UR Family N60

Instruction Manual
Network Stability and Synchrophasor
Measurement System

Product Version: 8.61

Publication Reference: N60-1601-0125-861-1
Copyright statement
Copyright © 2024 GE Vernova. All rights reserved.
EnerVista, EnerVista Launchpad, and EnerVista D&I Setup software are registered trademarks of GE Vernova.
The contents of this manual are the property of GE Vernova. This documentation is provided on license and may
not be reproduced in whole or in part without the permission of GE Vernova. The content of this manual is for
informational use only and is subject to change without notice.

Disclaimer
It is the responsibility of the user to verify and validate the suitability of all GE Vernova products. This equipment
must be used within its design limits. The proper application including the configuration and setting of this product to
suit the power system assets, is the responsibility of the user, who is also required to ensure that all local or regional
safety guidelines are adhered to. Incorrect application of this product could risk damage to property, the
environment, personal injuries or fatalities and it is the sole responsibility of the person/entity applying and qualifying
the product for use.
The content of this document has been developed to provide guidance to properly install, configure and maintain
this product for its intended applications. This guidance is not intended to cover every possible contingency that
may arise during commissioning, operation, service, or maintenance activities. Should you encounter any
circumstances not clearly addressed in this document, please contact your local GE service site.
It is the sole responsibility of the user to secure their network and associated devices against cybersecurity
intrusions or attacks. GE Vernova and its affiliates are not liable for any damages or losses arising from or related to
such security intrusion or attacks.
The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice.

Warranty
For products shipped as of 1 October 2013, GE Vernova Grid Solutions warrants most of its GE-manufactured
products for 10 years.
For warranty details including any limitations and disclaimers, see the Terms and Conditions at https://
www.gevernova.com/grid-solutions/multilin/warranty.htm
For products shipped before 1 October 2013, the standard 24-month warranty applies.

Major changes
For information on the updates included in this release of the manual, please refer to the latest release notes.

Open source licenses

The optional IEC 61850-9-2LE/IEC 61869 Process Bus Modules include open source code. See the UR-
OpenSourceLicense folder installed at the root level with the software, such as at C:\Program Files (x86)\GE Power
Management\URPC
Contents

Chapter 1 Introduction 1
1.1 Chapter Overview 2
1.2 Foreword 3
1.2.1 Target Audience 3
1.2.2 Typographical conventions 3
1.2.3 Nomenclature 4
1.3 Cautions, warnings and notes 5
1.3.1 General Cautions and Warnings 5
1.4 For Further Assistance 8
1.4.1 Repairs 8

Chapter 2 Product Description 9

2.1 Chapter Overview 10
2.2 Product Overview 11
2.3 Signal processing 16
2.4 Communication Functions 18
2.5 Order codes 19
2.5.1 Order codes for UR 19
2.5.2 Order codes for replacement modules 19

Chapter 3 Specifications 21
3.1 Chapter Overview 22
3.2 Protection elements 23
3.2.1 Phase/neutral/ground time overcurrent 23
3.2.2 Phase/neutral/ground instantaneous overcurrent 23
3.2.3 Phase directional overcurrent 24
3.2.4 Neutral directional overcurrent 24
3.2.5 Sensitive directional power 25
3.2.6 Phase undervoltage 25
3.2.7 Phase overvoltage 25
3.2.8 Underfrequency 26
3.2.9 Overfrequency 26
3.2.10 Rate of change of frequency 26
3.2.11 Synchrocheck 27
3.2.12 Power swing detect 27
3.2.13 Open pole detector 28
3.2.14 Thermal overload 28
3.2.15 Trip bus (trip without FlexLogic) 28
3.2.16 Harmonic detection 28
3.2.17 Multi-range signal oscillation detector 29
3.3 User-programmable elements 30
3.3.1 FlexLogic 30
3.3.2 FlexCurves 30
3.3.3 FlexStates 30
3.3.4 FlexElements 30
3.3.5 Non-volatile latches 31
3.3.6 User-programmable LEDs 31
3.3.7 LED test 31
3.3.8 User-definable displays 31
3.3.9 Control pushbuttons 31
3.3.10 User-programmable pushbuttons 31
Contents

3.3.11 Selector switch 32

3.3.12 Digitizer 32
3.3.13 8-bit comparator 32
3.3.14 8-bit switch 32
3.3.15 Digital elements 33
3.4 Monitoring 34
3.4.1 Oscillography 34
3.4.2 Event recorder 34
3.4.3 User-Programmable Fault Report 34
3.4.4 Data logger 34
3.4.5 Phasor measurement unit 35
3.5 Metering 36
3.5.1 RMS Current: Phase, Neutral and Ground 36
3.5.2 RMS Voltage 36
3.5.3 Real Power (Watts) 36
3.5.4 Reactive Power (VARS) 36
3.5.5 Apparent Power (VA) 36
3.5.6 Watt-hours (Positive and Negative) 36
3.5.7 VAR-hours (Positive and Negative) 36
3.5.8 Current Harmonics 37
3.5.9 Voltage Harmonics 37
3.5.10 Frequency 37
3.5.11 Demand 38
3.6 Inputs 39
3.6.1 AC current 39
3.6.2 AC voltage 39
3.6.3 Frequency 39
3.6.4 Contact inputs 39
3.6.5 Contact inputs with auto-burnishing 40
3.6.6 DCMA inputs 40
3.6.7 RTD inputs 40
3.6.8 IRIG-B input 40
3.6.9 Direct Inputs 41
3.6.10 Teleprotection 41
3.7 Power supply 42
3.7.1 Low range 42
3.7.2 High range 42
3.7.3 All ranges 42
3.7.4 Internal fuse 42
3.8 Outputs 43
3.8.1 Form-A relay 43
3.8.2 Latching relay 43
3.8.3 Form-A monitors 43
3.8.4 Form-C and critical failure relay 44
3.8.5 Fast Form-C relay 44
3.8.6 Solid-state output relay 44
3.8.7 Control power external output 45
3.8.8 Direct Outputs 45
3.8.9 DCMA outputs 45
3.9 Communication protocols 46
3.10 Inter-relay communications 48
3.10.1 STP interface options 48
3.10.2 Link power budget and maximum optical input power 48
3.10.3 Typical link distance 49
3.10.4 Losses and margin 49
3.11 CyberSentry security 50

N60-1601-0125-861-1 ii
Contents

3.12 Graphical front panel 51

3.13 Environmental 52
3.14 Type tests 53
3.15 Production tests 54
3.16 Approvals 55
3.17 Maintenance 56

Chapter 4 Installation 57
4.1 Chapter Overview 58
4.2 Unpack and inspect 59
4.3 Panel cutouts 60
4.3.1 Horizontal units 60
4.3.2 Vertical units 64
4.4 Rear terminal layout 69
4.5 Wiring 72
4.5.1 Typical wiring 72
4.5.2 Dielectric strength 73
4.5.3 Control power 74
4.5.4 Non-volatile data storage 75
4.5.5 CT/VT modules 76
4.5.6 Process Bus Module for HardFiber 77
4.5.7 Contact inputs and outputs 78
4.5.7.1 Contact input and output module assignments 80
4.5.7.2 Contact input and output module wiring 84
4.5.7.3 Contact inputs 86
4.5.7.4 General application considerations 87
4.5.7.5 Use of contact inputs with auto-burnishing 89
4.5.7.6 Use of contact inputs with active impedance 90
4.5.8 Transducer inputs and outputs 91
4.5.9 Communication ports 93
4.5.9.1 General grounding considerations 93
4.5.9.2 RS232 port 95
4.5.9.3 RS485 port 96
4.5.9.4 100BaseFx fiber optic ports 97
4.5.9.5 IRIG-B 97
4.6 Inter-relay communications 99
4.6.1 Direct input and output communications 99
4.6.2 Fiber LED and ELED transmitters 101
4.6.3 Fiber laser transmitters 101
4.6.4 G.703 interface 102
4.6.4.1 G.703 selection switch procedures 103
4.6.4.2 G.703 timing modes 104
4.6.4.3 G.703 test modes 105
4.6.5 RS422 interface 105
4.6.5.1 Two-channel application via multiplexers 106
4.6.5.2 Transmit timing 107
4.6.5.3 Receive timing 108
4.6.6 Two-channel two-clock RS422 interface 108
4.6.7 RS422 and fiber interface 109
4.6.8 G.703 and fiber interface 109
4.6.9 IEEE C37.94 interface 109
4.6.10 C37.94SM interface 113
4.7 Activate relay 117
4.8 Software installation 118
4.8.1 EnerVista communication overview 118
4.8.2 System requirements 118

N60-1601-0125-861-1 iii
Contents

4.8.3 Installing the software 119

4.9 Add device to software 120
4.9.1 Set IP address in UR 120
4.9.2 Test Ethernet connection 121
4.9.3 Internet Configuration 123
4.9.4 Configure serial connection 123
4.9.5 Configure Ethernet connection 124
4.9.6 Configure modem connection 126
4.9.7 Automatic discovery of UR devices 126
4.10 Connect to the relay 128
4.10.1 Connect to the relay in EnerVista 128
4.10.2 Use Quick Connect via front RS232 port 129
4.10.3 Use Quick Connect via front USB port 130
4.10.4 Use Quick Connect via a rear Ethernet port 130
4.11 Set up CyberSentry and change default password 131
4.12 Import settings 132
4.12.1 Import settings from XML file 132
4.12.2 Import settings from device files 135
4.13 Connect to substation gateway 137
4.13.1 Files and records 137

Chapter 5 Interfaces 138

5.1 Chapter Overview 139
5.2 EnerVista 140
5.2.1 EnerVista Introduction 140
5.2.2 Settings Files 140
5.2.3 Event viewing 141
5.2.4 File support 141
5.2.5 Main window 141
5.2.6 Protection summary window 143
5.2.7 Settings templates 144
5.2.7.1 Enable settings template 144
5.2.7.2 Edit settings template 145
5.2.7.3 Add password protection 146
5.2.7.4 View settings template 146
5.2.7.5 Remove settings template 148
5.2.8 Securing FlexLogic equations 148
5.2.8.1 Locking entries in a settings template 148
5.2.8.2 Locking a settings file to a serial number 150
5.2.9 Settings file traceability 151
5.2.9.1 Settings file traceability information 152
5.2.9.2 Online device traceability information 153
5.2.9.3 Additional traceability rules 153
5.2.10 Command line interface 153
5.3 Front panel 159
5.3.1 Basic front panel 159
5.3.1.1 Front panel display 160
5.3.1.2 Navigation keys 161
5.3.1.3 LED indicators 162
5.3.1.4 Labeling 164
5.3.1.5 Menu navigation 165
5.3.1.6 Change settings 167
5.3.2 Enhanced front panel 168
5.3.2.1 Enhanced front panel display 169
5.3.2.2 Navigation keys 170
5.3.2.3 LED indicators 171

N60-1601-0125-861-1 iv
Contents

5.3.2.4 Labeling 172

5.3.2.5 Menu navigation 177
5.3.2.6 Change settings 179
5.3.3 Graphical front panel 180
5.3.3.1 Home page 181
5.3.3.2 Rolling mode 182
5.3.3.3 Single-line diagrams 182
5.3.3.4 Single-line diagram example 183
5.3.3.5 Single-line diagram editor 187
5.3.3.6 Annunciator 195
5.3.3.7 Annunciator editor 198
5.3.3.8 Metering editor 200
5.3.3.9 Configurable navigation editor 201
5.3.3.10 Navigation keys 202
5.3.3.11 LED indicators 202
5.3.3.12 Labeling 204
5.3.3.13 Menu navigation 205
5.3.3.14 Change settings 205
5.3.3.15 View actual values 209
5.3.4 Breaker control 211
5.3.4.1 Control mode selection and monitoring 211
5.3.4.2 Control of breakers 211
5.3.5 Password control 212
5.3.5.1 Resetting the password in a device without CyberSentry 213
5.3.5.2 Invalid password entry 214
5.4 Logic diagrams 215
5.5 FlexLogic 217
5.5.1 FlexLogic design using Engineer 217
5.5.2 Design logic 219
5.5.2.1 Examples 219
5.5.2.2 Add existing FlexLogic equations 220
5.5.2.3 Create logic diagram 221
5.5.2.4 Compiled results and warning messages 225
5.5.2.5 Rapidly add logic blocks in sequence 228
5.5.2.6 Connect two logic diagrams 228
5.5.2.7 Optimize the logic 229
5.5.2.8 Change logic order 229
5.5.2.9 Search logic 230
5.5.2.10 Exclude sheet from compile 230
5.5.3 Send file to and from device 231
5.5.4 Monitor logic 231
5.5.5 View front panel and print labels 232
5.5.6 Generate connectivity report 233
5.5.7 Preferences 233
5.5.7.1 View menu 233
5.5.7.2 Logic designer 233
5.5.7.3 Logic monitor 235
5.5.7.4 COMTRADE waveforms 236
5.5.8 Toolbars 236
5.5.9 FlexLogic operands 240
5.5.10 FlexLogic rules 244
5.5.11 FlexLogic evaluation 244
5.5.12 FlexLogic example 245
5.5.13 FlexElement base units 250

Chapter 6 CyberSecurity 254

6.1 Chapter Overview 255

N60-1601-0125-861-1 v
Contents

6.2 Cybersecurity overview 256

6.3 Security setup 257
6.3.1 Password security 257
6.3.1.1 Password security settings 258
6.3.2 EnerVista security 264
6.3.3 CyberSentry security 264
6.3.3.1 CyberSentry user roles 265
6.3.3.2 CyberSentry settings through EnerVista 267
6.3.3.3 CyberSentry authentication 271
6.3.3.4 CyberSentry settings through the front panel 272
6.3.4 RADIUS server configuration 281

Chapter 7 Process bus module 284

7.1 Chapter Overview 285
7.2 Overview 286
7.3 Parallel Redundancy Protocol (PRP) 287
7.4 High-availability seamless redundancy (HSR) 289
7.5 Front Panel Settings 291
7.6 SV Stream Configuration 297
7.6.1 SV stream logic 301
7.6.2 Message troubleshooting 302
7.6.3 SV quality processing 302
7.6.4 SV simulation processing 303
7.6.5 SV stream settings 303
7.7 Remote resources configuration 314

Chapter 8 Phasor Measurement Unit 315

8.1 Chapter Overview 316
8.2 Synchrophasor implementation 317
8.3 Implementation of IEC 61850-90-5 318
8.4 Example of protection synchrophasors data set 320
8.5 Example of creation of different data sets 321
8.6 Example of CFG-2 based configuration 322
8.7 Modification of SYNC word 323
8.8 Settings 324
8.8.1 PMU instance settings 324
8.8.1.1 Basic configuration 325
8.8.1.2 PMU calibration 329
8.8.1.3 PMU triggering overview 331
8.8.1.4 PMU recording 338
8.8.2 Aggregators 339
8.8.2.1 C37.118 Aggregator configuration 340
8.8.2.2 IEC 61850-90-5 aggregator configuration 341
8.8.3 Control blocks 342
8.8.4 Time Quality 344

Chapter 9 Settings 346

9.1 Chapter Overview 347
9.2 Overview 348
9.2.1 Introduction to elements 348
9.2.2 Base quantities 349
9.2.3 Introduction to AC sources 350
9.2.4 CT/VT configuration 350
9.3 Settings menu 352

N60-1601-0125-861-1 vi
Contents

9.4 Product setup 356

9.4.1 Security 356
9.4.2 Display properties 356
9.4.3 Clear relay records 358
9.4.4 Communications 359
9.4.4.1 Communications settings menu 359
9.4.4.2 Serial ports 360
9.4.4.3 Network 361
9.4.4.4 IPv4 route table 363
9.4.4.5 Modbus protocol 364
9.4.4.6 Protocols & Authority 365
9.4.4.7 DNP protocol 366
9.4.4.8 DNP / IEC 60870-5-104 point lists 370
9.4.4.9 Web server HTTP protocol 371
9.4.4.10 TFTP protocol 372
9.4.4.11 IEC 60870-5-104 protocol 372
9.4.4.12 IEC 60870-5-103 protocol 374
9.4.4.13 USB port 378
9.4.5 Modbus user map 378
9.4.6 Real-time clock 379
9.4.6.1 Precision time protocol (1588) 381
9.4.6.2 SNTP protocol 383
9.4.6.3 Local time 384
9.4.6.4 PBM PTP 386
9.4.6.5 IRIG-B 390
9.4.7 User-programmable Fault reports 390
9.4.8 Oscillography 391
9.4.8.1 Digital channels 394
9.4.8.2 Analog channels 394
9.4.9 Data logger 395
9.4.10 Demand 397
9.4.10.1 Thermal exponential calculation method 397
9.4.10.2 Block Interval calculation method 398
9.4.10.3 Rolling Demand calculation method 398
9.4.11 User-programmable LEDs 399
9.4.11.1 LED test 399
9.4.11.2 Trip and alarm LEDs 402
9.4.11.3 User-programmable LED <n> 402
9.4.11.4 Event cause LED <n> 403
9.4.12 User-programmable self-tests 404
9.4.13 Control pushbuttons 405
9.4.14 User-programmable pushbuttons 406
9.4.15 Flex state parameters 412
9.4.16 User-definable displays 412
9.4.16.1 User display <n> 413
9.4.17 Direct Inputs and Outputs 414
9.4.17.1 CRC Alarm 420
9.4.17.2 Unreturned messages alarm 421
9.4.18 Teleprotection 422
9.4.19 Installation 423
9.5 System setup 424
9.5.1 AC inputs 424
9.5.1.1 Current banks 424
9.5.1.2 Voltage banks 425
9.5.2 Power system 426
9.5.3 Signal sources 428
9.5.3.1 User selection of AC parameters for comparator elements 429
9.5.3.2 AC input actual values 429

N60-1601-0125-861-1 vii
Contents

9.5.3.3 Disturbance detectors (internal) 429

9.5.3.4 Example for use of sources 430
9.5.3.5 Source switching 431
9.5.4 Breakers 433
9.5.4.1 Control authority 440
9.5.4.2 Dual breaker control logic 441
9.5.5 Disconnect switch control 445
9.5.5.1 Disconnect switch control logic 452
9.5.6 FlexCurves 456
9.5.6.1 FlexCurve configuration with EnerVista software 457
9.5.6.2 Recloser curve editing 458
9.5.6.3 Standard recloser curves 459
9.5.7 PMU instance settings 463
9.5.7.1 Basic configuration 464
9.5.7.2 PMU calibration 469
9.5.7.3 PMU triggering overview 470
9.5.7.4 PMU recording 477
9.6 FlexLogic settings 479
9.6.1 FlexLogic equation editor 479
9.6.2 FlexLogic timers 479
9.6.3 FlexElements 480
9.6.4 Non-volatile latches 484
9.7 Grouped elements 486
9.7.1 Setting Group 1 486
9.7.2 Power swing detect (ANSI 68) 486
9.7.3 Phase current 497
9.7.3.1 Inverse TOC curve characteristics 497
9.7.3.2 Phase time overcurrent (ANSI 51P, IEC PTOC) 503
9.7.3.3 Phase instantaneous overcurrent (ANSI 50P, IEC PIOC) 505
9.7.3.4 Phase directional overcurrent (ANSI 67P, IEC PDOC/PTOC) 507
9.7.4 Neutral Current 510
9.7.4.1 Neutral time overcurrent (ANSI 51N, IEC PTOC) 511
9.7.4.2 Neutral instantaneous overcurrent (ANSI 50N, IEC PIOC) 512
9.7.4.3 Neutral directional overcurrent (ANSI 67N, IEC PDEF/PTOC) 514
9.7.5 Ground Current 519
9.7.5.1 Ground time overcurrent (ANSI 51G, IEC PTOC) 520
9.7.5.2 Ground instantaneous overcurrent (ANSI 50G, IEC PIOC) 521
9.7.6 Voltage elements 523
9.7.6.1 Voltage elements menu 523
9.7.6.2 Undervoltage inverse time curves 524
9.7.6.3 Overvoltage inverse time curves 524
9.7.6.4 Phase undervoltage (ANSI 27P, IEC PTUV) 525
9.7.6.5 Phase overvoltage (ANSI 59P, IEC PTOV) 527
9.7.7 Supervising Elements 529
9.7.7.1 Open pole detector 529
9.7.8 Power 531
9.7.8.1 Sensitive directional power (ANSI 32) 532
9.8 Control elements 536
9.8.1 Trip Bus 536
9.8.2 Setting groups 538
9.8.3 Selector Switch 540
9.8.4 Underfrequency (ANSI 81U) 547
9.8.5 Overfrequency (ANSI 81O) 548
9.8.6 Frequency rate of change (ANSI 81R) 549
9.8.7 Synchrocheck (ANSI 25) 551
9.8.7.1 Notes on the synchrocheck function 556
9.8.8 Digital elements 557
9.8.9 Digital counters 561

N60-1601-0125-861-1 viii
Contents

9.8.10 Monitoring elements 563

9.8.10.1 Monitoring elements menu 563
9.8.10.2 CT failure detector 563
9.8.10.3 VT fuse failure 565
9.8.10.4 Thermal overload protection (ANSI 49) 567
9.8.10.5 Harmonic detection 570
9.8.11 Multi-range signal oscillation detector (MSOD) 574
9.9 Inputs/outputs 579
9.9.1 Contact inputs 579
9.9.2 Virtual inputs 581
9.9.3 Contact outputs 582
9.9.3.1 Non-latching contact outputs (H) 582
9.9.3.2 Latching contact outputs 584
9.9.4 Virtual outputs 587
9.9.5 Resetting 587
9.9.6 Direct inputs and outputs 588
9.9.6.1 Direct inputs 588
9.9.6.2 Direct outputs 589
9.9.6.3 Application examples 589
9.9.6.4 Direct analog inputs and outputs 593
9.9.6.5 Direct integer inputs and outputs 596
9.9.7 Teleprotection 598
9.9.7.1 Teleprotection inputs 598
9.9.7.2 Teleprotection outputs 598
9.9.7.3 Teleprotection input/output processing 599
9.10 Transducer inputs/outputs 600
9.10.1 DCmA inputs 600
9.10.2 DCmA outputs 601
9.10.3 DCmA application examples 603
9.10.4 RTD inputs 604
9.11 Testing 607
9.11.1 IED mode config 607
9.11.2 IED mode process 609
9.11.3 Force contact inputs 611
9.11.4 Force contact outputs 612
9.12 Simulation 613
9.12.1 Subscribe to simulated values 613
9.12.2 Publish simulated values 615
9.13 Front Panel Settings 617
9.14 SV stream settings 623

Chapter 10 Actual Values 633

10.1 Chapter Overview 634
10.2 Actual Values Menu 635
10.3 Front panel 636
10.4 Status 638
10.4.1 IED 638
10.4.2 Contact inputs 638
10.4.3 Virtual inputs 638
10.4.4 RxGOOSE boolean inputs 638
10.4.5 RxGOOSE DPS inputs 639
10.4.6 Teleprotection inputs 639
10.4.7 Contact Outputs 639
10.4.8 Virtual outputs 639
10.4.9 RxGOOSE status 639
10.4.10 RxGOOSE statistics 640

N60-1601-0125-861-1 ix
Contents

10.4.11 Fixed GOOSE 640

10.4.12 Digital counters 641
10.4.13 Breaker status 642
10.4.14 Selector switches 642
10.4.15 Flex states 643
10.4.16 Ethernet 643
10.4.17 Real time clock synchronizing 643
10.4.18 Direct inputs 645
10.4.19 Direct devices status 646
10.4.20 EGD protocol status 646
10.4.21 Teleprotection channel tests 647
10.4.22 Remaining connection status 647
10.4.23 Parallel Redundancy Protocol (PRP) 648
10.4.24 TxGOOSE status 650
10.4.25 Protocol 650
10.5 Metering 651
10.5.1 Metering conventions 651
10.5.2 Sources 654
10.5.2.1 Phase current metering 654
10.5.2.2 Ground current metering 655
10.5.2.3 Phase voltage metering 655
10.5.2.4 Auxiliary voltage metering 656
10.5.2.5 Power metering 656
10.5.2.6 Energy metering 658
10.5.2.7 Demand metering 658
10.5.2.8 Frequency metering 659
10.5.2.9 Current harmonics and THD metering 660
10.5.2.10 Voltage harmonics and THD metering 660
10.5.3 Synchrocheck 661
10.5.4 Tracking frequency 662
10.5.5 FlexElements 663
10.5.6 Digitizer 665
10.5.7 8-bit comparators 665
10.5.8 Summator 666
10.5.9 Direct analogs 666
10.5.10 RxGOOSE analogs 666
10.5.11 Phasor Measurement Unit 666
10.5.12 PMU aggregator 668
10.5.13 Transducer inputs and outputs 668
10.5.14 Harmonic detection 668
10.5.15 Station Battery Voltage 669
10.5.16 Multi-range signal oscillation detector (MSOD) 669
10.6 Remote resources 670
10.7 Process Bus Module 671
10.7.1 General status 671
10.7.2 RxSV status 671
10.7.3 Clock synchronizing 673
10.7.4 PRP 675
10.7.5 HSR 677
10.8 Records 678
10.8.1 User programmable fault reports 678
10.8.2 Event records 678
10.8.2.1 Enhanced and basic front panels 678
10.8.2.2 Graphical front panel 679
10.8.3 Oscillography 680
10.8.4 Data logger 681
10.8.5 Phasor Measurement Unit 681

N60-1601-0125-861-1 x
Contents

10.9 Product information 682

10.9.1 Model information 682
10.9.2 Firmware revisions 683

Chapter 11 Commands and targets 685

11.1 Chapter Overview 686
11.2 Commands menu 687
11.2.1 Virtual inputs 687
11.2.2 Clear records 687
11.2.3 Set date and time 688
11.2.4 Relay maintenance 689
11.2.5 Phasor Measurement Unit one-shot 691
11.2.6 Security 693
11.3 Targets menu 694
11.3.1 Target messages 694
11.3.2 Relay self-tests 694
11.3.3 Major self-test error messages 695
11.3.4 Minor self-test error messages 695
11.3.5 Instantaneous protection elements trip security 698
11.3.6 HardFiber major self-test error messages 698
11.3.7 HardFiber minor self-test error messages 699

Chapter 12 Commissioning 700

12.1 Chapter Overview 701
12.2 Overview 702
12.3 Testing underfrequency and overfrequency elements 703

Chapter 13 Maintenance 705

13.1 Chapter Overview 706
13.2 Monitoring 707
13.2.1 Devices with Site Targets 707
13.2.2 Data with Modbus Analyzer 707
13.3 General maintenance 710
13.4 Files and Settings 711
13.4.1 Retrieve files 711
13.4.2 CyberSentry security event files 711
13.4.3 Convert device settings 712
13.4.4 Copy settings to other device 714
13.4.5 Export settings 714
13.4.6 Compare settings 715
13.4.7 Back up and restore settings 717
13.4.7.1 Back up settings 717
13.4.7.2 Restore settings 719
13.4.8 Upgrade software 722
13.4.9 Upgrade firmware 723
13.4.10 Uninstall and clear files and data 725
13.5 Replace module 727
13.6 Battery 730
13.6.1 Replace battery 730
13.6.2 Dispose of battery 731
13.7 Repairs 732
13.8 Storage and disposal 733

N60-1601-0125-861-1 xi
Contents

Chapter 14 Appendices 734

14.1 Abbreviations 735
14.2 FlexLogic Operands 744
14.3 FlexAnalog items 745
14.4 Version history 746

N60-1601-0125-861-1 xii
 CHAPTER 1

INTRODUCTION
Chapter 1 - Introduction

1.1 CHAPTER OVERVIEW

This chapter provides some critical safety information and some general information about the technical manual.
This chapter contains the following sections:
Chapter Overview 2
Foreword 3
Cautions, warnings and notes 5
For Further Assistance 8

N60-1601-0125-861-1 2
Chapter 1 - Introduction

1.2 FOREWORD
This technical manual provides a functional and technical description of the relay, as well as a comprehensive set of
instructions for using it. The level at which this manual is written assumes that you are already familiar with
protection engineering and have experience in this discipline. The description of principles and theory is limited to
that which is necessary to understand the product. For further details on general protection engineering theory, we
refer you to the publication, Protection and Automation Application Guide, which is available online.
We have attempted to make this manual as accurate, comprehensive and user-friendly as possible. However we
cannot guarantee that it is free from errors. Nor can we state that it cannot be improved. We would therefore be
very pleased to hear from you if you discover any errors, or have any suggestions for improvement. Our policy is to
provide the information necessary to help you safely specify, engineer, install, commission, maintain, and eventually
dispose of this product. We consider that this manual provides the necessary information, but if you believe that
more details are needed, please contact us.

1.2.1 TARGET AUDIENCE

This manual is aimed towards all professionals charged with installing, commissioning, maintaining,
troubleshooting, or operating any of the products within the specified product range. This includes installation and
commissioning personnel as well as engineers who will be responsible for operating the product.
The level at which this manual is written assumes that installation and commissioning engineers have knowledge of
handling electronic equipment. Also, system and protection engineers have a thorough knowledge of protection
systems and associated equipment.

1.2.2 TYPOGRAPHICAL CONVENTIONS

The following typographical conventions are used throughout this manual.
● Description of software menu items, buttons, labels or hardware keys and buttons written in bold type and
colored in Vernova dark green.
For example: Select Save from the file menu
● The names for special keys, appear in in upper case bold type and colored in Vernova dark green.
For example: ENTER
● Filenames, paths, code, and text that appears on a command line interface use the courier font
For example: Example\File.text
● Special terminology is written with leading capitals
For example: Line Differential Relay
● If reference is made to the relay's internal settings database on the relay's LCD screen, the menu items are
written in bold italics
For example: SECURITY (on the relay's LCD screen), or Security (in the EnerVista D&I Setup software
software)
● Menu paths are shown with > separators. This applies to both software menu paths and relay menu paths
For example: SETTINGS > SYSTEM SETUP > AC INPUTS (for relay path), or File > Save (for software
path)
● Setting values are written with the courier font and are italicized
For example: Enabled
● Multilin products, use Flexlogic operands. Flexlogic operands are written in dark Vernova green uppercase
courier font
For example: PUSHBUTTON 1 ON
● Sometimes it is beneficial to emphasize some words. Depending on the case in question, this may be done
with bold, italic or upper case font attributes.
● Notes are written in italic in, and are surrounded by a border.
For example:

N60-1601-0125-861-1 3
Chapter 1 - Introduction

Note:
This is a note

1.2.3 NOMENCLATURE
Due to the technical nature of this manual, many special terms, abbreviations and acronyms are used throughout
the manual. Some of these terms are well-known industry-specific terms while others may be special product-
specific terms used by GE Vernova. The first instance of any acronym or term used in a particular chapter is
explained. In addition, a separate glossary is available on the GE Vernova website.
We would like to highlight the following changes of nomenclature however:
● The word relay and IED (Intelligent Electronic Device) are both used to describe the protection device. The
term IED is associated with the IEC61850 standard, whereas the term relay is the long-used traditional term.
It may also be referred to simply as the device or the product.
● American English and spelling is used throughout this manual.
● The term 'Earth' and American term 'Ground' are equivalent. You may find either used in the manual.

● When depicting a generic instance of a number of items, this manual uses <n> where n can be any integer.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 4
Chapter 1 - Introduction

1.3 CAUTIONS, WARNINGS AND NOTES

Before attempting to install or use the device, review all safety indicators in this document to help prevent injury,
equipment damage, or downtime.

1.3.1 GENERAL CAUTIONS AND WARNINGS

The following general safety precautions and warnings apply.

Caution:
Before attempting to use the equipment, it is important that all danger and caution
indicators are reviewed.
If the equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer or functions
abnormally, proceed with caution. Otherwise, the protection provided by the
equipment may be impaired and can result in impaired operation and injury.

Warning:
Hazardous voltages can cause shock, burns or death.

Caution:
Installation/service personnel must be familiar with general device test practices,
electrical awareness and safety precautions must be followed.
Before performing visual inspections, tests, or periodic maintenance on this device
or associated circuits, isolate or disconnect all hazardous live circuits and sources
of electric power.

Warning:
Failure to shut equipment off prior to removing the power connections could
expose you to dangerous voltages causing injury or death.
Ensure that all connections to the product are correct so as to avoid accidental risk
of shock and/or fire, for example from high voltage connected to low voltage
terminals.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 5
Chapter 1 - Introduction

Caution:
Follow the requirements of this manual, including adequate wiring size and type,
terminal torque settings, voltage, current magnitudes applied, and adequate
isolation/clearance in external wiring from high to low voltage circuits.
Use the device only for its intended purpose and application.
Ensure that all ground paths are un-compromised for safety purposes during
device operation and service.
All recommended equipment that should be grounded and must have a reliable and
un-compromised grounding path for safety purposes, protection against
electromagnetic interference and proper device operation.
Equipment grounds should be bonded together and connected to the facility’s
main ground system for primary power.
Keep all ground leads as short as possible.
In addition to the safety precautions mentioned all electrical connections made
must respect the applicable local jurisdiction electrical code.
It is recommended that a field external switch, circuit breaker be connected near
the equipment as a means of power disconnect. The external switch or circuit
breaker is selected in accordance with the power rating.
This product itself is not Personal Protective Equipment (PPE). However, it can be
used in the computation of site specific Arc Flash analysis when the arc flash
option is ordered. If a new appropriate Hazard Reduction Category code for the
installation is determined, user should follow the cautions mentioned in the arc
flash installation section.
The critical failure relay must be connected to annunciate the status of the device
for ALL applications. This is particularly important for when the Arc Flash option is
ordered.
Ensure that the control power applied to the device, the AC current, and voltage
input match the ratings specified on the relay nameplate. Do not apply current or
voltage in excess of the specified limits.
Only qualified personnel are to operate the device. Such personnel must be
thoroughly familiar with all safety cautions and warnings in this manual and with
applicable country, regional, utility, and plant safety regulations.

Warning:
Hazardous voltages can exist in the power supply and at the device connection to
current transformers, voltage transformers, control, and test circuit terminals. Make
sure all sources of such voltages are isolated prior to attempting work on the
device.
Hazardous voltages can exist when opening the secondary circuits of live current
transformers. Make sure that current transformer secondary circuits are shorted
out before making or removing any connection to the current transformer (CT)
input terminals of the device.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 6
Chapter 1 - Introduction

Caution:
For tests with secondary test equipment, ensure that no other sources of voltages
or currents are connected to such equipment and that trip and close commands to
the circuit breakers or other switching apparatus are isolated, unless this is
required by the test procedure and is specified by appropriate utility/plant
procedure.
When the device is used to control primary equipment, such as circuit breakers,
isolators, and other switching apparatus, all control circuits from the device to the
primary equipment must be isolated while personnel are working on or around this
primary equipment to prevent any inadvertent command from this device.
Use an external disconnect to isolate the mains voltage supply.

Warning:
LED transmitters are classified as IEC 60825-1 Accessible Emission Limit (AEL)
Class 1M. Class 1M devices are considered safe to the unaided eye. Do not view
directly with optical instruments.

Note:
To ensure the settings file inside the relay is updated, wait 30 seconds after a setpoint change before cycling power.
This product is rated to Class A emissions levels and is to be used in Utility, Substation Industrial environments. Not
to be used near electronic devices rated for Class B levels.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 7
Chapter 1 - Introduction

1.4 FOR FURTHER ASSISTANCE

For product support, contact us as follows:
GE Vernova
650 Markland Street
Markham, Ontario
Canada L6C 0M1
Worldwide telephone: +1 905 927 7070
Europe/Middle East/Africa telephone: +34 94 485 88 54
North America toll-free: 1 800 547 8629
Fax: +1 905 927 5098
Worldwide e-mail: [email protected]
Europe e-mail: [email protected]
Website: https://www.gevernova.com/grid-solutions

1.4.1 REPAIRS
The firmware and software can be upgraded without return of the device to the factory.
For issues not solved by troubleshooting, the process to return the device to the factory for repair is as follows:
● Contact a GE Grid Solutions Technical Support Center. Contact information is found in the first chapter.
● Obtain a Return Materials Authorization (RMA) number from the Technical Support Center.
● Verify that the RMA and Commercial Invoice received have the correct information.
● Tightly pack the unit in a box with bubble wrap, foam material, or styrofoam inserts or packaging peanuts to
cushion the item(s). You may also use double boxing whereby you place the box in a larger box that contains
at least 5 cm of cushioning material.
● Ship the unit by courier or freight forwarder, along with the Commercial Invoice and RMA, to the factory.
● Customers are responsible for shipping costs to the factory, regardless of whether the unit is under warranty.
● Fax a copy of the shipping information to the GE Grid Solutions service department.
Use the detailed return procedure outlined at
https://www.gegridsolutions.com/multilin/support/ret_proc.htm
The current warranty and return information are outlined at
https://www.gegridsolutions.com/multilin/warranty.htm

N60-1601-0125-861-1 8
 CHAPTER 2

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Chapter 2 - Product Description

2.1 CHAPTER OVERVIEW

This chapter contains the following sections:

Chapter Overview 10
Product Overview 11
Signal processing 16
Communication Functions 18
Order codes 19

N60-1601-0125-861-1 10
Chapter 2 - Product Description

2.2 PRODUCT OVERVIEW

The N60 is part of the Universal Relay (UR) family of products. It is a microprocessor-based device for load
shedding and special protection schemes.
With its modular architecture, the Product can be configured to monitor from one through five three-phase power
circuits. The relay provides a variety of metering functions, including the following: active, reactive, and apparent
power on a per-phase and three-phase basis; true RMS value, phasors, and symmetrical components of currents
and voltages; and power factor and frequency. The latter can be measured independently and simultaneously from
up to six signals.
The Product allows interfacing with other analog signals via optional transducer modules to monitor equipment
temperature, transformer tap positions, weather data, and other information.
In addition to standard communications protocols that can be exercised simultaneously and independently over a
range of communication ports, including the redundant Ethernet port, the relay supports an independent mechanism
for direct, fast, and secure digital inter-intelligent electronic device (IED) communications. This allows both reduced
wiring and development time for all local connections in a substation, as well as building wide-area protection and
control schemes.
Up to 64 on/off signals can be exchanged between any two Product devices via digital communications. The relays
can be configured in rings with up to 16 devices each using direct fiber (C37.94), G.704, and RS422 interfaces. An
optional redundant (dual-channel) communication card supports combinations of the three interfaces allowing
different physical connections in each channel. Dual-ring communication architecture can be selected for
redundancy. Open ring or crossover configurations can be utilized to increase the number of devices in the scheme.
The effective message delivery time depends of the number of other Product devices located between the sending
and receiving IEDs. A two-cycle or one-cycle worst-case message delivery times can be comfortably achieved for
comparatively large Product schemes.
Sophisticated self-monitoring and diagnostic functions are incorporated, such as 32-bit cyclic redundancy code
(CRC), unreturned messages count, and lost packets count. The Product supports both multiplexed and direct fiber
(up to 100 km) inter-substation connections.
The Product allows sending and receiving any analog value measured by the relay using the dedicated inter-IED
communication mechanisms. Power, voltage, and current magnitudes, frequency, transducer inputs and other
values can be freely configured for the inter-IED exchanges. The analog values are transmitted with the eight-bit
resolution. Upon reception, any remote analog value can be re-sent, compared with another value or a constant
threshold, added to or subtracted from another local or remote analog value, subjected to the rate-of-change
monitoring, and so on. This powerful feature allows advanced applications, such as balancing power over wide
areas, or adding extra security by comparing local and remote measurements for consistency. It also facilitates
simple telemetry.
Voltage and current metering are built into the relay as standard features. Parameters are available as total
waveform root mean square (RMS) magnitude, or as fundamental frequency only RMS magnitude and angle
(phasor).
Diagnostic features include:
● An event recorder capable of storing 1024 time-tagged events
● Oscillography capable of storing up to 64 records with programmable trigger, content, and sampling rate
● The internal clock used for time-tagging can be synchronized with an IRIG-B signal, using the Simple
Network Time Protocol (SNTP) over the Ethernet port, or using the Precision Time Protocol (PTP). This
precise time stamping allows the sequence of events to be determined throughout the system.
● Events can also be programmed (via FlexLogic equations) to trigger oscillography data capture that can be
set to record the measured parameters before and after the event for viewing on a computer.
These tools significantly reduce troubleshooting time and simplify report generation in the event of a system fault.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 11
Chapter 2 - Product Description

Several options are available for communication.

● An RS232 port (or a USB port with the graphical front panel) is provided for connection with a PC to program
settings and monitor actual values.
● All serial ports support the Modbus RTU protocol.
● A rear RS485 port allows independent access by operators and engineering staff. It can be connected to
system computers with baud rates up to 115.2 kbps.
● The RS485 interface also supports DNP, IEC 60870-5-103 and IEC 60870-5-104, whereby only one of these
can be enabled at any time. When the IEC 60870-5-103 protocol is chosen, the RS485 port has a fixed even
parity and the baud rate can be either 9.6 kbps or 19.2 kbps.
● The 100Base-FX or 100Base-TX Ethernet interface provides fast, reliable communications in noisy
environments.
● The Ethernet port supports IEC 61850, Modbus/TCP, TFTP, and PTP (according to IEEE Std. 1588-2008 or
IEC 61588), and it allows access to the relay via any standard web browser.
● The Ethernet port supports the IEC 60870-5-104 protocol
● The Ethernet port supports the Parallel Redundancy Protocol (PRP) of IEC 62439-3 (clause 4, 2012) when
purchased as an option.
● GOOSE and secure Routable GOOSE (R-GOOSE) are supported with software options.
● Process Bus GOOSE is supported with a hardware module and software options for applicable relays
Settings and actual values can be accessed from the front panel or EnerVista software.
The Product uses flash memory technology that allows field upgrading of both firmware and software as new
features are added.
With a Process Bus Module that supports IEC 61850-9-2LE and IEC 61869, PRP is supported on two Ethernet
ports to IEC 62439, and High-availability Seamless Redundancy (HSR) is supported on four Ethernet ports for dual
HSR ring architecture.
The relay supports the following ANSI functions (American National Standards Institute)

ANSI codes
ANSI
Function ANSI code Function
code
25 Synchrocheck 51N Neutral time overcurrent
27P Phase undervoltage 51P Phase time overcurrent
32 Sensitive directional power 59P Phase overvoltage
49 Thermal overload protection 67N Neutral directional overcurrent
Adaptive fault detector (sensitive current
50DD 67P Phase directional overcurrent
disturbance detector)
50G Ground instantaneous overcurrent 68 Power swing blocking
50N Neutral instantaneous overcurrent 81O Overfrequency
50P Phase instantaneous overcurrent 81R Rate of change of frequency
51G Ground time overcurrent 81U Underfrequency

The following single-line diagram illustrates the relay functionality using American National Standards Institute
(ANSI) device numbers.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 12
Chapter 2 - Product Description

✡☛ ☛ ✯ ✰ ✡

☞✌✍✎ ✏✑✒✓✔✕✖✒✗ ✌✗ ✘✙✎✌✚✎✙ ✛

✱✲✳✴✵ ✶✷✸✹

✜✖✙ ✘✙✎✌✚✎✙ ✛

✢✣✤ ❨✪✤ ✢✛✤ ✥✦ ❨✧ ❲❳ ✢✣❫ ✢✛❫ ❨✪❫ ✦✪✤ ✢❳✤ ✧✛★ ✧✛✩ ✧✛✮

✫✎✔✎✙✕✒✬ ✭ ✤✫✮

✺✻ ❍■❏■❃■❑✾❅ ❄❅❆❂❇❈❉❊✾❅ ❋❂●❉❃❇

✼✽✾✿❀✽✾❁✾❂❃

❩❬❭ ❩❪❭
✦✢

▲▼◆ ▲✾❃❖P❅◗ ❘❃❆❙■✽■❃❚ ❆❂❈ ❘❚❂❊❯❅P●❯❆❇P❅ ❱✾❆❇❉❅✾❁✾❂❃ ❘❚❇❃✾❁

✁✂✂✄☎✆✄✝✞✟✠

Figure 1: Single line diagram

Other device functions

Function Function

Breaker Control Modbus communications

Contact Inputs (up to 120) Modbus user map

Contact Outputs (up to 72) Non-Volatile Latches

Control Pushbuttons Non-Volatile Selector Switch

CT failure detector Open pole detector

CyberSentry Security Oscillography

Data Logger Setting groups (6)

Digital Counters (8) Synchrophasors (PMUs)

Digital Elements (96) Teleprotection inputs and outputs

Direct Inputs (8) (32 with direct fiber) Time Synchronization over IRIG-B or IEEE 1588

Disconnect Switches Time Synchronization over SNTP

DNP 3.0 or IEC 60870-5-104 protocol Transducer inputs and outputs

Eight-bit switch User-definable Displays

Event Recorder User-definable fault reports

FlexElements (16) User-programmable LEDs

FlexLogic Equations User-definable pushbuttons

N60-1601-0125-861-1 13
Chapter 2 - Product Description

Function Function

Generic comparator User-programmable Self-Tests

IEC 60870-5-103 Communications Virtual Inputs (128)

IEC 61850 Communications Virtual Outputs (256)

IEC 62351-9 Data and Communications Security VT Fuse Failure

Metering: current, demand, energy,

frequency, power, power factor, voltage,
harmonics, THD

Number of elements per feature

Feature No. Feature No.
CT Banks 6 Multirange Signal Oscillation Detection (MSOD) 6
VT Banks 6 Neutral Directional OC 3
# of DSPs 3 Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent 12
Basic UR relay features 1 Neutral Time Overcurrent 6
Breaker Control 6 Non Volatile Latches 16
Breaker switch 24 Open Pole Detect 1
Contact Inputs 120 Oscillography 1
Contact Outputs 72 Overfrequency 4
CT Fail 6 Phase Directional 3
Current CT settings 6 Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent 12
Current Unbalance 1 Phase Overvoltage 3
Demand 6 Phase Time Overcurrent 6
Digital Counters 8 Phase Undervoltage 3
Digital Elements 96 Power Swing Detect 1
Digitizer 5 Precision Time Protocol(1588) 3
Platform Direct I/O 64 Security 1
Disturbance Detection 6 Selector Switch 2
Energy Metering 6 Sensitive Directional Power 2
Event Recorder 1 Setting Groups 6
Field Resources 1 Simple Network Time Protocol 1
FlexElements 16 Sources 6
FlexLogic Equations 1 Switch 6
FlexMath 1 Synchrocheck 6
Direct Analogs 32 Synchrophasors 6
Direct integers 16 Aggregators (max 4) 4
Summator 6 Teleprotection I/O 1
Frequency Rate of Change 4 Thermal Overload Protection 2
Generic Comparator 6 Transducer I/O 1
Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent 12 DCMA inputs 24
Ground Time Overcurrent 6 Trip Bus 6

N60-1601-0125-861-1 14
Chapter 2 - Product Description

Feature No. Feature No.

Harmonic Detection 6 Underfrequency 6
IEC 61850 Communications 1 User Programmable Fault Report 2
RxGOOSE 64 User Programmable LEDs 48
RxGOOSE BOOLEAN 256 User Programmable Pushbuttons 48
RxGOOSE DPS 16 Control PBs 3
RxGOOSE I/O States 1 User-definable displays 16
RxGOOSE Status 64 Virtual Inputs 128
IEC103 Communications 1 Virtual Outputs 256
Modbus Communications 1 VT Fuse Failure 6
Modbus User Map 1

N60-1601-0125-861-1 15
Chapter 2 - Product Description

2.3 SIGNAL PROCESSING

The relays are microprocessor-based protection devices that are designed to measure power system conditions
directly via CT and VT inputs and via other sources of information, such as analog inputs, communications inputs,
and contact inputs. The following figure shows the overall signal processing in URs.
An analog low pass anti-aliasing filter with a 3 dB corner frequency is set at 2.4 kHz and is used for current and
voltage analog filtering as well as signal conditioning. The same filtering is applied for phase, ground currents,
phase-to-phase (when applicable), and auxiliary voltages. The 2.4 kHz cut-off frequency applies to both 50 and 60
Hz applications and fixed in the hardware, and thus is not dependent on the system nominal frequency setting.

Analog Analog low- Analog-to- Digital band- Phasor

Inputs pass filter Digital pass filter estimation
Converter
½ cycle Fundament
U A Fourier al freq.
Phasors,
From 1 cycle Seq. com-
CT/VT Fourier ponents

I Frequency
D
T
RMS
values

Synchro-
Sampling phasors Analog Outputs
frequency filtering
DSP module module

Tracking
HMI frequency Events
selection,
Protection
Ethernet algorithms
ports
estimation Control Comtrade, data
I> elements,
Commun logger
Serial i-cation Z< monitoring

Serial
ports protocols U< elements,
FlexLogic, DNP, Modbus,
IEC60870
IRIG-B Accurate
Real- Time PMU (IEEE C37.118,
IEEE stamping

Ethernet
1588 Time Synchrophasors IEC 61850-90-5)
clock Aggregation,
SNTP calculations post-filtering IEC 61850 (GOOSE,
CPU module MMS Server)
comms module
Contact Inputs

Analog Inputs
Inter-relay

Inter-relay
module

module

Channel comms module

Ddebounce monitorin A
filtering g CRC
check D Contact Outputs
module

G.703, RS-422,
Optoisolated C37.94, direct fiber DCmA, RTD
859740A1.vsd

Figure 2: UR signal processing

The relay samples its AC signals at 64 samples per cycle, that is, at 3840 Hz in 60 Hz systems, and 3200 Hz in 50
Hz systems. The sampling rate is adjusted dynamically to the actual system frequency by an accurate and fast
frequency tracking system.
The analog/digital converter has the following ranges of AC signals:
Voltages

r 2 ˜ 260 V
r ˜
Currents
r ˜ 46rated A
r 2 ˜ 46rated A

³
³
N60-1601-0125-861-1 16
Chapter 2 - Product Description

Current harmonics are estimated based on raw samples with the use of the full-cycle Fourier filter. Harmonics 2nd
through 25th are estimated.
r ˜
True RMS value for the current is calculated on a per-phase basis. The true RMS can be used for demand
recording or as an input signal to Time Overcurrent function, if the latter is intended for thermal protection. The true
RMS is calculated
r ˜ as per the widely accepted definition:

t
1
³
2
I RMS t = -- i t dt
T
t–T

RMS values include harmonics, inter-harmonics, DC components, and so on, along with fundamental frequency
values. The true RMS value reflects thermal effects of the current and is used for the thermal related monitoring and
protection functions.
Protection and control functions respond to phasors of the fundamental and/or harmonic frequency components
(magnitudes and angles), with an exception for some functions that have an option for RMS or fundamental
measurements, or some function responding to RMS only. This type of response is explained typically in each
element's section in this instruction manual.
Currents are pre-filtered using a Finite Impulse Response (FIR) digital filter. The filter is designed to reject DC
components and low-frequency distortions, without amplifying high-frequency noise. This filter is referred to as a
modified MIMIC filter, which provides excellent filtering and overall balance between speed and accuracy of filtering.
The filter is cascaded with the full-cycle Fourier filter for the current phasor estimation.
Voltages are pre-filtered using a patented FIR digital filter. The filter has been optimized to reject voltage-
transformer-specific distortions, such as Capacitive Voltage Transformer (CVT) noise and high-frequency oscillatory
components. The filter is cascaded with the half-cycle Fourier filter for the voltage phasor estimation.
The URs measure power system frequency using the Clarke transformation by estimating the period of the
waveform from two consecutive zero-crossings in the same direction (negative-to-positive). Voltage or current
samples are pre-filtered using a Finite Impulse Response (FIR) digital filter to remove high frequency noise
contained in the signal. The period is used after several security conditions are met, such as true RMS signal must
be above 6% nominal for a certain time. If these security conditions are not met, the last valid measurement is used
for a specific time after which the UR reverts to nominal system frequency.
Synchrophasors are calculated using a patented convolution integral algorithm. This algorithm allows use of the
same time-stamped samples, which are used for protection and taken at the same sampling frequency. This allows
URs to use one sampling clock for both protection algorithms and synchrophasors.
Synchrophasors on firmware versions 7.23 and up have been tested and certified to meet IEEE C37.118-2011 and
C37.118.1a-2014 standards for both metering and protection classes with outputs available up to 60
synchrophasors per second for the metering class and 120 synchrophasors per second for the protection class.
Synchrophasors measurement is also available via IEC 61850-90-5 protocol.
The contact inputs threshold is settable in the firmware with 17, 33, 84, and 166 V DC settings available. Inputs are
scanned every 0.5 ms and can be conditioned for the critical applications, using debounce time timer, settable from
0.0 to 16.0 ms. Contact inputs with auto-burnishing are available as well, when external contacts are exposed to the
contamination in a harsh industrial environment.
All measured values are available in the UR metering section on the front panel and via communications protocols.
Measured analog values and binary signals can be captured in COMTRADE format with sampling rates from 8 to
64 samples per power cycle. Analog values can be captured with the Data Logger, allowing much slower rates
extended over a long period of time.
Other advanced UR order code options are available to support IEC 61850 (including fast GOOSE, ICD/CID/IID
files, and so on), IEEE 1588 (IEEE C37.238 power profile) based time synchronization, CyberSentry (advanced
cyber security), the Parallel Redundancy Protocol (PRP), IEC 60870-5-103, and so on.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 17
Chapter 2 - Product Description

2.4 COMMUNICATION FUNCTIONS

The UR family supports an array of communication ports and protocols to allow connection to equipment such as
personal computers, remote terminal units (RTUs), supervisory control and data acquisition (SCADA) masters, and
programmable logic controllers. These communication features can be selected as options in the order codes.
Relay communication is a very extensive subject, requiring significant amount of documentation. Because of this,
we supply a separate Communications Guide, which is applicable to all the models within the UR product family.
The Communications Guide is a major part of the overall documentation of each product model.
Prior to this version, the product manuals themselves contained a large part of the communication documentation.
With this version, much of the theoretical information has been moved from this product manual into the
Communications Guide. Only communication information pertaining directly to front panel settings remains in this
product manual. for fuerther information, we refer you to the Communications Guide.

Due to the extensiveness of IEC61850 documentation, all IEC61850 information has ben moved into the
Communications Guide, including the settings.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 18
Chapter 2 - Product Description

2.5 ORDER CODES

The order code is on the product label and indicates the product options applicable.
The relay is available as a 19-inch rack horizontal mount or reduced-size (¾) vertical unit. It consists of the following
modules:
● Power supply
● CPU
● CT/VTs
● Contact inputs and outputs
● Transducer inputs and outputs
● Inter-relay communications.
Module options are specified at the time of ordering.
The order codes shown here are subject to change without notice. See the web page for the product for the latest
options.
The letters in the top row of the table correspond to slots in the UR chassis, for example slot F, H, or U.
The R-GOOSE protocol described in IEC 61850-8-1 is available through the IEC 61850 software option. R-GOOSE
security requires the CyberSentry software option.

Note:
Process Bus GOOSE requires an IEC 61850-9-2LE / IEC 61869 Process Bus Module, as well as IEC 61850, PRP, and IEEE
1588 software options. This is not available for all UR models

For Japanese, the settings display in Japanese on the graphical front panel, while the keys printed on the panel are
in English.

2.5.1 ORDER CODES FOR UR

The data items are kept in spreadsheets attached to this PDF. The spreadsheets may be opened using Microsoft
Excel, or free web-based software such as Google Sheets.
Please note that this manual must be opened with a PDF viewer capable of opening attachments, such as Adobe
Acrobat Reader or Nitro PDF. If using Nitro PDF, attachments are shown in the Attachment Pane. To show or hide
the Attachments pane, look in the sidebar and click the Attachments tab.
An Open File dialog box may open with a warning message about potential harm from programs, macros or
viruses. The files supplied do not contain any harmful content, and may be safely opened.
If using Adobe Acrobat Reader, click on the button below to open the spreadsheet.

Order Code N60 86x

2.5.2 ORDER CODES FOR REPLACEMENT MODULES

Replacement modules can be ordered separately. When ordering a replacement CPU module or front panel,
provide the serial number of your existing unit.
Not all replacement modules apply to the relay described in this manual.
The order codes shown here are subject to change without notice. See the web page for the product for the latest
options.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 19
Chapter 2 - Product Description

Please note that this manual must be opened with Adobe Acrobat Reader to allow access to the attached
spreadsheet. This program is freely available on the Adobe website. The spreadsheets may be opened using free
web-based software such as Google Sheets.
An Open File dialogue box may open with a warning message about potential harm from programs, macros or
viruses. The files supplied do not contain any harmful content, and may be safely opened.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 20
 CHAPTER 3

SPECIFICATIONS
Chapter 3 - Specifications

3.1 CHAPTER OVERVIEW

This chapter contains the following sections:

Chapter Overview 22
Protection elements 23
User-programmable elements 30
Monitoring 34
Metering 36
Inputs 39
Power supply 42
Outputs 43
Communication protocols 46
Inter-relay communications 48
CyberSentry security 50
Graphical front panel 51
Environmental 52
Type tests 53
Production tests 54
Approvals 55
Maintenance 56

N60-1601-0125-861-1 22
Chapter 3 - Specifications

3.2 PROTECTION ELEMENTS

The operating times include the activation time of a trip rated form-A output contact unless otherwise indicated.
FlexLogic operands of a given element are 4 ms faster. Take this into account when using FlexLogic to interconnect
with other protection or control elements of the relay, building FlexLogic equations, or interfacing with other
intelligent electronic devices (IEDs) or power system devices via communications or different output contacts. If not
specified, the operate times given here are for a 60 Hz system at nominal system frequency. Operate times for a 50
Hz system are 1.2 times longer. Timer Accuracy is specified as a percentage of the total operating time that is the
sum of the Operate Time and settable Pickup Delay.

3.2.1 PHASE/NEUTRAL/GROUND TIME OVERCURRENT

PHASE/NEUTRAL/GROUND TOC
Current Phasor or RMS
0.020 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001 (standard CT for ground)
Pickup level 0.002 to 3.000 pu in steps of 0.001 (sensitive ground CT)
0.005 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001 (Process Bus Module, ground)
Dropout level 97% of pickup
Level accuracy
0.1 to 2.0 x CT rating ±0.5% of reading or ±0.4% of rated (whichever is greater)
>2.0 x CT rating ±1.5% of reading
IEEE Moderately/Very/Extremely Inverse; IEC (and BS) A/B/C and Short
Inverse; GE IAC Inverse, Short/Very/ Extremely Inverse; I2t; FlexCurves™
Timing characteristics
(programmable); (Curve multiplier 0.00 to 600.00 in steps of 0.01 s)
Definite Time (Time delay = 0.00 to 600.00 in steps of 0.01 s)
Reset type: Instantaneous/Timed (per IEEE)
±3.5% of operate time or ±½ cycle (whichever is greater) from pickup to
Curve timing accuracy at 1.03 to 20 x pickup
operate (see NOTE 1)
Modifies pickup current for voltage in the range of 0.1 < V < 0.9 VT
Voltage restraint
Nominal in a fixed linear relationship

Note:
Protection and control elements have additional operating time delay of up to 3 ms if the product is ordered with an IEC
61850-9-2LE / IEC 61869 Process Bus Module (order code 85, 86, 87).

3.2.2 PHASE/NEUTRAL/GROUND INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT

PHASE/NEUTRAL/GROUND IOC
0.020 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001 (standard CT for ground)
Pickup level 0.002 to 3.000 pu in steps of 0.001 (sensitive ground CT)
0.005 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001 (Process Bus Module, ground)
Dropout level 97% of pickup
Level accuracy
0.1 to 2.0 x CT rating ±0.5% of reading or ±0.4% of rated (whichever is greater)
>2.0 x CT rating ±1.5% of reading
Overreach <2%
Pickup delay 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
Reset delay 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01

N60-1601-0125-861-1 23
Chapter 3 - Specifications

PHASE/NEUTRAL/GROUND IOC
<16 ms at 3 × pickup at 60 Hz (Phase IOC) (see NOTE 1)
Operate time <20 ms at 3 × pickup at 60 Hz (Neutral IOC) (see NOTE 1)
<25 ms at 3 x pickup at 60 Hz (Ground IOC) (see NOTE 1)
Timer accuracy ±3.5% of operate time or ±1/4 cycle (whichever is greater)

3.2.3 PHASE DIRECTIONAL OVERCURRENT

PHASE DIRECTIONAL OVERCURRENT
Relay connection 90° (quadrature)
ABC phase seq.: phase A (VBC), phase B (VCA), phase C (VAB); ACB
Quadrature voltage
phase seq.: phase A (VCB), phase B (VAC), phase C (VBA)
Polarizing voltage threshold 0.004 to 3.000 pu in steps of 0.001
Current sensitivity threshold 0.05 pu
Characteristic angle 0 to 359° in steps of 1
Angle accuracy ±2°
Operation time (FlexLogic operands)
Tripping (reverse load, forward fault) <12 ms, typically (see NOTE 1)
Blocking (forward load, reverse fault) <8 ms, typically (see NOTE 1)

Note:
Protection and control elements have additional operating time delay of up to 3 ms if the product is ordered with an IEC
61850-9-2LE / IEC 61869 Process Bus Module (order code 85, 86, 87).

3.2.4 NEUTRAL DIRECTIONAL OVERCURRENT

NEUTRAL DIRECTIONAL OVERCURRENT
Directionality: Co-existing forward and reverse
Polarizing: Voltage, Current, Dual, Dual-V, Dual-I
Polarizing voltage V_0 or VX
Polarizing current IG
Operating current I_0
Level sensing 3 × (|I_0| – K × |I_1|), IG Independent for forward and reverse
Restraint, K 0.000 to 0.500 in steps of 0.001
Characteristic angle –90 to 90° in steps of 1
Limit angle 40 to 90° in steps of 1, independent for forward and reverse
Angle accuracy ±2°
Offset impedance 0.00 to 250.00 Ω in steps of 0.01
Pickup level 0.002 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.01
Dropout level 97 to 98%
Operation time <16 ms at 3 × pickup at 60 Hz (see NOTE 1)

N60-1601-0125-861-1 24
Chapter 3 - Specifications

Note:
Protection and control elements have additional operating time delay of up to 3 ms if the product is ordered with an IEC
61850-9-2LE / IEC 61869 Process Bus Module (order code 85, 86, 87).

3.2.5 SENSITIVE DIRECTIONAL POWER

SENSITIVE DIRECTIONAL POWER
Measured power 3-phase, true RMS
Number of stages 2
Characteristic angle 0 to 359° in steps of 1
Calibration angle 0.00 to 0.95° in steps of 0.05

Minimum power –3.300 to 3.300 pu in steps of 0.001

Pickup level accuracy ±1% or ±0.001 pu, whichever is greater
Hysteresis 2% or 0.001 pu, whichever is greater
Pickup delay 0 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
Timer accuracy ±3% of operate time or ±1/4 cycle (whichever is greater)
<50 ms (plus up to 5 ms with Process Bus Module with order code 85, 86,
Operate time
87)

3.2.6 PHASE UNDERVOLTAGE

PHASE UNDERVOLTAGE
Voltage Phasor only
Pickup level 0.004 to 3.000 pu in steps of 0.001
Dropout level 102% of pickup
Level accuracy ±0.5% of reading from 10 to 208 V
GE IAV Inverse (Curve multiplier 0.00 to 600.00 in steps of 0.01 s)
Definite Time (Time delay = 0.00 to 600.00 in steps of 0.01 s)
Timing characteristics
FlexCurves (programmable, Curve multiplier = 0.00 to 600.00 in steps of
0.01 s)
Reset delay 0 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
±3.5% of operate time or ±1/2 cycle (whichever is greater) from pickup to
Curve timing accuracy at <0.90 x pickup
operate
Operate time <30 ms at 0.9 pickup at 60 Hz for Definite Time mode

3.2.7 PHASE OVERVOLTAGE

PHASE OVERVOLTAGE
Voltage Phasor only
Pickup level 0.004 to 3.000 pu in steps of 0.001
Dropout level 98% of pickup
Level accuracy ±0.5% of reading from 10 to 208 V
GE IAV Inverse (Curve multiplier 0.00 to 600.00 in steps of 0.01 s)
Definite Time (Time delay = 0.00 to 600.00 in steps of 0.01 s)
Timing characteristics
FlexCurves (programmable, Curve multiplier = 0.00 to 600.00 in steps of
0.01 s)

N60-1601-0125-861-1 25
Chapter 3 - Specifications

PHASE OVERVOLTAGE
Reset delay 0 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
±3.5% of operate time or ±1 cycle (whichever is greater) from pickup to
Curve timing accuracy at >1.1 x pickup
operate
Operate time <30 ms at 1.1 x pickup at 60 Hz for Definite Time mode

3.2.8 UNDERFREQUENCY
UNDERFREQUENCY
Minimum signal 0.10 to 1.25 pu in steps of 0.01
Pickup level 20.00 to 70.00 Hz in steps of 0.01
Dropout level pickup + 0.03 Hz

Level accuracy ±0.001 Hz

Time delay 0 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001
Timer accuracy: ±3% of operate time or ±1/4 cycle (whichever is greater)
typically 4 cycles at 0.1 Hz/s change
Operate time typically 3.5 cycles at 0.3 Hz/s change
typically 3 cycles at 0.5 Hz/s change
Typical times are average operate times including variables, such as frequency change instance, and test method, and can
vary by ±0.5 cycles

3.2.9 OVERFREQUENCY
OVERFREQUENCY
Pickup level 20.00 to 70.00 Hz in steps of 0.01
Dropout level pickup - 0.03 Hz

Level accuracy ±0.001 Hz

Time delay 0 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001
Timer accuracy: ±3% of operate time or ±1/4 cycle (whichever is greater)
typically 4 cycles at 0.1 Hz/s change
Operate time typically 3.5 cycles at 0.3 Hz/s change
typically 3 cycles at 0.5 Hz/s change
Typical times are average operate times including variables, such as frequency change instance, and test method, and can
vary by ±0.5 cycles

3.2.10 RATE OF CHANGE OF FREQUENCY

RATE OF CHANGE OF FREQUENCY
df/dt trend increasing, decreasing, bi-directional
df/dt pickup level 0.10 to 15.00 Hz/s in steps of 0.01

df/dt dropout level 96% of pickup

df/dt level accuracy 80 mHz/s or 3.5%, whichever is greater (up to df/dt trend of 10 Hz/s)

Overvoltage supervision 0.100 to 3.000 pu in steps of 0.001

Overcurrent supervision 0.020 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001

Pickup delay 0 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001

N60-1601-0125-861-1 26
Chapter 3 - Specifications

RATE OF CHANGE OF FREQUENCY

Reset delay 0 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001
Timer accuracy: ±3% of operate time or ±1/4 cycle (whichever is greater)
typically 9.5 cycles at 2 × pickup
Operate time typically 8.5 cycles at 3 × pickup
typically 6.5 cycles at 5 × pickup
Typical times are average operate times including variables, such as frequency change instance, and test method, and can
vary by ±0.5 cycles

3.2.11 SYNCHROCHECK
SYNCHROCHECK
Max voltage difference 0 to 400000 V in steps of 1
Max angle difference 0 to 100° in steps of 1

Max frequency difference 0.005 to 2.000 Hz in steps of 0.001

Hysteresis for max frequency difference 0.000 to 0.100 Hz in steps of 0.001

None, LV1 & DV2, DV1 & LV2, DV1 or DV2, DV1 xor DV2, DV1 & DV2 (L
Dead source function
= Live, D = Dead)
S-CLS MAX dF 0.100 to 10.000 Hz in steps of 0.001

S-CLS MIN dF 0.005 to 1.000 Hz in steps of 0.001

V2 MAG CORR FACTOR 0.10 to 10.00 in steps of 0.01

V2 ANGLE SHIFT -180° to +180° in steps of 1°

PHASE SELECT Auto, VAG, VBG, VCG, VAB, VBC, VCA

3.2.12 POWER SWING DETECT

POWER SWING DETECT
Functions Power swing block, out-of-step trip
Characteristic Mho or Quad
Measured impedance Positive-sequence

Blocking / tripping modes 2-step or 3-step

Tripping mode Early or Delayed
Current supervision Pickup level 0.050 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001
Current supervision Dropout level 97 to 98% of pickup
Fwd / reverse reach (sec. Ω) 0.10 to 500.00 Ω in steps of 0.01
Left and right blinders (sec. Ω): 0.10 to 500.00 Ω in steps of 0.01
Impedance accuracy ±5%
Fwd / reverse angle impedances 40 to 90° in steps of 1
Angle accuracy ±2°
Characteristic limit angles 40 to 140° in steps of 1
Timers 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001
Timer accuracy ±3% of operate time or ±1/4 cycle (whichever is greater)

N60-1601-0125-861-1 27
Chapter 3 - Specifications

3.2.13 OPEN POLE DETECTOR

OPEN POLE DETECTOR
Detects an open pole condition, monitoring breaker auxiliary contacts, the current in each phase, and optional voltages on the
line.
Current pickup level 0.020 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001
Line capacitive reactances (XC1, XC0) 300.0 to 9999.9 sec. Ω in steps of 0.1

Remote current pickup level 0.000 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001

Current dropout level pickup + 3%, not less than 0.05 pu

3.2.14 THERMAL OVERLOAD

THERMAL OVERLOAD
Thermal overload curves IEC 255-8 curve
Base current 0.20 to 3.00 pu in steps of 0.01
Overload (k) factor 0.2 to 4 pu in steps of 0.05

Alarm level 0.2 to 1.0 pu in steps of 0.1

Trip time constant 0 to 999 min. in steps of 0.1
Reset time constant 0 to 999 min. in steps of 0.1
Minimum reset time 0 to 999 min. in steps of 0.1
Timer accuracy (cold curve) ±100 ms or 2%, whichever is greater
±500 ms or 2%, whichever is greater for Ip < 0.9 × k × Ib and I / (k × Ib) >
Timer accuracy (hot curve)
1.1

3.2.15 TRIP BUS (TRIP WITHOUT FLEXLOGIC)

TRIP BUS (TRIP WITHOUT FLEXLOGIC)
Number of elements 6
Number of inputs 16
Operate time <2 ms at 60 Hz

Timer accuracy ±3% or 10 ms, whichever is greater

3.2.16 HARMONIC DETECTION

HARMONIC DETECTION
Number of elements 6
2.0 to 100.0% of I(f1) (current fundamental frequency phasor) in steps of
Pickup threshold
0.1%
Pickup level accuracy
With I(f1) from 0.4 to 2.0 × CT rating: ±2% of reading or ±1% of 100%,
Harmonics
whichever is greater
With I(f1) from 0.4 to 2.0 × CT rating: ±2% of reading or ±1% of 100% per
THD
each harmonic, whichever is greater
Pickup delay 0 to 600.00s in steps of 0.01
±3% of delay setting or ±1/4 cycle (whichever is greater) from pickup to
Timer accuracy
operate

N60-1601-0125-861-1 28
Chapter 3 - Specifications

HARMONIC DETECTION
Operating time <10 ms at 2 × pickup at 60 Hz

Note:
Accuracy of the DC measurement depends on the duration and content of the DC component, compared to the fundamental
frequency current. It also depends on the source of the signal. DSP or HardFiber transducers can saturate and cause higher
error than stated here, while with an MU-320 merging unit as a source, it meets the accuracy stated here due to immunity of
the MU-320 to saturation.

3.2.17 MULTI-RANGE SIGNAL OSCILLATION DETECTOR

MULTI-RANGE SIGNAL OSCILLATOR DETECTOR
Number of elements 2
Input signal to detector
Source Voltage Va Mag, Vb Mag, Vc Mag, V1 Mag, Source Current Ia,
For frequency band I to III Mag, Ib Mag, Ic Mag, I1 Mag, Source Real 3-phase Power and Source
Reactive 3-phase Power
Source Voltages (samples) Va, Vb, Vc, Vx, V_clarke, or Source Currents:
For frequency band IV
Ia, Ib, Ic, In, I_clarke
Minimum pickup of Mag_osc 0.02 to 10.00 pu for alarm and 0.05 to 10.00 pu for trip in steps of 0.01 pu
±5% of reading or 5% of rated (whichever is greater) for oscillation signal
Pickup level accuracy
>0.1 pu
Pickup delay Definite time: 0 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Time accuracy: ±3% or ±20 ms, whichever is greater
Typical operating time of 2/f_osc + 0.04 s without damping ratio
supervision
Typical operating time of 3/f_osc + max(0.02, 0.25/f_osc) s with damping
Operate time: ±3% or ±20 ms, whichever is greater ratio supervision
The operating time is dependent on the oscillation inception point, the
oscillation frequency and
the magnitude of the oscillation, and therefore can vary from these values

N60-1601-0125-861-1 29
Chapter 3 - Specifications

3.3 USER-PROGRAMMABLE ELEMENTS

3.3.1 FLEXLOGIC
FLEXLOGIC
Reverse Polish Notation with graphical visualization (keypad
Programming language
programmable)
Lines of code 1024
Internal variables 64
NOT, XOR, OR (2 to 16 inputs), AND (2 to 16 inputs), NOR (2 to 16
Supported operations inputs), NAND (2 to 16 inputs), latch (reset-dominant), edge detectors,
timers
Inputs: any logical variable, contact, or virtual input
Number of timers 64
Pickup delay 0 to 60000 (ms, sec., min.) in steps of 1
Dropout delay 0 to 60000 (ms, sec., min.) in steps of 1
Timer accuracy ±0.1% of operate time or ±1/8 cycle, whichever is greater

3.3.2 FLEXCURVES
FLEXCURVES
Number 4 (A through D)
Reset points 40 (0 through 1 of pickup)
Operate points 80 (1 through 20 of pickup)

Time delay 0 to 65535 ms in steps of 1

3.3.3 FLEXSTATES
FLEXSTATES
Number up to 256 logical variables grouped under 16 Modbus addresses
Programmability any logical variable, contact, or virtual input

3.3.4 FLEXELEMENTS
FLEXELEMENTS
Number of elements: 16
Operating signal any analog actual value, or two values in differential mode
Operating signal mode signed or absolute value

Operating mode level, delta

Comparator direction over, under
Pickup level –90.000 to 90.000 pu in steps of 0.001
Hysteresis 0.1 to 50.0% in steps of 0.1
Delta dt 20 ms to 60 days
Pickup and dropout delay 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001

N60-1601-0125-861-1 30
Chapter 3 - Specifications

3.3.5 NON-VOLATILE LATCHES

NON-VOLATILE LATCHES
Type set-dominant or reset-dominant
Number 16 (individually programmed)
Output stored in non-volatile memory

Execution sequence as input prior to protection, control, and FlexLogic

3.3.6 USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS

USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDs (Enhanced and basic front panels)
Number: 48 plus trip and alarm
Programmability from any logical variable, contact, or virtual input
Reset mode self-reset or latched

3.3.7 LED TEST

LED TEST
Initiation from any contact input or user-programmable condition
Number of tests 3, interruptible at any time
Duration of full test approximately 3 minutes
Test sequence 1 all LEDs on
Test sequence 2 all LEDs off, one LED at a time on for 1 s
Test sequence 3 all LEDs on, one LED at a time off for 1 s

3.3.8 USER-DEFINABLE DISPLAYS

USER-DEFINABLE DISPLAYS (Enhanced and basic front panels)
Number of displays 16
Lines of display 2 × 20 alphanumeric characters
Parameters up to 5, any Modbus register addresses
Invoking and scrolling keypad, or any user-programmable condition, including pushbuttons

3.3.9 CONTROL PUSHBUTTONS

CONTROL PUSHBUTTONS (Enhanced and basic front panels)
Number of pushbuttons 7
Operation drive FlexLogic operands

3.3.10 USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS

CONTROL PUSHBUTTONS (Enhanced and basic front panels)
12 on basic front panel
16 on enhanced horizontal front panel
Number of pushbuttons 6 on enhanced vertical front panel
48 on graphical front panel (8 physical pushbuttons, 40 graphical interface
pushbuttons)
Mode self-reset, latched

N60-1601-0125-861-1 31
Chapter 3 - Specifications

CONTROL PUSHBUTTONS (Enhanced and basic front panels)

Display message 2 lines of 20 characters each
Drop-out timer 0.00 to 60.00 s in steps of 0.05
Autoreset timer 0.2 to 600.0 s in steps of 0.1
Hold timer 0.0 to 10.0 s in steps of 0.1

3.3.11 SELECTOR SWITCH

SELECTOR SWITCH
Number of elements 2
Upper position limit 1 to 7 in steps of 1
Selecting mode time-out or acknowledge
Time-out timer 3.0 to 60.0 s in steps of 0.1
Control inputs step-up and 3-bit
restore from non-volatile memory or synchronize to a 3-bit control input or
Power-up mode
synch/restore mode

3.3.12 DIGITIZER
DIGITIZER
Input signal: any FlexAnalog parameter
Independent elements: 1 per CT bank, to a maximum of 5
Response time: < 8 ms at 60 Hz, < 10 ms at 50 Hz
Upper / lower limit for input signal: 0.050 to 90 pu in steps of 0.001
Resolution: 8 bits / full-scale
Maximum error: ±0.6% of full-scale
Rounding method: nearest with a one-count dead-band

3.3.13 8-BIT COMPARATOR

8-BIT COMPARATOR
Number of elements: 6
Operating signal: up to two 8-bit integers via FlexLogic operands
Operating mode: add or subtract, controlled from any FlexLogic operand
Operating signal mode: signed, absolute value
Comparator direction: over, under
Pickup level: –25400 to 25400 in steps of 1
Hysteresis: 0 to 5000 in steps of 1
Pickup/Dropout delay: 0 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.01
Scaling factor for display: 0.01 to 100.00 in steps of 0.01

3.3.14 8-BIT SWITCH

8-BIT SWITCH
Number of elements: 6
Input signals: two 8-bit integers via FlexLogic operands
Control signal: any FlexLogic operand

N60-1601-0125-861-1 32
Chapter 3 - Specifications

8-BIT SWITCH
Response time: < 8 ms at 60 Hz, < 10 ms at 50 Hz

3.3.15 DIGITAL ELEMENTS

DIGITAL ELEMENTS
Number of elements: 96
Operating signal any FlexLogic operand
Pickup delay 0.000 to 999999.999 s in steps of 0.001
Dropout delay 0.000 to 999999.999 s in steps of 0.001
Timing accuracy ±3% or ±4 ms, whichever is greater

N60-1601-0125-861-1 33
Chapter 3 - Specifications

3.4 MONITORING

3.4.1 OSCILLOGRAPHY
OSCILLOGRAPHY
Number of records 3 to 64, configurable
Sampling rate 8, 16, 32, or 64 samples per power cycle, configurable
Triggers any FlexLogic operand, configurable

Trigger position 0 to 100%, configurable

raw AC input channels
up to 127 configured digital channels (+ 1 trigger operand), representing
Recorded data any FlexLogic operand
up to 32 configured analog channels, representing any measured analog
value
Data storage in non-volatile memory
Format: COMTRADE IEEE C37.111 (1999 or 2013)

3.4.2 EVENT RECORDER

EVENT RECORDER
Capacity 1024 events
Time-tag to 1 microsecond
Triggers any FlexLogic operand, configurable

Data storage in non-volatile memory

3.4.3 USER-PROGRAMMABLE FAULT REPORT

FAULT REPORT
Number of elements: 2
Pre-fault trigger: any FlexLogic operand
Fault trigger: any FlexLogic operand

Recorder quantities: 32 (any FlexAnalog value)

3.4.4 DATA LOGGER

DATA LOGGER
Number of channels 1 to 16
Parameters any available analog actual value
Sampling rate 15 to 3600000 ms in steps of 1

Trigger any FlexLogic operand

Mode continuous or triggered

Storage capacity: 1-second rate: 01 channel for NN days
(NN is dependent on memory) 16 channels for NN days

N60-1601-0125-861-1 34
Chapter 3 - Specifications

DATA LOGGER
Storage capacity: 60-minute rate: 01 channel for NN days
(NN is dependent on memory) 16 channels for NN days

3.4.5 PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT

PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT
Output format: per IEEE C37.118-2011, C37.118.1a-2014, or IEC 61850-90-5 standard
Number of channels 14 synchrophasors, 16 analogs, 16 digitals
TVE (total vector error) <1%
frequency, voltage, current, power, rate of change of frequency, user-
Triggering
defined
1, 2, 5, 10, 12, 15, 20, 25, 30, 50, or 60 times per second for P and M
Reporting rate
class, and 100 or 120 times per second for P class only
Number of clients one over TCP/IP port and one over UDP/IP per aggregator

AC ranges as indicated in appropriate specification sections

Network reporting format 16-bit integer (for IEEE C37.118) or 32-bit IEEE floating point numbers
rectangular (real and imaginary for IEEE C37.188) or polar (magnitude
Network reporting style
and angle) coordinates
Post-filtering none, 3-point, 5-point, 7-point

Calibration ±5° (angle) and ±5% (magnitude)

N60-1601-0125-861-1 35
Chapter 3 - Specifications

3.5 METERING

3.5.1 RMS CURRENT: PHASE, NEUTRAL AND GROUND

RMS CURRENT: PHASE, NEUTRAL, AND GROUND
Accuracy at 0.1 to 2.0 × CT rating ±0.25% of reading or ±0.1% of rated (whichever is greater)
Accuracy at > 2.0 × CT rating ±1.0% of reading

3.5.2 RMS VOLTAGE

VOLTAGE
Accuracy: ±0.5% of reading from 10 to 208 V

3.5.3 REAL POWER (WATTS)

REAL POWER (WATTS)
Accuracy at 0.1 to 1.5 x CT rating and 0.8 to 1.2 x VT rating: ±1.0% of reading at –1.0 £ PF < –0.8 and 0.8 < PF £ 1.0

3.5.4 REACTIVE POWER (VARS)

REACTIVE POWER (VARS)
Accuracy at 0.1 to 1.5 x CT rating and 0.8 to 1.2 x VT rating: ±1.0% of reading at –0.2 ≤ PF ≤ 0.2

3.5.5 APPARENT POWER (VA)

APPARENT POWER (VA)
Accuracy at 0.1 to 1.5 x CT rating and 0.8 to 1.2 x VT rating: ±1.0% of reading

3.5.6 WATT-HOURS (POSITIVE AND NEGATIVE)

WATT-HOURS (POSITIVE AND NEGATIVE)
Accuracy ±2.0% of reading
Range ±0 to 1 × 106 MWh
Parameters three-phase only
Update rate 50 ms

3.5.7 VAR-HOURS (POSITIVE AND NEGATIVE)

VAR-HOURS (POSITIVE AND NEGATIVE)
Accuracy ±2.0% of reading
Range ±0 to 1 × 106 Mvarh
Parameters three-phase only
Update rate 50 ms

N60-1601-0125-861-1 36
Chapter 3 - Specifications

3.5.8 CURRENT HARMONICS

CURRENT HARMONICS
per phase, displayed as a % of I(f1) (current fundamental
Harmonics (2nd to 25th harmonic):
frequency phasor)
THD per phase, displayed as a % of I(f1)
with I(f1) 0.4 to 2.0 × CT rating: ±2% of reading or ±1% of
Accuracy Harmonics:
100%, whichever is greater
with I(f1) from 0.4 to 2.0 × CT rating: ±2% of reading or ±1%
Accuracy THD:
of 100% per each harmonic, whichever is greater
2nd to 17th harmonic including THD with a regular CT/VT
module
2nd to 13th harmonic including THD with a Process Bus
Module (order code 85, 86, 87) when anti-aliasing filter is
enabled
Accuracy applies to:
2nd to 16th harmonic including THD with a Process Bus
Module (order code 85, 86, 87) when anti-aliasing filter is
disabled
2nd to 15th harmonic including THD with a HardFiber Process
Bus Module (order code 81)

3.5.9 VOLTAGE HARMONICS

VOLTAGE HARMONICS
per phase, displayed as a % of V(f1) (voltage fundamental
Harmonics (2nd to 25th harmonic):
frequency phasor)
THD per phase, displayed as a % of V(f1)
with V(f1) 25 to 208 V: ±2% of reading or ±1% of 100%,
Accuracy Harmonics:
whichever is greater
with V(f1) 25 to 208 V: ±2% of reading or ±1% of 100% per
Accuracy THD:
each harmonic, whichever is greater
2nd to 25th harmonic including THD with a regular CT/VT
module
2nd to 10th harmonic including THD with a Process Bus
Module (order code 85, 86, 87) when anti-aliasing filter is
enabled
Accuracy applies to:
2nd to 16th harmonic including THD with a Process Bus
Module (order code 85, 86, 87) when anti-aliasing filter is
disabled
2nd to 15th harmonic including THD with a HardFiber Process
Bus Module (order code 81)

3.5.10 FREQUENCY
FREQUENCY
±0.001 Hz (when voltage signal is used for frequency
Accuracy for input at V = 0.8 to 1.2 pu
measurement)
±0.02 Hz (when current signal is used for frequency
Accuracy for input at I = 0.1 to 0.25 pu
measurement)
±0.005 Hz (when current signal is used for frequency
Accuracy for input at I > 0.25 pu
measurement)

N60-1601-0125-861-1 37
Chapter 3 - Specifications

3.5.11 DEMAND
DEMAND
Phases A, B, and C present and maximum measured currents
Measurements 3-Phase Power (P, Q, and S) present and maximum
measured currents
Accuracy ±2.0%

N60-1601-0125-861-1 38
Chapter 3 - Specifications

3.6 INPUTS

3.6.1 AC CURRENT
AC CURRENT
CT rated primary 1 to 50000 A
CT rated secondary 1 or 5 A by connection
Relay burden < 0.2 VA at rated secondary
Conversion range (Standard CT): 0.02 to 46 × CT rating RMS symmetrical
Conversion range (Sensitive Ground CT module): 0.002 to 4.6 × CT rating RMS symmetrical
20 ms at 250 times rated
1 sec at 100 times rated
Current withstand: continuous 4x Inom
URs equipped with 24 CT inputs have a maximum operating
temperature of 50°C
150000 RMS symmetrical amperes, 250 V maximum (primary
Short circuit rating
current to external CT)

3.6.2 AC VOLTAGE
AC VOLTAGE
VT rated secondary 25.0 to 240.0 V
VT ratio 1.00 to 24000.00
Relay burden < 0.25 VA at 120 V

Conversion range 1 to 275 V

continuous at 260 V to neutral
Voltage withstand
1 min/hr at 420 V to neutral

3.6.3 FREQUENCY
FREQUENCY
Nominal frequency setting 25 to 60 Hz
Sampling frequency 64 samples per power cycle
Tracking frequency range with DSP 20 to 70 Hz

Tracking frequency range with with Process Bus Module (not B90): 20 to 65 Hz

3.6.4 CONTACT INPUTS

CONTACT INPUTS
Dry contacts 1000 Ω maximum
Wet contacts 300 V DC maximum
Selectable thresholds 17 V, 33 V, 84 V, 166 V

Tolerance ±10%

Contacts per common return (standard module) 4

N60-1601-0125-861-1 39
Chapter 3 - Specifications

CONTACT INPUTS
Contacts per common return (6Y I/O module) 2

Recognition time < 1 ms

Debounce time 0.0 to 16.0 ms in steps of 0.5

Continuous current draw (standard module) 4 mA (when energized)

Continuous current draw (6Y I/O module) 2 mA (when energized)

3.6.5 CONTACT INPUTS WITH AUTO-BURNISHING

CONTACT INPUTS WITH AUTO-BURNISHING
Dry contacts 1000 Ω maximum
Wet contacts 300 V DC maximum
Selectable thresholds 17 V, 33 V, 84 V, 166 V

Tolerance ±10%

Contacts per common return 2

Recognition time < 1 ms

Debounce time 0.0 to 16.0 ms in steps of 0.5

Continuous current draw 4 mA (when energized)

Auto-burnish impulse current 50 to 70 mA

Duration of auto-burnish impulse 25 to 50 mS

3.6.6 DCMA INPUTS

DCMA INPUTS
Current input (mA DC) 0 to –1, 0 to +1, –1 to +1, 0 to 5, 0 to 10, 0 to 20, 4 to 20 (programmable)
Input impedance 379 Ω ±10%
Conversion range –1 to + 20 mA DC

Accuracy ±0.2% of full scale

Type Passive

3.6.7 RTD INPUTS

RTD INPUTS
Types (3-wire) 100 Ω Platinum, 100 and 120 Ω Nickel, 10 Ω Copper
Sensing current 5 mA
Range –50 to +250°C

Accuracy ±2°C

Isolation 36 V pk-pk

3.6.8 IRIG-B INPUT

IRIG-B INPUT
IRIG formats accepted: B000…B007, B120…B127

N60-1601-0125-861-1 40
Chapter 3 - Specifications

IRIG-B INPUT
IRIG control bits IEEE Std C37.118.1-2011
Amplitude modulation 1 to 10 V pk-pk
DC shift operating range: 0 to 10 V DC
TTL logic low 0.0 to 0.8 V DC
TTL logic high 2.0 to 5.0 V DC
Input impedance 50 kΩ
Isolation 2 kV

3.6.9 DIRECT INPUTS

DIRECT INPUTS
Input points: 3264256
Remote devices: 16
Default states on loss of comms: On, Off, Latest/Off, Latest/On
Ring configuration: Yes, No

Data rate: 64 or 128 kbps

CRC: 32-bit

CRC alarm responding to: Rate of messages failing the CRC

CRC alarm monitoring message count: 10 to 10000 in steps of 1

CRC alarm threshold: 1 to 1000 in steps of 1
Unreturned message alarm responding to: Rate of unreturned messages in the ring configuration

Unreturned message alarm monitoring message count: 10 to 10000 in steps of 1

Unreturned message alarm alarm threshold: 1 to 1000 in steps of 1

3.6.10 TELEPROTECTION
TELEPROTECTION
Input points: 16
Remote devices: 3
Default states on loss of comms: On, Off, Latest/Off, Latest/On
Ring configuration: No

Data rate: 64 or 128 kbps

CRC: 32-bit

N60-1601-0125-861-1 41
Chapter 3 - Specifications

3.7 POWER SUPPLY

3.7.1 LOW RANGE

LOW RANGE
Nominal DC voltage 24 to 48 V
Minimum DC voltage 20 V
Maximum DC voltage 75 V for SL power supply module
Voltage loss hold-up 200 ms duration at maximum load

Note:
Low range is DC only

3.7.2 HIGH RANGE

HIGH RANGE
Nominal DC voltage 125 to 250 V
Minimum DC voltage 88 V
Maximum DC voltage 300 V
Nominal AC voltage 100 to 240 V at 50/60 Hz
Minimum AC voltage 88 V at 25 to 100 Hz
Maximum AC voltage 265 V at 25 to 100 Hz
Voltage loss hold-up 200 ms duration at maximum load

3.7.3 ALL RANGES

ALL RANGES
Volt withstand 2 × Highest Nominal Voltage for 10 ms
Power consumption typical 15 to 20 W/VA
Power consumption maximum 45 W/VA

Note:
Contact factory for exact order code consumption

3.7.4 INTERNAL FUSE

INTERNAL FUSE
Rating (low range) 8 A / 250 V
Rating (high range) 4 A / 250 V
Interrupting capacity (AC) 100 000 A RMS symmetrical
Interrupting capacity (DC) 10 000 A

N60-1601-0125-861-1 42
Chapter 3 - Specifications

3.8 OUTPUTS

3.8.1 FORM-A RELAY

FORM-A RELAY
Make and carry for 0.2 s 30 A as per ANSI C37.90
Carry continuous 6A
1 A at 24V
0.5 A at 48 V
Break (DC inductive, L/R = 40 ms)
0.3 A at 125 V
0.2 A at 250 V
Operate time < 4 ms
Contact material silver alloy
Contacts per common return (6Y I/O module) 2
Contacts with voltage monitoring (6Y I/O module) 2

6Y FORM-A VOLTAGE MONITOR

Applicable voltage approx. 15 to 250 V DC
Carry continuous approx. 2mA

3.8.2 LATCHING RELAY

LATCHING RELAY
Make and carry for 0.2 s 30 A as per ANSI C37.90
Carry continuous 6 A as per IEEE C37.90
6 A at 24V
1.6 A at 48 V
Break (DC resistive as per IEC 61810-1)
0.4 A at 125 V
0.2 A at 250 V
Operate time < 4 ms
Contact material silver alloy
Control separate operate and reset inputs
Control mode operate-dominant or reset-dominant

3.8.3 FORM-A MONITORS

FORM-A MONITORS
FORM-A VOLTAGE MONITOR
Applicable voltage approx. 15 to 250 V DC
Trickle current approx. 1 to 2.5 mA
FORM-A CURRENT MONITOR
Threshold current approx. 80 to 100 mA

N60-1601-0125-861-1 43
Chapter 3 - Specifications

3.8.4 FORM-C AND CRITICAL FAILURE RELAY

FORM-A RELAY
Make and carry for 0.2 s 30 A as per ANSI C37.90
Carry continuous 8A
1 A at 24V
0.5 A at 48 V
Break (DC inductive, L/R = 40 ms)
0.3 A at 125 V
0.2 A at 250 V
Operate time < 8 ms
Contact material silver alloy

3.8.5 FAST FORM-C RELAY

FORM-A RELAY
Make and carry 0.1A max (resistive load)
20 KΩ at 250 V DC
5 KΩ at 120 V DC
Minimum load impedance (2 W resistor)
2 KΩ at 48 V DC
2 KΩ at 24 V DC
50 KΩ at 250 V DC
2 KΩ at 120 V DC
Minimum load impedance (1 W resistor)
2 KΩ at 48 V DC
2 KΩ at 24 V DC
Operate time < 8 ms

Note:
values for 24 V and 48 V are the same due to a required 95% voltage drop across the load impedance.

Operate time < 0.6 ms

Internal Limiting Resistor 100 Ω, 2 W

3.8.6 SOLID-STATE OUTPUT RELAY

SOLID-STATE OUTPUT RELAY
Operate and release time <100 μs
Maximum voltage 265 V DC
Maximum leakage current in off state (excluding
100 μA
voltage monitor circuit current)
Maximum continuous current 5 A at 45°C; 4 A at 65°C
Make and carry (for 0.2 s) 30 A as per ANSI C37.90
Make and carry (for 0.03 s) 300 A

N60-1601-0125-861-1 44
Chapter 3 - Specifications

Breaking Capacity
Utility application
Specification UL 508 Industrial application
(autoreclose scheme)
5000 operations,
1 second on, 5 operations,
9 seconds off 10000 operations,
0.2 seconds on,
Operations per interval 0.2 seconds on,
1000 operations, 0.2 seconds off,
30 seconds off
0.5 seconds on, within 1 minute
0.5 seconds off
3.2 A at L/R = 10 ms
Break capability (0 to 250 V 1.6 A at L/R = 20 ms
10 A at L/R = 40 ms 10 A at L/R = 40 ms
DC) 0.8 A
L/R = 40 ms

3.8.7 CONTROL POWER EXTERNAL OUTPUT

CONTROL POWER EXTERNAL OUTPUT (For dry contact input)
Capacity 100 mA DC at 48 V DC
Isolation ±300 Vpk

3.8.8 DIRECT OUTPUTS

DIRECT OUTPUTS
Output points 3264356

3.8.9 DCMA OUTPUTS

DCMA OUTPUTS
Range –1 to 1 mA, 0 to 1 mA, 4 to 20 mA
12 kΩ for –1 to 1 mA range
Max. load resistance 12 kΩ for 0 to 1 mA range
600 Ω for 4 to 20 mA range
±0.75% of full-scale for 0 to 1 mA range
Accuracy: ±0.5% of full-scale for –1 to 1 mA range
±0.75% of full-scale for 0 to 20 mA range
99% Settling time to a step change 100 ms
Isolation 1.5 kV
Driving signal any FlexAnalog quantity
Upper and lower limit for the driving signal –90 to 90 pu in steps of 0.001

N60-1601-0125-861-1 45
Chapter 3 - Specifications

3.9 COMMUNICATION PROTOCOLS

IEC 61850
Supports IEC 61850 Editions 1.0 and 2.0. See the UR Family
IEC 61850
Communications Guide and its conformance statements.

RS232 (Enhanced and basic front panels)

Front port 19.2 kbps, Modbus RTU

USB (Graphical front panel)

Front port USB 2.0 type B

RS485
1 rear port up to 115 kbps, Modbus RTU, DNP 3, IEC 60870-5-103
Typical distance 1200 m
Isolation 2 kV, isolated together at 36 Vpk

FIBER ETHERNET PORT

Operates with 50/125 μm and 62.5/125 μm multimode fiber
Parameters (100 Mb multimode)
Wavelength 1310 nm
Connector LC
Transmit power –20 dBm
Receiver sensitivity –30 dBm
Power budget 10 dB
Maximum input power –14 dBm
Typical distance 2 km
Full duplex yes
Redundancy yes

ETHERNET
Modes 10 Mb, 10/100 Mb (auto-detect)
Connector RJ45
Cable type CAT 5 or CAT 6 Shielded twisted Pair (STP)

SIMPLE NETWORK TIME PROTOCOL (SNTP)

Clock synchronization error <10 ms (typical)

PRECISION TIME PROTOCOL (PTP) PTP IEEE Std 1588-2008 (version 2)

Power Profile (PP) as per IEEE StandardPC37.238-2017

N60-1601-0125-861-1 46
Chapter 3 - Specifications

PRECISION TIME PROTOCOL (PTP) PTP IEEE Std 1588-2008 (version 2)

Slave-only ordinary clock when using station bus Ethernet interface.
Clock
Boundary clock when using process bus Ethernet interface

PARALLEL REDUNDANCY PROTOCOL (PRP) (IEC 62439-3 CLAUSE 4, 2012)

Ethernet ports used 2 and 3
Networks supported 10/100 Mb Ethernet

PROCESS BUS MODULE (NON-HARDFIBER)

2 x 1000Base-SX, 1 Gbps LC connectors,
Ethernet ports 4 x 1000Base-SX (1 Gbps) + 4 x 100Base-FX (100 Mbps) LC connectors
4 x 100Base-FX, LC connectors
Number of sampled value (SV) streams: Up to 8
SV subscription profiles IEC 61850-9-2LE (1 ASDU only) or IEC 61869-9 (1 or 2 ASDUs)
Sampling Rate
4800 Hz (80 samples/cycle) fixed for 60 Hz - Protection class
IEC 61850-9-2
4000 Hz (80 samples/cycle) fixed for 50 Hz - Protection class
IEC 61869-9 4800 Hz for 60/50 Hz - Protection class
GOOSE support P1 class 1 TxGOOSE, and 8 RxGOOSE
IEC 62439-3:2012 PRP (ports 1 and2)
IEC 62439-3:2012 HSR (ports 1 and 2)
Network Config modes:
IEC 62439-3:2012
Dual HSR (ports 1 and 2, 5 and 6); or Point-to-Point (ports 1 to 8)
IEC 61850-9-3 PTPv2 Utility profile
Time synchronization PTPv2/PP (IEEE C37.238-2017 over Process Bus Module
PTPv2/PP (IEEE C37.238-2017; or IRIG-B over CPU for PTP master
Time synchronization mode: Slave-only, master-slave on Process Bus Module, and slave-only on CPU
Simulation mode: Supported for both GOOSE and SV

Test mode (test, test/block) Supported for both GOOSE and SV

OTHER
TFTP, SFTP, HTTP, IEC 60870-5-104, Ethernet Global Data (EGD), IEEE
Other protocols
C37.118

N60-1601-0125-861-1 47
Chapter 3 - Specifications

3.10 INTER-RELAY COMMUNICATIONS

3.10.1 STP INTERFACE OPTIONS

SHIELDED TWISTED-PAIR INTERFACE OPTIONS
Interface type Typical distance
RS422 1200 m

Note:
RS422 distance is based on transmitter power and does not take into consideration the clock source provided by the user

G.703 100 m

3.10.2 LINK POWER BUDGET AND MAXIMUM OPTICAL INPUT POWER

LINK POWER BUDGET AND MAXIMUM OPTICAL INPUT POWER

Maximum
Received
Emitter, fiber type Cable type Transmit power Power budget optical input
sensitivity
power
62.5/125 μm -16 dBm 16 dBm
820 nm, multimode -32 dBm -8 dBm
50/125 μm -20 dBm 12 dBm
62.5/125 μm -16 dBm 16 dBm
1300 nm, multimode -32 dBm -8 dBm
50/125 μm -20 dBm 12 dBm
1300 nm, single mode 9/125 μm -15 dBm -32 dBm 17 dBm -8 dBm
1300 nm, laser, single mode 9/125 μm 0 dBm -34 dBm 34 dBm -8 dBm
1550 nm, laser single mode 9/125 μm 5 dBm -34 dBm 39 dBm -10 dBm

The following specifications apply to filter interface modules implemented before January 2012:

Maximum
Received
Emitter, fiber type Transmit power Power budget optical input
sensitivity
power
820 nm LED, multimode –20 dBm –30 dBm 10 dB –7.6 dBm
1300 nm LED, multimode –21 dBm –30 dBm 9 dB –11 dBm
1300 nm ELED, single mode –23 dBm –32 dBm 9 dB –14 dBm
1300 nm Laser, single mode –1 dBm –30 dBm 29 dB –14 dBm
1550 nm Laser, single mode +5 dBm –30 dBm 35 dB –14 dBm

Note:
The power budgets are calculated from the manufacturer’s worst-case transmitter power and worst case receiver sensitivity.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 48
Chapter 3 - Specifications

Note:
The power budgets for the 1300 nm ELED are calculated from the manufacturer's transmitter power and receiver sensitivity at
ambient temperature. At extreme temperatures these values deviate based on component tolerance. On average, the output
power decreases as the temperature is increased by a factor of 1 dB / 5 °C.

3.10.3 TYPICAL LINK DISTANCE

Typical distance
Emitter, fiber type Cable type Connector type
Before Jan 2012 From Jan 2012
62.5/125 μm ST 1.65 km 2 km
820 nm LED, multimode
50/125 μm ST 1.65 km 2 km

62.5/125 μm ST 4 km 5 km
1300 nm LED, multimode
50/125 μm ST 4 km 5 km
1300 nm ELED, single mode 9/125 μm ST 11.4 km 20 km
1300 nm laser, single mode 9/125 μm ST 64 km 65 km
1550 nm laser, single mode 9/125 μm ST 105 km 125 km

Note:
Typical distances listed are based on the following assumptions for system loss. As actual losses vary from one installation to
another, the distance covered by your system can vary.

3.10.4 LOSSES AND MARGIN

CONNECTOR LOSSES (Total at both ends)
ST connector 0.7 dB (each)

FIBER LOSSES
820 nm multimode 3 dB/km
1300 nm multimode 1 dB/km

1300 nm single mode 0.35 dB/km

1550 nm single mode 0.25 dB/km

Splice losses one splice every 2 km at 0.05 dB loss per splice

SYSTEM MARGIN
Additional loss added to calculations to compensate for all other losses 3 dB
Compensated difference in transmitting and receiving (channel asymmetry) channel
10 ms
delays using GPS satellite clock:

N60-1601-0125-861-1 49
Chapter 3 - Specifications

3.11 CYBERSENTRY SECURITY

OPTIONS
Software options Level 1

N60-1601-0125-861-1 50
Chapter 3 - Specifications

3.12 GRAPHICAL FRONT PANEL

DISPLAY
Type Color graphical back-lit LCD display
Size 7 inches (17.8 cm)
Resolution 800 by 480 pixels
5 single-line diagram pages with controls, status, and metering values
Up to 8 annunciator pages with total of 96 annunciator windows
1 phasor metering page for each AC Source
Pages 5 tabular metering pages with dynamic metering and status
Event records page with dynamic update
Product information page
Settings, actual values, error messages (targets)

LED INDICATORS
5 device status indicators
Functions 9 event cause indicators
8 user-programmable pushbutton indicators

PUSHBUTTONS
Type membrane
5 bottom Tab pushbuttons and 1 Home pushbutton for page recall
4 directional, 1 ENTER, and 1 ESCAPE pushbutton element selection
Functions
10 side pushbuttons for power system element control
RESET pushbutton

INGRESS PROTECTION
IP40 front (IP54 front with IP54 mounting collar accessory)
IP code
IP10 back (IP20 back with IP20 cover accessory)

N60-1601-0125-861-1 51
Chapter 3 - Specifications

3.13 ENVIRONMENTAL

AMBIENT TEMPERATURES
Maximum operating range –40 to 85°C
Continuous operating range –40 to 60°C*

Note:
*Based on IEC 60068-2-1 and IEC 60068-2-2, Variant Bd and Ad for 16 hrs. The UR can operate up to a surrounding
ambient of 85°C, however operating outside the recommended continuous temperature range for extended periods can
result in MTBF degradation.

Note:
LCD contrast and performance will degrade below -20C. Contrast and performance will return to normal once temperature
returns above -20C.

Ideal Storage Temperature Range 15ºC to 27ºC

HUMIDITY
Operating up to 95% (non-condensing) at 55°C (as per IEC 60068-2-30 variant 1, 6
Humidity
days)
Ideal Storage Humidity Range 30% to 60%
Relative Humidity (RH) Air Quality Proper ventilation is recommended

OTHER
Altitude 2000 m (maximum)
Pollution degree II
Overvoltage category II
IP20 front, IP10 back (basic front panel and Rev. 1 enhanced front panel)
Ingress protection IP40 front, IP10 back (Rev. 2 enhanced front panel)
IP54 front with IP54 mounting collar accessory (Rev. 2 enhanced front panel)
Ingress protection with IP20 cover
IP20 back
accessory
Noise 0 dB

N60-1601-0125-861-1 52
Chapter 3 - Specifications

3.14 TYPE TESTS

Test Reference standard Test level

Dielectric voltage withstand EN 60255-5* 2.2 kV
Impulse voltage withstand EN 60255-51* 5 kV
Damped oscillatory IEC 61000-4-18 / IEC 60255-22-1 2.5 kV CM, 1 kV DM
Electrostatic discharge EN 61000-4-2 / IEC 60255-22-2 Level 3
RF immunity EN 61000-4-3 / IEC 60255-22-3 Level 3
Fast transient disturbance EN 61000-4-4 / IEC 60255-22-4 Class A and B
Surge immunity EN 61000-4-5 / IEC 60255-22-5 Level 3 and 4
Conducted RF immunity EN 61000-4-6 / IEC 60255-22-6 Level 3
Power frequency immunity EN 61000-4-7* / IEC 60255-22-7 Class A and B
Voltage interruption and ripple DC IEC 60255-11 12% ripple, 200 ms interrupts
Radiated and conducted emissions CISPR11 / CISPR22 / IEC 60255-25 Class A
Sinusoidal vibration IEC 60255-21-1 Class 1
Shock and bump IEC 60255-21-2 Class 1
Seismic IEC 60255-21-3 Class 1
Power magnetic immunity IEC 61000-4-8 Level 5
Pulse magnetic immunity IEC 61000-4-9 Level 4
Damped magnetic immunity IEC 61000-4-10 Level 4
Voltage dip and interruption IEC 61000-4-11 0, 40, 70, 80% dips; 250 / 300 cycle interrupts
Damped oscillatory IEC 61000-4-12* 2.5 kV CM, 1 kV DM
Conducted RF immunity, 0 to 150 kHz IEC 61000-4-16 Level 4
Voltage ripple IEC 61000-4-17 15% ripple
Ingress protection IEC 60529* IP20 front, IP10 back
Cold IEC 60068-2-1 –40°C for 16 hours
Hot IEC 60068-2-2 85°C for 16 hours
Humidity IEC 60068-2-30 6 days, variant 1
Damped oscillatory IEEE/ANSI C37.90.1 2.5 kV, 1 MHz
RF immunity IEEE/ANSI C37.90.2 20 V/m, 80 MHz to 1 GHz
e83849 NKCR
Section 43 - Temperature test
Safety UL 508 Energization of Contact Inputs and/or Contact
Outputs for continuous duty is not to exceed a
total of 31 W of power
Safety UL C22.2-14 e83849 NKCR7
Safety UL 1053 e83849 NKCR
Insulation: class 1, Pollution degree: 2, Over
Safety IEC 60255-27
voltage cat II
*Not tested by third party

N60-1601-0125-861-1 53
Chapter 3 - Specifications

3.15 PRODUCTION TESTS

OPTIONS
Products go through an environmental test based upon an Accepted
Thermal
Quality Level (AQL) sampling process.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 54
Chapter 3 - Specifications

3.16 APPROVALS

Compliance Applicable council directive According to

Low voltage directive EN 60255-5
CE EN 60255-26 / EN 50263
EMC directive
EN 61000-6-5

UL 508

C-UL-US --- UL 1053

C22.2 No. 14

N60-1601-0125-861-1 55
Chapter 3 - Specifications

3.17 MAINTENANCE
MOUNTING
Attach mounting brackets using 20 inch-pounds (±2 inch-pounds) of torque.

CLEANING
Normally, cleaning is not required. When dust has accumulated on the front panel display, wipe with a dry cloth.

Note:
To avoid deterioration of electrolytic capacitors, power up units that are stored in a de-energized state once per year, for one
hour continuously

N60-1601-0125-861-1 56
 CHAPTER 4

INSTALLATION
Chapter 4 - Installation

4.1 CHAPTER OVERVIEW

This chapter contains the following sections:

Chapter Overview 58
Unpack and inspect 59
Panel cutouts 60
Rear terminal layout 69
Wiring 72
Inter-relay communications 99
Activate relay 117
Software installation 118
Add device to software 120
Connect to the relay 128
Set up CyberSentry and change default password 131
Import settings 132
Connect to substation gateway 137

N60-1601-0125-861-1 58
Chapter 4 - Installation

4.2 UNPACK AND INSPECT

1. Open the package and check that the following items have been delivered along with the device itself:
a. Mounting screws
b. Certificate of Calibration
c. Test Report
d. EC Declaration of Conformity
e. Front panel label package
2. Inspect the device for physical damage.
3. View the rear nameplate and verify that the correct model has been delivered. The model order code is at the
top right of the nameplate.
4. For any issues, contact GE as outlined in the For Further Assistance section in chapter 1.
Instruction manuals and software are not normally delivered with the device. You will need to download all relevant
documentation and software from the GE website, unless you have specifically ordered printed copies of the
documentation. You will need the following:
● GE EnerVista™ software and documentation
● Instruction Manual
● UR Family Communications Guide

Note:
The instruction manual outlines how to install, configure, and use the unit.

Note:
The communications guide is for advanced use with communication protocols.

Note:
The warranty is included at the end of this instruction manual and on the GE website.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 59
Chapter 4 - Installation

4.3 PANEL CUTOUTS

This section does not apply to the HardFiber products. Please see the dedicated instruction manual for further
information.
Install the relay in an indoor environment within the environmental specifications. The relay complies with Pollution
Category II, which means installation in an office, laboratory, or testing environment.

4.3.1 HORIZONTAL UNITS

The product is available as a 19-inch rack horizontal mount unit with a removable front panel. The front panel is
specified as enhanced, basic, or graphical at the time of ordering. The enhanced and graphical front panels have
additional user-programmable pushbuttons and LED indicators, while the basic front panel has additional user-
programmable pushbuttons.
The modular design allows the relay to be upgraded and repaired by qualified service personnel. The front panel is
hinged to allow access to the modules. The front panel is itself removable to allow mounting on doors with limited
rear depth and for upgrading.
The enhanced horizontal front panel is also referred to as the IP54 Front Panel or Enhanced Front Panel Rev. 2.
This panel uses a screw instead of a knob to close the panel. It conforms to an IP54 rating with the IP54 mounting
collar purchased separately. The IP54 mounting collar can be used in panel-mount installations, not 19-inch rack-
mount installations. The IP54 mounting collar cannot be used with Rev. 1 enhanced front panels.
The case dimensions are shown in the following figures, along with panel cutout details for panel mounting. When
planning the location of your panel cutout, ensure that provision is made for the front panel to swing open without
interference to or from adjacent equipment.
Mount the relay such that the front panel sits semi-flush with the panel or switchgear door, allowing the operator
access to the keypad and the front communications port.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 60
Chapter 4 - Installation

✂✠ ☎✆
✝✡✁✌✟✍ ☛☛☞
✌✂☎✍✁✆
✝✡✞☎✟✠✄ ☛☛☞

✁✂✄☎✆
✝✞✞☎✟✠✡ ☛☛☞

✁✂✞☎✠✆
✝ ✍✌✟✞✍ ☛☛☞
☎✂✌✌✄✆ ☎✂✌☎✠✆
✝ ✁✁✟☎✁ ☛☛☞ ✝ ✁☎✟✁✍ ☛☛☞

✌✂✠✞✠✆
✝✞✍✎✟☎✡ ☛☛☞ ✏✑✒✏✓✔✕✖✗✘✙✚

Figure 3: Horizontal dimensions (Rev. 1 enhanced front panel)

✂✁ ☛✞☎
✆✍☞✁ ✌✄ ✟✠✡ ✝✌✁✂✞☎
✆✍✞✁☛ ✟✠✡

✝✞✁ ✄✂☎ ✆ ☞☞✁ ☛ ✟✠ ✡

✁✂✂✄☎ ✁✂ ☎
✆✝✞✁✞ ✞ ✟✠✡ ✆✝✞✁ ☛ ✟✠✡

✝☛✁✂✞☞☎ ✆☞☛✁✝✂☞ ✟✠✡

☛☞✍☞✂ ✎✝✁✟✏✑

Figure 4: Horizontal dimensions (Rev. 2 enhanced front panel)

N60-1601-0125-861-1 61
Chapter 4 - Installation

✁✂✄☎✆✝
✞✟✠✠✡✠✆ ☛☛☞
✆✂✖✁✆✝
✞☎✡ ☛☛☞
✜✢✗✣✤✢✗ ✗✘✙✂ ✚ ✟

☎✂ ✄✝ ✟✂✆✆✆✝
✞ ✁ ✂ ☛☛☞ ✞ ✆ ✡✠✆ ☛☛☞

☎✂☎✛✆✝
✞✟✛✆✡✁✛ ☛☛☞ ✌✍✎✌✏✌✑✎✒✓✔✕

Figure 5: Horizontal mounting (enhanced and graphical front panels)

✘✙✚✛✜✙✢✣✤✥ ✣✙✬ ✧✛★✩ ✏☛☞✎ ✑✚✮✖ ✚★✭✙✣★ ✭✙✮✢✣✛✢✯

✧✛★✩ ✦✚✙✭ ✚★✤✚ ✙✦ ✬✤✢★✥

✸★✜★✥ ✙✮✣✥✛✢★
✒✱✍✌☛✪✔✎ ❍
❉ ●
✏✫✌☞✔✓ ✕✕✖ ❈
❇ ●
❅❆ ❍
❄ ❅❈ ❉ ●
✒✌☞✗✎ ☛✍✌☞✍✎ ❊❋ ❈ ●
❇
✏✓✓✗✌✒ ✕✕✖ ✏✓✗✔✌✒ ✕✕✖ ❅P ❅❙
◗ ❇
❊❖
☞✌✒✍✎
❍ ✔✌☞✔✍✎
✏✓✑✒✌☞ ✕✕✖ ❉ ●
❈
❇ ● ❍ ✏☛✗✔✌✒ ✕✕✖
❅❆ ❅❈ ❉ ●
❄
❊❋ ❈
P
●
❇❅ ❅❈
❖ ◗
❘
❊◗

✄✞■✂✝❏
✸✷✴✹✺✵✶✻ ✷✵✼✽✻✳✶✳✽✾✵✲ ❑▲✞✝ ▼▼◆
☛✗✌✪✓✎
✿✽✷ ✻❀✳✶✹❁❂✵✴✷ ✕✽❃✾✶✳✾❂ ✝✞✄✄✄❏ ✍✌✫✗✪✎
✏✑✑✪✌✍ ✕✕✖
❑❵✁✂✞✄ ▼▼◆
❚❯❱❲❳❨ ✏☞✌✪ ✕✕✖
❩❲❬❭❯❪ ❫❫❴
☛✑✌✪✓✍✎
✏✫✔✒✌✒ ✕✕✖
☛✗✌✗✓✍✎
✘✙✚✛✜✙✢✣✤✥ ✬✤✢★✥ ✭✙✮✢✣✛✢✯
✏✑✪✍✌☛ ✕✕✖
✑✱✍✌✓✒✎
☛✒✌✫✗✎ ✏✗✌☛ ✕✕
✏✑✔✔✌✔ ✕✕✖ ✲✳✴✕✵✶✵✷✖
✘✙✚✛✜✙✢✣✤✥ ✦✚✙✢✣ ✧✛★✩

✰✮✣✙✮✣
✗✌☛✫✎ ✑✌✍✍✎
✗✌✍✍✎
✏☛✒☛✌☛ ✕✕✖ ✏☛✍☛✌✔ ✕✕✖
✏☛✗✗✌✒ ✕✕✖

☛✗✌✗✪✎ ☛☞✌✍✍✎
✏✑✪✍✌✒ ✕✕✖ ✏✑✒✓✌✔ ✕✕✖
✁✂✂✄☎✆✝✞✟✠✡

Figure 6: Horizontal dimensions and mounting (basic front panel)

N60-1601-0125-861-1 62
Chapter 4 - Installation

✝✝✁✎✂✛☎
✆✌☛✝✟✞ ✠✠✡

✂✁ ☛✞ ☞
✆✌✍ ✟✎✄ ✠✠✡

✁✂✂✄☎ ✁✂ ✎☎
✆✝✞✞✟ ✞ ✠✠✡ ✆✝✞ ✟✞☛ ✠✠✡

✝☛✁✂✞✍☎
✆✍☛✝✟✂✍ ✠✠✡
✏✑✒✓✔✔✕✖✗✘✙✚
Figure 7: Horizontal dimensions (graphical front panel)

N60-1601-0125-861-1 63
Chapter 4 - Installation

✪✘✫✗✙✚✗✧ ✑✓✗✕✒

✞✁✂☎ ✆✂✁✂ ✟✠✡

✞✍✁☛☛☎ ✆✄☛✁✍✄ ✟✠✡

✏ ☛✁✝☛☛
✍ ✑✒✓✔✕✖

✁✂✄☎
✆✝✞✁✞ ✟✠✡

✎✁✍✌☎
✆✞☞✁✄✂ ✟✠✡

✝☛✁✞☞☎ ✆✌✞✁✝ ✟✠✡

✚✑✌✄ ✔✘✒✒✓✜

✗✘✙✕✖
✞✁ ✚✗✖✑✕✔✙ ✙✛✕ ✔✘✒✒✓✜ ✢✕✣✘✜✕ ✚✗✖✙✓✒✒✓✙✚✘✗✤ ✥✕✜✚✣✦ ✧✓✖★✕✙ ✚✖ ✓✩✛✕✜✕✩ ✙✘ ✙✛✕ ✪✕✙✓✒ ✘✗ ✓✒✒ ✖✚✩✕✖
✝✁ ✪✓★✕ ✖✫✜✕ ✙✛✕ ✜✕✒✓✦ ✚✖ ✑✘✖✚✙✚✘✗✕✩ ✔✕✗✙✕✜ ✙✘ ✙✛✕ ✔✫✙ ✘✫✙
✂✁ ✚✗✖✙✓✒✒ ✚✑✬✌✄ ✔✘✒✒✓✜✤ ✔✘✗✣✚✜✪ ✙✛✕ ✧✓✖★✕✙ ✑✜✘✑✕✜✒✦ ✪✓✙✕✖ ✭✚✙✛ ✙✛✕ ✑✓✗✕✒ ✘✗ ✓✒✒ ✖✚✩✕✖
✖✕✔✫✜✕ ✫✖✚✗✧ ✮ ✬✂✝ ✛✕✯ ✗✫✙ ✓✙ ✍ ✑✒✓✔✕✖✁ ✄✝✄☞✎✓✞✁✟✰✱

Figure 8: Horizontal dimensions (IP54 mounting collar)

4.3.2 VERTICAL UNITS

The relay is also available as a reduced size (¾) vertical mount unit, with a removable front panel. The front panel is
specified as enhanced or basic at the time of ordering. The enhanced front panel contains additional user-
programmable pushbuttons and LED indicators, while the basic front panel has additional user-programmable
pushbuttons.
The modular design allows the relay to be upgraded and repaired by qualified service personnel. The front panel is
hinged to allow easy access to the modules. The front panel is itself removable to allow mounting on doors with
limited rear depth and for upgrading.
The case dimensions are shown in the following figures, along with panel cutout details for panel mounting. When
planning the location of your panel cutout, ensure that provision is made for the front panel to swing open without
interference to or from adjacent equipment.
Mount the relay such that the front panel sits semi-flush with the panel or switchgear door, allowing the operator
access to the keypad and the communications port.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 64
Chapter 4 - Installation

✛✗✜✘✙✢✘✣ ✤✖✑✒✥✓✙ ✕✖✗✘✙ ✗✚ ✎✑✘✓✏

✁✂✄☎
✆✝✞✟✁✟ ✠✠✡

✕✖✗✘✙
✤✓✲✓✏

✝☛✁✟✟☎ ✝☞✁☛✌☎
✆☞✂✂✁✂ ✠✠✡
✆☞✄✝✁✟ ✠✠✡

✦✓✖✙✢✒✑✏ ✧✘★✑✘✒✓✩ ✳✢✩✓ ✦✢✓✪

✕✖✗✘✙ ✗✚ ✎✑✘✓✏
✦✓✖✙✢✒✑✏ ✧✘★✑✘✒✓✩ ✕✖✗✘✙ ✦✢✓✪ ✁✝✟☎
✆✝✄✟✁✍ ✠✠✡
✝✁☛☛☎ ✂✁✟✟☎
✆☞✞✁☞ ✠✠✡ ✆✝✟✝✁✌ ✠✠✡ ✟✁✍✟☎
✁✟✟☎ ✆☛✁✝ ✠✠✡
✆✝ ✁ ✠✠✡
✫✓✖✠✢✘✑✏ ✤✏✗✒✥✔

✝✂✁✟☞☎
✞✁☛✄☎ ✆☞☛✌✁✍ ✠✠✡ ✭✮✫✯✮✫
✆✍✂☞✁✂ ✠✠✡
✕✖✗✘✙ ✗✚ ✎✑✘✓✏
✰✓✚✓✖✓✘✒✓ ✗✘✏✱ ✝☞✁✌✌☎
✆☞✂ ✁✟ ✠✠✡

✝✁☞✄☎
✆☞☛✁✍ ✠✠✡
✛✗✜✘✙✢✘✣ ✤✖✑✒✥✓✙
✦✓✖✙✢✒✑✏ ✧✘★✑✘✒✓✩ ✫✗✬ ✦✢✓✪

✟✁✍✝☞☎ ✆☛✁✂✝ ✠✠✡

✂ ✎✏✑✒✓✔ ✦✓✖✙✢✒✑✏ ✧✘★✑✘✒✓✩ ✛✗✜✘✙✢✘✣ ✎✑✘✓✏
✴✵✶✴✷✸✹✺✻✼✽✾
Figure 9: Vertical dimensions and mounting (enhanced front panel)

N60-1601-0125-861-1 65
Chapter 4 - Installation

✍✎✏✑✒ ✏✓ ✄✂☞☞✆
✝ ✄✄✂✟ ✡✡☛ ✚✕✑✖✗
✔✕✑✖✗
✛✏✜✑✒✢✑✣ ✘✎✕✤✥✖✒

✍✎✏✑✒
✘✖✙✖✗

✁✂✄☎✆ ✁✂✠☞✆
✝✁✞✟✂✠ ✡✡☛ ✝✁✞☎✂✌ ✡✡☛

✷✸✹✺✻✼✽✾ ❄✻❅✸ ❂✻✸❃

✷✸✹✺✻✼✽✾ ✿✹❀❁✺ ❂✻✸❃

✄✂ ✁✦
✝ ✟ ✂ ✡✡☛
✂✟✠✆ ✞✂☞☞
✝✞✄✂☞ ✡✡☛ ✝ ☞ ✂✧☛
✂✠✄✦ ☞✂✞✧✦
✝✁✌✂✌ ✡✡☛ ✝ ✂✄ ✡✡☛

✚✕✑✖✗ ✶P✏◗✑ ✓✏✎

✎✖✓✖✎✖✑✤✖ ✏✑✗❘

✌✂☞☞✆
✝☎☎✟✂✧ ✡✡☛ ✛✏✜✑✒✢✑✣ ✘✎✕✤✥✖✒

✲ ✲
✭ ✱ ✭ ✱
✳✯ ✱ ✬✫ ✱
✯✪★ ✪✴✬ ✩✪★ ✰✪✫
✫ ✯
✮✩ ✮✩
❖✖✎✡✢✑✕✗ ✘✗✏✤✥✶
✄✂☞☞✆
✝ ✄✄✂✟ ✡✡☛

✷✸✹✺✻✼✽✾ ❙❀✺✺❀▲ ❂✻✸❃

☞✂☎ ✁✆ ✝✠✂✞ ✡✡☛✵

✞ ✔✗✕✤✖✶

❆❇❈❉❊❊❋❇●❍■❏ ✷✸✹✺✻✼✽✾ ❑✽❁✸✾ ▲❀▼❁✺✻❁◆

Figure 10: Vertical dimensions and mounting (basic front panel)

For side-mounting devices with the enhanced front panel, see the following documents:
● GEK-113180 — UR-Series UR-V Side-Mounting Front Panel Assembly Instructions
● GEK-113181 — Connecting a Remote UR-V Enhanced Front Panel to a Vertical UR Device Instruction Sheet
● GEK-113182 — Connecting a Remote UR-V Enhanced Front Panel to a Vertically-Mounted Horizontal UR
Device Instruction Sheet
For side-mounting devices with the basic front panel, use the following figures:

N60-1601-0125-861-1 66
Chapter 4 - Installation

✫
✆

✢ ✦

✄ ✡

☛
✦
☞

✦
✁

✖ ✒

✌
✁

✑ ✧

✝ ✄

✂
✌

✏ ✏

✙ ✝

✞
✢

✄
✦ ✩
✡

✄ ☞

✂ ✛
✤

✌
☞

✘ ✄
★

★
✏

★ ☎
✛

✘
✎ ★

✄
✎

✢
☞

✁
✂
✌

✄
☎

✌ ☞
☎

✁
☛
✄

✌
✠
✕

✄ ✑

✎ ✄ ✏

✏ ✆

✁
✣

✢
☛ ✒ ✝
☞
✂

★ ☎

✄ ✁
✒
✂

✘ ✖
✎ ✪

✢
☛ ✂

✆ ✍

☛
✝

✄
✔

☛ ☞

✂ ✎

☞ ✎ ✆

☛
✞

✦
✌
✄
☞

☎
☎

✂
✌

✎
✄ ☎ ☎ ☎

✄ ✄

✂
✁

✕ ✕
✎

✝ ✆

✄ ✄

✡
✂
✏

✣
✞

✎ ✎

✖
✁

✡
✢
✂

☞ ☞

✗ ✝ ☎

✂
✄

✠ ✆
☛ ✄
✛

✂ ✂
✄
✁

✌
✁

☛ ✣

✂
✑ ☛ ✔ ☛

☞
✛
✌
☞

✝
✣

☞ ✝ ✝
✏ ✖ ✁
✞ ✢ ✖

✚ ✍ ✁ ✔ ✎ ✔ ☞

✙ ☎

✘
✢ ✎

☎
☛

✝ ✎

☎
✝

✆ ✁

✁
☞

☎
✞

✪
✍

☞ ☎

✦
☞

☎
✄

✂
✠

✆
✑

✂
✄

✘ ✂
✪

✞
✆
☞ ✂

✆ ✡ ✎

✣
✧

☎
✪

☎ ✖

✄ ✆
✂

☛
✢

☞
✥ ✑

✦ ☎
✡ ✜

✁
✏

✄
✂
✄
✦

✁
☛

✒ ✝

✦
✄

✠ ✖

✖
✝

✧
✞

✆
✖

✦ ✁

✂
✁

✞ ✝

✛
✌

✘
✕ ✪ ✎

Figure 11: Vertical side-mounting installation (basic front panel)

N60-1601-0125-861-1 67
Chapter 4 - Installation

✎✝✎✎✟
✠✆✎✡✝☞☛

✑✝✞✞✟
✠✆✞✑✝✚☛

✓✧✗✛✘✙
✠✢✓✖✖✓✢✘★✘✣✙☛ ☞✝✌✞✟
✆✝✏✏✟
✠✍✆✝✡☛
✠☞✑✝✚☛
✕✔✧✘✖ ✙✛✜✩✧ ✪✜✣
✏✝✎✌✟ ✏✝✏✚✟ ✆✝✞✞✟ ✣✘✪✘✣✘✧✗✘ ✜✧✖✫
✠✆✍✝✞☛ ✠✆✝✏☛ ✠✞✞✝✡☛ ✠✬✓✘✩✘✒ ✪✣✜✢ ✪✣✜✧★☛

✥✦✥ ✥✦✥
✆✝✏✏✟
✂ ✠☞✑✝✚☛
✁
☎
✂✄
✁

✑✝☞✍✟
✠✆✞✞✝✌☛

✏✝✆✑✡✟ ✒✓✔✝ ✠✎ ✕✖✔✗✘✙☛

✠✚✝✏☛
✆✏✝✏✑✟
✠☞✑✑✝✞☛

✆☞✝☞✏✟
✠✞✏✡✝✡☛

✥✦✥ ✥✦✥

✏✝☞✆✞✟ ✒✓✔✝ ✠✑✝✚☛ ✭✮✯✰✱✯✲✯✳✴✵✶

✠✚ ✕✖✔✗✘✙☛
✙✘✘ ✛✜✖✘✙ ✢✔✣✤✘✒ ✥✦✥

Figure 12: Vertical side-mounting rear dimensions (basic front panel)

N60-1601-0125-861-1 68
Chapter 4 - Installation

4.4 REAR TERMINAL LAYOUT

The rear terminals depend on the order code. An example is shown here.

Figure 13: Example of rear panel layout

Warning:
Do not touch any rear terminals while the relay is energized, else death or serious
injury can result from electrical shock.

Note:
Small form-factor pluggable ports (SFPs) are pluggable transceivers. They transmit, receive, and convert electrical signals to
optical signals and vice-versa. Supplied with the device, they are inserted into the Ethernet ports on the CPU and/or Process
Bus modules. A photo in the Maintenance chapter shows this plug-in device. Do not use non-validated transceivers or install
validated transceivers in the wrong Ethernet slot, else damage can occur.

Note:
When using a copper SFP with a Process Bus Module, always use Shielded Twisted Pair Ethernet Cable. We ecommend
limiting the length of the cable to three meters (9.8 feet) and confining it within one bay/cubicle.

Note:
When using a Process Bus Module, to view if the SFP is 100 Mbps or 1 Gbps, enter the IP address of the device in a web
browser and access Process Card Menu > Process Card SFP Information.

Terminal number assignments are three characters long and assigned by module slot position, row number, and
column letter. Two-slot wide modules take their slot designation from the first slot position (nearest to CPU module),
indicated by an arrow on the terminal block. The figure shows an example of rear terminal assignments.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 69
Chapter 4 - Installation

✁ ✂ ✄ ✞✟✠✡ ☛✠☞✌✡✌✠✍

✝ ✆ ☎ ✝ ✆ ☎ ✎✠✟✏✑✍ ✟✒✡✡✒✓
✼✠✓✽✏✒ ✿ ✌✍❁❂❃☛✠✏✍❄☞

✔ ✻✰✹ ✻✰✺ ✻✰✱ ✯✰✹ ✯✰✺ ✯✰✱ ✔ ✜✠✢ ✍✏✑✣✒✓

✼✠✓✽✏✒ ✾✿ ❀✾ ✌✍❁❂❃☛✠✏✍❄☞
✕ ✻✲✹ ✻✲✺ ✻✲✱ ✯✲✹ ✯✲✺ ✯✲✱ ✕

✖ ✻✳✹ ✻✳✺ ✻✳✱ ✯✳✹ ✯✳✺ ✯✳✱ ✖

✗ ✻✴✹ ✻✴✺ ✻✴✱ ✯✴✹ ✯✴✺ ✯✴✱ ✗

✘ ✻✵✹ ✻✵✺ ✻✵✱ ✯✵✹ ✯✵✺ ✯✵✱ ✘

✙ ✻✶✹ ✻✶✺ ✻✶✱ ✯✶✹ ✯✶✺ ✯✶✱ ✙

✚ ✻✷✹ ✻✷✺ ✻✷✱ ✯✷✹ ✯✷✺ ✯✷✱ ✚

✛ ✻✸✹ ✻✸✺ ✻✸✱ ✯✸✹ ✯✸✺ ✯✸✱ ✛

✤✥✦✧★✩✪✦✫✬✭✮

Figure 14: Example of modules in F and H slots

The torque used to connect the screws that connect the terminal blocks (top screws a, b, c) and the metal plates
over empty slots to the chassis is 9 inch-pounds (1Nm). For the screws used to wire the terminal blocks (rows 1 to
8), use 19±1 inchpounds (2.1±0.1 Nm).
The CPU module type depends on order code. During manufacturing, the power supply and CPU modules are
installed in slots B and D of the chassis with 13 inch-pounds (1.47 Nm) of torque on the screws at the top and
bottom of the modules. Wire connections to these two modules at 13 inch-pounds (1.47 Nm).

Figure 15: CPU modules and power supply

The following figure shows the optical connectors for CPU modules.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 70
Chapter 4 - Installation

Figure 16: LC fiber connector (left) and ST fiber connector (right)

Speeds for the LC connections on non-HardFiber Process Bus Modules are as follows:
● Order code 85 — 1000Base-SX ports 1a and 1b, or ports 3a and 3b
● Order code 86 — 1000Base-SX ports 1a, 1b, 3a, 3b; 100Base-FX ports 2a, 2b, 4a, 4b
● Order code 87 — 100Base-FX ports 1a, 1b, 2a, 2b, 3a, 3b, 4a, 4b

N60-1601-0125-861-1 71
Chapter 4 - Installation

4.5 WIRING

4.5.1 TYPICAL WIRING

For Sampled Value (SV) applications using a Process Bus Module (order code 85, 86, 87) with IRIG-B for
synchronization, follow the recommended cables and grounding connections outlined here and later.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 72
Chapter 4 - Installation
r❧ ❞❡
♥♥ ❢❣
❞❡❢❣❤✐❥ ❤❦❧♠❣♥♦♣✐❞❣❦❧ ❥♣ ❤✐
④⑤✈✇q✇⑩s ❶tqq✈ ❣❦ ❤ ❥
qrs t✉ ✈✇①②t③ ④tqr ✇✈ ✉⑤②⑥✇①⑦⑧t⑨③s ❧♠ q♣
❥♥
❞♦
✵✶ö ✰✧✲ ü âãä ❦♦
❡♣ ❛❸ ❝
✡ ✯✮ âãæ
✵✶ô
ý
✰✧ âãç
ü âåä
✵✶ë ✰✧✳ ✯ù âåæ ❞❡
ý ❢❣
✵✸ö ✰★✲ âåç ❤✐
ü âìä ❥
✵✸ô ✯ú âìæ ❦❧
✰★ ý ❛❸ ❜ ♠❥
✾ ✝✁ âìç ♥❞
✵✸ë ✰★✳ ÿ ü âèä ♦❦
✜✝
✢ÿ ✯û âèæ ♦❡
♣
✵✹ö ✰✩✲ ✜ ý
éêë
✵✹ô ✰✩ ✷❃❈✺❇✷✺ ✼❈✯✸✺ ✯í★ éóö
✷❃❈✺❇✷✺ ✼❈✯✸✺ ✯íï â÷ç
✴ìç ✰✩✳ ✷❃❈✺❇✷✺ ✼❈✯✸✺ ✯✻★ âñä
✴èä ✰✱✲ ✷❃❈✺❇✷✺ ✼❈✯✸✺ ✯✻ï âñç
✁✞✝ ✷❃❂❂❃❈ ✯íð éóô
✴èæ ✆✁
✰✱ ✁✞✝ ✝✠ ✷❃❈✺❇✷✺ ✼❈✯✸✺ ✯î★ éõö
✴èç ✰✱✳ ✆☎ ✞✟✁ ✷❃❈✺❇✷✺ ✼❈✯✸✺ ✯îï âøç
✁ÿ ✮✟
✻ ✝✆ ✷❃❈✺❇✷✺ ✼❈✯✸✺ ✯✹★ âòä
✵óö ✰✧✲ ✣✢☎ ✺✮ ÿ☎✄ ✷❃❈✺❇✷✺ ✼❈✯✸✺ ✯✹ï âòç
✢✝ ✂ÿ✁ ✷❃❂❂❃❈ ✯îð éõô
✵óô ✰✧ ✜ ÿþ ✱✸✦❉❆ âòæ
✵óë ✰✧✳
✵✷ö ✰★✲
✵✷ô ✰★
✿ ✵✷ë ✰★✳ ✝✁
✝ÿ ✡☛☞
✵õö ✰✩✲ ✢✜ÿ ✌✍✎✏✑✒✓ ✔✎✕✖✗✘✗✎✙ ✕✌✚ ✔✙✌✛✜✒✑✢✜✕✔✑✒
✜
✵õô ✰✩ ✣✍✕✔✤✒✍✣✍✌✎ ✔✙✔✎✍✣ ü ☛ãä
✡ ✌✮ ☛ãæ
✴øç ✰✩✳ ý
☛ãç
ü ☛åä
✴òä ✰✱✲ ✌ù ☛åæ
ý
✴òæ ✰✱ ☛åç
ü ☛ìä
✴òç ✰✱✳ ✌ú ☛ìæ
ý ☛ìç
✽✶ö ✰✧✲ ü ☛èä
✽✶ô ✰✧ ✌û ý ☛èæ
☞êë
✽✶ë ✰✧✳ ✷❃❈✺❇✷✺ ✼❈✯✸✺ ✌í★ ☞óö
✷❃❈✺❇✷✺ ✼❈✯✸✺ ✌íï ☛÷ç ➄➅➆ ➇➈➉➊➋➌➍➎
✽✸ö ✰★✲ ✷❃❈✺❇✷✺ ✼❈✯✸✺ ✌✻★ ☛ñä ➏ ➏ ➣
✽✸ô ✰★
✷❃❈✺❇✷✺ ✼❈✯✸✺ ✌✻ï ☛ñç ➌➐➑ ↕ ↕ ↔ ➎➐➑
✁✞✝ ✷❃❂❂❃❈ ✌íð ☞óô
❀ ✝✁ ✁✆✝
➎➐➑ ↔ ↔ ↕ ➌➐➑
✽✸ë ✰★✳
✝ÿ ✠✟
✷❃❈✺❇✷✺ ✼❈✯✸✺ ✌î★ ☞õö ➝ ➝ ↕➙
✽✹ö ✰✩✲ ✢✜ÿ ✞✁ ✷❃❈✺❇✷✺ ✼❈✯✸✺ ✌îï ☛øç ➒➓➔→ ➞ ➞ ➛ ➒➓➔→
✜ ✷❃❈✺❇✷✺ ✼❈✯✸✺ ✌✹★ ☛òä ➜ ➜ ➜
✆✝☎
✽✹ô ✰✩ ÿ✄ ✷❃❈✺❇✷✺ ✼❈✯✸✺ ✌✹ï ☛òç ➛ ➛ ➝
✂ÿ✁ ✷❃❂❂❃❈ ✌îð ☞õô ➣ ➣ ➞
✼ìç ✰✩✳ ÿþ ➭ ➭ ↕↕
✱✸✦❉❆ ☛òæ
✼èä ✰✱✲
➩ ➊➫➄ ➟➠ ➡➢➔
✼èæ ➇➈➄➄➍➇➌➈➎ ➤➥➔➔➦➤➧➥➨
✰✱ ✁✞✝
✼èç ✰✱✳ ✆☎ ✻
✁ÿ ✟✮ ➯➲➳➵➸➵
✽óö ✰✧✲ ✣✢☎ ✺✮ ➶➹➳➘
✢✝ ➺➻➼➽➾➚➪
✽óô ✰✧ ✜
ü ✍ãä
✽óë ✰✧✳ ✡ ✏✮ ✍ãæ
ý
✽✷ö ✰★✲ ✍ãç
ü ✍åä
✽✷ô ✰★ ✏ù ý ✍åæ
❁ ✝✁ ✍åç
✽✷ë ✰★✳ ÿ ü ✍ìä
✜✝
✢ÿ ✏ú ✍ìæ
✽õö ✰✩✲ ✜ ý ✍ìç
✽õô ✰✩ ü ✍èä
✏û ý ✍èæ
✼øç ✰✩✳ ✎êë
✼òä ✰✱✲ ✷❃❈✺❇✷✺ ✼❈✯✸✺ ✏í★ ✎óö
✷❃❈✺❇✷✺ ✼❈✯✸✺ ✏íï ✍÷ç
✼òæ ✰✱ ✷❃❈✺❇✷✺ ✼❈✯✸✺ ✏✻★ ✍ñä
✞✁
✷❃❈✺❇✷✺ ✼❈✯✸✺ ✏✻ï ✍ñç
✼òç ✰✱✳ ✷❃❂❂❃❈ ✏íð ✎óô
✝✆
✑✒✕ ✰✧✲ ✝✁✠ ✷❃❈✺❇✷✺ ✼❈✯✸✺ ✏î★ ✎õö
✟✞ ✷❃❈✺❇✷✺ ✼❈✯✸✺ ✏îï ✍øç
✑✒✪ ✰✧ ✁✝ ✷❃❈✺❇✷✺ ✼❈✯✸✺ ✏✹★ ✍òä
☎✆ÿ ✷❃❈✺❇✷✺ ✼❈✯✸✺ ✏✹ï ✍òç
➃➂
➁➀
✑✒✓ ✰✧✳ ✄✂
ÿ✁ ✷❃❂❂❃❈ ✏îð ✎õô ❿
✑✫✕ ✰★✲ þÿ ✱✸✦❉❆ ✍òæ ❽❾❼
✑✫✪ ✰★ ✁✞✝
✝ ✆☎ Ô ❲❵❴❩❴❲❬❛ ÖÙÚ
❂ ✖✥✘ ✰★✳ ✁ ÖÙØ
✝ÿ ✁ÿ ➴❬❴❛➷❵❝
ÖàÚ
✑✬✕ ✰✩✲ ✢✜ÿ ✣✢☎ ❻❸
✜ ✢ ➬➮ ➱ ✃❲ Ö×Ø
✑✬✪ ✰✩ ✜✝ ÒÓ❐ ❳➷❩❜➷❩ Ö×Ú
❐Ñ ❪❴ ÖáÚ
✖✗✘ ✰✩✳ ÐÏ ❲❳❨❩❵❳❛ ❛❳ ÛÞß ❷❸ ❹❺ ❻❸
✟✮ ❰ ❜❳❫❝❵
ÛÞÝ
✑✔✕ ✰✱✲ ✮✯ ❒❮❐ ❭➷❵Õ❝ ÛÜÝ
✑✔✪ ✰✱ ➴❴❛❩❝❵ ÛÜß
✑✔✓ ✰✱✳
➧ ➝➙➋➞ ➟ ➳➵➽ ➟➨➨➎➩➫➭➯➲ ❐ ➹➘➴❺➷
✖✙✚ ➺➻➾ ➬➮➱➘✃
✒✓✔✕ ✦✧
➝➙➋➞ ➜ ➳➵➸ ➟➨➨➎➩➫➭➯➲
✖✙✘ ✦✧ ✞✁ ➺➻➼
✖✗✘✓✙✚ ✛✔✘✜✢✣✛✘✙ ✜✛✙✤
✦★ ✝ ✝✆ ➝➙➋➞ ✑ ➳➵✎ ➟➨➨➎➩➫➭➯➲ ÛÜÙ×ÝÑ×Ñ
✖✤✚ ÿ✁ ÿ☎ ➺➻✏ ÓÞÙßÓ×Ñ àÒÙ❮ß ❒❮❰ÏÐÑ ÒÓ
✜✢✝ ✣ ➃➄➅
ÔÕ
Ö×ØÙÚ×
✖✤✘ ✦★ ✜ÿ ✂✁✄ ➋➔→➣↔ ➃➆➅
✭✠ ↕➙➛ ➜
✖✛✚ ✦✩ ➠➡➢ ➃➉➅
➃➇➈
✖✛✘ ✦✩ ➊➋➊➌➍➎ ➃➇➅
❲❳❨❩❬❲❩❭ ❭❪❳❫❨ ➏➐➑➒➓
✉①t ⑦✈④ ✑⑧✕ ✦⑨ ❫❴❩❪ ❨❳ ➦➥ ➚➪➶ á❰âÒãÙÒÝ
✈s✇ ⑥①
✉ ⑤✈ ❲❳❨❩❵❳❛ ❜❳❫❝❵ ➤
t✉s ②③④ ✑⑧✓ ✦⑨

✁✂✂✄☎✆✁✝✞✟✠
❂❃❄✸❅❆ ❇✦✦❇❈❉❆❂❆❈✺ P◗❘❙❚❯❱ P❙❱❲ ❳❯
❍ ❏ ▲ ❋ ❖ ❙ ❱ ❚ ◗ ● ■ ❑ ❊ ◆ ❘ ❯ P ▼ ❇❋● ❍■❏❑❃ ❨❩◗❙❬❘❯❘ ❭❪
✻ ✹ ✻ ✹ ▲▼◆▼▲❖▲ ❃❄❅❆❇❈ ❉❆❊ ❲❯❩P❭❬❫❚ ❭❱
✻ ✹ ✶ ✮ ❴❩◗❵❭❘❯❘
✖✙✚ ✦✧ ✼✽✳✲✾✿❀ ✷✺❀❁✺ ✼✽✳✲✾✿❀ ✷✺ ✼✽✳✲✾✿❀ ✷✺ ✷✯✸ ✯✰✬✧✩
➀❿ ❼ ✰✲✾✳✲✾✿ ✰✲✾✳✲✾✿ ✰✲✾✳✲✾✿ ✱✲✳✳✴✵
❾❼ ❸⑩➂ ✖✙✘ ✦✧ ✞✁
❽ ❻ ✝✆
❼ ✥✦✧★✩ ✪✫✧✬✭ äåæç èæéêëéì æç íéçîè ïð ñåî òïóóïôæðê ïëèîë õïèîö
❺❻❷ ❿❷❸ ❾ ✖✤✚ ✦★ ÿ☎ ÷øùúûùùúüýüúþÿüúüø ú✁ÿüú✂ø ú✄ÿþú☎ø
❹ ❸ ✣
❷❸❶ ⑩❿❻ ✖✤✘ ✦★ ✁✂✄ äåæç èæéêëéì ✆ëï✝æèîç éð î✞éì✆óî ïò åïô ñåî èî✝æõî
⑩ ➁ ❿ ✦✩ ✭✠ æç ôæëîè✟ ðïñ ç✆îõæòæõéóó✠ åïô ñï ôæëî ñåî èî✝æõî✡ ☛óîéçî
✖✛✚
ëîòîë ñï ñåî ☞ðçñë✌õñæïð ✍éð✌éó òïë éèèæñæïðéó èîñéæóç ïð
✖✛✘ ✦✩ ôæëæðê íéçîè ïð ✝éëæï✌ç õïðòæê✌ëéñæïðç✡

Figure 17: Typical wiring diagram (T module shown for CPU)

4.5.2 DIELECTRIC STRENGTH

Dielectric strength is the maximum electric strength that can be sustained without breakdown. It is measured in
volts.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 73
Chapter 4 - Installation

The table shows the dielectric strength of the UR-series module hardware.

Dielectric strength of UR modules

Module type Module function Terminals Dielectric strength
From To
1 Power supply High (+); Low (+); (–) Chassis 2000 V AC for 1 minute
1 Power supply 48 V DC (+) and (–) Chassis 2000 V AC for 1 minute
Relay terminals except
1 Power supply Chassis 2000 V AC for 1 minute
terminals 8a and 8b
2 Reserved N/A N/A N/A
3 Reserved N/A N/A N/A
4 Digital contact inputs/outputs All Chassis 2000 V AC for 1 minute
5 Analog inputs/outputs All except 8b Chassis < 50 V DC
6 Digital contact inputs/outputs All Chassis 2000 V AC for 1 minute
G.703 All except 2b, 3a, 7b, 8a Chassis 2000 V AC for 1 minute
7
RS422 All except 6a, 7b, 8a Chassis < 50 V DC
8 CT/VT All Chassis 2000 V AC for 1 minute
9 CPU All Chassis 2000 V AC for 1 minute

Note:
Filter networks and transient protection clamps are used in the hardware to prevent damage caused by high peak voltage
transients, radio frequency interference (RFI), and electromagnetic interference (EMI). These protective components can be
damaged by application of the ANSI/IEEE C37.90 specified test voltage for longer than the specified minute.

4.5.3 CONTROL POWER

Power supplied to the relay must be connected to the matching power supply range of the relay. If incorrect voltage
is applied or voltage is applied to the wrong terminals, damage can occur.
The device contains electrolytic capacitors. These capacitors are well-known to deteriorate over time if voltage is
not applied periodically. Deterioration can be avoided by powering up the relay at least once a year.
The power supply module is ordered with one of two possible voltage ranges, and the device can be ordered with or
without a redundant power supply module option. Each range has a dedicated input connection for proper
operation. The ranges are as follows:
● Low (LO) range — 24 to 48 V (DC only) nominal
● High (HI) range — 125 to 250 V nominal
The power supply module provides power to the relay and supplies power for dry contact input connections.
The SL and SH power supply modules also provide an auxiliary 48 V DC power for dry contact input connections
and a critical failure relay. The critical failure relay is a form-C device that is energized once control power is applied
and the relay has successfully booted up with no critical self-test failures. If ongoing self-test diagnostic checks
detect a critical failure (see the Self-Test Errors section) or control power is lost, the relay de-energizes.

Note:
The TH and TL models do not have the auxiliary 48 V DC.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 74
Chapter 4 - Installation

Warning:
Connect all wires at the back of a UR before connecting to power, else death or
serious injury can result from electrical shock.

To connect power to the relay:

1. Locate the power supply module in the first slot, slot B, on the back of the device
2. Connect the three wires to the terminals, or connect two to the terminals and the third to the ground screw. 14
gauge stranded wire with disconnect devices is recommended. Use 13 inch-pounds torque.
3. Connect all wires to the relay before turning on power.
For high-reliability systems, the device has a redundant option in which two power supplies are placed in parallel on
the bus. If one of the power supplies becomes faulted, the second power supply assumes the full load of the relay
without any interruptions. Each power supply has a green LED on the front of the module to indicate that it is
functional. The critical fail relay of the module also indicates a faulted power supply.
An LED on the front of the control power module shows the status of the power supply, as outlined in the table.
LED indication Power supply
Continuous on OK
On/off cycling Failure
Off Failure or no power

127(
$&RU'& JDXJHVWUDQGHG
ZLUHZLWKVXLWDEOH
GLVFRQQHFWGHYLFHV
LVUHFRPPHQGHG
+HDY\FRSSHUFRQGXFWRU )XVHV
RUEUDLGHGZLUH

%E %D %D %E %E

 
¯ /2: +,*+
),/7(5 685*(
&21752/
32:(5
6ZLWFKJHDU 85
JURXQGEXV SURWHFWLRQV\VWHP

$&'5

Figure 18: Control power connection

4.5.4 NON-VOLATILE DATA STORAGE

Non-volatile data is temporary data required after a power cycle for relay state, such as latch status before reboot.
The relay saves this data in non-volatile storage every two minutes or when a state change occurs.
If a state change occurs just before a power down (less than two minutes) and the relay power is cycled, some
temporary data can be saved and the prior state is retained at power up. Otherwise, a two-minute powered on
period after a state change ensures that all temporary state changes required after reboot have been saved. A
command also is available to initiate saving of data in the compact flash memory using Commands > Relay
Maintenance > Save Volatile Data.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 75
Chapter 4 - Installation

4.5.5 CT/VT MODULES

Note:
Verify that the connection made to the relay terminals for nominal current of 1 A or 5 A matches the secondary rating of the
connected CTs. Unmatched CTs can result in equipment damage or inadequate protection.

The CT and VT inputs are analog current transformer and voltage transformer signals used to monitor AC power
lines. The UR-series of relays support 1 A and 5 A CTs. A CT/VT module can have current or voltage inputs on
channels 1 through 4 inclusive, or channels 5 through 8 inclusive. Channels 1, 2, 3 and 4 are intended for
connection to phase A, B, C and another quantity respectively. The same applies for channels 5, 6, 7 and 8.
Channels 4 and 8 are intended for connection to a single-phase source. For voltage inputs, these channels are
labeled as auxiliary voltage (VX). For current inputs, these channels are intended for connection to a CT between
system neutral and ground, and are labeled as ground current (IG).
Size 12 American Wire Gauge (AWG) is commonly used to connect to the module; the maximum size is 10 AWG.
CT/VT modules can be ordered with a standard ground current input that is the same as the phase current input.
Each AC current input has an isolating transformer and an automatic shorting mechanism that shorts the input
when the module is withdrawn from the chassis. There are no internal ground connections on the current inputs.
Current transformers with 1 to 50000 A primaries and 1 A or 5 A secondaries can be used.
For some UR models, CT/VT modules with a sensitive ground input are also available. The ground CT input of the
sensitive ground modules is 10 times more sensitive than the ground CT input of standard CT/VT modules.
However, the phase CT inputs and phase VT inputs are the same as those of regular CT/VT modules.
CT/VT modules have enhanced diagnostics, which can automatically detect hardware failure and take the relay out
of service. CT connections for both ABC and ACB phase rotations are identical, as shown in the Typical Wiring
Diagram.
The phase voltage channels are used for most metering and protection purposes. The auxiliary voltage channel is
used as input for the synchrocheck and volts-per-hertz features, which are optional features for some UR models.
When using a zero-sequence core balance CT to detect ground fault current, its placement is shown as follows. You
should use twisted-pair cabling on a zero-sequence CT.
✏✑✒✓✔✕✖✗✕✗ ✘✙✚✖✕ ✒✓✔✕✖✗✕✗ ✘✙✚✖✕
✁✂✄☎✆ ✝✂☎☎✞✝✟✠✂☎ ✟✂ ☎✞✄✟✁✡☛ ✸✟✁✞✌✌ ✝✂☎✞
✩✪✫✬✭✮ ☞✄✌✟ ✍✞ ✂☎ ✟✎✞ ✌✂✄✁✝✞ ✌✠✆✞ ✸✂✄✁✝✞ ✌✎✠✞☛✆✌
✤ ✥ ✦ ✧ ✤ ✥ ✦

✁✂✄☎✆
✂✄✟✌✠✆✞ ✦★

★✂ ✹✁✂✄☎✆✺
✛✜✢✣ ☞✄✌✟ ✍✞ ✂☎
☛✂✡✆ ✌✠✆✞
✛✜✢✣ ✯✯✰✰✱✲✳✰✴✵✶✷
Figure 19: Zero-sequence core balance CT installation

N60-1601-0125-861-1 76
Chapter 4 - Installation

✻✣✽ ✿ ✧☞

✻✣ ✿ ✧✲

✻✣✾ ✿ ✧✏

✻✤✽ ✿ ★☞

✻✣✽ ✡✧☞ ✻✤ ✿ ★✲

✻✣ ✡✧✲ ✻✤✾ ✿ ★✏

✻✣✾ ✡✧✏ ✻✥✽ ✿ ✩☞

✻✤✽ ✡★☞ ✻✥ ✿ ✩✲

✳ ✻✤ ✡★✲ ✻✥✾ ✿ ✩✏ ✢✣ ✡✧☞

✖ ✑
✴✴ ❀
✘
✯ ✻✤✾ ✡★✏ ✑✶ ✻✼✽ ✿ ✪☞ ✢✣ ✡✧✏
✑ ✫ ❁✶
✵✶ ✮✯ ✑
✑ ✰ ❂
✻✥✽ ✡✩☞ ✳ ✻✼ ✿ ✪✲ ✢✤ ✡★☞
✷ ✖
✫✙ ✬✶ ✖
✑✶ ✯
✕
✴✴
✸ ✻✥ ✡✩✲ ✘ ✻✼✾ ✿ ✪✏ ✢✤ ✡★✏
✯
✬✶ ✑
❃ ✫
✯ ✓ ✮✯
✕ ✰
✑ ✻✥✾ ✡✩✏ ✔ ✖ ✻✣✽ ✿ ☛☞ ✢✥ ✡✩☞
✹ ✕ ✫✙
✖
✓ ✗✘
✔ ✻✼✽ ✡✪☞ ✙ ✻✣ ✿ ☛✲ ✢✥ ✡✩✏
✕ ✚✑
✖ ✳ ✑
✗✘ ✒
✙ ✻✼ ✡✪✲ ✛✙ ✻✣✾ ✿ ☛✏ ✒ ✢✦ ✡✪☞
✚✺ ✜ ✓ ✔
✔ ✗✫
✳ ✕ ✬
✛ ✻✼✾ ✡✪✏ ✻✤✽ ✿ ✌☞ ✖ ✭ ✢✦ ✡✪✏
✙ ✗✘ ✘
✬ ✙ ✮✯
✯ ✚✑ ✰
✕ ✢✣ ✡☛☞ ✻✤ ✿ ✌✲ ✖ ✢✣ ✡☛☞
✺ ✒ ✫✙
✒ ✛
✛ ✙✜
✙ ✢✣ ✡☛✏ ✻✤✾ ✿ ✌✏ ✢✣ ✡☛✏
✜
✒ ✢✤ ✡✌☞ ✻✥✽ ✿ ✍☞ ✢✤ ✡✌☞
✔
✗✫
✬ ✱✡✌✏
✭ ✢✤ ✡✌✏ ✻✥ ✿ ✍✲ ✢✤
✘
✮✯
✰ ✢✥ ✡✍☞ ✻✥✾ ✿ ✍✏ ✢✥ ✡✍☞
✖
✫✙
✢✥ ✡✍✏ ✻✼✽ ✿ ✎☞ ✢✥ ✡✍✏

✢✦ ✡✎☞ ✻✼ ✿ ✎✲ ✢✦ ✡✎☞

✢✦ ✡✎✏ ✻✼✾ ✿ ✎✏ ✢✦ ✡✎✏

✁✂ ✄☎✆✂✝✞✟✠

Figure 20: CT/VT module wiring

Note:
The tilda sign (~) represents the slot position, because this will be different for different configurations.

4.5.6 PROCESS BUS MODULE FOR HARDFIBER

The relay can be ordered with a process bus interface module to interface with the HardFiber Process Bus System,
or HardFiber Brick, allowing bidirectional IEC 61850 fiber-optic communications with up to eight HardFiber Bricks.
The HardFiber system integrates seamlessly with the existing UR-series applications, including protection functions,
FlexLogic, metering, and communications.
This process bus system offers the following benefits:
● Reduces labor associated with design, installation, and testing of protection and control applications using the
UR by reducing the number of individual copper terminations
● Integrates seamlessly with existing UR applications, since the IEC 61850 process bus interface module
replaces the traditional CT/VT modules
● Communicates using open standard IEC 61850 messaging
For details on the HardFiber system, see its Instruction Manual.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 77
Chapter 4 - Installation

4.5.7 CONTACT INPUTS AND OUTPUTS

With the exception of the high density modules, which have 36 terminal connections, all contact input/output
modules have 24 terminal connections. The connections are arranged typically as three terminals per row, with
eight rows in total. A given row of three terminals can be used for the outputs of one relay. For example, for form-C
relay outputs, the terminals connect to the normally open (NO), normally closed (NC), and common contacts of the
relay. For a form-A output, there are options of using current or voltage detection for feature supervision, depending
on the module ordered. The terminal configuration for contact inputs is different for the two applications.
The contact inputs are grouped with a common return. The input/output modules have three versions of grouping:
four inputs per common return, five inputs per common return on a high-density module (6W and 6X), and two
inputs per common return. When a contact input/output module is ordered, four inputs per common is used. If the
inputs must be isolated per row, then two inputs per common return are selected (4D module). If the space limitation
in the relay requires use of a high density input module (6W), five inputs share one common return and the module
has six banks of inputs.
A high density I/O module (6Y) is available with two inputs sharing one common return. This module has six groups
of two inputs i.e., a total of twelve contact inputs.
This module also provides station battery DC voltage measurement through two contact inputs: Contact Input 9
(x13a) and Contact Input 11 (x16a). The measured DC voltage value is available as a Flex-Analog and as an Actual
Value. The positive terminal of the station battery should be connected directly to the Contact Input 9 or 11, and the
negative terminal should be connected to the common return.
A Single setting STATION BATTERY NOM VOLTAGE is provided for Contact Inputs 9 and 11 to convert the
measured DC voltage to pu values, for the use by the FlexElement. If the setting STATION BATTERY NOM
VOLTAGE is set to 0V then the station battery voltage measurement functionality is not available. In this case,
contact inputs 9 and 11 can be used as regular contact inputs with their ON and OFF operands evaluated based on
the setting Ips x13a,x15a,x16a,x18a THRESHOLD. For more detail see the Contact Inputs section in the Settings
Chapter.
The tables and diagrams that follow illustrate the module types and contact arrangements, which can be ordered for
the relay. Since an entire row is used for a single contact output, the name is assigned using the module slot
position and row number. However, since there are two contact inputs per row, these names are assigned by
module slot position, row number, and column position.
Some form-A / solid-state relay outputs include circuits to monitor the DC voltage across the output contact when it
is open, and the DC current through the output contact when it is closed. Each of the monitors contains a level
detector whose output is set to logic ON = 1 when the current in the circuit is above the threshold setting. The
voltage monitor is set to ON = 1 when there is a voltage across the open contact. The detector allows a current of
about 1 to 2.5 mA except for the 6Y module type outputs, which allow 2mA. The current monitor is set to ON = 1
when the current flowing through the closed contact exceeds about 80 to 100 mA. The voltage monitor is intended
to check the health of the overall trip circuit. The current monitor can be used to seal-in the output contact until an
external contact has interrupted current flow. If enabled, the current monitoring can be used as a seal-in signal to
ensure that the form-A contact does not attempt to break the energized inductive coil circuit and weld the output
contacts.
Block diagrams are shown as follows for form-A and solid-state relay outputs with optional voltage monitor, optional
current monitor, and with no monitoring. The actual values shown for contact output 1 are the same for all contact
outputs. With the exception of the 6Y module type, Form-A contact output with or without a current or voltage
monitoring option is not polarity sensitive. For the 6Y module type, polarity must be followed to properly monitor the
voltage.
The polarity shown in the figure is required for solid-state contact output connection.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 78
Chapter 4 - Installation

✆✝✂ ✆✝✂
☎ ☎

✆✝✞ ✆✝✞ ✁✂✄

✠ ✁✂✄ ✠
✆✝✟ ✔ ✆✝✟ ✔

✕✖ ✗✘✙✚✕✛✜ ✢✣✚✤ ✘✥✚✣✘✦✕✙

✗✘✙✚✕✛✜ ✪✘✦✣✚✘✩✣✦✛ ✘✦✙✫ ✬✘✚✤ ✭✘✙✚✕✛✜ ✕✦✮ ✧★✩✩✜✦✚ ✪✘✦✣✚✘✩✣✦✛
✧★✩✩✜✦✚ ✪✘✦✣✚✘✩✣✦✛

✆✝✂ ✆✝✂
✠ ✠

☎ ✆✝✞ ☎ ✆✝✞ ✁✂✄

✁✂✄
✆✝✟ ✔ ✆✝✟ ✔

✯✖ ✰★✩✩✜✦✚ ✢✣✚✤ ✘✥✚✣✘✦✕✙

✰★✩✩✜✦✚ ✪✘✦✣✚✘✩✣✦✛ ✘✦✙✫ ✬✘✚✤ ✭✘✙✚✕✛✜ ✕✦✮ ✧★✩✩✜✦✚ ✪✘✦✣✚✘✩✣✦✛
✭✘✙✚✕✛✜ ✪✘✦✣✚✘✩✣✦✛
✱✜✲✚✜✩✦✕✙ ✳★✪✥✜✩ ✕✴✯ ✣✵ ✩✜✶★✣✩✜✮✖

✆✝✂

✆✝✞

✁✂✄
✆✝✟ ✔
✧✖ ✷✘ ✪✘✦✣✚✘✩✣✦✛
✡☛☞✡✌☛✍✎✏✑✒✓

Figure 21: Form-A and solid-state contact outputs with voltage and current monitoring

13a 9

14a

16a 11

17a

827863A2

Figure 22: 6Y I/O module contact inputs and outputs

The operation of voltage and current monitors is reflected with the corresponding FlexLogic operands (CONT OP #
VON, CONT OP # VOFF, and CONT OP # ION) that can be used in protection, control, and alarm logic. The typical
application of the voltage monitor is breaker trip circuit integrity monitoring; a typical application of the current
monitor is seal-in of the control command.
See the Digital Elements section of chapter 5 for an example of how form-A and solid-state relay contacts can be
applied for breaker trip circuit integrity monitoring.

Warning:
Consider relay contacts unsafe to touch when the unit is energized. Death or serious
injury can result from touching live relay contacts.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 79
Chapter 4 - Installation

USE OF FORM-A AND SOLID-STATE RELAY OUTPUTS IN HIGH-IMPEDANCE CIRCUITS

For form-A and solid-state relay output contacts internally equipped with a voltage measuring circuit across the
contact, the circuit has an impedance that can cause a problem when used in conjunction with external high-input
impedance monitoring equipment, such as modern relay test set trigger circuits. These monitoring circuits can
continue to read the form-A contact as being closed after it has closed and subsequently opened, when measured
as an impedance.
The solution is to use the voltage measuring trigger input of the relay test set, and connect the form-A contact
through a voltage-dropping resistor to a DC voltage source. If the 48 V DC output of the power supply is used as a
source, a 500 Ω, 10 W resistor is appropriate. In this configuration, the voltage across either the form-A contact or
the resistor can be used to monitor the state of the output.

Note:
Where a tilde “~” symbol appears, substitute the slot position of the module. Where a number sign “#” appears, substitute the
contact number.

When current monitoring is used to seal-in the form-A and solid-state relay contact outputs, give the FlexLogic
operand driving the contact output a reset delay of 10 ms to prevent damage of the output contact (in situations
when the element initiating the contact output is bouncing, at values in the region of the pickup value).
For high-density input/output modules 6W, 6X and 6Y, use the following guidelines to connect. The new I/O
modules use pin type terminal blocks instead of the current ring type. The new terminals are required to achieve
higher I/O count per module.
● 12 to 24 AWG (3.3 mm2 to 0.2 mm2), single wire termination
● 16 to 24 AWG (1.31 mm2 to 0.2 mm2), multiple wire termination with matching wire sizes and stranding. Two
wires maximum per circuit
● Suggested wiring screw tightening torque is a minimum 4.43 in-lb (0.5 Nm) and maximum 5.31 in-lb (0.6 Nm)
● Minimum suggested temperature rating for the conductors is 75°C
● Wire type: copper
For module types 67, 6A, 6B, 6C, 6D, 6E, 6F, 6G, 6H, 6K, 6L, 6M, 6N, 6P, 6R, 6S, 6T, 6U, 6V, 4A, 4B, 4C, 4D, and
4L, use the following guidelines to connect:
● 12 to 24 AWG (3.3 mm2 to 0.2 mm2)
● Wiring screw tightening torque is 19 inch-pounds, (2.15 Nm)
● Minimum suggested temperature rating for the conductors is 75°C
● Wire type: copper

4.5.7.1 CONTACT INPUT AND OUTPUT MODULE ASSIGNMENTS

~4A module ~4B module ~4C module ~4D module
Terminal Terminal Terminal Terminal
Output or input Output or input Output Output
assignment assignment assignment assignment
~1 Not Used ~1 Not Used ~1 Not Used ~1a, ~1c 2 Inputs
~2 Solid-State ~2 Solid-State ~2 Solid-State ~2a, ~2c 2 Inputs
~3 Not Used ~3 Not Used ~3 Not Used ~3a, ~3c 2 Inputs
~4 Solid-State ~4 Solid-State ~4 Solid-State ~4a, ~4c 2 Inputs
~5 Not Used ~5 Not Used ~5 Not Used ~5a, ~5c 2 Inputs
~6 Solid-State ~6 Solid-State ~6 Solid-State ~6a, ~6c 2 Inputs
~7 Not Used ~7 Not Used ~7 Not Used ~7a, ~7c 2 Inputs
~8 Solid-State ~8 Solid-State ~8 Solid-State ~8a, ~8c 2 Inputs

N60-1601-0125-861-1 80
Chapter 4 - Installation

~4L module 67 module ~6A module ~6B module

Terminal Terminal Terminal Terminal
Output or input Output or input Output or input Output or input
assignment assignment assignment assignment
~1 2 Outputs ~1 Form-A ~1 Form-A ~1 Form-A
~2 2 Outputs ~2 Form-A ~2 Form-A ~2 Form-A
~3 2 Outputs ~3 Form-A ~3 Form-C ~3 Form-C
~4 2 Outputs ~4 Form-A ~4 Form-C ~4 Form-C
~5 2 Outputs ~5 Form-A ~5a, ~5c 2 Inputs ~5 Form-C
~6 2 Outputs ~6 Form-A ~6a, ~6c 2 Inputs ~6 Form-C
~7 2 Outputs ~7 Form-A ~7a, ~7c 2 Inputs ~7a, ~7c 2 Inputs
~8 Not Used ~8 Form-A ~8a, ~8c 2 Inputs ~8a, ~8c 2 Inputs

~6C module ~6D module ~6E module ~6F module

Terminal Terminal Terminal Terminal
Output Output Output or input Output
assignment assignment assignment assignment
~1 Form-C ~1a, ~1c 2 Inputs ~1 Form-C ~1 Fast Form-C
~2 Form-C ~2a, ~2c 2 Inputs ~2 Form-C ~2 Fast Form-C
~3 Form-C ~3a, ~3c 2 Inputs ~3 Form-C ~3 Fast Form-C
~4 Form-C ~4a, ~4c 2 Inputs ~4 Form-C ~4 Fast Form-C
~5 Form-C ~5a, ~5c 2 Inputs ~5a, ~5c 2 Inputs ~5 Fast Form-C
~6 Form-C ~6a, ~6c 2 Inputs ~6a, ~6c 2 Inputs ~6 Fast Form-C
~7 Form-C ~7a, ~7c 2 Inputs ~7a, ~7c 2 Inputs ~7 Fast Form-C
~8 Form-C ~8a, ~8c 2 Inputs ~8a, ~8c 2 Inputs ~8 Fast Form-C

~6G module ~6H module ~6K module ~6L module

Terminal Terminal Terminal Terminal
Output or input Output or input Output Output or input
assignment assignment assignment assignment
~1 Form-A ~1 Form-A ~1 Form-C ~1 Form-A
~2 Form-A ~2 Form-A ~2 Form-C ~2 Form-A
~3 Form-A ~3 Form-A ~3 Form-C ~3 Form-C
~4 Form-A ~4 Form-A ~4 Form-C ~4 Form-C
~5a, ~5c 2 Inputs ~5 Form-A ~5 Fast Form-C ~5a, ~5c 2 Inputs
~6a, ~6c 2 Inputs ~6 Form-A ~6 Fast Form-C ~6a, ~6c 2 Inputs
~7a, ~7c 2 Inputs ~7a, ~7c 2 Inputs ~7 Fast Form-C ~7a, ~7c 2 Inputs
~8a, ~8c 2 Inputs ~8a, ~8c 2 Inputs ~8 Fast Form-C ~8a, ~8c 2 Inputs

~6M module ~6N module ~6P module ~6R module

Terminal Terminal Terminal Terminal
Output or input Output or input Output or input Output or input
assignment assignment ssignment assignment
~1 Form-A ~1 Form-A ~1 Form-A ~1 Form-A
~2 Form-A ~2 Form-A ~2 Form-A ~2 Form-A

N60-1601-0125-861-1 81
Chapter 4 - Installation

~6M module ~6N module ~6P module ~6R module

Terminal Terminal Terminal Terminal
Output or input Output or input Output or input Output or input
assignment assignment ssignment assignment
~3 Form-C ~3 Form-A ~3 Form-A ~3 Form-C
~4 Form-C ~4 Form-A ~4 Form-A ~4 Form-C
~5 Form-C ~5a, ~5c 2 Inputs ~5 Form-A ~5a, ~5c 2 Inputs
~6 Form-C ~6a, ~6c 2 Inputs ~6 Form-A ~6a, ~6c 2 Inputs
~7a, ~7c 2 Inputs ~7a, ~7c 2 Inputs ~7a, ~7c 2 Inputs ~7a, ~7c 2 Inputs
~8a, ~8c 2 Inputs ~8a, ~8c 2 Inputs ~8a, ~8c 2 Inputs ~8a, ~8c 2 Inputs

~6S module ~6T module ~6U module ~6V module

Terminal Terminal Terminal Terminal
Output or input Output or input Output Output
assignment assignment assignment assignment
~1 Form-A ~1 Form-A ~1 Form-A ~1 Form-A
~2 Form-A ~2 Form-A ~2 Form-A ~2 Form-A
~3 Form-C ~3 Form-A ~3 Form-A ~3 Form-C
~4 Form-C ~4 Form-A ~4 Form-A ~4 2 Outputs
~5 Form-C ~5a, ~5c 2 Inputs ~5 Form-A ~5a, ~5c 2 Inputs
~6 Form-C ~6a, ~6c 2 Inputs ~6 Form-A ~6a, ~6c 2 Inputs
~7a, ~7c 2 Inputs ~7a, ~7c 2 Inputs ~7a, ~7c 2 Inputs ~7a, ~7c 2 Inputs
~8a, ~8c 2 Inputs ~8a, ~8c 2 Inputs ~8a, ~8c 2 Inputs ~8a, ~8c 2 Inputs

~6W module ~6X module ~6Y module

Terminal assignment Output or input Terminal assignment Output or input Terminal assignment Output or input
~1a Input ~1a, ~2a Form-A ~1a Input
~2a Input ~3a, ~4a Form-A ~3a Input
~3a Input ~5a, ~6a Form-A ~4a Input
~4a Input ~7a, ~8a Form-A ~6a Input
~5a Input ~9a, ~10a Form-A ~7a Input
~7a Input ~11a, ~12a Form-A ~9a Input
~8a Input ~13a, ~14a Form-A ~10a Input
~9a Input ~15a, ~16a Form-A ~12a Input
~10a Input ~17a, ~18a Form-A ~13a Input
~11a Input ~1b, ~2b Form-A ~15a Input
~13a Input ~3b, ~4b Form-A ~16a Input
~14a Input ~5b, ~6b Form-A ~18a Input
~15a Input ~7b, ~8b Form-A ~1b, ~3b Form-A
~16a Input ~9b, ~10b Form-A ~2b, ~3b Form-A
~17a Input ~11b, ~12b Form-A ~4b, ~6b Form-A
~1b Input ~13b, ~14b Form-A ~5b, ~6b Form-A
~2b Input ~15b, ~16b Form-A ~7b, ~9b Form-A

N60-1601-0125-861-1 82
Chapter 4 - Installation

~6W module ~6X module ~6Y module

Terminal assignment Output or input Terminal assignment Output or input Terminal assignment Output or input
~3b Input ~17b, ~18b Form-A ~8b, ~9b Form-A
~4b Input ~10b, ~12b Form-A
~5b Input ~11b, ~12b Form-A
~7b Input ~13b, ~14b Form-A
~8b Input ~15b, ~16b Form-A
~9b Input ~17b, ~18b Form-A
~10b Input
~11b Input
~13b Input
~14b Input
~15b Input
~16b Input
~17b Input

N60-1601-0125-861-1 83
Chapter 4 - Installation

4.5.7.2 CONTACT INPUT AND OUTPUT MODULE WIRING

✁✂✄☎✂✆✁✝✞✟✠

Figure 23: Contact input and output module wiring (Sheet 1 of 3)

N60-1601-0125-861-1 84
Chapter 4 - Installation

✢ ✓✔ ✠✟ ❁ ✘✔ ✯✰✱✲✳✯✲ ✴✱ ❁ ❅✶ ✥✦✧✦★✩✪ ✦✫✬ ✑✪ ✤ ❁ ✓✔ ❁ ✙✔ ✯✰✱✲✳✯✲ ✴✱ ❁ ✵✶ ✥✦✧✦★✩✪ ✦✫✬ ✑❂ ✤ ❁ ✓✔

✢ ✡☛ ✢✡ ❁ ✘✜ ✯✰✱✲✳✯✲ ✴✱ ❁ ❅✷ ❁✡ ✣ ❁ ✡☛ ❁ ✙✜ ✯✰✱✲✳✯✲ ✴✱ ❁ ✵✷ ❁✡ ✣ ❁ ✡☛
✢ ✓✜ ❁ ✚✔ ✯✰✱✲✳✯✲ ✴✱ ❁ ❆✶ ❁ ✓✜ ❁ ✛✔ ✯✰✱✲✳✯✲ ✴✱ ❁ ✸✶ ❁ ✓✜
✢ ✕✔ ❁ ✑❀ ✯✰✱✲✳✯✲ ✴✱ ❁ ❆✷ ✤ ❁ ✕✔ ❁ ✒❀ ✯✰✱✲✳✯✲ ✴✱ ❁ ✸✷ ✤ ❁ ✕✔
✢ ☞☛ ✢☞ ❁ ✘✮ ✯✰✹✹✰✱ ❁ ❅✺ ❁☞ ✣ ❁ ☞☛ ❁ ✙✮ ✯✰✹✹✰✱ ❁ ✵✺ ❁☞ ✣ ❁ ☞☛
✢ ✕✜ ✯✰✱✲✳✯✲ ✴✱ ❁ ✕✜ ❁ ✕✜
❁ ✙✔ ❁ ✵✶ ❁ ✒☛ ✻✼✽✾✿
✢ ✖✔ ✯✰✱✲✳✯✲ ✴✱ ❁ ✖✔ ❁ ✖✔
❁ ✙✜ ❁ ✵✷
✢ ✌☛ ✢✌ ✯✰✱✲✳✯✲ ✴✱ ❁✌ ❁ ✌☛ ❁✌ ❁ ✌☛
❁ ✛✔ ❁ ✸✶
✢ ✖✜ ✯✰✱✲✳✯✲ ✴✱ ❁ ✖✜ ❁ ✖✜
❁ ✒❀ ❁ ✸✷
✢ ✗✔ ✯✰✹✹✰✱ ❁ ✗✔ ❁ ✗✔
❁ ✙✮ ❁ ✵✺
✢ ✍☛ ✢✍ ❁✍ ❁ ✍☛ ❁✍ ❁ ✍☛
✢ ✗✜ ❁ ✒☛ ✻✼✽✾✿ ❁ ✗✜ ❁ ✗✜
✢ ✘✔ ❁ ✘✔
✢ ✎☛ ✢✎ ❁✎ ❁ ✎☛
✢ ✘✜ ❁ ✘✜
✢ ✚✔ ❁ ✚✔
✢ ✑☛ ✢✑ ❁✑ ❁ ✑☛
✢ ✚✜ ❁ ✚✜
✢ ✙✔
✢ ✏☛ ✢✏ ✝✞✁
✢ ✙✜ ✆
☎✄
✢ ✛✔ ✁
✢ ✒☛ ✢✒ ✂✁
✢ ✛✜

❁ ✘✔ ✯✰✱✲✳✯✲ ✴✱ ❁ ❅✶ ✥✦✧✦★✩✪ ✦✫✬ ✑❄ ✤ ❁ ✓✔ ✢ ✙✔ ✯✰✱✲✳✯✲ ✴✱ ✢ ✵✶ ✥✦✧✦★✩✪ ✦✫✬ ✑✭ ✤ ✢ ✓✔

❁ ✘✜ ✯✰✱✲✳✯✲ ✴✱ ❁ ❅✷ ❁✡ ✣ ❁ ✡☛ ✢ ✙✜ ✯✰✱✲✳✯✲ ✴✱ ✢ ✵✷ ✢✡ ✣ ✢ ✡☛
❁ ✚✔ ✯✰✱✲✳✯✲ ✴✱ ❁ ❆✶ ❁ ✓✜ ✢ ✛✔ ✯✰✱✲✳✯✲ ✴✱ ✢ ✸✶ ✢ ✓✜
❁ ✑❀ ✯✰✱✲✳✯✲ ✴✱ ❁ ❆✷ ✤ ❁ ✕✔ ✢ ✒❀ ✯✰✱✲✳✯✲ ✴✱ ✢ ✸✷ ✤ ✢ ✕✔
❁ ✘✮ ✯✰✹✹✰✱ ❁ ❅✺ ❁☞ ✣ ❁ ☞☛ ✢ ✙✮ ✯✰✹✹✰✱ ✢ ✵✺ ✢☞ ✣ ✢ ☞☛
✯✰✱✲✳✯✲ ✴✱ ❁ ✕✜ ✢ ✕✜
❁ ✙✔ ❁ ✵✶ ✢ ✒☛ ✻✼✽✾✿
✯✰✱✲✳✯✲ ✴✱ ✤ ❁ ✖✔ ✤ ✢ ✖✔
❁ ✙✜ ❁ ✵✷ ✣ ✣
✯✰✱✲✳✯✲ ✴✱ ❁✌ ❁ ✌☛ ✢✌ ✢ ✌☛
❁ ✛✔ ❁ ✸✶
✯✰✱✲✳✯✲ ✴✱ ❁ ✖✜ ✢ ✖✜
❁ ✒❀ ❁ ✸✷
✯✰✹✹✰✱ ✤ ❁ ✗✔ ✤ ✢ ✗✔
❁ ✙✮ ❁ ✵✺ ✣ ✣
❁✍ ❁ ✍☛ ✢✍ ✢ ✍☛
❁ ✒☛ ✻✼✽✾✿ ❁ ✗✜ ✢ ✗✜
✤ ✢ ✘✔
✢✎ ✣ ✢ ✎☛
✢ ✘✜
❁ ✘✔ ✯✰✱✲✳✯✲ ✴✱ ❁ ❅✶ ✥✦✧✦★✩✪ ✦✫✬ ✑❇ ❁ ✓✔ ✤ ✢ ✚✔
❁ ✘✜ ✯✰✱✲✳✯✲ ✴✱ ❁ ❅✷ ❁✡ ❁ ✡☛ ✢✑ ✣ ✢ ✑☛
❁ ✚✔ ✯✰✱✲✳✯✲ ✴✱ ❁ ❆✶ ❁ ✓✜ ✢ ✚✜
❁ ✑❀ ✯✰✱✲✳✯✲ ✴✱ ❁ ❆✷ ❁ ✕✔
❁ ✘✮ ✯✰✹✹✰✱ ❁ ❅✺ ❁☞ ❁ ☞☛
✯✰✱✲✳✯✲ ✴✱ ❁ ✕✜
❁ ✙✔ ❁ ✵✶
✯✰✱✲✳✯✲ ✴✱ ❁ ✖✔ ❁ ✙✔ ✯✰✱✲✳✯✲ ✴✱ ❁ ✵✶ ✥✦✧✦★✩✪ ✦✫✬ ✑❃ ❁ ✓✔
❁ ✙✜ ❁ ✵✷
✯✰✱✲✳✯✲ ✴✱ ❁✌ ❁ ✌☛ ❁ ✙✜ ✯✰✱✲✳✯✲ ✴✱ ❁ ✵✷ ❁✡ ❁ ✡☛
❁ ✛✔ ❁ ✸✶
✯✰✱✲✳✯✲ ✴✱ ❁ ✖✜ ❁ ✛✔ ✯✰✱✲✳✯✲ ✴✱ ❁ ✸✶ ❁ ✓✜
❁ ✒❀ ❁ ✸✷
✯✰✹✹✰✱ ❁ ✗✔ ❁ ✒❀ ✯✰✱✲✳✯✲ ✴✱ ❁ ✸✷ ❁ ✕✔
❁ ✙✮ ❁ ✵✺
❁✍ ❁ ✍☛ ❁ ✙✮ ✯✰✹✹✰✱ ❁ ✵✺ ❁☞ ❁ ☞☛
❁ ✒☛ ✻✼✽✾✿ ❁ ✗✜ ❁ ✕✜
❁ ✒☛ ✻✼✽✾✿
❁ ✖✔
❁✌ ❁ ✌☛
❁ ✖✜
❁ ✘✔ ✯✰✱✲✳✯✲ ✴✱ ❁ ❅✶ ✥✦✧✦★✩✪ ✦✫✬ ✑★ ❁ ✓✔ ❁ ✗✔
❁ ✘✜ ✯✰✱✲✳✯✲ ✴✱ ❁ ❅✷ ❁✡ ❁ ✡☛ ❁✍ ❁ ✍☛
❁ ✚✔ ✯✰✱✲✳✯✲ ✴✱ ❁ ❆✶ ❁ ✓✜ ❁ ✗✜
❁ ✑❀ ✯✰✱✲✳✯✲ ✴✱ ❁ ❆✷ ❁ ✕✔ ❁ ✘✔
❁ ✘✮ ✯✰✹✹✰✱ ❁ ❅✺ ❁☞ ❁ ☞☛ ❁✎ ❁ ✎☛
✯✰✱✲✳✯✲ ✴✱ ❁ ✕✜ ❁ ✘✜
❁ ✙✔ ❁ ✵✶
✯✰✱✲✳✯✲ ✴✱ ❁ ✖✔ ❁ ✚✔
❁ ✙✜ ❁ ✵✷
✯✰✱✲✳✯✲ ✴✱ ❁✌ ❁ ✌☛ ❁✑ ❁ ✑☛
❁ ✛✔ ❁ ✸✶
✯✰✱✲✳✯✲ ✴✱ ❁ ✖✜ ❁ ✚✜
❁ ✒❀ ❁ ✸✷
✯✰✹✹✰✱ ❁ ✗✔
❁ ✙✮ ❁ ✵✺
❁✍ ❁ ✍☛
❁ ✒☛ ✻✼✽✾✿ ❁ ✗✜
✢ ✙✔ ✯✰✱✲✳✯✲ ✴✱ ✢ ✵✶ ✥✦✧✦★✩✪ ✦✫✬ ✑❈ ✢ ✓✔
✢ ✙✜ ✯✰✱✲✳✯✲ ✴✱ ✢ ✵✷ ✢✡ ✢ ✡☛
✢ ✛✔ ✯✰✱✲✳✯✲ ✴✱ ✢ ✸✶ ✢ ✓✜
❁ ✘✔ ✯✰✱✲✳✯✲ ✴✱ ❁ ❅✶ ✥✦✧✦★✩✪ ✦✫✬ ✑❖ ✤ ❁ ✓✔
✣ ✢ ✒❀ ✯✰✱✲✳✯✲ ✴✱ ✢ ✸✷ ✢ ✕✔
❁ ✘✜ ✯✰✱✲✳✯✲ ✴✱ ❁ ❅✷ ❁✡ ❁ ✡☛
✢ ✙✮ ✯✰✹✹✰✱ ✢ ✵✺ ✢☞ ✢ ☞☛
❁ ✚✔ ✯✰✱✲✳✯✲ ✴✱ ❁ ❆✶ ❁ ✓✜
✻✼✽✾✿ ✢ ✕✜
❁ ✑❀ ✯✰✱✲✳✯✲ ✴✱ ❁ ❆✷ ✤ ❁ ✕✔ ✢ ✒☛
✣ ✢ ✖✔
❁ ✘✮ ✯✰✹✹✰✱ ❁ ❅✺ ❁☞ ❁ ☞☛
✢✌ ✢ ✌☛
✯✰✱✲✳✯✲ ✴✱ ❁ ✕✜
❁ ✙✔ ❁ ✵✶ ✢ ✖✜
✯✰✱✲✳✯✲ ✴✱ ❁ ✖✔
❁ ✙✜ ❁ ✵✷ ✢ ✗✔
✯✰✱✲✳✯✲ ✴✱ ❁✌ ❁ ✌☛
❁ ✛✔ ❁ ✸✶ ✢✍ ✢ ✍☛
✯✰✱✲✳✯✲ ✴✱ ❁ ✖✜
❁ ✒❀ ❁ ✸✷ ✢ ✗✜
✯✰✹✹✰✱ ❁ ✗✔
❁ ✙✮ ❁ ✵✺ ❁ ✍P ✢ ✘✔
❁ ✍☛
❁ ◗❘ ✢✎ ✢ ✎☛
❁ ✒☛ ✻✼✽✾✿ ❁ ✗✜
✢ ✘✜
✢ ✚✔
✢✑ ✢ ✑☛
✢ ✚✜
❉❊❋●❍■❏❋❑▲▼◆

Figure 24: Contact input and output module wiring (Sheet 2 of 3)

N60-1601-0125-861-1 85
Chapter 4 - Installation

✁✂✁✄☎✆ ✁✝✞ ✟✖ ✁✂✁✄☎✆ ✁✝✞ ✟✠ Digital I/O 6Y

☞☛ ✗✘✙✚✛✗✚ ✜✙ ✤✣ ✗✘✙✚✛✗✚ ✜✙ ✤✯ ☞✕ ✍ ☞☛ ✍ ☞✕ ~ 1b CONTACT IN ~ 1a + ~ 1a
✡☛ ✗✘✙✚✛✗✚ ✜✙ ✦✣ ✗✘✙✚✛✗✚ ✜✙ ✦✯ ✡✕ ✍ ✡☛ ✍ ☞✌ ☞ ✍ ✡✕ ~ 2b
~1
COMMON ~ 2a - ~ 2a
✏☛ ✗✘✙✚✛✗✚ ✜✙ ★✣ ✗✘✙✚✛✗✚ ✜✙ ★✯ ✏✕ ✍ ✏☛ ✍ ✏✕
~2
✡
~ 3b CONTACT IN ~ 3a ~ 3a
✎☛ ✗✘✙✚✛✗✚ ✜✙ ✪✣ ✗✘✙✚✛✗✚ ✜✙ ✪✯ ✎✕ ✍ ✎☛ ✍ ☞☞ ✍ ✎✕ ~ 4b CONTACT IN ~ 4a
+
+ ~ 4a
✑☛ ✗✘✙✚✛✗✚ ✜✙ ✭✣ ✗✘✙✚✛✗✚ ✜✙ ✭✯ ✑✕ ✍ ✑☛ ✍ ✑✕ ~ 5b
~3
COMMON ~ 5a - ~ 5a
✟☛ ✰ ✗✘✫✫✘✙ ✬ ✮✣ ✗✘✫✫✘✙ ✬ ✮✯ ✰ ✟✕ ✍ ✟☛ ✍ ☞✡ ✏ ✍ ✟✕ ~ 6b
~4
CONTACT IN ~ 6a + ~ 6a
✓☛ ✗✘✙✚✛✗✚ ✜✙ ✢✣ ✗✘✙✚✛✗✚ ✜✙ ✢✯ ✓✕ ✍ ✓☛ ✍ ☞✏ ✎ ✍ ✓✕ ~ 7b CONTACT IN ~ 7a + ~ 7a
✍ ✒☛ ✍ ✒✕
~5
✒☛ ✗✘✙✚✛✗✚ ✜✙ ✥✣ ✗✘✙✚✛✗✚ ✜✙ ✥✯ ✒✕ ~ 8b COMMON ~ 8a - ~ 8a
✔☛ ✗✘✙✚✛✗✚ ✜✙ ✧✣ ✗✘✙✚✛✗✚ ✜✙ ✧✯ ✔✕ ✍ ✔☛ ✍ ☞✎ ✑ ✍ ✔✕ ~ 9b
~6
CONTACT IN ~ 9a + ~ 9a
☞✌☛ ✗✘✙✚✛✗✚ ✜✙ ✤✩✣ ✗✘✙✚✛✗✚ ✜✙ ✤✩ ☞✌✕ ✍☞✌☛ ☞✌✕ ~ 10b CONTACT IN ~ 10a + ~ 10a
☞☞☛ ✗✘✙✚✛✗✚ ✜✙ ✤✤✣ ✗✘✙✚✛✗✚ ✜✙ ✤✤✯ ☞☞✕ ✍☞☞☛ ✍ ☞✑ ✟ ✍ ☞☞✕ ~ 11b
~7
COMMON ~ 11a - ~ 11a
☞✡☛ ✰ ✗✘✫✫✘✙ ✬ ✤✦✣ ✗✘✫✫✘✙ ✬ ✤✦✯ ✰ ☞✡✕ ✍☞✡☛ ✍ ☞✡✕ ~ 12b
~8
CONTACT IN ~ 12a + ~ 12a

☞✏☛ ✗✘✙✚✛✗✚ ✜✙ ✤★✣ ✗✘✙✚✛✗✚ ✜✙ ✤★✯ ☞✏✕ ✍☞✏☛ ✍ ☞✟ ✓ ✍ ☞✏✕ ~ 13b CONTACT IN ~ 13a + ~ 13a

☞✎☛ ✗✘✙✚✛✗✚ ✜✙ ✤✪✣ ✗✘✙✚✛✗✚ ✜✙ ✤✪✯ ☞✎✕ ✍☞✎☛ ☞✎✕ ~ 14b

~9
COMMON ~ 14a - ~ 14a
☞✑☛ ✗✘✙✚✛✗✚ ✜✙ ✤✭✣ ✗✘✙✚✛✗✚ ✜✙ ✤✭✯ ☞✑✕ ✍☞✑☛ ✍ ☞✓ ✒ ✍ ☞✑✕ ~ 15b CONTACT IN ~ 15a + ~ 15a
☞✟☛ ✗✘✙✚✛✗✚ ✜✙ ✤✮✣ ✗✘✙✚✛✗✚ ✜✙ ✤✮✯ ☞✟✕ ✍☞✟☛ ✍ ☞✟✕ ~ 16b
V ~10
CONTACT IN ~ 16a + ~ 16a
☞✓☛ ✗✘✙✚✛✗✚ ✜✙ ✤✢✣ ✗✘✙✚✛✗✚ ✜✙ ✤✢✯ ☞✓✕ ✍☞✓☛ ✍ ☞✒ ✔ ✍ ☞✓✕ ~ 17b COMMON ~ 17a - ~ 17a
☞✒☛ ✰ ✗✘✫✫✘✙ ✬ ✤✥✣ ✗✘✫✫✘✙ ✬ ✤✥✯ ✰ ☞✒✕ ✍☞✒☛ ✍ ☞✒✕ ~ 18b
V ~11
CONTACT IN ~ 18a + ~ 18a

859759A3.VSD

Figure 25: Contact input and output module wiring (Sheet 3 of 3)

Note:
Observe the polarity shown in the figures for all contact input and output connections.

4.5.7.3 CONTACT INPUTS

A dry contact has one side connected to terminal B3b. This is the positive 48 V DC voltage rail supplied by the
power supply module. The other side of the dry contact is connected to the required contact input terminal. Each
contact input group has its own common (negative) terminal that must be connected to the DC negative terminal
(B3a) of the power supply module. When a dry contact closes, a current of 1 to 3 mA flows through the associated
circuit.
A wet contact has one side connected to the positive terminal of an external DC power supply. The other side of this
contact is connected to the required contact input terminal. If a wet contact is used, then the negative side of the
external source must be connected to the relay common (negative) terminal of each contact group. The maximum
external source voltage for this arrangement is 300 V DC.
The voltage threshold at which each group of four contact inputs detects a closed contact input is programmable as
17 V DC for 24 V sources, 33 V DC for 48 V sources, 84 V DC for 110 to 125 V sources, and 166 V DC for 250 V
sources.
▼✔✗◆❖P✱◗❘ ❙✗✍◆ ✌✘❚✔ ✺✸ ▼✔✗◆❖P✱◗❘ ❙✗✍◆ ✌✘❚✔ ✺✸
✒✖✗✘✕ ✴✍P✌✱✴✌ ❖P❚❯✌❱✍❯✌❚❯✌ ◆✍❲❯◗✔ ✒✓✔✌✕ ✴✍P✌✱✴✌ ❖P❚❯✌❱✍❯✌❚❯✌ ◆✍❲❯◗✔

✯✰✱ ✙✚✛✜✢✣✜ ✤✛✥✦✜ ✧ ✯✰✱ ✙✚✛✜✢✣✜ ✤✛✥✦✜ ✧

✯✰✴ ✙✚✛✜✢✣✜ ✤✛✥✦✜ ★ ✯✰✴ ✙✚✛✜✢✣✜ ✤✛✥✦✜ ★
✯✵✱ ✙✚✛✜✢✣✜ ✤✛✥✦✜ ✩ ☛☞ ✌✍ ☛✎✏ ✑ ✯✵✱ ✙✚✛✜✢✣✜ ✤✛✥✦✜ ✩
✯✵✴ ✙✚✛✜✢✣✜ ✤✛✥✦✜ ✮ ✯✵✴ ✙✚✛✜✢✣✜ ✤✛✥✦✜ ✮
✯✰✳ ✙✚✲✲✚✛ ✯✰✳ ✙✚✲✲✚✛
✯✵✳ ✪✦✫✬✭ ✯✵✳ ✪✦✫✬✭

✸✼✳
✸✼✱ ✙✫✤✜✤✣✢✶ ✻✢✤✶✦✫✭
✸☛✳ ❉■
●
✸❀✱ ▲
✮✽ ✾ ✿✙ ✚✦✜✥✦✜ ❇
✸❀✳ ❑
❏■
✸✎✳ ❁❂❃ ❍
✸✺✳ ❄❅❃ ✙✚✛✜✫✚✶ ✥✚✷✭✫ ❍
●
❋
✸✺✱ ❊
❉
✸✵✱ ✪✦✫✬✭ ❈
❇
✸✵✳ ✹✤✶✜✭✫ ❆

✁✂✂✄☎✆✝✞✟✠✡

Figure 26: Dry and wet contact input connections

N60-1601-0125-861-1 86
Chapter 4 - Installation

Note:
Where a tilde “~” symbol appears, substitute the slot position of the module

Note:
There is no provision in the relay to detect a DC ground fault on 48 V DC control power external output. We recommend using
an external DC supply.

4.5.7.4 GENERAL APPLICATION CONSIDERATIONS

Contacts outputs of protective relays, auxiliary contacts from breakers, disconnectors and other devices are
connected generally to contacts inputs of protective relays. In some situations, the contact outputs of some
protective relays can have high impedance connected across it. When such a contact output is connected across a
relay contact input, it can spuriously operate the relay input even when the output is open, if there is a substantial
distributed capacitance (represented by C1) present in the wiring between the output and the relay input, and the
debounce time setting in the relay is low enough. This false assertion of the contact input, when there is inadvertent
ground present at the DC positive terminal, can be prevented by inserting a resistor across the input.
The following figure shows a typical DC circuit, with battery ground detection, of contact input. The contact output
has parallel impedance across it (represented by R1).

✁✂✄☎✆✄ ✝✂✞✟✄

✠✡☛☞✡✡✌✍✎✏✑✒
Figure 27: Typical contact input DC circuit

The presence of the impedance path (R1) across the contact output allows the stray (distributed) capacitance C1 to
charge as shown, thus developing a voltage across the contact input enough to momentarily operate the input while
the capacitance discharges in the presence of DC ground on the positive terminal of the battery.
The duration of the discharge depends on the value of the distributed capacitance, the initial voltage of the
distributed capacitance, and the input impedance of the contact input. If the duration is greater than the debounce
time setting, then the contact input operates.
The application example that follows describes how to mitigate this issue by connecting a resistor across the
contact input, as shown in the next figure, or by adjusting the debounce time setting to a value greater than the
discharge time to prevent spurious operation of the contact input only if the voltage (with output open) across the
contact input due to trickle current is less than the threshold voltage. This operation of contact inputs also can be
prevented by using the Auto-Burnish contact inputs or contact inputs with active impedance.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 87
Chapter 4 - Installation

✁✂✄☎✆✄ ✝✂✞✟✄

✠✡☛☞✡✌✍✎✏✑✒✓
Figure 28: Contact input connected to a contact output with resistor (R2) across the input

Application example
This example is for illustrative purposes only and the calculations present the worst-case scenario. In practice, the
value of debounce time can be lower.
Contact input ON state impedance used in the calculation of the discharge period is based on the following table.
Battery voltage (V) Input impedance (kΩ)
130 50
250 97

Assumptions:
● Debounce time setting = 2 ms
● Stray capacitance = 0.1 μF.
● Initial voltage across the stray capacitance "Vinitial" = 19 V (Vthreshold - 65 V), where Vthreshold = 84 V. The
initial voltage Vinitial depends on values of impedance of R1 and contact inputs when the contact input is
OFF (non-activated state).
Therefore, the discharge time constant (τ) = 50 kΩ *0.1 μF = 5 ms.
The discharge period t is calculated from the following equation:
Vthreshold = (Vbatt - VInitial) *e^ (-t/τ)
84 = -149 *e^ (t/0.005)
T = -0.005 * ln (84/149) = 0.0029 s
Therefore, in this example the contact inputs operate.
To prevent this operation, the debounce time must be increased to 4 ms (set debounce time as per the following
table) or insert a resistor less than or equal to "R" as calculated later.

Stray capacitance (μF) Battery voltage (V) Debounce time (ms)

0.05 130 2
0.1 130 4
0.2 130 4
0.05 250 3

N60-1601-0125-861-1 88
Chapter 4 - Installation

Stray capacitance (μF) Battery voltage (V) Debounce time (ms)

0.1 250 6*
0.2 250 11
* Default debounce time on contact inputs is 6 ms
The value of this resistor "R" is calculated as follows:
1. Determine the minimum voltage (V threshold) required to turn on the input. This is determined by direct
measurement or referenced in the input specifications.
2. Calculate the resistance necessary to limit the voltage to 1/3 V threshold (when the contact is OFF, the non-
activated state) as follows:
R = (Vthreshold / 3) / (2 mA)
The 2 mA current is used in case the contact input is connected across the GE Form A contact output with
voltage monitoring. Otherwise use the amperage of the active circuit connected to the contact input when its
contact output is open and the voltage across the contact input is third trigger threshold to calculate the
resistor value.
3. When the contact is ON (operate state), the battery voltage appears across the resistor. The wattage rating of
the resistor is then:
PR = 1.3 * (Vbatt) ^2 / R Watts
4. Applying the following equation to our example:
R = 84 V / 3 * (1 / 2 mA) = 14 kΩ
PR = 1.57 Watts Eq. 3-4
5. Calculating the voltage across the contact input with the Burden Resistor, Voltage across the contact Input:
Vresistor = 2 mA * 14 Kohm = 28 V
Vresistor < contact input threshold (84 V)
In conclusion, in this example, the contact input does NOT operate falsely with the Burden Resistor across its input
AND when a battery ground is present.

4.5.7.5 USE OF CONTACT INPUTS WITH AUTO-BURNISHING

The contact inputs sense a change of state of the external device contact based on the measured current. When
external devices are located in a harsh industrial environment (either outdoor or indoor), their contacts can be
exposed to various types of contamination. Normally, there is a thin film of insulating sulfidation, oxidation, or
contaminates on the surface of the contacts, sometimes making it difficult or impossible to detect a change of state.
This film must be removed to establish circuit continuity — an impulse of higher than normal current can accomplish
this.
The contact inputs with auto-burnish create a high current impulse when the threshold is reached to burn off this
oxidation layer as a maintenance to the contacts. Afterwards the contact input current is reduced to a steady-state
current. The impulse has a five-second delay after a contact input changes state.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 89
Chapter 4 - Installation

✕✖✗✗✘✙✌

☛☞ ✌✍ ✎☞ ✏✑

✒ ✏✑

✚✛✏✘

✓☛ ✌✍ ☛☞ ✏✔
✁✂✄✁☎✆✝✞✟✠✡

Figure 29: Current through contact inputs with auto-burnishing

Regular contact inputs limit current to less than 3 mA to reduce station battery burden. In contrast, contact inputs
with auto-burnishing allow currents up to 50 to 70 mA at the first instance when the change of state is sensed.
Then, within 25 to 50 ms, this current is slowly reduced to 3 mA as indicated. The 50 to 70 mA peak current burns
any film on the contacts, allowing for proper sensing of state changes. If the external device contact is bouncing, the
auto-burnishing starts when external device contact bouncing is over.
Another important difference between the auto-burnishing input module and the regular input modules is that only
two contact inputs have common ground, as opposed to four contact inputs sharing one common ground (see the
Contact Input and Output Module Wiring diagrams). This is beneficial when connecting contact inputs to separate
voltage sources. Consequently, the threshold voltage setting is also defined per group of two contact inputs.
The auto-burnish feature can be disabled or enabled using the DIP switches found on each daughter card. There is
a DIP switch for each contact, for a total of 16 inputs.

☛☞✌✍✎✏✍ ✑✌✒✓✍ ✔ ✎✓✍☞✕✖✓✗✌✑✘✙ ✚ ✛✜✜

☛☞✌✍✎✏✍ ✑✌✒✓✍ ✢ ✎✓✍☞✕✖✓✗✌✑✘✙ ✚ ✛✜✜

☛☞✌✍✎✏✍ ✑✌✒✓✍ ✔ ✎✓✍☞✕✖✓✗✌✑✘✙ ✚ ✛✌

☛☞✌✍✎✏✍ ✑✌✒✓✍ ✢ ✎✓✍☞✕✖✓✗✌✑✘✙ ✚ ✛✜✜

☛☞✌✍✎✏✍ ✑✌✒✓✍ ✔ ✎✓✍☞✕✖✓✗✌✑✘✙ ✚ ✛✜✜

☛☞✌✍✎✏✍ ✑✌✒✓✍ ✢ ✎✓✍☞✕✖✓✗✌✑✘✙ ✚ ✛✌

☛☞✌✍✎✏✍ ✑✌✒✓✍ ✔ ✎✓✍☞✕✖✓✗✌✑✘✙ ✚ ✛✌

☛☞✌✍✎✏✍ ✑✌✒✓✍ ✢ ✎✓✍☞✕✖✓✗✌✑✘✙ ✚ ✛✌

✁✂✄☎✆✝✆✞✟✠✡

Figure 30: Figure 3-26: Auto-burnish DIP switches

The auto-burnish circuitry has an internal fuse for safety purposes. During regular maintenance, check the auto-
burnish functionality using an oscilloscope.

4.5.7.6 USE OF CONTACT INPUTS WITH ACTIVE IMPEDANCE

Contact inputs can be susceptible to parasitic capacitance, caused by long cable runs affected by switching surges
from external circuits. This can result in inadvertent activation of contact inputs with the external contact open. In
this case, GE recommends using the contact I/O module with active impedance circuit.
Active impedance contact input can tolerate external cable capacitance of up to 0.2 μF, without entering the ON
state for more than 2 ms. The contact input debounce time can still be set above 2 ms for added security to prevent
contact input activations caused by external transient ON states.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 90
Chapter 4 - Installation

An active impedance contact input is normally in Low impedance mode during OFF contact state (non-activated
condition). During Low impedance state, contact input impedance is maintained at 10 K Ohms impedance to allow
fast discharge of the stray capacitance of the long cables.
When the contact input voltage exceeds the set threshold, active impedance maintains 10 K Ohms impedance. If
voltage starts rapidly decreasing, this indicates that stray capacitance is being discharged through the contact input.
If, however, voltage stabilizes above the set threshold, the input impedance is switched to High impedance mode of
100 K Ohms. This value reduces the input current to <3 mA, and contact input switches to the ON state (operated
state).
The figure shows the active impedance contact input V-I characteristic. Different thresholds with their corresponding
characteristics are shown by color. The contact input is in the ON (operated) state if the input voltage is to the right
of the colored threshold band (+/-10% tolerance), and the contact input is in the OFF (non-activated) state when
input voltage is to the left of the band. A contact input is in LOW state during non-operated system condition, and
actively switches to HIGH state upon detection of input voltage above the settable threshold.
✁✵
❞❧ ❞❧
♦❤ ♦❤
s❡ s❡
r❤ r❤
t t
❞❧ ❞❧ ❱ ❱ ✰
♦❤ ♦❤ ✹✽ ✻ ✲✾
s❡ s❡ ✻
✶ ✴✾
✷✺ r❤ r❤ ✰
t t ✲✳❝
❱ ❱ ✱
✼
✶
✸
✸ ✯✰
✫✬
✇
▲✪
✷✵
✎
✍
✠✡
✡
♣
♠
❛✌
✐✌ ✺
♠☞
☛
♥ ✕
✡✠ ✔
✠ ✒✓
✉ ❑
❈ ✏✑
✵

✖✗✗ ✘ ✙✚✛✜✢✚✣✤✥
✦✧ ✘ ✙✚✛✜✢✚✣✤✥
★★ ✘ ✙✚✛✜✢✚✣✤✥
✺ ✖✩ ✘ ✙✚✛✜✢✚✣✤✥

❆❋❄
●❏❏ ▼ ◆❖P◗ ❄❅❆❇❉❄ ❊❋
❍■✿❀ ❁❂❃
✵ ✺
✵ ✵✵ ✺✵ ✷✵✵ ✷✺✵ ✁✵✵
✵
✂✄☎✆✝❣✞ ✭✂✄☎✆✟✮ ❘❙❚❯❙❯❲❳❨✈❩❬
Figure 31: Active impedance contact input V-I characteristic

4.5.8 TRANSDUCER INPUTS AND OUTPUTS

Transducer input modules receive input signals from external DCmA output transducers (DCmA In) or resistance
temperature detectors (RTDs). Hardware and software are provided to receive signals from these external
transducers and convert these signals into a digital format for use as required.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 91
Chapter 4 - Installation

Transducer output modules provide DC current outputs in several standard DCmA ranges. Software is provided to
configure virtually any analog quantity used in the relay to drive the analog outputs.
Each transducer input/output module has 24 terminal connections. These connections are arranged as three
terminals per row over eight rows. A given row can be used for either inputs or outputs, with terminals in column "a"
having positive polarity and terminals in column "c" having negative polarity. Since an entire row is used for a single
input/output channel, the name of the channel is assigned using the module slot position and row number.
Each module also requires that a connection from an external ground bus be made to terminal 8b. The current
outputs require a twisted-pair shielded cable, where the shield is grounded at one end only. The following figure
illustrates the transducer module types (5A, 5C, 5D, 5E, and 5F) and channel arrangements that can be ordered for
the relay.

Note:
Where a tilde “~” symbol appears, substitute the slot position of the module.

✁✂✄☎✁✆✝✞✟✠✡

Figure 32: Transducer input/output module wiring

The following figure show how to connect RTDs.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 92
Chapter 4 - Installation

✁✂✄✄☎✆✝✂✄ ✞✁✝✄✟✠✄✠ ✡☛☞✟✄

✌✕✔✎✄ ✡☛☞✟✄ ✝✑ ✞✄✛☛✂☛✎✄ ✡✕✑✠✔✝✎ ✙✂✕✏
✡✔✂✂✄✑✎ ✡☛✂✂✜✝✑✢ ✡✕✑✠✔✡✎✕✂✞
✌ ✍ ✎✄✂✏✝✑☛✟✞

✸✹✯✺✻ ✼❀❁ ✌ ✍

❃❄❅ ✼✽❂
✯✰✱ ✼✽
❋❄●❍ ✼✽■

✲✳✴ ✵✶✷ ✼✽ ✾ ✼✿ ❆❇❅❈❉❊ ✼✽❁ ✌ ✍ ✎✄✂✏✝✑☛✟✞

❃❄❅ ✼✿❂
✯✰✱ ✼✿
❋❄●❍ ✼✿■

✌ ✍

✒☛✓✝✏✔✏ ✎✕✎☛✟ ✟✄☛✠ ✂✄✞✝✞✎☛✑✡✄✖

✗✘ ✕✁✏✞ ✙✕✂ ✚✟☛✎✝✑✔✏ ✌ ✍✞
✣✤✥✦✧★✩✪✫✬✭✮

Figure 33: RTD connections

4.5.9 COMMUNICATION PORTS

4.5.9.1 GENERAL GROUNDING CONSIDERATIONS

When using RJ45 Copper connection the cable must be shielded twisted pair Ethernet cable.
If not using a Process Bus Module (order code 85, 86, 87), the following cable and ground connection is
appropriate.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 93
Chapter 4 - Installation

✓✓ ▼✳✶✍✽✎
✱✼✺✳✵ ✵☞✶✴✍ ❍■❏ ❑■❏ ✠✡✡☛☞✌✍✎❉✑ ❊❋●✬ ✘ ▲

❍■◆ ❑■◆ ✠✡✡☛☞✌✍✎❉✑ ❊❋●✬ ✚

✷✸✳✍✴✹✍✹ ❍■❖ ❑■❖ ✠✡✡☛☞✌✍✎❉✑
✺✻✳✌✺✍✹✎✼☞✳✽✌ ❊❋●✬ ✛
✗✘✙ ✕
✤❃✜❄❅
✗✚✙ ✖
❆❇❈✚
✾✽✱✿❀✹ ☞✺ ✗✛✙ ✝✒✓✓✒✔
✽✍❁✱✺✍ ✗✜✢ ✕
✹✍❂✳✵✍
✗✜✙ ✖ ✣✤✣✥✦✧
★✩✪✫✬ ✯
☛✔✝ ✮
✭
✝✱✎☞✲✳☞✴ ✵☞✶✴✍

✠✡✡☛☞✌✍✎✏✑ ❊❋●✬ ✘ ✯

❍■❏ ❑■❏ ✠✡✡☛☞✌✍✎❉✑ ❊❋●✬ ✚

✷✸✳✍✴✹✍✹ ❍■❏ ❑■❏ ✠✡✡☛☞✌✍✎❉✑
✺✻✳✌✺✍✹✎✼☞✳✽✌ ❊❋●✬ ✛
✗✘✙ ✕
✤❃✜❄❅
✗✚✙ ✖
❆❇❈✚
✾✽✱✿❀✹ ☞✺ ✗✛✙ ✝✒✓✓✒✔
✽✍❁✱✺✍ ✗✜✢ ✕
✹✍❂✳✵✍
✗✜✙ ✖ ✣✤✣✥✦✧
★✩✪✫✬ ✯
☛✔✝ ✮
✭
✝✱✎☞✲✳☞✴ ✵☞✶✴✍

✠✡✡☛☞✌✍✎✏✑ ❊❋●✬ ✘ ✰

✠✡✡☛☞✌✍✎✏✑ ❊❋●✬ ✚
✷✸✳✍✴✹✍✹ ✠✡✡☛☞✌✍✎✏✑
✺✻✳✌✺✍✹✎✼☞✳✽✌ ❊❋●✬ ✛
✗✘✙ ✕
✤❃✜❄❅
✗✚✙ ✖
❆❇❈✚
✾✽✱✿❀✹ ☞✺ ✗✛✙ ✝✒✓✓✒✔
✽✍❁✱✺✍ ✗✜✢ ✕
✹✍❂✳✵✍
✗✜✙ ✖ ✣✤✣✥✦✧
★✩✪✫✬ ✯
☛✔✝ ✮
✭
✝✱✎☞✲✳☞✴ ✵☞✶✴✍
✁✂✄✂✂☎✁✆✝✞✟

Figure 34: CPU module wiring for IRIG-B without Process Bus Module

For Sampled Value (SV) applications using a Process Bus Module with order code 85, 86, or 87 with IRIG-B for
synchronization, follow the recommended cables and grounding connections. If using a Process Bus Module and
IRIG-B as the synchronizing source, we recommend moving the grounding from the IRIG-B generator to UR
terminal D4a in order to better protect the IRIG-B input from long bursts of transient noise.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 94
Chapter 4 - Installation

☛☛ ❋✫✮✆✵✝
✩✴✲✫✭ ✭✄✮✬✆ ❆❇❈ ❉❇❈ ✁✁✂✄☎✆✝❂✟ ❃❄❅✤ ✏ ❊

❆❇● ❉❇● ✁✁✂✄☎✆✝❂✟ ❃❄❅✤ ✒

❆❇❍ ❉❇❍ ✁✁✂✄☎✆✝❂✟ ❃❄❅✤ ✓
✯✰✫✆✬✱✆✱ ✲✳✫☎✲✆✱✝✴✄✫✵ ✭✄✮✬✆
✎✏✑ ✌
✗✼✔✽✾
✎✒✑ ✍
✿❀❁✒
✶✵✩✷✸✱ ✄✲ ✎✓✑ ✠✡☛☛✡☞
✹✺ ✎✔✕ ✌
✱✆✻✫✭✆
✎✔✑ ✍ ✖✗✖✘✙✚
✛✜✢✣✤ ✧
✂☞✠ ✦
✥
✠✩✝✄✪✫✄✬ ✭✄✮✬✆
✶✵✩✷✸✱ ✭✩✝✄✪✫✄✬ ✭✄✮✬✆ ✷☎✫✸❪ ✲✆✵❫✫✸✄✬ ◗▼✄

✯✰✫✆✬✱✆✱ ❴✲✰✆✵✸✆✲ ✭✄✮✬✆

✁✁✂✄☎✆✝✞✟ ❃❄❅✤ ✏ ✧
☛☛ ❋✫✮✆✵✝
✩✴✲✫✭ ✭✄✮✬✆ ❆❇❈ ❉❇❈ ✁✁✂✄☎✆✝❂✟ ❃❄❅✤ ✒
❆❇● ❉❇● ✁✁✂✄☎✆✝❂✟ ❃❄❅✤ ✓
✯✰✫✆✬✱✆✱ ✲✳✫☎✲✆✱✝✴✄✫✵ ✭✄✮✬✆
✎✏✑ ✌
✗✼✔✽✾
✎✒✑ ✍
✿❀❁✒
✶✵✩✷✸✱ ✄✲ ✎✓✑ ✠✡☛☛✡☞
✹✺ ✎✔✕ ✌
✱✆✻✫✭✆
✎✔✑ ✍ ✖✗✖✘✙✚
✛✜✢✣✤ ✧
✂☞✠ ✦
✥
✠✩✝✄✪✫✄✬ ✭✄✮✬✆
✶✵✩✷✸✱ ✭✩✝✄✪✫✄✬ ✭✄✮✬✆ ✷☎✫✸❪ ✲✆✵❫✫✸✄✬ ◗▼✄

✁✁✂✄☎✆✝✞✟ ❃❄❅✤ ✏ ★
✯✰✫✆✬✱✆✱ ❴✲✰✆✵✸✆✲ ✭✄✮✬✆
✁✁✂✄☎✆✝✞✟ ❃❄❅✤ ✒

✁✁✂✄☎✆✝✞✟ ❃❄❅✤ ✓
✯✰✫✆✬✱✆✱ ✲✳✫☎✲✆✱✝✴✄✫✵ ✭✄✮✬✆
✎✏✑ ✌
✗✼✔✽✾
✎✒✑ ✍
✿❀❁✒
✶✵✩✷✸✱ ✄✲ ✎✓✑ ✠✡☛☛✡☞
✹✺ ✎✔✕ ✌
✱✆✻✫✭✆
✎✔✑ ✍ ✖✗✖✘✙✚
✛✜✢✣✤ ✧
✂☞✠ ✦
✥
✠✩✝✄✪✫✄✬ ✭✄✮✬✆
✶✵✩✷✸✱ ✭✩✝✄✪✫✄✬ ✭✄✮✬✆ ✷☎✫✸❪ ✲✆✵❫✫✸✄✬ ◗▼✄

✯✰✫✆✬✱✆✱ ❴✲✰✆✵✸✆✲ ✭✄✮✬✆

❙❚❯❙❚❚❱❲❳❨❩❬❭ ❃❄❅✤ ✏ ❘
☛☛ ❋✫✮✆✵✝
❆❇❈ ❉❇❈ ✁✁✂✄☎✆✝❂✟ ❃❄❅✤ ✒
✩✴✲✫✭ ✭✄✮✬✆
❆❇● ❉❇● ✁✁✂✄☎✆✝❂✟ ❃❄❅✤ ✓
✯✰✫✆✬✱✆✱ ✲✳✫☎✲✆✱✝✴✄✫✵ ✭✄✮✬✆
✎✏✑ ✌
✗✼✔✽✾
✎✒✑ ✍
✿❀❁✒
✶✵✩✷✸✱ ✄✲ ✎✓✑ ✠✡☛☛✡☞
✹✺ ✎✔✕ ✌
✱✆✻✫✭✆
✎✔✑ ✍ ✖✗✖✘✙✚
✛✜✢✣✤ ✧
✂☞✠ ✦
✥
✠✩✝✄✪✫✄✬ ✭✄✮✬✆
✶✵✩✷✸✱ ✭✩✝✄✪✫✄✬ ✭✄✮✬✆ ✷☎✫✸❪ ✲✆✵❫✫✸✄✬ ◗▼✄ ■❏❑▲▲▼◆❖P✠◗✺

Figure 35: CPU module wiring when using a Process Bus Module

4.5.9.2 RS232 PORT

On the enhanced and basic front panels is a nine-pin RS232C serial port for programming with a computer. All that
is required to use this interface is a computer running the EnerVista UR Setup software provided with the relay.
Cabling for the RS232 port is shown in the following figure for the nine-pin connector on the UR and nine or 25-pin
connector on a computer.
The baud rate for this port can be set, with a default of 115200 bps.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 95
Chapter 4 - Installation

✵✽✾✿❀ ❁❂✿❃❄ ❅ ❁❆✿ ✝☞✲✳✲ ☛✽✾❇✽❂❈ ❁✾✽❀

❉❊ ✍❋✠
✲❊ ●✒❍■❏
✳❊ ●✝❍■❏
✝✞✟✠✡
☛✞✝☞✌✍✠✟ ❑❊ ✍❋✠
✎✌✏☛✑✒✞✝ ▲❊ ●☞▼✍■❏ ☞❆❇✿❂❄ ▼✽✾◆✿❖
✤☎✁✜✙ ✘✖✜✔✗ P❊ ✍❋✠
✘☎✁✣☎✖✂ ✘✁☎✙ ◗❊ ✍❋✠
❘❊ ✍❋✠
❅❊ ✍❋✠

✢ ✘✕✜
☎✓✆✚✆ ☎✓✆✚✆
✛ ✁✜✜✔ ✙✁☎ ✛ ✁✜✜✔ ✙✁☎
✑✝☞✲✳✲ ✴✍✒✞✝✵✠✎✞
✁✂✄ ✁☎ ✁✂✆
☎✔✗✖✰ ✁✂✘✱✙✔☎ ✓✔☎✕✖✗ ✘✁☎✙
✥ ✥ ✫ ✷✆✸✸✶✷✖✚✹✺✻✼
✙✯✛ ✦ ✦ ✧ ☎✯✛
☎✯✛ ✧ ✧ ✦ ✙✯✛
★ ★ ✦✭
✓✣✜✛ ✩ ✩ ✪ ✓✣✜✛
✮ ✮ ✮
✪ ✪ ★
✫ ✫ ✩
✬ ✬ ✦✦

✢ ✘✕✜ ✆✶ ✘✕✜
✁✜✜✔ ✙✁☎ ✁✜✜✔ ✙✁☎

Figure 36: RS232 front panel port connection

4.5.9.3 RS485 PORT

RS485 data transmission and reception are accomplished over a single twisted-pair wire with transmit and receive
data alternating over the same two wires.
Through the use of the port, continuous monitoring and control from a remote computer, SCADA system, or Power
Line Carrier (PLC) is possible.
To minimize errors from noise, the use of shielded twisted-pair wire is recommended. Correct polarity must be
observed. For instance, the relays must be connected with all RS485 “+” terminals connected together, and all
RS485 “–” terminals connected together. Though data is transmitted over a two-wire twisted pair, all RS485 devices
require a shared reference, or common voltage. This common voltage is implied to be a power supply common.
Some systems allow the shield (drain wire) to be used as common wire and to connect directly to the relay COM
terminal (#3); others function correctly only if the common wire is connected to the COM terminal, but insulated from
the shield.
To avoid loop currents, ground the shield at only one point. If other system considerations require the shield to be
grounded at more than one point, insall resistors (typically 100 ohms) between the shield and ground at each
grounding point. Each relay needs to be daisy-chained to the next one in the link. A maximum of 32 relays can be
connected in this manner without exceeding driver capability. For larger systems, additional serial channels must be
added. It is also possible to use commercially available repeaters to have more than 32 relays on a single channel.
Avoid star or stub connections entirely.
Lightning strikes and ground surge currents can cause large momentary voltage differences between remote ends
of the communication link. For this reason, surge protection devices are provided internally at both communication
ports. An isolated power supply with an optocoupled data interface also acts to reduce noise coupling. To ensure
maximum reliability, ensure that all equipment has similar transient protection devices installed. Terminate both
ends of the RS485 circuit with an impedance as shown in the figure.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 96
Chapter 4 - Installation

t
✁✂✄✂ ☎ ✆✝✁ ☎ ✞✟✠✡☛☞✌✍ ✚✛✜✢✌✍✣✌✢ ✤✌✥✣✞✌
✦✧★✖✕✩ ✹❃★❄✑✖✩ ✏✙★✗
✴✸ ✵✶✷ ❅❆❇❈❉ ❊
✘✙✑✙ ✎✏✑✒✓✒✔✏✕✖✗ ✎✏✑✒✓✒✔✏✕✖✗ ✘✙✑✙
❅❆❇❈❉ ❋

●❍■

●❍■❏ ❇❈❉●❍■

▼✗✒✔✻✩ ❄✧★✖✕✩ ✙✑ ✦◆❖✘❖ P ◗❘◆ P

✓✒✺✏✔✑✖✗ ✟❙❑▲ ✒✗ ✙✑
❚❯❱❄✖✗★✖❄ ✩✖❲★✓✖ ✟❙❑▲ ✛✌❑✳▲
❅❆❇❈❉ ❊
✴✸ ✵✶✷ ✹✖✗✺★✻✙✑★✻✼ ★✺✏✖✩✙✻✓✖ ✙✑
✖✙✓✧ ✖✻✩ ✵✑✽✏★✓✙✕✕✽ ✾✿❀ ❁ ✙✻✩ ✾ ✻❂✷ ❅❆❇❈❉ ❋

●❍■❏ ❇❈❉●❍■

❚✏ ✑✒ ❳✿ ✩✖❲★✓✖❄❨
✺✙❩★✺✔✺ ❬❀❀❀ ❭✖✖✑
✵✾✿❀❀ ✺✷
✛✌❑✳▲
✴✸ ✵✶✷
❅❆❇❈❉ ❊
❅❆❇❈❉ ❋

●❍■❏ ❇❈❉●❍■ ✝✳✢☞ ✤✌✥✣✞✌

✪✫✬✬✭✬✮✮✯✰✱✲

Figure 37: RS485 serial connection

4.5.9.4 100BASEFX FIBER OPTIC PORTS

The fiber-optic communication ports allow for fast and efficient communications between relays at 100 Mbps.
Optical fiber can be connected to the relay supporting a wavelength of 1310 nm in multimode.
Ensure that the dust covers are installed when the fiber is not in use. Dirty or scratched connectors can lead to high
losses on a fiber link.

4.5.9.5 IRIG-B
There is a round IRIG-B connector at the back of the CPU module, marked "IN." Use is optional. IRIG-B is a
standard time code format that allows stamping of events to be synchronized among connected devices. The IRIG-
B code allows time accuracies of up to 100 ns. The GE MultiSync 100 1588 GPS Clock as well as third-party
equipment are available for generating the IRIG-B signal. This equipment can use a global positioning system
(GPS) satellite system to obtain the time reference so that devices at different geographic locations can be
synchronized. The IRIG time code formats are serial, pulse width-modulated codes that can be either DC level
shifted or amplitude modulated (AM). Using IRIG-B input, the relay operates an internal oscillator with 1 μs
resolution and accuracy.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 97
Chapter 4 - Installation

✔✕✖ ✗✘✙✙✚✗✛✜✘✙ ✁✍✎ ✏✟✑✌☛☛✡✑✌ ✏✒✏✑✌✓

❱❲
✮✯✮✰✱✲ ❤❞ ❵❛❵❜❝❞ ❡❥❣
✳✴✵✶ ✷✸✹✶ ✺✶✻✶✼✽✳✸✼ ❤✐ ❵❛❵❜❝❞ ❡❢❣
✁✂✄☎✂✆ ✝✞✟✠✡✟☛ ✝✟☞☛✌ ✌✝✌✡❴✌❯
✾✿❀❁❂❃❄❅❆ ❇❈ ✢
❉❊❋●❄❆❍■❏ ❊❇■❍●❉❆❏■ ❳❨❩ ❬❭❪❫
❂❄❑▲❉● ▼❉▲ ◆❏ ❍❂❏■❖

✔✕✖ ✗✘✙✙✚✗✛✜✘✙ ✁✍✎ ✏✟✑✌☛☛✡✑✌ ✏✒✏✑✌✓

✮✯✮✰✱✲
✳✴✵✶ ✷✸✹✶ ✺✶✻✶✼✽✳✸✼ ❱❲
✎P✡✌☛◗✌◗ ✑❘✡✏✑✌◗❙❚✟✡❯ ✝✟☞☛✌
✢ ❤❞ ❵❛❵❜❝❞ ❡❥❣
✾✿❀❁❂❃❄❅❆ ❇❈
❉❊❋●❄❆❍■❏ ❊❇■❍●❉❆❏■ ❤✐ ❵❛❵❜❝❞ ❡❢❣
❂❄❑▲❉● ▼❉▲ ◆❏ ❍❂❏■❖ ✌✝✌✡❴✌❯
❳❨❩ ❬❭❪❫

✣✤✥✥✦✧★✩✪✫✬✭
Figure 38: Options for IRIG-B connection

Note:
Using an amplitude-modulated receiver causes errors up to 1 ms in event time stamping.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 98
Chapter 4 - Installation

4.6 INTER-RELAY COMMUNICATIONS

4.6.1 DIRECT INPUT AND OUTPUT COMMUNICATIONS

The direct inputs and outputs feature makes use of the type 7 series of communications modules and allows direct
messaging between UR devices. The communications modules are outlined in the table later in this section.
The communications channels are normally connected in a ring configuration, as shown in the following figure. The
transmitter of one module is connected to the receiver of the next module. The transmitter of this second module is
then connected to the receiver of the next module in the ring. This is continued to form a communications ring. The
figure illustrates a ring of four UR-series relays with the following connections: UR1-Tx to UR2-Rx, UR2-Tx to UR3-
Rx, UR3-Tx to UR4-Rx, and UR4-Tx to UR1-Rx. A maximum of 16 URs can be connected in a single ring.

✡☛
☞✌ ✍
✌☛

✡☛
☞✌ ✎
✌☛

✡☛
☞✌ ✏
✌☛

✡☛
☞✌ ✑
✌☛

✁✂✄✄☎✆✂✝✞✟✠

Figure 39: Direct input and output single-channel connection

Inter-relay communication (IRC) modules with protocol C37.94 and G.703 are designed for back-to-back
communication connections, so the ring configuration shown in the previous figure does not apply. To establish
inter-relay communication in more than two URs, you need to have a two-channel IRC module and enable the
DIRECT I/O CHANNEL CROSSOVER setting in all relays, as shown in the next figure. This configuration can be
expanded to 16 URs, and this configuration does not provide a redundancy ring since both channels are made into
a single ring by the channel crossover function. As per the figure entitled Typical Pin Interconnection between Two
G.703 Interfaces later in this chapter, the clock is supplied typically by multiplexer (MUX) and all URs are in Loop
Timing Mode. If there is no MUX, then UR1 and UR3 can be in Internal Timing Mode and UR2 and UR4 can be in
Loop Timing Mode. That is, connected channels must have opposite timing modes.

✍✎✒ ✍✎✏ ✍✎✒ ✍✎✏

✁✂ ✁✑ ✒ ✁✂ ✁✂ ✁✑ ✏ ✁✂
✑✎✒ ✑✎✏ ✑✎✒ ✑✎✏

✍✎✒ ✍✎✏ ✍✎✒ ✍✎✏

✁✂ ✁✑ ✔ ✁✂ ✁✂ ✁✑ ✓ ✁✂
✑✎✒ ✑✎✏ ✑✎✒ ✑✎✏
✄☎✆✆✝✞✟✠✡☛☞✌
Figure 40: Ring configuration for C37.94 module (concept also applies to G.703)

The interconnection for dual-channel type 7 communications modules is shown as follows. Two-channel modules
allow for a redundant ring configuration. That is, two rings can be created to provide an additional independent data
path. The required connections are: UR1-Tx1 to UR2-Rx1, UR2-Tx1 to UR3-Rx1, UR3-Tx1 to UR4-Rx1, and UR4-
Tx1 to UR1-Rx1 for the first ring; and UR1-Tx2 to UR4-Rx2, UR4-Tx2 to UR3-Rx2, UR3-Tx2 to UR2-Rx2, and UR2-
Tx2 to UR1-Rx2 for the second ring.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 99
Chapter 4 - Installation

☛☞✌

✎☞✌
✍✎ ✌
☛☞✏

✎☞✏

☛☞✌

✎☞✌
✍✎ ✏
☛☞✏

✎☞✏

☛☞✌

✎☞✌
✍✎ ✑
☛☞✏

✎☞✏

☛☞✌

✎☞✌
✍✎ ✒
☛☞✏

✎☞✏

✁✂✄✄☎✆✝✞✟✠✡

Figure 41: Direct input and output dual-channel connection

The following figure shows the connection for three UR-series relays using two independent communication
channels. UR1 and UR3 have single type 7 communication modules; UR2 has a dual-channel module. The two
communication channels can be of different types, depending on the type 7 modules used. To allow the direct input
and output data to cross-over from channel 1 to channel 2 on UR2, set the DIRECT I/O CHANNEL CROSSOVER
setting to Enabled on UR2. This forces UR2 to forward messages received on Rx1 out Tx2, and messages
received on Rx2 out Tx1.

✓✔
✖✗ ✕
✗✔

☛☞✌✍✍✎✏ ✑

✓✔✕

✗✔✕
✖✗ ✘
✓✔✘

✗✔✘

☛☞✌✍✍✎✏ ✒

✓✔
✖✗ ✙
✗✔
✁✂✄☎✆✝✂✞✟✠✡

Figure 42: Direct input and output single/dual channel combination connection

The inter-relay communications modules are available with several interfaces and some are outlined here in more
detail. Those that apply depend on options purchased. The options are outlined in the Inter-Relay Communications
section of the Order Code tables in Chapter 2. All of the fiber modules use ST type connectors.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 100
Chapter 4 - Installation

4.6.2 FIBER LED AND ELED TRANSMITTERS

The following figure shows the configuration for the 7A, 7B, 7C, 7H, 7I, and 7J fiber-only modules.
✁✂ ✄✂ ☎✆✝ ✍✂ ✎✂ ☎✆✝
✞ ✟✠✝✡☛☞✌ ✏ ✟✠✝✡☛☞✌

✕✖✑ ✕✖✑

✗✖✑ ✗✖✑

✕✖✔

✗✖✔

✑ ✒✓☎✆✆☞☛ ✔ ✒✓☎✆✆☞☛✌
✘✙✚✛✚✜✢✙✣✤✥✦

Figure 43: LED and ELED fiber modules

4.6.3 FIBER LASER TRANSMITTERS

The following figure shows the configuration for the 72, 73, 7D, and 7K fiber-laser modules.
✘✞ ✄☎✙ ✘✚ ✘✣ ✄☎✙ ✘✤
✛✜✙✢✝✆✟ ✛✜✙✢✝✆✟

☛✡ ☛✡

✠✡ ✠✡

☛✡✞

✠✡✞

✁✂✄☎☎✆✝ ✞ ✁✂✄☎☎✆✝✟
☞✌✍✎✏✑✒✓✔✕✖✗

Figure 44: Laser fiber modules

The following figure shows configuration for the 2I and 2J fiber-laser modules.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 101
Chapter 4 - Installation

✖ ✄☎✗ ✘
✙✚✗✛✝✆✞

☛✠✡

✟✠✡

☛✠

✟✠

✁✂✄☎☎✆✝✞
☞✌✍☞✎✏✑✍✒✓✔✕

Figure 45: 2I and 2J laser fiber modules

Warning:
Do not look into the output of any fiber transmitter. This could cause serious eye
injury.

Note:
When using a laser Interface, attenuators can be necessary to ensure that you do not exceed the maximum optical input
power to the receiver

4.6.4 G.703 INTERFACE

G.703 is an International Telecommunications Union (ITU) standard for the transmission of data and voice signals.
Modules 7R (one channel) and 7S (two channels) apply.
The following figure shows the 64K ITU G.703 co-directional interface configuration. This is module 7S.
The G.703 module is fixed at 64 kbps. The SETTINGS > PRODUCT SETUP > DIRECT I/O > DIRECT I/O DATA
RATE setting is not applicable to this module.
AWG 24 twisted shielded pair wiring is recommended for external connections, with the shield grounded only at one
end. Connecting the shield to pin X1a or X6a grounds the shield since these pins are connected internally to
ground. Thus, if pin X1a or X6a is used to ground the shield at one end, do not ground the shield at the other end.
This interface module is protected by surge suppression devices.
✎ ✔✕✖✗✘✙ ✡✰☞
✍
✓✑ ✚ ✡✰✌
✲✳✴✵✶
✏✑ ✚ ✡✭☞
✷✸✹✺✺✻✼ ✾
✓✑ ✒ ✡✭✌
✏✑ ✒ ✡✱☞
✬
★ ✿❀❁❂✻ ✡✱✌
✩✥✫
✪ ✔✕✖✗✘✙ ✡✮☞
✩✤
★ ✓✑ ✚ ✡✮✌
✧
✦ ✲✳✴✵✶
✏✑ ✚ ✡✯☞
✦ ✷✸✹✺✺✻✼ ✽
✥ ✓✑ ✒ ✡✯✌
✤
✣
✢ ✏✑ ✒ ✡☛☞
✜✍
✛ ✿❀❁❂✻ ✡☛✌
✁✂✄✄☎✆☎✝✞✟✠

Figure 46: G.703 interface configuration

N60-1601-0125-861-1 102
Chapter 4 - Installation

The following figure shows the typical pin interconnection between two G.703 interfaces. For the actual physical
arrangement of these pins, see the Rear Terminal Layout section earlier in this chapter. All pin interconnections are
to be maintained for a connection to a multiplexer.
✆☎ ✡☛☞✌✍✎ ✦✂ ✦✂ ✡☛☞✌✍✎ ✆☎
✠✞ ✏ ✦✄ ✦✄ ✠✞ ✏
★✩✪✫✬ ✝✞ ✏ ✣✂ ✣✂ ✝✞ ✏ ★✩✪✫✬
✭✮✯✰✰✱✲ ✴ ✭✮✯✰✰✱✲ ✴
✠✞ ✟ ✣✄ ✣✄ ✠✞ ✟
✝✞ ✟ ✧✂ ✧✂ ✝✞ ✟
✢ ✢
✙✖ ✵✶✷✸✱ ✧✄ ✧✄ ✵✶✷✸✱ ✙✖
✜✚ ✜✚
✛✕ ✡☛☞✌✍✎ ✤✂ ✤✂ ✡☛☞✌✍✎ ✛✕
✚ ✚
✙ ✠✞ ✏ ✤✄ ✤✄ ✠✞ ✏ ✙
✘ ✘
✗ ★✩✪✫✬ ✝✞ ✏ ✥✂ ✥✂ ✝✞ ✏ ★✩✪✫✬ ✗
✗✖ ✭✮✯✰✰✱✲ ✳ ✭✮✯✰✰✱✲ ✳ ✗✖
✕ ✠✞ ✟ ✥✄ ✥✄ ✠✞ ✟ ✕
✔✓ ✔✓
✝✞ ✟ ✁✂ ✁✂ ✝✞ ✟
✒☎ ✒☎
✑ ✵✶✷✸✱ ✁✄ ✁✄ ✵✶✷✸✱ ✑
✹✺✻✼✽✼✾✿❀❁❂❃
Figure 47: Typical pin interconnection between two G.703 interfaces

Note:
Pin nomenclature differs from one manufacturer to another. It is not uncommon to see pinouts numbered TxA, TxB, RxA, and
RxB. In such cases, assume that “A” is equivalent to “+” and “B” is equivalent to “–.”

4.6.4.1 G.703 SELECTION SWITCH PROCEDURES

1. With the power to the relay off, remove the G.703 module (7R or 7S) as follows. Record the original location
of the module to help ensure that the same or replacement module is inserted into the correct slot.
2. Simultaneously pull the ejector/inserter clips located at the top and at the bottom of each module in order to
release the module for removal. (For more information on accessing modules, see the Maintenance chapter.)
3. Remove the module cover screw.
4. Remove the top cover by sliding it towards the rear and then lift it upwards.
5. Set the timing selection switches (channels 1 and 2) to the required timing modes.
6. Replace the top cover and the cover screw.
7. Re-insert the G.703 module. Take care to ensure that the correct module type is inserted into the correct slot
position. The ejector/inserter clips located at the top and bottom of each module must be in the disengaged
position as the module is inserted smoothly into the slot. Once the clips have cleared the raised edge of the
chassis, engage the clips simultaneously. When the clips have locked into position, the module is inserted
fully.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 103
Chapter 4 - Installation

✡✁☛☛✁☞ ✝✁✂✄☎

✌✍✄✝☛✁☎✎✏✑✆✄☎☛✄☎ ✝✒✏✠

✘✙✚✛✜

✔✕✑✑✄✒ ✖
✟✏☞✏✑✓ ✆✄✒✄✝☛✏✁✑
✆✞✏☛✝✔✄✆

✟✁✠ ✝✁✂✄☎

✔✕✑✑✄✒ ✗

✁✂✄☎ ✆✝☎✄✞
✌✍✄✝☛✁☎✎✏✑✆✄☎☛✄☎ ✝✒✏✠

✙✢✣✙
✤✥✦✧✧★✩✥✪✫✬✭
Figure 48: G.703 timing selection switch setting

Switches Function
OFF → octet timing disabled
S1
ON → octet timing 8 kHz
S5 = OFF and S6 = OFF → loop timing mode
S5 = ON and S6 = OFF → internal timing mode
S5 and S6
S5 = OFF and S6 = ON → minimum remote loopback mode
S5 = ON and S6 = ON → dual loopback mode

4.6.4.2 G.703 TIMING MODES

Note:
If octet timing is enabled (ON), this 8 kHz signal is asserted during the violation of bit 8 (LSB) necessary for connecting to
higher order systems. When relays are connected back-to-back, octet timing is disabled (OFF).

There are two timing modes for the G.703 module: internal timing mode and loop timing mode (default).
● Internal Timing Mode — The system clock is generated internally. Therefore, set the G.703 timing selection to
internal timing mode for back-to-back (UR-to-UR) connections. For back-to-back connections, set octet timing
(S1 = OFF) and timing mode to internal timing (S5 = ON and S6 = OFF).
● Loop Timing Mode — The system clock is derived from the received line signal. Therefore, set the G.703
timing selection to loop timing mode for connections to higher order systems. For connection to a higher
order system (URto-multiplexer, factory defaults), set to octet timing (S1 = ON) and set timing mode to loop
timing (S5 = OFF and S6 = OFF).
The switch settings for the internal and loop timing modes are shown.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 104
Chapter 4 - Installation

✖✔✔✗ ☞✑✒✑☛✓ ✒✔✕✌

✡☛☞✌✍☛✎✏ ☞✑✒✑☛✓ ✒✔✕✌
✘✙✎✚☞✔✍✛ ✕✌✙✎✜✏☞✢

✁✂✄☎✂✆✂✝✞✟✠

Figure 49: Switch settings for timing modes

4.6.4.3 G.703 TEST MODES

In minimum remote loopback mode, the multiplexer is enabled to return the data from the external interface without
any processing to assist in diagnosing G.703 line-side problems irrespective of clock rate. Data enters from the G.
703 inputs, passes through the data stabilization latch that also restores the proper signal polarity, passes through
the multiplexer, and then returns to the transmitter. The differential received data is processed and passed to the G.
703 transmitter module after which point the data is discarded. The G.703 receiver module is fully functional and
continues to process data and passes it to the differential Manchester transmitter module. Since timing is returned
as it is received, the timing source is expected to be from the G.703 line side of the interface.

✝✞✟ ✠ ✝✡☛☛☞✌☞✍✎✡✏✑ ✞✏✍✒✓☞✔✎☞✌ ✌☞✒☞✡✕☞✌

✁✂ ☎✆✄ ✝✞✖ ✠ ✝✡☛☛☞✌☞✍✎✡✏✑ ✞✏✍✒✓☞✔✎☞✌ ✎✌✏✍✔✗✡✎✎☞✌
✘✙✖ ✠ ✘✚✙✛✜ ✎✌✏✍✔✗✡✎✎☞✌
✘✙✟ ✠ ✘✚✙✛✜ ✌☞✒☞✡✕☞✌

✁✄ ☎✆✂
✢✣✤✥✥✣✦✧★✩✪✫
Figure 50: G.703 minimum remote loopback mode

In dual loopback mode, the multiplexers are active and the functions of the circuit are divided into two with each
receiver/transmitter pair linked together to deconstruct and then reconstruct their respective signals. Differential
Manchester data enters the Differential Manchester receiver module and then is returned to the differential
Manchester transmitter module. Likewise, G.703 data enters the G.703 receiver module and is passed through to
the G.703 transmitter module to be returned as G.703 data. Because of the complete split in the communications
path and because, in each case, the clocks are extracted and reconstructed with the outgoing data, in this mode
there must be two independent sources of timing. One source lies on the G.703 line side of the interface while the
other lies on the differential Manchester side of the interface.

✝✞✟ ✠ ✝✡☛☛☞✌☞✍✎✡✏✑ ✞✏✍✒✓☞✔✎☞✌ ✌☞✒☞✡✕☞✌

✁✂ ☎✆✄ ✝✞✖ ✠ ✝✡☛☛☞✌☞✍✎✡✏✑ ✞✏✍✒✓☞✔✎☞✌ ✎✌✏✍✔✗✡✎✎☞✌
✘✙✖ ✠ ✘✚✙✛✜ ✎✌✏✍✔✗✡✎✎☞✌
✘✙✟ ✠ ✘✚✙✛✜ ✌☞✒☞✡✕☞✌

✁✄ ☎✆✂
✢✣✤✥✥✦✧★✩✪✫✬
Figure 51: G.703 dual loopback mode

4.6.5 RS422 INTERFACE

Depending on your model, there are either two or three RS422 inter-relay communications modules available
(modules 7T, 7W and 7V respectively). The three-channel module also has a dual-clock. The modules can be
configured to run at 64 or 128 kbps. You should use AWG 24 twisted shielded pair cable should for exernal
connections. These modules are protected by optically-isolated surge suppression devices.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 105
Chapter 4 - Installation

Note:
For applicable models, module 7V is intended for use with two independent channel banks with two independent clocks, i.e
for situations where a single clock for both channels is not acceptable

The shield pins (6a and 7b) are connected internally to the ground pin (8a). Proper shield termination is as follows:
● Site 1 — Terminate shield to pins 6a or 7b or both
● Site 2 — Terminate shield to COM pin 2b
The clock terminating impedance should be matched with the impedance of the line.
✡✏✞✑✄✟☎✆✝✂✞✞✟✄ ✠✡☛☞☞ ✌✍✎✁✄✟ ✁✂✄☎✆✝✂✞✞✟✄ ✠✡☛☞☞ ✌✍✎✁✄✟
❝✴ ✿✽ ❀ ✯❑✱ ✵✴ ✿✽ ❀ ✯❑✱
❍❉ ✼✽ ❀ ✯❑✳ ✼✽ ❀ ✯❑✳
❆●❊ ◆❖P◗◗ ✿✽ ✾ ✯▼✳ ◆❖P◗◗ ✿✽ ✾ ✯▼✳
❘❙❚❯❯❱❲ ❳ ❘❙❚❯❯❱❲ ❳
❋❅ ✼✽ ✾ ✯■✱ ✼✽ ✾ ✯■✱
❊❉
❈ ✶✷✸✹✺✻ ✯▲✳ ✶✷✸✹✺✻ ✯▲✳
❇ ✾ ✯✰✳ ✿✽ ❀ ✯❏✱
❇❆ ❭❲❪❘❫
❅ ❀ ✯✲✱ ❍❉ ✼✽ ❀ ✯❏✳
❄❄ ◆❖P◗◗
❃❂ ❭❪❴❴❪❯ ❵❛❜ ✯▼✱ ❊❆● ❘❙❚❯❯❱❲ ◗ ✿✽ ✾ ✯■✳
❁ ❖❨❩❬❱ ✯✲✳ ❋❅ ✼✽ ✾ ✯▲✱
❊❉
❈ ✶✷✸✹✺✻ ✯✰✱
❇ ✿✽ ❀ ✯✰✳
❇❆ ❭❲❪❘❫
❅ ✼✽ ❀ ✯✲✱
❄❄
❃❂ ❭❪❴❴❪❯ ❵❛❜ ✯▼✱
✒ ✓✔✕✓✖✗✘✙✚ ✘✛✙ ✚✜✢✘ ✣✢✚✓✘✓✢✔ ❁ ❖❨❩❬❱ ✯✲✳
✤✥✦✧✧★✩✪✫✬✭✮
Figure 52: RS422 interface connections

The following figure shows the typical pin interconnection between two single-channel RS422 interfaces installed in
slot W. All pin interconnections are to be maitained for a connection to a multiplexer.

Tx – W3b W3b Tx –
7T

7T
Rx – W3a W3a Rx –
RS422 communications

RS422 communications
RS422 Tx + W2a W2a Tx + RS422
channel 1 channel 1
Rx + W4b W4b Rx +
Shield W6a W6a Shield
+ W7a W7a +
Clock Clock
– W8b W8b –
Common COM W2b W2b COM Common
Surge W8a W8a Surge
+ –

Clock
831809A3.CDR

Figure 53: Typical pin interconnection between two RS422 interfaces

4.6.5.1 TWO-CHANNEL APPLICATION VIA MULTIPLEXERS

The RS422 interface can be used for single-channel or two-channel applications over SONET/SDH or multiplexed
systems. When used in single-channel applications, the RS422 interface links to higher-order systems in a typical
way, observing transmit (Tx), receive (Rx), and send timing (ST) connections. However, when used in two-channel
applications, certain criteria must be followed since there is one clock input for the two RS422 channels. The
system functions correctly when the following connections are observed and your data module has a terminal timing
feature. Terminal timing is a common feature in most synchronous data units that allows the module to accept
timing from an external source. Using the terminal timing feature, two-channel applications can be achieved if these
connections are followed: the send timing outputs from the multiplexer (data module 1) connects to the clock inputs
of the UR RS422 interface in the usual way. In addition, the send timing outputs of data module 1 are also
paralleled to the terminal timing inputs of data module 2. By using this configuration, the timing for both data
modules and both UR RS422 channels is derived from a single clock source. As a result, data sampling for both of

N60-1601-0125-861-1 106
Chapter 4 - Installation

the UR RS422 channels is synchronized via the send timing leads on data module 1, shown as follows. If the
terminal timing feature is not available or this type of connection is not wanted, the G.703 interface is a viable option
that does not impose timing restrictions.
✁✂✁ ✄☎✆✝✞✟ ✠
☛☞✌✍✁✞ ✍✁✄✟
❃❂ ❊❋●❍■❏ ✼✿✾ ✎✏✑✒✓ ✔ ✎✕✖✗ ✗✘✙✘
❊❋●❍▲❏ ✼❪❀ ✎✏✑✥✓ ✔ ✎✕✖✗ ✗✘✙✘
❛❜❝❞❞ ▼❋●❍■❏ ✦✏✑✒✓ ✔ ✦✕✧✕✢★✕✗ ✗✘✙✘
❡❢❣❤❤✐❥ ❦ ✼❵❀
▼❋●❍▲❏ ✼❪✾ ✦✏✑✥✓ ✔ ✦✕✧✕✢★✕✗ ✗✘✙✘
❄❅❆❇❈❉ ✼❴✾ ✦✎✑✒✓ ✔ ✦✕✩✪✕✫✙ ✙✬ ✫✕✖✗ ✑✦✚✎✓
■ ✼✽✾ ✦✎✑✥✓ ✔ ✦✕✩✪✕✫✙ ✙✬ ✫✕✖✗ ✑✦✚✎✓
❡❥❧❡♠ ▲ ✼❁❀ ✦✚✑✒✓ ✔ ✦✕✧✕✢★✕ ✙✢✜✢✖✤
❘❨ ❊❋❑❍■❏
❱❩ ✼❵✾ ✦✚✑✥✓ ✔ ✦✕✧✕✢★✕ ✙✢✜✢✖✤
❭❬ ❊❋❑❍▲❏ ✼❫❀ ✭✎✑✒✓ ✔ ✭✣✕✘✛ ✚✬ ✫✕✖✗
❯❩ ❛❜❝❞❞
❨❳ ❡❢❣❤❤✐❥ ❞ ▼❋❑❍■❏ ✼❴❀ ✭✎✑✥✓ ✔ ✭✣✕✘✛ ✚✬ ✫✕✖✗
❲ ▼❋❑❍▲❏ ✼❫✾ ✮✬✧✘✣ ✣✬✬✯✰✘✧✱
❲❱
❯ ❄❅❆❇❈❉ ✼✽❀ ✦✕✜✬✙✕ ✣✬✬✯✰✘✧✱
❚❚ ❡❧♣♣❧❤ ◆❖P ✎✢✤✖✘✣ ✤✛✬✪✖✗
❙❘ ✼✿❀
◗ ❜♥❛♦✐ ✼❁✾ ✎✚✑✒✓ ✔ ✎✕✖✗ ✙✢✜✢✖✤
✎✚✑✥✓ ✔ ✎✕✖✗ ✙✢✜✢✖✤

✁✂✁ ✄☎✆✝✞✟ ✡
☛☞✌✍✁✞ ✍✁✄✟
✚✚✑✒✓ ✔ ✚✕✛✜✢✖✘✣ ✙✢✜✢✖✤
✚✚✑✥✓ ✔ ✚✕✛✜✢✖✘✣ ✙✢✜✢✖✤
✎✏✑✒✓ ✔ ✎✕✖✗ ✗✘✙✘
✎✏✑✥✓ ✔ ✎✕✖✗ ✗✘✙✘
✦✏✑✒✓ ✔ ✦✕✧✕✢★✕✗ ✗✘✙✘
✦✏✑✥✓ ✔ ✦✕✧✕✢★✕✗ ✗✘✙✘
✦✎✑✒✓ ✔ ✦✕✩✪✕✫✙ ✙✬ ✫✕✖✗ ✑✦✚✎✓
✦✎✑✥✓ ✔ ✦✕✩✪✕✫✙ ✙✬ ✫✕✖✗ ✑✦✚✎✓
✭✎✑✒✓ ✔ ✭✣✕✘✛ ✚✬ ✫✕✖✗
✭✎✑✥✓ ✔ ✭✣✕✘✛ ✚✬ ✫✕✖✗
✮✬✧✘✣ ✣✬✬✯✰✘✧✱
✦✕✜✬✙✕ ✣✬✬✯✰✘✧✱
✎✢✤✖✘✣ ✤✛✬✪✖✗
✎✚✑✒✓ ✔ ✎✕✖✗ ✙✢✜✢✖✤
✎✚✑✥✓ ✔ ✎✕✖✗ ✙✢✜✢✖✤
✲✳✴✵✶✶✷✳✸✹✺✻
Figure 54: Timing configuration for RS422 two-channel, three-terminal application

Data module 1 provides timing to the RS422 interface via the ST(A) and ST(B) outputs. Data module 1 also
provides timing to data module 2 TT(A) and TT(B) inputs via the ST(A) and AT(B) outputs. The data module pin
numbers have been omitted in the figure because they vary by manufacturer.

4.6.5.2 TRANSMIT TIMING

The RS422 interface accepts one clock input for transmit timing. It is important that the rising edge of the 64 kHz
transmit timing clock of the multiplexer interface is sampling the data in the center of the transmit data window.
Therefore, it is important to confirm clock and data transitions to ensure proper system operation. For example, the
following figure shows the positive edge of the Tx clock in the center of the Tx data bit.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 107
Chapter 4 - Installation

✠✡ ☛☞✌☛✍

✠✡ ✎✏✑✏

✁✂✄✁✁☎✂✆✝✞✟

Figure 55: Clock and data transitions

4.6.5.3 RECEIVE TIMING

The RS422 interface utilizes NRZI-MARK modulation code and therefore does not rely on an Rx clock to recapture
data. NRZI-MARK is an edge-type, invertible, self-clocking code.
To recover the Rx clock from the data-stream, an integrated digital phase lock loop (DPLL) circuit is utilized. The
DPLL is driven by an internal clock, which is 16-times over-sampled, and uses this clock along with the data-stream
to generate a data clock that can be used as the serial communication controller (SCC) receive clock.

4.6.6 TWO-CHANNEL TWO-CLOCK RS422 INTERFACE

The two-channel two-clock RS422 interface (module 7V) is for use with the synchrophasor feature. The figure
shows the module connections.
✗❱✔❲✏✕✑✒✓✎✔✔✕✏ ✖✗✘✙✙ ✚✛✜✍✏✕ ✌✍✎✏✑✒✓✎✔✔✕✏ ✖✗✘✙✙ ✚✛✜✍✏✕ ✌✍✎✏✑✒✓✎✔✔✕✏ ✜✍✎✏✑✒✏✛✒❨ ✖✗✘✙✙ ✚✛✜✍✏✕

❳✧ ✲✰ ✳ ✢❃✤ ★✧ ✲✰ ✳ ✢❃✤ ❝✧ ✲✰ ✳ ✢❃✤

❀✼ ✯✰ ✳ ✢❃✦ ✯✰ ✳ ✢❃✦ ✯✰ ✳ ✢❃✦
❆❇❈❉❉ ✲✰ ✱ ✢❅✦ ❆❇❈❉❉ ✲✰ ✱ ✢❅✦ ❆❇❈❉❉ ✲✰ ✱ ✢❅✦
✽✹✿ ❊❋●❍❍■❏ ❑ ❊❋●❍❍■❏ ❑ ❊❋●❍❍■❏ ❑
✸✾✽ ✯✰ ✱ ✢❁✤ ✯✰ ✱ ✢❁✤ ✯✰ ✱ ✢❁✤
✼✻ ✩✪✫✬✭✮ ✢❄✦ ✩✪✫✬✭✮ ✢❄✦ ✩✪✫✬✭✮ ✢❄✦
✺ ✱ ✢✣✦ ✲✰ ✳ ✢❂✤ ✲✰ ✳ ✢❂✤
✺✹ ❖❏P❊◗
✸ ✳ ✢✥✤ ✯✰ ✳ ✢❂✦ ✯✰ ✳ ✢❂✦
✷✷ ❀✼ ❆❇❈❉❉ ❆❇❈❉❉
✶✵ ❖P❘❘P❍ ❙❚❯ ✢❅✤ ✹✿✽ ✲✰ ✱ ✢❁✦ ✲✰ ✱ ✢❁✦
❊❋●❍❍■❏ ❉ ❊❋●❍❍■❏ ❉
✴ ❇▲▼◆■ ✢✥✦ ✾✸ ✯✰ ✱ ✢❄✤ ✯✰ ✱ ✢❄✤
✽✼ ❀✼
✻ ✩✪✫✬✭✮ ✢✣✤ ✹✿✽ ✩✪✫✬✭✮ ✢✣✤
✺ ✲✰ ✳ ✢✣✦ ✾✸ ✲✰ ✳ ✢✣✦
✺✹ ❖❏P❊◗ ✽✼ ❖❋●❍❍■❏ ❑
✸ ✯✰ ✳ ✢✥✤ ✻ ❊❏P❊◗ ✯✰ ✳ ✢✥✤
✷✷ ✺
✶✵ ❖P❘❘P❍ ❙❚❯ ✢❅✤ ✺✹ ❖❋●❍❍■❏ ❉ ✲✰ ✳ ✢❞✤
✴ ❇▲▼◆■ ✢✥✦ ✸ ❊❏P❊◗ ✯✰ ✳ ✢❞✦
✷✷
✶✵ ❖P❘❘P❍ ❙❚❯ ✢❅✤
✁✂✄✁☎✆✝✞✟ ✝✠✞ ✟✡☛✝ ☞☛✟✁✝✁☛✂ ✴ ❇▲▼◆■ ✢✥✦
❩❬❭❩❪❭❫❭❴❵❛❜
Figure 56: Two-channel two-clock RS422 interface connections

N60-1601-0125-861-1 108
Chapter 4 - Installation

4.6.7 RS422 AND FIBER INTERFACE

The following figure shows the combined RS422 plus fiberoptic interface configuration at 64 K baud. The 7L, 7M,
7N, 7P, and 74 modules are used in two-terminal with a redundant channel or three-terminal configurations where
channel 1 is employed via the RS422 interface (possibly with a multiplexer) and channel 2 via direct fiber.
AWG 20 to 24 twisted shielded pair wiring is recommended for external RS422 connections. Ground the shield only
at one end. For the direct fiber channel, address power budget issues properly.

Note:
When using a laser interface, attenuators can be necessary to ensure that you do not exceed maximum optical input power to
the receiver.

✓ ✚ ✍❈✏
✕ ✑ ❉❃❊✾❋ ✪
✑✓ ✙ ✾✿❀❁❁❂❃ ❄ ★ ✍❈✶
✔ ✘
✑✓ ✓✗✖ ❉❊●●❊❁ ❍■❏ ✍✹✶
✒ ✑
✑ ✦✧ ★ ✍✷✶
✩✧ ★ ✍✷✏
✺✻✼✽✽ ✦✧ ✪ ✍✹✏
✴ ✾✿❀❁❁❂❃ ❄
✘ ✩✧ ✪ ✍✵✶
✲✯✳
✗ ✛✜✢✣✤✥ ✍✸✏
✲✮
✘
✱ ❑▲▼❂❆
✭ ✰ ✁✂ ✄✁✂
✭ ✾✿❀❁❁❂❃ ✽
✚ ✰
✬ ✯
✫ ✮ ✻❅❆❇❂ ✍✎✏
☎✆✝✞✞✞✟✠✡☛☞✌

Figure 57: RS422 and fiber interface connection

4.6.8 G.703 AND FIBER INTERFACE

The following figure shows the combined G.703 plus fiber-optic interface configuration at 64 kbps. The 7E, 7F, 7G,
7Q, and 75 modules are used in configurations where channel 1 is employed via the G.703 interface (possibly with
a multiplexer) and channel 2 via direct fiber. AWG 24 twisted shielded pair wiring is recommended for external G.
703 connections connecting the shield to pin 1a at one end only. For the direct fiber channel, address power budget
issues properly. See previous sections for details on the G.703 and fiber interfaces.

Note:
When using a laser interface, attenuators can be necessary to ensure that you do not exceed the maximum optical input
power to the receiver.

✒
✕✏ ✏✙ ✢✣✤✥✦✧ ✌✵✶
✒✔ ✘✗ ★✛ ✩ ✌✵✎
✏✒ ✖ ✷✸✹✺✻
✓✏ ✼✽✾✿✿❀❁ ❂ ✚✛ ✩ ✌✴✶
✒✑ ★✛ ✜ ✌✴✎
✏ ✳✗
✱✮✲ ✚✛ ✜ ✌✍✶
✭✱✖ ❃❄❅❆❀ ✌✍✎
✰✗
✬ ✯ ❇❈❉❀❅ ✄✁✂
✏✫✪ ✮✯✭ ✼✽✾✿✿❀❁ ❊ ✁✂
✕
☎✆✝✞✞☎✟✝✠✡☛☞
Figure 58: G.703 and fiber interface connection

4.6.9 IEEE C37.94 INTERFACE

IEEE C37.94 is a standard interface between teleprotection equipment and digital multiplexers.
The UR-series IEEE C37.94 modules are designed to interface with IEEE C37.94 compliant digital multiplexers or
an IEEE C37.94 compliant interface converter for use with direct input and output applications. The IEEE C37.94
standard defines a point-to-point optical link for synchronous data between a multiplexer and a teleprotection

N60-1601-0125-861-1 109
Chapter 4 - Installation

device. Data speed is typically 64 kbps, but the standard provides for speeds up to 64n kbps, where n = 1, 2,…, 12.
The UR-series C37.94 communication modules are either 64 kbps (with n fixed at 1) or 128 kbps (with n fixed at 2).
The frame is a valid International Telecommunications Union (ITU-T) recommended G.704 pattern from the
standpoint of framing and data rate. The frame is 256 bits and is repeated at a frame rate of 8000 Hz, with a
resultant bit rate of 2048 kbps.
The specifications for the module are as follows:
● IEEE standard — C37.94 for 1 x 128 kbps optical fiber interface (modules 2G, 2H) or 2 x 64 kbps optical fiber
interface (other modules)
● Fiber-optic cable type — 50 nm or 62.5 μm core diameter optical fiber
● Fiber-optic mode — multimode
● Fiber-optic cable length — up to 2 km
● Fiber-optic connector — type ST
● Wavelength — 820 ±40 nm
● Connection — as per all fiber-optic connections, a Tx-to-Rx connection is required
The UR-series C37.94 module can be connected directly to any compliant digital multiplexer that supports the IEEE
C37.94 standard. The figure shows the concept.
✡☛☛☛ ☞✌✍✎✏✑
✒✓✔✕✖ ✓✗✘✕✖✒✙✚✕
✰✝✱✝✲✳✴
✁✂✄☎✆✝☎✄ ✵✶✴✲✝✷✴☎✸☎✆✹
✞☎✟✝✠☎ ✺✻✻✻ ✼✽✾✿❀❁
✠❂✵✷✴✝✳❃✲
✛✜ ✘✢ ✣ ✤✥
✦✧★✩✪✪✫★✬✭✮✯
Figure 59: IEEE C37.94 connection to compliant digital multiplexer

The UR-series C37.94 communication module can be connected to the electrical interface (G.703, RS422, or X.21)
of a non-compliant digital multiplexer via an optical-to-electrical interface converter that supports the IEEE C37.94
standard. The following figure shows the concept.

✶✷✷✷ ✸✹✺✻✼✣ ✜✢✣✍✍

★✤✽✦✧ ✤✥☞✦✧★✩✪✦ ✤✥☞✦✧★✩✪✦
✾✝✿✝✛❀❁
✁✂✄☎✆✝☎✄ ✑✒✒✒ ✓✔✕✖✗✘ ❂❃❁✛✝❄❁☎❅☎✆
✞☎✟✝✠☎ ✠✙✚✟☎✆✛☎✆ ❆✝✛❇ ✒✑❈✂✘❉❉
✡☛ ☞✌ ✍ ✎✏ ✝✚✛☎✆❊❀✠☎

✫✬✭✮✯✰✱✭✲✳✴✵
Figure 60: IEEE C37.94 connection to non-compliant digital multiplexer

In 2008, GE Grid Solutions released revised modules 76 and 77 for C37.94 communication to enable multi-ended
fault location functionality with firmware 5.60 release and higher. Revised 76 and 77 modules can be identified with
"Rev D" or "Rev E" printed on it and must be used on all ends of of relay communication for two and three terminal
applications with firmware 5.6 or higher.
It is possible to mix newer Rev D or Rev E modules with older Rev C modules with any firmware revision.
The UR-series C37.94 communication module has six switches to set the clock configuration. The following figure
shows the functions of these control switches.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 110
Chapter 4 - Installation

✗✕✕✘ ✌✒✓✒☞✔ ✓✕✖✍

☛☞✌✍✎☞✏✑ ✌✒✓✒☞✔ ✓✕✖✍ ✙✚✏✛✌✕✎✜ ✖✍✚✏✢✑✌✣

✁✂✄☎✆✝✂✞✟✠✡

Figure 61: Clock configuration switches

For the internal timing mode, the system clock is generated internally. Therefore, set the timing switch selection to
internal timing for relay 1 and loop timed for relay 2. There must be only one timing source configured.
For the looped timing mode, the system clock is derived from the received line signal. Therefore, set the timing
selection to loop timing mode for connections to higher order systems.
To remove the IEEE C37.94 communications module cover and set the switches:
1. With power to the relay off, remove the IEEE C37.94 module (type 2I, 2J, 76, or 77 module) as follows.
Record the original location of the module to help ensure that the same or replacement module is inserted
into the correct slot.
2. Simultaneously pull the ejector/inserter clips located at the top and bottom of each module in order to release
the module for removal.
3. Remove the module cover screw.
4. Remove the top cover by sliding it towards the rear and then lift it upwards.
5. Set the timing selection switches (channels 1 and 2) to the required timing modes (see description earlier).
6. Replace the top cover and the cover screw.
7. Re-insert the IEEE C37.94 module. Take care to ensure that the correct module type is inserted into the
correct slot position. The ejector/inserter clips located at the top and at the bottom of each module must be in
the disengaged position as the module is inserted smoothly into the slot. Once the clips have cleared the
raised edge of the chassis, engage the clips simultaneously. When the clips have locked into position, the
module is inserted fully.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 111
Chapter 4 - Installation

✡✁☛☛✁☞ ✝✁✂✄☎

✌✍✄✝☛✁☎✎✏✑✆✄☎☛✄☎ ✝✒✏✠

✘✙✚✛✜

✔✕✑✑✄✒ ✖
✟✏☞✏✑✓ ✆✄✒✄✝☛✏✁✑
✆✞✏☛✝✔✄✆

✟✁✠ ✝✁✂✄☎

✔✕✑✑✄✒ ✗

✁✂✄☎ ✆✝☎✄✞
✌✍✄✝☛✁☎✎✏✑✆✄☎☛✄☎ ✝✒✏✠

✙✢✣✙
✤✥✦✧✧★✩✥✪✫✬✭
Figure 62: IEEE C37.94 timing selection switch setting
Modules shipped since January 2012 have status LEDs that indicate the status of the DIP switches, as shown in the
following figure.

✁✂
✆✝✞ ✟✠✡☛☞✌✍✎✠✏✠✎✑ ✟✒✓
✕✖✗✗✘

✙✚ ☎✁✂
✛✜✢✣✤✥✦✧
★✜✩✩✪✫ ✬✭✪✮✯✰✱✫✲✳✰
✴✵✴✶
✷ ✸✹✺✪✪✰✯
✁✂

✁✄
❊✴❳✣ ✶ ✆✝✔ ✟✠✡☛☞✌✍✎✠✏✠✎✑ ✟✒✓

✻✰✸✹✪✭✸✺✯✬✼✽✽✲✾✿❀
✻✰✯❀ ❁✤✩❂❃✷✤✥✱❄✷✷✷
❅✺❆❀ ❁✤✩❂❃✷✩★✱✷✩✤❇ ☎✁✄
❁❈❉❊✻❋●✧✴❊❍✛●❃
★ ❇✩✩❂✥✢✱❇❄✷✤
P◗❘❙❚❯❱❚ ❱❲
■❏❑▲▼◆❖❏◆❏❑❏ ✁✄

✆✝✞ ✆❨❩✍☛ ✆❩✡❬✠❭❪❫❴✎✠❩✡ ✟✒✓

✆✝✔ ✆❨❩✍☛ ✆❩✡❬✠❭❪❫❴✎✠❩✡ ✟✒✓

❵❛❜❝❞ ❡❢❣❤ ❛❣✐❛ ❡❢❣❤ ❥❦✔❥❧♠✌✞♥✍♦❫

Figure 63: Status LEDs

The clock configuration LED status is as follows:

● Flashing green — loop timing mode while receiving a valid data packet
● Flashing yellow — internal mode while receiving a valid data packet
● Solid red — (switch to) internal timing mode while not receiving a valid data packet

N60-1601-0125-861-1 112
Chapter 4 - Installation

The link/activity LED status is as follows:

● Flashing green — FPGA is receiving a valid data packet
● Solid yellow — FPGA is receiving a "yellow bit" and remains yellow for each "yellow bit"
● Solid red — FPGA is not receiving a valid packet or the packet received is invalid

4.6.10 C37.94SM INTERFACE

The UR-series C37.94SM communication modules (2A and 2B) are designed to interface with modified IEEE
C37.94 compliant digital multiplexers or IEEE C37.94 compliant interface converters that have been converted from
820 nm multimode fiber optics to 1300 nm ELED single-mode fiber optics. The IEEE C37.94 standard defines a
point-to-point optical link for synchronous data between a multiplexer and a teleprotection device. This data is
typically 64 kbps, but the standard provides for speeds up to 64n kbps, where n = 1, 2,…, 12. The UR-series
C37.94SM communication module is 64 kbps only with n fixed at 1. The frame is a valid ITU-recommended G.704
pattern from the standpoint of framing and data rate. The frame is 256 bits and is repeated at a frame rate of 8000
Hz, with a resultant bit rate of 2048 kbps.
The specifications for the module are as follows:
● Emulated IEEE standard — Emulates C37.94 for 1 × 64 kbps optical fiber interface (modules set to n = 1 or
64 kbps)
● Fiber-optic cable type — 9/125 μm core diameter optical fiber
● Fiber-optic mode — Single-mode, ELED compatible with HP HFBR-1315T transmitter and HP HFBR-2316T
receiver
● Fiber-optic cable length — Up to 11.4 km
● Fiber-optic connector — Type ST
● Wavelength — 1300 ±40 nm
● Connection — As per all fiber-optic connections, a Tx-to-Rx connection is required
The UR-series C37.94SM communication module can be connected directly to any compliant digital multiplexer that
supports C37.94SM, as shown.
✡☛☞✌✍✎✏✑
✒✓✔✕✖ ✓✗✘✕✖✒✙✚✕

✁✂✄☎✆✝☎✄ ✱✝✲✝✳✴✵
✞☎✟✝✠☎ ✶✷✵✳✝✸✵☎✹☎✆
✺✻✼✽✻✾✿❀
✛✜ ✘✢ ✣✤ ✥✦
✧★✩✪✫✪✬✩✭✮✯✰
Figure 64: C37.94SM fiber interface

It also can be connected directly to any other UR-series relay with a C37.94SM module, as shown.
✙✚✛✜✢✣✤✥
✦✧★✩✪ ✧✫✬✩✪✦✭✮✩
✁✂✄☎✆✝☎✄ ✁✂✄☎✆✝☎✄
✞☎✟✝✠☎ ✡✝☛☞ ✞☎✟✝✠☎ ✡✝☛☞
✌✍✎✏✑✒✓✔ ✌✍✎✏✑✒✓✔
✕✖✞✗✘☎ ✕✖✞✗✘☎
✯✰ ✬✱ ✲✳ ✴✵
✶✷✸✹✺✶✻✸✼✽✾✿
Figure 65: C37.94SM fiber interface

In 2008, GE Grid Solutions released revised modules 2A and 2B for C37.94SM communication to enable multi-
ended fault location functionality with firmware 5.60 release and higher. All modules 2A and 2B shipped since the
change support this feature and are fully backward compatible with firmware releases below 5.60. For customers

N60-1601-0125-861-1 113
Chapter 4 - Installation

using firmware release 5.60 and higher, the module can be identified with "Rev D" printed on it and is to be used on
all ends of relay communication for two and three terminal applications. Failure to use it at all ends results in
intermittent communication alarms. For customers using firmware revisions below 5.60, it is not required to match
the revision of the modules installed.
The UR-series C37.94SM module has six switches that are used to set the clock configuration. The following figure
shows the functions of these control switches.
✗✕✕✘ ✌✒✓✒☞✔ ✓✕✖✍
☛☞✌✍✎☞✏✑ ✌✒✓✒☞✔ ✓✕✖✍ ✙✚✏✛✌✕✎✜ ✖✍✚✏✢✑✌✣

✁✂✄☎✆✝✂✞✟✠✡

Figure 66: Clock configuration switches

For the internal timing mode, the system clock is generated internally. Therefore, set the timing switch selection to
internal timing for relay 1 and loop timed for relay 2. There must be only one timing source configured.
For the looped timing mode, the system clock is derived from the received line signal. Therefore, set the timing
selection to loop timing mode for connections to higher-order systems.
To remove the C37.94SM communications module cover and set the switches:
1. With power to the relay off, remove the C37.94SM module (module 2A or 2B) as follows. Record the original
location of the module to help ensure that the same or replacement module is inserted into the correct slot.
2. Simultaneously pull the ejector/inserter clips located at the top and at the bottom of each module in order to
release the module for removal.
3. Remove the module cover screw.
4. Remove the top cover by sliding it towards the rear and then lift it upwards.
5. Set the timing selection switches (channels 1 and 2) to the required timing modes (see description earlier).
6. Replace the top cover and the cover screw.
7. Re-insert the C37.94SM module. Take care to ensure that the correct module type is inserted into the correct
slot position. The ejector/inserter clips located at the top and at the bottom of each module must be in the
disengaged position as the module is inserted smoothly into the slot. Once the clips have cleared the raised
edge of the chassis, engage the clips simultaneously. When the clips have locked into position, the module is
inserted fully.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 114
Chapter 4 - Installation

✡✁☛☛✁☞ ✝✁✂✄☎

✌✍✄✝☛✁☎✎✏✑✆✄☎☛✄☎ ✝✒✏✠

✘✙✚✛✜

✔✕✑✑✄✒ ✖
✟✏☞✏✑✓ ✆✄✒✄✝☛✏✁✑
✆✞✏☛✝✔✄✆

✟✁✠ ✝✁✂✄☎

✔✕✑✑✄✒ ✗

✁✂✄☎ ✆✝☎✄✞
✌✍✄✝☛✁☎✎✏✑✆✄☎☛✄☎ ✝✒✏✠

✙✢✣✙
✤✥✦✧✧★✩✥✪✫✬✭
Figure 67: C37.94SM timing selection switch setting

Note:
Modules shipped since January 2012 have status LEDs that indicate the status of the DIP switches, as shown in the following
figure.

✁✂
✆✝✞ ✟✠✡☛☞✌✍✎✠✏✠✎✑ ✟✒✓
✕✖✗✗✘

✙✚ ☎✁✂
✛✜✢✣✤✥✦✧
★✜✩✩✪✫ ✬✭✪✮✯✰✱✫✲✳✰
✴✵✴✶
✷ ✸✹✺✪✪✰✯
✁✂

✁✄
❊✴❳✣ ✶ ✆✝✔ ✟✠✡☛☞✌✍✎✠✏✠✎✑ ✟✒✓

✻✰✸✹✪✭✸✺✯✬✼✽✽✲✾✿❀
✻✰✯❀ ❁✤✩❂❃✷✤✥✱❄✷✷✷
❅✺❆❀ ❁✤✩❂❃✷✩★✱✷✩✤❇ ☎✁✄
❁❈❉❊✻❋●✧✴❊❍✛●❃
★ ❇✩✩❂✥✢✱❇❄✷✤
P◗❘❙❚❯❱❚ ❱❲
■❏❑▲▼◆❖❏◆❏❑❏ ✁✄

✆✝✞ ✆❨❩✍☛ ✆❩✡❬✠❭❪❫❴✎✠❩✡ ✟✒✓

✆✝✔ ✆❨❩✍☛ ✆❩✡❬✠❭❪❫❴✎✠❩✡ ✟✒✓

❵❛❜❝❞ ❡❢❣❤ ❛❣✐❛ ❡❢❣❤ ❥❦✔❥❧♠✌✞♥✍♦❫

Figure 68: Status LEDs

N60-1601-0125-861-1 115
Chapter 4 - Installation

The clock configuration LED status is as follows:

● Flashing green — loop timing mode while receiving a valid data packet
● Flashing yellow — internal mode while receiving a valid data packet
● Solid red — (switch to) internal timing mode while not receiving a valid data packet

The link/activity LED status is as follows:

● Flashing green — FPGA is receiving a valid data packet
● Solid yellow — FPGA is receiving a "yellow bit" and remains yellow for each "yellow bit"
● Solid red — FPGA is not receiving a valid packet or the packet received is invalid

N60-1601-0125-861-1 116
Chapter 4 - Installation

4.7 ACTIVATE RELAY

The relay is in the default “Not Programmed” state when it leaves the factory. When the relay is powered up, the
"Trouble" LED is on and the "In Service" LED is off. This "Not programmed state is evident on the screen display.
The relay in the “Not Programmed” state blocks all output relays from activating. This conditions remains until the
relay is explicitly put into “Programmed” state.
The relay can be activated either directly using the front panel or alternatively with the EnerVista software.
To activate the relay using the front panel:
1. Press the MENU key until the SETTINGS header flashes momentarily and the PRODUCT SETUP message
displays.
2. Press the right arrow until the SECURITY message displays.
3. Press the down arrow until the INSTALLATION message displays.
4. Press the right arrow until the RELAY SETTINGS: Not Programmed message displays
5. After the RELAY SETTINGS Not Programmed message displays, press a VALUE key to change the
selection to "Programmed."
6. Press the ENTER key to save the change.
7. When the NEW SETTING HAS BEEN STORED message appears, the relay is in the "Programmed" state and
the In Service LED turns on.
To activate the relay using EnerVista software:
1. Navigate to Settings > Product Setup > Installation and change the Relay Settings field to "Programmed."
2. Save the change.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 117
Chapter 4 - Installation

4.8 SOFTWARE INSTALLATION

4.8.1 ENERVISTA COMMUNICATION OVERVIEW

The EnerVista UR Setup software communicates to the relay via the front panel RS232 or USB port or the rear
RS485 / Ethernet ports.
To communicate via the RS232 port, use a standard straight-through serial cable. Connect the DB-9 male end to
the relay and the DB-9 or DB-25 female end to the computer COM2 port as described in the CPU Communication
Ports section earlier in this chapter.

✖☞✗✘✙✍✚✛
✜✙✍✡✌✙✛
✜☞✍✡☞✌

✠✡☛☞✌✍☞✡ ✤✥✦✧★✥
✎✏✑✎✏✏ ✒✓✔✕ ✩✧✦✦✪✫✬✩✭★✬✧✫✮ ✯✬✫✰
✱✧✩✭✯
✩✧✫★✲✧✯

❉✖❊✕☞✌✘☞✕ ❋✠●
❯❱❲❳❨❩❬❭❪ ✳✫✴✬✫✥✥✲

✒✙✢☞✣
✵✶ ✷✸✹✺✻✹✻✼ ✽✾✿❀
❁❂❃❃✸✼✻❁❄✺✻❂✼❅ ❁❂✼❆❇❈✺❇❈
✤▲▼◆❖ PP❖ ✰◗❘✮

✤▲❙❚❙

✁✂✄☎✆✝✞✟
✖☞✔✙✌✡✕

✁✂✄☎✆✝✞✟

❍✌✙■✓✛☞✕☛✙✙✡✘✍✗
❏✙✣✣✘✕✕✘✙✍✘✍✗
❑☞✡✡✘✍✗ ✜☛✚✍✗☞✕

❫❴❵❛❜❝❞❵❡❢❣❤
Figure 69: Relay communication options

To communicate through the relay's rear RS485 port from a computer RS232 port, the RS232/RS485 converter box
is required. This device (catalog number F485) connects to the computer using a straight-through serial cable. A
shielded twisted-pair wire (20, 22, or 24 AWG) connects the F485 converter to the rear communications port. The
converter terminals (+, –, GND) are connected to the communication module (+, –, COM) terminals. See the CPU
Communication Ports section in chapter 3 for details. The line is terminated with an R-C network (that is, 120 Ω, 1
nF) as described in this chapter.

4.8.2 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS

The relay front panel or the EnerVista UR Setup software can be used to communicate with the relay. The software
interface is the preferred method to edit settings and view actual values because the computer monitor can display
more information.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 118
Chapter 4 - Installation

The minimum system requirements for the EnerVista software are as follows:
● Intel Pentium processor (dual core) or (recommended) Core Duo
● One of the following operating systems in the required EnerVista language, such as English or French:
○ Windows 10
○ Windows Server 2008 Release 2 with Service Pack 1 (64-bit)
○ Windows Server 2012 Release 2 (64-bit)
○ Windows Server 2016
● 1 GB free hard drive space
● 2 GB RAM
● 1280 x 800 display screen

4.8.3 INSTALLING THE SOFTWARE

After ensuring that the requirements for using EnerVista UR Setup software are met, there are three ways to install
the software:
● Download EnerVista Launchpad software from https://www.gevernova.com/grid-solutions/multilin and install it
● Download the EnerVista UR Setup software from https://www.gevernova.com/grid-solutions/multilin and
install it
Install on a computer that has an operating system in the required language, for example a German operating
system for use with EnerVista software in German.
The software can be installed on one computer and used by one user, unless permission is granted otherwise.
To install the software:
1. Click the Install Now button and follow the instructions.
2. When installation is complete, start the EnerVista Launchpad application.
3. Click the IED Setup section of the Launch Pad window.
4. In the EnerVista Launch Pad window, click the Add Product button and select the appropriate product as
follows.
5. Select the product and click the Add Now button
6. Follow the instructions in the wizard to complete the process. The files are installed in the directory indicated,
and the installation program automatically creates icons and adds an entry to the Windows start menu.
7. For non-English software, configure the language for the front panel in the EnerVista software under Settings
> Product Setup > Display Properties. User-entered strings are not translated, for example relay names, so
setting the language now ensures that the names are entered/displayed in the required language. For the
EnerVista software language, access the View > Language menu item.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 119
Chapter 4 - Installation

4.9 ADD DEVICE TO SOFTWARE

You connect remotely to the relay through the rear RS485 or Ethernet port with a computer running the EnerVista
UR Setup software. The relay also can be accessed locally with a computer through the front panel RS232 or USB
port or the rear Ethernet port using the Quick Connect feature.
The following procedures are outlined:
● Add device for serial access; see the Configure Serial Connection section
● Add device for the rear Ethernet port; see the Configure Ethernet Connection section
● Add device for access using a modem; see the Configure Modem Connection section
● Connect locally with a computer through either the front RS232 or USB port or rear Ethernet port
● Discover automatically UR devices within a network; see the Automatic Discovery of UR Devices section
Devices in the Device Setup window are listed in the order entered.
Devices in the main software window are listed alphabetically. Use the Device Name to order them as required, for
example B30 Odessa, B30 Truro, B90, T35.
You cannot import a file to add a device to the software. You can import settings as outlined at the end of the
chapter. The Quick Connect button also can be used to add devices. The device is added to a Quick Connect menu
item in the Online Window area, cannot be moved from it to another grouping, and needs to be renamed in the
Device Setup window. GE instead recommends using the Device Setup window to add devices, as outlined here.

4.9.1 SET IP ADDRESS IN UR

The UR family supports the use of subnetworks as documented in RFC 950, which divides class-based networks
into subnetworks (non-CIDR). The classes and IP address ranges are defined as follows.
Classes IP address range Default subnet mask address UR devices
A 1.0.0.0 to 127.255.255.255 255.0.0 65,535 or more
B 128.0.0.0 to 191.255.255.255 255.255.0.0 255 to 65,534
C 192.0.0.0 to 23.255.255.255 255.255.255.0 0 to 254
D 224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255 (Reserved for multicasting)
E 240.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255 (Reserved)

Both network and subnet addresses are contained within a range. The number of hosts determines the class and
addresses as follows:
● Class A 255.0.0.0 — The first octet (255) specifies the network, the second to fourth octets (0) specify the
subnet and host. Use this class when you have more than 65,535 hosts (UR devices).
● Class B 255.255.0.0 — The first two octets (255) specify the network, the third octet (0) specifies the subnet,
and the fourth octet (0) specifies the host. Use this class when you have 255 to 65,534 hosts (UR devices).
● Class C 255.255.255.0 — The first three octets (255) specify the network and the last octet (0) specifies the
subnet and host. Use this class when you have up to 254 hosts (UR devices).
An example of implementation is one computer and one UR device. Because there is one UR device, class C
addressing is required. So we use UR 192.167.2.x with subnet mask 255.255.255.0 and computer 192.167.3.x with
subnet mask 255.255.255.0.
For older, non-CIDR routing protocols, such as RIP version 1, follow these restrictions:
● Identical subnet masks — Use a single mask for all subnets within a network
● Contiguous subnets — The subnets must be contiguous and not split among networks. The subnets cannot
pass traffic through other networks.
The IP and subnet addresses need to be added to the UR for Ethernet communication.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 120
Chapter 4 - Installation

For serial communication, for example using any front RS232 port and the Quick Connect feature, the addresses
are not required, but typically they are entered to add/configure devices for regular use.
To add the IP addresses:
1. On the front of the UR, press the MENU key until the SETTINGS menu displays.
2. Navigate to one of the ports under SETTINGS > PRODUCT SETUP > COMMUNICATIONS > NETWORK >
NETWORK PORT > PRT IP ADDRESS.
3. Enter an IP address and press the ENTER key to save the value.
4. In the same menu, select the PRT SUBNET IP MASK setting. Enter a subnet IP address. Press the ENTER
key to save the value.
5. When connecting through an Ethernet network, also configure the gateway address under SETTINGS >
PRODUCT SETUP > COMMUNICATIONS > IPv4 ROUTE TABLE > DEFAULT IPv4 ROUTE GATEWAY
ADDRESS. Press the ENTER key to save the value.
If using a blue or grey Ethernet cable, skip the rest of the this section. If this connection is to be permanent, always
use shielded twisted pair (STP) cable.
If using an orange cross-over Ethernet cable, the computer needs to be set up as follows.
1. Use an orange Ethernet cross-over cable to connect the computer to the rear Ethernet port. In case you need
it, the following figure shows the pinout for an Ethernet cross-over cable.
✪ ✫
✩ ✬ ❊✠✡ ✶ ❊✠✡ ✷
★ ✭ P☛☞ ❲☛✐❡ ❝✌✍✌✐ ✡☛❉✎✐❉✏ P☛☞ ❲☛✐❡ ❝✌✍✌✐ ✡☛❉✎✐❉✏
✧ ✮ ✑ ✒✓✔✕✖✗✘✙✚✛✜✖ ✑ ✒✓✔✕✖✗✜✙✖✖✛
✢ ❖✙✚✛✜✖ ✢ ●✙✖✖✛
✸ ✒✓✔✕✖✗✜✙✖✖✛ ✸ ✒✓✔✕✖✗✘✙✚✛✜✖
✹ ❇✣✤✖ ✹ ❇✣✤✖
✺ ✒✓✔✕✖✗✥✣✤✖ ✺ ✒✓✔✕✖✗✥✣✤✖
✻ ●✙✖✖✛ ✻ ❖✙✚✛✜✖
✼ ✒✓✔✕✖✗✥✙✘♦✛ ✼ ✒✓✔✕✖✗✥✙✘♦✛
✦ ❇✙✘♦✛ ✦ ❇✙✘♦✛
✽ ✁✂✄✄☎✆✝❈✞✟

Figure 70: Ethernet cross-over cable PIN layout

2. Navigate to the menu where you can set the IP properties
3. Enter an IP address with the first three numbers the same as the IP address of the relay and the last number
different (in this example, 1.1.1.2).
4. Enter a subnet mask equal to the one set in the relay (in this example, 255.0.0.0).
5. Confirm the values.

4.9.2 TEST ETHERNET CONNECTION

1. Open a Windows console window, for example by selecting Start > Run from the Windows Start menu and
typing cmd or clicking the Start button and entering cmd.
2. Type ping followed by a space, followed by the relevant IP address. (in this example, the IP address is
1.1.1.1)
C:\WINNT>ping 1.1.1.1
3. If the connection is successful, the system returns four replies similar to the following:
Pinging 1.1.1.1 with 32 bytes of data:
Reply from 1.1.1.1: bytes=32 time<10ms TTL=255
Reply from 1.1.1.1: bytes=32 time<10ms TTL=255
Reply from 1.1.1.1: bytes=32 time<10ms TTL=255
Reply from 1.1.1.1: bytes=32 time<10ms TTL=255
Ping statistics for 1.1.1.1:
Packets: Sent = 4, Received = 4, Lost = 0 (0% loss),
Approximate round trip time in milliseconds:
Minimum = 0ms, Maximum = 0ms, Average = 0 ms

N60-1601-0125-861-1 121
Chapter 4 - Installation

Note:
Note that the values for time and TTL vary depending on local network configuration.

4. If the following sequence of messages appears when entering the C:\WINNT>ping 1.1.1.1 command:
Pinging 1.1.1.1 with 32 bytes of data:
Request timed out.
Request timed out.
Request timed out.
Request timed out.
Ping statistics for 1.1.1.1:
Packets: Sent = 4, Received = 0, Lost = 4 (100% loss),
Approximate round trip time in milliseconds:
Minimum = 0ms, Maximum = 0ms, Average = 0 ms
Pinging 1.1.1.1 with 32 bytes of data:
Verify the physical connection between the relay and the computer, check the programmed IP address then
repeat step 2.
5. If the following sequence of messages appears when entering the C:\WINNT>ping 1.1.1.1 command:
Pinging 1.1.1.1 with 32 bytes of data:
Hardware error.
Hardware error.
Hardware error.
Hardware error.
Ping statistics for 1.1.1.1:
Packets: Sent = 4, Received = 0, Lost = 4 (100% loss),
Approximate round trip time in milliseconds:
Minimum = 0ms, Maximum = 0ms, Average = 0 ms
Pinging 1.1.1.1 with 32 bytes of data:
Verify the physical connection between the relay and the computer, check the programmed IP address, then
repeat step 2.
6. If the following sequence of messages appears when entering the C:\WINNT>ping 1.1.1.1 command:
Pinging 1.1.1.1 with 32 bytes of data:
Destination host unreachable.
Destination host unreachable.
Destination host unreachable.
Destination host unreachable.
Ping statistics for 1.1.1.1:
Packets: Sent = 4, Received = 0, Lost = 4 (100% loss),
Approximate round trip time in milliseconds:
Minimum = 0ms, Maximum = 0ms, Average = 0 ms
Pinging 1.1.1.1 with 32 bytes of data:
Verify the IP address is programmed in the local computer by entering the ipconfig command in the
command window. The IP configuration should look similar to this:
Windows IP Configuration
Ethernet adapter <F4FE223E-5EB6-4BFB-9E34-1BD7BE7F59FF>:
Connection-specific DNS suffix. . :
IP Address. . . . . . . . . . . . : 0.0.0.0
Subnet Mask . . . . . . . . . . . : 0.0.0.0
Default Gateway . . . . . . . . . :
Ethernet adapter Local Area Connection:
Connection-specific DNS suffix . :
IP Address. . . . . . . . . . . . : 1.1.1.2
Subnet Mask . . . . . . . . . . . : 255.0.0.0
Default Gateway . . . . . . . . . :

N60-1601-0125-861-1 122
Chapter 4 - Installation

4.9.3 INTERNET CONFIGURATION

1. Start your internet browse.
2. Select the UR device from the EnerVista Launchpad to start EnerVista UR Setup.
3. Click the Quick Connect button to open the window.
4. Select the Ethernet interface and enter the IP address assigned to the relay, then click the Connect button.
The EnerVista UR Setup software creates a site named “Quick Connect” with a corresponding device also
named “Quick Connect” and displays them on the left side of the screen.
5. Expand the sections to view data directly from the device.
Each time that the EnerVista UR Setup software is initialized, click the Quick Connect button to establish direct
communications to the relay. This ensures that configuration of the EnerVista UR Setup software matches the relay
model number.

4.9.4 CONFIGURE SERIAL CONNECTION

Two options are possible: local connection between computer and front RS232 port, and remote connection using
the rear RS485 terminals.
If using Windows 10 and a GE USB-to-Serial Cable Converter (part number 0100-0001) connected between a USB
port on the computer and the front serial port on the UR, use the Prolific driver version 3.2.0.0 from the Internet.
To use the RS485 terminals at the back of the relay, a GE Grid Solutions F485 converter (or compatible RS232-to-
RS485 converter) is required. See the F485 instruction manual for details.
1. Connect the computer to the F485 and the F485 to the RS485 terminal on the back of the UR device. Or
connect the computer to the RS232 port on the front of the relay.
2. Start the EnerVista UR Setup software, or in EnerVista Launchpad select the UR device to start the software.
3. Click the Device Setup button. The window opens.
4. Click the Add Site button. A new category is added. Enter a site name in the Site Name field. Optionally add
a short description of the site. This example uses Location 1 as the site name.
5. Click the Add Device button. A new device is added.
6. Enter a name in the Device Name field, up to 16 characters, and optionally add a description of the site. The
Color option is for the text in the device list in the Online Window.
7. Select Serial from the Interface drop-down list. Interface parameters display that must be entered for serial
communications. Try to load automatically the fields by clicking the Read Order Code button.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 123
Chapter 4 - Installation

Figure 71: Configuring serial communication

8. Enter the COM port used by the computer, the baud rate, and parity settings from the front panel SETTINGS
> PRODUCT SETUP > COMMUNICATIONS > SERIAL PORTS menu, and the relay slave address setting
from the front panel SETTINGS > PRODUCT SETUP > COMMUNICATIONS > MODBUS PROTOCOL >
MODBUS SLAVE ADDRESS menu in their respective fields.
Baud Rate — Typically 19200 bits per second (bps) for RS232, and higher for RS485. Both modems need to
use the same rate, meaning at the computer and the relay ends.
Parity — Set to None if unsure
Bits — Set to 8 if unsure
Stop Bits — Set to 1 if unsure
Post Terminal Window — Enable this option if you have a Schweitzer Engineering (SEL) SEL-203x
Communications Processor, such as an SEL-2030 or SEL-2032. This option enables display of a terminal
window to allow interaction with the other device.
9. Click the Read Order Code button to connect to the relay and upload the order code to the EnerVista
software. If a communications error occurs, ensure that the EnerVista software serial communications values
entered in the previous step correspond to the relay setting values, and also ensure that the same IP address
is not assigned to multiple ports.
10. Click the OK button when the relay order code has been received. The new site and device are added to the
Online Window.
11. The device has now been configured for serial communications.

4.9.5 CONFIGURE ETHERNET CONNECTION

You connect the Ethernet cable, define a site in the software, then add the relay as a device for the site.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 124
Chapter 4 - Installation

The Ethernet cable can be connected from the relay to an Ethernet network or directly to the computer. If this
connection is to be permanent, always use shielded twisted pair (STP) cable.
The computer and UR device must be on the same subnet.
1. Connect the Ethernet network cable and any SFP supplied with the relay to the Ethernet port on the CPU
module at the back of the device.
2. Start the EnerVista UR Setup software, or in EnerVista Launchpad select the UR device to start the software.
3. Click the Device Setup button. The window opens.
4. Click the Add Site button. A new category is added. Enter a site name in the Site Name field. Optionally add
a short description of the site. This example uses Location 1 as the site name.
5. Click the Add Device button. A new device is added.
6. 6. Enter a name in the Device Name field, up to 16 characters, and optionally add a description of the site.
The Color option is for the text in the device list in the Online Window.
7. Select Ethernet from the Interface drop-down list. This displays a number of interface parameters that must
be entered for Ethernet functionality.

Figure 72: Configuring Ethernet communication

8. Enter the relay IP Address, which can be viewed on the device front panel under SETTINGS > PRODUCT
SETUP COMMUNICATIONS > NETWORK > NETWORK PORT > PRT IP ADDRESS. Once the IP address
is entered, try to load automatically the fields by clicking the Read Order Code button.
9. Enter the relay Slave address and Modbus Port address values from the settings in the front panel
SETTINGS > PRODUCT SETUP > COMMUNICATIONS > MODBUS PROTOCOL menu.
10. If using a gateway to connect to the device, select Yes from the drop-down list.
11. Click the Read Order Code button to connect to the device and upload the order code. If the device was
entered already, a message displays "Device ’x’ is also using IP address...." If a

N60-1601-0125-861-1 125
Chapter 4 - Installation

communications error occurs, ensure that the values entered in the previous steps correspond to the relay
setting values, and also ensure that the same IP address is not assigned to multiple ports.
12. Click the OK button when the relay order code has been received. The new site and device are added to the
Online Window.
The device has now been configured for Ethernet communications.

4.9.6 CONFIGURE MODEM CONNECTION

A modem connection allows a computer to communicate with a UR device over phone lines. Two modems are
required. One modem is connected to the UR device, either by connecting the serial cable to the front panel port or
through a RS485 box to the rear terminals of the UR device. The second modem is connected to the computer that
initiates the connection.
To add a UR device for modem connections:
1. Connect the modems to the computer and UR.
2. Start the EnerVista UR Setup software, or in EnerVista Launchpad select the UR device to start the software.
3. Click the Device Setup button. The window opens.
4. Click the Add Site button. A new category is added. Enter a site name in the Site Name field. Optionally add
a short description of the site, such as the address or intersection.
5. Click the Add Device button. A new device is added.
6. Enter a name in the Device Name field, up to 16 characters, and optionally add a description of the site. The
Color is for the text in the device list in the Online Window.
7. Select “Modem” from the Interface drop-down list. This displays a number of interface parameters that must
be entered.
8. Select "Generic Modem" from the Modem Name drop-down list, then enter the phone number to dial to
establish communication with the remote modem.
Post Terminal Window — Enable this option if you have a Schweitzer Engineering (SEL) SEL-203x
Communications Processor, such as an SEL-2030 or SEL-2032. It enables display of a terminal window to
allow interaction with the other device.
9. Once the phone number is entered, try to load automatically the device information by clicking the Read
Order Code button.
10. Click the OK button when the relay order code has been received. The new device is added to the Online
window.
The UR device has now been added to the software.

4.9.7 AUTOMATIC DISCOVERY OF UR DEVICES

The EnerVista UR Setup software can find and communicate to all UR-family devices located on an Ethernet
network.
Using the Discover button in the Device Setup window, a single click of the mouse triggers the software to detect
any URs located on the network. This is done by searching a range of IP addresses based on the subnet mask of
the computer.
When a UR device is detected, the EnerVista UR Setup software proceeds to configure all settings and order code
options in the window. This feature allows the user to identify and interrogate all UR devices at a location.
Examples of address ranges are as follows:

Example 1: Host IP address is 3.94.247.10 with a subnet mask of 255.255.252.0

Host’s subnet is 3.94.244.0

N60-1601-0125-861-1 126
Chapter 4 - Installation

Possible IP addresses in this subnet are:

● 3.94.244.1 to 254
● 3.94.245.1 to 254
● 3.94.246.1 to 254
● 3.94.247.1 to 254
The discover function scans all those possible IP addresses to detect UR relays.

Example 2: Host IP address is 3.94.247.145 with a subnet mask of 255.255.252.128

Host’s subnet is 3.94.247.128
Possible IP addresses in this subnet are:
● 3.94.247.128 to 3.94.248.254
The discover function scans all those possible IP addresses to detect UR relays.
To automatically add UR devices:
1. In the EnerVista software, click the Device Setup button. The window opens.
2. Click the Discover button. The software searches for UR devices on the computer subnet and adds any
found to the Online Window area. If a required device is not found, add it manually as outlined earlier.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 127
Chapter 4 - Installation

4.10 CONNECT TO THE RELAY

There are four ways to the connect to the device, as follows:
● RS232 or USB port (outlined here)
● RS485 port
● Ethernet port (outlined here)
● LAN
When unable to connect because of an access violation, access Device Setup and refresh the order code for the
device.
When unable to connect, ensure that the same IP address is not assigned to multiple ports, for example under
Settings > Product Setup > Communications > Network.
If still unable to connect, try unplugging and replugging the Ethernet connection. If that does not work, try to ping the
device from the computer, and if unsuccessful, restart the computer.
When multiple computers are connected to a relay, EnerVista settings windows are not updated automatically. They
are refreshed when re-opened. If a user changes a setting on one computer, the other users need to refresh the
display by closing and opening the settings window to see the change. To ensure that current settings are always
viewed, close settings windows when not in use so that they are up-to-date when next accessed.

4.10.1 CONNECT TO THE RELAY IN ENERVISTA

To access the relay in EnerVista:
1. Open the Settings > Product Setup > Display Properties window as shown. The window opens with a
status indicator on the lower left of the EnerVista UR Setup window.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 128
Chapter 4 - Installation

◗☛✌✍✖ ✎✍✏✌✠☞ ❤✠✏ ❧✌☞✖✑

❊✗✕✎☞✐ ✏❤❡ ✑✌✏❡ ❧✌✑✏ ❜✘ ✐✠☛❜❧❡❞✍❧✌✍✖✌☞✙

✠✒ ✑❡❧❡✍✏✌☞✙ ✏❤❡ ✰✚✛ ❜✠✗♦

✟✠✡✡☛☞✌✍✎✏✌✠☞✑ ✑✏✎✏☛✑ ✌☞✐✌✍✎✏✠✒✑✓

●✒❡❡☞ ❂ ❖✔
❘❡✐ ❂ ◆✠ ✍✠✡✡☛☞✌✍✎✏✌✠☞✑
❯❘ ✌✍✠☞ ❂ ✒❡✕✠✒✏ ✌✑ ✠✕❡☞

✽ ✁✂ ✄☎✄✆❈✝✞

2. If the status indicator is red, verify that the Ethernet network cable is properly connected to the Ethernet port
on the back of the relay and that the relay has been properly set up for communication.
3. If a relay icon appears in place of the status indicator, then a report (such as an oscillography or event record)
is open. Close the report to re-display the green status indicator.
4. The Display Properties settings can now be viewed, edited, or printed.

Quick action hot links

The EnerVista UR Setup software has several quick action buttons to provide instant access to several functions
that are performed often when using URs. From the online window, users can select the relay to interrogate from a
pull-down window, then click the button for the action to perform. The following quick action functions are available:
● View the event record
● View the last recorded oscillography record
● View the protection summary
● View all of the metering values
● View the status of all inputs and outputs
● Generate a service report

4.10.2 USE QUICK CONNECT VIA FRONT RS232 PORT

This feature applies to the enhanced and basic front panels.
To connect to the UR from a computer using a serial cable:
1. Connect an RS232 serial cable to the computer and the front panel RS232 port. For example, use a USB-to-
serial RS232 DB9M converter cable when connecting to the USB port on the computer. If using Windows 10
and a GE USB-to-Serial Cable Converter (part number 0100-0001) connected between a USB port on the
computer and the front serial port on the UR, use the Prolific driver version 3.2.0.0 from the Internet.
2. Start the EnerVista UR Setup software, or in EnerVista Launchpad select the UR device to start the software.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 129
Chapter 4 - Installation

3. Click the Quick Connect button. The window opens.

4. Select the serial Interface and the communications port from the drop-down lists, then click Connect. The
COM Port is that of the computer.
5. The EnerVista software creates a site named “Quick Connect” with a corresponding device also named
“Quick Connect” and displays them in the Online Window. Expand the sections to view data directly from the
UR device. Use the Device Setup button to change the site name.
Each time that the EnerVista UR Setup software is initialized, click the Quick Connect button to establish direct
communications to the relay. This ensures that configuration of the EnerVista UR Setup software matches the relay
model number.

4.10.3 USE QUICK CONNECT VIA FRONT USB PORT

This feature applies to the graphical front panel.
To connect to the UR from a computer using a USB cable:
1. Connect the cable to the computer and the front panel USB port (square connector).
2. Start the EnerVista UR Setup software, or in EnerVista Launchpad select the UR device to start the software.
3. Click the Quick Connect button to open the window.
4. Select the USB Interface and the GE Virtual Serial Port driver from the drop-down list, then click Connect. If
the GE driver does not display, it means that the USB cable was connected on Windows 10 when upgrading
the UR software. You need to re-install the EnerVista software with the USB cable disconnected.
5. The EnerVista software creates a site named “Quick Connect” with a corresponding device also named
“Quick Connect” and displays them in the Online Window. Expand the sections to view data directly from the
UR device. Use the Device Setup button to change the site name.
Each time that the EnerVista UR Setup software is initialized, click the Quick Connect button to establish direct
communications to the relay. This ensures that configuration of the EnerVista UR Setup software matches the relay
model number.

4.10.4 USE QUICK CONNECT VIA A REAR ETHERNET PORT

To connect to a UR using an Ethernet cable:
1. In the EnerVista software, click the Quick Connect button. The window opens
2. Select the Ethernet interface and enter the IP address assigned to the relay, then click the Connect button.
The EnerVista UR Setup software creates a site named “Quick Connect” with a corresponding device also
named "Quick Connect" and displays them in the Online Window.
3. Expand the sections to view data directly from the relay. Use the Device Setup button to change the site
name.
Each time that the EnerVista software is initialized, click the Quick Connect button to establish direct
communications to the relay. This ensures that configuration of the EnerVista UR Setup software matches the relay
model number.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 130
Chapter 4 - Installation

4.11 SET UP CYBERSENTRY AND CHANGE DEFAULT PASSWORD

If and when first using CyberSentry security, use the following procedure for set up.
1. Log in to the relay as Administrator by using the VALUE keys on the front panel or through EnerVista
connected serially (so that no IP address is required). If logging in through EnerVista choose Device
authentication (see figure). Enter the default password ChangeMe1#. Note that the LOCK SETTINGS setting
needs to be disabled (default) in the SETTINGS > PRODUCT SETUP > SECURITY > SUPERVISORY
menu.
2. Enable the Supervisor role if you have a need for it.
3. Make any required changes in configuration, such as setting a valid IP address for communication over
Ethernet.
4. Log out of the Administrator account by choosing None.
Next, device or server authentication can be chosen on the login screen, but the choice is available only in
EnerVista. UseDevice authentication to log in using the five pre-configured roles (Administrator, Supervisor,
Engineer, Operator, Observer, or Administrator and Supervisor when Device authentication is disabled). When
using a serial connection, only Device authentication is supported. When Server authentication is required,
characteristics for communication with a RADIUS server must be configured on the UR. This is possible only
through the EnerVista software. The RADIUS server itself also must be configured. At the end of this instruction
manual, the appendix called RADIUS Server Configuration gives an example of how to set up a simple RADIUS
server. Once both the RADIUS server and the parameters for connecting the UR to the server have been
configured, you can choose Server authentication on the login screen of EnerVista.
During the commissioning phase, you have the option to bypass the use of passwords. Do so by enabling the
Bypass Access setting under Settings > Product Setup > Security > Supervisory. Be sure to disable this bypass
setting after commissioning the device.
You can change the password for any role either from the front panel or through EnerVista. If using EnerVista,
navigate to Settings > Product Setup > Security. Change the Local Administrator Password, for example. We
strongly recommend that the password for the Administrator be changed from the default. Changing the passwords
for the other three roles is optional.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 131
Chapter 4 - Installation

4.12 IMPORT SETTINGS

The options are:
● Import settings from XML or CID file — Import all settings or a group of settings from an XML or CID file to a
device in the Offline Window area. Examples are Control elements, FlexLogic operands, and System Setup
settings. This feature uses a built-in import/export tool.
● Import settings from device files — Import a URS, IID, or CID file to a device in the Offline Window area.

4.12.1 IMPORT SETTINGS FROM XML FILE

All settings, groups of settings, and/or individual settings can be imported, such as System Setup, FlexLogic
operands, inputs/outputs, protection, and Control elements. A built-in import/export tool is used.
Note the following behavior:
● Available in English only
● Works in the Offline Window area
● Supports older firmware versions too, such as 6.x
● Import must be to same version, such as 8.03 to 8.03
● Except for B90, import can be to a different product, such as L90 to D60; order codes do not need to match
● Setting must exist in target device
● Complete single-line diagram can be imported, not parts of it
● Engineer function/menu item is not included
● Order codes must match when applying settings from the Offline Window area to a live device in the Online
Window area. For example, settings from a C30 in the Offline Window area cannot be applied directly to a
live C60 device.

Note:
A B90 device can import settings only from another B90 device

For information on exporting, see the Maintenance chapter.

Features in the tool include:
● Ability to perform global import (Import All button), by current window (Import button), or individual setting
(right-click)
● Can import from a different dataset, such as from Dataset 3 to Dataset 2
● When a setting is not present in the target device, it cannot be selected/activated for the import device and
the Import button is inactive
● Use the search box at the top-left to locate setting names and values, highlighted in blue
● Use the Compare by Lines and Compare VOs drop-down lists to sort display of FlexLogic equations
● Use the Left Entry From / Left Entry To boxes to display select rows
● Enable the Synchronous Scrolling check box to lock scrolling for target and import devices
● Add rows by right-clicking; validation is done later by the software
● Use the Comparison Report button to view quickly all differences, whether saved or not
● Use the Target Device Report to view quickly the imported settings, whether saved or not
● Click the Save button to save imports, otherwise none are
The following procedures outline how to import settings, apply to a live device, compare settings, and view imported
settings.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 132
Chapter 4 - Installation

To import settings:
1. In EnerVista, right-click the device in the Offline Window area and select the Import Settings option. A window
opens. If the device is not listed in the Offline Window area, right-click it in the Online Window area and select
the Add Device to Offline Window option.
2. Select the XML file to import, and click the Open button. When the firmware versions differ, a message
displays and the file cannot be imported.
When the firmware versions match, a window opens that compares existing and import settings. Existing
settings are on the left, and settings to be imported are on the right. The window for FlexLogic operands
differs, allowing more granularity.
When the order codes of the existing and imported setting files do not match, but both devices share the
same function(s), then the comparison list shows the common settings instead of all the settings. For
example, the distance protection function exists both in L90 and D60. The software allows importing L90
distance protection to D60 distance, and vice versa.
With successful launch, the device with the settings to be imported displays on the right, and the targeted
device to receive these settings is on the left. The differences are highlighted in orange. When check boxes
are deselected on the right side, it means that there are no differences or that settings are not present in the
target device. (For a summary, click the Comparison Report button at the top-right, as outlined in the next
procedure.)

3. Review the settings, either in the main window or using the Comparison Report.
If required, deselect any settings on the right side that are no longer wanted for import.
If required, copy any setting in the import device by right-clicking the value, selecting the Copy option, and
Pasting it in the target setting field. Or select the Import option.
4. To filter FlexLogic operands, click the Compare by Lines / Compare VOs button to toggle.
Compare by Lines — Displays FlexLogic operands 1 to 1024.
Compare VOs — For virtual outputs, enable the check boxes of those wanted, for both the import and target
devices.
5. To import the settings for the window currently active, click the Import button. Or to import all settings, click
the Import All button. The settings are imported, as shown in green.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 133
Chapter 4 - Installation

6. If required, to undo an import, click the Undo Import button. Or, to undo an import and to refresh all entries to
their original state, click the Restore button.
7. To save the changes, click the Save button and confirm at the prompt. Or to cancel all changes, click the
Cancel button. The window closes.
To apply the settings to a live device:
1. Drag-and-drop the device entry from the Offline Window area to an entry in the Online Window area.
Individual settings also can be dragged and dropped. The order codes must match.
To compare settings:
1. Click the Comparison Report button at the top-right of the window. This displays a summary of activity and
includes following settings: different, missing, imported, and invalid.
Number of Differences — The number of settings in the target device having setting values different from
the import device
Number of Missing Settings — The number of settings that are not found in the target device settings
Number of Settings Imported — The number of settings imported in the target device
Number of Invalid Settings — The number of settings that are same in both devices but the import device
setting value is not within range (out-of-range) of the target device setpoint range. For example, a 'FuncName
Block' setting is available in both import and target devices. The import device 'FuncName Block' setting is
configured as '87L TRIP OPIOC 1 OP,' however operand '87L TRIP OPIOC 1 OP' is not within the range of
the target device.
2. To save the display as an HTML file, click the Save to File button.
To view imported settings on the target device:
1. Click the Target Device Report button at the top-right of the window.
When no settings have been imported yet, the window shows basic information about the receiving device,
such as order code.
When settings have been imported, whether saved or not, a report displays. It is a comparison of the target
device before and after import.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 134
Chapter 4 - Installation

For invalid settings for the target device, a message displays, they are highlighted in red in the main window,
and they are listed in red at the bottom of the window. This means that the target device does not have the
feature and cannot accept the settings. In the example shown, the device does not have bus functions, so the
settings are invalid. Scroll through the list to review the invalid settings. Note that the sets of invalid setting
groups are highlighted in red on the left side of the window (not shown).

To save the display as an HTML file, click the Save to File button.

4.12.2 IMPORT SETTINGS FROM DEVICE FILES

The following file types can be imported:
● URS — UR settings file (firmware version 7.3x or earlier)
● IID — Instantiated IED capability description file — Actual settings on UR
● CID — Configured IED description file — Settings sent to the UR (may or may not be actual settings). When
using IEC 61850, network settings can also be configured by accepting a CID file that includes them, as long
as the IP address of at least one port is manually configured in the relay before the CID file is sent and the IP
address matches that in the file. The import is done in the Offline Window area.
To import a settings file:
1. In the Offline Window area, right-click the device and select the Add Device from File option. The device is
that from which you want to import settings.
2. If required, change the Files of type drop-down list.
Select the file to import.
To apply the settings to a live device:
1. Drag-and-drop the device entry from the Offline Window area to its entry in the Online Window area.
Individual settings also can be dragged and dropped. The order codes must match.
This is what happens:
● CID — For version 7.30 or later, a new URS file generates and moves into a new device folder, generating
SCL files from the new URS file. Files in the folder have new time stamps. The CID file retains its time stamp.
● URS — When not using IEC 61850 and the version is lower than 7.30, the file is added and the time stamp is
unchanged. When clicking on the tree element, a device folder is created, the original file moves into it, and
the time stamp is on the URS file is retained.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 135
Chapter 4 - Installation

When version is 7.30 or later, with IEC61850 is us, the file is added and the time stamp is unchanged. When
clicking on the tree element, a device folder is created, the original file moves into it, SCL files are generated
there, and the "Last modified" time stamp on the URS file changes.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 136
Chapter 4 - Installation

4.13 CONNECT TO SUBSTATION GATEWAY

A GE Multilin D400 Substation Gateway can be used to collect data from UR devices in a local area network (LAN).
It collects metering, status, event, and fault report data from serial or LAN-based intelligent substation devices, and
it pre-processes the data. The D400 supports up to 16 serial and eight network connections, with multiple devices
possible on each serial connection. Up to 10 concurrent file transfer sessions are possible, meaning data for up to
10 URs can be transferred at the same time and any additional IEDs are queued on a first-come-first-served basis.
The D400 can then upload files to a demilitarized zone (DMZ) server at the enterprise level.
Setup is as follows. For UR devices with the CyberSentry software option, when there is a need to retrieve
periodically the logs from the UR securely without a human interface, the following approach can be used. See the
D400 manual for configuration details to achieve it. A UR in the substation can authenticate a user either connecting
to a RADIUS server or on the device itself. This depends on the user name used for authentication on a connection.
The D400 connects to the UR device using an Ethernet, USB, or serial port on the UR. At the other end, the cable
attaches to the rear of D400. Use the D400 software to configure a serial or network communication/connection for
the UR, then to configure the IED device blocks/clients for the UR, and then to configure record retrieval. Once
configured, the UR and D400 use a keyfile authentication mechanism to establish communication.
For UR devices with the IEC 61850 software option, also use the D400 IEC 61850 Loader software.
When a D400 detects new files available for download from a UR, it connects to the UR and reads the files via
Secure File Transfer Protocol (SFTP) protocol. The following files can be transferred:
● Oscillography files
● Event records
● Log files
● Configuration (setting) files
The D400 information is viewable in its software and in a web browser.

Note:
The D400 is discontinued and no longer offered. The G500 is a replacement to the D400, where the same file retrieval
services and cybersecurity connection can be used.

4.13.1 FILES AND RECORDS

Oscillography files are stored in COMTRADE format in the D400 folder system using the UR site and device name.
Event records are stored as the EVT.TXT file in the D400 folder system using the UR site and device name.
Log files can be retrieved for UR 7.0 and later. The following file types are possible, stored in the D400 folder
system using the UR site and device name:
● factory_event.txt — Information about change methods and origins. Saved with a "_YYMMDDhhmmss"
retrieval time stamp, for example FACTORY_EVENT_170525183124.TXT.
● setting_changes.log — Information on what settings have been changed. Saved with a
"_YYMMDDhhmmss" retrieval time stamp, for example SETTING_CHANGES_170525183124.TXT.
Setting files are the configuration/settings files in the IEC 61850 SCL/IID format. The ur.iid file is saved with a
"_YYMMDDhhmmss" retrieval time stamp, for example ur_170525183124.iid. It is stored in the D400 folder
system using the UR site and device name.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 137
 CHAPTER 5

INTERFACES
Chapter 5 - Interfaces

5.1 CHAPTER OVERVIEW

This chapter contains the following sections:

Chapter Overview 139
EnerVista 140
Front panel 159
Logic diagrams 215
FlexLogic 217

N60-1601-0125-861-1 139
Chapter 5 - Interfaces

5.2 ENERVISTA

5.2.1 ENERVISTA INTRODUCTION

The EnerVista UR Setup software provides a single facility to configure, monitor, maintain, and troubleshoot relays
connected over local or wide-area networks. It can be used while disconnected (offline) or connected (online) to a
relay. In offline mode, you can create settings files for eventual downloading to the device. In online mode,
communication with the device is real-time.
The EnerVista UR Setup software is provided with every UR relay. This chapter outlines the EnerVista software
interface. The EnerVista Setup help file in the software also provides details for getting started and using the
software interface.

5.2.2 SETTINGS FILES

The EnerVista software supports the following ways of handling changes to relay settings:
● In offline mode (relay disconnected) to create or edit relay settings files for later transfer to relays
● While connected to a relay to modify relay settings, and then save the settings to the relay
● Create/edit settings files and then write them to the relay while connected to the relay
See the back up section in the Maintenance chapter for instructions on how to create a settings file either offline or
online.
Settings files are organized on the basis of file names assigned by the user. A settings file contains data pertaining
to the following types of relay settings:
● Device definition
● Product setup
● System setup (not in C30, D60)
● FlexLogic
● Grouped elements (not in C30, D60)
● Control elements
● Inputs/outputs
● Remote resources
● Testing
Factory default values are supplied and can be restored after any changes.
The following communications settings are not transferred to the relay with settings files:
● Modbus Slave Address
● Modbus TCP Port Number
● RS485 COM2 Baud Rate
● RS485 COM2 Parity
● COM2 Minimum Response Time
● COM2 Selection
● RRTD Slave Address
● RRTD Baud Rate
● IP Address (see end of previous chapter for information)
● IP Subnet Mask
● IP Routing

N60-1601-0125-861-1 140
Chapter 5 - Interfaces

When a settings file is loaded to a relay that is in-service, the following sequence occurs:
1. The relay takes itself out of service.
2. The relay issues a UNIT NOT PROGRAMMED major self-test error.
3. The relay closes the critical fail contact.
The Maintenance chapter outlines how to use a settings file in the .urs format for backup and restore.

5.2.3 EVENT VIEWING

In online or offline mode, you can view and analyze data generated by triggered parameters as follows:
● Event recorder — The event recorder captures contextual data associated with the last 1024 events, listed
chronologically from most recent to oldest. Event records are viewable at software and device-specific levels.
Access this under Admin > Event Log > View.
● Oscillography — The oscillography waveform traces and digital states are used to provide a visual display
of power system and relay operation data captured during specific triggered events. Access this latter under
Actual Values > Records > Event Record.
The following table outlines some software-level entries.
Event Description

EnerVista UR Setup SESSION The EnerVista software was launched

STARTED
Language was changed The user changed the software language using the View > Language menu item

DEFAULT USERS CREATED The user management window was launched using the Admin > User Management menu
item
: Successful upload of firmware The firmware on a device was upgraded
END
Firmware verified
Firmware uploaded
Firmware erased
START: Upload new firmware
EnerVista UR Setup EVENT The event record was cleared. All event records were deleted using the
LOG CLEARED Admin > Event Log > Clear menu item

5.2.4 FILE SUPPORT

The following support applies, where the Settings List is at the bottom left and the Site List is at the top left of the
EnerVista window.
● Execution — Any EnerVista UR Setup file that is opened launches the application or provides focus to the
already opened application. If the file was a settings file (has a .urs extension) that had been removed from
the Settings List navigation menu, it is added back to the menu.
● Drag and Drop — The device settings and individual settings can be dragged and dropped between the
Online and Offline Window areas. Also, any Windows Explorer directory folder is a file drag source and drop
target.
New files that are dropped into the Offline Window are added to the tree, which is automatically sorted
alphabetically with respect to settings file names. In the Online Window, files or individual menu items that are
dropped in the selected device menu are sent automatically to the online device.

5.2.5 MAIN WINDOW

The EnerVista UR Setup software window has the following components:
1. Title bar that shows the pathname of the active data view or the name of the software

N60-1601-0125-861-1 141
Chapter 5 - Interfaces

2. Main window menu bar

3. Main window toolbar
4. Site list / online window area
5. Settings list / offline window area
6. Software windows, with common toolbar
7. Settings file data view windows, with common toolbar
8. Workspace area with data view tabs
9. Status bar
10. Quick action hot links

✷ ✶ ✻ ✼

✶✠

✾ ✁✂✄ ☎✆✂✝❈✞✟
✽

Figure 73: EnerVista UR Setup software window

When the Offline Window has devices saved to it, it includes a Reserved entry with spare settings when customer-
specific functions are provided on a UR.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 142
Chapter 5 - Interfaces

Figure 74: Reserved settings

5.2.6 PROTECTION SUMMARY WINDOW

The Protection Summary is a graphical user interface to manage elements, such as enabling and disabling them.
Access it under Settings > Protection Summary. See the Settings chapter for information on use.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 143
Chapter 5 - Interfaces

Figure 75: Protection Summary interface (B30 example shown)

5.2.7 SETTINGS TEMPLATES

Settings file templates simplify the configuration and commissioning of multiple relays that protect similar assets. An
example is a substation that has 10 similar feeders protected by 10 UR F60 relays. In these situations, typically
90% or greater of the settings are identical among devices.
The templates allow engineers to configure and test these common settings, then lock them so that they are not
available to users. For example, locked settings can be hidden from view for field engineers, allowing them to
quickly identify and concentrate on specific settings.
The remaining settings (typically 10% or less) can be specified as editable and made available to field engineers
installing the devices. These are settings such as protection element pickup values and CT and VT ratios.
The settings template mode allows the user to define which settings are visible in the software. Settings templates
can be applied to both settings files (settings file templates) and online devices (online settings templates). The
functionality is identical for both purposes.
Settings file conversion from previous firmware versions is supported.

Note:
Note: Template mode is available in the English software only.

5.2.7.1 ENABLE SETTINGS TEMPLATE

The settings file template feature is disabled by default. It can be enabled in offline or online mode.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 144
Chapter 5 - Interfaces

In offline mode:
1. Locate the settings file in the Offline Window area of the EnerVista UR Setup software. If not there, a file can
be added from an online device by right-clicking it and selecting the Add Device to Offline Window option.
2. In the Offline Window area, right-click the selected device or settings file and select the Template Mode >
Create Template option.
The settings file template is now enabled and the file menus display in light blue. The settings file is now in template
editing mode. To undo the action, select Template Mode > Remove Template
In online mode:
1. Locate the device in the Online Window area of the EnerVista UR Setup software.
2. Right-click the device and select the Template Mode > Create Template option. The software prompts for a
template password. This password is required to use the template feature and must be at least four
characters in length.
3. Enter and re-enter the new password, then click OK to continue.
The online settings template is now enabled. The device is now in template editing mode.

5.2.7.2 EDIT SETTINGS TEMPLATE

The settings template editing feature allows you to specify which settings are available for viewing and modification
in EnerVista UR Setup. By default, all settings except the FlexLogic equation editor settings are locked.
1. With the template already enabled, locate the device or settings file in the Online or Offline Window area in
the software.
2. Right-click the device or file and select the Template Mode > Edit Template option to verify or place the
device in template editing mode (check mark beside option). If prompted, enter the template password then
click OK.
3. Open the relevant settings window that contains settings to be specified as viewable.
By default, all settings are specified as locked and displayed against a gray background. The icon on the upper right
of the settings window indicates that the EnerVista software is in EDIT mode. The following example shows the
phase time overcurrent settings window in Edit mode.

Figure 76: Settings template with all settings specified as locked

1. Specify the settings to make viewable by clicking them. They will show with a yellow background

N60-1601-0125-861-1 145
Chapter 5 - Interfaces

Figure 77: Settings template with two settings specified as editable

2. Click the Save button to save changes to the settings template.
3. Continue through any other settings window to specify all viewable settings.
The next time that the device/settings are accessed, only those specified as viewable/editable display in the menu
hierarchy.

5.2.7.3 ADD PASSWORD PROTECTION

We recommend that you save templates with password protection to maximize security. When templates are
created for online settings, the password is added during the initial template creation step. It does not need to be
added after the template is created.
To add password protection to a settings file template:
1. In the Offline Window area, right-click the device and select the Template Mode > Password Protect
Template option. The software prompts for a template password. This password must be at least four
characters in length.
2. Enter and re-enter the new password, then click OK to continue.
The settings file template is now secured with password protection.

5.2.7.4 VIEW SETTINGS TEMPLATE

Once all necessary settings are specified for viewing, users are able to view the settings template on the online
device or settings file. There are two ways to specify the settings view with the settings template feature:
● Display only those settings available for editing
● Display all settings, with settings not available for editing grayed-out

N60-1601-0125-861-1 146
Chapter 5 - Interfaces

To display settings available for editing:

1. Right-click the device in the Online or Offline Window area and apply the template by selecting the Template
Mode > View In Template Mode option.
2. Enter the template password if prompted, then click OK to apply the template.
Once the template has been applied, users are limited to view and edit the settings specified by the template. The
effect of applying the template to the phase time overcurrent settings is shown.

P ✁✂✄ t☎✆✄ ♦✝✄❡❝✞❡❡✄✟t ✇☎✟✠♦✇ ✇☎t t✄✆✡☛✁t✄ ✁✡✡☛☎✄✠ ✝☎✁

t ✄ ✍✎✏✑✒✓✔✎ ▼✕✖✎ ❃ ❱✗✎✘ ■✙ ✍✎✏✑✒✓✔✎ ▼✕✖✎ ❝♦✆✆✁✟✠❛
❚ ✄ t✄✆✡☛✁t✄ ✂✡✄❝☎☞☎✄✂ t ✁t ♦✟☛✌ t ✄ P☎❝✚✞✡ ✁✟✠ ❈✞❡✝✄
P ✁✂✄ t☎✆✄ ♦✝✄❡❝✞❡❡✄✟t ✂✄tt☎✟s✂ ✇☎✟✠♦✇ ✇☎t ♦✞t t✄✆✡☛✁t✄ ✁✡✡☛☎✄✠❛ ✂✄tt☎✟s✂ ❜✄ ✁✝✁☎☛✁❜☛✄❛
✽✛✜✽✢✽✣✤✥✦✧★
Figure 78: Applying templates using the View in Template Mode command

Viewing the settings in template mode also modifies the settings menu, showing only the settings categories that
contain

Figure 79: Applying templates using the View in Template Mode settings command

To display settings available for editing and settings locked by the template:
1. Right-click the device in the Online or Offline Window area and apply the template by selecting the Template
Mode > View All Settings option.
2. Enter the template password then click OK to apply the template.
Once the template has been applied, users are limited to edit the settings specified by the template, but all settings
are shown. The effect of applying the template to the phase time overcurrent settings is shown as follows.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 147
Chapter 5 - Interfaces

P ✁✂✄ t☎✆✄ ♦✝✄❡❝✞❡❡✄✟t ✂✄tt☎✟s✂ ✇☎✟✠♦✇ ✇☎t ♦✞t t✄✆✡☛✁t✄ ✁✡✡☛☎✄✠❛ P ✁✂✄ t☎✆✄ ♦✝✄❡❝✞❡❡✄✟t ✇☎✟✠♦✇ ✇☎t t✄✆✡☛✁t✄ ✁✡✡☛☎✄✠ ✝☎✁
t ✄ ✍✎✏✑✒✓✔✎ ▼✕✖✎ ❃ ❱✗✎✘ ❆✒✒ ❙✎✔✔✗✙✚✛ ❝♦✆✆✁✟✠❛
❚ ✄ t✄✆✡☛✁t✄ ✂✡✄❝☎☞☎✄✂ t ✁t ♦✟☛✌ t ✄ P☎❝✜✞✡ ✁✟✠ ❈✞❡✝✄
✂✄tt☎✟s✂ ❜✄ ✁✝✁☎☛✁❜☛✄❛
✽✢✣✽✤✥✦✧★✩✪✫
Figure 80: Applying templates using the View All Settings command

5.2.7.5 REMOVE SETTINGS TEMPLATE

Once a settings template is removed, it cannot be reapplied and a new settings template needs to be defined before
use.
1. Right-click the device in the Online or Offline Window area and select the Template Mode > Remove
Template option.
2. Enter the template password if prompted and click OK to continue.
3. The EnerVista software removes all template information and all settings are available3. Confirm that you
want to remove the template by clicking Yes.
The EnerVista software removes all template information and all settings are available.

5.2.8 SECURING FLEXLOGIC EQUATIONS

The UR allows users to secure some or all FlexLogic equations, preventing unauthorized viewing or modification of
critical FlexLogic applications. This is accomplished using the settings template feature to lock individual entries
within FlexLogic equations.
Secured FlexLogic equations remain secure when files are sent to and retrieved from any UR-series device.
Locking can be tied to the serial number too.

5.2.8.1 LOCKING ENTRIES IN A SETTINGS TEMPLATE

To lock individual entries of a FlexLogic equation:
1. Right-click the settings file or online device and select the Template Mode > Create Template item to enable
the settings template feature.
2. If prompted, enter the template password.
3. Select the FlexLogic > FlexLogic Equation Editor settings menu item. By default, all FlexLogic entries are
specified as viewable and display against a yellow background. The icon on the upper right of the window
also indicates that EnerVista UR Setup is in EDIT mode.
4. Specify the entries to lock by clicking them. The locked entries display a gray background as shown in the
example.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 148
Chapter 5 - Interfaces

Figure 81: Locking FlexLogic equation entries in Edit Mode

5. Click the Save button to save and apply changes to the settings template.
6. Select the Template Mode > View In Template Mode option to view the template.
7. Optionally apply a password to the template by right-clicking the device and selecting the Template Mode >
Password Protect Template option.
Once the template has been applied, users are limited to view and edit the FlexLogic entries not locked by the
template. The effect of applying the template to the FlexLogic entries is shown here.

❚② ✁✂✄☎ ❋☎✆✝✞✟✠✁✂✡ ✆❡☛☞✁✆✌ ✇✁☛✍✟✎☛ ☛✆t ☎✄☛✆ ✄ ☎✁✆❛✏ ❚② ✁✂✄☎ ❋☎✆✝✞✟✠✁✂✡ ✆❡☛☞✁✆✌ ☎✟✂❧✆❛ ✇✁☛✍ ☛✆t ☎✄☛✆ ✈✁✄
☛✍✆ ✑✒✓✔✕✖✗✒ ▼✘✙✒ ❃ ❱✚✒✛ ■✜ ✑✒✓✔✕✖✗✒ ▼✘✙✒ ✂✟tt✄❡❛✏
✽✢✣✽✤✥✦✥✧❈★✩
Figure 82: Locking FlexLogic entries through settings templates

The FlexLogic entries are also shown as locked in the graphical view and on the front panel display.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 149
Chapter 5 - Interfaces

Figure 83: Secured FlexLogic in graphical view

5.2.8.2 LOCKING A SETTINGS FILE TO A SERIAL NUMBER

A settings file and associated FlexLogic equations also can be locked to a UR serial number. Once FlexLogic
entries in a settings file have been secured, use the following procedure to lock the settings file to a serial number.
A serial number is viewable under Actual Values > Product Info > Model Information, the inside front panel, and
the rear of the device.
1. Right-click the setting file in the Offline Window area and select the Edit Device Properties item. The
window opens.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 150
Chapter 5 - Interfaces

Figure 84: Settings file properties window

2. Enter the serial number of the relay to lock to the settings file in the Serial # Lock field.
3. Click the OK button to apply the change. The serial number is not validated. The settings file and
corresponding secure FlexLogic equations are now locked to the device specified by the serial number.

5.2.9 SETTINGS FILE TRACEABILITY

A traceability feature for settings files allows the user to quickly determine if the settings in a device have been
changed since the time of installation from a settings file. When a settings file is transferred to a device, the date,
time, and serial number are sent back to the EnerVista Setup and added to the settings file on the local computer.
This information can be compared with the relay actual values at any later date to determine if security has been
compromised.
The traceability information is only included in the settings file if a complete settings file is either transferred to the
device or obtained from the device. Any partial settings transfers by way of drag and drop do not add the traceability
information to the settings file.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 151
Chapter 5 - Interfaces

❀ ❁❂❃❃❄❅❆❇❄❈❂❃✸❉❅❁❇❂✸✸❂❊
❃❋✷✸✹❁❂✸❄❂❁❊❂●❄✧❂

✁✂✄☎✄✆✝ ✞✟✠✡☛☞✄✆✞✠✌✟
✞✆✄☎✍✑✆✄✌✝ ✠ ✍✂✄✒✓✔☎✄✆✝✞✄☎✍☎✄✍✍✝
☎✌✄✕✝✏✠✄✖✎✏✂✞✠✎✄✌✞✍✄

✁✂✄☎✄✆✝ ✞✟✠✡☛☞✄✆✑✗✍✂✄✒✓✔☎✄✆✝
✌✞✍✄✞✆✄✞✌✌✄✌✍✑✍✂✄☎✄✍✍✝ ✠ ✎✗✝ ✟✄✄✘✂✄✠☎✄✍✍✝
☎✌✄✕✝✏✄✞✠✌✍✂✄✗✝
✠✎✗✝ ✟ ✄☎ ✟✄ ✍✆✞✠☎✗✄✆
✞✆✄✍✆✞✠☎✗✄✆✆✄✌✍✑✍✂✄✌✄✕✝✏✄✖
✧★✩✪✫✬✭✮✬✫✯✰✱✭✬✲✫✮✭✰✳
✷✸✹✰✭✬✳ ✭✰✲✭✺✳ ✻ ✯ ✮✴✭✰✭✮✮✳
✭✮★✲✭✮✭✬✩✳ ✯ ✭✳ ✱ ✯✵✱✳✮✽✶✭ ✫✯✲✮✴✭
✰✭✻✼✬✳ ❁❂✸❄❉❈❅✷❍■❂✸❉❅❊❃✸❉❅❁❇❂✸❊❉❃❂
✴✫✰✾✭✭✯✻★✩✪✬★✩✳✰✭✲✿ ❁❂❅❃■❉✧❏❃❋❂❅❂✸●❄❁❃❉❉❅❊
❉❊❊❂❊❃❋❁❂❃❃❄❅❆❇❄❈❂✿ ✙✚✛✙✜✚✢✛✣✤✥✦
Figure 85: Settings file traceability

With reference to the above figure, the traceability feature is used as follows.
● The transfer date of a settings file is logged in the relay and can be viewed in the EnerVista software or the
front panel display. Likewise, the transfer date of a settings file saved to a local computer is logged in the
EnerVista software.
● Comparing the dates stored in the relay and on the settings file at any time in the future indicates if any
changes have been made to the relay configuration since the settings file was saved.

5.2.9.1 SETTINGS FILE TRACEABILITY INFORMATION

The serial number and file transfer date are saved in the settings files when they are sent to a device. The serial
number and file transfer date are included in the settings file device definition within the EnerVista UR Setup.

❚ ✁✂✄✁☎✆✝✆✞✟ ❞✁✞✁ ✆✐ s✄✞✞✆✐✠s

❢✆✝✄ ❞✄✡✆✂✄ ❞✄❢✆✐✆✞✆☛✐

✽☞✌✽✍✎✏✑✒❈✓✔

Figure 86: Device definition showing traceability data

This information is also available in printed settings file reports as shown in the example. A report is generated by
right-clicking and selecting the Print Settings option.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 152
Chapter 5 - Interfaces

❚ ✁✂✄✁☎✆✝✆✞✟ ❞✁✞✁
✆✐ s✄✞✞✆✐✠s ✄❡✡ ✞

✽☛☞✽✌☞✍✎✏❈✑✒

Figure 87: Settings file report showing traceability data

5.2.9.2 ONLINE DEVICE TRACEABILITY INFORMATION

The serial number and file transfer date are available for an online device through the actual values. Select the
Actual Values > Product Info > Model Information menu item within the EnerVista online window as shown in the
example.

✁✂✄☎✂✆✝✞✝✟✠ ✡✂✟✂ ✝☛ ☞☛✞✝☛☎

✡☎✌✝✄☎ ✂✄✟✍✂✞ ✌✂✞✍☎✎ ✏✂✑☎

✒✓✔✒✕✖✗✘✙✚✛✜
Figure 88: Traceability data in Actual Values window

This information is also available from the front panel display through the following actual values:
ACTUAL VALUES > PRODUCT INFO > MODEL INFORMATION > SERIAL NUMBER
ACTUAL VALUES > PRODUCT INFO > MODEL INFORMATION > LAST SETTING CHANGE

5.2.9.3 ADDITIONAL TRACEABILITY RULES

The following additional rules apply for the traceability feature:
● If the user changes any settings within the settings file in the offline window, then the traceability information
is removed from the settings file
● If the user creates a new settings file, then no traceability information is included in the settings file
● If the user converts an existing settings file to another revision, then any existing traceability information is
removed from the settings file
● If the user duplicates an existing settings file, then any traceability information is transferred to the duplicate
settings file

5.2.10 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE

SetupCLI is a command line interface to communicate with the EnerVista UR Setup software. Commands can be
sent from a DOS prompt or a Windows batch file.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 153
Chapter 5 - Interfaces

The interface is installed with the EnerVista software. Its default location is similar to C:\Program Files
\EnerVista\Tools\SetupCLI
The EnerVista software needs to be installed on a computer to run the command line interface. The command line
interface does not provide a remote connection to a computer running the EnerVista software.
Items to note are as follows:
● It works with EnerVista UR Setup version 6.10 and later
● It is available in English only
● The graphical user interface of the software is not available concurrently with the command line interface
● It does not support concurrent commands
● It has limited functionality with CyberSentry
● It does not interface with UR Engineer
● It does not work when EnerVista UR Setup security is enabled, meaning when login is required

The command syntax is as follows:

● Options enclosed in [ ] are optional
● Values enclosed in < > are replaced with your own values
● <Application> is replaced with the EnerVista software to receive the command. Use "URPC" for EnerVista UR
Setup.
● <device> is the UR device name, as displayed in the Device Name field of the Device Setup window and
listed in the Online Window. Use quotes with spaces, such as "B30 Belfort".
● "-s" can be used with any command to suppress error messages
● All commands, their return codes, and error description are logged in the file C:\ProgramData\EnerVista\Tools
\SetupCLI\SetupCLI.log
● When the Supervisor account is enabled, the LOCK SETTINGS setting must be disabled (default) before the
putsettings, inservice, or reboot command can be used. This setting cannot be changed using the command
line interface.
● Use quotes ("") to enclose any parameter containing a space
● Commands, options, and parameters are case sensitive
● All commands have a return code of 0-255. 0 indicates success and 1-255 indicate different errors
● If SetupCLI is automated (in a batch file), make sure that only a single batch is running at a time. SetupCLI
does not support concurrent operations.

To run the command line interface:

1. In Windows, click the Start button, enter cmd, and press the Enter key. After prompting for permission, the
Windows command window opens.
2. Enter SetupCLI followed by the action to execute. An example of use is to enter SetupCLI -h to display
help, specifically the commands and explanations outlined here.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 154
Chapter 5 - Interfaces

Figure 89: Command line interface run in the command window

SetupCLI -h
Display help.
It displays the content outline here.

SetupCLI <Application> start [-c] [-s]

Launch application with name <Application>.
To start in client mode, which is the graphical user interface, include option '-c'. Before use, the software must be
idle without any windows open. Any activity or open windows can cause unexpected behavior. When in client
mode, do not use Launchpad's Site Management feature.
To suppress errors, include option -s.
Example: SetupCLI URPC start -c

SetupCLI <Application> exit [-s]

Exit application with name <Application>.
Example: SetupCLI URPC exit

SetupCLI <Application> login -d <device> [-A <authentication type>] [-a <account>] -w <password> [-s]
Authenticate with device <device> using password <password>.
For non-CyberSentry devices: set <authentication type> to "traditional". Note that <authentication type>
defaults to traditional if not specified.
Set <account> to COMMANDS or SETTINGS. If not specified, the SETTINGS account is used.
Example: SetupCLI URPC login -d "C30 Melbourne" -A traditional -a SETTINGS -w
1password1
Example of a batch file that checks for an error (this batch file uses standard batch file operations to check the
return code (ERRORLEVEL) and jump to an error handler):

N60-1601-0125-861-1 155
Chapter 5 - Interfaces

SetupCLI URPC start

SetupCLI URPC login -d demoDevice -a SETTINGS -w WrongPassword -A traditional
IF NOT ERRORLEVEL 0 GOTO FAILED
SetupCLI URPC putsettings -d demoDevice -f "example file.urs"
SetupCLI URPC inservice -d demoDevice
SetupCLI URPC reboot -d demoDevice
SetupCLI URPC exit
exit

:FAILED
echo Please try again
exit

For CyberSentry devices with local authentication: Set <authentication type> to "local". Set <account> to
"Supervisor", "Administrator", "Engineer", "Operator", or "Observer".
For CyberSentry devices with RADIUS authentication — Set <authentication type> to "radius". Set
<account> to the user's account on the RADIUS server.

SetupCLI <Application> logout -d <device> [-s]

Log out of device <device>.
Example: SetupCLI URPC logout -d C30

SetupCLI <Application> getsettings -d <device> -f <File> [-s]

Read settings from device <device> and save them to the .urs file <File>. The <File> must not already exist. The
default path to the output file is C:\Users\Public\Public Documents\GE Power Management\URPC
\Data
Example: SetupCLI URPC getsettings -d C30 -f "C30 Markham.urs"
Example of a batch file to retrieve a settings file:
SetupCLI URPC start
SetupCLI URPC getsettings -d demoDevice -f C:\example.urs
SetupCLI URPC exit
Example of a batch file to retrieve a settings file from a relay that requires RADIUS authentication:
SetupCLI URPC start
SetupCLI URPC login -d demoDevice -a %1 -w %2 -A radius
SetupCLI URPC getsettings -d demoDevice -f "example file.urs"
SetupCLI URPC logout -d demoDevice
SetupCLI URPC exit

N60-1601-0125-861-1 156
Chapter 5 - Interfaces

Although a user name and password could have been entered in this batch file, it would have created a security
risk. Batch files allow you to pass in runtime parameters and refer to them in your script as %1, %2, and so on.
For example, if this file is called example.bat, one calls it as follows: "example.bat MyUserName MyPassword"

SetupCLI <Application> putsettings -d <device> -f <File> [-s]

Write the settings file <File> to the device <device>.
For CyberSentry devices, putsettings is only supported for users with the "Administrator" role.
Example: SetupCLI URPC putsettings -d C30 -f "C30 Markham.urs"

SetupCLI <Application> compare -f <File1> -r <File2> -o <OutputFile> [-s]

Compare settings files <File1> and <File2>, and save output to <OutputFile>.
Example: SetupCLI URPC compare -f may.urs -r september.urs -o compared.txt
Batch file example that retrieves a settings file, compares it with an existing settings file, and opens the resulting
comparison file:
SetupCLI URPC start
SetupCLI URPC getsettings -d demoDevice -f devicefile.urs
SetupCLI URPC compare -f existingfile.urs -r devicefile.urs -o output.txt

The output is similar to the following:

Comparing settings file aaa.urs : C:\Users\Public\Public Documents\GE Power
Management\URPC\Data\ with bbb.urs : C:\Users\Public\Public Documents\GE Power
Management\URPC\Data\

# Setting Name (Group,Module,Item) Value

1 Default Message Timeout (1,1,1) = 299 s
2 Default Message Timeout (1,1,1) = 300 s
3 Flash Message Time (1,1,1) = 0.9 s
4 Flash Message Time (1,1,1) = 1.0 s

SetupCLI <Application> inservice -d <device> [-n] [-s]

Put the device in service. Include option -n to take the device out of service.
Example: SetupCLI URPC inservice -d C30

SetupCLI <Application> reboot -d <device> [-s]

Reboot the relay <device>. This is necessary after changing IEC 61850 settings and aggregator source settings.
Example: SetupCLI URPC reboot -d "C30_Instanbul"

N60-1601-0125-861-1 157
Chapter 5 - Interfaces

SetupCLI <Application> adddevice -I <IP Address> -S <Slave Address> -P <Modbus Port>

Connect to a device using its IP address, slave address, and Modbus port. Show the device in the EnerVista
interface under the SetupCLI Site as DEV@SETUP_CLI.
EnerVista UR Setup 7.30 or higher supports this command.

Figure 90: Device added using IP address

The device is named as DEV@SETUP_CLI, which is used as the device name required by the <device>
parameter of other SetupCLI commands.
The device name DEV@SETUP_CLI is always assigned to the device that is connected most recently by
performing 'adddevice' command. It means that the Application only keeps up to one device named as
DEV@SETUP_CLI, the 'adddevice' command disconnects/deletes the device DEV@SETUP _CLI that was
connected previously by performing 'adddevice' command.
The device name DEV@SETUP_CLI is never used to configure/connect to a device through the graphical user
interface.
Example of a batch file using a device IP address to retrieve its settings file:
SetupCLI URPC start
SetupCLI URPC adddevice -I 192.168.140.113 -S 113 -P 502
SetupCLI URPC getsettings -d DEV@SETUP_CLI -f C:\example.urs
SetupCLI URPC exit

After connecting the device using IP address, the device name DEV@SETUP_CLI is used to identify this device in
'getsettings' command.
Example of a batch file using a device IP address to retrieve a settings file when RADIUS authentication is
required:
SetupCLI URPC start
SetupCLI URPC adddevice -I 192.168.140.113 -S 113 -P 502
SetupCLI URPC login -d DEV@SETUP_CLI -a %1 -w %2 -A radius
SetupCLI URPC getsettings -d DEV@SETUP_CLI -f "example file.urs"
SetupCLI URPC logout -d DEV@SETUP_CLI
SetupCLI URPC exit
DEV@SETUP_CLI has to be used as the device name in the commands followed by the 'adddevice' command.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 158
Chapter 5 - Interfaces

5.3 FRONT PANEL

The basic front panel consists of LED panels, an RS232 port, keypad, LCD display, control pushbuttons, and
optional user-programmable pushbuttons. The front panel is hinged to allow easy access to removable modules
inside the chassis. There is also a removable dust cover that is to be removed when accessing the keypad. The
basic front panel is available in either horizontal or vertical format*. The following figures shows the two types of
basic front panel.

Note:
*Vertical format not available for B90 or N60

✁✂ ✄☎✆✝✞ ✟ ✁✂ ✄☎✆✝✞ ✠ ✁✂ ✄☎✆✝✞ ✜

✂✡☛✄✞☎☞
✙✍✏✆✖ ✄☎✆✝✞
✚✛✠✜✠ ✄✏✍✖

✛✒☎✞✞ ✔☛✝✍✎✄✍✏✑✍☎✒✒☎✓✞✝
✌☛✝✍✎✄✍✏✑✍☎✒✒☎✓✞✝ ✗✝☞✄☎✘
✢✣✏✆✖✍✏✞✤ ✄✔☛✕✓✔✖✖✏✆☛ ✟ ✖✏ ✥
✄✔☛✕✓✔✖✖✏✆☛ ✟ ✖✏ ✟✠
✦✧★✦✩✪✫✬✭✮✯✰

Figure 91: Basic horizontal front panel

5.3.1 BASIC FRONT PANEL

The basic front panel consists of LED panels, an RS232 port, keypad, LCD display, control pushbuttons, and
optional user-programmable pushbuttons. The front panel is hinged to allow easy access to removable modules
inside the chassis. There is also a removable dust cover that is to be removed when accessing the keypad. The
basic front panel is available in either horizontal or vertical format*. The following figures shows the two types of
basic front panel.

Note:
*Vertical format not available for B90 or N60

N60-1601-0125-861-1 159
Chapter 5 - Interfaces

✁✂ ✄☎✆✝✞ ✟ ✁✂ ✄☎✆✝✞ ✠ ✁✂ ✄☎✆✝✞ ✜

✂✡☛✄✞☎☞
✙✍✏✆✖ ✄☎✆✝✞
✚✛✠✜✠ ✄✏✍✖

✛✒☎✞✞ ✔☛✝✍✎✄✍✏✑✍☎✒✒☎✓✞✝
✌☛✝✍✎✄✍✏✑✍☎✒✒☎✓✞✝ ✗✝☞✄☎✘
✢✣✏✆✖✍✏✞✤ ✄✔☛✕✓✔✖✖✏✆☛ ✟ ✖✏ ✥
✄✔☛✕✓✔✖✖✏✆☛ ✟ ✖✏ ✟✠
✦✧★✦✩✪✫✬✭✮✯✰

Figure 92: Basic horizontal front panel

♠♥ ♦♣qrsqst
✉✈✇①②③④

✡☛☞✌ ✤ ★ ✬
✍☛✎✏ ✛✚✜✜✗✢✚ ✣ ✧ ✫
☛✑✒✓✏☛ ✥ ✩ ✭ ⑤⑥④①③⑦
☛☞✔☛✕ ✖✗✘✙✚ ✪ ✦ ✮✯✰

❣ ❤ ✐
❵❛❜❝❞❡❢❜❞ ❵❛❜❝❞❡❢❜❞ ❵❛❜❝❞❡❢❜❞
⑧✇⑥⑨⑩①⑨❶❷⑨③❸❸③❹②⑥
❥ ❦ ❧ ①❺✇❻❹❺❼❼❶❽✇ ❾ ❼❶ ❿
❵❛❜❝❞❡❢❜❞ ❵❛❜❝❞❡❢❜❞ ❵❛❜❝❞❡❢❜❞

➀➁✉ ①③❽⑥② ➂

❂❃❄❃❅❂ ❳❨❳❩❬❭❪❫❴❳
✲❀ ✼✻✸❁✲✳✻ ❲▼❏●■▲❊
✺✸✽✵✿✷✻ ❘❋❍❍❊❉● ✸✻✼✻✺
✺✻✼✺✹✽✾✻ ❚❍❊❯❋❊❉❘❱
✺✸✲✱ ▼●P❊❍ ✵✼✻✸ ❈
✶✷✶✸✹ ❖P■◗❊■ ➀➁✉ ①③❽⑥② ❾
✱✲✳✴✵✱ ❖P■◗❊❙ ✵✼✻✸ ❇
➃⑨❶❽❼ ①③❽⑥② ❖P■◗❊❘
❉❊❋●❍■❏❑▲❍▼❋❉◆ ✵✼✻✸ ❆
➄➅➂➆➂ ①❶⑨❼

✁✂ ✄☎✆✄✝✞✟✠

Figure 93: Basic vertical front panel

5.3.1.1 FRONT PANEL DISPLAY

Messages display on a back-lit liquid crystal display (LCD) to make them visible under poor lighting conditions.
When the keypad and display are not actively being used, the display defaults to user-defined messages. Any high-
priority event driven message overrides the default messages.
Up to 20 characters can be used to configure some setting names in the software, while up to 12 characters display
on the front panel. A tilde (~) symbol is used for the twelfth character on the front panel when a name extends
beyond the 12 character limit. An example is shown for a Virtual Input.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 160
Chapter 5 - Interfaces

Figure 94: Tilde symbols displays with names 12 or more characters long

The front panel can be viewed and used in the EnerVista software, for example to view an error message displayed
on the front panel or the LEDs. To view the front panel in EnerVista software, click Actual Values > Front Panel,
then any option.

Figure 95: Front panel use in the software (C60 shown)

5.3.1.2 NAVIGATION KEYS

Display messages are organized into pages under the following headings: actual values, settings, commands, and
targets.
The MENU key navigates through these pages. Each heading page is divided further into further submenus.
The MESSAGE keys navigate through the sub-menus. The VALUE keys increment or decrement numerical setting
values when in programming mode. These keys also scroll through alphanumeric values in the text edit mode.
Alternatively, values can be entered with the numeric keypad.
The decimal key initiates and advances to the next character in text edit mode or enters a decimal point.
The HELP key can be pressed at any time for context-sensitive help messages.
The ENTER key stores setting values.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 161
Chapter 5 - Interfaces

When entering an IP address on the front panel, key in the first sequence of the number, then press the • key for the
decimal place. For example, for 127.0.0.1, press 127, then •, then 0, then •, then 0, then •, then 1. To save the
address, press the ENTER key.
When entering or changing an order code with two lines, press the down arrow to access the second line. On a
basic front panel, do this under ACTUAL VALUES > PRODUCT INFO > MODEL INFORMATION.
The figure shows the sequence to use to enter a setting. Subsequent sections provide more detail.

Figure 96: Front panel keypad use (basic front panel shown)

5.3.1.3 LED INDICATORS

The basic front panel consists of three panels with LED indicators, keys, and a communications port. The RESET
key is used to reset any latched LED indicator or target message, once the condition has been cleared (these
latched conditions can also be reset via the SETTINGS > INPUT/OUTPUTS > RESETTING menu). The RS232 port
is for connection to a computer.
The USER keys are used by the breaker control feature.

Figure 97: LED panel 1

Status indicators
● IN SERVICE — Indicates that control power is applied, all monitored inputs/outputs and internal systems are
fine, and the relay is in (online) Programmed mode (under Settings > Product Setup > Installation)
● TROUBLE — Indicates that the relay has detected an internal problem. Check the self-test messages
outlined at the end of the Commands and Targets chapter, and view the event records under Actual Values >
Records. For a beta / pre-release, this LED is always on.
● TEST MODE — Indicates that the relay is in test mode. For information, see the Testing section in the
Settings chapter.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 162
Chapter 5 - Interfaces

● TRIP — Indicates that the selected FlexLogic operand serving as a trip switch has operated. This indicator
always latches; initiate the reset command to reset the latch.
● ALARM — Indicates that the selected FlexLogic operand serving as an alarm switch has operated. This
indicator never latches.
● PICKUP — Indicates that an element is picked up. This indicator never latches.

Event-cause indicators
Event-cause LEDs are turned on or off by protection elements that have their respective target setting selected as
either “Enabled” or “Latched.” If a protection element target setting is “Enabled,” then the corresponding event
cause LEDs remain on as long as the operand associated with the element remains asserted. If a protection
element target setting is “Latched,” then the corresponding event cause LEDs turn on when the operate operand
associated with the element is asserted and remains on until the RESET button on the front panel is pressed after
the operand is reset.
All elements that are able to discriminate faulted phases can independently turn off or on the phase A, B, or C
LEDs. This includes phase instantaneous overcurrent, phase undervoltage, and so on. This means that the phase
A, B, and C operate operands for individual protection elements are ORed to turn on or off the phase A, B, or C
LEDs.
● VOLTAGE — Indicates voltage was involved
● CURRENT — Indicates current was involved
● FREQUENCY — Indicates frequency was involved
● OTHER — Indicates a composite function that is not solely current, voltage, or frequency based (distance or
power for example) or a control function (digital element or trip bus for example)
● PHASE A — Indicates phase A was involved
● PHASE B — Indicates phase B was involved
● PHASE C — Indicates phase C was involved
● NEUTRAL/GROUND — Indicates that neutral or ground was involved

User-programmable indicators
The second and third panels provide 48 amber LED indicators whose operation is controlled by the user. Custom
labeling can be done.
User customization of LED operation is of maximum benefit in installations where languages other than English are
used to communicate with operators. See the User-programmable LEDs section in chapter 5 for the settings used
to program the operation of the LEDs on these panels.

Figure 98: LED panels 2 and 3 (index template)

Default labels for LED panel 2

The default labels are intended to represent the following:
● GROUP 1...6 — The illuminated GROUP is the active settings group
● BREAKER 1(2) OPEN — The breaker is open

N60-1601-0125-861-1 163
Chapter 5 - Interfaces

● BREAKER 1(2) CLOSED — The breaker is closed

● BREAKER 1(2) TROUBLE — A problem related to the breaker has been detected
● SYNCHROCHECK NO1(10) IN-SYNCH — Voltages have satisfied the synchrocheck element
● RECLOSE ENABLED — The recloser is operational
● RECLOSE DISABLED — The recloser is not operational
● RECLOSE IN PROGRESS — A reclose operation is in progress
● RECLOSE LOCKED OUT — The recloser is not operational and requires a reset

Note:
Firmware revisions 2.9x and earlier support eight user setting groups; revisions 3.0x and higher support six setting groups.
For convenience of users using earlier firmware revisions, the relay panel shows eight setting groups. Even though the LEDs
have default labels, they are fully user-programmable.

The relay is shipped with the default label for the LED panel 2. The LEDs, however, are not pre-programmed. To
match the pre-printed label, the LED settings must be entered as shown in the 'User-programmable LEDs section'.
The LEDs are fully user-programmable. The default labels can be replaced by user-printed labels for both panels as
explained in the next section.

Figure 99: LED panel 2 (default labels)

5.3.1.4 LABELING
After programming LEDs and pushbuttons under Settings > Product Setup > User-Programmable Leds and
User-Programmable Pushbuttons, labels can be created for the front panel.
To create LED and pushbutton labels for a basic front panel:
1. In the EnerVista software, if the relay is not already listed in the Offline Window area, add it by right-clicking it
and selecting the Add Device to Offline Window option.
2. Click the File > Front Panel Report menu item and select the device.
3. In the Front Panel Report window, double-click an LED or pushbutton slot and type a label. If you need to see
the existing front panel remotely, access Actual Values > Front Panel for the online device.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 164
Chapter 5 - Interfaces

Figure 100: Basic front panel label designer (LEDs shown)

4. Optionally save the changes by clicking the Save icon on the toolbar.
5. Click the Print icon on the toolbar. Consider printing to PDF format and adjusting the zoom for appropriate
label size, then print on a physical printer.
6. Cut labels as a block or individually, for example with scissors or an Exacto knife.
7. If there is a plastic cover over the front panel, remove it by gently pushing in on the right side and lifting off
the cover.
8. Remove the plastic cover over the LEDs or pushbutton(s) using a screw driver.
9. Insert the labels.
10. Re-attach the plastic covers.

5.3.1.5 MENU NAVIGATION

Press the MENU key to display selections or home page. Each press of the key advances through the following
main headings:
● Actual Values
● Settings
● Commands
● Targets
● Factory Service
● User displays (when enabled)
The setting and actual value pages are arranged hierarchically. Header display pages are indicated by two black
squares, (nn) while sub-header pages are indicated by a single black square (n). The header display pages
represent the highest level of the hierarchy and the sub-header display pages fall below this level. Use the down,
right, left, and up arrows to navigate the menu. The MESSAGE up and down arrow keys move within a group of
headers, sub-headers, setting values, or actual values. Continually pressing the MESSAGE right arrow from a

N60-1601-0125-861-1 165
Chapter 5 - Interfaces

header display displays specific information for the category. Conversely, continually pressing the MESSAGE left
arrow from a setting value or actual value display returns to the header display.
Default values are indicated in this instruction manual in mixed case. In the example shown here, the default access
level is restricted.

Highest level Lowest level (setting value)

■ ■ SETTINGS ■ SECURITY ■ ACCESS LEVEL

ó ó
■ ■ PRODUCT SETUP ■ ■Restricted
ô

■ ■ SETTINGS
■ ■ SYSTEM SETUP

Example
■ ■ ACTUAL VALUES Press the MENU key until the Actual Values header page appears. This page contains
■ ■ STATUS system and relay status information.

■ ■ SETTINGS Press the MENU key until the Settings header page appears. This category contains
■ ■ PRODUCT SETUP settings to configure the relay.

■ SECURITY Press the MESSAGE right arrow once to display the first sub-header (Security).
■

ACCESS LEVEL: Press the MESSAGE right arrow once to display the first setting for Security.
RESTRICTED

■ SECURITY Press the MESSAGE left arrow to return to the Security heading.
■

■ DISPLAY Press the MESSAGE down arrow to display the second setting sub-header associated
■ PROPERTIES with the Product Setup header.

LANGUAGE: Press the MESSAGE right arrow once to display the first setting for Display Properties.
English

■ ■ SETTINGS Press the MESSAGE left arrow to return to the Display Properties page, then again to
■ ■ SYSTEM SETUP return to the Product Setup Page. Press the MESSAGE down arrow to move to the next
Settings page. This page contains settings for System Setup.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 166
Chapter 5 - Interfaces

5.3.1.6 CHANGE SETTINGS

Numerical data
Each numerical setting has its own minimum, maximum, and increment value associated with it. These parameters
define what values are acceptable for a setting.

FLASH MESSAGE For example, select the SETTINGS > PRODUCT SETUP > DISPLAY PROPERTIES >
TIME: 10.0 s FLASH MESSAGE TIME setting.

MINIMUM: 0.5 Press the HELP key to view the minimum and maximum values. Press the key again to
MAXIMUM: 10.0 view the next context sensitive help message.

Two methods of editing and storing a numerical setting value are available.
● 0 to 9 and decimal point — The relay numeric keypad works the same as a calculator. A number is entered
one digit at a time. The leftmost digit is entered first and the rightmost digit is entered last. Pressing the
MESSAGE left arrow or pressing the ESCAPE key, returns the original value to the display.
● VALUE keys — The VALUE up arrow increments the displayed value by the step value, up to the maximum
value allowed. While at the maximum value, pressing the VALUE up arrow again allows the setting selection
to continue upward from the minimum value. The VALUE down arrow decrements the displayed value by the
step value, down to the minimum value. While at the minimum value, pressing the VALUE down arrow again
allows the setting selection to continue downward from the maximum value.

FLASH MESSAGE As an example, set the flash message time setting to 2.5 seconds. Press the appropriate
TIME: 2.5 s numeric keys in the sequence “2 . 5". The display message changes as the digits are
being entered.
ò

NEW SETTING Until ENTER is pressed, editing changes are not registered by the relay. Press ENTER to
HAS BEEN STORED store the new value in memory. This flash message momentarily appears as confirmation
of the storing process.

Note:
Numerical values that contain decimal places are rounded-off if more decimal place digits are entered than specified by the
step value

Enumeration data
Enumeration settings have data values that are part of a set, whose members are explicitly defined by a name. A
set has two or more members.
ACCESS LEVEL: For example, the selections available for ACCESS LEVEL are "Restricted," "Command,"
Restricted "Setting," and "Factory Service."

Enumeration type values are changed using the VALUE keys. The VALUE up arrow displays the next selection
while the VALUE down arrow displays the previous selection.
ACCESS LEVEL: If the ACCESS LEVEL needs to be "Setting," press the VALUE keys until the proper
Setting selection displays. Press HELP at any time for the context sensitive help messages.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 167
Chapter 5 - Interfaces

NEW SETTING Changes are not registered by the relay until the ENTER key is pressed. Pressing ENTER
HAS BEEN STORED stores the new value in memory. This flash message momentarily appears as confirmation

Alphanumeric text
Text settings have data values that are fixed in length, but user-defined in characters. They can be upper-case
letters, lower-case letters, numerals, and a selection of special characters.
There are several places where text messages can be programmed to allow the relay to be customized for specific
applications. One example is the Message Scratchpad. Use the following procedure to enter alphanumeric text
messages.
For example, enter the text “Breaker #1”.
1. Press the decimal point to enter text edit mode.
2. Press the VALUE keys until the character 'B' appears; press the decimal key to advance the cursor to the
next position.
3. Repeat step 2 for the remaining characters: r,e,a,k,e,r, ,#,1.
4. Press ENTER to store the text.
5. If you have any problem, press HELP to view context sensitive help. Flash messages appear sequentially for
several seconds each. For the case of a text setting message, pressing HELP displays how to edit and store
new values.

5.3.2 ENHANCED FRONT PANEL

The enhanced front panel consists of LED panels, an RS232 port, keypad, LCD display, control pushbuttons, and
optional user-programmable pushbuttons. The front panel is hinged to allow access to removable modules inside
the chassis. The enhanced front panel is available in either horizontal or vertical format*. The following figure shows
the horizontal front panel. The following figures shows the two types of enhanced front panel.

Note:
*Vertical format not available for B90 or N60

✁✂✄ ☎✆✝✞✟✠ ✡☛☞ ✁✠✌✁☎✍✎✆✏ ✑✍✠✄✝

☞✁✒✑✝✍✓

✪✄✓✑✍✌

✯✆✠✎✏✆✝
✑✞✒✘✗✞✎✎✆✠✒ ✰✮✱
✏✆✠✎ ✑✍✠✄✝
✫✬✭✮✭ ✑✆✏✎

✔✒✄✏✕✑✏✆✖✏✍✟✟✍✗✝✄ ✑✞✒✘✗✞✎✎✆✠✒ ✙ ✎✆ ✙✚ ✛✜✢✛✣✤✥✢✦✧★✩

Figure 101: Enhanced horizontal front panel

N60-1601-0125-861-1 168
Chapter 5 - Interfaces

Figure 102: Enhanced vertical front panel

5.3.2.1 ENHANCED FRONT PANEL DISPLAY

Messages display on a back-lit liquid crystal display (LCD) to make them visible under poor lighting conditions.
When the keypad and display are not actively being used, the display defaults to user-defined messages. Any high-
priority event driven message overrides the default messages.
Up to 20 characters can be used to configure some setting names in the software, while up to 12 characters display
on the front panel. A tilde (~) symbol is used for the twelfth character on the front panel when a name extends
beyond the 12 character limit. An example is shown for a Virtual Input.

Figure 103: Tilde symbols displays with names 12 or more characters long

N60-1601-0125-861-1 169
Chapter 5 - Interfaces

The front panel can be viewed and used in the EnerVista software, for example to view an error message displayed
on the front panel or the LEDs. To view the front panel in EnerVista software, click Actual Values > Front Panel,
then any option.

Figure 104: Front panel use in the software (C60 shown)

5.3.2.2 NAVIGATION KEYS

Display messages are organized into pages under the following headings: actual values, settings, commands, and
targets.
The MENU key navigates through these pages. Each heading page is divided further into further submenus.
The MESSAGE keys navigate through the sub-menus. The VALUE keys increment or decrement numerical setting
values when in programming mode. These keys also scroll through alphanumeric values in the text edit mode.
Alternatively, values can be entered with the numeric keypad.
The decimal key initiates and advances to the next character in text edit mode or enters a decimal point.
The HELP key can be pressed at any time for context-sensitive help messages.
The ENTER key stores setting values.
When entering an IP address on the front panel, key in the first sequence of the number, then press the • key for the
decimal place. For example, for 127.0.0.1, press 127, then •, then 0, then •, then 0, then •, then 1. To save the
address, press the ENTER key.
When entering or changing an order code with two lines, press the down arrow to access the second line. On a
basic front panel, do this under ACTUAL VALUES > PRODUCT INFO > MODEL INFORMATION.
The figure shows the sequence to use to enter a setting. Subsequent sections provide more detail.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 170
Chapter 5 - Interfaces

Figure 105: Front panel keypad use (basic front panel shown)

5.3.2.3 LED INDICATORS

The enhanced front panel display provides five columns of LED indicators. The first column contains 14 status and
event-cause LEDs. The next four columns contain the 48 user-programmable LEDs.
The RESET key is used to reset any latched LED indicator or target message, once the condition has been cleared
(these latched conditions can also be reset via the SETTINGS > INPUT/OUTPUTS > RESETTING menu).
The USER keys are used by the breaker control feature.

Figure 106: Typical LED panel for enhanced front panel

The status indicators in the first column are as follows:

● IN SERVICE — Indicates that control power is applied, all monitored inputs/outputs and internal systems are
fine, and the relay is in (online) Programmed mode (under Settings > Product Setup > Installation)
● TROUBLE — Indicates that the relay has detected an internal problem. Check the self-test messages
outlined at the end of the Commands and Targets chapter, and view the event records under Actual Values
> Records. For a beta / pre-release, this LED is always on.
● TEST MODE — Indicates that the relay is in test mode. For information, see the Testing section in the
Settings chapter.
● TRIP — Indicates that the selected FlexLogic operand serving as a trip input has operated. Set the operand
under Settings > Product Setup > User-Programmable LEDs > Trip & Alarm LEDs. This indicator latches;
initiate the reset command to reset the latch.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 171
Chapter 5 - Interfaces

● ALARM — Indicates that the FlexLogic operand serving as an alarm switch has operated. Set the operand
under Settings > Product Setup > User-Programmable LEDs > Trip & Alarm LEDs. This indicator never
latches.
● PICKUP — Indicates that an element is picked up. This indicator never latches.
● The event-cause indicators in the first column are as follows.
Event-cause LEDs are below the status LEDs. They are turned on or off by protection elements that have their
respective target setting selected as either “Enabled” or “Latched.” If a protection element target setting is
“Enabled,” then the corresponding event-cause LEDs remain on as long as the operand associated with the
element remains asserted. If a protection element target setting is “Latched,” then the corresponding event-cause
LEDs turn on when the operate operand associated with the element is asserted and remains on until the RESET
button on the front panel is pressed after the operand is reset.
All elements that are able to discriminate faulted phases can independently turn off or on the phase A, B, or C
LEDs. This includes phase instantaneous overcurrent, phase undervoltage, and so on. This means that the phase
A, B, and C operate operands for individual protection elements are ORed to turn on or off the phase A, B, or C
LEDs.
● VOLTAGE — This LED indicates voltage was involved
● CURRENT — This LED indicates current was involved
● FREQUENCY — This LED indicates frequency was involved
● OTHER — This LED indicates a composite function that is not solely current, voltage, or frequency based
(distance or power for example) or a control function (digital element or trip bus for example)
● PHASE A — This LED indicates phase A was involved
● PHASE B — This LED indicates phase B was involved
● PHASE C — This LED indicates phase C was involved
● NEUTRAL/GROUND — This LED indicates that neutral or ground was involved
The user-programmable LEDs consist of 48 amber LED indicators in four columns. The operation of these LEDs is
user-defined. Support for applying a customized label beside every LED is provided. Default labels are shipped in
the label package of every relay, together with custom templates. The default labels can be replaced by user-printed
labels. User customization of LED operation is of maximum benefit in installations where languages other than
English are used to communicate with operators. See the User-Programmable LEDs section in chapter 5 for the
settings used to program the operation of the LEDs on these panels.

5.3.2.4 LABELING
The following procedure requires these pre-requisites:
● The UR front panel label cutout sheet (GE part number 1006-0047) has been downloaded from http://
www.gegridsolutions.com/products/support/ur/URLEDenhanced.doc and printed
● Small-bladed knife
To create custom LED and pushbuttons labels for the enhanced front panel:
1. Start the EnerVista UR Setup software.
2. If not already copied to the Offline Window area, right-click the online device and select the Add Device to
Offline Window option. Click the Receive button in the window that opens to save the settings file to the
Offline Window area.
3. Type labels as follows. Select the File > Front Panel Report. The window opens.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 172
Chapter 5 - Interfaces

Figure 107: Enhanced front panel label designer

4. Enter the text to appear next to each LED and above each user-programmable pushbutton in the fields
provided. The LED Offsets and Button Offsets buttons move all labels left/right and up/down on the page
(they both do the same action, so use either button). The Button Offsets button does not display when there
are no pushbuttons to customize.
5. Feed the UR front panel label cutout sheet into a printer and press the Print button in the front panel report
window.
6. When printing is complete, fold the sheet along the perforated lines and punch out the labels.
7. Remove the UR label insert tool from the package and bend the tabs as described in the following
procedures. These tabs are used for removal of the default and custom LED labels.

Note:
Use the tool with the printed side containing the GE part number facing the user

The label package shipped with every relay contains the three default labels, the custom label template sheet, and
the label removal tool.
If the default labels are suitable for your application, insert them in the appropriate slots and program the LEDs to
match them. If you require custom labels, use the following procedures to remove the original labels and insert the
new ones.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 173
Chapter 5 - Interfaces

To set up and use the label removal tool:

1. Bend the tabs at the left end of the tool upwards as shown

2. Bend the tab at the center of the tool tail

To remove the LED labels from the relay front panel and insert the custom labels as shown:
1. Use the knife to lift the LED label and slide the label tool underneath. Ensure that the bent tabs are pointing
away from the relay.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 174
Chapter 5 - Interfaces

2. Slide the label tool under the LED label until the tabs snap out as shown. This attaches the label tool to the
LED label.

3. Remove the tool and attached LED label as shown.

4. Slide the new LED label inside the pocket until the text is properly aligned with the LEDs, as shown.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 175
Chapter 5 - Interfaces

To remove the user-programmable pushbutton labels from the front panel and insert the custom labels:
1. Use the knife to lift the pushbutton label and slide the tail of the label tool underneath, as shown. Ensure that
the bent tab points away from the relay.

2. Slide the label tool under the user-programmable pushbutton label until the tabs snap out as shown. This
attaches the label tool to the user-programmable pushbutton label.

3. Remove the tool and attached user-programmable pushbutton label.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 176
Chapter 5 - Interfaces

4. Slide the new user-programmable pushbutton label inside the pocket until the text is properly aligned with the
buttons.

5.3.2.5 MENU NAVIGATION

Press the MENU key to display selections or home page. Each press of the key advances through the following
main headings:
● Actual Values
● Settings
● Commands

N60-1601-0125-861-1 177
Chapter 5 - Interfaces

● Targets
● Factory Service
● User displays (when enabled)
The setting and actual value pages are arranged hierarchically. Header display pages are indicated by two black
squares, (nn) while sub-header pages are indicated by a single black square (n). The header display pages
represent the highest level of the hierarchy and the sub-header display pages fall below this level. Use the down,
right, left, and up arrows to navigate the menu. The MESSAGE up and down arrow keys move within a group of
headers, sub-headers, setting values, or actual values. Continually pressing the MESSAGE right arrow from a
header display displays specific information for the category. Conversely, continually pressing the MESSAGE left
arrow from a setting value or actual value display returns to the header display.
Default values are indicated in this instruction manual in mixed case. In the example shown here, the default access
level is restricted.

Highest level Lowest level (setting value)

■ ■ SETTINGS ■ SECURITY ■ ACCESS LEVEL

ó ó
■ ■ PRODUCT SETUP ■ ■Restricted
ô

■ ■ SETTINGS
■ ■ SYSTEM SETUP

Example
■ ■ ACTUAL VALUES Press the MENU key until the Actual Values header page appears. This page contains
■ ■ STATUS system and relay status information.

■ ■ SETTINGS Press the MENU key until the Settings header page appears. This category contains
■ ■ PRODUCT SETUP settings to configure the relay.

■ SECURITY Press the MESSAGE right arrow once to display the first sub-header (Security).
■

ACCESS LEVEL: Press the MESSAGE right arrow once to display the first setting for Security.
RESTRICTED

■ SECURITY Press the MESSAGE left arrow to return to the Security heading.
■

■ DISPLAY Press the MESSAGE down arrow to display the second setting sub-header associated
■ PROPERTIES with the Product Setup header.

LANGUAGE: Press the MESSAGE right arrow once to display the first setting for Display Properties.
English

N60-1601-0125-861-1 178
Chapter 5 - Interfaces

■ ■ SETTINGS Press the MESSAGE left arrow to return to the Display Properties page, then again to
■ ■ SYSTEM SETUP return to the Product Setup Page. Press the MESSAGE down arrow to move to the next
Settings page. This page contains settings for System Setup.

5.3.2.6 CHANGE SETTINGS

Numerical data
Each numerical setting has its own minimum, maximum, and increment value associated with it. These parameters
define what values are acceptable for a setting.

FLASH MESSAGE For example, select the SETTINGS > PRODUCT SETUP > DISPLAY PROPERTIES >
TIME: 10.0 s FLASH MESSAGE TIME setting.

MINIMUM: 0.5 Press the HELP key to view the minimum and maximum values. Press the key again to
MAXIMUM: 10.0 view the next context sensitive help message.

Two methods of editing and storing a numerical setting value are available.
● 0 to 9 and decimal point — The relay numeric keypad works the same as a calculator. A number is entered
one digit at a time. The leftmost digit is entered first and the rightmost digit is entered last. Pressing the
MESSAGE left arrow or pressing the ESCAPE key, returns the original value to the display.
● VALUE keys — The VALUE up arrow increments the displayed value by the step value, up to the maximum
value allowed. While at the maximum value, pressing the VALUE up arrow again allows the setting selection
to continue upward from the minimum value. The VALUE down arrow decrements the displayed value by the
step value, down to the minimum value. While at the minimum value, pressing the VALUE down arrow again
allows the setting selection to continue downward from the maximum value.

FLASH MESSAGE As an example, set the flash message time setting to 2.5 seconds. Press the appropriate
TIME: 2.5 s numeric keys in the sequence “2 . 5". The display message changes as the digits are
being entered.
ò

NEW SETTING Until ENTER is pressed, editing changes are not registered by the relay. Press ENTER to
HAS BEEN STORED store the new value in memory. This flash message momentarily appears as confirmation
of the storing process.

Note:
Numerical values that contain decimal places are rounded-off if more decimal place digits are entered than specified by the
step value

Enumeration data
Enumeration settings have data values that are part of a set, whose members are explicitly defined by a name. A
set has two or more members.
ACCESS LEVEL: For example, the selections available for ACCESS LEVEL are "Restricted," "Command,"
Restricted "Setting," and "Factory Service."

Enumeration type values are changed using the VALUE keys. The VALUE up arrow displays the next selection
while the VALUE down arrow displays the previous selection.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 179
Chapter 5 - Interfaces

ACCESS LEVEL: If the ACCESS LEVEL needs to be "Setting," press the VALUE keys until the proper
Setting selection displays. Press HELP at any time for the context sensitive help messages.

NEW SETTING Changes are not registered by the relay until the ENTER key is pressed. Pressing ENTER
HAS BEEN STORED stores the new value in memory. This flash message momentarily appears as confirmation

Alphanumeric text
Text settings have data values that are fixed in length, but user-defined in characters. They can be upper-case
letters, lower-case letters, numerals, and a selection of special characters.
There are several places where text messages can be programmed to allow the relay to be customized for specific
applications. One example is the Message Scratchpad. Use the following procedure to enter alphanumeric text
messages.
For example, enter the text “Breaker #1”.
1. Press the decimal point to enter text edit mode.
2. Press the VALUE keys until the character 'B' appears; press the decimal key to advance the cursor to the
next position.
3. Repeat step 2 for the remaining characters: r,e,a,k,e,r, ,#,1.
4. Press ENTER to store the text.
5. If you have any problem, press HELP to view context sensitive help. Flash messages appear sequentially for
several seconds each. For the case of a text setting message, pressing HELP displays how to edit and store
new values.

5.3.3 GRAPHICAL FRONT PANEL

The graphical front panel is a hardware option. A relay with a graphical front panel can only be configured with
Enervista, so if you order a relay with a graphical front panel, you also need to order EnerVista.
The graphical front panel consists of a USB port, LED panel, color screen display, user-programmable pushbuttons,
and navigation keys. The graphical front panel has a seven-inch (17.8 cm) color liquid crystal display (LCD). The
display is used to read data, such as metering actual values, alarms, self-test messages, and event records, and for
viewing single-line diagrams. Settings can be changed on the front panel, except for the graphical front panel itself
and for IEC 61850. The USB port connects to a computer with the EnerVista software and can be used to upgrade
the relay and to transfer files and settings. The USB port is the square type B. User-programmable pushbuttons 9 to
40 can be programmed among the 10 pushbuttons on the left and right sides of the display.The graphical front
panel is available only in the horizontal format. The following figures shows the graphical front panel.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 180
Chapter 5 - Interfaces

✫☎✪✡ ✆✑✄✒✏✑✓✓✌✔✄
✁✂✄ ✂☎✄✆✝✞✟ ✠✄✡☛☞✆☛✌✍☛✞✎✎✞✏✝✡ ✆✑✄✒✏✑✓✓✌✔✄

✳✴ ✵✶✷✸✳✹✶
✺✷✻✼✽✾✶ ❏ ◆
✺✶✵✺✿✻❀✶
✺✷✳❁
❂✾❂✷✿ ❑ ❖
❁✳✹❃✼❁
✸✻✾✺❂❄✶
✹✼✷✷✶✴✺ ▲ P
✠✫✬ ✆✌☛✓ ❅✷✶❆✼✶✴✹❇
✻✺❈✶✷
❉❊❋●❍❋ ▼ ◗
❁❈❂✵✶✽
❁❈❂✵✶✹
✦✌✓ ✑✄✡✪ ✴✶✼✺✷❂✾■❄✴❀
✭✮✯✮✰ ✮✯✲ ✮✱✰✮✭

❘✡✄✡✓ ✩✞✏ ✆✑✄✒✏✑✓✓✌✔✄ ❙✌✎✡ ✁✄❚✞✆✡ ✦✞✧☎✍✞✓☎✌✔ ★✡✟✄

✕✖✗✘✙✚✛✜✢✣✤✥
Figure 108: Graphical front panel

Header content varies by page. The home page displays any active icons, such as security status, active setting
group, and active target messages. It shows the date and time of the relay. If the relay synchronizes to an external
time source via PTP, IRIG-B, SNTP, and so on, the date/time is shown in white, and otherwise in yellow. On pages
other than the home page, the header displays the name of the page.
The footer dynamically labels the Tab, or control, pushbuttons immediately below. Page content displays between
the header and footer.

5.3.3.1 HOME PAGE

Press the Home pushbutton to display the root page no matter the state. Any edit, control, or password entry
sessions are canceled. The header shows several relay/system status icons. The default content of the home page
is the product information page, which you can configure to show the content of any single-line diagram page,
annunciator page, metering page, or event records page for example. The Tab pushbuttons on the bottom row each
navigate to their page. The home page displays for a user-configured time period, then scrolls through user-
configured pages, a feature referred to as rolling.
Holding the Home pushbutton for one second displays the product information page. The Home page also can
display when settings are saved.
Security indicator, showing how many people are logged in, including local and remote users. The lock is red when
one or more users are logged in and other otherwise green.
When no users are logged in because login is not required, an icon does not display.
Identifies the active setting group number (not shown)

Displays when an abnormal annunciator alarm is present. Navigate to the Annunciator for details. When there are
no such alarms, the icon does not display.
Even when you acknowledge/reset an alarm, the icon displays as long as the condition remains. For example, a
breaker trouble alarm displays, you acknowledge it, but the icon remains because the breaker trouble remains.
ActiveTargets: defined targets symbol, where targets are error messages.
View error messages by pressing the Menu Tab pushbutton, then accessing the TARGETS menu. Pressing the
RESET button clears those messages that can be.

Configure the home page in the software under Settings > Product Setup > Graphical Panel > Home Page. The
menu does not display when there is no graphical front panel.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 181
Chapter 5 - Interfaces

Figure 109: Home page example with default content (product information)

5.3.3.2 ROLLING MODE

After a user-defined period of inactivity, the graphical front display rolls among up to 10 user-selected pages. The
roll-to-pages are selected in the EnerVista software, with the defaults being the product information page. Each
page displays for less than five seconds. Also, the display backlight intensity is lowered after a configurable period
to a user-defined level (0, 10, 20, or 30%); lower intensity extends the life of the display.
Configure rolling mode in the software under Settings > Product Setup > Graphical Panel > Rolling Mode.
Operation works as follows:
● Press the Home pushbutton or ESCAPE pushbutton twice to cancel rolling, restore full backlight intensity,
and return to the Home page
● Press the ENTER, ESCAPE, or a pushbutton to pause rolling once and restore full backlight intensity
Rolling is disabled by setting the delay to 0.
The following buttons display at the top of the window:
● Save — Updates the connected device if online or the open setting file if offline with changes made
● Restore — Undoes changes that have not been saved
● Default — Changes all rolling mode settings to their factory default values
● Reset — Displays factory default values. Previous changes are not lost unless you save the reset window.

5.3.3.3 SINGLE-LINE DIAGRAMS

A single-line diagram, or mimic diagram, is a line drawing of elements in an electrical system. The graphical front
panel displays up to five single-line diagrams. Each can be configured to show the arrangement of a portion of the

N60-1601-0125-861-1 182
Chapter 5 - Interfaces

power system, the status of circuit breakers and of ground and disconnect switches, user-programmable
pushbuttons, and metering and status values. Each also enables control of the displayed breakers and switches
when operand status assigned to the Enable Controls from GFP setting is ON.
One diagram is provided by default, single_bus_line_dsc.mif, which can be modified.
Configure the diagrams under Settings > Product Setup > Graphical Panel > Single Line Diagram Editor.
Each single-line diagram page has a user-configurable name that appears in the header and in the footer Tab
pushbutton label. Factory default names are SLD 1 to SLD 5. Pages that have no configured content have a blank
Tab pushbutton label, and the Tab pushbutton does nothing. The label for the current page has a blue background.

✁✂✁✄☎ ✌✠✁✒✲✁✠ ✩✪✪✪ ✤✠✒✞☛✥✡✠✦✁✠ ✧★ ✩✪✪✪

✆✝✞✁ ✌✠✁✒✲✁✠ ✩✪✟ ✤✠✒✞☛✥✡✠✦✁✠ ✫★ ✩✪✪✪

✆✝✞✁ ✟✠✡☛☛✡☞✁✠ ✌✠✁✒✲✁✠ ✑✪ ✤✠✒✞☛✥✡✠✦✁✠ ✧★ ✩✪✟

✌✍☛ ✟✠✡☛☛✡☞✁✠ ✳✝☎✄✴ ✩✪✪✪ ✤✠✒✞☛✥✡✠✦✁✠ ✫★ ✩✪✟
✌✍☛ ✳✝☎✄✴ ✩✪✟ ✬✁✒✄☎✡✠ ✩✪✪✪
✎✁✁✏✁✠ ✳✝☎✄✴ ✑✪ ✬✁✒✄☎✡✠ ✩✪✟
✑✠✡✍✞✏
✓✁☎✁✠✝✞✱ ✟✒✭✒✄✝☎✡✠ ✑✁✞✁✠✒✂ ✩✪✟
✑✁✞✁✠✒☎✡✠ ☎✒☎✍☛ ✟✒✭✒✄✝☎✡✠ ✮✡✂✒✠✝☎✯ ✩✪✪✪
✓✡☎✡✠ ✤✁✵☎ ✟✍✠✠✁✞☎ ✤✠✒✞☛✥✡✠✦✁✠ ✩✪✪✪
✔✟ ✡✍✠✄✁
✮✍☛✴✶✍☎☎✡✞ ✟✍✠✠✁✞☎ ✤✠✒✞☛✥✡✠✦✁✠ ✩✪✟

✰✡✂☎✒✱✁ ✤✠✒✞☛✥✡✠✦✁✠ ✩✪✪✪

✰✡✂☎✒✱✁ ✤✠✒✞☛✥✡✠✦✁✠ ✩✪✟
✕✖✗✕✘✖✙✚✛✜✢✣
Figure 110: Toolbar options for single-line diagram

The letters T, S, B, R, and X next to a controllable element have the following meaning. An example (TSB) is shown
in the next figure.
● T — The element is “tagged” (irrespective of whether it is tagged from graphical front panel or via IEC
61850). Local and remote control of the device are inhibited, both open and close. Tripping is unaffected
unless additional logic has been configured.
● S — The position indication of the device is substituted with a manually entered value
● B — Blocking open/close command is bypassed
● R — Autoreclose is enabled and not blocked
● X — The device is out-of-service and control is not available

5.3.3.4 SINGLE-LINE DIAGRAM EXAMPLE

The following example outlines how to create a circuit breaker diagram, then how to close the second circuit
breaker. The figure shows six switches (SW, M), two breakers (CB), feeder (arrow), and ground (lined arrow).

N60-1601-0125-861-1 183
Chapter 5 - Interfaces

Figure 111: Single-line diagram of open circuit breakers

Under Settings > System Setup > Switches and Breakers, enable and name the six switches and two breakers.
Switch 6, M568G, has the A/3 Pole Opened setting on.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 184
Chapter 5 - Interfaces

Figure 112: Configure Breaker and Switch settings

In the EnerVista software, open the single-line diagram editor under Settings > Product Setup > Graphical Panel
> Single Line Diagram Editor.
Add the four switches for the top line by clicking the GE switch symbol in the toolbar, then clicking in the window. (If
the UR device is not online, the software attempts to connect.) Right-click to edit properties. Rotate switches
SW569 and SW5682 to 270 degrees. Rotate switches 5681 and SW523 to 90 degrees. Ignore the TSB text.
Add the two lower switches. Leave rotation at 0 degrees.
Add the two breakers by clicking the GE breaker symbol in the toolbar, then click in the window. Right-click to edit
properties, rotating 90 degrees and setting the color to red (open).
Draw lines to fill in the gaps between the switches and breakers by clicking the line symbol in the toolbar, then
clicking and dragging on the canvas to draw a line. Do not draw a single line for the top line, but instead draw
several small lines.
Add the feeder arrow head by clicking the symbol in the toolbar, then clicking the end of the line.
Add the ground symbol by clicking the symbol in the toolbar, then clicking the end of the line.
Add three metered values by clicking the M symbol in the toolbar, then clicking near the feeder arrow. Double-click
to edit. The three metered values are SRC1 Vag Mag, SRC 1 P, and SRC 1 Q.
Name the page by right-clicking the bottom tab. Here, page 1 is renamed "Milton line M568M."
Note that active symbols in the toolbar display and those that are inactive are greyed-out.
The diagram has been created. Save it by clicking the Save button.
Next is to close circuit breaker CB523. This circuit breaker is shown at the top right of the figure. A vertical line
means that it is open, and the color can be set as red or green.
On the graphical front panel, press the Home pushbutton, then press the SLDs pushbutton to activate the first
single-line diagram page.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 185
Chapter 5 - Interfaces

Figure 113: Single-line diagram on graphical front panel

Press the Enable Control pushbutton, which displays when the Settings > Product Setup > Graphical Panel >
Home Page > Enable Controls From GFP setting is configured and its FlexLogic operand is ON. The side
pushbutton labels display.

Figure 114: Side pushbutton display on graphical front panel

Press the CB523 breaker pushbutton. Its menu displays.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 186
Chapter 5 - Interfaces

Figure 115: Pushbuttons to control the breaker

Press the pushbutton to close the breaker, confirming the action at the prompt.

Note:
If at the prompt the control action is prevented this is because status of the operand assigned to the Enable Controls From
GFP setting has changed back to OFF before confirming the prompt action. As a result, the command is not issued, and the
screen goes to the top SLD page.

In this diagram, the two circuit breakers have hard-coded actions available to them. No action is possible on the
switches.
Observe the USER PB 9 and 10 entries in the earlier figure. As outlined later, these are activated by clicking the PB
icon on the software toolbar. These two pushbuttons can be configured under Settings > Product Setup > User-
Programmable Pushbuttons.
When a breaker is tagged, the letter T displays under the breaker in the diagram. The Tag pushbutton shown
toggles to Remove Tag.

5.3.3.5 SINGLE-LINE DIAGRAM EDITOR

Start the application in the EnerVista software under Settings > Product Setup > Graphical Panel > Single Line
Diagram Editor.
The following buttons display at the top of the window:
● Save — Updates the connected device if online or the open setting file if offline with changes made
● Restore — Undoes changes that have not been saved
● Load — Opens single-line diagram files, which replaces one or all windows with that in the file selected
● Store — Saves all single-line diagrams as a .mif file. Because single-line diagrams are not retained when
using the Convert Device Settings function, for example when converting in the Offline Window area from
version 7.6 to 7.7, GE recommends making backup files using this function.
On the right side of the window is a toolbox containing the components that can be added to the window. These
include line, breaker, disconnect, metering value, status value, text, and miscellaneous power system elements. To
create the single-line diagram, click the symbol, then click in the window. Once in the window, the component can

N60-1601-0125-861-1 187
Chapter 5 - Interfaces

be positioned and its properties modified. When using the pointing device to position a component, the component
can snap to the nearest snap point. Snap points are in a 4 x 4 rectangular grid. The keyboard arrow keys move the
selected component(s) in one pixel increments when snap locations are inadequate. Multiple components can be
selected and moved or deleted as a group, or copied and pasted to another location. Right- or double-clicking a
component opens the properties window.
Ctrl+A selects all objects in a diagram.

Lines
Line components represent power system busses or electrical connections between power system elements. They
can also be used as visual dividers and underline.
To add a line component, click it in the toolbox, then click in the window. Double-click a line to open its properties
window to set orientation.

Static symbols
Static symbols depicting power system elements are available. For information, see the ANSI/IEEE 315A and IEC
60617 standards.
Up to 32 static symbols can be used per single-line diagram.
To add a symbol, click it in the toolbox, then click in the window. Double-click the symbol to open its properties
window to set orientation.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 188
Chapter 5 - Interfaces

Figure 116: IEEE and IEC static symbols

Breaker and disconnect components

Breaker components and disconnect components are interfaces to the UR breaker control elements and disconnect
switch elements. On a UR device they show dynamically the breaker or disconnect status as calculated by the
element, and provide means to open, close, tag, bypass interlock, and substitute (force status of) the element.
Breaker components in addition provide means to enable/disable breaker autoreclose.
Each breaker and disconnect component can be configured to use UR-style symbols, IEC symbols, or simple
square/slash symbols as shown in the following figure. The symbols assume horizontal symbol orientation, red -
closed color, and green - open scheme. With vertical orientation, they are rotated 90 degrees.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 189
Chapter 5 - Interfaces

Figure 117: Single-line diagram symbols

To add a breaker or disconnect component, click it in the toolbox, then click in the window. Up to 10 dynamic
components can be added to each single-line diagram.
Breaker and disconnect components have three different parts: label, symbol, and flags. Drag each of its parts to
their final locations. Double or right-click any of these parts to open the properties window. Properties that can be

N60-1601-0125-861-1 190
Chapter 5 - Interfaces

edited are label text, breaker control element or disconnect switch element number, symbol orientation (horizontal
or vertical), color scheme (red - closed, or red - open), and assigned side button (if any). If the selected breaker or
disconnect element does not exist in the target relay or has not been enabled, then the component is displayed in
the graphical front panel and in the drawing edit window in grey. The color scheme selection has no effect when an
IEC style symbol is used because IEC style symbols do not use color.

Symbol orientation
The figure shows the orientation available for the breaker and disconnect switch (taking Open status as examples).
The default position is 0 degrees.

Figure 118: Single-line diagram symbol orientation

A question mark displays in a symbol on the graphical front panel when status is bad. The question mark does not
rotate with orientation. The following figures show the orientation available for the static components. The default
position is 0 degrees.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 191
Chapter 5 - Interfaces

Figure 119: Single-line diagram static symbol orientation (sheet 1 of 2)

N60-1601-0125-861-1 192
Chapter 5 - Interfaces

Figure 120: Single-line diagram static symbol orientation (sheet 2 of 2)

User-programmable pushbuttons
User-programmable pushbuttons 1 to 8 are physical pushbuttons on the right side of the graphical front panel,
numbering down the two columns.
Any remaining user-programmable pushbuttons are programmed among the 10 pushbuttons on the left and right
sides of the screen display. They show dynamically and provide a means to perform the same control as the other
pushbuttons.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 193
Chapter 5 - Interfaces

Figure 121: Assigning pushbuttons to the display

As an example, if you set up a single-line diagram with two breakers and six switches, then eight of the side
pushbuttons are used automatically for control of the breakers and switches. Side pushbuttons 9 and 10 are
available. In the single-line diagram, let us set side pushbutton 9 to clear event records as follows:
● Show side pushbutton 9 on the graphical front panel — Click the PB symbol in the toolbar, then set Side
button 9 to pushbutton 9 in the drop-down list. This pushbutton then displays when appropriate on the right
side of the screen display.
● Program event record clearing — Set Settings > Product Setup > Clear Relay Records > Clear Event
Records to FlexLogic operand PUSHBUTTON 9 ON
● Program pushbutton 9 — Set Settings > Product Setup > User-Programmable Pushbuttons >
Pushbutton 9 Function to "Self-reset." When pressed, pushbutton 9 clears the event records.
To instead set the second user pushbutton (not a side pushbutton) to clear events, follow the second and third bullet
points, selecting settings of PUSHBUTTON 2 ON and Pushbutton 2.

Metering components
Metering components show dynamically the value of a FlexAnalog operand or actual value. Up to 16 metering
components can be added to each single-line diagram.
To add a metering component, click the M symbol in the toolbox, then click in the window. Drag it to its final location.
Double-click it to open the properties window. The figure shows the properties that can be edited.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 194
Chapter 5 - Interfaces

Figure 122: Metering properties

Status components
Status components show dynamically the value of a FlexLogic operand. Up to 16 can be used in a diagram and 30
in all single-line diagrams.
An example is to show the Off or On state of the ANY MAJOR ERROR FlexLogic operand. The name of the
operand displays in the single-line diagram editor, then as Off or On on the graphical front panel.
To add a status component, click the S symbol in the toolbox, then click in the window. Drag it to its final location.
Double-click it to open the properties window. Properties that can be edited include parameter (any FlexLogic
operand), text color background color, and on and off text.
Optionally add a text label to display beside the status.

Text
Text components show a single line of user-configured text.
Up to 16 text components can be used per single-line diagram.
To add a text component, click the T symbol in the toolbox, then click in the window. Drag it to its final location.
Double-click it to open the properties window. Properties that can be edited are text, color, and size.

5.3.3.6 ANNUNCIATOR
An annunciator is a grid of small windows for alarms, actual values, self-test messages, and product information.
The graphical front panel emulates a conventional annunciator panel. The annunciator has 96 windows, each with a
description of the alarm condition that lights the window. The windows are arranged in rows and columns of 3 x 4, 4
x 6, or 6 x 8 over several pages. Each window can have up to three lines of configurable text, and one line can
instead be a metered value. Normally the window background is dark, and when the configured FlexLogic operand
becomes On, the window lights up.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 195
Chapter 5 - Interfaces

The figure shows that two alarms are active. One alarm is configured red and the other alarm is configured blue.
The red alarm type is Self Reset, so the alarm displays in a solid color. The blue alarm type is Acknowledgeable, so
the alarm flashes until it is acknowledged, for example by navigating with the arrow keys and pressing the ENTER
button. The alarm then remains blue until the trigger condition is eliminated.

Figure 123: 3x4 annunciator page with two active windows

To display the annunciator, press the Home pushbutton, then the Annunciator Tab pushbutton. If there is one or
more window in alarm or requiring reset, the annunciator page showing the first of these opens. Otherwise the first
annunciator page opens.
Alarms do not display automatically. Set the Home page and/or rolling pages to display annunciator pages. The Tab
pushbutton labels populate with the annunciator pages. The label text for each annunciator page is configurable
and displays in the header and Tab label. The current page has a blue Tab label. Tab labels for annunciator pages
that have an active window (that is, on, latched, or unacknowledged) are red. Pages where alarms are not triggered
have a grey Tab label. Pages that have no configured windows do not have Tab pushbuttons and do not display.
The Up, Down, Left, and Right pushbuttons cause the selection to move one window in the indicated direction.
Pressing the Right pushbutton past the last window in a row scrolls the display to any next annunciator page, not
the next row. The behavior is similar for the other pushbuttons, for example pressing the Up pushbutton while in the
top row goes to any previous page. If no previous page exists, no action occurs.
Annunciator windows are positioned statically, so that all windows are visible no matter their state.
Alarm types of each window can be configured as Self Reset, Latched, or Acknowledgeable. In Self Reset mode,
the window lighting follows the state of the configured FlexLogic operand. The self-reset mode alarm sequence
conforms to ISA-18.1-1979 (R2004) standard type A 4 5 6.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 196
Chapter 5 - Interfaces

Process: Normal
Sequence: Normal
Visual: Off

Return to Normal

To Abnormal
Process: Abnormal
Sequence: Acknowledged
Visual: On
859856A1.vsd

Figure 124: Annunciator alarm sequence in Self Reset mode

Latched mode is intended for transient signals such as trip, and it conforms to ISA-18.1-1979 (R2004) standard type
M6.

Process: Normal
Sequence: Normal To Abnormal
Visual: Off
Return to Normal

Process: Abnormal or Normal

Reset while
Sequence: Alarm
Normal
Visual: Fast Flash

Process: Abnormal
Reset while
Sequence: Acknowledged
Abnormal
Visual: On
859857A1.vsd

Figure 125: Annunciator alarm sequence in Latched mode

In Acknowledgeable mode, both Off to On and On to Off state changes in the configured operand cause the
background to flash; the window must be acknowledged/reset to cancel flashing. This mode conforms to
ISA-18.1-1979 (R2004) standard type R-6.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 197
Chapter 5 - Interfaces

Process: Normal
Reset Sequence: Normal To Abnormal
Visual: Off

Process: Normal Reset while Normal Process: Abnormal or Normal

Sequence: Ringback Sequence: Alarm
Visual: Slow Flash Return to Abnormal Visual: Fast Flash

Process: Abnormal
Reset while
Return to Normal Sequence: Acknowledged
Abnormal
Visual: On
859858A1.vsd

Figure 126: Annunciator alarm sequence in Acknowledgeable mode

To reset all annunciator windows:

● In the software, access Actual Values > Graphical Panel > Annunciator Panel
To acknowledge/reset all annunciator windows on a page:
● On the graphical front panel with none of the annunciator windows selected, press the RESET pushbutton
once for acknowledgement and twice for reset. The flashing stops.
To acknowledge an annunciator window:
● On the graphical front panel, press the Up, Down, Left, and Right pushbuttons to select the window, so that is
has a yellow outline. Press the RESET or ENTER pushbutton. While a window is selected, if that window has
activated since the last restart, the date/time of the last activation of that window displays in the header.
An alarm remains in an alarm state (for example, displays red) when the condition remains. That is, if you
acknowledged a flashing alarm but the alarm condition remains, the background color remains red.
The SETTINGS > INPUTS/OUTPUTS > RESETTING > RESET ANNUNCIATOR setting can be used to select a
FlexLogic operand that when activated acknowledges/resets all annunciator windows.

5.3.3.7 ANNUNCIATOR EDITOR

The annunciator editor is used to configure alarms and actual value displays for the graphical front panel.
The path in the EnerVista software is Settings > Product Setup > Graphical Panel > Annunciator Editor.
The figure shows the annunciator editor and its preview window. The page name is entered as General at the top
right. Acknowledgeable and self-resetting alarms are set for basic functions, such as online/offline, Ethernet ports,
unauthorizedaccess/failed logins, and battery failure. The text to display in the annunciator window is entered. The
IN SERVICE LED is set to be green because when the device is on, this LED is green. The preview shows what the
annunciator looks like with all alarms triggered. The last window is not configured and displays blank/grey. In order
for the Ethernet and battery alarms to work, the corresponding self-test alarms have been enabled under Settings >
Product Setup > User-Programmable Self Tests (not shown). The LEDs can be viewed on the front panel, so
adding them to the annunciator is for illustrative purposes only.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 198
Chapter 5 - Interfaces

Figure 127: Annunciator editor and preview window

The three page layouts (3 × 4, 4 × 6, and 6 × 8) select the number of rows x columns of windows that appear in a
page. Annunciator window size and text size shrink as the number of annunciator windows in a page increases.
Properties that can be edited include alarm type (acknowledgeable, latched, self-reset), alarm input (any FlexLogic
operand), text color, and alarm background color.
The following buttons display at the top of the window:
• Save — Updates the connected device if online or the open setting file if offline with changes made
• Restore — Undoes changes that have not been saved
• Default — Changes all annunciator settings to their factory default values
• Reset — Displays factory default values. Previous settings are not lost unless you save the reset window.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 199
Chapter 5 - Interfaces

5.3.3.8 METERING EDITOR

The metering editor is an actual values display tool. It creates pages of actual values for the graphical front panel.
Thereare two types: tables and phasor diagrams. Tabular actual values pages have settings to configure, while
phasor actual values pages have no settings. Five tabular metering pages can be configured, while there can be a
phasor page for each configured AC source. They display on the graphical front panel using the Metering Tab
pushbutton.
The path to the editor is Settings > Product Setup > Graphical Panel > Metering Editor.

Figure 128: Metering editor with preview window

The inputs are selected at the top. Select from the drop-down list or start typing in the field.
The page, page name, and grid layout are set below the inputs.
Content to display is configured with the cell lines. The content can be actual values, a status indicator, or text.
● Actual value — Select from the FlexAnalogs applicable to the relay, where a FlexAnalog is an analog
parameter
● Status — Select from the FlexLogic operands identified in the Status Inputs at the top of the window. An
example is to display text to indicate whether the BATTERY FAIL operand is on or off.
● Text — Enter text to display in the table, for example name of table or column heading
If the metering input is other than OFF, the value of the selected metering input displays, formatted according to the
size, text color, units, multiplier, and decimal configuration. Otherwise either the Text or the Off Text displays
depending on the value of the operand selected by setting Status Input/Index.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 200
Chapter 5 - Interfaces

A maximum of eight Status Inputs/Indexes can be used per metering page and 16 in all metering pages.
The following buttons display at the top of the window:
● Save — Updates the connected device if online or the open setting file if offline with changes made
● Restore — Undoes changes that have not been saved
● Default — Changes all actual value settings to their factory default values
● Reset — Displays factory default values. Previous settings are not lost unless you save the reset window.

5.3.3.9 CONFIGURABLE NAVIGATION EDITOR

Configurable Navigation is a feature that opens specified pages when specific FlexLogic operands are activated.
This feature is useful to open the annunciator page containing an annunciator window that has entered its abnormal
state.
In the example shown, failure of any of the three Ethernet ports triggers the Product Information page to display.
With unauthorized access (such as wrong password), IRIG-B clock failure, or breaker trouble, the Event Records
display. When a breaker opens, a single-line diagram displays. For the Ethernet and IRIG-B failure pages to work,
these functions also have been enabled under Settings > Product Setup > User-Programmable Self Tests. For
the breaker trouble, the single-line diagram has been configured.

Figure 129: Navigation editor

The path is Settings > Product Setup > Graphical Panel > Configurable Navigation.
The settings consist of 64 field pairs, each with a condition and an activation page. The condition selects any
FlexLogic operand. The activation page selection is the standard set, such as product information, event records,
annunciator pages, and single-line diagrams.
To use the feature, select a CONDITION, select its ACTIVATE PAGE option, then save. When selecting the
condition operand, open the drop-down list and start typing in the field to auto-fill. For example, typing F displays
FIRST ETHERNET FAIL.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 201
Chapter 5 - Interfaces

The following buttons display at the top of the window:

● Save — Updates the connected device if online or the open setting file if offline with changes made
● Restore — Undoes changes that have not been saved
● Default — Changes all settings in the window to factory default values
● Reset — Displays factory default values. Previous settings are not lost unless you save the reset window

5.3.3.10 NAVIGATION KEYS

Up/Down/Left/Right — These pushbuttons move the selector among the options on a page. The
selection is indicated by a yellow background or a yellow border. On menu pages, the Right
pushbutton activates the selected submenu drilling down the menu hierarchy, and the Left pushbutton
backs up the menu hierarchy. These pushbuttons have a typematic feature on some pages: after a
short pause, the pushbutton repeats as long as it is pressed.
ENTER — Activates the selection on the display, for example a submenu, a control, a keypad key, or
a setting. Also stores updated settings.
ESCAPE — If a setting is open for edit, this pushbutton closes the setting without saving. If an item is
selected, this pushbutton deselects it. Otherwise this pushbutton activates the previous page in the
page hierarchy.
RESET — Clears all latched LED indications and target messages. When a page with
acknowledgeable/resettable items is displayed, it instead resets/acknowledges all items on that page,
or if an item on that page is selected, it resets/acknowledges that item. If you reset/acknowledge
alarms, they stop flashing but remain in the alarm state as long as that state remains. In other words,
a red alarm does not switch off just because you acknowledged the alarm.
Home — Activates the home page, which is the root page. The page displays product information by
default and is configurable.
Side pushbutton — Five pushbuttons on the left side of the display and five pushbuttons on the right
side of the display. They perform various functions depending on the displayed page, such as
switchgear controls. The display dynamically shows its label next to each side pushbutton when the
pushbutton has an assigned function. These pushbuttons can also be programmed to function as
user-programmable pushbuttons 9 and above.
Tab pushbutton — Five pushbuttons under the display. They navigate through the page hierarchy,
and on some pages activate other actions. The display footer dynamically labels the page or action
that is activated by the Tab pushbutton.
User-programmable pushbutton — Eight physical pushbuttons are associated with the first eight
user-programmable pushbutton elements. Numbering is down, that is, 1 to 4 down the left column and
5 to 8 down the right column. These elements control a set of FlexLogic operands that can be used to
initiate outputs or select modes. Each physical pushbutton has an integrated LED indicator that can
be user-configured to display the appropriate status. These pushbuttons have clear covers behind
which custom labels can be mounted. A utility is available to print the labels, under File > Front Panel
Report in the software

5.3.3.11 LED INDICATORS

The graphical front panel has 14 LEDs. LEDs 1 to 5 are fixed status LEDs, and LEDs 6 to 14 are programmable.

Status indicators
● IN SERVICE — Indicates that control power is applied, all monitored inputs/outputs and internal systems are
fine, the relay’s test mode is disabled, and the relay is in (online) Programmed mode (under Settings >
Product Setup > Installation)
● TROUBLE — Indicates that the relay has detected an internal problem. Check the self-test messages
outlined at the end of the Commands and Targets chapter, and view the event records under Actual Values
> Records. For a beta / pre-release, this LED is always on.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 202
Chapter 5 - Interfaces

● TEST MODE — Indicates that the relay is in Test Blocked (solid) or Test (flashing) mode. For information, see
the Testing section in the Settings chapter.
● TRIP — Indicates that the selected FlexLogic operand serving as a trip input has operated. Set the operand
under Settings > Product Setup > User-Programmable LEDs > Trip & Alarm LEDs. This indicator
latches; initiate the reset command to reset the latch.
● ALARM — Indicates that the selected FlexLogic operand serving as an alarm input has operated. Set the
operand under Settings > Product Setup > User-Programmable LEDs > Trip & Alarm LEDs.

Figure 130: Example of LEDs on graphical front panel

User-programmable event-cause indicators

Event-cause LEDs are below the status LEDs. They are turned on or off by protection elements that have their
respective target setting selected as Self-Reset or Latched. If set to Self-Reset, then the corresponding
event cause LED remains on as long as the operand associated with the element remains asserted. If set to
Latched and asserted, then it remains on until the operand is reset and then a reset command initiated.
All elements that are able to discriminate faulted phases can independently turn on or off the phase A, B, or C
LEDs. This includes phase instantaneous overcurrent, phase undervoltage, and so on. This means that the phase
A, B, and C operate operands for individual protection elements are ORed to turn on or off the phase A, B, or C
LEDs.
The LEDs have defaults and can be configured to show instead the status of any FlexLogic operand.
The labeling area has a clear cover for custom labels. A utility is available to print stick-on labels, as outlined later in
this chapter.
These LEDs are programmed by default as follows:
● PICKUP — LED 6 — Indicates that an element is picked up, and hence a trip can be imminent
● VOLTAGE — LED 7 — Indicates voltage was involved
● CURRENT — LED 8 — Indicates current was involved
● FREQUENCY — LED 9 — Indicates frequency was involved
● OTHER — LED 10 — Indicates a composite function that is not solely current, voltage, or frequency based
(distance or power for example) or a control function (digital element or trip bus for example)
● PHASE A — LED 11 — Indicates phase A was involved
● PHASE B — LED 12 — Indicates phase B was involved
● PHASE C — LED 13 — Indicates phase C was involved
● NEUTRAL/GROUND — LED 14 — Indicates that neutral or ground was involved

N60-1601-0125-861-1 203
Chapter 5 - Interfaces

5.3.3.12 LABELING
The relay includes software for labeling the LEDs and pushbuttons on the graphical front panel and a sticker sheet
with preprinted and blank labels. The pre-printed labels are on the top-left of the template sheet, and the blank
labels are on the bottom-right. Use the pre-printed labels, or use the designer provided in the software and print
labels onto the template. One sheet is provided.
The example shows LED labeling, with pushbutton labeling below it (cut off).
To create LED and pushbutton labels for the front panel:
1. In the EnerVista software, in the Online or Offline Window area, access Settings > Front Panel Label
Designer or Front Panel Label Designer (at the product root level). The designer window opens with pre-
configured labels.
2. Under File > Print Setup, change the page orientation to Landscape.
3. In the label designer window, delete all labels not wanted for printing. This can be done by clicking the Reset
button to clear all labels, or by selecting each unwanted label and deleting it. Otherwise, all labels displayed
print on the template and use up the template. If you make a mistake, exit the window and open it again to
view the default labels.
4. Based on the location on the template on which to print, create the labels by typing in the appropriate slots.

Figure 131: Front panel label designer for graphical front panel
5. Click the Print button in the window and select the printer.
6. Once printed, peel the labels off the template and stick them on the front panel. For the enhanced and
graphical front panels, they go over the clear plastic inserts, not under. For the basic front panel, they go
under or over the plastic covers.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 204
Chapter 5 - Interfaces

Any changes are not saved. Each time that the label designer window opens, the original template displays. Any
labels deleted are not lost.

5.3.3.13 MENU NAVIGATION

Press the MENU key to display selections or home page. Each press of the key advances through the following
main headings:
● Actual Values
● Settings
● Commands
● Targets
● Factory Service
● User displays (when enabled)
Access the main menu by pressing the Home pushbutton, then the Menu Tab pushbutton.
Use the Up and Down arrow pushbuttons to select a submenu, then press the Right or ENTER pushbutton to drill
into that submenu. The Left and ESCAPE pushbuttons back up the menu hierarchy.
The Page Up and Page Down Tab pushbuttons also navigate through the list. When there is only a single page of
options, they jump to the first and last entries.
The options displayed depend on order code.

Figure 132: Main menu on graphical front panel

5.3.3.14 CHANGE SETTINGS

When enabling an element in the EnerVista software that outputs to an actual value, the actual values menu is not
updated on the graphical front panel via Ethernet connection when that menu is active on the graphical front panel.
Navigate out and back into the menu for activation.

Numerical data
This example outlines how to change the FLASH MESSAGE TIME setting. Flash messages are status, warning,
error, and information messages displayed in response to certain key presses during settings programming. An
example is a confirmation message upon saving settings. This setting specifies how long to display the message.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 205
Chapter 5 - Interfaces

Press the Menu pushbutton to display the main menu.

Figure 133: Main menu

Use the Up or Down pushbutton to select SETTINGS, then press the Right or ENTER pushbutton.

Figure 134: Settings menu

With PRODUCT SETUP selected, press the Right or ENTER pushbutton.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 206
Chapter 5 - Interfaces

Figure 135: Product Setup menu

Use the Up or Down pushbutton to select DISPLAY PROPERTIES, then press the Right or ENTER pushbutton.

Figure 136: Display Properties menu

Use the Up or Down pushbutton to select FLASH MESSAGE TIME, then press the Right or ENTER pushbutton. If
the relay is configured to require login to edit settings, and the user is not already logged in, the login page displays.
When the user has successfully logged in, the setting is opened for edit. As the FLASH MESSAGE TIME setting
accepts a numerical value, a keypad displays. The time is to be changed to 4.0 seconds.
The current setting displays. A flashing cursor line marks the insertion point, initially positioned after the last
character of the setting. The setting range displays under the text.
Press the <-- Move Cursor and Move Cursor --> Tab pushbuttons to move the insertion point. Place it after the 2.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 207
Chapter 5 - Interfaces

Press the Backspace Tab pushbutton to remove the character to the left of the cursor, in this case the 2.
Using the arrow keys, enter another time, for example 4 for four seconds. These Up, Down, Left, and Right
pushbuttons move the keypad key selector. Pressing the ENTER pushbutton with the - key selected inverts the
sign. Pressing the ENTER pushbutton with the decimal point selected enters that character at the insertion point.
Push ENTER now to accept the 4.

Figure 137: Settings page with numeric keypad

Press the Save Tab pushbutton, which does a range check on the value, saves the setting when valid, closes the
page, and displays the previous page.
When a setting is not saved due to an invalid value, a message flashes, for example being out of range. In cases
where the relay needs to be restarted for settings to take effect, the flash message advises.
Setting entry can be canceled without impact on the original value by pressing the ESCAPE or Home pushbutton.

Alphanumeric text
Settings that accept alphanumeric values display a keyboard. An example is a pushbutton name.
The &123 key toggles between text and numbers.
The shift key (up arrow on keyboard) is green upon activation, while the keyboard letters switch to upper case.
Double-click the shift key to lock capital lettering, or full capitals.
The globe key (shown greyed-out) toggles the keyboard language between English and another display language
selected, for example between English and French. (The second language needs to be activated under Settings >
Product Setup > Display Properties.)
For Japanese and Chinese, up to 10 characters can be input in a field, not 20.
To add accents, highlight a key and hold the ENTER pushbutton on the graphical front panel. Any special
characters associated with the key display.
To avoid conflict with XML programming, do not enter the following characters on the Annunciator and Metering
editor panels: " (quotation mark), ' (apostrophe), < (less than), > (greater than), & (ampersand). When used, the text
following the character does not display or the Annunciator and Metering panels do not display on the graphical
front panel.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 208
Chapter 5 - Interfaces

Figure 138: Settings page with keyboard and accents

5.3.3.15 VIEW ACTUAL VALUES

In addition to data viewable in the Actual Values menu on the front panel, phasor diagrams and metered data can
be displayed. The metered data can be arranged as a table. The update rate of metered values is 500 ms.
A phasor page for each configured AC Source and up to five user-configurable metering pages can be displayed.
The phasor pages are not configurable. Each phasor page shows a phasor plot and numerical values of all
currents, voltages, and symmetrical components of a single AC source.
The Annunciator and Metering pages can be configured to display data. Each has a user-configured number of
rows and columns. Each cell can include either configurable static text or the value of a selected FlexLogic operand,
FlexAnalog operand, or actual value.
To display a metering page, press the Home pushbutton, then the Metering Tab pushbutton. The first metering
page opens, with phasor pages listed before tabular pages. The Tab pushbuttons display any other metering page,
as do the Up, Down, Left and Right pushbuttons. The current page is highlighted with a blue Tab pushbutton.
Each phasor page has a name, which consists of the value of the SOURCE NAME # setting appended with "
Phasors." Phasor pages that have no configured CTs or VTs do not have a Tab pushbutton, and phasor pages that
have no configured cells cannot be displayed.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 209
Chapter 5 - Interfaces

Figure 139: Phasor display

The configurable name displays in the header and Tab pushbutton label. Factory default names are Page 1, Page
2, and so on.

Figure 140: Metered actual values

The phasor sources are configured under Settings > System Setup > Signal Sources. The tables to display the
actual values are configured in the software under Settings > Product Setup > Graphical Panel > Metering
Editor.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 210
Chapter 5 - Interfaces

5.3.4 BREAKER CONTROL

The relay can interface with associated circuit breakers. In many cases the application monitors the state of the
breaker, that can be presented on front panel LEDs, along with a breaker trouble indication. Breaker operations can
be manually initiated from the front panel keypad or automatically initiated from a FlexLogic operand. A setting is
provided to assign names to each breaker; this user-assigned name is for the display of related flash messages.
These features are provided for two breakers; the user can use only those portions of the design relevant to a single
breaker, which must be breaker 1. It is assumed in the following discussion that the SETTINGS > SYSTEM SETUP
> BREAKERS > BREAKER 1(2) > BREAKER FUNCTION setting is enabled for each breaker.

5.3.4.1 CONTROL MODE SELECTION AND MONITORING

Installations can require that a breaker be operated in the three-pole only mode (3-pole), or in the one and three-
pole (1-pole) mode, selected by setting. If the mode is selected as three-pole, a single input tracks the breaker open
or closed position. If the mode is selected as one-pole, all three breaker pole states must be input to the relay.
These inputs must be in agreement to indicate the position of the breaker.
For the following discussion it is assumed that the SETTINGS > SYSTEM SETUP > BREAKERS > BREAKER 1(2)
> BREAKER 1(2) PUSH BUTTON CONTROL setting is enabled for each breaker.

5.3.4.2 CONTROL OF BREAKERS

After a correct command password, you are permitted 30 minutes in which to make any changes. After this 30
minute interval you cannot open or close a breaker via the keypad. The following instructions begin from the not-
permitted state.

Control of two breakers

For the following setup example, the Name field represents the user-programmed variable name.
For this example, the relay is connected and programmed for both breaker 1 and breaker 2. The USER 1 key
performs the selection of which breaker is to be operated by the USER 2 and USER 3 keys. The USER 2 key
manually closes the breaker, and the USER 3 key manually opens the breaker.
ENTER COMMAND This message appears when the USER 1, USER 2, or USER 3 key is pressed and a
PASSWORD COMMAND PASSWORD is required, that is, if COMMAND PASSWORD is enabled and
no commands have been issued within the last 30 minutes

PRESS USER 1 This message appears if the correct password is entered or if none is required. This
To select breaker message displays for 30 seconds or until the USER 1 key is pressed again.

BKR1-(Name) SELECTED This message displays after the USER 1 key is pressed for the second time. Three
USER 2=CLS / USER 3=OP possible actions can be performed from this state within 30 seconds as per the following
items (1), (2) and (3).
(1)

USER 2 OFF / ON If the USER 2 key is pressed, this message appears for 20 seconds. If the USER 2 key is
To close BKR1-(Name) pressed again within that time, a signal is created that can be programmed to operate an
output relay to close breaker 1.
(2)

USER 3 OFF / ON If the USER 3 key is pressed, this message appears for 20 seconds. If the USER 3 key is
To open BKR-1(Name) pressed again within that time, a signal is created that can be programmed to operate an
output relay to open breaker 1.
(3)

N60-1601-0125-861-1 211
Chapter 5 - Interfaces

BKR2-(Name) SELECTED If the USER 1 key is pressed at this step, this message appears showing that a different
USER 2=CLS / USER 3=OP breaker is selected. Three possible actions can be performed from this state as per (1),
(2) and (3). .
Repeatedly pressing the USER 1 key alternates between available breakers. Pressing
keys other than USER 1, 2, or 3 at any time cancels the breaker control function

Control of one breaker

For this application, the relay is connected and programmed for breaker 1 only. Operation for this application is
identical to that described in the previous section for two breakers.

5.3.5 PASSWORD CONTROL

The relay supports password entry from a local or remote connection. Local access is defined as access to settings
or commands via the front panel. This includes both keypad entry and the RS232 port. Remote access is defined as
access to settings or commands via any rear communications port. This includes both Ethernet and RS485
connections.
When entering a settings or command password via EnerVista or any serial interface, you must enter the
corresponding connection password. If the connection is to the back of the relay, the remote password must be
used. If the connection is to the RS232 port of the front panel, the local password must be used.
There are two user security access levels; 'setting' and 'command', for which you can set a password for each. Use
of a password for each level controls whether you can enter commands or change settings. Another option is to
specify setting and/or command access for individual user accounts.

Setting
This allows you to make any changes to any of the setting values:
● Changing any setting
● Test mode operation

Command
This restricts you from making any settings changes, but allows you to perform the following operations:
● Operating the breakers via front panel keypad
● Changing the state of virtual inputs
● Clearing the event records
● Clearing the oscillography records
● Clearing fault reports
● Changing the date and time
● Clearing the breaker arcing current
● Clearing energy records
● Clearing the data logger
● Clearing the user-programmable pushbutton states
To enter the initial setting or command password:
1. Press the MENU key until the SETTINGS header flashes momentarily and the PRODUCT SETUP message
appears on the display.
2. Press the MESSAGE right arrow until the ACCESS LEVEL message appears on the display.
3. Press the MESSAGE down arrow until the CHANGE LOCAL PASSWORDS message appears on the display.
4. Press the MESSAGE right arrow until the CHANGE SETTING PASSWORD or CHANGE COMMAND
PASSWORD message appears on the display.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 212
Chapter 5 - Interfaces

■ ■ SECURITY ACCESS LEVEL:

■■ ó Restricted
■ CHANGE LOCAL CHANGE COMMAND
ó ■ PASSWORDS ó PASSWORD: No
CHANGE SETTING
ñ PASSWORD: No
5. After the CHANGE...PASSWORD message appears on the display, press the VALUE up or down arrow to
change the selection to “Yes.”
6. Press the ENTER key and the display prompts you to ENTER NEW PASSWORD.
7. Type in a password and press the ENTER key.
8. When VERIFY NEW PASSWORD displays, re-type the password and press ENTER

CHANGE SETTING
PASSWORD: No ó
CHANGE SETTING ENTER NEW VERIFY NEW
PASSWORD: Yes ó PASSWORD: ########## ó PASSWORD: ##########
NEW PASSWORD
ñ HAS BEEN STORED
9. When the NEW PASSWORD HAS BEEN STORED message appears, your new Setting (or Command)
password is active.

5.3.5.1 RESETTING THE PASSWORD IN A DEVICE WITHOUT CYBERSENTRY

EnerVista UR Setup
1. In Settings > Product Setup, click the CHANGE button for the Command Password or Setting Password.
2. The pop-up states Password Status: Set, confirming that the user has previously set a password. Type
ChangeMe1# in both the New Password and Confirm Password fields, and press OK.
3. If the device has not been logged into using the previously set password, a prompt will request that the
previous password should be entered. Do this and press OK.
4. A message will appear confirming that this was a valid password - click OK.
5. A pop-up will now appear confirming Password Status: Default (i.e. the password is reset to the
default ChangeMe1# and prompting for the new password. Type the new password, confirm it in the next
field, then click OK.

Front panel
1. Press the MENU key until the SETTINGS header flashes momentarily and the PRODUCT SETUP message
appears on the display.
2. Press the MESSAGE right arrow until the ACCESS LEVEL message appears on the display.
3. Press the MESSAGE down arrow until the CHANGE LOCAL PASSWORDS message appears on the display.
4. Press the MESSAGE right arrow until the CHANGE SETTING PASSWORD or CHANGE COMMAND
PASSWORD message appears on the display.
5. After the CHANGE...PASSWORD message appears on the display, press the VALUE up or down arrow to
change the selection to “Yes”.
6. Type “ChangeMe1#” and press the ENTER key. This will clear the current password and make ChangeMe1#
the password.
7. The display will prompt you to ENTER CURRENT PASSWORD. Type in a new password and press the
ENTER key.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 213
Chapter 5 - Interfaces

5.3.5.2 INVALID PASSWORD ENTRY

By default, when an incorrect Command or Setting password has been entered via the front panel three times within
five minutes, the LOCAL ACCESS DENIED FlexLogic operand is set to On and the relay does not allow settings or
command level access via the front panel for five minutes.
By default, when an incorrect Command or Setting password has been entered via any external communications
interface three times within five minutes, the REMOTE ACCESS DENIED FlexLogic operand is set to On and the
relay does not allow settings or command access via the any external communications interface for five minutes.
The REMOTE ACCESS DENIED FlexLogic operand is set to Off after five minutes for a Command password or 30
minutes for a Settings password.
These default settings can be changed in EnerVista under Settings > Product Setup > Security.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 214
Chapter 5 - Interfaces

5.4 LOGIC DIAGRAMS

Logic diagrams in this instruction manual provide an overview of function and settings. A logic diagram is based on
● Inputs-on the left side, which are setting and operands
● Logical gates, which is Boolean algebra to combine logical lines using AND, OR, NOT, and other gates to get
a new logical state
● Logical operators, which are timers, one-shot operations, latches, and so on
● Outputs-on the right side, which are products of the manipulations with inputs, logical gates, and logical
operators to produce new operands and define the output state of the element
True and false values are denoted by 1 and 0 respectively. A function usually is high/on/enabled when 1.
Reading from right to left in the following diagram, the TRIP BUS 1 OP and TRIP BUS 1 PKP FlexLogic operands
on the right side are triggered when either the settings or reset latch in the middle of the diagram is triggered. When
this applies, the TRIP BUS 1 OP operand is triggered after the delay set by the TRIP BUS 1 PICKUP DELAY or
TRIP BUS 1 RESET DELAY setting, while the TRIP BUS 1 PKP operand initiates immediately. The settings or reset
latch in the middle of the diagram is triggered as follows.
● For the reset, one of three conditions are required to meet the OR requirement shown at the bottom left. That
is, the TRIP BUS 1 LATCHING setting must be 0=Disabled (which is negated by the NOT function to become
1=Enabled), output from the TRIP BUS 1 RESET FlexLogic operand must be 1, or output from the RESET
OP FlexLogic operand must be 1.
● For the settings, one of 16 input conditions at the top left must be met for the OR, the TRIP BUS 1
FUNCTION must be Enabled, and the TRIP BUS 1 BLOCK output must output as 0, which is then negated/
reversed by NOT to become 1.

Logic diagram symbols

Symbol Description
= Off Output from FlexLogic operand, so user-defined
= Enabled 1 = Enabled and 0 = Disabled
OR Any function input on the left side satisfies the condition
AND All functions input on the left side are required to satisfy the condition
¢ Not. Negates/reverses the output, for example 0 becomes 1.
l Connection
S, R Set, Reset
TPKP Timer pickup. Triggered by the settings latch in the diagram
TRST Timer reset. Triggered by the reset latch in the diagram.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 215
Chapter 5 - Interfaces

SETTINGS
TRIP BUS 1 INPUT 1
SETTINGS
= Off
TRIP BUS 1 PICKUP
TRIP BUS 1 INPUT 2
DELAY
= Off Non-volatile,
TRIP BUS 1 RESET
OR set-dominant

***
DELAY
AND S TPKP FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
TRIP BUS 1 INPUT 16 TRIP BUS 1 OP
Latch
= Off TRST
R

SETTINGS
TRIP BUS 1 FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
FUNCTION
TRIP BUS 1 PKP
= Enabled
TRIP BUS 1 BLOCK AND
= Off

SETTINGS
TRIP BUS 1
LATCHING
= Enabled
TRIP BUS 1 RESET
= Off
OR

FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
RESET OP 842023A1.CDR

Figure 141: Logic diagram

N60-1601-0125-861-1 216
Chapter 5 - Interfaces

5.5 FLEXLOGIC

5.5.1 FLEXLOGIC DESIGN USING ENGINEER

The IED internally uses the FlexLogic equations. EnerVista Engineer provides a graphical way to design the logic.
When the user presses “compile” in Logic Designer, the software converts the graphical logic into equations and
updates the FlexLogic Equations.
There are two ways to create, edit and maintain the FlexLogic equations:
● Using the FlexLogic Equation Editor available at FlexLogic > FlexLogic Equation Editor
● Using the Logic Designer available at Engineer > Logic Designer

Note:
EnerVista Engineer is only available through the offline window of the EnerVista UR Setup. FlexLogic Equation Editor and
Logic Designer are designed to be mutually exclusive as using them interchangeably to create, edit and maintain the
FlexLogic equations may cause inconsistencies in the resulting equations. We recommend using only one of the two methods
throughout the process.

Parts of EnerVista Viewpoint Engineer software are integrated in the EnerVista UR Setup software. Engineer can be
used to create and modify FlexLogic that is used by a device, such as to monitor output, monitor triggers, and
create self-tests.
Features include:
● Automatically displays existing FlexLogic
● Drag-and-drop interface
● Open multiple tabs and edit simultaneously
● Display symbols in IEC, ISO, or UR formats
● Export a diagram as BMP file or copy it to the clipboard for import into other applications
● Scale and print files in various paper sizes
● Works with all UR firmware versions
The figure shows an example where several inputs are used to trigger an output. With the OR function, any one of
the inputs can trigger the output.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 217
Chapter 5 - Interfaces

Figure 142: Inputs triggering output in Engineer

The process is as follows:

● Modify or create a logic diagram in the Offline Window area of the EnerVista UR Setup software
● Compile it and troubleshoot any errors
● The logic populates automatically into the FlexLogic Equation Editor
● Upload the file to the live device
● Monitor the output

N60-1601-0125-861-1 218
Chapter 5 - Interfaces

This section explains how to use Engineer. It outlines the following topics:
● Design logic
● Send file to and from device
● Monitor logic
● View front panel
● Generate connectivity report
● Preferences
● Toolbars

5.5.2 DESIGN LOGIC

FlexLogic can be created with a block diagram. Note that although work is completed in the Offline Window area of
the software, communication occurs with the online device, for example when switching to monitoring mode.
The following procedures are outlined:
● Examples
● Add existing FlexLogic equations
● Create a logic diagram/sheet
● Rapidly add logic blocks in sequence
● Connect two logic diagrams/sheets
● Optimize the logic
● Change logic order
● Search logic
● Exclude sheet from compile

5.5.2.1 EXAMPLES
The symbols are displayed in the UR format.

Create oscillography trigger every three minutes

Figure 143: Three-minute timer turns on LED for 10 seconds

Preparation — Under Settings > Inputs/Outputs > Virtual Outputs, the first and second virtual outputs are named
OscTrigger

N60-1601-0125-861-1 219
Chapter 5 - Interfaces

Top logic — Three-minute timer trigger

Bottom logic — Turn on LED 1 for 10 seconds when the trigger starts

Create data logger trigger every seven minutes

Figure 144: Seven-minute timer turns on LED for 10 seconds

Preparation — Under Settings > Inputs/Outputs > Virtual Outputs, virtual outputs 3 and 4 are named
DLTrigger
Top logic — Seven-minute timer trigger
Bottom logic — Turn on LED 9 for 10 seconds when the trigger starts

Create events every minute, then every 100 ms

Figure 145: One-minute timer turns on LED and creates events every 100 ms

Preparation — Under Settings > Inputs/Outputs > Virtual Outputs, virtual output 5 is named EVStart, 6 is
named EVTriggered, and 7 is named EVMakeEvent
Top logic — One-minute timer trigger
Middle logic — Turn on LED 17 for 10 seconds when trigger starts
Bottom logic — Create events at 100 ms intervals for the same 10 second period

5.5.2.2 ADD EXISTING FLEXLOGIC EQUATIONS

A logic diagram can be created using existing FlexLogic equations (this section) or by creating new ones (next
section).

N60-1601-0125-861-1 220
Chapter 5 - Interfaces

Note:
FlexLogic Equation Editor and Logic Designer are designed to be mutually exclusive as using them interchangeably to create,
edit and maintain the FlexLogic equations may cause inconsistencies in the resulting equations. We recommend using only
one of the two methods throughout the process.

To create a logic diagram using existing FlexLogic equations:

● In the Offline Window area, modify the FlexLogic for the device under FlexLogic > FlexLogic Equation
Editor. If the device is not listed, right-click the device in the Online Window area and select the Add Device
to Offline Window option. Upon saving the modified FlexLogic, a yellow icon appears for the device in the
Offline Window area to indicate that the logic differs from the Online device.
● In the Offline Window area, access Engineer for the device, then Logic Designer. The logic opens.
● Click the Edit > Auto Populate Workbook menu item. If the software prompts if you want to keep or discard
existing sheets, either is acceptable, with the older excluded sheeted being denoted by brackets, such as <
Sheet 1 >. The logic displays in the various tabs. The FlexLogic created in the equation editor appears in
Sheet 1, for example.

5.5.2.3 CREATE LOGIC DIAGRAM

Upon access of the Logic Designer, the FlexLogic equations of the device display. You can create new logic in new
sheets or modify the ones that display.
This procedure uses input / output logic as an example.
1. In the Offline Window area, access Engineer for the device, then Logic Designer. If the device is not listed,
right-click the device in the Online Window area and select the Add Device to Offline Window option.

Figure 146: Access Engineer in the Offline Window area

A default block diagram opens that shows 48 inputs (boxes) and 48 user-programmable LEDs (circles).
For the graphical front panel, no LEDs can be added to the window and the LEDs are removed when opening
any existing files. For these existing files with the LEDs removed, save the file without them.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 221
Chapter 5 - Interfaces

Figure 147: Default view of FlexLogic designer

2. Optionally delete the default logic diagram by right-clicking its tab at the bottom of the window and selecting
Delete.
3. To add a blank sheet, click Edit > Add Sheet. A new tab displays. Or use the last tab displayed, which is a
blank sheet.
4. Optionally right-click the new tab and rename it.
5. Add the input blocks to the logic diagram. For example, click the I/O Tokens tab on the right, click the Input
element, then click in the logic sheet to add it. Or drag-and-drop it.
6. Double-click the block on the sheet to configure it, selecting from the two drop-down lists. The figure shows
that virtual input 61 is being added. The View Associated Screen button opens its settings window.

Figure 148: Configuring an input block

N60-1601-0125-861-1 222
Chapter 5 - Interfaces

7. Add the output blocks to the logic diagram. For example, click the I/O Tokens tab, click the Virtual Output
element, then click in the logic sheet to add it. Double-click the block on the sheet to configure it. For the
name, make it unique. The figure shows virtual output 61 is being added, with a suffix of "io" added to the
name to make it unique. Note that the outline color of a block is red until it is configured, and that this
properties window varies by block and the selectable options by order code.

Figure 149: Configuring an output block

8. Connect the input blocks to the output blocks by drawing a line as follows. Click at the end of one block and
drag the line to the next block. Or click the Drawing Tools tab, then select the Line option. The cursor needs
to be at the connection point to end the line, not elsewhere on the block. Note that the outline color is no
longer red on the blocks.

Figure 150: Completed inputs and outputs

9. Add any remaining blocks or information. Right-click a block to copy and paste it. Notes are as follows.
Add a text box — Drawing Tools > Text
Add a FlexElement — Elements > FlexElement. An analog input is expected where a small arrow head
shows in the box.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 223
Chapter 5 - Interfaces

Figure 151: FlexElement accepts analog inputs on left side where arrow heads display

Add an Element — Elements tab. Available elements reflect the product, for example the Control Elements
category.

Figure 152: Elements reflect Control Elements

10. Check for any blocks that have a red outline. These are invalid. Fix them before continuing, for example by
configuring them.
11. Compile the logic diagram to check for errors by clicking the Compile button at the bottom left or by pressing
the F7 key.
If prompted about a message about sorting, click Yes to apply the default (for this example), which can be
automatic sorting based on an algorithm that applies fastest execution time.
With successful compiling, the file is saved and the FlexLogic equations populate automatically. Scroll up
through the compile messages, with the red errors being the only messages that require fixing before
proceeding.
The figure shows that we forgot to add the "Io" suffix to the names of virtual outputs 62 and 63, as indicated
by Warning: Virtual output xx using default name. This warning is a minor warning.
The warning input using disabled feature means that input needs to be enabled. Double-click the
block, click the View Associated Screen button, enable the setting, save, and recompile.
The output and messages are explained in the next section.
Some information displayed in the compile messages updates automatically, for example messages after a
device is unplugged.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 224
Chapter 5 - Interfaces

Figure 153: Compile and check the logic

12. View the FlexLogic equations by navigating in the Offline Window area to FlexLogic > FlexLogic Equation
Editor. The window opens with the entries displayed in the next tab.

Figure 154: Logic displayed in FlexLogic Equation Editor

13. Save the work.
The logic diagram has been created and the FlexLogic equations populated. The next steps are to upload the file to
the device and to monitor the device.

5.5.2.4 COMPILED RESULTS AND WARNING MESSAGES

When a yellow caution symbol displays in the Offline Window area, it means that the settings file is not
synchronized with the online device. Right-click the device in the Offline Window area, and select the Update SCL
files option. SCL refers to the Substation Configuration Language. An Instantiated IED capability description (IID)
file is an example of an SCL file and contains the actual settings on a UR device.

Figure 155: Settings files not synchronized between offline and online files

When the Update SCL files option is selected, the CID and IID files in the device folder are updated by the user
configuration in the IEC 61850 panel and thereby become synchronized. The CID file and the IID file (depending on
the preference 'Do not update IID file when updating SCL files') are updated. If the CID file is not already there, it is
generated. The location of these files is

N60-1601-0125-861-1 225
Chapter 5 - Interfaces

C:\ProgramData\GE Power Management\urpc, for example, in the Offline and Online folders.
Any FlexLogic equations entered in the Offline Window area are erased. The logic drawn in the Logic Designer
window in Engineer in the Offline Window area remain. The warning icon disappears after updating. The following
information is contained in the compile window.

Figure 156: Compiled results

● Number of Lines Saved — The number of compiled logic lines eliminated by using the optimization algorithm,
as set in the Optimize Compiled Output option of the Preferences. In the example shown, no lines were
saved because the optimizer is disabled.
● FlexLogic Lines — The number of lines that the compiled logic uses, for example seven of 512 available.
● Virtual Output equations — The number of FlexLogic equations used in the Logic Designer window.
● Timers used — The number of timers used in the Logic Designer window.
● Memory Used — The percent of memory used in the Logic Designer window.

Compilation errors
Block gate or
Category Message Description
gate affected
Number of lines (nnn) exceeds The compiled result exceeds the limit of 512. Reduce
Error All
maximum limit of 512 the number of equations to 512 or less.
Tag-in not configured (TAG_ID, A Tag-In is connected to a circuit but the Tag-In is not
Error Tag-In
SheetReference) referencing an existing Tag-Out

N60-1601-0125-861-1 226
Chapter 5 - Interfaces

Block gate or
Category Message Description
gate affected
The number of One-Shots contained within all of the VO
One Shot is over limit (SYMBOL_ID,
Error 1 Shots blocks has exceeded the maximum allowed for the
SheetReference)
firmware revision. This value can either be 0 or 32.
A Virtual Output block is located within the FlexLogic
VO has no inputs (VO_ID,
Error =VO diagram and there is no block connected as input to it.
SheetReference)
Connect and identify the inputs.
The same timer is used in more than one place in the
Timer used more than once (TIMER_ID, editor. This means either the circuit that the Timer
Error Time
SheetReference) belongs to has been branched, or the Timer has been
duplicated.
An Input symbol is configured to an item that is not
recognized by the current order code and version.
Unrecognized Parameter
Error Input Possible cause: The order code and/or version of the
SYMBOL_ID,Name,SheetReference)
settings file was converted causing the input parameter
to become unavailable.

Compilation warnings
When using the Reset OP operand, a warning can appear indicating that this is a disabled feature. This means
that the Reset Settting's FlexLogic operand is set to OFF. Resetting of the relay can be done by pressing the reset
button on the front panel of the relay or by sending a Reset command through communications.
Block gate or
Category Message Description
gate affected
Minor Input set to unused VO
Input An Input symbol is using an unassigned Virtual Output
warning (SYMBOL_ID,Name,Sheet)
Major
Tag-out Tag-out not connected (TAG_ID,Sheet) A Tag-Out symbol has no input
warning
A symbol’s input and/or output is not connected and is
Major Symbol not connected
All not part of a VO block. Draw the input and/or output to
warning (SYMBOL_ID,Name,Sheet)
the block.
Minor Virtual Output n using default name The Assigned Virtual Output is using the default name.
=VO
warning (VO_ID,Sheet) Change the name.
An Input symbol is using a Contact Input, Contact
Minor Input using default name Output, Digital Element, FlexElement, or Digital Counter
Input
warning (SYMBOL_ID,Name,Sheet) set to the default name. Change the name so that it is
unique.
An Input symbol is using a disabled Virtual Input,
Contact Input, Digital Element, FlexElement, Digital
Setting Input using disabled feature
Input Counter, Control Pushbutton, Programmable
warning (SYMBOL_ID,Name,Sheet)
Pushbutton, Contact Output, or Protection/Monitoring
Element. Enable it and try again.
Major
Input Input set to OFF (SYMBOL_ID,Sheet) An Input symbol is set to OFF
warning
Major
Input Input set to ON (SYMBOL_ID,Sheet) An Input symbol is set to ON
warning
Setting Contact Output Operate is OFF
Input The symbol block is using the default setting of OFF
warning (SYMBOL_ID, Contacts)
Setting Contact Output Seal-In is OFF
Input The symbol block is using the default setting of OFF
warning (SYMBOL_ID, Contacts)

N60-1601-0125-861-1 227
Chapter 5 - Interfaces

5.5.2.5 RAPIDLY ADD LOGIC BLOCKS IN SEQUENCE

Blocks are added by clicking an element then clicking in the drawing area, or by dragging and dropping the element
onto the canvas. Blocks can be added rapidly in sequence, for example when you have inputs 1 to 10, without
having to select the element each time.
1. In Engineer, click File > Preferences. The window opens.
2. Click the Editor entry.
3. Enable the Repeat Symbol check box.
4. Click the OK button to save and exit from the window.
5. In the logic diagram, select an element, then click in the drawing area to add it, click again to add a second
box, and so on.

5.5.2.6 CONNECT TWO LOGIC DIAGRAMS

When the logic is complex and requires two sheets, for example, these two sheets can be connected. By
connecting them, the logic is continuous from one sheet to the next.
1. In the first sheet, click the I/O Tokens tab.
2. Scroll to the bottom, and click and drag the Tag Out element to the sheet where the next sheet is to connect.
3. Double-click the element and in the window that opens, give it a name, such as "To Sheet 2" or "To IO Sheet
2."

Figure 157: Connecting sheet 1 to sheet 2

4. In the second sheet, click and drag the Tag In element to the sheet where the first sheet is to connect.
5. Double-click the element and in the window that opens, select the first sheet from the drop-down list to
connect the two sheets.
6. Save the work.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 228
Chapter 5 - Interfaces

5.5.2.7 OPTIMIZE THE LOGIC

The number of available FlexLogic entries depends on firmware, for example 515 or 1024 lines. The software can
automatically optimize a logic diagram to reduce space and free up entries.
1. In Engineer, enable the Optimization check box in the Compile tab. With this option enabled, the software
automatically optimizes a logic diagram to reduce space and free up FlexLogic entries.
2. Run the compiler by clicking the Compile button. The number of saved lines displays in the Optimization
Summary. Changes also display when the FlexLogic Equation Editor is accessed. The logic diagram does not
change. In the example shown, no lines were saved to free up space.

Figure 158: Code optimization results

5.5.2.8 CHANGE LOGIC ORDER

The order in which the FlexLogic is populated in the FlexLogic Equation Editor window depends on settings.
First, when automatic sorting is not enabled, the sequence in which the blocks were drawn is followed.
Second, the order in which equations are executed can be manually changed, as outlined here.
Third, automatic sorting can be set in preferences, as outlined here. It is enabled by default and means that an
algorithm is implemented to give best results and quickest performance, For example, the block with the fastest
execution time is entered first in the FlexLogic. When two block functions have the same execution time the block
drawn first displays first in the FlexLogic. For example, drawing input 61 to output 61, then input 62 to output 62
causes the input/output 61 to be entered into the FlexLogic first. Automatic sorting takes precedence over manual
sort; if you enable this option, manual sorting is not implemented.
To manually change logic order:
1. In the compile area, click the VO Order tab.
2. If the window is blank, click the Refresh button.
3. Select an entry and click the up or down arrow. To cancel any manual changes, click the Sort or Refresh
button.
4. Recompile. The change is not executed or saved if automatic sorting is enabled

N60-1601-0125-861-1 229
Chapter 5 - Interfaces

Figure 159: Ordering FlexLogic entries

To set automatic sorting:
1. In Engineer, under File > Preferences, select the Compiler option. The Automatically Sort VOs option
means that the block with the fastest execution time is entered first in the FlexLogic. When two block
functions have the same execution time the block drawn first displays first in the FlexLogic. For example,
drawing input 61 to output 61, then input 62 to output 62 causes the input/output 61 to be entered into the
FlexLogic first.

5.5.2.9 SEARCH LOGIC

Items that can be searched in a logic diagram include gates, Input, Contact Input, Contact Output, Timer, Virtual
Output, Tag In, Tag Out, and User-programmable LED. You can perform a search while designing or monitoring.
1. In the compiler area of Engineer, click the Search tab.
2. Use one of the following methods to set search criteria:
a. Select an element from the first drop-down list. Results display automatically.
b. Type in the second text string box, or select any of the 32 previous searches from the drop-down list.
Click the Search button. Any results display.
The search applies to all tabs, not just the active tab.
3. Double-click a search result to view the item.

Figure 160: Search function

You can also select an element from the drop-down list on the toolbar. It is then highlighted in the logic diagram

5.5.2.10 EXCLUDE SHEET FROM COMPILE

While designing the FlexLogic equations, you can remove entire sheets from the compile logic. This allows you to
test various schemes by placing schemes on separate sheets and including either sheet at compile time.
1. In the Logic Designer window, right-click the tab and select the Exclude from Compile option so that the
check mark displays. When sheets are excluded, a message displays with each compile that excluded
sheets will not be reflected in the RPN. An excluded sheet is denoted with end brackets,
similar to < Sheet 1 >.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 230
Chapter 5 - Interfaces

Figure 161: Excluding a tab from compiling

5.5.3 SEND FILE TO AND FROM DEVICE

With the logic diagram created, compiled, and errors eliminated, the FlexLogic can be sent to a live device. And,
conversely, a file from a live device can be added to the Offline Window area for additional work.
To send a file to a device:
1. In the Offline Window area of the software, right-click the device name and select the Write Settings to
Device option. A prompt can appear that the URS file has been repaired; acknowledge the message.
2. When a window opens, select the device to which you want to send the file, then click the Send button and
confirm. The order codes and IEC 61850 edition must match. The file is sent to the live device. Any errors
can be viewed in the log file at the prompt.
To import a file from a device:
1. Close all open files in Engineer that relate to the device, else a message displays to that effect, for example
to close the FlexLogic view associated with the file. When the file is not associated with a live device, a
message displays to that effect; you need to identify the device to which you want to send the file. The order
codes must match.
2. Right-click the device in the Online Window area and select the Add Device to Offline Window option. After
you enter a name for the file, it is written to the Offline Window area.

5.5.4 MONITOR LOGIC

After creating the logic diagram, validating it, and uploading the FlexLogic to a device, the results from the device
can be viewed.
The following checks are performed automatically when switching from design to monitoring, and prompts display
when necessary:
● Verify that the order code of the linked relay matches the settings file
● Verify that the version of the linked relay matches the settings file
● Verify that the FlexLogic Equation Editor of the linked relay matches the settings file. Solution: Compile the
FlexLogic logic diagram and send the settings file to the relay.
● Verify that the FlexLogic Timers of the linked relay match the settings file. Solution: Compile the FlexLogic
logicdiagram and send the settings file to the relay.
● If the settings file contains a serial number lock, then verify that the serial number of the linked relay matches
the settings file
To view results:
1. In the Offline Window area of the software, expand the Engineer entry for the device.
2. Double-click the Logic Designer entry and Compile the logic.
3. Double-click the Logic Monitor entry, or click the M button in the toolbar at the top of the window.
With successful launch, the logic displays and a green indicator displays at the bottom of the tab.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 231
Chapter 5 - Interfaces

When the file is not associated with a live device, a message displays to that effect; you need to identify the device
to which you want to send the file. The order codes must match between the Offline Window and the Online
Window.
When the device is offline, a message indicates problems communicating with the device.
When the devices are not synchronized, a message indicates the FlexLogic does not match the settings file. To
send the offline file to the device, right-click the device name and select the Write Settings to Device option.
When the state of a symbol is OFF, the symbol is shown in the default color or no color.
When a symbol's state changes to ON, the symbol and connection line turns green.
The state of some symbols can either be unknown or the state transitions faster than the update interval. For these
two cases, the state of the symbol is considered 'UNKNOWN' and the symbol is outlined in red.
The colors for the ON and Unknown state can be customized in the Preferences.
The figure shows that the software is communicating with devices (square green indicator) and that a minor error is
present (green box outline). In this case, the battery is weak and needs to be replaced. This can be viewed as the
Replace Battery message on the front panel of the device and in the EnerVista software under Actual Values >
Front Panel > Front Panel or Display/Keypad.

Figure 162: Monitoring a device, with minor error caused by weak battery

5.5.5 VIEW FRONT PANEL AND PRINT LABELS

This window displays the LEDs that are on the front panel. You can create labels and print them for the device. You
do not use the window to add text labels and upload them to the device. Custom labeling is also outlined earlier in
this chapter; see the Front Panel Labeling section.
To view the front panel:
1. In the Offline Window area of the software, expand the Engineer entry for the device.
2. Double-click the Front Panel Report entry. The report displays. The Device Summary is read from the
settings file and cannot be changed. The LEDs and pushbuttons display below the summary.
3. To save the report, click File > Save As, enter a file name, and select the front panel report (FPR), JPG, or
PDF format.
To print labels:
1. In the Front Panel Report window, double-click an LED or pushbutton and enter text.
2. To print the labels, click the Print icon on the toolbar.
3. To save the report and labels, click File > Save As, enter a file name, and select the FPR, JPG, or PDF
format.
4. Use the instructions in the second tab of the window to add the labels to the physical device.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 232
Chapter 5 - Interfaces

5.5.6 GENERATE CONNECTIVITY REPORT

This report displays basic information about a device, such as order code, port numbers, inputs and outputs. You
can use it to create a PDF file of basic information. The report is based on CID and/or IID files, and not the system
or full SCD. All device details including Remote Inputs, Remote Outputs, and Analog Inputs/Outputs are indicated,
including quantities used and available.
To display a device report:
1. In the Offline Window area of the software, expand the Engineer entry for the device.
2. Double-click the Device Connectivity Report entry. The report displays.
3. To save as a PDF file, click File > Save As.

5.5.7 PREFERENCES
Preferences determine functionality. As such, you are encouraged to review them. This section outlines some
options available in the menus and preference panels.
Access them in the Logic Designer panel under the View menu and under File > Preferences. The Logic Designer
and Logic Monitor preferences are outlined here, not all preferences for a device.

5.5.7.1 VIEW MENU

View > Toolbar > Advanced Actions — Active when in Logic Designer. Toggles a toolbar to nudge, rotate, flip, or
change the order of an element.
View > Show Unused Pins — Enable to display unconnected pins. Disable to eliminate unconnected pins from the
view, for example when printing:

Figure 163: Unused pins on and off

5.5.7.2 LOGIC DESIGNER

The path is File > Preferences > Logic Designer.

Workbook Setup
Option Description
Changes the size of diagram area displayed in Engineer. If you set the size to be smaller than an
Size and Units
existing logic diagram, the content is cut off.
The scale for logic diagram when printing. Scaling a large diagram to 200 percent, for example,
WorkBook > Print Scale
results in the diagram being cut off.
When enabled, the printing output prevents Virtual Output circuits from spanning more than a
WorkBook > Orphan
single page. The largest Virtual Output circuit is scaled to fit on a single page and all remaining
Protection
Virtual Output circuits are scaled so that all circuits are printed using the same scale.
WorkBook > Show Title When enabled, places an information box at the bottom right of the diagram when printing. Enter
Block the information in the File Information panel.
WorkBook > Show Sheet When enabled, shows Sheet 1, Sheet 2, or any other name at the top of the logic diagram when
Name printing.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 233
Chapter 5 - Interfaces

Option Description
WorkBook > Start Sheet
Places the sheet on the next page when printing.
On New Page
WorkBook > Show Notes When other than None, prints the text from any information notes added to the document (under
Selection Drawing Tools tab > Note). The text is printed after the logic diagram.
The text entered here displays at the bottom right of a diagram when printing, provided that the
File Information Show Title Block option is enabled. Note the option to change the logo from the GE logo to your
company logo.

Display
The panel sets how the element boxes display. The figure shows how an AND gate displays when the UR default,
IEC, or ISO symbol type is selected.

Figure 164: AND gate varies by standard selected

Editor
Option Description
Enable this feature to add element blocks rapidly in sequence, for example when you have inputs
Repeat Symbol 1 to 10, without having to select the element each time. Select the element block from the toolbox,
click the diagram, then continue to click to add additional blocks.
When enabled and you copy and paste a virtual output or timer element, the numbering
Use first available VO / continues in sequence. For example, you copy timer 5 and paste it as timer 6. When disabled and
Timer you copy and paste a virtual output or timer element, the same number is used. For example, you
copy timer 5 and paste it as timer 5
Logic diagrams with changes are saved automatically according to this interval. The range is 5
Auto-Save Logic
minutes (default) to 30 minutes. With auto-save, the file extension of the saved file is .auto. This
Designer every x minutes
file remains until you save the file manually.

Auto Populate
These options work in the Edit > Auto Populate Workbook function
Option Description
When an existing settings file is opened in the Logic Designer, the Logic Designer populates the
canvas and attempts to evenly distribute the Virtual Output circuits across multiple sheets. A value
VOs per Worksheet of 100 in this setting places all FlexLogic equations on a single sheet until there are 100, then the
next ones are placed on another sheet. A value of 1 places each Virtual Output circuit on a
separate sheet.
If Show Contact Outputs and Show LEDs are selected, for example, the function places Contact
Output and User-programmable LED symbols for settings that are configured. If you disable the
Show / FlexLogic Merge /
LED check boxes, then the LED tab/sheet does not display when you next open the Logic
Show Unuse
Designer window. The settings apply to all products, not just the active window when it is next
opened. Close then reopen the Logic Designer window for the setting to take effect.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 234
Chapter 5 - Interfaces

Compiler
Option Description
Show Warnings Options to filter the messages that display when logic compiles.
Enable to display minor errors. An example is using the default values of an element added to the
Minor diagram, such as the name of the element. An example is "Warning: Virtual output xx using
default name," for which you simply click into the element to rename it.
Enable to display major errors. Examples are an input that does not have a corresponding output,
Major
using disabled features, and failing to connect a symbol. Fix these errors.
Enable to display error message related to settings, such as an improperly configured setting,
Setting
such as using ON or OFF.
When enabled, the logic is compiled with an algorithm to give best results and quickest
performance, for example the fastest logic first. The fastest logic displays in the FlexLogic
Equation Editor output as the first entries in the table. Use sorting when virtual outputs have
Automatically Sort VOs
dependencies on other virtual outputs. This setting takes precedence over order set manually in
the VO Order tab in the compiler. When disabled, the sequence in which the blocks were drawn is
followed
Optimize Compiled
Not applicable. Use the check box outlined earlier in the Optimize the Logic section
Output

5.5.7.3 LOGIC MONITOR

Display
The software displays the color specified when an element is on. There is no color when the element is off. The
software displays another color when the status cannot be determined and is unknown.

Timing
Timing Information can be displayed in the monitoring window. This timing information is only an approximate
representation of how Engineer sees transitions. Use the device's Event Record to view accurate timing information.
The timing information can also be streamed to a comma-separated values (CSV) spreadsheet.
The timing information displayed and recorded can be filtered based on six categories. If a category is not selected,
any timing information related to that category does not display and is not recorded to the CSV file.
Option Description
Enable to display times in the monitoring window.
Show Timing Information Because of the update rate of the Logic Monitoring, the timing information cannot be used as an
in Output Window accurate representation of the events that occur within the relay. Use instead the device's event
record. Timing information can be delayed by 30 seconds.
Enable to write timing information in a spreadsheet. The timing information is recorded in a text file
Save Timing Information that uses commas to separate each of the fields. This file uses the extension CSV that is
to CSV File supported by any spreadsheet application.
Every change written to the CSV file requires a timestamp.

Timestamp format
yyyy/mm/dd hh:dd:ss, devicename, offline
yyyy/mm/dd hh:dd:ss, devicename, ONLINE
yyyy/mm/dd hh:dd:ss, VO1: Virt Out 1, 0
yyyy/mm/dd hh:dd:ss, VI4: Virt In 4, 1
yyyy/mm/dd hh:dd:ss, DI3: Direct In 3, 0

N60-1601-0125-861-1 235
Chapter 5 - Interfaces

yyyy/mm/dd hh:dd:ss, RI2: Remote In 2, 1

yyyy/mm/dd hh:dd:ss, H5a: Contact In 1, 1
yyyy/mm/dd hh:dd:ss, H1: Contact Output 1, 0

Note:
Data is only appended to the CSV file

Note:
Options display for filtering, such as recording timing for Virtual Inputs and Outputs, but not Communications Status

5.5.7.4 COMTRADE WAVEFORMS

Waveform files are viewable in the EnerVista software. The preferences are unrelated to Engineer and are outlined
in the UR Family Communications Guide.

5.5.8 TOOLBARS
These are toggled in the View > Toolbar menu.
The UR symbols are displayed for the toolbox icons. They change when the default setting is changed to IEC or
ISO symbols. The symbols displayed in the toolbox also vary by firmware version, reflecting what is supported for
each release.

FlexLogic Editor toolbar

Figure 165: FlexLogic Editor toolbar

From left to right:

● Create a new settings file
● Open an existing settings file in the URS, CID, or IID format
● Save the Logic Designer diagram
● Create a PDF document from Logic Designer diagram(s). Settings can be changed under File > Preferences
> Workbook Setup.
● Display or hide the compile window area
● Select to change the sort order of the Virtual Output list to the right of the icon. Virtual Outputs can be sorted
numerically in ascending and descending order based on numbers and names.
● Select a Virtual Output to locate and select it in the workbook. Each Virtual Output listed also contains the
name of the sheet where the Virtual Output is located.
● Switch to Logic Designer mode
● Switch to Logic Monitor mode
● Turn on all communications to all Logic Designer diagrams that are in the monitoring mode. Default upon
each launch of Engineer.
● Turn off all communications to all Logic Designer diagrams that are in the monitoring mode. This is a legacy
function for serial communication to turn off communication to devices. Turning off communication applies to
the current session only. When you re-launch the EnerVista software, communication is on by default.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 236
Chapter 5 - Interfaces

Token Toolbox

Figure 166: Drawing Tools

From left to right:

● Draw a line. Click and drag to draw.
● Draw multiple joined lines. Click and drag for each line. Double-click to finish.
● Draw multi-sided object. Click for each line. Double-click to finish.
● Draw four-sided object. Click and drag to draw.
● Draw multiple curves. Click for each line. Double-click to finish.
● Draw multiple, closed curves. Click for each line. Double-click to finish.
● Draw oval or circle. Click and drag to draw.
● Add text box with rectangle around it. Click to add. Double-click it to change text.
● Add figure. Select file in the window that opens, then click on diagram canvas to add figure.
● Add note icon and text. Click to add. Double-click to edit the title and text.

I/O Tokens
These are parts used in FlexLogic equations. They are the inputs and outputs of the Virtual Output equations. The
display can vary from that shown here.

Figure 167: I/O tokens

From left to right:

● Input symbol that can be configured to any FlexLogic operand value
● Remote inputs from other devices
● Input from another UR device. Teleprotection inputs/outputs and direct inputs/outputs are mutually exclusive
and cannot be used simultaneously.
● Teleprotection inputs/outputs and direct inputs/outputs are mutually exclusive and cannot be used
simultaneously.
● FlexAnalog symbol that can be used as the input to a FlexElement or use the FlexAnalog symbol to monitor
an actual value when in logic Monitoring mode
● Contact Input Gate is similar to the Input symbol but is restricted to the operands associated with a Contact
Input
● Contact Output Gate is similar to the Input symbol but is restricted to the operands associated with a Contact
Output. The Operate and Seal-In settings can be configured graphically.
● The Non-Volatile Latch is similar to the Input symbol but is restricted to the operands associated with a Non-
Volatile Latch. The Set and Reset settings can be configured graphically.
● The final output of an equation is a numbered register called a virtual output. Virtual outputs can be used as
an input operand in any equation, including the equation that generates the output, as a seal-in or other type
of feedback.
● Place and configure a Remote Output. The UR's order code and firmware version then determine the
availability of the Remote Output.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 237
Chapter 5 - Interfaces

● Place and configure a Direct Output. The UR's order code and firmware version then determine the
availability of the Direct Output to another UR device.
● Place and configure a Teleprotection Output. The UR's order code and firmware version then determine the
availability of the Teleprotection Output.
● Place a User Programmable LED in the Logic Designer diagram. Not applicable when using a graphical front
panel.
● A Tag Out can be used in 1 of 2 ways. The first use of the Tag Out is to break up logic that needs to span
several sheets. The second use of the Tag Out is to associate a frequently used block of code with the Tag
Out and then repeatedly use the same block of code using a Tag In. When a Tag Out is referenced more than
once, the Tag Out is replaced with a Virtual Output during the compile phase.
● Tag-In can is used to reference an existing Tag-Out. It joins another diagram to a previous diagram.

Boolean Tokens
These symbols are used to create FlexLogic Equations. Use them as intermediate logic for the Virtual Output
equations. The display can vary from that shown here.

Figure 168: Boolean tokens

From left to right:

● Place an OR gate in the Logic Designer diagram. Only one action needs to occur. Any function input on the
left side satisfies the condition.The number of inputs is configurable from two to 16.
● Place an AND gate in the Logic Designer diagram. Multiple actions need to occur. All functions input on the
left side are required to satisfy the condition. The number of inputs is configurable from two to 16.
● Place a NOR gate in the Logic Designer diagram. Gives the value of one when all input operands have a
value of zero and otherwise gives a value of zero. It gives an output signal when there are no input signals.
An inverter that reverses the logic state. The number of inputs is configurable from two to 16.
● Place a NAND gate in the Logic Designer diagram. Gives the value of zero when all input operands have a
value of one and otherwise gives a value of one. It gives an output signal until all signals are present on its
inputs. An inverter that reverses the logic state. The number of inputs is configurable from two to 16.
● Place a XOR gate in the Logic Designer diagram, which is two exclusive OR gates. Only one action needs to
occur. If there are two inputs or there is no input, there is no output.
● Place a NOT gate in the Logic Designer diagram. Gives the value of one when the input operand has a value
of zero and otherwise gives a value of zero. It gives an output signal when there is no input signal. An inverter
that reverses the logic state.
● Place a latch in the Logic Designer diagram. A latch has two inputs and one output. One input is the Set
input, and other input is the Reset input.
● Place a positive one shot symbol that responds to a positive going edge in the Logic Designer diagram. A
"one shot" is a single input gate that generates a pulse ins response to an edge on the input.
● Place a negative one shot symbol that responds to a negative going edge in the Logic Designer diagram
● Place a positive one shot and a negative one shot symbol in the Logic Designer diagram
● Place a timer in the Logic Designer diagram

Elements

For the following elements, you should use EITHER Logic Designer OR the manual setting
screen. Do not use both as this will cause inconsistencies with their settings

N60-1601-0125-861-1 238
Chapter 5 - Interfaces

These blocks configure properties of the element or use element operands as input to FlexLogic equations.

Figure 169: Elements

From left to right:

● Place and configure a FlexElement. A FlexElement is a universal comparator used to monitor any analog
actual value calculated by the relay or a net difference of any two analog actual values of the same type.
● Place and configure the Settings Group settings
● Place and configure a Selector Switch element. Firmware version determines feature availability. The
Selector Switch element is intended to replace a mechanical selector switch. Typical applications include
setting group
● control or control of multiple logic sub-circuits in user-programmable logic. The element provides for two
control inputs.
● Place and configure a Digital Element. A Digital Element can monitor any FlexLogic operand
● and present a target message and/or enable events recording depending on the output operand state.
● Place and configure a Digital Counter element. A Digital Counter counts the number of state transitions
● from Logic 0 to Logic 1. The counter is used to count operations such as the pickups of an element.

Basic Actions toolbar

Figure 170: Basic Actions toolbar

From left to right:

● Select components. Click one component and hold down the CTRL key to select others. Or click and drag an
area that contains multiple components to select.
● Shows vertices points for the component selected (if the component support vertices manipulation)
● Shows the properties of the selected component
● Zoom in and center the screen to the spot selected
● Zoom in to a magnitude that fits your entire schema layout on your entire screen
● Zoom in on the components that you have selected
● Move the viewable area of your screen around the schema. To activate, select this tool and then place the
hand icon over and part of your schema. Click and drag the hand in a direction to move around the schema.
● Align the selected components to the top of the reference component
● Align the selected components to the middle of the reference component
● Align the selected components to the bottom of the reference component
● Align the selected components to the left of the reference component
● Align the selected components to the centre of the reference component
● Align the selected components to the right of the reference component
● Evenly space the selected components across a horizontal axis, starting from the far left component and
ending at the far right component
● Evenly space the selected components across a vertical axis, starting from the top component and ending at
the bottom component

N60-1601-0125-861-1 239
Chapter 5 - Interfaces

● Set the width of the selected components to the same width as the reference component
● Set the height of the selected components to the same height as the reference component
● Set the width and height of the selected components to the same width and height of the reference
component

Advanced Actions toolbar

Figure 171: Advanced Actions toolbar

Only basic objects (lines, rectangles, ellipses) can be rotated and flipped.
Only objects from the Drawing Toolbar can be structured (grouped, ungrouped, forward, backward)
From left to right:
● Moves selected component one pixel upward
● Moves selected component one pixe downward
● Moves selected component one pixel left
● Moves selected component one pixel right
● Rotates selected component freely. Once selected, put your mouse cursor over the component and move the
component clockwise or counter-clockwise depending on what you need.
● Rotates selected component 90 degrees counter-clockwise
● Rotates selected component 90 degrees clockwise
● Flips the selected component on the vertical axis
● Flips the selected component on the horizontal axis
● Combines all selected components into one combined entity.
● Ungroups components into separate components.
● Moves current components to the absolute front of all viewable layers
● Moves current components to the absolute back of all viewable layers
● Moves current components on layer higher than its original layer hierarchy
● Moves current components on layer lower than its original layer hierarchy

5.5.9 FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS

For flexibility, the arrangement of internal digital logic combines fixed and user-programmed parameters. Logic upon
which individual features are designed is fixed, and all other logic, from contact input signals through elements or
combinations of elements to contact outputs, is variable. The user has complete control of all variable logic through
FlexLogic. In general, the system receives analog and digital inputs that it uses to produce analog and digital
outputs. The figure shows major subsystems of a generic UR-series relay involved in this process.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 240
Chapter 5 - Interfaces

✖✗✝ ✕☛✘
☎✗✝ ✙✏✚✕✛ ✾✪✂✿✎✓✫✆✒❀ ☎✆✄✞☞✟✪
✂❁☞✟✞✆✓✁✝ ✓☞✞✌☞✞✝
✖✟✪✒☞✪✟✞✂
✕✖✔✏ ✌✟✄✟✔✂✞✂✄✝ ✽✂✟✝☞✄✆✁✫
✏✁✟✪✓✫ ✟✁✍
✓✄
✆✁✌☞✞ ✍✂✒✆✝✆✓✁ ✕✆✫✆✞✟✪ ✾✪✟✫✝
✡✗✕
✙✏✚✕✛ ✂✪✂✔✂✁✞✝ ✂✪✂✔✂✁✞✝
✆✁✌☞✞✝
❂ ❃
✖✓✁✞✟✒✞ ✾✓✄✔❄✏ ✟✁✍
✆✁✌☞✞✝ ✾✪✂✿✎✓✫✆✒❀ ☛✖✡ ✓✁✪✭
✺✪✓✒✻ ✒✓☞✁✞✂✄✝
✓✌✂✄✟✞✆✓✁ ✖✓✁✞✟✒✞
✙✂✟✒✼ ✓☞✞✌☞✞✝
✂✪✂✔✂✁✞✛
✬✂✭✌✟✍
☎✆✄✞☞✟✪ ✡✂✔✓✞✂
✆✁✌☞✞✝ ✙✾✪✂✿✎✓✫✆✒ ✓✌✂✄✟✁✍✝✛ ✓☞✞✌☞✞✝
✰✱

✡✂✔✓✞✂ ✕✆✝✌✪✟✭
✆✁✌☞✞✝ ✖✓✁✞✄✓✪ ✟✁✍ ✎ ✕✝
✙✮✯✯☛ ✛ ✟✁✍ ✕✆✝✌✪✟✭
✔✓✁✆✞✓✄✆✁✫
✲✂✟✞☞✄✂✝
✲✆✳✂✄ ✏✁✟✪✓✫
✕✆✄✂✒✞ ✓☞✞✌☞✞ ✙✕✚✏✛
✮✴✵✶✷ ✆✁✌☞✞✝
✡☛✸✹✹ ✙✍✒✔✏✛

✙☛✞✟✞☞✝✛ ✾✆✳✂✄
✕✆✄✂✒✞
✮✴✵✶✷
✓☞✞✌☞✞✝
✡☛✸✹✹
✙✏✒✞☞✟✪ ❅✟✪☞✂✝✛ ✙☛✞✟✞☞✝✛

✁✂✄☎✆✝✞✟ ✠✡ ☛✂✞☞✌ ✟✁✍ ✎✏✑ ✒✓✔✔☞✁✆✒✟✞✆✓✁✝

✜✢✣✤✢✢✥✣✦✧★✩

Figure 172: UR architecture overview

The states of all digital signals used in the Product are represented by flags (or FlexLogic operands, which are
described later in this section). A digital “1” is represented by a set flag. Any external contact change-of-state can be
used to block an element from operating, as an input to a control feature in a FlexLogic equation, or to operate a
contact output. The state of the contact input can be displayed locally or viewed remotely via the communications
facilities provided. If a simple scheme where a contact input is used to block an element is wanted, this selection is
made when programming the element. This capability also applies to the other features that set flags: elements,
virtual inputs, remote inputs, schemes, and human operators.
If more complex logic than shown in the figure is required, it is implemented via FlexLogic. For example, to have the
closed state of contact input H7a and the operated state of the phase undervoltage element block the operation of
the phase time overcurrent element, the two control input states are programmed in a FlexLogic equation. This
equation ANDs the two control inputs to produce a virtual output that is then selected when programming the phase
time overcurrent to be used as a blocking input. Virtual outputs can only be created by FlexLogic equations.
Traditionally, protective relay logic has been relatively limited. Any unusual applications involving interlocks,
blocking, or supervisory functions had to be hard-wired using contact inputs and outputs. FlexLogic minimizes the
requirement for auxiliary components and wiring while making more complex schemes possible.
The logic that determines the interaction of inputs, elements, schemes, and outputs is field-programmable through
the use of logic equations that are sequentially processed. The use of virtual inputs and outputs in addition to
hardware is available internally and on the communication ports for other relays to use (distributed FlexLogic).
FlexLogic allows users to customize the relay through a series of equations that consist of operators and operands.
The operands are the states of inputs, elements, schemes, and outputs. The operators are logic gates, timers, and
latches (with set and reset inputs). A system of sequential operations allows any combination of operands to be
assigned as inputs to specified operators to create an output. The final output of an equation is a numbered register

N60-1601-0125-861-1 241
Chapter 5 - Interfaces

called a virtual output. Virtual outputs can be used as an input operand in any equation, including the equation that
generates the output, as a seal-in or other type of feedback.
A FlexLogic equation consists of parameters that are either operands or operators. Operands have a logic state of 1
or 0. Operators provide a defined function, such as an AND gate or a Timer. Each equation defines the
combinations of parameters to be used to set a Virtual Output flag. Evaluation of an equation results in either a 1
(=ON, or flag set) or 0 (=OFF, or flag not set). Each equation is evaluated at least four times every power system
cycle.
Some types of operands are present in the relay in multiple instances, for example contact and remote inputs.
These types of operands are grouped together (for presentation purposes only) on the front panel display. The table
lists characteristics of the different types of operands.
Operand type State Example of format Characteristics [Input Is ‘1’ (= ON) if...]
Contact Input On Cont Ip On Voltage is applied presently to the input (external contact closed)
Off Cont Ip Off Voltage is not applied presently to the input (external contact open)
Contact Output (type Form-A contact Contact Closed Cont Op 1 Closed Contact output is closed
only)
Current On Cont Op 1 Ion Current is flowing through the contact
Voltage On Cont Op 1 VOn Voltage exists across the contact
Voltage Off Cont Op 1 VOff Voltage does not exist across the contact
Direct Input On DIRECT INPUT 1 On The direct input is presently in the ON state
Element (Analog): (not C30) Pickup PHASE TOC1 PKP The tested parameter is presently above the pickup setting of an
element that responds to rising values or below the pickup setting
of an element that responds to falling values
Dropout PHASE TOC1 DPO This operand is the logical inverse of the above PKP operand
Operate PHASE TOC1 OP The tested parameter has been above/below the pickup setting of
the element for the programmed delay time, or has been at logic 1
and is now at logic 0 but the reset timer has not finished timing
Block PHASE TOC1 BLK The output of the comparator is set to the block function
Element (Digital) Pickup Dig Element 1 PKP The input operand is at logic 1
Dropout Dig Element 1 DPO This operand is the logical inverse of the above PKP operand
Operate Dig Element 1 OP The input operand has been at logic 1 for the programmed pickup
delay time, or has been at logic 1 for this period and is now at logic
0 but the reset timer has not finished timing
Element (Digital Counter): (not B90) Higher than Counter 1 HI The number of pulses counted is above the set number
Equal to Counter 1 EQL The number of pulses counted is equal to the set number
Lower than Counter 1 LO The number of pulses counted is below the set number
Fixed On On Logic 1
Off Off Logic 0
RxGOOSE Boolean On RxGOOSE Boolean 1 The RxGOOSE Boolean is presently in the ON state
On
Virtual Input On Virt Ip 1 On The virtual input is presently in the ON state
Virtual Output On Virt Op 1 On The virtual output is presently in the set state (that is, evaluation of
the equation that produces this virtual output results in a "1")

A full list of operands for the UR-series of relays is available in the appendix. You can also view them online in a
relay by entering the IP address of the relay in a web browser and accessing the Device Information Menu.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 242
Chapter 5 - Interfaces

Note:
Any FlexLogic operands that are visible online but not listed below, are intended for factory use.

You can rename the following operand types if desired.

● Breakers in the breaker control feature
● The ID (identification) of the contact inputs and outputs
● The ID of virtual inputs and outputs.
If you change the default name or ID of any of these operands, the assigned name will appear in the relay list of
operands.
The characteristics of the logic gates are tabulated in the following table, and the operators available in FlexLogic
are listed in the FlexLogic operators table.
Gates Number of inputs Output is ‘1’ (= ON) if...
NOT 1 input is ‘0’
OR 2 to 16 any input is ‘1’
AND 2 to 16 all inputs are ‘1’
NOR 2 to 16 all inputs are ‘0’
NAND 2 to 16 any input is ‘0’
XOR 2 only one input is ‘1’

Type Syntax Description Notes

Editor INSERT Insert a parameter in an equation list
DELETE Delete a parameter from an equation list

End END The first END encountered signifies the last entry in the list
of processed FlexLogic parameters
One shot POSITIVE ONE SHOT One shot that responds to a positive going edgeOne shot A ‘one shot’ refers to a single input gate that
that responds to a positive going edge generates a pulse in response to an edge on the
input. The output from a ‘one shot’ is True
NEGATIVE ONE SHOT One shot that responds to a negative going edge (positive) for only one pass through the FlexLogic
equation. There is a maximum of 64 ‘one shots.’A
‘one shot’ refers to a single input gate that
DUAL ONE SHOT One shot that responds to both the positive and negative generates a pulse in response to an edge on the
going edgesOne shot that responds to both the positive input. The output from a ‘one shot’ is True
and negative going edges (positive) for only one pass through the FlexLogic
equation. There is a maximum of 64 ‘one shots.’

N60-1601-0125-861-1 243
Chapter 5 - Interfaces

Type Syntax Description Notes

Logic gate NONOT Logical NOT Operates on the previous parameter

OR(n) n input OR gate Operates on the n previous parameters

AND(n) n input AND gate Operates on the n previous parameters

NOR(n) n input NOR gate Operates on the n previous parameters

NAND(n) n input NAND gate Operates on the n previous parameters

XOR(2) 2 input Exclusive OR gate Operates on the 2 previous parameters

LATCH (S,R) Latch (set, reset): reset-dominant The parameter preceding LATCH(S,R) is the reset
input. The parameter preceding the reset input is
the set input.
Timer TIMER n Timer set with FlexLogic timer n settings The timer is started by the preceding parameter.
The output of the timer is
TIMER n.
Assign = Virt Op n Assigns previous FlexLogic operand to virtual output n The virtual output is set by the preceding
virtual parameter
output

5.5.10 FLEXLOGIC RULES

When forming a FlexLogic equation, the sequence in the linear array of parameters must follow these general rules:
1. Operands must precede the operator that uses the operands as inputs.
2. Operators have only one output. The output of an operator must be used to create a virtual output if it is to be
used as an input to two or more operators.
3. Assigning the output of an operator to a virtual output terminates the equation.
4. A timer operator (for example, TIMER 1) or virtual output assignment (for example, = Virt Op 1) can be used
once only. If this rule is broken, a syntax error is declared.

5.5.11 FLEXLOGIC EVALUATION

Each equation is evaluated in the ascending order in which the parameters have been entered.
FlexLogic provides built-in latches that by definition have a memory action, remaining in the set state after the set
input has been asserted. These built-in latches are reset dominant, meaning that if logical "1" is applied to both set
and reset entries simultaneously, then the output of the latch is logical "0." However, they are volatile, meaning that
they reset upon removal of control power.
When making changes to FlexLogic entries in the settings, all FlexLogic equations are re-compiled whenever any
new FlexLogic entry value is entered, and as a result of the re-compile all latches are reset automatically.
To implement FlexLogic using a graphical user interface, see the FlexLogic Design and Monitoring using Engineer
section in the previous chapter.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 244
Chapter 5 - Interfaces

5.5.12 FLEXLOGIC EXAMPLE

This section provides an example of logic implementation for a typical application. The sequence of steps is
important to minimize the work to develop the relay settings. Note that the example in the following figure
demonstrates the procedure, not to solve a specific application situation.
Note that there is also a graphical interface with which to draw logic and populate FlexLogic equation entries.
In the example, we assume that logic has already been programmed to produce virtual outputs 1 and 2, and is only
a part of the full set of equations used. When using FlexLogic, it is important to make a note of each virtual output
used; a virtual output designation (1 to 256) can be assigned only once.

✙✟✚✂✡✁✏ ✝✡✂✠✡✂ ☞
✌✂✁✂✍ ✎ ✓✞

✙✟✚✂✡✁✏ ✝✡✂✠✡✂ ✛
✘✍✂
✌✂✁✂✍ ✎ ✓✞
✁✂✄☎

✙✟✚✂✡✁✏ ✟✞✠✡✂ ☞ ✓✔ ✥☞ ✔✍✌✍✂

✌✂✁✂✍ ✎ ✓✞
✒✓✔
✗✟✜✟✂✁✏ ✍✏✍✢✍✞✂ ☞ ✪✟✢✍✚ ✛
✌✂✁✂✍ ✎ ✣✟✄✤✡✠
✪✟✢✍ ✗✍✏✁✫ ✓✠✍✚✁✂✍ ✝✡✂✠✡✂
✓✔ ✥✛
✝✞ ✑✚✝✠✝✡✂ ✚✍✏✁✫ ☛☞
✗✟✜✟✂✁✏ ✍✏✍✢✍✞✂ ✛ ✪✟✢✍✚ ☞
✦✛★★ ✢✌✩
✌✂✁✂✍ ✎ ✓✠✍✚✁✂✍✑ ✪✟✢✍ ✑✍✏✁✫
✕✖✗
✝✞ ✠✟✄✤✡✠
✦✧★★ ✢✌✩
✆✝✞✂✁✄✂ ✟✞✠✡✂ ☛☞✄
✌✂✁✂✍ ✎ ✆✏✝✌✍✑
✬✭✮✯✭✰✱✭✲✳✴✵

Figure 173: Logic example

1. Inspect the example logic diagram to determine if the required logic can be implemented with the FlexLogic
operators. If this is not possible, the logic must be altered until this condition is satisfied. Once done, count
the inputs to each gate to verify that the number of inputs does not exceed the FlexLogic limits, which is
unlikely but possible. If the number of inputs is too high, subdivide the inputs into multiple gates to produce an
equivalent. For example, if 25 inputs to an AND gate are required, connect Inputs 1 through 16 to AND(16),
17 through 25 to AND(9), and the outputs from these two gates to AND(2).
Inspect each operator between the initial operands and final virtual outputs to determine if the output from the
operator is used as an input to more than one following operator. If so, the operator output must be assigned
as a virtual output.
For the example shown, the output of the AND gate is used as an input to both OR#1 and Timer 1, and must
therefore be made a virtual output and assigned the next available number (that is, Virtual Output 3). The
final output must also be assigned to a virtual output as virtual output 4, which is programmed in the contact
output section to operate relay H1 (that is, contact output H1).
Therefore, the required logic can be implemented with two FlexLogic equations with outputs of virtual output
3 and virtual output 4, shown as follows.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 245
Chapter 5 - Interfaces

✛✍✜✂✗✁✏ ✢✗✂✘✗✂ ✓
☞✂✁✂☛ ✔ ✝✒

✛✍✜✂✗✁✏ ✢✗✂✘✗✂ ✚
✌☛✂
☞✂✁✂☛ ✔ ✝✒
✁✂✄☎
✝✞ ✙✓ ✞☛☞☛✂
✛✍✜✂✗✁✏ ✍✒✘✗✂ ✓
☞✂✁✂☛ ✔ ✝✒ ★✍✑☛✜ ✚
✆✝✞ ★✍✑☛ ✩☛✏✁✪
✡✍✎✍✂✁✏ ☛✏☛✑☛✒✂ ✓ ✝✞ ✙✚ ✛✍✜✂✗✁✏ ✢✗✂✘✗✂ ✣
✢✒ ✩✜✢✘✢✗✂
☞✂✁✂☛ ✔ ✕✍✄✖✗✘
✤✚✦✦ ✑☞✧

✡✍✎✍✂✁✏ ☛✏☛✑☛✒✂ ✓ ★✍✑☛✜ ✓

☞✂✁✂☛ ✔ ✝✘☛✜✁✂☛✩ ★✍✑☛ ✩☛✏✁✪
✟✠✡
✢✒ ✘✍✄✖✗✘
✤✥✦✦ ✑☞✧
✶✢✒✂✁✄✂ ✍✒✘✗✂ ✷✓✄
☞✂✁✂☛ ✔ ✶✏✢☞☛✩ ✛✍✜✂✗✁✏ ✢✗✂✘✗✂ ✵

✫✬✭✮✬✯✰✬✱✲✳✴

Figure 174: Logic example with virtual outputs

2. Prepare a logic diagram for the equation to produce virtual output 3, as this output is used as an operand in
the virtual output 4 equation (create the equation for every output that is used as an operand first, so that
when these operands are required they already have been evaluated and assigned to a specific virtual
output). The logic for virtual output 3 is shown as follows with the final output assigned.

✂✞✙✞✠☛☞ ✚☞✚✛✚✜✠ ☎
✢✠☛✠✚✣ ✤✍✚✟☛✠✚✥

✁✂✄☎✆ ✝✞✟✠✡☛☞ ✌✡✠✍✡✠ ✎

✦✌✜✠☛✧✠ ✞✜✍✡✠ ★✩✧

✢✠☛✠✚ ✣ ✦☞✌✢✚✥
✏✑✒✓✑✒✔✑✕✖✗✘
Figure 175: Logic for virtual output 3
3. Prepare a logic diagram for virtual output 4, replacing the logic ahead of virtual output 3 with a symbol
identified as virtual output 3, shown as follows.

✌✍✎✂✏✁✑ ✒✏✂✓✏✂ ✕
✠✂✁✂✟ ✮ ✝✣

✌✍✎✂✏✁✑ ✒✏✂✓✏✂ ☞
✡✟✂
✠✂✁✂✟ ✮ ✝✣
✁✂✄☎
✝✞ ☛✕ ✞✟✠✟✂
✌✍✎✂✏✁✑ ✍✣✓✏✂ ✕
✠✂✁✂✟ ✮ ✝✣ ✛✍✙✟✎ ☞
✆✝✞ ✛✍✙✟ ✜✟✑✁✢
✝✞ ☛☞ ✌✍✎✂✏✁✑ ✒✏✂✓✏✂ ✔
✯✍✰✍✂✁✑ ✟✑✟✙✟✣✂ ✕ ✒✣ ✜✎✒✓✒✏✂
✠✂✁✂✟ ✮ ✱✍✄✤✏✓
✖☞✘✘ ✙✠✚

✛✍✙✟✎ ✕
✌✍✎✂✏✁✑ ✒✏✂✓✏✂ ✲ ✛✍✙✟ ✜✟✑✁✢
✠✂✁✂✟ ✮ ✝✣ ✒✣ ✓✍✄✤✏✓
✖✗✘✘ ✙✠✚
✳✒✣✂✁✄✂ ✍✣✓✏✂ ✴✕✄
✠✂✁✂✟ ✮ ✳✑✒✠✟✜
✥✦✧★✦✥✩✦✪✫✬✭

Figure 176: Logic for virtual output 4

4. Program the FlexLogic equation for virtual output 3 by translating the logic into available FlexLogic
parameters. The equation is formed one parameter at a time until the required logic is complete. It is
generally easier to start at the output end of the equation and work back towards the input, as shown in the
following steps. It is also recommended to list operator inputs from bottom to top. For demonstration, the final
outputs are arbitrarily identified as parameter 99, and each preceding parameter decremented by one in turn.
Until accustomed to using FlexLogic, it is suggested that a worksheet with a series of cells marked with the
arbitrary parameter numbers be prepared shown as follows.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 246
Chapter 5 - Interfaces

✵
✵✁
✵✂
✵✄
✵☎

.....
✾✆
✾✝
✾✾
827029A1.VSD

Figure 177: FlexLogic worksheet

5. Following the procedure outlined, start with parameter 99, as follows:
99: The final output of the equation is virtual output 3, which is created by the operator "= Virt Op n". This
parameter is therefore "= Virt Op 3".
98: The gate preceding the output is an AND, which in this case requires two inputs. The operator for this
gate is a 2-input AND so the parameter is “AND(2)”. Note that FlexLogic rules require that the number of
inputs to most types of operators must be specified to identify the operands for the gate. As the 2-input AND
operates on the two operands preceding it, these inputs must be specified, starting with the lower.
97: This lower input to the AND gate must be passed through an inverter (the NOT operator) so the next
parameter is “NOT”. The NOT operator acts upon the operand immediately preceding it, so specify the
inverter input next.
96: The input to the NOT gate is to be contact input H1c. The ON state of a contact input can be programmed
to be set when the contact is either open or closed. Assume for this example that the state is to be ON for a
closed contact. The operand is therefore “Cont Ip H1c On”.
95: The last step in the procedure is to specify the upper input to the AND gate, the operated state of digital
element 2. This operand is "DIG ELEM 2 OP".
Writing the parameters in numerical order forms the equation for virtual output 3:
[95] DIG ELEM 2 OP
[96] Cont Ip H1c On
[97] NOT
[98] AND(2)
[99] = Virt Op 3
It is now possible to check that this selection of parameters produces the required logic by converting the set
of parameters into a logic diagram. The result of this process is shown in the figure, which is compared to the
logic for virtual output 3 diagram as a check.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 247
Chapter 5 - Interfaces

✁✂✄☎✆✝✞✟ ✂✠✡☛☞✌
✚✩
✒✞✝ ✢✁✂✣✂✠✡ ✔ ✓✒✢✔✕ ✎✤
✫✬✭ ✗✞☛✡✮✯✁ ✆✮✡✘✮✡ ✙
✁✂✄☎✆✝✞✟ ✂✠✡☛☞✌
✚✪
✥✆✠✡ ✦✘ ✔ ✎✠ ✓✧★✟✕
✁✂✄☎✆✝✞✟ ✂✠✡☛☞✌
✚✛
✍✎✏
✁✂✄☎✆✝✞✟ ✂✠✡☛☞✌
✚✜
✑✍✒ ✓✔✕
✁✂✄☎✆✝✞✟ ✂✠✡☛☞✌
✚✚
✖ ✗✞☛✡ ✎✘ ✙ ✓✗✎✙✕
✰✱✲✳✴✳✵✱✶✷✸✹

Figure 178: FlexLogic equation for virtual output 3

6. Repeating the process described for virtual output 3, select the FlexLogic parameters for Virtual Output 4.
99: The final output of the equation is virtual output 4, which is parameter “= Virt Op 4".
98: The operator preceding the output is timer 2, which is operand “TIMER 2". Note that the settings required
for the timer are established in the timer programming section.
97: The operator preceding timer 2 is OR #2, a 3-input OR, which is parameter “OR(3)”.
96: The lowest input to OR #2 is operand “Cont Ip H1c On”.
95: The center input to OR #2 is operand “TIMER 1".
94: The input to timer 1 is operand “Virt Op 3 On".
93: The upper input to OR #2 is operand “LATCH (S,R)”.
92: There are two inputs to a latch, and the input immediately preceding the latch reset is OR #1, a 4-input
OR, which is parameter “OR(4)”.
91: The lowest input to OR #1 is operand “Virt Op 3 On".
90: The input just above the lowest input to OR #1 is operand “XOR(2)”.
89: The lower input to the XOR is operand “DIG ELEM 1 PKP”.
88: The upper input to the XOR is operand “Virt Ip 1 On".
87: The input just below the upper input to OR #1 is operand “Virt Op 2 On".
86: The upper input to OR #1 is operand “Virt Op 1 On".
85: The last parameter is used to set the latch, and is operand “Virt Op 4 On".
The equation for virtual output 4 is:
[85] Virt Op 4 On
[86] Virt Op 1 On
[87] Virt Op 2 On
[88] Virt Ip 1 On
[89] DIG ELEM 1 PKP
[90] XOR(2)
[91] Virt Op 3 On
[92] OR(4)
[93] LATCH (S,R)
[94] Virt Op 3 On
[95] TIMER 1
[96] Cont Ip H1c On
[97] OR(3)
[98] TIMER 2
[99] = Virt Op 4
Now check that the selection of parameters produce the required logic by converting the set of parameters
into a logic diagram. The result is shown in the figure, which is compared to the logic for virtual output 4
diagram as a check

N60-1601-0125-861-1 248
Chapter 5 - Interfaces

✁✂✄☎✆✝✞✟ ✂✠✡☛☞✌
✫✲ ✍✞☛✡ ✎✏ ✕ ✎✠ ✒✍✎✕✓
✁✂✄☎✆✝✞✟ ✂✠✡☛☞✌
✫✰ ✍✞☛✡ ✎✏ ✣ ✎✠ ✒✍✎✣✓
✁✂✄☎✆✝✞✟ ✂✠✡☛☞✌
✫✱ ✍✞☛✡ ✎✏ ✤ ✎✠ ✒✍✎✤✓
✁✂✄☎✆✝✞✟ ✂✠✡☛☞✌ ✚✂✡
✫✫ ☎✘✡✟✙
✍✞☛✡ ✖✏ ✣ ✎✠ ✒✍✖✣✓
✭✮✯ ✮✯ ✔✂✜✂✡
✁✂✄☎✆✝✞✟ ✂✠✡☛☞✌
✫✢ ✥✞✝ ✦✁✂✧✂✠✡ ✣ ✒✥✦✣✓ ★✩★
✁✂✄☎✆✝✞✟ ✂✠✡☛☞✌
✢✬ ✪✎✔ ✒✤ ✖✠✏✗✡✓
✁✂✄☎✆✝✞✟ ✂✠✡☛☞✌
✢✣ ✍✞☛✡ ✎✏ ✑ ✎✠ ✒✍✎✑✓
✮✯ ✵✷ ✍✞☛✡✗✘✁ ✆✗✡✏✗✡ ✕
✁✂✄☎✆✝✞✟ ✂✠✡☛☞✌
✢✤ ✎✔ ✒✕ ✖✠✏✗✡✓
✁✂✄☎✆✝✞✟ ✂✠✡☛☞✌
✢✑ ☎✘✡✟✙ ✒✚✂✡✛ ✔✂✜✂✡✓
✁✂✄☎✆✝✞✟ ✂✠✡☛☞✌
✢✕ ✍✞☛✡ ✎✏ ✑ ✎✠ ✒✍✎✑✓ ✵✶
✁✂✄☎✆✝✞✟ ✂✠✡☛☞✌
✢✲ ✴✞✧✂☛ ✣
✁✂✄☎✆✝✞✟ ✂✠✡☛☞✌
✢✰ ❃✆✠✡ ✖✏ ✤ ✎✠ ✒❄✣✟✓
✁✂✄☎✆✝✞✟ ✂✠✡☛☞✌
✢✱ ✎✔ ✒✑ ✖✠✏✗✡✓
✁✂✄☎✆✝✞✟ ✂✠✡☛☞✌
✢✫ ✴✞✧✂☛ ✤
✁✂✄☎✆✝✞✟ ✂✠✡☛☞✌
✢✢ ✳✍✞☛✡ ✎✏ ✕ ✒✍✎✕✓
✸✹✺✻✼✽✾✹✿❀❁❂

Figure 179: FlexLogic equation for virtual output 4

7. Now write the complete FlexLogic expression required to implement the logic, making an effort to assemble
the equation in an order where Virtual Outputs that are used as inputs to operators are created before
needed. In cases where a lot of processing is required to perform logic, this can be difficult to achieve, but in
most cases does not cause problems as all logic is calculated at least four times per power frequency cycle.
The possibility of a problem caused by sequential processing emphasizes the necessity to test the
performance of FlexLogic before it is placed in service.
In the following equation, virtual output 3 is used as an input to both latch 1 and timer 1 as arranged in the
following order:
DIG ELEM 2 OP
Cont Ip H1c On
NOT
AND(2)
= Virt Op 3
Virt Op 4 On
Virt Op 1 On
Virt Op 2 On
Virt Ip 1 On
DIG ELEM 1 PKP
XOR(2)
Virt Op 3 On
OR(4)
LATCH (S,R)
Virt Op 3 On
TIMER 1
Cont Ip H1c On
OR(3)
TIMER 2
= Virt Op 4
END

N60-1601-0125-861-1 249
Chapter 5 - Interfaces

In this expression, the virtual output 4 input to the four-input OR is listed before it is created. This is typical of
a form of feedback, in this case, used to create a seal-in effect with the latch, and is correct.
8. Always test the logic after it is loaded into the relay, in the same way as has been used in the past. Testing
can be simplified by placing an "END" operator within the overall set of FlexLogic equations. The equations
are evaluated up to the first "END" operator.
The "On" and "Off" operands can be placed in an equation to establish a known set of conditions for test
purposes, and the "INSERT" and "DELETE" commands can be used to modify equations.

5.5.13 FLEXELEMENT BASE UNITS

Unit Description
87L SIGNALS IBASE = maximum primary RMS value of the +IN and –IN inputs
(Local IA Mag, IB, and IC) (CT primary for source currents, and 87L source primary current for line differential currents)
(Diff Curr IA Mag, IB, and IC) (L30, L90)
(Terminal 1 IA Mag, IB, and IC)
(Terminal 2 IA Mag, IB and IC)
87L SIGNALS BASE = Squared CT secondary of the 87L source
(Op Square Curr IA, IB, and IC) (L30, L90)
(Rest Square Curr IA, IB, and IC)
BREAKER ACC ARCING AMPS BASE = 2000 kA2 ´ cycle
(Brk X Acc Arc Amp A, B, and C) (All but B90, C30, N60)
BREAKER ARCING AMPS BASE = 1 kA2 ´ cycle
(Brk X Arc Amp A, B, and C) (All but B90, C30, N60)
BUS DIFFERENTIAL DIFFERENTIAL IBASE = maximum phase CT primary current of all configured bays (sources) for a given bus differential zone
CURRENT of the +IN and –IN inputs
(Bus Diff Mag) (B30)
BUS DIFFERENTIAL RESTRAINING IBASE = maximum phase CT primary current of all configured bays (sources) for a given bus differential zone
CURRENT of the +IN and –IN inputs
(Bus Rest Mag) (B30)
BUS GROUND DIFFERENTIAL IBASE = maximum ground CT primary current of all configured bays (sources) for a given bus differential zone
DIFFERENTIAL CURRENT of the +IN and –IN inputs for “Measured” option or maximum phase CT primary current for “Calculated” option.
(Bus Ground Diff Mag) (B30)
BUS GROUND DIFFERENTIAL IBASE = maximum ground CT primary current of all configured bays (sources) for a given bus differential zone
RESTRAINING CURRENT (Bus Ground of the +IN and –IN inputs for “Measured” option or maximum phase CT primary current for “Calculated” option.
Rest Mag) (B30)
CURRENT UNBALANCE BASE = 100%
(Amp Unbalance) (M60)
DCmA BASE = maximum value of the DCMA INPUT MAX setting for the two transducers configured under the +IN
and –IN inputs
(All UR products)
DELTA TIME BASE = 1 µs
(All UR products)
FAULT LOCATION BASE = Line Length as specified in Fault Report
(C60, C95, D30, D60, F35, F60, L30, L60, L90)
FIELD CURRENT IBASE = maximum value setting defined for the specific transducer input configured
(G60 only)
FIELD GROUND CURRENT IBASE = 5 mA
(G60 only)
FIELD GROUND FAULT LOCATION BASE = 100%
(G60 only)
FIELD GROUND INJECTED VOLTAGE VBASE = 15 V
(G60 only)

N60-1601-0125-861-1 250
Chapter 5 - Interfaces

Unit Description
FIELD GROUND RESISTANCE RBASE = 250 KΩ

(G60 only)
FIELD VOLTAGE VBASE = 500 V

(G60 only)
FREQUENCY fBASE = 1 Hz
(All UR products)
FREQUENCY RATE OF CHANGE df/dtBASE = 1 Hz/s
(D30, D60, F60, G30, G60, L30, L90, N60, T60)
MSOD FREQ_OSC 1 Hz
(D60, G30, G60, L90, N60, T60)
MSOD MAG_OSC 1 pu
(D60, G30, G60, L90, N60, T60)
MSOD PHASE_OSC 360 degrees
(D60, G30, G60, L90, N60, T60)
MSOD DAMPR_OSC 1%
(D60, G30, G60, L90, N60, T60)
PHASE ANGLE jBASE = 360 degrees (see the UR angle referencing convention)
(All UR products)
POWER FACTOR PFBASE = 1.00
(All UR products)
RTDs BASE = 100°C
(All UR products)
SENSITIVE DIR POWER PBASE = maximum value of 3 x VBASE x IBASE for the +IN and –IN inputs of the sources configured for the
(Sns Dir Power) sensitive power directional element(s).
(C60, C95, D60, F60, G30, G60, L90, N60, T60)
SOURCE CURRENT IBASE = maximum nominal primary RMS value of the +IN and –IN inputs
(All UR products)
SOURCE ENERGY EBASE = 10000 MWh or MVAh, respectively
(Positive and Negative Watthours, (B30, C60, C95, D60, F35, F60, G30, G60, L90, M60, N60, T60
Positive and Negative Varhours)
SOURCE POWER PBASE = maximum value of VBASE x IBASE for the +IN and –IN inputs
(All UR products)
SOURCE THD & HARMONICS BASE = 1%
C70, D60, F35, F60, G30, G60, L30, L90, N60, T60
SOURCE VOLTAGE VBASE = maximum nominal primary RMS value of the +IN and –IN inputs
(All UR products)
STATION BATTERY VOLTAGE VDC_BASE = STATION BATTERY NOM VOLTAGE setting
MEASUREMENT (All UR products)
STATOR DIFFERENTIAL CURRENT IBASE = maximum primary RMS value of the +IN and –IN inputs
(Stator Diff Iar, Ibr, and Icr) (CT primary for source currents, and bus reference primary current for bus differential currents)
(G60, M60)
STATOR GROUND 3RD HARMONIC VBASE = Primary auxiliary voltage of the STATOR GROUND SOURCE
VOLTAGES (G60, M60)
(Stator Gnd Vn/V0 3rd)
STATOR GROUND RESISTANCE RBASE = 10 KΩ
(G60)

N60-1601-0125-861-1 251
Chapter 5 - Interfaces

Unit Description
STATOR GROUND SUB-HARMONIC VBASE = nominal secondary voltage of auxiliary VT for the stator ground source
VOLTAGE (G60)
STATOR GROUND SUB-HARMONIC IBASE = ground CT primary current of stator ground source
CURRENT (G60)
STATOR RESTRAINING CURRENT IBASE = maximum primary RMS value of the +IN and –IN inputs
(Stator Diff Iad, Ibd, and Icd) (CT primary for source currents, and bus reference primary current for bus differential currents)
(G60, M60)
SYNCHROCHECK VBASE = maximum primary RMS value of all the sources related to the +IN and –IN inputs
(Max Delta Volts) (B30, C60, C95, D30, D60, F60, G30, G60, L30, L60, L90, N60, T60)
THERMAL MODEL BASE = 100%
(Model Capacity Used) (M60)
(Model Motor Unbalance)
THERMAL MODEL BASE = 10 minutes
(Model Lockout Time) (M60)
THERMAL MODEL BASE = 1.00 pu of FLA
(Thermal Model Load) (M60)
(Biased Motor Load)
THERMAL MODEL BASE = 10 seconds
(Trip Time on Overload) (M60)
THRU FLT x TOT ACC A BASE = 1.00 pu
THRU FLT x TOT ACC B (T35, T60)
THRU FLT x TOT ACC C
Transformer total thermal/mechanical
damage
VOLTS PER HERTZ BASE = 1.00 pu
(G30, G60, L90, T60)
XFMR DIFFERENTIAL CURRENT IBASE = maximum primary RMS value of the +IN and -IN inputs
(Xfmr Iad, Ibd, and Icd Mag) (CT primary for source currents, and transformer reference primary current for transformer differential currents)
(G30, T35, T60)
XFMR VOLTAGE COMPENSATED IBASE = maximum primary RMS value of the +IN and -IN inputs
DIFFERENTIAL CURRENT (CT primary for source currents, and transformer reference primary current for transformer differential currents)
(Intturn# Cmp Iad Mag, Intturn# Cmp IBd (T35, T60)
Mag and Intturn# Cmp Icd Mag)
XFMR RAW DIFFERENTIAL CURRENT IBASE = maximum primary RMS value of the +IN and -IN inputs
(Intturn# Raw Iad Mag, Intturn# Raw IBd (CT primary for source currents, and transformer reference primary current for transformer differential currents)
Mag and Intturn# Raw Icd Mag) (T35, T60)
INTERTURN FAULT DETECTION BASE=0.1
COEFFICENTS (T35, T60)
(Intturn# Coef Ka Mag, Intturn# Coef Kb
Mag, Intturn# Coef Kc Mag)
XFMR DIFFERENTIAL HARMONIC BASE = 10%
CONTENT (G30, T35, T60)
(Xfmr Harm2 Iad, Ibd, and Icd Mag)
(Xfmr Harm5 Iad, Ibd, and Icd Mag)
XFMR RESTRAINING CURRENT IBASE = maximum primary RMS value of the +IN and -IN inputs
(Xfmr Iar, Ibr, and Icr Mag) (CT primary for source currents, and transformer reference primary current for transformer differential currents)
(G30, T35, T60)

N60-1601-0125-861-1 252
Chapter 5 - Interfaces

Unit Description
ZBASE ZBASE = PhaseVTSecondary / PhaseCTSecondary, where PhaseVTSecondary and PhaseCTSecondary are
the secondary nominal voltage and the secondary nominal current of the distance source. In case multiple CT
inputs are summed as one source current and mapped as the distance source, use the PhaseCTSecondary
value from the CT with the highest primary nominal current.
Distance source is specified in setting under SETTINGS ðò GROUPED ELEMENTS ðò SETTING GROUP 1(6)
ð DISTANCE.
PhaseVTSecondary and PhaseCTSecondary are specified in setting under SETTINGS ðò SYSTEM SETUP ðò
AC INPUTS.
(D30, D60, G60, L60, L90, T60)

N60-1601-0125-861-1 253
 CHAPTER 6

CYBERSECURITY
Chapter 6 - CyberSecurity

6.1 CHAPTER OVERVIEW

This chapter contains the following sections:

Chapter Overview 255
Cybersecurity overview 256
Security setup 257

N60-1601-0125-861-1 255
Chapter 6 - CyberSecurity

6.2 CYBERSECURITY OVERVIEW

The UR family of products are digital devices designed to be installed and operated in utility substations & industrial
plant environments and connected to secure private networks. UR relays should not be connected to the public
internet.
We strongly recommend that you protect your digital devices using a defense-in-depth strategy. This will protect
your products, your network, your systems and your interfaces against cybersecurity threats. This includes, but is
not limited to:
● Locating your digital devices inside the control system network security perimeter
● Deploying and maintaining access controls
● Monitoring and Intrusion Detection
● Security awareness training of security policies
● Network segmentation
● Firewalls installation
● Strong and active password management
● Data encryption
● Antivirus protection
UR relays are available with an optional software option (CyberSentry), which provides additional cybersecurity
mechanisms to help you protect against cybersecurity intrusion. We strongly recommend that you use this
"CyberSentry" option.
For additional details and recommendations on how to protect your relays, please read this chapter and implement
the principles outlined. From time to time, we may issue additional instructions and recommendations relating to the
products and other cybersecurity threats or vulnerabilities.
As a customer of GE, it is YOUR sole responsibility to make sure that your UR relays are installed and operated in
accordance with its cybersecurity capabilities, the security context, and the instructions and recommendations
provided. Users assume all risks and liability associated with damages or losses incurred in connection with any
and all cybersecurity incidences.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 256
Chapter 6 - CyberSecurity

6.3 SECURITY SETUP

The following security features are available:
● Password security — Basic security present by default
● EnerVista security — Role-based access to various EnerVista software screens and configuration elements.
The feature is present by default in the EnerVista software.
● CyberSentry security — Advanced security available using a software option. When purchased, the option
is enabled automatically, and the default Password security and EnerVista security are disabled.
To maximize security, see the UR Family Secure Deployment Guide.

6.3.1 PASSWORD SECURITY

Password security is a basic security feature present by default. Two levels of password security are provided:
command and setting. Use of a password for each level controls whether all users can enter commands and/or
change settings. Two types of connection security are provided: password entry from local or remote connection.
Local access is defined as access to settings or commands via the front panel interface. This includes both keypad
entry and the through a front panel port. Remote access is defined as access to settings or commands via any rear
communications port. This includes both Ethernet and RS485 connections. These two settings are on by default
and apply to all users. When entering a settings or command password via EnerVista or any serial interface, the
user must enter the corresponding connection password. If the connection is to the back of the relay, the remote
password is used. If the connection is to a front panel port, the local password applies. (These two local and remote
password settings are not shown in the figure.)
Password access events are logged in the Event Recorder.

Figure 180: Password security

Lost password
If all passwords are lost, reset the unit to default values. Follow the instructions outlined later for:
COMMANDS > RELAY MAINTENANCE > SERVICE COMMAND

N60-1601-0125-861-1 257
Chapter 6 - CyberSecurity

Note:
The entire relay is reset to default values, not just the passwords.

Then change the CyberSentry password as described in the Set Up CyberSentry and Change Default Password
section at the end of the Installation chapter.

Password requirements
A user account requires an alpha-numeric password that meets the following requirements:
• Password is case-sensitive
• Password cannot contain the user account name or parts of the user account that exceed two consecutive
characters
• Password must be 8 to 20 characters in length
• Password must contain characters from all of the following categories:
English
○ uppercase characters (A through Z)
English
○ lowercase characters (a through z)
Base
○ 10 digits (0 through 9)
Non-alphabetic
○ characters (for example, ~, !, @, #, $,%, &)

6.3.1.1 PASSWORD SECURITY SETTINGS

Setting path: SETTINGS > PRODUCT SETUP > SECURITY
■ SECURITY ACCESS LEVEL: Range: Restricted, Command, Setting,
ó
■ Restricted Factory Service (for factory use only)
■ CHANGE LOCAL
ô
■ PASSWORDS
■ CHANGE REMOTE
ó
■ PASSWORDS
■ ACCESS
ô
■ SUPERVISION
■ DUAL PERMISSION
ô
■ SECURITY ACCESS
PASSWORD ACCESS
ñ Range: Disabled, Enabled
EVENTS: Disabled

The relay supports password entry from either a local or remote connection.
Local access is defined as access to settings or commands via the front panel. This includes both keypad entry and
the RS232 port. Remote access is defined as access to settings or commands via any rear communications port.
This includes both Ethernet and RS485 connections. Any change to the local or remote password enables this
functionality.

Note:
For a relay without CyberSentry, ANY user can activate the RESET button or Reset/Acknowledge an alarm in the Graphical
Front Panel Annunciator without password entry.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 258
Chapter 6 - CyberSecurity

The security menu has the following settings:

● ACCESS LEVEL
● PASSWORD ACCESS EVENTS

ACCESS LEVEL
This setting is viewable on the front panel. The Setting and Command passwords can be changed in the EnerVista
interface.
The "Restricted" option means that settings and commands can be accessed, but there is no access to factory
configuration. Access automatically reverts to the Restricted level according to the ACCESS LEVEL TIMEOUTS
values. The access level is set to Restricted when control power is cycled. The "Factory Service" level is for factory
functions.
There are two user security access levels, setting and command, for which you can set a password for each. Use of
a password for each level controls whether users can enter commands or change settings. Another option is to
specify setting and/or command access for individual user accounts.
● Setting — Allows the user to make any changes to any of the setting values:
○ Change any setting
○ Test mode operation
● Command — Restricts the user from making any settings changes, but allows the user to perform the
following operations:
○ Operate the breakers via front panel keypad (not all UR models)
○ Change the state of virtual inputs
○ Clear the event records
○ Clear the oscillography records
○ Clear fault reports
○ Change the date and time
○ Clear the breaker arcing current
○ Clear energy records
○ Clear the data logger
○ Clear the user-programmable pushbutton states
When entering a settings or command password via EnerVista or any serial interface, you must enter the
corresponding connection password. If the connection is to the back of the relay, use the remote password. If the
connection is to the RS232 port of the front panel, use the local password.
The local setting and command sessions are initiated by the user through the front panel display and are disabled
either by the user or by timeout (via the setting and command level access timeout settings). The remote setting
and command sessions are initiated through the EnerVista software and are disabled either by the user or by
timeout.
The state of the session (local or remote, setting or command) determines the state of the following FlexLogic
operands:
● ACCESS LOC SETG OFF — Asserted when local setting access is disabled
● ACCESS LOC SETG ON — Asserted when local setting access is enabled
● ACCESS LOC CMND OFF — Asserted when local command access is disabled
● ACCESS LOC CMND ON — Asserted when local command access is enabled
● ACCESS REM SETG OFF — Asserted when remote setting access is disabled
● ACCESS REM SETG ON — Asserted when remote setting access is enabled
● ACCESS REM CMND OFF — Asserted when remote command access is disabled
● ACCESS REM CMND ON — Asserted when remote command access is enabled

N60-1601-0125-861-1 259
Chapter 6 - CyberSecurity

Note:
A command or setting write operation is required to update the state of the remote and local security operands listed.

Note:
When a setting password or command password is set or updated, user access with a graphical front panel is removed.
Simply log in again on the graphical front panel.

Note:
When the setting password is set or updated, the graphical front panel Access Level displays as Command. This is because
the graphical front panel is a Modbus client and it does not have automatic access to the password change.

PASSWORD ACCESS EVENTS

This setting allows recording of password access events in the event recorder.
The security menu has the following sub-menus:
● CHANGE LOCAL PASSWORDS
● CHANGE REMOTE PASSWORDS
● ACCESS SUPERVISION
● DUAL PERMISSION SECURITY ACCESS
These sub-menus are described in the subsequent sections.

6.3.1.1.1 CHANGE LOCAL PASSWORDS SETTING

Setting path: SETTINGS > PRODUCT SETUP > SECURITY > CHANGE LOCAL PASSWORDS

■ CHANGE LOCAL CHANGE SETTING

ó Range: No, Yes
■ PASSWORDS PASSWORD: No
■ CHANGE COMMAND
ñ Range: No, Yes
■ PASSWORD: No

There are two user security access levels, setting and command. Use of a password for each level controls whether
users can enter commands or change settings. Proper password codes are required to enable each access level.
When a CHANGE COMMAND PASSWORD or CHANGE SETTING PASSWORD setting is SET to “Yes” via the
front panel interface, the following message sequence is shown:
1. ENTER NEW PASSWORD:
2. VERIFY NEW PASSWORD:
3. NEW PASSWORD HAS BEEN STORED.
To gain write access to a restricted setting, program the ACCESS LEVEL setting in the main security menu to
Setting and then change the setting, or attempt to change the setting and follow the prompt to enter the
programmed password. If the password is correctly entered, access is allowed. Access automatically reverts to the
restricted level according to the access level timeout setting values and when power is cycled.

6.3.1.1.2 CHANGE REMOTE PASSWORDS SETTING

Setting path: SETTINGS > PRODUCT SETUP > SECURITY > CHANGE REMOTE PASSWORDS

N60-1601-0125-861-1 260
Chapter 6 - CyberSecurity

■ CHANGE REMOTE CHANGE SETTING

ó Range: No, Yes
■ PASSWORDS PASSWORD: No
■ CHANGE COMMAND
ñ Range: No, Yes
■ PASSWORD: No

To set the command or setting password in EnerVista:

1. In the EnerVista software or from the front panel, navigate to Settings > Product Setup > Security menu
item to open the remote password settings window.
2. Click the command or setting password Change button.
3. Enter the new password in the New Password field.
4. Re-enter the password in the Confirm Password field
5. Click OK to confirm. The password is checked to ensure that it meets requirements.

Note:
If you establish a local (serial) connection to the relay, you cannot view remote passwords

6.3.1.1.3 ACCESS SUPERVISION SETTING

Setting path: SETTINGS > PRODUCT SETUP > SECURITY > ACCESS SUPERVISION

■ ACCESS ■ ACCESS LEVEL

ó
■ SUPERVISION ■ TIMEOUTS
INVALID ATTEMPTS
ô Range: 2 to 5 in steps of 1
BEFORE LOCKOUT: 3
PASSWORD LOCKOUT
ô Range: 5 to 60 minutes in steps of 1
DURATION: 5 min
FACTORY SERVICE MODE:
ô Range: Enabled, Disabled
Disabled

ñ LOCK FIRMWARE: Enabled Range: Enabled, Disabled

This menu displays when the ACCESS LEVEL setting is set to anything other than Restricted or Command.
The ACCESS SUPERVISION menu has the following settings:
● INVALID ATTEMPTS BEFORE LOCKOUT
● PASSWORD LOCKOUT DURATION
● FACTORY SERVICE MODE
● LOCK FIRMWARE
The following access settings are available.

INVALID ATTEMPTS BEFORE LOCKOUT

This setting specifies the number of times that an incorrect password can be entered within three minutes before
lockout occurs. When lockout occurs, the LOCAL ACCESS DENIED or REMOTE ACCESS DENIED FlexLogic
operands are turned to the On state. These operands Off state after the lockout has expired.

PASSWORD LOCKOUT DURATION

This setting specifies the time that the relay locks out password access after the number of invalid password entries
specified by the INVALID ATTEMPTS BEFORE LOCKOUT setting.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 261
Chapter 6 - CyberSecurity

The relay provides a means to raise an alarm upon failed password entry. If password verification fails while
accessing a password-protected level of the relay (either settings or commands), the UNAUTHORIZED ACCESS
FlexLogic operand is asserted. The operand can be programmed to raise an alarm via contact outputs or
communications. This feature can be used to protect against both unauthorized and accidental access attempts.
The UNAUTHORIZED ACCESS operand is reset with the COMMANDS > CLEAR RECORDS > RESET
UNAUTHORIZED ALARMS command. Therefore, to apply this feature with security, password-protect the
Command level. The operand does not generate events or targets.
If events or targets are required, the UNAUTHORIZED ACCESS operand can be assigned to a digital element
programmed with event logs or targets enabled.

FACTORY SERVICE MODE

A factory service user is supported to perform additional operations intended only for them. This setting allows
access by GE support staff to be turned on and off. A factory service user can log in only when this setting is
configured as Enabled. It is disabled by default. When Enabled, the relay logs events and activates the TROUBLE
LED.
GE recommends that Factory Service Mode be disabled when factory operations are not intended to be performed.
The TROUBLE LED de-activates when a user disables Factory Service Mode.
Login is required for this user, and the password is unique for each relay.
A factory service user is logged out with any of the following circumstances:
● UR restarts
● FACTORY SERVICE MODE setting is disabled by Administrator or factory service user
● ACCESS LEVEL setting is changed from "Factory Service" via front panel or serial connection

LOCK FIRMWARE
This setting determines whether the device accepts or blocks a firmware upgrade. When disabled, firmware can be
updated. When enabled, the firmware cannot be updated. When Enabled/locked and a firmware upgrade is
attempted using the software, the UNAUTH FW ATTEMPT FlexLogic operand does not assert. When locked and a
firmware upgrade is attempted without using the software, the operand asserts. A user with an Access Level of
"Settings" can modify this setting.
The ACCESS SUPERVISION menu also has an ACCESS LEVEL TIMEOUTS sub-menu containing the following
settings

COMMAND LEVEL ACCESS TIMEOUT

This setting specifies the length of inactivity (no local or remote access) required to return to restricted access from
the Command password level.

Note:
The access level is set to Restricted when control power is cycled

SETTING LEVEL ACCESS TIMEOUT

This setting specifies the length of inactivity (no local or remote access) required to return to restricted access from
the Settings password level.

Note:
The access level is set to Restricted when control power is cycled

N60-1601-0125-861-1 262
Chapter 6 - CyberSecurity

6.3.1.1.4 DUAL PERMISSION SECURITY ACCESS

Setting path: SETTINGS > PRODUCT SETUP > SECURITY > DUAL PERMISSION SECURITY ACCESS

■ DUAL PERMISSION LOCAL SETTING AUTH:

ó Range: selected FlexLogic operands
■ SECURITY ACCESS On
REMOTE SETTING AUTH:
ô Range: FlexLogic operand
On
ACCESS AUTH
ñ Range: 5 to 480 minutes in steps of 1
TIMEOUT: 30 min

This menu displays when the ACCESS LEVEL setting is other than Restricted or Command. This feature
provides a mechanism to prevent unauthorized or unintended upload of settings to a relay through the local or
remote interface. The following settings are available through the local (front panel) interface only.
The DUAL PERMISSION SECURITY ACCESS menu has the following settings:
● LOCAL SETTING AUTH
● REMOTE SETTING AUTH
● ACCESS AUTH TIMEOUT

LOCAL SETTING AUTH

This setting is used for local (front panel or RS232 interface) setting access supervision. Valid values for the
FlexLogic operands are either “On” (default) or any physical “Contact Input ~~ On” value. If this setting is “On,“ then
local setting access functions as normal; that is, a local setting password is required. If this setting is any contact
input on FlexLogic operand, then the operand must be asserted (on) prior to providing the local setting password to
gain setting access.
If setting access is not authorized for local operation (front panel or RS232 interface) and the user attempts to
obtain setting access, then the UNAUTHORIZED ACCESS message displays on the front panel.
If this setting is Off, firmware upgrades are blocked. If this setting is On, firmware upgrades are allowed.

REMOTE SETTING AUTH

This setting is used for remote (Ethernet or RS485 interface) setting access supervision.
If this setting is “On” (the default setting), then remote setting access functions as normal; that is, a remote
password is required. If this setting is “Off,” then remote setting access is blocked even if the correct remote setting
password is provided. If this setting is any other FlexLogic operand, then the operand must be asserted (set as on)
prior to providing the remote setting password to gain setting access.
If this setting is "Off," firmware upgrades are blocked. If this setting is "On," firmware upgrades are allowed.

ACCESS AUTH TIMEOUT

This setting represents the timeout delay for local setting access. This setting is applicable when the LOCAL
SETTING AUTH setting is programmed to any operand except “On.” The state of the FlexLogic operand is
monitored continuously for an off-to-on transition. When this occurs, local access is permitted and the timer
programmed with the ACCESS AUTH TIMEOUT setting value is started. When this timer expires, local setting
access is immediately denied. If access is permitted and an off-to-on transition of the FlexLogic operand is
detected, the timeout is restarted. The status of this timer updates every five seconds.
The following settings are available through the remote (EnerVista UR Setup) interface only. Select the Settings >
Product Setup > Security menu item to display the security settings window.
The Remote Settings Authorized setting is used for remote (Ethernet or RS485 interface) setting access
supervision. If this setting is “On” (the default setting), then remote setting access functions as normal; that is, a

N60-1601-0125-861-1 263
Chapter 6 - CyberSecurity

remote password is required. If this setting is “Off,” then remote setting access is blocked even if the correct remote
setting password is provided. If this setting is any other FlexLogic operand, then the operand must be asserted (on)
prior to providing the remote setting password to gain setting access.
The Access Authorized Timeout setting represents the timeout delay remote setting access. It applies when the
Remote Settings Authorized setting is programmed to any operand except “On” or “Off.” The state of the FlexLogic
operand is continuously monitored for an off-to-on transition. When this occurs, remote setting access is permitted,
and the timer programmed with the Access Authorized Timeout setting value is started. When this timer expires,
remote setting access is denied immediately. If access is permitted and an off-to-on transition of the FlexLogic
operand is detected, the timeout is restarted. The status of this timer updates every five seconds.

6.3.2 ENERVISTA SECURITY

The EnerVista security management system is a role-based access control (RBAC) system that allows an
administrator to manage the privileges of multiple users. This allows for access control of UR devices by multiple
personnel within a substation and conforms to the principles of RBAC as defined in ANSI INCITS 359-2004. The
EnerVista security management system is disabled by default to allow the administrator direct access to the
EnerVista software after installation. It is recommended that security be enabled before placing the device in
service.
Basic password or enhanced CyberSentry security applies, depending on purchase.

6.3.3 CYBERSENTRY SECURITY

CyberSentry is a software option, specified at the time of ordering. It provides advanced security features, which are
not available in the standard product. When the option is purchased, the basic password security is disabled
automatically. CyberSentry provides security through the following features:
● An Authentication, Authorization, Accounting (AAA) Remote Authentication Dial-In User Service (RADIUS)
client that is managed centrally, enables user attribution, provides accounting of all user activities, and uses
secure standards-based strong cryptography for authentication and credential protection. In other words, this
option uses a RADIUS server for user authentication.
● A Role-Based Access Control (RBAC) system that provides a permission model that allows access to UR
device operations and configurations based on specific roles and individual user accounts configured on the
AAA server. That is, Administrator, Supervisor, Engineer, Operator, and Observer roles are used. There is no
login required for the Observer role.
● Security event reporting through the Syslog protocol for supporting Security Information Event Management
(SIEM) systems for centralized cybersecurity monitoring
● Strong encryption of all access and configuration network messages between the EnerVista software and UR
devices using the Secure Shell (SSH) protocol, the Advanced Encryption Standard (AES), and 128-bit keys in
Galois Counter Mode (GCM) as specified in the U.S. National Security Agency Suite B extension for SSH
and approved by the National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST) FIPS-140-2 standards for
cryptographic systems
The EnerVista software provides the means to configure and authenticate the relay access using either a server or
the device. Access to functions depends on user role. The login screen of EnerVista has two options:
● Server authentication
● Device authentication.
When the server authentication is selected, the relay uses the RADIUS server and not its local authentication
database to authenticate the user.
When the device authentication is selected, the relay uses its local authentication database and not the RADIUS
server to authenticate the user. In this case, it uses built-in roles as login accounts and the associated passwords
are stored on the relay. In this case, access is not user-attributable. In cases where user-attributable access is
required, especially for auditable processes for compliance reasons, use server authentication (RADIUS) only.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 264
Chapter 6 - CyberSecurity

No password or security information is displayed in plain text by the EnerVista software or the UR device, nor are
they ever transmitted without cryptographic protection.

Note:
Only (TCP/UDP) ports and services that are needed for device configuration and for customer enabled features are open. All
the other ports are closed. For example, Modbus is on by default, so its TCP port 502, is open. But if Modbus is disabled, port
502 is closed. This function has been tested and no unused ports have been found open.

When CyberSentry is enabled, Modbus communications over Ethernet is encrypted for all roles but for the
Observer. The built-in Observer role has read-only access to data over Modbus over Ethernet without
authentication. Encrypted Modbus communication over Ethernet is not always tolerated by SCADA systems. The
UR has a bypass access feature for such situations, which allows unencrypted Modbus over Ethernet. The Bypass
Access setting is available on the SETTINGS > PRODUCT SETUP > SECURITY > SUPERVISORY screen. Note
that other protocols (DNP, 101, 103, 104, EGD) are not encrypted, and they are good communications options for
SCADA systems when CyberSentry is enabled.
When using the rear RS485 port and CyberSentry, registers can be read with a maximum buffer of 64 bytes.
Settings may not be written, so use another port or configure the SERIAL INACTIVITY TIMEOUT setting to a high
value, such as eight minutes, to give the relay enough time to finish the task.

6.3.3.1 CYBERSENTRY USER ROLES

CyberSentry user roles (Administrator, Supervisor, Engineer, Operator, Observer) limit the levels of access to
various UR functions. This means that the EnerVista software allows for access to functionality based on the user’s
logged in role.
Example: Administrative functions can be segmented from common operator functions, or engineering type access,
all of which are defined by separate roles so that access of UR devices by multiple personnel within a substation is
allowed.
One role of one type is allowed to be logged in at a time. For example, one Operator can be logged in but not a
second Operator at the same time. This prevents subsets of settings from being changed at the same time.

Administrator

Engineer

Operator

Observer Supervisor

842838A2.CDR

Figure 181: Cybersentry user roles

The following table lists user roles and permissions.

Administrator Engineer Operator Supervisor Observer
Complete access
except for Command Authorizes
Summary Complete access Default role
CyberSentry menu writing
Security
Device Definition R R R R R
Settings
|---------- Product Setup

N60-1601-0125-861-1 265
Chapter 6 - CyberSecurity

Administrator Engineer Operator Supervisor Observer

|--------------- Security (CyberSentry) RW R R R R
|--------------- Supervisory See table notes R R See table notes R
|--------------- Display Properties RW RW R R R
Clear Relay Records
|--------------- RW RW R R R
(settings)
|--------------- Communications RW RW R R R
|--------------- Modbus User Map RW RW R R R
|--------------- Real Time Clock RW RW R R R
|--------------- Oscillography RW RW R R R
|--------------- Data Logger RW RW R R R
|--------------- Demand RW RW R R R
User-Programmable
|--------------- RW RW R R R
LEDs
User-Programmable Self
|--------------- RW RW R R R
Tests
|--------------- Control Pushbuttons RW RW R R R
User-Programmable
|--------------- RW RW R R R
Pushbuttons
|--------------- Flex state Parameters RW RW R R R
|--------------- User-Definable Displays RW RW R R R
|--------------- Direct I/O RW RW R R R
|--------------- Teleprotection RW RW R R R
|--------------- Installation RW RW R R R
|---------- System Setup RW RW R R R
|---------- FlexLogic RW RW R R R
|---------- Grouped Elements RW RW R R R
|---------- Control Elements RW RW R R R
|---------- Inputs / Outputs RW RW R R R
|--------------- Contact Inputs RW RW R R R
|--------------- Contact Input threshold RW RW R R R
|--------------- Virtual Inputs RW RW R R R
|--------------- Contact Outputs RW RW R R R
|--------------- Virtual Outputs RW RW R R R
|--------------- Resetting RW RW R R R
|--------------- Direct Inputs RW RW R R R
|--------------- Direct Outputs RW RW R R R
|--------------- Teleprotection RW RW R R R
|--------------- Direct Analogs RW RW R R R
|--------------- Direct Integers RW RW R R R
|---------- Transducer I/O RW RW R R R
|---------- Testing RW RW R R R
|---------- Front Panel Label Designer NA NA NA NA NA
|---------- Protection Summary NA NA NA NA NA
Commands RW RW RW R R

N60-1601-0125-861-1 266
Chapter 6 - CyberSecurity

Administrator Engineer Operator Supervisor Observer

|---------- Virtual Inputs RW RW RW R R
|---------- Clear Records RW RW RW R R
|---------- Set Date and Time RW RW RW R R
User Displays R R R R R
Targets R R R R R
Actual Values R R R R R
|---------- Front Panel R R R R R
|---------- Status R R R R R
|---------- Metering R R R R R
|---------- Transducer I/O R R R R R
|---------- Records R R R R R
|---------- Product Info R R R R R
Maintenance RW RW R R R
|---------- Modbus Analyzer NA NA NA NA NA
|---------- Change front panel RW RW RW R R
|---------- Update firmware Yes No No No No
Table Notes:
● RW = read and write access
● R = read access
● Supervisor = RW (default), Administrator = R (default), Administrator = RW (only if Supervisor role is
disabled)
● NA = the permission is not enforced by CyberSentry security

6.3.3.2 CYBERSENTRY SETTINGS THROUGH ENERVISTA

CyberSentry security settings are configured under Settings > Product Setup > Security.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 267
Chapter 6 - CyberSecurity

Figure 182: Security panel when CyberSentry installed

For the Device > Settings > Product Setup > Supervisory option, the panel looks like the following.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 268
Chapter 6 - CyberSecurity

Figure 183: Supervisory panel

For the Security panel, the following settings are available:

Radius server settings

Minimum
Setting name Description Minimum Maximum Default Units
permission
IP address of the main RADIUS server.
Default value indicates no Primary RADIUS
Primary RADIUS IP server is configured, and hence RADIUS is
0.0.0.0 223.255.255.254 0.0.0.0 - Administrator
Address disabled.
Restart the relay for any change to take
effect.
Primary Authentication
RADIUS authentication port 1 65535 1812 - Administrator
Port
Primary Accounting
RADIUS accounting port 1 65535 1813 - Administrator
Port
Value that
An identifier that specifies RADIUS vendor- represents
Vendor ID Administrator
specific attributes used with the protocol General
Electric
RADIUS Authentication Authentication method used by RADIUS
EAP-TTLS PAP EAP-TTLS - Administrator
Method server
See the
Shared secret used in authentication. It Password See the following
RADIUS Authentication
displays as asterisks. This setting must meet Requirements password section N/A - Administrator
(Shared) Secret
the CyberSentry password requirements. section earlier in for requirements
this chapter
See the
Confirm RADIUS
Confirmation of the shared secret. The entry Password
Authentication (Shared) 245 characters N/A - Administrator
displays as asterisks. Requirements
Secret
section

N60-1601-0125-861-1 269
Chapter 6 - CyberSecurity

General security settings

Minimum
Setting name Description Minimum Maximum Default Units
permission
Number of failed authentications before the
0 (lockout
Session Lockout device blocks subsequent authentication 99 3 - Administrator
disabled)
attempts for the lockout period
Session Lockout The period in minutes that a user is prevented
0 (no period) 9999 3 min Administrator
Period from logging in after being locked out
When enabled, local Device authentication with
roles is allowed. When disabled, the UR only
authenticates to the AAA server (RADIUS).
NOTE: Administrator and Supervisor (if still
enabled) remain active even after Device
authentication is disabled. The only permission
Device Authentication Disabled Enabled Enabled - Administrator
for local Administrator is to re-enable Device
authentication when Device authentication is
disabled. To re-enable Device authentication, the
Supervisor unlocks the device for setting
changes, and then the Administrator can re-
enable Device authentication.
Supervisor
When enabled, the device can go into factory
(Administrator
Factory Service Mode service mode. To enable, Supervisor Disabled Enabled Disabled -
when Supervisor
authentication is necessary.
is disabled)
Supervisor
When disabled, the device allows modification of
(Administrator
Lock Settings settings. To enable, Supervisor authentication is Disabled Enabled Disabled -
when Supervisor
necessary.
is disabled)
Supervisor
When enabled, the device denies firmware
(Administrator
Lock Firmware upload. To change setting, Supervisor Disabled Enabled Disabled -
when Supervisor
authentication is necessary.
is disabled)
Restore to Defaults Sets the device to factory defaults No Yes No - Administrator
When enabled, the Supervisor role is active. To
Administrator to
enable, Administrator authentication is
enable and
Supervisor Role necessary. When disabled, the Supervisor role is Disabled Enabled Enabled -
Supervisor to
inactive. To disable, Supervisor authentication is
disable
necessary.
See RADIUS See RADIUS
Ensures that RADIUS user names are not the
RADIUS user names server server - Administrator
same as local/device role names
documents documents
See the The specified role
Local/device roles except for Observer are Password See the following and Administrator,
Change
Password password-protected. All RADIUS users are Requirements password section Text except for
Me1#
password-protected. section earlier in for requirements Supervisor, where
this chapter it is only itself

N60-1601-0125-861-1 270
Chapter 6 - CyberSecurity

Security alarm settings

Minimum
Setting name Description / Details Min Max Default Units
permissions
A threshold number indicating when an alarm is set
Failed Authentications Disabled Enabled Enabled - Administrator
off to indicate too many failed authentication attempts
A value indicating if the device can receive a firmware
upgrade. If Enabled and a firmware upgrade attempt
Firmware Lock is made, the device alarm activates. If Disabled, the Disabled Enabled Enabled - Administrator
device alarm does not activate. On each firmware
upgrade this setting goes back to the default.
A value indicating if the device can accept any Supervisor
settings changes. If Enabled and a settings change (Administrator if
Settings Lock Disabled Enabled Enabled -
attempt is made, the device alarm activates. If Supervisor has
Disabled, the device alarm does not activate. been disabled)

6.3.3.3 CYBERSENTRY AUTHENTICATION

The following types of authentication are supported by CyberSentry to access the UR device:
● Device Authentication (local UR device authenticates)
● Server Authentication (RADIUS server authenticates

User authentication
The EnerVista software allows access to functionality that is determined by the user role, which comes either from
the local UR device or the RADIUS server.
The EnerVista software has a device authentication option on the login screen for accessing the UR device. When
the "Device" button is selected, the UR uses its local authentication database and not the RADIUS server to
authenticate the user. In this case, it uses its built-in roles (Administrator, Engineer, Supervisor, Observer, Operator,
or Administrator and Supervisor when Device Authentication is disabled) as login names and the associated
passwords are stored on the UR device. As such, when using the local accounts, access is not user-attributable.
In cases where user-attributable access is required especially to facilitate auditable processes for compliance
reasons, use RADIUS authentication.
When the "Server" Authentication Type option is selected, the UR uses the RADIUS server and not its local
authentication database to authenticate the user.
No password or security information is displayed in plain text by the EnerVista software or UR device, nor is such
information ever transmitted without cryptographic protection.

Server authentication
The UR has been designed to direct automatically the authentication requests based on user names. In this
respect, local account names on the UR are considered as reserved and not used on a RADIUS server.
The UR detects automatically whether an authentication request is to be handled remotely or locally. As there are
five local accounts possible on the UR, if the user ID credential does not match one of the five local accounts, the
UR forwards automatically the request to a RADIUS server when one is provided.
If a RADIUS server is provided, but is unreachable over the network, server authentication requests are denied. In
this situation, use local UR accounts to gain access to the UR system.

SSH Server Authentication:

From 8.60 onwards the URPC supports Server authentication functionality. In SSH communication, the EnerVista
UR setup software is the client and the UR relay is the SSH server.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 271
Chapter 6 - CyberSecurity

In the Enervista menu, this function can be enabled in File > Preferences > SSH Communication.

6.3.3.4 CYBERSENTRY SETTINGS THROUGH THE FRONT PANEL

Setting path: SETTINGS > PRODUCT SETUP > SECURITY
Range: Administrator, Supervisor, Engineer,
■ SECURITY LOGIN:
ó Operator, Factory (for factory use only),
■ None
None
■ CHANGE DEVICE
ô
■ PASSWORD
■ SESSION
ô
■ SETTINGS
■ RESTORE DEFAULTS
ô
■
■ SYSLOG
ô
■ SETTINGS
■ SUPERVISORY
ñ
■

LOGIN setting
This setting is applicable for Device authentication only. This setting allows a user to log in with a specific role, as
outlined here. For the Supervisor role, enable the “Supervisor Role” setting. Log out by right-clicking the device in
EnerVista and selecting the Disconnect option.
Whenever a new role is logged in, the user is prompted to enter a password. Passwords must obey the
requirements specified earlier in the chapter in the Password Requirements section.The UR device supports five
roles. Roles have their corresponding passwords, except the Observer role, which does not require a password.
There are no time-outs for the Administrator, Engineer, Operator, and Supervisor when logged in using the front
panel; log out manually or use the Command > Security commands in the software.
The roles are defined as follows:
● Administrator — Complete read/write access to all settings and commands. This role does not allow
concurrent access. This role has an operand to indicate when it is logged on.
● Supervisor — This is only an approving role. This role’s authentication commits setting changes submitted by
Administrator or Engineer. The Supervisor role authenticates to unlock the UR relay for setting changes and
not approve changes after the fact. Only a Supervisor can set the Settings Lock and Firmware Lock in the
Security settings. This role also has the ability to forcefully log off any other role and clear the security event
log. This role can also be disabled, but only through a Supervisor authentication. When this role is disabled
its permissions are assigned to the Administrator role.
● Engineer — Complete read/write access to all settings and commands except configuring Security settings
and firmware upgrades. This role does not allow concurrent access.
● Operator — The Operator has read/write access to all settings under the Commands menu/section. This role
does not exist offline.
● Observer — This role has read-only access for all settings. This role allows concurrent viewing access but it
has no download access to any files on the device. Observer is the default role if no authentication has been
done. This role displays as None on the front panel. When local authentication is used, no password is
required for this role. When RADIUS server authentication is used, a password is required.
● Factory — For GE service personnel only

N60-1601-0125-861-1 272
Chapter 6 - CyberSecurity

Note:
The Local Access Denied message on the front panel can mean that you need to log in to the UR in order to complete the
action.

The SECURITY menu option has the following sub-menus:

● CHANGE DEVICE PASSWORD
● SESSION SETTINGS
● RESTORE DEFAULTS
● SYSLOG SETTINGS
● SUPERVISORY
These sub-menus are described in the following sections.

6.3.3.4.1 CHANGE DEVICE PASSWORD

Setting path: SETTINGS > PRODUCT SETUP > SECURITY > CHANGE DEVICE PASSWORD

■ CHANGE DEVICE
ó NEW PASSWORD: Range: 20 alphanumeric characters
■ PASSWORD

ñ CONFIRM PASSWORD: Range: 20 alphanumeric characters

The menu displays on the front panel upon successful login of the Administrator role. Passwords are stored in
salted hash format.
In Device authentication mode, the Observer role does not have a password associated with it. In Server
authentication mode the Observer role requires a password.
If you are locked out of the software, reset the device to factory defaults as outlined later for COMMANDS < RELAY
MAINTENANCE < SERVICE COMMAND. When using CyberSentry, the default password is ChangeMe1#.
Once the passwords are set, the Administrator with Supervisor approval can change the role-associated password.

6.3.3.4.2 SESSION SETTINGS

Setting path: SETTINGS > PRODUCT SETUP > SECURITY > SESSION SETTINGS

■ SESSION
ó SESSION LOCKOUT: Range: 20 alphanumeric characters
■ SETTINGS
SESSION LOCKOUT
ñ Range: 20 alphanumeric characters
PERIOD:

SESSION LOCKOUT setting

This setting specifies the number of failed authentications before the device blocks subsequent authentication
attempts for the lockout period. A value of zero means lockout is disabled.

SESSION LOCKOUT setting

This setting specifies the period of time in minutes of a lockout period. A value of 0 means that there is no lockout
period.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 273
Chapter 6 - CyberSecurity

6.3.3.4.3 RESTORE DEFAULTS

Setting path: SETTINGS > PRODUCT SETUP > SECURITY >RESTORE DEFAULTS

■ SESSION LOAD FACTORY

ó
■ SETTINGS DEFAULTS: NoRange: Yes, No

LOAD FACTORY DEFAULTS setting

This setting is used to reset all the settings, communication, and security passwords. An Administrator role is used
to change this setting and a Supervisor role (if not disabled) approves it.

6.3.3.4.4 SYSLOG SETTINGS

Setting path: SETTINGS > PRODUCT SETUP > SECURITY >SYSLOG SETTINGS

■ SYSLOG SYSLOG FUNCTION:

ó Range: Enable, Disable
■ SETTINGS Disable:
SYSLOG IP ADDRESS:
ô Range: 0.0.0.0 to 223.255.255.255
0.0.0.0:
SYSLOG PORT NUMBER:
ñ Range: 1 to 65535
514

SYSLOG FUNCTION setting

This setting allows the Syslog functionality to be enabled or disabled in the relay.

SYSLOG IP ADDRESS setting

The IP address of the target Syslog server to which all security events are transmitted.

SYSLOG PORT NUMBER setting

The UDP port number of the target Syslog server to which all security events are transmitted.

Figure 184: Example of the Syslog data

6.3.3.4.5 SUPERVISORY
Setting path: SETTINGS > PRODUCT SETUP > SECURITY > SUPERVISORY

N60-1601-0125-861-1 274
Chapter 6 - CyberSecurity

■ SUPERVISORY DEVICE
ó Range: Yes, No
■ AUTHENTICATION: Yes
BYPASS ACCESS: Range: Local, Remote, Local and Remote,
ô
Disabled Disabled, Pushbuttons
RESET KEY ACCESS:
ô Range: Enabled, Disabled
Disabled
FACTORY SERVICE
ô Range: Enabled, Disabled
MODE: Disabled
■ SELF TESTS
ô
■
SUPERVISOR ROLE:
ô Range: Enabled, Disabled
Disabled
SERIAL INACTIVITY
ô Range: 1 to 9999 minutes
TIMEOUT: 1 min
LOCK SETTINGS:
ô Range: Enabled, Disabled
Disabled
LOCK FIRMWARE:
ñ Range: Enabled, Disabled
Enabled

The Supervisory menu settings are available for Supervisor role only, or if the Supervisor role is disabled then for
the Administrator role only. The following settings are available:
● DEVICE AUTHENTICATION
● BYPASS ACCESS
● RESET KEY ACCESS
● FACTORY SERVICE MODE
● SUPERVISOR ROLE
● SERIAL INACTIVITY TIMEOUT
● LOCK SETTINGS
● LOCK FIRMWARE

DEVICE AUTHENTICATION setting

This setting is enabled by default, meaning "Yes" is selected. When enabled, Device authentication with roles is
enabled. When this setting is disabled, the UR only authenticates to the AAA server (RADIUS). However, the
Administrator and Supervisor (when enabled) remain active even after device authentication is disabled and their
only permission is to re-enable Device authentication. To re-enable Device authentication, the Supervisor unlocks
the device for settings changes, then the Administrator re-enables device authentication.

BYPASS ACCESS setting

The bypass security feature provides an easier access, with no authentication and encryption for those special
situations when this is considered safe. Only the Supervisor, or the Administrator when the Supervisor role is
disabled, can enable this feature.

Mode

Authentication — Role Based Access Control Authentication — RBAC and passwords

Normal
(RBAC) and passwords in clear encrypted SSH tunneling
No passwords for allowed RBAC levels
Bypass access No passwords for allowed RBAC levels
No SSH tunneling

N60-1601-0125-861-1 275
Chapter 6 - CyberSecurity

The bypass options are as follows:

● Local — Bypasses authentication for push buttons, keypad, and RS232
● Remote — Bypasses authentication for RS485 and Ethernet
● Local and Remote — Bypasses authentication for push buttons, keypad, RS232, RS485, and Ethernet
● Pushbuttons — Bypasses authentication for front panel push buttons, including in the software. On the
graphical front panel, the authentication for side pushbuttons to control breakers and disconnects also is
bypassed.
With BYPASS ACCESS set to other than "Disabled," the software displays a message that LOCK SETTINGS is
ignored.

RESET KEY ACCESS setting

This setting Indicates whether user authentication is required for executing the RESET button on the front panel or
the front panel in the software. When Disabled, user authentication is required at the Administrator or Engineer
level. When Enabled, any user can execute the RESET command without authentication. A Supervisor, or the
Administrator if the Supervisor role is disabled, can enable this feature.

FACTORY SERVICE MODE setting

This setting allows access by GE support staff to be turned on and off. When Enabled, the device can go into
factory service mode. A Supervisor role is necessary to enable the setting, and otherwise an Administrator role
when the Supervisor role is disabled. The default value is Disabled. An event is generated when disabling and
enabling, and the TROUBLE LED activates when enabled. The factory service user enters a password that is
unique for each device. When a factory service user is logged in on the front panel, a remote user cannot access
the device at the same time. A factory service user is logged out with any of the following circumstances:
● UR restarts
● Factory Service Mode setting is disabled by Administrator or factory service user
● When a non-factory service user logs in via front panel or serial connection

SUPERVISOR ROLE setting

When Enabled, the Supervisor role is active. To Disable this setting a Supervisor authentication is necessary. If
disabled, the Supervisor role is not allowed to log in. In this case, the Administrator can change the settings under
the Supervisory menu. If enabled, Supervisor authentication is required to change the settings in the Supervisory
menu. If the Supervisor disables their role after authentication, the Supervisor session remains valid until they
switch to another role using MMI or until they end the current Supervisor session if using communications. This role
is disabled by default.

SERIAL INACTIVITY TIMEOUT setting

The role logged via a serial port is auto logged off after the Serial Inactivity timer times out. A separate timer is
maintained for RS232 and RS485 connections. Set this value to a high number, such as eight minutes, when using
the rear RS485 terminals for settings write.
GE recommends setting this value to at least 3 minutes for the following scenario: while connected to a
CyberSentry device, with serial or USB cable connected to the front panel, and performing "Add Device to Offline
Window" or an online/ offline comparison. With less than the recommended 3 minutes, the serial activity timeout
interrupts the connection and the security role login window appears. Upon login, the process resumes.

LOCK SETTINGS setting

Specifies whether the device accepts settings changes, with a default of Disabled to allow changes. The Supervisor
role Disables this setting for the relay to start accepting setting changes or command changes. After all the setting
changes are applied or commands executed, the Supervisor then Enables the setting to lock setting changes.
When set to "Enabled," all other settings in the Supervisory window cannot be edited. Any setting changes on other
Modbus screens and IEC 61850 screens cannot be saved to the relay. When the BYPASS ACCESS setting is set to
a local or remote option, it overrides LOCK SETTINGS and allows changes.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 276
Chapter 6 - CyberSecurity

LOCK FIRMWARE setting

Specifies whether the device accepts a firmware upgrade, with a default of Enabled to deny upgrade. The
Supervisor role Disables this setting to allow upgrades. After the upgrade, the Supervisor then Enables the setting
to prevent upgrades. When the BYPASS ACCESS setting is set to a local or remote option, it overrides LOCK
FIRMWARE and allows changes.
The SUPERVISORY menu has the sub-menu SELF TESTS.

SELF TESTS sub-menu

Setting path: SETTINGS > PRODUCT SETUP > SECURITY > SUPERVISORY > SELF TESTS

■ SELF TESTS ■ FAILED

ó
■ ■ AUTHENTICATE
FIRMWARE LOCK:
ô Range: Enabled, Disabled
Enabled
SETTINGS LOCK:
ô Range: Enabled, Disabled
Enabled

FAILED AUTHENTICATE > FAILED AUTHENTICATE setting

If this setting is Enabled then the number of failed authentications is compared with the Session Lockout threshold.
When the Session Lockout threshold is exceeded, this minor alarm indication comes up.

FIRMWARE LOCK setting

If this setting is Enabled, then any firmware upgrade operation attempt when the LOCK FIRMWARE setting is
enabled brings up this self test alarm.

SETTINGS LOCK setting

If this setting is Enabled then an unauthorized write attempt to a setting for a given role activates this self test.

6.3.3.4.6 CYBERSENTRY SETUP

When first using CyberSentry security, use the following procedure for setup.
1. Log into the relay as Administrator by using the VALUE keys on the front panel to enter the default password
"ChangeMe1#". Note that the LOCK SETTINGS setting needs to be disabled (default) in the SETTINGS >
PRODUCT SETUP > SECURITY > SUPERVISORY menu.
2. Enable the Supervisor role if you have a need for it.
3. Make any required changes in configuration, such as setting a valid IP address for communication over
Ethernet.
4. Log out of the Administrator account by choosing None.
5. Next, Device or Server authentication can be chosen on the login screen, but the choice is available only in
EnerVista. Use Device authentication to log in using the five pre-configured roles (Administrator, Supervisor,
Engineer, Operator, Observer). When using a serial connection, only Device authentication is supported.
When Server authentication is required, characteristics for communication with a RADIUS server must be
configured. This is possible only in the EnerVista software. The RADIUS server itself also must be
configured. The appendix called RADIUS Server at the end of this instruction manual gives an example of
how to set up a simple RADIUS server. Once both the RADIUS server and the parameters for connecting the
UR to the server have been configured, you can choose Server authentication on the login screen of
EnerVista.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 277
Chapter 6 - CyberSecurity

Notes
The use of CyberSentry for devices communicating through an Ethernet-to-RS485 gateway is not supported.
Because these gateways do not support the secure protocols necessary to communicate with such devices, the
connection cannot be established. Use the device as a non-CyberSentry device.
Users logged in through the front panel are not timed out and cannot be forcefully logged out by a supervisor. Roles
logged in through the front panel that do no allow multiple instances (Administrator, Supervisor, Engineer, Operator)
must switch to None (equivalent to a logout) when they are done in order to log out.
For all user roles except Observer, only one instance can be logged in at a time, for both login by front panel and
software.
To configure Server authentication:
1. In the EnerVista software, choose Device authentication and log in as Administrator.
2. Configure the following RADIUS server parameters: IP address, authentication port, shared secret, and
vendor ID.
3. On the RADIUS server, configure the user accounts. Do not use the five pre-defined roles as user names
(Administrator, Supervisor, Engineer, Operator, Observer) in the RADIUS server. If you do, the UR relay
automatically provides the authentication from the device.
4. In the EnerVista software, choose Server authentication and log in using the user name and password
configured on the RADIUS server for Server authentication login.
5. After making any required changes, log out.

Note:
When changing settings offline, ensure that only settings permitted by the role that performs the settings download are
changed because only those changes are applied.

Pushbuttons (both user-control buttons and user-programmable buttons) located on the front panel can be pressed
by an Administrator or Engineer role. This also applies to the RESET button, which resets targets, where targets are
errors displayed on the front panel or the Targets panel of the EnerVista software. The RESET button has special
behavior in that it allows these two roles to press it even when they are logged in through the RS232 port and not
through the front panel.
To reset the security event log and self-test operands:
1. Log in as Supervisor (if the role is enabled) or Administrator (if the Supervisor role is disabled)
2. Execute a clear security command under Commands > Security > Clear Security.

6.3.3.4.7 SECURITY EVENTS

The security events produced when the CyberSentry option is purchased are sent as sytem log (syslog) messages
to a syslog server, if one is configured. The format is as follows.

Event Date & Activity

Security log Username IP address Role Category Log type Event result
number Timestamp value

● Event Number — Event identification number (index)

● Date & Timestamp — UTC date and time
● Username — 255 chars maximum, but in the security log it is truncated to 20 characters
● IP address — Device IP address
● Role — 16 bit unsigned, of type format F617
Enumeration Role
0 None

N60-1601-0125-861-1 278
Chapter 6 - CyberSecurity

Enumeration Role
1 Administrator
2 Supervisor
3 Engineer
4 Operator
5 Factory

● Category — Based on IEC62443-4-2 CR2.8

Category
a) Access Control
b) Request Error
c) Control System event
d) Backup and Restore event
e) Configuration Changes
f) Audit Log event

● LogType — Fixed string: “IEC62351-14”

● Activity Value — 16 bit unsigned
●
Activity
Value/
Event Result Category
Event
ID
1 Authentication Failed a) Access Control
2 User Lockout a) Access Control
3 FW Upgrade e) Configuration Changes
4 FW Lock a) Access Control
5 Settings Lock a) Access Control
Settings Change. Because this can fill the
entire event log, it is supported by the already
6 e) Configuration Changes
existing Settings_Change.log file. This event
is not required.
7 Clear Oscillography command c) Control System event
Clear Data Logger command (not applicable
8 c) Control System event
to all UR products)
Clear Demand Records command (not
9 c) Control System event
applicable to all UR products)
Clear Energy command (not applicable to all
10 c) Control System event
UR products)
11 Clear Unauthorized Access command a) Access Control
Clear Teleprotection Counters command (not
12 c) Control System event
applicable to all UR products)
13 Clear All Relay Records command c) Control System event
14 Role Log in a) Access Control
15 Role Log out a) Access Control

N60-1601-0125-861-1 279
Chapter 6 - CyberSecurity

Activity
Value/
Event Result Category
Event
ID
16 WRITE_SETTING_FILE e) Configuration Changes
17 Factory Mode enabled f) Audit Log event
18 Factory Mode disabled f) Audit Log event
19 FW file validation successful f) Audit Log event
20 FW file validation failed b) Request Error
21 Supervisor password changed e) Configuration Changes
22 Administrator password changed e) Configuration Changes
23 Engineer password changed e) Configuration Changes
24 Operator password changed e) Configuration Changes
25 Bypass mode activated a) Access Control
26 Bypass mode deactivated a) Access Control
30 CERT_V_FORMAT f) Audit Log events
31 CERT_PK_SIG_ALG f) Audit Log events
32 CERT_V_PK_EXPIRED f) Audit Log events
33 CERT_V_PK_EARLY f) Audit Log events

If “System Integrity Recovery” events are logged during a restart of the unit due to an incorrect shutdown sequence,
upgrade the firmware to version 7.31 or later to correct this issue.
In addition to supporting syslog, a relay with CyberSentry also saves the security events in two local security files,
these being SECURITY_EVENTS.CSV and SETTING_CHANGES.LOG. Details on these files and how to retrieve
them are available in the EnerVista software under Maintenance > Retrieve File. Depending on the level of
criticality/severity, a syslog server or a reporting tool gathering information from a syslog server can produce
reports, charts, and so on. All severity levels are per RFC 5424.

CyberSentry system events recorded

Event Severity Description
FAILED_AUTH, ORIGIN, A failed authentication with origin information (username and IP:MAC
Notice (5)
TIMESTAMP address), a time stamp in UTC time when it occurred
AUTH_LOCKOUT, ORIGIN, An authentication lockout has occurred because of too many failed
Warning (4)
TIMESTAMP authentication attempts
FIRMWARE_UPGD, ORIGIN,
Information (6) Indicates that a change of firmware has occurred
TIMESTAMP
FIRMWARE_LOCK, ORIGIN, An attempt was made to change firmware while the firmware lock was
Warning (4)
TIMESTAMP enabled
SETTING_CHG, ORIGIN,
Notice (5) Indicates setting change(s)
TIMESTAMP
SETTING_LOCK, ORIGIN, An attempt was made to change settings while the settings lock was
Warning (4)
TIMESTAMP enabled
LOGIN, ORIGIN, TIMESTAMP Information (6) Indicates when a certain role logged in
LOGOUT, ORIGIN, TIMESTAMP Information (6) Indicates when a certain role logged out or timed out
CLEAR_OSCILLOGRAPHY Notice (5) Clear oscillography command was issued
CLEAR_DATA_LOGGER Notice (5) Clear data logger command was issued
CLEAR_DEMAND_RECS Notice (5) Clear demand records command was issued

N60-1601-0125-861-1 280
Chapter 6 - CyberSecurity

Event Severity Description

CLEAR_ENERGY Notice (5) Clear energy command was issued
RESET_UNAUTH_ACCESS Notice (5) Reset Unauthorized access command was issued
CLEAR_TELEPROTECTION_CNT Notice (5) Clear teleprotection counters command was issued
CLEAR_ALL_RECS Notice (5) Clear all records command was issued
WRITE_SETTING_FILE Notice (5) Write settings file to the relay
BYPASS_ACTIVATE Warning (4) Bypass was activated (serial, keypad or both)
BYPASS_DEACTIVATE Warning (4) Bypass was deactivated
FACTORY_MODE_ENABLED Warning (4) Factory Service Mode activated
FACTORY_MODE_DISABLED Warning (4) Factory Service Mode deactivated
FW_FILE_VALIDATION_SUCCESSF
Information (6) Firmware file signature validation successful
UL
FW_FILE_VAILDATION_FAILED Warning (4) Firmware file signature validation failed
SUPERVISOR_PSWD_CHANGED Notice (5) Supervisor user account’s password changed
ADMIN_PSWD_CHANGED Notice (5) Administrator user account’s password changed
ENGINEER_PSWD_CHANGED Notice (5) Engineer user account’s password changed
OPERATOR_PSWD_CHANGED Notice (5) Operator user account’s password changed

6.3.4 RADIUS SERVER CONFIGURATION

The following procedure is an example of how to set up a simple RADIUS server. You install the RADIUS server
software on a separate computer. In this example, we use FreeRADIUS third-party software.
1. Download and install FreeRADIUS from www.freeradius.org as the RADIUS server. This is a Windows 32-
bit installation that is known to work. If you try another third-party tool and it does not work, use the
FreeRADIUS software.
2. Open the radiusd.conf file in the <Path_to_Radius>\etc\raddb folder
3. Locate the bind_address field and enter your RADIUS server IP address.
Text editor software that supports direct editing and saving of UNIX text encodings and line breaks, such as
EditPad Lite, is needed for this editing.
4. In the users.conf file in the <Path_to_Radius>\etc\raddb folder, add the following text to configure a
user Tester with an Administrator role.
Tester User-Password == "TesterPw1#"
GE-UR-Role = Administrator
5. In the clients.conf file in the <Path_to_Radius>\etc\raddb folder, add the following text to define
the UR as a RADIUS client, where in this example the client IP address is 10.14.61.132, the shared secret
specified here is also configured on the UR device for successful authentication, and the shortname is a
short, optional alias that can be used in place of the IP address.
client 10.14.61.132 {
secret = Testing!123
shortname = ur1-test
}
Alternatively, you may specify one secret for a network of clients, where in the example below the clients are
all within the 10.14.61.0/24 subnet and the shared secret specified here is also configured on all the UR
devices in the subnet for successful authentication.
client 10.14.61.0/24 {
secret = Testing!123

N60-1601-0125-861-1 281
Chapter 6 - CyberSecurity

shortname = net1-test
}
6. In the <Path_to_Radius>\etc\raddb folder, create a file called dictionary.ge and add the following
content.
# ##########################################################
# GE VSAs
############################################################
VENDOR GE 2910

# Management
authorization
BEGIN-VENDOR GE

# Role ID
ATTRIBUTE GE-UR-Role 1 integer

# GE-UR-ROLE values
VALUE GE-UR-Role Administrator 1
VALUE GE-UR-Role Supervisor 2
VALUE GE-UR-Role Engineer 3
VALUE GE-UR-Role Operator 4
VALUE GE-UR-Role Observer 5

END-VENDOR GE
#############################################################
7. In the dictionary file in the <Path_to_Radius>\etc\raddb folder, add the following line.
$INCLUDE dictionary.ge
For example, the file can look like the following:
$INCLUDE ../share/freeradius/dictionary
$INCLUDE dictionary.ge
8. For the first start, run the RADIUS server in debug mode to ensure that there are no compiling errors.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 282
Chapter 6 - CyberSecurity

<Path_to_Radius>/start_radiusd_debug.bat
9. Set up the RADIUS parameters on the UR as follows.
a. If logging in, select Device for the Authentication Type, and use Administrator for the User
Name. The default password is ChangeMe1#.
b. Access Settings > Product Setup > Security.
c. Configure the IP address (10.14.61.122 in this example) and ports (default values in this example) for
the RADIUS server. Leave the GE vendor ID field at the default of 2910.
d. Update the RADIUS shared secret (Testing!123 in this example) as specified in the clients.conf file.
Restart the relay for the IP address and port changes to take effect.
10. Verify the operation by loging in to the UR software as follows.
a. In the login window, select Server as the Authentication Type
b. Enter the user name (for example user name Tester with password TesterPw1#).
c. Check that the RADIUS server log file shows the access with an Access-Accept entry.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 283
 CHAPTER 7

PROCESS BUS MODULE

Chapter 7 - Process bus module

7.1 CHAPTER OVERVIEW

This chapter contains the following sections:

Chapter Overview 285
Overview 286
Parallel Redundancy Protocol (PRP) 287
High-availability seamless redundancy (HSR) 289
Front Panel Settings 291
SV Stream Configuration 297
Remote resources configuration 314

N60-1601-0125-861-1 285
Chapter 7 - Process bus module

7.2 OVERVIEW

Note:
This feature requires a Process Bus Module (order code 85, 86, or 87).

Note:
Process Bus GOOSE requires IEC 61850 and IEEE 1588 software options

The UR provides a digital process bus by use of a Process Bus Module. A digital process bus enables digital
transmission of data between the switchyard and relays in a control house using communication cables instead of
hard-wired connections.
The Process Bus Module supports the IEC 61850-9-2LE and IEC 61869 protocols, switched networks, and two
redundancy protocols (Parallel Redundancy Protocol and High-Availability Seamless Redundancy). The module is
used to transfer data streams in protection and control networks, including dataset samples referred to as sampled
values (SVs), with the stability of redundancy.
A Process Bus Module with order code 85, 86, or 87 is distinct from the HardFiber Process Bus Module with order
code 81. This section does not apply to the HardFiber module.
Configuration includes that for redundancy and synchronization of time-clock sources because data transfer occurs
among multiple devices.

Note:
For any device that is connected to a copper SFP of the Process Bus Module, set its port speed to Auto Negotiate. The
copper SFP supports 100 Mbps and 1 Gbps speeds in auto-negotiate mode. If the device connecting to the Process Bus
Module has a fixed port speed, does not support auto-negotiation, or its auto-negotiate is disabled, then the link speed of the
copper SFP is fixed at 1 Gbps and it communicates only with a device that supports 1 Gbps.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 286
Chapter 7 - Process bus module

7.3 PARALLEL REDUNDANCY PROTOCOL (PRP)

PRP enables seamless switchover and zero recovery time during a single network failure in substation automation
networks. It ensures that critical data, such as GOOSE and sampled value (SV) data, are transmitted without delay
in case of local area network (LAN) defects. In other words, with PRP functionality, the Process Bus Module can be
connected to redundant LANs and work with zero recovery time.
PRP is supported to the IEC 62439-3:2012 standard, Clause 4.
The figure shows that PRP achieves redundancy by using a combination of frame and LAN duplication. Identical
frames, here labeled frames A and B, are sent on two independent networks that connect source and destination.
The frames carry GOOSE or supervisory data. Under normal circumstances, both frames reach the destination and
one of them is sent up the stack to the destination application, while the other frame is discarded. If an error occurs
in one of the networks and traffic is prevented from flowing on that path, connectivity is provided by the other
network to ensure continuous communication. When designing this network care was taken to ensure that there is
no single point of failure in the two LANs, such as a common power supply, as such scenarios can bring down
simultaneously both LANs.

RedBox Gateway
SAN

LAN A LAN B

Bridges / switches Bridges / switches

Merging
Units

A-frame B-frame
B-frame A-frame
1a 1b

1b 1a
UR DANP (Source) UR DANP (Destination) 859778A1.ppt

Figure 185: PRP redundant network example

PRP implements redundancy in the nodes rather than in the network by using specialized nodes called Doubly
Attached Nodes Running PRP (DANP) for handling the duplicated frames. The figure shows an example. Each
DANP node has two ports that are connected to the two independent LANs with similar (but not necessarily
identical) topology. A source DANP sends identical frames over both LANs and a destination DANP receives both
frames from the two LANs within a certain time period, consumes the first frame, and discards the duplicate frame.
Each UR device in this example implements PRP on ports 1a and 1b of the Process Bus Module. Both URs require
a Process Bus Module. Ports 1a and 1b act as DANP in the PRP network. With two ports required, Process Bus
Modules with order code 85, 86, or 87 can be used. While this example shows a UR as receiving the frames, the
receiver can be a merging unit or UR.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 287
Chapter 7 - Process bus module

A device with only one port, such as a printer or computer, is called a Singly Attached Node (SAN). It is a node with
non-redundant network adapters. A SAN can communicate with other SANs and DANPs on the same LAN. When a
SAN is attached to a redundant LAN by a Redundancy Box (RedBox) device, the SAN can communicate with all
DANPs and SANs in both LANs. In other words, if redundancy for a SAN is required, the SAN is connected to both
LANs through a RedBox.
A merging unit (MU), such as the GE MU320, is an interface between analog and digital worlds. With an MU, the
analog signals from the CTs and VTs in the yard are converted to digital signals and transmitted via the sampled
value (SV) network communication protocol.
The bridges shown are network switches that connect devices participating in the PRP network and otherwise do
not have an active role in PRP.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 288
Chapter 7 - Process bus module

7.4 HIGH-AVAILABILITY SEAMLESS REDUNDANCY (HSR)

Similar to PRP, High-Availability Seamless Redundancy (HSR) enables seamless switchover and zero recovery
time during a single network failure in substation automation networks. It ensures that critical data, such as GOOSE
and SV data, are transmitted without delay in case of LAN defects.
HSR is supported to IEC 62439-3, Clause 5. SV data can be received from merging units meeting IEC 61869-9.
HSR is used in network topology with rings and rings of rings. All nodes in the ring are doubly attached. The figure
shows an example. The Doubly Attached Node with HSR (DANH) is a node that has two ports interconnected by
full-duplex links and participates in the HSR ring. The source node receives a frame from its upper layer, inserts an
HSR tag to identify duplicates, and sends it over its two ports in different directions, shown by the red and blue
arrows. In a normal, fault-free state, the identical frames reach the destination DANH within a certain interval, the
destination DANH removes the HSR tag, sends the first frame up the stack to the destination application and
discards the second frame. If an error occurs in one of the network nodes and traffic cannot flow on that path,
connectivity is provided through the other direction and ensures continuous communication.

UR DANH (Source) UR DANH

SAN

1a 1b 1b 1a

UR DANH (Destination)
RedBox

Merging Unit Merging Unit Merging Unit

859776A1.ppt

Figure 186: HSR single-ring configuration example

A Singly Attached Node, or SAN, such as a computer or printer, is a node with non-redundant network adapters. It
uses a redundancy box (RedBox) to connect to the ring.
A merging unit (MU), such as the GE MU320, is an interface between analog and digital worlds. With an MU, the
analog signals from the CTs and VTs in the yard are converted to digital signals and transmitted via the sampled
value (SV) network communication protocol.
A UR with the Process Bus Module implements either single or dual HSR capability. It supports hierarchical ring
topologies, such as connected rings, mesh topology, and an HSR ring in a PRP network.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 289
Chapter 7 - Process bus module

In single HSR configuration, ports 1a and 1b of the Process Bus Module act as DANH, and any other ports on the
Process Bus Module are disabled. Point-to-point configuration is not available. For single HSR, Process Bus
Module 85, 86, or 87 can be used.
In dual HSR configuration, the UR to connect to two independent HSR rings. Ports 1a and 1b form one DANH node,
and ports 3a and 3b form the second DANH node. Any other ports on the module are disabled. Traffic from HSR-1
ring is not forwarded to the HSR-2 ring and vice versa. The UR does not facilitate any message communication
between the two independent HSR rings. In dual HSR, with four ports required, a Process Bus Module with order
code 86 or 87 can be used.
While the UR does not provide RedBox functionality, an HSR ring can be connected to a PRP network using two
RedBoxes, one for each redundant LAN of the PRP network. The RedBoxes are configured to handle PRP frames
on the interlinks and HSR frames on the HSR ring. As per the IEC 62439-3:2016 standard, up to seven PRP
networks can be connected to the same HSR ring.
While the UR does not provide QuadBox functionality, a QuadBox can be added to interconnect two HSR rings,
which is beneficial when traffic on a single ring exceeds the ring’s capability.

UR DANH (Source)

1a 3a
1b 3b
HSR Ring 1 HSR Ring 2

HSR 1 Nodes HSR 2 Nodes

UR DANH UR DANH

Merging Unit Merging Unit

859777A1.ppt

Figure 187: Dual HSR, double-ring configuration example

N60-1601-0125-861-1 290
Chapter 7 - Process bus module

7.5 FRONT PANEL SETTINGS

Setting path: SETTINGS > PROCESS BUS MODULE > GENERAL
■ GENERAL NETWORK CONFIG:
ó Range: INDEPENDENT, PRP, HSR, Dual HSR
■ INDEPENDENT
PRP SUPV MCST ADDR:
ô Range: 01 15 4E 00 01 00 to 01 15 4E 00 01 FF
01154E000100
HSR-1 SUPV MCST ADDR:
ô Range: 01 15 4E 00 01 00 to 01 15 4E 00 01 FF
01154E000100
HSR-2 SUPV MCST ADDR:
ô Range: 01 15 4E 00 01 00 to 01 15 4E 00 01 FF
01154E000101
PORT 1a FUNCTION:
ô Range: Disabled, Enabled
Enabled

ô ò

PORT 4b FUNCTION:
ô Range: Disabled, Enabled
Enabled
SV TRBL PRT BLOCK:
ô Range: Global, Partial
Global
SV TRBL CONT OP BLK:
ô Range: FlexLogic operand
Off
SV DELAY ALARM:
ô Range: 1.0 ms to 10.0 ms in steps of 0.1 ms
6.0 ms
QUALITY CHECK:
ô Range: Reject Questionable, Accept Questionable
Reject Questionable
ANTI-ALIASING FILTER:
ô Range: Disabled, Enabled
Disabled
SMPSYNCH CHECK:
ô Range: Global, Local, Local-87L, Any
Global
Fallback GmID:
Range: 8 Octet string
00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
TARGET: Click to view or
ô Range: List of available Targets. Access in EnerVista.
edit selected Targets
EVENTS: Click to view or Range: List of available FlexLogic operand types
ô
edit selected Events from SV Stream Processing. Access in EnerVista.

NETWORK CONFIG
This setting specifies the network configuration and redundancy for the Process Bus Module. If set to
INDEPENDENT, all ports on the Process Bus Module are enabled, and the Process Bus Module can be connected
directly to merging units (MUs) or to a switch without redundancy. To enable and disable individual ports on the
Process Bus Module in a point-to-point (PPP) network, use the PORT x FUNCTION settings. If set to PRP or HSR,
ports 1a and 1b are enabled. The PORT 1a FUNCTION and PORT 1b FUNCTION settings change, depending on
usage. If set to Dual HSR, ports 1a and 1b are enabled for one HSR ring. When using a Process Bus Module,
ports 3a and 3b are enabled for another HSR ring.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 291
Chapter 7 - Process bus module

PRP SUPV MCST ADDR

This setting changes the multicast address used by the Parallel Redundancy Protocol (PRP) supervision frames.
Configure all DANP devices in the PRP network with the same multicast address for the network supervision to
operate properly. You can edit this setting when the NETWORK CONFIG setting is set to PRP.

HSR-1 SUPV MCST ADDR

This setting changes the multicast address used by High-Availability Seamless Redundancy ring one (HSR-1 ports
1a and 1b) supervision frames, for single HSR configuration. Configure all DANH devices in the HSR network with
the same multicast address for the network supervision to operate properly. This setting is editable when the
NETWORK CONFIG setting is set to HSR or Dual HSR.

HSR-2 SUPV MCST ADDR

This setting changes the multicast address used by the HSR-2 (ports 3a and 3b) supervision frames for the second
DANH in a Dual HSR configuration. Configure all DANH devices in the HSR network with the same multicast
address for the network supervision to operate properly. You can edit this setting when the NETWORK CONFIG
setting is set to Dual HSR.

PORT 1a to 4b FUNCTION
These settings manually enable and disable Process Bus Module Ethernet ports. Typically, Process Bus Module
ports are order-code dependent, and the INDEPENDENT network configuration enables all the ports by default.
These settings allow individual ports to be enabled and disabled individually. To connect only a few of the ports,
other ports can be disabled to avoid a PBEthPort-# Offline self-test error. The fields active depend on order
code and NETWORK CONFIG setting. For order code 85, ports 1a, 1b, 3a, and 3b are available to be turned on or
off. For order codes 86 and 87, all eight ports can be available to be turned on or off.
When a port is disabled, all transmitting and receiving traffic on the port is blocked. Relay restart is not required
when changing these port function fields.

SV TRBL PRT BLOCK

In case of loss of any subscribed SV streams or due to bad quality of any subscribed SV frames, the relay's
protection functions need to be blocked to avoid undesired operation. This setting specifies the type of blocking
applied. When set to Global, all the protection functions that utilize the sampled values are blocked.
Communications, data logging, and oscillography remain functional. Availability of switchgear control is determined
by the SV TRBL CONT OP BLK operand. When set to Partial, only those protection functions are blocked that
utilize the sampled values from the affected SV stream. All other protection functions remain operational.

SV TRBL CONT OP BLK

This setting selects a FlexLogic operand that determines whether the contact outputs are blocked or not. When the
state of the operand is low, the contact outputs are not blocked when there is a loss of any SV stream or received
SV frames have bad quality. You can enable switchgear control through contact outputs during SV stream trouble.
When the operand is high, the contact outputs are blocked when there is a loss of any SV stream or received SV
frames have bad quality and the switchgear control is not available through contact outputs during SV stream
trouble.

SV DELAY ALARM
The sampled value (SV) frames may arrive with a delay from the MUs, which can be due to the MU performance or
different network path delays. This setting specifies the maximum delay expected between the time a sample is
taken at the MU and the time of arrival of that SV message. Sampling time is estimated based on the UR Process
Bus Module clock and the sampling rate. If the calculated frame delay is more than this setting value, the RxSV#
Delay Alm On FlexLogic operand asserts. The setting value needs to be calibrated and set at the commissioning
time for the given network topology. An alarm in runtime indicates the network performance is degrading over the
time. In short, this setting specifies how long the relay waits to declare that a sample is delayed. Protection is not
blocked by this setting.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 292
Chapter 7 - Process bus module

QUALITY CHECK
Flags are used to assess the quality of sampled value data to ensure protection. This setting specifies how the
sampled values are processed by the relay when the associated q.validity is set to Questionable. Quality is
checked per AC bank, not per SV stream. When set to Reject Questionable, the questionable data is
considered invalid and the frame is rejected. Only Good quality data is accepted. Set it to Accept Questionable
only if it is absolutely known that questionable quality from a MU is not compromising the quality of the data for
various applications. When set to Accept Questionable, both the Good and Questionable quality data are
accepted.

ANTI-ALIASING FILTER
This setting activates or deactivates the anti-aliasing filter that conditions the sampled values from the Process Bus
network. If the Merging Unit providing sampled values is applies an anti-aliasing filter, this setting must be disabled.
Otherwise, this setting can be enabled to apply filtering of the received sampled values. When enabled, the device
applies a low-pass-filter, which attenuates all the harmonics above the 15th order.

SMPSYNCH CHECK
This setting is a time synchronization check. It specifies the time synchronization source of an SV stream expected
by the Process Bus Module.
When set to Global, only the SV streams with SmpSynch indicating a Global (2) value are accepted. A stream
with a SmpSynch value other than Global (2) is rejected.
When set to Local, all SV streams with SmpSynch indicating a Local (1) or Global (2) area clock are
accepted.
When set to Any, any SmpSynch value in the range of 0 to 254 is acceptable. Streams outside the range are
rejected.
When all the subscribed MU streams support IEC61850 Ed 2.1, an additional acceptance criterion as outlined in the
description of setting Fallback GmID, has been added from UR version 8.5 and onwards

Fallback GmID
In the RxSV streams supporting IEC61850 Ed 2.1, the SynchSrcID attribute is used as acceptance criteria for the
RxSV streams, which are used by the Protection elements. In the absence of Global Clock, this setting indicates the
GmID of the local clock to which all subscribed MUs have to be synchronized for RxSV streams to be accepted.
The effect of the Fallback GmID is explained as below:
When SMPSYNCH CHECK is set to Global, only the RxSV streams with SmpSynch attribute indicating a Global
(2) value are accepted. SynchSrcID(GmID) Check is not done as all the streams accepted are Globally
synchronized.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 293
Chapter 7 - Process bus module

Figure 188: SympSynchCheck with GmID Flowchart

Effect of SMPSYNCH CHECK setting and attribute

MU Smpsynch UR Setting: SMPSYNCH CHECK
Attribute Global Local Any
Global Protection elements operational Protection elements operational Protection elements operational

Local Protection elements blocked Protection elements operational Protection elements operational
if GmId=GmIDRef

Any Protection elements blocked Protection elements blocked Other protection elements operational

N60-1601-0125-861-1 294
Chapter 7 - Process bus module

TARGET
With this setting, you can select the target messages of the affected SV stream(s) to be displayed on the front
panel. The target resets itself once the issue with the SV stream is resolved. Note that a selected target message
applies to all the configured SV streams. For example, if target message RxSV DELAY ALM ON' is selected, then a
target displays when any of the configured SV streams has an active SV Delay Alarm. When disabled, no target
message displays on the front panel.

Figure 189: FlexLogic operand target selection

EVENTS
With this setting, you can select the flexlogic operands, which will generate the events of the affected SV stream(s),
to be recorded in the event recorder. Note that a selected event from the menu applies to all the configured SV
streams. When disabled, no event is recorded in the event recorder.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 295
Chapter 7 - Process bus module

Figure 190: FlexLogic operand event selection

Note:
Choose carefully the events to be recorded in the event recorder. If an SV stream is noisy, there is risk of event recorder
overflow. Apart from testing, select a minimal number of events following relay commissioning

N60-1601-0125-861-1 296
Chapter 7 - Process bus module

7.6 SV STREAM CONFIGURATION

The UR platform can subscribe up to eight sampled value (SV) streams. Up to six banks and up to six sources can
be used for protection. Reception of a sampled value (RxSV) can be enabled in the IEC 61850-9-2LE or IEC
61869-9/13 format.
These settings are available in the EnerVista software and can also be configured in the software using a CID file.
The path is Settings > Process Bus Module > SV Stream Config. If a message displays that the data cannot be
opened, it can mean that access timed out. In this case, try again.

Figure 191: Example of sampled values configuration

The configuration window is explained as follows:

● The four areas of the window (Common Setting, RxSV Streams, Advanced Config, AC Banks, and Sources)
collapse and expand by clicking their buttons
● A column collapses and expands by clicking its heading
● The Show Enabled button toggles active/configured content
● The Show Custom Layout button toggles changes made to formatting, such as column width. Such
changes can be made with or without the button active, and they are retained when the panel is closed.
● There are up to eight RxSV, eight AC Bank, and six Source columns. A B30 can have up to 24 RxSV, 30 AC
Bank (24 CT and six VT), and 30 Source columns.
● With IEC 61869-9, the Advanced Config fields populate and are read-only when importing a file
● Rules are enforced and the configuration cannot be saved until the rules are followed. For example, Neutral
Origin 1 and Neutral Origin 2 cannot be mapped to the same SV stream. See the troubleshooting section that
follows.
● The window is configured based on the separate areas and not based on columns. For example, stream
RxSV1 is configured in the SV Messages area of the window, not the first column in the entire window. Or for
example, Source1 in the first column can be configured to use AC Bank B2 in the second column.
● The following example shows that Source1 at the bottom of the window is set to map to AC Bank B2, which is
mapped to the first stream (RxSV1) and its available VT1 phase voltage and VT2 neutral voltage.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 297
Chapter 7 - Process bus module

Figure 192: Understanding SV configuration

● The UR allows switching AC banks (essentially streams) from the main measuring MU to the alternate
measuring MU. Once an operand assigned to the SWITCH ALT CT/VT setting is logical 1, the input data to
this source is switched from the banks assigned to PHASE CT/GROUND CT to the banks assigned to ALT
PHASE CT/ALT GROUND CT settings for current transformers. This is similar for voltage transformers.
● Banks assigned to the same function for the main and alternate input data have to have the same CT and VT
nominals and connections, otherwise a warning is generated and switching functionality is prohibited. For
example, banks assigned to the PHASE CT and ALT PHASE CT have to have same primary and secondary
CT values.
● During switching from the main CT/VT input data to alternate input data and vice versa, all relay functions are
blocked for two power cycles and metering data does not update
● See the Source Switching section under SETTINGS > SYSTEM SETUP > SIGNAL SOURCES in this
manual for application examples of AC bank switching

N60-1601-0125-861-1 298
Chapter 7 - Process bus module

An example of the configuration process is as follows:

1. Configure SV streams by importing an MU CID file. This populates the SV Messages area of the window.
2. Configure the Sources fields.
3. Map the AC Bank fields to the RxSV Stream fields.
4. Troubleshoot using the messages displayed during configuration and/or upon save so that the rules are
followed. Saving frequently during configuration helps to deal with issues early.
5. Restart the relay for the changes to take effect.
The table outlines mapping examples using CT channels. VT channels are similar.
Scenario AC Bank configuration Advanced Config configuration

No CT signal in the SV stream --- ---

One neutral Neutral Origin 1 = RxSV1-CT1/NTR CT1-N maps to AC1
Two neutrals Neutral Origin 1 = RxSV1-CT1/NTR CT1-N maps to AC1
Neutral Origin 2 = RxSV2-CT2/NTR CT2-N maps to AC2

Three phases Phase Origin 1 = RxSV1-CT1/PHS CT1-A, B, C map to AC1, 2, 3

Three phases followed by one neutral Phase Origin 1 = RxSV1-CT1/PHS CT1-A, B, C, N map to AC1, 2, 3, 4
Neutral Origin 1 = RxSV1-CT1/NTR
One neutral followed by three phases Neutral Origin 1 = RxSV1-CT1/NTR CT1-N maps to AC1
Phase Origin 1 = RxSV1-CT2/PHS CT2-A, B, C map to AC2, 3, 4
One neutral followed by three phases, then followed by Neutral Origin 1 = RxSV1-CT1/NTR CT1-N maps to AC1
one neutral Phase Origin 1 = RxSV1-CT2/PHS CT2-A, B, C, N map to AC2, 3, 4, 5
Neutral Origin 2 = RxSV2-CT2/NTR
Three phases followed by one neutral, then another Phase Origin 1 = RxSV1-CT1/PHS CT1-A, B, C, N map to AC1, 2, 3, 4
neutral Neutral Origin 1 = RxSV1-CT1/NTR CT2-N maps to AC5
Neutral Origin 2 = RxSV2-CT2/NTR
Two three-phases Phase Origin 1 = RxSV1-CT1/PHS CT1-A, B, C map to AC1, 2, 3
Phase Origin 2 = RxSV2-CT2/PHS CT2-A, B, C map to AC4, 5, 6
Three phases followed by one neutral, then another three Phase Origin 1 = RxSV1-CT1/PHS CT1-A, B, C, N map to AC1, 2, 3, 4
phases Neutral Origin 1 = RxSV1-CT1/NTR CT2-A, B, C map to AC5, 6, 7
Phase Origin 2 = RxSV2-CT2/PHS
Three phases followed by another three phases, then one Phase Origin 1 = RxSV1-CT1/PHS CT1-A, B, C map to AC1, 2, 3
neutral Phase Origin 2 = RxSV2-CT2/PHS CT2-A, B, C, N map to AC4, 5, 6, 7
Neutral Origin 2 = RxSV2-CT2/NTR
Three phases, one neutral, then another three phases Phase Origin 1 = RxSV1-CT1/PHS CT1-A, B, C, N map to AC1, 2, 3, 4
and one neutral. Neutral Origin 1 = RxSV1-CT1/NTR CT2-A, B, C, N map to AC5, 6, 7, 8
See the following figure. Phase Origin 2 = RxSV2-CT2/PHS
Neutral Origin 2 = RxSV2-CT2/NTR

N60-1601-0125-861-1 299
Chapter 7 - Process bus module

Figure 193: Example three phases, one neutral, then three phases and one neutral

N60-1601-0125-861-1 300
Chapter 7 - Process bus module

7.6.1 SV STREAM LOGIC

❇❈❉❊ ❋●❉❍■❏❑
✠✯✾❃ ❀✬✤✺★✝✝✳✥✰ ◆✦✦

❇❈❉❊ ❋●❉❍■❏❑
✧▲✪✫▼ ✠★✯✭✾ ✖✯✮ ◆✦✦

❇❈❉❊ ❋●❉❍■❏❑
✁✂✂✄☎✆
✧▲✪✫▼ ✪✳✮✹✳✔ ◆✦✦
✪✫ ✠★✯✭✾ ✖✯✭✬✮❆
✖✺✺★✻✔ ✪✳✮ ✪✫
❇❈❉❊ ❋●❉❍■❏❑
✪✮✻✪✾✥✺♣ ✗♣★✺❁❆
✧▲✪✫▼ ✪✾✥✗♣❁ ◆→
✐★✝✔ ✕✤❃★ r❅✥✺✔✳✤✥
➅➉⑥❻ ⑥⑦➃⑧➉ ❷❸
s❅✭✯✳✔✾ ✗♣★✺❁
➊⑦➉⑧❿❻➊
◆✧ ❇❈❉❊ ❋●❉❍■❏❑
❃✔✧▲ ❄ ✱②✮✝③
✠✯✾❃ ❀✬✤✺★✝✝✳✥✰ ◆✥

✲✿❀✕ ✗✯✤✺❁ ❂ ★✝✔✳✮✭✔★❃ ❇❈❉❊ ❋●❉❍■❏❑

✪✭✮✻✯✳✥✰ ✔✳✮★✿✵ ❄ ✪✫ ✠★✯✭✾ ✉ ✝✭✮✻ ✧▲✪✫▼ ✠★✯✭✾ ✖✯✮ ◆✥
✭✯✭✬✮ ❃❅✬✭✔✳✤✥ ✱✈✇ ✺✾✺ ✌❲❡❲❙✒❲➣✒❨ ✎✍✒❫ ❙✍ ↔↕✘➙↔➛✘✓
✌❲❡❲❙✒❲➣✒❨ ✎✍✒❫ ❙✍ ↔↕✘➙↔➛✘✓
❇❈❉❊ ❋●❉❍■❏❑
✪✳✮ ❤✳✔ ✼✼ ✐✧❥❦ ❧❧ ♠✖✺✺★✻✔
✉ ✝✭✮✻ ✧▲✪✫▼ ✪✳✮✹✳✔ ◆✥
✪✳✮ ♥◆◆✪❦❧✪✫♦ ✼✼ ❦✥✭❤✯★❃
✱✈✇ ✺✾✺
✪✫▼ ✐✳✮★ ✪✾✥✺ ✝✤❅✬✺★ ❇❈❉❊ ❋●❉❍■❏❑
✁✂✂✄☎✆ ❃✤★✝✥q✔ ✮✭✔✺♣ ✪✮✻✪✾✥✺♣ ✉ ✝✭✮✻ ✧▲✪✫▼ ✪✾✥✗♣❁ r✭✳✯
✗♣★✺❁ ✱✈✇ ✺✾✺
✝✞✟✠
✡☛☛☛☛☞ ✌✍✎✏ ✍✑✒✒✓ ❇❈❉❊ ❋●❉❍■❏❑
✖✥✭✯✤✰▼✴✶✴✞✭✯✳❃✳✔✾ ✼✼ ✟✥✞✭✯✳❃ ✉ ✝✭✮✻
✱✈✇ ✺✾✺ ✧▲✪✫▼ s❅✭✯✗♣❁ ◆→
✁✂✂✄☎✆
✖✥✭✯✤✰▼ ✶✴✞✭✯✳❃✳✔✾ ✼✼ ✶❅★✝✔✴
✠✝✔ ✕✖✗ ❧❧ s❅✭✯✳✔✾ ✗♣★✺❁ ✼ ✧★t★✺✔ ✉ ✝✭✮✻ ❇❈❉❊ ❋●❉❍■❏❑
◆✧
s❅★✝✔✴ ✱✈✇ ✺✾✺
✘✙✚✘✛✚✛✜✚✘✢✚✣✣✚✣✣ ✧▲✪✫▼ s❅✭✯✗♣❁ r✭✳✯
✼ ✖✥✭✯✤✰▼ ✶✴✔★✝✔ ✼✼ ✝★✔ ❧❧
✐★✝✔ ✕✤❃★ r❅✥✺✔✳✤✥ ✼✼ ✉ ✝✭✮✻
✁✂✂✄☎✆ ❇❈❉❊ ❋●❉❍■❏❑
✠✳✝✭❤✯★❃ ✱✈✇ ✺✾✺
✗✤✥✦✧★✞ ✧▲✪✫▼ ❢✤✝✔ ◆✦✦
✽✤ ✦✬✭✮★ ✬★✺★✳✞★❃ ✦✤✬
✡✩☞ ✔✳✮★❄ ✲✪✫ ✠★✯✭✾ ✭✯✭✬✮ ② ✺✾✺
✼ ✖✽✠ ❃❅✬✭✔✳✤✥①✱✴②❀❀✵ ❇❈❉❊ ❋●❉❍■❏❑
② ✺✾✺
✧▲✪✫▼ ❢✤✝✔ ◆✥
✁✂✂✄☎✆ SV# SynchSrcID doesn’t
4 samp
match Reference GmID 1/8 cyc
✪✫ ✪✔✬★✭✮ ❇❈❉❊ ❋●❉❍■❏❑
✼ ◆✧ ✧▲✪✫▼ ◆✦✦
✝✞✟✠
✠✝✔ ✕✖✗
✗✤✥✦✧★✞
✪✳✮ ✹✳✔ ❇❈❉❊ ❋●❉❍■❏❑
✪✮✻✗✥✔ ✧▲✪✫▼ ◆✥
✪✮✻✪✾✥✺
❖P◗
✖✥✭✯✤✰✱ ✲✳✥✝✔✕✭✰✴✳✵ ✌❘✒❙❚✍ ❯❱❲❳❨❩ ✑❩❙✍❚
✏❙❳❨❩✏❲❳❬✓ ❭ ✪❅✺✺★✝✝ ✼ ❣ ❇❈❉❊ ❋●❉❍■❏❑
✖✥✭✯✤✰✱ ✲✶✵
❪✑❲✒❙✏❫ ✛❴❨❵❛ ❭ ◆✧
✴✴✴ ❜❙❳❝❙✏ ✛❴❨❵❛ ❭ ✪✫▼ ❀✬✤✺★✝✝✳✥✰ r✭✳✯
❘❞❡❲✍❵❨❞ ❖❙❩❩ r✭✳✯ ✼ ✱
✷✴ ④ ⑤⑥⑦⑧⑨ ⑩❶❷❸❹ ❷❺❻❼❺⑦ ❽❾ ❿❾➀
❜❲❳❬✒❨ ❘✒❚✎❱❙✏❴❳
✖✥✭✯✤✰✱✸ ✲✳✥✝✔✕✭✰✴✳✵ ⑩❶❷❸❹ ❷➁❾➂➃➄ ➅❿❺➆ ❿❾➀ ⑩❶❷❸❹ ❇❈❉❊ ❋●❉❍■❏❑
✖✥✭✯✤✰✱✸ ✲✶✵ ➇➈❿➆➂➃➄ ➅❿❺➆ ➉⑧➊⑧⑦ ➋❺➌⑧➌ ➀➉⑥➍ ⑥➈⑦➎
✪✫▼ ❀✬✤✺★✝✝✳✥✰ ◆→
➏➃⑧❾ ⑩❶❷❸❹ ➐⑥➊⑦ ❽❾ ⑥➍⑧➉❿❾➀ ❺➊
❿➊➊⑧➉⑦⑧➀ ➋❾⑥ ➑➉❿❻⑧ ➉⑧➒⑧❺➓⑧➀ ➑⑥➉ ➔
➒➁➒➆⑧➊➎

Flex Operand
❹⑨ ➀⑦⑩❶ ➉⑧➍➉⑧➊⑧❾⑦➊ ⑦➃⑧ ⑦❺❻⑧ ⑧➆❿➍➊⑧➀ ➊❺❾➒⑧ ⑦➃⑧ RxSV# GmIdChk Fail
➆❿➊⑦ ➑➉❿❻⑧ ➏❿➊ ➉⑧➒⑧❺➓⑧➀ ➜➁ ⑦➃⑧ ➉⑧➆❿➁➌

Flex Operand
RxSV# GmIdChk OK

Figure 194: SV stream logic diagram

SV streams are accepted based on the following settings that need to match the MU:
● SmpSynch Check — Time synchronization check as outlined earlier in the General section
● Quality Check — Outlined earlier
● svID — Multicast Sampled Value Identification of a stream
● Dst MAC — Destination Media Access Control address in the header of the SV message
● ConfRev — When the configuration revision is non-zero, the UR accepts the frame when it matches its
configured value
The relay decodes an SV stream when the DstMAC attribute of the injected SV stream matches any of the
configured SV stream subscriptions.
Each qualified SV stream (that is, with matching svID, Dst MAC, and ConfRev) that is mapped to any of the AC
Banks is checked for the SV delay, matching Sim bit, time synchronization source, and quality checks. When four
samples in 1/8th of power cycle duration fail any of these checks, a corresponding FlexLogic operand is asserted,
with a drop-out timer of one protection pass. The drop-out timer is retriggered each time that the check fails.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 301
Chapter 7 - Process bus module

The RxSV# Lost FlexLogic operand is set when consecutive 160 samples (two cycles) are lost following the
assertion of SV DELAY ALARM. The time accuracy for the assertion of this operand can be up to two protection
passes.
The RxSV# Off FlexLogic operand is set when the "Miss Sample Algorithm" fails (for example, due to temporary
loss of stream or stream rejected due to any condition check failure) or the stream is lost, with a drop-out time of 17
protection passes. Every "Miss Sample Algorithm" fail condition for that RxSV# stream retriggers the drop-out timer
for the RxSV# Off operand.

7.6.2 MESSAGE TROUBLESHOOTING

Examples for messages displayed are as follows:
● The SvID attribute of RxSV1 is empty — Type a name for the stream in the svID field
● The number of channels being selected for CT2-N...exceed the total allowable 7 CT channels — Set the
CT2-N field to None, or increase the CT Channels field to 8
● The number of channels being selected for CT inputs...exceeds the total allowable 4 CT channels — The CT
Channels field is set at 4 and there are entries in the CT2-A/B/C/N fields. Set the latter fields to None or
increase the number of channels.
● The selected ’RxSV3’ stream is disabled. Configure stream before assigning to AC Bank Phase Origin —
Enable the RxSV3 stream in its SV Stream field
● The AC Bank 2 assigned to Source 1 is not configured — B2 is set in a Source1 field at the bottom of the
window. In the AC BANKS area of the window, go to the B2 column, and set one of the fields.
● The AC Bank 2 is a Voltage channel and is assigned to Phase CT of Source 1 — In the Source area of the
window, change the B2 assignment from Phase CT to VT
● The AC Bank x assigned...is not configured.., — Configure the AC Banks section in the software window
before setting the field
● The CT channels set of the selected ’RxSV1-CT1’ are not configured — In the Advanced Config section, set
the CT fields

7.6.3 SV QUALITY PROCESSING

● Any degradation in the measurement or sampled value data of the merging unit inhibits the protection
functions of the IED. IEC 61850 assigns quality attributes to each sampled value channel, to identify the data
validity. The UR Process Bus Module interface uses the quality flags of subscribed analog channels to enable
or inhibit the protection functions
● Quality is checked per channel in an ASDU/frame. For example, if A-phase current has invalid quality, but
other current channels have good quality, the frames with good quality are still accepted and values are
displayed in the metering. However, if any channel in the AC Bank has invalid quality, protection functions
using this AC bank are blocked until all four channels have good quality.
● For protection functions to work correctly, q.validity needs to be good. Samples with invalid quality can result
in unacceptable behavior from the protection functions. An SV analog quantity with q.validity = invalid is
ignored.
● When “Quality Check” is set to 'Accept questionable' data, the data with q.validity = questionable is valid.
When “Quality Check” is set to 'Reject questionable' data, the data with q.validity = questionable is ignored.
● When the relay is in-service, or test function is Disabled, the data with q.test set to TRUE is processed as
invalid
● When the relay test function is forced or isolated, the data with q.test set to TRUE and q.test set to FALSE is
valid.
● If any channel value within a sampled value stream is rejected due to a quality check, the device sets a
FlexLogic operand “RxSV# QualChk Fail” for the duration of the quality check failure.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 302
Chapter 7 - Process bus module

7.6.4 SV SIMULATION PROCESSING

When received SV frames have Sim Bit TRUE, the frame is ignored unless the value of @Master/LPHD1.Sim.stVal
is true (@Master/LPHD1.Sim.stVal is true when Settings > Simulation > Subscribe to Simulated Values >
Simulation Mode is enabled).
When @Master/LPHD1.Sim.stVal is TRUE...
● Once subscribed SV messages with simulation bit TRUE are accepted, subscribed SV messages with
simulation bit FALSE are ignored and the received SV messages with the simulation bit TRUE are used in
place of the actual SV messages until @Master/LPHD1.Sim.stVal is set to FALSE
● When a SV frame is received with simulation bit TRUE, the FlexLogic operand for the corresponding stream
is set as RxSV# SimBit On. After the latest change in simulation bit as recorded by the "Latest Sim Bit
Change" time stamp, the relay takes 4 to 8 msec to process and assert the RxSV# SimBit On FlexLogic
operand.
● If SV messages with simulation bit TRUE are not received, the RxSv# continues to use the actual SV frames
● When the value of @Master/LPHD1.Sim.stVal changes from TRUE to FALSE
○ Subscribed SV messages with simulation bit TRUE are ignored immediately after this change
○ Only subscribed SV messages with simulation bit FALSE are accepted

7.6.5 SV STREAM SETTINGS

The following settings are available.

RxSV Format
Range: IEC 61850-9-2LE r2-1, IEC 61869-9 ed1.0
Default: IEC 61850-9-2LE r2-1
This setting selects the SV frame format, or protocol.
When set to IEC 61850-9-2LE r2-1, the relay assumes that the received SV frame references datasets that
comply with IEC 61850-9-2LE, Table 6: Dataset (PhsMeas1). The IED must be configured with a system
frequency of 50 or 60 Hz for correct operation.
When set to IEC 61869-9 ed1.0, the relay assumes that the dataset rules comply with IEC 61869-9 ed1.0
and that the number of Application-layer Service Data Units (ASDUs) are user-configurable.

Note:
When a file using a single SV stream (either IEC 61850-9-2LE r2-1 or IEC 61869-9 ed1.0) is converted from firmware version
8.2x and below to firmware versions 8.3x and above, the conversion will complete with no errors and the RxSV Format setting
will have the same value as the original file. If there is a mix of SV streams in the original file, then the user will be notified of
this error and all configured SV streams will be set to the SV Stream default; “Disabled”. The RxSV Format setting will also
default to “IEC 61850-9-2LE r2-1”

SV Stream
● Range: Disabled, Enabled
● Default: Disabled
This setting enables an SV stream. When disabled, all other RxSV settings are not editable and set to default.

svID
● Range: 1 up to 129 Visible String characters
● Default: empty string

N60-1601-0125-861-1 303
Chapter 7 - Process bus module

svID refers to the name of the sampled value packet. The svID field of incoming SV messages must exactly match
this value for the message to be accepted as a valid RxSV# message. The svID field of the sampled value frame
must be unique within the system/substation.

Dst MAC
● Range: any valid multicast MAC (12-digit hexadecimal number)
● Default: 01-0C-CD-04-00-00
Only received SV messages having a destination Media Access Control (MAC) address equal to this value are
accepted as valid RxSV# messages. Each address must be unique. The destination MAC increases the overall
performance of multicast message reception by filtering only the configured messages for processing. For a
received SV message, the Dst MAC is validated if it matches with any of the configured RxSV# Dst MAC. If
validation is successful, the message is forwarded for further checks. There is no explicit check for the configured
Dst MAC versus the SvID for a received SV message.

ConfRev
● Range: 0 to 2147483647 in steps of 1
● Default: 0
ConfRev refers to configuration revision, which is a count of configuration changes in the SV control block. If the
value entered here is non-zero, the ConfRev field of incoming SV messages must match this value for the message
to be accepted as a valid RxSV# message. If the setting is zero, RxSV# does not check the value received in the
ConfRev field.

Force MU Out of Service

● Range: FlexLogic operand
● Default: Off
This setting is intended specifically for forcing a faulty Merging Unit (MU) out of service in applications where a
circuit can be energized from more than one side, such as breaker and a half application, and the redundancy at
MU level is not available. For such application current from both sides are summed up using UR source mechanism
and if one MU fails, it will block all protection functions from using this source.

✍☛✟
✌✟
☛☞✠✠
☛✡
✠✟
✞✝✆

✁✂ ✎✏✑✒✓ ✎✏✑✒✔ ✁✄
✕✖✗ ✕✘ ✑✙✚✛✜✢✙
✁☎
✣✤✥✣✦✧★✩✪✫✬✭
Figure 195: Forcing MU1 out of service for a Breaker-and-a-half configuration

N60-1601-0125-861-1 304
Chapter 7 - Process bus module

For example, in the above figure it is possible to open Breaker1 and still keep the system energized through
Breaker 2. The setting FORCE MU OUT OF SERVICE allows MU1to be taken out of service while keeping the
protection and control elements operational by using the RxSV stream from MU2 only. If redundancy is available at
MU level, then the protection can be kept operational without using setting FORCE MU OUT OF SERVICE, through
the Cross-checking functionality. Please refer to the description of settings CROSS-CHECKING, PHASE ORIGIN 1,
2 and NEUTRAL ORIGIN 1, 2 for more details.
To put an MU out of service, the corresponding breaker has to be opened before asserting the FlexLogic selected in
the setting FORCE MU OUT OF SERVICE to the ON state. The MU can now be disconnected for troubleshooting
purposes. The current channels from the affected MU will be treated as online with sampled current values forced to
ZEROs. The protection using respective source remains operational based on the current values sent by the other
MU which is located on the closed breaker side.
Note that:
● Keeping RxSV online (with current substituted as ZEROs) is applicable to current channels only. The status
of voltage channels will become Offline, and the protection elements will get blocked according to the setting
SV TRBL PRT BLOCK.
● The FlexLogic operands on the SV Config logic show the actual state of the affected the RxSV stream (i.e.,
RxSV# Off/On), irrespective of setting FORCE MU OUT OF SERVICE being Off or On.
You must ensure that the primary circuit to which the affected MU is connected remains de-energized for the entire
duration of forcing MU out of service, otherwise the protection elements will mal-operate. The circuit should be de-
energized before changing the setting FORCE MU OUT OF SERVICE to On. The circuit should be energized only
after the setting FORCE MU OUT OF SERVICE is set to Off.
SV stream processing FlexLogic operands must not be used to automate FORCE MU OUT OF SERVICE. We
strongly recommend that FORCE MU OUT OF SERVICE is manually controlled (for example, through a
pushbutton, contact input, virtual input, or GOOSE).
The setting FORCE MU OUT OF SERVICE is intended for applications where a breaker can be opened, and the
corresponding MU can be taken out of service while the circuit is energized through another breaker such as in
breaker-and-a-half application. For any other application, the use of this setting should be carefully evaluated.
We do not recommend using the setting FORCE MU OUT OF SERVICE together with the cross-checking function.

Stream Status
This is an LED status indicator for the reception of an SV stream (RxSV#). A green LED reflects the RxSV# On
FlexLogic operand, meaning that the SV stream is online. A red LED reflects the RxSV# Off FlexLogic operand,
meaning that the SV stream is offline. When the EnerVista UR Setup software is not online or the stream is
disabled, the LED is grayed-out with Not Available, or “-NA-” status.

Advanced Configuration
Click the button to display or hide the fields.
These are settings to import an MU CID file and/or support IEC 61869-9 based SV streams, as per Table 902 on
Standard sample rates. IEC 61869-9 allows flexibility on numbers of current and voltage channels. It can be in one
of these sequences: A, B, C, N or A, AB, B, BC, C, CA, N. The UR supports up to eight CT channels and up to eight
VT channels and one or two ASDUs for protection applications. The following settings are active when the SV
Stream field is set to IEC 61869-9, and they also depend on the MU Variant Code.

MU SCL Import
Use this feature to configure SV streams by importing an MU CID file. The setting file comparison with IEC
61869-9-2LE configuration is not available. The IEC 61850 Merge feature with IEC 61869-9-2LE is not available.
Upon clicking the Import button and selecting a .cid file, a window appears from which to select the stream to
import.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 305
Chapter 7 - Process bus module

Figure 196: Selecting a stream to import from a merging unit CID file

Rules for accepting a CID file include:

● The same remote channel cannot be mapped to more than one AC bank channel
● An AC bank channel cannot be mapped to more than one remote channel
● For each AC bank, there are three phase inputs from the same SV control block and all three inputs are
configured
● Phase 1 and Phase 2 inputs are not from the same SV control block
● Phase 1 and Phase 2 aux inputs are not from the same SV control block
● A configured Phase consumes three analog channels and Aux consumes one analog channel, with a
maximum of 24 channels

SvCBRef
● Range: 0 up to 129 alphanumeric, underscore, slash, and period characters, beginning with an alpha
character
● Default: empty string
This field is read-only. When imported, the MU SCL file populates this field. The value is an ObjectReference to the
publishing control block in the format:
● <LDName>/LLN0.<SvCBName>
where <LDName> is the function-related name, if any, of the logical device containing the publishing control block,
otherwise the product-related name of that logical device, and <SvCBName> is the name of the publishing control
block.
When RxSV# is configured manually, the field is empty.

CT Channels
● Range: 0 to 8
● Default: 4
This setting specifies the number of CT channels available in the subscribed RxSV# message from the publisher
MU. The CT-1 fields reflect the number selected here. The number of current quantities matches the number
specified by the Variant Code of the MU.
Typically, a CT channel includes four current channels (three phase-ground currents and one ground/neutral/earth
current). A current channel is the combination of the current sample value attribute (AmpSv.instMag.i) and the
subsequent quality attribute (AmpSv.q).
If CT Channels is 4, CT1-A/B/C/N are supported for the stream.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 306
Chapter 7 - Process bus module

If CT Channels is 8, CT2-A/B/C/N also are supported for the stream.

If CT Channels is 0, no CT channels display for AC input selection.
This setting is read-only and fixed at 4 when an SV Stream is set to IEC 61850-9-2LE.
If a message displays that the number of channels being selected for CT inputs...exceeds the
total allowable 4 CT channels, this means that the CT Channels field is set at 4 and there are entries in
the CT2-A/B/C/N fields. Set the latter fields to None or increase the number of channels.

VT Channels
● Range: 0 to 8
● Default: 4
This setting specifies the number of VT channels in the subscribed RxSV# message from the publisher MU.
Typically, VT channels include four voltage channels (three phase-ground voltages and auxiliary voltage). This
setting specifies the number of voltage channels in the subscribed RxSV# message. The voltage channel is the
combination of voltage sample value attribute (VolSv.instMag.i) and the corresponding quality attribute (VolSv.q).
The VT-1 fields reflect the number selected here. The number of voltage quantities matches the number specified
by the Variant Code of the dataset.
If VT Channels is 4, VT1-A/B/C/N are supported for the stream.
If VT Channels is 8, VT2-A/B/C/ also are supported for the stream.
If VT Channels is 0, no VT channels display for AC input selection.
This setting is read-only and fixed at 4 when an SV Stream is set to IEC 61850-9-2LE.
If a message displays that "the number of channels being selected for CT inputs...exceeds the
total allowable 2 VT , this means that the VT Channels field is set at 2 and there are more than two entries in
the VT1-A/B/C/N fields. The number of configured VT1 fields needs to match the VT Channels field.

ASDUs
● Range: 1, 2
● Default: 1
This setting specifies the number of Application-layer Service Data Units (ASDUs) concatenated in one Application
Protocol Data Unit (APDU) in the subscribed RxSV# message. When concatenating several ASDUs into one frame,
the ASDU with the oldest samples is the first one in the frame. This setting is read-only and set at the default when
an SV Stream is set to IEC 61850-9-2LE.
Recycle power to the relay when changing this setting.

Variant Code
The EnerVista software auto-populates the Variant Code for the RxSV# message based on the settings Sample
Rate, the number of ASDUs, the number of CT Channels, and the number of VT Channels configured.
For example, F4800S2I8U0 describes sampled values with 4800 samples per second, two ASDU (samples) per
message, 8 currents, and no voltages.
As another example, F4800S1I8U4 means sampled values with 4800 samples per second, 1 ASDU per message, 8
CT channels, and 4 VT channels.
This field is read-only as per IEC 61869-9: 2016, Clause-6.903.2.
The number of samples (sample rate) in the variant code is set based on the SETTINGS > SYSTEM SETUP >
POWER SYSTEM > NOMINAL FREQUENCY setting. This value displays 4000 Hz for 50 Hz nominal frequency.
This value displays 4800 Hz for 60 Hz nominal frequency or any other nominal frequency except 50 Hz. IEC
61869-9 suggests the 4800 Hz sample rate for general measuring and protective applications, regardless of the
power system frequency.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 307
Chapter 7 - Process bus module

CT1-A/B/C
● Range: None, AC1 to AC16
● Default: AC1/AC2/AC3
This setting specifies the sequence of Analog Channel (per phase) that is mapped to the CT-1 of the corresponding
stream. An origin to CT Phase input defines the physical measurement input to the CT bank by mapping specific
AC inputs from that merging unit (or SV message).
The fields are active when the SV Stream field is set to IEC 61869-9. The CT1 phases are available if the number
of CT Channels is 4 or below. CT2 is added if CT Channels is 5 or higher.
The fields are set to the defaults and are read-only when the SV Stream field is set to IEC 61850-9-2LE.

CT1- N
● Range: None, AC1 to AC16
● Default: AC4
This setting specifies the Analog Channel that is mapped to the CT ground/neutral input. An origin to CT1-N input
defines the physical measurement input to the CT bank by mapping specific AC inputs from that MU (or SV
message). If the MU does not publish any CT1-N inputs, configure the setting as None.
In the EnerVista software, the CT Aux input setting only populates the current channels of that RxSV#.
This CT Aux input setting is active when the SV Stream field is set to IEC 61869-9.
This CT Aux input setting is set to AC4 and is read-only when the SV Stream is set to IEC 61850-9-2LE.

VT1-A/B/C
● Range: None, AC1 to AC16
● Default: AC5/AC6/AC7
This setting specifies the Analog Channel (per phase) that is mapped to the VT1- phase inputs. An origin to VT
Phase input defines the physical measurement input to the VT bank by mapping specific AC inputs from that MU (or
SV message). If the MU does not publish any VT channels, configure the setting as None.
The VT1 phase fields are active when the SV Stream field is set to IEC 61869-9. The VT1 phases are available if
the number of VT Channels is 4 or below. VT2 is added if VT Channels is 5 or higher.
The fields are set to the defaults and are read-only when the SV Stream field is set to IEC 61850-9-2LE.

VT1-N
● Range: None, AC1 to AC16
● Default: AC8
This setting specifies the Analog Channel that is mapped to the VT Aux/neutral input. An origin to VT input defines
the physical measurement input to the VT bank by mapping specific AC inputs from that MU (or SV message). If the
MU does not publish any VT1-N inputs, configure the setting as None.
In the EnerVista software, the VT Aux input setting only populates the voltage channels of that RxSV#.
The VT1-N input setting is active when the SV Stream field is set to IEC 61869-9.
The VT1-N input setting is set to the default and is read-only when the SV Stream field is set to IEC 61850-9-2LE.

AC BANKS
The UR platform supports up to six AC Banks. They can be CT or VT banks (similar to SETTINGS > SYSTEM
SETUP > AC INPUTS > CURRENT/VOLTAGE BANK). That is, each AC Bank can be configured either as current
or voltage (not both). If configured as current, inapplicable voltage settings (such as VT ratio, VT secondary) are
inactive. Similarly, if a bank is configured as voltage, current settings (such as CT primary, CT secondary) are
inactive. In addition, bank level redundancy (that is, Origin-1 and Origin-2) is supported using crosschecking of each

N60-1601-0125-861-1 308
Chapter 7 - Process bus module

channel signal received from two different SV streams that are connected to the same electrical point on the
primary power system. A maximum 24 channels can be configured to the AC Banks.
Click the button to display or hide the fields.
The following settings are available for each AC bank.
Each Phase Origin setting consumes three phase channels Ia/Va, Ib/Vb, or Ic/Vc, and a Neutral Origin setting
consumes one ground or Aux Channel In/Vn, which means that
● An AC Bank with Phase Origin1 and Neutral Origin1 settings configured consumes four channels
● An AC Bank with both Phase Origin 1 and Phase Origin 2 and both Neutral Origin 1 and Neutral Origin 2
settings configured consumes eight channels
A maximum of 24 channels can be configured to the AC Banks.
For changes in this section, restart the relay, for example using Maintenance > Reboot Relay Command.

Phase Origin 1, 2
● Range: None, RxSV1-CT1/PHS, RxSV1-VT1/PHS to RxSV8-CT1/PHS, RxSV8-VT1/PHS
● Default: None
An origin to an AC bank defines the physical measurement input to the bank by mapping specific AC inputs from a
specific MU to the bank.
The UR Process Bus Module provides for the reliability of AC values for protection, metering, and oscillography by
allowing duplicate origins of AC data. An origin is considered unavailable when set to None. If origin 1 is available,
the relay uses the values from origin 1 for protection, metering, and oscillography. Otherwise if origin 2 is available,
the relay uses the values from origin 2. If both origins are unavailable, then the bank AC values are forced to zero to
prevent ambiguity of measurement.
With crosschecking, the relay can use different origins. See the Crosschecking setting for information regarding
automatic protection blocking possibilities on loss of one or both origins.
The two-phase origins in an AC bank must be of the same type and connected to the same electrical point in the
primary power system. The two origins must be two currents with the same CT settings, or two voltages with the
same VT settings. The current/voltage type of the phase and auxiliary origins must also match on each AC bank. It
is intended that the origin AC inputs measure the same primary quantity with the same ratio. The same ratio and
connection settings are applied to both origins.

Neutral Origin 1, 2
● Range: None, RxSV1-CT1/NTR, RxSV1-VT1/ NTR to RxSV8-CT1/NTR, RxSV8-VT1/ NTR
● Default: None
These settings specify the field units that are the origins of the auxiliary input IN or VN. Duplicate auxiliary origins
are supported in the same way as phase origins.
The two auxiliary origins in an AC bank must be of the same type. The two origins must be two currents with the
same CT secondary setting, or two voltages. The current/voltage type of the phase and auxiliary origins also must
match on each AC bank. It is intended that the origin AC inputs measure the same primary quantity with the same
ratio. The same ratio and connection settings are applied to both origins.

Crosschecking
● Range: None, Depend Origin-1 Pref, Depend Origin-2 Pref
● Default: None
The crosschecking feature allows application-level redundancy by checking between two independent SV streams
from the same electrical connection of the instrument transformers. In addition to the network redundancy provided
by PRP/HSR, the UR Process Bus Module allows the relay to communicate with redundant merging units.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 309
Chapter 7 - Process bus module

When set to None, crosschecking is disabled. Use this on a non-protection-critical AC bank, such as one used for a
synchrocheck voltage. GE strongly recommends setting it to None when redundancy is not supported at the
merging unit level; otherwise the "ACBank# Orig1(2) In Use" operand status is inaccurate.
Origin preference is supported in case of discrepancy in dependability mode. This allows testing (secondary
injection) or replacement of an MU that is configured to non-preferred origin without affecting protection functions
since these functions are using a preferred origin stream when online. As such, dependability with Origin-1
preference allows continued use of Origin-1 in case of discrepancy between both online origin stream sampled
values. Similarly, dependability with Origin-2 preference allows continued use of Origin-2 in case of discrepancy
between both online origin stream sampled values.
The table shows how the Crosschecking setting, the availability of AC bank origins, and discrepancy checks
determine whether protection is blocked. Blocked here means only protection elements. It does not inhibit metering,
actual values, oscillography, or other functions.
When set to Depend Origin-1 Pref, protection is blocked if there is no good signal from both the Origin-1 and
Origin-2 sources. When both the merging unit sources are good, the preference is given always for Origin-1. When
the preferred MU sources fails, the alternate MU source is used for protection and measurement.
When set to Depend Origin-2 Pref, protection is blocked if there is no good signal from both the Origin-1 and
Origin-2 sources. When both the merging unit sources are good, the preference is given always for Origin-2. When
the preferred MU sources fails, the alternate MU source is used for protection and measurement.

Note:
While switching from a preferred to non-preferred channel, the protection functions are delayed for two cycles. While
switching back to a preferred channel, the protection functions are delayed for one cycle.

Crosschecking and protection behavior

Crosschecking Origin-1 RxSV stream Origin-2 RxSV stream Discrepancy check Protection operation
setting status status
None Not relevant Not relevant No check Normal
Depend Origin-1 Pref Not mapped Not mapped No check Normal
Online Online OK / discrepant Normal using Origin-1 stream
Online Offline No check Normal using Origin-1 stream
Offline Online No check Normal using Origin-2 stream
Offline Offline No check Blocked
Depend Origin-2 Pref Not mapped Not mapped No check Normal
Online Online OK / discrepant Normal using Origin-2 stream
Online Offline No check Normal using Origin-1 stream
Offline Online No check Normal using Origin-2 stream
Offline Offline No check Blocked

Origin1 becomes offline and switches to Origin2 for the following reasons:
● When more than three of five frame samples received are invalid or a frame with sequence number is
received after three consecutive missed frames for any channel of origin. The reason for invalid frames can
be any of the following reasons:
○ If one or more AmpSv.q or VolSv.q attribute(s) are invalid from the assigned SV frame channels to the
AC bank origin
○ When “Quality Check” is set to 'Reject questionable' data, the data with q.validity = questionable is
processed as invalid
○ When the relay is in-service or the test function is Disabled, the SV data with q.test set to TRUE is
processed invalid

N60-1601-0125-861-1 310
Chapter 7 - Process bus module

○ When received SV frames with Sim Bit TRUE, the frame is invalid unless the value of @Master/
LPHD1.Sim.stVal is true (that is Settings > Simulation > GOOSE/SV > Accept Sim GOOSE&SV or
Settings > Simulation > Subscribe to Simulated Values > Simulation Mode is set to Enabled)
○ If the value of @Master/LPHD1.Sim.stVal is TRUE, once a subscribed SV messages with simulation bit
TRUE are received, subscribed SV messages with simulation bit FALSE are invalid until @Master/
LPHD1.Sim.stVal is set to FALSE
○ SV streams with “SmpSync” value out of the following specified ranges are rejected:
○ i. When the “SmpSynch Check” is set to “Global” (2), SV streams with “SmpSynch” value set to Global
(2) are accepted
○ ii. When the “SmpSynch Check” is set to “Local” (1), SV streams with “SmpSynch” value set to Global
(2) or Local (1) are accepted
○ iii. When the “SmpSynch Check” is set to “Any” (0 to 254), SV streams with “SmpSynch” value set in
the range of 0 to 254 are accepted. For 7.80 version, the accepted range is 0 to 127.
● SV frames are delayed/not received for more than 1.9 power system cycles
The selected Origin quality will be the quality of the AC Bank.
If both Origins have invalid quality, then the AC Bank data is marked as invalid and does not participate in
protection.

Phase/Ground CT Primary
● Range: 1 to 65000 A insteps of 1
● Default: 1
Enter the rated CT primary current value in Amperes. For 1000:5 and 1000:1 CTs, enter 1000.

Phase/Ground CT Secondary
● Range: 1A, 5A
● Default: 1A
Enter the rated CT secondary current value in Amperes. For correct operation, the CT secondary rating must match
the setting (that must also correspond to the specific CT connections used).

Phase CT Polarity
● Range: Standard, Inverted-3ph, Inverted Ph-A, Inverted Ph-B, Inverted Ph-C
● Default: Standard
If CTs are wired with the correct polarity in all phases, i.e. CT polarity reversal is not required, “Standard” should be
selected. If CT polarity is incorrect in just one phase, then select “Inverted Ph-A (B or C)”; choosing the affected
phase. If CT polarities of all three phases are incorrect, select “Inverted-3Ph” to correct the CT polarities for all three
phases. It should be noted that the oscillography record will capture the CTs current signal as applied to the relay
terminal irrespective of this setting. This ensures correct relay behavior when recorded oscillography is played back
to the relay.

Ground CT Polarity
Range: Standard, Inverted
Default: Standard
If the ground CT is wired with the correct polarity, select “Standard” for this setting. If the Ground CT polarity is
incorrect, then select “Inverted” to correct it. It should be noted that the oscillography record will capture ground CT
current signal as applied to the relay terminal irrespective of this setting. This ensures the correct relay behavior
when recorded oscillography is played back to the relay.
It is important that the settings PHASE CT POLARITY and GROUND CT POLARITY are set to the correct values
before putting the relay into operation. Selecting the wrong value or changing this setting whilst relay is in operation
would result in undesirable operation of the protection and control functions.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 311
Chapter 7 - Process bus module

If you intend to use the crosschecking functionality (redundancy at MU level), then this setting should be used
carefully to ensure that CT Polarity is the same on both MUs on each phase/neutral channel.

SIGNAL SOURCES
Click the button to display or hide the fields. The first six Sources are the platform sources and can accept both
current banks and voltage banks and are associated with AC bank 1 to 6. The first six sources allow current
summation for phase and auxiliary CTs.
Recycle power to the relay when changing a source.

Name
● Range: up to 20 alphanumeric characters
● Default: SRC 1
This setting specifies an alphanumeric name for the source.

Phase CT
● Range: None, B1, B2, B3, B4, B5, B6, B1+B2, ... B1+B2+B3+B4+B5+B6 or B7...B28
● Default: None
This setting selects the phase CTs of an AC bank or the sum of the phase CTs of multiple AC banks to be the phase
current of the source. That is, it select the AC Banks section above in the window.
If you see the message "the AC Bank x assigned...is not configured..," it means that you need to configure the AC
Banks section in the software window before setting this field. The AC Bank selected can match the Origins fields
and Sources, such as a Phase CT set at B1 with Phase Origin 1 RxSV1-CT1/PHS and source SRC1. Another
example is to use Phase CT set at B2 with Phase Origin 1 RxSV2-CT1/PHS and source SRC2.

Ground CT
● Range: None, B1, B2, B3, B4, B5, B6, B1+B2, ... B1+B2+B3+B4+B5+B6 or B7...B28
● Default: None
This setting selects the ground CTs of an AC bank or the sum of the ground CTs of multiple AC banks to be the
ground current of the source. That is, it selects the AC Banks section above in the window.

Phase VT
● Range: None, B1, B2, B3, B4, B5, B6
● Default: None
This setting selects the phase VTs of an AC bank to be the phase voltages of the source.

Alt Phase CT
● Range: None, B1, B2, B3, B4, B5, B6, B1+B2, ... B1+B2+B3+B4+B5+B6 or B7...B28
● Default: None
This setting is for switching between main and alternate sources. It selects the alternate phase CTs of an AC bank
or the sum of the phase CTs of multiple AC banks to be the phase current of the source.

Alt Ground CT
● Range: None, B1, B2, B3, B4, B5, B6, B1+B2, ... B1+B2+B3+B4+B5+B6 or B7...B28
● Default: None
This setting is for switching between main and alternate sources. It selects the ground CTs of an AC bank or the
sum of the ground CTs of multiple AC banks to be the ground current of the source.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 312
Chapter 7 - Process bus module

Switch Alt CT
● Range: FlexLogic operand
● Default: Off
This setting is for switching the alternate source on or off.

Alt Phase VT
● Range: None, B1, B2, B3, B4, B5, B6
● Default: None
This setting is for switching between main and alternate sources. It selects the phase VTs of an AC bank to be the
phase voltages of the source.

Alt Aux VT
● Range: None, B1, B2, B3, B4, B5, B6
● Default: None
This setting is for switching between main and alternate sources. It selects the auxiliary VT input of an AC bank to
be the auxiliary voltage of the source.

Switch Alt VT
● Range: FlexLogic operand
● Default: Off
This setting is for switching the alternate source on or off.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 313
Chapter 7 - Process bus module

7.7 REMOTE RESOURCES CONFIGURATION

When the relay is ordered with a process card module as a part of HardFiber system, an additional Remote
Resources menu tree is available in the EnerVista software to allow configuration of the HardFiber system.

Figure 197: Remote Resources configuration menu

The remote resources settings configure a Product with a Process Bus Module to work with HardFiber Bricks.
Remote resources configuration is only available through the EnerVista software, and is not available through the
Product front panel. A Brick provides eight AC measurements, along with contact inputs, DC analog inputs, and
contact outputs, to be the remote interface to field equipment such as circuit breakers and transformers. The
Product with a Process Bus Module has access to all of the capabilities of up to eight Bricks. Remote resources
settings configure the point-to-point connection between specific fiber optic ports on the Product process card and
specific Brick. The relay is then configured to measure specific currents, voltages and contact inputs from those
Bricks, and to control specific outputs.
The configuration process for remote resources is straightforward and consists of the following steps.
● Configure the field units. This establishes the point-to-point connection between a specific port on the relay
Process Bus Module, and a specific digital core on a specific Brick. This is a necessary first step in
configuring a process bus relay.
● Configure the AC banks. This sets the primary and secondary quantities and connections for currents and
voltages. AC bank configuration also provides a provision for redundant measurements for currents and
voltages, a powerful reliability improvement possible with process bus.
● Configure signal sources. This functionality of the Product has not changed other than the requirement to use
currents and voltages established by AC bank configuration under the remote resources menu.
● Configure field contact inputs, field contact outputs, RTDs, and transducers as required for the application's
functionality. These inputs and outputs are the physical interface to circuit breakers, transformers, and other
equipment. They replace the traditional contact inputs and outputs located at the relay to virtually eliminate
copper wiring.
● Configure shared inputs and outputs as required for the application's functionality. Shared inputs and outputs
are distinct binary channels that provide high-speed protection quality signaling between relays through a
Brick.
For additional information on how to configure a relay with a Process Bus Module, see the HardFiber Process Bus
System Instruction Manual.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 314
 CHAPTER 8

PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT

Chapter 8 - Phasor Measurement Unit

8.1 CHAPTER OVERVIEW

This chapter contains the following sections:

Chapter Overview 316
Synchrophasor implementation 317
Implementation of IEC 61850-90-5 318
Example of protection synchrophasors data set 320
Example of creation of different data sets 321
Example of CFG-2 based configuration 322
Modification of SYNC word 323
Settings 324

N60-1601-0125-861-1 316
Chapter 8 - Phasor Measurement Unit

8.2 SYNCHROPHASOR IMPLEMENTATION

Phasors are used in protection relays. When these phasors are referenced to a common time base, they are
referred to as synchrophasors. A vastly improved method for tracking power system dynamic phenomena for power
system monitoring, protection, operation, and control can be realized when synchrophasors from different locations
within the power system are networked to a central location.
The relay offers PMU features over two communication standards, IEC 61850-90-5 and IEEE C37.118. The figure
shows complete synchrophasor implementation.

Figure 198: Synchrophasor implementation

N60-1601-0125-861-1 317
Chapter 8 - Phasor Measurement Unit

8.3 IMPLEMENTATION OF IEC 61850-90-5

Synchrophasor data is measured and calculated by PMUs. The data is used to assess the condition of the electrical
power network. The IEEE C37.118 standards define the message formats used to transmit synchrophasor data.
Synchrophasor streaming via IEEE C37.118 works well, but there is now a need to have an IEC61850-compliant
communication mechanism. This has led to the development of IEC 61850-90-5. The IEC 61850-90-5 technical
report defines the packet structure for multicast routing of streamed Sampled Value (SV) known as R-SV.
UR firmware versions 7.0 and above provides this facility, which is equivalent in structure and configuration to that
of the existing IEEE C37.118 implementation of firmware version 6.0. That means synchrophasor data at rates up to
60 Hz for metering, and 120 Hz for protection class synchrophasors.
Precise time input to the relay from the international time standard, via either IRIG-B or PTP, is vital for correct
synchrophasor measurement and reporting. For IRIG-B, a DC level shift IRIG-B receiver must be used for the PMU
to output proper synchrophasor values.
Depending on the applied filter, the synchrophasors that are produced by PMUs are classified as either P
(protection) or M (Measurement) class synchrophasors. Synchrophasors available within the UR that have no
filtering applied are classified as NONE, which within the standard is classified as PRES OR UNKNOWN under the
Calculation Method - ClcMth. Each Logical Device PMU supports one MxxMMXU, MxxMSQI, PxxxMMXU,
PxxxMSQI, NxxMMXU, and one NxxMSQI logical node.

Figure 199: Logical nodes supported in each logical device

The following is a summary of LNs that are in each Logical Device (LD2 through LD7):
● PxxxMMXU1 ClcMth = P-Class (Note Vaux is mapped to Vneut of MMXU)
● PxxxMSQI1 ClcMth = P-CLASS
● MxxMMXU1 ClcMth = M-Class (Note Vaux is mapped to Vneut of MMXU)
● MxxMSQI1 ClcMth = M-CLASS
● NxxMMXU1 ClcMth = M-Class (Note Vaux is mapped to Vneut of MMXU)
● NxxMSQI1 ClcMth = M-CLASS
● GGIO1, which contains 16 digital status indication points and 16 analog points. The Analog GGIO values are
selectable from any FlexAnalog value in the UR.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 318
Chapter 8 - Phasor Measurement Unit

The Synchro Logical Nodes in an LD report at the same rate as set in the PMUn Basic Configuration setting. This is
reflected in the instantiation of the Data Object – SmpRate in the msvcb## of LLN0 in the LD1. SmpRate is a Read
Only Integer Status (INS).
When the first PMU from any LD is mapped into an aggregator, the aggregator inherits the Sample Rate (SmpRate)
and IEEE C37.118 Class (P or M) of that PMU. The value of the SmpRate DO in the Report Control Block is set
based on the value of the Sample Rate in the PMU. The Class of the Dataset are mapped into the MSVID of the
Dataset (see text that follows for the overall name of the MSVID). If other PMUs are mapped into the same
aggregator with different Sample Rates or from different classes, then a Self-Test error (DatSetErr) is set and
dataset transmission is blocked.
A setting value — MSVID — is created with a maximum input range of 56 characters (=64 less 6 for the IDCode
less 2 for the Class).
The value of MSVID in the dataset is a concatenation of the aggregator IDCode and the MSVID setting value in the
format: MSVID-AggregatorIDCode-CLASS where CLASS is P, M, or N (for None) – depending on the Class of the
first PMU included in the Aggregator.
Synchrophasor Rectangular Format and Integer data types are NOT supported in IEC 61850-90-5 (only supported
with IEEE C37.118) and not to set — GGIO1 that contains 16 digital status indication points — aggregated as a 16
bit bitstring and 16 analog points. The Analog GGIO values are selectable from any FlexAnalog value in the UR. For
firmware versions 7.0 and later, the description fields for the phasors, analog, and digital channels are populated
with the 16 character name field provided within the Basic Configuration menu. Additionally, the names of the 16
binary points are implemented as numbered descriptions — d1, d2, d3, and so on. The number of descriptions are
equal to the number of bits configured in the 16 bit digital status word.
All bit strings less than or equal to 32 bits in length map into a 32 bit bitstring in an IEC 61850-90-5 dataset. The
Value of the Nominal Frequency of the chassis is instantiated as a DO in LPHD of LD1. The value is named HzNom
and is an Integer Status (INS).
The UR also supports the option to apply no filtering to the synchrophasors. If no filtering is applied (PMU Class =
None), according to the standard, the ClcMth attribute is PRES. The semantic of the ClcMth used is not carried in
the individual DO and so it is recommended that one of letters of the prefix on the instantiated LNs be set to “P” or
“M” accordingly in order to differentiate. For firmware versions 7.0 and later, only FCDA data is supported. The PMU
Implementation by UR Device table earlier indicates the maximum size of each PMU data set for version 7.2 and
later using FCDA data (non-structured data).

N60-1601-0125-861-1 319
Chapter 8 - Phasor Measurement Unit

8.4 EXAMPLE OF PROTECTION SYNCHROPHASORS DATA SET

This example shows the protection synchrophasors data set with a reporting rate of 60 frames per second
(P60MMXU1). This data or list of items, as shown in the following figure, is not available to the UR setup program
but is available to be mapped by the user into a selected aggregator or aggregators dataset. The logical device
name (LDName) of each PMU LD is a 64 character user setting. The IEEE C37.118 STN and IDCode is to be
mapped as a concatenated value in the (d)escription field of LPL CDC of the NamPlt DO in LLN0. The mapping is
implemented as STN-IDCode (text string).
From each PMU, the user selects the phasor information of interest that is mapped into the selected aggregator
datset(s). For version 7.0 and later, only FCDA data is supported.

Figure 200: Data set created from user-selected internal items

N60-1601-0125-861-1 320
Chapter 8 - Phasor Measurement Unit

8.5 EXAMPLE OF CREATION OF DIFFERENT DATA SETS

The aggregators allow the aggregation of phasors from multiple PMUs (with the same reporting rate) into a single
custom data set to optimize bandwidth when streaming.

Figure 201: Example of aggregator data sets

N60-1601-0125-861-1 321
Chapter 8 - Phasor Measurement Unit

8.6 EXAMPLE OF CFG-2 BASED CONFIGURATION

The relay is expected to send the CFG-2 file (IEEE C37.118 config. file) upon request from the upstream
synchrophasor devices without stopping R-SV multicasting, as shown in the following figure. The primary domain
controller (PDC) does not need to use a stop/start data stream command if the UR protocol is set to IEC
61850-90-5 prior to requesting the configuration via CFG-2 (IEEE C37.118 config. file). The CFG-2 request from the
P30 can be on TCP/IP or UDP/IP, however, R-SV data streaming is only UDP multicasts (not TCP).

Figure 202: CFG-2 based configuration solution

N60-1601-0125-861-1 322
Chapter 8 - Phasor Measurement Unit

8.7 MODIFICATION OF SYNC WORD

In the CFG-2 file, all relevant information about the data being streamed is included. However, this file does not
include the fact that it describes a 90-5 dataset or the number of Application Service Data Units (datasets). In order
to communicate this information via the CFG-2 file for a given aggregator, when the aggregator is set to 90-5, the
version number of the CFG-2 file (found in bits 0-3 of the frame SYNC word, which is set presently to 2) is set as
follows:
Value (decimal) Number of ASDUs
11 1
12 2
13 3
14 4

N60-1601-0125-861-1 323
Chapter 8 - Phasor Measurement Unit

8.8 SETTINGS
Setting path: SETTINGS > SYSTEM SETUP > PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT
■ PHASOR MEASUREMENT ■ PHASOR MEASUREMENT
ó
■ UNIT ■ UNIT 1
■ PMU AGGREGATOR 1
ô
■
■ 90–5 R-SV CB 1
ô
■ CONFIGURATION
■ TIME QUALITY
ô
■

The PMU settings menu consists of the following sub-menus. Up to six PMUs are available, depending on UR
model and option choice. Only one is shown here

PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT 1

This submenu invokes the settings for a particular PMU instance.

PMU AGGREGATOR 1
This submenu invokes the Aggregator settings for a particular PMU instance

90–5 R-SV CB 1
This submenu invokes the settings for an IEC 61850 implementation.

8.8.1 PMU INSTANCE SETTINGS

Setting path: SETTINGS > SYSTEM SETUP > PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT > PHASOR MEASUREMENT
UNIT <n>
Up to six PMUs are available, depending on UR model and option choice. Only one is shown here.
■ PHASOR MEASUREMENT ■ PMU 1 BASIC
ó
■ UNIT 1 ■ CONFIGURATION
■ PMU 1
ô
■ CALIBRATION
■ PMU 1
ô
■ TRIGGERING
■ PMU 1
ñ
■ RECORDING

The PMU instance menu consists of the following sub-menus.

PMU 1 BASIC CONFIGURATION

This submenu invokes the basic configuration settings for PMU 1.

PMU 1 CALIBRATION
This submenu invokes the calibration settings for PMU 1.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 324
Chapter 8 - Phasor Measurement Unit

PMU 1 TRIGGERING
This submenu invokes the triggering settings for PMU 1.

PMU 1 RECORDING
This submenu invokes the recording settings for PMU 1.

8.8.1.1 BASIC CONFIGURATION

Setting path: SETTINGS > SYSTEM SETUP > PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT > PHASOR MEASUREMENT
UNIT <n>
Up to six PMUs are available, depending on UR model and option choice. Only one is shown here.
■ PMU 1 BASIC PMU 1
ó Range: Enabled, Disabled
■ CONFIGURATION FUNCTION: Disabled

PMU 1 IDCODE:
ô Range: 1 to 65534 in steps of 1
1

Range: 32-character ASCII string truncated to 16

PMU 1 STN:
ô characters if mapped into C37.118 Default: GE-UR-
GE-UR-PMU
PMU
PMU 1 GLOBAL PMU ID:
ô Range: 16-character ASCII string
GE-UR-PMU-000001
PMU 1 LATITUDE:
ô Range: -90.00000 to 90.00000 in steps of 0.00001°.
0.00000 °
PMU 1 LONGITUDE:
ô Range: -179.99999 to 180.00000 in steps of 0.00001°
0.00000 °
PMU 1 ELEVATION: Range: -9999.999 to 9999.999 in steps of 0.001
ô
0.000 m meters
PMU 1 SIGNAL SOURCE:
ô Range: available signal sources
SRC 1
PMU 1 CLASS:
ô Range: None, M-CLASS, P-CLASS
M-CLASS
PMU 1 FORMAT:
ô Range: Integer, Floating-point
Integer
PMU 1 STYLE:
ô Range: Polar, Rectangular
Polar
PMU 1 RATE: Range: 1, 2, 4, 5, 10, 12, 15,20, 25, 30,50, 60, 100,
ô
10/sec 120
PMU 1 f & df/dt Range: None, 10Hz/s <10Hz, 10Hz/s <20Hz, 20Hz/s
ô
FILTER: None <10Hz, 20Hz/s <20Hz
■ C37.118 PMU 1
ô
■ CONFIGURATION
PMU 1 PHS- 1:
ô Range: available synchrophasor values
Off

PMU 1 PHS- 14:

ô Range: available synchrophasor values
Off
PMU 1 PHS- 1:
ô Range: 16-character ASCII string
NM: GE-UR-PMU-PHS 1

N60-1601-0125-861-1 325
Chapter 8 - Phasor Measurement Unit

PMU 1 PHS- 14:

ô Range: 16-character ASCII string
NM: GE-UR-PMU-PHS 14
PMU 1 A-CH- 1:
Range: available FlexAnalog values
Off

PMU 1 A-CH-8:
ô Range: available FlexAnalog values
Off
PMU 1 A-CH- 1:
ô Range: 16-character ASCII string
NM: AnalogChannel 1

PMU 1 A-CH-8:
ô Range: 16-character ASCII string
NM: AnalogChannel 8
PMU 1 D-CH- 1:
Range: available FlexLogic operands
Off

PMU 1 D-CH-16:
ô Range: available FlexLogic operands
Off
PMU 1 D-CH- 1
ô Range: 16-character ASCII string
NM: Dig Channel 1

PMU 1 D-CH-16
ô Range: 16-character ASCII string
NM: Dig Channel 16
PMU 1 D-CH- 1
ô Range: Off, On
NORMAL STATE: Off

PMU 1 D-CH-16:
ô Range: Off, On
NORMAL STATE: Off
■ 90-5 PMU 1
ñ
■ CONFIGURATION

PMU 1 FUNCTION
This setting enables the LOGICAL Device PMU 1 functionality. Use this setting to permanently enable or disable the
feature.

PMU 1 IDCODE
This setting assigns a numerical ID to the PMU. It corresponds to the IDCODE field of the data, configuration,
header, and command frames of the IEEE C37.118 protocol. The PMU uses this value when sending data,
configuration, and header frames; and it responds to this value when receiving the command frame. This is used
when only data from one PMU is present.

PMU 1 STN
This setting assigns an alphanumeric ID to the PMU station. It corresponds to the STN field of the configuration
frame of the IEEE C37.118 protocol. This value is a 16-character ASCII string as per the IEEE C37.118 standard.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 326
Chapter 8 - Phasor Measurement Unit

PMU 1 SIGNAL SOURCE

This setting specifies one of the available L90 signal sources for processing in the PMU. Any combination of
voltages and currents can be configured as a source. The current channels can be configured as sums of physically
connected currents. This facilitates PMU applications in breaker-and-a-half, ring-bus, and similar arrangements.
The PMU feature calculates voltage phasors for actual voltage (A, B, C, and auxiliary) and current (A, B, C, and
ground) channels of the source, as well as symmetrical components (0, 1, and 2) of both voltages and currents.
When configuring communication and recording features of the PMU, the user can select, from the above superset,
the content to be sent out or recorded. When one source is selected by one PMU, it cannot be selected by another
PMU.

PMU 1 CLASS (Range P, M, None)

This setting selects the synchrophasor class. A reporting rate of 100 or 120 can only be selected for class P
synchrophasors and if the system frequency is 50 or 60 Hz, respectively.

PMU 1 NETWORK REPORTING FORMAT

This setting selects between reporting synchrophasors as 16-bit integer or 32-bit IEEE floating point numbers. This
setting complies with bit-1 of the FORMAT field of the C37.118 configuration frame. Note that this setting applies to
synchrophasors only; the user-selectable FlexAnalog channels are always transmitted as 32-bit integer values.

PMU 1 NETWORK REPORTING STYLE

This setting selects between reporting synchrophasors in rectangular (real and imaginary) or in polar (magnitude
and angle) coordinates. This setting complies with bit-0 of the FORMAT field of the C37.118 configuration frame.

PMU 1 RATE
This setting specifies the reporting rate for the network (Ethernet) port. This value applies to all PMU streams of the
device that are assigned to transmit over this aggregator. For a system frequency of 60 Hz (50 Hz), the L90
generates a reporting mismatch message if the selected rate is not set as 10 Hz, 12 Hz, 15 Hz, 20 Hz, 30 Hz, 60
Hz, or 120 Hz (or 10 Hz, 25 Hz, 50 Hz, or 100 Hz when the system frequency is 50 Hz) when entered via the
keypad or software; and the L90 stops the transmission of reports. Note that 4 Hz is not allowed for an M-class 50
Hz system.

PMU 1 f & df/dt FILTER

This setting allows applying post-filtering to the frequency and rate-of-change of-frequency to avoid reporting
erroneous values, which can possibly happen during fault, switching, and other system disturbances. For example,
choosing 20Hz/s <10Hz setting ensures that if rate-of-change of-frequency between current reporting instance and
previous one exceeds 20Hz/s or frequency deviation from the nominal frequency exceeds 10Hz, then new
frequency and rate-of-change of-frequency value are invalidated. If this happens, the previous valid value of the
frequency is maintained and rate-of-change of-frequency value is forced to 0 at this reporting instance.

PMU 1 PHS-1 to PMU 1 PHS-14

These settings specify synchrophasors to be transmitted from the superset of all synchronized measurements. The
table outlines available synchrophasor values.

Selection Meaning

Va First voltage channel, either Va or Vab

Vb Second voltage channel, either Vb or Vbc
Vc Third voltage channel, either Vc or Vca
Vx Fourth voltage channel
Ia Phase A current, physical channel or summation as per the source settings
Ib Phase B current, physical channel or summation as per the source settings

N60-1601-0125-861-1 327
Chapter 8 - Phasor Measurement Unit

Selection Meaning

Ic Phase C current, physical channel or summation as per the source settings

Ig Fourth current channel, physical or summation as per the source settings
V1 Positive-sequence voltage, referenced to Va
V2 Negative-sequence voltage, referenced to Va
V0 Zero-sequence voltage
I1 Positive-sequence current, referenced to Ia
I2 Negative-sequence current, referenced to Ia
I0 Zero-sequence current

These settings allow for optimizing the frame size and maximizing transmission channel usage, depending on a
given application. Select “Off” to suppress transmission of a given value.

PMU 1 PHS-1 NM to PMU 1 PHS-14 NM

These settings allow for custom naming of the synchrophasor channels. Sixteen-character ASCII strings are
allowed as in the CHNAM field of the configuration frame. These names are typically based on station, bus, or
breaker names.

PMU 1 A-CH-1 to PMU 1 A-CH-16

These settings specify any analog data measured by the relay to be included as a user-selectable analog channel
of the data frame. Up to eight analog channels can be configured to send any FlexAnalog value from the relay.
Examples include frequency, rate of frequency change, active and reactive power, per phase or three-phase power,
power factor, temperature via RTD inputs, and THD. The configured analog values are sampled concurrently with
the synchrophasor instant and sent as 32-bit floating-point values scaled to Engineering units.

PMU 1 A-CH-1 NM to PMU 1 A-CH-16 NM

These settings allow for custom naming of the analog channels. Sixteen-character ASCII strings are allowed as in
the CHNAM field of the configuration frame.

PMU 1 D-CH-1 to PMU 1 D-CH-16

These settings specify any digital flag measured by the relay to be included as a user-selectable digital channel of
the data frame. Up to 16 digital channels can be configured to send any FlexLogic operand from the relay. The
configured digital flags are sampled concurrently with the synchrophasor instant. These values are mapped into a
two-byte integer number, with byte 1 LSB corresponding to the digital channel 1 and byte 2 MSB corresponding to
digital channel 16.

PMU 1 D-CH-1 NM to PMU 1 D-CH-16 NM

These settings allow for custom naming of the digital channels. Sixteen-character ASCII strings are allowed as in
the CHNAM field of the configuration frame.

PMU 1 D-CH-1 NORMAL STATE to PMU 1 D-CH-16 NORMAL STATE

These settings allow for specifying a normal state for each digital channel. These states are transmitted in
configuration frames to the data concentrator.

Submenu for C37.118 configuration

The basic configuration men also contains a submenu for the C37.118 configuration as follows:
Setting path: SETTINGS > SYSTEM SETUP > PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT > PHASOR MEASUREMENT
UNIT > PMU 1 BASIC CONFIGURATION > C37.118 PMU 1 CONFIGURATION

N60-1601-0125-861-1 328
Chapter 8 - Phasor Measurement Unit

■ C37.118 PMU 1 PMU 1 FORMAT:

ó Range: Integer, Floating-point
■ CONFIGURATION Integer
PMU 1 FREQ FORMAT:
ô Range: Integer, Floating-point
Integer
PMU 1 STYLE:
ô Range: Polar, Rectangular
Polar

PMU 1 FORMAT
This setting selects whether synchrophasors are reported as 16-bit integers or 32-bit IEEE floating point numbers.
This setting complies with bit-1 of the FORMAT field of the IEEE C37.118 configuration frame. This setting applies
to synchrophasors only; user-selectable FlexAnalog channels are always transmitted as 16-bit integer values.

PMU 1 FREQ FORMAT

This setting selects between reporting frequency and rate-of-change-of-frequency as 16-bit integer or 32-bit IEEE
floating point numbers. This setting complies with bit 3 of the FORMAT field of the C37.118 configuration frame.

PMU 1 STYLE
This setting selects whether synchrophasors are reported in rectangular (real and imaginary) coordinates or in polar
(magnitude and angle) coordinates. This setting complies with bit-0 of the FORMAT field of the IEEE C37.118
configuration frame.
The basic configuration men also contains a submenu for the IEC61850-90-5 configuration as follows:
Setting path: SETTINGS > SYSTEM SETUP > PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT > PHASOR MEASUREMENT
UNIT > PMU 1 BASIC CONFIGURATION > 90-5 PMU 1 CONFIGURATION
■ 90-5 PMU 1 PMU 1 LDINST:
ó Range: 64 char ASCII text
■ CONFIGURATION PMU1

PMU1 LDINST
This is a user-defined visible string (maximum 64 char ASCII test) to assign Logical Device (LD) Inst for a PMU
logical device.

Note:
With 90-5 PMU, the FORMAT and STYLE are Floating-point and Polar respectively, as specified in the IEC 61850-90-5
technical report.

Note:
As per IEC 61850-6 standard specification, the PMU LD Name is the concatenated combination (to total 64 characters) of IED
Name (specified in IEC 61850 Server Settings) appended with PMU X LDINST string.

8.8.1.2 PMU CALIBRATION

Up to six PMUs are available, depending on UR model and option choice. Only one is shown here.
Setting path: SETTINGS > SYSTEM SETUP > PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT > PHASOR MEASUREMENT
UNIT <n> PMU <n> CALIBRATION
■ PMU 1 PMU 1 VA CALIBRATION
ó Range: –5.00 to 5.00° in steps of 0.05
■ CALIBRATION ANGLE: 0.00°

N60-1601-0125-861-1 329
Chapter 8 - Phasor Measurement Unit

PMU 1 VA CALIBRATION
ô Range: 95.0 to 105.0 in steps of 0.1%
MAG: 100.0%
PMU 1 VB CALIBRATION
ô Range: –5.00 to 5.00° in steps of 0.05
ANGLE: 0.00°
PMU 1 VB CALIBRATION
ô Range: 95.0 to 105.0 in steps of 0.1%
MAG: 100.0%
PMU 1 VC CALIBRATION
ô Range: –5.00 to 5.00° in steps of 0.05
ANGLE: 0.00°
PMU 1 VC CALIBRATION
ô Range: 95.0 to 105.0 in steps of 0.1%
MAG: 100.0%
PMU 1 VX CALIBRATION
ô Range: –5.00 to 5.00° in steps of 0.05
ANGLE: 0.00°
PMU 1 VX CALIBRATION
ô Range: 95.0 to 105.0 in steps of 0.1%
MAG: 100.0%
PMU 1 IA CALIBRATION
ô Range: –5.00 to 5.00° in steps of 0.05
ANGLE: 0.00°
PMU 1 IA CALIBRATION
ô Range: 95.0 to 105.0 in steps of 0.1%
MAG: 100.0%
PMU 1 IB CALIBRATION
ô Range: –5.00 to 5.00° in steps of 0.05
ANGLE: 0.00°
PMU 1 IB CALIBRATION
ô Range: 95.0 to 105.0 in steps of 0.1%
MAG: 100.0%
PMU 1 IC CALIBRATION
ô Range: –5.00 to 5.00° in steps of 0.05
ANGLE: 0.00°
PMU 1 IC CALIBRATION
ô Range: 95.0 to 105.0 in steps of 0.1%
MAG: 100.0%
PMU 1 IG CALIBRATION
ô Range: –5.00 to 5.00° in steps of 0.05
ANGLE: 0.00°
PMU 1 IG CALIBRATION
ô Range: 95.0 to 105.0 in steps of 0.1%
MAG: 100.0%
PMU 1 SEQ VOLT SHIFT
ô Range: –180 to 180° in steps of 30
ANGLE: 0°
PMU 1 SEQ CURR SHIFT
ñ Range: –180 to 180° in steps of 30
ANGLE: 0°

This menu contains user angle and magnitude calibration data for the Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU). This data
is combined with the factory adjustments to shift the phasors for better accuracy.

PMU 1 VA... IG CALIBRATION ANGLE

These settings recognize applications with protection class voltage and current sources, and they allow you to
calibrate each channel (four voltages and four currents) individually to offset errors introduced by VTs, CTs, and
cabling. The setting values are effectively added to the measured angles. Therefore, enter a positive correction
when the secondary signal lags the true signal and a negative value when the secondary signal leads the true
signal.

PMU 1 VA... IG CALIBRATION MAGNITUDE

These settings recognize applications with protection class voltage and current sources, and they allow you to
calibrate each channel (four voltages and four currents) individually to offset errors introduced by VTs, CTs. The
setting values are effectively a multiplier of the measured magnitudes. Therefore, entering a multiplier greater than

N60-1601-0125-861-1 330
Chapter 8 - Phasor Measurement Unit

100% of the secondary signal increases the true signal, and a multiplier less than 100% value of the secondary
signal reduces the true signal.

PMU 1 SEQ VOLT SHIFT ANGLE

This setting allows you to correct positive- and negative-sequence voltages for vector groups of power transformers
located between the PMU voltage point and the reference node. This angle is effectively added to the positive-
sequence voltage angle and subtracted from the negative-sequence voltage angle. Note that:
● When this setting is not “0°”, the phase and sequence voltages do not agree. Unlike sequence voltages, the
phase voltages cannot be corrected in a general case and therefore are reported as measured.
● When receiving synchrophasor data at multiple locations, with possibly different reference nodes, it can be
more beneficial to allow the central locations to perform the compensation of sequence voltages.
● This setting applies to PMU data only. The relay calculates symmetrical voltages independently for protection
and control purposes without applying this correction.
● When connected to line-to-line voltages, the PMU calculates symmetrical voltages with the reference to the
AG voltage and not to the physically connected AB voltage.

PMU 1 SEQ CURR SHIFT ANGLE

This setting allows you to correct positive and negative-sequence currents for vector groups of power transformers
located between the PMU current point and the reference node. The setting has the same meaning for currents as
the PMU 1 SEQ VOLT SHIFT ANGLE setting has for voltages. Normally, you would set the two correcting angles
identically, except in rare applications when the voltage and current measuring points are located at different
windings of a power transformer.

8.8.1.3 PMU TRIGGERING OVERVIEW

Setting path: SETTINGS > SYSTEM SETUP > PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT > PHASOR MEASUREMENT
UNIT 1 > PMU TRIGGERING
■ PMU 1 ■ PMU 1 USER
ó
■ TRIGGERING ■ TRIGGER
■ PMU 1 FREQUENCY
ô
■ TRIGGER
■ PMU 1 VOLTAGE
ô
■ TRIGGER
■ PMU 1 CURRENT
ô
■ TRIGGER
■ PMU 1 POWER
ô
■ TRIGGER
■ PMU 1 df/dt
ñ
■ TRIGGER

Each Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU) contains five triggering mechanisms to facilitate triggering of the associated
PMU recorder, or cross-triggering of other PMUs in the system. They are
● Overfrequency and underfrequency
● Overvoltage and undervoltage
● Overcurrent
● Overpower
● High rate of change of frequency
The pre-configured triggers can be augmented with a user-specified condition built freely using programmable logic
of the relay. The entire triggering logic is refreshed once every two power system cycles. All five triggering functions

N60-1601-0125-861-1 331
Chapter 8 - Phasor Measurement Unit

and the user-definable condition are consolidated (ORed) and connected to the PMU recorder. Each trigger can be
programmed to log its operation into the event recorder and to signal its operation via targets. The five triggers drive
the STAT bits of the data frame to inform the destination of the synchrophasor data regarding the cause of trigger.
The following convention is adopted to drive bits 11, 3, 2, 1, and 0 of the STAT word.
✖✗✘✘✙✚✛
✎✤✒✑ ✥✑☛✦✦✒✑
✜✢✢ ✣ ✄

✧★✗✩★✪✛✙✫ ✪✬✗✭✮✚✯✖ ✧★✗✩★✪✛✙✫ ✪✬✗✭✮✚✯

✌✍✎ ✏ ✰✠✱✲ ✥✠✳✴✴✱✠ ✜✠ ✡☛☞ ✸✹ ✡☛☞ ✏✏ ✌✍✎ ✏ ✥✠✳✴✴✱✠✱✟
✜✠ ✡☛☞ ✄
✌✍✎ ✏ ✠✜✞✜✰ ✥✠✳✴✴✱✠
✌✍✎ ✏ ✵✜✶✥ ✥✠✳✴✴✱✠
✜✠ ✡☛☞ ✏
✌✍✎ ✏ ✞✎✠✠ ✥✠✳✴✴✱✠ ✌✍✎ ✏ ✑✒✓✔✑✕✒✑
✌✍✎ ✏ ✌✜✷✱✠ ✥✠✳✴✴✱✠ ✡☛☞ ✆
✁✂✄✄✄✁☎✆✝✞✟✠

Figure 203: STAT bits logic

The trigger reset (drop-off) timer is available for all five triggering functions (FREQ, ROCOF, VOLT, CURR, POWER)
in individual trigger settings under the TRIGGER DPO TIME setting. This asserts individual trigger operand and
overall PMU x TRIGGERED operand with stat bits 3 and 11 for a fixed interval defined by this setting. If it is required
that PMU x TRIGGERED operand with stat bits 3 and 11 stay longer than the individual reset timer, then use the
PMU x USER TRIGGER setting assigned with appropriate elements and FlexLogic. In short, in case of USER
TRIGGER, the drop-off time needs to be implemented using FlexLogic.

8.8.1.3.1 USER TRIGGERING

Setting path: SETTINGS > SYSTEM SETUP > PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT > PHASOR MEASUREMENT
UNIT 1 > PMU TRIGGERING > PMU 1 USER TRIGGER
■ PMU 1 USER ■ PMU 1 USER TRIGGER
ó Range: FlexLogic operand
■ TRIGGER ■ Off

The user trigger allows you to construct customized triggering from FlexLogic. The entire triggering logic is
refreshed every two power system cycles.

8.8.1.3.2 FREQUENCY TRIGGERING

Setting path: SETTINGS > SYSTEM SETUP > PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT > PHASOR MEASUREMENT
UNIT 1 > PMU TRIGGERING > PMU 1 TRIGGERING > PMU 1 FREQUENCY TRIGGER
■ PMU 1 FREQUENCY PMU 1 FREQ TRIGGER
ó Range: Enabled, Disabled
■ TRIGGER FUNCTION: Disabled
PMU 1 FREQ TRIGGER
ô Range: 20.00 to 70.00 Hz in steps of 0.01
LOW-FREQ: 49.00 Hz
PMU 1 FREQ TRIGGER
ô Range: 20.00 to 70.00 Hz in steps of 0.01
HIGH-FREQ: 61.00 Hz
PMU 1 FREQ TRIGGER
ô Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
PKP TIME: 0.10 s
PMU 1 FREQ TRIGGER
ô Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
DPO TIME: 1.00 s
PMU 1 FREQ TRIG BLK:
ô Range: FlexLogic operand
Off
PMU 1 FREQ TRIGGER
ô Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
TARGET: Self-reset

N60-1601-0125-861-1 332
Chapter 8 - Phasor Measurement Unit

PMU 1 FREQ TRIGGER

ñ Range: Enabled, Disabled
EVENTS: Disabled

The trigger responds to the frequency signal of the Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU) source. The frequency is
calculated from a selection of phase voltages, auxiliary voltage, phase currents, and ground current, depending on
the source configuration. This element requires that the frequency is above the minimum measurable value. If the
frequency is below this value, the trigger drops out.

PMU 1 FREQ TRIGGER FUNCTION

This setting enables or disabled the frequency trigger function.

PMU 1 FREQ TRIGGER LOW-FREQ

This setting specifies the low threshold for the abnormal frequency trigger. The comparator applies a 0.02 Hz
hysteresis.

PMU 1 FREQ TRIGGER HIGH-FREQ

This setting specifies the high threshold for the abnormal frequency trigger. The comparator applies a 0.02 Hz
hysteresis.

PMU 1 FREQ TRIGGER PKP TIME

This setting is used to filter out spurious conditions and avoid unnecessary triggering of the recorder.

PMU 1 FREQ TRIGGER DPO TIME

This setting is used to extend the trigger after the situation returns to normal. This setting is important when using
the recorder in forced mode (recording as long as the triggering condition is asserted).

✷✸✁✹✸✺✆✄✻ ✺✼✁✽✾☎✿
✝✞✟ ✠ ❀✓✢✍ ✍☛✎✏✏☞☛
✝✞✟ ✠ ✒✟☛☛ ✍☛✎✏✏☞☛
✝✞✟ ✠ ✝✓✭☞☛ ✍☛✎✏✏☞☛

✁✂✂✄☎✆ ✝✞✟ ✠ ☛✓✒✓✡ ✍☛✎✏✏☞☛ ✷✸✁✹✸✺✆✄✻ ✺✼✁✽✾☎✿

❂ ✝✞✟ ✠ ✍☛✎✏✏☞☛☞✲
✝✞✟ ✠ ✡☛☞✌ ✍☛✎✏✏☞☛ ❁
✁✂✂✄☎✆
✡✟✑✒✍✎✓✑✔
✝✞✟ ✠ ✟✦☞☛ ✍☛✎✏✏☞☛✔
☞✕✖✗✘✙✚ ✛ ✠
✓✤✤ ✛ ✥
✬
✝✞✟ ✠ ✡☛☞✌ ✍☛✎✏ ✜✢✣✔ ✫
✪
✓✤✤ ✛ ✥
✁✂✂✄☎✆
❃❄ ❅❆❇❆ ❈❉❃❊ ❄❋
✝✞✟ ✠ ✡☛☞✌ ✍☛✎✏✏☞☛ ✢✓✭✮✡☛☞✌✔ ✁✂✂✄☎✆ ✁✂✂✄☎✆ ❃●❍ ■❏❃❏ ❋❑❏▲❍
✁✂✂✄☎✆
✝✞✟ ✠ ✡☛☞✌ ✍☛✎✏✏☞☛ ✯✎✏✯✮✡☛☞✌✔ ✝✞✟ ✠ ✡☛☞✌ ✍☛✎✏✏☞☛ ✝✣✝ ✍✎✞☞✔ ✝✞✟ ✠ ✡☛☞✌ ✍☛✎✏✏☞☛ ✲✝✓ ✍✎✞☞✔
✝✞✟ ✠ ✦✎✏✑✧✢ ✷✸✁✹✸✺✆✄✻ ✺✼✁✽✾☎✿
☛✟✑
✦✓✟☛✒☞✔ ✥✰ ✤ ✰ ✢✓✭✮✡☛☞✌ ✳✵❲✵ ✥
✓☛ ✝✞✟ ✠ ✡☛☞✌ ✍☛✎✏✏☞☛
✡☛☞✌✟☞✑✒★✩ ✤ ✤ ✱ ✯✎✏✯✮✡☛☞✌ ✳✴✵✶
✥
▼◆❖PP▼◗❘❙❚❯❱

Figure 204: Frequency trigger logic

8.8.1.3.3 VOLTAGE TRIGGERING

Setting path: SETTINGS > SYSTEM SETUP > PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT > PHASOR MEASUREMENT
UNIT 1 > PMU TRIGGERING > PMU 1 TRIGGERING > PMU 1 VOLTAGE TRIGGER
■ PMU 1 VOLTAGE PMU 1 VOLT TRIGGER
ó Range: Enabled, Disabled
■ TRIGGER FUNCTION: Disabled
PMU 1 VOLT TRIGGER
ô Range: 0.250 to 1.250 pu in steps of 0.001
LOW-VOLT: 0.800 pu
PMU 1 VOLT TRIGGER
ô Range: 0.750 to 1.750 pu in steps of 0.001
HIGH-VOLT: 1.200 pu

N60-1601-0125-861-1 333
Chapter 8 - Phasor Measurement Unit

PMU 1 VOLT TRIGGER

ô Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
PKP TIME: 0.10 s
PMU 1 VOLT TRIGGER
ô Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
DPO TIME: 1.00 s
PMU 1 VOLT TRIG BLK:
ô Range: FlexLogic operand
Off
PMU 1 VOLT TRIGGER
ô Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
TARGET: Self-reset
PMU 1 VOLT TRIGGER
ñ Range: Enabled, Disabled
EVENTS: Disabled

This element responds to abnormal voltage. Separate thresholds are provided for low and high voltage. In terms of
signaling its operation, the element does not differentiate between the undervoltage and overvoltage events. The
trigger responds to the phase voltage signal of the Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU) source. All voltage channels
(A, B, and C or AB, BC, and CA) are processed independently and can trigger the recorder. A minimum voltage
supervision of 0.1 pu is implemented to prevent pickup on a de-energized circuit, similarly to the undervoltage
protection element.

PMU 1 VOLT TRIGGER FUNCTION

This setting enables or disabled the voltage trigger function.

PMU 1 VOLT TRIGGER LOW-VOLT

This setting specifies the low threshold for the abnormal voltage trigger, in per-unit of the PMU source. 1 pu is a
nominal voltage value defined as the nominal secondary voltage times VT ratio. The comparator applies a 1%
hysteresis.

PMU 1 VOLT TRIGGER HIGH-VOLT

This setting specifies the high threshold for the abnormal voltage trigger, in per-unit of the PMU source. 1 pu is a
nominal voltage value defined as the nominal secondary voltage times VT ratio. The comparator applies a 1%
hysteresis.

PMU 1 VOLT TRIGGER PKP TIME

This setting is used to filter out spurious conditions and avoid unnecessary triggering of the recorder.

PMU 1 VOLT TRIGGER DPO TIME

This setting is used to extend the trigger after the situation returns to normal. This setting is important when using
the recorder in the forced mode (recording as long as the triggering condition is asserted).
✾✿☞❀✿❁✏✍❂ ❁❃☞❄❅✎❆☛
☛☞✌✌✍✎✏☛
✑✒✓ ✔ ✢✙✜❇ ✘✙✚✛✛✜✙
✑✒✓ ✔ ✕✖✗✘ ✘✙✚✛✛✜✙ ✑✒✓ ✔ ✤✓✙✙ ✘✙✚✛✛✜✙
✢✓✣✤✘✚✖✣✥
✑✒✓ ✔ ✑✖✶✜✙ ✘✙✚✛✛✜✙
✜✦✧★✩✪✫ ✬ ✔
✵ ✑✒✓ ✔ ✙✖✤✖✢ ✘✙✚✛✛✜✙ ✾✿☞❀✿❁✏✍❂ ❁❃☞❄❅✎❆
✑✒✓ ✔ ✕✖✗✘ ✘✙✚✛ ✭✗✮✥ ✴ ❉
✳ ❈ ✑✒✓ ✔ ✘✙✚✛✛✜✙✜✹
✖✯✯ ✬ ✰ ☛☞✌✌✍✎✏

☛☞✌✌✍✎✏☛ ✑✒✓ ✔ ✓✱✜✙ ✘✙✚✛✛✜✙✥

☛☞✌✌✍✎✏☛ ✑✒✓ ✔ ✕✖✗✘ ✘✙✚✛✛✜✙ ✗✖✶✷✕✖✗✘✥ ✖✯✯ ✬ ✰

✑✒✓ ✔ ✱✚✛✣✲✗ ✑✒✓ ✔ ✕✖✗✘ ✘✙✚✛✛✜✙ ✸✚✛✸✷✕✖✗✘✥

✱✖✓✙✤✜✥
✙✓✣
✕✘ ✤✖✣✣✜✤✘✚✖✣✥ ✐❥❦❦❧♠♥✐ ☛☞✌✌✍✎✏☛ ▼◆ ❖P◗P ❘❙▼❚ ◆❯
❋✰●✔❍■ ❏ ✕ ❏ ✗✖✶✷✕✖✗✘❑ ✖✙ ▼❱❲ ❳❨▼❨ ❯❩❨❬❲
✶❊✜ ✹✜✗✘✲ ❋✕ ▲ ✸✚✛✸✷✕✖✗✘❑ ❭❪❫ ❴ ❵❛❜❝ ❞❛❡❢❢❜❛ ❭❣❭ ❞❡❪❜❤ ✑✒✓ ✔ ✕✖✗✘ ✘✙✚✛✛✜✙ ✹✑✖ ✘✚✒✜✥
✕✲ ✕✲✭ ❋✰●✔❍■ ❏ ✕ ❏ ✗✖✶✷✕✖✗✘❑ ✖✙ ✾✿☞❀✿❁✏✍❂ ❁❃☞❄❅✎❆
❉ q♦♣♦ r
❋✕ ▲ ✸✚✛✸✷✕✖✗✘❑ ❈
✕✭ ✕✭✤ ✑✒✓ ✔ ✕✖✗✘ ✘✙✚✛✛✜✙
❋✰●✔❍■ ❏ ✕ ❏ ✗✖✶✷✕✖✗✘❑ ✖✙
✕✤ ✕✤✲ ❋✕ ▲ ✸✚✛✸✷✕✖✗✘❑ r ✺✻✼✽
✁✂✄✄☎✆✝✞✟✠✡

Figure 205: Voltage trigger logic

N60-1601-0125-861-1 334
Chapter 8 - Phasor Measurement Unit

8.8.1.3.4 CURRENT TRIGGERING

Setting path: SETTINGS > SYSTEM SETUP > PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT > PHASOR MEASUREMENT
UNIT 1 > PMU TRIGGERING > PMU 1 TRIGGERING > PMU 1 CURRENT TRIGGER
■ PMU 1 CURRENT PMU 1 CURR TRIGGER
ó Range: Enabled, Disabled
■ TRIGGER FUNCTION: Disabled
PMU 1 CURR TRIGGER
ô Range: 0.100 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001
PICKUP: 1.800 pu
PMU 1 CURR TRIGGER
ô Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
PKP TIME: 0.10 s
PMU 1 CURR TRIGGER
ô Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
DPO TIME: 1.00 s
PMU 1 CURR TRIG BLK:
ô Range: FlexLogic operand
Off
PMU 1 CURR TRIGGER
ô Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
TARGET: Self-reset
PMU 1 CURR TRIGGER
ñ Range: Enabled, Disabled
EVENTS: Disabled

This element responds to elevated current. The trigger responds to the phase current signal of the Phasor
Measurement Unit (PMU) source. All current channel (A, B, and C) are processed independently and can trigger the
recorder.

PMU 1 CURR TRIGGER FUNCTION

This setting enables or disabled the current trigger function.

PMU 1 CURR TRIGGER PICKUP

This setting specifies the pickup threshold for the overcurrent trigger, in per unit of the PMU source. A value of 1 pu
is a nominal primary current. The comparator applies a 3% hysteresis.

PMU 1 CURR TRIGGER PKP TIME

This setting is used to filter out spurious conditions and avoid unnecessary triggering of the recorder.

PMU 1 CURR TRIGGER DPO TIME

This setting is used to extend the trigger after the situation returns to normal. This setting is important when using
the recorder in the forced mode (recording as long as the triggering condition is asserted).

8.8.1.3.5 POWER TRIGGERING

Setting path: SETTINGS > SYSTEM SETUP > PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT > PHASOR MEASUREMENT
UNIT 1 > PMU TRIGGERING > PMU 1 TRIGGERING > PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER
■ PMU 1 POWER PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER
ó Range: Enabled, Disabled
■ TRIGGER FUNCTION: Disabled
PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER
ô Range: 0.250 to 3.000 pu in steps of 0.001
ACTIVE: 1.250 pu
PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER
ô Range: 0.250 to 3.000 pu in steps of 0.001
REACTIVE: 1.250 pu
PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER
ô Range: 0.250 to 3.000 pu in steps of 0.001
APPARENT: 1.250 pu

N60-1601-0125-861-1 335
Chapter 8 - Phasor Measurement Unit

PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER

ô Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
PKP TIME: 0.10 s
PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER
ô Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
DPO TIME: 1.00 s
PMU 1 PWR TRIG BLK:
ô Range: FlexLogic operand
Off
PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER
ô Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
TARGET: Self-reset
PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER
ñ Range: Enabled, Disabled
EVENTS: Disabled

This element responds to abnormal power. Separate thresholds are provided for active, reactive, and apparent
powers. In terms of signaling its operation, the element does not differentiate among the three types of power. The
trigger responds to the single-phase and three-phase power signals of the Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU)
source.

PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER FUNCTION

This setting enables or disabled the power trigger function.

PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER ACTIVE

This setting specifies the pickup threshold for the active power of the source. For single-phase power, 1 pu is a
product of 1 pu voltage and 1 pu current, or the product of nominal secondary voltage, the VT ratio and the nominal
primary current. For the three-phase power, 1 pu is three times that for a single-phase power. The comparator
applies a 3% hysteresis.

PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER REACTIVE

This setting specifies the pickup threshold for the reactive power of the source. For single-phase power, 1 pu is a
product of 1 pu voltage and 1 pu current, or the product of nominal secondary voltage, the VT ratio and the nominal
primary current. For the three-phase power, 1 pu is three times that for a single-phase power. The comparator
applies a 3% hysteresis.

PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER APPARENT

This setting specifies the pickup threshold for the apparent power of the source. For single-phase power, 1 pu is a
product of 1 pu voltage and 1 pu current, or the product of nominal secondary voltage, the VT ratio and the nominal
primary current. For the three-phase power, 1 pu is three times that for a single-phase power. The comparator
applies a 3% hysteresis.

PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER PKP TIME

This setting is used to filter out spurious conditions and avoid unnecessary triggering of the recorder.

PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER DPO TIME

This setting is used to extend the trigger after the situation returns to normal. This setting is of particular importance
when using the recorder in the forced mode (recording as long as the triggering condition is asserted).

N60-1601-0125-861-1 336
Chapter 8 - Phasor Measurement Unit

✡☛☞☞✌✍✎✡

✏✑✒ ✓ ✏✔✕✖✗
✘✗✙✚✚✖✗ ✛✒✜✢✘✙✔✜✣ ✺✻☛✼✻✽✎✌✾ ✽✿☛❀❁✍❂✡
✖✤✥✦✧★✩ ✪ ✓ ✏✑✒ ✓ ✛✗✖❃ ✘✗✙✚✚✖✗
✲
✏✑✒ ✓ ✏✕✗ ✘✗✙✚ ✫✬✭✣ ✱ ✏✑✒ ✓ ✴✔✬✘ ✘✗✙✚✚✖✗
✰ ✡☛☞☞✌✍✎✡
✔✮✮ ✪ ✯ ✏✑✒ ✓ ✢✒✗✗ ✘✗✙✚✚✖✗
✏✑✒ ✓ ✏✔✕✖✗ ✘✗✙✚✚✖✗ ✳✢✘✙✴✖✣
✏✑✒ ✓ ✗✔✢✔✛ ✘✗✙✚✚✖✗ ✺✻☛✼✻✽✎✌✾ ✽✿☛❀❁✍❂
✏✑✒ ✓ ✏✔✕✖✗ ✘✗✙✚✚✖✗ ✗✖✳✢✘✙✴✖✣
❆ ✏✑✒ ✓ ✘✗✙✚✚✖✗✖✵
❅
✏✑✒ ✓ ✏✔✕✖✗ ✘✗✙✚✚✖✗ ✳✏✏✳✗✖✜✘✣ ✡☛☞☞✌✍✎
✡☛☞☞✌✍✎✡
✗✒✜ ✏✑✒ ✓ ✒❄✖✗ ✘✗✙✚✚✖✗✣
✏✑✒ ✓ ❄✙✚✜✳✬ ❄✔✒✗✢✖✣
✔✮✮ ✪ ✯
✳✢✘✙✴✖ ✏✔✕✖✗❍ ✏✳ ✥✦❇❈✏❉ ❊ ✳✢✘✙✴✖ ✏✙✢✭✒✏
✳✢✘✙✴✖ ✏✔✕✖✗❍ ✏✫ ✥✦❇❈✏❉ ❊ ✳✢✘✙✴✖ ✏✙✢✭✒✏
✳✢✘✙✴✖ ✏✔✕✖✗❍ ✏✢ ✥✦❇❈✏❉ ❊ ✳✢✘✙✴✖ ✏✙✢✭✒✏ ■❏ ❑▲▼▲ ◆❖■P ❏◗
❳❨❩❩❬❭❪❳ ✡☛☞☞✌✍✎✡ ■❘❙ ❚❯■❯ ◗❱❯❲❙
❋✏ ✳✢✘✙✴✖ ✏✔✕✖✗❍ ✏ ✥✦❇❈✏❉ ❊ ❋●❈✳✢✘✙✴✖ ✏✙✢✭✒✏❉
✏✑✒ ✓ ✏✔✕✖✗ ✘✗✙✚✚✖✗ ✏✭✏ ✘✙✑✖✣ ✏✑✒ ✓ ✏✔✕✖✗ ✘✗✙✚✚✖✗ ✵✏✔ ✘✙✑✖✣
✗✖✳✢✘✙✴✖ ✏✔✕✖✗❍ ❃✳ ✥✦❇❈❃❉ ❊ ✗✖✳✢✘✙✴✖ ✏✙✢✭✒✏
✺✻☛✼✻✽✎✌✾ ✽✿☛❀❁✍❂
✗✖✳✢✘✙✴✖ ✏✔✕✖✗❍ ❃✫ ✥✦❇❈❃❉ ❊ ✗✖✳✢✘✙✴✖ ✏✙✢✭✒✏ ❵❫❴❫ ❛
❆ ✏✑✒ ✓ ✏✔✕✖✗ ✘✗✙✚✚✖✗
❅
✗✖✳✢✘✙✴✖ ✏✔✕✖✗❍ ❃✢ ✥✦❇❈❃❉ ❊ ✗✖✳✢✘✙✴✖ ✏✙✢✭✒✏
❛ ✶✷✸✹
❋✏ ✗✖✳✢✘✙✴✖ ✏✔✕✖✗❍ ❃ ✥✦❇❈❃❉ ❊ ❋●❈✗✖✳✢✘✙✴✖ ✏✙✢✭✒✏❉
✳✏✏✳✗✖✜✘ ✏✔✕✖✗❍ ❄✳ ❄ ❊ ✳✏✏✳✗✖✜✘ ✏✙✢✭✒✏
✳✏✏✳✗✖✜✘ ✏✔✕✖✗❍ ❄✫ ❄ ❊ ✳✏✏✳✗✖✜✘ ✏✙✢✭✒✏
✳✏✏✳✗✖✜✘ ✏✔✕✖✗❍ ❄✢ ❄ ❊ ✳✏✏✳✗✖✜✘ ✏✙✢✭✒✏
❋✏ ✳✏✏✳✗✖✜✘ ✏✔✕✖✗❍ ❄ ❄ ❊ ❋●❈✳✏✏✳✗✖✜✘ ✏✙✢✭✒✏❉
✁✂✄☎☎✆☎✝✞✟✠

Figure 206: Power trigger logic

8.8.1.3.6 RATE OF CHANGE OF FREQUENCY TRIGGERING

Setting path: SETTINGS > SYSTEM SETUP > PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT > PHASOR MEASUREMENT
UNIT 1 > PMU TRIGGERING > PMU 1 TRIGGERING > PMU 1 df/dt TRIGGER
■ PMU 1 df/dt PMU 1 df/dt TRIGGER
ó Range: Enabled, Disabled
■ TRIGGER FUNCTION: Disabled
PMU 1 df/dt TRIGGER
ô Range: 0.10 to 15.00 Hz/s in steps of 0.01
RAISE: 0.25 Hz/s
PMU 1 df/dt TRIGGER
ô Range: 0.10 to 15.00 Hz/s in steps of 0.01
FALL: 0.25 Hz/s
PMU 1 df/dt TRIGGER
ô Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
PKP TIME: 0.10 s
PMU 1 df/dt TRIGGER
ô Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
DPO TIME: 1.00 s
PMU 1 df/dt TRG BLK:
ô Range: FlexLogic operand
Off
PMU 1 df/dt TRIGGER
ô Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
TARGET: Self-reset
PMU 1 df/dt TRIGGER
ñ Range: Enabled, Disabled
EVENTS: Disabled

This element responds to frequency rate of change. Separate thresholds are provided for rising and dropping
frequency. The trigger responds to the rate of change of frequency (df/dt) of the Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU)
source.

PMU 1 df/dt TRIGGER FUNCTION

This setting enables or disabled the power trigger function.
PMU 1 df/dt TRIGGER RAISE
This setting specifies the pickup threshold for the rate of change of frequency in the raising direction (positive df/dt).
The comparator applies a 4% hysteresis.
PMU 1 df/dt TRIGGER FALL
This setting specifies the pickup threshold for the rate of change of frequency in the falling direction (negative df/dt).
The comparator applies a 4% hysteresis.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 337
Chapter 8 - Phasor Measurement Unit

PMU 1 df/dt TRIGGER PKP TIME

This setting is used to filter out spurious conditions and avoid unnecessary triggering of the recorder.
PMU 1 df/dt TRIGGER DPO TIME
This setting is used to extend the trigger after the situation returns to normal. This setting is of importance when
using the recorder in the forced mode (recording as long as the triggering condition is asserted).

✤✥ ❳✥✦✄✁✧ ✦★ ✩✪✂✫❙
P☎✆ ✶ ❋✡✌✭ ✠✡☛☞☞✌✡
P☎✆ ✶ ❱✏✖✠ ✠✡☛☞☞✌✡
P☎✆ ✶ ✎✆✡✡ ✠✡☛☞☞✌✡
❙ ❚❚✁✂✄❙ P☎✆ ✶ P✏✬✌✡ ✠✡☛☞☞✌✡ ✤✥ ❳✥✦✄✁✧ ✦★ ✩✪✂✫
✯ P☎✆ ✶ ✠✡☛☞☞✌✡✌❉
P☎✆ ✶ ❞✝✞❞✟ ✠✡☛☞☞✌✡ ✮
❙ ❚❚✁✂✄
❋✆✍✎✠☛✏✍✑
P☎✆ ✶ ✆✘✌✡ ✠✡☛☞☞✌✡✑
✌❊✒✓✔✕❞ ❂ ✶
✏✝✝ ❂ ❢
✛
P☎✆ ✶ ❞✝✞❞✟ ✠✡☞ ❇✖✗✑ ✚
❆
✏✝✝ ❂ ❢
❙ ❚❚✁✂✄❙ ❙ ❚❚✁✂✄❙
t♦ ✰✲✳✲ ❜✴ts ♦✵
P☎✆ ✶ ❞✝✞❞✟ ✠✡☛☞☞✌✡ ✡✙☛✘✌✑ P☎✆ ✶ ❞✝✞❞✟ ✠✡☛☞☞✌✡ P✗P ✠☛☎✌✑ t✷✸ ✹✺t✺ ✵✻✺✼✸
❙ ❚❚✁✂✄
P☎✆ ✶ ❞✝✞❞✟ ✠✡☛☞☞✌✡ ❋✙✖✖✑ P☎✆ ✶ ❞✝✞❞✟ ✠✡☛☞☞✌✡ ❉P✏ ✠☛☎✌✑
P☎✆ ✶ ✘☛☞✍✙✖ ✤✥ ❳✥✦✄✁✧ ✦★ ✩✪✂✫
✡✆✍
✘✏✆✡✎✌✑ ❞✝✞❞✟ ❃ ✡✙☛✘✌ ✟✜✢✜
✏✡ P☎✆ ✶ ✡✏✎✏❋ ✠✡☛☞☞✌✡
✡✏✎✏❋✱ ❞✝✞❞✟ ➊❞✝✞❞✟ ❃ ❋✙✖✖ ✟✣✜❖
✽✾✿❀❀❀❁❄❅❈●❍

Figure 207: Rate of Change of frequency trigger logic

8.8.1.4 PMU RECORDING

Setting path: SETTINGS > SYSTEM SETUP > PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT > PHASOR MEASUREMENT
UNIT 1 > PMU TRIGGERING > PMU 1 RECORDING
■ PMU 1 PMU 1 FUNCTION:
ó Range: Enabled, Disabled
■ RECORDING Disabled
PMU 1 NO OF TIMED
ô Range: 2 to 128 in steps of 1
RECORDS: 10
PMU 1 TRIGGER MODE:
ô Range: Automatic Overwrite, Protected
Automatic Overwrite
PMU 1 TIMED TRIGGER
ñ Range: 1 to 50% in steps of 1
POSITION: 10%
The length of the PMU record is variable. It depends on some settings and configuration, such as PMU 1 NO OF
TIMED RECORDS, PMU 1 RATE, the number of Synchrophasors etc. There is a fixed amount of data storage for
PMU recording. The more records captured, the less the recording length captured per record. See the ACTUAL
VALUES > RECORDS > PMU RECORDS > PMU 1 RECORDING menu to view the actual PMU record length
captured per record. The following table provides sample configurations with corresponding seconds per record.
The minimum number of PMU records is two. The third to fifth columns is the number of configured values recorded
in each record.

Records Frames per sec. Synchrophasors Analogs Digitals Record length

3 30 14 8 16 590.4
16 30 14 8 16 138.9
32 30 14 8 16 71.5
64 30 14 8 16 36.3
3 60 14 8 16 295.2
16 60 14 8 16 69.4

N60-1601-0125-861-1 338
Chapter 8 - Phasor Measurement Unit

Records Frames per sec. Synchrophasors Analogs Digitals Record length

32 60 14 8 16 35.7
64 60 14 8 16 18.1

PMU 1 FUNCTION
This setting enables or disables the recorder for PMU 1. The rate is fixed at the reporting rate set within the
aggregator.

PMU 1 NO OF TIMED RECORDS

This setting specifies the number of timed records that are available for a given logical PMU 1. The length of each
record is equal to the available memory divided by the content size and number of records. As the number of
records is increased, the available storage for each record is reduced. The relay supports a maximum of 128
records in either timed or forced mode.

PMU 1 TRIGGER MODE

This setting specifies what happens when the recorder uses its entire available memory storage. With Automatic
Overwrite, the last record is erased to facilitate new recording, when triggered. Under the “Protected” selection,
the recorder stops creating new records when the entire memory is used up by the old uncleared records.

PMU 1 TIMED TRIGGER POSITION

This setting specifies the amount of pre-trigger data as a percent of the entire record. This setting applies only to the
timed mode of recording.

8.8.2 AGGREGATORS
Depending on the UR model, up to four aggregators may be available. Only one is shown here.
Setting path: SETTINGS > SYSTEM SETUP > PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT > PMU AGGREGATOR 1
■ PMU AGGREGATOR 1 PMU AGGREGATOR 1
ó Range: NONE, 37.118, 90-5
■ PROTOCOL: NONE
PMU AGGREGATOR 1
ô Range: 1 to 65534 in steps of 1
IDCODE: 1
PMU AGGREGATOR 1
ô Range: No, Yes
INCLUDE PMU1: No
■ C37.118 AGGR 1
ô
■ CONFIGURATION
■ 90-5 AGGR 1
ñ
■ CONFIGURATION

It is not possible to stream both IEEE C37.118 and IEC 61850-90-5 simultaneously. When the protocol selection is
set via the software or keypad, any aggregators whose protocol is not set to None are set to the last protocol
saved.

PMU AGGREGATOR1 PROTOCOL

This setting selects the protocol; IEEE C37.118 or IEC 61850-90-5. Because only one protocol is supported at a
time in a device, this setting applies to all PMU aggregators in the device.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 339
Chapter 8 - Phasor Measurement Unit

PMU AGGREGATOR1 IDCODE

This is a numeric identifier of the Aggregator / PDC function. In an IEEE C37.118 output stream, this identifies the
ID of the aggregator, which is only used if there is more than 1 PMU mapped into an aggregator.

PMU AGGREGATOR1 PMU1

This setting decides whether the Aggregator includes the data set in the reporting data stream or not.
The PMU AGGREGATOR 1 setting includes two further submenus for configuring the protocols:
● c37.118 AGGR 1 CONFIGURATION
● 90-5 AGGR 1 CONFIGURATION

Note:
Only PMUs with same reporting rate can be assigned to the same PMU AGGREGATOR

8.8.2.1 C37.118 AGGREGATOR CONFIGURATION

Depending on the UR model, up to four aggregators may be available. Only one is shown here.
Setting path: SETTINGS > SYSTEM SETUP > PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT > PMU AGGREGATOR 1
C37.118 AGGR 1 CONFIGURATION
■ C37.118 AGGR 1 PMU AGGREGATOR 1
ó Range: 0 to 65534
■ CONFIGURATION TCP PORT: 4712
PMU AGGREGATOR 1:
ô Range: 0 to 65534
UDP PORT: 4713
PMU AGGREGATOR 1:
ñ Range: Disabled, Enabled
PDC CONTROL: Disabled

PMU AGGREGATOR 1 TCP PORT

This setting selects the TCP port number to be used by this aggregator for network reporting. All ports, even those
of unused aggregators, must be valid and unique to avoid port number collisions.

PMU AGGREGATOR 1 UDP PORT

This setting selects the UDP port number to be used by this aggregator for network reporting. All ports, even those
of unused aggregators, must be valid and unique to avoid port number collisions.

PMU AGGREGATOR 1 PDC CONTROL

The synchrophasor standard allows for user-defined controls originating at the PDC (phasor data concentrator), to
be executed on the PMU. The control is accomplished via an extended command frame. The relay decodes the first
word of the extended field, EXTFRAME, to drive 16 dedicated FlexLogic operands. Each aggregator supports 16
FlexLogic operands, as shown in the following table. The operands are asserted for five seconds following reception
of the command frame. If the new command frame arrives within the five-second period, the FlexLogic operands
are updated, and the five-second timer restarts. This setting enables or disables the control.

Operand type Operand syntax Operand description

ELEMENT: Phasor data concentrator asserts control bit 1, as

AGTR1 PDC CNTRL 1
Synchrophasor, phasor data, concentrator received via the network
Phasor data concentrator asserts control bit 2 as
As above AGTR1 PDC CNTRL 2
received via the network

N60-1601-0125-861-1 340
Chapter 8 - Phasor Measurement Unit

Operand type Operand syntax Operand description

Phasor data concentrator asserts control bit 3 as

As above AGTR1 PDC CNTRL 3
received via the network
AGTR1 PDC CNTRL Phasor data concentrator asserts control bit 16,
As above
16 as received via the network
Phasor data concentrator asserts control bit 1, as
As above AGTR1 PDC CNTRL 1
received via the network
Phasor data concentrator asserts control bit 2 as
As above AGTR1 PDC CNTRL 2
received via the network
Phasor data concentrator asserts control bit 3 as
As above AGTR1 PDC CNTRL 3
received via the network
AGTR1 PDC CNTRL Phasor data concentrator asserts control bit 16,
As above
16 as received via the network

8.8.2.2 IEC 61850-90-5 AGGREGATOR CONFIGURATION

Depending on the UR model, up to four aggregators may be available. Only one is shown here.
Setting path: SETTINGS > SYSTEM SETUP > PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT > PMU AGGREGATOR 1 90-5
AGGR 1 CONFIGURATION
■ 90-5 AGGR 1 PMU AGGREGATOR 1
ó Range: 56-character ASCII text (blank by default)
■ CONFIGURATION Name
PMU AGGREGATOR 1
ô Range: 1, 2, 3
PORT: 1
PMU AGGREGATOR 1
ô Range: 0 to 65534 in steps of 1
UDP PORT: 102
PMU AGGREGATOR 1
ñ Range: 1 to 4
NUMBER OF ASDUs: 1

PMU AGGREGATOR 1 NAME

This setting allows you to enter a visible string of characters (maximum 56) to identify the source of the stream. This
value, concatenated with the Aggregator IDCode and Aggregator Class of Service, is mapped into the IEC 61850
MSVID filed in the output stream. The field allows 65 characters, but uses the first 56 characters.

AGGREGATOR 1: PHYSICAL PORT

This setting determines the physical ports through which the synchrophasor traffic is transmitted. The range is 1, 2,
3.

PMU AGGREGATOR 1: UDP PORT

This setting selects the UDP port number that is used by this dataset for network reporting. A default setting value
for IEC 6150-90-5 is provided.

PMU AGGREGATOR 1: NUMBER OF ASDUs

This setting sets the number of Application Service Data Units (ASDUs) from 1 through to 4.

ASDU setting Transmission

1 ASDU at T0 (current values)

2 ASDU at T-1 (previous values) + ASDU at T0 (current values)
3 ASDU at T-2 (previous values) + ASDU at T-1 (previous values) + ASDU at T0 (current values)

N60-1601-0125-861-1 341
Chapter 8 - Phasor Measurement Unit

ASDU setting Transmission

ASDU at T-3 (previous values) + ASDU at T-2 (previous values) + ASDU at T-1 (previous values) + ASDU
4
at T0 (current values)

8.8.3 CONTROL BLOCKS

Setting path: SETTINGS > SYSTEM SETUP > PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT > 90–5 R-SV CB 1
CONFIGURATION
■ 90–5 R-SV CB 1 R-SV CB1 SVENA:
ó Range: FlexLogic operand
■ CONFIGURATION Off
R-SV CB1 CLIENT CTRL:
ô Range: FlexLogic operand
Off
R-SV CB1 SVENA DFLT:
ô Range: FlexLogic operand
Off
R-SV CB1 CONFREV:
ô Range: 1 to 4294967295
1
R-SV CB1 PRIORITY:
ô Range: 0 to 7
4
R-SV CB1 CSCP CLASS:
ô Range: None, Expedited Forwarding
Expedited Forwarding
R-SV CB1 VLAN ID:
ô Range: 0 to 4095
0
R-SV CB1 APPID:
ô Range: 0 to 16383
0
R-SV CB1 DEST IP:
ô Range: 0 to 255.255.255.255
224.0.0.0
R-SV CB1 SECURITY:
ñ Range: 0 to 2
0

R-SV CB1 SVENA

The SV Stream Control is set by either toggling an assigned FlexLogic operand or a remote client write, to start and
stop the streaming of R-SV frames. If remote client control is disabled, a negative response is provided to the client
in response to a write attempt. A FlexLogic operand (SvEna) is provided for each Aggregator that reflects the state
of the SvEna control where 1 = Enabled and 0=Disabled. The figure shows the logic for setting the SvEna control
bit.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 342
Chapter 8 - Phasor Measurement Unit

✁✂✂✄☎ ✆✝✞✟✠✡✁✞

✘✓✚✖✛
✘✒✛✒✜✏ ✯★✑✒✔ ✰✱✲
☛☞✌ ✒✎ ✘✓✚✖✛
✍✜✏✙✢✜✒✒✎✖✣ ✍✎✏✑✒✑✓✔
✤✥✔✦✕✧✔★✛✖✩ ✕✖✔✗✘✙✎✒
✪✫✎✬✔✖✒✛★✭✮

☛☞✌ ✯★✑✒✔ ✰✳✲

✒✎ ✘✓✚✖✛

✴✵✶✷✸✶✹✺✻✼✽✾
Figure 208: Logic for setting SvEna control bit

R-SV CB1 CLIENT CONTRL

This setting determines if a client can write to the reserve bit. When the assigned FlexLogic operand is a logic 1
state, remote clients can write to both the reserve bit and the SvEna bit. When the FlexLogic operand is a logic 0
state, the remote client writes to the reserve bit, the SvEna is rejected by the UR, and a negative response with the
appropriate Service Error is returned to the client.

R-SV CB1 SVENA DFLT

This setting sets the default state of the stream (On or Off) on power-up or restart.

R-SV CB1 CONFREV

The relay increments the Configuration revision every time the configuration is changed. This setting allows the user
to reset the configuration back to 1 or a value from 1 to 4294967295.

R-SV CB1 PRIORITY

A value from 0 through 7. The default value is 4.

R-SV CB1 DSCP CLASS

The value represents the IPv4 Differentiated Services (formerly called TypeOfService) value. The default value is
set for Expedited Forwarding (101110B (46 or 2EH)). This value provides priority routing, when supported in the
routers.

R-SV CB1 VLAN ID

A range of values limited from 0 to 4095.

R-SV CB1 APPID

This setting allows the selection of a specific application ID for each sending device.

R-SV CB1 DEST IP

This is the destination multicast IP address that is entered in Standard IPV4 address format. The valid range for
IPv4 is from 224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255. The UR does not test the address entered.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 343
Chapter 8 - Phasor Measurement Unit

R-SV CB1 SECURITY

This setting selects the level of security and authentication used, as outlined in the following table, and is in the form
of an enumeration as per standard. The range is 0 to 2.

Enumeration Authentication Encryption

0 No No
1 Yes No
2 Yes Yes

8.8.4 TIME QUALITY

Setting path: SETTINGS > SYSTEM SETUP > PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT > TIME QUALITY
■ TIME QUALITY HOLDOVER MODE:
ó Range: DISABLED, ENABLED.
■ DISABLED
HOLDOVER TIME: Range: 0 minute to 30000 minutes in steps of 1
ñ
0 minute minute.

HOLDOVER MODE
This setting allows users to apply the Holdover mode when the PTP grandmaster loses primary time reference.
When the setting is enabled, depending on the clock class and clock accuracy of the PTP grandmaster, a PMU
Sync Error will be set after a time defined by the setting HOLDOVER TIME. When the setting is disabled, the
Holdover Timer logic is not applied, and a PMU Sync error is declared as for previous versions to ensure backward
compatibility.

HOLDOVER TIME
This setting specifies the wait time from the actual loss of time synchronization for the Time quality Flags to indicate
that time synchronization has been lost.
After the loss of the primary reference to the PTP Grand Master, if the accuracy of the time source is not within 1
microsecond and time from the actual loss of synchronization is within the Holdover Time, the Time Sync Lost flag
remains 0. After the Holdover Time expires, the Time Sync Lost flag is set to ‘1’.
The logic diagram shows the functioning of Holdover Time. the following conditions apply
● The Time sync Lost is 1
● Bit13 (PMU Sync Error) of STAT word is set to true
● The 4-bit Message Time Quality indicator code of the FRACSEC field will indicate the actual clock accuracy.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 344
Chapter 8 - Phasor Measurement Unit

SETTINGS
HOLDOVER MODE

Disabled=1

ACTUAL VALUE
RTC SYNC SOURCE

=Port # PTP Clock

AND
AND
clockClass > 6
SETTINGS
HOLDOVER MODE OR Time Sync Lost

Enabled=1

AND
ACTUAL VALUE
RTC SYNC SOURCE OR
AND
clockClass >7
=Port # PTP Clock
OR
clock Accuracy >25 µs

SETTINGS
Holdover
Time
AND 0 min
clockClass =7

AND
clock Accuracy >1 µs

859838A1.vsdx

Figure 209: Holdover Time logic

N60-1601-0125-861-1 345
CHAPTER 9

SETTINGS
Chapter 9 - Settings

9.1 CHAPTER OVERVIEW

This chapter contains the following sections:

Chapter Overview 347
Overview 348
Settings menu 352
Product setup 356
System setup 424
FlexLogic settings 479
Grouped elements 486
Control elements 536
Inputs/outputs 579
Transducer inputs/outputs 600
Testing 607
Simulation 613
Front Panel Settings 617
SV stream settings 623

N60-1601-0125-861-1 347
Chapter 9 - Settings

9.2 OVERVIEW
This chapter describes the relay's settings shown on the front panel display.
You can view settings remotely in a web browser by
1. Entering the IP address of the relay
2. Accessing the Device Information Menu option
3. Selecting the Front-Panel Display Report option.
When a restart is required for a setting change to take effect, use the Maintenance > Reboot Relay command in
the software.
Settings file conversion from previous firmware versions is supported. This is described in the Maintenance chapter.

Note:
The relay is not taken out of service when saving settings, but it is is taken out of service when a settings file is written to it.

9.2.1 INTRODUCTION TO ELEMENTS

The term element is used to describe a feature that is based around a comparator. The comparator is provided with
an input (or set of inputs), which is tested against a programmed setting (or group of settings) to determine if the
input is within the defined range. a logic output is set according to the result. The logic output is sometimes referred
to as a flag. A single comparator can make multiple tests and provide multiple outputs. For example, the time
overcurrent comparator sets a pickup flag when the current input is above the setting and sets an operate flag when
the input current has been at a level above the pickup setting for the time specified by the time-current curve
settings. All analog comparators use analog actual values as the input.
Elements are arranged into two classes, grouped and control. Each element classed as a grouped element is
provided with six alternate sets of settings, in setting groups numbered 1 through 6. The performance of a grouped
element is defined by the setting group that is active at a given time. The performance of a control element is
independent of the selected active setting group.
The main characteristics of an element are shown on a logic diagram. This includes the inputs, settings, fixed logic,
and the output operands generated.
Some settings are common to many elements, outlined as follows:
● FUNCTION setting — This setting programs the element to operate when selected as Enabled. The factory
default is Disabled. Once Enabled, any element associated with the function becomes active and all
options become available.
● NAME setting — This setting is used to uniquely identify the element.
● SOURCE setting — This setting is used to select the AC source to be monitored. See the Introduction to AC
Sources section later.
● PICKUP setting — For simple elements, this setting is used to program the level of the measured parameter
above or below which the pickup state is established. In more complex elements, a set of settings can be
provided to define the range of the measured parameters that cause the element to pick up.
● PICKUP DELAY setting — This setting sets a time-delay-on-pickup, or on-delay, for the duration between the
pickup and operate output states.
● RESET DELAY setting — This setting is used to set a time-delay-on-dropout, or off-delay, for the duration
between the operate output state and the return to logic 0 after the input transits outside the defined pickup
range.
● BLOCK setting — The default output operand state of all comparators is a logic 0 or 'flag not set'. The
comparator remains in this default state until a logic 1 is asserted at the RUN input, allowing the test to be
performed. If the RUN input changes to logic 0 at any time, the comparator returns to the default state. The

N60-1601-0125-861-1 348
Chapter 9 - Settings

RUN input is used to supervise the comparator. The BLOCK input is used as one of the inputs to RUN
control.
● TARGET setting — This setting is used to define the operation of an element target message. When set to
Disabled, no target message or illumination of a front panel LED indicator is issued upon operation of the
element. When set to Self-Reset, the target message and LED indication follow the operate state of the
element and self-resets once the operate element condition clears. When set to Latched, the target
message and LED indication remains visible after the element output returns to logic 0 until a RESET
command is received by the relay.
● EVENTS setting — This setting is used to control whether the pickup, dropout, or operate states are recorded
by the event recorder. When set to Disabled, element pickup, dropout, or operate are not recorded as
events. When set to Enabled, events are created for:
○ <Element> PKP (pickup)
○ <Element> DPO (dropout)
○ <Element> OP (operate)
The DPO event is created when the measure and decide comparator output transits from the pickup state (logic 1)
to the dropout state (logic 0). This can happen when the element is in the operate state if the reset delay time is not
zero.
Not every operand of a given element in a UR relay generates events, only the major output operands. Elements,
asserting output per phase, log operating phase output only, without asserting the common three-phase operand
event.

9.2.2 BASE QUANTITIES

Some settings are specified in per-unit (pu) calculated quantities, where pu quantity = (actual quantity) / (base quantity)
Where the current source is from a single current transformer (CT), the base quantity is the nominal secondary or
primary current of the CT. Use the secondary current base to convert pu settings to/from a secondary current value,
and use the primary current base to convert pu settings to/from a primary current value.
Where the current source is the sum of two or more CTs with different nominal primary currents, the primary base
quantity is the largest nominal primary current.
For example, if CT1 = 300 / 5 A and CT2 = 100 / 1 A, then the base quantity is 300 A primary, 5 A secondary per CT.
The CT2 current is scaled to the CT1 base quantity. If 5A is injected into the CT1 secondary and 1A is injected into
the 1A CT2 secondary windings, with both currents in-phase, the sum of CT1 and CT2 is measured as
[5A+1A*(100/1)/(300/5)]*300/5=400.00A primary or 400.00A/300A=1.333pu
Where the current source is the sum of two or more CTs with same nominal primary current but different secondary
current, the first bank in the summation defines the secondary current base (for example in the F1+M1 sum, the F1
secondary nominal value defines the base).
For voltage elements in delta-connected VTs, the primary base quantity is the nominal phase-to-phase primary
voltage of the protected system provided that the following two conditions are satisfied:
● The VT ratio setting is set to the nominal ratio of the VTs
● The secondary voltage setting is set to the phase-to-phase voltage seen by the relay
For example, on a system with a 13.8 kV nominal primary voltage, the base quantity is 13800 V. With 14400:120 V
delta-connected VTs, the secondary base quantity and secondary voltage setting is:
(13800/14400) x 120 =115V
For wye-connected VTs, the primary and secondary base quantities are the phase-to-ground primary voltage of the
protected system, provided that the VT ratio setting is set to the nominal ratio of the VTs and the secondary voltage
setting PHASE VT x SECONDARY is set to the phase-to-ground voltage seen by the relay when the voltage of the
protected system in nominal. For the same system with a 13.8 kV nominal primary voltage and same VTs as above,
the secondary voltage setting (here a phase-to-ground value) is:

N60-1601-0125-861-1 349
Chapter 9 - Settings

(13800/14400) x (120/Ö3) = 66.4V

9.2.3 INTRODUCTION TO AC SOURCES

A mechanism called a Source creates a group of CT and VT input channels to be used by one or more protection
and control elements. Sources, in the context of UR series relays, refer to the logical grouping of current and
voltage signals such that one source contains all the signals required to measure the load or fault in a particular
power system. A given source can contain some, or all, of the following signals:
● Three-phase currents
● Single-phase ground current
● Three-phase voltages
● An auxiliary voltage from a single VT for checking for synchronism.
For example, a line protection system having distance protection, phase and ground overcurrent protection
supervised by a directional element, and breaker failure protection, can use a single source (SRC 1) shown in the
table below. For some functions, two sources are needed. For example, for the synchrocheck function, voltage
across the breaker needs to be measured, therefore both SRC1 with a phase voltage and source SRC 2 with an
auxiliary voltage are needed.
Two AC sources are provided for each DSP module in UR relays. In relays with two DSP modules, four AC sources
are provided. In relays with three DSP modules, six AC sources are provided.
Parameter Source 1 Source 2
Name SRC 1 SRC 2
Phase CT F1 None
Ground CT F1 None
Phase VT F5 None
Aux VT None F5

Another important feature of the UR source is the ability to sum currents internally. In conventional analog or
electronic relays, the sum of the currents is obtained from an external electrical connection of all CTs, through which
any portion of the current for the element being protected can flow. In this case, auxiliary interposing CTs are
needed to perform ratio matching, if the ratios of the primary CTs to be summed are not identical. In the UR series
of relays, all the current signals are input to the UR device individually, where grouping, ratio correction, and
summation are calculated internally with the help of configuration settings.
A major advantage of using internal summation is that the individual currents are still available to the protection
device along with a summed current. For example, in a breaker-and-a-half configuration, CT current summed from
both breakers is used for the line distance and overcurrent protection, while still being available as individual
currents, for breaker failure protection for both breakers.
The internal grouping of current and voltage signals forms an AC source. This source can be given a specific name
through the settings and becomes available to protection and metering elements. Individual names can be given to
each source to help identify them for later use.
Once the sources have been configured, you have them available as selections for the choice of input signal for the
protection elements and as metered quantities.

9.2.4 CT/VT CONFIGURATION

Current transformer (CT) and voltage transformer (VT) input channels are contained in CT/VT modules. The type of
input channel can be phase/neutral/other voltage, phase/ground current, or sensitive ground current. The CT/VT
modules calculate total waveform RMS levels, fundamental frequency phasors, symmetrical components, and
harmonics for voltage or current, as allowed by the hardware in each channel. These modules can calculate other
parameters as directed by the CPU module.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 350
Chapter 9 - Settings

A CT/VT module contains up to eight input channels, numbered 1 through 8. The channel numbering corresponds
to the module terminal numbering 1 through 8 and is arranged as follows. Channels 1, 2, 3, and 4 are always
provided as a group, hereafter called a “bank,” and all four are either current or voltage, as are channels 5, 6, 7, and
8. Channels 1, 2, 3 and 5, 6, 7 are arranged as phase A, B, and C respectively. Channels 4 and 8 are either another
current or voltage.
Banks are ordered sequentially from the block of lower-numbered channels to the block of higher-numbered
channels, and from the CT/VT module with the lowest slot position letter to the module with the highest slot position
letter, as follows.
Increasing slot position >
CT/VT module 1 CT/VT module 2 CT/VT module 3
<bank 1> <bank 3> <bank 5>
<bank 2> <bank 4> <bank 6>

The UR platform allows for a maximum of six sets of three-phase voltages and six sets of three-phase currents. The
result of these restrictions leads to the maximum number of CT/VT modules in a chassis to three. The maximum
number of sources is six. A summary of CT/VT module configurations is as follows.

Item Maximum number

CT/VT Module 2
CT Bank (3 phase channels, 1 ground channel) 2
VT Bank (3 phase channels, 1 auxiliary channel) 2

Upon relay startup, configuration settings for every bank of current or voltage input channels are generated
automatically from the order code. Within each bank, a channel identification label is assigned automatically to each
bank of channels in a given product. The bank naming convention is based on the physical location of the channels.
Bank identification consists of the letter designation of the slot in which the CT/VT module is mounted as the first
character, followed by numbers indicating the channel, either 1 or 5.
For three-phase channel sets, the number of the lowest numbered channel identifies the set. For example, F1
represents the three-phase channel set of F1/F2/F3, where F is the slot letter and 1 is the first channel of the three
channels.
Upon startup, the CPU configures the settings required to characterize the current and voltage inputs. It displays
them in the appropriate section in the sequence of the banks as follows for a maximum configuration: F1, F5, L1,
L5, S1, and S5.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 351
Chapter 9 - Settings

9.3 SETTINGS MENU

In this manual, the settings are described with the help of pictorial representations as shown below. The boxes with
borders represent the LCD display on the relay and the text within the boxes show what is displayed on the LCD
screen. The horizontal positions depict how you move between the settings using the horizontal cursor keys and the
vertical positions depict how you move between the settings using the vertical cursor keys. The small black boxes
on the left within each cell show that there are sub-menus. The cells with four black boxes on the left show that it is
as the highest menu level while the cells with two black boxes show that it is a sub-menu, which parents further
settings.
■ ■ SETTINGS ■ SECURITY
ó
■ ■ PRODUCT SETUP ■
■ DISPLAY
ò ô
■ PROPERTIES
■ CLEAR RELAY
ô
■ RECORDS
■ COMMUNICATIONS
ô
■
■ MODBUS USER MAP
ô
■
■ REAL TIME
ô
■ CLOCK
■ USER-PROGRAMMABLE
ô
■ FAULT REPORTS
■ OSCILLOGRAPHY
ô
■
■ DATA LOGGER
ô ■

■ DEMAND
ô
■
■ USER-PROGRAMMABLE
ô
■ LEDS
■ USER-PROGRAMMABLE
ô
■ SELF TESTS
■ CONTROL
ô
■ PUSHBUTTONS
■ USER-PROGRAMMABLE
ô
■ PUSHBUTTONS
■ FLEX STATE
ô
■ PARAMETERS
■ USER-DEFINABLE
ô ■ DISPLAYS

■ DIRECT I/O
ô ■

■ TELEPROTECTION
ô
■

N60-1601-0125-861-1 352
Chapter 9 - Settings

■ INSTALLATION
ñ ñ
■
■ ■ REMOTE RESOURCES ■ Access in Enervista only
ó
■■ ■
■ ■ SETTINGS ■ AC INPUTS
ó
■ ■ SYSTEM SETUP ■
■ POWER SYSTEM
ò ô
■
■ SIGNAL SOURCES
ô
■
■ BREAKERS
ô
■
■ SWITCHES
ô ■

■ FLEXCURVES
ô
■
■ PHASOR MEASUREMENT
ñ ñ
■ UNIT
■ ■ PROCESS BUS ■ GENERAL
ó
■ ■ MODULE ■
■ SV STREAM CONFIG
ñ ñ
■
■ ■ SETTINGS ■ FLEXLOGIC
ó
■ ■ FLEXLOGIC ■ EQUATION EDITOR
■ FLEXLOGIC
ò ô
■ TIMERS
■ FLEXELEMENTS
ô
■
■ NON-VOLATILE
ô
■
■ FLEXMATH
ñ ñ
■
■ ■ SETTINGS ■ SETTING GROUP 1
ó
■ ■ GROUPED ELEMENTS ■
■ SETTING GROUP 2
ò ô
■
■ SETTING GROUP 3
ô
■
■ SETTING GROUP 4
ô
■
■ SETTING GROUP 5
ô
■
■ SETTING GROUP 6
ñ ñ
■
■ ■ SETTINGS ■ TRIP BUS
ó
■ ■ CONTROL ELEMENTS ■

N60-1601-0125-861-1 353
Chapter 9 - Settings

■ SETTING GROUPS
ò ô
■
■ SELECTOR SWITCH
ô
■
■ UNDERFREQUENCY
ô
■
■ OVERFREQUENCY
ô
■
■ SYNCHROCHECK
ô
■
■ DIGITAL ELEMENTS
ô
■
■ DIGITAL COUNTERS
ô
■
■ MONITORING ELEMENTS
ô
■
■ FREQUENCY RATE
ô
■ OF CHANGE
■ DIGITIZERS
ô
■
■ 8-BIT COMPARATORS
ô
■
■ 8-BIT SWITCHES
ô
■
■ MULTI-RANGE SIGNAL
ñ ñ
■ OSCILL DETECTOR
■ ■ SETTINGS ■ CONTACT INPUTS
ó
■ ■ INPUTS / OUTPUTS ■
■ VIRTUAL INPUTS
ò ô
■
■ CONTACT OUTPUTS
ô
■
■ VIRTUAL OUTPUTS
ô
■
■ RESETTING
ô
■
■ DIRECT INPUTS
ô
■
■ DIRECT OUTPUTS
ô
■
■ DIRECT ANALOGS
ô
■
■ DIRECT INTEGERS
ô
■
■ TELEPROTECTION
ñ ñ
■
■ ■ SETTINGS ■ DCMA INPUTS
ó
■ ■ TRANSDUCER I/O ■

N60-1601-0125-861-1 354
Chapter 9 - Settings

■ RTD INPUTS
ò ô
■
■ DCMA OUTPUTS
ñ ñ
■
■ ■ SETTINGS ■ IED MODE CONFIG
ó
■ ■ TESTING ■
■ FORCE CONTACT
ò ô
■ INPUTS
■ FORCE CONTACT
ô
■ OUTPUTS
■ PMU
ô
■ TEST VALUES
■ ■ SETTINGS ■ SUBSCRIBE TO
ñ
■ ■ SIMULATION ■ SIMULATED VALUES
■ PUBLISH
ó
■ SIMULATED VALUES

N60-1601-0125-861-1 355
Chapter 9 - Settings

9.4 PRODUCT SETUP

The PRODUCT SETUP menus is where you set up the basic configuration of the relay.

9.4.1 SECURITY
The UR relay provides a large array of security features and options. These are fully described in the Cybersecurity
chapter and will not be repeated here.

9.4.2 DISPLAY PROPERTIES

Setting path: SETTINGS > PRODUCT SETUP > DISPLAY PROPERTIES
■ DISPLAY LANGUAGE: Range: Language depending on order code) Visible
ó
■ PROPERTIES English when language other than English is purchased.
FLASH MESSAGE
ô Range: 0.5 to 10.0 s in steps of 0.1
TIME: 1.0 s
DEFAULT MESSAGE
ô Range: 10 to 900 s in steps of 1
TIMEOUT: 300 s
DEFAULT MESSAGE Range: 25%, 50%, 75%, 100%
ô
INTENSITY: 25 % Visible when a VFD is installed
SCREEN SAVER Range: Disabled, Enabled
ô
FEATURE: Disabled Visible when an LCD is installed
SCREEN SAVER WAIT Range: 1 to 65535 min. in steps of 1
ô
TIME: 30 min Visible when an LCD is installed
CURRENT CUT-OFF
ô Range: 0.002 to 0.020 pu in steps of 0.001
LEVEL: 0.020 pu
VOLTAGE CUT-OFF
ñ Range: 0.1 to 2.0 V secondary in steps of 0.1
LEVEL: 1.0 V

The DISPLAY PROPERTIES sub-menu has the following settings.

LANGUAGE
This setting selects the language used to display settings, actual values, and targets. This setting displays when a
language other than English was purchased, and the range depends on the order code of the relay. For Japanese,
the settings display in Japanese on the graphical front panel, while the keys printed on the panel are in English.
For Japanese and Chinese, up to 10 characters can be input in a field on the graphical front panel, not the usual 20.
If you have a graphical front panel, you can change the language regardless of the language purchased. If you
select a language with which you are unfamiliar and want to switch back to English for example, the menu order
remains the same.
If you change the language after entering user-configured names, such as relay names, the strings are not
translated. For example, a relay name is entered in English, the language is changed to Japanese, and the relay
name remains in English. For this reason it is important to set the language before changing the settings.
You can also select the language in EnerVista under Maintenance > Change Front Panel. The language of the
EnerVista software can be changed under View > Language. Only languages supported by the operating system
can be displayed. For example, for Polish or Japanese, the software needs to be installed on a Polish or Japanese
operating system.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 356
Chapter 9 - Settings

Note:
Restart the relay after changing the LANGUAGE setting

FLASH MESSAGE TIME

Flash messages are status, warning, error, and information messages displayed in response to certain key presses
during settings programming. These messages override any normal messages. Use this setting to change the
duration of flash messages on the display.

DEFAULT MESSAGE TIMEOUT

If the keypad is inactive for a period of time, the relay automatically reverts to a default message. The inactivity time
is modified using this setting to ensure that messages remain on the screen long enough during programming or
reading of actual values. This setting is not supported on the graphical front panel.

DEFAULT MESSAGE INTENSITY

The brightness can be attenuated during default message display. During keypad interrogation, the display always
operates at full brightness. This setting is not supported on the graphical front panel.

SCREEN SAVER FEATURE and SCREEN SAVER WAIT TIME

These settings control the back-lighting for relays with an LCD. When SCREEN SAVER FEATURE is enabled, the
LCD back-lighting turns off after the DEFAULT MESSAGE TIMEOUT followed by the SCREEN SAVER WAIT
TIME, provided that no keys have been pressed and no target messages are active. When a key press occurs or a
target becomes active, the LCD back-lighting turns on. These settings are not supported on the graphical front
panel.

CURRENT CUT-OFF LEVEL

This setting modifies the current cut-off threshold. Very low currents (1 to 2% of the rated value) are very
susceptible to noise. Some customers prefer very low currents to display as zero, while others prefer the current to
display even when the value reflects noise rather than the actual signal. The relay applies a cut-off value to the
magnitudes and angles of the measured currents. If the magnitude is below the cut-off level, it is substituted with
zero. This applies to phase and ground current phasors as well as true RMS values and symmetrical components.
The cut-off operation applies to quantities used for metering, protection, and control, as well as those used by
communications protocols. Note that the cut-off level for the sensitive ground input is 10 times lower than the
CURRENT CUT-OFF LEVEL setting value. Raw current samples available via oscillography are not subject to cut-
off. This setting does not affect the 87L metering cutoff, which is constantly at 0.02 pu.

VOLTAGE CUT-OFF LEVEL

This setting modifies the voltage cut-off threshold. Very low secondary voltage measurements (at the fractional volt
level) can be affected by noise. Some customers prefer these low voltages to be displayed as zero, while others
prefer the voltage to be displayed even when the value reflects noise rather than the actual signal. The relay applies
a cut-off value to the magnitudes and angles of the measured voltages. If the magnitude is below the cut-off level, it
is substituted with zero. This operation applies to phase and auxiliary voltages, and symmetrical components. The
cut-off operation applies to quantities used for metering, protection, and control, as well as those used by
communications protocols. Raw samples of the voltages available via oscillography are not subject to cut-off.
Considerations:

Note:
The Current and Voltage Cut-off levels not only affect the display values, they also affect the actual values used by the
protection and the control elements. Thus, the settings CURRENT CUT-OFF LEVEL and VOLTAGE CUT-OFF LEVEL should
not be changed while relay is in service

N60-1601-0125-861-1 357
Chapter 9 - Settings

The CURRENT CUT-OFF LEVEL and the VOLTAGE CUT-OFF LEVEL are used to determine the metered power
cut-off levels. The power cut-off level is calculated using the following equations.
For Delta connections:
3-phase power cut-off = (Ö3 x CURRENT CUT-OFF LEVEL x VOLTAGE CUT-OFF LEVEL x VT
primary x CT primary) / VT secondary
For Wye connections:
3-phase power cut-off = (3 x CURRENT CUT-OFF LEVEL x VOLTAGE CUT-OFF LEVEL x VT
primary x CT primary) / VT secondary
Per-phase power cut-off = (CURRENT CUT-OFF LEVEL x VOLTAGE CUT-OFF LEVEL x VT primary
x CT primary) / VT secondary
where
VT primary = VT secondary × VT ratio and CT primary = CT secondary × CT ratio.
For example, given the following settings:
● CURRENT CUT-OFF LEVEL: 0.02 pu
● VOLTAGE CUT-OFF LEVEL: 1.0 V
● PHASE CT PRIMARY: 100 A
● PHASE VT SECONDARY: 66.4 V
● PHASE VT RATIO: 208.00 : 1
● PHASE VT CONNECTION: Delta
We have:
CT primary = 100 A
VT primary = PHASE VT SECONDARY x PHASE VT RATIO = 66.4 V x 208 = 13811.2 V
The power cut-off is therefore:
Power cut-off = (CURRENT CUT-OFF LEVEL × VOLTAGE CUT-OFF LEVEL × CT primary × VT
primary)/VT secondary, therefore
Power cut-off = ( Ö3 × 0.02 pu × 1.0 V × 100 A × 13811.2 V) / 66.4 V = 720.5 watts
Any calculated power value below this cut-off does not display. As well, the three-phase energy data do not
accumulate if the total power from all three phases does not exceed the power cut-off.

Note:
Lower the VOLTAGE CUT-OFF LEVEL and CURRENT CUT-OFF LEVEL with care as the relay accepts lower signals as
valid measurements. Unless dictated otherwise by a specific application, we recommend default settings of 0.02 pu for
CURRENT CUT-OFF LEVEL and 1.0 V for VOLTAGE CUT-OFF LEVEL.

9.4.3 CLEAR RELAY RECORDS

Setting path: SETTINGS > PRODUCT SETUP > CLEAR RELAY RECORDS
■ CLEAR CLEAR USER REPORTS: Range: FlexLogic operand
ó
■ RELAY RECORDS Off
CLEAR EVENT RECORDS:
ô Range: FlexLogic operand
Off
CLEAR OSCILLOGRAPHY:
ô Range: FlexLogic operand
Off

N60-1601-0125-861-1 358
Chapter 9 - Settings

CLEAR DATA LOGGER:

ô Range: FlexLogic operand
Off
CLEAR DEMAND:
ô Range: FlexLogic operand
Off
CLEAR ENERGY:
ô Range: FlexLogic operand
Off
RESET UNAUTH ACCESS:
ô Range: FlexLogic operand
Off
CLEAR DIR I/O STATS: Range: FlexLogic operand
ñ
Off Visible only for units with Direct I/O module

RESET UNAUTH ACCESS

This setting Resets the access restriction counter. Selected records can be cleared from user-programmable
conditions with FlexLogic operands. Assigning user-programmable pushbuttons to clear specific rcords is a typical
application for these commands. Since the relay responds to rising edges of the configured FlexLogic operands,
they must be asserted for at least 50 ms to take effect.
Clearing records with user-programmable operands is not protected by the command password. However, user-
programmable pushbuttons are protected by the command password. Thus, if they are used to clear records, the
user- programmable pushbuttons can provide extra security if required.
For example, to assign user-programmable pushbutton 1 to clear demand records, apply the following settings:
1. Assign the clear demand function to pushbutton 1 by making the following change in the SETTINGS >
PRODUCT SETUP > CLEAR RELAY RECORDS menu.
CLEAR DEMAND: PUSHBUTTON 1 ON
2. Set the properties for user-programmable pushbutton 1 by making the following changes in the SETTINGS >
PRODUCT > SETUP > US -PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS > USER PUSHBUTTON 1 menu:
PUSHBUTTON 1 FUNCTION: Self-reset
PUSHBTN 1 DROP-OUT TIME: 0.20 s

9.4.4 COMMUNICATIONS
The UR relay provides a large array of communication features and options. All theory and general information
relating to comunications can be found in the Communications Guide. This setting contains information about the
front panel and Enervista settings only.
All IEC61850 information including the settings has been moved into the Communications Guide.

9.4.4.1 COMMUNICATIONS SETTINGS MENU

Setting path: SETTINGS > PRODUCT SETUP > COMMUNICATIONS

Note:
Not all settings are used for all models

■ COMMUNICATIONS ■ SERIAL PORTS

ó
■ ■
■ NETWORK
ô
■

N60-1601-0125-861-1 359
Chapter 9 - Settings

■ IPv4 ROUTE TABLE

ô
■
■ MODBUS PROTOCOL
ô
■
■ PROTOCOL
ô
■
■ DNP PROTOCOL
ô
■
■ DNP / IEC104
ô
■ POINT LISTS
■ IEC 61850 PROTOCOL
ô
■
■ LEGACY FIXED GOOSE
ô
■
■ WEB SERVER
ô
■ HTTP PROTOCOL
■ TFTP PROTOCOL
ô
■
■ IEC 60870-5-104
ô
■ PROTOCOL
■ EGD PROTOCOL
ô
■
■ IEC103
ô
■ PROTOCOL
■ USB 2.0 PORT
ñ
■

The sub-menus are described in the following sections.

9.4.4.2 SERIAL PORTS

This section does not describe the principles of serial cmmunication. It only describes the required settings. For
further details on serial communication, refer to the Installation and Maintenance chapters of this manual and the
separate Communications Guide.
Setting path: SETTINGS > PRODUCT SETUP > COMMUNICATIONS > SERIAL PORTS
■ SERIAL PORTS RS232 PORT FUNCTION: Range: Disabled, Enabled
ó
■ Enabled
RS232 BAUD
ô Range: 19200, 115200
RATE: 115200 ms
RS485 COM2 PORT
ô Range: Disabled, Enabled
FUNCTION: Enabled
RS485 COM2 BAUD Range: 300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 14400, 19200,
ô
RATE: 19200 28800, 33600, 38400, 57600, 115200 bit/s
RS485 COM2 PARITY:
ô Range: None, Odd, Even
Even
RS485 COM2 RESPONSE
ñ Range: 0 to 1000 ms in steps of 10
MIN TIME: 0 ms

N60-1601-0125-861-1 360
Chapter 9 - Settings

RS232 PORT FUNCTION

This setting enables and disables the RS232 serial port on the front panel. When the port function is enabled, a
standard RS232 serial cable allows a computer running the EnerVista UR Setup software to retrieve, display, and
write settings either individually or collectively, to display status and actual values, to initiate controls, and to retrieve
and display event records, oscillography records, data logger records, and disturbance records. This setting is
applicable to both enhanced and basic front panels.

RS232 BAUD RATE, RS485 COM2 BAUD RATE, and PARITY

This setting sets the COM1 and COM2 Baud rates and parities. It is important that these parameters agree with the
settings used on the computer or other equipment that is connected to these ports. If IEC 60870-103 is chosen as
the protocol, valid baud rates are 9600 and 19200 bit/s, and valid parity is Even.

RS485 PORT FUNCTION

This setting enables and disables the RS485 COM2 serial port on the rear panel. When the port function is
disabled, SCADA (Modbus or IEC103 communications) and other comms on the rear RS485 port are not permitted.

RS485 COM2 RESPONSE MIN TIME

This setting specifies the minimum time before the rear RS485 port transmits after receiving data from a host. This
feature allows operation with hosts that hold the RS485 transmitter active for some time after each transmission.

9.4.4.3 NETWORK
This section does not describe the principles of Ethernet networking topology. It only describes the required
settings. For further details on Ethernet networking, refer to the Installation and Maintenance chapters of this
manual and the separate Communications Guide.
Setting path: SETTINGS > PRODUCT SETUP > COMMUNICATIONS > NETWORK
■ NETWORK PORT 1 PRT1 IP ADDRESS: Range: standard IPV4 address format
ó
■ 127.0.0.1
PRT1 SUBNET IP MASK:
ô Range: standard IPV4 address format
255.0.0.0
PRT1 FUNCTION:
ñ Range: Enabled, Disabled
Enabled

■ NETWORK PORT 2 PRT2 IP ADDRESS: Range: standard IPV4 address format

ó
■ 127.0.0.1
PRT2 SUBNET IP MASK:
ô Range: standard IPV4 address format
255.0.0.0
PRT2 REDUNDANCY: Range: None, Failover, PRP
ô
None Range if no PRP license: None, Failover
PRP MCST ADDR:
ô Range: 01-15-4E-00-01-00 to 01-15-4E-00-01-FF
01154E000100
PRT2 FUNCTION:
ñ Range: Enabled, Disabled
Enabled

■ NETWORK PORT 3 PRT3 IP ADDRESS: Range: standard IPV4 address format

ó
■ 127.0.0.1
PRT3 SUBNET IP MASK:
ô Range: standard IPV4 address format
255.0.0.0

N60-1601-0125-861-1 361
Chapter 9 - Settings

PRT3 FUNCTION:
ñ Range: Enabled, Disabled
Enabled

The NETWORK menu is used to set the Ethernet network parameters. When using more than one Ethernet port,
configure each to belong to a different network or subnet using the IP addresses and mask. Configure the network
IP and subnet settings before configuring the routing settings.

Note:
To obtain a list of all port numbers used, for example for audit purposes, contact GE technical support with substantiating
information, such as the serial number and order code of your device.

The IP addresses are used with the DNP, Modbus/TCP, IEC 61580, IEC 60870-5-104, TFTP, HTTP, and PRP
protocols.
You must use the front panel to change these settings. You can only use EnerVista software to enable or disable the
ports. In the Offline Window area, all settings can be changed except port 2 redundancy (depending on firmware
version).
When using GOOSE, in failover or PRP mode, port 3 configuration in the CID file is ignored. The Port 3
ConnectedAP elements has no meaning, as ports 2 and 3 use the port 2 MAC address, IP address, and mask.

PRT1 (2 or 3) IP ADDRESS
This setting sets the port’s IPv4 address in standard IPV4 format. This setting is valid on port 3 if PRT2
REDUNDANCY is set to None.

PRT1 (2 or 3) SUBNET MASK

This setting sets the port’s IPv4 subnet mask in standard IPV4 format. This setting is valid on port 3 if PRT2
REDUNDANCY is set to None.

PRT1 (2 or 3) FUNCTION
This setting enable/disables network communication on the respective port. When the port function is disabled, the
network traffic on this port is disabled. The PRT2 REDUNDANCY setting has no effect on this functionality. The
change takes effect after restarting the relay.

Note:
If you disable a port, which is used to communicate between the relay and the software, you will break all communication
between the two. If you do this, you must re-enable the port and check the IP and gateway addresses. You must also set the
relay to Programmed.

PRT2 REDUNDANCY
This setting determines whether ports 2 and 3 will operate in redundant or independent mode. If your product
includes PRP, the available options will include PRP in addition to None and Failover. In non-redundant mode,
ports 2 and 3 operate independently with their own MAC, IP, and mask addresses. If REDUNDANCY is set to
Failover, the operation of ports 2 and 3 is as follows:
● Ports 2 and 3 use the port 2 MAC address, IP address, and mask
● The configuration fields for IP address and mask on port 3 are hidden
● Port 3 is in standby mode and does not actively communicate on the Ethernet network but monitors its link to
the Multilink switch. If port 2 detects a problem with the link, communications is switched to Port 3. Port 3 is,
in effect, acting as a redundant or backup link to the network for port 2. Once port 2 detects that the link
between itself and the switch is good and that communication is healthy for five minutes, then switching back
to port 2 is performed. The delay in switching back ensures that rebooted switching devices connected to the

N60-1601-0125-861-1 362
Chapter 9 - Settings

relay, which signal their ports as active prior to being completely functional, have time to completely initialize
themselves and become active. Once port 2 is active again, port 3 returns to standby mode.
If REDUNDANCY is set to PRP, the operation of ports 2 and 3 is as follows:
● Ports 2 and 3 use the port 2 MAC address, IP address, and mask
● The configuration fields for IP address and mask on port 3 are overwritten with those from port 2. This is
visible on the front panel but not displayed in the EnerVista software.
● PRT 2 MCST ADDRESS field is visible
● The port 2 PTP function still uses only port 2 and the port 3 PTP function still uses only port 3. The relay still
synchronizes to whichever port has the best master. When ports 2 and 3 see the same master, as is typically
the case for PRP networks, the port with the better connectivity is used.
Behavior for GOOSE messages is as follows:
● If REDUNDANCY is set to Failover or PRP, in order to transmit a GOOSE message on port 2, the CID file
must be configured to have the corresponding GSE element in both ConnectedAPs S2 and S3. In the
EnerVista software, the TxGOOSE CPU PORT ASSIGNMENT needs to be Ports-1,2,3 to transmit
GOOSE on both ports 1 and 2, or Ports-2,3 to have GOOSE only on port 2, with failover/PRP.
● If REDUNDANCY is set to PRP, the port 2 configured GOOSE message is simultaneously transmitted on
ports 2 and 3.
● If REDUNDANCY is set to Failover and the port 2 link fails, then only the port 2 configured GOOSE
message is transmitted on port 3.

Note:
The two ports must be connected to completely independent LANs with no single point of failure, such as common power
supplies that feed switches on both LANs.

Note:
When REDUNDANCY is set to PRP or Failover and the network path with resolved default gateway is broken, then the
ARP table needs approximately five seconds to rebuild. The layer 2 protocols (GOOSE and PTP) are not affected. However,
the TCP/IP or UDP protocols (MMS connections, DNP3.0, and so on) may require reconnection if their active connection does
not ride through re-transmission frames.

For any changes to this setting to take effect, restart the unit.

PRT2 PRP MCST ADDR

This setting allows you to change the multicast address used by the PRP supervision frames. This setting is
available if REDUNDANCY is set to PRP. All devices in the same PRP network must have the same multicast
address. Choose an address that does not conflict with another multicast protocol.

9.4.4.4 IPV4 ROUTE TABLE

Setting path: SETTINGS > PRODUCT SETUP > COMMUNICATIONS > IPv4 ROUTE TABLE 1
You can configure up to 6 static routes and one default route. The following description shows just the first of the six
static routes.
■ IPv4 ROUTE TABLE ■ DEFAULT IPv4 ROUTE
ó
■ ■
■ IPv4 NETWORK
ô
■ ROUTE 1

In the DEFAULT IPv4 ROUTE menu, you specify the gateway address using the GATEWAY ADDRESS setting.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 363
Chapter 9 - Settings

■ DEFAULT IPv4 ROUTE GATEWAY ADDRESS:

ó Range: standard IPV4 unicast address format
■ 127.0.0.1

In the IPv4 NETWORK menu, you set the individual static routes by specifying the destination address and the
subnet mask as follows:
■ IPv4 NETWORK RT1 DESTINATION:
ó Range: standard IPV4 unicast address format
■ ROUTE 1 127.0.0.1
RT1 NET MASK:
ô Range: standard IPV4 unicast address format
255.0.0.0
RT1 GATEWAY:
ñ Range: standard IPV4 unicast address format
127.0.0.1

Note:
Configure the network IP and subnet settings before configuring the routing settings

9.4.4.5 MODBUS PROTOCOL

Setting path: SETTINGS > PRODUCT SETUP > COMMUNICATIONS > MODBUS PROTOCOL
■ MODBUS PROTOCOL MODBUS SLAVE
ó Range: 1 to 254 in steps of 1
■ ADDRESS: 254
MODBUS TCP PORT
ñ Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1
NUMBER(502): 502

The serial communication ports utilize the Modbus protocol, unless the port is configured for DNP or IEC
60870-5-103 operation. This allows the EnerVista UR Setup software to be used on the port. UR devices operate as
Modbus slave devices only. For more information on the protocol, including the memory map table, see the UR
Family Communications Guide.

MODBUS SLAVE ADDRESS

When using the Modbus protocol on the RS232 port, the relay responds regardless of the MODBUS SLAVE
ADDRESS programmed. For the RS485 port, each device on the serial bus must have a unique slave address from
1 to 254. Address 0 and addresses from 248 and up are reserved by the Modbus protocol specification, and so we
do not recommend their use here. Address 0 is the broadcast address to which all Modbus slave devices listen.
Addresses do not have to be sequential, but no two devices can have the same address or conflicts resulting in
errors will occur. Generally, starting at 1, set each device added to the link to use the next higher address. When
using Modbus TCP/IP, the client must use the programmed MODBUS SLAVE ADDRESS value in the Unit Identifier
field.

MODBUS TCP PORT NUMBER

You can also use Modbus over TCP/IP on any of the Ethernet ports. The listening TCP port 502 is reserved for
Modbus communications, and only in exceptional cases when MODBUS TCP PORT NUMBER is set to any other
port. A MODBUS TCP PORT NUMBER of 0 disables Modbus over TCP/IP, meaning closes the Modbus TCP port.
When the port number is changed to 0, the change takes effect when the relay is restarted. When it is set to 0, use
the front panel or serial port to communicate with the relay.

Note:
Do not set more than one protocol to the same TCP/UDP port number, as this results in unreliable operation of those
protocols.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 364
Chapter 9 - Settings

9.4.4.6 PROTOCOLS & AUTHORITY

Setting path: SETTINGS > PRODUCT SETUP > COMMUNICATIONS > PROTOCOL& AUTHORITY
■ PROTOCOL & SCADA PROTOCOL:
ó Range: DNP 3.0, IEC 60870-5-104, IEC 60870-5-103
■ AUTHORITY DNP 3.0
SFTP PROTOCL:
ô Range: Disabled, Enabled
Enabled
MMS PORT FUNCTION:
ô Range: Disabled, Enabled
Enabled
CID FILE WRITE VIA
ô Range: Disabled, Enabled
MMS: Enabled
IEC 61850 MULTILEVEL
ô Range: Disabled, Enabled
CONTROL: Enabled
IED LOCAL STATUS:
ñ Range: FlexLogic operand
Off

This menu allows selection of one of the following protocols: DNP 3.0, IEC60870-104, or IEC60870-103.

SCADA PROTOCOL
This setting selects the SCADA protocol on which the unit communicates, either DNP3.0, IEC 60870-104 or IEC
60870-103, with DNP being the default. Options depend on order code. For any change to take effect, restart the
unit.
The following table shows the protocols that are operational on the RS232, RS485, and Ethernet ports. It shows all
possible combinations of the protocol and DNP channel port settings.
DNP CHANNEL 1(2)
Protocol RS232 RS485 Ethernet
PORT
Channel 1: Eth TCP
DNP Modbus Modbus DNP, Modbus, IEC 61850
Channel 2: Eth TCP
Channel 1: Eth TCP
DNP Modbus Modbus DNP, Modbus, IEC 61850
Channel 2: none
Channel 1: none
DNP Modbus Modbus DNP, Modbus, IEC 61850
Channel 2: Eth TCP
Channel 1: Eth UDP
DNP Modbus Modbus DNP, Modbus, IEC 61850
Channel 2: none
Channel 1: Eth TCP
DNP Modbus DNP DNP, Modbus, IEC 61850
Channel 2: RS485
Channel 1: Eth TCP
DNP DNP Modbus DNP, Modbus, IEC 61850
Channel 2: RS232
Channel 1: Eth UDP
DNP Modbus DNP DNP, Modbus, IEC 61850
Channel 2: RS485
Channel 1: Eth UDP
DNP DNP Modbus DNP, Modbus, IEC 61850
Channel 2: RS232
Channel 1: RS485
DNP Modbus DNP DNP, Modbus, IEC 61850
Channel 2: Eth TCP
Channel 1: RS232
DNP Modbus DNP, Modbus, IEC 61850 DNP, Modbus, IEC 61850
Channel 2: Eth TCPDNP
Channel 1: RS485
DNP DNP DNP Modbus, IEC 61850
Channel 2: RS232

N60-1601-0125-861-1 365
Chapter 9 - Settings

DNP CHANNEL 1(2)

Protocol RS232 RS485 Ethernet
PORT

Channel 1: RS232
DNP DNP DNP Modbus, IEC 61850
Channel 2: RS485

Channel 1: RS485
DNP Modbus DNP Modbus, IEC 61850
Channel 2: none
IEC 104, Modbus, IEC
IEC 104 Modbus Modbus
61850

IEC 103 Modbus IEC 103 Modbus, IEC 61850

SFTP
This setting enables or disables file transfers to/from the relay by Secure Shell (SSH) and Secure File Transfer
Protocol (SFTP). This setting displays when using IEC 61850 without CyberSentry.

MMS PORT FUNCTION

This setting enables or disables MMS port 102. This setting does not, affect GOOSE operation.

CID FILE WRITE FROM MMS

This setting enables or disables CID file writes from the MMS client.

MULTILEVEL CONTROL
When enabled, control authority from multiple levels (Bay, Station and Remote) are allowed simultaneously based
on Local/Remote status and status authority status. Otherwise only one level has the authority to control, based on
Local/Remote status and status authority status.

Note:
MULTILEVEL CONTROL setting is only available for order codes with the IEC 61850 software option. It is only applicable to
Breaker and Disconnect switch control related logical nodes (XCBR/XSWI and CSWI), which instantiates Loc and LocSta
data objects. For all other controllable data objects in other logical nodes (like virtual inputs in GGIO2) MULTILEVEL
CONTROL setting is not applicable.

IED LOCAL STATUS

This selects an operand, that indicates the relay is in Local or Remote mode. When the operand value is set, the
relay is in Local mode and any commands from remote protocols (IEC 61850) are rejected.

Note:
IED LOCAL STATUS setting is only available for order codes with the IEC 61850 software option. It is applicable for all IEC
61850 commands including Breaker and Disconnect switch controls, and the commands are allowed only when the
FlexOperand assigned to IED LOCAL STATUS setting is at logic “0”. When the FlexOperand assigned to IED Local Status is
at logic “1”, all the control actions from IEC 61850 client are blocked.

9.4.4.7 DNP PROTOCOL

Setting path: SETTINGS > PRODUCT SETUP > COMMUNICATIONS > DNP PROTOCOL
■ DNP PROTOCOL ■ DNP CHANNELS
ó
■ ■ DNP 3.0
DNP ADDRESS:
ô Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1
1

N60-1601-0125-861-1 366
Chapter 9 - Settings

■ DNP NETWORK
ô
■ CLIENT ADDRESSES
DNP TCP/UDP PORT
ô Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1
NUMBER(20000): 20000
DNP UNSOL RESPONSE
ô Range: Disabled, Enabled
FUNCTION: Disabled
DNP UNSOL RESPONSE
ô Range: 0 to 60 s in steps of 1
TIMEOUT: 5 s
DNP UNSOL RESPONSE
ô Range: 1 to 255 in steps of 1
MAX RETRIES: 10
DNP UNSOL RESPONSE
ô Range: 0 to 65519 in steps of 1
DEST ADDRESS: 1
DNP CURRENT SCALE Range: 0.001, 0.01. 0.1, 1, 10, 100, 1000, 10000,
ô
FACTOR: 1 100000, 1000000, 10000000, 100000000
DNP VOLTAGE SCALE Range: 0.001, 0.01. 0.1, 1, 10, 100, 1000, 10000,
ô
FACTOR: 1 100000, 1000000, 10000000, 100000000
DNP POWER SCALE Range: 0.001, 0.01. 0.1, 1, 10, 100, 1000, 10000,
ô
FACTOR: 1 100000, 1000000, 10000000, 100000000
DNP ENERGY SCALE Range: 0.001, 0.01. 0.1, 1, 10, 100, 1000, 10000,
ô
FACTOR: 1 100000, 1000000, 10000000, 100000000
DNP PF SCALE Range: 0.001, 0.01. 0.1, 1, 10, 100, 1000, 10000,
ô
FACTOR: 1 100000, 1000000, 10000000, 100000000
DNP OTHER SCALE Range: 0.001, 0.01. 0.1, 1, 10, 100, 1000, 10000,
ô
FACTOR: 1 100000, 1000000, 10000000, 100000000
DNP CURRENT DEFAULT
ô Range: 0 to 100000000 in steps of 1
DEADBAND: 30000
DNP VOLTAGE DEFAULT
ô Range: 0 to 100000000 in steps of 1
DEADBAND: 30000
DNP POWER DEFAULT
ô Range: 0 to 100000000 in steps of 1
DEADBAND: 30000
DNP ENERGY DEFAULT
ô Range: 0 to 100000000 in steps of 1
DEADBAND: 30000
DNP PF DEFAULT
ô Range: 0 to 100000000 in steps of 1
DEADBAND: 30000
DNP OTHER DEFAULT
ô Range: 0 to 100000000 in steps of 1
DEADBAND: 30000
DNP TIME SYNC IIN
ô Range: 1 to 10080 min. in steps of 1
PERIOD: 1440 min
DNP MESSAGE FRAGMENT
ô Range: 30 to 2048 in steps of 1
SIZE: 240
DNP OBJECT 1
ô Range: 1, 2
DEFAULT VARIATION: 2
DNP OBJECT 2
ô Range: 1, 2, 3
DEFAULT VARIATION: 2
DNP OBJECT 20
ô Range: 1, 2, 5, 6
DEFAULT VARIATION: 1
DNP OBJECT 21
ô Range: 1, 2, 9, 10
DEFAULT VARIATION: 1

N60-1601-0125-861-1 367
Chapter 9 - Settings

DNP OBJECT 22
ô Range: 1, 2, 5, 6
DEFAULT VARIATION: 1
DNP OBJECT 23
ô Range: 1, 2, 5, 6
DEFAULT VARIATION: 1
DNP OBJECT 30
ô Range: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5
DEFAULT VARIATION: 1
DNP OBJECT 32
ô Range: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 7
DEFAULT VARIATION: 1
DNP NUMBER OF PAIRED
ô Range: 0 to 32 in steps of 1
CONTROL POINTS: 0
DNP TCP CONNECTION
ô Range: 10 to 7200 s in steps of 1
TIMEOUT: 120 s
DNP EVENT TIME BASE:
ñ Range: UTC, LOCAL
LOCAL

DNP TCP/UDP PORT NUMBER

This setting is for normal DNP operation. To close the port, set the port number to 0.

DNP UNSOL RESPONSE FUNCTION

This is set to Disabled for RS485 applications since there is no collision avoidance mechanism.

DNP UNSOL RESPONSE TIMEOUT

This sets the time the relay waits for a DNP master to confirm an unsolicited response.

The DNP UNSOL RESPONSE MAX RETRIES

This setting determines the number of times the relay retransmits an unsolicited response without receiving
confirmation from the master; a value of 255 allows infinite re-tries.

DNP UNSOL RESPONSE DEST ADDRESS

This is the DNP address to which all unsolicited responses are sent. The IP address to which solicited responses
are sent is determined by the relay from the current TCP connection or the most recent UDP message. The DNP
scale factor settings are numbers used to scale analog input point values. These settings group the analog input
data into the following types: current, voltage, power, energy, power factor, and other. Each setting represents the
scale factor for all analog input points of that type. For example, if the DNP VOLTAGE SCALE FACTOR setting is
set to 1000, all DNP analog input points that are voltages are returned with values 1000 times smaller (for example,
a value of 72000 V on the relay is returned as 72). These settings are useful when analog input values must be
adjusted to fit within certain ranges in DNP masters. Note that a scale factor of 0.1 is equivalent to a multiplier of 10
(that is, the value is 10 times larger).

DNP DEFAULT DEADBAND

These settings determine when to trigger unsolicited responses containing analog input data. These settings group
the analog input data into the following types: current, voltage, power, energy, power factor, and other. Each setting
represents the default deadband value for all analog input points of that type. For example, to trigger unsolicited
responses from the relay when any current values change by 15 A, the DNP CURRENT DEFAULT DEADBAND
setting is set to 15. Note that these settings are the deadband default values. DNP object 34 points can be used to
change deadband values, from the default, for each individual DNP analog input point.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 368
Chapter 9 - Settings

DNP TIME SYNC IIN PERIOD

This setting determines how often the Need Time Internal Indication (IIN) bit is set by the relay. Changing this time
allows the DNP master to send time synchronization commands more or less often, as required.

DNP MESSAGE FRAGMENT SIZE

This setting determines the size, in bytes, at which message fragmentation occurs. Large fragment sizes allow for
more efficient throughput; smaller fragment sizes cause more application layer confirmations to be necessary, which
provides more robust data transfer over noisy communication channels.

Note:
Check the DNP Points Lists relay web page to view the analog inputs and/or binary inputs points lists. This page can be
viewed with a web browser by entering the IP address of the Ethernet port employed to access the Main Menu, then by
clicking the Device Information Menu item, then the DNP Points Lists item.

DNP OBJECT 1 DEFAULT VARIATION to DNP OBJECT 32 DEFAULT VARIATION

These settings select the DNP default variation number for object types 1, 2, 20, 21, 22, 23, 30, and 32. The default
variation refers to the variation response when variation 0 is requested and/or in class 0, 1, 2, or 3 scans.
The DNP binary outputs typically map one-to-one to IED data points. That is, each DNP binary output controls a
single physical or virtual control point in an IED. DNP binary outputs are mapped to virtual inputs. However, some
legacy DNP implementations use a mapping of one DNP binary output to two physical or virtual control points to
support the concept of trip/close (for circuit breakers) or raise/lower (for tap changers) using a single control point.
That is, the DNP master can operate a single point for both trip and close, or raise and lower, operations. The relay
can be configured to support paired control points, with each paired control point operating two virtual inputs.

DNP NUMBER OF PAIRED CONTROL POINTS

This setting allows configuration of 0 to 64 binary output paired controls. The control points pairing starts from the
highest number of binary outputs available i.e. 128. Points not configured as paired operate on a one-to-one basis.
So if you select a value of 2 for this setting, the pairing starts from the highest number; 128. Control points 128-127
and 126-125 operate in pairs and the rest (1-124) are operated individually.

DNP TCP CONNECTION TIMEOUT

This setting specifies a time delay for the detection of dead network TCP connections. If there is no data traffic on a
DNP TCP connection for greater than the time specified by this setting, the connection is aborted. This frees up the
connection to be re-used by a client.
See the UR Family Communications Guide for more information on DNP.

Note:
For any change to DNP settings, restart the relay.

DNP CHANNELS sub-menu

■ DNP Channels DNP CHANNEL 1 PORT: Range: NONE, COM1 - RS485, COM2 - RS485,
■ ó NONE FRONT PANEL - RS232, NETWORK - TCP,
NETWORK - UDP
DNP CHANNEL 2 PORT: Range: NONE, COM1 - RS485, COM2 - RS485,
ñ
NONE FRONT PANEL - RS232, NETWORK - TCP

The DNP CHANNEL 1 PORT and DNP CHANNEL 2 PORT settings select the communications port assigned to
the DNP protocol for each channel. Once DNP is assigned to a serial port, DNP is the only protocol running on that
port; Modbus or IEC 60870-5-103 are disabled. If DNP is assigned to RS485, the protocol must be set to DNP on
the serial port configuration as well, for the change to take effect. When the DNP CHANNEL <n> PORT setting is

N60-1601-0125-861-1 369
Chapter 9 - Settings

set to Network - TCP, the DNP protocol can be used over TCP/IP on the Ethernet ports. When this value is set to
Network - UDP, the DNP protocol can be used over UDP/IP on channel 1 only. The Front Panel - RS232
value does not apply to the graphical front panel; when selected the DNP client cannot establish a connection on a
USB port.

Note:
Do not set more than one protocol to the same TCP/UDP port number, as this results in unreliable operation of those
protocols.

The DNP ADDRESS setting is the DNP slave address. This number identifies the relay on a DNP communications
link. Assign a unique address to each DNP slave.
The relay can specify a maximum of five clients for its DNP connections. These are IP addresses for the controllers
to which the relay can connect. The settings are defined in the following sub-menu.

DNP NETWORK CLIENT ADDRESS sub-menu

■ DNP Channels CLIENT ADDRESS 1:
ó Range: standard IP address
■ 0.0.0.0
CLIENT ADDRESS 2:
ñ Range: standard IP address
0.0.0.0
CLIENT ADDRESS 3:
Range: standard IP address
0.0.0.0
CLIENT ADDRESS 4:
Range: standard IP address
0.0.0.0
CLIENT ADDRESS 5:
Range: standard IP address
0.0.0.0

9.4.4.8 DNP / IEC 60870-5-104 POINT LISTS

You can configure up to 256 binary and up to 256 analog input points for the DNP protocol, or the MSP and MME
points for IEC 60870-5-104 protocol. The value for each point is user-programmable and can be configured by
assigning FlexLogic operands for binary inputs / MSP points or FlexAnalog parameters for analog inputs / MME
points. The menu is as follows:
Setting path: SETTINGS > PRODUCT SETUP > COMMUNICATIONS > DNP / IEC104 POINT LISTS
■ DNP / IEC104 ■ BINARY INPUT / MSP
ó
■ POINT LISTS ■ POINTS
■ ANALOG INPUT / MME
ô
■ POINTS

You can configure to 256 binary input points for the DNP or IEC 60870-5-104 protocols. The points are configured
by assigning an appropriate FlexLogic operand. See the FlexLogic section for the range of assignable operands.
The menu for the binary input points (DNP) or MSP points (IEC 60870-5-104) follows.
■ BINARY INPUT / MSP POINT: <n>
ó Range: FlexLogic operand
■ POINTS Off

where n is 0 to 255.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 370
Chapter 9 - Settings

You can configure up to 256 analog input points for the DNP or IEC 60870-5-104 protocols. The analog point list is
configured by assigning an appropriate FlexAnalog parameter to each point. See the FlexAnalog Parameters
section for the range of assignable parameters.
The menu for the analog input points (DNP) or MME points (IEC 60870-5-104) follows.
■ ANALOG INPUT / MME POINT: <n>
ó Range: FlexLogic operand
■ POINTS Off

where n is 0 to 255.

Note:
Changes to the DNP / IEC 60870-5-104 point lists take effect when the relay is restarted

Note:
The DNP / IEC 60870-5-104 point lists always begin with point 0 and end at the first Off value. Since DNP / IEC 60870-5-104
point lists must be in one continuous block, any points assigned after the first Off point are ignored.

9.4.4.9 WEB SERVER HTTP PROTOCOL

Setting path: SETTINGS > PRODUCT SETUP > COMMUNICATIONS > WEB SERVER HTTP PROTOCOL
■ WEB SERVER HTTP TCP PORT
ó Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1
■ HTTP PROTOCOL NUMBER(80): 80

The relay contains an embedded web server and can display pages in a web browser. The web pages are
organized as a series of menus that can be accessed starting at the Main Menu. Web pages are read-only and are
available showing IEC 60870-5-104 points lists, Modbus registers, event records, fault reports, and so on. First
connect the relay and a computer to an Ethernet network, then enter the IP address of the relay Ethernet port in a
web browser. To close the port, set the port number to 0.
Any change takes effect when the relay is restarted.

Figure 210: Example of UR web page showing event records

N60-1601-0125-861-1 371
Chapter 9 - Settings

Note:
Do not set more than one protocol to the same TCP/UDP port number, as this results in unreliable operation of those
protocols

9.4.4.10 TFTP PROTOCOL

Setting path: SETTINGS > PRODUCT SETUP > COMMUNICATIONS > TFTP PROTOCOL
■ TFTP PROTOCOL TFTP MAIN UDP PORT
ó Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1
■ NUMBER(69): 69
TFTP DATA UDP PORT 1
ô Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1
NUMBER: 0
TFTP DATA UDP PORT 2
ñ Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1
NUMBER: 0

The Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP) can be used to transfer files from the relay over a network. The relay
operates as a TFTP server. TFTP client software is available from various sources, including Microsoft Windows
NT. The dir.txt file obtained from the relay contains a list and description of all available files, for example event
records and oscillography.
The put function is not available for security reasons. You can enter a get command but not a put command.

TFTP MAIN UDP PORT NUMBER

To close the port, set the port number to 0. Any change takes effect when the relay is restarted.

Note:
Do not set more than one protocol to the same TCP/UDP port number, as this results in unreliable operation of those
protocols.

9.4.4.11 IEC 60870-5-104 PROTOCOL

Setting path: SETTINGS > PRODUCT SETUP > COMMUNICATIONS > IEC 60870-5-104 PROTOCOL
■ IEC 60870-5-104 IEC TCP PORT
ó Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1
■ PROTOCOL NUMBER(2404): 2404
■ IEC NETWORK
ô
■ CLIENT ADDRESSES
IEC COMMON ADDRESS
ô 0 to 65535 in steps of 1
OF ASDU: 0
IEC CYCLIC DATA
ô Range: 1 to 65535 in steps of 1
PERIOD: 60 s
IEC CURRENT DEFAULT
ô Range: 0 to 100000000 in steps of 1
THRESHOLD: 30000
IEC VOLTAGE DEFAULT
ô Range: 0 to 100000000 in steps of 1
THRESHOLD: 30000
IEC POWER DEFAULT
ô Range: 0 to 100000000 in steps of 1
THRESHOLD: 30000
IEC ENERGY DEFAULT
ô Range: 0 to 100000000 in steps of 1
THRESHOLD: 30000
IEC PF DEFAULT
ô Range: 0.00 to 1.00
THRESHOLD: 1.00

N60-1601-0125-861-1 372
Chapter 9 - Settings

IEC OTHER DEFAULT

ô Range: 0 to 100000000 in steps of 1
THRESHOLD: 30000
IEC REDUNDANCY
ô Range: No, Yes
ENABLED: No
IEC EVENT TIME BASE:
ñ Range: Local, UTC
LOCAL

The relay supports the IEC 60870-5-104 protocol. IEC 60870-5-104 is a transmission protocol for network access,
specifically for communication between a control station and substation over a TCP/IP network. The relay can be
used as an IEC 60870-5-104 slave device connected to a maximum of two masters (usually either an RTU or a
SCADA master station). Since the relay maintains two sets of IEC 60870-5-104 data change buffers, ideally no
more than two masters actively communicate with the relay at one time.

IEC TCP PORT NUMBER

This setting sets the TCP port number. To close the port, set the port number to 0. Any change takes effect when
the relay is restarted.

IEC COMMON ADDRESS OF ASDU

This setting sets the ASDU address number. The change takes effect when the relay is restarted.

IEC CYCLIC DATA PERIOD

This setting sets the time of each cycle. The change takes effect when the relay is restarted.

The DEFAULT threshold settings

The default threshold settings are used to determine when to trigger spontaneous responses containing
M_ME_NC_1 analog data. These settings group the analog data into types: current, voltage, power, energy, and
other. Each setting represents the default threshold value for all M_ME_NC_1 analog points of that type. For
example, to trigger spontaneous responses from the relay when any current values change by 15 A, the IEC
CURRENT DEFAULT THRESHOLD setting is set to 15. Note that these settings are the default values of the
deadbands. P_ME_NC_1 (parameter of measured value, short floating point value) points can be used to change
threshold values, from the default, for each individual M_ME_NC_1 analog point. Whenever power is removed and
re-applied, the default thresholds are in effect.

IEC REDUNDANCY
This setting decides whether multiple client connections are accepted or not. If redundancy is set to Yes, two
simultaneous connections can be active at any given time.

IEC Event timebase

This setting sets which time source to use, Local or UTC.

Note:
Do not set more than one protocol to the same TCP/UDP port number, as this results in unreliable operation of those
protocols.

IEC NETWORK CLIENT ADDRESS sub-menu

■ IEC NETWORK CLIENT ADDRESS <n>:
ó Range: standard IPV4 address format
■ CLIENT ADDRESSES 0.0.0.0

where n = 1 to 5

N60-1601-0125-861-1 373
Chapter 9 - Settings

9.4.4.12 IEC 60870-5-103 PROTOCOL

The relay is provided with optional IEC 60870-5-103 communications capability, specified as a software option at
the time of ordering.
Setting path: SETTINGS > PRODUCT SETUP > COMMUNICATIONS > IEC 60870-5-103 PROTOCOL
■ IEC103 IEC103 COMMON
ó Range: 0 to 254 in steps of 1
■ PROTOCOL ADDRESS OF ASDU: 0
IEC103 SYNC TIMEOUT:
ô Range: 1 to 1440 min in steps of 1
1
■ IEC103 INPUTS
ô
■ BINARY
■ IEC103 INPUTS
ô
■ MEASURANDS
■ IEC103 COMMANDS
ô
■

IEC 60870-5-103 is a companion standard to the IEC 60870-5 suite of standards for transmission protocols. It
defines messages and procedures for interoperability between protection equipment and devices of a control
system in a substation for communicating on a serial line.
The IEC 60870-5-103 is an unbalanced (master-slave) protocol for coded-bit serial communication, exchanging
information with a control system. In the context of this protocol, the protection equipment is the slave and the
control system is the master. The communication is based on a point-to-point principle. The master must be able to
interpret the IEC 60870-5-103 communication messages.
The UR implementation of IEC 60870-5-103 consists of the following functions:
● Report binary inputs
● Report analog values (measurands)
● Commands
● Time synchronization
The RS485 port supports IEC 60870-5-103.
The UR Family Communications Guide contains more information on the protocol.

IEC103 COMMON ADDRESS OF ASDU

This setting uniquely defines this relay on the serial line. The ID is an integer between 0 and 254. This ID does not
need to be in sequential order for all stations that communicate with a controller, but we recommend it. Note that
RS485 allows a maximum of 32 slave stations on a communication line, so the entire range of 254 addresses is
never exhausted.

IEC103 SYNC TIMEOUT

This setting defines the time that the relay waits for a synchronization message. The relay synchronizes its clock
using all available sources, with the source synchronizing more frequently overwriting the time of the other sources.
Since the synchronization message received from the IEC 60870-5-103 master is less frequent than IRIG-B, PTP,
or SNTP, its time is overwritten by these three sources, if any of them is active. If the synchronization timeout occurs
and none of IRIG-B, PTP, or SNTP is active, the relay sets the invalid bit in the time stamp of a time-tagged
message.
The settings for the remaining sub-menus are outlined as follows.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 374
Chapter 9 - Settings

IEC 103 INPUTS BINARY sub-menus

■ IEC103 INPUTS ■ POINT <n>:
ó
■ BINARY ■
where n = 0 to 95

■ POINT <n>: POINT <n> FUN

ó Range: 0 to 255 in steps of 1
■ 0
POINT <n> INF
ô Range: 0 to 255 in steps of 1
0
POINT <n> Input
ô Range: FlexLogic operand
Off
where n = 0 to 95

The binary input points are mapped using elements from a list of possible FlexLogic operands. A maximum of 96
binary inputs (points) can be mapped this way.
The IEC 60870-5-103 point list always starts with point 0 and ends at the first Off value. Since the IEC
60870-5-103 point list must be in a continuous block, any points assigned after the first Off point are ignored.
For each defined point, set appropriate values for the Function Type (FUN) and Information Number (INF), which
form the Information Object Identifier field of the ASDU, as defined in IEC 60870-5-103.
The binary input points are sent as Class 1 data. They are sent either as a response to a general interrogation
received from the controller or reported spontaneously. Spontaneous transmission occurs as a response to cyclic
Class 2 requests. If the relay wants to transmit Class 1 data at that time, it demands access for Class 1 data
transmission (ACD=1 in the control field of the response).
For any change to take effect, restart the relay.

IEC 103 INPUTS MEASURANDS sub-menus

■ IEC103 INPUTS ■ ASDU <n>
ó
■ MEASURANDS ■
where n = 1 to 4
In the following, only ASDU 1 is shown.
■ ASDU 1: ASDU 1 TYP:
ó Range: 3 or 9
■ 9
ASDU <n> FUN:
ô Range: 0 to 255 in steps of 1
0
ASDU 1 INF:
ô Range: 0 to 255 in steps of 1
0
ASDU 1 SCAN TOUT:
ô
0
ASDU 1 ANALOG <n>
ô
Off
ASDU 1 ANALOG <n>
ô
FACTOR: 1.000
ASDU 1 ANALOG <n>
ô
OFFSET: 0
where n = 1 to 9

N60-1601-0125-861-1 375
Chapter 9 - Settings

The configuration menu allows a maximum of four ASDUs containing measurands. Measurands are sent as a
response to Class 2 requests, which are cyclic requests coming from the master.

TYPE IDENTIFICATION (TYP)

The configuration field TYP indicates how many measurands are present in the corresponding ASDU. Each ASDU
can take either 4 or 9 measurands maximum, depending on the type identification. For any change to take effect,
restart the relay.

FUNCTION TYPE (FUN) and INFORMATION NUMBER (INF)

These two fields form the Information Object Identifier of the ASDU as defined in IEC 60870-103. For any change to
take effect, restart the relay.

SCAN TIMEOUT (SCAN TOUT)

This is the cyclic period used by the relay to decide when a measurand ASDU is included in a response. The
measurand is sent as response to a Class 2 request when the corresponding timeout expires. The default value 0
means 500 ms.

ANALOG #
This field contains the actual measurand to be sent in the response to the master. The measurands can be mapped
using elements from a list of FlexAnalog operands. The measurands sent are voltage, current, power, power factor,
and frequency. If any other FlexAnalog is chosen, the relay sends 0 instead of its value. Note that the power is
transmitted in kW, not W. Measurands are transmitted as ASDU 3 or ASDU 9 (type identification value set to
measurands I, respectively measurands II).
Each IEC 60870-5-103 measurands list ends at the first Off value. Any measurand assigned after the first Off
value is ignored.
At least one measurand per ASDU must be configured in order to configure the following ASDU. For example, the
user can configure only one measurand for each ASDU, but the user is not allowed to skip ASDU 2 and configure
measurands in ASDU 3.
For any change to take effect, restart the relay.

ANALOG # FACTOR and OFFSET

For each measurand included in the ASDU, a factor and offset also can be configured. The factor and offset allow
for scaling to be performed on measurands. The final measurement sent to the IEC 60870-103 master is then ax +
b, where x is the measurand, a is the multiplying factor and b is the offset. The master has to perform the reversed
operation in order to retrieve the actual value if such scaling is done. By default a = 1 and b = 0, so no scaling is
done if these values are left at their defaults. Examples of when scaling is appropriate are as follows:
● If the measured value contains decimals and it is important to preserve the resolution.
Since the format for transmitting the measurand does not permit decimals, a factor a>1 can be applied before
transmission. For example, a frequency of 59.9Hz can be transmitted as Ft = 10 * F = 10 * 59.9 = 599. In this
case a = 10, b = 0. The master receives a value of 599 and has to divide by 10 to retrieve the real value of
59.9.
● If the measured value is larger than what fits in the format defined in IEC 103.
The format defined in the standard allows for signed integers up to 4095. By offsetting, unsigned integers up
to 4096 + 4095 = 8191 are supported. Scaling using factors <1 may be required in such cases. The calculation
is outlined in the IEC 60870-5-103 chapter of the UR Family Communications Guide. Two examples follow,
where you decide factors a and b.

Example 1
Nominal power Pn = 100 MW = 100000 KW (power is transmitted in KW)
Since P can be both positive and negative:

N60-1601-0125-861-1 376
Chapter 9 - Settings

Transmitted power Pt = (4095/(Pn*2.4)) * P = (4095/(100000 * 2.4) ) * P = 0.017 * P

a = 0.017
b=0
Pt = 0.017 * P
For a max power 100000 KW * 2.4 = 240000 KW, we transmit
Pt = 0.017 * 240000 = 4080
A value above 240 MW is indicated by overflow.

Example 2
Nominal voltage Vn = 500000 V
Since RMS voltage V can be only positive:
Transmitted voltage Vt = (8191/(Vn*2.4)) * V - 4096 = (8191/(500000 * 2.4) ) * V - 4096 = 0.0068 * V -
4096
a = 0.0068
Since the step is in increments of 0.001, we round it at:
a = 0.006
b = -4096
Vt = 0.006 * V - 4096
For max voltage 500000 V * 2.4 = 1200000 V, we transmit
Vt = 0.006 * 1200000 - 4096 = 7200 - 4096 = 3104

IEC 103 COMMANDS sub-menus

■ IEC103 COMMANDS ■ COMMAND <n>
ó
■ ■
where n = 0 to 31
In the following, only COMMAND 0 is shown.
■ COMMAND 0: COMMAND 0 FUN:
ó Range: 0 to 255 in steps of 1
■ 0
COMMAND 0 INF:
ô Range: 0 to 255 in steps of 1
0
COMMAND 0 ON:
ô Range: Virtual input
Off
COMMAND 0 OFF:
ô Range: Virtual input
Off

Commands are received as General Command (Type Identification 20). You can configure the action to perform
when an ASDU command comes.
A list of available mappings is provided on the relay. This includes 128 virtual inputs (see the following table). The
ON and OFF for the same ASDU command can be mapped to different virtual inputs.
Each command is identified by the unique combination made by the function type (FUN) and information number
(INF). If the master sends an ASDU command that does not have the FUN and INF of any configured command,
the relay rejects it.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 377
Chapter 9 - Settings

IEC 103 COMMANDS mapping table

Description Value

Off 0
Virtual Input 1 1
Virtual Input 2 2
... ...
Virtual Input 128 128

For any change to take effect, restart the relay.

9.4.4.13 USB PORT

Setting path: SETTINGS > PRODUCT SETUP > COMMUNICATIONS > USB 2.0
■ USB 2.0 USB DEVICE PORT
ó Range: Disabled, Enabled
■ FUNCTION: Enabled

Note:
This setting applies to the USB port on the graphical front panel

This setting enables/disables the USB port on the graphical front panel. When the port function is enabled, a
standard USB serial cable allows a computer running the EnerVista UR Setup software to retrieve, display, and
write settings either individually or collectively, to display status and actual values, to initiate controls, and to retrieve
and display event records, oscillography records, data logger records, and disturbance records. Installation of the
EnerVista software automatically installs the drivers required to use this USB port.
DNP is not available using the USB port on the graphical front panel.

9.4.5 MODBUS USER MAP

Setting path: SETTINGS > PRODUCT SETUP > MODBUS USER MAP
■ MODBUS USER MAP ADDR 1: 0 n = 1 to 256
ó
■ VALUE: 0 Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1

The Modbus user map provides read-only access for up to 256 registers. The memory map can be read from the
front panel, the UR Family Communications Guide, or in a web browser. For the web browser, enter the IP address
of the Product and click a Modbus Memory Map option.
On the front panel, the address to read a specific Modbus register depends on whether the requested value is a
setting or an actual value.
Up to firmware version 7.8x, the settings and actual values are in the same Modbus table. To obtain a memory map
value, enter its address on the front panel.
Starting in firmware version 7.90, the settings have their own Modbus memory table and the actual values are in
their own table. To obtain a memory map value, use the following sequence:
1. Obtain the hexadecimal Modbus address of the data item. It must have four digits, such as 024A.
2. Prefix the address by 3 for settings or by 4 for actual values.
3. Convert the resulting hexadecimal number to decimal.
4. Enter the resulting number in the first column of the Modbus user map. The corresponding value (if
programmed) displays in second column (VALUE). A value of "0" in subsequent register lines automatically

N60-1601-0125-861-1 378
Chapter 9 - Settings

returns values of Modbus registers having the address of the previous line incremented by 1. These
subsequent addresses are all in the same Modbus table (settings or actual values) as the address that was
entered. An address value of "0" in the initial register means "none" and values of "0" display for all registers.
Different address values can be entered as required in any of the register positions.
Here are two examples of how to add a setting or actual value to the front panel Modbus user map.
To add the setting Phase TOC 1 Pickup to the Modbus user map:
1. Find the address of the setting Phase TOC 1 Pickup, which is 334Eh (334E in hexadecimal format).
2. Prefix this address by 3 to obtain 3334Eh.
3. Convert this value to decimal to obtain 209742 and enter it on the front panel.
To add the actual value SRC 1 Frequency to the Modbus user map:
1. Find the address of the actual value SRC 1 Frequency, which is 1D80h.
2. Prefix this address by 4 to obtain 41D80h.
3. Convert this value to decimal to obtain 269696 and enter it on the front panel.

9.4.6 REAL-TIME CLOCK

Setting path: SETTINGS > PRODUCT SETUP > REAL TIME CLOCK
■ REAL TIME SYNCHRONIZING SOURCE: Range: None, PP/IRIG-B/PTP/Other, IRIG-B/PP/PTP/
ó
■ CLOCK None Other, PP/PTP/IRIG-B/Other, PBM Clock
REAL TIME CLOCK EVENTS:
ô Range: Enabled, Disabled
Disabled
IRIG-B SIGNAL TYPE:
ô Range: None, DC Shift, Amplitude Modulated
None
■ PRECISION TIME
ô
■ PROTOCOL (1588)
■ SNTP PROTOCOL
ô
■
■ LOCAL TIME
ô
■
■ PBM PTP
ñ
■

The relay contains a real time clock (RTC) to create time stamps for communications protocols as well as for
historical data, such as event records and oscillography. When the relay restarts, the RTC initializes from an
onboard clock (backed up by supercapacitor for TL and TH models, or battery for SL and SH models). The RTC has
an accuracy of approximately ±1 minute per month (~23 ppm). Once the RTC is synchronized with the Precision
Time Protocol (PTP), IRIG-B, or SNTP, its accuracy approaches that of the synchronizing time delivered to the
relay. While the RTC is not synchronized via PTP or IRIG-B, or the relay determines that it has an offset possibly
greater than 10 μs from the international time standard, the CLOCK UNSYNCHRONIZED FlexLogic operand is
activated. When channel asymmetry function is used, the relay’s real time clock must be synchronized to an
external time source using PTP or IRIG-B, typically from a global positioning system (GPS) receiver.

SYNCHRONIZING SOURCE
This setting is shown when the relay includes the IEEE 1588 software option. The setting configures the priority
sequence of the time synchronization source, to determine which of the available external time sources to use for
time synchronization. A setting value of None causes the RTC and the synchrophasor clock to free-run, and the
clock can be changed from the front panel or from communications protocols. A setting value of PP/IRIG-B/PTP/
Other, IRIG-B/PP/PTP/Other, or PP/PTP/IRIG-B/Other causes the relay to track the first source named
that is enabled and operational, or free-run if none of these are available. Here, PP means a time source that is

N60-1601-0125-861-1 379
Chapter 9 - Settings

strictly compliant with PP, PTP means a time source that is not strictly compliant with PP, and Other means any
less precise source (SNTP, IEC 103, IEC 104, Modbus, or DNP). When a time source fails or recovers, the relay
automatically transfers synchronization as required by this setting.
Selecting PBM Clock causes the relay to use the time source from any non-HardFiber Process Bus Module clock.
If the Process Bus Module PTP FUNCTION setting is enabled and PTP grandmaster is available in the process bus
network, the Process Bus Module clock is synchronized to the PTP grandmaster. If this is not the case, the Process
Bus Module clock free-runs. A relay can use a synchronizing source either from the real-time clock (main CPU) or a
Process Bus Module.
Note that a relay does not need to be time synchronized to accept the sampled values. All the elements (protection,
control, monitoring, logic, and so on) in the UR (except Line Current Differential element) remain fully functional
without requiring any external synchronizing source for the UR, as long as all the sampled values subscribed by the
relay are synchronized according to the Settings > Process Bus Module > General > SmpSynch Check setting
and pass the other acceptance criteria as defined in Settings > Process Bus Module > SV Stream Config >
Logic.

Note:
Some UR applications like oscillography, event recorder, and datalogger use the real-time clock for time-stamping.

If clock synchronization is lost, the Line Current Differential function is blocked. All other elements remain functional.
When the relay does not have the IEEE 1588 software option and this setting does not display, it uses IRIG-B when
enabled and operational. If IRIG-B is not available the it uses SNTP (if configured). If SNTP is not available it free-
runs, unless the clock is changed from the front panel or from communications protocols.
For the Other protocols, whenever a time synchronization message is received through any of the active protocols,
the clock updates. However, given that IEC 60870-5-103, IEC 60870-5-104, Modbus, and DNP are low-accuracy
time synchronization methods, avoid their use for synchronization when better accuracy time protocols, such as
IRIG-B and PTP, are available. If IRIG-B or PTP is used to update the relay clock, the other protocols (such as
SNTP) are prevented from being used to update, even if active.
See the COMMANDS > SET DATE AND TIME menu section of this manual to manually set the RTC.

Note:
When 1 ms accuracy is required for events, oscillography, time stamping, synchrophasors, and 87L asymmetry with respect
to the master clock, the PTP clock needs to be connected to the CPU of a relay. The 1 ms accuracy cannot be maintained if
the CPU is synchronized through the Process Bus Module due to a delay up to 2 ms in transmitting a time stamp from the
Process Bus Module to a CPU.

REAL TIME CLOCK EVENTS

This setting allows changes to the date and/or time to be captured in the event record. The event records the RTC
time before the adjustment. A Date/Time Changed event is generated when:
● The real time clock changed from SNTP/PTP/IRIG-B and the time difference is more than one second
● The real time clock changed from the front panel or via Modbus register. The relay always generates this
event regardless of the time difference.
● The Daylight Saving Time (DST) setting gets enabled and the current relay time is already in the DST zone
● The real time clock enters or leaves DST

IRIG-B SIGNAL TYPE

To enable IRIG-B synchronization, the input IRIG-B SIGNAL TYPE must be set to DC Shift or Amplitude
Modulated. Make this setting None to disable IRIG-B synchronization. When IRIG-B is enabled and active, clock
synchronization by communication protocols DNP, IEC 60870-5-103 or IEC 60870-5-104 is blocked. Clock
synchronization from the front panel and over Modbus is always enabled.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 380
Chapter 9 - Settings

Clocks can be synchronized locally among several relays using the computer time. When using a time source, such
as IRIG-B, the time is overwritten eventually by the time source. To synchronize clocks among UR devices:
1. In the EnerVista software, expand the main menu in the Online Window area and select the Synchronize
Devices entry. The software prompts to acknowledge any offline devices.
2. Click the Synchronize Devices button at the top of the window, and confirm the action at the prompt. The
devices adopt the time of the computer being used.
To configure and enable PTP and/or SNTP, or to set local time parameters (for example time zone, daylight
savings), use the sub-menus described in the following sections.
The relay supports the adjustment of real-time clock for the leap second (addition or removal of a leap second) per
applicable standards, when the UR is synchronized using PTP or IRIG-B. The Flexlogic operand LEAP SECOND
DETECTED gets asserted for 1 second when leap second adjustment is made and event is recorded in the events
log. The following functions are affected by the leap second time adjustment:
● Real-time clock
● Synchrophasors publishing and Comtrade recording
● Regular transient recorder Comtrade and data logger Comtrade.
● Event Logger

9.4.6.1 PRECISION TIME PROTOCOL (1588)

Setting path: SETTINGS > PRODUCT SETUP > REAL TIME CLOCK > PRECISION TIME PROTOCOL (1588)
■ PRECISION TIME STRICT POWER PROFILE:
ó Range: Enabled, Disabled
■ PROTOCOL (1588) Disabled
PTP DOMAIN NUMBER:
ô Range: 0 to 255
0
PTP VLAN PRIORITY:
ô Range: 0 to 7
4
PTP VLAN ID:
ô Range: 0 to 4095
0
■ PTP PORT <n>
ñ
■

where n = 1 to 3
The following sub-menu for PTP PORT <n> is shown below:

Sub-menu PTP PORT 1

■ PTP PORT 1 PORT 1 PTP FUNCTION:
ó Range: Enabled, Disabled
■ Disabled
PORT 1 PATH DELAY ADDER:
ô Range: 0 to 60000 ns in steps of 1
0 ns
PORT 1 PATH DELAY
ñ ASYMMETRY: Range: –1000 to +1000 ns in steps of 1
0 ns

The relay provides optional Precision Time Protocol (PTP) capability. This feature is specified as the IEEE 1588
software option at the time of ordering.
The relay supports the Precision Time Protocol (PTP) specified in IEEE Std 1588 2008 using the Power Profile (PP)
specified in IEEE Std C37.238 2017. This enables the relay to synchronize to the international time standard over
an Ethernet network that implements PP.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 381
Chapter 9 - Settings

The relay can be configured to operate on some PTP networks that are not strictly PP compliant. Time accuracy
can be less than specified for a PP network. Tolerated deviations from strict PP include:
● Missing declaration of PP compliance in the messages
● Connection to a network device that does not support the PTP peer delay mechanism
● Jitter substantially greater than 1 μs in received event messages
● Certain non-compliant announce and sync message update rates
The relay implements PTP according to IEEE Std 1588 2008 and the equivalent IEC 61588:2009(E), sometimes
referred to as version 2 PTP. It does not support version 1 of the standard.
PTP is a protocol that allows multiple clocks in a network to synchronize with one another. It permits
synchronization accuracies better than 1 ns, but this requires that each and every component in the network can
achieve very high levels of accuracy and a very high baud rate, faster than normally used for relay communications.
When operating over a generic Ethernet network, time errors can amount to 1 ms or more. PP is a profile of PTP
which specifies a limited subset of PTP suitable for use in power system protection, control, automation, and data
communication applications, and thereby facilitates interoperability between different vendor’s clocks and switches.
PP specifies a worst-case delivered time error of less than 1 μs over a 16-hop network.
In a PTP system and in a PP system, the clocks automatically organize themselves into a master-slave
synchronization hierarchy with the best clock available making itself the 'grandmaster' at the top of the hierarchy. All
other clocks make themselves slaves and track the grandmaster. Typically the grandmaster clock receives its time
from GPS satellites or some other link to the international time standard. If the grandmaster fails, the next best clock
available in the domain assumes the grandmaster role. When a clock on start-up discovers that it is better than the
present grandmaster, it adopts the grandmaster role and the previous grandmaster reverts to slave. The
qualification mechanism accepts a potential master clock as a new grandmaster, when in a four-second interval it
has received three announce messages from it, all better than the present grandmaster clock and better than any
other announce in this interval.
Time messages issued by the grandmaster are delayed as they pass through the network both due to the finite
speed of the signal in the interconnecting fiber or wire, and due to processing delays in the Ethernet switches. Each
clock and switch implementing PP measures the propagation delay to each of its PP neighbors, and compensates
for these delays in the time received. Each network device implementing PP measures the processing delay it
introduces in each time message and compensates for this delay in the time it transmits. As a result, the time
delivered to end-devices such as the relay, are virtually identical to the grandmaster time. If one of the network
devices in the hierarchy does not fully implement PP, the associated propagation delay and/or latency may not be
compensated for, and the time received at the end-device can be in error by more than 100 μs.
The following settings are available for configuring the relay for PTP. The PTP menu displays only when the option
is purchased.

STRICT POWER PROFILE

Power profile (IEEE Std C37.238 2017) requires that the relay only selects a clock as a grandmaster, which is
compliant with PP. This means the delivered time has a worst-case error of ±1 μs, and the peer delay mechanism is
implemented. With the strict power profile setting enabled, the relay only selects as master the clocks displaying the
IEEE_C37_238 identification codes. It uses a port only when the peer delay mechanism is operational. With the
strict power profile setting disabled, the relay uses clocks without the power profile identification when no power
profile clocks are present, and uses ports, even if the peer delay mechanism is non-operational. This setting applies
to all of the relay’s PTP-capable ports.

PTP DOMAIN NUMBER

Set this setting to the domain number of the grandmaster-capable clock(s). A network can support multiple time
distribution domains, each distinguished with a unique domain number. More commonly, there is a single domain
using the default domain number zero. This setting applies to all of the relay’s PTP-capable ports.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 382
Chapter 9 - Settings

PTP VLAN PRIORITY

This setting selects the value of the priority field in the 802.1Q VLAN tag in request messages issued by the relay’s
peer delay mechanism. In compliance with PP, the default VLAN priority is 4, but we recommend you set it to 7 in
accordance with PTP. Depending on the characteristics of the device to which the relay is linked directly, VLAN
Priority may have no effect. This setting applies to all of the relay’s PTP-capable ports.

PTP VLAN ID
This setting selects the value of the ID field in the 802.1Q VLAN tag in request messages issued by the relay’s peer
delay mechanism. It is provided in compliance with PP. As these messages have a destination address that
indicates they are not to be bridged, their VLAN ID serves no function, and so can be left at its default value.
Depending on the characteristics of the device to which the relay is linked, VLAN ID may have no effect. This
setting applies to all of the relay’s PTP-capable ports.
The settings in the sub-menu PTP PORT <n> are now described

PTP PORT <n> FUNCTION

This setting enables or disables the PTP function on the port.

PTP PORT <n> PATH DELAY ADDER

This setting sets the time compensation for the path delay. The time delivered by PTP is advanced by the set time
value prior to the time being used to synchronize the relay’s real time clock. This is to compensate for time delivery
delays not compensated for in the network. In a fully compliant PP network, the peer delay and the processing
delay mechanisms compensate for all the delays between the grandmaster and the relay. In such networks, make
this setting zero. In networks containing one or more switches and/or clocks that do not implement both of these
mechanisms, not all delays are compensated, so the time of message arrival at the relay is later than the time
indicated in the message. This setting can be used to approximately compensate for this delay. However, as the
relay is not aware of network switching that dynamically changes the amount of uncompensated delay, there is no
setting that always and completely corrects for uncompensated delay. A setting can be chosen that reduces the
worst-case error to half of the range between minimum and maximum uncompensated delay, if these values are
known.

PTP PORT <n> PATH DELAY ASSYMMETRY

This setting corresponds to delayAsymmetry in PTP, which is used by the peer delay mechanism to compensate
for any difference in the propagation delay between the two directions of a link. Except in unusual cases, the two
fibers are of essentially identical length and composition, so make this setting zero. In unusual cases where the
length of the link is different in different directions, set this setting to the number of nanoseconds the Ethernet
propagation delay to the relay is longer than the mean of path propagation delays to and from the relay. For
instance, if it is known say from the physical length of the fibers and the propagation speed in the fibers that the
delay from the relay to the Ethernet switch it is connected to is 9000 ns and that the delay from the switch to the
relay is 11000 ns, then the mean delay is 10000 ns, and the path delay asymmetry is 11000 - 10000 = +1000 ns.

9.4.6.2 SNTP PROTOCOL

Setting path: SETTINGS > PRODUCT SETUP > REAL TIME CLOCK > SNTP PROTOCOL
■ SNTP PROTOCOL SNTP FUNCTION:
ó Range: Enabled, Disabled
■ Disabled
SNTP SERVER1 IP
ô Range: standard IP address format
ADDR: 127.0.0.1
SNTP SERVER2 IP
ô Range: standard IP address format
ADDR: 127.0.0.1
SNTP SERVER1 UDP
ô Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1
PORT: 123

N60-1601-0125-861-1 383
Chapter 9 - Settings

SNTP SERVER2 UDP

ñ Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1
PORT: 123

The relay supports the Simple Network Time Protocol specified in RFC-2030. With SNTP, the relay can obtain clock
time over an Ethernet network. The relay acts as an SNTP client to receive time values from redundant SNTP/NTP
servers, usually a dedicated product using a GPS receiver to provide an accurate time. One or two SNTP servers
can be used; use of both servers for redundancy is recommended but not required.
To use SNTP, enable the function and set the IP addresses of SNTP SERVER1 IP ADDR and SNTP SERVER2 IP
ADDR. The relay attempts to obtain time values from server 1. If server 1 is not available the relay tries server 2.
Since many time values are obtained and averaged, it generally takes three to four minutes until the relay clock is
closely synchronized with the SNTP/NTP server. It can take up to 20 minutes for the relay to signal an SNTP self-
test error if the server is offline, depending on the number and SNTP server modes. Broadcast mode timeout is 10
minutes and unicast timeout is 80 seconds (corresponds to three unicast request retries).

SNTP FUNCTION
Enables or disables the SNTP feature on the relay.

SNTP SERVER1 IP ADDR

This sets the SNTP Server 1 IP address. If SERVER1 SNTP server is set to 127.0.0.1, the relay considers the
SERVER1 SNTP server to be not configured. To use SERVER1 SNTP in broadcast mode, set the SNTP SERVER1
IP ADDR setting to "0.0.0.0" The relay SNTP client then listens to SNTP messages sent to the broadcast address
for the subnet. The relay waits up to 18 minutes (>1024 seconds) without receiving an SNTP broadcast message
before switching to the alternate channel.

SNTP SERVER2 IP ADDR

This sets the SNTP Server 2 IP address. The relay uses this address to contact an SNTP/NTP server if SERVER1
channel fails or is not reachable. The operation of SNTP server is the same as described for SNTP 1 server.

SNTP SERVER1 UDP PORT

This setting is 123 for normal SNTP operation. If SERVER1 SNTP is not required, close the port by changing this
setting to zero.

SNTP SERVER2 UDP PORT

This setting is 123 for normal SNTP operation. If SERVER2 SNTP is not required, close the port by changing this
setting to zero.

Note:
Do not set more than one protocol to the same TCP/UDP port number, as this results in unreliable operation of those
protocols.

Note:
If SERVER1 IP ADDR and UDP PORT settings match the SERVER2 IP ADDR and UDP PORT settings, the relay considers
only the SERVER1 SNTP server as being configured and generates an SNTP Failure error message. The failure message
also displays when both servers are unavailable.

9.4.6.3 LOCAL TIME

Setting path: SETTINGS > PRODUCT SETUP > REAL TIME CLOCK > LOCAL TIME
■ LOCAL TIME LOCAL TIME OFFSET FROM UTC:
ó Range: –24.0 to 24.0 hr in steps of 0.5
■ 0.0 hr

N60-1601-0125-861-1 384
Chapter 9 - Settings

DAYLIGHT SAVINGS TIME:

ô Range: Disabled, Enabled
Disabled
DST START MONTH:
ô Range: January to December (all months)
January
DST START DAY:
ô Range: Sunday to Saturday (all days of the week)
Sunday
DST START DAY INSTANCE:
ô Range: First, Second, Third, Fourth, Last
First
DST START HOUR:
ô Range: 0:00 to 23:00 in steps of one hour
2:00
DST STOP MONTH:
ô Range: January to December (all months)
January
DST STOP DAY:
ô Range: Sunday to Saturday (all days of the week)
Sunday
DST STOP DAY INSTANCE:
ô Range: First, Second, Third, Fourth, Last
First
DST STOP HOUR:
ñ Range: 0:00 to 23:00 in steps of one hour
2:00

The relay maintains two times: local time and Universal Coordinated Time (UTC). Local time can be provided by
IRIG-B signals. UTC time is provided by SNTP servers.
The real-time clock (RTC) and time stamps reported in historical records and communication protocols may be
incorrect if the Local Time settings are not properly configured.
See the IRIG-B section in the Installation chapter for guidance on these settings when using an IRIG-B source that
sets the IRIG-B control bits according to IEEE Std 1344-1995.

LOCAL TIME OFFSET FROM UTC

This setting is used to specify the local time zone offset from UTC (Greenwich Mean Time) in hours. Time zones in
the eastern hemisphere have positive values; time zones in the western hemisphere have negative values. A value
of zero causes the relay to use UTC for local time. This setting has two uses. When the system RTC is
synchronized with a communications protocol providing only local time or it is free-running, the offset setting is used
to calculate UTC from the local time these provide. When the RTC is synchronized with a communications protocol
providing only UTC (such as PTP or SNTP), the time offset setting is used to determine local time from the UTC
provided. PTP ALTERNATE_TIME_OFFSET_INDICATOR TLVs are not used to calculate local time.

DAYLIGHT SAVINGS TIME

This setting enables or disables daylight saving time.

DST settings
You use these settings to allow the relay to follow the DST rules of the local time zone. Note that when IRIG-B time
synchronization is active, the local time in the IRIG-B signal contains any daylight savings time offset and so the
DST settings are ignored.
Note that the following items do not include the DST:
● Time of Day Timer Start Time
● Time of Day Timer Stop Time
● Event Recorder Last Cleared Date
● Source x Demand VAR Maximum Date
● Source x Demand WATT Maximum Date

N60-1601-0125-861-1 385
Chapter 9 - Settings

● Source x Demand VA Maximum Date

● Source x Demand Ia Maximum Date
● Source x Demand Ib Maximum Date
● Source x Demand Ic Maximum Date
● PMU x Last Cleared Date
● PMU One-Shot Time
● Data Logger Newest Time
● Data Logger Oldest Time
● Oscillography Last Cleared Date
● Last Settings Change Date
● User Programmable Fault Report Cleared Date
● Digital Counter x Frozen Time Stamp
● HIZ RMS Capture x Time
● HIZ Capture x Time.

9.4.6.4 PBM PTP

Setting path: SETTINGS > PRODUCT SETUP > REAL TIME CLOCK > PBM PTP
■ PBM PTP PTP FUNCTION:
ó Range: Disabled, Master-Slave, Slave-only
■ Disabled
PTP PROFILE:
ô Range: Power Utility Profil, Power Profile
Power Utility Profil
PTP DOMAIN NUMBER:
ô Range: 0 to 255
93
PTP VLAN PRIORITY:
ô Range: 0 to 7
4
PTP VLAN ID:
ô Range: 0 to 4094
0
PTP MASTER PRIO1:
ô Range: 0 to 255
128
PTP MASTER PRIO2:
ô Range: 0 to 255
128
■ Port <n>a
ô
■
■ Port <n>a
ñ
■

where n = 1 to 4.
A different time source is set for the Process Bus Module. The Process Bus Module supports the Precision Time
Protocol (PTP) as PTP master and slave functionality. The PTP state of each port is determined by the PTP settings
and grandmaster clock availability on the local network. Time synchronization supports IEEE 1588 PTPv2.

PBM PTP configuration

The relay supports IEEE 1588 PTPv2 as PTP Slave or PTP Master on its Process Bus Module ports. It can be
supplied with an external RTC clock from the main CPU ports (station bus ports), the Process Bus Module ports, or
both. It utilizes one of the two clocks depending upon the configuration of the synchronization source and PTP
function as follows:

N60-1601-0125-861-1 386
Chapter 9 - Settings

To use an external PTP Grand Master clock from the Process Bus Module port (UR acts as PTP Slave only),
configure the following settings:
● SETTINGS > PRODUCT SETUP > REAL TIME CLOCK > SYNCRONIZING SOURCE = PBM clock
● SETTINGS > PRODUCT SETUP > REAL TIME CLOCK > PBM PTP > PTP FUNCTION = Slave-only
With this configuration, the relay RTC will use the clock from the Process Bus Module port. For ensuring full
functionality of the line current differential element including channel asymmetry compensation, this combination of
settings is not recommended. If channel asymmetry is enabled with this combination of settings, the line current
differential element is permanently blocked as indicated by the operand 87L DIFF BLOCKED. For the full and
proper functionality of the line current differential element, the PTP clock available at Station bus/CPU port should
be used as described later in this section.
If the SETTINGS > PRODUCT SETUP > REAL TIME CLOCK > SYNCRONIZING SOURCE setting is PBM clock
and the SETTINGS > PRODUCT SETUP > REAL TIME CLOCK > PBM PTP > PTP FUNCTION setting is
disabled, the RTC clock free-runs.
To use an external PTP Grand Master clock from the Process Bus Module port (UR in PTP Slave mode) or to
enable the relay as PTP Master on its Process Bus Module ports, configure the following settings:
● SETTINGS > PRODUCT SETUP > REAL TIME CLOCK > SYNCRONIZING SOURCE = PBM clock
● SETTINGS > PRODUCT SETUP > REAL TIME CLOCK > PBM PTP > PTP FUNCTION = Master-Slave
With this configuration, the relay RTC uses the clock from the Process Bus Module port.
To use an external clock through a main CPU port (PTP Slave, IRIG-B, other source) and to enable the relay as
PTP Master on its Process Bus Module ports, configure the following settings:
● SETTINGS > PRODUCT SETUP > REAL TIME CLOCK > SYNCRONIZING SOURCE = PP/IRIG-B/PTP/
Other, or IRIG-B/PP/PTP/Other, or PP/PTP/IRIG-B/Other
● SETTINGS > PRODUCT SETUP > REAL TIME CLOCK > PBM PTP > PTP FUNCTION = Master-Slave,
or Slave, or Disabled
With this configuration, the relay RTC uses the clock from the main CPU port.

Note:
Some UR applications like oscillography, event recorder, and datalogger use the real-time clock for time-stamping.

In all of these scenarios, when the Grand Master clock is not available through a CPU port and/or Process Bus
Module, all the elements except the Line Current Differential element, remain functional without requiring any
external synchronizing source for the relay, as long as all the sampled values subscribed by the relay are
synchronized according to the setting defined in SETTINGS > PROCESS BUS MODULE > GENERAL >
SMPSYNCH CHECK and pass the other acceptance criteria.
The settings are as follows:

PTP FUNCTION
This setting sets the source for time synchronization for the Process Bus Module. When disabled, PTP is disabled
on all ports of the Process Bus Module. When set to Master-Slave, the Process Bus Module acts as a PTP slave
when a grandmaster clock is available in the communication path. If no better clock than its own clock is available in
the communication path, the module switches to master mode and provides the grandmaster functionality by
sending Announce frames and other supporting PTP Master frames.
When set to Slave-only, the Process Bus Module acts as a PTP slave ordinary clock if a grandmaster clock is
available in the network. If no grandmaster clock is available in the communication path, the module continues to
wait for the Announce messages.
When PTP is enabled but no grand master is available on any of the Process Bus Module ports, PB PTP Failure
events are generated.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 387
Chapter 9 - Settings

To view the synchronizing source, see the setting ACTUAL VALUES >PB MODULE > TIME SYNC > SYNC
SOURCE.

PTP PROFILE
This specifies the profile to be used for PTP Master communication. The Power Utility Profile option relates to IEC
61850-9-3, while the Power Profile option relates to IEEE C37.238 2017. When the Process Bus Module PTP is in
the slave state, this setting has no effect. As a slave, the Process Bus Module accepts both the Power Profile and
the Power Utility Profile.

PTP DOMAIN NUMBER

This sets the PTP domain number. Set this to the domain number of the grandmaster-capable clock(s) to
synchronize to. A network can support multiple time distribution domains, each distinguished with a unique domain
number. The Power Utility Profile recommends 93 as the value for the domain number.

PTP VLAN PRIORITY

This setting selects the value of the priority field in the 802.1Q VLAN tag in PTP request messages issued by the
relay.

PTP VLAN ID
This setting selects the value of the ID field in the 802.1Q VLAN tag in PTP request messages issued by the relay.
As these messages have a destination address that indicates they are not to be bridged, their VLAN ID serves no
function, and so the setting can be left at its default value. Depending on the characteristics of the device to which
the relay is directly linked, VLAN ID can have no effect.

PTP MASTER PRIO1

Priority1 is used in the execution of the best master clock algorithm and lower values take precedence. The
operation of the best master clock algorithm selects clocks from a set with a lower value of priority1 over clocks
from a set greater than priority1. The setting values Priority1 and Priority2 decide when the UR Process Bus Module
ports are selected as grandmaster clock. In a single LAN, we recommend the following:
● Set PTP MASTER PRIO1 higher than the actual grandmaster, so that the grandmaster(s) takes precedence
over the relay
● Set PTP MASTER PRIO1 the same as all the Process Bus Module ports participating in one communication
path
● Use PTP MASTER PRIO2 to further prioritize the Process Bus Module ports in the network. The relay with
lower value is selected as best master when Priority1, clockClass, clockAccuracy, and
scaledOffsetLogVariance are the same. The setting is editable in the software when the PTP FUNCTION
setting is Master-Slave.

PTP MASTER PRIO2

Priority2 is used in the execution of the best master clock algorithm and lower values take precedence. If the
operation of the best master clock algorithm fails to order the clocks based on the values of priority1, clockClass,
clockAccuracy, and scaledOffsetLogVariance, the priority2 attribute allows the creation of up to 256
priorities to further fine-tune the selection of best clocks. If Priority2 is configured the same for two URs in the same
communication path, best master clock algorithm uses clockIdentity to resolve the tie-breaker. The setting is
editable in the software when the PTP FUNCTION setting is Master-Slave.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 388
Chapter 9 - Settings

Note:
Independent of the NETWORK CONFIG and PTP FUNCTION settings, the enabled transceiver ports on the Process Bus
Module operate in stateless transparent clock mode. We recommend always setting the NETWORK CONFIG setting to match
with the network topology to avoid unnecessary data storms. For example, if the PRP network has multiple relays connected
on a PRP LAN and if the NETWORK CONFIG setting is misconfigured to Independent, PTP messages other than PDelay
messages are forwarded between the connected ports, which can create a PTP data storm.

Sub-menus for ports 1a to 4b

The PBM PTP menu also has sub-menus for eight different port settings; Port 1a, 1b, 2a, 2b, 3a, 3b, 4a and 4b.
Only one is shown here.
■ Port 1a PATH DELAY ADDER:
ó Range: 0 to 60000 ns in steps of 1
■ 0 ns
PATH DELAY ASYMMETRY:
ô Range: -1000 to +1000 ns in steps of 1
0 ns

These setting are editable in the software when the PTP FUNCTION setting is not disabled.
Up to eight ports display here, depending on the Process Bus Module.
Default port assignments for the Process Bus Module are as follows:
● Parallel Redundancy Protocol (PRP) — Ports 1a and 1b are enabled
● High-Availability Seamless Redundancy (HSR) — Ports 1a and 1b are enabled
● Dual HSR — Ports 1a and 1b support HSR-1, and ports 3a and 3b support HSR-2
● INDEPENDENT — Ports 1a to 4b are enabled
Port availability by order code is as follows:
● 85 — Ports 1a and 1b, or 3a and 3b
● 86 — All eight ports
● 87 — All eight ports
For the following two settings, there is no dependency on the NETWORK CONFIG setting. For order code 85, ports
1a, 1b, 3a, and 3b settings are available. For order codes 86 and 87, all the port settings are available. Configure
these settings as per your network. For example, for order code 85, while ports 1a, 1b, 3a, and 3b settings display,
configure ports 1a and 1b when your network uses these two ports.

PATH DELAY ADDER

This setting sets the time compensation for the path delay. The time delivered by PTP is advanced by the set time
value prior to the time being used to synchronize the relay’s real time clock. This is to compensate for time delivery
delays not compensated for in the network. In a fully compliant PP network, the peer delay and the processing
delay mechanisms compensate for all the delays between the grandmaster and the relay. In such networks, make
this setting zero. In networks containing one or more switches and/or clocks that do not implement both of these
mechanisms, not all delays are compensated, so the time of message arrival at the relay is later than the time
indicated in the message. This setting can be used to approximately compensate for this delay. However, as the
relay is not aware of network switching that dynamically changes the amount of uncompensated delay, there is no
setting that always and completely corrects for uncompensated delay. A setting can be chosen that reduces the
worst-case error to half of the range between minimum and maximum uncompensated delay, if these values are
known.
Restart the relay after changing this setting, for example using Maintenance > Reboot Relay.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 389
Chapter 9 - Settings

PATH DELAY ASYMMETRY

This setting corresponds to delayAsymmetry in PTP, which is used by the peer delay mechanism to compensate
for any difference in the propagation delay between the two directions of a link. Except in unusual cases, the two
fibers are of essentially identical length and composition, so make this setting zero. In unusual cases where the
length of the link is different in different directions, set this setting to the number of nanoseconds the Ethernet
propagation delay to the relay is longer than the mean of path propagation delays to and from the relay. For
instance, if it is known say from the physical length of the fibers and the propagation speed in the fibers that the
delay from the relay to the Ethernet switch it is connected to is 9000 ns and that the delay from the switch to the
relay is 11000 ns, then the mean delay is 10000 ns, and the path delay asymmetry is 11000 - 10000 = +1000 ns.

9.4.6.5 IRIG-B
Setting path: SETTINGS > PRODUCT SETUP > REAL TIME CLOCK > IRIG-B
■ IRIG-B IRIG B SIGNAL TYPE:
ó Range: None, DC Shift, Amplitude Modulated
■ None
UTC OFFSET: USE :
ñ Range: Local Time settings, IRIG-B Time
LOCAL TIME SETTINGS

IRIG B SIGNAL TYPE

This setting enables IRIG B synchronization. The input IRIG B signal type must be set to DC Shift or Amplitude
Modulated using the Settings > Product Setup > Real Time Clock > IRIG-B > IRIG B Signal Type setting. IRIG B
synchronization may be disabled by making this setting None.

UTC OFFSET
This setting defines how the Local Time is derived from the IRIG-B time.
When set to LOCAL TIME SETTINGS, the time offset code in the IRIG control bits is used as follows (to ensure
backward compatibility for Firmware versions prior to 8.6):
UTC_Time = IRIG-B_Time – Time_Offset (IRIG-B CF bits, including the DST)
Use the following equation to get local time:
Local_Time = UTC_Time + LOCAL TIME OFFSET FROM UTC(setting under REAL TIME CLOCK/
LOCAL TIME menu)
Finally, the DST time is determined by the Relay DST setting.
When set to IRIG-B TIME, the relay derives UTC time and Local Time from IRIG-B time itself and doesn’t need
relay LOCAL TIME settings.
UTC_Time = IRIG-B_Time – Time_Offest (IRIG-B CF bits, including the DST)
Local_Time = IRIG-B_Time

9.4.7 USER-PROGRAMMABLE FAULT REPORTS

Setting path: SETTINGS > PRODUCT SETUP > FAULT REPORT 1(2)
■ USER-PROGRAMMABLE FAULT REPORT 1
ó Range: Disabled, Enabled
■ FAULT REPORT 1 FUNCTION: Disabled
PRE-FAULT 1 TRIGGER:
ô Range: FlexLogic operand
Off
FAULT 1 TRIGGER
ô Range: FlexLogic operand
Off

N60-1601-0125-861-1 390
Chapter 9 - Settings

FAULT REPORT <n>

ñ Range: Off, any actual value analog parameter
Off

When enabled, this function monitors the pre-fault trigger. The pre-fault data are stored in the memory for
prospective creation of the fault report on the rising edge of the pre-fault trigger. The element waits for the fault
trigger as long as the pre-fault trigger is asserted, but not shorter than 1 second. When the fault trigger occurs, the
fault data is stored and the complete report is created. If the fault trigger does not occur within 1 second after the
pre-fault trigger drops out, the element resets and no record is created.
The user programmable record contains the following information: the user-programmed relay name, detailed
firmware revision (x.xx, for example) and relay model (Product), the date and time of trigger, the name of pre-fault
trigger (a specific FlexLogic operand), the name of fault trigger (a specific FlexLogic operand), the active setting
group at pre-fault trigger, the active setting group at fault trigger, pre-fault values of all programmed analog channels
(one cycle before pre-fault trigger), and fault values of all programmed analog channels (at the fault trigger).
Each fault report is stored as a file to a maximum capacity of ten files. An eleventh trigger overwrites the oldest file.
The EnerVista software is required to view all captured data. A FAULT RPT TRIG event is automatically created
when the report is triggered.
The relay includes two user-programmable fault reports to enable capture of two types of trips (for example, trip
from thermal protection with the report configured to include temperatures, and short-circuit trip with the report
configured to include voltages and currents). Both reports feed the same report file queue.
The last record is available as individual data items via communications protocols.

PRE-FAULT 1 TRIGGER
Specifies the FlexLogic operand to capture the pre-fault data. The rising edge of this operand stores one cycle-old
data for subsequent reporting. The element waits for the fault trigger to actually create a record as long as the
operand selected as PRE-FAULT 1 TRIGGER is “On.” If the operand remains “Off” for 1 second, the element resets
and no record is created.

FAULT 1 TRIGGER
Specifies the FlexLogic operand to capture the fault data. The rising edge of this operand stores the data as fault
data and results in a new report. The trigger (not the pre-fault trigger) controls the date and time of the report.

FAULT REPORT 1 # 1 to FAULT REPORT 1 #32

These settings specify an actual value such as voltage or current magnitude, true RMS, phase angle, frequency,
temperature, and so on, to be stored when the report is created. Up to 32 channels can be configured. Two reports
are configurable to cope with variety of trip conditions and items of interest.

9.4.8 OSCILLOGRAPHY
Setting path: SETTINGS > PRODUCT SETUP > OSCILLOGRAPHY
■ OSCILLOGRAPHY NUMBER OF RECORDS:
ó Range: 3 to 64 in steps of 1
■ <n>
TRIGGER MODE:
ô Range: Automatic Overwrite, Protected
Automatic Overwrite
TRIGGER POSITION:
ô Range: 0 to 100% in steps of 1
50%
TRIGGER SOURCE:
ô Range: FlexLogic operand
Off
AC INPUT WAVEFORMS:
ô Range: Off, 8, 16, 32, 64 samples/cycle
64 samples/cycle

N60-1601-0125-861-1 391
Chapter 9 - Settings

■ DIGITAL CHANNELS
ô
■
■ ANALOG CHANNELS
ñ
■

Oscillography records contain waveforms captured at the sampling rate as well as other relay data at the point of
trigger. Oscillography records are triggered by a programmable FlexLogic operand. Multiple oscillography records
can be captured simultaneously.
To retrieve an Oscillography record from a relay:
1. If not yet set up for oscillography, configure settings under Settings > Product Setup > Oscillography in the
EnerVista software.
2. Access Actual Values > Records > Oscillography in the EnerVista software.
3. In the window that opens, select the record number. The highest number is the most recent record (Newest
Record Number).
4. Click the Read button to get the waveform. When available, waveforms are displayed graphically, and
otherwise error messages display.
5. In the waveform window that opens, you can save the file, for example with the CFG extension.

NUMBER OF RECORDS
The number of records is selectable, but the number of cycles captured in a single record varies considerably based
on other factors, such as sample rate and the number of operational modules. There is a fixed amount of data
storage for oscillography; the more data captured, the less the number of cycles captured per record. See the
ACTUAL VALUES > RECORDS > OSCILLOGRAPHY menu to view the number of cycles captured per record.
The following table provides sample configurations with corresponding cycles/record. The minimum number of
oscillographic records is three.

Records CT/VTs Sample rate Digital channels Analog channels Cycles per record

3 1 32 32 16 2399

3 1 64 32 16 1450

16 1 32 32 16 666

16 1 64 32 16 402

32 1 32 32 16 352

32 1 64 32 16 213

3 2 32 32 16 1516

3 2 64 32 16 851

16 2 32 32 16 421

TRIGGER MODE
A new record automatically overwrites an older record when TRIGGER MODE is set to Automatic Overwrite.
This keeps the number of available records equal to the NUMBER OF RECORDS setting value. When TRIGGER
MODE is set to Protected, new records stop being captured once the number of captured records becomes equal
to the NUMBER OF RECORDS value.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 392
Chapter 9 - Settings

TRIGGER POSITION
Set this to a percentage of the total buffer size (for example, 10%, 50%, 75%, and so on). A trigger position of 25%
consists of 25% pre- and 75% post-trigger data.

TRIGGER SOURCE
Always captured in oscillography and can be any FlexLogic parameter (element state, contact input, virtual output,
and so on). The relay sampling rate is 64 samples per cycle.

AC INPUT WAVEFORMS
Determines the sampling rate at which AC input signals (that is, current and voltage) are stored. Reducing the
sampling rate allows longer records to be stored. This setting has no effect on the internal sampling rate of the relay,
which is always 64 samples per cycle. That is, it has no effect on the fundamental calculations of the device.
For products with the 9-2LE hardware and software options, this setting is fixed at 64 samples/cycle.

Note:
When changes are made to the oscillography settings, all existing oscillography records are cleared

DIGITAL CHANNELS sub-menu

■ DIGITAL Channels DIGITAL CHANNEL <n>
ó Range: FlexLogic operand
■ Off
where n = 1 to 127

DIGITAL CHANNEL <n>

These settings select the FlexLogic operand state recorded in an oscillography trace. The length of each
oscillography trace depends in part on the number of parameters selected here. Parameters set to Off are
ignored. There are 127 channels and one trigger, for a total of 128.
To populate quickly the rows in the Offline Window, use Ctrl C/V to copy/paste, or click then double-click a row to
display a quick selection window

Figure 211: Quick selection window

ANALOG CHANNELS sub-menu

■ ANALOG Channels ANALOG CHANNEL <n> Range: Off, any FlexAnalog/actual value parameter
ó
■ Off See Appendix for list
where n = 1 to 32

N60-1601-0125-861-1 393
Chapter 9 - Settings

ANALOG CHANNEL <n>

These settings select the metering actual value recorded in an oscillography trace. The length of each oscillography
trace depends in part on the number of parameters selected here. Parameters set to Off are ignored. The
parameters available in a given relay depend on
● the type of relay,
● the type and number of CT/VT hardware modules installed, and
● the type and number of analog input hardware modules installed
A list of all possible analog metering actual value parameters is presented in Appendix A: FlexAnalog Parameters.
All eight CT/VT module channels are stored in the oscillography file. The CT/VT module channels are named as
follows:
<slot_letter><terminal_number>—<I or V><phase A, B, or C, or 4th input>
The fourth current input in a bank is called IG, and the fourth voltage input in a bank is called VX. For example, F2-
IB designates the IB signal on terminal 2 of the CT/VT module in slot F.
If there are no CT/VT modules and analog input modules, no analog traces appear in the file; only the digital traces
appear.

9.4.8.1 DIGITAL CHANNELS

■ DIGITAL Channels Digital CHANNEL <n>
ó Range: FlexLogic operand
■ Off

DIGITAL CHANNEL <n>

These settings select the FlexLogic operand state recorded in an oscillography trace. The length of each
oscillography trace depends in part on the number of parameters selected here. Parameters set to Off are
ignored. There are 127 channels and one trigger, for a total of 128.
To populate quickly the rows in the Offline Window, use Ctrl C/V to copy/paste, or click then double-click a row to
display a quick selection window

Figure 212: Quick selection window

9.4.8.2 ANALOG CHANNELS

■ DIGITAL Channels Digital CHANNEL <n> Range: Off, any FlexAnalog/actual value parameter
ó
■ Off See Appendix for list
where n = 1 to 32

N60-1601-0125-861-1 394
Chapter 9 - Settings

ANALOG CHANNEL <n>

These settings select the metering actual value recorded in an oscillography trace. The length of each oscillography
trace depends in part on the number of parameters selected here. Parameters set to Off are ignored. The
parameters available in a given relay depend on
● the type of relay,
● the type and number of CT/VT hardware modules installed, and
● the type and number of analog input hardware modules installed
A list of all possible analog metering actual value parameters is presented in Appendix A: FlexAnalog Parameters.
All eight CT/VT module channels are stored in the oscillography file. The CT/VT module channels are named as
follows:
<slot_letter><terminal_number>—<I or V><phase A, B, or C, or 4th input>
The fourth current input in a bank is called IG, and the fourth voltage input in a bank is called VX. For example, F2-
IB designates the IB signal on terminal 2 of the CT/VT module in slot F.
If there are no CT/VT modules and analog input modules, no analog traces appear in the file; only the digital traces
appear.

9.4.9 DATA LOGGER

Setting path: SETTINGS > PRODUCT SETUP > DATA LOGGER
■ DATA LOGGER DATA LOGGER MODE:
ó Range: Continuous, Trigger
■ Continuous
DATA LOGGER TRIGGER:
ô Range: FlexLogic operand
Off
DATA LOGGER RATE:
ô Range: 15 to 3600000 ms in steps of 1
60000 msec
DATA LOGGER CHNL <N>: Range: Off, any FlexAnalog/actual value parameter
ô
Off See Appendix A for list
DATA LOGGER CONFIG:
ñ Range: Not applicable - shows computed data only
0 CHNL x 0.0 DAYS
where n = 1 to 16
The data logger samples and records up to 16 analog parameters at a user-defined sampling rate. This recorded
data can be downloaded to EnerVista UR Setup and displayed with parameters on the vertical axis and time on the
horizontal axis. All data is stored in non-volatile memory, so the information is retained when power to the relay is
lost. For a fixed sampling rate, the data logger can be configured with a few channels over a long period or a larger
number of channels for a shorter period. The relay automatically partitions the available memory between the
channels in use. The following table outlines examples of storage capacities for a system frequency of 60 Hz.

Data logger storage capacity example

Sampling rate Channels Days Storage capacity

1 0.1 482 s

8 0.1 60 s
15 ms
9 0.1 54 s

16 0.1 30 s

N60-1601-0125-861-1 395
Chapter 9 - Settings

Sampling rate Channels Days Storage capacity

1 0.3 32729 s

8 0.1 4091 s
1,000 ms
9 0.1 3637 s

16 0.1 2046 s

1 22.7 1963710 s

8 2.8 245460 s
60,000 ms
9 2.5 218190 s

16 1.4 127230 s

1 1362.1 117822600 s

3,600,000 ms 8 170.2 14727600 s

9 151.3 13091400 s

Note:
Changing any setting affecting data logger operation clears data in the log

DATA LOGGER MODE

This setting configures the mode in which the data logger operates. When set to Continuous, the data logger
actively records any configured channels at the rate as defined by the DATA LOGGER RATE. The data logger is
idle in this mode when no channels are configured. When set to Trigger, the data logger records any configured
channels at the instance of the rising edge of the DATA LOGGER TRIGGER source FlexLogic operand. The data
logger ignores all subsequent triggers and continues to record data until the active record is full. Once the data
logger is full, a CLEAR DATA LOGGER command is required to clear the data logger record before a new record
can be started. Performing the CLEAR DATA LOGGER command also stops the current record and resets the data
logger to be ready for the next trigger.

DATA LOGGER TRIGGER

This setting selects the signal used to trigger the start of a new data logger record. Any FlexLogic operand can be
used as the trigger source. This setting only applies when the mode is set to Trigger.

DATA LOGGER RATE

This setting selects the time interval at which the actual value data is recorded.

DATA LOGGER CHNL <n>

These settings select the metering actual value that is to be recorded in Channel <n> of the data log. The
parameters available in a given relay are dependent on: the type of relay, the type and number of CT/VT hardware
modules installed, and the type and number of Analog Input hardware modules installed. Upon startup, the relay
automatically prepares the parameter list. A list of all possible analog metering actual value parameters is shown in
the FlexAnalog appendix.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 396
Chapter 9 - Settings

DATA LOGGER CONFIG

This display presents the total amount of time that the Data Logger can record the channels not selected to Off
without overwriting old data.

9.4.10 DEMAND
Setting path: SETTINGS > PRODUCT SETUP > DEMAND
■ DEMAND CRNT DEMAND METHOD: Range: Thermal Exponential, Block Interval, Rolling
ó
■ Thermal Exponential Demand
POWER DEMAND METHOD: Range: Thermal Exponential, Block Interval, Rolling
ô
Thermal Exponential Demand
DEMAND INTERVAL:
ô Range: 5, 10, 15, 20, 30, 60 minutes
15 MIN
DEMAND TRIGGER: Range: FlexLogic operand
ñ
Off Note: for calculation using method 2a

The relay measures current demand on each phase, and three-phase demand for real, reactive, and apparent
power. Current and Power methods can be chosen separately. Settings are provided to allow you to emulate
common electrical utility demand measuring techniques, for statistical or control purposes.

CRNT DEMAND METHOD

Here you can set the calculation method for the current demand

POWER DEMAND METHOD

Here you can set the calculation method for the power demand

DEMAND INTERVAL
Use this setting to set the required demand interval

DEMAND TRIGGER
Use this setting to define whether a demand trigger is required or not. If the demand trigger is On, a variation of the
Block interval method is used as described later.
The relay can be set to calculate demand by any of the following methods.
● Thermal exponential
● Block Interval
● Rolling demand
These are described in the following sections

9.4.10.1 THERMAL EXPONENTIAL CALCULATION METHOD

This method emulates the action of an analog peak-recording thermal demand meter. The relay measures the
quantity (RMS current, real power, reactive power, or apparent power) on each phase every second and assumes
that the circuit quantity remains at this value until updated by the next measurement. It calculates the 'thermal
demand equivalent' based on the following equation:

d(t) = D(1 - e-kt)

N60-1601-0125-861-1 397
Chapter 9 - Settings

where:
● d = demand value after applying input quantity for time t (in minutes)
● D = input quantity (constant)
● k = 2.3 / thermal 90% response time
The figure shows the 90% thermal response time characteristic of 15 minutes. A setpoint establishes the time to
reach 90% of a steady-state value, just as the response time of an analog instrument. A steady state value applied
for twice the response time indicates 99% of the value.

✕
✔✓
✒
✑
✏
✎
✍
❉

❚✐✟✠ ✭✟✐✡☛☞✠❡✌
✽ ✁✂✽✂✄☎✆❈✝✞

Figure 213: Thermal demand characteristic

9.4.10.2 BLOCK INTERVAL CALCULATION METHOD

There are two Block Interval calculation methods as follows:
If CRNT DEMAND METHOD is set to Block Interval and DEMAND TRIGGER is set to Off, method 1 is used
as follows.
If DEMAND TRIGGER is assigned to any other FlexLogic operand, Method 2 is used as follows.

1) Block interval calculation method without demand trigger

This method calculates a linear average of the quantity (RMS current, real power, reactive power, or apparent
power) over the programmed demand time interval, starting daily at 00:00:00 (that is, 12:00 am). The 1440 minutes
per day is divided into the number of blocks as set by the programmed time interval. Each new value of demand
becomes available at the end of each time interval.

2) Block Interval calculation method with demand trigger

This method calculates a linear average of the quantity (RMS current, real power, reactive power, or apparent
power) over the interval between successive Start Demand Interval logic input pulses. Each new value of demand
becomes available at the end of each pulse. Assign a FlexLogic operand to the DEMAND TRIGGER setting to
program the input for the new demand interval pulses.

Note:
If a trigger is assigned, the maximum allowed time between two trigger signals is 60 minutes. If no trigger signal appears
within 60 minutes, demand calculations are performed and available, and the algorithm resets and starts the new cycle of
calculations. The minimum required time for trigger contact closure is 20 μs.

9.4.10.3 ROLLING DEMAND CALCULATION METHOD

This method calculates a linear average of the quantity (RMS current, real power, reactive power, or apparent
power) over the programmed demand time interval, in the same way as Block Interval. The value is updated every
minute and indicates the demand over the time interval just preceding the time of update.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 398
Chapter 9 - Settings

9.4.11 USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS

Basic and Enhanced front panels

Setting path: SETTINGS > PRODUCT SETUP > USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS
■ USER-PROGRAMMABLE ■ LED TEST
ó
■ LEDS ■
■ TRIP & ALARM LEDS
ô
■
■ USER-PROGRAMMABLE
ñ
■ LED <n>
where n = 1 to 48

Graphical front panel

Setting path: SETTINGS > PRODUCT SETUP > USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS
■ USER-PROGRAMMABLE ■ LED TEST
ó
■ LEDS ■
■ TRIP & ALARM LEDS
ô
■
■ EVENT CAUSE
ñ
■ LED <n>
where n = 1 to 9
The LEDs can be customized to illuminate when a selected FlexLogic operand is in the logic 1 state. The trip and
alarm LEDs can also be customized in a similar manner. To ensure correct functionality of all LEDs, an LED test
feature is also provided.

9.4.11.1 LED TEST

Setting path: SETTINGS > PRODUCT SETUP > USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS > LED TEST
■ LED TEST LED TEST FUNCTION:
ó Range: Disabled, Enabled
■ Disabled
LED TEST CONTROL:
ñ Range: FlexLogic operand
Off

When enabled, the LED test can be initiated from any digital input or user-programmable condition, such as a user-
programmable pushbutton. The control operand is configured under the LED TEST CONTROL setting. The test
covers all LEDs, including the LEDs of the optional user-programmable pushbuttons. For the enhanced and basic
front panels, the test consists of the following three stages:
1. All 62 LEDs on the relay are illuminated. This is a quick test to verify if any of the LEDs is faulty. This stage
lasts as long as the control input is on, up to a maximum of one minute. After one minute, the test ends.
2. All the LEDs are turned off, and then one LED at a time turns on for one second, then back off. The test
routine starts at the top left panel, moving from the top to bottom of each LED column. This test checks for
hardware failures that lead to more than one LED being turned on from a single logic point. This stage can be
interrupted at any time.
3. All the LEDs are turned on. One LED at a time turns off for one second, then back on. The test routine starts
at the top left panel moving from top to bottom of each column of the LEDs. This test checks for hardware
failures that lead to more than one LED being turned off from a single logic point. This stage can be
interrupted at any time.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 399
Chapter 9 - Settings

For the graphical front panel, the test consists of the following stages:
1. All 22 LEDs on the relay are illuminated. This is a quick test to verify if any of the LEDs is faulty. This stage
lasts as long as the control input is on, up to a maximum of one minute. After one minute, the test ends.
2. All the LEDs are turned off, and then one LED at a time turns on with the orange color for one second, then
back off. The test routine starts at the top left panel, moving from the top to bottom for all 14 LEDs. Then the
eight pushbutton LEDs are tested in the same manner. This test checks for hardware failures that lead to
more than one LED being turned on from a single logic point. This stage can be interrupted at any time.
3. All the LEDs are turned on with the orange color. One LED at a time turns off for one second, then back on.
The test routine starts at the top left panel moving from top to bottom for all 14 LEDs. Then the eight
pushbutton LEDs are tested in the same manner. This test checks for hardware failures that lead to more
than one LED being turned off from a single logic point. This stage can be interrupted at any time.
4. Additionally, stages 2 and 3 are repeated twice for the five device status LEDs and nine event cause LEDs,
one time with green color on and the other with red color on.
When testing is in progress, the LEDs are controlled by the test sequence, rather than the protection, control, and
monitoring features. However, the LED control mechanism accepts all the changes to LED states generated by the
relay and stores the actual LED states (on or off) in memory. When the test completes, the LEDs reflect the actual
state resulting from relay response during testing. The reset pushbutton does not clear any targets when the LED
Test is in progress.
A dedicated FlexLogic operand, LED TEST IN PROGRESS, is set for the duration of the test. When the test
sequence is initiated, the LED TEST INITIATED event is stored in the event recorder.
The entire test procedure is user-controlled. In particular, stage 1 can last as long as necessary, and stages 2 and 3
can be interrupted. The test responds to the position and rising edges of the control input defined by the LED TEST
CONTROL setting. The control pulses must last at least 250 ms to take effect. The following diagram explains how
the test is executed.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 400
Chapter 9 - Settings

❘✠✡☛☞ ❚❖ ❚✠✌❚

✲★✥★✚ ✚✫★
✬✮✯ ✰✮❙✰ ■✱ P✲✳✴✲✮❙❙
✛✢✥✢✙❞ ★✩❞★ ✘✪ ✚✫★
✘✣★✛✦✙✩
❝✘✙✚✛✘✜ ✢✙✣✤✚

✌t❛✍t t✎✏ s✑✒t✓❛✍✏ ✐✔❛✕✏ ✑✒ ❘✏st✑✍✏ t✎✏ ▲✠☛ st❛t✏s

t✎✏ ▲✠☛s ✒✍✑✔ t✎✏ s✑✒t✓❛✍✏ ✐✔❛✕✏

❙★✚ ✚✫★
✬✮✯ ✰✮❙✰ ■✱ P✲✳✴✲✮❙❙
✘✣★✛✦✙✩

❝✘✙✚✛✘✜ ✢✙✣✤✚ ✢✥ ✘✙

✌❚✡❆✠ ✶ ✚✢✵★✹✘✤✚
✭❛✖✖ ▲✠☛s ✑♦✗ ✺✧ ✵✢✙✤✚★♠

✩✛✘✣✣✢✙❞ ★✩❞★ ✘✪ ✚✫★

❝✘✙✚✛✘✜ ✢✙✣✤✚

✛✢✥✢✙❞ ★✩❞★ ✘✪ ✚✫★

❲✦✢✚ ✧ ✥★❝✘✙✩
❝✘✙✚✛✘✜ ✢✙✣✤✚

✌❚✡❆✠ ✷ ✛✢✥✢✙❞ ★✩❞★ ✘✪ ✚✫★

✭✑♦✏ ▲✠☛ ✑♦ ❛t ❛ t✐✔✏✗ ❝✘✙✚✛✘✜ ✢✙✣✤✚

✛✢✥✢✙❞ ★✩❞★ ✘✪ ✚✫★

❲✦✢✚ ✧ ✥★❝✘✙✩
❝✘✙✚✛✘✜ ✢✙✣✤✚

✛✢✥✢✙❞ ★✩❞★
✌❚✡❆✠ ✸
✘✪ ✚✫★ ❝✘✙✚✛✘✜
✭✑♦✏ ▲✠☛ ✑✒✒ ❛t ❛ t✐✔✏✗ ✢✙✣✤✚

✽ ✁✂✄✄☎✄✆✝✞✟

Figure 214: LED test sequence

Application example 1
Assume one needs to check if any of the LEDs is faulty through user-programmable pushbutton 1. Apply the
following settings.
Configure user-programmable pushbutton 1 by making the following entries in the SETTINGS > PRODUCT SETUP
> USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS > USER PUSHBUTTON 1 menu. (The option does not display when
not purchased.)
● PUSHBUTTON 1 FUNCTION: Self-reset
● PUSHBTN 1 DROP-OUT TIME: 0.10 s

N60-1601-0125-861-1 401
Chapter 9 - Settings

Configure the LED test to recognize user-programmable pushbutton 1 by making the following entries in the
SETTINGS > PRODUCT SETUP > USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS > LED TEST menu:
● LED TEST FUNCTION: Enabled
● LED TEST CONTROL: PUSHBUTTON 1 ON
The test is initiated when the user-programmable pushbutton 1 is pressed. Keep the pushbutton pressed for as long
as the LEDs are being visually inspected. When finished, release the pushbutton. The relay then automatically
starts stage 2. At this point, test can be canceled by pressing the pushbutton.

Application example 2
Assume you need to check whether any LEDs are faulty as well as check one LED at a time to check for other
failures. This is to be performed via user-programmable pushbutton 1.
After applying the settings in application example 1, hold down the pushbutton as long as necessary to test all
LEDs. When finished, release the pushbutton so that the relay then automatically starts stage 2. When stage 2 is
completed, stage 3 starts automatically. The test can be canceled at any time by pressing the pushbutton.

9.4.11.2 TRIP AND ALARM LEDS

Setting path: SETTINGS > PRODUCT SETUP > USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS > TRIP & ALARMS LEDS
■ TRIP & ALARM LEDS TRIP LED INPUT:
ó Range: FlexLogic operand
■ Off
ALARM LED INPUT:
ñ Range: FlexLogic operand
Off

The trip and alarm LEDs are in the first LED column (enhanced and graphical front panels) and on LED panel 1
(basic front panel). Each LED can be programmed to turn on when the selected FlexLogic operand is in the logic 1
state.

9.4.11.3 USER-PROGRAMMABLE LED <N>

Setting path: SETTINGS > PRODUCT SETUP > USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS > USER-PROGRAMMABLE
LED <n>
■ USER-PROGRAMMABLE LED <n> OPERAND:
ó Range: FlexLogic operand
■ LED <n> Off
LED <n> TYPE:
ñ Range: FlexLogic operand
Self-Reset
where n = 1 to 48

For the enhanced and basic front panels, there are 48 amber LEDs across the relay LED panels. Each of these
indicators can be programmed to illuminate when the selected FlexLogic operand is in the logic 1 state.
For the basic front panel, the LEDs are located as follows:
● LED Panel 2 — User-programmable LEDs 1 through 24
● LED Panel 3 — User programmable LEDs 25 through 48
For the enhanced front panel, the LEDs are located as follows:
● LED column 2 — User-programmable LEDs 1 through 12
● LED column 3 — User-programmable LEDs 13 through 24
● LED column 4 — User-programmable LEDs 25 through 36
● LED column 5 — User-programmable LEDs 37 through 48

N60-1601-0125-861-1 402
Chapter 9 - Settings

See the LED Indicators section in chapter 4 for information on the location of these indexed LEDs.
The user-programmable LED settings select the FlexLogic operands that control the LEDs. If the LED <n> TYPE
setting is Self-Reset (the default setting), the LED illumination tracks the state of the selected LED operand. If the
LED <n> TYPE setting is Latched, the LED, once lit, remains so until reset by the front panel RESET button, from
a remote device via a communications channel, or from any programmed operand, even if the LED operand state
de-asserts.

9.4.11.3.1 RECOMMENDED SETTINGS FOR USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS

Setting Parameter

LED 1 operand SETTING GROUP ACT 1

LED 2 operand SETTING GROUP ACT 2
LED 3 operand SETTING GROUP ACT 3
LED 4 operand SETTING GROUP ACT 4
LED 5 operand SETTING GROUP ACT 5
LED 6 operand SETTING GROUP ACT 6
LED 7 operand Off
LED 8 operand Off
LED 9 operand BREAKER 1 OPEN
LED 10 operand BREAKER 1 CLOSED
LED 11 operand BREAKER 1 TROUBLE
LED 12 operand Off
LED 13 operand Off
LED 14 operand BREAKER 2 OPEN
LED 15 operand BREAKER 2 CLOSED
LED 16 operand BREAKER 2 TROUBLE
LED 17 operand SYNC 1 SYNC OP
LED 18 operand SYNC 2 SYNC OP
LED 19 operand Off
LED 20 operand Off
LED 21 operand Off
LED 22 operand Off
LED 23 operand Off
LED 24 operand Off

9.4.11.4 EVENT CAUSE LED <N>

Setting path: SETTINGS > PRODUCT SETUP > USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS > EVENT CAUSE LED <n>
■ EVENT CAUSE LED <n> OPERAND:
ó Range: FlexLogic operand
■ LED <n> LED PICKUP
LED 1 COLOR:
ô Range: Red, Green, Orange
Green
LED 1 TYPE:
ñ Range: Self-Reset, Latched
Self-Reset
where n = 1 to 9
For the graphical front panel, the event cause LED settings select the FlexLogic operands that control the LEDs.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 403
Chapter 9 - Settings

LED <n> TYPE

If set to Self-Reset, the LED illumination tracks the state of the selected LED operand. If set to Latched, the
LED, once lit, remains so even the LED operand state already de-asserts, until reset by the front panel RESET
button, from a remote device via a communications channel, or from any programmed operand.
The table outlines default input operand and output operands for each event cause LED.

Default input and output operand for event cause LEDs

LED Default input operand Output operand Default color

Event Cause LED 1 LED PICKUP EVENT CAUSE LED 1 Green

Event Cause LED 2 LED VOLTAGE EVENT CAUSE LED 2 Orange
Event Cause LED 3 LED CURRENT EVENT CAUSE LED 3 Orange
Event Cause LED 4 LED FREQUENCY EVENT CAUSE LED 4 Orange
Event Cause LED 5 LED OTHER EVENT CAUSE LED 5 Orange
Event Cause LED 6 LED PHASE A EVENT CAUSE LED 6 Orange
Event Cause LED 7 LED PHASE B EVENT CAUSE LED 7 Orange
Event Cause LED 8 LED PHASE C EVENT CAUSE LED 8 Orange
Event Cause LED 9 LED NEUTRAL/GROUND EVENT CAUSE LED 9 Orange

9.4.12 USER-PROGRAMMABLE SELF-TESTS

Setting path: SETTINGS > PRODUCT SETUP > USER-PROGRAMMABLE SELF TESTS
■ USER-PROGRAMMABLE DIRECT RING BREAK Range: Disabled, Enabled. Valid for units equipped
ó
■ SELF TESTS FUNCTION: Enabled with Direct Input/Output module.
DIRECT DEVICE OFF Range: Disabled, Enabled. Valid for units equipped
ô
FUNCTION: Enabled with Direct Input/Output module.
RxGOOSE OFF
ô Range: Disabled, Enabled
FUNCTION: Enabled
FIRST ETHERNET FAIL
ô Range: Disabled, Enabled
FUNCTION: Disabled
SEC. ETHERNET FAIL
ô Range: Disabled, Enabled
FUNCTION: Disabled
THIRD ETHERNET FAIL
ô Range: Disabled, Enabled
FUNCTION: Disabled
SFP MODULE FAIL
ô Range: Disabled, Enabled
FUNCTION: Disabled
BATTERY FAIL
ô Range: Disabled, Enabled
FUNCTION: Enabled
SNTP FAIL
ô Range: Disabled, Enabled
FUNCTION: Enabled
IRIG-B FAIL
ô Range: Disabled, Enabled
FUNCTION: Enabled
PTP FAIL
ô Range: Disabled, Enabled
FUNCTION: Enabled
SV STREAM TROUBLE
ô Range: Disabled, Enabled
FUNCTION: Enabled

N60-1601-0125-861-1 404
Chapter 9 - Settings

PB ETH PORT <nm> FAIL

ô Range: Disabled, Enabled
FUNCTION: Disabled
PB SFP MODUL <nm> FAIL
ñ Range: Disabled, Enabled
FUNCTION: Disabled
where n = 1 to 4, and m = a to b
All major self-test alarms are reported automatically with their corresponding FlexLogic operands, events, and
targets.
This settings menu allows enabling and disabling of most minor self-test alarms. When in the Disabled mode, minor
alarms do not assert a FlexLogic operand, write to the event recorder, or display target messages. Moreover, they
do not trigger the ANY MINOR ALARM or ANY SELF-TEST messages. When enabled,minor alarms continue to
function along with other major and minor alarms. When using the graphical front panel and setting annunciator
alarms, the function needs to be enabled here too, else the alarm is not triggered.

Note:
PB SFP MODUL # FAIL FUNCTION — For order code H85, ports 2a, 2b, 4a, 4b are not available.

9.4.13 CONTROL PUSHBUTTONS

Setting path: SETTINGS > PRODUCT SETUP > CONTROL PUSHBUTTONS > CONTROL PUSHBUTTON <n>
■ CONTROL CNTRL PUSHBUTTN <n> ID
ó Range: up to 20 alphanumeric characters
■ PUSHBUTTON <n> CTRL PB 1
CONTROL PUSHBUTTON <n>
ô Range: Disabled, Enabled
FUNCTION: Disabled
CONTROL PUSHBUTTON <n>
ñ Range: Disabled, Enabled
EVENTS: Disabled
where n = 1 to 7
This feature is supported with enhanced and basic front panels.
There are three standard control pushbuttons, labeled USER 1, USER 2, and USER 3, on the basic and enhanced
front panels. These are user-programmable and can be used for various applications such as performing an LED
test, switching setting groups, and invoking and scrolling though user-programmable displays.
The control pushbuttons are easily identifiable on the front panel with the labels USER 1, USER 2 and USER 3 for
the standard option, and with the additional USER 4, USER 5, USER 6 and USER 7 as an optional extra for some
models.
Control pushbuttons are not typically used for critical operations and are not protected by the control password.
However, by supervising their output operands, the user can dynamically enable or disable control pushbuttons for
security reasons.
Each control pushbutton asserts its own FlexLogic operand. Each operand need to be configured appropriately to
perform the required function. Each operand remains asserted as long as the pushbutton is pressed and resets
when the pushbutton is released. A dropout delay of 100 ms is incorporated to ensure fast pushbutton manipulation
is recognized by various features that can use control pushbuttons as inputs.
An event is logged in the event record (as per user setting) when a control pushbutton is pressed. No event is
logged when the pushbutton is released. The front panel keys (including control keys) cannot be operated
simultaneously.
Firmware revisions 3.2x and older use these three pushbuttons for manual breaker control. This functionality has
been retained—if the breaker control feature is configured to use the three pushbuttons, they cannot be used as
user-programmable control pushbuttons.
The control pushbuttons become user-programmable only if the breaker control feature is not configured for manual
control via the USER 1 to USER 3 pushbuttons as shown. If configured for manual control, breaker control typically

N60-1601-0125-861-1 405
Chapter 9 - Settings

uses the larger, optional user-programmable pushbuttons, making the control pushbuttons available for other user
applications.

✜✢✣✣✤✥✦
✟☛☞✌✡☛✍ ✎✏✑✒✓✏✌✌☛☞ ✝
✔✏☞✟✌✕☛☞✖
✘✱✲✳✴✵✶ ✷ ✝

✜✢✣✣✤✥✦✜
✑✗✑✌✘✙ ✑✘✌✏✎
✚ ✓✡✘✆✛✘✡✑
✚ ✓✡✘✆✛✘✡ ✝
✚ ✓✡✘✆✛✘✡✝ ✎✓✟☛☞✌✡☛✍
✆☞✠ ✡✏☞
✻✿ ☛✸✸ ✷ ✄
❂ ✣✤✧✢★
✽❁ ☛✔✔
❀✿ ✑✗✑✌✘✙ ✑✘✌✏✎ ✩✪✢✫✪✬✦✤✭ ✬✮✢★✯✥✰
✾ ✚ ✓✡✘✆✛✘✡✑ ✄
✾ ☛☞ ✟☛☞✌✡☛✍ ✎✏✑✒✓✌☞ ✝ ☛☞
✽ ✚ ✓✡✘✆✛✘✡ ✂ ✝✄✄ ❃❄✵❅
✼✻
✺ ✚ ✓✡✘✆✛✘✡✂ ✎✓✟☛☞✌✡☛✍
✹
☛✸✸ ✷ ✄
✁✂✄✂☎✆✝✞✟✠✡

Control pushbutton logic

9.4.14 USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS

This feature is optional, specified at the time of ordering.
Setting path: SETTINGS > PRODUCT SETUP > USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS > USER
PUSHBUTTON <n>
■ USER PUSHBUTTON <n> PUSHBUTTON <1>
ó Range: Self-Reset, Latched, Disabled
■ FUNCTION: Disabled
PUSHBTN <n> ID TEXT:
ô Range: up to 20 alphanumeric characters
USER PB 1
PUSHBTN <n> ON TEXT:
ô Range: up to 20 alphanumeric characters
PUSHBTN <n> ON
PUSHBTN <n> OFF TEXT:
ô Range: up to 20 alphanumeric characters
PUSHBTN <n> OFF
PUSHBTN <n> HOLD:
ô Range: 0.0 to 10.0 s in steps of 0.1
0.1 s
PUSHBTN <n> SET:
ô Range: FlexLogic operand
Off
PUSHBTN <n> RESET:
ô Range: FlexLogic operand
Off
PUSHBTN <n> AUTORST:
ô Range: Disabled, Enabled
Disabled
PUSHBTN <n> AUTORST
ô Range: 0.2 to 600.0 s in steps of 0.1
DELAY: 1.0 s
PUSHBTN <n> REMOTE:
ô Range: FlexLogic operand
Off
PUSHBTN <n> LOCAL:
ô Range: FlexLogic operand
Off
PUSHBTN <n> DROP-OUT
ô Range: 0 to 60.00 s in steps of 0.05
TIME: 0.00 s
PUSHBTN <n> LED CTL:
ô Range: FlexLogic operand
Off

N60-1601-0125-861-1 406
Chapter 9 - Settings

PUSHBTN <n> MESSAGE:

ô Range: Disabled, Normal, High Priority
Disabled
PUSHBUTTON <1>
ñ Range: Disabled, Enabled
EVENTS: Disabled
where n depends on the front panel ordered (12, 6, 16 or 48)
User-programmable pushbuttons provide an easy and error-free method of entering digital state (on, off)
information. The number depends on the front panel ordered.
● Enhanced horizontal front panel — 16 user-programmable pushbuttons
● Enhanced vertical front panel — 6 user-programmable pushbuttons
● Basic horizontal front panel — 12 user-programmable pushbuttons
● Graphical front panel — 48 user-programmable pushbuttons (eight physical pushbuttons, 40 graphical
interface pushbuttons)

Note:
User-programmable pushbuttons require a front panel with that option. If the front panel was ordered separately, update the
EnerVista software under Maintenance > Change Front Panel.

The digital state can be entered locally (by directly pressing the front panel pushbutton or optional graphical front
panel interface) or remotely (via FlexLogic operands) into FlexLogic equations, protection elements, and control
elements. Typical applications include breaker control, autorecloser blocking, and setting groups changes. For
example, set pushbuttons 1 to 5 to select settings groups 1 to 5, or set pushbutton 1 to clear event records. The
user-programmable pushbuttons are under the control level of password protection.

Example
To clear event records using pushbutton 1, set Settings > Product Setup > Clear Relay Records > Clear Event
Records to FlexLogic operand PUSHBUTTON 1 ON. Then program the pushbutton by setting Settings > Product
Setup > User-Programmable Pushbuttons > Pushbutton 1 Function to Self-reset. For a graphical front
panel, to use a side pushbutton to clear the event records, it also needs to be programmed in a single-line diagram.
The figures show user-configurable pushbuttons for the front panels.

✠✡☛☞ ✠✡☛☞ ✠✡☛☞ ✠✡☛☞ ✠✡☛☞ ✠✡☛☞ ✠✡☛☞ ✠✡☛☞ ✠✡☛☞ ✠✡☛☞ ✠✡☛☞ ✠✡☛☞ ✠✡☛☞ ✠✡☛☞ ✠✡☛☞ ✠✡☛☞
✌✍✎☛✌ ✏ ✌✍✎☛✌ ✑ ✌✍✎☛✌ ✒ ✌✍✎☛✌ ✓ ✌✍✎☛✌ ✔ ✌✍✎☛✌ ✕ ✌✍✎☛✌ ✖ ✌✍✎☛✌ ✗ ✌✍✎☛✌ ✘ ✌✍✎☛✌ ✏✙ ✌✍✎☛✌ ✏✏ ✌✍✎☛✌ ✏✑ ✌✍✎☛✌ ✏✒ ✌✍✎☛✌ ✏✓ ✌✍✎☛✌ ✏✔ ✌✍✎☛✌ ✏✕

✁✂ ✄✁☎✄✆✝✞✟

Figure 215: User-programmable pushbuttons (enhanced front panel)

✠ ✌ ✍ ✞ ✟ ✠✠
✁✂✄ ☎✆✝✂☎ ✁✂✄ ☎✆✝✂☎ ✁✂✄ ☎✆✝✂☎ ✁✂✄ ☎✆✝✂☎ ✁✂✄ ☎✆✝✂☎ ✁✂✄ ☎✆✝✂☎

☞ ✎ ✏ ✡ ✠☛ ✠☞
✁✂✄ ☎✆✝✂☎ ✁✂✄ ☎✆✝✂☎ ✁✂✄ ☎✆✝✂☎ ✁✂✄ ☎✆✝✂☎ ✁✂✄ ☎✆✝✂☎ ✁✂✄ ☎✆✝✂☎

✑✒✓✔✔✕✖✗✘✙✚✛
Figure 216: User-programmable pushbuttons (basic front panel)

N60-1601-0125-861-1 407
Chapter 9 - Settings

✁✂✄✁☎✆ ☎✝✞ ✟✠✡✡✂✝☛ ☞✂✁ ✌✠☛✍✟✠✡✡✂✝☛ ✎ ✡✂ ✏✑ ✠☛✍✟✠✡✡✂✝☛ ✒ ✡✂ ✑

❈ ❋
❉ ●
❏ ❍
❊ ■

✣✤✥✤✦ ✤✥★ ✤✧✦✤✣

✩✪✫✬✭✫✭✮❅❆❇ ✯✰✱✲✳✴✵ ✶✱✷✸✹✺✹✱✻ ✷✼✽ ✶✻✼✾✿✴✳❀✿✷❁✳✴ ❂✰✷❁❃✴✰❄✰✼✱ ✶✻❁✱✰❄
✓✔✕✓✖✗✘✙✚✛✜✢
Figure 217: User-programmable pushbuttons (graphical front panel)

Each pushbutton asserts its own On and Off FlexLogic operands (for example, PUSHBUTTON 1 ON and
PUSHBUTTON 1 OFF). These operands are available for each pushbutton and are used to program specific
actions. If any pushbutton is active, the ANY PB ON operand is asserted.
Each pushbutton has an associated LED indicator. By default, this indicator displays the present status of the
corresponding pushbutton (on or off). However, each LED indicator can be assigned to any FlexLogic operand
through the PUSHBTN 1 LED CTL setting.
The activation and deactivation of user-programmable pushbuttons depends on whether latched or self-reset mode
is programmed.
● Latched mode — In latched mode, a pushbutton can be set (activated) by asserting the operand assigned to
the PUSHBTN 1 SET setting, by directly pressing the associated front panel pushbutton, or with the graphical
front panel interface. The state of each pushbutton is stored in non-volatile memory and maintained through a
loss of control power. The pushbutton is reset (deactivated) in latched mode by asserting the operand
assigned to the PUSHBTN 1 RESET setting, by directly pressing the active front panel pushbutton, or with
the graphical front panel interface. It can also be programmed to reset automatically through the PUSHBTN 1
AUTORST and PUSHBTN 1 AUTORST DELAY settings. These settings enable the autoreset timer and
specify the associated time delay. The autoreset timer can be used in select-before-operate (SBO) breaker
control applications, where the command type (close/open) or breaker location (feeder number) must be
selected prior to command execution. The selection must reset automatically if control is not executed within
a specified time period.
● Self-reset mode — In self-reset mode, a user-programmable pushbutton can be set (activated) by asserting
the operand assigned to the PUSHBTN 1 SET setting, by pressing the front panel pushbutton, or by the
graphical front panel interface. A pushbutton remains active for the time it is pressed physically or pressed in
the graphical front panel interface, plus the dropout time specified in the PUSHBTN 1 DROP-OUT TIME
setting. If the pushbutton is activated via FlexLogic, the pulse duration is specified by the PUSHBTN 1
DROP-OUT TIME setting only. The time the operand assigned to the PUSHBTN 1 SET setting remains On
has no effect on the pulse duration.

Note:
The pulse duration of the remote set or local front panel pushbutton must be at least 56 ms for a 60 Hz system or 60 ms for a
50 Hz system to operate the pushbutton. This allows the user-programmable pushbuttons to properly operate during power
cycling events and various system disturbances that can cause transient assertion of the operating signals.

The local and remote operation of each user-programmable pushbutton can be inhibited through the PUSHBTN 1
LOCAL and PUSHBTN 1 REMOTE settings. If local inhibit is applied, the pushbutton ignores set and reset
commands executed through the front panel pushbuttons. If remote inhibit is applied, the pushbutton ignores set
and reset commands executed through FlexLogic operands.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 408
Chapter 9 - Settings

The inhibit functions are not applied to the autoreset feature. The inhibit function can be used in SBO control
operations to prevent user-programmable pushbutton activation and ensuring 'one-at-a-time' select operation. The
inhibit functions can also be used to prevent pushbutton activation from the accidental pressing of the front panel
pushbuttons. The separate inhibit of the local and remote operation simplifies the implementation of local/remote
control supervision.
Pushbutton states can be logged by the event recorder. User-defined messages can also be associated with each
pushbutton and displayed on basic and enhanced front panels when the user-programmable pushbutton is
activated, and when in the latched mode when the user-programmable pushbutton is deactivated. With the
graphical front panel interface, instead of messages, the status of user-programmable pushbuttons can display on a
single-line diagram and can also display in annunciator page windows and in actual values page cells.
For the graphical front panel, the pushbuttons 1 to 8 are linked to the eight physical pushbuttons, and pushbuttons 9
and above are mapped to the graphical interface pushbuttons. To set the buttons for pushbuttons 9 and above,
access Settings > Product Setup > Graphical Panel > Single Line Diagram Editor, click the PB symbol in the
toolbox, then configure pushbuttons 9 and above.

PUSHBUTTON 1 FUNCTION
This setting selects the mode of the pushbutton (Self-Reset, Latched, Disabled). If set to Disabled, the pushbutton
is not active and the corresponding FlexLogic operands (both On and Off) are de-asserted. If set to Latched, the
pushbutton remains on until reset.

PUSHBTN 1 ID TEXT
This setting specifies the top 20-character line of the user-programmable pushbutton message and is intended to
provide ID information of the pushbutton. For example, the text displays in the Event Record. See the User-
definable Displays section in this chapter for instructions on how to enter alphanumeric characters from the keypad.
On a graphical front panel, this setting instead controls the label of the user-programmable pushbutton component
on single-line diagrams.

PUSHBTN 1 ON TEXT
This setting specifies the bottom 20-character line of the user-programmable pushbutton message and is displayed
when the pushbutton is in the On position. See the User-definable Displays section for instructions on entering
alphanumeric characters from the keypad. On a graphical front panel, this setting instead controls the on status text
of the user-programmable pushbutton component on single-line diagrams. This setting is not applied to the physical
pushbuttons on the graphical front panel.

PUSHBTN 1 OFF TEXT

This setting specifies the bottom 20-character line of the user-programmable pushbutton message and displays
when the pushbutton is deactivated and the PUSHBUTTON 1 FUNCTION is latched. A message does not
display when the PUSHBUTTON 1 FUNCTION is Self-reset as the pushbutton operand status is implied to be
Off upon its release. The length of the Off message is configured with the PRODUCT SETUP > DISPLAY
PROPERTIES > FLASH MESSAGE > TIME setting. On a graphical front panel, this setting instead controls the off
status text of the user-programmable pushbutton component on single-line diagrams. This setting is not applied to
the physical pushbuttons on the graphical front panel.

PUSHBTN 1 HOLD
This setting specifies the time required for a front panel pushbutton to be pressed before it is deemed active. This
timer is reset upon release of the pushbutton. Note that user-programmable pushbutton operation requires the front
panel pushbutton to be pressed a minimum of 56 ms for a 60 Hz system or 60 ms for a 50 Hz system. This
minimum time is required prior to activating the user-programmable pushbutton hold timer.

PUSHBTN 1 SET
This setting assigns the FlexLogic operand serving to activate the user-programmable pushbutton element. The
duration of the incoming set signal must be at least 56 ms for a 60 Hz system or 60 ms for a 50 Hz system.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 409
Chapter 9 - Settings

PUSHBTN 1 RESET
This setting assigns the FlexLogic operand serving to deactivate the user-programmable pushbutton element. This
setting is applicable only if the user-programmable pushbutton is in Latched mode.

PUSHBTN 1 AUTORST
This setting enables the user-programmable pushbutton autoreset feature. This setting is applicable only if the
pushbutton is in Latched mode.

PUSHBTN 1 AUTORST DELAY

This setting specifies the time delay for automatic reset of the pushbutton when in Latched mode.

PUSHBTN 1 REMOTE
This setting assigns the FlexLogic operand serving to inhibit user-programmable pushbutton operation from the
operand assigned to the PUSHBTN 1 SET or PUSHBTN 1 RESET settings.

PUSHBTN 1 LOCAL
This setting assigns the FlexLogic operand serving to inhibit user-programmable pushbutton operation from the
front panel pushbuttons. This inhibit functionality is not applicable to pushbutton autoreset.

PUSHBTN 1 DROP-OUT TIME

This setting applies only to Self-Reset mode and specifies the duration of the user-programmable pushbutton
active status after the front panel pushbutton or graphical front panel interface pushbutton has been released. When
activated remotely, this setting specifies the entire activation time of the pushbutton; the length of time the operand
selected by PUSHBTN 1 SET remains on has no effect on the pulse duration.

PUSHBTN 1 LED CTL

This setting assigns the FlexLogic operand serving to drive the front panel pushbutton LED. If this setting is Off,
then LED operation is directly linked to the PUSHBUTTON 1 ON operand. This setting is not applied to Pushbuttons
9 and above on the graphical front panel, where the label background shows the orange glow color for the On state.

PUSHBTN 1 MESSAGE
This setting controls the behavior of the user-programmable pushbutton on message that is programmed in the
PUSHBTN 1 ID and PUSHBTN 1 ON TEXT settings, and the behavior of the user-programmable pushbutton off
message that is programmed in the PUSHBTN 1 ID and PUSHBTN 1 OFF TEXT settings. This setting has no effect
on the graphical front panel.
When set to Disabled, user-programmable pushbutton messages do not display. Otherwise the on message
displays when the user-programmable pushbutton becomes activated, and if in the Latched mode the off message
displays when the user-programmable pushbutton becomes deactivated.
When set to Normal, the duration the message displays is as specified by the FLASH MESSAGE TIME setting.
When set to High Priority, the duration of the off message is as specified by the FLASH MESSAGE TIME
setting, but the on message is displayed as long as the user-programmable pushbutton is activated. While
activated, target and other messages are suppressed. To allow front panel keypad operation, when a keypad button
is pressed the message is suppressed for 10 seconds.

PUSHBUTTON 1 EVENTS
If this setting is enabled, each user-programmable pushbutton state change is logged as an event into the event
recorder.
The figures show the user-programmable pushbutton logic.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 410
Chapter 9 - Settings

✙✚✛✛✜✢✣
✩✪✫✬✭✪✮✮✯✂ ✰ ✱✪✂✲✮✳✯✂
✤ ✥☎✟✦✞☛✧
✤ ★✟✠☞✌☛✧ ❜❝▲❞❏❡❢ ❖P ◗❘❙❚❯❱❚P❲❚❳❨❨❳❩❬❙
✤ ✫☛✞✴✆✵☛✶☛✠ ❱◗❘❭❩◗❪❪P❫❘ ❬P❲❴❵
❘❭❙❙❪ ❛
✓✔ ❣❤✐❥ ❦❤✐❧♠ ♥♦❧♣q
✙✚✛✛✜✢✣ ✙✚✛✛✜✢✣
✩✪✫✬✭✮✂ ✰ ★✯✲✸★ ✩✪✫✬✭✮✂ ✰ ✬✯★✹
✯✴✴ ✤ ✷ ✮❾❿❾
➀➁➂➃ ➄➁➂➅➆ ➇➈➅➉➊ ✖✗✘
✷
✖✗✘
✓✔ ✛✜❃✚❀
❣❤✐❥ ➎❤♦♥➏➐➑♦q ❦❤✐❧♠ ♥♦❧♣q
❄❅ ❆✶❇

✙✚✛✛✜✢✣ ✷ ✕✁
✩✪✫✬✭✮✂ ✰ ✫✥✮
❇❅✷ ❆✶ ➒❄✷ ✬➓➔
✯✴✴ ✤ ✷ ✛✜❃✚❀
✂✄☎✆✝✄✞✟✠✡✞☛ ✞✟✠☞✌
❄❅ ❆✶❇
✙✚✛✛✜✢✣ ✖✗✘ ➋➌➍
✩✪✫✬✭✮✂ ✰ ✵✥❉✯✮✥ ✷ ✍✎✏✑✒
✯✴✴ ✤ ✷ ❇❅✷ ❆✶ ➒❄✷ ✬➓➔ ✁
✛✜❃✚❀
✺✻✚✼✻✽✣✜✾ ✽✿✚❀❁✢❂ ❈✷✷ ❆✶
✩✪✫✬✭✪✮✮✯✂ ✰ ✯✱✱
✷

✙✚✛✛✜✢✣
✩✪✫✬✭✮✂ ✰ ✵✥✫✥✮ ✖✗✘
✯✴✴ ✤ ✷

✕✁ ❖P ◗❘❙❚❯❱❚P❲❚❳❨❨❳❩❬❙
✙✚✛✛✜✢✣ ✓✔ ●❍■❏❑❍▲▲▼◆ ▼◆ ❱◗❘❭❩◗❪❪P❫❘ ❬P❲❴❵
✙✚✛✛✜✢✣ ❘❭❙❙❪ ❛
④⑤⑥⑦⑧⑨⑩ ❶ ❷⑤⑨❸❹⑥⑨ ❺❻❼❷❽
✩✪✫✬✭✮✂ ✰ ✸✪✮✯✵✫✮
✮❾❿❾
✤ ✥☎✟✦✞☛✧
✖✗✘ ➋➌➍
✤ ✹✡✶✟✦✞☛✧
✷

✛✜❃✚❀
✺✻✚✼✻✽✣✜✾ ✽✿✚❀❁✢❂ ❈✷✷ ❆✶ ✕✁
✩✪✫✬✭✪✮✮✯✂ ✰ ✯✂
✷

✙✚✛✛✜✢✣
✖✗✘ ✩✪✫✬✭✮✂ ✰ ✹✵✯✩✆✯✪✮ ✮✳❉✥
✷
✕✁
✮✔❊❋
✖✗✘
rstt✉✈✇✉①✑②③

Figure 218: User-programmable pushbutton logic (Sheet 1 of 2)

N60-1601-0125-861-1 411
Chapter 9 - Settings

✭▲▲ ⑦✱✩✩❖✳✱

❍❊❏■❏❍ ●❍❇❇■❏❍
✩✱✬✬✴✮✳
❜❝❴❞❪❡❢ ◗❙■❇❁ ●❍❇❇■❏❍ ❉☞●❍
✩✱✬✬✴✮✳✩
❨ ❄❆❇❁❈❉❊ ☞✼ ❉❍⑧❉
✸✹✺
✶✷ ❉✷❲❳ ✻ ⑧⑧⑧⑧⑧⑧⑧⑧⑧⑧
❄❆❇❁❈❉❊ P◗◗ ❉❍⑧❉
✻ ⑧⑧⑧⑧⑧⑧⑧⑧⑧⑧
☞✌✍✎✏✌✎✏✌✑✒✓✍
❦❧♠♥ ♦♣q❧rs❧♠t❧✉♥♥✉✈✇q ✔✑✍✑✎ ✕ ❍✌❃✏✌❚✑❀ ✏✌❀ ✍✎✏✌❀✏✔❀ ⑩✔✒✌✎ ❯✏✌✑✿✍
s♦♣①✈♦②②♠③♣ ✇♠t④⑤ ♣①qq② ⑥

▲✰✱▼✰✭✳✴✵ ✭✧✱◆❖✮✲
❜❝❴❞❪❡❢❣❭❡❜❤✐❥❡❭❡❴
✸✹✺ ❄❆❇❁❈❆❉❉P❊ ❋ P◗◗

▲✰✱▼✰✭✳✴✵ ✭✧✱◆❖✮✲
❩❬❭❪❫❬❴❴❵❛ ❵❛ ❄❆❇❁❈❆❉❉P❊ ❋ P❊

✭✮ ⑦✱✩✩❖✳✱
✩✱✬✬✴✮✳ ❍❊❏■❏❍ ●❍❇❇■❏❍
❄❆❇❁❈❉❊ ❋ ●❍❇❇■❏❍
✸✹✺
✻ ✼✽✍✏✾✿✑❀
✻ ❁✽❂❃ ❄✔✽✒✔✽✎❅ ✩✱✬✬✴✮✳✩
✻ ❊✒✔❑✏✿ ❄❆❇❁❈❉❊ ☞✼ ❉❍⑧❉
✻ ⑧⑧⑧⑧⑧⑧⑧⑧⑧⑧
✖✗
❄❆❇❁❈❉❊ P❊ ❉❍⑧❉
✩✱✬✬✴✮✳
✻ ⑧⑧⑧⑧⑧⑧⑧⑧⑧⑧
◗❙■❇❁ ●❍❇❇■❏❍ ❉☞●❍
❨ ❍✌❃✏✌❚✑❀ ✏✌❀ ✍✎✏✌❀✏✔❀ ⑩✔✒✌✎ ❯✏✌✑✿✍
✸✹✺
❉✷❲❳ ❉❃✑ ❑✑✍✍✏❂✑ ✽✍ ✎✑❑❯✒✔✏✔✽✿❅ ✔✑❑✒⑨✑❀ ✽⑩
✏✌❅ ❶✑❅❯✏❀ ✾✓✎✎✒✌ ✽✍ ❯✔✑✍✍✑❀❷ ❉✑✌
✍✑❚✒✌❀✍ ✒⑩ ❶✑❅❯✏❀ ✽✌✏❚✎✽⑨✽✎❅ ✔✑✍✎✒✔✑✍
☞✌✍✎✏✌✎✏✌✑✒✓✍
☞✌✍✎✏✌✎✏✌✑✒✓✍ ✔✑✍✑✎ ✽✍ ✑❘✑❚✓✎✑❀ ✽⑩ ✏✌❅ ✔✑✍✑✎ ✕ ✎❃✑ ❑✑✍✍✏❂✑❷
⑩✔✒✌✎ ❯✏✌✑✿ ✾✓✎✎✒✌ ✽✍ ❯✔✑✍✍✑❀ ✒✔ ✏✌❅ ✌✑❸
✎✏✔❂✑✎ ✒✔ ❑✑✍✍✏❂✑ ✾✑❚✒❑✑✍ ✏❚✎✽⑨✑❷

✧★✩✪✫★✬ ✬✭✮ ✯ ✰✱✲ ✰✭✳✴✵

✟✘ ✙✚ ✛✁✂✄☎✁✆✆✝✞ ✟ ✠✡☛ ✜✝✞✆✢✝✣ ✤✂ ✂✥✆ ✆✝ ✝✚✚✘
✁✂✄☎✁✆✆✝✞ ✟
▲✰✱▼✰✭✳✴✵ ✭✧✱◆❖✮✲ ▲✰✱▼✰✭✳✴✵ ✭✧✱◆❖✮✲ ✠✡☛
❄❆❇❁❈❆❉❉P❊ ❋ P❊ ❄❆❇❁❈❆❉❉P❊ ❋ P❊
❄❆❇❁❈❆❉❉P❊ ❿ P❊
▲✰✱▼✰✭✳✴✵ ✭✧✱◆❖✮✲
❄❆❇❁❈❆❉❉P❊ ➀ P❊ ✦✘ ✙✚ ✛✁✂✄☎✁✆✆✝✞ ✟ ✠✡☛ ✜✝✞✆✢✝✣ ✤✂ ✞✝✆ ✂✥✆ ✆✝ ✝✚✚✘
✶✷ ■❊➂ ❄❈ P❊
✩✱✬✬✴✮✳ ✁✂✄☎✁✆✆✝✞ ✟
❄❆❇❁❈❉❊ ❋ ❙❍✼ ❱❉❙ ✠✡☛
❄❆❇❁❈❆❉❉P❊ ❋➁ P❊ ✻ ✏✌❅ ◗✿✑❘❙✒❂✽❚ ✒❯✑✔✏✌❀
❉❃✑ ✑✌❃✏✌❚✑❀ ⑩✔✒✌✎ ❯✏✌✑✿ ❃✏✍ ❋➁ ✒❯✑✔✏✌❀✍➃
✎❃✑ ✍✎✏✌❀✏✔❀ ⑩✔✒✌✎ ❯✏✌✑✿ ❃✏✍ ❋❿

❹❺✦✦❻❼❽✟✘❾☛✗

Figure 219: User-programmable pushbutton logic (Sheet 2 of 2)

9.4.15 FLEX STATE PARAMETERS

Setting path: SETTINGS > PRODUCT SETUP > FLEX STATE PARAMETERS
■ FLEX STATE PARAMETER <n>:
ó Range: FlexLogic operand
■ PARAMETERS Off
where n = 1 to 256
This feature provides a mechanism where any of 256 selected FlexLogic operand states can be used for efficient
monitoring. The feature allows user-customized access to the FlexLogic operand states in the relay. The state bits
are packed so that 16 states are readable in a single Modbus register. The state bits can be configured so that all
states of interest are available in a minimum number of Modbus registers.
The state bits can be read out in the Flex States register array beginning at Modbus address 0900h. Sixteen states
are packed into each register, with the lowest-numbered state in the lowest-order bit. Sixteen registers
accommodate the 256 state bits.

9.4.16 USER-DEFINABLE DISPLAYS

Setting path: SETTINGS > PRODUCT SETUP > USER-DEFINABLE DISPLAYS

N60-1601-0125-861-1 412
Chapter 9 - Settings

■ USER-DEFINABLE INVOKE AND SCROLL:

ó Range: FlexLogic operand
■ DISPLAYS Off
■ USER DISPLAY <n>
ñ
■
where n = 1 to 16
This feature is supported with enhanced and basic front panels. It is not supported with the optional graphical front
panel.
This menu provides a mechanism for manually creating up to 16 user-defined information displays in a convenient
viewing sequence in the USER DISPLAY menu (between the TARGETS and ACTUAL VALUES top-level menus).
The sub-menus facilitate text entry and Modbus register data pointer options for defining the user display content.
Once programmed, the user-definable displays can be viewed in two ways:
● Keypad
● User-programmable control input

Keypad
Use the MENU key to select the USER DISPLAY menu item to access the first user-definable display (note that
only the programmed screens are displayed). The screens can be scrolled using the up and down arrow keys. The
display disappears after the default message time-out period specified by the PRODUCT SETUP > DISPLAY
PROPERTIES > DEFAULT MESSAGE TIMEOUT setting.

User-programmable control input

The user-definable displays also respond to the INVOKE AND SCROLL setting. Any FlexLogic operand (in
particular, the user-programmable pushbutton operands), can be used to navigate the programmed displays.
On the rising edge of the configured operand (such as when the pushbutton is pressed), the displays are invoked by
showing the last user-definable display shown during the previous activity. From this moment onward, the operand
acts exactly as the down key and allows scrolling through the configured displays. The last display wraps up to the
first one. The INVOKE AND SCROLL input and the down arrow key operate concurrently.
When the default timer expires (set by the DEFAULT MESSAGE TIMEOUT setting), the relay starts to cycle
through the user displays. The next activity of the INVOKE AND SCROLL input stops the cycling at the currently
displayed user display, not at the first user-defined display. The INVOKE AND SCROLL pulses must last for at least
250 ms to take effect.

9.4.16.1 USER DISPLAY <N>

Setting path: SETTINGS > PRODUCT SETUP > USER-DEFINABLE DISPLAYS USER DISPLAY <n>
■ USER DISPLAY <n> ó DISP <n> TOP LINE: Range: up to 20 alphanumeric characters

ô DISP <n> BOTTOM LINE: Range: up to 20 alphanumeric characters

DISP <n> ITEM <m>:

ñ Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1
0
where n = 1 to 16, m = 1 to 5
Any existing system display can be automatically copied into an available user display by selecting the existing
display and pressing the ENTER key. The display then prompts with ADD TO USER DISPLAY LIST? After
selecting Yes, a message indicates that the selected display has been added to the user display list. When this type
of entry occurs, the sub-menus are automatically configured with the proper content—this content can be edited
subsequently.
This menu is used to enter user-defined text and user-selected Modbus-registered data fields into the particular
user display. Each user display consists of two 20-character lines (top and bottom). The tilde (~) character is used

N60-1601-0125-861-1 413
Chapter 9 - Settings

to mark the start of a data field – the length of the data field needs to be accounted for. Up to five separate data
fields can be entered in a user display – the nth tilde (~) refers to the nth item.
A user display can be entered from the front panel keypad or the EnerVista interface (preferred for convenience).
The following procedure shows how to enter text characters in the top and bottom lines from the front panel keypad.
Press the HELP key at any time for context sensitive help information.
1. Select the line to be edited.
2. Press the decimal key to enter text edit mode.
3. Use either VALUE key to scroll through the characters. A space is selected like a character.
4. Press the decimal key to advance the cursor to the next position.
5. Repeat step 3 and continue entering characters until the desired text is displayed.
6. Press the ENTER key to store the new settings.
To enter a numerical value for any of the five items (the decimal form of the selected Modbus address) from the
front panel keypad, use the number keypad. Use the value of “0” for any items not being used. Use the HELP key at
any selected system display (setting, actual value, or command) which has a Modbus address, to view the
hexadecimal form of the Modbus address, then manually convert it to decimal form before entering it (EnerVista
usage conveniently facilitates this conversion). See the Modbus Memory Map section earlier in this chapter for
information on how to calculate the decimal value to enter on the front panel.
Use the MENU key to go to the user displays menu to view the user-defined content. The current user displays
show in sequence, changing every four seconds. While viewing a user display, press the ENTER key and confirm to
remove the display from the user display list. Use the MENU key again to exit the user displays menu.
An example of user display setup and result is shown as follows.
■ USER DISPLAY 1 DISP 1 TOP LINE:
ó Shows user-defined text with first tilde marker
■ Current X ~ A
DISP 1 BOTTOM LINE:
ô Shows user-defined text with second tilde marker
Current Y ~ A
DISP 1 ITEM 1: Shows decimal form of user-selected Modbus register
ô
6016 address, corresponding to first tilde marker
DISP 1 ITEM 2: Shows decimal form of user-selected Modbus register
ô
6357 address, corresponding to second tilde marker
DISP 1 ITEM 3: This item is not being used. There is no
ô
0 corresponding tilde marker in top or bottom lines.
DISP 1 ITEM 4: This item is not being used. There is no
ô
0 corresponding tilde marker in top or bottom lines.
DISP 1 ITEM 5: This item is not being used. There is no
0 corresponding tilde marker in top or bottom lines.

■ USER DISPLAYS Current X 0.850

ó Shows the resultant display content
■ Current Y 0.327 A

If the parameters for the top line and the bottom line items have the same units, then the unit is displayed on the
bottom line only. The units are only displayed on both lines if the units specified both the top and bottom line items
are different.

9.4.17 DIRECT INPUTS AND OUTPUTS

Setting path: SETTINGS > PRODUCT SETUP > DIRECT I/O

N60-1601-0125-861-1 414
Chapter 9 - Settings

■ DIRECT I/O DIRECT OUTPUTS

ó Range:1 to 16 in steps of 1
DEVICE ID: 1
DIRECT I/O CH1 RING
ô Range: Yes, No
CONFIGURATION: Yes
DIRECT I/O CH2 RING
ô
CONFIGURATION: Yes
DIRECT I/O DATA
ô
RATE: 64 kbps
DIRECT I/O CHANNEL
ô
CROSSOVER: Disabled
■ CRC ALARM CH1
ô
■
■ CRC ALARM CH2
ô
■
■ UNRETURNED
ô
■ MESSAGES ALARM CHANEL 1
■ UNRETURNED
ñ
■ MESSAGES ALARM CHANEL 2

Note:
This option is available when an Inter-Relay Communications card is specified at the time of ordering. With the option, direct
inputs/outputs display by default. When you enable the teleprotection feature, direct I/O is not visible.

Direct inputs and outputs provide the ability to exchange status information between relays connected together with
type 7 digital communications cards. The mechanism is very similar to IEC 61850 GOOSE, except that
communications takes place over a non-switchable isolated network and is optimized for speed. On type 7 cards
that support two channels, messages are sent from both channels simultaneously. This effectively sends direct
output messages both ways around a ring configuration. On type 7 cards that support one channel, messages are
sent only in one direction. Messages are resent (forwarded) when it is determined that the message did not
originate at the receiver.
Direct Inputs and Outputs are initiated automatically and start running when at least one Direct Output in the given
UR is set to anything but Off.
For the direct I/Os to function properly, all UR devices sending I/Os using an Inter-Relay Communications card must
have identical firmware revisions.

Note:
Teleprotection inputs/outputs and direct inputs/outputs are mutually exclusive. As such, they cannot be used simultaneously.
Once teleprotection inputs and outputs are enabled, direct inputs and outputs are disabled, and vice versa.

Direct output message timing is similar to GOOSE message timing. Integrity messages (with no state changes) are
sent at least every 1000 ms. Messages with state changes are sent within the main pass scanning the inputs and
asserting the outputs unless the communication channel bandwidth has been exceeded. Two self-tests are
performed and signaled by the following FlexLogic operands:
DIRECT RING BREAK (direct input/output ring break) — Indicates that direct output messages sent from a UR-
series relay are not being received back by the relay
DIRECT DEVICE 1 OFF to DIRECT DEVICE 16 OFF (direct device offline) — Indicate that direct output messages
from at least one direct device are not being received

N60-1601-0125-861-1 415
Chapter 9 - Settings

Direct input and output settings are similar to remote input and output settings. The equivalent of the remote device
name strings for direct inputs and outputs is the DIRECT OUTPUT DEVICE ID setting, which identifies the relay in
all direct output messages. All UR-series IEDs in a ring need to have unique numbers assigned. The IED ID is used
to identify the sender of the direct input and output message.
If the direct input and output scheme is configured to operate in a ring, all direct output messages are received
back. If not, the direct input/output ring break self-test is triggered. The self-test error is signaled by the DIRECT
RING BREAK FlexLogic operand.
Select the DIRECT I/O DATA RATE to match the data capabilities of the communications channel. All relays
communicating over direct inputs and outputs must be set to the same data rate. UR-series relays equipped with
dual-channel communications cards apply the same data rate to both channels. Delivery time for direct input and
output messages is approximately 0.2 or 0.4 of a power system cycle, depending on the data rate.

Direct input and output data rates

Module Supported data rates
2A, 2B 64 kbps
2E, 2F (legacy modules) 64 kbps
2G, 2H 128 kbps
2I, 2J 64 kbps, 128 kbps
72, 73 64 kbps, 128 kbps, 213 kbps (B90 only)
74, 75 64 kbps
76, 77 64 kbps
7A, 7B, 7C, 7D 64 kbps, 128 kbps, 213 kbps (B90 only)
7E, 7F, 7G 64 kbps
7H, 7I, 7J, 7K 64 kbps, 128 kbps, 213 kbps (B90 only)
7L, 7M, 7N, 7P, 7Q 64 kbps
7R, 7S 64 kbps
7T, 7W 64 kbps

Note:
The G.703 modules are fixed at 64 kbps. The DIRECT I/O DATA RATE setting is not applicable to these modules.

The DIRECT I/O CHANNEL CROSSOVER setting applies to a Product with dual-channel communication cards and
allows crossing over messages from channel 1 to channel 2. This places all UR-series relays into one direct input
and output network regardless of the physical media of the two communication channels.
The following application examples illustrate the basic concepts for direct input and output configuration. See the
Inputs and Outputs section for information on configuring FlexLogic operands (flags, bits) to be exchanged.

Example 1: Extending the input/output capabilities of a UR-series relay

Consider an application that requires additional quantities of contact inputs or output contacts or lines of
programmable logic that exceed the capabilities of a single UR-series chassis. The problem is solved by adding an
extra UR-series IED, such as the C30, to satisfy the additional input and output and programmable logic
requirements. The two IEDs are connected via single-channel digital communication cards as shown in the figure.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 416
Chapter 9 - Settings

✝✞✟
✁ ✂✄☎ ✆
✠✞✟

✝✞✟
✁ ✂✄☎ ✡
✠✞✟
☛☞✌✍✎✎✏✎✑✒✓✔
Figure 220: Input and output extension via direct inputs and outputs

In this application, apply the following settings. For relay 1:

● DIRECT OUTPUT DEVICE ID: “1”
● DIRECT I/O CH1 RING CONFIGURATION: “Yes”
● DIRECT I/O DATA RATE: “128 kbps”
● For UR-series IED 2:
● DIRECT OUTPUT DEVICE ID: “2”
● DIRECT I/O CH1 RING CONFIGURATION: “Yes”
● DIRECT I/O DATA RATE: “128 kbps”
The message delivery time is about 0.2 of power cycle in both ways (at 128 kbps); that is, from device 1 to device 2,
and from device 2 to device 1. Different communications cards can be selected by the user for this back-to-back
connection (for example: fiber, G.703, or RS422).

Example 2: Interlocking busbar protection

A simple interlocking busbar protection scheme could be accomplished by sending a blocking signal from
downstream devices, say 2, 3, and 4, to the upstream device that monitors a single incomer of the busbar, as
shown.

✡☛ ☞✌✍ ✎ ✓✔✕✖✗

✡☛ ☞✌✍ ✏ ✡☛ ☞✌✍ ✒ ✡☛ ☞✌✍ ✑

✁✂✄☎✂✆☎✝✞✟✠

Figure 221: Sample interlocking busbar protection scheme

For increased reliability, a dual-ring configuration (shown as follows) is recommended for this application.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 417
Chapter 9 - Settings

✔✒✓ ✑✒✓
☛☞ ✌✍✎ ✏
✑✒✕ ✔✒✕

✑✒✓ ✔✒✕ ✑✒✕ ✔✒✓

☛☞ ✌✍✎ ✖ ☛☞ ✌✍✎ ✗
✔✒✓ ✑✒✕ ✔✒✕ ✑✒✓

✔✒✕ ✑✒✕
☛☞ ✌✍✎ ✘
✑✒✓ ✔✒✓
✁✂✄☎✆✝☎✞✟✠✡

Figure 222: Interlocking bus protection scheme via direct inputs/outputs

In this application, apply the following settings. For relay :

● DIRECT OUTPUT DEVICE ID: “1”
● DIRECT I/O CH1 RING CONFIGURATION: “Yes”
● DIRECT I/O CH2 RING CONFIGURATION: “Yes”
For relay 2:
● DIRECT OUTPUT DEVICE ID: “2”
● DIRECT I/O CH1 RING CONFIGURATION: “Yes”
● DIRECT I/O CH2 RING CONFIGURATION: “Yes”
For relay 3:
● DIRECT OUTPUT DEVICE ID: “3”
● DIRECT I/O CH1 RING CONFIGURATION: “Yes”
● DIRECT I/O CH2 RING CONFIGURATION: “Yes”
For relay 4:
● DIRECT OUTPUT DEVICE ID: “4”
● DIRECT I/O CH1 RING CONFIGURATION: “Yes”
● DIRECT I/O CH2 RING CONFIGURATION: “Yes”
The Message delivery time is approximately 0.2 of power system cycle (at 128 kbps) times number of ‘bridges’
between the origin and destination. Dual-ring configuration effectively reduces the maximum ‘communications
distance’ by a factor of two.
In this configuration the following delivery times are expected (at 128 kbps) if both rings are healthy:
Relay 1 to Relay 2: 0.2 of power system cycle
Relay 1 to Relay 3: 0.4 of power system cycle
Relay 1 to Relay 4: 0.2 of power system cycle
Relay 2 to Relay 3: 0.2 of power system cycle
Relay 2 to Relay 4: 0.4 of power system cycle
Relay 3 to Relay 4: 0.2 of power system cycle
If one ring is broken (say TX2-RX2) the delivery times are as follows:
Relay 1 to Relay 2: 0.2 of power system cycle
Relay 1 to Relay 3: 0.4 of power system cycle
Relay 1 to Relay 4: 0.6 of power system cycle
Relay 2 to Relay 3: 0.2 of power system cycle
Relay 2 to Relay 4: 0.4 of power system cycle

N60-1601-0125-861-1 418
Chapter 9 - Settings

Relay 3 to Relay 4: 0.2 of power system cycle

A coordinating timer for this bus protection scheme could be selected to cover the worst case scenario (0.4 of a
power system cycle). Upon detecting a broken ring, the coordination time is adaptively increased to 0.6 of a power
system cycle. The complete application requires addressing a number of issues, such as failure of both the
communications rings, failure or out-of-service conditions of one of the relays, and so on. Self-monitoring flags of
the direct inputs and outputs feature primarily are used to address these concerns.

Example 3: Pilot-aided schemes

Consider the three-terminal line protection application shown.

☛☞ ✌✍✎ ✏ ☛☞ ✌✍✎ ✑

☛☞ ✌✍✎ ✒
✁✂✄☎✆✝☎✞✟✠✡

Figure 223: Three-terminal line application

A permissive pilot-aided scheme can be implemented in a two-ring configuration, shown as follows (Relays 1 and 2
constitute a first ring, while Relays 2 and 3 constitute a second ring).

✏✑✒ ✓✑✒ ✓✑✕

✡☛ ☞✌✍ ✎ ✡☛ ☞✌✍ ✔
✓✑✒ ✏✑✒ ✏✑✕

✓✑✒
✡☛ ☞✌✍ ✖
✏✑✒
✁✂✄☎✁✆☎✝✞✟✠

Figure 224: Single-channel open loop configuration

In this application, apply the following settings. For UR-series Relay 1:

● DIRECT OUTPUT DEVICE ID: “1”
● DIRECT I/O CH1 RING CONFIGURATION: “Yes”
● DIRECT I/O CH2 RING CONFIGURATION: “Yes”
For UR-series Relay 2:
● DIRECT OUTPUT DEVICE ID: “2”
● IRECT I/O CH1 RING CONFIGURATION: “Yes”
● DIRECT I/O CH2 RING CONFIGURATION: “Yes”
For UR-series Relay 3:
● DIRECT OUTPUT DEVICE ID: “3”
● DIRECT I/O CH1 RING CONFIGURATION: “Yes”
● DIRECT I/O CH2 RING CONFIGURATION: “Yes”

N60-1601-0125-861-1 419
Chapter 9 - Settings

In this configuration the following delivery times are expected (at 128 kbps):
● Relay 1 to Relay 2: 0.2 of power system cycle
● Relay 1 to Relay 3: 0.5 of power system cycle
● Relay 2 to Relay 3: 0.2 of power system cycle
In this scheme, Relays 1 and 3 do not communicate directly. Relay 2 must be configured to forward the messages
as explained in the Inputs and Outputs section. Implement a blocking pilot-aided scheme with more security and,
ideally, faster message delivery time. This is accomplished using a dual-ring configuration as shown here.

✑✒✕ ✑✒✓ ✔✒✓ ✔✒✕

☛☞ ✌✍✎ ✏ ☛☞ ✌✍✎ ✖
✔✒✓ ✔✒✕ ✑✒✕ ✑✒✓

✑✒✓ ✔✒✓
☛☞ ✌✍✎ ✗
✔✒✕ ✑✒✕
✁✂✄☎✆✝☎✞✟✠✡

Figure 225: Dual-channel closed loop (dual-ring) configuration

In this application, apply the following settings. For UR-series Relay 1:

● DIRECT OUTPUT DEVICE ID: “1”
● DIRECT I/O CH1 RING CONFIGURATION: “Yes”
● DIRECT I/O CH2 RING CONFIGURATION: “Yes”
For UR-series Relay 2:
● DIRECT OUTPUT DEVICE ID: “2”
● DIRECT I/O CH1 RING CONFIGURATION: “Yes”
● DIRECT I/O CH2 RING CONFIGURATION: “Yes”
For UR-series Relay 3:
● DIRECT OUTPUT DEVICE ID: “3”
● DIRECT I/O CH1 RING CONFIGURATION: “Yes”
● DIRECT I/O CH2 RING CONFIGURATION: “Yes”
In this configuration the following delivery times are expected (at 128 kbps) if both the rings are healthy:
● Relay 1 to Relay 2: 0.2 of power system cycle
● Relay 1 to Relay 3: 0.2 of power system cycle
● Relay 2 to Relay 3: 0.2 of power system cycle
The two communications configurations can be applied to both permissive and blocking schemes. Take speed,
reliability, and cost into account when selecting the required architecture.

9.4.17.1 CRC ALARM

Setting path: SETTINGS > PRODUCT SETUP > DIRECT I/O > CRC ALARM CH1(2)

Note:
Only channel 1 is shown

■ CRC ALARM CH 1 CRC ALARM CH 1:

ó Range: Enabled, Disabled
FUN CTION: Disabled

N60-1601-0125-861-1 420
Chapter 9 - Settings

CRC ALARM CH 1
ô Range: 100 to 10000 in steps of 1
MESSAGE COUNT: 600
CRC ALARM CH 1
ô Range: 1 to 1000 in steps of 1
THRESHOLD: 10
CRC ALARM CH 1
ñ Range: Enabled, Disabled
EVENTS: Disabled

The relay checks the integrity of the incoming Direct I/O messages using a 32-bit CRC. The CRC alarm function is
available for monitoring the communication medium noise by tracking the rate of messages failing the CRC check.
The monitoring function counts all incoming messages, including messages that failed the CRC check. A separate
counter adds up messages that failed the CRC check. When the failed CRC counter reaches the user-defined level
specified by the CRC ALARM CH1 THRESHOLD setting, the DIR IO CH1 CRC ALARM FlexLogic operand is set.
When the total message counter reaches the user-defined maximum specified by the CRC ALARM CH1
MESSAGE COUNT setting, both the counters reset and the monitoring process is restarted.
You configure the operand to drive an output contact, user-programmable LED, or selected communication-based
output.
The CRC alarm function is available on a per-channel basis. The total number of Direct I/O messages that failed the
CRC check is available as an Actual Value ACTUAL VALUES > STATUS > DIRECT INPUTS > CRC FAIL COUNT
CH1.

Message count and length of the monitoring window

To monitor communications integrity, the relay sends 1 message per second at 64 kbps, 2 messages per second at
128 kbps, or for the B90 only, 3 messages per second at 213 kbps, even if there is no change in the direct outputs.
If the messages are sent faster as a result of direct outputs activity, the monitoring time interval shortens. Take this
into account when determining the CRC ALARM CH1 MESSAGE COUNT setting. For example, if the requirement
is a maximum monitoring time interval of 10 minutes at 64 kbps, then the CRC ALARM CH1 MESSAGE COUNT is
set to 10 x 60 x 1 = 600.

Correlation of failed CRC and bit error rate (BER)

The CRC check can fail if one or more bits in a packet are corrupted. Therefore, an exact correlation between the
CRC fail rate and the BER is not possible. Under certain assumptions an approximation can be made as follows. A
direct input and output packet containing 20 bytes results in 160 bits of data being sent and therefore, a
transmission of 63 packets is equivalent to 10,000 bits. A BER of 10–4 implies 1 bit error for every 10000 bits sent
or received. Assuming the best case of only 1 bit error in a failed packet, having 1 failed packet for every 63
received is about equal to a BER of 10–4.

9.4.17.2 UNRETURNED MESSAGES ALARM

Setting path: SETTINGS > PRODUCT SETUP > DIRECT I/O > UNRETURNED MESSAGES ALARM CH 1(2)
■ UNRETURNED UNRET MSGS ALARM CH1
ó Range: Enabled, Disabled
■ MESSAGES ALARM CH1 FUNCTION: Disabled
UNRET MSGS ALARM CH1
ô Range: 100 to 10000 in steps of 1
MESSAGE COUNT: 600
UNRET MSGS ALARM CH1
ô Range: 1 to 1000 in steps of 1
THRESHOLD: 10
UNRET MSGS ALARM CH1
ñ Range: Enabled, Disabled
EVENTS: Disabled

The relay checks the integrity of the direct input and output communication ring by counting unreturned messages.
In the ring configuration, all messages originating at a given device should return within a pre-defined period of time.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 421
Chapter 9 - Settings

The unreturned messages alarm function is available for monitoring the integrity of the communication ring by
tracking the rate of unreturned messages. This function counts all the outgoing messages and a separate counter
adds the messages have failed to return. When the unreturned messages counter reaches the user-definable level
specified by the UNRET MSGS ALARM CH1 THRESHOLD setting and within the user-defined message count
UNRET MSGS ALARM CH1 COUNT, the DIR IO CH1 UNRET ALM FlexLogic operand is set.
When the total message counter reaches the user-defined maximum specified by the UNRET MSGS ALARM CH1
MESSAGE COUNT setting, both the counters reset and the monitoring process is restarted.
Configure the operand to drive an output contact, user-programmable LED, or selected communication-based
output. Latching and acknowledging conditions, if required, are programmed accordingly.
The unreturned messages alarm function is available on a per-channel basis and is active only in the ring
configuration. The total number of unreturned input and output messages is available as the ACTUAL VALUES >
STATUS > DIRECT INPUTS > UNRETURNED MSG COUNT CH1 actual value.

9.4.18 TELEPROTECTION
Setting path: SETTINGS > PRODUCT SETUP > DIRECT I/O > CRC ALARM CH <n>
■ TELEPROTECTION TELEPROTECTION
ó Range: Enabled, Disabled
FUN CTION: Disabled
NUMBER OF TERMINALS
ô Range: 2, 3
2
NUMBER OF COMM
ô Range: 1, 2
CHANNELS: 1
LOCAL RELAY ID
Range: 0 to 63 in steps of 1
NUMBER: 0
TERMINAL 1 RELAY ID
Range: 0 to 63 in steps of 1
NUMBER: 0
TERMINAL 2 RELAY ID
ñ Range:0 to 63 in steps of 1
NUMBER: 0

Note:
This option is available when an Inter-Relay Communications card is specified at the time of ordering. With the option, direct
inputs/outputs display by default. When you enable the teleprotection feature, direct I/O is not visible.

Digital teleprotection transfers protection commands between two or three relays in a secure, fast, dependable, and
deterministic way. Possible applications are permissive or blocking pilot schemes and direct transfer trip (DTT).
Teleprotection can be applied over any analog or digital channels and any communications media, such as direct
fiber, copper wires, optical networks, or microwave radio links. A mixture of communication media is possible.
Once teleprotection is enabled and the teleprotection input/outputs are configured, data packets are transmitted
continuously every 1/4 cycle (3/8 cycle if using C37.94 modules) from peer-to-peer. Security of communication
channel data is achieved by using CRC-32 on the data packet.

Note:
Teleprotection inputs/outputs and direct inputs/outputs are mutually exclusive. As such, they cannot be used simultaneously.
Once teleprotection inputs and outputs are enabled, direct inputs and outputs are blocked, and vice versa.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 422
Chapter 9 - Settings

NUMBER OF TERMINALS
Specifies whether the teleprotection system operates between two peers or three peers.

NUMBER OF CHANNELS
Specifies how many channels are used. If the NUMBER OF TERMINALS is 3 (three-terminal system), set the
NUMBER OF CHANNELS to 2. For a two-terminal system, the NUMBER OF CHANNELS can set to 1 or 2
(redundant channels).

LOCAL RELAY ID NUMBER, TERMINAL 1 RELAY ID NUMBER, and TERMINAL 2 RELAY ID NUMBER
In installations that use multiplexers or modems, you should make sure that the data used by the relays protecting a
given line is from the correct relays. The teleprotection function performs this check by reading the message ID sent
by transmitting relays and comparing it to the programmed ID in the receiving relay. This check is also used to block
inputs if inadvertently set to loopback mode, or data is being received from a wrong relay by checking the ID on a
received channel. If an incorrect ID is found on a channel during normal operation, the TELEPROT CH1 ID FAIL or
TELEPROT CH2 ID FAIL FlexLogic operand is set, driving the event with the same name and blocking the
teleprotection inputs. For commissioning purposes, the result of channel identification is also shown in the STATUS
> CHANNEL TESTS > VALIDITY OF CHANNEL CONFIGURATION actual value. The default value of 0 for the
LOCAL RELAY ID NUMBER indicates that relay ID is not to be checked. On two-terminals two-channel systems,
the same LOCAL RELAY ID NUMBER is transmitted over both channels; as such, only the TERMINAL 1 ID
NUMBER has to be programmed on the receiving end.

9.4.19 INSTALLATION
Setting path: SETTINGS > PRODUCT SETUP > INSTALLATION
■ INSTALLATION RELAY SETTINGS:
ó Range: Not Programmed, Programmed
Not Programmed
RELAY NAME:
ô Range: up to 20 alphanumeric characters
Relay-1:
STATION NAME
ñ Range: up to 20 alphanumeric characters
Station-1

RELAY SETTINGS
To safeguard against the installation of a relay without any entered settings, the unit does not allow signaling of any
output relay until RELAY SETTINGS is set to Programmed. This setting is Not Programmed by default. The UNIT
NOT PROGRAMMED self-test error message displays until the relay is put into the Programmed state.

RELAY NAME
This setting allows the user to uniquely identify a relay. This name appears on generated reports.

STATION NAME
This setting allows the user to associate the relay with the installed substation.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 423
Chapter 9 - Settings

9.5 SYSTEM SETUP

This section describes all the settings necessary for setting up the system:

9.5.1 AC INPUTS
Setting path: SETTINGS > SYSTEM SETUP > AC INPUTS
■ AC INPUTS ■ CURRENT BANK F1(U5)
ó
■ ■
■ VOLTAGE BANK F1(U5)
ñ
■

9.5.1.1 CURRENT BANKS

Setting path: SETTINGS > SYSTEM SETUP > AC INPUTS> CURRENT BANK <X,Y>
Upto six banks are available with designations dependent on the configuration. Only bank F1 is shown here.
■ CURRENT BANK F1 PHASE CT F1
ó Range: 1 to 65000 A in steps of 1
■ PRIMARY: 1 A
PHASE CT F1
ô Range: 1 A, 5 A: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1
SECONDARY: 1 A
PHASE CT F1 POL: Range: Standard, Inverted-3Ph, Inverted Ph-A,
ô
STANDARD Inverted Ph-B, Inverted Ph-C
GROUND CT F1
ô Range: 1 to 65000 A in steps of 1
PRIMARY: 1 A
GROUND CT F1
ô Range: 1 A, 5 A
SECONDARY: 1 A
GROUND CT F1 POL:
ñ Range: Standard, Inverted
STANDARD

For a Product with -9-2LE hardware and software options, this element is not present.
If applicable, record the value of any energy parameters and then reset immediately prior to changing any CT
characteristics.
Depending on the model, either two, four or six banks of phase and ground CTs can be set, where the current
banks are denoted in the following format Xa, where X = the slot designation, and a is the AC quantity group
designation.
These settings are critical for all features that have settings dependent on current measurements. When the relay is
ordered, the CT module must be specified to include a standard or sensitive ground input. As the phase CTs are
connected in wye (star), the calculated phasor sum of the three phase currents (IA + IB + IC = neutral current = 3I0)
is used as the input for the neutral overcurrent elements. In addition, a zero-sequence (core balance) CT which
senses current in all of the circuit primary conductors, or a CT in a neutral grounding conductor can also be used.
For this configuration, the ground CT primary rating must be entered. To detect low level ground fault currents, the
sensitive ground input can be used. In this case, the sensitive ground CT primary rating must be entered. See
chapter 3 for more details on CT connections.
Enter the rated CT primary current values. For both 1000:5 and 1000:1 CTs, the entry would be 1000. For correct
operation, the CT secondary rating must match the setting (which must also correspond to the specific CT
connections used).
The following example illustrates how multiple CT inputs (current banks) are summed as one source current. Given
the following current banks:

N60-1601-0125-861-1 424
Chapter 9 - Settings

F1: CT bank with 500:1 ratio

F5: CT bank with 1000:1 ratio
The source current is SRC 1 = F1 + F5
The highest primary current (in F5) is 1 pu, so the secondary current from the other two CTs are adjusted
accordingly before summation. If a protection element is set up to act on SRC 1 currents, then a pickup level of 1 pu
operates on 1000 A primary.
The same rule applies for current sums from CTs with different secondary taps (5 A and 1 A).

Warning:
In case of current sums from CTs with the same primary current but different secondary current, the
first CT bank becomes a base and second CT bank current is-rescaled to the first CT bank (for
example F1+M1, F1 is a base for the settings and actual values).

The relay allows the reversal of the CT polarity for a single phase or three phases without changing the wiring. You
do this using the settings PHASE CT F1 (Xa) POL and GROUND CT F1 (Xa) POL.

PHASE CT F1 POL
If CTs are wired with the correct polarity in all phases, i.e. CT polarity reversal is not required; the Standard value
should be selected. If the CT polarity is incorrect in just one phase, let's say phase A, then select Inverted Ph-
A. If CT polarities of all three phases are incorrect, select Inverted-3Ph to correct the CT polarities for all three
phases. Note that the oscillography record will capture the CTs current signal as applied to the relay terminal
irrespective of this setting. This ensures correct relay behavior when recorded oscillography is played back to the
relay.

GROUND CT F1 POL
The same principles described above apply.

Note:
It is important that the settings PHASE CT F1 POL and GROUND CT F1 POL are set to the correct values before putting the
relay into operation. Selecting the wrong value or changing this setting whilst relay is in operation would result in undesirable
operation of the protection and control functions.

9.5.1.2 VOLTAGE BANKS

Setting path: SETTINGS > SYSTEM SETUP > AC INPUTS > VOLTAGE BANK <X,Y>
Up to six banks are available. Only bank F5 is shown here.
■ VOLTAGE BANK F5 PHASE VT F5
ó Range: Wye, Delta
■ CONNECTION: Wye
PHASE VT F5
ô Range: 25.0 to 240.0 V in steps of 0.1
SECONDARY: 66.4 V
PHASE VT F5
ô Range: 1.00 to 24000.00 in steps of 0.01
RATIO: 1.00 :1
AUXILIARY VT F5
ô Range: Vn, Vag, Vbg, Vcg, Vab, Vbc, Vca
CONNECTION: Vag
AUXILIARY VT F5
ô Range: 25.0 to 240.0 V in steps of 0.1
SECONDARY: 66.4 V
AUXILIARY VT F5
ñ Range: 1.00 to 24000.00 in steps of 0.01
RATIO: 1.00 :1

N60-1601-0125-861-1 425
Chapter 9 - Settings

If applicable, record the value of any energy parameters and then reset immediately prior to changing any VT
characteristics.
Depending on the model, either one, two, three or twenty four banks of phase/auxiliary VTs can be set.
With VTs installed, the relay can perform voltage measurements as well as power calculations.

PHASE VT F5 CONNECTION
You can set this to Wye or Delta

PHASE VT F5 SECONDARY
Here, you set the secondary value of the phase VT in bank F5

PHASE VT F5 RATIO
Here you set the VT ratio of the phase VT in bank F5

AUXILIARY VT F5 CONNECTION
Here you set the connection of the auxiliary VT (Vn, Vag, Vbg, Vcg, Vab, Vbc, Vca)

AUXILIARY VT F5 SECONDARY
Here, you set the secondary value of the auxiliary VT in bank F5

AUXILIARY VT F5 RATIO
Here you set the VT ratio of the auxiliary VT in bank F5

Note:
The nominal PHASE VT F5 SECONDARY voltage setting is the voltage across the relay input terminals when nominal
voltage is applied to the VT primary.

Note:
For example, on a system with a 13.8 kV nominal primary voltage and with a 14400:120 volt VT in a delta connection, the
secondary voltage is 115; that is, (13800 / 14400) × 120. For a wye connection, the voltage value entered must be the phase
to neutral voltage, which is 115 / = 66.4.

Note:
On a 14.4 kV system with a delta connection and a VT primary to secondary turns ratio of 14400:120, the voltage value
entered is 120; that is, 14400 / 120.

9.5.2 POWER SYSTEM

Setting path: SETTINGS > SYSTEM SETUP > POWER SYSTEM
■ POWER SYSTEM NOMINAL FREQUENCY:
ó Range: 25 to 60 Hz in steps of 1
■ 60 Hz
PHASE ROTATION:
ô Range: ABC, ACB
ABC
FREQUENCY AND PHASE
ô Range: SRC <n> (depending on model)
REFERENCE: SRC 1

N60-1601-0125-861-1 426
Chapter 9 - Settings

SIGNAL TO TRACK:
ô Range: Auto, 3-ph VT, 1-ph VT, 3-ph CT, 1-ph CT
Auto
ALTERNATE FREQ AND PHS
ô Range: SRC 1, SRC 2, SRC 3, SRC 4, SRC 5, SRC 6
REFERENCE: None
ALT SIGNAL TO TRACK:
ô Range: 3-ph VT, 1-ph VT, 3-ph CT, 1-ph CT
3-ph VT
FREQUENCY TRACKING:
ñ Range: Disabled, Enabled
Enabled

NOMINAL FREQUENCY
The power system NOMINAL FREQUENCY value is used as a default to set the digital sampling rate if the system
frequency cannot be measured from available signals. This can happen if the signals are not present or are heavily
distorted. Before reverting to the nominal frequency, the frequency tracking algorithm holds the last valid frequency
measurement for a safe period of time while waiting for the signals to reappear or for the distortions to decay. When
using a Process Bus Module and SV streams, the SV streams need to be defaulted before changing this setting,
under Settings > Process Bus Module > SV Stream Config. After changing the nominal frequency, restart the
relay using Maintenance > Reboot Relay Command.

PHASE ROTATION
The phase sequence of the power system is required to properly calculate sequence components and power
parameters. The PHASE ROTATION setting matches the power system phase sequence and informs the relay of
the actual system phase sequence, either ABC or ACB. CT and VT inputs on the relay, labeled as A, B, and C, must
be connected to system phases A, B, and C for correct operation.

FREQUENCY AND PHASE REFERENCE

This setting determines which signal source is used for frequency tracking and phase angle reference. Within this
source, a specific signal shall be selected for tracking frequency calculation and for the phase angle reference, and
such selection will be determined by the SIGNAL TO TRACK setting below.

SIGNAL TO TRACK
This setting specifies the signal in a source to be used for tracking frequency calculation and for phase angle
reference. When Auto is selected, the AC signal to be used in a source is prioritized based on the AC inputs
configuration in this source, in which phase voltages takes precedence, followed by the auxiliary voltage, then
phase currents, and finally ground current, as it was in legacy UR f/w releases. With Auto, the signal selection is
static rather than dynamic, i.e. AC signals are selected, based upon the source configuration only, regardless of
whether a particular signal is applied to the relay or not. If VT or CT is selected (3-ph VT, 1-ph VT, 3-ph CT, 1-ph
CT), the AC signal to be used is directly based on this selection and will revert to nominal frequency if the selected
signal is below 0.06pu.
For the three-phase selection, phase A is used for angle referencing (ANGLE REF = VA or IA). Clarke
transformation of the phase signals is used for frequency metering and tracking (VFREQUENCY = (2VA - VB - VC) /
3) for better performance during fault, open pole, and VT and CT fail conditions.
Phase angle of the reference signal always displays zero degrees and all other phase angles are relative to this
signal. If the pre-selected reference signal is not measurable at a given time, the phase angles are not referenced to
any external AC signal and are referenced to the internal reference to continue maintaining proper phase
relationship between all other measured AC signal. The phase angle referencing is done via a phase locked loop,
which can synchronize independent UR-series relays if they have the same AC signal reference. This results in very
precise correlation of phase angle indications between different UR series relays.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 427
Chapter 9 - Settings

ALTERNATE FREQ AND PHS REFERENCE

This setting determines the alternative source for frequency tracking and phase angle reference. If the signal
specified by the main FREQUENCY AND PHASE REFERENCE setting is lost, the reference will be switched to this
alternative reference. switching between the main reference and the alternative reference is allowed (activated) only
if the following conditions are true:
● Frequency tracking is enabled, AND
● The alternative reference is set to a source other than None, AND
● The selected signals between main and alternative FREQUENCY AND PHASE REFERENCE are different.
Switching is also allowed (activated) even if the same source is selected in both the FREQUENCY AND PHASE
REFERENCE setting and in the ALTERNATE FREQ AND PHS REFERENCE setting, given that different signals
are selected in the SIGNAL TO TRACK and ALT SIGNAL TO TRACK settings.
When the main source signal becomes available again, the relay will switch back to the main source.

ALT SIGNAL TO TRACK

This is the same as the SIGNAL TO TRACK setting in the main FREQUENCY AND PHASE REFERENCE setting,
but the signal defined here is used for the ALTERNATE FREQ AND PHS REFERENCE setting. When the same
source is selected for both main and alternate reference quantities, the signal selected in this setting must be
different from the signal selected in the main reference, otherwise no switching is performed.
If neither main nor alternate signals are available, tracking frequency is reverting to nominal until either main or
alternate signals are available and measurable.

FREQUENCY TRACKING
This enables or disables frequency tracking. It is only disabled in unusual circumstances. Please consult GE for
special variable frequency applications.

Note:
The frequency tracking feature functions only when the relay is in the Programmed mode. Otherwise, the metering values
are available but can exhibit significant errors.

9.5.3 SIGNAL SOURCES

Setting path: SETTINGS > SYSTEM SETUP > SOURCE <n>
where n, number of sources depend on the model. Only Source 1 is shown here
■ SOURCE 1 SOURCE 1 NAME:
ó Range: up to 20 alphanumeric characters
■ SRC 1
SOURCE 1 PHASE CT: Range: None, F1,... up to any 6 CTs.
ô
None Only Phase CT inputs are displayed.
SOURCE 1 GROUND CT: Range: None, F1,... up to any 6 CTs.
ô
None Only Ground CT inputs are displayed.
SOURCE 1 PHASE VT: Range: None, <relevant slot designation>
ô
None Only phase voltage inputs are displayed
SOURCE 1 AUX VT: Range: None, <relevant slot designation>
ô
None Only auxiliary voltage inputs are displayed
SRC 1 ALT PHASE CT:
ô Range: None, F1,... up to any 6 CTs
None

N60-1601-0125-861-1 428
Chapter 9 - Settings

SRC 1 ALT GROUND CT:

ô Range: None, F1,... up to any 6 CTs
None
SWITCH TO ALT CT:
ô Range: FlexLogic operand
Off
SRC 1 ALT PHASE VT:
ô Range: None, <relevant slot designation>
None
SRC 1 ALT AUX VT:
ô Range: None, <relevant slot designation>
None
SRC 1 SWITCH ALT VT:
ñ Range: FlexLogic operand
Off
Identical menus are available for each source. You can replace SRC <n> with any text up to 20 characters.
The first letter in the source identifier represents the module slot position. The number directly following this letter
represents either the first bank of four channels (1, 2, 3, 4) called “1” or the second bank of four channels (5, 6, 7, 8)
called “5” in a particular CT/VT module.
It is possible to select the sum of all CT combinations. The first channel displayed is the CT to which all others are
referred. For example, the selection “F1+F5” indicates the sum of each phase from banks F1 and F5, scaled to
whichever CT has the higher ratio. Selecting None hides the associated actual values.
The approach used to configure the AC sources consists of several steps:
● Specify the information about each CT input. This is the nominal primary and secondary current.
● Specify the information about each VT input. This is the connection type, ratio and nominal secondary
voltage.
● Specify the configuration for each source, including specifying which CTs are summed together.

9.5.3.1 USER SELECTION OF AC PARAMETERS FOR COMPARATOR ELEMENTS

CT/VT modules automatically calculate all current and voltage parameters from the available inputs. You must
select the specific input parameters to be measured by every element in the relevant settings menu. The internal
design of the element specifies which type of parameter to use and provides a setting for source selection. In
elements where the parameter can be either fundamental or RMS magnitude, such as phase time overcurrent, two
settings are provided. One setting specifies the source, the second setting selects between fundamental phasor and
RMS.

9.5.3.2 AC INPUT ACTUAL VALUES

The calculated parameters associated with the configured voltage and current inputs are displayed in the current
and voltage sections of actual values. Only the phasor quantities associated with the actual AC physical input
channels display here. All parameters contained within a configured source are displayed in the sources section of
the actual values.

9.5.3.3 DISTURBANCE DETECTORS (INTERNAL)

The disturbance detector (ANSI 50DD) element is a sensitive current disturbance detector that detects any
disturbance on the protected system. The 50DD function is used directly in some elements in the relay, for example
VT Fuse Failure detector or Fault Report. It can also be used to supervise current-based elements to prevent
maloperation as a result of the wrong settings or external CT wiring problem. A disturbance detector is provided for
each source.
The 50DD function responds to the changes in magnitude of the sequence currents. The disturbance detector logic
is as follows.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 429
Chapter 9 - Settings

✕✖✂✂✗✘✙

✁✂✄ ☎ ✍✟✝✚✞✠✌ ✆✡✌✞✍✛✚✑✆✍✜✏✢

✍✟✝✍✡✟✌✑✡✆✛✠✞✟✟✡☞✌
✆✝✞✟✠✡ ☛ ✠✞✌✣✝✤✤ ✜✡✥✡✜
✠✞✟✟✡☞✌ ✍✎✏✆✝✟
✂✗❄✖✽
✑✒☛ ✦✧✑✒☛✧ ✣ ✧✑✒☛★✧✦ ✩ ✓✪✠✞✌ ✣✝✤✤ ✹☎✖✺☎✻✙✗✁ ✻✼✖✽ ✘✾
❃
✑✒✓ ✦✧✑✒✓✧ ✣ ✧✑✒✓★✧✦ ✩ ✓✪✠✞✌ ✣✝✤✤ ✷✸ ✆✟✠ ☛ ✿✔✚✚ ✝✍
❀ ❁❂❁
✑✒✔ ✦✧✑✒✔✧ ✣ ✧✑✒✔★✧✦ ✩ ✓✪✠✞✌ ✣✝✤✤
✫✬✭✮✭ ✑✯ ✰✱ ✓ ✲✳✲✴✭✱ ✵✴✶

✕✖✂✂✗✘✙

✁✂✄ ☎ ✍✟✝✚✞✠✌ ✆✡✌✞✍✛✚✑✆✍✜✏✢

✍✟✝✍✡✟✌✑✡✆✛✠✞✟✟✡☞✌
✆✝✞✟✠✡ ✓ ✠✞✌✣✝✤✤ ✜✡✥✡✜
✠✞✟✟✡☞✌ ✍✎✏✆✝✟
✑✒☛ ✂✗❄✖✽
✦✧✑✒☛✧ ✣ ✧✑✒☛★✧✦ ✩ ✓✪✠✞✌ ✣✝✤✤ ✹☎✖✺☎✻✙✗✁ ✻✼✖✽ ✘✾
❃
✑✒✓ ✦✧✑✒✓✧ ✣ ✧✑✒✓★✧✦ ✩ ✓✪✠✞✌ ✣✝✤✤ ✷✸ ✆✟✠ ✓ ✿✔✚✚ ✝✍
❀ ❁❂❁
✑✒✔ ✦✧✑✒✔✧ ✣ ✧✑✒✔★✧✦ ✩ ✓✪✠✞✌ ✣✝✤✤
✫✬✭✮✭ ✑✯ ✰✱ ✓ ✲✳✲✴✭✱ ✵✴✶

✕✖✂✂✗✘✙

✁✂✄ ☎ ✍✟✝✚✞✠✌ ✆✡✌✞✍✛✚✑✆✍✜✏✢

✍✟✝✍✡✟✌✑✡✆✛✠✞✟✟✡☞✌
✆✝✞✟✠✡ ❅ ✠✞✌✣✝✤✤ ✜✡✥✡✜
✠✞✟✟✡☞✌ ✍✎✏✆✝✟
✑✒☛ ✂✗❄✖✽
✦✧✑✒☛✧ ✣ ✧✑✒☛★✧✦ ✩ ✓✪✠✞✌ ✣✝✤✤ ✹☎✖✺☎✻✙✗✁ ✻✼✖✽ ✘✾
❃
✑✒✓ ✦✧✑✒✓✧ ✣ ✧✑✒✓★✧✦ ✩ ✓✪✠✞✌ ✣✝✤✤ ✷✸ ✆✟✠ ❅ ✿✔✚✚ ✝✍
❀ ❁❂❁
✑✒✔ ✦✧✑✒✔✧ ✣ ✧✑✒✔★✧✦ ✩ ✓✪✠✞✌ ✣✝✤✤
✫✬✭✮✭ ✑✯ ✰✱ ✓ ✲✳✲✴✭✱ ✵✴✶
❆✓❇✔❈✓✏✿❉✲✶✮

Figure 226: Disturbance detector logic (example using six sources)

The disturbance detector responds to the change in currents of twice the current cut-off level. The default cut-off
threshold is 0.02 pu; thus by default the disturbance detector responds to a change of 0.04 pu. The metering
sensitivity setting PRODUCT SETUP > DISPLAY PROPERTIES > CURRENT CUT-OFF LEVEL controls the
sensitivity of the disturbance detector accordingly.

9.5.3.4 EXAMPLE FOR USE OF SOURCES

An example of the use of sources is shown in the following figure. A relay can have the following hardware
configuration:
Increasing slot position letter >
UR CT/VT module 1 CT/VT module 2 CT/VT module 3
B30, B90, C70, F35, N60, T35 8 CTs 4 CTs, 4 VTs 4 CTs, 4 VTs
C60, C95, D60, G30, G60, L30, L90, M60, T60 CTs VTs not applicable

This configuration can be used on a two-winding transformer, with one winding connected into a breaker-and-a-half
system. The following figure shows the arrangement of sources used to provide the functions required in this
application, and the CT/VT inputs that are used to provide the data.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 430
Chapter 9 - Settings

☛✌
✍✎✏ ✑✒✓✔

☛☞
✢✣✤✥✦✧ ✼ ✢✣✤✥✦✧ ❁

✸✹✺✻ ✸✹✺✻

✢✣✤✥✦✧ ✽
✗✘✙✚✛✘ ✗✘✙✚✛✜
✕✌ ✾✣✿❀✻ ✸✹✺✻

✳ ✵ ✴✶✷ ✩✪✫

✳ ✵ ✴✶✷ ✗✘✬

✾✣✿❀✻ ✸✹✺✻
✖✌

✖✌ ✢✣✤✥✦✧ ★

✭✮ ✮✯✰✱✲

✖☞
✁✂✂✄☎✆✝✞✟✠✡

Figure 227: Figure 5-67: Example of use of sources

Y LV D HV AUX
SRC 1 SRC 2 SRC 3
Phase CT M1 F1+F5 None
Ground CT M1 None None
Phase VT M5 None None
Aux VT None None U1

9.5.3.5 SOURCE SWITCHING

The UR supports current and voltage signals input from both main and alternate CTs and VTs, with user-defined
switching capability. This is beneficial in applications, where the relay can provide protection when the main CT or
VT is not available due to station re-configuration. The following figure shows examples of VT switching from VT1 to
VT2 when Bus 1 is de-energized, and the line is energized via Bus 2. The CT switching example in (b) shows the
connection of the bus transfer breaker CT to the line relay, when the line is energized via the transfer bus. This
could be for example, when the main line breaker is taken out of commission for maintenance. In this case, the
relay senses current from either CT 1 when the line is energized via main line breaker or CT 2 when the line is
energized via the transfer bus breaker.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 431
Chapter 9 - Settings

Bus 1 Main bus

VT 1 VT 2 Transfer VT 1
Bus 2 bus

CT 1 CT 2

CT 1 UR UR

a) b)
859791A1.vsdx

Figure 228: Examples of VTs (a) and CTs (b) switching from the main to alternate

The following figure shows the logic diagram for switching from main banks to alternate banks.
SETTINGS SETTINGS

SOURCE 1 PHASE CT: SOURCE 1 PHASE VT:

None None

SOURCE 1 GROUND CT: SOURCE 1 AUX VT:

None None
To SOURCE 1 To SOURCE 1
SRC 1 ALT PHASE CT: currents phasor SRC 1 ALT PHASE VT: voltage phasor
calculations calculations
None None

SRC 1 ALT GROUND CT: SRC 1 ALT AUX VT:

None None

SRC 1 SWITCH ALT CT: SRC 1 SWITCH ALT VT:

FLEXLOGIC OPERAND FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
Off 0c SRC1 CT SW PROT BLK Off 0c SRC1 VT SW PROT BLK
2c 2c

FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
SRC1 CT ALT BANK ON
SRC1 VT ALT BANK ON

859825A1.vsdx

Figure 229: Logic diagram of switching CTs and VTs from the main to alternate banks

Figure 230:

When a FlexLogic operand assigned to the setting SRC 1 SWITCH ALT CT/VT is at logical 0, the analog data is
processed from the main CT and VT analog data banks. When this operand is logical 1, the analog data is
processed from the alternate CT and VT analog data banks.
Note that:
● Banks assigned to the same function for the main and alternate input data must have the same CT and VT
nominal values and connections. If this is not the case, a warning is generated and switching functionality is
prohibited. For example, banks assigned to the PHASE CT and ALT PHASE CT must have same primary
and secondary CT values. The ground CT input has to be of the identical type.
● During switching to/from the main CT/VT input data from/to the alternate input data and vice versa, all relay
functions are blocked for two power cycles, and metering data is not updated.
● CT bank switching is allowed if both main and alternate CT banks have the exact same combination for CT
summation.
● Use Non-volatile Latches if you need the switching state to be remembered.
● Since switching occurs in both the Phase and Ground CT, it is possible to keep the same set under both the
main source and alternate source, but a different set for the ground/aux signal.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 432
Chapter 9 - Settings

9.5.4 BREAKERS
The breaker control element contains the auxiliary logic for status and serves as the interface for opening and
closing of a circuit breaker from protection, autoreclose, SCADA, or through the front panel interface. The breaker
control element can be used to create interlocking functionality. For greater security in determination of the breaker
position, both the 52/a and 52/b auxiliary contacts are used with reporting of the discrepancy between them.
To use this element, configure the contact outputs that trip and close the breaker to use FlexLogic operands
BREAKER 1 OFF CMD (or BREAKER 1 TRIP A/B/C in the case of single-pole tripping) and BREAKER 1 ON CMD,
and configure the breaker control element inputs as described here.
Setting path: SETTINGS > SYSTEM SETUP > BREAKERS
■ BREAKERS ■ COMMON SETTINGS
ó
■ ■
■ BREAKER <n>
ñ
■

The SYSTEM SETUP > BREAKERS menu has two sub-menus:

● COMMON SETTINGS
● BREAKER <n>, where n = 1 to 4

COMMON SETTINGS
There is only one common setting amongst circuit breakers; BKR INTERM & BAD ST TIMERS:
This can be set to Common or Distinct. When set to Common, the breaker element considers both 00 and 11
states of 52a and 52b as an intermediate state and when the Toperate timer expires, declares the breaker as bad
status. When set to Distinct” the breaker element considers 00 state of 52a and 52b as an intermediate state
and 11 as bad status. When the breaker status detected is 00, the breaker element waits for the Toperate timer to
expire before declaring the intermediate state. When the breaker status detected is 11, the breaker element waits
for the Bad ST Tsuppress timer to expire before declaring the bad state. See breaker logic diagrams 2 and 4.

BREAKER <n>
Each breaker has the following settings. Only Breaker 1 is shown here.
Setting path: SETTINGS > SYSTEM SETUP > BREAKERS > BREAKER 1
■ BREAKER 1 BREAKER 1
ó Range: Disabled, Enabled
■ FUNCTION: Disabled
BREAKER 1 NAME:
ô Range: up to six alphanumeric characters
Bkr 1s
BREAKER 1 MODE:
ô Range: 3-Pole, 1-Pole
3-Pole
BREAKER1 ΦA/3P DPS
ô Range: Off, RxGOOSE DPS 1, RxGOOSE DPS 2…
INP:Off
BREAKER1 ΦA/3P OPND:
ô Range: FlexLogic operand
Off
BREAKER1 ΦA/3P CLSD:
ô Range: FlexLogic operand
Off
BREAKER1 ΦB DPS
ô Range: Off, RxGOOSE DPS 1, RxGOOSE DPS 2…
INP:Off
BREAKER 1 ΦB OPENED:
ô Range: FlexLogic operand
Off

N60-1601-0125-861-1 433
Chapter 9 - Settings

BREAKER 1 ΦB CLOSED:
ô Range: FlexLogic operand
Off
BREAKER1 ΦC DPS
ô Range: Off, RxGOOSE DPS 1, RxGOOSE DPS 2…
INP:Off
BREAKER 1 ΦC OPENED:
ô Range: FlexLogic operand
Off
BREAKER 1 ΦC CLOSED:
ô Range: FlexLogic operand
Off
BREAKER 1 ALARM PDisc DELAY:
ô Range: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001
0.000 s
BREAKER 1 EXT ALARM:
ô Range: FlexLogic operand
Off
BREAKER 1 RACKED-IN:
ô Range: FlexLogic operand
Off
BREAKER 1 OUT OF SV:
ô Range: FlexLogic operand
Off
BREAKER 1 OPEN CMD:
ô Range: FlexLogic operand
Off
BRK1 COMMS OPEN CMD:
ô Range: FlexLogic operand
Off
BREAKER 1 CLOSE CMD:
ô Range: FlexLogic operand
Off
BRK1 COMMS CLS CMD:
ô Range: FlexLogic operand
Off
BREAKER1 PB CONTROL:
ô Range: FlexLogic operand
Off
BREAKER1 TOPERATE:
ô Range: 0 to 65535 ms in steps of 1
70 ms
BREAKER 1 BAD ST TSUPPRESS:
ô Range: 0 to 65535 ms in steps of 1
0 ms
MANUAL CLOSE RECAL1 TIME:
ô Range: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001
0.000 s
BREAKER 1 OPEN SEAL-IN:
ô Range: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001
0.000 s
BREAKER 1 BLK OPEN:
ô Range: FlexLogic operand
Off
BREAKER 1 BLK CLOSE:
ô Range: FlexLogic operand
Off
BRK1 BLK BYPASS:
ô Range: Disabled, Enabled
Disabled
BREAKER 1 TAGGING:
ô Range: Disabled, Enabled
Disabled
BREAKER 1 SUBSTITUTN:
ô Range: Disabled, Enabled
Disabled
BREAKER 1 EVENTS:
ô Range: Disabled, Enabled
Disabled
BRK1 CILO INTERLOCK GFP
ô Range: Disabled, Enabled
BYPASS: Disabled

N60-1601-0125-861-1 434
Chapter 9 - Settings

BREAKER 1 LOCAL:
ô Range: FlexLogic operand
Off
BRK1 BLK ML CMD IN LOCAL:
ô Range: Disabled, Enabled
Disabled
BRK1 CSWI LOC STAT:
ô Range: FlexLogic operand
Off
BRK1 STATION AUTHOR:
ô Range: FlexLogic operand
Off
BREAKER 1 OPEN INTERLOCK:
ô Range: FlexLogic operand
Off
BREAKER 1 CLOSE INTERLOCK:
ô Range: FlexLogic operand
Off
BREAKER 1 SYNCCHECK CLOSE:
ô Range: FlexLogic operand
Off
BREAKER 1 POS-REACHED
Range: Enabled, Disabled
CHECK: Enabled

For relays that support 9-2LE, use SETTINGS > SYSTEM SETUP > BREAKERS > BAY1(28) BREAKER.
The following settings are available for each breaker control element.

BREAKER 1 FUNCTION
This setting enables and disables the operation of the breaker 1 control feature.

BREAKER 1 NAME
This setting allows you to assign a user-defined name (up to six characters) to the breaker. This name is used in
flash messages related to breaker 1.

BREAKER 1 MODE
This setting sets either 3-Pole mode, where all breaker poles are operated simultaneously, or 1-Pole mode,
where all breaker poles are operated independently.

BREAKER1 ΦA/3P DPS INP

This setting selects a double point status input (RxGOOSE# DPS Input) that is subscribed via GOOSE. Each
received RxGOOSE# DPS Input consist of 2 bits. The derived switch status is shown in the logic diagram.
When the IEC61850 RxGOOSE# DPS is mapped to BREAKER1 ΦA/3P DPS INP, the switch status (Open/Close/
Intermediate/Bad) will be based on the RxGOOSE DPS # value.
If the BREAKER1 ΦA/3P DPS INP selects a RxGOOSE DPS Input:
● the respective BREAKER1 ΦA/3P OPND and BREAKER1 ΦA/3P CLSD settings are not considered.
● the respective BREAKER T OPERATE and BREAKER BAD ST TSUPPRESS settings are also not
considered in the receiving relay

BREAKER1 ΦA/3P OPND

This setting selects an operand (usually a contact input), which is for a normally-closed 52/b status input. This
activates a logic 1 when the breaker is open. If a separate 52/b contact input is not available, then the inverted 52/a
status signal or the inverted BREAKER 1 CLOSED status signal can be used.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 435
Chapter 9 - Settings

BREAKER1 ΦA/3P CLSD

This setting selects an operand (usually a contact input) connected to a breaker auxiliary position tracking
mechanism. This input is for a normally-open 52/a status input that creates a logic 1 when the breaker is closed. If
the BREAKER 1 MODE setting is selected as 3-Pole, this setting selects a single 52/a input as the operand used
to track the breaker open or closed position. If the mode is selected as 1-Pole, the input mentioned is used to
track phase A and the BREAKER 1 ΦB and BREAKER 1 ΦC settings select operands to track phases B and C,
respectively.

BREAKER1 ΦB DPS INP

If the mode is selected as three-pole, this setting has no function. If the mode is selected as single-pole, this input is
used to track the switch phase B position as outlined for phase A.

BREAKER1 ΦB OPENED
In three-pole mode, this setting has no function. In single-pole mode, this input is used to track the breaker phase B
opened position as outlined for phase A.

BREAKER1 ΦB CLOSED
In three-pole mode, this setting has no function. In single-pole mode, this input is used to track the breaker phase B
closed position as outlined for phase A.

BREAKER1 Φc DPS INP

If the mode is selected as three-pole, this setting has no function. If the mode is selected as single-pole, this input is
used to track the switch phase C position as outlined for phase A.

BREAKER1 ΦC OPENED
In three-pole mode, this setting has no function. In single-pole mode, this input is used to track the breaker phase C
opened position as outlined for phase A.

BREAKER1 ΦC CLOSED
In three-pole mode, this setting has no function. In single-pole mode, this input is used to track the breaker phase C
closed position as outlined for phase A.

BREAKER 1 ALARM PDisc DELAY

This setting specifies the delay interval during which a conflict of status among the pole position tracking operands
does not declare a pole discrepancy. This allows for non-simultaneous operation of the poles. If single-pole tripping
and reclosing is used, the breaker can trip unsymmetrically for faults. In this case, the minimum alarm delay setting
must exceed the maximum time required for fault clearing and reclosing by a suitable margin.

BREAKER 1 EXT ALARM

This setting selects an operand, usually an external contact input connected to a breaker alarm reporting contact.
While the selected operand is active, the BREAKER 1 TROUBLE operand is activated.

BREAKER 1 RACKED-IN
This setting selects a contact input to show whether the breaker is racked-in or racked-out. The racked-in or racked-
out status is used to indicate dynamically the status of breaker symbol, only applied in the single-line diagram on
the graphical front panel. If this setting is set to Off, the racked status is not considered.

BREAKER 1 OUT OF SV
This setting selects an operand indicating that breaker 1 is out-of-service.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 436
Chapter 9 - Settings

BREAKER 1 OPEN CMD

This setting selects an operand that initiates a Breaker 1 open/trip command. The command is not executed when
blocked by the operand assigned to BREAKER 1 BLK OPEN setting.

BRK1 COMMS OPEN CMD

This setting selects an operand that initiates a Breaker 1 open command. The setting is intended for commands
received via communication protocols (DNP3, IEC104 and Modbus) to be supervised by IED Local/Remote status.
The command is not executed if the relay is in local mode or blocked by the operand assigned to the BREAKER 1
BLK OPEN setting.

BREAKER 1 CLOSE CMD

This setting selects an operand that initiates a Breaker 1 close command. The command is not executed when
blocked by an operand assigned to the BREAKER 1 BLK CLOSE setting.

BKR 1 COMMS CLS CMD

This setting selects an operand that initiates a Breaker 1 close command. The setting is intended for commands
received via communication protocols (DNP3, IEC104 and Modbus) to be supervised by IED Local/Remote status.
The command is not executed if the relay is in local mode or blocked by the operand assigned to the BREAKER 1
BLK CLOSE setting.

BREAKER 1 PB CONTROL
When the selected operand value is high, local breaker control operations are allowed from front panel pushbuttons.

BREAKER 1 TOPERATE
This setting specifies the required interval to overcome transient conflict between the 52/a and 52/b auxiliary
contacts during breaker operation. If transient conflict still exists after this time has expired, the BREAKER 1 BAD
STATUS FlexLogic operand is asserted for alarm or blocking purposes.

BREAKER 1 BAD ST TSUPPRESS

When the BKR INTERM & BAD ST TIMERS setting is set to Distinct, this setting specifies the required interval
to overcome the transient state of 11 during the breaker operation. If the 11 state still exists after this time, the
BREAKER 1 BAD STATUS FlexLogic operand is asserted. When the BKR INTERM & BAD ST TIMERS setting is
set to Common, this setting is not used.

MANUAL CLOSE RECAL1 TIME

This setting specifies the seal-in time of the close commands due to an operator-initiated manual close command to
the circuit breaker.

BREAKER 1 OPEN SEAL-IN

This setting specifies the seal-in time of the three-pole open command initiated by either the Trip Out element or a
manual open command to the circuit breaker.

BREAKER 1 BLK OPEN

This setting selects an operand that prevents initiation of Breaker 1 open and individual phase trip commands. This
setting can be used for blocking circuit breaker tripping for instance when breaker monitoring detects conditions
such as low SF6 gas density.

BREAKER 1 BLK CLOSE

This setting selects an operand that prevents initiation of Breaker 1 close commands. This setting can be used for
blocking circuit breaker closing, for instance to prevent closing into a closed ground switch.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 437
Chapter 9 - Settings

BRK1 BLK BYPASS

This setting is only available for relays with a graphical front panel. When enabled, this setting allows the graphical
front panel to bypass breaker 1 blocking. When asserted, BREAKER 1 BLK OPEN and BREAKER 1 BLK CLOSE
settings are bypassed.

BREAKER 1 TAGGING
This setting is only available for relays with a graphical front panel. Breaker tagging is used to block certain
operation when it is tagged for safety purposes. No other action is needed after enabling the function; it is handled
internally where certain functions are blocked.
Set to Enable No Override to allow the graphical front panel or IEC 61850 MMS control to tag breaker 1. When
tagged from the graphical front panel, tagging can be removed only from the graphical front panel, and an attempt
to remove tagging using IEC 61850 MMS control results in a negative response (-Rsp). When tagged from IEC
61850 MMS control, tagging can be removed only by MMS control.
Set to Enable With Override to allow the graphical front panel or IEC 61850 MMS control to tag breaker 1.
When tagged from the graphical front panel, tagging can be removed only from the graphical front panel, and an
attempt to remove tagging using IEC 61850 MMS control results in a negative response (-Rsp). When tagged from
IEC 61850 MMS control, tagging can be removed by MMS control or from the graphical front panel. That is, the
graphical front panel has an override function.
When tagged, the following operations are disabled:
● Pushbutton open/close
● IEC 61850 open/close
● Autoreclose command issued by the Autoreclose element (if applicable to model)
● Close command initiated by BREAKER 1 CLOSE setting.
The trip command issued by the Trip Out element or BREAKER 1 OPEN setting is not affected.

BREAKER1 SUBSTITUTN
This setting is only available for relays with a graphical front panel. When enabled, this setting allows the graphical
front panel/IEC 61850 to substitute breaker 1 status. When substituted, breaker 1 control open/close status is
forced to the substituted value.

BRK1 CILO INTRLK TO LOCAL CTRL

When enabled, this setting allows CILO interlock to apply to front panel and FlexLogic operand controls. This setting
is available only if the order code includes IEC 61850.

BRK1 CILO INTERLOCK GFP BYPASS

When enabled, this setting allows the graphical front panel to bypass the CILO interlock for front panel and
FlexLogic operand controls. This setting is available only if the order code includes IEC 61850 and graphical front
panel.

BREAKER 1 LOCAL
This setting selects an operand that indicates the Breaker in the switch yard is in Local or Remote mode. When the
operand value is set, it indicates that the Breaker is in Local mode. You set this setting using the EnerVista software
or with an SCL file.

BRK1 BLK MNL CMD IN LOCAL

When this setting is enabled, and the BREAKER 1 LOCAL operand state is logic 1 (i.e. the Breaker is in Local
mode and Bkr0XCBR1.Loc is TRUE), manual commands originating from the front panel pushbuttons, graphical
front panel and BREAKER 1 OPEN/CLOSE CMD are blocked. When disabled, manual commands originating from

N60-1601-0125-861-1 438
Chapter 9 - Settings

the relay are allowed even when the Breaker is in Local mode. This setting is available only if the order code
includes IEC 61850.

BKR1 CSWI LOC STAT

This setting selects an operand that indicates the breaker residing in that bay is in Local or Remote mode. When
the operand state is logic 1, the bay is considered to be in Local mode, otherwise it is considered to be in Remote
mode. The operand status is modeled in the IEC 61850 server using the respective breaker’s CSWI Loc data object
and you should refer to the operand status in the Control Authority table to determine the control authority for
different levels. This setting is available only if the order code includes IEC 61850.

BKR1 STATION AUTHOR

This setting selects an operand that indicates the Station level authority status. The operand status is modeled in
the IEC 61850 server using the respective breaker’s CSWI LocSta data object the user should refer to the operand
status in the Control Authority table to determine the control authority for different levels. This setting is available
only if the order code includes IEC 61850.

BREAKER 1 OPEN INTERLOCK

This setting selects an operand that indicates the interlock status for the Breaker Open commands. This operand
state is mapped directly to the IEC 61850 BkrCILO1.EnaOpn.stVal, which is used to reject the IEC 61850 open
command when the selected operand state is at logic 0 (BkrCILO1.EnaOpn.stVal is set to false). However, the IEC
61850 client can choose to check or skip the interlock condition to execute the command using the Check
parameter. In addition, the interlock condition can be applied to the local commands, which can originate from the
front local HMI, front panel push buttons, graphical front panel (GFP) and FlexLogic Operands assigned to the
BREAKER 1 OPEN CMD setting. This is achieved by enabling BRK1 CILO INTRLK TO LOCAL CTRL. This
setting is available only if the order code includes IEC 61850.

BREAKER 1 CLOSE INTERLOCK

This setting selects an operand that indicates the interlock status for the Breaker Open commands. This operand
state is mapped directly to the IEC 61850 BkrCILO1.EnaCls.stVal, which is used to reject the IEC 61850 close
command when the selected operand state is at logic 0 (BkrCILO1.EnaCls.stVal is set to false). However, the IEC
61850 client can choose to check or skip the interlock condition to execute the command using the Check
parameter. In addition, the interlock condition can be applied to the local commands, which can originate from the
front local HMI, front panel push buttons, graphical front panel (GFP) and FlexLogic Operands assigned to the
BREAKER 1 CLOSE CMD setting. This is achieved by enabling BRK1 CILO INTRLK TO LOCAL CTRL. This
setting is available only if the order code includes IEC 61850.

BREAKER 1 SYNCCHECK CLOSE

This setting selects an operand that indicates the status of the synchrocheck function of the Breaker. When the
operand value is set, the remote commands from IEC 61850 client are rejected if the IEC 61850 client set the
synchrocheck bit in the Check parameter. This setting is only available if the order code includes IEC 61850.

BREAKER 1 POS-REACHED CHECK

When enabled, the IEC 61850 control value is checked for current Breaker status and is rejected if the command
value (Open/Close) from IEC 61850 client match with the present Breaker status. When disabled, the current
Breaker status is not verified to accept the control. This setting is only available if the order code includes IEC
61850.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 439
Chapter 9 - Settings

Note:
Before software release version 7.90, ST.LOC OPERAND, INTERLOCK OPN, INTERLOCK CLS and SYNCCHECK CLOSE
settings were available in IEC 61850 configurator under System Setup > Breaker. From version 7.90 onwards, the above
mentioned settings were removed from the IEC 61850 configurator and merged with the Breaker settings screen under
Settings > System Setup > Breakers (outside the IEC 61850 configurator). Also, the name of the setting ST.LOC
OPERAND has been changed to LOCAL.

Note:
BREAKER 1 LOCAL, INTERLOCK OPEN, INTERLOCK CLOSE, SYNCCHECK CLOSE settings are not available on the
front panel and can be configured either from EnerVista Software or via SCL files. Refer to the MICS document online for
respective settings modeling in SCL files. BREAKER 1 POS-REACHED CHECK is only configurable via EnerVista software.

9.5.4.1 CONTROL AUTHORITY

Within the substation, control commands to the primary equipment, such as the breaker or disconnect switch, can
originate from one of three levels: Station, Remote or Bay.
● Station level commands are those originating from either the substation gateway or from the station HMI
● Remote commands are from the remote Network Control Center (NCC).
● Bay level commands, are commands originating from bay devices such as bay controllers (e.g. C264) or
IEDs (protection relays), either using 61850 control services or using non-61850 control methods (front panel
pushbuttons, graphical front panel or commands initiated through FlexOperands).
Under certain operational conditions, such as during maintenance, it is necessary to block commands from one or
more of these levels. The local/remote control feature (described in IEC61850 7-4: Annex B) allows you to enable or
disable control authority from one or more of the three levels, as illustrated in the below table. IEC61850 commands
originating from the various levels are differentiated using the Origin.OrCat attribute value in the 61850 command.
The IEC61850 7-4 Local/Remote table is extended with Bay level non-61850 commands and those commands are
only allowed when the Bay level has the control authority.
Switch Bay Control Command from
Bay Station NCC
Mode of Manual
switching Local Control Control Authority Control at
orCat
authority for Behavior At Station Level Switch
local control (process)
BKR1 BLK Non 61850
Local Ctl
MNL CMD XCBR.LocXSWI.Loc LLN0.MltLev CSWI.Loc CSWI.LocSta Bay Station Remote
(Bay)
IN LOCAL Control
Enabled T F n.a. n.a. AA NA NA NA NA
Disabled T F n.a. n.a. AA AA NA NA NA
n.a. F F T n.a. AA AA AA NA NA
n.a. F F F T AA NA NA AA NA
n.a. F F F F AA NA NA NA AA
Enabled T T n.a. n.a. AA NA NA NA NA
Disabled T T n.a. n.a. AA AA NA NA NA
n.a. F T T n.a. AA AA AA NA NA
n.a. F T F T AA AA AA AA NA
n.a. F T F F AA AA AA AA AA

N60-1601-0125-861-1 440
Chapter 9 - Settings

Key
● n.a. - not applicable
● AA - Always Allowed
● NA - Not Allowed
● Non-61850 Bay Control - Any manual control from the relay, i.e. from the front panel, the relay push buttons
or a FlexOperand initiated command.
● Manual Control at Switch (process) - Control external to the IED, e.g. the breaker may be controlled directly
from the control panel.
● Cells highlighted in gray are not defined in the standard and reflect UR’s commitment to maintaining
backwards compatibility

9.5.4.2 DUAL BREAKER CONTROL LOGIC

The following diagrams show the dual breaker control logic:

N60-1601-0125-861-1 441
Chapter 9 - Settings

SETTING
BREAKER 1 FUNCTION
Enabled = 1
SETTING * BkrCILO1.EnaOpn.stVal
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
BRK1 CILO INTRLK
BREAKER 1 TAG ON
TO LOCAL CTRL Enabled = 1
SETTING FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
BREAKER 1 PUSHBUTTON BRK1 LOCAL OPEN CILO
CONTROL BRK1 CILO BYPASS ON AND
Off = 0
AND SETTING *
USER 3 OFF/ON
Breaker1 Open Interlock
To open BKR1-(name) FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
OR Off = 0
AND BRK1 LOCAL AUTHOR ON
Breaker 1 Open OR
From graphical front panel
BkrCSWI1.LocSta.ctlVal FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
AND AND BRK1 REM AUTHOR ON
SETTING *
OR
BRK1 STATION AUTHOR AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
Off = 0 OR
AND AND BRK1 STATN AUTHOR ON
SETTING * AND
BRK1 CSWI LOC STAT AND FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
Off = 0 AND OR AND BRK1 BAY AUTHOR ON
SETTING *
Multi-Level Control
AND AND BkrCSWI1.OpOpn.general
ENABLED = 1
SETTING * AND FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
BRK1 BLK MNL CMD IN LOCAL
ENABLED = 1 AND BREAKER 1 MNL OPEN
AND
SETTING
Breaker 1 Local OR
Off = 0
AND FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
BkroXCBR1.Pos.ctlVal = off AND OR AND BREAKER 1 OFF CMD
BkrCSWI1.Pos.ctlVal = off OR
SETTING
From IEC 61850 protocol AND BREAKER 1 OPEN
OR SEAL-IN
From sheet 4-2 of 4 FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
T PKP OR AND
Breaker1 Open command BREAKER 1 TRIP A
0 AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
TRIP 3-POLE
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
TRIP PHASE A
OR AND BREAKER 1 TRIP B
TRIP PHASE B
TRIP PHASE C
On D60, L60, L90, from Trip Output,
only on breaker 1 FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
From IEC 61850 protocol AND OR AND BREAKER 1 TRIP C
BkrCSWI1.BlkOpn.ctlVal = on

Bkr0XCBR1.BlkOpn.ctlVal = on
AND
SETTING BkrCSWI1.BlkOpn.stVal
BREAKER 1 BLK OPEN OR To 61850 protocol
Off = 0
Bkr0XCBR1.BlkOpn.stVal
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND AND
BRK 1 BLK BYPASS ON BkrCILO1.EnaCls.stVal
From IEC 61850 protocol BkrCSWI1.CmdBlk.stVal
AND
BkrCSWI1.CmdBlk.ctlVal = on
To 61850 protocol
SETTING *
AND
Breaker1 Close Interlock
AND BkrCSWI1.Blk.stVal
Off = 0
AND To 61850 protocol
USER 2 OFF/ON AND
To close BKR1-(name)
OR
Breaker 1 Close OR FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
BRK1 LOCAL CLS CILO
From graphical front panel AND

From IEC 61850 protocol AND

Bkr0XCBR1.Pos.ctlVal = on
OR AND FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
BkrCSWI1.Pos.ctlVal = on
AND AND BREAKER 1 MNL CLS
OR
OR
From sheet 4-2 of 4 SETTING
AND MANUAL CLOSE
Breaker1 Close command AND
RECAL1 TIME BkrCSWI1.OpCls.general
T PKP
0
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND OR AND BREAKER 1 ON CMD
BREAKER 1 ENA RCLS AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
AR CLOSE BKR1 0
On C60, D60, L60, L90 breaker 1 and AND
20 ms OR
2, from Autoreclose OR
From IEC 61850 protocol AND
BkrCSWI1.BlkCls.ctlVal = on

Bkr0XCBR1.BlkCls.ctlVal = on BkrCSWI1.BlkCls.stVal
AND
SETTING OR Bkr0XCBR1.BlkCls.stVal
BREAKER 1 BLK CLOSE
AND To 61850 protocol
Off = 0
Enable
to sheet 2
CSWI cmd BKR 1
Blk to sheet LOCAL to
3 sheet 3
859826A1.vsdx

Figure 231: Dual breaker control logic (Sheet 1 of 5)

N60-1601-0125-861-1 442
Chapter 9 - Settings

FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
BREAKER 1 SUBD OPEN O to sheet 4
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND R
BREAKER 1 SUBD CLSD

SETTING
AND NOT
BREAKER 1 ✁A/3P DPS INP
RxGOOSE DPS # = 1
Similarly for Phase B and C

from sheet 1
SETTING
Enable
BKR INTERM & BAD ST TIMERS
SETTING COMMON = 1
DISTINCT = 1 to sheet 4
BREAKER 1 MODE
1-Pole = 1
3-Pole = 1

FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
BREAKER 1 SUBD CLSD
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
BREAKER 1 ✁A CLSD
BREAKER 1 SUBD OPEN BKR1 A CLOSED AND
AND
SETTING
BREAKER 1 ✁A/3P CLSD
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
Off = 0
OR BKR1 A OPENED AND BREAKER 1 ✁A OPEN
AND
AND
SETTING FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
BREAKER 1 ✁A/3P OPND SETTING AND BREAKER 1 ✁A INTERM
OR AND
Off = 0 AND BREAKER 1 TOPERATE FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
OR T PKP
AND BREAKER 1 ✁A BAD ST
AND 0

FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
BKR1 B CLOSED AND BREAKER 1 ✁B CLSD
SETTING AND
BREAKER 1 ✁B CLSD FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
Off = 0
OR BKR1 B OPENED AND BREAKER 1 ✁B OPEN
AND
AND
SETTING
BREAKER 1 ✁B OPENED
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
OR AND AND BREAKER 1 ✁B INTERM
Off = 0 AND
OR SETTING
BREAKER 1 TOPERATE FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
AND
T PKP AND BREAKER 1 ✁B BAD ST
0

FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
BREAKER 1 ✁C CLSD
BKR1 C CLOSED AND
SETTING AND
BREAKER 1 ✁C CLSD FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
Off = 0
OR BKR1 C OPENED AND BREAKER 1 ✁C OPEN
AND
AND
SETTING
BREAKER 1 ✁C OPENED
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
Off = 0
OR AND AND BREAKER 1 ✁C INTERM
AND
OR SETTING
BREAKER 1 TOPERATE FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
AND
T PKP
AND BREAKER 1 ✁C BAD ST
0

FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
OR BREAKER 1 BAD STATUS

SETTING
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
BREAKER 1 EXT ALARM
AND BREAKER 1 TROUBLE
Off = 0 OR

AND FLEXLOGIC OPERAND

BKR1 A CLOSED AND BREAKER 1 CLOSED
OR
BKR1 B CLOSED
When the BKR INTERM & BAD ST AND
BKR1 C CLOSED SETTING
TIMERS setting is “Common,” BREAKER 1 PDisc ALARM DELAY
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
breaker element uses the logic AND BREAKER 1 DISCREP
T PKP
highlighted in dashed box for AND
0
Breaker 1 A/ B/ C INTERM and
BAD ST FlexLogic operands BKR1 A OPENED
AND FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
BKR1 B OPENED
AND BREAKER 1 OPEN
BKR1 C OPENED OR

AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
BKR1 A CLOSED AND BREAKER 1 ANY P OPEN
BKR1 B CLOSED AND
BKR1 C CLOSED
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
AND BREAKER 1 1P OPEN
XOR
SETTING
BREAKER 1 OUT OF SV FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
Off = 0 AND BREAKER 1 OOS

Enable
to sheet 3
859814B1.vsdx

Figure 232: Dual breaker control logic (Sheet 2 of 5)

N60-1601-0125-861-1 443
Chapter 9 - Settings

from sheet 1 from sheet 1

CSWI cmd BKR 1
SETTING *** Blk LOCAL
BREAKER 1 TAGGING
Enable No Override OR
Enable with Override
from sheet 2
AND Enable
BkrCSWI1.TagOn.ctlVal=On AND
OR
Bkr0XCBR1.TagOn.ctlVal=On Non-volatile,
OR Reset-dominant
Breaker 1 Tag S FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
From graphical front panel Latch BREAKER 1 TAG ON
AND BREAKER 1 TAG OFF
OR R
OR

AND
Breaker 1 Remove Tag
OR
BkrCSWI1.TagOn.ctlVal=Off AND
AND
OR
Bkr0XCBR1.TagOn.ctlVal=Off

SETTING ***
BREAKER 1 SUBSTITUTN
Non-volatile,
Enabled = 1
Reset-dominant
Breaker 1 Substitute Open S FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
Latch BREAKER 1 SUBD OPEN
Breaker 1 Remove Substitution
OR R
From graphical front panel

Breaker 1 Substitute Closed S FLEXLOGIC OPERAND

Latch BREAKER 1 SUBD CLSD
OR R

SETTING ***
BREAKER 1 BLK BYPASS
Enabled = 1 Non-volatile,
Reset-dominant
Breaker 1 Blk Bypass S FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
Latch BRK 1 BLK BYPASS ON
Breaker 1 Remove Blk Bypass
From graphical front panel OR R BRK 1 BLK BYPASS OFF

For relays with AR element

SETTING
BREAKER 1 AR BLOCK
Enabled = 1 Non-volatile,
Reset-dominant
Breaker 1 Block Autoreclose S FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
Latch BREAKER 1 BLK RCLS
Breaker 1 Unblock Autoreclose
OR R BREAKER 1 ENA RCLS
From graphical front panel

SETTING **
BRK1 CILO INTERLOCK GFP
BYPASS Enabled = 1 Non-volatile,
Reset-dominant
Breaker 1 Interlock Bypass S FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
BRK1 CILO BYPASS ON
Latch BRK1 CILO BYPASS OFF
Breaker 1 Remove Interlock Bypass
R
From graphical front panel OR
859827A1.vsdx

Figure 233: Dual breaker control logic (Sheet 3 of 5)

The breaker element has direct hard-coded connections to the IEC 61850 model as shown in the logic diagram.
This allows remote open/close operation of each breaker, using either CSWI or XCBR IEC 61850 logical nodes. IEC
61850 'select-before-operate' functionality, local/remote switch functionality, along with blocking of open/close
commands are provided. Note that the dwell time for the IEC 61850 trip and close commands shown is one
protection pass only. To maintain the close/open command for a certain time, do so by setting the seal-in timers
BREAKER 1 OPEN SEAL-IN and MANUAL CLOSE RECAL1TIME, on the contact outputs using the Seal-in
setting, in the Trip Output element, and/or in FlexLogic.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 444
Chapter 9 - Settings

From Sheet 2: BKR INTERM & BAD ST TIMERS = DISTINCT 1-Pole Enable

SETTING
BREAKER1 BAD ST TSUPPRESS FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
T PKP AND BREAKER 1 ✁A BAD ST
AND 0

SETTING
BREAKER 1 TOPERATE FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
AND T PKP AND BREAKER 1 ✁A INTERM
0

1-Pole Enable

SETTING
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
BREAKER1 BAD ST
TSUPPRESS
AND BREAKER 1 ✁ BAD ST
AND T PKP
0

SETTING
BREAKER 1 TOPERATE FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
AND T PKP AND BREAKER 1 ✁ INTERM
0

Where is B and C

From Sheet 2 (BREAKER 1 ✁A/3P DPS INP, BREAKER 1 SUBSTITUTN logic)

Value FLEXLOGIC OPERAND

SETTING
0 BREAKER 1 ✁A INTERM
BREAKER 1 ✁A/3P DPS INP 1 BREAKER 1 ✁A OPEN
RxGOOSE DPS # = 1 2 BREAKER 1 ✁A CLSD
3 BREAKER 1 ✁A BAD ST

Similar to phase B and C 859815B1

Figure 234: Dual breaker control logic (Sheet 4 of 5)

SETTING
BREAKER 1 OPEN CMD
Off = 0

SETTING
BRK1 COMMS OPEN CMD OR Breaker1 Open command
Off = 0
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
IED in Remote
SETTING
BREAKER 1 CLOSE CMD
Off = 0

SETTING
BRK1 COMMS CLS CMD OR Breaker1 Close command
Off = 0
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
IED in Remote
859837A1

Figure 235: Dual breaker control logic (Sheet 5 of 5)

9.5.5 DISCONNECT SWITCH CONTROL

For relays with 9-2LE hardware and software options, this element is not present.
The disconnect switch control element contains the auxiliary logic for status. It serves as the interface for opening
and closing disconnect switches through SCADA control or through the front panel interface. The disconnect switch
control element can be used to create interlocking functionality. For greater security in determination of the switch
pole position, both the 89/a and 89/b auxiliary contacts are used to report any discrepancy between them. The
number of available disconnect switches is four per breaker. The disconnect switch control element is executed and
status updated every ½ power cycle. To use this element, configure the contact outputs that open and close the
disconnect switch to use FlexLogic operands SWITCH 1 OFF CMD and SWITCH 1 ON CMD, and configure the
disconnect switch control element's inputs as outlined here.
Setting path: SETTINGS > SYSTEM SETUP > SWITCHES

N60-1601-0125-861-1 445
Chapter 9 - Settings

■ SWITCHES ■ COMMON SETTINGS

ó
■ ■
■ SWITCH <n>
ñ
■

The SYSTEM SETUP > SWITCHES menu has two sub-menus:

● COMMON SETTINGS
● SWITCH <n>, where n = 1 to 24

COMMON SETTINGS
There is only one common setting amongst switches ; SW INTERM & BAD ST TIMERS:
This can be set to Common or Distinct. When set to Common, the switch element considers both 00 and 11
states of 89/a and 89/b as an intermediate state and when the Toperate timer expires, declares the switch as bad
status. When set to Distinct” the switch element considers 00 state of 89/a and 89/b as an intermediate state and 11
as bad status. When the switch status detected is 00, the switch element waits for the Toperate timer to expire
before declaring the intermediate state. When the switch status detected is 11, the switch element waits for the Bad
ST Tsuppress timer to expire before declaring the bad state. See switch logic diagrams 2 and 4.

SWITCH <n>
Each switch (1 to 24) has the following settings. Only switch 1 is shown here.
Setting path: SETTINGS > SYSTEM SETUP > SWITCHES > SWITCH 1
■ SWITCH 1 SWITCH 1 FUNCTION:
ó Range: Disabled, Enabled
■ Disabled
SWITCH 1 NAME:
ô Range: up to six alphanumeric characters
SW 1
SWITCH 1 MODE:
ô Range: 3-Pole, 1-Pole
3-Pole
SWTCH 1 ΦA/3P DPS
ô Range: Off, RxGOOSE DPS 1, RxGOOSE DPS 2...
INP: Off
SWTCH 1 ΦA/3P OPND:
ô Range: FlexLogic operand
Off
SWTCH 1 ΦA/3P CLSD:
ô Range: FlexLogic operand
Off
SWITCH 1 ΦB DPS:
ô Range: Off, RxGOOSE DPS 1, RxGOOSE DPS 2…
INP: Off
SWITCH 1 ΦB OPENED:
ô Range: FlexLogic operand
Off
SWITCH 1 ΦB CLOSED:
ô Range: FlexLogic operand
Off
SWITCH 1 ΦC DPS:
Range: Off, RxGOOSE DPS 1, RxGOOSE DPS 2…
INP: Off
SWITCH 1 ΦC OPENED:
ô Range: FlexLogic operand
Off
SWITCH 1 ΦC CLOSED:
ô Range: FlexLogic operand
Off
SWITCH 1 ALARM PDisc DELAY:
ô Range: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001
0.000 s

N60-1601-0125-861-1 446
Chapter 9 - Settings

SWITCH 1 OPEN CMD:

ô Range: FlexLogic operand
Off
SW1 COMMS OPEN CMD:
ô Range: FlexLogic operand
Off
SWITCH 1 CLOSE CMD:
ô Range: FlexLogic operand
Off
SW1 COMMS CLS CMD:
ô Range: FlexLogic operand
Off
SWITCH 1 PB CONTROL:
ô Range: FlexLogic operand
Off
SWITCH 1 TOPERATE:
ô Range: 0 to 65535 ms in steps of 1
70 ms
SWITCH 1 BAD ST TSUPPRESS:
ô Range: 0 to 65535 ms in steps of 1
0 ms
SWITCH 1 OPEN SEAL-IN:
ô Range: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001
0.000 s
SWITCH 1 CLOSE SEAL-IN:
ô Range: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001
0.000 s
SWITCH 1 BLK OPEN:
ô Range: FlexLogic operand
Off
SWITCH 1 BLK CLOSE:
ô Range: FlexLogic operand
Off
SWITCH 1 BLK BYPASS:
ô Range: Disabled, Enabled
Disabled
SWITCH 1 TAGGING: Range: Disabled, Enable No Override, Enable with
ô
Disabled Override
BSWITCH 1 SUBSTITUTN:
ô Range: Disabled, Enabled
Disabled
SWITCH 1 EVENTS:
ô Range: Disabled, Enabled
Disabled
SW1 CILO INTRLK TO LOCAL
ô Range: Disabled, Enabled
CTRL: Disabled
SW1 CILO INTERLOCK GFP
ô Range: Disabled, Enabled
BYPASS: Disabled
SWITCH 1 LOCAL:
ô Range: FlexLogic operand
Off
SW1 BLK MNL CMD IN LOCAL:
ô Range: Disabled, Enabled
Disabled
SW1 CSWI LOC STAT:
ô Range: FlexLogic operand
Off
SW1 STATION AUTHOR:
ô Range: FlexLogic operand
Off
SWITCH 1 OPEN INTERLOCK:
ô Range: FlexLogic operand
Off
SWITCH 1 CLOSE INTERLOCK:
ô Range: FlexLogic operand
Off

N60-1601-0125-861-1 447
Chapter 9 - Settings

SWITCH 1 POS-REACHED
ô CHECK: Range: Disabled, Enabled
Enabled

The following settings are available for each switch control element.

SWITCH 1 FUNCTION
This setting enables and disables the operation of the disconnect switch element.

SWITCH 1 NAME
This setting allows you to assign a user-defined name (up to six characters) to the switch. This name is used in
flash messages related to switch 1.

SWITCH 1 MODE
This setting sets either 3-Pole mode, where all disconnect switch poles are operated simultaneously, or 1-Pole
mode, where each disconnect switch pole has its own auxiliary switch.

SWTCH 1 ΦA/3P DPS INP

This setting selects a double point status input (RxGOOSE# DPS Input) that is subscribed via GOOSE. Each
received RxGOOSE# DPS Input consist of 2 bits. The derived switch status is shown in the logic diagram.
When the IEC61850 RxGOOSE# DPS is mapped to SWITCH1 ΦA/3P DPS INP, the switch status (Open/Close/
Intermediate/Bad) will be based on the RxGOOSE DPS # value.
If the SWITCH1 ΦA/3P DPS INP selects a RxGOOSE DPS Input:
● the respective SWITCH1 ΦA/3P OPND and SWITCH1 ΦA/3P CLSD settings are not considered.
● the respective SWITCH T OPERATE and SWITCH BAD ST TSUPPRESS settings are also not considered in
the receiving relay

SWITCH 1 ΦA/3P OPND

This setting selects an operand (usually a contact input), which is for a normally-closed 89/a status input. This
activates a logic 1 when the breaker is open. If a separate 89/b contact input is not available, then the inverted 89/a
status signal or the inverted SWITCH 1 CLOSED status signal can be used.

SWITCH 1 ΦA/3P CLSD

This setting selects an operand (usually a contact input) connected to a disconnect switch auxiliary position tracking
mechanism. This input is for a normally-open 89/a status input that creates a logic 1 when the disconnect switch is
closed. If the SWITCH 1 MODE setting is 3-Pole, this setting selects a single 89/a input as the operand used to
track the breaker open or closed position. In 1-Pole mode, the input mentioned is used to track phase A and the
SWITCH 1 ΦB and SWITCH 1 ΦC settings select operands to track phases B and C, respectively.

SWITCH1 ΦB DPS INP

If the mode is selected as three-pole, this setting has no function. If the mode is selected as single-pole, this input is
used to track the switch phase B position as outlined for phase A.

SWITCH 1 ΦB OPENED
In three-pole mode, this setting has no function. In single-pole mode, this input is used to track the disconnect
switch phase B opened position as outlined for phase A.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 448
Chapter 9 - Settings

SWITCH 1 ΦB CLOSED
In three-pole mode, this setting has no function. In single-pole mode, this input is used to track the disconnect
switch phase B closed position as outlined for phase A.

SWITCH1 ΦC DPS INP

If the mode is selected as three-pole, this setting has no function. If the mode is selected as single-pole, this input is
used to track the switch phase C position as outlined for phase A.

SWITCH 1 ΦC OPENED
In three-pole mode, this setting has no function. In single-pole mode, this input is used to track the disconnect
switch phase C opened position as outlined for phase A.

SWITCH 1 ΦC CLOSED
In three-pole mode, this setting has no function. In single-pole mode, this input is used to track the disconnect
switch phase C closed position as outlined for phase A.

SWITCH 1 ALARM PDisc DELAY

This setting specifies the delay interval during which a conflict of status among the pole position tracking operands
does not declare a pole discrepancy. This allows for non-simultaneous operation of the poles.

SWITCH 1 OPEN CMD

This setting selects an operand that initiates a Switch 1 Open command. The command is not executed when
blocked by the operand assigned to SWITCH1 BLK OPEN setting.

SW1 COMMS OPEN CMD

This setting selects an operand that initiates a Switch 1 Open command. The setting is intended for commands
received via communication protocols (DNP3, IEC104 and Modbus) to be supervised by IED Local/Remote status.
The command is not executed if the relay is in local mode or blocked by the operand assigned to the SWITCH 1
BLK OPEN setting.

SWITCH 1 CLOSE CMD

This setting selects an operand that initiates a Switch 1 Close command. The command is not executed when
blocked by an operand assigned to the SWITCH 1 BLK CLOSE setting.

SW1 COMMS CLS CMD

This setting selects an operand that initiates a Switch 1 Close command. The setting is intended for commands
received via communication protocols (DNP3, IEC104 and Modbus) to be supervised by IED Local/Remote status.
The command is not executed if the relay is in local mode or blocked by the operand assigned to the SWITCH 1
BLK CLOSE setting.

SWITCH 1 PB CONTROL
When the selected operand value is high, local disconnect switch operations are allowed from front panel
pushbuttons .

SWITCH 1 TOPERATE
This setting specifies the required interval to overcome transient conflict between the 89/a and 89/b auxiliary
contacts during disconnect switch operation. If transient conflict still exists after this time has expired, the SWITCH 1
BAD STATUS FlexLogic operand is asserted for alarm or blocking purposes.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 449
Chapter 9 - Settings

SWITCH 1 BAD ST TSUPPRESS

When the SW INTERM & BAD ST TIMERS setting is set to Distinct, this setting specifies the required interval to
overcome the transient state of 11 during the breaker operation. If the 11 state still exists after this time, the
SWITCH 1 BAD STATUS FlexLogic operand is asserted. When the SW INTERM & BAD ST TIMERS setting is set
to Common, this setting is not used.

SWITCH 1 OPEN SEAL-IN

This setting specifies the seal-in time of the open command due to an operator-initiated manual open command to
the disconnect switch.

SWITCH 1 CLOSE SEAL-IN

This setting specifies the seal-in time of the close command due to an operator-initiated manual close command to
the disconnect switch.

SWITCH 1 BLK OPEN

This setting selects an operand that prevents initiation of the disconnect Switch 1 command. This setting can be
used to block the disconnect switch from opening, for instance when switch yard monitoring indicates that current
exceeding the switch's interrupting rating can be flowing through the switch.

SWITCH 1 BLK CLOSE

This setting selects an operand that prevents initiation of disconnect Switch 1 close commands. This setting can be
used to block the disconnect switch from closing, for instance to prevent closing into a closed ground switch.

SWITCH 1 BLK BYPASS

This setting is only available for relays with a graphical front panel. When enabled, this setting allows the graphical
front panel to bypass switch 1 interlocking. When asserted, SWITCH 1 BLK OPEN and SWITCH 1 BLK CLOSE
settings are bypassed.

SWITCH 1 TAGGING
This setting is only available for relays with a graphical front panel. Switch tagging is used to block certain
operations for safety purposes. No other action is needed after enabling the function; it is handled internally where
certain functions are blocked.
Set to Enable No Override to allow the graphical front panel or IEC 61850 MMS control to tag switch 1. When
tagged from the graphical front panel, tagging can be removed only from the graphical front panel, and an attempt
to remove tagging using IEC 61850 MMS control results in a negative response (-Rsp). When tagged from IEC
61850 MMS control, tagging can be removed only by MMS control.
Set to Enable With Override to allow the graphical front panel or IEC 61850 MMS control to tag switch 1.
When tagged from the graphical front panel, tagging can be removed only from the graphical front panel, and an
attempt to remove tagging using IEC 61850 MMS control results in a negative response (-Rsp). When tagged from
IEC 61850 MMS control, tagging can be removed by MMS control or from the graphical front panel. That is, the
graphical front panel has an override function.
When tagged, the following operations are disabled:
● Pushbutton open/close
● IEC 61850 open/close
● Open command initiated by SWITCH 1 OPEN setting
● Close command initiated by SWITCH 1 CLOSE setting.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 450
Chapter 9 - Settings

SWITCH 1 SUBSTITUTN
This setting is only available for relays with a graphical front panel. When enabled, this setting allows the graphical
front panel/IEC 61850 to substitute switch 1 status. When substituted, switch 1 control open/close status is forced to
the substituted value.

SWITCH 1 LOCAL
This setting selects an operand that indicates the Switch control behavior from an IEC 61850 client. When the
operand value is set, it indicates the Switch in Local mode and the remote commands from IEC 61850 client are
blocked. You set this setting using the EnerVista software or with an SCL file.

SW1 BLK MNL CMD IN LOCAL

When this setting is enabled, and the SWITCH 1 LOCAL operand state is logic 1 (i.e. the Switch is in Local mode
and Disc0XSWI1.Loc is TRUE), manual commands originating from the front panel pushbuttons, graphical front
panel and SWITCH 1 OPEN/CLOSE CMD are blocked. When disabled, manual commands originating from the
relay are allowed even when the switch is in Local mode. This setting is available only if the order code includes
IEC 61850.

SW1CSWI LOC STAT

This setting selects an operand that indicates the switch residing in that bay is in Local or Remote mode. When the
operand state is logic 1, the bay is considered to be in Local mode, otherwise it is considered to be in Remote
mode. The operand status is modeled in the IEC 61850 server using the respective Switch CSWI Loc data objects.
You should refer to the operand status in the Control Authority table to determine the control authority for different
levels. This setting is available only if the order code includes IEC 61850.

SW1 STATION AUTHOR

This setting selects an operand that indicates the Station level authority status. The operand status is modeled in
the IEC 61850 server using the respective CSWI LocSta data objectS. Refer to the operand status in the Control
Authority table to determine the control authority for different levels. This setting is available only if the order code
includes IEC 61850.

SWITCH 1 OPEN INTERLOCK

This setting selects an operand that indicates the interlock status for the Switch Open commands. This operand
state is mapped directly to the IEC 61850 DiscCILO1.EnaOpn.stVal, which is used to reject the IEC 61850 open
command when the selected operand state is at logic 0 (DiscCILO1.EnaOpn.stVal is set to false). However, the IEC
61850 client can choose to check or skip the interlock condition to execute the command using the Check
parameter. In addition, the interlock condition can be applied to the local commands, which can originate from the
front local HMI, front panel push buttons, graphical front panel and FlexLogic Operands assigned to the SWITCH 1
OPEN CMD setting. This is achieved by enabling SW1 CILO INTRLK TO LOCAL CTRL. This setting is available
only if the order code includes IEC 61850.

SWITCH 1 CLOSE INTERLOCK

This setting selects an operand that indicates the interlock status for the Switch Open commands. This operand
state is mapped directly to the IEC 61850 DiscCILO1.EnaCls.stVal, which is used to reject the IEC 61850 close
command when the selected operand state is at logic 0 (DiscCILO1.EnaCls.stVal is set to false). However, the IEC
61850 client can choose to check or skip the interlock condition to execute the command using the Check
parameter. In addition, the interlock condition can be applied to the local commands, which can originate from the
front local HMI, front panel push buttons, graphical front panel and FlexLogic Operands assigned to the SWITCH 1
CLOSE CMD setting. This is achieved by enabling SW1 CILO INTRLK TO LOCAL CTRL. This setting is available
only if the order code includes IEC 61850.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 451
Chapter 9 - Settings

SWITCH 1 POS-REACHED CHECK

When enabled, the IEC 61850 control value is checked for current switch status and is rejected if the command
value (Open/Close) from IEC 61850 client matches with the present switch status. When disabled, the current
switch status is not verified to accept the control. This setting is only available if the order code includes IEC 61850.
It is set using the Enervista software.

Note:
Before software release version 7.90, ST.LOC OPERAND, INTERLOCK OPN, INTERLOCK CLS and SYNCCHECK CLOSE
settings were available in IEC 61850 configurator under System Setup > Switches. From version 7.90 onwards, the above
mentioned settings were removed from the IEC 61850 configurator and merged with the Breaker settings screen under
Settings > System Setup > Switches (outside the IEC 61850 configurator). Also, the name of the setting ST.LOC
OPERAND has been changed to LOCAL.

Note:
SWITCH 1 LOCAL, INTERLOCK OPEN, INTERLOCK CLOSE, SYNCCHECK CLOSE settings are not available on the front
panel and can be configured either from EnerVista Software or via SCL files. Refer to the MICS document online for
respective settings modeling in SCL files. SWITCH 1 POS-REACHED CHECK is only configurable via EnerVista software.

The switch element has direct hard-coded connections to the IEC 61850 model as shown in the logic diagrams.
This allows remote open/close operation of each switch, using either CSWI or XSWI IEC 61850 logical nodes. IEC
61850 select-before-operate functionality, local/remote switch functionality, along with blocking open/close
commands are provided. Note that the dwell time for the IEC 61850 trip and close commands shown is one
protection pass only. To maintain close/open command for a certain time, do so using the seal-in timers SWITCH 1
OPEN SEAL-IN and SWITCH 1 CLOSE SEAL-IN, on the contact outputs using the setting, or in FlexLogic.

9.5.5.1 DISCONNECT SWITCH CONTROL LOGIC

The following diagrams show the disconnect switch control logic:

N60-1601-0125-861-1 452
Chapter 9 - Settings

SETTING
SWITCH 1 FUNCTION
Enabled = 1
SETTING * DiscCILO1.EnaOpn.stVal
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
SW1 CILO INTRLK
SWITCH 1 TAG ON
TO LOCAL CTRL Enabled = 1 FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
SETTING
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND SW1 LOCAL OPEN CILO
SWITCH 1 PB CONTROL AND
Off = 0 SW1 CILO BYPASS ON
AND
SETTING *
SWITCH 1 Open FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
SWITCH 1 Open Interlock
From graphical front panel AND SW1 LOCAL AUTHOR ON
Off = 0 OR
DiscCSWI#.LocSta.ctlVal
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
SETTING * AND
AND SW1 REM AUTHOR ON
SW1 STATION AUTHOR
OR AND
Off = 0 FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
AND OR
AND SW1 STATN AUTHOR ON
SETTING *
AND
SW1 CSWI LOC STAT AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
Off = 0 AND OR
AND SW1 BAY AUTHOR ON
SETTING *
Multi-Level Control
ENABLED = 1 AND
SETTING *
SW1 BLK MNL CMD IN LOCAL AND
ENABLED = 1
AND
DiscCSWI1.OpOpn.general
SETTING OR To IEC 61850 protocol
SWITCH1 LOCAL
Off = 0
AND AND
Disc0XSWI1.Pos.ctlVal = off OR FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
SETTING
DiscCSWI1.Pos.ctlVal = off OR AND SWITCH 1 OFF CMD
SWITCH 1 OPEN SEAL-IN
From IEC 61850 protocol AND
T PKP
OR 0 AND
From sheet 4-2 of 4
AND
Switch 1 Open command

DiscCSWI1.BlkOpn.ctlVal = on To IEC 61850 protocol

AND DiscCSWI1.BlkOpn.stVal

Disc0XSWI1.BlkOpn.ctlVal = on
From IEC 61850 protocol AND
SETTING
SWITCH 1 BLOCK OPEN OR Disc0XSWI1.BlkOpn.stVal
Off = 0 To IEC 61850 protocol
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND AND
DiscCILO1.EnaCls.stVal = FALSE
SWITCH 1 BLK BYPASS ON To IEC 61850 protocol
AND DiscCSWI1.CmdBlk.stVal
DiscCSWI1.CmdBlk.ctlVal = on

SETTING * AND
SWITCH 1 Close Interlock To IEC 61850 protocol
Off = 0 AND DiscCSWI1.Blk.stVal
AND AND
SWITCH 1 Close
From graphical front panel FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
OR
SW1 LOCAL CLS CILO
AND
AND
Disc0XSWI1.Pos.ctlVal = on
OR FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
DiscCSWI1.Pos.ctlVal = on
AND AND SWITCH 1 ON CMD
From IEC 61850 protocol AND
OR SETTING
SWITCH 1 CLOSE SEAL-IN OR DiscCSWI1.OpCls.general
From sheet 4-2 of 4
AND T PKP To IEC 61850 protocol
Switch1 Close command AND
0
From IEC 61850 protocol

0
AND 20 ms
OR OR

AND DiscCSWI1.BlkCls.stVal
DiscCSWI1.BlkCls.ctlVal = on
Disc0XSWI1.BlkCls.ctlVal = on
AND Disc0XSWI1.BlkCls.stVal
SETTING OR To 61850 protocol
SWITCH 1 BLK CLOSE
AND Enable
Off = 0 to sheet 2

CSWI cmd Switch 1

Blk to Local
Sheet 3 to Sheet 3 859828B1.vsdx

Figure 236: Disconnect switch control logic (Sheet 1 of 5)

N60-1601-0125-861-1 453
Chapter 9 - Settings

FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
SWITCH 1 SUBD OPEN
O
R
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
SWITCH 1 SUBD CLSD

SETTING
AND NOT
SWITCH 1 ✁A/3P DPS INP Similarly for Phase B and C
RxGOOSE DPS # = 1

from sheet 1
SETTING Enable
SW INTERM & BAD ST TIMERS
SETTING COMMON = 1
SWITCH 1 MODE DISTINCT = 1 to sheet 4
1-Pole = 1
3-Pole = 1

FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
SWITCH 1 SUBD CLSD
SWITCH 1 SUBD OPEN FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
SW1 A CLOSED AND SWITCH 1 ✁A CLSD
SETTING AND
SWITCH 1 ✁A/3P CLSD FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
Off = 0
OR SW1 A OPENED AND SWITCH 1 ✁A OPEN
AND
AND
SETTING FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
SWITCH 1 ✁A/3P OPND AND SWITCH 1 ✁A INTERM
OR AND SETTING
Off = 0 AND
SWITCH 1 TOPERATE FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
OR
T PKP AND SWITCH 1 ✁A BAD ST
AND 0

SW1 B CLOSED FLEXLOGIC OPERAND

SWITCH 1 ✁B CLSD
AND
SETTING AND
SWITCH 1 ✁B CLSD FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
Off = 0
OR SW1 B OPENED AND SWITCH 1 ✁B OPEN
AND
AND
SETTING
SWITCH 1 ✁B OPENED FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
Off = 0
OR AND AND SWITCH 1 ✁B INTERM
AND
SETTING
OR FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
SWITCH 1 TOPERATE
AND AND SWITCH 1 ✁B BAD ST
T PKP
0

FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
SW1 C CLOSED AND SWITCH 1 ✁C CLSD
SETTING AND
SWITCH 1 ✁C CLSD FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
Off = 0
OR SW1 C OPENED AND SWITCH 1 ✁C OPEN
AND
AND
SETTING
SWITCH 1 ✁C OPENED FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
SWITCH 1 ✁C INTERM
OR AND AND
Off = 0 AND
OR SETTING
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
SWITCH 1 ✁C BAD ST
SWITCH 1 TOPERATE
AND AND
T PKP
0

When the SW INTERM & BAD ST TIMERS setting is FLEXLOGIC OPERAND

“Common,” switch element uses the logic highlighted in OR SWITCH 1 BAD STATUS
dashed boxes for SWITCH1 A/ B/ C INTERM and BAD
ST FlexLogic operands.
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
AND SWITCH 1 TROUBLE
OR

AND FLEXLOGIC OPERAND

SW1 A CLOSED AND SWITCH 1 CLOSED
OR
SW1 B CLOSED
AND
SW1 C CLOSED SETTING
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
SWITCH 1 PDisc ALARM DELAY
AND SWITCH 1 DISCREP
T PKP
AND
0

SW1 A OPENED
AND FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
SW1 B OPENED
AND SWITCH 1 OPEN
SW1 C OPENED OR

AND
Enable
to sheet 3 859812A1.vsdx

Figure 237: Disconnect switch control logic (Sheet 2 of 5)

N60-1601-0125-861-1 454
Chapter 9 - Settings

from sheet 1 from sheet 1

CSWI cmd Switch 1
SETTING *** Blk LOCAL
SWITCH 1 TAGGING
Enable No Override OR
Enable with Override
from sheet 2
AND Enable
DiscCSWI1.TagOn.ctlVal=On AND
OR
Disc0XSWI1.TagOn.ctlVal=On Non-volatile,
OR Reset-dominant
SWITCH 1 Tag S FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
From graphical front panel Latch SWITCH 1 TAG ON
AND SWITCH 1 TAG OFF
OR R
OR

AND
SWITCH 1 Remove Tag
OR
DiscCSWI1.TagOn.ctlVal=Off AND
AND
OR
Disc0XSWI1.TagOn.ctlVal=Off

SETTING ***
SWITCH 1 SUBSTITUTN
Enabled = 1 Non-volatile,
Reset-dominant
SWITCH 1 Substitute Open S FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
Latch SWITCH 1 SUBD OPEN
SWITCH 1 Remove Substitution
OR R

SWITCH 1 Substitute Closed S FLEXLOGIC OPERAND

From graphical front panel Latch SWITCH 1 SUBD CLSD
OR R

SETTING ***
SWITCH 1 BLK BYPASS
Enabled = 1 Non-volatile,
Reset-dominant
SWITCH 1 Bypass S FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
SWITCH 1 Remove Bypass Latch SW 1 BLK BYPASS ON
From graphical front panel OR R SW 1 BLK BYPASS OFF

SETTING **
SW1 CILO INTERLOCK GFP
BYPASS Enabled = 1 Non-volatile,
Reset-dominant
Breaker 1 Interlock Bypass S FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
SW1 CILO BYPASS ON
Latch
Breaker 1 Remove Interlock Bypass SW1 CILO BYPASS OFF
R
From graphical front panel OR

859829B1

Figure 238: Disconnect switch control logic (Sheet 3 of 5)

N60-1601-0125-861-1 455
Chapter 9 - Settings

SW INTERM & BAD ST TIMERS = DISTINCT

from Sheet 2 1-Pole Enable

❙❊❚❚ ◆✁
SWITCH1 BAD ST TSUPPRESS ❋✄❊❳✄❖✁ ❈ ❖☎❊❘❆◆❉
T PKP AND SWITCH1 ✂A BAD ST
AND 0

❙❊❚❚ ◆✁
SWITCH1 TOPERATE ❋✄❊❳✄❖✁ ❈ ❖☎❊❘❆◆❉
AND T PKP AND SWITCH1 ✂A INTERM
0

1-Pole Enable

❙❊❚❚ ◆✁
SWITCH1 BAD ST TSUPPRESS
❋✄❊❳✄❖✁ ❈ ❖☎❊❘❆◆❉
T PKP
AND SWITCH1 ✂✆ BAD ST
AND 0

❙❊❚❚ ◆✁
SWITCH1 TOPERATE ❋✄❊❳✄❖✁ ❈ ❖☎❊❘❆◆❉
AND T PKP AND SWITCH1 ✂✆INTERM
0

Where ✆ is B and C

From Sheet 2 (SWITCH 1 ✂A/3P DPS INP,

SWITCH 1 SUBSTITUTN logic)

Value ❋✄❊❳✄❖✁ ❈ ❖☎❊❘❆◆❉

❙❊❚❚ ◆✁
0 SWITCH 1 ✂A INTERM
SWITCH 1 ✂A/3P DPS INP 1 SWITCH 1 ✂A OPEN
RxGOOSE DPS # = 1 2 SWITCH 1 ✂A CLSD
3 SWITCH 1 ✂A BAD ST

Similar to phase B and C

Figure 239: Disconnect switch control logic (Sheet 4 of 5)

SETTING
SWITCH 1 OPEN CMD
Off = 0

SETTING
SW1 COMMS OPEN CMD OR Switch1 Open command
Off = 0
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
IED in Remote
SETTING
SWITCH 1 CLOSE CMD
Off = 0

SETTING
SW1 COMMS CLS CMD OR Switch1 Close command
Off = 0
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
IED in Remote 859836A1

Figure 240: Disconnect switch control logic (Sheet 5 of 5)

9.5.6 FLEXCURVES
Setting path: SETTINGS > SYSTEM SETUP > FLEXCURVES > FLEXCURVE <n>
where n = A to D
■ FLEXCURVE A FLEXCURVE A TIME AT
ó Range: 0 to 65535 ms in steps of 1
■ 0.00 xPKP: 0 ms

N60-1601-0125-861-1 456
Chapter 9 - Settings

FLEXCURVE A TIME AT
ô Range: 0 to 65535 ms in steps of 1
0.05 xPKP: 0 ms

â:

FLEXCURVE A TIME AT
ñ Range: 0 to 65535 ms in steps of 1
20.00xPKP: 0 ms

FlexCurves A through D have settings for entering times to reset and operate at the following pickup levels: 0.00 to
0.98 and 1.03 to 20.00. This data is converted into two continuous curves by linear interpolation between data
points. To enter a custom FlexCurve, enter the reset and operate times (using the VALUE keys) for each selected
pickup point (using the MESSAGE up/down keys) for the required protection curve (A, B, C, or D).

Reset Time Reset Time Operate Time Operate Time Operate Time Operate Time
ms ms ms ms ms ms
0.00 0.68 1.03 2.9 4.9 10.5
0.05 0.70 1.05 3.0 5.0 11.0
0.10 0.72 1.1 3.1 5.1 11.5
0.15 0.74 1.2 3.2 5.2 12.0
0.20 0.76 1.3 3.3 5.3 12.5
0.25 0.78 1.4 3.4 5.4 13.0
0.30 0.80 1.5 3.5 5.5 13.5
0.35 0.82 1.6 3.6 5.6 14.0
0.40 0.84 1.7 3.7 5.7 14.5
0.45 0.86 1.8 3.8 5.8 15.0
0.48 0.88 1.9 3.9 5.9 15.5
0.50 0.90 2.0 4.0 6.0 16.0
0.52 0.91 2.1 4.1 6.5 16.5
0.54 0.92 2.2 4.2 7.0 17.0
0.56 0.93 2.3 4.3 7.5 17.5
0.58 0.94 2.4 4.4 8.0 18.0
0.60 0.95 2.5 4.5 8.5 18.5
0.62 0.96 2.6 4.6 9.0 19.0
0.64 0.97 2.7 4.7 9.5 19.5
0.66 0.98 2.8 4.8 10.0 20.0

Note:
The relay using a given FlexCurve applies linear approximation for intervals between the user-entered points. Take care when
setting the two points that are closest to the multiple of pickup of 1 (0.98 pu and 1.03 pu). We recommend that you set the two
times to a similar value, otherwise the linear approximation can result in undesired behavior for the operating quantity that is
close to 1.00 pu.

9.5.6.1 FLEXCURVE CONFIGURATION WITH ENERVISTA SOFTWARE

The EnerVista software allows for easy configuration and management of FlexCurves and their associated data
points. You can configure FlexCurves from a selection of standard curves to provide the best approximate fit, then
edit specific data points afterwards. Alternately, you can import curve data from a specified file (.csv format) by

N60-1601-0125-861-1 457
Chapter 9 - Settings

selecting the EnerVista Import Data From setting (Settings > System Setup > FlexCurves > FlexCurve). You
customize FlexCurves by editing the operating time (ms) values at pre-defined per-unit current multiples.

Note:
Note that the pickup multiples start at zero (implying the "reset time"), operating time below pickup, and operating time above
pickup.

9.5.6.2 RECLOSER CURVE EDITING

You can shape recloser curves into a composite curve with a minimum response time and a fixed time above a
specified pickup multiples. 41 recloser curve types supported. These definite operating times are useful to
coordinate operating times, typically at higher currents and where upstream and downstream protective devices
have different operating characteristics. The recloser curve configuration window shown here appears when you set
the Initialize From setting in the EnerVista software to Recloser Curve and clicking the Initialize FlexCurve
button.

✡☛☞✌✍✎☞✍✏✑✒ ✓✔✕✖✗✘ ✙✚✛✖✜✢✣✖✢✗✘✤ ✜✥✗ ✔✛✦✧✗ ★✣✗✦✕✜✢✩✪ ✜✢✚✗✘

✫✬✬✭✮ ✯✰✰✱ ✲✳✴ ✲✵✶✴ ✱✷✴✸✵✹✵✴✰ ✵✺ ✲✳✵✱ ✹✵✴✻✰ ✼✵✺ ✶✱✽ ✲✾ ✴✿✸✳

❀❁❂❃❄ ✾✷✴❅✿✲✵✺❆ ✲✵✶✴ ❇✿✻❈✴❉

✡✍❊✍❋☛❋ ●✏❍✎■❊❍✏ ❏✍❋✏ ❑✡●❏▲✒ ▼◆ ✗✩✕❖✖✗P◗ ✜✥✗ ❘❙❚ ✘✗✜✜✢✩✪

P✗◆✢✩✗✘ ✜✥✗ ✘✥★✦✜✗✘✜ ★✣✗✦✕✜✢✩✪ ✜✢✚✗ ✗✧✗✩ ✢◆ ✜✥✗ ✔✛✦✧✗ ✘✛✪✪✗✘✜✘

✕ ✘✥★✦✜✗✦ ✜✢✚✗ ✕✜ ✥✢✪✥✗✦ ✔✛✦✦✗✩✜ ✚✛✖✜✢✣✖✗✘❯ ❱ ✔★✚✣★✘✢✜✗ ★✣✗✦✕✜✢✩✪

✔✥✕✦✕✔✜✗✦✢✘✜✢✔ ✢✘ ✗◆◆✗✔✜✢✧✗✖❲ P✗◆✢✩✗P❯ ❳★✦ ✔✛✦✦✗✩✜ ✚✛✖✜✢✣✖✗✘ ✖★❨✗✦

✜✥✕✩ ✜✥✗ ✢✩✜✗✦✘✗✔✜✢★✩ ✣★✢✩✜◗ ✜✥✗ ✔✛✦✧✗ P✢✔✜✕✜✗✘ ✜✥✗ ★✣✗✦✕✜✢✩✪ ✜✢✚✗❩

★✜✥✗✦❨✢✘✗◗ ✜✥✗ ❘❙❚ P★✗✘❯ ❱✩ ✢✩◆★✦✚✕✜✢★✩ ✚✗✘✘✕✪✗ ✕✣✣✗✕✦✘

❨✥✗✩ ✕✜✜✗✚✣✜✢✩✪ ✜★ ✕✣✣✖❲ ✕✩ ❘❙❚ ✘✥★✦✜✗✦ ✜✥✕✩ ✜✥✗ ✚✢✩✢✚✛✚

✔✛✦✧✗ ✜✢✚✗❯

❬✍❭❪ ❫☛✑✑✏❊✌ ❏✍❋✏✒ ❱✖✖★❨✘ ✜✥✗ ✛✘✗✦ ✜★ ✘✗✜ ✕ ✣✢✔❴✛✣ ✚✛✖✜✢✣✖✗

◆✦★✚ ❨✥✢✔✥ ✣★✢✩✜ ★✩❨✕✦P✘ ✜✥✗ ★✣✗✦✕✜✢✩✪ ✜✢✚✗ ✢✘ ◆✢❵✗P❯ ❚✥✢✘ ✢✘

✩★✦✚✕✖✖❲ ★✩✖❲ ✦✗❛✛✢✦✗P ✕✜ ✥✢✪✥✗✦ ✔✛✦✦✗✩✜ ✖✗✧✗✖✘❯ ❚✥✗ ❬❫❏ ●❜✌✍■

P✗◆✢✩✗✘ ✜✥✗ ✥✢✪✥ ✔✛✦✦✗✩✜ ✣✢✔❴✛✣ ✚✛✖✜✢✣✖✗❩ ✜✥✗ ❬❫❏ P✗◆✢✩✗✘ ✜✥✗

★✣✗✦✕✜✢✩✪ ✜✢✚✗❯
✁✂✄✂☎✆☎✝✞✟✠

Figure 241: Recloser curve initialization

Note:
The Multiplier and Adder settings only affect the curve portion of the characteristic and not the MRT and HCT settings. The
HCT settings override the MRT settings for multiples of pickup greater than the HCT ratio.

Example
A composite curve is created from the GE_111 standard with MRT = 200 ms and HCT initially disabled. HCT is then
enabled at eight times pickup with an operating time of 30 ms. At approximately four times pickup, the curve
operating time is equal to the MRT and from then onwards the operating time remains at 200 ms.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 458
Chapter 9 - Settings

✁✂✄☎✆✝☎✞✟✠✡

Composite recloser curve with HCT disabled

With the HCT feature enabled, the operating time reduces to 30 ms for pickup multiples exceeding eight times
pickup

✁✂✄✂☎✆✝✞✟✠✡

Composite recloser curve with HCT enabled

Note:
Configuring a composite curve with an increase in operating time at increased pickup multiples is not allowed. If you attempt
this, the EnerVista software will generate an error message and discard the proposed changes

9.5.6.3 STANDARD RECLOSER CURVES

The following graphs display standard recloser curves available.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 459
Chapter 9 - Settings

☛☞✌✍✾
✏

✚✑✓

✻
✚✑✒
✺
☛☞✌✍✽
✹
✸
✷

✶ ☛☞✌✍✿
✚✑✏ ☛☞✌✍✎
✵
✴
✳

✚✑✚✓

☛☞✌✍✌ ☛☞✌✍✼

✚✑✚✒

✚✑✚✏

✏ ✏✑✒ ✏✑✓ ✒ ✒✑✓ ✔ ✕ ✓ ✖ ✗ ✘ ✙ ✏✚ ✏✒ ✏✓ ✒✚

✛✜✢✢✣✤✥ ✦✧★✩✪✫✬✩✭ ✮✯ ✬✫✰✱★✬✲

✁✂✄✂☎✆✝✞✟✠✡

Figure 242: Recloser curves GE101 to GE106

✍✕

✷✸✹✻✼
✌✕

☛✕

✷✸✹✺✽
✶
✵
✴
✳ ✌
✲

✰
✯ ✷✸✹✼✾
☛
✮

✷✸✹✹✺

✕☞✍

✕☞✌

✕☞☛

✕☞✕✍
☛ ☛☞✌ ☛☞✍ ✌ ✌☞✍ ✎ ✏ ✍ ✑ ✒ ✓ ✔ ☛✕ ☛✌ ☛✍ ✌✕

✖✗✘✘✙✚✛ ✜✢✣✤✥✦✧✤★ ✩✪ ✧✦✫✬✣✧✭

✁✂✄✂☎✆✝✞✟✠✡

Figure 243: Recloser curves GE113, GE120, GE138, and GE142

N60-1601-0125-861-1 460
Chapter 9 - Settings

✎✖

✍✖

☞✖

✷ ✸✹❀✾✺
✶
✵
✴
✳ ✎

✱
✰
✯
✸✹✺✽✺

✸✹✺✼✾
✸✹✺✻✼
☞

✸✹✺✻✿

✖✌✎

☞ ☞✌✍ ☞✌✎ ✍ ✍✌✎ ✏ ✑ ✎ ✒ ✓ ✔ ✕ ☞✖ ☞✍ ☞✎ ✍✖

✗✘✙✙✚✛✜ ✢✣✤✥✦✧★✥✩ ✪✫ ★✧✬✭✤★✮

✁✂✄☎✆✝✞✟✠✡☛

Figure 244: Recloser curves GE134, GE137, GE140, GE151, and GE201

✌✔

✶✷✸✼✺

☞✔

✵
✴
✳
✲
✱
✶✷✸✽✸
✰

✯ ✡✔
✮
✭

✶✷✸✹✸

✶✷✺✻✻

☞
✡ ✡☛☞ ✡☛✌ ☞ ☞☛✌ ✍ ✎ ✌ ✏ ✑ ✒ ✓ ✡✔ ✡☞ ✡✌ ☞✔

✕✖✗✗✘✙✚ ✛✜✢✣✤✥✦✣✧ ★✩ ✦✥✪✫✢✦✬

✁✂✄✂ ☎✆✝✞✟✠

Figure 245: Recloser curves GE131, GE141, GE152, and GE200

N60-1601-0125-861-1 461
Chapter 9 - Settings

✍✕

✌✕
✷✸✹✻✾

☛✕

✌
✶
✵
✷✸✹✻✼
✴
✳
✲ ☛

✰
✯ ✕☞✍
✮
✷✸✹✺✺

✕☞✌
✷✸✹✻✽

✕☞☛

✕☞✕✍

✷✸✹✻✹

✕☞✕✌ ✷✸✹✻✺

✕☞✕☛
☛ ☛☞✌ ☛☞✍ ✌ ✌☞✍ ✎ ✏ ✍ ✑ ✒ ✓ ✔ ☛✕ ☛✌ ☛✍ ✌✕

✖✗✘✘✙✚✛ ✜✢✣✤✥✦✧✤★ ✩✪ ✧✦✫✬✣✧✭

✁✂✄✂☎✆✝✞✟✠✡

Figure 246: Recloser curves GE133, GE161, GE162, GE163, GE164, and GE165

✌✕
✷✸✹✻✼

☛✕

☛
✶
✵
✴
✳
✲
✕☞✍
✷✸✹✻✿
✱

✰
✯
✮
✕☞✌

✷✸✹✻✺

✕☞☛

✷✸✹✹✺

✕☞✕✍
✷✸✹✹✾
✷✸✹✹✽

✕☞✕✌

✕☞✕☛
☛ ☛☞✌ ☛☞✍ ✌ ✌☞✍ ✎ ✏ ✍ ✑ ✒ ✓ ✔ ☛✕ ☛✌ ☛✍ ✌✕

✖✗✘✘✙✚✛ ✜✢✣✤✥✦✧✤★ ✩✪ ✧✦✫✬✣✧✭

✁✂✄✂☎✆✝✞✟✠✡

Figure 247: Recloser curves GE116, GE117, GE118, GE132, GE136, and GE139

N60-1601-0125-861-1 462
Chapter 9 - Settings

☞✔

✡✔

✶✷✸✹✹

✡
✵
✴
✳
✲
✱
✔☛✌
✰

✯
✮ ✶✷✸✸✺
✭
✔☛☞

✶✷✸✸✸
✶✷✸✹✸
✔☛✡

✔☛✔✌ ✶✷✸✸✽ ✶✷✸✸✹

✶✷✸✻✼

✔☛✔☞

✔☛✔✡
✡ ✡☛☞ ✡☛✌ ☞ ☞☛✌ ✍ ✎ ✌ ✏ ✑ ✒ ✓ ✡✔ ✡☞ ✡✌ ☞✔

✕✖✗✗✘✙✚ ✛✜✢✣✤✥✦✣✧ ★✩ ✦✥✪✫✢✦✬

✁✂✄✂✁☎✆✝✞✟✠

Figure 248: Recloser curves GE107, GE111, GE112, GE114, GE115, GE121, and GE122

✌✔

☞✔

✶✷✺✻✺

✡✔

✵
✴
✳ ✌
✲
✱

✯
✮
✭ ✶✷✸✼✽
☞
✶✷✸✸✹

✔☛✌

✔☛☞
✡ ✡☛☞ ✡☛✌ ☞ ☞☛✌ ✍ ✎ ✌ ✏ ✑ ✒ ✓ ✡✔ ✡☞ ✡✌ ☞✔

✕✖✗✗✘✙✚ ✛✜✢✣✤✥✦✣✧ ★✩ ✦✥✪✫✢✦✬

✁✂✄✂✄☎✆✝✞✟✠

Figure 249: Recloser curves GE119, GE135, and GE202

9.5.7 PMU INSTANCE SETTINGS

Setting path: SETTINGS > SYSTEM SETUP > PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT > PHASOR MEASUREMENT
UNIT <n>
Up to six PMUs are available, depending on UR model and option choice. Only one is shown here.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 463
Chapter 9 - Settings

■ PHASOR MEASUREMENT ■ PMU 1 BASIC

ó
■ UNIT 1 ■ CONFIGURATION
■ PMU 1
ô
■ CALIBRATION
■ PMU 1
ô
■ TRIGGERING
■ PMU 1
ñ
■ RECORDING

The PMU instance menu consists of the following sub-menus.

PMU 1 BASIC CONFIGURATION

This submenu invokes the basic configuration settings for PMU 1.

PMU 1 CALIBRATION
This submenu invokes the calibration settings for PMU 1.

PMU 1 TRIGGERING
This submenu invokes the triggering settings for PMU 1.

PMU 1 RECORDING
This submenu invokes the recording settings for PMU 1.

9.5.7.1 BASIC CONFIGURATION

Setting path: SETTINGS > SYSTEM SETUP > PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT > PHASOR MEASUREMENT
UNIT <n>
Up to six PMUs are available, depending on UR model and option choice. Only one is shown here.
■ PMU 1 BASIC PMU 1
ó Range: Enabled, Disabled
■ CONFIGURATION FUNCTION: Disabled

PMU 1 IDCODE:
ô Range: 1 to 65534 in steps of 1
1

Range: 32-character ASCII string truncated to 16

PMU 1 STN:
ô characters if mapped into C37.118 Default: GE-UR-
GE-UR-PMU
PMU
PMU 1 GLOBAL PMU ID:
ô Range: 16-character ASCII string
GE-UR-PMU-000001
PMU 1 LATITUDE:
ô Range: -90.00000 to 90.00000 in steps of 0.00001°.
0.00000 °
PMU 1 LONGITUDE:
ô Range: -179.99999 to 180.00000 in steps of 0.00001°
0.00000 °
PMU 1 ELEVATION: Range: -9999.999 to 9999.999 in steps of 0.001
ô
0.000 m meters
PMU 1 SIGNAL SOURCE:
ô Range: available signal sources
SRC 1
PMU 1 CLASS:
ô Range: None, M-CLASS, P-CLASS
M-CLASS

N60-1601-0125-861-1 464
Chapter 9 - Settings

PMU 1 FORMAT:
ô Range: Integer, Floating-point
Integer
PMU 1 STYLE:
ô Range: Polar, Rectangular
Polar
PMU 1 RATE: Range: 1, 2, 4, 5, 10, 12, 15,20, 25, 30,50, 60, 100,
ô
10/sec 120
PMU 1 f & df/dt Range: None, 10Hz/s <10Hz, 10Hz/s <20Hz, 20Hz/s
ô
FILTER: None <10Hz, 20Hz/s <20Hz
■ C37.118 PMU 1
ô
■ CONFIGURATION
PMU 1 PHS- 1:
ô Range: available synchrophasor values
Off

PMU 1 PHS- 14:

ô Range: available synchrophasor values
Off
PMU 1 PHS- 1:
ô Range: 16-character ASCII string
NM: GE-UR-PMU-PHS 1

PMU 1 PHS- 14:

ô Range: 16-character ASCII string
NM: GE-UR-PMU-PHS 14
PMU 1 A-CH- 1:
Range: available FlexAnalog values
Off

PMU 1 A-CH-8:
ô Range: available FlexAnalog values
Off
PMU 1 A-CH- 1:
ô Range: 16-character ASCII string
NM: AnalogChannel 1

PMU 1 A-CH-8:
ô Range: 16-character ASCII string
NM: AnalogChannel 8
PMU 1 D-CH- 1:
Range: available FlexLogic operands
Off

PMU 1 D-CH-16:
ô Range: available FlexLogic operands
Off
PMU 1 D-CH- 1
ô Range: 16-character ASCII string
NM: Dig Channel 1

PMU 1 D-CH-16
ô Range: 16-character ASCII string
NM: Dig Channel 16
PMU 1 D-CH- 1
ô Range: Off, On
NORMAL STATE: Off

N60-1601-0125-861-1 465
Chapter 9 - Settings

PMU 1 D-CH-16:
ô Range: Off, On
NORMAL STATE: Off
■ 90-5 PMU 1
ñ
■ CONFIGURATION

PMU 1 FUNCTION
This setting enables the LOGICAL Device PMU 1 functionality. Use this setting to permanently enable or disable the
feature.

PMU 1 IDCODE
This setting assigns a numerical ID to the PMU. It corresponds to the IDCODE field of the data, configuration,
header, and command frames of the IEEE C37.118 protocol. The PMU uses this value when sending data,
configuration, and header frames; and it responds to this value when receiving the command frame. This is used
when only data from one PMU is present.

PMU 1 STN
This setting assigns an alphanumeric ID to the PMU station. It corresponds to the STN field of the configuration
frame of the IEEE C37.118 protocol. This value is a 16-character ASCII string as per the IEEE C37.118 standard.

PMU 1 SIGNAL SOURCE

This setting specifies one of the available L90 signal sources for processing in the PMU. Any combination of
voltages and currents can be configured as a source. The current channels can be configured as sums of physically
connected currents. This facilitates PMU applications in breaker-and-a-half, ring-bus, and similar arrangements.
The PMU feature calculates voltage phasors for actual voltage (A, B, C, and auxiliary) and current (A, B, C, and
ground) channels of the source, as well as symmetrical components (0, 1, and 2) of both voltages and currents.
When configuring communication and recording features of the PMU, the user can select, from the above superset,
the content to be sent out or recorded. When one source is selected by one PMU, it cannot be selected by another
PMU.

PMU 1 CLASS (Range P, M, None)

This setting selects the synchrophasor class. A reporting rate of 100 or 120 can only be selected for class P
synchrophasors and if the system frequency is 50 or 60 Hz, respectively.

PMU 1 NETWORK REPORTING FORMAT

This setting selects between reporting synchrophasors as 16-bit integer or 32-bit IEEE floating point numbers. This
setting complies with bit-1 of the FORMAT field of the C37.118 configuration frame. Note that this setting applies to
synchrophasors only; the user-selectable FlexAnalog channels are always transmitted as 32-bit integer values.

PMU 1 NETWORK REPORTING STYLE

This setting selects between reporting synchrophasors in rectangular (real and imaginary) or in polar (magnitude
and angle) coordinates. This setting complies with bit-0 of the FORMAT field of the C37.118 configuration frame.

PMU 1 RATE
This setting specifies the reporting rate for the network (Ethernet) port. This value applies to all PMU streams of the
device that are assigned to transmit over this aggregator. For a system frequency of 60 Hz (50 Hz), the L90
generates a reporting mismatch message if the selected rate is not set as 10 Hz, 12 Hz, 15 Hz, 20 Hz, 30 Hz, 60
Hz, or 120 Hz (or 10 Hz, 25 Hz, 50 Hz, or 100 Hz when the system frequency is 50 Hz) when entered via the
keypad or software; and the L90 stops the transmission of reports. Note that 4 Hz is not allowed for an M-class 50
Hz system.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 466
Chapter 9 - Settings

PMU 1 f & df/dt FILTER

This setting allows applying post-filtering to the frequency and rate-of-change of-frequency to avoid reporting
erroneous values, which can possibly happen during fault, switching, and other system disturbances. For example,
choosing 20Hz/s <10Hz setting ensures that if rate-of-change of-frequency between current reporting instance and
previous one exceeds 20Hz/s or frequency deviation from the nominal frequency exceeds 10Hz, then new
frequency and rate-of-change of-frequency value are invalidated. If this happens, the previous valid value of the
frequency is maintained and rate-of-change of-frequency value is forced to 0 at this reporting instance.

PMU 1 PHS-1 to PMU 1 PHS-14

These settings specify synchrophasors to be transmitted from the superset of all synchronized measurements. The
table outlines available synchrophasor values.

Selection Meaning

Va First voltage channel, either Va or Vab

Vb Second voltage channel, either Vb or Vbc
Vc Third voltage channel, either Vc or Vca
Vx Fourth voltage channel
Ia Phase A current, physical channel or summation as per the source settings
Ib Phase B current, physical channel or summation as per the source settings
Ic Phase C current, physical channel or summation as per the source settings
Ig Fourth current channel, physical or summation as per the source settings
V1 Positive-sequence voltage, referenced to Va
V2 Negative-sequence voltage, referenced to Va
V0 Zero-sequence voltage
I1 Positive-sequence current, referenced to Ia
I2 Negative-sequence current, referenced to Ia
I0 Zero-sequence current

These settings allow for optimizing the frame size and maximizing transmission channel usage, depending on a
given application. Select “Off” to suppress transmission of a given value.

PMU 1 PHS-1 NM to PMU 1 PHS-14 NM

These settings allow for custom naming of the synchrophasor channels. Sixteen-character ASCII strings are
allowed as in the CHNAM field of the configuration frame. These names are typically based on station, bus, or
breaker names.

PMU 1 A-CH-1 to PMU 1 A-CH-16

These settings specify any analog data measured by the relay to be included as a user-selectable analog channel
of the data frame. Up to eight analog channels can be configured to send any FlexAnalog value from the relay.
Examples include frequency, rate of frequency change, active and reactive power, per phase or three-phase power,
power factor, temperature via RTD inputs, and THD. The configured analog values are sampled concurrently with
the synchrophasor instant and sent as 32-bit floating-point values scaled to Engineering units.

PMU 1 A-CH-1 NM to PMU 1 A-CH-16 NM

These settings allow for custom naming of the analog channels. Sixteen-character ASCII strings are allowed as in
the CHNAM field of the configuration frame.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 467
Chapter 9 - Settings

PMU 1 D-CH-1 to PMU 1 D-CH-16

These settings specify any digital flag measured by the relay to be included as a user-selectable digital channel of
the data frame. Up to 16 digital channels can be configured to send any FlexLogic operand from the relay. The
configured digital flags are sampled concurrently with the synchrophasor instant. These values are mapped into a
two-byte integer number, with byte 1 LSB corresponding to the digital channel 1 and byte 2 MSB corresponding to
digital channel 16.

PMU 1 D-CH-1 NM to PMU 1 D-CH-16 NM

These settings allow for custom naming of the digital channels. Sixteen-character ASCII strings are allowed as in
the CHNAM field of the configuration frame.

PMU 1 D-CH-1 NORMAL STATE to PMU 1 D-CH-16 NORMAL STATE

These settings allow for specifying a normal state for each digital channel. These states are transmitted in
configuration frames to the data concentrator.

Submenu for C37.118 configuration

The basic configuration men also contains a submenu for the C37.118 configuration as follows:
Setting path: SETTINGS > SYSTEM SETUP > PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT > PHASOR MEASUREMENT
UNIT > PMU 1 BASIC CONFIGURATION > C37.118 PMU 1 CONFIGURATION
■ C37.118 PMU 1 PMU 1 FORMAT:
ó Range: Integer, Floating-point
■ CONFIGURATION Integer
PMU 1 FREQ FORMAT:
ô Range: Integer, Floating-point
Integer
PMU 1 STYLE:
ô Range: Polar, Rectangular
Polar

PMU 1 FORMAT
This setting selects whether synchrophasors are reported as 16-bit integers or 32-bit IEEE floating point numbers.
This setting complies with bit-1 of the FORMAT field of the IEEE C37.118 configuration frame. This setting applies
to synchrophasors only; user-selectable FlexAnalog channels are always transmitted as 16-bit integer values.

PMU 1 FREQ FORMAT

This setting selects between reporting frequency and rate-of-change-of-frequency as 16-bit integer or 32-bit IEEE
floating point numbers. This setting complies with bit 3 of the FORMAT field of the C37.118 configuration frame.

PMU 1 STYLE
This setting selects whether synchrophasors are reported in rectangular (real and imaginary) coordinates or in polar
(magnitude and angle) coordinates. This setting complies with bit-0 of the FORMAT field of the IEEE C37.118
configuration frame.
The basic configuration men also contains a submenu for the IEC61850-90-5 configuration as follows:
Setting path: SETTINGS > SYSTEM SETUP > PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT > PHASOR MEASUREMENT
UNIT > PMU 1 BASIC CONFIGURATION > 90-5 PMU 1 CONFIGURATION
■ 90-5 PMU 1 PMU 1 LDINST:
ó Range: 64 char ASCII text
■ CONFIGURATION PMU1

N60-1601-0125-861-1 468
Chapter 9 - Settings

PMU1 LDINST
This is a user-defined visible string (maximum 64 char ASCII test) to assign Logical Device (LD) Inst for a PMU
logical device.

Note:
With 90-5 PMU, the FORMAT and STYLE are Floating-point and Polar respectively, as specified in the IEC 61850-90-5
technical report.

Note:
As per IEC 61850-6 standard specification, the PMU LD Name is the concatenated combination (to total 64 characters) of IED
Name (specified in IEC 61850 Server Settings) appended with PMU X LDINST string.

9.5.7.2 PMU CALIBRATION

Up to six PMUs are available, depending on UR model and option choice. Only one is shown here.
Setting path: SETTINGS > SYSTEM SETUP > PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT > PHASOR MEASUREMENT
UNIT <n> PMU <n> CALIBRATION
■ PMU 1 PMU 1 VA CALIBRATION
ó Range: –5.00 to 5.00° in steps of 0.05
■ CALIBRATION ANGLE: 0.00°
PMU 1 VA CALIBRATION
ô Range: 95.0 to 105.0 in steps of 0.1%
MAG: 100.0%
PMU 1 VB CALIBRATION
ô Range: –5.00 to 5.00° in steps of 0.05
ANGLE: 0.00°
PMU 1 VB CALIBRATION
ô Range: 95.0 to 105.0 in steps of 0.1%
MAG: 100.0%
PMU 1 VC CALIBRATION
ô Range: –5.00 to 5.00° in steps of 0.05
ANGLE: 0.00°
PMU 1 VC CALIBRATION
ô Range: 95.0 to 105.0 in steps of 0.1%
MAG: 100.0%
PMU 1 VX CALIBRATION
ô Range: –5.00 to 5.00° in steps of 0.05
ANGLE: 0.00°
PMU 1 VX CALIBRATION
ô Range: 95.0 to 105.0 in steps of 0.1%
MAG: 100.0%
PMU 1 IA CALIBRATION
ô Range: –5.00 to 5.00° in steps of 0.05
ANGLE: 0.00°
PMU 1 IA CALIBRATION
ô Range: 95.0 to 105.0 in steps of 0.1%
MAG: 100.0%
PMU 1 IB CALIBRATION
ô Range: –5.00 to 5.00° in steps of 0.05
ANGLE: 0.00°
PMU 1 IB CALIBRATION
ô Range: 95.0 to 105.0 in steps of 0.1%
MAG: 100.0%
PMU 1 IC CALIBRATION
ô Range: –5.00 to 5.00° in steps of 0.05
ANGLE: 0.00°
PMU 1 IC CALIBRATION
ô Range: 95.0 to 105.0 in steps of 0.1%
MAG: 100.0%
PMU 1 IG CALIBRATION
ô Range: –5.00 to 5.00° in steps of 0.05
ANGLE: 0.00°

N60-1601-0125-861-1 469
Chapter 9 - Settings

PMU 1 IG CALIBRATION
ô Range: 95.0 to 105.0 in steps of 0.1%
MAG: 100.0%
PMU 1 SEQ VOLT SHIFT
ô Range: –180 to 180° in steps of 30
ANGLE: 0°
PMU 1 SEQ CURR SHIFT
ñ Range: –180 to 180° in steps of 30
ANGLE: 0°

This menu contains user angle and magnitude calibration data for the Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU). This data
is combined with the factory adjustments to shift the phasors for better accuracy.

PMU 1 VA... IG CALIBRATION ANGLE

These settings recognize applications with protection class voltage and current sources, and they allow you to
calibrate each channel (four voltages and four currents) individually to offset errors introduced by VTs, CTs, and
cabling. The setting values are effectively added to the measured angles. Therefore, enter a positive correction
when the secondary signal lags the true signal and a negative value when the secondary signal leads the true
signal.

PMU 1 VA... IG CALIBRATION MAGNITUDE

These settings recognize applications with protection class voltage and current sources, and they allow you to
calibrate each channel (four voltages and four currents) individually to offset errors introduced by VTs, CTs. The
setting values are effectively a multiplier of the measured magnitudes. Therefore, entering a multiplier greater than
100% of the secondary signal increases the true signal, and a multiplier less than 100% value of the secondary
signal reduces the true signal.

PMU 1 SEQ VOLT SHIFT ANGLE

This setting allows you to correct positive- and negative-sequence voltages for vector groups of power transformers
located between the PMU voltage point and the reference node. This angle is effectively added to the positive-
sequence voltage angle and subtracted from the negative-sequence voltage angle. Note that:
● When this setting is not “0°”, the phase and sequence voltages do not agree. Unlike sequence voltages, the
phase voltages cannot be corrected in a general case and therefore are reported as measured.
● When receiving synchrophasor data at multiple locations, with possibly different reference nodes, it can be
more beneficial to allow the central locations to perform the compensation of sequence voltages.
● This setting applies to PMU data only. The relay calculates symmetrical voltages independently for protection
and control purposes without applying this correction.
● When connected to line-to-line voltages, the PMU calculates symmetrical voltages with the reference to the
AG voltage and not to the physically connected AB voltage.

PMU 1 SEQ CURR SHIFT ANGLE

This setting allows you to correct positive and negative-sequence currents for vector groups of power transformers
located between the PMU current point and the reference node. The setting has the same meaning for currents as
the PMU 1 SEQ VOLT SHIFT ANGLE setting has for voltages. Normally, you would set the two correcting angles
identically, except in rare applications when the voltage and current measuring points are located at different
windings of a power transformer.

9.5.7.3 PMU TRIGGERING OVERVIEW

Setting path: SETTINGS > SYSTEM SETUP > PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT > PHASOR MEASUREMENT
UNIT 1 > PMU TRIGGERING
■ PMU 1 ■ PMU 1 USER
ó
■ TRIGGERING ■ TRIGGER

N60-1601-0125-861-1 470
Chapter 9 - Settings

■ PMU 1 FREQUENCY
ô
■ TRIGGER
■ PMU 1 VOLTAGE
ô
■ TRIGGER
■ PMU 1 CURRENT
ô
■ TRIGGER
■ PMU 1 POWER
ô
■ TRIGGER
■ PMU 1 df/dt
ñ
■ TRIGGER

Each Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU) contains five triggering mechanisms to facilitate triggering of the associated
PMU recorder, or cross-triggering of other PMUs in the system. They are
● Overfrequency and underfrequency
● Overvoltage and undervoltage
● Overcurrent
● Overpower
● High rate of change of frequency
The pre-configured triggers can be augmented with a user-specified condition built freely using programmable logic
of the relay. The entire triggering logic is refreshed once every two power system cycles. All five triggering functions
and the user-definable condition are consolidated (ORed) and connected to the PMU recorder. Each trigger can be
programmed to log its operation into the event recorder and to signal its operation via targets. The five triggers drive
the STAT bits of the data frame to inform the destination of the synchrophasor data regarding the cause of trigger.
The following convention is adopted to drive bits 11, 3, 2, 1, and 0 of the STAT word.
✖✗✘✘✙✚✛
✎✤✒✑ ✥✑☛✦✦✒✑
✜✢✢ ✣ ✄

✧★✗✩★✪✛✙✫ ✪✬✗✭✮✚✯✖ ✧★✗✩★✪✛✙✫ ✪✬✗✭✮✚✯

✌✍✎ ✏ ✰✠✱✲ ✥✠✳✴✴✱✠ ✜✠ ✡☛☞ ✸✹ ✡☛☞ ✏✏ ✌✍✎ ✏ ✥✠✳✴✴✱✠✱✟
✜✠ ✡☛☞ ✄
✌✍✎ ✏ ✠✜✞✜✰ ✥✠✳✴✴✱✠
✌✍✎ ✏ ✵✜✶✥ ✥✠✳✴✴✱✠
✜✠ ✡☛☞ ✏
✌✍✎ ✏ ✞✎✠✠ ✥✠✳✴✴✱✠ ✌✍✎ ✏ ✑✒✓✔✑✕✒✑
✌✍✎ ✏ ✌✜✷✱✠ ✥✠✳✴✴✱✠ ✡☛☞ ✆
✁✂✄✄✄✁☎✆✝✞✟✠

Figure 250: STAT bits logic

The trigger reset (drop-off) timer is available for all five triggering functions (FREQ, ROCOF, VOLT, CURR, POWER)
in individual trigger settings under the TRIGGER DPO TIME setting. This asserts individual trigger operand and
overall PMU x TRIGGERED operand with stat bits 3 and 11 for a fixed interval defined by this setting. If it is required
that PMU x TRIGGERED operand with stat bits 3 and 11 stay longer than the individual reset timer, then use the
PMU x USER TRIGGER setting assigned with appropriate elements and FlexLogic. In short, in case of USER
TRIGGER, the drop-off time needs to be implemented using FlexLogic.

9.5.7.3.1 USER TRIGGERING

Setting path: SETTINGS > SYSTEM SETUP > PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT > PHASOR MEASUREMENT
UNIT 1 > PMU TRIGGERING > PMU 1 USER TRIGGER
■ PMU 1 USER ■ PMU 1 USER TRIGGER
ó Range: FlexLogic operand
■ TRIGGER ■ Off

N60-1601-0125-861-1 471
Chapter 9 - Settings

The user trigger allows you to construct customized triggering from FlexLogic. The entire triggering logic is
refreshed every two power system cycles.

9.5.7.3.2 FREQUENCY TRIGGERING

Setting path: SETTINGS > SYSTEM SETUP > PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT > PHASOR MEASUREMENT
UNIT 1 > PMU TRIGGERING > PMU 1 TRIGGERING > PMU 1 FREQUENCY TRIGGER
■ PMU 1 FREQUENCY PMU 1 FREQ TRIGGER
ó Range: Enabled, Disabled
■ TRIGGER FUNCTION: Disabled
PMU 1 FREQ TRIGGER
ô Range: 20.00 to 70.00 Hz in steps of 0.01
LOW-FREQ: 49.00 Hz
PMU 1 FREQ TRIGGER
ô Range: 20.00 to 70.00 Hz in steps of 0.01
HIGH-FREQ: 61.00 Hz
PMU 1 FREQ TRIGGER
ô Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
PKP TIME: 0.10 s
PMU 1 FREQ TRIGGER
ô Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
DPO TIME: 1.00 s
PMU 1 FREQ TRIG BLK:
ô Range: FlexLogic operand
Off
PMU 1 FREQ TRIGGER
ô Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
TARGET: Self-reset
PMU 1 FREQ TRIGGER
ñ Range: Enabled, Disabled
EVENTS: Disabled

The trigger responds to the frequency signal of the Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU) source. The frequency is
calculated from a selection of phase voltages, auxiliary voltage, phase currents, and ground current, depending on
the source configuration. This element requires that the frequency is above the minimum measurable value. If the
frequency is below this value, the trigger drops out.

PMU 1 FREQ TRIGGER FUNCTION

This setting enables or disabled the frequency trigger function.

PMU 1 FREQ TRIGGER LOW-FREQ

This setting specifies the low threshold for the abnormal frequency trigger. The comparator applies a 0.02 Hz
hysteresis.

PMU 1 FREQ TRIGGER HIGH-FREQ

This setting specifies the high threshold for the abnormal frequency trigger. The comparator applies a 0.02 Hz
hysteresis.

PMU 1 FREQ TRIGGER PKP TIME

This setting is used to filter out spurious conditions and avoid unnecessary triggering of the recorder.

PMU 1 FREQ TRIGGER DPO TIME

This setting is used to extend the trigger after the situation returns to normal. This setting is important when using
the recorder in forced mode (recording as long as the triggering condition is asserted).

N60-1601-0125-861-1 472
Chapter 9 - Settings

✷✸✁✹✸✺✆✄✻ ✺✼✁✽✾☎✿
✝✞✟ ✠ ❀✓✢✍ ✍☛✎✏✏☞☛
✝✞✟ ✠ ✒✟☛☛ ✍☛✎✏✏☞☛
✝✞✟ ✠ ✝✓✭☞☛ ✍☛✎✏✏☞☛

✁✂✂✄☎✆ ✝✞✟ ✠ ☛✓✒✓✡ ✍☛✎✏✏☞☛ ✷✸✁✹✸✺✆✄✻ ✺✼✁✽✾☎✿

❂ ✝✞✟ ✠ ✍☛✎✏✏☞☛☞✲
✝✞✟ ✠ ✡☛☞✌ ✍☛✎✏✏☞☛ ❁
✁✂✂✄☎✆
✡✟✑✒✍✎✓✑✔
✝✞✟ ✠ ✟✦☞☛ ✍☛✎✏✏☞☛✔
☞✕✖✗✘✙✚ ✛ ✠
✓✤✤ ✛ ✥
✬
✝✞✟ ✠ ✡☛☞✌ ✍☛✎✏ ✜✢✣✔ ✫
✪
✓✤✤ ✛ ✥
✁✂✂✄☎✆
❃❄ ❅❆❇❆ ❈❉❃❊ ❄❋
✝✞✟ ✠ ✡☛☞✌ ✍☛✎✏✏☞☛ ✢✓✭✮✡☛☞✌✔ ✁✂✂✄☎✆ ✁✂✂✄☎✆ ❃●❍ ■❏❃❏ ❋❑❏▲❍
✁✂✂✄☎✆
✝✞✟ ✠ ✡☛☞✌ ✍☛✎✏✏☞☛ ✯✎✏✯✮✡☛☞✌✔ ✝✞✟ ✠ ✡☛☞✌ ✍☛✎✏✏☞☛ ✝✣✝ ✍✎✞☞✔ ✝✞✟ ✠ ✡☛☞✌ ✍☛✎✏✏☞☛ ✲✝✓ ✍✎✞☞✔
✝✞✟ ✠ ✦✎✏✑✧✢ ✷✸✁✹✸✺✆✄✻ ✺✼✁✽✾☎✿
☛✟✑
✦✓✟☛✒☞✔ ✥✰ ✤ ✰ ✢✓✭✮✡☛☞✌ ✳✵❲✵ ✥
✓☛ ✝✞✟ ✠ ✡☛☞✌ ✍☛✎✏✏☞☛
✡☛☞✌✟☞✑✒★✩ ✤ ✤ ✱ ✯✎✏✯✮✡☛☞✌ ✳✴✵✶
✥
▼◆❖PP▼◗❘❙❚❯❱

Figure 251: Frequency trigger logic

9.5.7.3.3 VOLTAGE TRIGGERING

Setting path: SETTINGS > SYSTEM SETUP > PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT > PHASOR MEASUREMENT
UNIT 1 > PMU TRIGGERING > PMU 1 TRIGGERING > PMU 1 VOLTAGE TRIGGER
■ PMU 1 VOLTAGE PMU 1 VOLT TRIGGER
ó Range: Enabled, Disabled
■ TRIGGER FUNCTION: Disabled
PMU 1 VOLT TRIGGER
ô Range: 0.250 to 1.250 pu in steps of 0.001
LOW-VOLT: 0.800 pu
PMU 1 VOLT TRIGGER
ô Range: 0.750 to 1.750 pu in steps of 0.001
HIGH-VOLT: 1.200 pu
PMU 1 VOLT TRIGGER
ô Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
PKP TIME: 0.10 s
PMU 1 VOLT TRIGGER
ô Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
DPO TIME: 1.00 s
PMU 1 VOLT TRIG BLK:
ô Range: FlexLogic operand
Off
PMU 1 VOLT TRIGGER
ô Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
TARGET: Self-reset
PMU 1 VOLT TRIGGER
ñ Range: Enabled, Disabled
EVENTS: Disabled

This element responds to abnormal voltage. Separate thresholds are provided for low and high voltage. In terms of
signaling its operation, the element does not differentiate between the undervoltage and overvoltage events. The
trigger responds to the phase voltage signal of the Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU) source. All voltage channels
(A, B, and C or AB, BC, and CA) are processed independently and can trigger the recorder. A minimum voltage
supervision of 0.1 pu is implemented to prevent pickup on a de-energized circuit, similarly to the undervoltage
protection element.

PMU 1 VOLT TRIGGER FUNCTION

This setting enables or disabled the voltage trigger function.

PMU 1 VOLT TRIGGER LOW-VOLT

This setting specifies the low threshold for the abnormal voltage trigger, in per-unit of the PMU source. 1 pu is a
nominal voltage value defined as the nominal secondary voltage times VT ratio. The comparator applies a 1%
hysteresis.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 473
Chapter 9 - Settings

PMU 1 VOLT TRIGGER HIGH-VOLT

This setting specifies the high threshold for the abnormal voltage trigger, in per-unit of the PMU source. 1 pu is a
nominal voltage value defined as the nominal secondary voltage times VT ratio. The comparator applies a 1%
hysteresis.

PMU 1 VOLT TRIGGER PKP TIME

This setting is used to filter out spurious conditions and avoid unnecessary triggering of the recorder.

PMU 1 VOLT TRIGGER DPO TIME

This setting is used to extend the trigger after the situation returns to normal. This setting is important when using
the recorder in the forced mode (recording as long as the triggering condition is asserted).
✾✿☞❀✿❁✏✍❂ ❁❃☞❄❅✎❆☛
☛☞✌✌✍✎✏☛
✑✒✓ ✔ ✢✙✜❇ ✘✙✚✛✛✜✙
✑✒✓ ✔ ✕✖✗✘ ✘✙✚✛✛✜✙ ✑✒✓ ✔ ✤✓✙✙ ✘✙✚✛✛✜✙
✢✓✣✤✘✚✖✣✥
✑✒✓ ✔ ✑✖✶✜✙ ✘✙✚✛✛✜✙
✜✦✧★✩✪✫ ✬ ✔
✵ ✑✒✓ ✔ ✙✖✤✖✢ ✘✙✚✛✛✜✙ ✾✿☞❀✿❁✏✍❂ ❁❃☞❄❅✎❆
✑✒✓ ✔ ✕✖✗✘ ✘✙✚✛ ✭✗✮✥ ✴ ❉
✳ ❈ ✑✒✓ ✔ ✘✙✚✛✛✜✙✜✹
✖✯✯ ✬ ✰ ☛☞✌✌✍✎✏

☛☞✌✌✍✎✏☛ ✑✒✓ ✔ ✓✱✜✙ ✘✙✚✛✛✜✙✥

☛☞✌✌✍✎✏☛ ✑✒✓ ✔ ✕✖✗✘ ✘✙✚✛✛✜✙ ✗✖✶✷✕✖✗✘✥ ✖✯✯ ✬ ✰

✑✒✓ ✔ ✱✚✛✣✲✗ ✑✒✓ ✔ ✕✖✗✘ ✘✙✚✛✛✜✙ ✸✚✛✸✷✕✖✗✘✥

✱✖✓✙✤✜✥
✙✓✣
✕✘ ✤✖✣✣✜✤✘✚✖✣✥ ✐❥❦❦❧♠♥✐ ☛☞✌✌✍✎✏☛ ▼◆ ❖P◗P ❘❙▼❚ ◆❯
❋✰●✔❍■ ❏ ✕ ❏ ✗✖✶✷✕✖✗✘❑ ✖✙ ▼❱❲ ❳❨▼❨ ❯❩❨❬❲
✶❊✜ ✹✜✗✘✲ ❋✕ ▲ ✸✚✛✸✷✕✖✗✘❑ ❭❪❫ ❴ ❵❛❜❝ ❞❛❡❢❢❜❛ ❭❣❭ ❞❡❪❜❤ ✑✒✓ ✔ ✕✖✗✘ ✘✙✚✛✛✜✙ ✹✑✖ ✘✚✒✜✥
✕✲ ✕✲✭ ❋✰●✔❍■ ❏ ✕ ❏ ✗✖✶✷✕✖✗✘❑ ✖✙ ✾✿☞❀✿❁✏✍❂ ❁❃☞❄❅✎❆
❉ q♦♣♦ r
❋✕ ▲ ✸✚✛✸✷✕✖✗✘❑ ❈
✕✭ ✕✭✤ ✑✒✓ ✔ ✕✖✗✘ ✘✙✚✛✛✜✙
❋✰●✔❍■ ❏ ✕ ❏ ✗✖✶✷✕✖✗✘❑ ✖✙
✕✤ ✕✤✲ ❋✕ ▲ ✸✚✛✸✷✕✖✗✘❑ r ✺✻✼✽
✁✂✄✄☎✆✝✞✟✠✡

Figure 252: Voltage trigger logic

9.5.7.3.4 CURRENT TRIGGERING

Setting path: SETTINGS > SYSTEM SETUP > PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT > PHASOR MEASUREMENT
UNIT 1 > PMU TRIGGERING > PMU 1 TRIGGERING > PMU 1 CURRENT TRIGGER
■ PMU 1 CURRENT PMU 1 CURR TRIGGER
ó Range: Enabled, Disabled
■ TRIGGER FUNCTION: Disabled
PMU 1 CURR TRIGGER
ô Range: 0.100 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001
PICKUP: 1.800 pu
PMU 1 CURR TRIGGER
ô Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
PKP TIME: 0.10 s
PMU 1 CURR TRIGGER
ô Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
DPO TIME: 1.00 s
PMU 1 CURR TRIG BLK:
ô Range: FlexLogic operand
Off
PMU 1 CURR TRIGGER
ô Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
TARGET: Self-reset
PMU 1 CURR TRIGGER
ñ Range: Enabled, Disabled
EVENTS: Disabled

This element responds to elevated current. The trigger responds to the phase current signal of the Phasor
Measurement Unit (PMU) source. All current channel (A, B, and C) are processed independently and can trigger the
recorder.

PMU 1 CURR TRIGGER FUNCTION

This setting enables or disabled the current trigger function.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 474
Chapter 9 - Settings

PMU 1 CURR TRIGGER PICKUP

This setting specifies the pickup threshold for the overcurrent trigger, in per unit of the PMU source. A value of 1 pu
is a nominal primary current. The comparator applies a 3% hysteresis.

PMU 1 CURR TRIGGER PKP TIME

This setting is used to filter out spurious conditions and avoid unnecessary triggering of the recorder.

PMU 1 CURR TRIGGER DPO TIME

This setting is used to extend the trigger after the situation returns to normal. This setting is important when using
the recorder in the forced mode (recording as long as the triggering condition is asserted).

9.5.7.3.5 POWER TRIGGERING

Setting path: SETTINGS > SYSTEM SETUP > PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT > PHASOR MEASUREMENT
UNIT 1 > PMU TRIGGERING > PMU 1 TRIGGERING > PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER
■ PMU 1 POWER PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER
ó Range: Enabled, Disabled
■ TRIGGER FUNCTION: Disabled
PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER
ô Range: 0.250 to 3.000 pu in steps of 0.001
ACTIVE: 1.250 pu
PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER
ô Range: 0.250 to 3.000 pu in steps of 0.001
REACTIVE: 1.250 pu
PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER
ô Range: 0.250 to 3.000 pu in steps of 0.001
APPARENT: 1.250 pu
PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER
ô Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
PKP TIME: 0.10 s
PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER
ô Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
DPO TIME: 1.00 s
PMU 1 PWR TRIG BLK:
ô Range: FlexLogic operand
Off
PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER
ô Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
TARGET: Self-reset
PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER
ñ Range: Enabled, Disabled
EVENTS: Disabled

This element responds to abnormal power. Separate thresholds are provided for active, reactive, and apparent
powers. In terms of signaling its operation, the element does not differentiate among the three types of power. The
trigger responds to the single-phase and three-phase power signals of the Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU)
source.

PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER FUNCTION

This setting enables or disabled the power trigger function.

PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER ACTIVE

This setting specifies the pickup threshold for the active power of the source. For single-phase power, 1 pu is a
product of 1 pu voltage and 1 pu current, or the product of nominal secondary voltage, the VT ratio and the nominal
primary current. For the three-phase power, 1 pu is three times that for a single-phase power. The comparator
applies a 3% hysteresis.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 475
Chapter 9 - Settings

PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER REACTIVE

This setting specifies the pickup threshold for the reactive power of the source. For single-phase power, 1 pu is a
product of 1 pu voltage and 1 pu current, or the product of nominal secondary voltage, the VT ratio and the nominal
primary current. For the three-phase power, 1 pu is three times that for a single-phase power. The comparator
applies a 3% hysteresis.

PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER APPARENT

This setting specifies the pickup threshold for the apparent power of the source. For single-phase power, 1 pu is a
product of 1 pu voltage and 1 pu current, or the product of nominal secondary voltage, the VT ratio and the nominal
primary current. For the three-phase power, 1 pu is three times that for a single-phase power. The comparator
applies a 3% hysteresis.

PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER PKP TIME

This setting is used to filter out spurious conditions and avoid unnecessary triggering of the recorder.

PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER DPO TIME

This setting is used to extend the trigger after the situation returns to normal. This setting is of particular importance
when using the recorder in the forced mode (recording as long as the triggering condition is asserted).
✡☛☞☞✌✍✎✡

✏✑✒ ✓ ✏✔✕✖✗
✘✗✙✚✚✖✗ ✛✒✜✢✘✙✔✜✣ ✺✻☛✼✻✽✎✌✾ ✽✿☛❀❁✍❂✡
✖✤✥✦✧★✩ ✪ ✓ ✏✑✒ ✓ ✛✗✖❃ ✘✗✙✚✚✖✗
✲
✏✑✒ ✓ ✏✕✗ ✘✗✙✚ ✫✬✭✣ ✱ ✏✑✒ ✓ ✴✔✬✘ ✘✗✙✚✚✖✗
✰ ✡☛☞☞✌✍✎✡
✔✮✮ ✪ ✯ ✏✑✒ ✓ ✢✒✗✗ ✘✗✙✚✚✖✗
✏✑✒ ✓ ✏✔✕✖✗ ✘✗✙✚✚✖✗ ✳✢✘✙✴✖✣
✏✑✒ ✓ ✗✔✢✔✛ ✘✗✙✚✚✖✗ ✺✻☛✼✻✽✎✌✾ ✽✿☛❀❁✍❂
✏✑✒ ✓ ✏✔✕✖✗ ✘✗✙✚✚✖✗ ✗✖✳✢✘✙✴✖✣
❆ ✏✑✒ ✓ ✘✗✙✚✚✖✗✖✵
❅
✏✑✒ ✓ ✏✔✕✖✗ ✘✗✙✚✚✖✗ ✳✏✏✳✗✖✜✘✣ ✡☛☞☞✌✍✎
✡☛☞☞✌✍✎✡
✗✒✜ ✏✑✒ ✓ ✒❄✖✗ ✘✗✙✚✚✖✗✣
✏✑✒ ✓ ❄✙✚✜✳✬ ❄✔✒✗✢✖✣
✔✮✮ ✪ ✯
✳✢✘✙✴✖ ✏✔✕✖✗❍ ✏✳ ✥✦❇❈✏❉ ❊ ✳✢✘✙✴✖ ✏✙✢✭✒✏
✳✢✘✙✴✖ ✏✔✕✖✗❍ ✏✫ ✥✦❇❈✏❉ ❊ ✳✢✘✙✴✖ ✏✙✢✭✒✏
✳✢✘✙✴✖ ✏✔✕✖✗❍ ✏✢ ✥✦❇❈✏❉ ❊ ✳✢✘✙✴✖ ✏✙✢✭✒✏ ■❏ ❑▲▼▲ ◆❖■P ❏◗
❳❨❩❩❬❭❪❳ ✡☛☞☞✌✍✎✡ ■❘❙ ❚❯■❯ ◗❱❯❲❙
❋✏ ✳✢✘✙✴✖ ✏✔✕✖✗❍ ✏ ✥✦❇❈✏❉ ❊ ❋●❈✳✢✘✙✴✖ ✏✙✢✭✒✏❉
✏✑✒ ✓ ✏✔✕✖✗ ✘✗✙✚✚✖✗ ✏✭✏ ✘✙✑✖✣ ✏✑✒ ✓ ✏✔✕✖✗ ✘✗✙✚✚✖✗ ✵✏✔ ✘✙✑✖✣
✗✖✳✢✘✙✴✖ ✏✔✕✖✗❍ ❃✳ ✥✦❇❈❃❉ ❊ ✗✖✳✢✘✙✴✖ ✏✙✢✭✒✏
✺✻☛✼✻✽✎✌✾ ✽✿☛❀❁✍❂
✗✖✳✢✘✙✴✖ ✏✔✕✖✗❍ ❃✫ ✥✦❇❈❃❉ ❊ ✗✖✳✢✘✙✴✖ ✏✙✢✭✒✏ ❵❫❴❫ ❛
❆ ✏✑✒ ✓ ✏✔✕✖✗ ✘✗✙✚✚✖✗
❅
✗✖✳✢✘✙✴✖ ✏✔✕✖✗❍ ❃✢ ✥✦❇❈❃❉ ❊ ✗✖✳✢✘✙✴✖ ✏✙✢✭✒✏
❛ ✶✷✸✹
❋✏ ✗✖✳✢✘✙✴✖ ✏✔✕✖✗❍ ❃ ✥✦❇❈❃❉ ❊ ❋●❈✗✖✳✢✘✙✴✖ ✏✙✢✭✒✏❉
✳✏✏✳✗✖✜✘ ✏✔✕✖✗❍ ❄✳ ❄ ❊ ✳✏✏✳✗✖✜✘ ✏✙✢✭✒✏
✳✏✏✳✗✖✜✘ ✏✔✕✖✗❍ ❄✫ ❄ ❊ ✳✏✏✳✗✖✜✘ ✏✙✢✭✒✏
✳✏✏✳✗✖✜✘ ✏✔✕✖✗❍ ❄✢ ❄ ❊ ✳✏✏✳✗✖✜✘ ✏✙✢✭✒✏
❋✏ ✳✏✏✳✗✖✜✘ ✏✔✕✖✗❍ ❄ ❄ ❊ ❋●❈✳✏✏✳✗✖✜✘ ✏✙✢✭✒✏❉
✁✂✄☎☎✆☎✝✞✟✠

Figure 253: Power trigger logic

9.5.7.3.6 RATE OF CHANGE OF FREQUENCY TRIGGERING

Setting path: SETTINGS > SYSTEM SETUP > PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT > PHASOR MEASUREMENT
UNIT 1 > PMU TRIGGERING > PMU 1 TRIGGERING > PMU 1 df/dt TRIGGER
■ PMU 1 df/dt PMU 1 df/dt TRIGGER
ó Range: Enabled, Disabled
■ TRIGGER FUNCTION: Disabled
PMU 1 df/dt TRIGGER
ô Range: 0.10 to 15.00 Hz/s in steps of 0.01
RAISE: 0.25 Hz/s
PMU 1 df/dt TRIGGER
ô Range: 0.10 to 15.00 Hz/s in steps of 0.01
FALL: 0.25 Hz/s
PMU 1 df/dt TRIGGER
ô Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
PKP TIME: 0.10 s
PMU 1 df/dt TRIGGER
ô Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
DPO TIME: 1.00 s
PMU 1 df/dt TRG BLK:
ô Range: FlexLogic operand
Off

N60-1601-0125-861-1 476
Chapter 9 - Settings

PMU 1 df/dt TRIGGER

ô Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
TARGET: Self-reset
PMU 1 df/dt TRIGGER
ñ Range: Enabled, Disabled
EVENTS: Disabled

This element responds to frequency rate of change. Separate thresholds are provided for rising and dropping
frequency. The trigger responds to the rate of change of frequency (df/dt) of the Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU)
source.

PMU 1 df/dt TRIGGER FUNCTION

This setting enables or disabled the power trigger function.
PMU 1 df/dt TRIGGER RAISE
This setting specifies the pickup threshold for the rate of change of frequency in the raising direction (positive df/dt).
The comparator applies a 4% hysteresis.
PMU 1 df/dt TRIGGER FALL
This setting specifies the pickup threshold for the rate of change of frequency in the falling direction (negative df/dt).
The comparator applies a 4% hysteresis.
PMU 1 df/dt TRIGGER PKP TIME
This setting is used to filter out spurious conditions and avoid unnecessary triggering of the recorder.
PMU 1 df/dt TRIGGER DPO TIME
This setting is used to extend the trigger after the situation returns to normal. This setting is of importance when
using the recorder in the forced mode (recording as long as the triggering condition is asserted).

✤✥ ❳✥✦✄✁✧ ✦★ ✩✪✂✫❙
P☎✆ ✶ ❋✡✌✭ ✠✡☛☞☞✌✡
P☎✆ ✶ ❱✏✖✠ ✠✡☛☞☞✌✡
P☎✆ ✶ ✎✆✡✡ ✠✡☛☞☞✌✡
❙ ❚❚✁✂✄❙ P☎✆ ✶ P✏✬✌✡ ✠✡☛☞☞✌✡ ✤✥ ❳✥✦✄✁✧ ✦★ ✩✪✂✫
✯ P☎✆ ✶ ✠✡☛☞☞✌✡✌❉
P☎✆ ✶ ❞✝✞❞✟ ✠✡☛☞☞✌✡ ✮
❙ ❚❚✁✂✄
❋✆✍✎✠☛✏✍✑
P☎✆ ✶ ✆✘✌✡ ✠✡☛☞☞✌✡✑
✌❊✒✓✔✕❞ ❂ ✶
✏✝✝ ❂ ❢
✛
P☎✆ ✶ ❞✝✞❞✟ ✠✡☞ ❇✖✗✑ ✚
❆
✏✝✝ ❂ ❢
❙ ❚❚✁✂✄❙ ❙ ❚❚✁✂✄❙
t♦ ✰✲✳✲ ❜✴ts ♦✵
P☎✆ ✶ ❞✝✞❞✟ ✠✡☛☞☞✌✡ ✡✙☛✘✌✑ P☎✆ ✶ ❞✝✞❞✟ ✠✡☛☞☞✌✡ P✗P ✠☛☎✌✑ t✷✸ ✹✺t✺ ✵✻✺✼✸
❙ ❚❚✁✂✄
P☎✆ ✶ ❞✝✞❞✟ ✠✡☛☞☞✌✡ ❋✙✖✖✑ P☎✆ ✶ ❞✝✞❞✟ ✠✡☛☞☞✌✡ ❉P✏ ✠☛☎✌✑
P☎✆ ✶ ✘☛☞✍✙✖ ✤✥ ❳✥✦✄✁✧ ✦★ ✩✪✂✫
✡✆✍
✘✏✆✡✎✌✑ ❞✝✞❞✟ ❃ ✡✙☛✘✌ ✟✜✢✜
✏✡ P☎✆ ✶ ✡✏✎✏❋ ✠✡☛☞☞✌✡
✡✏✎✏❋✱ ❞✝✞❞✟ ➊❞✝✞❞✟ ❃ ❋✙✖✖ ✟✣✜❖
✽✾✿❀❀❀❁❄❅❈●❍

Figure 254: Rate of Change of frequency trigger logic

9.5.7.4 PMU RECORDING

Setting path: SETTINGS > SYSTEM SETUP > PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT > PHASOR MEASUREMENT
UNIT 1 > PMU TRIGGERING > PMU 1 RECORDING
■ PMU 1 PMU 1 FUNCTION:
ó Range: Enabled, Disabled
■ RECORDING Disabled
PMU 1 NO OF TIMED
ô Range: 2 to 128 in steps of 1
RECORDS: 10

N60-1601-0125-861-1 477
Chapter 9 - Settings

PMU 1 TRIGGER MODE:

ô Range: Automatic Overwrite, Protected
Automatic Overwrite
PMU 1 TIMED TRIGGER
ñ Range: 1 to 50% in steps of 1
POSITION: 10%
The length of the PMU record is variable. It depends on some settings and configuration, such as PMU 1 NO OF
TIMED RECORDS, PMU 1 RATE, the number of Synchrophasors etc. There is a fixed amount of data storage for
PMU recording. The more records captured, the less the recording length captured per record. See the ACTUAL
VALUES > RECORDS > PMU RECORDS > PMU 1 RECORDING menu to view the actual PMU record length
captured per record. The following table provides sample configurations with corresponding seconds per record.
The minimum number of PMU records is two. The third to fifth columns is the number of configured values recorded
in each record.

Records Frames per sec. Synchrophasors Analogs Digitals Record length

3 30 14 8 16 590.4
16 30 14 8 16 138.9
32 30 14 8 16 71.5
64 30 14 8 16 36.3
3 60 14 8 16 295.2
16 60 14 8 16 69.4
32 60 14 8 16 35.7
64 60 14 8 16 18.1

PMU 1 FUNCTION
This setting enables or disables the recorder for PMU 1. The rate is fixed at the reporting rate set within the
aggregator.

PMU 1 NO OF TIMED RECORDS

This setting specifies the number of timed records that are available for a given logical PMU 1. The length of each
record is equal to the available memory divided by the content size and number of records. As the number of
records is increased, the available storage for each record is reduced. The relay supports a maximum of 128
records in either timed or forced mode.

PMU 1 TRIGGER MODE

This setting specifies what happens when the recorder uses its entire available memory storage. With Automatic
Overwrite, the last record is erased to facilitate new recording, when triggered. Under the “Protected” selection,
the recorder stops creating new records when the entire memory is used up by the old uncleared records.

PMU 1 TIMED TRIGGER POSITION

This setting specifies the amount of pre-trigger data as a percent of the entire record. This setting applies only to the
timed mode of recording.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 478
Chapter 9 - Settings

9.6 FLEXLOGIC SETTINGS

9.6.1 FLEXLOGIC EQUATION EDITOR

SETTINGS > FLEXLOGIC > FLEXLOGIC EQUATION EDITOR
■ FLEXLOGIC FLEXLOGIC ENTRY 1
■ EQUATION EDITOR ó END Range: FlexLogic operands

FLEXLOGIC ENTRY 1024

ñ Range: FlexLogic operands
END1

There are 1,024 FlexLogic entries available, numbered from 1 to 1024, with default END entry settings. If a
Disabled element is selected as a FlexLogic entry, the associated state flag is never set to 1. Press the +/– key
when editing FlexLogic equations to quickly scan through the major parameter types.
There are two ways to create, edit and maintain the FlexLogic equations:
1. Using the FlexLogic Equation Editor available at FlexLogic > FlexLogic Equation Editor
2. Using the Logic Designer available at Engineer > Logic Designer

Note:
EnerVista Engineer is only available through the offline window of the EnerVista UR Setup.

Note:
FlexLogic Equation Editor and Logic Designer are designed to be mutually exclusive as using them interchangeably to create,
edit and maintain the FlexLogic equations may cause inconsistencies in the resulting equations. We recommend using only
one of the two methods throughout the process.

9.6.2 FLEXLOGIC TIMERS

SETTINGS > FLEXLOGIC > FLEXLOGIC TIMERS > FLEXLOGIC TIMER <n>

Note:
Only FLEXLOGIC TIMER 1 is shown

■ FLEXLOGIC TIMER 1
■ TIMER 1 ó TYPE: millisecond Range: millisecond, second, minute

TIMER 1 PICKUP
ô Range: 0 to 60000 in steps of 1
DELAY: 0
TIMER 1 DROPOUT
ñ Range: 0 to 60000 in steps of 1
DELAY: 0

There are a number of identical FlexLogic timers available. These timers are used as operators for FlexLogic
equations.

TIMER 1 TYPE
Selects the time measurement unit.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 479
Chapter 9 - Settings

TIMER 1 PICKUP DELAY

Sets the time delay to pickup. If a pickup delay is not required, set this function to 0.

TIMER 1 DROPOUT DELAY

Sets the time delay to dropout. If a dropout delay is not required, set this function to 0.

9.6.3 FLEXELEMENTS
SETTINGS > FLEXLOGIC > FLEXELEMENTS > FLEXELEMENT <n>

Note:
Only FLEXELEMENT 1 is shown

■ FLEXELEMENT 1 FLEXELEMENT 1
■ ó FUNCTION: Disabled Range: Disabled, Enabled

FLEXELEMENT 1 NAME:
ô Range: up to six alphanumeric characters
FxE 1
FLEXELEMENT 1 +IN:
ô Range: Off, any analog actual value parameter
Off
FLEXELEMENT 1 -IN:
ô Range: Off, any analog actual value parameter
Off
FLEXELEMENT 1 INPUT
ô Range: SIGNED, ABSOLUTE
MODE: SIGNED
FLEXELEMENT 1 COMP
ô Range: LEVEL, DELTA
MODE: LEVEL
FLEXELEMENT 1
ô Range: OVER, UNDER
DIRECTION: OVER
FLEXELEMENT 1
ô Range: –90.000 to 90.000 pu in steps of 0.001
PICKUP: 1.000 pu
FLEXELEMENT 1
Range: 0.1 to 50.0% in steps of 0.1
HYSTERESIS: 3.0%
FLEXELEMENT 1 dt
Range: Milliseconds, Seconds, Minutes
UNIT: Milliseconds
FLEXELEMENT 1 dt:
Range: 20 to 86400 in steps of 1
20
FLEXELEMENT 1 PKP
Range: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001
DELAY: 0.000 s
FLEXELEMENT 1 RST
Range: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001
DELAY: 0.000 s
FLEXELEMENT 1 BLK:
Range: FlexLogic operand
Off
FLEXELEMENT 1
Range: Self-reset, Disabled, Latched
TARGET: Self-reset
FLEXELEMENT 1
ñ Range: Disabled, Enabled
EVENTS: Disabled

N60-1601-0125-861-1 480
Chapter 9 - Settings

A FlexElement is a universal comparator used to monitor any analog actual value calculated by the relay or a net
difference of any two analog actual values of the same type. The effective operating signal can be treated as a
signed number or its absolute value can be used.
FlexElements run every half power cycle (every four protection passes).
The element can be programmed to respond either to a signal level or to a rate-of-change (delta) over a pre-defined
period of time. The output operand is asserted when the operating signal is higher than a threshold or lower than a
threshold, as per your choice.

☞✌✍✍✎✏✑
☞✌✍✍✎✏✑
✁✂✄✂✁✂☎✂✆✝ ✞
✟✆✠✝✡☛✆ ✁✂✄✂✁✂☎✂✆✝ ✞ ✡✆✙✟✝
☎☛✚✂
✂✒✓✔✕✖✗ ✘ ✞ ✁✂✄✂✁✂☎✂✆✝ ✞ ✠☛☎✙
☎☛✚✂
✁✂✄✂✁✂☎✂✆✝ ✞
✚✡✛✂✠✝✡☛✆
☞✌✍✍✎✏✑
✁✂✄✂✁✂☎✂✆✝ ✞ ✙✡✠✜✟✙
✁✂✄✂✁✂☎✂✆✝ ✞ ✼✁✜ ✁✂✄✂✁✂☎✂✆✝ ✞ ✡✆✙✟✝
✤✆✚ ❆❅✷✝✂✛✂✷✡✷
☛✽✽ ✘ ✾
✁✂✄✂✁✂☎✂✆✝ ✞ ✗✢ ✟✆✡✝ ☞✌✍✍✎✏✑
☞✌✍✍✎✏✑ ✁✂✄✂✁✂☎✂✆✝ ✞ ✙✜✙
✁✂✄✂✁✂☎✂✆✝ ✞ ✗✢ ✚✂✁✤❅
✁✂✄✂✁✂☎✂✆✝ ✞ ✣✡✆ ✁✂✄✂✁✂☎✂✆✝ ✞ ✛✷✝
✛✟✆ ✚✂✁✤❅
✤✥✢✦✓✕ ✧✓✕✦✖ ★✩✌✪✩✫✑✎✬ ✫✭✌✮✯✏✰
✳ ✿❀❁❀
✁✂✄✂✁✂☎✂✆✝ ✞ ✲✡✆ ✱✂ ✞ ☛✙
✴ ✿❂❃❄
✤✥✢✦✓✕ ✧✓✕✦✖ ✱✂ ✞ ✚✙☛
✱✂ ✞ ✙✜✙

✯✬✍✺✯✩ ✻✯✩✺✌
✕✖✱✂✕✖✵✖✒✢ ✞ ☛✶✷✸✹
❇❈❉❊❊❈❋❈●❍■❏

Figure 255: FlexElement logic

FLEXELEMENT 1 +IN
This setting specifies the first (non-inverted) input to the FlexElement. Zero is assumed as the input if this setting is
set to Off. For proper operation of the element, at least one input must be selected. Otherwise, the element does
not assert its output operands.

Note:
Filter the InputPlus or InputMinus field in the software by double-clicking it, then entering a value.

FLEXELEMENT 1 –IN
Specifies the second (inverted) input to the FlexElement. Zero is assumed as the input if this setting is set to Off.
For proper operation of the element, at least one input must be selected. Otherwise, the element does not assert its
output operands. This input is used to invert the signal if needed for convenience, or to make the element respond
to a differential signal, such as for a top-bottom oil temperature differential alarm. The element does not operate if
the two input signals are of different types, for example if one tries to use active power and phase angle to build the
effective operating signal.
The element responds directly to the differential signal if the FLEXELEMENT 1 INPUT MODE setting is set to
Signed The element responds to the absolute value of the differential signal if this setting is set to Absolute.
Sample applications for the Absolute setting include monitoring the angular difference between two phasors with
a symmetrical limit angle in both directions, monitoring power regardless of its direction, or monitoring a trend.
The element responds directly to its operating signal—as defined by the FLEXELEMENT 1 +IN, FLEXELEMENT 1
–IN and FLEXELEMENT 1 INPUT MODE settings—if the FLEXELEMENT 1 COMP MODE setting is set to Level.
The element responds to the rate of change of its operating signal if the FLEXELEMENT 1 COMP MODE setting is

N60-1601-0125-861-1 481
Chapter 9 - Settings

set to Delta. In this case, the FLEXELEMENT 1 dt UNIT and FLEXELEMENT 1 dt settings specify how the rate of
change is derived.

FLEXELEMENT 1 DIRECTION
Enables the relay to respond to either high or low values of the operating signal. The following figure explains the
application of the FLEXELEMENT 1 DIRECTION, FLEXELEMENT 1 PICKUP, and FLEXELEMENT 1
HYSTERESIS settings.

✍☎✎☎✍☎✏☎✑✒ ✟ ✓✔✓

✕✖✗✘✗✖✗✙✗✚✛
✜✢✣✗✤✛✢✥✚ ✦ ✥✧★✩
✯✰✠✒☎✱☎✠✲✠ ✳ ✴ ✵✶ ✓✲✷✔✸✓

✪ ✁✂✄☎✁✂✆✂✝✞ ✟ ✠✡☛☞✌
✮
✭
✫✬
✪

✍☎✎☎✍☎✏☎✑✒ ✟ ✓✔✓

✕✖✗✘✗✖✗✙✗✚✛
✜✢✣✗✤✛✢✥✚ ✦ ✹✺✻★✩
✯✰✠✒☎✱☎✠✲✠ ✳ ✴ ✵✶ ✓✲✷✔✸✓

✪ ✁✂✄☎✁✂✆✂✝✞ ✟ ✠✡☛☞✌
✮
✭
✫✬
✪ ✼✽✾✿❀❁❂✾❃❄❅❆
Figure 256: FlexElement direction, pickup, and hysteresis

In conjunction with the FLEXELEMENT 1 INPUT MODE setting, the element can be programmed to provide two
extra characteristics, as shown in the following figure.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 482
Chapter 9 - Settings

☛✙✎✚✎✙✎✛✎✜✢ ✓ ✣✤✣

✥✦✧★✧✦✧✩✧✪✫
✬✭✮✧✯✫✭✰✪ ✱ ✰✲✳✴✵
✥✦✧★✧✦✧✩✧✪✫ ✭✪✶✷✫
✩✰✬✧ ✱ ✸✹✺✻✳✼✵

☛☞✌✍✎☞✌✏✌✑✒ ✓ ✔✕✖✗✘

☛✙✎✚✎✙✎✛✎✜✢ ✓ ✣✤✣

✥✦✧★✧✦✧✩✧✪✫
✬✭✮✧✯✫✭✰✪ ✱ ✰✲✳✴✵
✥✦✧★✧✦✧✩✧✪✫ ✭✪✶✷✫
✩✰✬✧ ✱ ✽✾✿❀❁❂❃✳✵

☛☞✌✍✎☞✌✏✌✑✒ ✓ ✔✕✖✗✘

☛✙✎✚✎✙✎✛✎✜✢ ✓ ✣✤✣

✥✦✧★✧✦✧✩✧✪✫
✬✭✮✧✯✫✭✰✪ ✱ ✷✻✼✳✴✵
✥✦✧★✧✦✧✩✧✪✫ ✭✪✶✷✫
✩✰✬✧ ✱ ✸✹✺✻✳✼✵

☛☞✌✍✎☞✌✏✌✑✒ ✓ ✔✕✖✗✘

☛✙✎✚✎✙✎✛✎✜✢ ✓ ✣✤✣

✥✦✧★✧✦✧✩✧✪✫
✬✭✮✧✯✫✭✰✪ ✱ ✷✻✼✳✴✵
✥✦✧★✧✦✧✩✧✪✫ ✭✪✶✷✫
✩✰✬✧ ✱ ✽✾✿❀❁❂❃✳✵

☛☞✌✍✎☞✌✏✌✑✒ ✓ ✔✕✖✗✘

✁✂✄☎✆✝✂✞✟✠✡

Figure 257: FlexElement input mode setting

FLEXELEMENT 1 PICKUP
This setting specifies the operating threshold for the effective operating signal of the element. If set to Over, the
element picks up when the operating signal exceeds the FLEXELEMENT 1 PICKUP value. If set to Under, the
element picks up when the operating signal falls below the FLEXELEMENT 1 PICKUP value.
When using FlexElements for Voltage Elements, 1 pu is always equal to phase to ground voltage nominal
secondary voltage, even if you select a phase to phase voltage as an operating quantity. The FLEXELEMENT 1
PICKUP setting is entered in per-unit values using the definitions of the base units, as described later.

FLEXELEMENT 1 HYSTERESIS
This setting controls the element dropout. Notice that both the operating signal and the pickup threshold can be
negative, facilitating applications such as reverse power alarm protection. The FlexElement can be programmed to
work with all analog actual values measured by the relay. This setting defines the pickup–dropout relation of the
element by specifying the width of the hysteresis loop as a percentage of the pickup value as shown in the
FlexElement Direction, Pickup, and Hysteresis diagram.

FLEXELEMENT 1 dt UNIT
Specifies the time unit for the setting FLEXELEMENT 1 dt. This setting is applicable only if FLEXELEMENT 1
COMP MODE is set to Delta.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 483
Chapter 9 - Settings

FLEXELEMENT 1 dt
Specifies duration of the time interval for the rate of change mode of operation. This setting is applicable only if
FLEXELEMENT 1 COMP MODE is set to Delta.

FLEXELEMENT 1 PKP DELAY

Specifies the pickup delay of the element.

FLEXELEMENT 1 RST DELAY

Specifies the reset delay of the element.

Note:
The Bus Differential FlexAnalog parameters applied in the settings FLEXELEMENT 1 +IN and FLEXELEMENT 1 -IN must be
from the same zone.

9.6.4 NON-VOLATILE LATCHES

SETTINGS > FLEXLOGIC > NON-VOLATILE LATCHES > LATCH <n>

Note:
Only Latch 1 is shown

■ LATCH 1 LATCH 1
■ ó FUNCTION: Disabled Range: Disabled, Enabled

LATCH 1 ID:
ô Range: up to 20 alphanumeric characters
NV Latch 1
LATCH 1 TYPE:
ô Range: Reset Dominant, Set Dominant
Reset Dominant
LATCH 1 SET:
ô Range: FlexLogic operand
Off
LATCH 1 RESET:
ô Range: FlexLogic operand
Off
LATCH 1
ô Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
TARGET: Self-reset
LATCH 1
ñ Range: Disabled, Enabled
EVENTS: Disabled

The non-volatile latches provide a permanent logical flag that is stored safely and do not reset upon restart after the
relay is powered down. Typical applications include sustaining operator commands or permanently blocking relay
functions, such as Autorecloser, until a deliberate interface action resets the latch.

LATCH 1 TYPE
This setting characterizes Latch 1 to be Set- or Reset-dominant.

LATCH 1 SET
If asserted, the specified FlexLogic operands sets Latch 1.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 484
Chapter 9 - Settings

LATCH 1 RESET
If asserted, the specified FlexLogic operand resets Latch 1.

✜✢✣✣✤✥✦ ✜✢✣✣✤✥✦

☛☞✌✍✎ ✏ ✑✒✓✍✌✔✕✓✖ ☛☞✌✍✎ ✏ ✌✗✘✙✖

✙✳✴✵✶✷✸✱✏ ✛✒✓

✜✢✣✣✤✥✦

☛☞✌✍✎ ✏ ✚✙✌✖
✧★✢✩★✪✦✤✫ ✪✬✢✭✮✥✯
✕✰✰✱✲ ✚✙✌ ☛☞✌✍✎ ✏ ✕✓
☛☞✌✍✎ ✏ ✕✑✑
✜✢✣✣✤✥✦

☛☞✌✍✎ ✏ ✛✙✚✙✌✖

✕✰✰✱✲ ✛✙✚✙✌ ✁✂✄✄☎✆✝✞✟✠✡

Latch n type Latch n set Latch n reset Latch n on Latch n off

Reset Dominant ON OFF ON OFF
OFF OFF Previous State Previous State
ON ON OFF ON
OFF ON OFF ON
Set Dominant ON OFF ON OFF
ON ON ON OFF
OFF OFF Previous State Previous State
OFF ON OFF ON
Figure 258: Non-volatile latch operation table and latch logic

N60-1601-0125-861-1 485
Chapter 9 - Settings

9.7 GROUPED ELEMENTS

Each protection element can be assigned up to six sets of settings with designations 1 to 6. The performance of
these elements is defined by the active setting group at a given time. Multiple setting groups allow the user to
conveniently change protection settings for different operating situations (for example, altered power system
configuration or season of the year). The active setting group can be preset or selected in the SETTING GROUPS
menu.

9.7.1 SETTING GROUP 1

Each of the six setting group menus is identical. Setting group 1 (the default active group) is active automatically
when no other group is active.
Setting path: SETTINGS > GROUPED ELEMENTS > SETTING GROUP 1(6)
■ SETTING GROUP 1 ■ POWER SWING
■ ó ■ DETECT

■ PHASE CURRENT
ô
■
■ NEUTRAL CURRENT
ô
■
■ GROUND CURRENT
ô
■
■ VOLTAGE ELEMENTS
ô
■
■ SUPERVISING ELEMENTS
ô
■
■ POWER
ñ
■

9.7.2 POWER SWING DETECT (ANSI 68)

SETTINGS > GROUPED ELEMENTS > SETTING GROUP 1(6) > POWER SWING DETECT
■ POWER SWING POWER SWING
■ DETECT ó FUNCTION: Disabled Range: Disabled, Enabled

POWER SWING
ô Range: SRC <n>
SOURCE: SRC 1
POWER SWING
ô Range: Mho Shape, Quad Shape
SHAPE: Mho Shape
POWER SWING
ô Range: Two Step, Three Step
MODE: Two Step
POWER SWING
ô Range: 0.050 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001
SUPV: 0.600 pu
POWER SW I2 SUPV ENAB:
ô Range: FlexLogic operand
Off
POWER SW I2 SUPV ENAB:
ô Range: FlexLogic operand
Off
POWER SWING
ô Range: 0.050 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001
I2 SUPV: 0.200 pu

N60-1601-0125-861-1 486
Chapter 9 - Settings

POWER SWING FWD

ô Range: 0.10 to 500.00 ohms in steps of 0.01
REACH: 50.00 Ω
POWER SWING QUAD FWD
ô Range: 0.10 to 500.00 ohms in steps of 0.01
REACH MID: 60.00 Ω
POWER SWING QUAD FWD
ô Range: 0.10 to 500.00 ohms in steps of 0.01
REACH OUT: 70.00 Ω
POWER SWING FWD
ô Range: 40 to 90° in steps of 1
RCA: 75°
POWER SWING REV
ô Range: 0.10 to 500.00 ohms in steps of 0.01
REACH: 50.00 Ω
POWER SWING QUAD REV
ô Range: 0.10 to 500.00 ohms in steps of 0.01
REACH MID: 60.00 Ω
POWER SWING QUAD REV
ô Range: 0.10 to 500.00 ohms in steps of 0.01
REACH OUT: 70.00 Ω
POWER SWING REV
ô Range: 40 to 90° in steps of 1
RCA: 75°
POWER SWING OUTER
ô Range: 40 to 90° in steps of 1
LIMIT ANGLE: 120°
POWER SWING MIDDLE
ô Range: 40 to 90° in steps of 1
LIMIT ANGLE: 90°
POWER SWING INNER
ô Range: 40 to 90° in steps of 1
LIMIT ANGLE: 60°
POWER SWING OUTER
ô Range: 0.10 to 500.00 ohms in steps of 0.01
RGT BLD: 100.00 Ω
POWER SWING OUTER
ô Range: 0.10 to 500.00 ohms in steps of 0.01
LFT BLD: 100.00 Ω
POWER SWING MIDDLE
ô Range: 0.10 to 500.00 ohms in steps of 0.01
RGT BLD: 100.00 Ω
POWER SWING MIDDLE
ô Range: 0.10 to 500.00 ohms in steps of 0.01
LFT BLD: 100.00 Ω
POWER SWING INNER
ô Range: 0.10 to 500.00 ohms in steps of 0.01
RGT BLD: 100.00 Ω
POWER SWING INNER
ô Range: 0.10 to 500.00 ohms in steps of 0.01
LFT BLD: 100.00 Ω
POWER SWING PICKUP
ô Range: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001
DELAY 1: 0.030 s
POWER SWING RESET
ô Range: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001
DELAY 1: 0.050 s
POWER SWING PICKUP
ô Range: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001
DELAY 2: 0.017 s
POWER SWING PICKUP
ô Range: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001
DELAY 3: 0.009 s
POWER SWING PICKUP
ô Range: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001
DELAY 4: 0.017 s
POWER SWING SEAL-IN
ô Range: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001
DELAY: 0.400 s
POWER SWING TRIP
ô Range: Early, Delayed
MODE: Delayed

N60-1601-0125-861-1 487
Chapter 9 - Settings

POWER SWING BLK:

ô Range: FlexLogic operand
Off
POWER SWING
ô Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
TARGET: Self-reset
POWER SWING
ñ Range: Disabled, Enabled
EVENTS: Disabled

The power swing detect element provides both power swing blocking and out-of-step tripping functions. The
element measures the positive-sequence apparent impedance and traces its locus with respect to either two or
three user-selectable operating characteristic boundaries. Upon detecting appropriate timing relations, the blocking
and/or tripping indications are given through FlexLogic operands. The element incorporates an adaptive disturbance
detector. This function does not trigger on power swings, but is capable of detecting faster disturbances—faults in
particular—that can occur during power swings. Operation of this dedicated disturbance detector is signaled via the
POWER SWING 50DD operand.
The power swing detect element asserts two operands intended for blocking selected protection elements on power
swings: POWER SWING BLOCK is a traditional signal that is safely asserted for the entire duration of the power
swing, and POWER SWING UN/BLOCK is established in the same way, but resets when an extra disturbance is
detected during the power swing. The POWER SWING UN/BLOCK operand can be used for blocking selected
protection elements if the intent is to respond to faults during power swing conditions.
Different protection elements respond differently to power swings. If tripping is required for faults during power
swing conditions, some elements can be blocked permanently (using the POWER SWING BLOCK operand), and
others can be blocked and dynamically unblocked upon fault detection (using the POWER SWING UN/BLOCK
operand).
View the operating characteristic and logic figures along with the following discussion to understand the operation of
the element.
The power swing detect element operates in three-step or two-step mode, as follows:
● Three-step operation — The power swing blocking sequence essentially times the passage of the locus of
the positive-sequence impedance between the outer and the middle characteristic boundaries. If the locus
enters the outer characteristic (indicated by the POWER SWING OUTER FlexLogic operand) but stays
outside the middle characteristic (indicated by the POWER SWING MIDDLE FlexLogic operand) for an
interval longer than POWER SWING PICKUP DELAY 1, the power swing blocking signal (POWER SWING
BLOCK FlexLogic operand) is established and sealed-in. The blocking signal resets when the locus leaves
the outer characteristic, but not sooner than the POWER SWING RESET DELAY 1 time.
● Two-step operation — If the two-step mode is selected, the sequence is identical to the three-step
operation, but it is the outer and inner characteristics that are used to time the power swing locus.
The out-of-step tripping feature operates as follows for three-step and two-step power swing detection modes:
● Three-step operation — The out-of-step trip sequence identifies unstable power swings by determining if
the impedance locus spends a finite time between the outer and middle characteristics and then a finite time
between the middle and inner characteristics. The first step is similar to the power swing blocking sequence.
After timer POWER SWING PICKUP DELAY 1 times out, latch 1 is set as long as the impedance stays within
the outer characteristic.
If afterwards, at any time (given the impedance stays within the outer characteristic), the locus enters the
middle characteristic but stays outside the inner characteristic for a period of time defined as POWER
SWING PICKUP DELAY 2, latch 2 is set as long as the impedance stays inside the outer characteristic. If
afterwards, at any time (given the impedance stays within the outer characteristic), the locus enters the inner
characteristic and stays there for a period of time defined as POWER SWING PICKUP DELAY 3, latch 2 is
set as long as the impedance stays inside the outer characteristic; the element is now ready to trip.
If the Early trip mode is selected, the POWER SWING TRIP operand is set immediately and sealed-in for
the interval set by the POWER SWING SEAL-IN DELAY. If the Delayed trip mode is selected, the element
waits until the impedance locus leaves the inner characteristic, then times out for the POWER SWING

N60-1601-0125-861-1 488
Chapter 9 - Settings

PICKUP DELAY 2 and sets latch 4; the element is now ready to trip. The trip operand is set later, when the
impedance locus leaves the outer characteristic.
● Two-step operation — Similar to the three-step mode with two exceptions. First, the initial stage monitors the
time spent by the impedance locus between the outer and inner characteristics. Second, the stage involving
the POWER SWING PICKUP DELAY 2 timer is bypassed. It is up to the user to integrate the blocking
(POWER SWING BLOCK) and tripping (POWER SWING TRIP) FlexLogic operands with other protection
functions and output contacts in order to make this element fully operational.
The element can be set to use either lens (mho) or rectangular (quadrilateral) characteristics, as shown in the
figure. When set to Mho, the element applies the right and left blinders as well. If the blinders are not required, set
their settings high enough to effectively disable the blinders.

✄☎
✁✂
✛
✚
✟✠ ✗
✙
✞ ✖
✝✞ ❈
✆ ☞✌ ❇
☛ ❆
✡☛

✓✔
✕
✍ ✭✮
✑
✒ ✰ ✱✲
✣ ✫✯
✍ ✩✥ ✭✫✪
✎✏ ★✢ ✬✭
✮
✍ ✜✧ ✫✬ ❉
✦ ✪
✑
✒ ✥✜
✤
✢✣
✛ ✜✢
✚
✙
✗
✖
✘
✗
✖

✳✴✵✶✷ ✸✹✺✹✵ ✻✼✽✸✶

✾✿❀✾❁❂✻✿❃❄❅✷

Figure 259: Power swing detect mho operating characteristics

N60-1601-0125-861-1 489
Chapter 9 - Settings

✁✂✄☎✁✆✝✞✟✠✡

Figure 260: Effects of blinders on the mho characteristics

✔✕✕✖✗ ✘✙✚ ✛✘✜

✔✕✕✖✗ ✗✥✚ ✛✘
✜
✢✔✜✜✘✖ ✘✙✚ ✛✘ ✿✹ ✻
✜ ✢✔✜✜✘✖ ✗✥✚ ✛✘ ✸
✜ ✾ ✺
✣✤✚✖✗ ✘✙✚ ✛✘✜ ✫ ✫
✪ ✪
✣✤✚✖✗ ✗✥✚ ✛✘ ✩ ✩
✜
✫ ✦✧ ✦✧
✪ ✹ ✹
✩
✌✍✎ ✏✑✒ ✦✧ ✼✽ ✼✽
✹ ✹ ✹
✩ ✩
✼✽ ✷
✸
✷
✸

✫ ✶✯ ☞
✪ ✵ ✻
✩ ✸
✦✧ ✳✴ ✺
★ ✰ ✱✮ ✪
✫
✦✧ ✲ ✩
✰✱ ✦✧
★
✮✯ ✦✧
✬✭ ✹
✩
✸
✷

✁✂✄☎✆✝✞✟✠✡☛

Figure 261: Power swing detect quadrilateral operating characteristics\

The FlexLogic output operands for the power swing detect element are as follows:
POWER SWING OUTER, POWER SWING MIDDLE, POWER SWING INNER, POWER SWING TMR2 PKP,
POWER SWING TMR3 PKP, and POWER SWING TMR4 PKP are auxiliary operands that facilitate testing and
special applications

N60-1601-0125-861-1 490
Chapter 9 - Settings

POWER SWING BLOCK blocks selected protection elements, such as distance functions
POWER SWING UN/BLOCK blocks those protection elements that are intended to be blocked under power swings,
but subsequently unblocked when a fault occurs after the power swing blocking condition has been established
POWER SWING 50DD indicates that an adaptive disturbance detector integrated with the element has picked up.
This operand triggers on faults occurring during power swing conditions. This includes both three-phase and single-
pole-open conditions.
POWER SWING INCOMING indicates an unstable power swing with an incoming locus (the locus enters the inner
characteristic)
POWER SWING OUTGOING indicates an unstable power swing with an outgoing locus (the locus leaving the outer
characteristic). This operand can be used to count unstable swings and take certain action only after a pre-defined
number of unstable power swings.
POWER SWING TRIP is a trip command
The settings for the power swing detect element are as follows.

POWER SWING FUNCTION

This setting enables and disables the power swing detection element. The setting applies to both power swing
blocking and out-of-step tripping functions.

POWER SWING SOURCE

The source setting identifies the signal source for both blocking and tripping functions.

POWER SWING SHAPE

This setting selects the shapes (either Mho or Quad) of the outer, middle, and inner characteristics of the power
swing detect element. The operating principle is not affected. The Mho characteristics use the left and right blinders.

POWER SWING MODE

This setting selects between the two-step and three-step operating modes and applies it to both power swing
blocking and out-of-step tripping functions. The three-step mode applies if there is enough space between the
maximum load impedances and distance characteristics of the relay that all three (outer, middle, and inner)
characteristics can be placed between the load and the distance characteristics. Whether the spans between the
outer and middle as well as the middle and inner characteristics are sufficient is determined by analysis of the
fastest power swings expected in correlation with settings of the power swing timers.
The two-step mode uses only the outer and inner characteristics for both blocking and tripping functions. This
leaves more space in heavily loaded systems to place two power swing characteristics between the distance
characteristics and the maximum load, but allows for only one determination of the impedance trajectory.

POWER SWING SUPV

A common overcurrent pickup level supervises all three power swing characteristics. The supervision responds to
the positive-sequence current.

POWER SW I2 SUPV ENAB

This setting is to enable I2 supervision logic through a FlexLogic operand, which is used to detect the presence of
significant unbalance in current signals, such as during fault conditions. Under these conditions, the POWER
SWING BLOCK operand is not asserted.

POWER SWING I2 SUPV

This setting specifies the threshold of the I2 supervision logic.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 491
Chapter 9 - Settings

POWER SWING FWD REACH

This setting specifies the forward reach of all three mho characteristics and the inner quadrilateral characteristic.
For a simple system consisting of a line and two equivalent sources, this reach needs to be higher than the sum of
the line and remote source positive-sequence impedances. Detailed transient stability studies can be needed for
complex systems in order to determine this setting. The angle of this reach impedance is specified by the POWER
SWING FWD RCA setting.

POWER SWING QUAD FWD REACH MID

This setting specifies the forward reach of the middle quadrilateral characteristic. The angle of this reach impedance
is specified by the POWER SWING FWD RCA setting. The setting is not used if the shape setting is Mho.

POWER SWING QUAD FWD REACH OUT

This setting specifies the forward reach of the outer quadrilateral characteristic. The angle of this reach impedance
is specified by the POWER SWING FWD RCA setting. The setting is not used if the shape setting is Mho.

POWER SWING FWD RCA

This setting specifies the angle of the forward reach impedance for the mho characteristics, angles of all blinders,
and both forward and reverse reach impedances of the quadrilateral characteristics.

POWER SWING REV REACH

This setting specifies the reverse reach of all three mho characteristics and the inner quadrilateral characteristic.
For a simple system of a line and two equivalent sources, this reach needs to be higher than the positive-sequence
impedance of the local source. Detailed transient stability studies can be needed for complex systems to determine
this setting. The angle of this reach impedance is specified by the POWER SWING REV RCA setting for Mho, and
the POWER SWING FWD RCA setting for inner Quad.

POWER SWING QUAD REV REACH MID

This setting specifies the reverse reach of the middle quadrilateral characteristic. The angle of this reach impedance
is specified by the POWER SWING FWD RCA setting. The setting is not used if the shape setting is Mho.

POWER SWING QUAD REV REACH OUT

This setting specifies the reverse reach of the outer quadrilateral characteristic. The angle of this reach impedance
is specified by the POWER SWING FWD RCA setting. The setting is not used if the shape setting is Mho.

POWER SWING REV RCA

This setting specifies the angle of the reverse reach impedance for the mho characteristics. This setting applies to
mho shapes only.

POWER SWING OUTER LIMIT ANGLE

This setting defines the outer power swing characteristic. The convention depicted in the power swing detect mho
operating characteristic diagram are to be observed: values greater than 90° result in an apple-shaped
characteristic; values less than 90° result in a lens-shaped characteristic. This angle must be selected in
consideration of the maximum expected load. If the maximum load angle is known, coordinate the outer limit angle
with a 20° security margin. Detailed studies can be needed for complex systems to determine this setting. This
setting applies to mho shapes only.

POWER SWING MIDDLE LIMIT ANGLE

This setting defines the middle power swing detect characteristic. It is relevant only for the three-step mode. A
typical value is close to the average of the outer and inner limit angles. This setting applies to mho shapes only.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 492
Chapter 9 - Settings

POWER SWING INNER LIMIT ANGLE

This setting defines the inner power swing detect characteristic. The inner characteristic is used by the out-of-step
tripping function: beyond the inner characteristic out-of-step trip action is definite (the actual trip can be delayed as
per the TRIP MODE setting). Therefore, this angle must be selected in consideration to the power swing angle
beyond which the system becomes unstable and cannot recover.
The inner characteristic is also used by the power swing blocking function in the two-step mode. In this case, set
this angle large enough so that the characteristics of the distance elements are safely enclosed by the inner
characteristic. This setting applies to Mho shapes only.

POWER SWING OUTER, MIDDLE, and INNER RGT BLD

These settings specify the resistive reach of the right blinder. The blinder applies to both Mho and Quad
characteristics. Set these value high if no blinder is required for the Mho characteristic.

POWER SWING OUTER, MIDDLE, and INNER LFT BLD

These settings specify the resistive reach of the left blinder. Enter a positive value; the relay automatically uses a
negative value. The blinder applies to both Mho and Quad characteristics. Set this value high if no blinder is
required for the Mho characteristic.

POWER SWING PICKUP DELAY 1

All the coordinating timers are related to each other and need to be set to detect the fastest expected power swing
and produce out-of-step tripping in a secure manner. Set the timers in relation to the power swing detect
characteristics, mode of power swing detect operation, and mode of out-of-step tripping. This timer defines the
interval that the impedance locus must spend between the outer and inner characteristics (two-step operating
mode), or between the outer and middle characteristics (three-step operating mode) before the power swing
blocking signal is established. This time delay must be set shorter than the time required for the impedance locus to
travel between the two selected characteristics during the fastest expected power swing. This setting is relevant for
both power swing blocking and out-of-step tripping.

POWER SWING RESET DELAY 1

This setting defines the dropout delay for the power swing blocking signal. Detection of a condition requiring a block
output sets latch 1 after PICKUP DELAY 1 time. When the impedance locus leaves the outer characteristic, timer
POWER SWING RESET DELAY 1 is started. When the timer times-out, the latch is reset. Select this setting to give
extra security for the power swing blocking action.

POWER SWING PICKUP DELAY 2

Controls the out-of-step tripping function in the three-step mode only. This timer defines the interval the impedance
locus must spend between the middle and inner characteristics before the second step of the out-of-step tripping
sequence is completed. This time delay must be set shorter than the time required for the impedance locus to travel
between the two characteristics during the fastest expected power swing.

POWER SWING PICKUP DELAY 3

Controls the out-of-step tripping function only. It defines the interval the impedance locus must spend within the
inner characteristic before the last step of the out-of-step tripping sequence is completed and the element is armed
to trip. The actual moment of tripping is controlled by the TRIP MODE setting. This time delay is provided for extra
security before the out-of-step trip action is executed.

POWER SWING PICKUP DELAY 4

Controls the out-of-step tripping function in Delayed trip mode only. This timer defines the interval the impedance
locus must spend outside the inner characteristic but within the outer characteristic before the element is armed for
the delayed trip. The delayed trip occurs when the impedance leaves the outer characteristic. This time delay is
provided for extra security. Set it considering the fastest expected power swing.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 493
Chapter 9 - Settings

POWER SWING SEAL-IN DELAY

The out-of-step trip FlexLogic operand (POWER SWING TRIP) is sealed-in for the specified period of time. The
sealing-in is crucial in the delayed trip mode, as the original trip signal is a very short pulse occurring when the
impedance locus leaves the outer characteristic after the out-of-step sequence is completed.

POWER SWING TRIP MODE

Selection of the Early trip mode results in an instantaneous trip after the last step in the out-of-step tripping
sequence is completed. The early trip mode stresses the circuit breakers as the currents at that moment are high
(the electromotive forces of the two equivalent systems are approximately 180° apart). Selection of the Delayed
trip mode results in a trip at the moment when the impedance locus leaves the outer characteristic. Delayed trip
mode relaxes the operating conditions for the breakers as the currents at that moment are low. Make the selection
considering the capability of the breakers in the system.

POWER SWING BLK

This setting specifies the FlexLogic operand used for blocking the Power Swing element. The blocking signal resets
immediately the output POWER SWING TRIP operand.

POWER SWING EVENTS

Enables and disables the logging of power swing detect events in the sequence of events recorder.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 494
Chapter 9 - Settings

✌✂✍✍✝☛✆✌
✎✏✑✒✓ ✔✑✕✖✗ ✎✏✑✒✓ ✔✑✕✖✗ ✏✙✤✒✓
✔✣✚✎✒✥ ✧✕★✕✤ ✚✖✗✧✒✥
✎✏✑✒✓ ✔✑✕✖✗ ✜✑✛ ✎✏✑✒✓ ✔✑✕✖✗ ★✕✛✛✧✒
✓✒✚✢✣✥ ✧✕★✕✤ ✚✖✗✧✒✥
✎✏✑✒✓ ✔✑✕✖✗ ✘✙✚✛ ✎✏✑✒✓ ✔✑✕✖✗ ✕✖✖✒✓
✌✂✍✍✝☛✆ ✜✑✛ ✓✒✚✢✣ ★✕✛✥ ✧✕★✕✤ ✚✖✗✧✒✥
✎✏✑✒✓ ✔✑✕✖✗ ✎✏✑✒✓ ✔✑✕✖✗ ✘✙✚✛ ✎✏✑✒✓ ✔✑✕✖✗ ✏✙✤✒✓
✜✙✖✢✤✕✏✖✥ ✜✑✛ ✓✒✚✢✣ ✏✙✤✥ ✓✗✤ ✭✧✛✥
✒✮✯✰✱✲✳ ✴ ✪ ✎✏✑✒✓ ✔✑✕✖✗ ✜✑✛ ✎✏✑✒✓ ✔✑✕✖✗ ✏✙✤✒✓
✓✢✚✥ ✧✜✤ ✭✧✛✥
✌✂✍✍✝☛✆ ✚✖✛ ✎✏✑✒✓ ✔✑✕✖✗ ✓✒✦ ✎✏✑✒✓ ✔✑✕✖✗ ★✕✛✛✧✒
✎✏✑✒✓ ✔✑✕✖✗ ✭✧✬✥ ✓✒✚✢✣✥ ✓✗✤ ✭✧✛✥
✏✼✼ ✴ ✸
✎✏✑✒✓ ✔✑✕✖✗ ✘✙✚✛ ✓✒✦ ✎✏✑✒✓ ✔✑✕✖✗ ★✕✛✛✧✒
✓✒✚✢✣ ★✕✛✥ ✧✜✤ ✭✧✛✥
✎✏✑✒✓ ✔✑✕✖✗ ✘✙✚✛ ✓✒✦ ✎✏✑✒✓ ✔✑✕✖✗ ✕✖✖✒✓
✓✒✚✢✣ ✏✙✤✥ ✓✗✤ ✭✧✛✥
✌✂✍✍✝☛✆ ✎✏✑✒✓ ✔✑✕✖✗ ✓✒✦ ✎✏✑✒✓ ✔✑✕✖✗ ✕✖✖✒✓
✓✢✚✥ ✧✜✤ ✭✧✛✥
✎✏✑✒✓ ✔✑✕✖✗ ✔✏✙✓✢✒✥
✓✙✖
✁✂✄✁☎✆✝✞ ☎✟✂✠✡☛☞
✦✩✪ ✏✙✤✒✓ ✕★✎✒✛✚✖✢✒
✚✖✛ ✎✏✑✒✓ ✔✑✕✖✗ ✏✙✤✒✓
✕✩✪ ✓✒✗✕✏✖
✕✩✻ ✓✙✖
✁✂✄✁☎✆✝✞ ☎✟✂✠✡☛☞
★✕✛✛✧✒ ✕★✎✒✛✚✖✢✒
✚✖✛ ✎✏✑✒✓ ✔✑✕✖✗ ★✕✛✛✧✒
✓✒✗✕✏✖
✓✙✖
✁✂✄✁☎✆✝✞ ☎✟✂✠✡☛☞
✕✖✖✒✓ ✕★✎✒✛✚✖✢✒
✚✖✛ ✎✏✑✒✓ ✔✑✕✖✗ ✕✖✖✒✓
✓✒✗✕✏✖

✌✂✍✍✝☛✆
✎✏✑✒✓ ✔✑✕✖✗
✔✙✎✦✥
✓✙✖

✕✩✪ ✫ ✎✕✢✬✙✎

✌✂✍✍✝☛✆
✎✏✑✒✓ ✔✑✕✖✗
✕✻ ✔✙✎✦✥
✓✙✖

✌✂✍✍✝☛✆ ✕✩✻ ✫ ✎✕✢✬✙✎

✎✏✑✒✓ ✔✑
✕✻ ✔✙✎✦ ✒✖✚✭ ✚✖✛ ✙✖✭✚✧✚✖✢✒ ✤✽ ✾✿✲✲❀ ✹
✏✼✼✴✸

✎✏✑✒✓ ✔✑✕✖✗ ✭✧✬ ✤✽ ✾✿✲✲❀ ✹

✵✶✷✵✸✹✚✪✺✢✛✓

Figure 262: Power swing detect logic (Sheet 1 of 3)

N60-1601-0125-861-1 495
Chapter 9 - Settings

☛☞✌✌✍✎✏

✑✒✓✔✕ ✖✓✗✘✙ ✫✚✘✛✬✗✒✘✜

✔✭✮✯✰✱✲ ✳ ✤

☛☞✌✌✍✎✏ ❈
❇
❆
✑✒✓✔✕ ✖✓✗✘✙ ◗❘✪✜
✌✍❊☞❋
✒✾✾ ✳ ✣
✣

☛☞✌✌✍✎✏ ✤✣ ✿❀✿✰✱✹

✑✒✓✔✕ ✖✓✗✘✙ ✖✒✚✕✛✔✜ ✕✚✘ ✌✍❊☞❋

●❍☞■❍❏✏✍❑ ❏▲☞❋▼✎◆
✣
✗✢✣ ✦ ✦✗✢✣✦ ✧ ✦✗✢✣★✦✦ ✩ ✪✢✣ ❈
❇ ✑✒✓✔✕ ✖✓✗✘✙ ❖✣PP
❆
✵ ❉ ✿❀✿✰✱✹
✗✢✤ ✦ ✦✗✢✤✦ ✧ ✦✗✢✤★✦✦ ✩ ✪✢✤ ✴
✁✂ ✄☎✆✝✞✟✠✡
✗✢✥ ✦ ✦✗✢✥✦ ✧ ✦✗✢✥★✦✦ ✩ ✪✢✥

✗✢✣✶ ✗✢✤✶ ✗✢✥ ✧ ✷✸✱✹✱✭✺ ✻✮✰✼✱✹

✗✢✣★✶ ✗✢✤★✶ ✗✢✥★ ✧ ✽✮✰✾✧✮✧✿❀✿✰✱ ❁✰✲ ✻✮✰✼✱✹
✪✢✣✶ ✪✢✥ ✧ ✺✽✸✱✱ ✺❂❃✱✹ ✺✽✱ ✮✻✱✸✮❄✱ ✿✽✮✭❄✱ ❁✻✱✸ ✰✮✹✺ ✷❁❅✱✸ ✿❀✿✰✱
✪✢✤ ✧ ✾❁✼✸ ✺❂❃✱✹ ✺✽✱ ✮✻✱✸✮❄✱ ✿✽✮✭❄✱ ❁✻✱✸ ✰✮✹✺ ✷❁❅✱✸ ✿❀✿✰✱

Figure 263: Power swing detect logic (Sheet 2 of 3)

❀❁ ❀❁ ❀❁ ✧★
❂ ❂ ❂ ✩
❃❄ ❃❄ ❃❄ ✪★
❅❂ ❅❂ ❅❂ ✫
✬
❆❇ ❆❇ ❆❇ ✭✮ ❞◗❡❢ ▲❣◆◆▼ ✝
❈ ❈ ❈ ✫
❁❉ ■ ❆❇ ✯✩ ✼ ✽✞✆✞ ✡✄
❊❃ ❆❏ ❇ ✰ ✦✖✵✵✚✤✙ ✦✖✵✵✚✤✙✦ ✞ ✟
❏❑ ❃❄ ✱✲
❄ ❃ ✶✁✷✄✌ ☞✷✎ ✸
✳ ✶✁✷✄✌ ☞✷✎ ✸ ✍✁✟✄☎ ✟✄✆✞✺ ✝ ✶✎✡✻✼✶☎
✴
✒✹▲▼◆❖ ✶✁✷✄✌ ☞✷✎ ✸
✞ ✟ ✟✄✆✞✺ ✝ ✌✄☞✄✂☎
✔✕✖✗✕✘✙✚✛ ✘✜✖✢✣✤✥✦
▼❯❱❯
▼❲❳❨ ❬ ❭❵ ✶✁✷✄✌ ☞✷✎ ✸ ✽✆✁✡✻
✶✁✷✄✌ ☞✷✎ ✸ ✼ ✾✽✆✁✡✻
✞ ✟ ❜❵ ❬ ❭❛
✏✹▲▼◆❖ ✔✕✖✗✕✘✙✚✛ ✘✜✖✢✣✤✥
❜❛
❫ ✶✁✷✄✌ ☞✷✎ ✸ ✓✿✟✟
✁✌ ❫
✁✌

✦✖✵✵✚✤✙
✶✁✷✄✌ ☞✷✎ ✸ ✔✕✖✗✕✘✙✚✛ ✘✜✖✢✣✤✥
✟✄✆✞✺ ✏ ✶✎✡✻✼✶☎ ✶✁✷✄✌ ☞✷✎ ✸ ✂✍✌✏ ✶✻✶
▼❯❱❯
✞ ✟ ✿ ❬ ❭❴
❜❴
❫
✒✹▲▼◆❖

✏✹▲▼◆❖
✔✕✖✗✕✘✙✚✛ ✘✜✖✢✣✤✥
✦✖✵✵✚✤✙ ✶✁✷✄✌ ☞✷✎ ✸ ✂✍✌✒ ✶✻✶
✶✁✷✄✌ ☞✷✎ ✸
✟✄✆✞✺ ✒ ✶✎✡✻✼✶☎ ✔✕✖✗✕✘✙✚✛ ✘✜✖✢✣✤✥
▼❯❱❯ ✶✁✷✄✌ ☞✷✎ ✸ ✎ ✡✁✍✎ ✸
✞ ✟ ✿ ❬ ❭❪
❜❪ ✦✖✵✵✚✤✙
❫ ✶✁✷✄✌ ☞✷✎ ✸ ✂✌✎✶
✍✁✟✄☎

✦✖✵✵✚✤✙ ✦✖✵✵✚✤✙
✶✁✷✄✌ ☞✷✎ ✸ ✶✁✷✄✌ ☞✷✎ ✸
✟✄✆✞✺ ✠ ✶✎✡✻✼✶☎ ✄P◗❘❙ ☞✄✞✆✹✎ ✟✄✆✞✺☎
▼❯❱❯ ✿
✞ ✟ ✿ ☞ ❩✠ ✔✕✖✗✕✘✙✚✛ ✘✜✖✢✣✤✥
❜❝ ▼❲❳❨
✞ ✟ ✶✁✷✄✌ ☞✷✎ ✸ ✂✌✎✶
✌ ✞ ✟
✟◆❘P❙◆❚

✔✕✖✗✕✘✙✚✛ ✘✜✖✢✣✤✥
✁✂✄☎ ✶✁✷✄✌ ☞✷✎ ✸ ✂✍✌✠ ✶✻✶
✆✝ ✞ ✟ ✆✠ ✆✞✂✡☛✄☞ ✞✌✄ ☞✄✂ ✟✁✍✎ ✞ ✂ ❞◗❡❢ ▲❣◆◆▼ ✝
✆✏✑ ✆✒ ✞ ✟ ✆✓ ✆✞✂✡☛✄☞ ✞✌✄ ✌✄☞✄✂ ✟✁✍✎ ✞ ✂ ✶✁✷✄✌ ☞✷✎ ✸ ✽✆✻
✔✕✖✗✕✘✙✚✛ ✘✜✖✢✣✤✥
✶✁✷✄✌ ☞✷✎ ✸ ✁✼✂✸✁✎ ✸
❋✓●❋✿✓✞✝❍✡✟✌

Figure 264: Power swing detect logic (Sheet 3 of 3)

N60-1601-0125-861-1 496
Chapter 9 - Settings

9.7.3 PHASE CURRENT

SETTINGS > GROUPED ELEMENTS > SETTING GROUP 1(6) > PHASE CURRENT
■ PHASE CURRENT ■ PHASE TOC <n>
■ ó ■ NOT ALL UR MODELS

■ PHASE IOC <n>

ô NOT ALL UR MODELS
■
■ PHASE
ñ NOT ALL UR MODELS
■ DIRECTIONAL <n>

9.7.3.1 INVERSE TOC CURVE CHARACTERISTICS

The inverse time overcurrent curves used by the time overcurrent elements are the IEEE, IEC, GE Type IAC, and
I2t standard curve shapes. This allows for simplified coordination with downstream devices.
If none of these curve shapes is adequate, FlexCurves can be used to customize the inverse time curve
characteristics. The definite time curve is also an option that can be appropriate if only simple protection is required.

Overcurrent curve types

IEEE IEC GE type IAC Other
IEEE Extremely Inverse IEC Curve A (BS142) IAC Extremely Inverse I2t
IEEE Very Inverse IEC Curve B (BS142) IAC Very Inverse FlexCurves A, B, C, and D
IEEE Moderately Inverse IEC Curve C (BS142) IAC Inverse Recloser Curves
IEC Short Inverse IAC Short Inverse Definite Time

A time dial multiplier setting allows selection of a multiple of the base curve shape (where the time dial multiplier =
1) with the curve shape setting (CURVE). Unlike the electromechanical time dial equivalent, operate times are
directly proportional to the time multiplier setting (TD MULTIPLIER) . For example, all times for a multiplier of 10 are
10 times the multiplier 1 or base curve values. Setting the multiplier to zero results in an instantaneous response to
all current levels above pickup.
Time overcurrent time calculations are made with an internal energy capacity memory variable. When this variable
indicates that the energy capacity has reached 100%, a time overcurrent element operates. If less than 100%
energy capacity is accumulated in this variable and the current falls below the dropout threshold of 97 to 98% of the
pickup value, the variable must be reduced. Two methods of this resetting operation are available: “Instantaneous”
and “Timed.” The “Instantaneous” selection is intended for applications with other relays, such as most static relays,
which set the energy capacity directly to zero when the current falls below the reset threshold. The “Timed”
selection can be used where the relay must coordinate with electromechanical relays.
The URs calculate operate time corresponding to the values in the range of 1.03 to 20 multiples of the pickup
current. Above 20 multiples of the pickup current, URs clamp the operate time to the value at a multiple of 20,
resulting in the flat part of the characteristics. Reset time is calculated in the range of 0 to 0.97 multiples of the
pickup current.

IEEE Curves
The IEEE time overcurrent curve shapes conform to industry standards and the IEEE C37.112-1996 curve
classifications for extremely, very, and moderately inverse curves. The IEEE curves are derived from the operate
and reset time equations.
A tr
------------------------------- + B -------------------------------
-
I p 2
T = TDM ☎ ✂ --------------✄ ➊ 1 , T RESET = TDM ☎ I
I pickup✁ 1 ➊ ✂ -------------- ✄
I pickup ✁

N60-1601-0125-861-1 497
Chapter 9 - Settings

where:
● T = operate time (in seconds)
● TDM = Multiplier setting
● I = input current
● Ipickup = Pickup Current setting
● A, B, p = constants defined in the table
● TRESET = reset time in seconds (assuming energy capacity is 100% and RESET is “Timed”)
● tr = characteristic constant defined in the table

IEEE inverse time curve constants

IEEE curve shape A B p tr
IEEE Extremely Inverse 28.2 0.1217 2.0000 29.1
IEEE Very Inverse 19.61 0.491 2.0000 21.6
IEEE Moderately Inverse 0.0515 0.1140 0.02000 4.85

IEEE curve trip times (in seconds)

Multiplier Current ( I / Ipickup)
(TDM) 1.5 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0 9.0 10.0
IEEE Extremely Inverse
0.5 11.341 4.761 1.823 1.001 0.648 0.464 0.355 0.285 0.237 0.203
1.0 22.682 9.522 3.647 2.002 1.297 0.927 0.709 0.569 0.474 0.407
2.0 45.363 19.043 7.293 4.003 2.593 1.855 1.418 1.139 0.948 0.813
4.0 90.727 38.087 14.587 8.007 5.187 3.710 2.837 2.277 1.897 1.626
6.0 136.090 57.130 21.880 12.010 7.780 5.564 4.255 3.416 2.845 2.439
8.0 181.454 76.174 29.174 16.014 10.374 7.419 5.674 4.555 3.794 3.252
10.0 226.817 95.217 36.467 20.017 12.967 9.274 7.092 5.693 4.742 4.065
IEEE Very Inverse
0.5 8.090 3.514 1.471 0.899 0.654 0.526 0.450 0.401 0.368 0.345
1.0 16.179 7.028 2.942 1.798 1.308 1.051 0.900 0.802 0.736 0.689
2.0 32.358 14.055 5.885 3.597 2.616 2.103 1.799 1.605 1.472 1.378
4.0 64.716 28.111 11.769 7.193 5.232 4.205 3.598 3.209 2.945 2.756
6.0 97.074 42.166 17.654 10.790 7.849 6.308 5.397 4.814 4.417 4.134
8.0 129.432 56.221 23.538 14.387 10.465 8.410 7.196 6.418 5.889 5.513
10.0 161.790 70.277 29.423 17.983 13.081 10.513 8.995 8.023 7.361 6.891
IEEE Moderately Inverse
0.5 3.220 1.902 1.216 0.973 0.844 0.763 0.706 0.663 0.630 0.603
1.0 6.439 3.803 2.432 1.946 1.688 1.526 1.412 1.327 1.260 1.207
2.0 12.878 7.606 4.864 3.892 3.377 3.051 2.823 2.653 2.521 2.414
4.0 25.756 15.213 9.729 7.783 6.753 6.102 5.647 5.307 5.041 4.827
6.0 38.634 22.819 14.593 11.675 10.130 9.153 8.470 7.960 7.562 7.241
8.0 51.512 30.426 19.458 15.567 13.507 12.204 11.294 10.614 10.083 9.654
10.0 64.390 38.032 24.322 19.458 16.883 15.255 14.117 13.267 12.604 12.068

N60-1601-0125-861-1 498
Chapter 9 - Settings

IEC Curves:IEC; Overcurrent curves:IEC; Equations:IEC curvescurves

For European applications, the relay offers three standard curves defined in IEC 255-4 and British standard BS142.
These are defined as IEC Curve A, IEC Curve B, and IEC Curve C. The IEC curves are derived by the operate and
reset time equations.
K tr
----------------------------------- ----------------------------------
-
E
T = TDM ✄ ✁ I I pickup ✂ ➊ 1 , T RESET = TDM ✄
1 I I pickup
➊ ✁ ✂
2

where:
● T = operate time (in seconds)
● TDM = Multiplier setting
● I = input current
● Ipickup = Pickup Current setting
● K, E = constants defined in the table
● tr = characteristic constant defined in the table
● TRESET = reset time in seconds (assuming energy capacity is 100% and RESET is “Timed”)

IEC (BS) inverse time curve constants

IEC (BS) curve shape K E tr
IEC Curve A (BS142) 0.140 0.020 9.7
IEC Curve B (BS142) 13.500 1.000 43.2
IEC Curve C (BS142) 80.000 2.000 58.2
IEC Short Inverse 0.050 0.040 0.500

IEC curve trip times (in seconds)

Multiplier Current ( I / Ipickup)
(TDM) 1.5 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0 9.0 10.0
IEC Curve A
0.05 0.860 0.501 0.315 0.249 0.214 0.192 0.176 0.165 0.156 0.149
0.10 1.719 1.003 0.630 0.498 0.428 0.384 0.353 0.330 0.312 0.297
0.20 3.439 2.006 1.260 0.996 0.856 0.767 0.706 0.659 0.623 0.594
0.40 6.878 4.012 2.521 1.992 1.712 1.535 1.411 1.319 1.247 1.188
0.60 10.317 6.017 3.781 2.988 2.568 2.302 2.117 1.978 1.870 1.782
0.80 13.755 8.023 5.042 3.984 3.424 3.070 2.822 2.637 2.493 2.376
1.00 17.194 10.029 6.302 4.980 4.280 3.837 3.528 3.297 3.116 2.971
IEC Curve B
0.05 1.350 0.675 0.338 0.225 0.169 0.135 0.113 0.096 0.084 0.075
0.10 2.700 1.350 0.675 0.450 0.338 0.270 0.225 0.193 0.169 0.150
0.20 5.400 2.700 1.350 0.900 0.675 0.540 0.450 0.386 0.338 0.300
0.40 10.800 5.400 2.700 1.800 1.350 1.080 0.900 0.771 0.675 0.600
0.60 16.200 8.100 4.050 2.700 2.025 1.620 1.350 1.157 1.013 0.900
0.80 21.600 10.800 5.400 3.600 2.700 2.160 1.800 1.543 1.350 1.200
1.00 27.000 13.500 6.750 4.500 3.375 2.700 2.250 1.929 1.688 1.500

N60-1601-0125-861-1 499
Chapter 9 - Settings

Multiplier Current ( I / Ipickup)

(TDM) 1.5 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0 9.0 10.0
IEC Curve C
0.05 3.200 1.333 0.500 0.267 0.167 0.114 0.083 0.063 0.050 0.040
0.10 6.400 2.667 1.000 0.533 0.333 0.229 0.167 0.127 0.100 0.081
0.20 12.800 5.333 2.000 1.067 0.667 0.457 0.333 0.254 0.200 0.162
0.40 25.600 10.667 4.000 2.133 1.333 0.914 0.667 0.508 0.400 0.323
0.60 38.400 16.000 6.000 3.200 2.000 1.371 1.000 0.762 0.600 0.485
0.80 51.200 21.333 8.000 4.267 2.667 1.829 1.333 1.016 0.800 0.646
1.00 64.000 26.667 10.000 5.333 3.333 2.286 1.667 1.270 1.000 0.808
IEC Short Inverse
0.05 0.153 0.089 0.056 0.044 0.038 0.034 0.031 0.029 0.027 0.026
0.10 0.306 0.178 0.111 0.088 0.075 0.067 0.062 0.058 0.054 0.052
0.20 0.612 0.356 0.223 0.175 0.150 0.135 0.124 0.115 0.109 0.104
0.40 1.223 0.711 0.445 0.351 0.301 0.269 0.247 0.231 0.218 0.207
0.60 1.835 1.067 0.668 0.526 0.451 0.404 0.371 0.346 0.327 0.311
0.80 2.446 1.423 0.890 0.702 0.602 0.538 0.494 0.461 0.435 0.415
1.00 3.058 1.778 1.113 0.877 0.752 0.673 0.618 0.576 0.544 0.518

B D E
T = TDM
✞
A + --------------------------- + --------------------------------- + ---------------------------------✟

, T RESET = TDM tr
✠ ✆
I I pkp C I I pkp C
2
I I pkp C
3✝
✠ ----------------------------
-
✄
✁ ✂ ➊ ✁✁ ✂ ➊ ✂ ✁✁ ✂ ➊ ✂
☎ 2
1 I I pkp
➊ ✁ ✂

where:
● T = operate time (in seconds)
● TDM = Multiplier setting
● I = Input current
● Ipkp = Pickup Current setting
● A to E = constants defined in the table
● tr = characteristic constant defined in the table
● TRESET = reset time in seconds (assuming energy capacity is 100% and RESET is “Timed”)

IAC curves
The curves for the General Electric type IAC relay family are derived from the formulae:

GE type IAC inverse time curve constants

IAC curve shape A B C D E tr
IAC Extreme Inverse 0.0040 0.6379 0.6200 1.7872 0.2461 6.008
IAC Very Inverse 0.0900 0.7955 0.1000 –1.2885 7.9586 4.678
IAC Inverse 0.2078 0.8630 0.8000 –0.4180 0.1947 0.990
IAC Short Inverse 0.0428 0.0609 0.6200 –0.0010 0.0221 0.222

N60-1601-0125-861-1 500
Chapter 9 - Settings

GE type IAC curve trip times

Multiplier Current ( I / Ipickup)
(TDM) 1.5 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0 9.0 10.0
IAC Extremely Inverse
0.5 1.699 0.749 0.303 0.178 0.123 0.093 0.074 0.062 0.053 0.046
1.0 3.398 1.498 0.606 0.356 0.246 0.186 0.149 0.124 0.106 0.093
2.0 6.796 2.997 1.212 0.711 0.491 0.372 0.298 0.248 0.212 0.185
4.0 13.591 5.993 2.423 1.422 0.983 0.744 0.595 0.495 0.424 0.370
6.0 20.387 8.990 3.635 2.133 1.474 1.115 0.893 0.743 0.636 0.556
8.0 27.183 11.987 4.846 2.844 1.966 1.487 1.191 0.991 0.848 0.741
10.0 33.979 14.983 6.058 3.555 2.457 1.859 1.488 1.239 1.060 0.926
IAC Very Inverse
0.5 1.451 0.656 0.269 0.172 0.133 0.113 0.101 0.093 0.087 0.083
1.0 2.901 1.312 0.537 0.343 0.266 0.227 0.202 0.186 0.174 0.165
2.0 5.802 2.624 1.075 0.687 0.533 0.453 0.405 0.372 0.349 0.331
4.0 11.605 5.248 2.150 1.374 1.065 0.906 0.810 0.745 0.698 0.662
6.0 17.407 7.872 3.225 2.061 1.598 1.359 1.215 1.117 1.046 0.992
8.0 23.209 10.497 4.299 2.747 2.131 1.813 1.620 1.490 1.395 1.323
10.0 29.012 13.121 5.374 3.434 2.663 2.266 2.025 1.862 1.744 1.654
IAC Inverse
0.5 0.578 0.375 0.266 0.221 0.196 0.180 0.168 0.160 0.154 0.148
1.0 1.155 0.749 0.532 0.443 0.392 0.360 0.337 0.320 0.307 0.297
2.0 2.310 1.499 1.064 0.885 0.784 0.719 0.674 0.640 0.614 0.594
4.0 4.621 2.997 2.128 1.770 1.569 1.439 1.348 1.280 1.229 1.188
6.0 6.931 4.496 3.192 2.656 2.353 2.158 2.022 1.921 1.843 1.781
8.0 9.242 5.995 4.256 3.541 3.138 2.878 2.695 2.561 2.457 2.375
10.0 11.552 7.494 5.320 4.426 3.922 3.597 3.369 3.201 3.072 2.969
IAC Short Inverse
0.5 0.072 0.047 0.035 0.031 0.028 0.027 0.026 0.026 0.025 0.025
1.0 0.143 0.095 0.070 0.061 0.057 0.054 0.052 0.051 0.050 0.049
2.0 0.286 0.190 0.140 0.123 0.114 0.108 0.105 0.102 0.100 0.099
4.0 0.573 0.379 0.279 0.245 0.228 0.217 0.210 0.204 0.200 0.197
6.0 0.859 0.569 0.419 0.368 0.341 0.325 0.314 0.307 0.301 0.296
8.0 1.145 0.759 0.559 0.490 0.455 0.434 0.419 0.409 0.401 0.394
10.0 1.431 0.948 0.699 0.613 0.569 0.542 0.524 0.511 0.501 0.493

I2t curves

The I2t curves are derived as follows:

100 100
----------------------- -------------------------
T = TDM ☎ I ✄
✂ -------------
-
2 , T RESET = TDM ☎ I ✄ ➊2
✂ --------------
I pickup ✁ I pickup ✁

N60-1601-0125-861-1 501
Chapter 9 - Settings

where:
● T = Operate time (in seconds)
● TDM = Multiplier setting
● I = Input current
● Ipickup = Pickup Current setting
● TRESET = reset time in seconds (assuming energy capacity is 100% and RESET is “Timed”)

I2t curve trip times

Multiplier Current ( I / Ipickup)
(TDM) 1.5 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0 9.0 10.0
0.01 0.44 0.25 0.11 0.06 0.04 0.03 0.02 0.02 0.01 0.01
0.10 4.44 2.50 1.11 0.63 0.40 0.28 0.20 0.16 0.12 0.10
1.00 44.44 25.00 11.11 6.25 4.00 2.78 2.04 1.56 1.23 1.00
10.00 444.44 250.00 111.11 62.50 40.00 27.78 20.41 15.63 12.35 10.00
100.00 4444.4 2500.0 1111.1 625.00 400.00 277.78 204.08 156.25 123.46 100.00
600.00 26666.7 15000.0 6666.7 3750.0 2400.0 1666.7 1224.5 937.50 740.74 600.00

FlexCurves
FlexCurves are described in the FlexCurves section later in this chapter. The curve shapes for the FlexCurves are
derived from the formulae:
I I
T = TDM ☎ FlexCurve Time at ✂ --------------✄ when ✂ --------------✄ ✆ 1.00
I pickup✁ I pickup✁

I I
T RESET = TDM ☎ FlexCurve Time at ✂ --------------✄ when ✂ --------------✄ ✆ 0.98
I pickup✁ I pickup✁

where:
● T = operate time (in seconds)
● TDM = Multiplier setting
● I = Input Current
● Ipickup = Pickup Current setting
● TRESET = Reset Time in seconds (assuming energy capacity is 100% and RESET: Timed)

Definite time curve

The Definite Time curve shape operates as soon as the pickup level is exceeded for a specified period of time. The
base definite time curve delay is in seconds. The curve multiplier of 0.00 to 600.00 makes this delay adjustable from
instantaneous to 600.00 seconds in steps of 10 ms. The definite time curve shapes are defined as follows:
T = TDM in seconds, when I > I pickup

T RESET = TDM in seconds

where:
● T = Operate Time (in seconds)
● TDM = Multiplier setting

N60-1601-0125-861-1 502
Chapter 9 - Settings

● I = Input Current
● Ipickup = Pickup Current setting
● TRESET = Reset Time in seconds (assuming energy capacity is 100% and RESET: Timed)

Recloser curves
The Product uses the FlexCurve feature to facilitate programming of many recloser curves. See the FlexCurves
settings section earlier in this chapter for details.

9.7.3.2 PHASE TIME OVERCURRENT (ANSI 51P, IEC PTOC)

SETTINGS > GROUPED ELEMENTS > SETTING GROUP 1(6) > PHASE CURRENT >PHASE TOC <n>

Note:
Only Phase TOC 1 is shown

■ PHASE TOC 1 PHASE TOC 1

■ ó FUNCTION: Disabled Range: Disabled, Enabled

PHASE TOC 1 SIGNAL Range: SRC <n>

ô
SOURCE: SRC 1 Not applicable to relays with 9-2LE
PHASE TOC 1
ô Range: Phasor, RMS
INPUT: Phasor
PHASE TOC1
ô Range:0.020 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001
PICKUP: 1.000 pu
PHASE TOC1
ô Range: see Overcurrent Curve Types table
CURVE: IEEE Mod Inv
PHASE TOC1
ô Range: 0.00 to 600.00 in steps of 0.01
TD MULTIPLIER: 1.00
PHASE TOC1
ô Range: Instantaneous, Timed
RESET: Instantaneous
PHASE TOC1 VOLTAGE
ô Range: Disabled, Enabled
RESTRAINT: Disabled
PHASE TOC1 BLOCK A:
ô Range: FlexLogic operand
Off
PHASE TOC1 BLOCK B:
ô Range: FlexLogic operand
Off
PHASE TOC1 BLOCK C:
ô Range: FlexLogic operand
Off
PHASE TOC1 Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
ô
TARGET: Self-reset Not applicable to relays with 9-2LE
PHASE TOC1 Range: Disabled, Enabled
ñ
EVENTS: Disabled Not applicable to relays with 9-2LE

The phase time overcurrent element can provide a specified time-delay operating characteristic versus the applied
current or be used as a simple definite time element. The phase current input quantities can be programmed as
fundamental phasor magnitude or total waveform RMS magnitude as required by the application.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 503
Chapter 9 - Settings

Two methods of resetting operation are available: Timed and Instantaneous (see the Inverse TOC Curve
Characteristics section earlier for details on curve setup, trip times, and reset operation). When the element is
blocked, the time accumulator resets according to the reset characteristic. For example, if the element reset
characteristic is set to “Instantaneous” and the element is blocked, the time accumulator clears immediately.
The PHASE TOC1 PICKUP setting can be reduced dynamically by a voltage restraint feature (when enabled). This
is accomplished via the multipliers (Mvr) corresponding to the phase-phase voltages of the voltage restraint
characteristic curve (see the figure); the pickup level is calculated as Mvr times the PHASE TOC1 PICKUP setting.
If the voltage restraint feature is disabled, the pickup level always remains at the setting value.

✗ ✂✁
✧
✚✛
✛ ✁✡
✕
✦ ✁✠
✙
✕✥ ✁✟
✘✤ ✁✞
✣
✛ ✁✝
✢✜
✛ ✁✆
✚✖✘
✘✙✗ ✁☎
✖ ✁✄
✕
✔ ✁✂

✁✂ ✁✄ ✁☎ ✁✆ ✁✝ ✁✞ ✁✟ ✁✠ ✁✡ ✂✁
✶✹✺✻✼✽✶✹✺✻✼ ★✾✿❀✺❁✼ ❂ ★✫ ✲✾❃❄❅✺✿ ✶✹✺✻✼✽❆✹✺✻✼ ★✾✿❀✺❁✼
★✩✪✫✬✭✮ ✯✮✰✫✯✬✱✲✫ ✳✴✬✯✬✳✫✮✯✱✰✫✱✳ ✵✩✯ ✶✴✬✰✮ ✫✱✷✮ ✩✸✳
☛☞☛✌☛✍✎✍✏✑✒✓
Figure 265: Phase time overcurrent voltage restraint characteristic

FUNCTION
This setting enables and disables the phase time overcurrent protection element.

SIGNAL SOURCE
Selects the signal source for the phase time overcurrent protection element.

INPUT
Selects how phase current input quantities are interpreted by the Product. Inputs can be selected as fundamental
phasor magnitudes or total waveform RMS magnitudes as required by the application.

PICKUP
Specifies the phase time overcurrent pickup level in per-unit values.

CURVE
Selects the time inverse overcurrent curve style.

TD MULTIPLIER
When TOC1 CURVE setting is set to Definite Time, this setting defines time delay to element pickup. When TOC1
CURVE setting is set to any inverse time curve, this setting defines inverse curve multiplier, used in the chosen
curve equation.

RESET
The “Instantaneous” reset method is intended for applications with other relays, such as most static relays, which
set the energy capacity directly to zero when the current falls below the reset threshold. The “Timed” reset method
can be used where the relay must coordinate with electromechanical relays.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 504
Chapter 9 - Settings

VOLTAGE RESTRAINT
Enables and disables the phase time overcurrent voltage restraint feature.

BLOCK A
Assertion of the operand assigned to this setting blocks phase A of the phase time overcurrent element.

EVENTS
Enables and disables the logging of phase time overcurrent events in the sequence of events recorder
✁✂✂✄☎✆
✠✒✏ ✁ ✂✌✍✓
☛✞☎✍✂✄✌☎✔
✁✱✪✲✣✙✳✛✓

✁✂✂✄☎✆
✠✒✏ ✁ ✂✌✍✓
✕✟✌✍✖✗✏ ✔
✌✯✯✛✰

✁✂✂✄☎✆
✠✒✏ ✁ ✂✌✍✓
✕✟✌✍✖✗✕✔
✌✯✯✛✰
✁✂✂✄☎✆
✁✂✂✄☎✆
✠✒✏ ✁ ✂✌✍✓
✠✒✏ ✁ ✂✌✍✓ ✄☎✠✞✂✔
✕✟✌✍✖✗✍✔
✠✒✏ ✁ ✂✌✍✓
✌✯✯✛✰ ✠✄✍✖✞✠✔
✠✒✏ ✁ ✂✌✍✓
✁✂✂✄☎✆ ✍✞✎✘✁✔
✠✒✏ ✁ ✂✌✍✓ ✠✒✏ ✁ ✂✌✍✓
✌✞✎✍✁✔ ✂✑ ✝✞✟✂✄✠✟✄✁✎✔
✄✏
✠✒✏ ✁ ✂✌✍✓
✄✕ ✎✁ ✁✂✔ ☛✟✁☞✟✌✆✄✍ ✌✠✁✎✏☎✑
✄✍ ✶✷✸ ✬✭✮ ✠✒✏ ✁ ✂✌✍✓ ✏ ✠✖✠
✄✏ ✠✄✍✖✞✠
✙✚✛✏✕✍ ✙✚✛✏✍✕ ✠✒✏ ✁ ✂✌✍✓ ✏ ✑✠✌
✬✭✮ ✝✞✟✂✄✠✟✡ ✄☎✠✞✂
✜ ✠✒✏ ✁ ✂✌✍✓ ✏ ✌✠
✘✏✕ ✘✏✍ ✙✜
✍✪✣✧✢✣✪✜✙ ✝✢✣✜✤✥✣✤✙✦ ✙✜ ✠✤✧★✢✥ ✶✷✸ ✬✭✮ ✠✒✏ ✁ ✂✌✍✓ ✕ ✠✖✠
✬✭✮ ✝✢✣✜✤✥✣✤✙✦✗✠✩✪✫✙ ✏ ✄✕ ✠✄✍✖✞✠
✙✜ ✠✒✏ ✁ ✂✌✍✓ ✕ ✑✠✌
✘✕✍ ✘✕✏ ✙✜ ✠✤✧★✢✥
✍✪✣✧✢✣✪✜✙ ✝✢✣✜✤✥✣✤✙✦ ✜ ✠✒✏ ✁ ✂✌✍✓ ✕ ✌✠
✬✭✮ ✝✢✣✜✤✥✣✤✙✦✗✠✩✪✫✙ ✕
✙✜ ✶✷✸ ✬✭✮ ✠✒✏ ✁ ✂✌✍✓ ✍ ✠✖✠
✘✍✏ ✘✍✕ ✄✍ ✠✄✍✖✞✠
✍✪✣✧✢✣✪✜✙ ✝✢✣✜✤✥✣✤✙✦ ✙✜ ✠✤✧★✢✥ ✠✒✏ ✁ ✂✌✍✓ ✍ ✑✠✌
✝✢✣✜✤✥✣✤✙✦✗✠✩✪✫✙ ✍
✜ ✠✒✏ ✁ ✂✌✍✓ ✍ ✌✠
✁✂✂✄☎✆ ✴✵ ✠✒✏ ✁ ✂✌✍✓ ✠✖✠
✠✒✏ ✁ ✂✌✍✓ ✘✌✟✂
✎✁ ✂✎✏✄☎✂✔ ✴✵ ✠✒✏ ✁ ✂✌✍✓ ✌✠
✁✱✪✲✣✙✳

✶✷✸ ✠✒✏ ✁ ✂✌✍✓ ✑✠✌

✹✺✻✼✻✺✶✽✾✿✸✵

Figure 266: Phase time overcurrent 1 logic

9.7.3.3 PHASE INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT (ANSI 50P, IEC PIOC)

SETTINGS > GROUPED ELEMENTS > SETTING GROUP 1(6) > PHASE CURRENT >PHASE IOC <n>

Note:
Only Phase IOC 1 is shown

■ PHASE IOC 1 PHASE IOC 1

■ ó FUNCTION: Disabled Range: Disabled, Enabled

PHASE IOC 1 SIGNAL Range: SRC <n>

ô
SOURCE: SRC 1 Not applicable to relays with 9-2LE

N60-1601-0125-861-1 505
Chapter 9 - Settings

PHASE IOC1
ô Range: 0.005 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001
PICKUP: 1.000 pu
PHASE IOC1 PICKUP
ô Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
DELAY: 0.00 s
PHASE IOC1 RESET
ô Range: 0.00 to 600.00 in steps of 0.01
DELAY : 0.00 s
PHASE IOC1 BLOCK A:
ô Range: FlexLogic operand
Off
PHASE IOC1 BLOCK B:
ô Range: FlexLogic operand
Off
PHASE IOC1 BLOCK C:
ô Range: FlexLogic operand
Off
PHASE IOC1 Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
ô
TARGET: Self-reset Not applicable to relays with 9-2LE
PHASE IOC1 Range: Disabled, Enabled
ñ
EVENTS: Disabled Not applicable to relays with 9-2LE

The phase instantaneous overcurrent element can be used as an instantaneous element with no intentional delay
or as a definite time element. The input current is the fundamental phasor magnitude.

FUNCTION
This setting enables and disables the phase instantaneous overcurrent protection element.

SOURCE
Selects the signal source for the phase instantaneous overcurrent protection element.

PICKUP
Specifies the phase instantaneous overcurrent pickup level in per-unit values.

DELAY
Delays the assertion of the PHASE IOC OP operands. It is used to achieve timing coordination with other elements
and relays.

RESET DELAY
Specifies a delay for the reset of the phase instantaneous overcurrent element between the operate output state
and the return to logic 0 after the input passes outside the defined pickup range. This setting is used to ensure that
the relay output contacts are closed long enough to ensure reception by downstream equipment.

BLOCK A
Assertion of the operand assigned to this setting block’s phase A of the phase instantaneous overcurrent element.

EVENTS
Enables and disables the logging of phase instantaneous overcurrent events in the sequence of events recorder.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 506
Chapter 9 - Settings

☛☞✌✌✍✎✏☛ ✽✾☞✿✾❀✏✍❁ ❀❂☞❃❄✎❅☛

☛☞✌✌✍✎✏
☛☞✌✌✍✎✏ ✮✣✜✭✛✯ ✲✘✗✕✳ ✮❆✦✧✓ ✥✪✩✑ ✦ ✮❇✮
✚✛✔✜✢✣✤✔
✮✣✜✭✛✯ ✹✘✺✘✢ ✲✘✗✕✳ ✮❆✦✧✓ ✥✪✩✑ ✦ ✲✮✪
✆✡✟ ✠✰✡ ✴✵✶✵ ✮❆✦✧✓ ✥✪✩✑ ✬ ✮❇✮
✑ ✒ ✓✔✕✖✗✘✙
✥✦ ✱ ✮✣✜✭✛✯ ✮❆✦✧✓ ✥✪✩✑ ✬ ✲✮✪
✴✠✷✸ ✮❆✦✧✓ ✥✪✩✑ ✩ ✮❇✮
✆✡✟ ✠✰✡ ✴✵✶✵ ✮❆✦✧✓ ✥✪✩✑ ✩ ✲✮✪
☛☞✌✌✍✎✏
✧✤✛★✜✘ ✥✬ ✱ ✮✣✜✭✛✯
✴✠✷✸
✒ ✥✦ ✽✾☞✿✾❀✏✍❁ ❀❂☞❃❄✎❅☛
✆✡✟ ✠✰✡ ✴✵✶✵
✒ ✥✬ ✮❆✦✧✓ ✥✪✩✑ ✦ ✪✮
✥✩ ✱ ✮✣✜✭✛✯ ✮❆✦✧✓ ✥✪✩✑ ✬ ✪✮
✒ ✥✩ ✴✠✷✸
✮❆✦✧✓ ✥✪✩✑ ✩ ✪✮

☛☞✌✌✍✎✏☛ ✽✾☞✿✾❀✏✍❁ ❀❂☞❃❄✎❅

✬✗✤✜✭ ✦ ✻✼ ✮❆✦✧✓ ✥✪✩✑ ✮❇✮
✒ ✪✫✫
✽✾☞✿✾❀✏✍❁ ❀❂☞❃❄✎❅
✬✗✤✜✭ ✬
✻✼ ✮❆✦✧✓ ✥✪✩✑ ✪✮
✒ ✪✫✫
✬✗✤✜✭ ✩ ✽✾☞✿✾❀✏✍❁ ❀❂☞❃❄✎❅
✒ ✪✫✫ ❈❉❊ ✮❆✦✧✓ ✥✪✩✑ ✲✮✪
✁✂✄☎☎✆ ✝✞✟✠

Figure 267: Phase instantaneous overcurrent logic

9.7.3.4 PHASE DIRECTIONAL OVERCURRENT (ANSI 67P, IEC PDOC/PTOC)

SETTINGS > GROUPED ELEMENTS > SETTING GROUP 1(6) > PHASE CURRENT >PHASE
DIRECTIONAL<n>

Note:
Only Phase Directional 1 is shown

■ PHASE PHASE DIR 1

■ DIRECTIONAL 1 ó FUNCTION: Disabled Range: Disabled, Enabled

PHASE DIR 1 SIGNAL Range: SRC <n>

ô
SOURCE: SRC 1 Not applicable to relays with 9-2LE
PHASE DIR 1 BLOCK:
ô Range: FlexLogic operand
Off
PHASE DIR 1
ô Range: 0 to 359° in steps of 1
ECA: 30°
PHASE DIR POL V1
ô Range: 0.004 to 3.000 pu in steps of 0.001
THRESHOLD: 0.700 pu
PHASE DIR 1 BLOCK
ô Range: No, Yes
WHEN V MEM EXP: No
PHASE DIR 1 Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
ô
TARGET: Self-reset Not applicable to relays with 9-2LE
PHASE DIR 1 Range: Disabled, Enabled
ñ
EVENTS: Disabled Not applicable to relays with 9-2LE

Note:
The TARGET setting is not user-selectable and forced to Disabled. If Targets are required from directional elements, it can
be achieved by assigning directional element output to a digital element, where targets selection can be used as required.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 507
Chapter 9 - Settings

The phase directional elements (one for each of phases A, B, and C) determine the phase current flow direction for
steady state and fault conditions and can be used to control the operation of the phase overcurrent elements via the
BLOCK inputs of these elements.
✽
✺✻ ✾
✻✼
✹✺
❂❁✮✯

✠✌☛✍✸✢★✏✑✒✓✔✕✖
✎✏✑✒✓ ✏✢✣✒✔
✧✔✓ ✬ ✶✮ ✯ ✷✏✣

✠✥✙✒

✠✌☛✍✎✏✑✒✓✔✕✖ ✗✌
✫☞✌
✧✔✓ ✬ ✭✮ ✯

✠✡☞

✠✡☞

✠☞☛ ✠✡☛
❀❁✮✯

✥✦✏✧✙✛✧ ★✙✛ ✥✦✏✧✔ ✌ ✥✙✒✏✛✜✩✏✓✜✙✢✪

✠✥✙✒ ✘ ✠✡☞✰✍✱✲✳✫☞✌✖ ✘ ✚✙✒✏✛✜✩✜✢✣ ✴✙✒✓✏✣✔

✗✌ ✘ ✙✚✔✛✏✓✜✢✣ ✤✑✛✛✔✢✓
✯
✫☞✌ ✘ ✫✒✔✵✔✢✓ ☞✦✏✛✏✤✓✔✛✜✧✓✜✤ ✌✢✣✒✔ ✬ ✭✮

✁✂ ✄✄☎✁✆✝✞✟

Figure 268: Phase A directional polarization

This element is intended to apply a block signal to an overcurrent element to prevent an operation when current is
flowing in a particular direction. The direction of current flow is determined by measuring the phase angle between
the current from the phase CTs and the line-line voltage from the VTs, based on the 90° or quadrature connection. If
there is a requirement to supervise overcurrent elements for flows in opposite directions, such as can happen
through a bus-tie breaker, program two phase directional elements with opposite element characteristic angle (ECA)
settings.
To increase security for three phase faults very close to the VTs used to measure the polarizing voltage, a voltage
memory feature is incorporated. This feature stores the polarizing voltage the moment before the voltage collapses,
and uses it to determine direction. The voltage memory remains valid for one second after the voltage has
collapsed.
The main component of the phase directional element is the phase angle comparator with two inputs: the operating
signal (phase current) and the polarizing signal (the line voltage, shifted in the leading direction by the characteristic
angle, ECA).
The table shows the operating and polarizing signals used for phase directional control.

Operating and polarizing signals

Phase Operating signal Polarizing signal Vpol
ABC phase sequence ACB phase sequence
A angle of IA angle of VBC x (1ÐECA) angle of VCB x (1ÐECA)
B angle of IB angle of VCA x (1ÐECA) angle of VAC x 1ÐECA)
C angle of IC angle of VAB x (1ÐECA) angle of VBA x (1ÐECA)

N60-1601-0125-861-1 508
Chapter 9 - Settings

Mode of operation
● When the function is Disabled or the operating current is below 5% x CT nominal, the element output is logic
0
● When the function is Enabled or the operating current is above 5% x CT nominal, and the polarizing voltage
is above the PRODUCT SETUP > DISPLAY PROPERTIES > VOLTAGE CUT-OFF LEVEL value, the
element output is dependent on the phase angle between the operating and polarizing signals:
○ The element output is logic 0 when the operating current is within polarizing voltage ±90°
○ For all other angles, the element output is logic 1
● Once the voltage memory has expired, the phase overcurrent elements under directional control can be set
to block or trip on overcurrent as follows:
○ When BLOCK WHEN V MEM EXP is set to Yes, the directional element blocks the operation of any
phase overcurrent element under directional control when voltage memory expires
○ When BLOCK WHEN V MEM EXP is set to No, the directional element allows tripping of phase
overcurrent elements under directional control when voltage memory expires
In all cases, directional blocking is permitted to resume when the polarizing voltage becomes greater than the
polarizing voltage threshold.

Settings

PHASE DIR 1 FUNCTION

This setting enables and disables the phase directional overcurrent protection element.

PHASE DIR 1 SIGNAL SOURCE

This setting is used to select the source for the operating and polarizing signals. The operating current for the phase
directional element is the phase current for the selected current source. The polarizing voltage is the line voltage
from the phase VTs, based on the 90° or quadrature connection and shifted in the leading direction by the element
characteristic angle (ECA).

PHASE DIR 1 BLOCK

Assertion of the operand assigned to this setting blocks operation of the phase directional overcurrent element.

PHASE DIR 1 ECA

This setting specifies the element characteristic angle, that is, the angle by which the polarizing voltage is shifted in
the leading direction to achieve dependable operation. In the design of the UR-series elements, a block is applied to
an element by asserting logic 1 at the blocking input. Program the phase directional overcurrent element using this
setting so that the output is logic 1 for current in the non-tripping direction.

PHASE DIR 1 POL V THRESHOLD

This setting is used to establish the minimum level of voltage for which the phase angle measurement is healthy
and reliable. Do not set this setting too low because the element can continue using the actual voltage already
distorted by the fault instead of using healthy memory voltage—this can cause wrong directional discrimination.

PHASE DIR 1 BLOCK WHEN V MEM EXP

This setting is used to select the required operation upon expiration of voltage memory. When set to "Yes," the
directional element blocks the operation of any phase overcurrent element under directional control, when voltage
memory expires. When set to "No," the directional element allows tripping of phase overcurrent elements under
directional control.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 509
Chapter 9 - Settings

PHASE DIR 1 EVENTS

This setting enables and disables the logging of phase directional overcurrent events in the sequence of events
recorder.

Note:
The phase directional element responds to the forward load current. In the case of a following reverse fault, the element
needs some time—in the order of 8 ms—to establish a blocking signal. Some protection elements, such as instantaneous
overcurrent, respond to reverse faults before the blocking signal is established. Therefore, a coordination time of at least 10
ms must be added to all the instantaneous protection elements under the supervision of the phase directional element. If
current reversal is of concern, a longer delay—in the order of 20 ms—is needed.

Logic diagram
✌✂✍✍✝☛✆
✎✏✑✒✓ ✔✕✖ ✗
✘✙✚✛✜✕✢✚
✓✹❂❃❄✫❅✭✗

✌✂✍✍✝☛✆
❆❇❈
✎✏✑✒✓ ✔✕✖ ✗
✣✤✢✛✥
✢✵✵✭✳
✌✂✍✍✝☛✆

✌✂✍✍✝☛✆ ✎✏✑✒✓ ✔✕✖ ✗ ✓✛✑

✎✏✑✒✓ ✔✕✖ ✗ ✒✢✙✖✛✓ ✕ ✳✴✳✿ ❀❁ ✑✚✔ ✖✙✚ ✳

✕✑ ✧❀✪❄
✗ ✁✂✄✁☎✆✝✞ ☎✟✂✠✡☛☞
✒✫✬✭✑✣✛ ✒✫✬✭✑✛✣ ✕ ✢✖ ✎✏ ✔✕✖✗ ✣✤✥
✌✂✍✍✝☛✆
✧✣✛ ✧✛✣
✎✏✑✒✓ ✔✕✖ ✗ ✎✢✤ ✧
✜✏✖✓✒✏✢✤✔ ✁✂✄✁☎✆✝✞ ☎✟✂✠✡☛☞
✢✖ ✎✏ ✔✕✖✗ ✣✤✥ ✑
✶✙✯✫ ✧ ✷✸✫✹ ✧ ★✺✹
✶✙✯✫ ✧ ✻✫✻✪✼✽ ✷✸✫✹
★✓★✢✖✮ ✜✕★✓✖
✧ ✾ ★✺✹
✧ ★✕✚✕★✙★ ✗ ❉✽❉❄✫
✗ ✯✫❉
❆❇❈

✌✂✍✍✝☛✆ ✙✒✓ ✑✛✜✙✑✤ ✧✢✤✜✑❙✓

✎✏✑✒✓ ✔✕✖ ✗ ✣✤✢✛✥ ✢✛
✦✏✓✚ ✧ ★✓★ ✓✩✎ ✙✒✓ ★✓★✢✖✕❚✓✔ ✧✢✤✜✑❙✓
✚✪
✮✫✯

✁✂✄✁☎✆✝✞ ☎✟✂✠✡☛☞
❊❋●❍■ ❏ ❑▲▼◆❖ ❍◆P◆❑●◗ ❘▲ ❊❋●❍■ ● ✎✏ ✔✕✖✗ ✣✤✥ ✣

✁✂✄✁☎✆✝✞ ☎✟✂✠✡☛☞
❊❋●❍■ ❖ ❑▲▼◆❖ ❍◆P◆❑●◗ ❘▲ ❊❋●❍■ ● ✎✏ ✔✕✖✗ ✣✤✥ ✛

✰✱✲✳✲✰✑✲✴✛✔✖

Figure 269: Phase directional logic

9.7.4 NEUTRAL CURRENT

SETTINGS > GROUPED ELEMENTS > SETTING GROUP 1(6) > NEUTRAL CURRENT
■ NEUTRAL CURRENT ■ NEUTRAL TOC <n>
■ ó ■ NOT ALL UR MODELS

■ NEUTRAL IOC <n>

ô NOT ALL UR MODELS
■
■ NEUTRAL
ñ NOT ALL UR MODELS
■ DIRECTIONAL <n>

N60-1601-0125-861-1 510
Chapter 9 - Settings

9.7.4.1 NEUTRAL TIME OVERCURRENT (ANSI 51N, IEC PTOC)

SETTINGS > GROUPED ELEMENTS > SETTING GROUP 1(6) > NEUTRAL CURRENT >NEUTRAL TOC <n>

Note:
Only Neutral TOC 1 is shown

■ NEUTRAL TOC 1 NEUTRAL TOC 1

■ ó FUNCTION: Disabled Range: Disabled, Enabled

NEUTRAL TOC 1 SIGNAL Range: SRC <n>

ô
SOURCE: SRC 1 Not applicable to relays with 9-2LE
NEUTRAL TOC 1
ô Range: Phasor, RMS
INPUT: Phasor
NEUTRAL TOC1
ô Range:0.020 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001
PICKUP: 1.000 pu
NEUTRAL TOC1
ô Range: see Overcurrent Curve Types table
CURVE: IEEE Mod Inv
NEUTRAL TOC1
ô Range: 0.00 to 600.00 in steps of 0.01
TD MULTIPLIER: 1.00
NEUTRAL TOC1
ô Range: Instantaneous, Timed
RESET: Instantaneous
NEUTRAL TOC1 BLOCK:
ô Range: FlexLogic operand
Off
NEUTRAL TOC1 Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
ô
TARGET: Self-reset Not applicable to relays with 9-2LE
NEUTRAL TOC1 Range: Disabled, Enabled
ñ
EVENTS: Disabled Not applicable to relays with 9-2LE

The neutral time overcurrent element can provide a desired time-delay operating characteristic versus the applied
current or be used as a simple definite time element. The neutral current input value is a quantity calculated as 3I0
from the phase currents and can be programmed as fundamental phasor magnitude or total waveform RMS
magnitude as required by the application.
Two methods of resetting operation are available: Timed and Instantaneous (see the Inverse TOC Curve
Characteristics section for details on curve setup, trip times, and reset operation). When the element is blocked, the
time accumulator resets according to the reset characteristic. For example, if the element reset characteristic is set
to “Instantaneous” and the element is blocked, the time accumulator clears immediately.

NEUTRAL TOC1 FUNCTION

This setting enables and disables the neutral time overcurrent protection element.

NEUTRAL TOC1 SIGNAL SOURCE

this setting selects the signal source for the neutral time overcurrent protection element.

NEUTRAL TOC1 INPUT

This setting selects how neutral current input quantities are interpreted by the Product. Inputs can be selected as
fundamental phasor magnitudes or total waveform RMS magnitudes as required by the application.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 511
Chapter 9 - Settings

NEUTRAL TOC1 PICKUP

This setting specifies the neutral time overcurrent pickup level in per-unit values.

NEUTRAL TOC1 CURVE

This setting selects the inverse time overcurrent curve style.

NEUTRAL TOC1 TD MULTIPLIER

This setting specifies a multiple of the base curve shape specified by the CURVE setting. Programming this value to
zero results in an instantaneous response to all current levels above pickup.

NEUTRAL TOC1 RESET

The “Instantaneous” reset method is intended for applications with other relays, such as most static relays, which
set the energy capacity directly to zero when the current falls below the reset threshold. The “Timed” reset method
can be used where the relay must coordinate with electromechanical relays.

NEUTRAL TOC1 BLOCK

Assertion of the operand assigned to this setting blocks operation of the neutral time overcurrent element.

NEUTRAL TOC1 EVENTS

This setting enables and disables the logging of neutral time overcurrent events in the sequence of events recorder

SETTING
NEUTRAL TOC1
INPUT
SETTING NEUTRAL TOC1
NEUTRAL TOC1 PICKUP
FUNCTION NEUTRAL TOC1
Enabled = 1 CURVE
NEUTRAL TOC1
TD MULTIPLIER
NEUTRAL TOC 1 FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
SETTING
RESET NEUTRAL TOC1 PKP
NEUTRAL TOC1
AND RUN IN PICKUP NEUTRAL TOC1 DPO
SOURCE
NEUTRAL TOC1 OP
IN t
I
SETTING
NEUTRAL TOC1
BLOCK
Off = 0 827034A4.VSD

Figure 270: Neutral time overcurrent 1 logic

9.7.4.2 NEUTRAL INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT (ANSI 50N, IEC PIOC)

SETTINGS > GROUPED ELEMENTS > SETTING GROUP 1(6) > NEUTRAL CURRENT >NEUTRAL IOC <n>

Note:
Only Neutral IOC 1 is shown

■ NEUTRAL IOC 1 NEUTRAL IOC 1

■ ó FUNCTION: Disabled Range: Disabled, Enabled

N60-1601-0125-861-1 512
Chapter 9 - Settings

NEUTRAL IOC 1 SIGNAL Range: SRC <n>

ô
SOURCE: SRC 1 Not applicable to relays with 9-2LE
NEUTRAL IOC1
ô Range: 0.020 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001
PICKUP: 1.000 pu
NEUTRAL IOC1 PICKUP
ô Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
DELAY: 0.00 s
NEUTRAL IOC1 RESET
ô Range: 0.00 to 600.00 in steps of 0.01
DELAY : 0.00 s
NEUTRAL IOC1 BLOCK:
ô Range: FlexLogic operand
Off
NEUTRAL IOC1 Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
ô
TARGET: Self-reset Not applicable to relays with 9-2LE
NEUTRAL IOC1 Range: Disabled, Enabled
ñ
EVENTS: Disabled Not applicable to relays with 9-2LE

The neutral instantaneous overcurrent element can be used as an instantaneous function with no intentional delay
or as a definite time function. The element essentially responds to the magnitude of a neutral current fundamental
frequency phasor calculated from the phase currents. A positive-sequence restraint is applied for better
performance. A small portion (6.25%) of the positive-sequence current magnitude is subtracted from the zero-
sequence current magnitude when forming the operating quantity of the element as follows:
Iop = 3 x (|I_0| - K x |I_1|) where K = 1/16
The positive-sequence restraint allows for more sensitive settings by counterbalancing spurious zero-sequence
currents resulting from:
● System unbalances under heavy load conditions
● Transformation errors of current transformers (CTs) during double-line and three-phase faults
● Switch-off transients during double-line and three-phase faults
The positive-sequence restraint must be considered when testing for pickup accuracy and response time (multiple
of pickup). The operating quantity depends on how test currents are injected into the relay, where single-phase
injection is Iop = 0.9375 x Iinjected and three-phase pure zero-sequence injection is:

Iop = 3 x Iinjected

NEUTRAL IOC1 FUNCTION

This setting enables and disables the neutral instantaneous overcurrent protection element.

NEUTRAL IOC1 SIGNAL SOURCE

This setting selects the signal source for the neutral instantaneous overcurrent protection element.

NEUTRAL IOC1 PICKUP

This setting specifies the neutral instantaneous overcurrent pickup level in per-unit values.

NEUTRAL IOC1 PICKUP DELAY

This setting delays the assertion of the NEUTRAL IOC OP operands. It is used to achieve timing coordination with
other elements and relays.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 513
Chapter 9 - Settings

NEUTRAL IOC1 RESET DELAY

This setting specifies a delay for the reset of the neutral instantaneous overcurrent element between the operate
output state and the return to logic 0 after the input passes outside the defined pickup range. This setting is used to
ensure that the relay output contacts are closed long enough to ensure reception by downstream equipment.

NEUTRAL IOC1 BLOCK

Assertion of the operand assigned to this setting blocks operation of the neutral instantaneous overcurrent element.

NEUTRAL IOC1 EVENTS

This setting enables and disables the logging of neutral instantaneous overcurrent events in the sequence of events
recorder.

✯✂✰✰✝☛✆
✯✂✰✰✝☛✆✯
✌✍✎✏✑✒✓ ✔✕✖✗ ✘✎✌✖✏✔✕✌✙ ✌✍✎✏✑✒✓ ✔✕✖✗
✯✂✰✰✝☛✆ ✚✔✖✛✎✚ ✣✍✓✒✻ ✙
✍✱✲✳✴✵✶✷✗ ✁✂✄✁☎✆✝✞ ☎✟✂✠✡☛☞
✌✍✎✏✑✒✓ ✔✕✖✗
✌✍✎✏✑✒✓ ✔✕✖✗ ✚✔✖✛✎✚✙ ✌✍✎✏✑✒✓ ✔✕✖✗ ✚✛✚
✑✍✜✍✏ ✣✍✓✒✻ ✙
✯✂✰✰✝☛✆ ✌✍✎✏✑✒✓ ✔✕✖✗ ✣✚✕
✒✌✣ ✑✎✌ ✼✚✛✚
✼✑✜✏ ✌✍✎✏✑✒✓ ✔✕✖✗ ✕✚
✌✍✎✏✑✒✓ ✔✕✖✗ ✢✓✕✖✛✙ ✽✾ ✿ ✔✸✹ ✿ ❀ ✛ ✿ ✔✸✗ ✿ ❁ ✚✔✖✛✎✚

✕✺✺✷✹

✯✂✰✰✝☛✆

✌✍✎✏✑✒✓ ✔✕✖✗ ✜✕✎✑✖✍✙

✔✸✹
✤✥✦✧★✩✪✩✫✬✭✮

Figure 271: Neutral IOC1 logic

9.7.4.3 NEUTRAL DIRECTIONAL OVERCURRENT (ANSI 67N, IEC PDEF/PTOC)

SETTINGS > GROUPED ELEMENTS > SETTING GROUP 1(6) > NEUTRAL CURRENT > NEUTRAL
DIRECTIONAL OC <n>

Note:
Only Neutral Directional OC 1 is shown

■ NEUTRAL NEUTRAL DIR OC1

■ DIRECTIONAL OC1 1 ó FUNCTION: Disabled Range: Disabled, Enabled

NEUTRAL DIR OC 1 Range: SRC <n>

ô
SOURCE: SRC 1 Not applicable to relays with 9-2LE
NEUTRAL DIR OC1
ô Range: Voltage, Current, Dual, Dual-V, Dual-I
POLARIZING: Voltage
NEUTRAL DIR OC1 POL
ô Range: Calculated V0, Measured VX
VOLT: Calculated V0
NEUTRAL DIR OC1 OP
ô Range: Calculated 3I0, Measured IG
CURR: Calculated 3I0
NEUTRAL DIR OC1 POSSEQ
ô Range: 0.000 to 0.500 in steps of 0.001
RESTRAINT: 0.063
NEUTRAL DIR OC1
ô Range: 0.00 to 250.00 Ω in steps of 0.01
OFFSET: 0.00 Ω
NEUTRAL DIR OC1 FWD
ô Range: –90 to 90° in steps of 1
ECA: 75° Lag

N60-1601-0125-861-1 514
Chapter 9 - Settings

NEUTRAL DIR OC1 FWD

ô Range: 40 to 90° in steps of 1
LIMIT ANGLE: 90°
NEUTRAL DIR OC1 FWD
ô Range: 0.006 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001
PICKUP: 0.050 pu
NEUTRAL DIR OC1 REV
ô Range: 40 to 90° in steps of 1
LIMIT ANGLE: 90°
NEUTRAL DIR OC1 REV
ô Range: 0.006 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001
PICKUP: 0.050 pu
NEUTRAL DIR OC1 BLK:
ô Range: FlexLogic operand
Off
NEUTRAL DIR OC1 Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
ô
TARGET: Self-reset Not applicable to relays with 9-2LE
NEUTRAL DIR OC1 Range: Disabled, Enabled
ñ
EVENTS: Disabled Not applicable to relays with 9-2LE

The neutral directional overcurrent element provides both forward and reverse fault direction indications for the
NEUTRAL DIR OC1 FWD and NEUTRAL DIR OC1 REV operands, respectively. The output operand is asserted if
the magnitude of the operating current is above a pickup level (overcurrent unit) and the fault direction is seen as
forward or reverse, respectively (directional unit).
The overcurrent unit responds to the magnitude of a fundamental frequency phasor of either the neutral current
calculated from the phase currents or the ground current. There are separate pickup settings for the forward-looking
and reverse-looking functions. If set to use the calculated 3I_0, the element applies a positive-sequence restraint for
better performance: a small user-programmable portion of the positive-sequence current magnitude is subtracted
from the zero-sequence current magnitude when forming the operating quantity.
Iop = 3 x (|I_0| - K x |I_1|)
The positive-sequence restraint allows for more sensitive settings by counterbalancing spurious zero-sequence
currents resulting from
● System unbalances under heavy load conditions
● Transformation errors of current transformers (CTs) during double-line and three-phase faults
● Switch-off transients during double-line and three-phase faults
The positive-sequence restraint must be considered when testing for pickup accuracy and response time (multiple
of pickup). The operating quantity depends on the way the test currents are injected into the relay
● Single-phase injection: Iop = (1 – K) x Iinjected
● Three-phase pure zero-sequence injection: Iop = 3 x Iinjected.
The positive-sequence restraint is removed for low currents. If the positive-sequence current is below 0.8 pu, the
restraint is removed by changing the constant K to zero. This facilitates better response to high-resistance faults
when the unbalance is very small and there is no danger of excessive CT errors as the current is low.
The directional unit uses the zero-sequence current (I_0) or ground current (IG) for fault direction discrimination and
can be programmed to use either zero-sequence voltage (Calculated V0 or Measured VX), ground current (IG),
or both for polarizing. Both zero-sequence current (I_0) and ground current (IG) must be greater than the CUT-OFF
LEVEL setting value to be validated as the operating quantity for directional current. The following tables define the
neutral directional overcurrent element. V_0 is the zero-sequence voltage, I_0 is the zero-sequence current, ECA is
the element characteristic angle, and IG is the ground current.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 515
Chapter 9 - Settings

Quantities for "calculated 3I0" configuration

Directional unit quantities Overcurrent unit quantities
Polarizing mode Direction Compared phasors
Voltage Forward –V_0 + Z_offset x I_0 I_0 x 1ÐECA Iop = 3(|I_0| – K x |I_1|) if |I1| > 0.8 pu
Iop = 3(|I_0|) if |I1| £ 0.8 pu
Reverse –V_0 + Z_offset x I_0 –I_0 x 1ÐECA
Current Forward IG I_0
Reverse IG –I_0
Dual, Dual-V, Dual-I Forward –V_0 + Z_offset x I_0 I_0 x 1ÐECA
or
IG I_0
Reverse –V_0 + Z_offset x I_0 –I_0 x 1ÐECA
or
IG –I_0

Quantities for "measured IG" configuration

Directional unit quantities Overcurrent unit quantities
Polarizing mode Direction Compared phasors
Voltage Forward –V_0 + Z_offset x IG/3 IG x 1ÐECA Iop = |IG|
Reverse –V_0 + Z_offset x IG/3 –IG x 1ÐECA
where:
V_0 = 1/3 x (VAG + VBG + VCG) = zero sequence voltage
I_0 = 1/3 x IN = 1/3 x (IA + IB + IC) = zero sequence current
● ECA = element characteristic angle
● IG = ground current
● Z_offset is the offset impedance, for which magnitude is the OFFSET setting and angle is the FWD ECA
When NEUTRAL DIR OC1 POL VOLT is set to Measured VX, one-third of this voltage is used in place of V_0.
The following figure explains the usage of the voltage polarized directional unit of the element.
The figure shows the voltage-polarized phase angle comparator characteristics for a phase A to ground fault, with:
● ECA = 90° (element characteristic angle = centerline of operating characteristic)
● FWD LA = 80° (forward limit angle = the ± angular limit with the ECA for operation)
● REV LA = 80° (reverse limit angle = the ± angular limit with the ECA for operation)
The element incorporates a current reversal logic. If the reverse direction is indicated for at least 1.25 of a power
system cycle, the prospective forward indication is delayed by 1.5 of a power system cycle. The element is
designed to emulate an electromechanical directional device. Larger operating and polarizing signals results in
faster directional discrimination bringing more security to the element operation.
The forward-looking function is designed to be more secure as compared to the reverse-looking function, and
therefore is to be used for the tripping direction. The reverse-looking function is designed to be faster as compared
to the forward-looking function and is to be used for the blocking direction. This allows for better protection
coordination.
Take the bias into account when using the neutral directional overcurrent element to directionalize other protection
elements.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 516
Chapter 9 - Settings

✗✘☛✚✛ ✜✢✒✏
✭✣☛ ✤☞ ✥✦✧ ✤☞
✜✢✒✏ ✜✢✒✏
☛☞✌
✍✎✏✑✏✎✏✒✓✏✔

✭✣☛ ★✩✏✎✪✫✢✒✬ ✥✦✧ ★✩✏✎✪✫✢✒✬

✭✏✬✢✮✒ ✭✏✬✢✮✒

✤☞ ✤☞

✘✙✚✛ ✜✢✒✏
✣✖☞

✣✖☞ ✜✢✒✏

✗✣✖☞ ✜✢✒✏

✗✘✙✚✛ ✜✢✒✏ ✤☞

☛✖✌ ✤☞

☛✕✌

✭✣☛ ✤☞ ✥✦✧ ✤☞
✜✢✒✏ ✜✢✒✏
✘☛✚✛ ✜✢✒✏
✁✂ ✄☎✆✝✞✟✠✡

Figure 272: Neutral directional voltage-polarized characteristic

NEUTRAL DIR OC1 POLARIZING

This setting selects the polarizing mode for the directional unit.
● If Voltage polarizing is selected, the element uses the zero-sequence voltage angle for polarization. The user
can use either the zero-sequence voltage V_0 calculated from the phase voltages, or the zero-sequence
voltage supplied externally as the auxiliary voltage V_X, both from the NEUTRAL DIR OC1 SOURCE. The
calculated V_0 can be used as polarizing voltage only if the voltage transformers are connected in Wye. The
auxiliary voltage can be used as the polarizing voltage provided SYSTEM SETUP > AC INPUTS > VOLTAGE
BANK > AUXILIARY VT CONNECTION is set to Vn and the auxiliary voltage is connected to a zero-
sequence voltage source (such as broken delta connected secondary of VTs). The zero sequence voltage
V_0 must be greater than PRODUCT SETUP > DISPLAY PROPERTIES > VOLTAGE CUT-OFF LEVEL to
be validated for use as polarizing signal. Additionally, when offset impedance is applied and zero-sequence
current is above 0.2 pu, compensated zero-sequence voltage -V_0 + Z_offset x I_0 must be above 0.02 pu in
order to discriminate fault direction; otherwise when zero-sequence current is less than 0.2 pu, -V_0 is then
used as the polarizing signal. If the polarizing signal is invalid, neither forward nor reverse indication is given.
● If Current polarizing is selected, the element uses the ground current angle connected externally and
configured under NEUTRAL OC1 SOURCE for polarization. The ground CT must be connected between the
ground and neutral point of an adequate local source of ground current. The ground current must be greater
than PRODUCT SETUP > DISPLAY PROPERTIES > CURRENT CUT-OFF LEVEL to be validated as a
polarizing signal. If the polarizing signal is not valid, neither forward nor reverse indication is given. In
addition, the zero-sequence current (I_0) must be greater than the PRODUCT SETUP > DISPLAY
PROPERTIES > CURRENT CUT-OFF LEVEL setting value. For a choice of current polarizing, it is
recommended that the polarizing signal be analyzed to ensure that a known direction is maintained
irrespective of the fault location. For example, if using an autotransformer neutral current as a polarizing
source, ensure that a reversal of the ground current does not occur for a high-side fault. Assume that the low-

N60-1601-0125-861-1 517
Chapter 9 - Settings

side system impedance is minimal when checking for this condition. A similar situation arises for a wye/
delta/wye transformer, where current in one transformer winding neutral can reverse when faults on both
sides of the transformer are considered.
● If Dual polarizing is selected, the element performs both directional comparisons as described. A given
direction is confirmed if either voltage or current comparators indicate so. If a conflicting (simultaneous
forward and reverse) indication occurs, the forward direction overrides the reverse direction.
● If Dual-V polarizing is selected, Voltage polarizing is performed and Current polarizing is ignored if the voltage
polarizing signal is valid; otherwise Current polarizing is performed if the current polarizing signal is valid. If
neither of them is valid, neither forward nor reverse indication is given.
● If Dual-I polarizing is selected, Current polarizing is performed and Voltage polarizing is ignored if the current
polarizing signal is valid; otherwise Voltage polarizing is performed if the voltage polarizing signal is valid. If
neither of them is valid, neither forward nor reverse indication is given.

NEUTRAL DIR OC1 POL VOLT

Selects the polarizing voltage used by the directional unit when "Voltage," "Dual," "Dual-V," or "Dual-I" polarizing
mode is set. The polarizing voltage can be programmed to be either the zero-sequence voltage calculated from the
phase voltages ("Calculated V0") or supplied externally as an auxiliary voltage ("Measured VX").

NEUTRAL DIR OC1 OP CURR

This setting indicates whether the 3I_0 current calculated from the phase currents, or the ground current is used by
this protection. This setting acts as a switch between the neutral and ground modes of operation (ANSI devices 67N
and 67G). If set to Calculated 3I0, the element uses the phase currents and applies the positive-sequence
restraint. If set to Measured IG, the element uses ground current supplied to the ground CT of the CT bank
configured as NEUTRAL DIR OC1 SOURCE. If this setting is Measured IG, then the NEUTRAL DIR OC1
POLARIZING setting must be Voltage, as it is not possible to use the ground current as an operating and
polarizing signal simultaneously. IG current has to be above PRODUCT SETUP > DISPLAY PROPERTIES >
CURRENT CUT-OFF LEVEL to be used as an operate quantity.

NEUTRAL DIR OC1 POS-SEQ RESTRAINT

This setting controls the amount of the positive-sequence restraint. Set it to 0.063 for backward compatibility with
firmware revision 3.40 and older. Set it to zero to remove the restraint. Set it higher if large system unbalances or
poor CT performance are expected.

NEUTRAL DIR OC1 OFFSET

This setting specifies the offset impedance used by this protection. The primary application for the offset impedance
is to guarantee correct identification of fault direction on series compensated lines. In regular applications, the offset
impedance ensures proper operation even if the zero-sequence voltage at the relaying point is very small. If this is
the intent, the offset impedance is not to be larger than the zero-sequence impedance of the protected circuit.
Practically, it shall be several times smaller. Enter the offset impedance in secondary ohms.

NEUTRAL DIR OC1 FWD ECA

This setting defines the characteristic angle (ECA) for the forward direction in the Voltage polarizing mode. The
Current polarizing mode uses a fixed ECA of 0°. The ECA in the reverse direction is the angle set for the forward
direction shifted by 180°.

NEUTRAL DIR OC1 FWD LIMIT ANGLE

This setting defines a symmetrical (in both directions from the ECA) limit angle for the forward direction.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 518
Chapter 9 - Settings

NEUTRAL DIR OC1 FWD PICKUP

This setting defines the pickup level for the overcurrent unit of the element in the forward direction. When selecting
this setting, keep in mind that the design uses a positive-sequence restraint technique for the Calculated 3I0
mode of operation.

NEUTRAL DIR OC1 REV LIMIT ANGLE

This setting defines a symmetrical (in both directions from the ECA) limit angle for the reverse direction.

NEUTRAL DIR OC1 REV PICKUP

This setting defines the pickup level for the overcurrent unit of the element in the reverse direction. When selecting
this setting, keep in mind that the design uses a positive-sequence restraint technique for the Calculated 3I0
mode of operation.
SETTINGS
NEUTRAL DIR OC1 F WD
PICKU P:

NEUTRAL DIR OC1 OP

CURR:

NEUTRAL DIR OC1 POS-

SE Q RESTRAINT:

SE TTINGS RUN

NEUTRAL DIR OC1 3( I_0 - K I_1 ) PICKUP

FU NCTION: OR
Enabled=1 IG PICKU P AND

SE TTINGS
AND SETTINGS
NEUTRAL DIR OC1 BLK: AND
NEUTRAL DIR OC1 F WD
ECA:
Off=0
NEUTRAL DIR OC1 F WD FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
LIMIT ANGLE:
SE TTINGS AND NEUTRAL DIR OC1 F WD
NEUTRAL DIR OC1 NEUTRAL DIR OC1 REV
SOURCE: LIMIT ANGLE:

NEUTRAL DIR OC1 P OL NEUTRAL DIR OC1

VOLT: OFFSET:
RUN
NEUTRAL DIR OC1 OP
CURR:
FW D
Me asure d VX OR
V V_cutoff FW D
Calculated V_ 0 1.25 cy
-3V_0 AND
Ze ro Seq Crt (I_0) I0 I_cutoff 1.5 cy
Ground Crt (IG) REV
IG I_cutoff 3I_ 0 REV

Voltage Polarization

SE TTINGS IG 0.05 pu AND RUN

NEUTRAL DIR OC1 FW D
POLARIZ ING :
Voltage OR Current Polarization
Current OR
REV
Dual, Dual-V, D ual-I OR
NOTE:
1) CURRENT POLARIZING IS POSSIBLE ONLY IN RE LAY S WITH
THE GROU ND CURRE NT INPU TS CONNE CTE D TO
AN AD EQU ATE CURRE NT POLARI ZING SOURCE SETTINGS
NEUTRAL DIR OC1 REV
2) G ROUND CURRENT CAN NOT BE USE D FOR POLARIZATION PICKU P:
AND OPERATION SIMU LTANEOUSLY AND FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
NEUTRAL DIR OC1 OP
CURR: NEUTRAL DIR OC1 REV
3) POSITI VE S EQU ENCE RE STRAINT IS NOT APPLIED W HE N
I_1 IS BELOW 0.8pu
NEUTRAL DIR OC1 POS -
SE Q RESTRAINT:
RUN
3( I_0 - K I_1 ) PICKUP
OR
IG P ICKU P
827195A1.vsdx

Figure 273: Neutral directional overcurrent logic

9.7.5 GROUND CURRENT

SETTINGS > GROUPED ELEMENTS > SETTING GROUP 1(6) > GROUND CURRENT
■ GROUND CURRENT ■ GROUND TOC <n>
■ ó ■ NOT ALL UR MODELS

N60-1601-0125-861-1 519
Chapter 9 - Settings

■ GROUND IOC <n>

ñ NOT ALL UR MODELS
■

9.7.5.1 GROUND TIME OVERCURRENT (ANSI 51G, IEC PTOC)

SETTINGS > GROUPED ELEMENTS > SETTING GROUP 1(6) > GROUND CURRENT >GROUND TOC <n>

Note:
Only Ground TOC 1 is shown

■ GROUND TOC 1 GROUND TOC 1

■ ó FUNCTION: Disabled Range: Disabled, Enabled

GROUND TOC 1 SIGNAL Range: SRC <n>

ô
SOURCE: SRC 1 Not applicable to relays with 9-2LE
GROUND TOC 1
ô Range: Phasor, RMS
INPUT: Phasor
GROUND TOC1
ô Range:0.020 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001
PICKUP: 1.000 pu
GROUND TOC1
ô Range: see Overcurrent Curve Types table
CURVE: IEEE Mod Inv
GROUND TOC1
ô Range: 0.00 to 600.00 in steps of 0.01
TD MULTIPLIER: 1.00
GROUND TOC1
ô Range: Instantaneous, Timed
RESET: Instantaneous
GROUND TOC1 BLOCK:
ô Range: FlexLogic operand
Off
GROUND TOC1 Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
ô
TARGET: Self-reset Not applicable to relays with 9-2LE
GROUND TOC1 Range: Disabled, Enabled
ñ
EVENTS: Disabled Not applicable to relays with 9-2LE

This element can provide a required time-delay operating characteristic versus the applied current or be used as a
simple definite time element. The ground current input value is the quantity measured by the ground input CT and is
the fundamental phasor or RMS magnitude. Two methods of resetting operation are available: Timed and
Instantaneous (see the Inverse TOC Curve Characteristics section for details). When the element is blocked,
the time accumulator resets according to the reset characteristic. For example, if the element reset characteristic is
set to Instantaneous and the element is blocked, the time accumulator clears immediately.

GROUND TOC1 FUNCTION

This setting enables and disables the ground time overcurrent protection element.

GROUND TOC1 SIGNAL SOURCE

This setting selects the signal source for the ground time overcurrent protection element.

GROUND TOC1 INPUT

This setting selects how ground current input quantities are interpreted by the Product. Inputs can be selected as
fundamental phasor magnitudes or total waveform RMS magnitudes as required by the application.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 520
Chapter 9 - Settings

GROUND TOC1 PICKUP

This setting specifies the ground time overcurrent pickup level in per-unit values. With a Process Bus Module,
accuracy of the element is determined by the sum of the relay internal processing errors and input signal from the
merging unit errors, which can be significant depending on the merging unit design. For low level pickup settings,
especially less than 0.020 pu with a Process Bus Module, ensure that the selected merging unit meets given
application accuracy requirements.

GROUND TOC1 CURVE

This setting selects the inverse time overcurrent curve style.

GROUND TOC1 TD MULTIPLIER

This setting specifies a multiple of the base curve shape specified by the CURVE setting. Programming this value to
zero results in an instantaneous response to all current levels above pickup.

GROUND TOC1 RESET

The Instantaneous reset method is intended for applications with other relays, such as most static relays, which set
the energy capacity directly to zero when the current falls below the reset threshold. The “Timed” reset method can
be used where the relay must coordinate with electromechanical relays.

GROUND TOC1 BLOCK

Assertion of the operand assigned to this setting blocks operation of the ground time overcurrent element.

Note:
These elements measure the current that is connected to the ground channel of a CT/VT module. The conversion range of a
standard channel is from 0.02 to 46 times the CT rating.

SETTINGS
GROUND TOC1
INPUT:
SETTING GROUND TOC1
GROUND TOC1 PICKUP:
FUNCTION: GROUND TOC1
Enabled = 1 CURVE:
GROUND TOC1
TD MULTIPLIER:
GROUND TOC 1 FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
SETTING
RESET: GROUND TOC1 PKP
GROUND TOC1
AND RUN IG PICKUP GROUND TOC1 DPO
SOURCE:
GROUND TOC1 OP
IG t
I
SETTING
GROUND TOC1
BLOCK:
827036A4.VSD
Off = 0

Figure 274: Ground TOC logic

9.7.5.2 GROUND INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT (ANSI 50G, IEC PIOC)

SETTINGS > GROUPED ELEMENTS > SETTING GROUP 1(6) > GROUND CURRENT >GROUND IOC <n>

N60-1601-0125-861-1 521
Chapter 9 - Settings

Note:
Only Ground IOC 1 is shown

■ GROUND IOC 1 GROUND IOC 1

■ ó FUNCTION: Disabled Range: Disabled, Enabled

GROUND IOC 1 SIGNAL Range: SRC <n>

ô
SOURCE: SRC 1 Not applicable to relays with 9-2LE
GROUND IOC1
ô Range: 0.020 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001
PICKUP: 1.000 pu
GROUND IOC1 PICKUP
ô Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
DELAY: 0.00 s
GROUND IOC1 RESET
ô Range: 0.00 to 600.00 in steps of 0.01
DELAY : 0.00 s
GROUND IOC1 BLOCK:
ô Range: FlexLogic operand
Off
GROUND IOC1 Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
ô
TARGET: Self-reset Not applicable to relays with 9-2LE
GROUND IOC1 Range: Disabled, Enabled
ñ
EVENTS: Disabled Not applicable to relays with 9-2LE

The ground instantaneous overcurrent element can be used as an instantaneous element with no intentional delay
or as a definite time element. The ground current input is the quantity measured by the ground input CT and is the
fundamental phasor magnitude.

GROUND IOC1 FUNCTION

This setting enables and disables the element.

GROUND IOC1 SIGNAL SOURCE

This setting selects the signal source for the element.

GROUND IOC1 PICKUP

This setting specifies the pickup level in per-unit values. With a Process Bus Module, accuracy of the element is
determined by the sum of the relay internal processing errors and input signal from the merging unit errors, which
can be significant depending on the merging unit design. For low level pickup settings, especially less than 0.020 pu
with a Process Bus Module, ensure that the selected merging unit meets the given application accuracy
requirements.

GROUND IOC1 PICKUP DELAY

This setting specifies the definite time delay after which the operate signal asserts.

GROUND IOC1 RESET DELAY

This setting specifies the reset time delay.

GROUND IOC1 BLOCK

Assertion of the operand assigned to this setting blocks operation of the element.
These elements measure the current that is connected to the ground channel of a CT/VT module. The conversion
range of a standard channel is from 0.02 to 46 times the CT rating.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 522
Chapter 9 - Settings

FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
GROUND IOC1 PKP
SETTING GROUND IOIC DPO
GROUND IOC1
SETTINGS GROUND IOC1 OP
FUNCTION:
Enabled = 1 GROUND IOC1 PICKUP
SETTING DELAY:
GROUND IOC1 GROUND IOC1 RESET
SETTING
PICKUP: DELAY:
GROUND IOC1
AND RUN tPKP
SOURCE:
IG
IG PICKUP tRST
SETTING
GROUND IOC1
BLOCK:
827037A5.VSD
Off = 0

Figure 275: Ground IOC1 logic

9.7.6 VOLTAGE ELEMENTS

9.7.6.1 VOLTAGE ELEMENTS MENU

SETTINGS > GROUPED ELEMENTS > SETTING GROUP 1(6) > VOLTAGE ELEMENTS
■ VOLTAGE ELEMENTS ■ PHASE
■ ó ■ UNDERVOLTAGE<n> All models except C30, T35

■ PHASE
ô All models except C30, T35
■ OVERVOLTAGE<n>
■ NEUTRAL OV<n>
ô All models except C30, B90, N60, T35
■
■ NEG SEQ OV <n> All models except B30, B90, C30, C60, C95, F35,
ô
■ L90, N60, T35,
■ AUXILIARY UV<n>
ô All models except B90, C30, C70, N60, T35
■
■ AUXILIARY OV<n>
ô All models except B90, C30, N60, T35
■
■ VOLTS/HZ <n>
ô G30, G60, L90, T60
■
■ COMPENSATED>
ô D60, L60, L90,
■ OVERVOLTAGE
■ VOLTAGE
ô C70
■ DIFFERENTIAL <n>
■ BANK
ô C70
■ OVERVOLTAGE
■ NEUTRAL VOLTAGE
ñ C70
■ UNBALANCE <n>

These protection elements can be used for a variety of applications, such as

● Undervoltage protection — For voltage sensitive loads, such as induction motors, a drop in voltage increases
the drawn current, which can cause dangerous overheating in the motor. The undervoltage protection feature

N60-1601-0125-861-1 523
Chapter 9 - Settings

can be used to either cause a trip or generate an alarm when the voltage drops below a specified voltage
setting for a specified time delay.
● Overvoltage protection — Overvoltage elements can be used to protect voltage sensitive loads and system
components against sustained overvoltage conditions
● Permissive functions — The undervoltage/overvoltage features can be used to block the functioning of
external devices by operating an output relay when the voltage falls below/exceeds the specified voltage
setting. The undervoltage/overvoltage features can also be used to block the functioning of other elements
through the block feature of those elements.
● Source transfer schemes — In the event of undervoltage/overvoltage, a transfer signal can be generated to
transfer a load from its normal source to a standby or emergency power source

9.7.6.2 UNDERVOLTAGE INVERSE TIME CURVES

The undervoltage elements can be programmed to have an inverse time delay characteristic. If in the respective
element the CURVE setting is set to Inverse Time, the undervoltage delay setting establishes the operating curve of
the element as follows:
D
T = ------------------------------
V ✄
✂ 1 ➊ --------------- -
V pickup✁

where
● T = operating time
● D = undervoltage delay setting (D = 0.00 operates instantaneously)
● V = secondary voltage applied to the relay
● Vpickup = pickup level
For reset time, see the settings section of the applicable element.

✗
✒
✖
✕
✔
✓
✑
✭✒
✑
✐✏
❚

✪ ♦❢ ✈♦✟✠❛✡☛ ♣☞✌✍✎♣
✽ ✁✂✽✽✄☎✆❈✝✞

Figure 276: Inverse time undervoltage curves

At 0% of pickup, the operating time equals the corresponding undervoltage element DELAY setting.

9.7.6.3 OVERVOLTAGE INVERSE TIME CURVES

The overvoltage elements can be programmed to have an inverse time delay characteristic. If in the respective
element the CURVE setting is set to Inverse Time, the overvoltage pickup delay setting establishes the operating
curve of the element as follows:

N60-1601-0125-861-1 524
Chapter 9 - Settings

T= D/ (V/Vpickup -1)
where:
● T = operating time
● D = undervoltage delay setting (D = 0.00 operates instantaneously)
● V = secondary voltage applied to the relay
● Vpickup = pickup level
For reset time, see the settings section of the applicable element.

Figure 277: Inverse time overvoltage curves

9.7.6.4 PHASE UNDERVOLTAGE (ANSI 27P, IEC PTUV)

SETTINGS > GROUPED ELEMENTS > SETTING GROUP 1(6) > VOLTAGE ELEMENTS > PHASE UNDERVOLTAGE<n>

Note:
Only Phase undervoltage 1 is shown

■ PHASE PHASE UV1

■ UNDERVOLTAGE 1 ó FUNCTION: Disabled Range: Disabled, Enabled

PHASE UV1 SIGNAL

ô Range: SRC <n>
SOURCE: SRC 1
PHASE UV1 MODE:
ô Range: Phase to Ground, Phase to Phase
Phase to Ground
PHASE UV1
ô Range: 0.004 to 3.000 pu in steps of 0.001
PICKUP: 1.000 pu

N60-1601-0125-861-1 525
Chapter 9 - Settings

PHASE UV1 Range: Definite Time, Inverse Time, FlexCurves A

ô
CURVE: Definite Time through D
PHASE UV1
ô Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
DELAY: 1.00 s
PHASE UV1 RESET
ô Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
DELAY: 1.00 s
PHASE UV1 MINIMUM
ô Range: 0.000 to 3.000 pu in steps of 0.001
VOLTAGE: 0.100 pu
PHASE UV1 BLOCK:
ô Range: FlexLogic operand
Off
PHASE UV1
ô Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
TARGET: Self-reset
PHASE UV1
ñ Range: Disabled, Enabled
EVENTS: Disabled

PHASE UV1 SIGNAL SOURCE

Selects the signal source for the phase undervoltage protection element.

PHASE UV1 MODE

This setting defines the mode of operation that can be Phase-to-Phase or Phase-to-Ground voltage. Phase-to-
ground or phase-to-phase voltages can be applied for wye VT connection, while phase-to-phase voltages can be
applied for delta VT connections only.

PHASE UV1 PICKUP

This setting specifies the phase undervoltage protection element pickup level.

PHASE UV1 CURVE

This setting defines the timing characteristic of the element, which can be Definite Time, Inverse Time (per the
curves described earlier in the Voltage Elements > Undervoltage Inverse Time Curves section), or FlexCurves A
through D. The timing characteristic depends on this setting and the Delay setting that follows.

PHASE UV1 DELAY

This setting defines the operation time of the element.
● When the PHASE UV1 CURVE setting is set to Definite Time, the PHASE UV1 DELAY setting defines
definite time delay for element operation.
● When the PHASE UV1 CURVE setting is set to Inverse Time, the PHASE UV1 DELAY setting defines the
inverse curve time delay multiplier (D) that is used in the curve equation explained in the Voltage Elements >
Undervoltage Inverse Time Curves section.
● When the PHASE UV1 CURVE setting is set to one of the FlexCurves, the PHASE UV1 DELAY setting
defines the FlexCurve time delay multiplier (D) that is used in the following curve equation:
T = D × FlexCurve time at (Vpkp/V)
For FlexCurves configuration instructions, see the System Setup > FlexCurves section.

PHASE UV1 RESET DELAY

When the Curve setting is set to Definite Time or Inverse Time, the element resets when applied voltage exceeds
the dropout voltage for the duration of the selected RESET DELAY setting.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 526
Chapter 9 - Settings

When the Curve setting is set to one of the FlexCurves, the element reset is based on the equation and not the
PHASE UV1 RESET DELAY setting.
As shown in the equation, because the element is supposed to operate in undervoltage condition, the multiple of
pickup value that defines the point on the FlexCurve characteristic is derived from the ratio of the set pickup value to
the measured voltage (and not the reverse). For example, if Pickup is set to 0.9 pu, when measured voltage is 0.82
pu, the ratio is 0.9/0.82 = 1.1. Therefore, in FlexCurve, the corresponding operate time is at 1.1 x PKP (not at 0.82 x
PKP). On the other hand, when measured voltage is 1 pu, the ratio is 0.9/1 = 0.9. Therefore, in FlexCurve, the
corresponding reset time is at 0.9 x PKP.

PHASE UV1 MINIMUM VOLTAGE

This setting selects the operating voltage below which the element is blocked (a setting of "0" allows a dead source
to be considered a fault condition).
SETTING
PHASE U V1 PICKUP:

SETTING PHASE U V1 CURVE:

PHASE U V1
FUNCTION:
PHASE U V1 DELAY:
Enabled = 1
PHASE U V1 RESET DELAY:
SETTING FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
AND
PHASE U V1 AND RUN ❱❆● ♦r ❱❆✝ ✞✟❈✠✡✞ PHASE U V1 A PKP
BLOCK: t PHASE U V1 A DPO
Off = 0 PHASE U V1 A OP
V TRST
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
SETTING
SETTING AND RUN ✁❇✂ ✄☎ ✁❇ P■ ❑❯P PHASE U V1 B PKP
PHASE U V1
t PHASE U V1 B DPO
PHASE U V1 SOURCE: MINIMUM VOLTAGE:
PHASE U V1 B OP
VAG or VAB ☛ ▼✐♥ ✐♠✉♠ V TRST
Source VT = Delta ▼✐♥ ✐♠✉ FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
VBG or VBC ☞✆ RUN ❱❈● ♦r ❱❈❆ P■ ❑❯P
VAB AND PHASE U V1 C PKP
VCG or VCA ☛ ▼✐♥ ✐♠✉♠
VBC t PHASE U V1 C DPO
VCA PHASE U V1 C OP
V TRST
Source VT = Wye
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
SETTING OR PHASE U V1 PKP

PHASE U V1 MODE:

Ph ase to Grou nd Ph ase to Pha se FLEXLOGIC OPERAND

VAG VAB OR PHASE U V1 OP
VBG VBC
VCG VCA
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
AND PHASE U V1 DPO

859824A1.vsdx

Figure 278: Phase undervoltage1 logic

9.7.6.5 PHASE OVERVOLTAGE (ANSI 59P, IEC PTOV)

SETTINGS > GROUPED ELEMENTS > SETTING GROUP 1(6) > VOLTAGE ELEMENTS > PHASE OVERVOLTAGE<n>

Note:
Only Phase overvoltage 1 is shown

■ PHASE PHASE OV1

■ OVERVOLTAGE 1 ó FUNCTION: Disabled Range: Disabled, Enabled

PHASE OV1 SIGNAL

ô Range: SRC <n>
SOURCE: SRC 1
PHASE OV1 MODE:
ô Range: Phase to Ground, Phase to Phase
Phase to Ground
PHASE OV1
ô Range: 0.004 to 3.000 pu in steps of 0.001
PICKUP: 1.000 pu
PHASE OV1 Range: Definite Time, Inverse Time, FlexCurves A
ô
CURVE: Definite Time through D

N60-1601-0125-861-1 527
Chapter 9 - Settings

PHASE OV1
ô Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
DELAY: 1.00 s
PHASE OV1 RESET
ô Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
DELAY: 1.00 s
PHASE OV1 BLOCK:
ô Range: FlexLogic operand
Off
PHASE OV1
ô Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
TARGET: Self-reset
PHASE OV1
ñ Range: Disabled, Enabled
EVENTS: Disabled

This element gives a time-delay operating characteristic versus the applied fundamental voltage.

PHASE OV1 SIGNAL SOURCE

Selects the signal source for the phase overvoltage protection element.

PHASE OV1 MODE

This setting defines the mode of operation, which can be Phase-to-Phase or Phase-to-Ground voltage. Phase-to-
ground or phase-to-phase voltages can be applied for wye VT connection, while phase-to-phase voltages can be
applied for delta VT connections only.

PHASE OV1 PICKUP

This setting specifies phase overvoltage protection element pickup level.

PHASE OV1 CURVE

This setting defines the timing characteristic of the element, which can be: Definite Time, Inverse Time (per the
curves described in the Voltage Elements > Overvoltage Inverse Time Curves section), FlexCurves A through D.
The timing characteristic depends on this setting and the Pickup Delay setting that follows.

PHASE OV1 PICKUP DELAY

This setting defines the operation time of the element.
● When the PHASE OV1 CURVE setting is set to Definite Time, the PHASE OV1 PICKUP DELAY setting
defines definite time delay for element operation.
● When the PHASE OV1 CURVE setting is set to Inverse Time, the PHASE OV1 PICKUP DELAY setting
defines the inverse curve time delay multiplier (D) that is used in the Voltage Elements > Overvoltage Inverse
Time Curves section.
● When the PHASE OV1 CURVE setting is set to one of the FlexCurves, the PHASE OV1 PICKUP DELAY
setting defines the FlexCurve time delay multiplier (D) that is used in the following curve equation:
T= D × FlexCurve time at (V/Vpkp)
For FlexCurves configuration instructions, see the System Setup > FlexCurves section.

PHASE OV1 RESET DELAY

When the Curve setting is set to Definite Time or Inverse Time, the element resets when applied voltage goes
below the dropout voltage for the duration of the selected RESET DELAY setting.
When the Curve setting is set to one of the FlexCurves, the element reset is based on the equation and not the
PHASE OV1 RESET DELAY setting.
As shown in the equation, the multiple of pickup value that defines the point on the FlexCurve characteristic is
derived from the ratio of the measured voltage to the set pickup. For example, if Pickup is set to 1.1 pu when the

N60-1601-0125-861-1 528
Chapter 9 - Settings

measured voltage is 1.3 pu, the ratio is 1.3/1.1 = 1.2. Therefore, in FlexCurve, the corresponding operate time is at
1.2 x PKP (not at 1.3 x PKP). On the other hand, when measured voltage is 1 pu, the ratio is 1/1.1 = 0.9. Therefore,
in FlexCurve, the corresponding reset time is at 0.9 x PKP.
SETTING

PHASE OV1 CURVE:

PHASE OV1 PICKUP

DELAY:
SET TING PHASE OV1 RESET
SET TING
PHAS E OV1
PHAS E OV1
DELAY: FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
FUNCTION: PHAS E OV1 A PKP
PICKUP:
t
Enabled = 1 PHAS E OV1 A DPO
RUN V TRST PHAS E OV1 A OP
❱❆● ♦r ❱❆❇ PICKUP
PHAS E OV1 B PKP
SET TING t
AND
PHAS E OV1 B DPO
PHAS E OV1 V
✁✂✄ ☎✆ ✁✂❈ PICKUP TRST PHAS E OV1 B OP
BLOCK:
PHAS E OV1 C PKP
Off = 0 t
PHAS E OV1 C D PO
✁❈✄ ☎✆ ✁❈✝ PICKUP V TRST PHAS E OV1 C OP

SETTING

PHASE OV1 SOURCE:

FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
Source VT = Delta OR PHAS E OV1 OP
VAB
VBC
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
VCA
Source VT = Wye AND PHAS E OV1 DPO

SETTING FLEXLOGIC OPERAND

OR PHAS E OV1 PKP
PHASE OV1 MODE:

Ph ase to Grou nd Ph ase to Pha se

859823A1.vsdx
VAG VAB
VBG VBC
VCG VCA

Figure 279: Phase overvoltage logic

9.7.7 SUPERVISING ELEMENTS

9.7.7.1 OPEN POLE DETECTOR

SETTINGS > GROUPED ELEMENTS > SETTING GROUP 1(6) > SUPERVISING ELEMENTS > OPEN POLE
DETECTOR
■ OPEN POLE DETECTOR OPEN POLE FUNCTION:
■ ó Disabled Range: Disabled, Enabled

OPEN POLE BLOCK:

ô Range: FlexLogic operand
Off
OPEN POLE CURRENT
ô SRC <n>
SOURCE: SRC 1
OPEN POLE CURRENT
ô Range: 0.05 to 20.00 pu in steps of 0.01
PKP: 0.20 pu
OPEN POLE BROKEN
ô Range: Disabled, Enabled
CONDUCTOR: Disabled
OPEN POLE VOLTAGE
ô Range: Disabled, Enabled
INPUT: Disabled
OPEN POLE VOLTAGE
ô SRC <n>
SOURCE: SRC 1
OPEN POLE φA AUX CO:
ô Range: FlexLogic operand
Off
OPEN POLE φB AUX CO:
ô Range: FlexLogic operand
Off

N60-1601-0125-861-1 529
Chapter 9 - Settings

OPEN POLE φC AUX CO:

ô Range: FlexLogic operand
Off
OPEN POLE PICKUP
ô Range: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001
DELAY: 0.060 s
OPEN POLE RESET
Range: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001
DELAY: 0.100 s
OPEN POLE TARGET:
ô Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
Self-reset
OPEN POLE EVENTS:
ñ Range: Disabled, Enabled
Disabled

The open pole detector detects if any pole of the associated circuit breaker is opened or the conductor is broken on
the protected power line and cable. The output FlexLogic operands can be used in three-pole and single-pole
tripping schemes, in reclosing schemes, in blocking some elements (like CT failure), and in signaling or indication
schemes. In single-pole tripping schemes, if OPEN POLE flag is set, any other subsequent fault causes a three-
phase trip regardless of fault type.
The open pole detector logic detects absence of current in one phase during presence of current in other phases.
Phases A, B, and C breaker auxiliary contacts (if available) are used in addition to make a logic decision for single-
pole tripping applications. If voltage input is available, a low voltage function is used to detect absence of the
monitoring voltage in the associated pole of the breaker.

OPEN POLE FUNCTION

Used to enable/disable operation of the element.

OPEN POLE BLOCK

Selects a FlexLogic operand that blocks operation of the element.

OPEN POLE CURRENT SOURCE

Selects the source for the current for the element.

OPEN POLE CURRENT PICKUP

Selects the pickup value of the phase current. The pickup setting is the minimum of the range and likely to be
somewhat above of the charging current of the line.

OPEN POLE BROKEN CONDUCTOR

Enables and disables detection of broken conductor or remote pole open conditions.

OPEN POLE VOLTAGE INPUT

Enables and disables the voltage input in making a logical decision. If the line VT (not bus VT) is available, the
voltage input can be set to Enable.

OPEN POLE VOLTAGE SOURCE

Selects the voltage source for the element.

OPEN POLE φ(A,B,C) AUX CONTACT

These three settings are used to select a FlexLogic operand reflecting the state of the 52b type phase A circuit
breaker auxiliary contact (closed when main breaker contact is open) for single-pole tripping applications. If two
breakers per line are used, then both breaker auxiliary contacts feeding into the AND gate (representing auxiliary
contacts connected in series) are to be assigned.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 530
Chapter 9 - Settings

OPEN POLE PICKUP DELAY

Selects the pickup delay of the element.

OPEN POLE RESET DELAY

This setting is used to select the reset delay of the element. The use of this setting depends on the particular
application and whether single-pole or three-pole tripping is used. It comprises the reset time of the operating
elements it used in conjunction with, the breaker opening time, and breaker auxiliary contacts discrepancy with the
main contacts.
✁✂✂✄☎✆
✎✏✑✒ ✏✎✓✑
✔✕✒✖✗✘✎✒✙ ✁✂✂✄☎✆
✑✾✿❆❀❇❃❈ ✎✏✑✒ ✏✎✓✑
✏✘✖✢✕✏ ✱✑✓✚✲✙
✁✂✂✄☎✆ ✎✏✑✒ ✏✎✓✑ ✝✞✁✟✞✠✆✄✡ ✠☛✁☞✌☎✍
✣✑✤✑✗ ✱✑✓✚✲✙
✎✏✑✒ ✏✎✓✑ ✜✓✎✖✢✙

✎❂❂❃❄ ✎✏✑✒ ✏✎✓✑ ✎✏

❉❊ ✚✒✲ ✏✳✚✤✑
✁✂✂✄☎✆
✎✏✑✒ ✏✎✓✑ ✚
✚✕✛ ✖✎✒✗✚✖✗✙
❋●❍
✎❂❂❃❄ ❉❊ ✚ ✎✏✑✒ ✏✎✓✑ ✎✏ ✚

✁✂✂✄☎✆
✎✏✑✒ ✏✎✓✑ ✜
✚✕✛ ✖✎✒✗✚✖✗✙
❋●❍
✎❂❂❃❄ ❉❊ ✜ ✎✏✑✒ ✏✎✓✑ ✎✏ ✜

✁✂✂✄☎✆
✎✏✑✒ ✏✎✓✑ ✖
✚✕✛ ✖✎✒✗✚✖✗✙
❋●❍
✎❂❂❃❄ ❉❊ ✖ ✎✏✑✒ ✏✎✓✑ ✎✏ ✖

✁✂✂✄☎✆
✎✏✑✒ ✏✎✓✑ ✜✣✎✢✑✒ ❉❊
✖✎✒✱✕✖✗✎✣✙
✑✾✿❆❀❇❃❈ ❋●❍

✁✂✂✄☎✆
❋●❍
✁✂✂✄☎✆ ✥✦✧★ ✦✥✩✧
✎✏✑✒ ✏✎✓✑ ✪✫✬✬✧★✭ ✦✮✪✯✫✦✰
❋●❍
✖✕✣✣✑✒✗ ✤✎✕✣✖✑✙ ❋●❍ ✣✕✒
✘✚ ✘✚ ❅ ✤✑✗✗✘✒✵ ❋●❍
✘✜ ✘✜ ❅ ✤✑✗✗✘✒✵ ❋●❍
✘✖ ✘✖ ❅ ✤✑✗✗✘✒✵ ❋●❍

✁✂✂✄☎✆
✎✏✑✒ ✏✎✓✑
✴✎✓✗✚✵✑ ✘✒✏✕✗✙
✑✾✿❆❀❇❃❈

✁✂✂✄☎✆
✎✏✑✒ ✏✎✓✑
✴✎✓✗✚✵✑ ✤✎✕✣✖✑✙
✶✲✑ ✱✑✓✗✚ ❋●❍ ✣✕✒

✴✚✵ ✻❁ ✴✚✜ ✴✚ ✷ ✸✹✺ ✒✻✼✽✾✿❀

✴✜✵ ✻❁ ✴✜✖ ✴✜ ✷ ✸✹✺ ✒✻✼✽✾✿❀

✴✖✵ ✻❁ ✴✖✚ ✴✖ ✷ ✸✹✺ ✒✻✼✽✾✿❀ ■❏❑▲▼❑❋❑◆❖❍❊

Figure 280: Open pole detector logic

9.7.8 POWER
SETTINGS > GROUPED ELEMENTS > SETTING GROUP 1(6) > POWER
■ POWER ■ SENSITIVE
■ ó ■ DIRECTIONAL POWER C60, C95, D60, F60, G30, G60, L90, N60, T60

N60-1601-0125-861-1 531
Chapter 9 - Settings

■ UNDERPOWER
ñ M60 only
■

9.7.8.1 SENSITIVE DIRECTIONAL POWER (ANSI 32)

SETTINGS > GROUPED ELEMENTS > SETTING GROUP 1(6) > VOLTAGE ELEMENTS > POWER > SENSITIVE
DIRECTIONAL POWER > DIRECTIONAL POWER 1(2)

Note:
Only Directional power 1 is shown

■ DIRECTIONAL DIR POWER 1

■ POWER 1 ó FUNCTION: Disabled Range: Disabled, Enabled

DIR POWER 1
ô Range: SRC <n>
SOURCE: SRC 1
DIR POWER 1
ô Range: 0 to 359° in steps of 1
RCA: 0°
DIR POWER 1
ô 0 to 0.95° in steps of 0.05
CALIBRATION: 0.00°
DIR POWER 1 STG1
ô Range: –3.300 to 3.300 pu in steps of 0.001
SMIN: 0.100 pu
DIR POWER 1 STG1
ô Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
DELAY: 0.50 s
DIR POWER 1 STG2
ô Range: –3.300 to 3.300 pu in steps of 0.001
SMIN: 0.100 pu
DIR POWER 1 STG2
ô Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
DELAY: 20.00 s
DIR POWER 1 BLK:
ô Range: FlexLogic operand
Off
DIR POWER 1
ô Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
TARGET: Self-reset
DIR POWER 1
ñ Range: Disabled, Enabled
EVENTS: Disabled

The sensitive directional power element responds to three-phase directional power and is designed for reverse
power and low forward power applications for synchronous machines or interconnections involving co-generation.
The relay measures the three-phase power from either a full set of wye-connected VTs or a full set of delta-
connected VTs. In the latter case, the two-wattmeter method is used. See the UR-series Metering Conventions
section in chapter 6 for details regarding the active and reactive powers used by the sensitive directional power
element.
The element has an adjustable characteristic angle and minimum operating power as shown in the Directional
Power Characteristic diagram that follows. The element responds to the following condition:
P cos θ + Q sin θ > SMIN

N60-1601-0125-861-1 532
Chapter 9 - Settings

where:
● P and Q are active and reactive powers as measured per the UR metering convention
● q is a sum of the element characteristic (DIR POWER 1 RCA) and calibration (DIR POWER 1
CALIBRATION) angles
● SMIN is the minimum operating power
The operating quantity is displayed in the ACTUAL VALUES > METERING > SENSITIVE DIRECTIONAL POWER
1(2) actual value. The element has two independent (as to the pickup and delay settings) stages for alarm and trip,
respectively.
✫

✪
✩
★✤
✧
✦
✤✥
✣
✘✙✚✛✜✢✚

☛✓✎✔
✓✎✕✏✖☛✎✍✏✗✑
✌✒✏✑
✙

☛☞✌✍☛✎✏✑

✁✂✄☎✆✝✆✞✟✠✡

Figure 281: Directional power characteristic

By making the characteristic angle adjustable and providing for both negative and positive values of the minimum
operating power, a variety of operating characteristics can be achieved as presented in the following figure. For
example, section (a) in the figure shows settings for reverse power, while section (b) shows settings for low forward
power applications.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 533
Chapter 9 - Settings

✜✦✣ ☞ ✜✩✣ ☞

✏✎✓✒✏✑✔✕

✌✍✎✏✑✒✎ ✏✎✓✒✏✑✔✕ ✌✍✎✏✑✒✎

☛ ☛

✙ ✙
✏✖✑ ✗ ✤✥✘ ✏✖✑ ✗ ✤✥✘
✓✚✔✕ ✛ ✘ ✓✚✔✕ ✧ ✘

✜★✣ ☞ ✜✢✣ ☞

✌✍✎✏✑✒✎ ✌✍✎✏✑✒✎

☛ ☛

✏✎✓✒✏✑✔✕ ✏✎✓✒✏✑✔✕

✙ ✙
✏✖✑ ✗ ✘ ✏✖✑ ✗ ✘
✓✚✔✕ ✧ ✘ ✓✚✔✕ ✛ ✘

✜✫✣ ☞ ✜✮✣ ☞
✌✍✎✏✑✒✎ ✏✎✓✒✏✑✔✕

✏✎✓✒✏✑✔✕ ✌✍✎✏✑✒✎

☛ ☛

✙ ✙
✏✖✑ ✗ ✪✘ ✏✖✑ ✗ ✬✭✘
✓✚✔✕ ✛ ✘ ✓✚✔✕ ✧ ✘

✁✂✄☎✂✆✝✞✟✠✡

Figure 282: Directional power element sample applications

DIR POWER 1 RCA

Specifies the relay characteristic angle (RCA) for the sensitive directional power function. Application of this setting
is threefold:
● It allows the element to respond to active or reactive power in any direction (active overpower/underpower,
and so on)
● Together with a precise calibration angle, it allows compensation for any CT and VT angular errors to permit
more sensitive settings
● It allows for required direction in situations when the voltage signal is taken from behind a delta-wye
connected power transformer and the phase angle compensation is required
For example, the active overpower characteristic is achieved by setting DIR POWER 1 RCA to 0°, reactive
overpower by setting DIR POWER 1 RCA to 90°, active underpower by setting DIR POWER 1 RCA to 180°, and
reactive underpower by setting DIR POWER 1 RCA to 270°.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 534
Chapter 9 - Settings

DIR POWER 1 CALIBRATION

This setting allows the relay characteristic angle to change in steps of 0.05°. This is useful when a small difference
in VT and CT angular errors is to be compensated to permit more sensitive settings. This setting virtually enables
calibration of the directional power function in terms of the angular error of applied VTs and CTs. The element
responds to the sum of the DIR POWER 1 RCA and DIR POWER 1 CALIBRATION settings.

DIR POWER 1 STG1 SMIN

This setting specifies the minimum power as defined along the relay characteristic angle (RCA) for the stage 1 of
the element. The positive values imply a shift towards the operate region along the RCA line; the negative values
imply a shift towards the restrain region along the RCA line. See the Directional Power Sample Applications figure
for details. Together with the RCA, this setting enables a wide range of operating characteristics. This setting
applies to three-phase power and is entered in per-unit (pu) values. The base quantity is 3 x VT pu base x CT pu
base for wye connected VTs, and x VT pu base x CT pu base for delta connected VTs.
For example, a setting of 2% for a 200 MW machine is 0.02 x 200 MW = 4 MW. If 13.8kV is line voltage and 10 kA
is a primary CT current, the source pu quantity is 239 MVA, and thus, SMIN needs to be set at 4 MW / 239 MVA =
0.0167 pu » 0.017 pu. If the reverse power application is considered, RCA = 180° and SMIN = 0.017 pu.
The element drops out if the magnitude of the positive-sequence current becomes virtually zero, that is, it drops
below the cutoff level.

DIR POWER 1 STG1 DELAY

This setting specifies a time delay for stage 1. For reverse power or low forward power applications for a
synchronous machine, stage 1 is typically applied for alarming and stage 2 for tripping.

❙✍❚❚✎✏✑

❉✟✠ P❖✡☛✠ ✶
✸❘✖✔✕✟❖✖✿

☛❊✪✹✺❡✻ ✒ ✶
❙✍❚❚✎✏✑❙ ❙✍❚❚✎✏✑
❙✍❚❚✎✏✑ ❉✟✠ P❖✡☛✠ ✶ ✠✔✗✿ ❉✟✠ P❖✡☛✠ ✶ ✙✕✳✶
❉☛☞✗❨✿
❉✟✠ P❖✡☛✠ ✶ ❇☞✌✿
❃ ❉✟✠ P❖✡☛✠ ✶
❂ ✬✵✷✵
❆ ✔✗☞✟❇✠✗✕✟❖✖✿
❖❢❢ ✒ ✓
❉✟✠ P❖✡☛✠ ✶ ✙✕✳✶ ✶✓✓ ♠✫
✙✴✟✖✿
❋✚✍❳✚✛✑✎✜ ✛✢✍✣✤✏✥❙
❉✟✠ P❖✡☛✠ ✶ ✙✕✳✼ ❋✚✍❳✚✛✑✎✜✾ ✛✢✍✣✤✏✥❙
❙✍❚❚✎✏✑ ✙✴✟✖✿ ❉✟✠ P❖✡☛✠ ✶ ✙✕✳✶ ❖P
✠❘✖ ❉✟✠ P❖✡☛✠ ✶ ✙✕✳✶ ❉P❖
❉✟✠ P❖✡☛✠ ✶ ✙❖❘✠✔☛✿ ❉✟✠ P❖✡☛✠ ✶ ❉P❖
❉✟✠ P❖✡☛✠ ✶ ✙✕✳✶ P✌P
❉✟✠☛✔✕✟❖✖✗☞ P❖✡☛✠ ❁ ❉✟✠ P❖✡☛✠ ✶ P✌P
✕✦✧❡❡★✩✦✪✫❡ ✪❛✬✭✮❡ ✩♣✯❡✧ ✰P✱ ❀
✔✘✗✠✗✔✕☛✠✟✙✕✟✔✙ ❉✟✠ P❖✡☛✠ ✶ ✙✕✳✼ P✌P
❁ ❉✟✠ P❖✡☛✠ ✶ ❖P
✕✦✧❡❡★✩✦✪✫❡ ✧❡✪❛✬✭✮❡ ✩♣✯❡✧ ✰✲✱ ❀
❉✟✠ P❖✡☛✠ ✶ ✙✕✳✼ ❉P❖
❉✟✠ P❖✡☛✠ ✶ ✙✕✳✼ ❖P

❙✍❚❚✎✏✑

❉✟✠ P❖✡☛✠ ✶ ✙✕✳✼

❉☛☞✗❨✿

✬✵✷✵

✶✓✓ ♠✫
✽ ✁✂✂✄☎✄✆❈✝✞

Figure 283: Sensitive directional power logic

N60-1601-0125-861-1 535
Chapter 9 - Settings

9.8 CONTROL ELEMENTS

Control Control elementselements are used for control rather than protection. See the Introduction to Elements
section at the beginning of this chapter for information.

9.8.1 TRIP BUS

Setting path: SETTINGS > CONTROL ELEMENTS > TRIP BUS > TRIP BUS 1(6)
■ TRIP BUS 1 TRIP BUS 1
ó Range: Enabled, Disabled
■ FUNCTION: Disabled
TRIP BUS 1 BLOCK:
ô Range: FlexLogic operand
Off
TRIP BUS 1 PICKUP
ô Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
DELAY: 0.00 s
TRIP BUS 1 RESET
ô Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
DELAY: 0.00 s
TRIP BUS 1 INPUT 1(16):
ô Range: FlexLogic operand
Off
TRIP BUS 1
ô Range: Enabled, Disabled
LATCHING: Disabled
TRIP BUS 1 RESET:
ô Range: FlexLogic operand
Off
TRIP BUS 1:
ô Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
TARGET: Self-reset
TRIP BUS 1
ñ Range: Enabled, Disabled
EVENTS: Disabled

The trip bus element allows aggregating outputs of protection and control elements without using FlexLogic and
assigning them a simple and effective manner. Each trip bus can be assigned for either trip or alarm actions. Simple
trip conditioning such as latch, delay, and seal-in delay are available.
The easiest way to assign element outputs to a trip bus is through the EnerVista software under Settings >
Protection Summary. Navigate to a specific protection or control protection element and check the bus box by
hovering over the blank check box and selecting an option that displays. Once the required element is selected for a
specific bus, a list of element operate-type operands are displayed and can be assigned to a trip bus. If more than
one operate-type operand is required, it can be assigned directly from the trip bus menu.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 536
Chapter 9 - Settings

Figure 284: Trip bus fields in the protection summary

The following settings are available.

TRIP BUS 1 BLOCK

The trip bus output is blocked when the operand assigned to this setting is asserted.

TRIP BUS 1 PICKUP DELAY

This setting specifies a time delay to produce an output depending on how output is used.

TRIP BUS 1 RESET DELAY

This setting specifies a time delay to reset an output command. Set the time delay long enough to allow the breaker
or contactor to perform a required action.

TRIP BUS 1 INPUT 1 to TRIP BUS 1 INPUT 16

These settings select a FlexLogic operand to be assigned as an input to the trip bus.

TRIP BUS 1 LATCHING

This setting enables or disables latching of the trip bus output. This is typically used when lockout is required or
user acknowledgement of the relay response is required.

TRIP BUS 1 RESET

The trip bus output is reset when the operand assigned to this setting is asserted. Note that the RESET OP operand
is pre-wired to the reset gate of the latch, As such, a reset command from the front panel interface or via
communications resets the trip bus output.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 537
Chapter 9 - Settings

SETTINGS
TRIP BUS 1 INPUT 1
SETTINGS
= Off
TRIP BUS 1 PICKUP
TRIP BUS 1 INPUT 2
DELAY
= Off Non-volatile,
TRIP BUS 1 RESET
OR set-dominant

***
DELAY
AND S TPKP FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
TRIP BUS 1 INPUT 16 TRIP BUS 1 OP
Latch
= Off TRST
R

SETTINGS
TRIP BUS 1 FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
FUNCTION
TRIP BUS 1 PKP
= Enabled
TRIP BUS 1 BLOCK AND
= Off

SETTINGS
TRIP BUS 1
LATCHING
= Enabled
TRIP BUS 1 RESET
= Off
OR

FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
RESET OP 842023A1.CDR

Figure 285: Trip bus logic

9.8.2 SETTING GROUPS

Setting path: SETTINGS > CONTROL ELEMENTS > TRIP BUS > SETTING GROUPS
■ SETTING GROUPS SETTING GROUPS
ó Range: Enabled, Disabled
■ FUNCTION: Disabled
Control Mode:
ô Range: Local, IEC61850 Client
Local
SETTING GROUPS BLK:
ô Range: FlexLogic operand
Off
GROUP 2(6) ACTIVATE ON:
ô Range: FlexLogic operand
Off

ô GROUP 1(6) NAME: Range: up to 16 alphanumeric characters

SETTING GROUP
ñ Range: Enabled, Disabled
EVENTS: Disabled

The setting groups menu controls the activation and deactivation of up to six groups of settings in the GROUPED
ELEMENTS settings menu. The active setting group can be indicated on the front display of the Product by
configuring User-Programmable LEDs to display the state of the SETTING GROUP ACT FlexLogic operands.
On a setting group change, protection elements are blocked temporarily to allow the relay to re-initialize with the
new settings. The duration of the block depends on relay configuration and can last up to four cycles. The actual
block duration on the group switching can be verified by the PROTSUPV operand.

SETTING GROUPS FUNCTION

When Enabled, allows setting groups other than group 1 (the default active group) to be activated. When Disabled,
the default setting group is forced active. When changed from Disabled to Enabled, it resets the active setting group
to 1 independent of the Control Mode setting.

Control Mode
This setting displays when IEC 61850 is used. It selects the active setting group selection control mode. When set
to Local, active setting group selection is based on the FlexLogic operand states selected by GROUP ACTIVATE
ON settings and the SelectActiveSG request from an IEC 61850 client generates a negative response. When set

N60-1601-0125-861-1 538
Chapter 9 - Settings

to IEC61850 Client, the SelectActiveSG request from an IEC 61850 client selects the active setting group
and the FlexLogic operand states of the GROUP ACTIVATE ON settings are ignored/not used.
The logic diagram shows the active setting group selection behavior based on the Control Mode setting.
When the Control Mode is Local, the priority scheme makes active the highest numbered group selected by the
GROUP ACTIVATE ON settings. The most recent active group selection is preserved while the Product is powered
down or reset.
When the Control Mode is IEC61850 Client, the SelectActiveSG selection has an initial value that can be set
on a CID file download by the IEC 61850 setting Initial Setting Group. The most recent SelectActiveSG selection
is preserved while the Product is powered down or reset. If it becomes necessary to cancel the SelectActiveSG
selection without using a SelectActiveSG service request, disable the SETTING GROUPS FUNCTION. This
resets the SelectActiveSG selection to 1.
When the Control Mode is changed, the current active setting group selection is preserved.

Figure 286: Logic diagram for Control Mode setting

Note:
Active setting group selection can be made either by IEC 61850 MMS SelectActiveSG service or Local by the FlexLogic
operand states selected by GROUP # ACTIVATE ON settings. Simultaneous setting group control is not permissible.

SETTING GROUPS BLK

Prevents the active setting group from changing when the selected FlexLogic operand is On. This can be useful in
applications where it is undesirable to change the settings under certain conditions, such as during a control
sequence.

GROUP 2 ACTIVATE ON to GROUP 6 ACTIVATE ON

Selects a FlexLogic operand which, when set, makes the particular setting group active for use by any grouped
element. A priority scheme ensures that only one group is active at a given time — the highest-numbered group that
is activated by its ACTIVATE ON parameter takes priority over the lower-numbered groups. There is no activate on
setting for group 1 (the default active group), because group 1 automatically becomes active if no other group is
active.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 539
Chapter 9 - Settings

The settings are read-only with default values when the Control Mode setting is set to IEC61850 Client.
A setting group selection can also be made by the IEC 61850 MMS service SelectActiveSG to the control block
@Master/LLN0.SGCB. An active group selection can be done either by SelectActiveSG service from a IEC 61850
client or by GROUP ACTIVATE ON settings, but mixed operation is not allowed.
An initial setting group value is initialized to the GROUP ACTIVATE ON setting value on Product reboot immediately
following the receipt of a valid CID file.

SETTING GROUP 1 NAME to SETTING GROUP 6 NAME

Allows the user to assign a name to each of the six settings groups. Once programmed, this name appears on the
second line of the GROUPED ELEMENTS > SETTING GROUP 1(6) menu display.
The relay can be set up via a FlexLogic equation to receive requests to activate or de-activate a particular non-
default settings group. The following FlexLogic equation (see the following figure) illustrates requests via remote
communications (for example, VIRTUAL INPUT 1 ON) or from a local contact input (for example, CONTACT IP 1
ON) to initiate the use of a particular settings group, and requests from several overcurrent pickup measuring
elements to inhibit the use of the particular settings group. The assigned VIRTUAL OUTPUT 1 operand is used to
control the On state of a particular settings group.

✂✄☎✆ ✄✝ ✞ ✟✠ ✡✂✄✞☛
✒✓ ✔☞✕
☞ ✌✟✠✆ ✄✝ ✞ ✟✠ ✡✍✎✏☛
✑ ✟☎ ✡✖☛
✤✥✦ ✔✑✕ ✪ ✫✬✭✮ ✯✰ ✱ ✲✫✯✱✳
✗ ✝✍✏✘✙ ✆✟✌✞ ✝✚✝
✛ ✠✟✆
✜ ✝✍✏✘✙ ✆✟✌✖ ✝✚✝
✢ ✠✟✆
✣ ✏✠✧ ✡★☛
✩ ✴ ✂✄☎✆ ✟✝ ✞ ✡✂✟✞☛

✁ ✵✥✦
✶✷✸✹✶✺✻✼✽✾✿❀
Figure 287: Example of FlexLogic control of a setting group

9.8.3 SELECTOR SWITCH

Setting path: SETTINGS > CONTROL ELEMENTS > SELECTOR SWITCH > SELECTOR SWITCH 1(2)

Note:
Only selector switch 1 is shown

■ SELECTOR SWITCH 1 SELECTOR 1 FUNCTION:

ó Range: Disabled, Enabled
■ Disabled
SELECTOR 1 FULL
ô Range: 1 to 7 in steps of 1
RANGE: 7
SELECTOR 1 TIME-OUT:
ô Range: 3.0 to 60.0 s in steps of 0.1
5.0 s
SELECTOR 1 STEP-UP:
ô Range: FlexLogic operand
Off
SELECTOR 1 STEP-UP
ô Range: Time-out, Acknowledge
MODE: Time-out

N60-1601-0125-861-1 540
Chapter 9 - Settings

SELECTOR 1 ACK:
ô Range: FlexLogic operand
Off
SELECTOR 1 3BIT A0:
ô Range: FlexLogic operand
Off
SELECTOR 1 3BIT A1:
ô Range: FlexLogic operand
Off
SELECTOR 1 3BIT A2:
ô Range: FlexLogic operand
Off
SELECTOR 1 3BIT
ô Range: Time-out, Acknowledge
MODE: Time-out
SELECTOR 1 3BIT ACK:
ô Range: FlexLogic operand
Off
SELECTOR 1 POWER-UP
ô Range: Restore, Synchronize, Sync/Restore
MODE: Restore
SELECTOR 1 TARGETS:
ô Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
Self-reset
SELECTOR 1 EVENTS:
ñ Range: Disabled, Enabled
Disabled

The selector switch element is intended to replace a mechanical selector switch. Typical applications include setting
group control or control of multiple logic sub-circuits in user-programmable logic.
The element provides for two control inputs. The step-up control allows stepping through selector position one step
at a time with each pulse of the control input, such as a user-programmable pushbutton. The three-bit control input
allows setting the selector to the position defined by a three-bit word.
The element allows pre-selecting a new position without applying it. The pre-selected position gets applied either
after time-out or upon acknowledgement via separate inputs (user setting). The selector position is stored in non-
volatile memory. Upon power-up, either the previous position is restored or the relay synchronizes to the current
three-bit word (user setting). Basic alarm functionality alerts the user under abnormal conditions; for example, the
three-bit control input being out of range.
A selector switch runs every two power cycles.

SELECTOR 1 FULL RANGE

This setting defines the upper position of the selector. When stepping up through available positions of the selector,
the upper position wraps up to the lower position (position 1). When using a direct three-bit control word for
programming the selector to a desired position, the change would take place only if the control word is within the
range of 1 to the SELECTOR FULL RANGE. If the control word is outside the range, an alarm is established by
setting the SELECTOR ALARM FlexLogic operand for three seconds.

SELECTOR 1 TIME-OUT
This setting defines the time-out period for the selector. This value is used by the relay in the following two ways.
When the SELECTOR STEP-UP MODE is Time-out, the setting specifies the required period of inactivity of the
control input after which the pre-selected position is automatically applied. When the SELECTOR STEP-UP MODE
is Acknowledge, the setting specifies the period of time for the acknowledging input to appear. The timer is re-
started by any activity of the control input. The acknowledging input must come before the SELECTOR 1 TIME-
OUT timer expires; otherwise, the change does not take place and an alarm is set.

SELECTOR 1 STEP-UP
This setting specifies a control input for the selector switch. The switch is shifted to a new position at each rising
edge of this signal. The position changes incrementally, wrapping up from the last (SELECTOR 1 FULL RANGE) to

N60-1601-0125-861-1 541
Chapter 9 - Settings

the first (position 1). Consecutive pulses of this control operand must not occur faster than every 50 ms. After each
rising edge of the assigned operand, the time-out timer is restarted and the SELECTOR SWITCH 1: POS Z CHNG
INITIATED target message is displayed, where Z the pre-selected position. The message is displayed for the time
specified by the FLASH MESSAGE TIME setting. The pre-selected position is applied after the selector times out
(Time-out mode), or when the acknowledging signal appears before the element times out (Acknowledge mode).
When the new position is applied, the relay displays the SELECTOR SWITCH 1: POSITION Z IN USE message.
Typically, a user-programmable pushbutton is configured as the stepping up control input.

SELECTOR 1 STEP-UP MODE

This setting defines the selector mode of operation. When set to Time-out, the selector changes its position after a
pre-defined period of inactivity at the control input. The change is automatic and does not require any explicit
confirmation of the intent to change the selector's position. When set to Acknowledge, the selector changes its
position only after the intent is confirmed through a separate acknowledging signal. If the acknowledging signal
does not appear within a pre-defined period of time, the selector does not accept the change and an alarm is
established by setting the SELECTOR STP ALARM output FlexLogic operand for three seconds.

SELECTOR 1 ACK
This setting specifies an acknowledging input for the stepping up control input. The pre-selected position is applied
on the rising edge of the assigned operand. This setting is active only under Acknowledge mode of operation. The
acknowledging signal must appear within the time defined by the SELECTOR 1 TIME-OUT setting after the last
activity of the control input. A user-programmable pushbutton is typically configured as the acknowledging input.

SELECTOR 1 3BIT A0, A1, and A2

These settings specify a three-bit control input of the selector. The three-bit control word pre-selects the position
using the following encoding convention:
A2 A1 A0 Position
0 0 0 rest
0 0 1 1
0 1 0 2
0 1 1 3
1 0 0 4
1 0 1 5
1 1 0 6
1 1 1 7

The rest position (0, 0, 0) does not generate an action and is intended for situations when the device generating
the three-bit control word is having a problem. When SELECTOR 1 3BIT MODE is Time-out, the pre-selected
position is applied in SELECTOR 1 TIME-OUT seconds after the last activity of the three-bit input. When
SELECTOR 1 3BIT MODE is Acknowledge, the pre-selected position is applied on the rising edge of the
SELECTOR 1 3BIT ACK acknowledging input.
The stepping up control input (SELECTOR 1 STEP-UP) and the three-bit control inputs (SELECTOR 1 3BIT A0
through A2) lock-out mutually: once the stepping up sequence is initiated, the three-bit control input is inactive; once
the three-bit control sequence is initiated, the stepping up input is inactive.

SELECTOR 1 3BIT MODE

This setting defines the selector mode of operation. When set to Time-out, the selector changes its position after a
pre-defined period of inactivity at the control input. The change is automatic and does not require explicit
confirmation to change the selector position. When set to Acknowledge, the selector changes its position only after
confirmation via a separate acknowledging signal. If the acknowledging signal does not appear within a pre-defined

N60-1601-0125-861-1 542
Chapter 9 - Settings

period of time, the selector rejects the change and an alarm established by invoking the SELECTOR BIT ALARM
FlexLogic operand for three seconds.

SELECTOR 1 3BIT ACK

This setting specifies an acknowledging input for the three-bit control input. The pre-selected position is applied on
the rising edge of the assigned FlexLogic operand. This setting is active only under the Acknowledge mode of
operation. The acknowledging signal must appear within the time defined by the SELECTOR TIME-OUT setting
after the last activity of the three-bit control inputs. Note that the stepping up control input and three-bit control input
have independent acknowledging signals (SELECTOR 1 ACK and SELECTOR 1 3BIT ACK, accordingly).

SELECTOR 1 POWER-UP MODE

This setting specifies the element behavior on power up of the relay.
When set to Restore, the last position of the selector (stored in the non-volatile memory) is restored after powering
up the relay. If the position restored from memory is out of range, position 0 (no output operand selected) is applied
and an alarm is set (SELECTOR 1 PWR ALARM).
When set to Synchronize, the selector switch acts as follows. For two power cycles, the selector applies position
0 to the switch and activates SELECTOR 1 PWR ALARM. After two power cycles expire, the selector synchronizes
to the position dictated by the three-bit control input. This operation does not wait for time-out or the acknowledging
input. When the synchronization attempt is unsuccessful (that is, the three-bit input is not available (0,0,0) or out of
range), then the selector switch output is set to position 0 (no output operand selected) and an alarm is established
(SELECTOR 1 PWR ALARM).
The operation of Synch/Restore mode is similar to the Synchronize mode. The only difference is that after an
unsuccessful synchronization attempt, the switch attempts to restore the position stored in the relay memory. The
Synch/Restore mode is useful for applications where the selector switch is employed to change the setting group
in redundant (two relay) protection schemes.

SELECTOR 1 EVENTS
If enabled, the following events are logged:
Event name Description
SELECTOR 1 POS Z Selector 1 changed its position to Z
SELECTOR 1 STP ALARM The selector position pre-selected via the stepping up control input has not been confirmed before
the time out
SELECTOR 1 BIT ALARM The selector position pre-selected via the three-bit control input has not been confirmed before the
time out

The following figures illustrate the operation of the selector switch. In these diagrams, “T” represents a time-out
setting:

N60-1601-0125-861-1 543
Chapter 9 - Settings

✳✴✵✶ ✷✸✳ ✵✷✹✶ ✷✺ ✷✻✶✼✽✳✴✷✾

✢✣✤✎✤✥✦✧★✦✩✪ ✬✭✮✩✪✤✯ ★✫ ✙ ✰✦★✭ ✬✭✮✩✪✤✯ ★✫ ✖ ✰✦★✭ ✬✭✮✩✪✤✯ ★✫ ✗ ✰✦★✭ ✮ ✬✭✮✩✪✤✯ ★✫ ✜ ✰✦★✭

✢✫✧✦★✦✫✩ ✗ ✮ ✢✱✧✭✲✱★★✫✩ ✮ ✑✎✲✦★ ✦✩✢✱★ ✢✱✧✭✲✱★★✫✩ ✮ ✑✎✲✦★ ✦✩✢✱★

☛☞✌✍✎✏✍

☞ ☞

✑✒✓☞ ✔✕

✑✒✓☞ ✔✖

✑✒✓☞ ✔✗
☞ ☞

✍✘☛ ✖

✍✘☛ ✗

✍✘☛ ✑

✍✘☛ ✙

✍✘☛ ✚

✍✘☛ ✛

✍✘☛ ✜

✒✓☞ ✕

✒✓☞ ✖

✒✓☞ ✗

☛☞✍ ✔✿✔❀❁

✒✓☞ ✔✿✔❀❁

✔✿✔❀❁
✁✂✄☎✄✆✝✞✟✠✡

Figure 288: Time-out mode

N60-1601-0125-861-1 544
Chapter 9 - Settings

✶✷✸✹✺✻ ✼✽✾✿✽ ❀✺✾✽ ✺❁ ✺❂✽❃✶❄ ❅✺✹

✥✦✧✏✧★✩✪✫✩✬✭ ✯✰✱✬✭✧✲ ✫✮ ✜ ✳✩✫✰ ✯✰✱✬✭✧✲ ✫✮ ✙ ✳✩✫✰ ✯✰✱✬✭✧✲ ✫✮ ✚ ✳✩✫✰

✥✮✪✩✫✩✮✬ ✚ ✱ ✥✴✪✰✵✴✫✫✮✬ ✱ ✕✏✵✩✫ ✩✬✥✴✫ ✱ ✥✴✪✰✵✴✫✫✮✬

☞✌✍✎✏✑✎

✒✓✔

✕✖✗✌ ✒✘

✕✖✗✌ ✒✙

✕✖✗✌ ✒✚

✕✖✗✌ ✒✓✔

✎✛☞ ✙

✎✛☞ ✚

✎✛☞ ✕

✎✛☞ ✜

✎✛☞ ✢

✎✛☞ ✣

✎✛☞ ✤

✖✗✌ ✘

✖✗✌ ✙

✖✗✌ ✚

☞✌✎ ✒❆✒❇❈

✖✗✌ ✒❆✒❇❈

✒❆✒❇❈
✁✂✄☎✆✝✞✟✠✡☛

Figure 289: Acknowledge mode

Application example
Consider an application where the selector switch is used to control setting groups 1 through 4 in the relay. The
setting groups are to be controlled from both user-programmable pushbutton 1 and from an external device via
contact inputs 1 through 3. The active setting group is to be available as an encoded three-bit word to the external
device and SCADA via output contacts 1 through 3. The pre-selected setting group is to be applied automatically
after five seconds of inactivity of the control inputs. When the relay powers up, it is to synchronize the setting group
to the three-bit control input.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 545
Chapter 9 - Settings

Make the following changes to setting group control in the SETTINGS > CONTROL ELEMENTS > SETTING
GROUPS menu:
● FUNCTION: Enabled
● Block: Off
● GROUP 2 ACTIVATE ON: SELECTOR 1 POS 2
● GROUP 3 ACTIVATE ON: SELECTOR 1 POS 3
● GROUP 4 ACTIVATE ON: SELECTOR 1 POS 4
● GROUP 5 ACTIVATE ON: Off
● GROUP 6 ACTIVATE ON: Off
Make the following changes to selector switch element in the SETTINGS > CONTROL ELEMENTS > SELECTOR
SWITCH > SELECTOR SWITCH 1 menu to assign control to user programmable pushbutton 1 and contact inputs 1
through 3:
● SELECTOR 1 FUNCTION: Enabled
● SELECTOR 1 FULL-RANGE: 4
● SELECTOR 1 STEP-UP MODE: Time-out
● SELECTOR 1 TIME-OUT: 5.0 s
● SELECTOR 1 STEP-UP: PUSHBUTTON 1 ON
● SELECTOR 1 ACK: Off
● SELECTOR 1 3BIT A0: CONT IP 1 ON
● SELECTOR 1 3BIT A1: CONT IP 2 ON
● SELECTOR 1 3BIT A2: CONT IP 3 ON
● SELECTOR 1 3BIT MODE: Time-out
● SELECTOR 1 3BIT ACK: Off
● SELECTOR 1 POWER-UP MODE: Synchronize
Now, assign the contact output operation (assume the H6E module) to the selector switch element by making the
following changes in the SETTINGS > INPUTS/OUTPUTS > CONTACT OUTPUTS menu:
● OUTPUT H1 OPERATE: SELECTOR 1 BIT 0
● OUTPUT H2 OPERATE: SELECTOR 1 BIT 1
● OUTPUT H3 OPERATE: SELECTOR 1 BIT 2
Finally, assign configure user-programmable pushbutton 1 by making the following changes in the SETTINGS >
PRODUCT SETUP > USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS > USER PUSHBUTTON 1 menu:
● PUSHBUTTON 1 FUNCTION: Self-reset
● PUSHBUTTON 1 DROP-OUT TIME: 0.10 s
The figure shows the logic for the selector switch.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 546
Chapter 9 - Settings

✱✥●●✩✯★✱

✲✳✴✳✵✶✷✸ ✹ ❍❆✴✴ ✸❁❇■✳❋

✲✳✴✳✵✶✷✸ ✹ ✲✶✳✺❉❆✺ ❂✷❊✳❋

✲✳✴✳✵✶✷✸ ✹ ✼❃❄✶ ❂✷❊✳❋

✲✳✴✳✵✶✷✸ ✹ ✶❄❂✳❉✷❆✶❋ ✮✪●❙✮✤ ❚✮✤❙✥

✱✥●●✩✯★✱
✲✳✴✳✵✶✷✸ ✹ ✺✷✲❄✶❄✷❇
✲✳✴✳✵✶✷✸ ✹ ❍❆❇✵✶❄✷❇❋ ✲✳✴✳✵✶✷✸ ✹ ✺✷❈✳✸❉❆✺ ❂✷❊✳❋

✳▲▼◆❖P◗ ❑ ✹ ✸❆❇
✲✳✴✳✵✶✷✸ ✹ ✲✶✳✺❉❆✺❋ ✣✤✥✦✤✧★✩✪✫ ✧✬✥✭✮✯✰✱
✷❏❏ ❑ ❅ ✡☛☞✌ ✍✌ ✲✳✴✳✵✶✷✸ ✹ ✺✷✲ ✹
✻
✲✳✴✳✵✶✷✸ ✹ ❁✵❘❋ ✹ ✲✳✴✳✵✶✷✸ ✹ ✺✷✲ ✻
✼
✷❏❏ ❑ ❅ ✎✏✑✒✓✔✕☞✖✗☞ ✲✳✴✳✵✶✷✸ ✹ ✺✷✲ ✼
✲✳✴✳✵✶✷✸ ✹ ✼❃❄✶ ❁❅❋ ✽
✲✳✴✳✵✶✷✸ ✹ ✺✷✲ ✽
❯
✷❏❏ ❑ ❅ ❛
❵ ✜✢ ✲✳✴✳✵✶✷✸ ✹ ✺✷✲ ✾
❫❬
✲✳✴✳✵✶✷✸ ✹ ✼❃❄✶ ❁✹❋ ❴❪ ❀ ✾
❯❲ ✲✳✴✳✵✶✷✸ ✹ ✺✷✲ ✿
❫❪ ✿
✷❏❏ ❑ ❅ ❭ ✲✳✴✳✵✶✷✸ ✹ ✺✷✲ ❀
❬❯
✲✳✴✳✵✶✷✸ ✹ ✼❃❄✶ ❁✻❋ ❩❨
❳❳❲
✷❏❏ ❑ ❅ ❯❱ ✣✤✥✦✤✧★✩✪✫ ✧✬✥✭✮✯✰✱
✲✳✴✳✵✶✷✸ ✹ ✼❃❄✶ ❁✵❘❋
✲✳✴✳✵✶✷✸ ✹ ✲✶✺ ❁✴❁✸❂
✷❏❏ ❑ ❅ ✘✙✚✛☛ ✎✏✑✒✓✔✕☞✖✗☞
✲✳✴✳✵✶✷✸ ✹ ❃❄✶ ❁✴❁✸❂
✘✙✚✛☛ ✌✓✡✛☛✛✓✒ ✓✍☛ ❝
❜ ✲✳✴✳✵✶✷✸ ✹ ❁✴❁✸❂
✲✳✴✳✵✶✷✸ ✹ ✺❈✸ ❁✴❁✸❂
✲✳✴✳✵✶✷✸ ✹ ❃❄✶ ❅
✲✳✴✳✵✶✷✸ ✹ ❃❄✶ ✹
✲✳✴✳✵✶✷✸ ✹ ❃❄✶ ✻
✁✂✄☎✂✆✂✝✞✟✠

Figure 290: Selector switch logic

9.8.4 UNDERFREQUENCY (ANSI 81U)

Setting path: SETTINGS > CONTROL ELEMENTS > UNDERFREQUENCY > UNDERFREQUENCY <n>

Note:
Only Underfrequency 1 is shown

■ UNDERFREQUENCY 1 UNDFREQ 1 FUNCTION:

ó Range: Disabled, Enabled
■ Disabled
UNDERFREQ 1 BLOCK:
ô Range: FlexLogic operand
Off
UNDERFREQ 1 SOURCE:
ô Range: SRC <n>
SRC 1
UNDERFREQ 1 MIN
ô Range: 0.10 to 1.25 pu in steps of 0.01
VOLT/AMP: 0.10 pu
UNDERFREQ 1 PICKUP:
ô Range: 20.00 to 70.00 Hz in steps of 0.01
59.50 Hz
UNDERFREQ 1 PICKUP
ô Range: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001
DELAY: 2.000 s
UNDERFREQ 1 RESET
ô Range: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001
DELAY: 2.000 s
UNDERFREQ 1 TARGET:
ô Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
Self-reset

N60-1601-0125-861-1 547
Chapter 9 - Settings

UNDERFREQ 1 EVENTS:
ñ Range: Disabled, Enabled
Disabled

The steady-state frequency of a power system is a certain indicator of the existing balance between the generated
power and the load. Whenever this balance is disrupted through the loss of an important generating unit or the
isolation of part of the system from the rest of the system, the effect is a reduction in frequency. If the control
systems of the system generators do not respond fast enough, the system can collapse. A reliable method to
quickly restore the balance between load and generation is to automatically disconnect selected loads, based on
the actual system frequency. This technique, called load-shedding, maintains system integrity and minimize
widespread outages. After the frequency returns to normal, the load can be restored automatically or manually.

UNDERFREQ 1 SOURCE
This setting is used to select the source for the signal to be measured. The element first checks for a live phase
voltage available from the selected source. If voltage is not available, the element attempts to use a phase current.
If neither voltage nor current is available, the element does not operate, as it does not measure a parameter below
the minimum voltage/current setting.

UNDERFREQ 1 MIN VOLT/AMP

Selects the minimum per unit voltage or current level required to allow the underfrequency element to operate. This
threshold is used to prevent an incorrect operation because there is no signal to measure.

UNDERFREQ 1 PICKUP
Selects the level at which the underfrequency element is to pickup. For example, if the system frequency is 60 Hz
and the load shedding is required at 59.5 Hz, the setting is 59.50 Hz.
✗☞❅❅✏✕✎

✘✙✚✛✜✢✜✛✣ ✤ ✢✘✙✥✦✧★✙✩

✶❃❋●❍■❏❑✺

✗☞❅❅✏✕✎ ✗☞❅❅✏✕✎ ✗☞❅❅✏✕✎

✳✴✵✶✷✸✷✶✹ ✺ ✳✴✵✶✷✸✷✶✹ ✺
✘✙✚✛✜✢✜✛✣ ✤ ✪✫★✥✬✩ ✻✼✽✾✳✻ ✿ ✻✼✽✾✳✻ ✵✶❈❉❊ ✿
✆❄✟ ✷✳✴ ✡☛☞✌☛✍✎✏✑ ✍✒☞✓✔✕✖✗
❀❚❚ ❑ ❯ ✳✴✵✶✷✸✷✶✹ ✺
✳✴✵✶✷✸✷✶✹ ✺ ✻✾✻
✷✶❆✶❇ ✵✶❈❉❊ ✿
✗☞❅❅✏✕✎ ✳✴✵✶✷✸✷✶✹ ✺ ✵✻❀
✗☞❅❅✏✕✎ ◆❖P❖
✘✙✚✛✜✢✜✛✣ ✤ ❯ ❫ ❚ ❫ ✻✼✽✾✳✻ ◆◗❘❙ ✳✴✵✶✷✸✷✶✹ ✺ ❀✻
✘✙✚✛✜✢✜✛✣ ✤ ✭★✘✜✥✛✩ ✔✑❅▲✔☛ ▼✔☛▲☞✗ ✮✧✙ ✯★✫✦ ✰ ✱✮✲✩

❈■❳■❍ ❴ ❁❂❃
❱❀❈❇ ❲ ❉❁✻ ✁✂✄✂☎✆☎✝✞✟✠
✸❨■❩❬■❃❭❪

Figure 291: Underfrequency logic

9.8.5 OVERFREQUENCY (ANSI 81O)

Setting path: SETTINGS > CONTROL ELEMENTS > OVERFREQUENCY > OVERFREQUENCY 1(4)

Note:
Only Overfrequency 1 is shown

■ OVERFREQUENCY 1 OVERFREQ 1 FUNCTION:

ó Range: Disabled, Enabled
■ Disabled
OVERFREQ 1 BLOCK:
ô Range: FlexLogic operand
Off
OVERFREQ 1 SOURCE:
ô Range: SRC <n>
SRC 1

N60-1601-0125-861-1 548
Chapter 9 - Settings

OVERFREQ 1 PICKUP:
ô Range: 20.00 to 70.00 Hz in steps of 0.01
60.50 Hzz
OVERFREQ 1 PICKUP
ô Range: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001
DELAY: 0.500 s
OVERFREQ 1 RESET
ô Range: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001
DELAY : 0.500 s
OVERFREQ 1 TARGET:
ô Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
Self-reset
OVERFREQ 1 EVENTS:
ñ Range: Disabled, Enabled
Disabled

There are four overfrequency elements, numbered 1 through 4.

A frequency calculation for a given source is made on the input of a voltage or current channel, depending on which
is available. The channels are searched for the signal input in the following order: voltage channel A, auxiliary
voltage channel, current channel A, and ground current channel. The first available signal is used for frequency
calculation.
The steady-state frequency of a power system is an indicator of the existing balance between the generated power
and the load. Whenever this balance is disrupted through the disconnection of significant load or the isolation of a
part of the system that has a surplus of generation, the effect is an increase in frequency. If the control systems of
the generators do not respond fast enough, to quickly ramp the turbine speed back to normal, the overspeed can
lead to the turbine trip. The overfrequency element can be used to control the turbine frequency ramp down at a
generating location. This element can also be used for feeder reclosing as part of the after load shedding
restoration.
The OVERFREQ 1 SOURCE setting selects the source for the signal to be measured.
The OVERFREQ 1 PICKUP setting selects the level at which the overfrequency element is to pickup.

✴✵✶✶✷✸✹

✘✙✚✛✜✛✚✢ ✣ ✜✤✥✦✧★✘✥✩
✴✵✶✶✷✸✹
☞✼✽✾✿❀❁ ❂ ✰
✍✮☞✓✡✓☞✯ ✰ ✒✏✑✱✲✒ ✳ ✗☞✺✺✏✕✎

✴✵✶✶✷✸✹ ✍✮☞✓✡✓☞✯ ✰ ✒✏✑✱✲✒

✔✕✖ ✓✲✕ ✖☞☛✔✻ ✳
✘✙✚✛✜✛✚✢ ✣ ✪✫✘✦✬✩ ✡☛☞✌☛✍✎✏✑ ✍✒☞✓✔✕✖✗
✍✮☞✓✡✓☞✯ ✰ ✓☞✗☞✺
✍✮☞✓✡✓☞✯ ✰ ✒✱✒
✖☞☛✔✻ ✳
✍❈❈ ❂ ❉ ✍✮☞✓✡✓☞✯ ✰ ✖✒✍
❃❄❅❄
❃✠❆❇ ✍✮☞✓✡✓☞✯ ✰ ✍✒
✴✵✶✶✷✸✹ ❈ ❏ ✒✏✑✱✲✒

✘✙✚✛✜✛✚✢ ✣ ✭✘✤✛✦✚✩

✡❊❀❋●❀✼❍■ ✁✂ ✄✁☎✆✝✞✟✠

Figure 292: Overfrequency logic

9.8.6 FREQUENCY RATE OF CHANGE (ANSI 81R)

Setting path: SETTINGS > CONTROL ELEMENTS > FREQUENCY RATE OF CHANGE > FREQUENCY RATE
OF CHANGE <n>

Note:
Only Frequency rate of change 1 is shown

N60-1601-0125-861-1 549
Chapter 9 - Settings

■ FREQUENCY RATE FREQ RATE 1

ó Range: Disabled, Enabled
■ OF CHANGE 1 FUNCTION: Disabled
FREQ RATE 1 SOURCE:
ô Range: SRC <n>
SRC 1
FREQ RATE 1 TREND:
ô Range: Increasing, Decreasing, Bi-directional
Increasing
FREQ RATE 1 PICKUP:
ô Range: 0.10 to 15.00 Hz/sec in steps of 0.01
0.50 Hz/sec
FREQ RATE 1 OV SUPV
ô Range: 0.100 to 3.000 pu in steps of 0.001
PICKUP: 0.700 pu
FREQ RATE 1 OC SUPV
ô Range: 0.020 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001
PICKUP: 0.200 pu
FREQ RATE 1 MIN
ô Range: 20.00 to 80.00 Hz in steps of 0.01
FREQUENCY: 45.00 Hz
FREQ RATE 1 MAX
ô Range: 20.00 to 80.00 Hz in steps of 0.01
FREQUENCY: 65.00 Hz
FREQ RATE 1 PICKUP
ô Range: 0 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001
DELAY: 0.000 s
FREQ RATE 1 RESET
ô Range: 0 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001
DELAY: 0.000 s
FREQ RATE 1 BLOCK:
ô Range: FlexLogic operand
Off
FREQ RATE 1 TARGET:
ô Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
Self-reset
FREQ RATE 1 EVENTS:
ñ Range: Disabled, Enabled
Disabled

The element responds to rate of change of frequency with voltage, current and frequency supervision.

FREQ RATE 1 TREND

This setting configures the element to respond to increasing or decreasing frequency, or to frequency change in
either direction.

FREQ RATE 1 PICKUP

This setting specifies an intended df/dt pickup threshold. For applications monitoring a decreasing trend, set FREQ
RATE 1 TREND to Decreasing and specify the pickup threshold accordingly. The operating condition is -df/dt >
Pickup.
For applications monitoring an increasing trend, set FREQ RATE 1 TREND to Increasing and specify the pickup
threshold accordingly. The operating condition is: df/dt > Pickup.
For applications monitoring rate of change of frequency in any direction set FREQ RATE 1 TREND to “Bi-
Directional” and specify the pickup threshold accordingly. The operating condition is abs (df/dt) > Pickup.

FREQ RATE 1 OV SUPV PICKUP

This setting defines the minimum voltage level required for operation of the element. The supervising function
responds to the positive-sequence voltage. Use overvoltage supervision to prevent operation under specific system
conditions, such as faults.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 550
Chapter 9 - Settings

FREQ RATE 1 OC SUPV PICKUP

This setting defines minimum current level required for operation of the element. The supervising function responds
to the positive-sequence current. Typical application includes load shedding. Set the pickup threshold to 0.020 if no
overcurrent supervision is required.

FREQ RATE 1 MIN FREQUENCY

This setting defines the minimum frequency level required for operation of the element. The setting can be used to
effectively block the feature based on frequency. For example, if the intent is to monitor an increasing trend but only
if the frequency is already above certain level, set this setting to the required frequency level.

FREQ RATE 1 MAX FREQUENCY

This setting defines the maximum frequency level required for operation of the element. The setting can be used to
effectively block the feature based on frequency. For example, if the intent is to monitor a decreasing trend but only
if the frequency is already below a certain level (such as for load shedding), set this setting to the required
frequency level.

Note:
If the signal source assigned to the frequency rate of change element is only set to auxiliary VT, then the minimum voltage
supervision is 3 V.

✰✱✲✲✳✴✵✰
✰✱✲✲✳✴✵
✓✔✕✖ ✔✗✘✕ ☞ ✓✒✣✏✘✎✛✣✜
✓✔✕✖ ✔✗✘✕ ☞ ✛✡ ✤✒✍✡
✕✶✬✷✪✧✸ ✹ ☞ ✍✎✏✑✒✍✜
❀
✓✔✕✖ ✔✗✘✕ ☞ ✙✚✛✏✑✜ ✔✒✣
✿
✾
✛✢✢
✠ ✡☛☞ ✠ ✌ ✍✎✏✑✒✍

✰✱✲✲✳✴✵✰

✰✱✲✲✳✴✵ ✓✔✕✖ ✔✗✘✕ ☞ ✍✎✏✑✒✍

✰✱✲✲✳✴✵✰
❇✕✚✗❅✜
✰✱✲✲✳✴✵ ✓✔✕✖ ✔✗✘✕ ☞ ✛✏ ✤✒✍✡
✓✔✕✖ ✔✗✘✕ ☞ ✘✔✕✣❇✜ ✓✔✕✖ ✔✗✘✕ ☞ ✔✕✤✕✘
✍✎✏✑✒✍✜
✓✔✕✖ ✔✗✘✕ ☞ ✤✛✒✔✏✕✜ ❇✕✚✗❅✜
✓✔✕✖ ✔✗✘✕ ☞ ✍✎✏✑✒✍✜
✔✒✣
✍✥✦ ✦✧★ ✩✥✪✫✬✭✧ ✮✡☛☞✯ ❀ ✫▲▼▲ ❈❉✱❊❉❋✵✳● ❋❍✱■❏✴❑✰
✿ ✔✒✣
✾
✍✥✦ ✦✧★ ✺✻✼✼✧✶✫ ✮✎☛☞✯ ✠ ✎☛☞ ✠ ✌✍✎✏✑✒✍ ✓✔✕✖ ✔✗✘✕ ☞ ✛✍

✓✼✧★✻✧✶✺✽ ✮✓✯ ✸✢❆✸✫ ✌ ✍✎✏✑✒✍

✫◆❖P
✓✔✕✖ ✔✗✘✕ ☞ ❇✍✛
✰✱✲✲✳✴✵✰
✓✔✕✖ ✔✗✘✕ ☞ ✍✑✍
✓✔✕✖ ✔✗✘✕ ☞ ❁✎✣
✓✔✕✖✒✕✣✏❅✜

✓✔✕✖ ✔✗✘✕ ☞ ❁✗❄

✓✔✕✖✒✕✣✏❅✜

✔✒✣

✓ ✌ ❁✎✣ ❂ ✓ ❃ ❁✗❄

✔✒✣

✏✬✪✺✻✪✬✫✧ ✸✢❆✸✫
✁✂✄✂✁☎✂✆✝✞✟

Figure 293: Frequency rate of change logic

9.8.7 SYNCHROCHECK (ANSI 25)

Setting path: SETTINGS > CONTROL ELEMENTS > SYNCHROCHECK > SYNCHROCHECK <n>

Note:
Only Synchrocheck 1 is shown

■ SYNCHROCHECK 1 SYNCHK1 FUNCTION:

ó Range: Disabled, Enabled
■ Disabled
SYNCHK1 BLOCK:
ô Range: FlexLogic operand
Off

N60-1601-0125-861-1 551
Chapter 9 - Settings

SYNCHK1 V1 SOURCE:
ô Range: SRC <n>
SRC 1
SYNCHK1 V2 SOURCE:
ô Range: SRC <n>
SRC 2
SYNCHK1 PHASE
ô Range: Auto, Vag, Vbg, Vcg, Vab, Vbc, Vca
SELECT: Auto
SYNCHK1 MAX VOLT
ô Range: 0 to 400000 V in steps of 1
DIFF: 10000 V
SYNCHK1 MAX ANGLE
ô Range: 0 to 100° in steps of 1
DIFF: 30
SYNCHK1 MAX FREQ
ô Range: 0.005 to 2.000 Hz in steps of 0.001
DIFF: 0.100 Hz
SYNCHK1 MAX FREQ
ô Range: 0.000 to 0.100 Hz in steps of 0.001
HYSTERESIS: 0.060 Hz
SYNCHK1 SYNC CLOSE:
ô Range: FlexLogic operand
Off
SYNCHK1 S-CLS MAX
ô Range: 0.100 to 10.000 Hz in steps of 0.001
dF: 0.500 Hz
SYNCHK1 S-CLS MIN
ô Range: 0.005 to 1.000 Hz in steps of 0.001
dF: 0.100 Hz
SYNCHK1 S-CLS ANG:
ô Range: 0 to 100° in steps of 1
1
SYNCHK1 S-CLS BRK
ô Range: 0.010 to 0.500 s in steps of 0.001
TIME: 0.035 s
SYNCHK1 V2 MAG CORR
ô Range: 0.10 to 10.00 in steps of 0.01
FACTOR: 1.00
SYNCHK1 V2 ANGLE
ô Range: -180 to +180 degrees in steps of 1
SHIFT: 0
SYNCHK1 DEAD SOURCE Range: None, LV1 and DV2, DV1 and LV2, DV1 or
ô
SELECT: LV1 and DV2 DV2, DV1 Xor DV2, DV1 and DV2
SYNCHK1 DEAD V1
ô Range: 0.04 to 1.25 pu in steps of 0.01
MAX VOLT: 0.30 pu
SYNCHK1 DEAD V2
ô Range: 0.04 to 1.25 pu in steps of 0.01
MAX VOLT: 0.30 pu
SYNCHK1 LIVE V1
ô Range: 0.04 to 1.25 pu in steps of 0.01
MIN VOLT: 0.70 pu
SYNCHK1 LIVE V2
ô Range: 0.04 to 1.25 pu in steps of 0.01
MIN VOLT: 0.70 pu
SYNCHK1 TARGET:
ô Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
Self-reset
SYNCHK1 EVENTS:
ñ Range: Disabled, Enabled
Disabled

The synchronism check function supervises the paralleling of two parts of a system that are to be joined by the
closure of a circuit breaker. The synchrocheck elements are typically used at locations where the two parts of the
system are interconnected through at least one other point in the system.
Synchrocheck verifies that the voltages (V1 and V2) on the two sides of the supervised circuit breaker are within set
limits of magnitude, angle, and frequency differences. The time that the two voltages remain within the admissible

N60-1601-0125-861-1 552
Chapter 9 - Settings

angle difference is determined by the setting of the phase angle difference DF and the frequency difference DF (slip
frequency). It can be defined as the time it takes the voltage phasor V1 or V2 to traverse an angle equal to 2 ´ DF at
a frequency equal to the frequency difference DF. This time is calculated by:

T = (DF´360°/2DF)-1
where:
● DF = phase angle difference in degrees
● DF = frequency difference in Hz
If one or both sources are de-energized, the synchrocheck programming can allow for closing of the circuit breaker
using undervoltage control to bypass the synchrocheck measurements (dead source function).

SYNCHK1 V1 SOURCE
This setting selects the source for voltage V1 (see the Notes section that follows).

SYNCHK1 V2 SOURCE
Selects the source for voltage V2. V1 and V2 can have different sources or they can be the same (see the table in
the next section).
If V1 and V2 are assigned to SRC 1, for example, then in Settings > System Setup > Power System, the below
settings should have the following values:
● FREQUENCY AND PHASE REFERENCE: SRC 1
● ALTERNATE FREQ AND PHS REFERENCE: SRC 1
● SIGNAL TO TRACK: Auto or 3PH_VT
● ALT SIGNAL TO TRACK: 1PH_VT
Also, in Settings > System Setup > Signal Sources, both PHASE VT and AUX VT should be configured.
If the above settings are not configured as suggested, the following target message will appear: SYNCHK 1:
CHECK SETTINGS. This message self-resets when the element is either disabled or configured as above.

Note:
The same source feature is not supported in the L60

SYNCHK1 PHASE SELECT

This setting selects the source voltage (see the table in the next section) used by the synchrocheck element and is
applicable when
● Both V1 and V2 assigned signal sources differ, and
● Both V1 and V2 assigned signal sources both have three-phase VT banks configured

SYNCHK1 MAX VOLT DIFF

Selects the maximum primary voltage difference in volts between the two sources. A primary voltage magnitude
difference between the two input voltages below this value is within the permissible limit for synchronism.

SYNCHK1 MAX ANGLE DIFF

Selects the maximum angular difference in degrees between the two sources. An angular difference between the
two input voltage phasors below this value is within the permissible limit for synchronism.

SYNCHK1 MAX FREQ HYSTERESIS

This setting specifies the required hysteresis for frequency difference condition.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 553
Chapter 9 - Settings

SYNCHK1 MAX FREQ DIFF

The condition becomes satisfied when the frequency difference becomes lower than SYNCHK1 MAX FREQ DIFF.
Once the condition is satisfied, the frequency difference must increase to more than the sum of SYNCHK1 MAX
FREQ DIFF + SYNCHK1 MAX FREQ HYSTERESIS to drop out.

SYNCHK1 S-CLS MAX dF

The condition becomes satisfied when the frequency difference becomes lower than SYNCHK1 S-CLS MAX dF.
Once the condition is satisfied, the frequency difference must increase to more than the sum of SYNCHK1 S-CLS
MAX dF + SYNCHK1 MAX FREQ HYSTERESIS to drop out.

SYNCHK1 S-CLS MIN dF

The condition becomes satisfied when the frequency difference becomes higher than SYNCHK1 S-CLS MIN dF.
Once the condition is satisfied, the frequency difference must decrease to less than SYNCHK1 S-CLS MIN dF -
SYNCHK1 MAX FREQ HYSTERESIS to drop out.

SYNCHK1 SYNC CLOSE

Enables the dynamic mode of synchrocheck. When it is enabled, the location of where the present V2 vector will be
arriving to synchronize (shown as V2' in the figures here) with breaker close time being taken into account will be
predicted based on the measured slip frequency so that breaker close command can be issued in advance to
ensure the synchronism at the time when the breaker is actually closed.

V1 V2'

Limit Angle Limit Angle

V2

✟2'
✟2
✟1
859746A1.vsd

Figure 294: Synchrocheck plot for slip > 0 (slip = F2-F1)

V2' V1

Limit Angle Limit Angle

V2

✟2'
✟2
✟1
859747A1.vsd

Figure 295: Synchrocheck plot for slip < 0 (slip = F2-F1)

SYNCHK1 S-CLS MAX dF

Specifies the maximum slip frequency allowed in Hz in the dynamic mode. The dynamic mode is disarmed when
the slip frequency exceeds this setting. Setting more than 2 Hz is not recommended as it is expected to have
significant errors in phasor estimation, so apply them with caution.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 554
Chapter 9 - Settings

SYNCHK1 S-CLS MIN dF

Specifies the minimum slip frequency allowed in Hz in the dynamic mode. The dynamic mode is disarmed when the
slip frequency drops below this setting.

SYNCHK1 S-CLS ANG

This setting specifies the maximum angular difference in degrees between the two voltage phasors V1 and
projected V2, that is, V2'.

SYNCHK1 S-CLS BRK TIME

Specifies the breaker closing time in seconds.

SYNCHK1 V2 MAG CORR FACTOR

Specifies the magnitude correction factor of source V2. This setting is used for V2 magnitude compensation so that
V2 magnitude can be directly compared with V1 magnitude. For example, when V1 and V2 are taken from 2
different windings of the transformer and at different voltage levels, the magnitude compensation must be performed
before starting magnitude comparison in synchrocheck element.

SYNCHK1 V2 ANGLE SHIFT

Specifies the angle of source V2 that needs to be shifted so that V2 angle can be directly compared with V1 angle.
For example, when V1 and V2 are taken from two different windings of the transformer and with different angle shift
due to winding connections, the angle shift compensation must be performed before starting angle comparison in
synchrocheck element.

SYNCHK1 DEAD SOURCE SELECT

Selects the combination of dead and live sources that bypass the synchronism check function and permit the
breaker to be closed when one or both of the two voltages (V1 or/and V2) are below the maximum voltage
threshold. A dead or live source is declared by monitoring the voltage level. Six options are available:
None — Dead Source function is disabled
● LV1 and DV2 — Live V1 and Dead V2
● DV1 and LV2 — Dead V1 and Live V2
● DV1 or DV2 — Dead V1 or Dead V2
● DV1 Xor DV2 — Dead V1 exclusive-or Dead V2 (one source is Dead and the other is Live)
● DV1 and DV2 — Dead V1 and Dead V2

SYNCHK1 DEAD V1 MAX VOLT

Establishes a maximum voltage magnitude for V1 in 1 pu. Below this magnitude, the V1 voltage input used for
synchrocheck is considered “Dead” or de-energized.

SYNCHK1 DEAD V2 MAX VOLT

Establishes a maximum voltage magnitude for V2 in pu. Below this magnitude, the V2 voltage input used for
synchrocheck is considered “Dead” or de-energized.

SYNCHK1 LIVE V1 MIN VOLT

Establishes a minimum voltage magnitude for V1 in pu. Above this magnitude, the V1 voltage input used for
synchrocheck is considered “Live” or energized.

SYNCHK1 LIVE V2 MIN VOLT

This setting establishes a minimum voltage magnitude for V2 in pu. Above this magnitude, the V2 voltage input
used for synchrocheck is considered “Live” or energized.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 555
Chapter 9 - Settings

9.8.7.1 NOTES ON THE SYNCHROCHECK FUNCTION

Note the following:
1) The selected sources for synchrocheck inputs V1 and V2 can include both a three-phase and an auxiliary
voltage. The relay automatically selects the specific voltages to be used by the synchrocheck element in
accordance with the following tables.

V1 and V2 assigned with different signal source

No. V1 or V2 (source Y) V1 or V2 (source Z) Auto-selected combination SYNCHK PHASE Selected Voltage for
SELECT comparison
Source Y Source Z

1 3 Phase VT bank with or without 3 Phase VT bank with or without 3 Phase VT bank 3 Phase VT bank Auto Vab
Auxiliary VT Auxiliary VT

2 3 Phase VT bank with or without 3 Phase VT bank with or without 3 Phase VT bank 3 Phase VT bank Vag or Vbg or Vcg or Vab As set for SYNCHK PHASE
Auxiliary VT Auxiliary VT or Vbc or Vca SELECT

3 3 Phase VT bank with or without Auxiliary VT 3 Phase VT bank Auxiliary VT Not applicable V auxiliary (as set for
Auxiliary VT Source Z)

4 Auxiliary VT Auxiliary VT Auxiliary VT Auxiliary VT Not applicable V auxiliary (as set for
selected sources)

The voltages V1 and V2 are matched automatically so that the corresponding voltages from the two sources are
used to measure conditions. A phase to phase voltage is used if available in both sources; if one or both of the
Sources have only an auxiliary voltage, this voltage is used. For example, if an auxiliary voltage is programmed to
VAG, the synchrocheck element automatically selects VAG from the other source. If the comparison is required on a
specific voltage, the user has the following two options:
Select the preferred phase to ground or phase to phase voltage using the SYNCHK PHASE SELECT setting when
both Source 1 and Source 2 have phase VTs
Externally connect that specific voltage to auxiliary voltage terminals and then use this “Auxiliary Voltage” to check
the synchronism conditions. If using a single CT/VT module with both phase voltages and an auxiliary voltage,
ensure that only the auxiliary voltage is programmed in one of the sources to be used for synchrocheck. An
exception is that synchronism cannot be checked between Delta connected phase VTs and a Wye connected
auxiliary voltage.

V1 and V2 assigned with same signal source

No. V1 or V2 (source Y) Required combination Selected Voltage for comparison
V1 V2
1 3 Phase VT bank with Auxiliary VT 3 Phase VT bank Auxiliary VT V auxiliary (as set for Source Y)

When both V1 and V2 are assigned with the same source, the relay assigns the three Phase VT bank to V1 and
Auxiliary VT to V2 and as programmed per setting “Auxiliary VT connection” used for Synchrocheck. For example, if
“Auxiliary VT connection” is programmed to VAG, the synchrocheck element automatically selects VAG from the 3
Phase VT bank of the same source.

Note:
Refer to the SYNCHK1 V2 SOURCE setting description for further information.

Exception: Synchronism cannot be checked between Delta-connected phase VTs and a Wye-connected auxiliary
voltage.
2) The relay measures frequency and Volts/Hz from an input on a given source with priorities as established by the
configuration of input channels to the source. The relay uses the phase channel of a three-phase set of voltages if

N60-1601-0125-861-1 556
Chapter 9 - Settings

programmed as part of that source. The relay uses the auxiliary voltage channel only if that channel is programmed
as part of the Source and a three-phase set is not.
❊❀✕❋❀●✙✗✾ ●❍✕■✽✘❏
✍✎✏ ✥❑✚ ✠ ✟☛ ✰❉❇✟❅ ✩✞✚

❊❀✕❋❀●✙✗✾ ●❍✕■✽✘❏
✍✎✏ ✥❑✚ ✠ ✟✠ ✰❉❇✟❅ ✩✞✚

❊❀✕❋❀●✙✗✾ ●❍✕■✽✘❏
✍✎✏ ✥❑✚ ✠ ✟✠ ❉❅✢❇▲ ✩✰▼

✔✕✖✖✗✘✙✔ ❊❀✕❋❀●✙✗✾ ●❍✕■✽✘❏

✓☎✜✄✆✪✛✜ ✍✎✏ ✥❑✚ ✠ ✟☛ ❉❅✢❇▲ ✩✰▼

❅✜✁❆✂✝✣ ☞ ✠
✍✎✏
❉✂✛✄❄
❇✲ ☞ ❈
✍✎✏
❊❀✕❋❀●✙✗✾ ●❍✕■✽✘❏✔
✍✎✏ ✥❑✚ ✠ ✤❅✰✤ ✥ ❇◆
✍✎✏ ✥❑✚ ✠ ✤❅✰✤ ✥ ✤◆❇
✔✕✖✖✗✘✙
✤✝✁✣ ✥✛☎✦✄✝ ✥✝✂✝✄✆ ❊❀✕❋❀●✙✗✾ ●❍✕■✽✘❏✔
✍✎✏ ✑✒
✚✛✜✝ ✥❑✚ ✠ ✢✥ ❇◆
✢✟✠ ✁✜✣ ✤✟☛ ✥❑✚ ✠ ✢✥ ✤◆❇
✑✒
✤✟✠ ✁✜✣ ✢✟☛
✍✎✏
✤✟✠ ✛✦ ✤✟☛ ➋➌➍
✤✟✠ ✧✛✦ ✤✟☛
✤✟✠ ✁✜✣ ✤✟☛
✍✎✏
✔✕✖✖✗✘✙
✤✝✁✣ ✟✠ ✩✁✧ ✟✛✂✆

✟✠ ★ ✩✁✧✪✫☎✫
✳✑✒
❊❀✕❋❀●✙✗✾ ●❍✕■✽✘❏✔
✔✕✖✖✗✘✙ ✍✎✏ ✥❑✚ ✠ ✟❇✢➦ ✤✞✓✓ ◆◗◆
✤✝✁✣ ✟☛ ✩✁✧ ✟✛✂✆
✑✒
✟☛ ★ ✩✁✧✪✫☎✫
❊❀✕❋❀●✙✗✾ ●❍✕■✽✘❏✔
✍✎✏ ✥❑✚ ✠ ✰✚➊ ✤✞✓✓ ◆◗◆
✔✕✖✖✗✘✙
✢✪✮✝ ✟✠ ✩✪✜ ✟✛✂✆
✍✎✏
❊❀✕❋❀●✙✗✾ ●❍✕■✽✘❏✔
✟✠ ✭ ✩✪✜✪✫☎✫
✍✎✏ ✥❑✚ ✠ ✓✬❅➧ ✤✞✓✓ ◆◗◆

✔✕✖✖✗✘✙
✢✪✮✝ ✟☛ ✩✪✜ ✟✛✂✆
✍✎✏
✟☛ ✭ ✩✪✜✪✫☎✫

✔✕✖✖✗✘✙
✾✽❀✾✿❀✽✖✕ ✩✁✧ ✟✛✂✆ ✤✪✲
✔✕✖✖✗✘✙ ✔✕✖✖✗✘✙ ✩✁✱✜✪✆☎✣✝ ✟✠ ✁✂✄☎✂✁✆✝
✟✠ ✥✛☎✦✄✝ ✰✜✱✂✝✯✠ ✞ ✟✠ ✡ ✟☛ ✞ ☞ ✌ ✟ ✌✟ ➉ ✩✁✧✪✫☎✫
➥♦④s♣ ➞♣⑦♣①t
☞ ✥✬ ✠ ✓✦✝❖☎✝✜✄❂ ✓✠ ❊❀✕❋❀●✙✗✾ ●❍✕■✽✘❏✔
✍✎✏ ✥❑✚ ✠ ✥❑✚ ❇◆
✰☎✆✛ ✔✕✖✖✗✘✙
✔✕✖✖✗✘✙✔ ✥❑✚ ✠ ✥❑✚ ✤◆❇
✟✁✱ ✩✁✧ ✰✜✱✂✝ ✤✪✲
✟☛ ✩✁✱ ❇✬ ✓✁✄✆✛✦ ✩ ✁✂✄☎✂✁✆✝
✟❆✱ ✌✯ ➉ ✩✁✧✪✫☎✫
✟✄✱ ③❨❡ ↔ ③❨↕➙❡ ✞ ✯➠ ✡ ✯➡ ✞ ☞➢➤
✟✁❆
✟❆✄ ✔✕✖✖✗✘✙✔ ✥❑✚ P✬❇ P❅ ◗ ✠
✟✄✁ ✾✽❀✾✿❀✽✖✕ ✩✁✧ ✓✦✝❖ ✤✪✲
✔✕✖✖✗✘✙ ✩✁✱✜✪✆☎✣✝ ✟☛ ✓✦✝❖ P❂➎✆✝✦✝➎✪➎
✟☛ ✥✛☎✦✄✝ ✰✜✱✂✝ ✯☛ ✁✂✄☎✂✁✆✝
✌✓ ➉ ✩✁✧✪✫☎✫
☞ ✥✬ ☛ ✓✦✝❖☎✝✜✄❂ ✓☛ ✞ ✓✠ ✡ ✓☛ ✞ ☞ ✌ ✓
✽✾✖✿✽❀ ❁✽❀✿✕✔
✥❂✜✄❃✦✛✄❃✝✄❄ ✠ ✌✓
✔✕✖✖✗✘✙✔ ✥❂✜✄❃✦✛✄❃✝✄❄ ✠ ✌✯
✟☛ ✰✜✱✂✝ ✥❃✪➛✆ ✰✥ ✥❂✜✄❃✦✛✄❃✝✄❄ ✠ ✌✟
❭❜❡ ↔ ❭❜ ➜➝➞ ✥❂✜✄❃✦✛✄❃✝✄❄ ✠ ❵❭❛
✥❂✜✄❃✦✛✄❃✝✄❄ ✠ ✟✠ ✩✰➊
✥❂✜✄❃✦✛✄❃✝✄❄ ✠ ✟✠ ✰✚➊✢❅
✥❂✜✄❃✦✛✄❃✝✄❄ ✠ ✟☛ ✩✰➊
✥❂✜✄❃✦✛✄❃✝✄❄ ✠ ✟☛ ✰✚➊✢❅
✥❂✜✄❃✦✛✄❃✝✄❄ ✠ ✟☛➟ ✩✰➊
✥❂✜✄❃✦✛✄❃✝✄❄ ✠ ✟☛➟ ✰✚➊✢❅
✔✕✖✖✗✘✙
✥❑✚❘ ✢❇✥❅❙
❇✓✓☞❈
✔✕✖✖✗✘✙✔ ✍✎✏
✥❘ ✢✥ ✩✰▼ ✣✓
✓✦✝❖ P❂➎✆✝✦✝➎✪➎ ❊❀✕❋❀●✙✗✾ ●❍✕■✽✘❏✔
✍✎✏ ✥❑✚ ✠ ✥❘ ✢❇✥❅ ❇◆
➏✓✠ ❘ ✓☛➏ ➉ ➐➑➒ ❿➓
✥❑✚ ✠ ✥❘ ✢❇✥❅ ✤◆❇
✔✕✖✖✗✘✙✔
✥❘ ✢✥ ✩✞✚ ✣✓
✓✦✝❖ P❂➎✆✝✦✝➎✪➎
➏✓✠ ❘ ✓☛➏ ➔ ➐→➣ ❿➓
❊❀✕❋❀●✙✗✾ ●❍✕■✽✘❏✔
✥❑✚ ✠ ✥❘ ✢❇✥❅ ✰✬✩✤
✔✕✖✖✗✘✙✔ ✔✕✖✖✗✘✙
✥❘ ✢✥ ❉✬◗ ✆ ✥❘ ✢✥ ✰✚➊
❚❯❱
❵❭ ❛ ➉ ✩✁✧✪✫☎✫
❲ ❳❨❩ ❬ ❭ ❪ ❫ ❴ ❵❭ ❛

❭❜❝ ❞ ❭❜❡❢❵❭❣❤✐❥❦❧♠✐❥
♥♦♣q♣❭❜❝ rs t♦♣ ✉q✈✇♣①t♣②
③❨ ④⑤⑥⑦♣ ④⑧t♣q ⑨⑩❶ t❷
❵❭❣❤✐❥❦❧♠✐❥ ❸❹ ❺❻❼ ❽❾❼❿❸➀❺❼❿
➁➂➃➄❼ ❹❻❸➅❺ ➁➅❺❼❾ ➆➇➈ ❺
✴✵✶✷✸✶✍✵✹✺✻✼

Figure 296: Synchrocheck logic

9.8.8 DIGITAL ELEMENTS

Setting path: SETTINGS > CONTROL ELEMENTS > DIGITAL ELEMENTS> DIGITAL ELEMENTS 1(96)

N60-1601-0125-861-1 557
Chapter 9 - Settings

Note:
Only Digital Element 1 is shown

■DIGITAL ELEMENT 1 DIGITAL ELEMENT 1

ó Range: Disabled, Enabled
■ FUNCTION: Disabled
DIG ELEM 1 NAME:
ô Range: up to 16 alphanumeric characters
Dig Element 1
DIG ELEM 1 INPUT:
ô Range: FlexLogic operand
Off
DIG ELEM 1 PICKUP
ô Range: 0.000 to 999999.999 s in steps of 0.001
DELAY: 0.000 s
DIG ELEM 1 RESET
ô Range: 0.000 to 999999.999 s in steps of 0.001
DELAY: 0.000 s
DIGITAL ELEMENT 1
ô Range: Disabled, Enabled
PICKUP LED: Enabled
DIG ELEM 1 BLOCK:
ô Range: FlexLogic operand
Off
DIGITAL ELEMENT 1
ô Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
TARGET: Self-reset
DIGITAL ELEMENT 1
ñ Range: Disabled, Enabled
EVENTS: Disabled

Note:
Digital elements run once per power system cycle. As such they can easily fail to react to an input signal or a block signal with
a duration less than one power system cycle. This also means that digital element output can react up to one power system
cycle later than the pickup and reset delay settings indicate.

Note:
Do not use digital elements with transient signals, such as communications commands. Do not use digital elements where
random delays of up to one cycle cannot be tolerated, such as in high speed protection.

There are 96 identical digital elements available, numbered 1 to 96. A digital element can monitor any FlexLogic
operand and present a target message and/or enable events recording depending on the output operand state. The
digital element settings include a name to be referenced in any target message, a blocking input from any selected
FlexLogic operand, and a timer for pickup and reset delays for the output operand.

DIGITAL ELEMENT 1 INPUT

Selects a FlexLogic operand to be monitored by the digital element.

DIGITAL ELEMENT 1 PICKUP DELAY

Sets the required time delay from element pickup to element operation. If a pickup delay is not required, set it to 0.
To avoid nuisance alarms, set the delay greater than the operating time of the breaker.

DIGITAL ELEMENT 1 RESET DELAY

Sets the time delay to reset. If a reset delay is not required, set to 0.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 558
Chapter 9 - Settings

DIGITAL ELEMENT 1 PICKUP LED

This setting enables or disabled the digital element pickup LED. When disabled, the operation of the pickup LED is
blocked.

Figure 297: Digital element logic

Circuit monitoring applications

Some versions of the digital input modules include an active voltage monitor circuit connected across form-A
contacts. The voltage monitor circuit limits the trickle current through the output circuit (see technical specifications
for form-A).
As long as the current through the voltage monitor is above a threshold (see technical specifications for form-A), the
Cont Op 1 VOn FlexLogic operand is set (for contact input 1—corresponding operands exist for each contact
output). If the output circuit has a high resistance or the DC current is interrupted, the trickle current drops below the
threshold and the Cont Op 1 VOff FlexLogic operand is set. Consequently, the state of these operands can be used
as indicators of the integrity of the circuits in which form-A contacts are inserted.

Example 1: Breaker trip circuit integrity monitoring

In many applications it is desired to monitor the breaker trip circuit integrity so that problems can be detected before
a trip operation is required. The circuit is considered to be healthy when the voltage monitor connected across the
trip output contact detects a low level of current, well below the operating current of the breaker trip coil. If the circuit
presents a high resistance, the trickle current falls below the monitor threshold, and an alarm is declared.
In most breaker control circuits, the trip coil is connected in series with a breaker auxiliary contact that is open when
the breaker is open (see figure). To prevent unwanted alarms in this situation, the trip circuit monitoring logic must
include the breaker position.
✡☛☞✌✍✁✂✍✌ ✎✍✏✂☎✍
✑✂✒✓ ✔✆✁✕☞✖ ☎✆✗✒✠☎✒✌

✯✰✱

✯✰✲ ✢✣✤

✛ ✢✣✴
✯✰✳ ✞✟✠ ✁✂✄ ☎✆✂✝

✘ ✙ ☎✚✁✁✍✗✒ ✕✆✗✂✒✆✁
✛ ✙ ✏✆✝✒✠✜✍ ✕✆✗✂✒✆✁ ✥✦✧★✧✩✪✦✫✬✭✮

Figure 298: Trip circuit example 1

N60-1601-0125-861-1 559
Chapter 9 - Settings

Assume the output contact H1 is a trip contact. Using the contact output settings, this output is given an ID name;
for example, Cont Op 1. Assume a 52a breaker auxiliary contact is connected to contact input H5a to monitor
breaker status. Using the contact input settings, this input is given an ID name, for example, Cont Ip 1, and is set On
when the breaker is closed. The settings to use digital element 1 to monitor the breaker trip circuit are indicated
(EnerVista example shown).

Figure 299: Digital Element 1 parameters for Example 1

Example 2: Breaker trip circuit integrity monitoring

If it is required to monitor the trip circuit continuously, independent of the breaker position (open or closed), a
method to maintain the monitoring current flow through the trip circuit when the breaker is open must be provided
(as shown in the following figure). This can be achieved by connecting a suitable resistor (see figure) across the
auxiliary contact in the trip circuit. In this case, it is not required to supervise the monitoring circuit with the breaker
position – the BLOCK setting is selected to Off. In this case, the settings are as follows (EnerVista example
shown)

Figure 300: Digital Element 1 parameters for Example 2

N60-1601-0125-861-1 560
Chapter 9 - Settings

✡☛☞✌✍✁✂✍✌ ✎✍✏✂☎✍
✑✂✒✓ ✔✆✁✕☞✖ ☎✆✗✒✠☎✒✌

❖P◗❘❙❚ ❯❱❲ ❲❙❚❳❚❨❱❲ ❩❬❭

✰✱✲
✸✹✺✻✼ ✽✾✿✿❀❁ ❂✻✽❃✽❄❅❆❇✻ ✸✹✺✻✼
✘
❈❉ ❊ ❋● ❍■■■ ❏ ❈❑
✰✱✳ ✢✣✤ ▲■ ❊ ❋● ▼■■■ ❏ ❈❑
❉◆ ❊ ❋● ❍■■■■ ❏ ❈❑
✛ ✢✣✵
❍❍■ ❊ ❋● ❈▼■■■ ❏ ▼❑
✰✱✴ ✞✟✠ ✁✂✄ ☎✆✂✝
❍❈▼ ❊ ❋● ❈▼■■■ ❏ ▼❑
☛
❈▼■ ❊ ❋● ▼■■■■ ❏ ▼❑
✶✷✄✠✌✌
✘ ✙ ☎✚✁✁✍✗✒ ✕✆✗✂✒✆✁ ✁✍✌✂✌✒✆✁
✛ ✙ ✏✆✝✒✠✜✍ ✕✆✗✂✒✆✁ ✥✦✧★✧✩✪✫✬✭✮✯

Figure 301: Trip circuit example 2

Note:
The wiring connection for two examples above is applicable to both form-A contacts with voltage monitoring and solid-state
contact with voltage monitoring.

9.8.9 DIGITAL COUNTERS

Setting path: SETTINGS > CONTROL ELEMENTS >DIGITAL COUNTERS > COUNTER 1(8)

Note:
Only Counter 1 is shown

■ COUNTER 1 COUNTER 1
ó Range: Disabled, Enabled
■ FUNCTION: Disabled
COUNTER 1 NAME:
ô Range: up to 12 alphanumeric characters
Counter 1

ô COUNTER 1 UNITS: Range: up to 6 alphanumeric characters

COUNTER 1 PRESET:
ô Range: –2,147,483,648 to +2,147,483,647
0
COUNTER 1 COMPARE:
ô Range: –2,147,483,648 to +2,147,483,647
0
COUNTER 1 UP:
ô Range: FlexLogic operand
Off
COUNTER 1 DOWN:
ô Range: FlexLogic operand
Off
COUNTER 1 BLOCK:
ô Range: FlexLogic operand
Off
CNT1 SET TO PRESET:
ô Range: FlexLogic operand
Off
COUNTER 1 RESET:
ô Range: FlexLogic operand
Off
COUNT1 FREEZE/RESET:
ô Range: FlexLogic operand
Off
COUNT1 FREEZE/COUNT:
ñ Range: FlexLogic operand
Off

N60-1601-0125-861-1 561
Chapter 9 - Settings

There are eight identical digital counters, numbered from 1 to 8. A digital counter counts the number of state
transitions from Logic 0 to Logic 1. The counter is used to count operations such as the pickups of an element, the
changes of state of an external contact (for example, breaker auxiliary switch), or pulses from a watt-hour meter.

COUNTER 1 UNITS
Assigns a label to identify the unit of measure pertaining to the digital transitions to be counted. The units label
appears in the corresponding actual values status.

COUNTER 1 PRESET
Sets the count to a required preset value before counting operations begin, as in the case where a substitute relay
is to be installed in place of an in-service relay, or while the counter is running.

COUNTER 1 COMPARE
Sets the value to which the accumulated count value is compared. Three FlexLogic output operands are provided to
indicate if the present value is ‘more than (HI)’, ‘equal to (EQL)’, or ‘less than (LO)’ the set value.

COUNTER 1 UP
Selects the FlexLogic operand for incrementing the counter. If an enabled UP input is received when the
accumulated value is at the limit of +2,147,483,647 counts, the counter rolls over to –2,147,483,648.

COUNTER 1 DOWN
Selects the FlexLogic operand for decrementing the counter. If an enabled DOWN input is received when the
accumulated value is at the limit of –2,147,483,648 counts, the counter rolls over to +2,147,483,647.

COUNTER 1 BLOCK
Selects the FlexLogic operand for blocking the counting operation. All counter operands are blocked.

CNT1 SET TO PRESET

Selects the FlexLogic operand used to set the count to the preset value. The counter sets to the preset value in the
following situations:
● When the counter is enabled and the CNT1 SET TO PRESET operand has the value 1 (when the counter is
enabled and CNT1 SET TO PRESET operand is 0, the counter sets to 0)
● When the counter is running and the CNT1 SET TO PRESET operand changes the state from 0 to 1 (CNT1
SET TO PRESET changing from 1 to 0 while the counter is running has no effect on the count)
● When a reset or reset/freeze command is sent to the counter and the CNT1 SET TO PRESET operand has
the value 1 (when a reset or reset/freeze command is sent to the counter and the CNT1 SET TO PRESET
operand has the value 0, the counter sets to 0)

COUNTER 1 RESET
Selects the FlexLogic operand for setting the count to either “0” or the preset value depending on the state of the
CNT1 SET TO PRESET operand.

COUNTER 1 FREEZE/RESET
Selects the FlexLogic operand for capturing (freezing) the accumulated count value into a separate register with the
date and time of the operation, and resetting the count to 0.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 562
Chapter 9 - Settings

COUNTER 1 FREEZE/COUNT
Selects the FlexLogic operand for capturing (freezing) the accumulated count value into a separate register with the
date and time of the operation, and continuing counting. The present accumulated value and captured frozen value
with the associated date/time stamp are available as actual values. If control power is interrupted, the accumulated
and frozen values are saved into non-volatile memory during the power-down operation.
SETTING
COUNTER 1 FUNCTION:
Enabled = 1 SETTINGS
COUNTER 1 NAME:
SETTING AND COUNTER 1 UNITS:
COUNTER 1 PRESET:
COUNTER 1 UP:
RUN
Off = 0 SETTING
FLEXLOGIC
COUNTER 1 COMPARE: OPERANDS
SETTING
CALCULATE Count more than Comp. COUNTER 1 HI
COUNTER 1 DOWN: Count equal to Comp.
VALUE COUNTER 1 EQL
Off = 0 Count less than Comp. COUNTER 1 LO

SETTING
COUNTER 1 BLOCK:
SET TO PRESET VALUE
Off = 0
SET TO ZERO
SETTING ACTUAL VALUE
CNT 1 SET TO PRESET: COUNTER 1 ACCUM:
OR
Off = 0
AND

SETTING AND ACTUAL VALUE

COUNTER 1 RESET:
COUNTER 1 FROZEN:
Off = 0 OR
STORE DATE & TIME Date & Time
SETTING
COUNT1 FREEZE/RESET:
Off = 0
OR
SETTING
COUNT1 FREEZE/COUNT:
Off = 0
827065A4.VSD

Figure 302: Digital counter logic

9.8.10 MONITORING ELEMENTS

9.8.10.1 MONITORING ELEMENTS MENU

Setting path: SETTINGS > CONTROL ELEMENTS > MONITORING ELEMENTS
■ MONITORING ■ VT FUSE FAILURE <n>
ó n = 1 to 6
■ ELEMENTS ■ ARCING CURRENT
■ CT FAILURE
ô n = 1 to 6
■ DETECTOR <n>
■ THERMAL OVERLOAD
ô
■ PROTECTION
■ HARMONIC
ñ
■ DETECTION

9.8.10.2 CT FAILURE DETECTOR

Setting path: SETTINGS > CONTROL ELEMENTS > MONITORING ELEMENTS > CT FAILURE DETECTOR <n>

N60-1601-0125-861-1 563
Chapter 9 - Settings

Note:
Only CT Failure Detector 1 is shown

■ CT FAILURE CT FAIL 1 FUNCTION:

ó Range: Disabled, Enabled
■ DETECTOR 1 Disabled

CT FAIL 1 BLOCK:
ô Range: FlexLogic operand
Off

CT FAIL 1 3I0 INP 1:

ô Range: SRC <n>
SRC <n>
CT FAIL 1 3I0 INP 1
ô Range: 0.1 to 2.0 pu in steps of 0.1
PKP: 0.2 pu
CT FAIL 1 3I0 INP 2:
ô Range: SRC <n>
SRC <n>
CT FAIL 1 3I0 INP 2
ô Range: 0.1 to 2.0 pu in steps of 0.1
PKP: 0.2 pu
CT FAIL 1 3V0 INPUT:
ô Range: SRC <n>
SRC <n>
CT FAIL 1 3V0 INPUT
ô Range: 0.04 to 2.00 pu in steps of 0.01
PKP: 0.20 pu
CT FAIL 1 PICKUP
ô Range: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001
DELAY: 1.000 s
CT FAIL 1 TARGET:
ô Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
Self-reset
CT FAIL 1 EVENTS:
ñ Range: Disabled, Enabled
Disabled

The CT failure function detects problems with system current transformers used to supply current to the relay. This
logic detects the presence of a zero-sequence current at the supervised source of current without a simultaneous
zero-sequence current at another source, zero-sequence voltage, or some protection element condition.
The CT failure logic (see later) is based on the presence of the zero-sequence current in the supervised CT source
and the absence of one of three or all of the three following conditions:
● Zero-sequence current at different source current (can be different set of CTs or different CT core of the same
CT)
● Zero-sequence voltage at the assigned source
● Appropriate protection element or remote signal
Settings are described as follows.

CT FAIL 1 FUNCTION
Enables or disables operation of the CT failure element.

CT FAIL 1 BLOCK
Selects a FlexLogic operand to block operation of the element during some condition (for example, an open pole in
process of the single pole tripping-reclosing). Local signals or remote signals representing operation of some
remote current protection elements via communication channels can also be chosen.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 564
Chapter 9 - Settings

CT FAIL 1 3I0 INPUT 1

Selects the current source for input 1. The most critical protection element should also be assigned to the same
source.

CT FAIL 1 3I0 INPUT 1 PICKUP

Selects the 3I_0 pickup value for input 1 (the main supervised CT source).

CT FAIL 1 3I0 INPUT 2

Selects the current source for input 2. Input 2 should use a different set of CTs or a different CT core of the same
CT. If 3I_0 does not exist at source 2, then a CT failure is declared.

CT FAIL 1 3I0 INPUT 2 PICKUP

Selects the 3I_0 pickup value for input 2 (different CT input) of the relay.

CT FAIL 1 3V0 INPUT

Selects the voltage source.

CT FAIL 1 3V0 INPUT PICKUP

Specifies the pickup value for the 3V_0 source.

CT FAIL 1 PICKUP DELAY

Specifies the pickup delay of the CT failure element.

✙✚✛✛✜✢✣

✁ ✂✄☎✆ ✝ ✂✞✟ ✁☎✠✟✡

✒✤✥✦✧★✩✪✝

✙✚✛✛✜✢✣

✁ ✂✄☎✆ ✝ ☛✆✠ ☞✡
✠✫✫✪✬ ✙✚✛✛✜✢✣

✙✚✛✛✜✢✣ ✙✚✛✛✜✢✣ ✁ ✂✄☎✆ ✝ ✍☎ ☞✞✍ ✑✒✆✄✓✡

✰✱✚✲✱✳✣✜✴ ✳✵✚✶✷✢✸✙
✁ ✂✄☎✆ ✝ ✌☎✠ ☎✟✍✞✁✝✡ ✁ ✂✄☎✆ ✝ ✌☎✠ ☎✟✍✞✁✝ ✍☞✍✡ ✔✕✖ ✬ ✁ ✂✄☎✆ ✝ ✠✍
✭✮ ✝ ✮✞✟ ✌☎✠ ✯ ✍☎ ☞✞✍
✁ ✂✄☎✆ ✝ ✍☞✍
✙✚✛✛✜✢✣ ✙✚✛✛✜✢✣

✁ ✂✄☎✆ ✝ ✌☎✠ ☎✟✍✞✁✏✡ ✁ ✂✄☎✆ ✝ ✌☎✠ ☎✟✍✞✁✏ ✍☞✍✡

✭✮ ✏ ✮✞✟ ✌☎✠ ✯ ✍☎ ☞✞✍

✙✚✛✛✜✢✣ ✙✚✛✛✜✢✣
✗✘
✁ ✂✄☎✆ ✝ ✌✎✠ ☎✟✍✞✁✡ ✁ ✂✄☎✆ ✝ ✌✎✠ ☎✟✍✞✁✡
✭✮ ✝ ✮✞✟ ✌✎✠ ✯ ✍☎ ☞✞✍ ✹✺✻✼✽✹✔✹✾✿✖✘
Figure 303: CT failure detector logic

9.8.10.3 VT FUSE FAILURE

Setting path: SETTINGS > CONTROL ELEMENTS > MONITORING ELEMENTS > VT FUSE FAILURE <n>

N60-1601-0125-861-1 565
Chapter 9 - Settings

Note:
Only VT Fuse Failure 1 is shown

■ VT FUSE FAILURE 1 VT FUSE FAILURE 1

ó Range: Disabled, Enabled
■ FUNCTION: Disabled
VT FUSE FAILURE 1 Range: SRC <n>
ô
CT SOURCE: SRC 1 B30 only
VT FUSE FAILURE 1
ô Range: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001
ALARM DELAY: 1.000 s
NEUTRAL WIRE OPEN 1
ô Range: Disabled, Enabled
DETECTION: Disabled
NEUTRAL WIRE OPEN 1
ñ Range: 0.004 to 3.000 pu in steps of 0.001
3 HARM PKP: 0.100 pu

Every signal source includes a fuse failure scheme. A signal source must have a three-phase VT bank and a three-
phase CT bank assigned to it, in order for the fuse failure scheme to operate.
The VT fuse failure detector is used to raise an alarm and/or block elements that operate incorrectly for a full or
partial loss of AC potential caused by one or more blown fuses. Some elements that can be blocked (via the
BLOCK input) are distance, voltage restrained overcurrent, and directional current.
There are two classes of fuse failure that occur:
● Class A — Loss of one or two phases
● Class B — Loss of all three phases
Different means of detection are required for each class. An indication of class A failures is a significant level of
negative-sequence voltage, whereas an indication of class B failures is when positive sequence current is present
and there is an insignificant amount of positive sequence voltage. Also, a rapid decrease in the phase voltages
magnitude from a healthy voltage level without disturbance in current can indicate VT fuse fail conditions. These
noted indications of fuse failure can also be present when faults are present on the system, so a means of detecting
faults and inhibiting fuse failure declarations during these events is provided.
Once the fuse failure condition is declared, it is sealed-in until the cause that generated it disappears.
An additional condition is introduced to inhibit a fuse failure declaration when the monitored circuit is de-energized;
positive-sequence voltage and current are both below threshold levels.

VT FUSE FAILURE 1 FUNCTION

Enables and disables the fuse failure feature for Source 1 VT Fuse Fail.

NEUTRAL WIRE OPEN 1 DETECTION

Enables and disables the VT neutral wire open detection function. When the VT is connected in Delta, do not
enable this function because there is no neutral wire for Delta connected VT.

NEUTRAL WIRE OPEN 1 3 HRAM PKP

Specifies the pickup level of 3rd harmonic of 3V0 signal for the NEUTRAL WIRE OPEN DETECTION logic to pick
up.
Base voltage for this element is PHASE VT SECONDARY setting in the case of WYE VTs and (PHASE VT
SECONDARY)/Ö3 in case of DELTA VTs. The setting is found under SETTINGS > SYSTEM SETUP > AC INPUTS
> VOLTAGE BANK > PHASE VT SECONDARY.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 566
Chapter 9 - Settings

✬✭✮✮✯✰✱ ✻✍①P ✻❤① ✧✦✢ ✻❆① ✧◆✙ ✛✩✙

✡✫✦★✛✥✣✦ ②✣✳✛✧❲✙ ✤✧❲✦✥✛✫✢✙ ✣③ ✣✦✙ ★❑★✳✙ ✪✗
✌✦✧✲✳✙✢ ✴ ✵ ✲✙③✣◆✙
☎✒✓
✹✶▲❍■✸■✮✶✸✬ ✡✍☛✏✑
✘✫✦ ✐❥✈❧✐♠✐❥✈✐ ♥ ♦♣q rs
t ✐❥✈❧✐ ♥ ♦♣✉ rs

✘✫✦ ✐❥❦❧✐♠✐❥❦✐ ♥ ♦♣q rs

✪✗
✬✶✷✸✹✭ ✺ t ✐❥❦❧✐ ♥ ♦♣✉ rs ⑧⑨⑩⑩❶❷❸
✻✍ ✘✫✦ ✻✑ ✡☛☞✌ ✡✍✎✏☛✘✌ ✵
✐❥✇❧✐♠✐❥✇✐ ♥ ♦♣q rs ✍✏✍✘❳ ❇✌✏✍❹
✻❤ t ✐❥✇❧✐ ♥ ♦♣✉ rs ❊❋✭●❋✶✱✯✹ ✶❍✭✸■✰❏
④⑤⑥⑤
✻❆ ✘✫✦ ☞✘❆✵ ✻✑ ✡✡ ✍✏✍✘❳
⑦
✻✼✽ ✻✼✽ ❃ ✿❀✵ ❂✫ ✪✗

✻✼✵ ✘✫✦
✻✼✵ ✾ ✿❀✿❁ ❂✫
✎✼✵
☎✒✓ ✡☛☞✌
✘✫✦
✡✍✎✏
✎✼✵ ❃ ✿❀✿❄❁ ❂✫
❜❝❞❡❢
✘✫✦ ❬ ❭❪❭❫❴❵ ✔✕✖
✮✯▲✭✸ ☎✒✓ ✪✗
✻✼✵ ✾ ✿❀❅✿ ❂✫ ❛
✽ ★❑★✳✙✚
❊❋✭●❋✶✱✯✹ ✶❍✭✸■✰❏✬
✘✫✦ ☎✒✓
✎✼✵ ✾ ✿❀✿❁ ❂✫ ✏✧✛★✩ ☞✘❆✵ ✻✑ ✡☛☞✌ ✡✍✎✏ ❈❉
✽✿ ★❑★✳✙✚
☞✘❆✵ ✻✑ ✡☛☞✌ ✡✍✎✏ ❇❉❈
❊❋✭●❋✶✱✯✹ ✶❍✭✸■✰❏✬
☞✘❆✵ ❁✿❇❇ ❈❉
❈❉✌▼ ❉❈✏✌ ❈❉
✑✩✙ ❈❉✌▼ ❉❈✏✌ ❈❉ ✣❂✙◆✧✦✢ ✧❂❂✳✥✙✚
✛✣ ✛✩✙ ❆❖✿P ❆◗❁P ❇❖✿P ✏❖✿P ✏◗✿P ✧✦✢ ▼❖✿ ☎✒✓
❜❝❞❡❢
✪✗ ❣❛ ❭❪❭❫❴❵ ✗✕✔✕✖
☎✒✓
☎✒✓ ❛
✘✙✚✙✛✜✢✣✤✥✦✧✦✛

❊❋✭●❋✶✱✯✹ ✶❍✭✸■✰❏
☎✒✓ ☞✘❆✵ ✻✑ ✡☛☞✌ ✡✍✎✏ ✻❈✏ ✏❈☞☞

✮✯▲✭✸
✬✭✮✮✯✰✱ ❁ ★❑★✳✙✚
☎✒✓
❙ ❯✍✘❳ ❉❨❉
✿
☎✒✓ ✘✫✦ ❊❋✭●❋✶✱✯✹ ✶❍✭✸■✰❏
✬✭✮✮✯✰✱ ❙✻✼✿ ❙◆✢ ❯✧◆✤ ❃✚✙✛✛✥✦❲ ✪✗ ☞✘❆✵ ✻✑ ▼✌☛ ❘✎✘✌ ❈❉✌▼
✮✯▲✭✸
▼✙✫✛◆✧✳ ❘✥◆✙ ❈❂✙✦ ❇✙✛✙★✛
✿
✌✦✧✲✳✙✢ ✴ ✵
☎✒✓ ✽✿ ★❑★✳✙✚

✬✶✷✸✹✭ ✺ ❊❋✭●❩■✰■❋✶✱
❙✻✼✿ ❚❙◆✢ ❯✧◆✤✣✦✥★❱ ☞✘❆✵ ❙✻✿ ❙✦✢ ❯✧◆✤✣✦✥★

✄ ✁✄✂✄☎✆✝✞✟✠

Figure 304: VT fuse fail logic

9.8.10.4 THERMAL OVERLOAD PROTECTION (ANSI 49)

Setting path: SETTINGS > CONTROL ELEMENTS > MONITORING ELEMENTS > THERMAL OVERLOAD
PROTECTION > THERMAL PROTECTION <n>

Note:
Only Thermal Protection 1 is shown

■ THERMAL THERMAL PROTECTION 1

ó Range: Disabled, Enabled
■ PROTECTION 1 FUNCTION: Disabled
THERMAL PROTECTION 1
ô Range: SRC <n>
SOURCE: SRC1
THERMAL PROTECTION 1
ô Range: 3-Phase, 1-Phase
MODE: 3-PHASE
THERMAL PROTECTION 1
ô Range: 0.20 to 3.00 pu in steps of 0.01
BASE CURR: 0.80 pu
THERMAL PROTECTION 1
ô Range: 0.20 to 4.00 in steps of 0.05
k FACTOR: 1.10
THERMAL PROTECTION 1
ô Range: 0.2 to 1.0 pu in steps of 0.1
ALARM LEVEL: 0.5 pu

N60-1601-0125-861-1 567
Chapter 9 - Settings

THERM PROT 1 TRIP

ô Range: 0.0 to 999.0 minutes in steps of 0.1
TIME CONST: 45.0 min
THERM PROT 1 RESET
ô Range: 0.0 to 999.0 minutes in steps of 0.1
TIME CONST: 45.0 min
THERM PROT 1 MINIM
ô Range: 0.0 to 999.0 minutes in steps of 0.1
RESET TIME: 20.0 min
THERM PROT 1 RESET:
ô Range: FlexLogic operand
Off
THERM PROT 1 BLOCK:
ô Range: FlexLogic operand
Off
THERMAL PROTECTION 1
ô Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
TARGET: Self-reset
THERMAL PROTECTION 1
ñ Range: Disabled, Enabled
EVENTS: Disabled

The thermal overload protection element corresponds to the IEC 255-8 standard and is used to detect thermal
overload conditions in protected power system elements. Choosing an appropriate time constant element can be
used to protect different elements of the power system.
The cold curve characteristic is applied when the estimated Ip current is less than 10% of the base current. If Ip
current is greater or equal than 10% than the base current, then the hot curve characteristic is applied. The Ip
current is estimated with a fixed time constant for both cooling and heating that reaches to the final value in two
seconds on a step change (either step up or step down) signal.
The IEC255-8 cold curve trip time is defined as follows:

top = top x ln [ I2 / (I2 - (kIb)2) ]

The IEC255-8 hot curve trip time is defined as follows:

top = top x ln [ (I2 - Ip2) / (I2 - (kIb)2) ]

where:
● t = time to operate
● t = thermal protection trip time constant
● I = measured overload RMS current
● Ip = measured load RMS current before overload occurs
● k =IEC 255-8 k-factor applied to IB, defining maximum permissible current above nominal current. A typical
value range for this k factor is 1.0 to 1.5 per the standard
● Ib = protected element base (nominal) current

To ensure element accuracy for high overcurrent conditions, the maximum value of I/(k x Ib) is limited to 8, even
when realistically it is exceeding this value.
The reset time of the thermal overload protection element is also time delayed using following formula:

trst = trst x ln [ (kIb)2) / (I2 - (kIb)2) ] + Tmin

where:
● trst = thermal protection trip time constant
● Tmin = a minimum reset time setting

N60-1601-0125-861-1 568
Chapter 9 - Settings

✖✘✙✚ ✍ ✗✏

✌✑✒✓ ✍ ✎✏

✌✔✕ ✍ ✎✏

☞
✡☛
✟✠ ✂
✞

✁✂

✁ ✂
✁✂ ✂ ✂ ✂
✄ ☎ ✄✆✝✆ ✛✜✢✢✜✣✤✥✦✧★✩

Figure 305: IEC 255-8 sample operate and reset curves

The thermal overload protection element estimates accumulated thermal energy E using the following equations
calculated each power cycle. When current is greater than the pickup level, In > k × Ib, element starts increasing the
thermal energy:
En = En-1 + Δt/top(In)
When current is less than the dropout level, In > 0.97 × k × Ib, the element starts decreasing the thermal energy:

Erst = En-1 + Δt/trst(In)

where
● Δt is the power cycle duration
● n is the power cycle index
● top(In) is the trip time calculated at index n as per the IEC255-8 cold curve or hot curve equations
● trst(In) is the reset time calculated at index n as per the reset time equation
● In is the measured overload RMS current at index n
● En is the accumulated energy at index n
● En–1 is the accumulated energy at index n – 1

N60-1601-0125-861-1 569
Chapter 9 - Settings

The thermal overload protection element removes the THERMAL PROT 1 OP and THERMAL PROT 1 ALARM
output operand when E < 0.05. In case of emergency, the thermal memory and as a result THERMAL PROT 1 OP
and THERMAL PROT 1 ALARM output operands can be reset using THERM PROT 1 RESET setting.
The calculations are performed per the selected mode (three-phase or single-phase). For three-phase, calculations
are performed per phase. If the accumulated energy reaches value 1 pu in any phase, the thermal overload
protection element operates and only resets when energy is less than 0.05 in all three phases. The THERMAL
PROT 1 ALARM operand asserts if accumulated energy reaches the selected THERMAL PROTECTION 1 ALARM
LEVEL setting in any phase an resets only when energy is below 0.05 in all three phases.
In single-phase mode, the thermal energy of only the ground channel IG of the assigned source is accumulated.

Typical time constants

Protected equipment Time constant Minimum reset time
Capacitor bank 10 minutes 30 minutes
Overhead line 10 minutes 20 minutes
Air-core reactor 40 minutes 30 minutes
Busbar 60 minutes 20 minutes
Underground cable 20 to 60 minutes 60 minutes

The figure shows the logic for the thermal overload protection element

SETTINGS

THERMAL PROTECTION 1
FUNCTION:
Enabled = 1
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
AND

THERM PROT 1 BLOCK:

Off = 0 THERMAL PROT 1 PKP

SETTINGS

THERMAL PROTECTION 1
MODE:
AND

SETTINGS
THERMAL PROTECTION 1 THERMAL PROTECTION 1
SETTINGS BASE CURR: S FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
ALARM LEVEL:
THERMAL PROTECTION 1 THERMAL PROTECTION 1 THERM PROT 1 TRIP LATCH THERMAL PROT 1 ALARM
SOURCE: k FACTOR: TIME CONST:
IA RMS IA > k * Ib R
RUN
IB RMS IB > k * Ib E =>ALRM Reset dominant
OR

IC RMS IC > k * Ib FLEXLOGIC OPERAND

IG RMS IG > k * Ib S
E =>1 THERMAL PROT 1 OP
LATCH

R
Reset dominant

LOAD CURRENT ES TIMATION

THERM PROT 1 RESET
IApn
IBpn TIME CONST:
ICpn THERM PROT 1 MINIM
IGp n RESET TIME:

RUN

SETTINGS
E < 0.05

THERM PROT 1 RESET:

Off = 0 Reset E to 0
827014A1.vsdx

Figure 306: Thermal overload protection logic

9.8.10.5 HARMONIC DETECTION

Setting path: SETTINGS > CONTROL ELEMENTS > MONITORING ELEMENTS > HARMONIC DETECTION >
HARMONIC DET 1(6)

N60-1601-0125-861-1 570
Chapter 9 - Settings

Note:
Only Harmonic Detection 1 is shown

■ HARMONIC DET 1 HARMONIC DET 1

ó Range: Disabled, Enabled
■ FUNCTION: Disabled

HARMONIC DET 1
ô Range: SRC <n>
SOURCE: SRC 1

HARMONIC DET 1
ô Range: DC, 2nd, 3rd, 4th, 5th, THD
HARMONIC: 2nd
HARMONIC DET 1 MIN
ô Range: 0.1 to 1.0 pu in steps of 0.01
PHS CUR: 0.2 pu
HARMONIC DET 1 MAX
ô Range: 1.0 to 30 pu in steps of 0.01
PHS CUR: 5.0 pu
HARMONIC DET 1 PHASE Range: ANY ONE, ANY TWO, ALL THREE,
ô
FOR OPER: ANY ONE AVERAGE
HARMONIC DET 1 PHS
ô Range: 2.0 to 100% in steps of 0.1
PICKUP: 20%
HARMONIC DET 1 MIN
ô Range: 0.1 to 1.0 pu in steps of 0.01
GND CUR: 0.2 pu
HARMONIC DET 1 MAX
ô Range: 1.0 to 30 pu in steps of 0.01
GND CUR: 1.0 pu
HARMONIC DET 1 GND
ô Range: 0.1 to 100% in steps of 0.1
PICKUP: 20%
HARMONIC DET 1 PKP
ô Range: 0.00 to 600 s in steps of 0.01
DELAY: 0 s
HARMONIC DET 1 BLK:
ô Range: Off, On, FlexLogic operand
Off
HARMONIC DET 1
ô Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
TARGET: Self-reset
HARMONIC DET 1:
ñ Range: Disabled, Enabled
EVENTS: Disabled

Transformer energization, voltage recovery following a clearance of external faults, startup or shutdown of
generators connected to transformers, or following a load injection can cause excessive magnetizing inrush current.
The nature of the magnetizing inrush current contains significant harmonics. The fundamental magnitude of this
magnetizing inrush current can be several times of the rated transformer overload current. Depending on the
sensitivity of the feeder or line overcurrent protection elements, magnetizing inrush current can cause an undesired
operation on these overcurrent protection elements.
In addition, DC offset can cause saturation in current transformers as well as in the input current transformers of
protective relays and can also result in undesired operation on some sensitive protection elements, such as
differential protection, restricted earth fault protection, or sequence overcurrent protection elements.
The Harmonic Detection element monitors one of the selected quantities, including DC offset, 2nd to 5th harmonic,
or Total Harmonics Distortion (THD), that are present in the phase currents and ground current. It adds delay or
blocking to prevent undesired operation. Harmonics are calculated and presented as a percent value relative to the
fundamental frequency phasor magnitude.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 571
Chapter 9 - Settings

Note:
When the output of this element is used for blocking protection functions, apply it directly (combination with other FlexLogic
operands adds delay to the blocking).

HARMONIC DET 1 FUNCTION

This setting enables and disables the Harmonic Detection element.

HARMONIC DET 1 SOURCE

Indicates the signal source for this element. Phase currents are taken from the three-phase CT bank assigned to
this source. Ground current is taken from the same source from the ground CT channel.

HARMONIC DET 1 HARMONIC

This setting selects DC, harmonic (2nd to 5th), or THD as the input quantity to be compared against the pickup
threshold in this element. Note that DC, harmonic, and THD are expressed in percent relative to the fundamental
magnitude. This setting applies to all four channels of the selected source. If detection of another harmonic is
required, then set up a separate Harmonic Detection element.
This setting applies to all four channels of the selected source, if detection of another harmonic is required, then set
up a separate Harmonic Detection element.

HARMONIC DET 1 MIN PHS CUR

This setting defines the minimum fundamental frequency current phasor magnitude required to allow the respective
(phase) logic in the harmonic detection element to operate.

HARMONIC DET 1 MAX PHS CUR

This setting defines the maximum fundamental frequency current phasor magnitude of the phases above which the
harmonic detection phase output is inhibited.

HARMONIC DET 1 PHASE FOR OPER

This setting defines the phases required for assertion of the HARMONIC DET 1 OP operand (except ground current
channel). Options are as follows:

ANY ONE
At least one phase picked up (DEFAULT)

ANY TWO
Two or more phases picked up

ALL THREE
All three phases picked up

AVERAGE
The average of three-phase harmonics or THDs picked up
If set to AVERAGE, the relay calculates the average level of the selected harmonic and compares this level against
the pickup setting. Averaging of the selected harmonic follows an adaptive algorithm depending on the fundamental
current magnitude per-phase. If the fundamental magnitude on any of the three phases falls outside of the defined
range based on the MIN PHS CUR and the MAX PHS CUR settings, the selected harmonic current from that phase
is dropped (zeroed) from the equation for averaging, and the divider is decreased from 3 to 2. The same happens if
the magnitude of the fundamental phasor on one of the remaining two phases falls out of the defined range based

N60-1601-0125-861-1 572
Chapter 9 - Settings

on the MIN PHS CUR and MAX PHS CUR settings. In this case, the selected harmonic on this phase is dropped
from summation, and the divider is decreased to 1.

HARMONIC DET 1 PHS PICKUP

This setting defines the pickup setting for the phase harmonic detection comparator of this element.

HARMONIC DET 1 MIN GND CUR

This setting defines the minimum fundamental frequency ground current phasor magnitude required to allow the
respective (ground) logic in this harmonic detection element to operate.

HARMONIC DET 1 MAX GND CUR

This setting defines the maximum fundamental frequency ground current phasor magnitude above which the
harmonic detection ground output is inhibited.

HARMONIC DET 1 GND PICKUP

This setting defines the pickup setting for ground harmonic detection comparator of this element.
The ground harmonic detection comparator of this element is connected to the ground channel of a CT module. For
standard channels, the conversion range is from 0.02 to 46 times the CT rating. For sensitive channels (sensitive
ground CT types), the conversion range is from 0.002 to 4.6 times the CT rating.

HARMONIC DET 1 PKP DELAY

This setting defines the pickup delay setting for this element.

HARMONIC DET 1 BLK

Assertion of the operand assigned to this setting blocks operation of the Harmonic Detection element.

HARMONIC DET 1 EVENTS

This setting enables and disables the logging of Harmonic Detection events in the event recorder.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 573
Chapter 9 - Settings

SETTINGS
HARMONIC DET 1 MAX
PHS CUR:
RUN
IA > MAX PHS CUR AND
RUN
IB > MAX PHS CUR AND FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
SETTING O HARMONIC DET 1 PKP
RUN R
HARMONIC DET 1
FUNCTION: IC > MAX PHS CUR
AND
Enabled = 1 RUN
AND FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
IAVG > MAX PHS CUR
SETTING AND HARMONIC DET 1 PKP A
HARMONIC DET 1 HARMONIC DET 1 PKP B
BLOCK: HARMONIC DET 1 PKP C
SETTINGS
Off = 0 HARMONIC DET 1 MIN SETTINGS FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
SETTINGS
PHS CUR: HARMONIC DET HARMONIC DET 1 HARMONIC DET 1 OP A
SETTING RUN 1 PHS PICKUP: PICKUP DELAY: HARMONIC DET 1 OP B
HARMONIC DET 1 RUN HARMONIC DET 1 OP C
SOURCE: IA > MIN PHS CUR TPKP
RUN HARM IA > PHS Pickup 20 ms
IA
IB IB > MIN PHS CUR RUN
TPKP SETTINGS
IC RUN HARM IB > PHS Pickup 20 ms
IAVG PHASES FOR
IC > MIN PHS CUR RUN TPKP OPERATION
IG HARM IC > PHS Pickup 20 ms
THD IA RUN
RUN FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
Harm IA [0, 2, 3, 4, 5] IAVG > MIN PHS CUR TPKP ANY ONE
HARM AVG > PHS Pickup 20 ms HARMONIC DET 1 OP
THD IB
Harm IB [0, 2, 3, 4, 5] SETTING ANY TWO
THD IC HARMONIC DET 1
Harm IC [0, 2, 3, 4, 5] HARMONIC: ALL THREE
THD IAVG PHASE A HARM# SELECT AVERAGE
Harm IAVG [0, 2, 3, 4, 5]
THD IG PHASE B HARM# SELECT
Harm IG [0, 2, 3, 4, 5] PHASE C HARM# SELECT
AVG HARM# SELECT

GND HARM# SELECT FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS

HARMONIC DET 1 PKP G

SETTINGS SETTINGS SETTINGS

HARMONIC DET 1 MAX HARMONIC DET 1 HARMONIC DET 1
GND CUR: GND PICKUP: PICKUP DELAY:
RUN FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
AND RUN TPKP
IG > MAX GND CUR HARMONIC DET 1 OP G
HARM IG > GND Pickup 20 ms

SETTINGS
HARMONIC DET 1 MIN
GND CUR:
RUN
IG > MIN GND CUR
859807A1.vsdx

Figure 307: Harmonic detection logic

9.8.11 MULTI-RANGE SIGNAL OSCILLATION DETECTOR (MSOD)

Setting path: SETTINGS > CONTROL ELEMENTS > MULTI-RANGE SIGNAL OSCILL DETECTOR > MUTLI-
RANGE SIGNAL OSCILLATOR <n>

Note:
Only Multi-range signal oscillation detector 1 is shown

■ MULTI-RANGE SIGNAL MSOD 1 FUNCTION:

ó Range: Disabled, Enabled
■ OSCILL DETECTOR 1 Disabled
MSOD 1 FREQ BAND:
ô Range: BAND 0, BAND 1, BAND 2, BAND 3, BAND 4
BAND 4
MSOD 1 SOURCE:
ô Range: SRC <n>
SRC1
MSOD 1 INPUT SIGNAL:
ô Range: See table
Va
MSOD 1 LOW FREQ:
ô Range: See table
35 Hz

N60-1601-0125-861-1 574
Chapter 9 - Settings

MSOD 1 HIGH FREQ:

ô Range: See table
45 Hz
MSOD 1 ALARM PKP:
ô Range: 0.02 to 10.00 pu in steps of 0.01
0.100 pu
MSOD 1 TRIP PKP:
ô Range: 0.05 to 10.00 pu in steps of 0.01
0.200 pu
MSOD 1 DEADBAND:
ô Range: 0.01 to 0.20 pu in steps of 0.01
0.02 pu
MSOD 1 ALARM DELAY:
ô Range: See table
0.10 s
MSOD 1 TRIP DELAY:
ô Range: See table
0.20 s
MSOD 1 DAMP R SUPV:
ô Range: Enabled, Disabled
Enabled
MSOD 1 DAMP R LEVEL:
ô Range: 0% to 30.0% in steps of 0.1
2%
MSOD 1 OSC PHASE
ô Range: -180.0 to 180.0 degrees in steps of 0.1
OFFSET:
MSOD 1 AVG CYCLES:
ô Range: 1 to 20 cycles in steps of 1
5
MSOD 1 BLOCK:
ô Range: FlexLogic operand
Off
MSOD 1 EVENTS:
ô Range: Enabled, Disabled
Disabled
MSOD 1 TARGET:
ñ Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
Disabled

The Multi-Range Signal Oscillation Detector (MSOD) is important for wind and solar farms because of oscillation in
the system.
The settings ranges and default values vary by band selected, as outlined in the following table.

Parameters for oscillation frequency detection bands

Band 0 Band I Band II Band III Band IV

Range Default Range Default Range Default Range Default Range Default
Input signal Ia, Ib, Ic, Ig Ia Va Mag, Vb V1 Mag Va Mag, Vb V1 Mag Va Mag, Vb V1 Mag Va, Vb, Vc, Va
Mag, Vc Mag, Mag, Vc Mag, Mag, Vc Mag, Vx, Ia, Ib, Ic,
V1 Mag, Vx V1 Mag, Vx V1 Mag, Vx Ig, Vclarke,
Mag, Ia Mag, Mag, Ia Mag, Ib Mag, Ia Mag, Iclarke
Ib Mag, Ic Mag, Ic Mag, I1 Ib Mag, Ic
Mag, I1 Mag, Mag, IG Mag, Mag, I1 Mag,
IG Mag, P3, P3, Q3, S3 IG Mag, P3,
Q3, S3 Q3, S3
Low freq --- --- 0.01 to 0.10 0.03 0.10 to 1.00 0.30 1.00 to 10.00 3.00 10.0 to fnom-5 35.0

High freq --- --- 0.01 to 0.10 0.06 0.10 to 1.00 0.60 1.00 to 10.00 6.00 10.0 to fnom-5 45.0

Alarm delay 0.00 to 1.00 0.00 to 600.00 50.00 0.00 to 600.00 5 0.00 to 600.00 0.5 0.00 to 600.00 0.1
600.00

N60-1601-0125-861-1 575
Chapter 9 - Settings

Band 0 Band I Band II Band III Band IV

Range Default Range Default Range Default Range Default Range Default
Trip delay 0.00 to 2.00 0.00 to 600.00 100.00 0.00 to 600.00 10 0.00 to 600.00 1 0.00 to 600.00 0.2
600.00
Averaging 1 to 20 5 --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
cycles

Sample rate 3840 Hz down 480 Hz down sampled to 6 480 Hz down sampled to 480 Hz 384 0Hz down sampled to
and execution sampled to 480 Hz Hz 60 Hz 480 Hz
rate (60 Hz
system)
Sample rate 3200 Hz down 400 Hz down sampled to 400 Hz down sampled to 400 Hz 3200 Hz down sampled to
and execution sampled to 400 Hz 5Hz 50 Hz 400 Hz
(50 Hz system)

MSOD 1 FREQ BAND

This setting selects the oscillation frequency band to be detected, BAND 0 (DC quantity), BAND I (0.01 to 0.1Hz),
BAND II (0.1 to 1Hz), BAND III (1 to 10Hz), and BAND IV (10 to fnom-5 Hz).
Band 0 is designed to detect geomagnetic induced currents. It is only applicable if DC-coupled non-conventional
instrument transformers (NCITs) are used (otherwise DC component cannot be measured as it does not pass
through the line CTs or the internal CTs). Due to the nature of the DC signal, the only measurement provided for
Band 0 is the magnitude; all other measurements are fixed to zero. Band 0 is applicable if process bus inputs are
used.

MSOD 1 SOURCE
This setting identifies the signal source for the MSOD element.

MSOD 1 INPUT SIGNAL

This setting identifies the input signal to the MSOD element collected from the source specified.

MSOD 1 LOW FREQ

This setting selects the value of the lower frequency of frequency band of interest. If measured frequency is outside
the frequency band of interest, neither the alarm output nor the trip output are given.

MSOD 1 HIGH FREQ

Same as for low frequency but for value of the higher frequency.

MSOD 1 ALARM PKP

This setting defines the pickup level for the alarm stage of the element. The oscillation magnitude is the oscillating
signal magnitude in per unit that is calculated by full cycle Fourier based on the calculated oscillation frequency.

MSOD 1 TRIP PKP

Same as for alarm pickup but for trip stage of the element.

MSOD 1 DEADBAND
This setting defines the deadband of the measured analog signal. If signal is inside the deadband, then oscillation is
not considered to be happening. When the signal is outside the deadband, then frequency of the oscillation signal is
measured and the oscillation magnitude is calculated based on the measured oscillation frequency. A typical setting
is at 0.25 of the alarm stage pickup setting.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 576
Chapter 9 - Settings

✁✂✄☎

✆☎✁✆✝✁✞✆
✟✠✠

✠ ✡
☛☞✌☞✍✌✎✏✑✒✓✔
Figure 308: Deadband

MSOD 1 ALARM DELAY

This setting specifies the pickup time delay of the alarm stage of the element.

MSOD 1 TRIP DELAY

This setting specifies the pickup time delay of the trip stage of the element.

MSOD 1 DAMP R SUPV

This setting enables or disables the damping ratio supervision.

MSOD 1 DAMP R LEVEL

This setting defines the oscillation damping ratio supervision level. A positive damping ratio means a damped
oscillation (oscillation with decreasing amplitude), and a negative damping ratio causes a power oscillation with
increasing amplitude (unstable oscillation). When the damping ratio supervision is enabled, MSOD is not permitted
to operate if the calculated damping ratio is greater than this setting (DAMP R LEVEL) because such oscillation is
considered a well-damped, stable oscillation. Operating time needs to be graded with the damping ratio setting to
prevent maloperation due to the time it takes to calculate the actual damping ratio. When the MSOD 1 DAMP R
SUPV setting is disabled, the MSOD 1 DAMP R LEVEL setting is inactive.

MSOD 1 OSC PHASE OFFSET

This setting defines the offset to oscillation phase angle (Phase_osc), which allows the user to calibrate the input
source to offset the phase errors introduced by VTs, CTs, cabling or connections (such as polarity or vector group
configurations). The setting value is added directly to the measured angles. Therefore, enter a positive correction
when the secondary signal lags the true signal and a negative value when the secondary signal leads the true
signal.

MSOD 1 AVG CYCLES

This setting defines the number of averaging cycles to be used in case of Band 0. The setting is visible/enabled if
MSOD is configured as Band 0.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 577
Chapter 9 - Settings

SETTINGS
MSOD 1 |f fnom| < 5Hz
SETTINGS
FUNCTION:

OR
Enabled = 1 MSOD 1 FERQ BAND SETTINGS
f=0

AND
MSOD 1 BLK: MSOD 1 INPUT MSOD 1 LOW FREQ:
Off = 0 SIGNAL
MSOD 1 DEADBAND MSOD 1 HIGH FREQ:
SETTINGS MSOD 1 OSC PH Freq_osc > FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
OFFSET LOW_FREQ SETTING

AND
MSOD 1 SOURCE MSOD 1 ALARM MSOD 1 ALARM
RUN AND
va DELAY:
vb Freq_osc <

AND
vc HIGH_FREQ tPKP
vx 0
ia SETTINGS
Collect input signals
ib
ic as per FREQ BAND MSOD 1 DAMP R LEVEL
in and calculate SETTING FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
Freq_osc, Mag_osc, DampR_soc > DAMP

AND
V_clarke
Ph_osc and R LEVEL MSOD 1 TRIP MSOD 1 TRIP
I_clarke
Va MAG DampR_osc from the DELAY:

AND
Vb MAG collected signals tPKP

OR
Vc Mag SETTINGS 0
V1 Mag
Vx MAG MSOD 1 DAMP R FLEXANALOG
Ia MAG SUPV:
Ib MAG Enabled = 1 MSOD 1 FREQ OSC
Freq_osc
Ic Mag DampR_osc
I1 Mag Mag_osc SETTINGS FLEXANALOG
Ig MAG Phase_osc MSOD 1 ALARM MSOD 1 DAMPR OSC
P PICKUP:
Q Mag_osc > ALARM
S PICKUP FLEXANALOG
MSOD 1 MAG OSC
SETTINGS
FLEXANALOG
MSOD 1 TRIP PICKUP:
MSOD 1 PHASE OSC
Mag_osc > TRIP PICKUP

859816A1.vsdx

Figure 309: MSOD bands I to IV logic

SETTINGS
MSOD 1
FUNCTION:
Enabled = 1 |f fnom| < 5Hz
AND

MSOD 1 BLK: OR
Off = 0 SETTINGS
MSOD 1 AVG CYC f=0
SETTINGS MSOD 1 INPUT
SIGNAL
MSOD 1 SOURCE
RUN

SETTING FLEXLOGIC OPERAND

MSOD 1 ALARM
AND

IA Collect input signals

MSOD 1 ALARM
IB and calculate Mag_osc SETTINGS DELAY:
IC from the collected
signals, taking into
MSOD 1 ALARM tPKP
IN 0
account the number of PICKUP:
averaging cycles to be Mag_osc > ALARM
used. PICKUP
SETTING
SETTINGS FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
MSOD 1 TRIP
MSOD 1 TRIP
AND

DELAY: MSOD 1 TRIP

PICKUP:
Freq_osc = 0 Mag_osc > TRIP tPKP
DampR_osc = 0 PICKUP 0
Mag_osc
FLEXANALOG
Ph_osc = 0 MSOD 1 MAG OSC

859817A1.vsdx

Figure 310: MSOD band 0 logic

N60-1601-0125-861-1 578
Chapter 9 - Settings

9.9 INPUTS/OUTPUTS

9.9.1 CONTACT INPUTS

Setting path: SETTINGS > INPUTS / OUTPUTS > CONTACT INPUTS
■ CONTACT ■ CONTACT INPUT CONTACT INPUT H5a
INPUTS ó H5a ID: Range: up to 20 alphanumeric characters
ó
■ ■ Cont Ip 1
CONTACT INPUT H5a
ô Range: 0.0 to 16.0 ms in steps of 0.5
DEBNCE TIME: 6.0 ms
CONTACT INPUT H5a
ñ Range: Disabled, Enabled
EVENTS: Disabled
■ CONTACT INPUT xxx
ô
■
■ CONTACT INPUT Ips H5a,H5c,H6a,H6c
ñ Range: 17, 33, 84, 166 Vdc
■ THRESHOLDS ó THRESHOLD: 33 Vdc
Ips H7a,H7c,H8a,H8c
ô Range: 17, 33, 84, 166 Vdc
THRESHOLD: 33 Vdc

ô ô Range: 17, 33, 84, 166 Vdc

Ips xxx,xxx,xxx,xxx
ô Range: 17, 33, 84, 166 Vdc
THRESHOLD: 33 Vdc
Range: 0 to 300 Vdc in steps of 1 Vdc.
STATION BATTERY
ô (Available only in 6Y card and applicable only to Contact
NOM VOLTAGE: 0 Vdc
Inputs 9 (x13a) and 11 (x16a).
BATTERY VOLTAGE
ñ I/O Range: None, slots with 6Y card installed
MODULE: None

Contact inputs and outputs are digital signals associated with connections to hard-wired contacts. Wet and dry
contacts are supported.
The contact inputs menu contains configuration settings for each contact input as well as voltage thresholds for
each group of two, four and five contact inputs. Upon startup, the relay processor determines (from an assessment
of the installed modules) which contact inputs are available and then display settings for only those inputs.
An alphanumeric ID can be assigned to a contact input for diagnostic, setting, and event recording purposes. The
CONTACT IP X On (Logic 1) FlexLogic operand corresponds to contact input X being closed, while CONTACT IP X
Off corresponds to contact input “X” being open. The CONTACT INPUT DEBNCE TIME setting defines the time
required for the contact to overcome ‘contact bouncing’ conditions. As this time differs for different contact types and
manufacturers, set it as a maximum contact debounce time (per manufacturer specifications) plus some margin to
ensure proper operation. If CONTACT INPUT EVENTS is enabled, every change in the contact input state triggers
an event.
A raw status is scanned for all Contact Inputs synchronously at the constant rate of 0.5 ms as shown in the
following figure. The DC input voltage is compared to a user-settable threshold. A new contact input state must be
maintained for a user-settable debounce time in order for the Product to validate the new contact state. In the
following figure, the debounce time is set at 2.5 ms; thus the 6th sample in a row validates the change of state
(mark no. 1 in the diagram). Once validated (de-bounced), the contact input asserts a corresponding FlexLogic
operand and logs an event as per user setting.
A time stamp of the first sample in the sequence that validates the new state is used when logging the change of
the contact input into the Event Recorder (mark no. 2 in the figure).

N60-1601-0125-861-1 579
Chapter 9 - Settings

Protection and control elements, as well as FlexLogic equations and timers, are executed eight times in a power
system cycle. The protection pass duration is controlled by the frequency tracking mechanism. The FlexLogic
operand reflecting the debounced state of the contact is updated at the protection pass following the validation
(marks no. 3 and 4 on the figure that follows). The update is performed at the beginning of the protection pass so all
protection and control functions, as well as FlexLogic equations, are fed with the updated states of the contact
inputs.
The FlexLogic operand response time to the contact input change is equal to the debounce time setting plus up to
one protection pass (variable and depending on system frequency if frequency tracking enabled). If the change of
state occurs just after a protection pass, the recognition is delayed until the subsequent protection pass; that is, by
the entire duration of the protection pass. If the change occurs just prior to a protection pass, the state is recognized
immediately. Statistically a delay of half the protection pass is expected. Owing to the 0.5 ms scan rate, the time
resolution for the input contact is below 1 ms.
For example, eight protection passes per cycle on a 60 Hz system correspond to a protection pass every 2.1 ms.
With a contact debounce time setting of 3.0 ms, the FlexLogic operand-assert time limits are: 3.0 + 0.0 = 3.0 ms
and 3.0 + 2.1 = 5.1 ms. These time limits depend on how soon the protection pass runs after the debouncing time.
Regardless of the contact debounce time setting, the contact input event is time-stamped with a 1 ms accuracy
using the time of the first scan corresponding to the new state (mark no. 2 shown). Therefore, the time stamp
reflects a change in the DC voltage across the contact input terminals that was not accidental as it was
subsequently validated using the debounce timer. Keep in mind that the associated FlexLogic operand is
asserted/de-asserted later, after validating the change.
The debounce algorithm is symmetrical: the same procedure and debounce time are used to filter the LOW-HIGH
(marks no.1, 2, 3, and 4 in the figure) and HIGH-LOW (marks no. 5, 6, 7, and 8) transitions.

◗
❖ ❯
❬ ❏
❨ ❖ ✏✺✌❉❀❈❉✎✫❉✥✕✕✥✍✴✌ ✓✪❉✌✺✪✎✴☞
◆❱ ❙
▼
❭

❄
✻ ✼ ✽
✓✜✧✙ ✘✛✮✧✷ ✭✹ ✛✦✙ ✹✜✚✘✛ ❁
✓✜✧✙ ✘✛✮✧✷ ✭✹ ✛✦✙ ✹✜✚✘✛ ✥✛ ✛✦✜✘ ✛✜✧✙★ ✛✦✙ ✓✦✙ ✲✰✙✳✴✭✣✜✬✵✶ ✘✬✮✢ ✬✭✚✚✙✘✷✭✢✱✜✢✣ ✛✭ ✛✦✙
✥✛ ✛✦✜✘ ✛✜✧✙★ ✛✦✙ ✢✙✩
✘✬✮✢ ✬✭✚✚✙✘✷✭✢✱✜✢✣ ✛✭ ✢✙✩ ✖✪✔✫✪✤ ✭✷✙✚✮✢✱ ✜✘ ✣✭✜✢✣ ✛✭ ✢✙✩ ✯✮✰✜✱✮✛✙✱ ✘✛✮✛✙ ✜✘
✖✴✎✿✤ ✬✭✢✛✮✬✛ ✘✛✮✛✙ ✜✘
✛✦✙ ✢✙✩ ✯✮✰✜✱✮✛✙✱ ✘✛✮✛✙ ✜✘ ✬✭✢✛✮✬✛ ✘✛✮✛✙ ✜✘ ✸✙ ✮✘✘✙✚✛✙✱ ✮✛ ✛✦✜✘ ✰✭✣✣✙✱ ✜✢ ✛✦✙ ✺✎✌ ✚✙✬✭✚✱
✯✮✰✜✱✮✛✙✱
✰✭✣✣✙✱ ✜✢ ✛✦✙ ✺✎✌ ✚✙✬✭✚✱ ✯✮✰✜✱✮✛✙✱ ✷✚✭✛✙✬✛✜✭✢ ✷✮✘✘

❂
❖
▲ ✓✦✙ ✲✰✙✳✴✭✣✜✬✵✶
❏ ✭✷✙✚✮✢✱ ✜✘ ✣✭✜✢✣ ✛✭ ✸✙
❖ ◗
◆ ❖ ✱✙❀✮✘✘✙✚✛✙✱ ✮✛ ✛✦✜✘
▼ ❏
▲ ❖ ✷✚✭✛✙✬✛✜✭✢ ✷✮✘✘
P ☞✌✍✎✏✑✒✌ ✓✔✕✌
❑
❏ ✖✗✘✙✚ ✘✙✛✛✜✢✣✤
■

✾
✓✦✙ ✲✰✙✳✴✭✣✜✬✵✶ ✭✷✙✚✮✢✱
☞✌✍✎✏✑✒✌ ✓✔✕✌
✓✦✙ ✲✰✙✳✴✭✣✜✬✵✶ ✭✷✙✚✮✢✱ ✬✦✮✢✣✙✘ ✚✙✹✰✙✬✛✜✢✣ ✛✦✙
✺✒✥✑ ✓✔✕✌ ✖✗✘✙✚ ✘✙✛✛✜✢✣✤
✬✦✮✢✣✙✘ ✚✙✹✰✙✬✛✜✢✣ ✛✦✙ ✯✮✰✜✱✮✛✙✱ ✬✭✢✛✮✬✛ ✘✛✮✛✙
❲❳ ✖❅❆❇ ✧✘✙✬✤ ✯✮✰✜✱✮✛✙✱ ✬✭✢✛✮✬✛ ✘✛✮✛✙
❱▲ ❩
❯ ◆ ❃
❏
▼ ■
❙ ◗
❚ ❨
◗ ▼
❙
❘

❈❉✎✓✌✒✓✔✎✑ ❈✥✺✺
✖❊ ✛✜✧✙✘ ✮ ✬❋✬✰✙ ✬✭✢✛✚✭✰✰✙✱ ✸❋ ✛✦✙
✹✚✙●✗✙✢✬❋ ✛✚✮✬❍✜✢✣ ✧✙✬✦✮✢✜✘✧✤
✁✂✄☎✆✝✞✟✠✡☛

Figure 311: Input contact debouncing mechanism and time stamp sample timing

The contact inputs are grouped with a common return. They are isolated in groups of four to allow connection of wet
contacts from different voltage sources for each group.
The CONTACT INPUT THRESHOLDS determine the minimum voltage required to detect a closed contact input.
This value is selected according to the following criteria: 17 for 24 V sources, 33 for 48 V sources, 84 for 110 to 125
V sources and 166 for 250 V sources.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 580
Chapter 9 - Settings

For example, to use contact input H5a as a status input from the breaker 52b contact to seal-in the trip relay and
record it in the Event Records menu, make the following settings changes:
● CONTACT INPUT H5a ID: Breaker Closed (52b)
● CONTACT INPUT H5a EVENTS: Enabled

Note:
The 52b contact is closed when the breaker is open and open when the breaker is closed.

The setting STATION BATTERY NOM VOLTAGE is applicable to 6Y cards only. A 6Y card provides an additional
function for station battery voltage measurement through contact inputs 9 (x13a) and 11 (x16a). To measure this DC
battery voltage, you:
1. set the STATION BATTERY NOM VOLTAGE setting to the nominal voltage of the station battery
2. connect the positive terminal of the station battery directly to the Contact Input 9 or 11
3. connect the negative terminal to the common return.
The measured DC voltage is available as the Flexanalogs Battery DC Volt1 / Battery DC Volt2.
Logic for monitoring the station battery voltage can be designed using Flexelements which use a per unit value of
the measured voltage. The setting STATION BATTERY NOM VOLTAGE is used as base for converting the
measured DC voltage to a per unit value. If the setting STATION BATTERY NOM VOLTAGE is set to 0 Vdc, then
the station battery DC voltage measurement functionality is not available and the Contact Inputs work as regular
contact inputs. The Flexanalog Battery DC Volt1 / Battery DC Volt2 would read 0.
The BATTERY VOLTAGE I/O MODULE setting is applicable only to the 6Y card. It uses the contacts inputs 9 and
11 for the station battery DC voltage measurement.
It should be noted that when contact inputs 9 (x13a) and 11 (x16a) are used for DC voltage measurement, the
contact inputs 10 (x15a) and 12 (x18a) could still be used as regular contact inputs, but the CONTACT INPUT
THRESHOLD settings for contact inputs 10 (x15a) and 12 (x18a) are forced to a certain value (out of 17, 33, 84,
166 Vdc) as shown in the table below. For example, if STATION BATTERY NOM VOLTAGE is set as 250 Vdc and
BATTERY VOLTAGE I/O MODULE is set to H, then the settings Ips H13a,H15a THRESHOLD and Ips H16a,H18a
THRESHOLD automatically become 166Vdc.
The following table shows the CI THRESHOLD setting for Contact Inputs 9-10 and 11-12 of 6Y card based on the
setting STATION BATTERY NOM VOLTAGE (when using the voltage monitoring functionality)
Range of the setting STATION BATTERY NOM VOLTAGE Applicable CI THRESHOLD setting for Contact Inputs 9-10 and 11-12 of 6Y card

Below 30V 17V

30V to 60V 33V

60V to 150V 84V

150V to 300V 166V

9.9.2 VIRTUAL INPUTS

Setting path: SETTINGS > INPUTS/OUTPUTS > VIRTUAL INPUTS > VIRTUAL INPUT 1(128)

Note:
Only Virtual input 1 is shown

■ VIRTUAL INPUT 1 VIRTUAL INPUT 1

ó Range: Disabled, Enabled
■ FUNCTION: Disabled

N60-1601-0125-861-1 581
Chapter 9 - Settings

VIRTUAL INPUT 1 ID:

ô Range: up to 20 alphanumeric characters
Virt Ip 1
VIRTUAL INPUT 1
ô Range: Self-Reset, Latched
TYPE: Latched
VIRTUAL INPUT 1
ñ Range: Disabled, Enabled
EVENTS: Disabled

The virtual inputs and outputs are digital signals associated with UR-series internal logic signals. Virtual inputs
include signals generated by the local user interface. The virtual outputs are outputs of FlexLogic equations used to
customize the device. Virtual outputs can also serve as virtual inputs to FlexLogic equations.
The virtual inputs can be individually programmed to respond to input signals from the keypad (via the COMMANDS
menu) and communications protocols. All virtual input operands are defaulted to Off (logic 0) unless the
appropriate input signal is received.
If the VIRTUAL INPUT x FUNCTION is to Disabled, the input is forced to off (logic 0) regardless of any attempt to
alter the input. If enabled, the input operates as shown on the logic diagram and generates output FlexLogic
operands in response to received input signals and the applied settings.
There are two types of operation: self-reset and latched. If VIRTUAL INPUT x TYPE is Self-Reset, when the
input signal transits from off to on, the output operand is set to on for only one evaluation of the FlexLogic equations
and then return to off. If set to Latched, the virtual input sets the state of the output operand to the same state as
the most recent received input.
The self-reset operating mode generates the output operand for a single evaluation of the FlexLogic equations. If
the operand is to be used anywhere other than internally in a FlexLogic equation, it likely needs to be lengthened in
time. A FlexLogic timer with a delayed reset can perform this function.

✩✪✫✫✬✭✮
✁✂✄☎✆✝ ✁✞✟☎✄ ✠
✡☎✞☛✄✁☞✞✌
✯✰✱✲✳✴✵✶✷ ❘
✛✜✢
▲✱❄✾◗
✥ ✎✏✑✒✓✔ ✁✕✖✒✑ ✠ ✑✗ ☞✞ ✘ ✠✚
✩✪✫✫✬✭✮
✥ ✎✏✑✒✓✔ ✁✕✖✒✑ ✠ ✑✗ ☞✡✡ ✘ ✙✚ ❍ ✁✂✄☎✆✝ ✁✞✟☎✄ ✠ ✁✍✌
✛✜✢
✩✪✫✫✬✭✮ ✸✹✳✴✺✳✻✼✽✾ ✿❀✴❁✱✰✵❂
✧★ ❃✽❁❄ ❅❀ ✷
❃❅❍■❏❑▲ ❅▼◆❏■ ✷
■❖◆✯P
▲✱❄✾◗✴✵ ✣✤✦
❘✴✳❙ ❚ ❍✴❯✴❄ ❆❇❈❉❆❉✛❊❋●✢★

Figure 312: Virtual inputs logic

9.9.3 CONTACT OUTPUTS

9.9.3.1 NON-LATCHING CONTACT OUTPUTS (H)

Setting path: SETTINGS > INPUTS/OUTPUTS > CONTACT OUTPUTS > CONTACT OUTPUT H1(H72)

Note:
Only Contact output H1 is shown

■ CONTACT OUTPUT H1 CONTACT OUTPUT H1 ID Range: up to 20 alphanumeric characters: Disabled,

ó
■ Cont Op 1 Enabled

N60-1601-0125-861-1 582
Chapter 9 - Settings

OUTPUT H1 OPERATE:
ô Range: FlexLogic operand
Off
OUTPUT H1 SEAL-IN:
ô Range: FlexLogic operand
Off
CONTACT OUTPUT H1
ñ Range: FlexLogic operand
EVENTS: Enabled

A contact output is a digital signals associated with connections to hard-wired contacts. Wet and dry contacts are
supported.
Upon startup of the relay, the main processor determines from an assessment of the modules installed in the
chassis which contact outputs are available and then presents the settings for only these outputs. Where the
contact input is non-latching, the settings are as shown.
An ID can be assigned to each contact output. The signal that can OPERATE a contact output can be any
FlexLogic operand (virtual output, element state, contact input, or virtual input). An additional FlexLogic operand can
be used to SEAL-IN the relay. Any change of state of a contact output can be logged as an Event if programmed to
do so.
For example, the trip circuit current is monitored by providing a current threshold detector in series with some Form-
A contacts (see the trip circuit example in the Digital Elements section). The monitor sets a flag (see the
specifications for Form-A). The name of the FlexLogic operand set by the monitor, consists of the output relay
designation, followed by the name of the flag; for example, Cont OP 1 IOn.
In most breaker control circuits, the trip coil is connected in series with a breaker auxiliary contact used to interrupt
current flow after the breaker has tripped, to prevent damage to the less robust initiating contact. This can be done
by monitoring an auxiliary contact on the breaker which opens when the breaker has tripped, but this scheme is
subject to incorrect operation caused by differences in timing between breaker auxiliary contact change-of-state and
interruption of current in the trip circuit. The most dependable protection of the initiating contact is provided by
directly measuring current in the tripping circuit, and using this parameter to control resetting of the initiating relay.
This scheme is often called trip seal-in.
This can be realized using the Cont OP 1 IOn FlexLogic operand to seal-in the contact output as follows:
● CONTACT OUTPUT H1 ID: Cont Op 1
● OUTPUT H1 OPERATE: any suitable FlexLogic operand
● OUTPUT H1 SEAL-IN: Cont Op 1 IOn
● CONTACT OUTPUT H1 EVENTS: Enabled
SETT ING
CONTACT OUTPU T H1 OPERATE
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
= On
OR Cont Op 1 Closed
Cont Op 1 Ion
Cont Op 1 Von
Cont Op 1 Voff

SETT ING
CONTACT OUTPU T H1 SEAL-IN H1a
AND
= On

H1b

H1c

859743A1.vsd

Figure 313: Contact input/output module type 6A contact 1 logic

N60-1601-0125-861-1 583
Chapter 9 - Settings

9.9.3.2 LATCHING CONTACT OUTPUTS

Setting path: SETTINGS > INPUTS/OUTPUTS > CONTACT OUTPUTS > CONTACT OUTPUT H1a

Note:
Only Contact output H1a is shown

■ CONTACT OUTPUT H1a CONTACT OUTPUT H1a ID Range: up to 20 alphanumeric characters: Disabled,
ó
■ Cont Op 1 Enabled
OUTPUT H1a OPERATE:
ô Range: FlexLogic operand
Off
OUTPUT H1a RESET:
ô Range: FlexLogic operand
Off
OUTPUT H1a SEAL-IN:
ô Range: FlexLogic operand
Off
OUTPUT H1a TYPE:
ô Range: Operate-dominant, Reset-dominant
Operate-dominant
CONTACT OUTPUT H1a
ñ Range: FlexLogic operand
EVENTS: Enabled

The latching output contacts are mechanically bi-stable and controlled by two separate (open and close) coils. As
such they retain their position even if the relay is not powered up. The relay recognizes all latching output contact
cards and populates the setting menu accordingly. On power up, the relay reads positions of the latching contacts
from the hardware before executing any other functions of the relay (such as protection and control features or
FlexLogic).
The latching output modules, either as part of the relay or as individual modules, are shipped from the factory with
all latching contacts open. It is highly recommended to double-check the programming and positions of the latching
contacts when replacing a module.
Since the relay asserts the output contact and reads back its position, it is possible to incorporate self-monitoring
capabilities for the latching outputs. If any latching outputs exhibits a discrepancy, the LATCHING OUTPUT ERROR
self-test error is declared. The error is signaled by the LATCHING OUT ERROR FlexLogic operand, event, and
target message.
The settings shown use H1a as an example. The menu varies; not all fields shown display.

OUTPUT H1a OPERATE

This setting specifies a FlexLogic operand to operate the Close Coil of the contact. The relay seals-in this input to
safely close the contact. Once the contact is closed and the RESET input is logic 0 (off), any activity of the
OPERATE input, such as subsequent chattering, does not have any effect. With both the OPERATE and RESET
inputs active (logic 1), the response of the latching contact is specified by the OUTPUT H1a TYPE setting.

OUTPUT H1a RESET or SEAL-IN

This setting specifies a FlexLogic operand to operate the Trip Coil of the contact. The relay seals-in this input to
safely open the contact. Once the contact is opened and the OPERATE input is logic 0 (off), any activity of the
RESET input, such as subsequent chattering, does not have any effect. With both the OPERATE and RESET
inputs active (logic 1), the response of the latching contact is specified by the OUTPUT H1a TYPE setting.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 584
Chapter 9 - Settings

OUTPUT H1a TYPE

This setting specifies the contact response under conflicting control inputs; that is, when both the OPERATE and
RESET signals are applied. With both control inputs applied simultaneously, the contact closes if set to Operate-
dominant and opens if set to Reset-dominant.
SETTING
CONTACT OUTPUT H1a OPERATE Non-volatile,
= On Set-dominant
AND S
SETTING OR Latch
CONTACT OUTPUT H1a TYPE ❈❧♦s❡
❖♥

= Operate-dominant R
❍✶❜
= Reset-dominant
Non-volatile,
SETTING OR Set-dominant
❍✶❛
CONTACT OUTPUT H1a RESET AND S
❖♣❡♥
= On Latch
R

FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
Cont Op 1 Closed

✽✺✾✼✹✹❆✶✳✈s ❞

Figure 314: Contact input/output module type 4L contact 1 logic

Application example 1
A latching output contact H1a is to be controlled from two user-programmable pushbuttons (buttons number 1 and
2). The following settings are applied.
Program the Latching Outputs by making the following changes in the SETTINGS > INPUTS/OUTPUTS >
CONTACT OUTPUTS > CONTACT OUTPUT H1a menu (assuming an H4L module):
● OUTPUT H1a OPERATE: PUSHBUTTON 1 ON
● OUTPUT H1a RESET: PUSHBUTTON 2 ON
Program the pushbuttons by making the following changes in the PRODUCT SETUP > USER-PROGRAMMABLE
PUSHBUTTONS > USER PUSHBUTTON 1 and USER PUSHBUTTON 2 menus:
● PUSHBUTTON 1 FUNCTION: Self-reset
● PUSHBTN 1 DROP-OUT TIME: 0.00 s
● PUSHBUTTON 2 FUNCTION: Self-reset
● PUSHBTN 2 DROP-OUT TIME: 0.00 s

Application example 2
A relay, having two latching contacts H1a and H1c, is to be programmed. The H1a contact is to be a Type-a
contact, while the H1c contact is to be a Type-b contact (Type-a means closed after exercising the operate input;
Type-b means closed after exercising the reset input). The relay is to be controlled from virtual outputs: VO1 to
operate and VO2 to reset.
Program the Latching Outputs by making the following changes in the SETTINGS > INPUTS/OUTPUTS >
CONTACT OUTPUTS > CONTACT OUTPUT H1a and CONTACT OUTPUT H1c menus (assuming an H4L
module):
● OUTPUT H1a OPERATE: VO1
● OUTPUT H1a RESET: VO2
● OUTPUT H1c OPERATE: VO2
● OUTPUT H1c RESET: VO1
Since the two physical contacts in this example are mechanically separated and have individual control inputs, they
do not operate at exactly the same time. A discrepancy in the range of a fraction of a maximum operating time can
occur. Therefore, a pair of contacts programmed to be a multi-contact relay do not guarantee any specific sequence

N60-1601-0125-861-1 585
Chapter 9 - Settings

of operation (such as make before break). If required, the sequence of operation must be programmed explicitly by
delaying some of the control inputs as shown in the next application example.

Application example 3
A make before break functionality must be added to the preceding example. An overlap of 20 ms is required to
implement this functionality.
Write the following FlexLogic equation (EnerVista example shown)

Figure 315: Flexlogic settings for Application example 3

Set both timers (Timer 1 and Timer 2) to 20 ms pickup and 0 ms dropout.

Program the Latching Outputs by making the following changes in the SETTINGS > INPUTS/OUTPUTS >
CONTACT OUTPUTS > CONTACT OUTPUT H1a and CONTACT OUTPUT H1c menus (assuming an H4L
module):
● OUTPUT H1a OPERATE: VO1
● OUTPUT H1a RESET: VO4
● OUTPUT H1c OPERATE: VO2
● OUTPUT H1c RESET: VO3

Application example 4
A latching contact H1a is to be controlled from a single virtual output VO1. The contact is to remain closed as long
as VO1 is high, and is to remain opened when VO1 is low. Program the relay as follows.
Write the following FlexLogic equation (EnerVista example shown).

Figure 316: Flexlogic settings for Application example 4

N60-1601-0125-861-1 586
Chapter 9 - Settings

Program the Latching Outputs by making the following changes in the SETTINGS > INPUTS/OUTPUTS >
CONTACT OUTPUTS > CONTACT OUTPUT H1a menu (assuming an H4L module):
● OUTPUT H1a OPERATE: VO1
● OUTPUT H1a RESET: VO2

9.9.4 VIRTUAL OUTPUTS

Setting path: SETTINGS > INPUTS/OUTPUTS > VIRTUAL OUTPUTS > VIRTUAL OUTPUT 1(256)

Note:
Only Virtual output 1 is shown

■ VIRTUAL OUTPUT 1 VIRTUAL OUTPUT 1 ID:

ó Range: up to 20 alphanumeric characters
■ Virt Op 1
VIRTUAL OUTPUT 1
ñ Range: Disabled, Enabled
EVENTS: Disabled

The virtual inputs and outputs are digital signals associated with UR-series internal logic signals. Virtual inputs
include signals generated by the local user interface. The virtual outputs are outputs of FlexLogic equations used to
customize the device. Virtual outputs can also serve as virtual inputs to FlexLogic equations.
The virtual outputs can be assigned using FlexLogic. If not assigned, the output is forced to ‘OFF’ (Logic 0). An ID
also can be assigned to each virtual output. Virtual outputs are resolved in each pass through the evaluation of the
FlexLogic equations. Any change of state of a virtual output can be logged as an event if programmed to do so.
For example, if Virtual Output 1 is the trip signal from FlexLogic and the trip relay is used to signal events, the
settings is programmed as follows:
● VIRTUAL OUTPUT 1 ID: Trip
● VIRTUAL OUTPUT 1 EVENTS: Disabled

9.9.5 RESETTING

Enhanced and basic front panels

SETTINGS > INPUTS/OUTPUTS > RESETTING
■ RESETTING RESET OPERAND:
ó Range: FlexLogic operand
■ Off

Graphical front panel

SETTINGS > INPUTS/OUTPUTS > RESETTING
■ RESETTING RESET OPERAND:
■ ó Off Range: FlexLogic operand

RESET ANNUNCIATOR:
ô Range: FlexLogic operand
Off

Some events can be programmed to latch the front panel LED event indicators, target messages, and/or graphical
front panel annunciator windows. Once set, the latching mechanism holds the latched indicators, messages, or

N60-1601-0125-861-1 587
Chapter 9 - Settings

windows in the set state after the initiating condition has cleared until a RESET command is received to return these
latches (not including FlexLogic latches) to the reset state where the initiating condition has cleared. The RESET
command can be sent from the front panel RESET button, a remote device via a communications channel, or any
selected operand. The Modbus execute function 05h with operation code 1 command is also available to perform
the same function as the front panel RESET key.

RESET OPERAND
The three sources of RESET commands each activates the RESET OP FlexLogic operand. Each individual source
of a RESET command also activates its individual operand RESET OP (PUSHBUTTON), RESET OP (COMMS), or
RESET OP (OPERAND) to identify the source of the command. Each of these three operands generates an event
in the event record when activated. The RESET OPERAND setting here selects the operand that activates the
RESET OP (OPERAND) operand.

RESET ANNUNCIATOR
Used to select a FlexLogic operand that when activated acknowledges/resets all annunciator windows on the
graphical front panel. The other methods to acknowledge/reset annunciator windows include:
● On the displayed page, press the RESET pushbutton with none of the annunciator windows selected to
acknowledge/reset all annunciator windows on that page
● To acknowledge/reset a specific annunciator window, use the Up, Down, Left and Right pushbuttons to select
the window, and press the RESET or ENTER pushbutton
● All annunciator windows can be reset remotely by programming a Virtual Input (for example Virtual Input 1)
as the input to the RESET ANNUNCIATOR setting. Then the Modbus execute function 05h with operation
code 1000h command (or function 10h with address 400h) is used to set the state of Virtual Input 1.
For the RESET ANNUNCIATOR setting, the RESET ANCTR OP FlexLogic operand is activated by the two sources
of RESET command, operand source and manual source. Each individual source of a RESET ANNUNCIATOR
command also activates its individual operand RESET OP (OPRD) or RESET ANCTR OP (MNUL) to identify the
source of the command. Each of these two operands generates an event in the event record when activated. The
setting here selects the operand that activates the RESET ANCTR OP (OPRD) operand. The RESET pushbutton
on the front panel or the reset command from the software activates the RESET ANCTR OP (MNUL) operand.

9.9.6 DIRECT INPUTS AND OUTPUTS

9.9.6.1 DIRECT INPUTS

Setting path: SETTINGS > INPUTS/OUTPUTS > DIRECT INPUTS > DIRECT INPUT <n>
■ DIRECT INPUT 1 DIRECT INPUT 1
ó Range: up to 12 alphanumeric characters
■ NAME: Dir Ip 1
DIRECT INPUT 1
ô Range: 0 to 16
DEVICE ID: 0
Range: 0 to 32
DIRECT INPUT 1
ô Range: 0 to 96 (C30, N60)
BIT NUMBER: 0
Range: 0 to 256 (B90)
DIRECT INPUT 1
ô Range: On, Off, Latest/On, Latest/Off
DEFAULT: Off
DIRECT INPUT 1
ñ Range: Enabled, Disabled
EVENTS: Disabled

These settings specify how the direct input information is processed.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 588
Chapter 9 - Settings

DIRECT INPUT 1 NAME

This setting allows the user to assign a descriptive name to the direct input.

DIRECT INPUT 1 DEVICE ID

Represents the source of direct input 1. The specified direct input is driven by the device identified here.

DIRECT INPUT 1 BIT NUMBER

The bit number to extract the state for direct input 1. Direct Input 1 is driven by the bit identified as DIRECT INPUT 1
BIT NUMBER. This corresponds to the direct output number of the sending device.

DIRECT INPUT 1 DEFAULT STATE

Represents the state of the direct input when the associated direct device is offline. The following choices are
available:
● On — Defaults the input to Logic 1
● Off — Defaults the input to Logic 0
● Latest/On — Freezes the input in case of lost communications. When the latest state is not known, such as
after relay power-up but before the first communication exchange, the input defaults to Logic 1. When
communication resumes, the input becomes fully operational.
● Latest/Off — Freezes the input in case of lost communications. When the latest state is not known, such as
after relay power-up but before the first communication exchange, the input defaults to Logic 0. When
communication resumes, the input becomes fully operational.

9.9.6.2 DIRECT OUTPUTS

Setting path: SETTINGS > INPUTS/OUTPUTS > DIRECT OUTPUTS> DIRECT OUTPUT <n>
■ DIRECT OUTPUT 1 DIR OUT 1 NAME:
ó Range: up to 12 alphanumeric characters
■ Dir Out 1
DIR OUT 1 OPERAND:
ô Range: FlexLogic operand
Off
DIRECT OUTPUT 1
ñ Range: Enabled, Disabled
EVENTS: Disabled

DIR OUT 1 NAME

This setting allows the user to assign a descriptive name to the direct output.

DIR OUT 1 OPERAND

This sets the FlexLogic operand that determines the state of this direct output.
These settings specify how the direct input information is processed.

9.9.6.3 APPLICATION EXAMPLES

The examples introduced in the earlier Direct Inputs and Outputs section (part of the Product Setup section) are
continued here to illustrate usage of the direct inputs and outputs.

Example 1: Extending input/output capabilities of a UR relay

Consider an application that requires additional quantities of contact inputs or output contacts or lines of
programmable logic that exceed the capabilities of a single UR-series chassis. The problem is solved by adding an
extra UR-series IED, such as the C30, to satisfy the additional inputs/outputs and programmable logic
requirements. The figure shows that two IEDs are connected via single-channel digital communication cards.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 589
Chapter 9 - Settings

✝✞✟
✁ ✂✄☎ ✆
✠✞✟

✝✞✟
✁ ✂✄☎ ✡
✠✞✟
☛☞✌✍✎✎✏✎✑✒✓✔
Figure 317: Input and output extension via direct inputs and outputs

Assume that contact input 1 from UR IED 2 is to be used by UR IED 1. The following settings are applied (Direct
Input 5 and bit number 12 are used, as an example).
UR IED 1:
● DIRECT INPUT 5 DEVICE ID = 2
● DIRECT INPUT 5 BIT NUMBER = 12
UR IED 2:
● DIRECT OUT 12 OPERAND = Cont Ip 1 On
The Cont Ip 1 On operand of UR IED 2 is now available in UR IED 1 as DIRECT INPUT 5 ON.

Example 2: Interlocking busbar protection

A simple interlocking busbar protection scheme can be accomplished by sending a blocking signal from
downstream devices, say 2, 3 and 4, to the upstream device that monitors a single incomer of the busbar, as shown
in the figure.

✡☛ ☞✌✍ ✎ ✓✔✕✖✗

✡☛ ☞✌✍ ✏ ✡☛ ☞✌✍ ✒ ✡☛ ☞✌✍ ✑

✁✂✄☎✂✆☎✝✞✟✠

Figure 318: Sample interlocking busbar protection scheme

ssume that Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 is used by Devices 2, 3, and 4 to block Device 1. If not blocked,
Device 1 trips the bus upon detecting a fault and applying a short coordination time delay.
The following settings are applied (assume Bit 3 is used by all 3 devices to send the blocking signal and Direct
Inputs 7, 8, and 9 are used by the receiving device to monitor the three blocking signals).
UR IED 2:
● DIRECT OUT 3 OPERAND: PHASE IOC1 OP
UR IED 3:
● DIRECT OUT 3 OPERAND: PHASE IOC1 OP

N60-1601-0125-861-1 590
Chapter 9 - Settings

UR IED 4:
● DIRECT OUT 3 OPERAND: PHASE IOC1 OP
UR IED 1:
● DIRECT INPUT 7 DEVICE ID: 2
● DIRECT INPUT 7 BIT NUMBER: 3
● DIRECT INPUT 7 DEFAULT STATE: select On for security, select Off for dependability
● DIRECT INPUT 8 DEVICE ID: 3
● DIRECT INPUT 8 BIT NUMBER: 3
● DIRECT INPUT 8 DEFAULT STATE: select On for security, select Off for dependability
● DIRECT INPUT 9 DEVICE ID: 4
● DIRECT INPUT 9 BIT NUMBER: 3
● DIRECT INPUT 9 DEFAULT STATE: select On" for security, select Off for dependability
Now the three blocking signals are available in UR IED 1 as DIRECT INPUT 7 ON, DIRECT INPUT 8 ON, and
DIRECT INPUT 9 ON. Upon losing communications or a device, the scheme is inclined to block (if any default state
is set to On), or to trip the bus on any overcurrent condition (all default states set to Off).

Example 3: Pilot-aided schemes

Consider a three-terminal line protection application shown in the following figure:

✡☛ ☞✌✍ ✎ ✓✔✕✖✗

✡☛ ☞✌✍ ✏ ✡☛ ☞✌✍ ✒ ✡☛ ☞✌✍ ✑

✁✂✄☎✂✆☎✝✞✟✠

☛☞ ✌✍✎ ✏ ☛☞ ✌✍✎ ✑

☛☞ ✌✍✎ ✒
✁✂✄☎✆✝☎✞✟✠✡

Figure 319: Three-terminal line application

Assume the Hybrid Permissive Overreaching Transfer Trip (Hybrid POTT) scheme is applied using the architecture
shown as follows. The scheme output operand HYB POTT TX1 is used to key the permission.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 591
Chapter 9 - Settings

✏✑✒ ✓✑✒ ✓✑✕

✡☛ ☞✌✍ ✎ ✡☛ ☞✌✍ ✔
✓✑✒ ✏✑✒ ✏✑✕

✓✑✒
✡☛ ☞✌✍ ✖
✏✑✒
✁✂✄☎✁✆☎✝✞✟✠

Figure 320: Single-channel open-loop configuration

In this architecture, Devices 1 and 3 do not communicate directly. Therefore, Device 2 must act as a "bridge." The
following settings are applied:
UR IEC 1:
● DIRECT OUT 2 OPERAND: HYB POTT TX1
● DIRECT INPUT 5 DEVICE ID: 2
● DIRECT INPUT 5 BIT NUMBER: 2 (this is a message from IED 2)
● DIRECT INPUT 6 DEVICE ID: 2
● DIRECT INPUT 6 BIT NUMBER: 4 (effectively, this is a message from IED 3)
UR IED 3:
● DIRECT OUT 2 OPERAND: HYB POTT TX1
● DIRECT INPUT 5 DEVICE ID: 2
● DIRECT INPUT 5 BIT NUMBER: 2 (this is a message from IED 2)
● DIRECT INPUT 6 DEVICE ID: 2
● DIRECT INPUT 6 BIT NUMBER: 3 (effectively, this is a message from IED 1)
UR IED 2:
● DIRECT INPUT 5 DEVICE ID: 1
● DIRECT INPUT 5 BIT NUMBER: 2
● DIRECT INPUT 6 DEVICE ID: 3
● DIRECT INPUT 6 BIT NUMBER: 2
● DIRECT OUT 2 OPERAND: HYB POTT TX1
● DIRECT OUT 3 OPERAND: DIRECT INPUT 5 (forward a message from 1 to 3)
● DIRECT OUT 4 OPERAND: DIRECT INPUT 6 (forward a message from 3 to 1)
The figure shows the signal flow among the three IEDs.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 592
Chapter 9 - Settings

✁ ✂✄☎ ✞ ✁ ✂✄☎ ✝
✟✠✡☛☞✌ ✍✎✌ ✏ ✑ ✒✓✔ ✕✍✌✌ ✌✖✗ ✟✠✡☛☞✌ ✠✘✕✎✌ ✙
✟✠✡☛☞✌ ✠✘✕✎✌ ✙ ✟✠✡☛☞✌ ✍✎✌ ✏ ✑ ✒✓✔ ✕✍✌✌ ✌✖✗
✟✠✡☛☞✌ ✠✘✕✎✌ ✚ ✟✠✡☛☞✌ ✍✎✌ ✛ ✑ ✟✠✡☛☞✌ ✠✘✕✎✌ ✚
✟✠✡☛☞✌ ✍✎✌ ✜ ✑ ✟✠✡☛☞✌ ✠✘✕✎✌ ✙
✟✠✡☛☞✌ ✠✘✕✎✌ ✚

✁ ✂✄☎ ✆ ✟✠✡☛☞✌ ✠✘✕✎✌ ✙

✟✠✡☛☞✌ ✠✘✕✎✌ ✚
✟✠✡☛☞✌ ✍✎✌ ✏ ✑ ✒✓✔ ✕✍✌✌ ✌✖✗
✢✣✤✥✦✥✧✦★✩✪✫
Figure 321: Signal flow for direct input and output

In three-terminal applications, both the remote terminals must grant permission to trip. Therefore, at each terminal,
direct inputs 5 and 6 are ANDed in FlexLogic and the resulting operand configured as the permission to trip (HYB
POTT RX1 setting).

9.9.6.4 DIRECT ANALOG INPUTS AND OUTPUTS

Setting path: SETTINGS > INPUTS/OUTPUTS > DIRECT ANALOGS
■ DIRECT ANALOGS ■ DIRECT ANALOG
ó
■ ■ OUTPUTS
■ DIRECT ANALOG
ñ
■ INPUTS

The direct analogs feature allows the transmission of analog values between any two UR-series relays that support
the feature. The communication channel is the same as that used for the direct inputs and outputs. When the direct
inputs and outputs and direct analog features are used together on the same channel, all UR-series relays must be
using firmware version 5.20 or higher.
Values are transmitted as unscaled floating point numbers. The units for these values are the base units of the
FlexAnalog value (for example, volts, amperes, watts, vars, VA, and so on).
Transmission of values occurs once every 250 ms, defined as the integrity period. Deadband and FlexLogic trigger
checks are performed once per power system cycle. Once a deadband or FlexLogic trigger occurs, the next
transmission does not occur until the next 250 ms integrity time-out.

9.9.6.4.1 DIRECT ANALOG OUTPUTS

Setting path: SETTINGS > INPUTS/OUTPUTS > DIRECT ANALOGS > DIRECT ANALOG OUTPUTS > DIRECT
ANALOG 1(32) OUTPUT

Note:
Only Direct Analog 1 Output is shown

■ DIRECT ANALOG 1 ANALOG 1 VALUE: Range: Off, any FlexAnalog parameter.

ó
■ OUTPUT Off See Appendix A for complete list.
ANALOG 1 DEADBAND:
ô Range: 0.000 to 1000000000.000 in steps of 0.001
0.000

N60-1601-0125-861-1 593
Chapter 9 - Settings

ANALOG 1 TRIGGER:
ñ Range: FlexLogic operand
Off

The direct analog outputs share the direct input and output settings for device ID, data rate, ring configuration, and
channel crossover.

ANALOG 1 VALUE
This setting selects the FlexAnalog parameter used to drive the associated direct analog output.

ANALOG 1 DEADBAND
This setting specifies the deadband value used to trigger transmission of the associated direct analog output. This
value is stored as an IEEE 754 / IEC 60559 floating-point number. Because of the large range for this setting, not all
values can be stored—some values can be rounded to the closest possible floating point number.

ANALOG 1 TRIGGER
This setting selects the FlexLogic operand used to trigger the transmission of the associated direct analog output.
Transmission occurs on the rising edge of the operand. The operand must transition from 0 to 1 and remain at a
value of 1 for at least one power system cycle to ensure detection of the rising edge and transmission of the
associated direct analog output.

9.9.6.4.2 DIRECT ANALOG OUTPUTS

Setting path: SETTINGS > INPUTS/OUTPUTS > DIRECT ANALOGS > DIRECT ANALOG INPUTS > DIRECT
ANALOG 1(32) INPUT

Note:
Only Direct Analog 1 Input is shown

■ DIRECT ANALOG 1 DIRECT ANALOG 1

ó Range: 0 to 16 in steps of 1
■ INPUT DEVICE: 0
DIRECT ANALOG 1
ô Range: 0 to 32 in steps of 1
NUMBER: 0
ANALOG 1 DEFAULT: Range: –1000000000.000 to 1000000000.000 in
ô
1000.000 steps of 0.001
ANALOG 1 DEFAULT
ô Range: Default Value, Last Known
MODE: Default Value
DIRECT ANALOG 1
ô Range: up to four alphanumeric characters
UNITS: unit
DIRECT ANALOG 1PU:
ñ Range: 1 to 2000000 in steps of 1
1

The direct analogs feature allows the transmission of analog values between any two UR-series relays supporting
the feature. The communication channel is the same as that used for the direct inputs and outputs feature. When
the direct inputs/outputs and direct analog features are used together on the same channel, the UR-series relays
must be using firmware version 5.20 or higher.
The settings for direct analog input 1 are as follows. The description applies to all 32 direct analog inputs.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 594
Chapter 9 - Settings

DIRECT ANALOG 1 DEVICE ID

This value selects the source of the direct analog 1 input. Direct analog input 1 is driven by the device programmed
in this setting.

DIRECT ANALOG 1 NUMBER

This value specifies which input to extract the value for the direct analog 1 input. Direct analog input 1 is driven by
the input programmed in this setting. This setting value corresponds to the direct analog output number of the
sending device.

DIRECT ANALOG 1 DEFAULT

This setting specifies the value of direct analog input 1 when the associated direct device is offline and the
ANALOG 1 DEFAULT MODE is set to Default Value. When the associated direct device is offline and the
default mode is set to Last Known, the value of direct analog input 1 remains at the last received value. This value
is stored as an IEEE 754 / IEC 60559 floating-point number. Because of the large range for this setting, not all
values can be stored—some values can be rounded to the closest possible floating point number.

DIRECT ANALOG 1 UNITS

This setting provides a four-character string that is used in the direct analog input 1 actual values display.

DIRECT ANALOG 1 PU
This setting defines the per-unit base factor when using the DIRECT ANALOG INPUT 1 ACTUAL FlexAnalog value
in other Product features, such as FlexElements. This value is used to normalize the direct analog input 1
FlexAnalog quantity to its per-unit base. See the FlexElements section for additional details on per-unit base values.

Application example
Direct analog input FlexAnalog parameters (the DIR ANALOG INPUT 1 to DIR ANALOG INPUT 32 values) are
available for use in other N60 functions that use FlexAnalog parameters.
The DIR ANA 1 INTEGRITY to DIR ANA 32 INTEGRITY, DIR ANA 1 DEADBAND to DIR ANA 32 DEADBAND, and
DIR ANA 1 FORCED to DIR ANA 32 FORCED FlexLogic operands are provided to indicate the most recent trigger
condition: Only one operand can be active (logic 1) at any time. If a direct device is offline, all of the associated
trigger operands are inactive (logic 0).
The figure illustrates the operation of the direct analogs feature. In this example, UR-1 is configured to use four out
of its 32 analog channels. These four values are selected from two sources. UR-2 is configured to receive two out of
the four analog values sent, and UR-3 is set to receive three values. Note that SRC 2 FREQ is effectively being
received at both UR-2 and UR-3.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 595
Chapter 9 - Settings

✁✂☎
✕✖✗✘ ✙ ✧★✥✩✪✦ ✫✬✭ ✘ ✸✹✺✻ ✼✽ ✾✿❀❁✼❂❃❄❅❆ ❇✿ ✽❅❀❆ ❁✿❃❄
❈❀❈❉✿❂ ❊❈❉❃❅✽ ❈✽ ✿❃❇❋❃❇✽ ✻● ❍● ■●
✆✝✝✞ ✝✟ ✕✖✗✘ ✙✚ ✧★✥✩✪✦ ✫✬✭ ✛ ❈❀❆ ❏● ❄❅✽❋❅✾❇✼❊❅❉❑▲
✠✞✡☛☞✌✍✞✝✎ ✕✖✗✛ ✚✖✜✢ ✧★✥✩✪✦ ✫✬✭ ✮
✏✍✑✍✒✡✓✡✑✔
✕✖✗✘ ✣✘ ✤✥✦ ✧★✥✩✪✦ ✫✬✭ ✯

✶✷
✖✷
✁✂✄
✖✲✳✪✭✲ ✧★✥✩✪✦ ✱ ✧★✥✩✪✦ ✰★ ✱ ✸✹✺❍ ✼✽ ✾✿❀❁✼❂❃❄❅❆ ❇✿ ❄❅✾❅✼❊❅
✆✝✝✞ ✝✟ ▼◆❖P ◗ ❈❀❆ ▼◆❖❘ ❙◆❚❯ ❁❄✿❱
✠✞✡☛☞✌✍✞✝✎ ✸✹✺✻ ❈✽ ❆✼❄❅✾❇ ❈❀❈❉✿❂ ✼❀❋❃❇✽ ❲
✏✍✑✍✒✡✓✡✑✔ ❈❀❆ ■● ❄❅✽❋❅✾❇✼❊❅❉❑▲
✖✲✳✪✭✲ ✧★✥✩✪✦ ✮ ✧★✥✩✪✦ ✰★ ✮

✶✷
✖✷
✁✂✴
✸✹✺■ ✼✽ ✾✿❀❁✼❂❃❄❅❆ ❇✿ ❄❅✾❅✼❊❅
▼◆❖P ◗❙● ▼◆❖❘ ❙◆❚❯● ❈❀❆
✆✝✝✞ ✝✟ ✖✲✳✪✭✲ ✧★✥✩✪✦ ✛ ✧★✥✩✪✦ ✰★ ✛ ▼◆❖P ❳P ❨❩❬ ❁❄✿❱ ✸✹✺✻ ❈✽
✠✞✡☛☞✌✍✞✝✎ ❆✼❄❅✾❇ ❈❀❈❉✿❂ ✼❀❋❃❇✽ ❍● ■● ❈❀❆ ❭●
✏✍✑✍✒✡✓✡✑✔ ✖✲✳✪✭✲ ✧★✥✩✪✦ ✮ ✧★✥✩✪✦ ✰★ ✮ ❄❅✽❋❅✾❇✼❊❅❉❑
✖✲✳✪✭✲ ✧★✥✩✪✦ ✵ ✧★✥✩✪✦ ✰★ ✵
❪❫❴❵❵❴❛❜❝❞❡❢
Figure 322: Direct analogs sample application

9.9.6.5 DIRECT INTEGER INPUTS AND OUTPUTS

Setting path: SETTINGS > INPUTS/OUTPUTS > DIRECT INTEGERS
■ DIRECT INTEGERS ■ DIRECT INTEGER
ó
■ ■ OUTPUTS
■ DIRECT INTEGER
ñ
■ INPUTS

The direct integers feature allows the transmission of integer values between any two UR-series relays that support
the feature. The communication channel is the same as that used for the direct inputs and outputs. When the direct
inputs and outputs, direct analogs, and direct integers features are used together on the same channel, all UR-
series relays must be using firmware version 5.70 or higher.
Values are transmitted as unsigned 32-bit integers.
Transmission of values occurs once every 250 ms. This is defined as the integrity period. FlexLogic trigger checks
are performed once per power system cycle. Once a deadband or FlexLogic trigger occurs, the next transmission
does not occur until the next 250 ms integrity time-out.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 596
Chapter 9 - Settings

9.9.6.5.1 DIRECT INTEGER OUTPUTS

Setting path: SETTINGS > INPUTS/OUTPUTS > DIRECT INTEGERS > DIRECT INTEGER OUTPUTS > DIRECT
INTEGER 1(16) OUTPUT

Note:
Only Direct Integer1 Output is shown

■ DIRECT INTEGER 1 INTGER 1 VALUE:

ó Range: Off, any FlexAnalog parameter.
■ OUTPUT Off
INTEGER 1 TRIGGER:
ñ Range: FlexLogic operand
Off

The direct integer outputs share the direct input and output settings for device ID, data rate, ring configuration, and
channel crossover.

INTEGER 1 VALUE
This setting selects the FlexInteger parameter used to drive the associated direct integer output.

INTEGER 1 TRIGGER
This setting selects the FlexLogic operand used to trigger the transmission of the associated direct integer output.
Transmission occurs on the rising edge of the operand. The operand must transition from 0 to 1 and remain at a
value of 1 for at least one power system cycle to ensure detection of the rising edge and transmission of the
associated direct integer output.

9.9.6.5.2 DIRECT INTEGER INPUTS

Setting path: SETTINGS > INPUTS/OUTPUTS > DIRECT INTEGERS> DIRECT INTEGER INPUTS > DIRECT
INTEGER 1(16) INPUT

Note:
Only Direct Analog 1 Input is shown

■ DIRECT INTEGER 1 DIRECT INTEGER 1

ó Range: 0 to 16 in steps of 1
■ INPUT DEVICE: 0
DIRECT INTEGER 1
ô Range: 0 to 16 in steps of 1
NUMBER: 0
INTEGER 1 DEFAULT:
ô Range: 0 to 429496295 in steps of 1
1000.000
INTEGER 1 DEFAULT
ñ Range: Default Value, Last Known
MODE: Default Value

The direct integers feature allows the transmission of integer values between any two UR-series devices supporting
the feature. The communication channel is the same as that used for the direct inputs and outputs feature. When
the direct inputs/outputs, direct analogs, and direct integers features are used together on the same channel, the
UR-series devices must be using firmware version 5.70 or higher.
The settings for direct integer input 1 are as follows. The description applies to all 16 direct integer inputs.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 597
Chapter 9 - Settings

DIRECT INTEGER 1 DEVICE

This value selects the source of the direct integer 1 input. Direct integer input 1 is driven by the device programmed
in this setting.

DIRECT INTEGER 1 NUMBER

This value specifies which input to extract the value for the direct integer 1 input. Direct integer input 1 is driven by
the input programmed in this setting. This setting value corresponds to the direct integer output number of the
sending device.

DIRECT INTEGER 1 DEFAULT

This setting specifies the value of direct integer input 1 when the associated direct device is offline and the
INTEGER 1 DEFAULT MODE is set to Default Value. When the associated direct device is offline and the
default mode is set to Last Known, the value of direct integer input 1 remains at the last received value. This value
is stored as an unsigned 32-bit integer.

9.9.7 TELEPROTECTION
The relay provides 16 teleprotection inputs on communications channel 1 (numbered 1-1 through 1-16) and 16
teleprotection inputs on communications channel 2 (on two-terminals two-channel and three-terminal systems only,
numbered 2-1 through 2-16). The remote relay connected to channels 1 and 2 of the local relay is programmed by
assigning FlexLogic operands to be sent via the selected communications channel. This allows the user to create
distributed protection and control schemes via dedicated communications channels. Some examples are directional
comparison pilot schemes and direct transfer tripping. Note that failures of communications channels affect
teleprotection functionality. The teleprotection function must be enabled to utilize the inputs.

9.9.7.1 TELEPROTECTION INPUTS

Setting path: SETTINGS > INPUTS/OUTPUTS > TELEPROTECTION > TELEPROT INPUTS
■ TELEPROT INPUTS TELEPROT INPUT 1-1
ó Range: Off, On, Latest/Off, Latest/On
■ DEFAULT: Off

TELEPROT INPUT 1-16

ô Range: Off, On, Latest/Off, Latest/On
DEFAULT: Off
TELEPROT INPUT 2-1
ô Range: Off, On, Latest/Off, Latest/On
DEFAULT: Off

TELEPROT INPUT 2-16

ñ Range: Off, On, Latest/Off, Latest/On
DEFAULT: Off

Setting the TELEPROT INPUT <n> DEFAULT settings to On defaults the input to logic 1 when the channel fails. A
value of Off defaults the input to logic 0 when the channel fails.
The Latest/On and Latest/Off values freeze the input in case of lost communications. If the latest state is not
known, such as after relay power-up but before the first communication exchange, then the input defaults to logic 1
for Latest/On and logic 0 for Latest/Off.

9.9.7.2 TELEPROTECTION OUTPUTS

Setting path: SETTINGS > INPUTS/OUTPUTS > TELEPROTECTION > TELEPROT OUTPUTS

N60-1601-0125-861-1 598
Chapter 9 - Settings

■ TELEPROT OUTPUTS TELEPROT OUTPUT 1-1:

ó Range: FlexLogic operand
■ Off

TELEPROT OUTPUT 1-16:

ô Range: FlexLogic operand
Off
TELEPROT OUTPUT 2-1:
ô Range: FlexLogic operand
Off

TELEPROT OUTPUT 2-16:

ñ Range: FlexLogic operand
Off

9.9.7.3 TELEPROTECTION INPUT/OUTPUT PROCESSING

As the following figure demonstrates, processing of the teleprotection inputs/outputs is dependent on the number of
communication channels and terminals. On two-terminal two-channel systems, they are processed continuously on
each channel and mapped separately per channel. Therefore, to achieve redundancy, the user must assign the
same operand on both channels (teleprotection outputs at the sending end or corresponding teleprotection inputs at
the receiving end). On three-terminal two-channel systems, redundancy is achieved by programming signal re-
transmittal in the case of channel failure between any pair of relays.

✿❀❁❂ ✿❀❁✈

❴❵❛❜❴❝ ❞❴❝❜❡❢ ❢❡❛❛❦❧♠

❣❤✪✧✧☞✌ ✒ ✐☛✪☛✑✐✔ ☛☞✌☞✍✎✏☛ ✦✧✍✑☛ ✒✓✒
★☞✩✪✑✌☛✔
❢❡❛❛❦❧♠ ✕✖✗✘✙ ✚✛✜ ✒✓✢✣✣✣✒✓✒✤✥
☛☞✌☞✍✎✏☛ ✏✑☛✍✑☛ ✒✓✒✔
✕✖✗✘✙ ✚✛✜ ✒✓✢✣✣✣✒✓✒✤✥ ✏✱ ♣❝❡q❝r♠❦❵ rs❡t❴❧✉
✩✗✮✫
✏✚✚ ✕✩✫✙✬✫✛✭✮✯ ✏✰✙✜✗✱✲✥ ✏✚✚ ✏✎ ✳✴✵✴✶✷✸ ✹✺✶✻✳ ✼✽✼ ✸✾
✏❥ ✕✖✗✘✙ ✚✛✜ ✒✓✢✣✣✣✒✓✒✤✥
❴❵❛❜❴❝ ❞❴❝❜❡❢
❢❡❛❛❦❧♠
☛☞✌☞✍✎✏☛ ✦✧✍✑☛ ✒✓✒ ❣❤✪✧✧☞✌ ✒ ✐☛✪☛✑✐✔
◗❘❙❙❚❯❱❲❳❨❱❘❯ ❲❩❳❯❯❬❭ ❪❫
★☞✩✪✑✌☛✔
✕✖✗✘✙ ✚✛✜ ✒✓✢✣✣✣✒✓✒✤✥ ❃❄❅❆❅❇❈❉❊❅❋❊●❉❍ ■❏❑ ▲❍▼◆❆❅❖P ❢❡❛❛❦❧♠
♣❝❡q❝r♠❦❵ rs❡t❴❧✉ ✳✴✵✴✶✷✸✳ ✸✻✳✶✻✳ ✼✽✼♥
✏✱ ✕✖✗✘✙ ✚✛✜ ✒✓✢✣✣✣✒✓✒✤✥
✩✗✮✫
✳✴✵✴✶✷✸ ✹✺✶✻✳ ✼✽✼ ✸✾ ✏✎ ✏✚✚ ✏✚✚ ✕✩✫✙✬✫✛✭✮✯ ✏✰✙✜✗✱✲✥
✕✖✗✘✙ ✚✛✜ ✒✓✢✣✣✣✒✓✒✤✥ ✏❥

✿❀❁✈ ⑩❶ ✿❀❁❷
❴❵❛❜❴❝ ❞❴❝❜❡❢ ❢❡❛❛❦❧♠
❣❤✪✧✧☞✌ ✢ ✐☛✪☛✑✐✔ ☛☞✌☞✍✎✏☛ ✦✧✍✑☛ ✢✓✒
★☞✩✪✑✌☛✔
❢❡❛❛❦❧♠ ✕✖✗✘✙ ✚✛✜ ✢✓✢✣✣✣✢✓✒✤✥
☛☞✌☞✍✎✏☛ ✏✑☛✍✑☛ ✢✓✒✔
✕✖✗✘✙ ✚✛✜ ✒✓✢✣✣✣✒✓✒✤✥ ✏✱ ♣❝❡q❝r♠❦❵ rs❡t❴❧✉
✩✗✮✫
✏✚✚ ✳✴✵✴✶✷✸ ✹✺✶✻✳ ♦✽✼ ✸✾
✏✚✚ ✕✩✫✙✬✫✛✭✮✯ ✏✰✙✜✗✱✲✥ ✏❥ ✏✎ ✕✖✗✘✙ ✚✛✜ ✢✓✢✣✣✣✢✓✒✤✥
❴❵❛❜❴❝ ❞❴❝❜❡❢
❢❡❛❛❦❧♠
❣❤✪✧✧☞✌ ✢ ✐☛✪☛✑✐✔
☛☞✌☞✍✎✏☛ ✦✧✍✑☛ ✢✓✒ ◗❘❙❙❚❯❱❲❳❨❱❘❯ ❲❩❳❯❯❬❭ ❪⑨
★☞✩✪✑✌☛✔
✕✖✗✘✙ ✚✛✜ ✒✓✢✣✣✣✒✓✒✤✥ ❃❑❍ ✇①❊❅❈②●❍▼❆ ③④③❊❅② ❉❈ ⑤①❊❅❈②●❍▼❆ ❢❡❛❛❦❧♠
♣❝❡q❝r♠❦❵ rs❡t❴❧✉ ⑥●❊⑦ ❈❅❖⑧❍❖▼❍❊ ❋⑦▼❍❍❅❆P
✏✱ ✳✴✵✴✶✷✸✳ ✸✻✳✶✻✳ ♦✽✼♥
✩✗✮✫ ✕✖✗✘✙ ✚✛✜ ✢✓✢✣✣✣✢✓✒✤✥
✳✴✵✴✶✷✸ ✹✺✶✻✳ ♦✽✼ ✸✾ ✏✎ ✏✚✚ ✏✚✚ ✕✩✫✙✬✫✛✭✮✯ ✏✰✙✜✗✱✲✥
✕✖✗✘✙ ✚✛✜ ✒✓✢✣✣✣✒✓✒✤✥ ✏❥

✁✂✄☎✆✝✂✞✟✠✡

Figure 323: Teleprotection input/output processing

N60-1601-0125-861-1 599
Chapter 9 - Settings

9.10 TRANSDUCER INPUTS/OUTPUTS

9.10.1 DCMA INPUTS

Different slots are used, depending on the model, as shown in the following table:
Slot Models
F1 B90, C30, C70, G30, N60, T35, T60
H1 B30, C60, C95, D30, D60, F35, F60, G60, L30, L60, L90, M60
U8 B30, B90, C70, L30, L90
W8 C30, C60, C95, D30, D60, F35, F60, G30, G60, L60, M60, N60, T35, T60

SETTINGS > TRANSDUCER I/O > DCMA INPUTS > DCMA INPUT <slot>
■ DCMA INPUT <slot> DCMA INPUT <slot>
ó Range: Disabled, Enabled
■ FUNCTION: Disabled
DCMA INPUT H1 ID:
ô Range: up to 20 alphanumeric characters
DCMA Ip 1
DCMA INPUT H1
ô Range: six alphanumeric characters
UNITS: μA
DCMA INPUT H1 Range: 0 to –1 mA, 0 to +1 mA, –1 to +1 mA, 0 to
ô
RANGE: 0 to -1 mA 5mA, 0 to 10mA, 0 to 20 mA, 4 to 20 m
DCMA INPUT H1 MIN
ô Range: –9999.999 to +9999.999 in steps of 0.001
VALUE: 0.000
DCMA INPUT H1 MAX
ñ Range: –9999.999 to +9999.999 in steps of 0.001
VALUE: 0.000

Hardware and software are provided to receive signals from external transducers and to convert these signals into a
digital format for use as required. The relay accepts inputs in the range of –1 to +20 mA DC, suuitable for use with
most common transducer output ranges; all inputs are assumed to be linear over the complete range.
Before the DCmA input signal can be used, the value of the signal measured by the relay must be converted to the
range and quantity of the external transducer primary input parameter, such as DC voltage or temperature. The
relay simplifies this process by internally scaling the output from the external transducer and displaying the actual
primary parameter.
DCmA input channels are arranged in a manner similar to CT and VT channels. Configure the individual channels
with the settings shown here.
The channels are arranged in sub-modules of two channels, numbered from 1 through 8 from top to bottom. On
power-up, the relay automatically generates configuration settings for every channel, based on the order code, in
the same general manner that is used for CTs and VTs. Each channel is assigned a slot letter followed by the row
number, 1 through 8 inclusive, which is used as the channel number. The relay generates an actual value for each
available input channel.
Settings are generated automatically for every channel available in the specific relay as shown above for the first
channel of an installed type 5F transducer module.
The function of the channel can be enabled or disabled. If disabled, no actual values are created for the channel. An
alphanumeric ID is assigned to each channel; this ID is included in the channel actual value, along with the
programmed units associated with the parameter measured by the transducer, such as volts, °C, megawatts, and
so on. This ID is also used to reference the channel as the input parameter to features designed to measure this
type of parameter.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 600
Chapter 9 - Settings

The DCMA INPUT <slot> RANGE setting specifies the mA DC range of the transducer connected to the input
channel.
The DCMA INPUT <slot> MIN VALUE and DCMA INPUT <slot> MAX VALUE settings are used to program the
span of the transducer in primary units. For example, a temperature transducer might have a span from 0 to 250 °C;
in this case the DCMA INPUT <slot> MIN VALUE value is 0 and the DCMA INPUT <slot> MAX VALUE value is
250. Another example is a watts transducer with a span from –20 to +180 MW; in this case the DCMA INPUT
<slot> MIN VALUE value is –20 and the DCMA INPUT <slot> MAX VALUE value is 180. Intermediate values
between the minimum and maximum values are scaled linearly.

9.10.2 DCMA OUTPUTS

Different slots are used, depending on the model, as shown in the following table:
Slot Models
F1 B90, C30, C70, G30, N60, T35, T60
H1 B30, C60, C95, D30, D60, F35, F60, G60, L30, L60, L90, M60
U8 B30, B90, C70, L30, L90
W8 C30, C60, C95, D30, D60, F35, F60, G30, G60, L60, M60, N60, T35, T60

SETTINGS > TRANSDUCER I/O > DCMA OUTPUTS > DCMA OUTPUT <slot>
■ DCMA OUTPUT <slot> DCMA OUTPUT <slot>
ó Range: Off, any analog actual value parameter
■ SOURCE: Off
DCMA OUTPUT <slot>
ô Range: –1 to 1 mA, 0 to 1 mA, 4 to 20 mA
RANGE: –1 to 1 mA
DCMA OUTPUT <slot>
ô Range: –90.000 to 90.000 pu in steps of 0.001
MIN VAL: 0.000 pu
DCMA OUTPUT <slot>
ñ Range: –90.000 to 90.000 pu in steps of 0.001
MAX VAL: 1.000 pu

Hardware and software is provided to generate DCmA signals that allow interfacing with external equipment. The
DCmA output channels are arranged in a manner similar to transducer input or CT and VT channels. The user
configures individual channels with the settings as follows.
The channels are arranged in sub-modules of two channels, numbered 1 through 8 from top to bottom. On power-
up, the relay automatically generates configuration settings for every channel, based on the order code, in the same
manner used for CTs and VTs. Each channel is assigned a slot letter followed by the row number, 1 through 8
inclusive, which is used as the channel number.
Both the output range and a signal driving a given output are user-programmable via the following settings menu
(an example for channel M5 is shown).
The relay checks the driving signal (x in equations below) for the minimum and maximum limits, and subsequently
re-scales so the limits defined as MIN VAL and MAX VAL match the output range of the hardware defined as
RANGE. The following equation is applied:

✆ I min if x < MIN VAL

✄
I out = ☎ I max if x > MAX VAL
✄
✂k x ➊ MIN VAL ✁ + I min otherwise

N60-1601-0125-861-1 601
Chapter 9 - Settings

where:
● x is a driving signal specified by the SOURCE setting
● Imin and Imax are defined by the RANGE setting
● k is a scaling constant calculated as:
I max ➊ I min
k = -------------------------------------------
-
MAX VAL ➊ MIN VAL

The feature is intentionally inhibited if the MAX VAL and MIN VAL settings are entered incorrectly, for example
when MAX VAL – MIN VAL < 0.1 pu. The resulting characteristic is illustrated in the following figure.

✒✓✖✗
☛
✏✎
✍✍
✡✌
☛
✡☞
☛
✡
✠
✒✓✔✕
✁✂✄✂☎✆ ✝✂✆☎✞✟
✙✚✛✜✢✣✤✥✦✧★✩ ✑✂☎ ✄✞✟ ✑✞✘ ✄✞✟
Figure 324: DCmA output characteristic

Settings

DCMA OUTPUT <slot> SOURCE

This setting specifies an internal analog value to drive the analog output. Actual values (FlexAnalog parameters)
such as power, current amplitude, voltage amplitude, power factor, etc. can be configured as sources driving DCmA
outputs. See Appendix A for a list of FlexAnalog parameters.

DCMA OUTPUT <slot> RANGE

This setting allows selection of the output range. Each DCmA channel can be set independently to work with
different ranges. The three most commonly used output ranges are available.

DCMA OUTPUT <slot> MIN VAL

This setting allows setting the minimum limit for the signal that drives the output. This setting is used to control the
mapping between an internal analog value and the output current. The setting is entered in per-unit values. The
base units are defined in the same manner as the FlexElement base units.

DCMA OUTPUT <slot> MAX VAL

This setting allows setting the maximum limit for the signal that drives the output. This setting is used to control the
mapping between an internal analog value and the output current. The setting is entered in per-unit values. The
base units are defined in the same manner as the FlexElement base units.

Note:
The DCMA OUTPUT <slot> MIN VAL and DCMA OUTPUT <slot> MAX VAL settings are ignored for power factor base units
(that is, if the DCMA OUTPUT <slot> SOURCE is set to FlexAnalog value based on power factor measurement).

N60-1601-0125-861-1 602
Chapter 9 - Settings

9.10.3 DCMA APPLICATION EXAMPLES

Example: Power monitoring (not applicable to B30, B90, C30)

A three phase active power on a 13.8 kV system measured via UR-series relay source 1 is to be monitored by the
DCmA H1 output of the range of –1 to 1 mA. The following settings are applied on the relay: CT ratio = 1200:5, VT
secondary 115, VT connection is delta, and VT ratio = 120. The nominal current is 800 A primary and the nominal
power factor is 0.90. The power is to be monitored in both importing and exporting directions and allow for 20%
overload compared to the nominal.
The nominal three-phase power is:
P = Ö3 x 13.8kV x 0.8kA x 0.9 = 17.21MW
The three-phase power with 20% overload margin is:
Pmax = 1.2 x 17.21MW = 20.65MW
The base unit for power (refer to the FlexElements section in this chapter for additional details) is:
PBASE = 115V x 120 x 1.2kA = 16.56MW
The minimum and maximum power values to be monitored (in pu) are:
Minimum power = -20.65MW/16.56MW = -1.247 pu
Maximum power = 20.65MW/16.56MW = 1.247 pu
The following settings are entered:
● DCMA OUTPUT H1 SOURCE: SRC 1 P
● DCMA OUTPUT H1 RANGE: –1 to 1 mA
● DCMA OUTPUT H1 MIN VAl: –1.247 pu
● DCMA OUTPUT H1 MAX VAL: 1.247 pu
With the above settings, the output will represent the power with the scale of 1 mA per 20.65 MW. The worst-case
error for this application can be calculated by superimposing the following two sources of error:
● ±0.5% of the full scale for the analog output module, or ±0.005 x (1-(-1)) x 20.65 MW = ±0.207 MW
● ±1% of reading error for the active power at power factor of 0.9
For example at the reading of 20 MW, the worst-case error is 0.01 ´ 20 MW + 0.207 MW = 0.407 MW.

Example: Current monitoring (not applicable to C30)

The phase A current (true RMS value) is to be monitored via the H2 current output working with the range from 4 to
20 mA. The CT ratio is 5000:5 and the maximum load current is 4200 A. The current is to be monitored from 0 A
upwards, allowing for 50% overload.
The phase current with the 50% overload margin is:
Imax = 1.5 x 4.2kA = 6.3kA
The base unit for current (see the FlexElements section in this chapter for additional details) is:
IBASE = 5kA
The minimum and maximum power values to be monitored (in pu) are:
Minimum current = 0kA/5kA = 0 pu
Maximum current = 6.3kA/5kA = 1.26 pu

N60-1601-0125-861-1 603
Chapter 9 - Settings

The following settings are entered:

● DCMA OUTPUT H2 SOURCE: SRC 1 Ia RMS
● DCMA OUTPUT H2 RANGE: 4 to 20 mA
● DCMA OUTPUT H2 MIN VAL: 0.000 pu
● DCMA OUTPUT H2 MAX VAL: 1.260 pu
The worst-case error for this application can be calculated by superimposing the following two sources of error:
● ±0.5% of the full scale for the analog output module, or ±0.005 x (20 - 4) x 6.3 kA = ±0.504 kA
● ±0.25% of reading or ±0.1% of rated (whichever is greater) for currents between 0.1 and 2.0 of nominal
For example, at the reading of 4.2 kA, the worst-case error is max(0.0025 x 4.2 kA, 0.001 x 5 kA) + 0.504 kA =
0.515 kA.

Example: Voltage monitoring (not applicable to C30)

A positive-sequence voltage on a 400 kV system measured via source 2 is to be monitored by the DCmA H3 output
with a range of 0 to 1 mA. The VT secondary setting is 66.4 V, the VT ratio setting is 6024, and the VT connection
setting is “Delta.” The voltage is to be monitored in the range from 70% to 110% of nominal.
The minimum and maximum positive-sequence voltages to be monitored are:
Vmin = 0.7 x 400kV/Ö3 = 161.66kV
Vmax = 1.1 x 400kV/Ö3 = 254.03 kV
The base unit for voltage (see the FlexElements section in this chapter for additional details) is:
VBASE = 0.0664kV x 6024 = 400kV
The minimum and maximum voltage values to be monitored (in pu) are:
Minimum voltage = 161.66kV/400kV = 0.404 pu
Maximum voltage = 254.03kV/400kV = 0.635 pu
The following settings are entered:
● DCMA OUTPUT H3 SOURCE: SRC 2 V_1 mag
● DCMA OUTPUT H3 RANGE: 0 to 1 mA
● DCMA OUTPUT H3 MIN VAL: 0.404 pu
● DCMA OUTPUT H3 MAX VAL: 0.635 pu
The limit settings differ from the expected 0.7 pu and 1.1 pu because the relay calculates the positive-sequence
quantities scaled to the phase-to-ground voltages, even if the VTs are connected in “Delta” (see the Metering
Conventions section in chapter 6), while at the same time the VT nominal voltage is 1 pu for the settings.
Consequently the settings required in this example differ from naturally expected by the factor of Ö3.
The worst-case error for this application could be calculated by superimposing the following two sources of error:
● ±0.5% of the full scale for the analog output module, or ± 0.005 x (1-0) x 254.03 kV = ±1.27 kV
● ±0.5% of reading
For example, under nominal conditions, the positive-sequence reads 230.94 kV and the worst-case error is 0.005 x
230.94 kV + 1.27 kV = 2.42 kV.

9.10.4 RTD INPUTS

Different slots are used, depending on the model, as shown in the following table:
Slot Models
F1 B90, C30, C70, G30, N60, T35, T60

N60-1601-0125-861-1 604
Chapter 9 - Settings

Slot Models
H1 B30, C60, C95, D30, D60, F35, F60, G60, L30, L60, L90, M60
U8 B30, B90, C70, L30, L90
W8 C30, C60, C95, D30, D60, F35, F60, G30, G60, L60, M60, N60, T35, T60

SETTINGS > TRANSDUCER I/O > RTD INPUTS > RTD INPUT <slot>
■ RTD INPUT <slot> RTDINPUT <slot>
ó Range: Disabled, Enabled
■ FUNCTION: Disabled
RTD INPUT <slot> ID:
ô Range: up to 20 alphanumeric characters
RTD Ip 1
RTD INPUT <slot> TYPE: Range: 100Ω Nickel, 10Ω Copper, 100Ω Platinum,
ñ
100Ω Platinum 120Ω Nickel

Hardware and software is provided to receive signals from external resistance temperature detectors and convert
these signals into a digital format for use as required. These channels are intended to be connected to any of the
RTD types in common use. Specific hardware details are contained in chapter 3.
RTD input channels are arranged in a manner similar to CT and VT channels. The user configures individual
channels with the settings shown here.
The channels are arranged in sub-modules of two channels, numbered from 1 through 8 from top to bottom. On
power-up, the relay automatically generates configuration settings for every channel, based on the order code, in
the same general manner that is used for CTs and VTs. Each channel is assigned a slot letter followed by the row
number, 1 through 8 inclusive, which is used as the channel number. The relay generates an actual value for each
available input channel.
Settings are automatically generated for every channel available in the specific relay as shown above for the first
channel of a type 5C transducer module installed in the first available slot.
The function of the channel can be either enabled or disabled. If disabled, there is not an actual value created for
the channel. An alphanumeric ID is assigned to the channel; this ID is included in the channel actual values. It is
also used to reference the channel as the input parameter to features designed to measure this type of parameter.
Selecting the type of RTD connected to the channel configures the channel.
Actions based on RTD overtemperature, such as trips or alarms, are done in conjunction with the FlexElements
feature. In FlexElements, the operate level is scaled to a base of 100°C. For example, a trip level of 150°C is
achieved by setting the operate level at 1.5 pu. FlexElement operands are available to FlexLogic for further
interlocking or to operate an output contact directly.
See the following table for reference temperature values for each RTD type.
Temperature Resistance (in ohms)
°C °F 100 Ω Pt 120 Ω Ni 100 Ω Ni 10 Ω Cu
(DIN 43760)
–50 –58 80.31 86.17 71.81 7.10
–40 –40 84.27 92.76 77.30 7.49
–30 –22 88.22 99.41 82.84 7.88
–20 –4 92.16 106.15 88.45 8.26
–10 14 96.09 113.00 94.17 8.65
0 32 100.00 120.00 100.00 9.04
10 50 103.90 127.17 105.97 9.42

20 68 107.79 134.52 112.10 9.81

N60-1601-0125-861-1 605
Chapter 9 - Settings

Temperature Resistance (in ohms)

°C °F 100 Ω Pt 120 Ω Ni 100 Ω Ni 10 Ω Cu
(DIN 43760)
30 86 111.67 142.06 118.38 10.19
40 104 115.54 149.79 124.82 10.58
50 122 119.39 157.74 131.45 10.97
60 140 123.24 165.90 138.25 11.35
70 158 127.07 174.25 145.20 11.74
80 176 130.89 182.84 152.37 12.12
90 194 134.70 191.64 159.70 12.51
100 212 138.50 200.64 167.20 12.90
110 230 142.29 209.85 174.87 13.28
120 248 146.06 219.29 182.75 13.67
130 266 149.82 228.96 190.80 14.06
140 284 153.58 238.85 199.04 14.44
150 302 157.32 248.95 207.45 14.83
160 320 161.04 259.30 216.08 15.22
170 338 164.76 269.91 224.92 15.61
180 356 168.47 280.77 233.97 16.00
190 374 172.46 291.96 243.30 16.39
200 392 175.84 303.46 252.88 16.78
210 410 179.51 315.31 262.76 17.17
220 428 183.17 327.54 272.94 17.56
230 446 186.82 340.14 283.45 17.95
240 464 190.45 353.14 294.28 18.34
250 482 194.08 366.53 305.44 18.73

N60-1601-0125-861-1 606
Chapter 9 - Settings

9.11 TESTING

9.11.1 IED MODE CONFIG

SETTINGS > TESTING > IED MODE CONFIG
■ IED MODE CONFIG IED MODE:
ó Range: On, Test, Test Blocked
■ On
TEST MODE INPUT:
ô Range: FlexLogic operand
Off
TEST-BLK MODE INPUT:
ô Range: FlexLogic operand
Off
MODE CTRL VIA MMS:
ô Range: FlexLogic operand (displays with IEC 61850)
On
CONTACT I/O FORCING:
ô Range: FlexLogic operand
On
IED MODE TARGET:
ô Range: Enabled, Disabled
ENABLED
IED BEHAVIOR:
ô Range: On, Test, Test Blocked
On
IED MODE TRIP SECURITY:
ñ Range: Enabled, Disabled
Disabled

The Product provides a test facility to verify the functionality of contact inputs and outputs, some communication
functions and the Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU, where applicable), using simulated conditions. It is accessible in
the software and graphical front panel.

IED MODE
Can be in one of three states: On, Test, or Test Blocked. In UR 7.7 and later, as outlined in the Simulation section
that follows, the UR test mode and GOOSE simulation mode are isolated, and they no longer depend on the mode
setting here.
The On mode is for normal in service operation; the relay protection, control, and communication function is normal.
Test features are disabled, except channel tests and PMU tests remain usable when provided. In On mode, the
front panel Test Mode LED is off.
The Test Blocked mode is implemented per IEC61850-7-4 standard. This allows the relay to be isolated quickly
so that it cannot negatively affect the power system or other parts of the substation automation system. This is
primarily used for testing purposes, but can also be used for loading new firmware, changing hardware modules,
and changing communication connections etc., providing all local or regional safety/testing guidelines are adhered
to.
As far as practical, all relay output signals are blocked, contact outputs are de-energized, and latching outputs are
frozen. Commands to HardFiber Bricks are blocked. The test bit of quality attribute of values that can be output via
IEC 61850 services is set to TRUE. The validity bit of the quality attribute of the data sent via IEC 61850 services is
set to "GOOD" if no major error is active. Direct I/O, 87L channel and PMU tests are operational on applicable
models. In Test Blocked mode, the front panel Test Mode LED is on.
The Test mode is for testing involving forcing relay operation by test signal injection and verifying correct relay
output. This mode is also for tests to verify the relay outputs (both contact and communications) have the intended
impact on specific power system devices or on specific other substation automation devices. Contact outputs can
be selectively enabled or forced as described in the Force Contact Inputs and Force Contact Outputs sections that

N60-1601-0125-861-1 607
Chapter 9 - Settings

follow. Shared outputs to Bricks have their test mode flag raised, which results in their value only being accepted by
relays also in forcible Test mode. The test bit and validity bit of the quality attribute of data sent via IEC 61850
services are set as TRUE and GOOD respectively. In Test mode, the front panel Test Mode LED flashes.
Otherwise, the UR remains fully operational while in the Test mode, allowing for various testing procedures. In
particular, the protection and control elements, and FlexLogic function normally. Other than the IEC 61850 protocol,
communications based inputs and outputs remain fully operational. The test procedure must take this into account.
Direct I/O channel tests and PMU tests are usable on applicable models.
When set to Test mode and the operand selected by the CONTACT I/O FORCING setting is On.
● If the FORCE Cont Ip # setting is set to Open or Closed, the respective quality attribute of the data sent via
IEC 61850 services is set to q.source = substituted
● If the FORCE Cont Op # setting is set to Energized, De-energized, or Freeze, the respective quality attribute
of the data sent via IEC 61850 services is set to q.source = substituted
When the Breaker Status is substituted manually from a graphical front panel, the respective quality attribute of the
breaker position data sett via IEC 61850 services is set to q.source = substituted.
The IED MODE setting can be selected through
● Front panel
● EnerVista UR Setup software
● FlexLogic operands
● IEC 61850 control to LLN0.Mod
● INITIATE TEST MODE ON SIM setting (under SIMULATION > SUBSCRIBE TO SIMULATED VALUES
menu)

Note:
It is important to note that following the writing of a new setting file to the relay, IED behavior will change according to the IED
MODE CONFIG settings in the new file. The user must ensure that IED MODE CONFIG settings in the new file are set
according to the expected behavior following the writing of the new setting file.

TEST MODE INPUT

This setting selects a FlexLogic operand that can put the UR into Test mode as per the logic diagram. Any
FlexLogic operand can be assigned to enable forcible Test mode, that is driven by any remote inputs, logic outputs,
front panel (user-programmable push buttons), and so on.

TEST-BLK MODE INPUT

This setting selects a FlexLogic operand that can put the UR into Test Blocked mode as per the logic diagram. Any
FlexLogic operand can be assigned to enable test isolated mode, that is driven by any remote inputs, logic outputs,
front panel (user-programmable push buttons) and so on.

MODE CTRL VIA MMS

This setting selects a FlexLogic operand for an IEC 61850 client to control the IED mode. When the operand is low/
off, IED mode control from the IEC 61850 client is disabled, and the control request to LLN0.Mod.ctlVal returns
return a negative response. When high/on, IED mode control by an IEC 61850 client is accepted.

CONTACT I/O FORCING

When in Test mode, the operand selected by this setting dictates further response of the UR to testing conditions,
as described in the Force Contact Inputs and Force Contact Outputs sections that follow. When no operand is
specified in this setting, forcing of inputs and outputs during Test mode are not available.
The test mode state is indicated on the relay front panel by a combination of the Test Mode LED indicator, the In-
Service LED indicator, and by the critical fail relay, as shown in the table.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 608
Chapter 9 - Settings

IED MODE TARGET

When this setting is Enabled, the corresponding target message of IED Mode Config is displayed on the front panel
when the relay behavior is either TEST or TEST BLOCKED. The target message gets self-reset when the relay
behavior is ON.
When this setting is Disabled, target message is not displayed when the relay behavior is either TEST or TEST
BLOCKED.

IED MODE In-Service LED Test Mode LED Critical fail relay CONTACT I/O Contact input and
setting FORCING setting output behavior
On Unaffected Off Normal No effect Normal
Test Blocked Off On De-energized No effect Contact outputs disabled
Test Off Flashing De-energized Off Normal
On Controlled by forcing
features

Note:
Following a restart or power-up, the CONTACT I/O FORCING setting remains at the last value before restart, but force
contact input and force contact output settings revert to Normal state.

Note:
Before uploading settings to the Online Window from the Offline Window of the software, ensure that the settings in this panel
in the Offline Window have been set to required values. Otherwise, undesired relay operation can occur.

IED BEHAVIOR
Displays the actual behavior of the IED based on different inputs to control the IED MODE. Note that the test mode
can be changed through the front panel, EnerVista software, FlexLogic operands, IEC 61850 control to LLN0.Mod,
and INITIATE TEST MODE ON SIM setting, with the following behavior.

TEST MODE TRIP SECURITY

This setting is used to govern both IOC Trip Security and Differential Trip Security functions. It is in effect only when
the IED is not in the normal in-service operation mode (i.e., IED Mode is set to a value other than On).
Change to IED MODE Behavior
Using front panel IED MODE and IED BEHAVIOR change in software
Using software IED MODE and IED BEHAVIOR change on front panel
Using operand IED MODE does not change in software or front panel, IED BEHAVIOR reflects
change
Using INITIATE TEST MODE ON SIM IED MODE and IED BEHAVIOR do not change in software or front panel
setting

9.11.2 IED MODE PROCESS

The IED MODE setting is changed to Test or Test Blocked (depending upon the selected setting value for
INITIATE TEST MODE ON SIM) when the relay is put into simulation mode. After this, the IED MODE is
controlled by the TESTING > IED MODE CONFIG menu.
The IED MODE selection is illustrated in the logic diagram.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 609
Chapter 9 - Settings

The SR Latch that drives the UR into Test mode or On mode are reset-dominant, which means that Test
Blocked mode has the highest priority over Test and On modes, when simultaneous commands are active. For
example, if both the FlexLogic operands assigned to the TEST MODE INPUT and TEST-BLK MODE INPUT
settings are ON, then the IED MODE is Test Blocked.
If Any Major error FlexLogic operand is set, then IED MODE is set to Test Blocked.
Following UR restart or power-up, the IED MODE remains latched at the last value, until change is trigged by
another input/command.
When the relay simulation mode is enabled (LPHD.Sim.stVal = TRUE), the INITIATE TEST MODE ON SIM
setting triggers respective test mode. If the relay is already in Test or Test Blocked mode, the priority scheme
defined in the IED MODE processing logic decides the resulting IED mode.
In summary, enabling the Test or Test Blocked mode in the TESTING > IED MODE CONFIG menu has no impact
on the simulation mode. However, enabling the simulation mode triggers the respective test mode selected by the
INITIATE TEST MODE ON SIM setting and the resulting IED mode is decided by the IED MODE process logic
diagram. Once the simulation mode is enabled, the user can switch independently among IED modes using the IED
MODE CONFIG settings while the simulation mode continues.
As shown in the logic diagram, the INITIATE TEST MODE ON SIM setting triggers the respective IED mode only
when the relay is entering into simulation mode (meaning on the positive edge trigger of RLY IN SIM MODE
FlexLogic operand) or there is a change in the INITIATE TEST MODE ON SIM setting value. Once simulation
mode is enabled, any command to change the IED Mode triggers the respective IED mode. When the simulation
mode is disabled, the test mode initiated by INITIATE TEST MODE ON SIM setting resets.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 610
Chapter 9 - Settings

Figure 325: IED mode processing logic

9.11.3 FORCE CONTACT INPUTS

Setting path: SETTINGS > INPUTS/OUTPUTS > DIRECT OUTPUTS> DIRECT OUTPUTS
■ FORCE CONTACT FORCE Cont Ip <n>
ó Range: Normal, Open, Closed
■ INPUTS Normal

The force contact inputs feature provides a method of performing checks on the function of all contact inputs.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 611
Chapter 9 - Settings

While in Test mode, the relay contact inputs can be pre-programmed to respond in the following ways:
● If set to Normal, the input remains fully operational. It is controlled by the voltage across its input terminals
and can be turned on and off by external circuitry. Select this value if a given input must be operational during
the test. This includes, for example, an input initiating the test, or being a part of a user pre-programmed test
sequence.
● If set to Open, the input is forced to report as opened (Logic 0) while the operand selected by CONTACT I/O
FORCING setting is On, regardless of the voltage across the input terminals. While the selected operand is
Off, the input behaves as it does when in service.
● If set to Closed, the input is forced to report as closed (Logic 1) while the operand selected by CONTACT
I/O FORCING setting is On regardless of the voltage across the input terminals. While the selected operand
is Off, the input behaves as it does when in service.

Note:
Following a restart or power-up, the CONTACT I/O FORCING setting remains at the last value before restart, but force
contact input and force contact output settings revert to Normal state.

9.11.4 FORCE CONTACT OUTPUTS

Setting path: SETTINGS > INPUTS/OUTPUTS > DIRECT OUTPUTS> DIRECT OUTPUTS
■ FORCE CONTACT FORCE Cont op <n>
ó Range: Normal, Energized, De-energized, Freeze
■ OUTPUTS Normal

The force contact outputs feature provides a method of performing checks on the function of all contact outputs.
While in Test mode, the relay contact outputs can be pre-programmed to respond in the following ways:
● If set to Normal, the contact output remains fully operational. It operates when its control operand is logic 1
and resets when its control operand is logic 0.
● If set to Energized, the output closes and remains closed while the operand selected by the CONTACT I/O
FORCING setting is On, regardless of the status of the operand configured to control the output contact.
While the selected operand is Off, the output behaves as it does when in service.
● If set to De-energized, the output opens and remains opened while the operand selected by the
CONTACT I/O FORCING setting is On, regardless of the status of the operand configured to control the
output contact. While the selected operand is Off, the output behaves as it does when in service.
● If set to Freeze, the output retains its position at the instant before the IED MODE was Test and the
operand selected by the CONTACT I/O FORCING setting was On, regardless of later changes in the status
of the operand configured to control the output contact. While the selected operand is Off, the output behaves
as it does when in service.

Note:
Following a restart or power-up, the CONTACT I/O FORCING setting remains at the last value before restart, but force
contact input and force contact output settings revert to Normal state.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 612
Chapter 9 - Settings

9.12 SIMULATION
Setting path: SETTINGS > SIMULATION
■ SETTINGS ■ SUBSCRIBE TO
ó
■ SIMULATION ■ SIMULATED VALUES
■ PUBLISH
ñ
■ SIMULATED VALUES

9.12.1 SUBSCRIBE TO SIMULATED VALUES

Setting path: SETTINGS > SIMULATION > SUBSCRIBE TO SIMULATED VALUES
■ SUBSCRIBE TO SIMULATION MODE:
ó Range: Disabled, Enabled
■ SIMULATED VALUES Disabled
SIM MODE INPUT:
ô Range: FlexLogic operand
Off
SIM CTRL VIA MMS:
ô Range: FlexLogic operand
On
INITIATE TEST MODE
ô Range: Disabled, Test, Test-Blocked
ON SIM: Test-Blocked
SIM MODE TARGET:
ô Range: Enabled, Disabled
Enabled
SIM MODE EVENTS:
ô Range: Enabled, Disabled
Disabled
SIMULATION MODE
ñ Range: Enabled, Disabled
STATUS: Disabled

Note:
The relay is provided with optional IEC 61850 communications that include simulation. The option is specified at the time of
ordering. The field reads Unavailable when IEC 61850 is not present.

Prior to UR 7.7, when the UR TEST MODE FUNCTION is set to Test Blocked or Test, the sim bit in the header
of all transmitted GOOSE messages is set to TRUE, so that the UR plays the simulator role during the testing and
commissioning phases. The Sim data attribute in the relay is set (<MasterLD>/LPHD1.Sim.stVal = TRUE), so that if
GOOSE messages are received with the simulation flag set, these are used in place of the normal messages.
The quality attribute values that are transmitted via GOOSE services are set to valid + test.
In UR 7.7 and later, the UR test mode and GOOSE simulation mode are isolated. The sim bit in the transmitted
GOOSE messages and the relay Sim attribute (<MasterLD>/LPHD1.Sim.stVal) are controlled via new Modbus
settings and MMS control requests. They no longer depend on the UR TEST MODE FUNCTION or IED MODE.
The settings also display in the software when the Product is set to IEC 61850 Edition 2. When using IEC 61850
Edition 1, the settings are read-only.

SIMULATION MODE
When set to Disabled, the relay Sim attribute (<MasterLD>/LPHD1.Sim.StVal) is set to False and the GOOSE/SV
messages received with simulation flag/bit set are ignored.
When set to Enabled, the relay Sim attribute (<MasterLD>/LPHD1.Sim.StVal) is set to True, so that if GOOSE/SV
messages are received with the simulation flag/bit set, these are used in place of the normal messages.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 613
Chapter 9 - Settings

SV messages has a simulation bit in the Reserved 1 field.

SIM MODE INPUT

This setting selects a FlexLogic operand. When set, the relay Simulation mode is enabled and, if the messages
(either GOOSE or SV) are received with the simulation bit true, messages from simulation devices are used in place
of actual messages. Any FlexLogic operand can be assigned to enable simulation mode, that is, driven by any
remote inputs, logic outputs, front panel (user-programmable pushbuttons), and so on.

SIM CTRL VIA MMS

This setting selects a FlexLogic operand for the IEC 61850 client to control the simulation mode.
When set to Off, simulation mode selection via IEC 61850 client is disabled and control request to LPHD.Sim.ctlVal
returns return negative response.
When set to On, simulation mode selection via IEC 61850 client is accepted.
This setting can be set from the front panel, EnerVista UR Setup software, FlexLogic operand, and IEC61850
control to LPHD.Sim.ctlVal.

INITIATE TEST MODE ON SIM

This setting initiates the selected test mode when simulation mode is enabled.
When set to Disabled, any command (from an IEC 61850 client, front panel, or Flex Operand) to set the simulation
mode enables the Sim mode irrespective of the current IED mode.
When set to Test or Test-Blocked, any command to set the simulation mode selects respective test mode, if the
relay is not already in Test or Test-Blocked mode. If the relay is already in Test or Test-Blocked mode by any user
command (from IEC 61850 client, front panel, or Flex Operand), the respective priority defined in test mode
processing decides the resultant test mode.
In summary, enabling the Test or Test-Blocked mode via the IED MODE setting (from front panel or EnerVista), via a
IEC61850 client command to LLN0.Mod.ctlVal, or via TEST MODE INPUT and TEST-BLK MODE INPUT settings
(FlexLogic operands) has no impact on the simulation mode. However, enabling the simulation mode using the
SIMULATION MODE setting (from front panel or EnerVista), via an IEC61850 client command to LPHD.Sim.ctlVal,
or via SIM MODE INPUT setting (FlexLogic operand) enables the selected test mode by the INITIATE TEST MODE
ON SIM setting. A user can independently disable the test or test-blocked mode by any specified command type,
but the relay simulation mode continues and accepts the simulated values in place of actual values until the
simulation mode is disabled.

SIM MODE TARGET

When this setting is Enabled, a target message IED IN SIM MODE is displayed on the front panel when the relay
is in Simulation mode. The target message gets self-reset when the relay exits the Simulation mode.
When this setting is Disabled, target message is not displayed when the relay is in Simulation mode.

SIM MODE EVENT

This setting is used to control whether the change in Simulation mode of relay is recorded in the event recorder.
When this setting is Enabled, the event showing the change in the status of Simulation is recorded. If this setting is
Disabled, the events related to Simulation mode are not recorded.

SIMULATION MODE STATUS

This is an actual value that indicates the present simulation mode of the relay.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 614
Chapter 9 - Settings

SETTINGS
SIMULATION MODE:
(From front panel or EnerVista)

Enabled=1

A
OR
SETTINGS
SIM MODE INPUT:
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
Off=0 IED IN SIM MODE OFF

FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
OR IED IN SIM MODE ON
From IEC 61850 protocol
LPHD1.Sim.ctlVal = TRUE
LPHD1.Sim.stVal

SETTINGS
AND SET
SIM CTRL VIA MMS:
(From front panel or EnerVista)
A
Enabled=1 RESET
OR
Set dominant

From IEC 61850 protocol AND

LPHD1.Sim.ctlVal = FALSE
859831A1.vsdx

Figure 326: Simulation mode logic

9.12.2 PUBLISH SIMULATED VALUES

Setting path: SETTINGS > SIMULATION > PUBLISH SIMULATED VALUES
■PUBLISH TxGOOSE SIM MODE:
ó Range: Disabled, Enabled
■ SIMULATED VALUES Disabled
SIM Q.VALIDITY:
ô Range: NONE, GOOD, INVALID, QUESTIONABLE
NONE
SIM Q.TEST:
ñ Range: NONE, TRUE, FALSE
NONE

TxGOOSE SIM MODE

When set to Disabled, the sim bits in all transmitted GOOSE messages are set to FALSE.
When set to Enabled, the sim bits in all transmitted GOOSE messages are set to TRUE.
This setting can be modified through the front panel, EnerVista UR Setup software, IEC 61850 client control to
<MasterLD>/LPHD1.TxGoSim.

SIM Q.VALIDITY
This setting simulates the validity bits of the quality attribute values included in all transmitted GOOSE messages.
When set to NONE, the q.Validity bits are set based on the logical node behavior value. When set to any other
value, the q.Validity bits of quality attributes included in all transmitted GOOSE messages are set to the selected
value.
This setting is used when TxGOOSE SIM MODE is enabled. It can be modified through the front panel and
EnerVista UR Setup software.

SIM Q.TEST
This setting simulates the Test bit of the quality attribute values included in all transmitted GOOSE messages. When
set to NONE, the q.Test bit is set based on the relay TEST MODE FUNCTION / IED MODE. When set to any other
value, the q.Test bit of quality attributes included in all transmitted GOOSE messages is set to the selected value.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 615
Chapter 9 - Settings

This setting is used when TxGOOSE SIM MODE is set to Enabled. It can be modified through the front panel and
EnerVista UR Setup software.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 616
Chapter 9 - Settings

9.13 FRONT PANEL SETTINGS

Setting path: SETTINGS > PROCESS BUS MODULE > GENERAL
■ GENERAL NETWORK CONFIG:
ó Range: INDEPENDENT, PRP, HSR, Dual HSR
■ INDEPENDENT
PRP SUPV MCST ADDR:
ô Range: 01 15 4E 00 01 00 to 01 15 4E 00 01 FF
01154E000100
HSR-1 SUPV MCST ADDR:
ô Range: 01 15 4E 00 01 00 to 01 15 4E 00 01 FF
01154E000100
HSR-2 SUPV MCST ADDR:
ô Range: 01 15 4E 00 01 00 to 01 15 4E 00 01 FF
01154E000101
PORT 1a FUNCTION:
ô Range: Disabled, Enabled
Enabled

ô ò

PORT 4b FUNCTION:
ô Range: Disabled, Enabled
Enabled
SV TRBL PRT BLOCK:
ô Range: Global, Partial
Global
SV TRBL CONT OP BLK:
ô Range: FlexLogic operand
Off
SV DELAY ALARM:
ô Range: 1.0 ms to 10.0 ms in steps of 0.1 ms
6.0 ms
QUALITY CHECK:
ô Range: Reject Questionable, Accept Questionable
Reject Questionable
ANTI-ALIASING FILTER:
ô Range: Disabled, Enabled
Disabled
SMPSYNCH CHECK:
ô Range: Global, Local, Local-87L, Any
Global
Fallback GmID:
Range: 8 Octet string
00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
TARGET: Click to view or
ô Range: List of available Targets. Access in EnerVista.
edit selected Targets
EVENTS: Click to view or Range: List of available FlexLogic operand types
ô
edit selected Events from SV Stream Processing. Access in EnerVista.

NETWORK CONFIG
This setting specifies the network configuration and redundancy for the Process Bus Module. If set to
INDEPENDENT, all ports on the Process Bus Module are enabled, and the Process Bus Module can be connected
directly to merging units (MUs) or to a switch without redundancy. To enable and disable individual ports on the
Process Bus Module in a point-to-point (PPP) network, use the PORT x FUNCTION settings. If set to PRP or HSR,
ports 1a and 1b are enabled. The PORT 1a FUNCTION and PORT 1b FUNCTION settings change, depending on
usage. If set to Dual HSR, ports 1a and 1b are enabled for one HSR ring. When using a Process Bus Module,
ports 3a and 3b are enabled for another HSR ring.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 617
Chapter 9 - Settings

PRP SUPV MCST ADDR

This setting changes the multicast address used by the Parallel Redundancy Protocol (PRP) supervision frames.
Configure all DANP devices in the PRP network with the same multicast address for the network supervision to
operate properly. You can edit this setting when the NETWORK CONFIG setting is set to PRP.

HSR-1 SUPV MCST ADDR

This setting changes the multicast address used by High-Availability Seamless Redundancy ring one (HSR-1 ports
1a and 1b) supervision frames, for single HSR configuration. Configure all DANH devices in the HSR network with
the same multicast address for the network supervision to operate properly. This setting is editable when the
NETWORK CONFIG setting is set to HSR or Dual HSR.

HSR-2 SUPV MCST ADDR

This setting changes the multicast address used by the HSR-2 (ports 3a and 3b) supervision frames for the second
DANH in a Dual HSR configuration. Configure all DANH devices in the HSR network with the same multicast
address for the network supervision to operate properly. You can edit this setting when the NETWORK CONFIG
setting is set to Dual HSR.

PORT 1a to 4b FUNCTION
These settings manually enable and disable Process Bus Module Ethernet ports. Typically, Process Bus Module
ports are order-code dependent, and the INDEPENDENT network configuration enables all the ports by default.
These settings allow individual ports to be enabled and disabled individually. To connect only a few of the ports,
other ports can be disabled to avoid a PBEthPort-# Offline self-test error. The fields active depend on order
code and NETWORK CONFIG setting. For order code 85, ports 1a, 1b, 3a, and 3b are available to be turned on or
off. For order codes 86 and 87, all eight ports can be available to be turned on or off.
When a port is disabled, all transmitting and receiving traffic on the port is blocked. Relay restart is not required
when changing these port function fields.

SV TRBL PRT BLOCK

In case of loss of any subscribed SV streams or due to bad quality of any subscribed SV frames, the relay's
protection functions need to be blocked to avoid undesired operation. This setting specifies the type of blocking
applied. When set to Global, all the protection functions that utilize the sampled values are blocked.
Communications, data logging, and oscillography remain functional. Availability of switchgear control is determined
by the SV TRBL CONT OP BLK operand. When set to Partial, only those protection functions are blocked that
utilize the sampled values from the affected SV stream. All other protection functions remain operational.

SV TRBL CONT OP BLK

This setting selects a FlexLogic operand that determines whether the contact outputs are blocked or not. When the
state of the operand is low, the contact outputs are not blocked when there is a loss of any SV stream or received
SV frames have bad quality. You can enable switchgear control through contact outputs during SV stream trouble.
When the operand is high, the contact outputs are blocked when there is a loss of any SV stream or received SV
frames have bad quality and the switchgear control is not available through contact outputs during SV stream
trouble.

SV DELAY ALARM
The sampled value (SV) frames may arrive with a delay from the MUs, which can be due to the MU performance or
different network path delays. This setting specifies the maximum delay expected between the time a sample is
taken at the MU and the time of arrival of that SV message. Sampling time is estimated based on the UR Process
Bus Module clock and the sampling rate. If the calculated frame delay is more than this setting value, the RxSV#
Delay Alm On FlexLogic operand asserts. The setting value needs to be calibrated and set at the commissioning
time for the given network topology. An alarm in runtime indicates the network performance is degrading over the
time. In short, this setting specifies how long the relay waits to declare that a sample is delayed. Protection is not
blocked by this setting.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 618
Chapter 9 - Settings

QUALITY CHECK
Flags are used to assess the quality of sampled value data to ensure protection. This setting specifies how the
sampled values are processed by the relay when the associated q.validity is set to Questionable. Quality is
checked per AC bank, not per SV stream. When set to Reject Questionable, the questionable data is
considered invalid and the frame is rejected. Only Good quality data is accepted. Set it to Accept Questionable
only if it is absolutely known that questionable quality from a MU is not compromising the quality of the data for
various applications. When set to Accept Questionable, both the Good and Questionable quality data are
accepted.

ANTI-ALIASING FILTER
This setting activates or deactivates the anti-aliasing filter that conditions the sampled values from the Process Bus
network. If the Merging Unit providing sampled values is applies an anti-aliasing filter, this setting must be disabled.
Otherwise, this setting can be enabled to apply filtering of the received sampled values. When enabled, the device
applies a low-pass-filter, which attenuates all the harmonics above the 15th order.

SMPSYNCH CHECK
This setting is a time synchronization check. It specifies the time synchronization source of an SV stream expected
by the Process Bus Module.
When set to Global, only the SV streams with SmpSynch indicating a Global (2) value are accepted. A stream
with a SmpSynch value other than Global (2) is rejected.
When set to Local, all SV streams with SmpSynch indicating a Local (1) or Global (2) area clock are
accepted.
When set to Any, any SmpSynch value in the range of 0 to 254 is acceptable. Streams outside the range are
rejected.
When all the subscribed MU streams support IEC61850 Ed 2.1, an additional acceptance criterion as outlined in the
description of setting Fallback GmID, has been added from UR version 8.5 and onwards

Fallback GmID
In the RxSV streams supporting IEC61850 Ed 2.1, the SynchSrcID attribute is used as acceptance criteria for the
RxSV streams, which are used by the Protection elements. In the absence of Global Clock, this setting indicates the
GmID of the local clock to which all subscribed MUs have to be synchronized for RxSV streams to be accepted.
The effect of the Fallback GmID is explained as below:
When SMPSYNCH CHECK is set to Global, only the RxSV streams with SmpSynch attribute indicating a Global
(2) value are accepted. SynchSrcID(GmID) Check is not done as all the streams accepted are Globally
synchronized.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 619
Chapter 9 - Settings

Figure 327: SympSynchCheck with GmID Flowchart

Effect of SMPSYNCH CHECK setting and attribute

MU Smpsynch UR Setting: SMPSYNCH CHECK
Attribute Global Local Any
Global Protection elements operational Protection elements operational Protection elements operational

Local Protection elements blocked Protection elements operational Protection elements operational
if GmId=GmIDRef

Any Protection elements blocked Protection elements blocked Other protection elements operational

N60-1601-0125-861-1 620
Chapter 9 - Settings

TARGET
With this setting, you can select the target messages of the affected SV stream(s) to be displayed on the front
panel. The target resets itself once the issue with the SV stream is resolved. Note that a selected target message
applies to all the configured SV streams. For example, if target message RxSV DELAY ALM ON' is selected, then a
target displays when any of the configured SV streams has an active SV Delay Alarm. When disabled, no target
message displays on the front panel.

Figure 328: FlexLogic operand target selection

EVENTS
With this setting, you can select the flexlogic operands, which will generate the events of the affected SV stream(s),
to be recorded in the event recorder. Note that a selected event from the menu applies to all the configured SV
streams. When disabled, no event is recorded in the event recorder.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 621
Chapter 9 - Settings

Figure 329: FlexLogic operand event selection

Note:
Choose carefully the events to be recorded in the event recorder. If an SV stream is noisy, there is risk of event recorder
overflow. Apart from testing, select a minimal number of events following relay commissioning

N60-1601-0125-861-1 622
Chapter 9 - Settings

9.14 SV STREAM SETTINGS

The following settings are available.

RxSV Format
Range: IEC 61850-9-2LE r2-1, IEC 61869-9 ed1.0
Default: IEC 61850-9-2LE r2-1
This setting selects the SV frame format, or protocol.
When set to IEC 61850-9-2LE r2-1, the relay assumes that the received SV frame references datasets that
comply with IEC 61850-9-2LE, Table 6: Dataset (PhsMeas1). The IED must be configured with a system
frequency of 50 or 60 Hz for correct operation.
When set to IEC 61869-9 ed1.0, the relay assumes that the dataset rules comply with IEC 61869-9 ed1.0
and that the number of Application-layer Service Data Units (ASDUs) are user-configurable.

Note:
When a file using a single SV stream (either IEC 61850-9-2LE r2-1 or IEC 61869-9 ed1.0) is converted from firmware version
8.2x and below to firmware versions 8.3x and above, the conversion will complete with no errors and the RxSV Format setting
will have the same value as the original file. If there is a mix of SV streams in the original file, then the user will be notified of
this error and all configured SV streams will be set to the SV Stream default; “Disabled”. The RxSV Format setting will also
default to “IEC 61850-9-2LE r2-1”

SV Stream
● Range: Disabled, Enabled
● Default: Disabled
This setting enables an SV stream. When disabled, all other RxSV settings are not editable and set to default.

svID
● Range: 1 up to 129 Visible String characters
● Default: empty string
svID refers to the name of the sampled value packet. The svID field of incoming SV messages must exactly match
this value for the message to be accepted as a valid RxSV# message. The svID field of the sampled value frame
must be unique within the system/substation.

Dst MAC
● Range: any valid multicast MAC (12-digit hexadecimal number)
● Default: 01-0C-CD-04-00-00
Only received SV messages having a destination Media Access Control (MAC) address equal to this value are
accepted as valid RxSV# messages. Each address must be unique. The destination MAC increases the overall
performance of multicast message reception by filtering only the configured messages for processing. For a
received SV message, the Dst MAC is validated if it matches with any of the configured RxSV# Dst MAC. If
validation is successful, the message is forwarded for further checks. There is no explicit check for the configured
Dst MAC versus the SvID for a received SV message.

ConfRev
● Range: 0 to 2147483647 in steps of 1
● Default: 0
ConfRev refers to configuration revision, which is a count of configuration changes in the SV control block. If the
value entered here is non-zero, the ConfRev field of incoming SV messages must match this value for the message

N60-1601-0125-861-1 623
Chapter 9 - Settings

to be accepted as a valid RxSV# message. If the setting is zero, RxSV# does not check the value received in the
ConfRev field.

Force MU Out of Service

● Range: FlexLogic operand
● Default: Off
This setting is intended specifically for forcing a faulty Merging Unit (MU) out of service in applications where a
circuit can be energized from more than one side, such as breaker and a half application, and the redundancy at
MU level is not available. For such application current from both sides are summed up using UR source mechanism
and if one MU fails, it will block all protection functions from using this source.

✍☛✟
✌✟
☛☞✠✠
☛✡
✠✟
✞✝✆

✁✂ ✎✏✑✒✓ ✎✏✑✒✔ ✁✄
✕✖✗ ✕✘ ✑✙✚✛✜✢✙
✁☎
✣✤✥✣✦✧★✩✪✫✬✭
Figure 330: Forcing MU1 out of service for a Breaker-and-a-half configuration

For example, in the above figure it is possible to open Breaker1 and still keep the system energized through
Breaker 2. The setting FORCE MU OUT OF SERVICE allows MU1to be taken out of service while keeping the
protection and control elements operational by using the RxSV stream from MU2 only. If redundancy is available at
MU level, then the protection can be kept operational without using setting FORCE MU OUT OF SERVICE, through
the Cross-checking functionality. Please refer to the description of settings CROSS-CHECKING, PHASE ORIGIN 1,
2 and NEUTRAL ORIGIN 1, 2 for more details.
To put an MU out of service, the corresponding breaker has to be opened before asserting the FlexLogic selected in
the setting FORCE MU OUT OF SERVICE to the ON state. The MU can now be disconnected for troubleshooting
purposes. The current channels from the affected MU will be treated as online with sampled current values forced to
ZEROs. The protection using respective source remains operational based on the current values sent by the other
MU which is located on the closed breaker side.
Note that:
● Keeping RxSV online (with current substituted as ZEROs) is applicable to current channels only. The status
of voltage channels will become Offline, and the protection elements will get blocked according to the setting
SV TRBL PRT BLOCK.
● The FlexLogic operands on the SV Config logic show the actual state of the affected the RxSV stream (i.e.,
RxSV# Off/On), irrespective of setting FORCE MU OUT OF SERVICE being Off or On.
You must ensure that the primary circuit to which the affected MU is connected remains de-energized for the entire
duration of forcing MU out of service, otherwise the protection elements will mal-operate. The circuit should be de-

N60-1601-0125-861-1 624
Chapter 9 - Settings

energized before changing the setting FORCE MU OUT OF SERVICE to On. The circuit should be energized only
after the setting FORCE MU OUT OF SERVICE is set to Off.
SV stream processing FlexLogic operands must not be used to automate FORCE MU OUT OF SERVICE. We
strongly recommend that FORCE MU OUT OF SERVICE is manually controlled (for example, through a
pushbutton, contact input, virtual input, or GOOSE).
The setting FORCE MU OUT OF SERVICE is intended for applications where a breaker can be opened, and the
corresponding MU can be taken out of service while the circuit is energized through another breaker such as in
breaker-and-a-half application. For any other application, the use of this setting should be carefully evaluated.
We do not recommend using the setting FORCE MU OUT OF SERVICE together with the cross-checking function.

Stream Status
This is an LED status indicator for the reception of an SV stream (RxSV#). A green LED reflects the RxSV# On
FlexLogic operand, meaning that the SV stream is online. A red LED reflects the RxSV# Off FlexLogic operand,
meaning that the SV stream is offline. When the EnerVista UR Setup software is not online or the stream is
disabled, the LED is grayed-out with Not Available, or “-NA-” status.

Advanced Configuration
Click the button to display or hide the fields.
These are settings to import an MU CID file and/or support IEC 61869-9 based SV streams, as per Table 902 on
Standard sample rates. IEC 61869-9 allows flexibility on numbers of current and voltage channels. It can be in one
of these sequences: A, B, C, N or A, AB, B, BC, C, CA, N. The UR supports up to eight CT channels and up to eight
VT channels and one or two ASDUs for protection applications. The following settings are active when the SV
Stream field is set to IEC 61869-9, and they also depend on the MU Variant Code.

MU SCL Import
Use this feature to configure SV streams by importing an MU CID file. The setting file comparison with IEC
61869-9-2LE configuration is not available. The IEC 61850 Merge feature with IEC 61869-9-2LE is not available.
Upon clicking the Import button and selecting a .cid file, a window appears from which to select the stream to
import.

Figure 331: Selecting a stream to import from a merging unit CID file

Rules for accepting a CID file include:

● The same remote channel cannot be mapped to more than one AC bank channel
● An AC bank channel cannot be mapped to more than one remote channel

N60-1601-0125-861-1 625
Chapter 9 - Settings

● For each AC bank, there are three phase inputs from the same SV control block and all three inputs are
configured
● Phase 1 and Phase 2 inputs are not from the same SV control block
● Phase 1 and Phase 2 aux inputs are not from the same SV control block
● A configured Phase consumes three analog channels and Aux consumes one analog channel, with a
maximum of 24 channels

SvCBRef
● Range: 0 up to 129 alphanumeric, underscore, slash, and period characters, beginning with an alpha
character
● Default: empty string
This field is read-only. When imported, the MU SCL file populates this field. The value is an ObjectReference to the
publishing control block in the format:
● <LDName>/LLN0.<SvCBName>
where <LDName> is the function-related name, if any, of the logical device containing the publishing control block,
otherwise the product-related name of that logical device, and <SvCBName> is the name of the publishing control
block.
When RxSV# is configured manually, the field is empty.

CT Channels
● Range: 0 to 8
● Default: 4
This setting specifies the number of CT channels available in the subscribed RxSV# message from the publisher
MU. The CT-1 fields reflect the number selected here. The number of current quantities matches the number
specified by the Variant Code of the MU.
Typically, a CT channel includes four current channels (three phase-ground currents and one ground/neutral/earth
current). A current channel is the combination of the current sample value attribute (AmpSv.instMag.i) and the
subsequent quality attribute (AmpSv.q).
If CT Channels is 4, CT1-A/B/C/N are supported for the stream.
If CT Channels is 8, CT2-A/B/C/N also are supported for the stream.
If CT Channels is 0, no CT channels display for AC input selection.
This setting is read-only and fixed at 4 when an SV Stream is set to IEC 61850-9-2LE.
If a message displays that the number of channels being selected for CT inputs...exceeds the
total allowable 4 CT channels, this means that the CT Channels field is set at 4 and there are entries in
the CT2-A/B/C/N fields. Set the latter fields to None or increase the number of channels.

VT Channels
● Range: 0 to 8
● Default: 4
This setting specifies the number of VT channels in the subscribed RxSV# message from the publisher MU.
Typically, VT channels include four voltage channels (three phase-ground voltages and auxiliary voltage). This
setting specifies the number of voltage channels in the subscribed RxSV# message. The voltage channel is the
combination of voltage sample value attribute (VolSv.instMag.i) and the corresponding quality attribute (VolSv.q).
The VT-1 fields reflect the number selected here. The number of voltage quantities matches the number specified
by the Variant Code of the dataset.
If VT Channels is 4, VT1-A/B/C/N are supported for the stream.
If VT Channels is 8, VT2-A/B/C/ also are supported for the stream.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 626
Chapter 9 - Settings

If VT Channels is 0, no VT channels display for AC input selection.

This setting is read-only and fixed at 4 when an SV Stream is set to IEC 61850-9-2LE.
If a message displays that "the number of channels being selected for CT inputs...exceeds the
total allowable 2 VT , this means that the VT Channels field is set at 2 and there are more than two entries in
the VT1-A/B/C/N fields. The number of configured VT1 fields needs to match the VT Channels field.

ASDUs
● Range: 1, 2
● Default: 1
This setting specifies the number of Application-layer Service Data Units (ASDUs) concatenated in one Application
Protocol Data Unit (APDU) in the subscribed RxSV# message. When concatenating several ASDUs into one frame,
the ASDU with the oldest samples is the first one in the frame. This setting is read-only and set at the default when
an SV Stream is set to IEC 61850-9-2LE.
Recycle power to the relay when changing this setting.

Variant Code
The EnerVista software auto-populates the Variant Code for the RxSV# message based on the settings Sample
Rate, the number of ASDUs, the number of CT Channels, and the number of VT Channels configured.
For example, F4800S2I8U0 describes sampled values with 4800 samples per second, two ASDU (samples) per
message, 8 currents, and no voltages.
As another example, F4800S1I8U4 means sampled values with 4800 samples per second, 1 ASDU per message, 8
CT channels, and 4 VT channels.
This field is read-only as per IEC 61869-9: 2016, Clause-6.903.2.
The number of samples (sample rate) in the variant code is set based on the SETTINGS > SYSTEM SETUP >
POWER SYSTEM > NOMINAL FREQUENCY setting. This value displays 4000 Hz for 50 Hz nominal frequency.
This value displays 4800 Hz for 60 Hz nominal frequency or any other nominal frequency except 50 Hz. IEC
61869-9 suggests the 4800 Hz sample rate for general measuring and protective applications, regardless of the
power system frequency.

CT1-A/B/C
● Range: None, AC1 to AC16
● Default: AC1/AC2/AC3
This setting specifies the sequence of Analog Channel (per phase) that is mapped to the CT-1 of the corresponding
stream. An origin to CT Phase input defines the physical measurement input to the CT bank by mapping specific
AC inputs from that merging unit (or SV message).
The fields are active when the SV Stream field is set to IEC 61869-9. The CT1 phases are available if the number
of CT Channels is 4 or below. CT2 is added if CT Channels is 5 or higher.
The fields are set to the defaults and are read-only when the SV Stream field is set to IEC 61850-9-2LE.

CT1- N
● Range: None, AC1 to AC16
● Default: AC4
This setting specifies the Analog Channel that is mapped to the CT ground/neutral input. An origin to CT1-N input
defines the physical measurement input to the CT bank by mapping specific AC inputs from that MU (or SV
message). If the MU does not publish any CT1-N inputs, configure the setting as None.
In the EnerVista software, the CT Aux input setting only populates the current channels of that RxSV#.
This CT Aux input setting is active when the SV Stream field is set to IEC 61869-9.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 627
Chapter 9 - Settings

This CT Aux input setting is set to AC4 and is read-only when the SV Stream is set to IEC 61850-9-2LE.

VT1-A/B/C
● Range: None, AC1 to AC16
● Default: AC5/AC6/AC7
This setting specifies the Analog Channel (per phase) that is mapped to the VT1- phase inputs. An origin to VT
Phase input defines the physical measurement input to the VT bank by mapping specific AC inputs from that MU (or
SV message). If the MU does not publish any VT channels, configure the setting as None.
The VT1 phase fields are active when the SV Stream field is set to IEC 61869-9. The VT1 phases are available if
the number of VT Channels is 4 or below. VT2 is added if VT Channels is 5 or higher.
The fields are set to the defaults and are read-only when the SV Stream field is set to IEC 61850-9-2LE.

VT1-N
● Range: None, AC1 to AC16
● Default: AC8
This setting specifies the Analog Channel that is mapped to the VT Aux/neutral input. An origin to VT input defines
the physical measurement input to the VT bank by mapping specific AC inputs from that MU (or SV message). If the
MU does not publish any VT1-N inputs, configure the setting as None.
In the EnerVista software, the VT Aux input setting only populates the voltage channels of that RxSV#.
The VT1-N input setting is active when the SV Stream field is set to IEC 61869-9.
The VT1-N input setting is set to the default and is read-only when the SV Stream field is set to IEC 61850-9-2LE.

AC BANKS
The UR platform supports up to six AC Banks. They can be CT or VT banks (similar to SETTINGS > SYSTEM
SETUP > AC INPUTS > CURRENT/VOLTAGE BANK). That is, each AC Bank can be configured either as current
or voltage (not both). If configured as current, inapplicable voltage settings (such as VT ratio, VT secondary) are
inactive. Similarly, if a bank is configured as voltage, current settings (such as CT primary, CT secondary) are
inactive. In addition, bank level redundancy (that is, Origin-1 and Origin-2) is supported using crosschecking of each
channel signal received from two different SV streams that are connected to the same electrical point on the
primary power system. A maximum 24 channels can be configured to the AC Banks.
Click the button to display or hide the fields.
The following settings are available for each AC bank.
Each Phase Origin setting consumes three phase channels Ia/Va, Ib/Vb, or Ic/Vc, and a Neutral Origin setting
consumes one ground or Aux Channel In/Vn, which means that
● An AC Bank with Phase Origin1 and Neutral Origin1 settings configured consumes four channels
● An AC Bank with both Phase Origin 1 and Phase Origin 2 and both Neutral Origin 1 and Neutral Origin 2
settings configured consumes eight channels
A maximum of 24 channels can be configured to the AC Banks.
For changes in this section, restart the relay, for example using Maintenance > Reboot Relay Command.

Phase Origin 1, 2
● Range: None, RxSV1-CT1/PHS, RxSV1-VT1/PHS to RxSV8-CT1/PHS, RxSV8-VT1/PHS
● Default: None
An origin to an AC bank defines the physical measurement input to the bank by mapping specific AC inputs from a
specific MU to the bank.
The UR Process Bus Module provides for the reliability of AC values for protection, metering, and oscillography by
allowing duplicate origins of AC data. An origin is considered unavailable when set to None. If origin 1 is available,

N60-1601-0125-861-1 628
Chapter 9 - Settings

the relay uses the values from origin 1 for protection, metering, and oscillography. Otherwise if origin 2 is available,
the relay uses the values from origin 2. If both origins are unavailable, then the bank AC values are forced to zero to
prevent ambiguity of measurement.
With crosschecking, the relay can use different origins. See the Crosschecking setting for information regarding
automatic protection blocking possibilities on loss of one or both origins.
The two-phase origins in an AC bank must be of the same type and connected to the same electrical point in the
primary power system. The two origins must be two currents with the same CT settings, or two voltages with the
same VT settings. The current/voltage type of the phase and auxiliary origins must also match on each AC bank. It
is intended that the origin AC inputs measure the same primary quantity with the same ratio. The same ratio and
connection settings are applied to both origins.

Neutral Origin 1, 2
● Range: None, RxSV1-CT1/NTR, RxSV1-VT1/ NTR to RxSV8-CT1/NTR, RxSV8-VT1/ NTR
● Default: None
These settings specify the field units that are the origins of the auxiliary input IN or VN. Duplicate auxiliary origins
are supported in the same way as phase origins.
The two auxiliary origins in an AC bank must be of the same type. The two origins must be two currents with the
same CT secondary setting, or two voltages. The current/voltage type of the phase and auxiliary origins also must
match on each AC bank. It is intended that the origin AC inputs measure the same primary quantity with the same
ratio. The same ratio and connection settings are applied to both origins.

Crosschecking
● Range: None, Depend Origin-1 Pref, Depend Origin-2 Pref
● Default: None
The crosschecking feature allows application-level redundancy by checking between two independent SV streams
from the same electrical connection of the instrument transformers. In addition to the network redundancy provided
by PRP/HSR, the UR Process Bus Module allows the relay to communicate with redundant merging units.
When set to None, crosschecking is disabled. Use this on a non-protection-critical AC bank, such as one used for a
synchrocheck voltage. GE strongly recommends setting it to None when redundancy is not supported at the
merging unit level; otherwise the "ACBank# Orig1(2) In Use" operand status is inaccurate.
Origin preference is supported in case of discrepancy in dependability mode. This allows testing (secondary
injection) or replacement of an MU that is configured to non-preferred origin without affecting protection functions
since these functions are using a preferred origin stream when online. As such, dependability with Origin-1
preference allows continued use of Origin-1 in case of discrepancy between both online origin stream sampled
values. Similarly, dependability with Origin-2 preference allows continued use of Origin-2 in case of discrepancy
between both online origin stream sampled values.
The table shows how the Crosschecking setting, the availability of AC bank origins, and discrepancy checks
determine whether protection is blocked. Blocked here means only protection elements. It does not inhibit metering,
actual values, oscillography, or other functions.
When set to Depend Origin-1 Pref, protection is blocked if there is no good signal from both the Origin-1 and
Origin-2 sources. When both the merging unit sources are good, the preference is given always for Origin-1. When
the preferred MU sources fails, the alternate MU source is used for protection and measurement.
When set to Depend Origin-2 Pref, protection is blocked if there is no good signal from both the Origin-1 and
Origin-2 sources. When both the merging unit sources are good, the preference is given always for Origin-2. When
the preferred MU sources fails, the alternate MU source is used for protection and measurement.

Note:
While switching from a preferred to non-preferred channel, the protection functions are delayed for two cycles. While
switching back to a preferred channel, the protection functions are delayed for one cycle.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 629
Chapter 9 - Settings

Crosschecking and protection behavior

Crosschecking Origin-1 RxSV stream Origin-2 RxSV stream Discrepancy check Protection operation
setting status status
None Not relevant Not relevant No check Normal
Depend Origin-1 Pref Not mapped Not mapped No check Normal
Online Online OK / discrepant Normal using Origin-1 stream
Online Offline No check Normal using Origin-1 stream
Offline Online No check Normal using Origin-2 stream
Offline Offline No check Blocked
Depend Origin-2 Pref Not mapped Not mapped No check Normal
Online Online OK / discrepant Normal using Origin-2 stream
Online Offline No check Normal using Origin-1 stream
Offline Online No check Normal using Origin-2 stream
Offline Offline No check Blocked

Origin1 becomes offline and switches to Origin2 for the following reasons:
● When more than three of five frame samples received are invalid or a frame with sequence number is
received after three consecutive missed frames for any channel of origin. The reason for invalid frames can
be any of the following reasons:
○ If one or more AmpSv.q or VolSv.q attribute(s) are invalid from the assigned SV frame channels to the
AC bank origin
○ When “Quality Check” is set to 'Reject questionable' data, the data with q.validity = questionable is
processed as invalid
○ When the relay is in-service or the test function is Disabled, the SV data with q.test set to TRUE is
processed invalid
○ When received SV frames with Sim Bit TRUE, the frame is invalid unless the value of @Master/
LPHD1.Sim.stVal is true (that is Settings > Simulation > GOOSE/SV > Accept Sim GOOSE&SV or
Settings > Simulation > Subscribe to Simulated Values > Simulation Mode is set to Enabled)
○ If the value of @Master/LPHD1.Sim.stVal is TRUE, once a subscribed SV messages with simulation bit
TRUE are received, subscribed SV messages with simulation bit FALSE are invalid until @Master/
LPHD1.Sim.stVal is set to FALSE
○ SV streams with “SmpSync” value out of the following specified ranges are rejected:
○ i. When the “SmpSynch Check” is set to “Global” (2), SV streams with “SmpSynch” value set to Global
(2) are accepted
○ ii. When the “SmpSynch Check” is set to “Local” (1), SV streams with “SmpSynch” value set to Global
(2) or Local (1) are accepted
○ iii. When the “SmpSynch Check” is set to “Any” (0 to 254), SV streams with “SmpSynch” value set in
the range of 0 to 254 are accepted. For 7.80 version, the accepted range is 0 to 127.
● SV frames are delayed/not received for more than 1.9 power system cycles
The selected Origin quality will be the quality of the AC Bank.
If both Origins have invalid quality, then the AC Bank data is marked as invalid and does not participate in
protection.

Phase/Ground CT Primary
● Range: 1 to 65000 A insteps of 1
● Default: 1
Enter the rated CT primary current value in Amperes. For 1000:5 and 1000:1 CTs, enter 1000.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 630
Chapter 9 - Settings

Phase/Ground CT Secondary
● Range: 1A, 5A
● Default: 1A
Enter the rated CT secondary current value in Amperes. For correct operation, the CT secondary rating must match
the setting (that must also correspond to the specific CT connections used).

Phase CT Polarity
● Range: Standard, Inverted-3ph, Inverted Ph-A, Inverted Ph-B, Inverted Ph-C
● Default: Standard
If CTs are wired with the correct polarity in all phases, i.e. CT polarity reversal is not required, “Standard” should be
selected. If CT polarity is incorrect in just one phase, then select “Inverted Ph-A (B or C)”; choosing the affected
phase. If CT polarities of all three phases are incorrect, select “Inverted-3Ph” to correct the CT polarities for all three
phases. It should be noted that the oscillography record will capture the CTs current signal as applied to the relay
terminal irrespective of this setting. This ensures correct relay behavior when recorded oscillography is played back
to the relay.

Ground CT Polarity
Range: Standard, Inverted
Default: Standard
If the ground CT is wired with the correct polarity, select “Standard” for this setting. If the Ground CT polarity is
incorrect, then select “Inverted” to correct it. It should be noted that the oscillography record will capture ground CT
current signal as applied to the relay terminal irrespective of this setting. This ensures the correct relay behavior
when recorded oscillography is played back to the relay.
It is important that the settings PHASE CT POLARITY and GROUND CT POLARITY are set to the correct values
before putting the relay into operation. Selecting the wrong value or changing this setting whilst relay is in operation
would result in undesirable operation of the protection and control functions.
If you intend to use the crosschecking functionality (redundancy at MU level), then this setting should be used
carefully to ensure that CT Polarity is the same on both MUs on each phase/neutral channel.

SIGNAL SOURCES
Click the button to display or hide the fields. The first six Sources are the platform sources and can accept both
current banks and voltage banks and are associated with AC bank 1 to 6. The first six sources allow current
summation for phase and auxiliary CTs.
Recycle power to the relay when changing a source.

Name
● Range: up to 20 alphanumeric characters
● Default: SRC 1
This setting specifies an alphanumeric name for the source.

Phase CT
● Range: None, B1, B2, B3, B4, B5, B6, B1+B2, ... B1+B2+B3+B4+B5+B6 or B7...B28
● Default: None
This setting selects the phase CTs of an AC bank or the sum of the phase CTs of multiple AC banks to be the phase
current of the source. That is, it select the AC Banks section above in the window.
If you see the message "the AC Bank x assigned...is not configured..," it means that you need to configure the AC
Banks section in the software window before setting this field. The AC Bank selected can match the Origins fields

N60-1601-0125-861-1 631
Chapter 9 - Settings

and Sources, such as a Phase CT set at B1 with Phase Origin 1 RxSV1-CT1/PHS and source SRC1. Another
example is to use Phase CT set at B2 with Phase Origin 1 RxSV2-CT1/PHS and source SRC2.

Ground CT
● Range: None, B1, B2, B3, B4, B5, B6, B1+B2, ... B1+B2+B3+B4+B5+B6 or B7...B28
● Default: None
This setting selects the ground CTs of an AC bank or the sum of the ground CTs of multiple AC banks to be the
ground current of the source. That is, it selects the AC Banks section above in the window.

Phase VT
● Range: None, B1, B2, B3, B4, B5, B6
● Default: None
This setting selects the phase VTs of an AC bank to be the phase voltages of the source.

Alt Phase CT
● Range: None, B1, B2, B3, B4, B5, B6, B1+B2, ... B1+B2+B3+B4+B5+B6 or B7...B28
● Default: None
This setting is for switching between main and alternate sources. It selects the alternate phase CTs of an AC bank
or the sum of the phase CTs of multiple AC banks to be the phase current of the source.

Alt Ground CT
● Range: None, B1, B2, B3, B4, B5, B6, B1+B2, ... B1+B2+B3+B4+B5+B6 or B7...B28
● Default: None
This setting is for switching between main and alternate sources. It selects the ground CTs of an AC bank or the
sum of the ground CTs of multiple AC banks to be the ground current of the source.

Switch Alt CT
● Range: FlexLogic operand
● Default: Off
This setting is for switching the alternate source on or off.

Alt Phase VT
● Range: None, B1, B2, B3, B4, B5, B6
● Default: None
This setting is for switching between main and alternate sources. It selects the phase VTs of an AC bank to be the
phase voltages of the source.

Alt Aux VT
● Range: None, B1, B2, B3, B4, B5, B6
● Default: None
This setting is for switching between main and alternate sources. It selects the auxiliary VT input of an AC bank to
be the auxiliary voltage of the source.

Switch Alt VT
● Range: FlexLogic operand
● Default: Off
This setting is for switching the alternate source on or off.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 632
 CHAPTER 10

ACTUAL VALUES
Chapter 10 - Actual Values

10.1 CHAPTER OVERVIEW

This chapter contains the following sections:

Chapter Overview 634
Actual Values Menu 635
Front panel 636
Status 638
Metering 651
Remote resources 670
Process Bus Module 671
Records 678
Product information 682

N60-1601-0125-861-1 634
Chapter 10 - Actual Values

10.2 ACTUAL VALUES MENU

■ ■ ACTUAL VALUES ■ ■ ACTUAL VALUES

■■ ó ■ ■ FRONT PANEL

■ ■ ACTUAL VALUES
ô
■ ■ STATUS
■ ■ ACTUAL VALUES
ô
■ ■ METERING
■ ■ ACTUAL VALUES
ô Not L60
■ ■ REMOTE RESOURCES
■ ■ ACTUAL VALUES
ô Not B90, C30, L60
■ ■ PB MODULE
■ ■ ACTUAL VALUES
ô
■ ■ RECORDS
■ ■ ACTUAL VALUES
ñ
■ ■ PRODUCT INFO

N60-1601-0125-861-1 635
Chapter 10 - Actual Values

10.3 FRONT PANEL

Basic and Enhanced
You can view the front panel using the EnerVista software (for example to view an error message displayed on the
front panel). You cannot however, change the settings using this view.
To view the front panel in EnerVista software:
1. Click Actual Values > Front Panel.
2. Click the pushbutton or LCD area to enlarge it.

Figure 332: Front panel use in the software (C60 shown

Graphical front panel

Note:
The graphical front panel is a hardware option.

Using the graphical front panel, You can acknowledge and reset Annunciator alarms, as well as view LEDs and
pushbuttons.
To view alarms for the graphical front panel in EnerVista:
1. Access Actual Values > Graphical Panel > Annunciator Panel. Alarms are listed, allowing remote
acknowledgement/reset.
2. Click the Acknowledge or Reset button for an alarm.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 636
Chapter 10 - Actual Values

Figure 333: Annunciator alarms displayed in the software

To view LEDs and pushbuttons on the graphical front panel in EnerVista:
1. Access Actual Values > Graphical Panel > LEDs or Pushbuttons.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 637
Chapter 10 - Actual Values

10.4 STATUS

10.4.1 IED
ACTUAL VALUES > STATUS > IED
■ IED IED BEHAVIOUR:
■ ó On Range: On, Test, Test Blocked

SIMULATION MODE Range: Disabled, Enabled

ñ
STATUS: Disabled Displays with IEC 61850

IED BEHAVIOUR
Displays the SETTINGS > TESTING > IED MODE CONFIG > IED MODE value.

SIMULATION MODE STATUS

Displays the SETTINGS > SIMULATION > SUBSCRIBE TO SIMULATED VALUES > SIMULATION MODE value,
meaning if simulation mode is enabled or disabled on a device.

10.4.2 CONTACT INPUTS

ACTUAL VALUES > STATUS > CONTACT INPUTS
■ CONTACT INPUTS Cont Ip <n>
■ ó On Range: On,Off

The present status of the contact inputs is shown here. The first line of a message display indicates the ID of the
contact input. For example, Cont Ip 1 refers to the contact input in terms of the default name-array index. The
second line of the display indicates the logic state of the contact input.

10.4.3 VIRTUAL INPUTS

ACTUAL VALUES > STATUS > CONTACT INPUTS
■ VIRTUAL INPUTS Virt Ip <n>
Range: On,Off
■ ó On
n = 1 to 128

The present status of the 128 virtual inputs is shown here. The first line of a message display indicates the ID of the
virtual input. For example, Virt Ip 1 refers to the virtual input in terms of the default name. The second line of the
display indicates the logic state of the virtual input.

10.4.4 RXGOOSE BOOLEAN INPUTS

ACTUAL VALUES > STATUS > RxGOOSE BOOLEANS
■ RxGOOSE BOOLEANS RxGOOSE BOOLEAN 1
Range: On,Off
■ ó STATUS: Off
n = 1 to 256

This menu displays when the product includes an IEC 61850 software option.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 638
Chapter 10 - Actual Values

10.4.5 RXGOOSE DPS INPUTS

ACTUAL VALUES > STATUS > RxGOOSE DPS
■ RxGOOSE DPS RxGOOSE DPS <n>
Range: On,Off
■ ó STATUS: Off
n = 1 to 128 (apart from B90 where n = 16)

This menu displays when the product includes an IEC 61850 software option.

10.4.6 TELEPROTECTION INPUTS

ACTUAL VALUES > STATUS TELEPROTECTION INPUTS
■ TELEPROTECTION TELEPROTECTION
Range: On
■ INPUTS ó INPUT 1-<n>: Off
n = 1 to 16

TELEPROTECTION Range: On
ñ
INPUT 2-<n>: Off n = 1 to 16

The present state of teleprotection inputs from communication channels 1 and 2 are shown here. The state
displayed is that of corresponding remote output unless the channel is declared failed.

10.4.7 CONTACT OUTPUTS

ACTUAL VALUES > STATUS > CONTACT OUTPUTS
■ CONTACT OUTPUTS Cont Op <n>
■ ó On Range: On, Off, VOff, VOn, IOn, IOff

The present state of the contact outputs is shown here. The first line of a message display indicates the ID of the
contact output. For example, Cont Op 1 refers to the contact output in terms of the default name-array index. The
second line of the display indicates the logic state of the contact output.
For form-A contact outputs, the state of the voltage and current detectors is displayed as Off, VOff, IOff, On, IOn,
and VOn. For form-C contact outputs, the state is displayed as Off or On.

10.4.8 VIRTUAL OUTPUTS

ACTUAL VALUES > STATUS > CONTACT OUTPUTS
■ VIRTUAL OUTPUTS Virt Op <n>
Range: On,Off
■ ó On
n = 1 to 256

The present state of each virtual output displays here. The first line of a message display indicates the ID of the
virtual output. For example, Virt Op 1 refers to the virtual output in terms of the default name-array index. The
second line of the display indicates the logic state of the virtual output, as calculated by the FlexLogic equation for
that output.

10.4.9 RXGOOSE STATUS

ACTUAL VALUES > STATUS > RxGOOSE DPS

N60-1601-0125-861-1 639
Chapter 10 - Actual Values

■ RxGOOSE All RxGOOSE Online:

■ STATUS ó Yes Range: Yes, No

RxGOOSE <n> Status:

Range: Online, Offline
ñ Offline
n = 1 to 64

This menu displays when the product includes an IEC 61850 software option.
The All RxGOOSE Online actual value does not consider RxGOOSE that are not configured or are not used by
any RxGOOSE Input.
If fixed GOOSE is configured, the All RxGOOSE Online actual value reflects the status of both the configurable
GOOSE subscriptions and the fixed GOOSE subscriptions. For All RxGOOSE Online status to have the value
“Yes”, all RxGOOSE x Status actual values must be Online and the fixed GOOSE All Remote Devices Online
status must have the value Yes.

10.4.10 RXGOOSE STATISTICS

ACTUAL VALUES > STATUS > RxGOOSE STATISTICS > RxGOOSE 1(64)

Note:
Only RxGOOSE 1 is shown

■ RxGOOSE 1 RxGOOSE 1
■ ó stNum 0 Range: 0 up to 4,294,967,295

RxGOOSE 1
ñ sqNum 0 Range: 0 up to 4,294,967,295: Online, Offline

This menu displays when the product includes an IEC 61850 software option.

stNum
State number. The most recently received value in GOOSE message field stNum. The publisher increments stNum
each time that the state of one or more of the GOOSE message members is sent with a revised value.

sqNum
Sequence number. The most recently received value in GOOSE message field sqNum. The publisher sets sqNum
to zero each time the state of one or more of the GOOSE message members is sent with a new value, and it
increments it whenever a GOOSE message is resent without any member value change.

10.4.11 FIXED GOOSE

Remote Devices
ACTUAL VALUES > STATUS > FIXED GOOSE > REMOTE DEVICES STATUS
■ REMOTE DEVICE ALL REMOTE DEVICES ONLINE:
■ STATUS ó Yes Range: Yes, No

REMOTE DEVICE <n> STATUS:

Range: On, Off
ñ Off
n = 1 to 16

N60-1601-0125-861-1 640
Chapter 10 - Actual Values

Displays the present state of the programmed remote devices.

ALL REMOTE DEVICES ONLINE

Indicates whether all programmed devices are online or not. If the state is No, then at least one required remote
device is not online.
ACTUAL VALUES > STATUS > FIXED GOOSE > REMOTE DEVICES STATISTICS > REMOTE DEVICE 1(16)

Note:
Only REMOTE DEVICE 1 is shown.

■ REMOTE DEVICE 1 REMOTE DEVICE 1 stNum:

■ ó 0 Range: 0 to 4,294,967,295

REMOTE DEVICE 1 sqNum:

ñ 0 Range: 0 to 4,294,967,295

REMOTE DEVICES 1 stNum

This indicates the most recently received value in the received Fixed GOOSE message field stNum (state number).
The publisher increments stNum each time that the state of one or more of the Fixed GOOSE message members is
sent with a revised value.

REMOTE DEVICES 1 sqNum

This indicates the most recently received value in the received Fixed GOOSE message field sqNum (sequence
number). The publisher sets sqNum to zero each time the state of one or more of the GOOSE message members is
sent with a new value, and it increments it whenever a Fixed GOOSE message is resent without any member value
change. This number rolls over to zero when the maximum count of 4,294,967,295 is reached.

Remote inputs
ACTUAL VALUES > STATUS > FIXED GOOSE > REMOTE INPUTS > REMOTE INPUT 1(32)

Note:
Only REMOTE INPUT 1 is shown

■ REMOTE INPUTS REMOTE INPUT 1 STATUS

■ ó Off Range: On, Off

10.4.12 DIGITAL COUNTERS

ACTUAL VALUES > STATUS > DIGITAL COUNTERS > DIGITAL COUNTERS Counter <n>

Note:
Only Counter 1 is shown

N60-1601-0125-861-1 641
Chapter 10 - Actual Values

■ DIGITAL COUNTERS Counter 1 ACCUM:

■ Counter 1 ó 0

Counter 1 FROZEN:
ô 0

Counter 1 FROZEN:
ô 1970/01/01 00:00:00 Range: YYYY/MM/DD HH:MM:SS

Counter 1 MICROS:
ñ 0 Range: 0 to 4294967295 in steps of 1

The present status of the digital counters displays here. The status of each counter, with the user-defined counter
name, includes the accumulated and frozen counts (the count units label also appears). Also included, is the date
and time stamp for the frozen count. The COUNTER 1 MICROS value refers to the microsecond portion of the time
stamp.

10.4.13 BREAKER STATUS

ACTUAL VALUES > STATUS > BREAKERS
■ BREAKERS BREAKER <n> ΦA/3P STATE:
■ ó N/A Range: N/A, Opened, Closed, Alert

BREAKER <n> ΦB/3P STATE:

ô N/A Range: N/A, Opened, Closed, Alert

BREAKER <n> ΦC/3P STATE:

ñ N/A Range: N/A, Opened, Closed, Alert

N/A is shown when BREAKER 1 FUNCTION is disabled.

Closed is shown when the breaker is closed.
Opened is shown when the breaker is opened.
Alert is the state that represents one of the following breaker conditions:
● Bad
● Intermediate
● Racked-out
● Out of Service
● Pole Discrepancy
● Trouble

10.4.14 SELECTOR SWITCHES

ACTUAL VALUES > STATUS > SELECTOR SWITCHES
■ SELECTOR SWITCHES SELECTOR SWITCH 1
■ ó POSITION: 0/7 Range: Current Position / 7

N60-1601-0125-861-1 642
Chapter 10 - Actual Values

SELECTOR SWITCH 2
ñ POSITION: 0/7 Range: Current Position / 7

The display shows both the current position and the full range. The current position only (an integer from 0 through
7) is the actual value.

10.4.15 FLEX STATES

ACTUAL VALUES > STATUS > FLEX STATES
■ FLEX STATES PARAM <n>: Off
Range: On,Off
■ ó Off
n = 1 to 256

There are 256 FlexState bits available. The second line value indicates the state of the given FlexState bit.

10.4.16 ETHERNET
ACTUAL VALUES > STATUS > ETHERNET
■ ETHERNET ETHERNET PRI LINK
■ ó STATUS: Fail Range: Fail, OK

ETHERNET SEC LINK

ô STATUS: OK Range: Fail, OK

ETHERNET TER LINK

ñ STATUS: Fail Range: Fail, OK

These values indicate the status of the first, second, and third Ethernet ports.

10.4.17 REAL TIME CLOCK SYNCHRONIZING

ACTUAL VALUES > STATUS > TIME SYNC
■ REAL TIME CLOCK RTC SYNC SOURCE:
Range: None, Port 1(3) PTP Clock, IRIG-B, Other,
■ SYNCHRONIZING ó None Process Bus Module Clock, SNTP1, SNTP2: On, Off

GRANDMASTER ID:
ô 0000000000000000 Range: any 8 octet value

ACCURACY:
ô 999999999 ns Range: 0 to 999,999,999 ns

PBM SW1 PTP State:

Range: Disabled, No Signal, Calibrating,
ô DISABLED Synchronized, Qualifying, Idea, Master

PBM SW2 PTP State:

Range: Disabled, No Signal, Calibrating,
ô DISABLED Synchronized, Qualifying, Idea, Master

PORT 1 PTP STATE: Range: Disabled, No Signal, Calibrating, Synch’d (No

ô No Signal Pdelay), Synchronized, Synch’d (Inv UTCoff), Synch’d
(Nopd INVoff)

N60-1601-0125-861-1 643
Chapter 10 - Actual Values

PORT 2 PTP STATE: Range: Disabled, No Signal, Calibrating, Synch’d (No

ô No Signal Pdelay), Synchronized, Synch’d (Inv UTCoff), Synch’d
(Nopd INVoff)
PORT 3 PTP STATE: Range: Disabled, No Signal, Calibrating, Synch’d (No
ô No Signal Pdelay), Synchronized, Synch’d (Inv UTCoff), Synch’d
(Nopd INVoff)
PTP - IRIG-B DELTA:
ô 500000000 ns Range: -500,000,000 to +500,000,000 ns

Last LeapSec Dir

ô None None, Positive, Negative

Last LeapSec Date

ñ 1970/01/01 Date: YYYY/MM/DD

Note:
This menu displays when the product includes an IEEE 1588 software option.

RTC SYNC SOURCE

This is the time synchronizing source the relay is using at present. Possible sources include Port 1 PTP Clock to
Port 3 PTP Clock. A value of Other means a less precise source (IEC 103, IEC 104, Modbus, DNP). An actual
value displays when the relay includes the IEEE 1588 software option.

Note:
When the SYNCHRONIZING SOURCE setting in Settings > Product Setup > Real Time Clock is set to PBM Clock, the
RTC SYNC SOURCE should also be set to Process Bus Module Clock.

GRANDMASTER ID
This is the grandmaster identity code being received from the present PTP grandmaster, if any. When the relay is
not using any PTP grandmaster, this actual value is zero. The grandmaster identity code is specified by PTP to be
globally unique, so one can always know which clock is grandmaster in a system with multiple grandmaster-capable
clocks.

ACCURACY
This is the estimated maximum time error at present in the RTC, considering the quality information embedded in
the received time signal. The value 999,999,999 indicates that the magnitude of the estimated error is one second
or more, or that the error cannot be estimated.

PORT 1…3 PTP STATE

This is the present state of the port’s PTP clock. The PTP clock state is:
● DISABLED: The PTP function setting is disabled. With all other values, the PTP function is enabled.
● NO SIGNAL: No signal from an active master has been found.
● CALIBRATING: An active master has been selected but is not yet locked in.
● Synch’d (No Pdelay): This value is shown if the port is synchronized, but the peer delay mechanism is
non-operational

N60-1601-0125-861-1 644
Chapter 10 - Actual Values

● SYNCH’D(INV UTCOff): This value is shown if the signal is synchronized to the PTP master but with
currentUtcOffsetValid = False
● Synch’d (Nopd INVoff): This value is shown if the port is synchronized, but the peer delay mechanism
is non-operational and PTP master has currentUtcOffsetValid = False
● SYNCHRONIZED: The signal is synchronized.

PTP - IRIG-B DELTA

This is the time difference, measured in nanoseconds, between the fractional seconds portion of the time being
received via PTP and that being received via IRIG-B. A positive value indicates that PTP time is fast compared to
IRIG-B time.

Last LeapSec Dir

This shows the direction of the last leap second.
● None: No leap second history
● Positive: Last leap second is positive and leap second is added
● Negative: Last leap second is negative and leap second is removed

Last LeapSec Date

This shows the date on which the last leap second was adjusted

Note:
Note: These actual values are non-volatile and persisted across reboots.

10.4.18 DIRECT INPUTS

ACTUAL VALUES > STATUS > DIRECT INPUTS
■ DIRECT INPUTS AVERAGE MSG RETURN
■ ó TIME CH1: 0 ms

UNRETURNED MSG
ô COUNT CH1: 0

CRC FAIL COUNT

ô CH1: 0

AVERAGE MSG RETURN

ô TIME CH2: 0 ms

UNRETURNED MSG
ô COUNT CH2: 0

CRC FAIL COUNT

ô CH2: 0

DIRECT INPUT <n>

ñ On n = model dependent

N60-1601-0125-861-1 645
Chapter 10 - Actual Values

AVERAGE MSG RETURN TIME

This the time taken for direct output messages to return to the sender in a direct input/output ring configuration (this
value is not applicable for non-ring configurations). This is a rolling average calculated for the last ten messages.
There are two return times for dual-channel communications modules.

UNRETURNED MSG COUNT

These values (one per communications channel) count the direct output messages that do not make the trip around
the communications ring.

CRC FAIL COUNT

These values (one per communications channel) count the direct output messages that have been received but fail
the CRC check. High values for either of these counts can indicate on a problem with wiring, the communication
channel, or one or more relays. The UNRETURNED MSG COUNT and CRC FAIL COUNT values can be cleared
using the CLEAR DIRECT I/O COUNTERS command.

DIRECT INPUT <n>

These values represent the state of each direct input.

10.4.19 DIRECT DEVICES STATUS

ACTUAL VALUES > STATUS > DIRECT DEVICES STATUS
■ DIRECT DEVICES DIRECT DEVICE <n>
Range: Offline, Online
■ STATUS ó STATUS: Offline
n= 1 to 16

These actual values represent the state of direct devices 1 through 16

10.4.20 EGD PROTOCOL STATUS

Fast Exchange
ACTUAL VALUES > STATUS > EGD PROTOCOL STATUS > PRODUCER STATUS > FAST EXCHANGE 1
■ FAST EXCHANGE 1 FAST EXCHANGE 1
■ ó SIGNATURE: 0

FAST EXCHANGE 1
ñ DATA LENGTH: 0

These values provide information for debugging an Ethernet Global Data (EGD) network. The EGD signature and
packet size for the fast EGD exchange display.

Slow Exchange
ACTUAL VALUES > STATUS > EGD PROTOCOL STATUS > PRODUCER STATUS > SLOW EXCHANGE 1(2)

Note:
Only SLOW EXCHANGE 1 is shown

N60-1601-0125-861-1 646
Chapter 10 - Actual Values

■ FAST EXCHANGE 1 SLOW EXCHANGE 1

■ ó SIGNATURE: 0

SLOW EXCHANGE 1
ñ DATA LENGTH: 0

These values provide information for debugging an EGD network. The EGD signature and packet size for the slow
EGD exchanges display.

10.4.21 TELEPROTECTION CHANNEL TESTS

ACTUAL VALUES > STATUS > TIME SYNC
■ TELEPROT CH TESTS CHANNEL 1
■ ó STATUS: n/a Range: n/a, FAIL, OK

CHANNEL 1 LOST
ô PACKETS: 1 Range: 1 to 65535 in steps of 1

CHANNEL 2
ô STATUS: n/a Range: n/a, FAIL, OK

CHANNEL 2 LOST
ô PACKETS: 1 Range: 1 to 65535 in steps of 1

VALIDITY OF CHANNEL
ñ CONFIGURATION: FAIL Range: n/a, FAIL, OK

The status information for two channels is shown here.

CHANNEL 1 STATUS
This represents the receiver status of each channel. If the value is OK, teleprotection is enabled and data is being
received from the remote terminal; If the value is FAIL, teleprotection enabled and data is not being received from
the remote terminal. If n/a, teleprotection is disabled.

CHANNEL 1 LOST PACKETS

Data is transmitted to the remote terminals in data packets at a rate of two packets per cycle.
The number of lost packets represents data packets lost in transmission; this count can be reset to 0 through the
COMMANDS > CLEAR RECORDS menu.

VALIDITY OF CHANNEL CONFIGURATION

This value displays the current state of the communications channel identification check, and hence validity. If a
remote relay ID does not match the programmed ID at the local relay, the FAIL message displays. The N/A value
appears if the local relay ID is set to a default value of 0, the channel is failed, or if the teleprotection inputs/outputs
are not enabled.

10.4.22 REMAINING CONNECTION STATUS

ACTUAL VALUES > STATUS > CHANNEL TESTS

N60-1601-0125-861-1 647
Chapter 10 - Actual Values

■ COMM STATUS MMS TCP (max 6)

■ REMAINING CONNECT ó 6 Range: 0 to 6

Modbus TCP (max 4)

ô 4 Range: 0 to 4

DNP TCP (max 2)

ô 2 Range: 0 to 2

IEC-104 TCP (max 2)

ô 2 Range: 0 to 2

PMU TCP
Range: 1 to 4
ô 1
Relays with PMU option only

SFTP (max 4)
ñ 4 Range: 0 to 4

These values specify the remaining number of TCP connections still available for each protocol. The display
depends on the options applicable to your device. Each time a connection is used, the remaining number of
connections decrements. When released, the remaining number of connections increments. If no connection is
made over the specific protocol, the number equals the maximum number available for the specific protocol.
For example, the maximum number of Modbus TCP connections is 4. Once an EnerVista session is opened on a
computer connected to the UR over Ethernet, the Modbus TCP status shows 3. If the EnerVista application is
closed, the Modbus TCP status shows 4.
For the graphical front panel, the remaining connections refer to TCP connections only.

MMS TCP
The number of IEC 61850 connections remaining.

PMU TCP (relays with PMU only)

The maximum number of PMU TCP connections matches the number of aggregators. The maximum number of
aggregators for the N60 is 4. The maximum number for the C60 is 2. The maximum number is 1 for other products
with a PMU. The remaining number of aggregators displays here.

10.4.23 PARALLEL REDUNDANCY PROTOCOL (PRP)

ACTUAL VALUES > STATUS > CHANNEL TESTS
■ PRP STATUS Total Rx Port A:
■ ó 0 Range: 0 to 4G, blank if PRP disabled

Total Rx Port B:
ô 0 Range: 0 to 4G, blank if PRP disabled

Total Errors Port A:

ô 0 Range: 0 to 4G, blank if PRP disabled

Total Errors Port B:

ô 0 Range: 0 to 4G, blank if PRP disabled

N60-1601-0125-861-1 648
Chapter 10 - Actual Values

Mismatches Port A:
ô 0 Range: 0 to 4G, blank if PRP disabled

Mismatches Port B:
ô 0 Range: 0 to 4G, blank if PRP disabled

FER Port A:
ô 0 Range: 0 t0 4G

FER Port B:
ô 0 Range: 0 t0 4G

Link Active Port A:

ô No Range: Yes, No

Link Active Port B:

ñ No Range: Yes, No

Note:
This menu displays when the product includes a PRP software option.

Total Rx Port A
This is a counter for total messages received (either from DANPs or from SANs) on port A.

Total Rx Port A
This is a counter for total messages received (either from DANPs or from SANs) on port A.

Total Errors Port A

This a counter for total messages received with an error (bad port code, frame length too short) on port A.

Total Errors Port A

This a counter for total messages received with an error (bad port code, frame length too short) on port B.

Mismatches Port A
This is a counter for total messages received with an error on Port A (PRP frame, but port received through and
LAN ID in the frame do not match).

Mismatches Port B
This is a counter for total messages received with an error on Port B (PRP frame, but port received through and
LAN ID in the frame do not match).

Link Active Port A

This shows whether the link on port A is active or not.

Link Active Port A

This shows whether the link on port A is active or not.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 649
Chapter 10 - Actual Values

10.4.24 TXGOOSE STATUS

ACTUAL VALUES > STATUS > TxGOOSE STATUS
■ TxGOOSE R-TxGOOSE <n>
Range: On, Off
■ STATUS ó ARP: Off
n = 1 to 16

Note:
This menu displays when the product includes an IEC 61850 software option.

This status is relevant to R-GOOSE reception when configured for SSM or ASM reception modes. It is not relevant
for GOOSE or for R-GOOSE in unicast reception mode.

ARP
The unicast mode of R-GOOSE transmission requires Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) for the resolution of the
network layer address into the MAC layer address. R-TxGOOSE <n> ARP status On indicates that ARP responses
are being received and the destination MAC address for R-GOOSE transmissions has been obtained. This status
remains Off if TxGOOSE <n> is not configured for R-GOOSE. It also remains Off if setting R-TxGOOSE1 DST IP is
set to a multicast address. In the case where setting R-TxGOOSE1 DST IP is configured with a unicast address and
this status indicates Off, TxGOOSE <n> transmission will be off, and therefore communication network diagnosis
needs to be carried out.
This status is only applicable for R-GOOSE transmission with setting R-TxGOOSE1 DST IP set to a unicast IP
address. It is not applicable for GOOSE or for R-GOOSE when setting R-TxGOOSE1 DST IP is multicast.

10.4.25 PROTOCOL
ACTUAL VALUES > STATUS > PROTOCOL
■ PROTOCOL IEC61850 EDITION:
■ ó Edition2 Range: Edition1, Edition2

Note:
This menu displays when the product includes an IEC 61850 software option.

This displays the IEC 61850 edition currently being used, as set under Settings > Product Setup >
Communications > Protocol > IEC61850 Edition.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 650
Chapter 10 - Actual Values

10.5 METERING

10.5.1 METERING CONVENTIONS

UR convention for measuring power and energy

✁✂ ✄✁✁✁ ☎✆✝✞✁✝✟✄✆✝✠
✦✥✧✥★✣✢✛★
✡☛☞☛✌✍✎✍☞✏ ☛✏ ✏✍✍✑ ✒✓
✸ ✎✔✍ ✕✖✗✏✍☞✘✍✏ ☞✍✙☛✓✏

✚✛✜✢✣✤✥ ✺✻✼ ✿❀
❵✣✢✢✰ ❛ ❜✛✰✭✢✭✮✥ ✶✻ ❁❂ ❃ ❄❅❆❇ ❁❂ ❃ ❄❆❏
✚✣★✰ ❛ ❜✛✰✭✢✭✮✥
❜❝ ❛ ❞✣✤ P◗
✺✽✼ ▲❁ ✿❁
❡✫★★✥✧✢ ✶✾ ✶✽
❁❂ ❃ ❄❆❏ ❁❂ ❃ ❄❅❆❇
✱✲✳✴✵✲✶✵✴ ✶✵✷
✺✾✼ ▲❀
✹ ❭❪❫❴ ❢❣✐❤
✩✧✪✫✬✢✭✮✥ ✯✥✰✭✰✢✭✮✥ ❳❨❩❬
✦✥✧✥★✣✢✛★
✸
✺✻✼ ✿❀
✚✛✜✢✣✤✥
❵✣✢✢✰ ❛ ❜✛✰✭✢✭✮✥ ❈❉ ❊ ❋●❍■ ❈❉ ❊ ❋❍❑
✚✣★✰ ❛ ❥✥✤✣✢✭✮✥ ✶✻ ✶✽
❜❝ ❛ ❞✥✣✪ ✺✽✼ ▲❁ ✿❁
❘❙
❡✫★★✥✧✢ ❁❂ ❃ ❄❆❏ ❁❂ ❃ ❄❅❆❇
✶✾
✱✲✳✴✵✲✶✵✴ ✶✵✷ ✺✾✼ ▼◆
❭❪❫❴ ❳❨❩❬
✯✥✰✭✰✢✭✮✥ ❢❣❦❤

✩✧✪✫✬✢✭✮✥ ✯✥✰✭✰✢✭✮✥
✹ ❭❪❫❴
✺✻✼ ✿❀
✚✛✜✢✣✤✥ ❁❂ ❃ ❄❅❆❇ ❁❂ ❃ ❄❆❏
✶✽ ✶✾
❵✣✢✢✰ ❛ ❥✥✤✣✢✭✮✥
✚✣★✰ ❛ ❥✥✤✣✢✭✮✥ ✺✽✼ ▲❁ ✿❁
❜❝ ❛ ❞✣✤ ❚❯
✶✻ ❁❂ ❃ ❄❆❏ ❁❂ ❃ ❄❅❆❇
❡✫★★✥✧✢ ✺✾✼
✱✲✳✴✵✲✶✵✴ ✶✵✷ ▲❀
✸ ❳❨❩❬
✦✥✧✥★✣✢✛★ ❢❣❧❤
✯✥✰✭✰✢✭✮✥
❭❪❫❴
✿❀
✺✻✼
✚✛✜✢✣✤✥ ✶✾ ❁❂ ❃ ❄❅❆❇ ❁❂ ❃ ❄❆❏
❵✣✢✢✰ ❛ ❥✥✤✣✢✭✮✥ ❱❲
✚✣★✰ ❛ ❜✛✰✭✢✭✮✥ ✺✽✼ ▼❈ ❖❈
❜❝ ❛ ❞✥✣✪ ✶✻
✶✽
❡✫★★✥✧✢ ❈❉ ❊ ❋❍❑ ❈❉ ❊ ❋●❍■
✺✾✼
✱✲✳✴✵✲✶✵✴ ✶✵✷ ▲❀
✸ ❳❨❩❬
❢❣♠❤
✦✥✧✥★✣✢✛★ ♥♦♣♦qrst✉t✈✇

N60-1601-0125-861-1 651
Chapter 10 - Actual Values

Figure 334: Flow direction of signed values for watts and VARs

UR convention for measuring phase angles

All phasors calculated by URs and used for protection, control and metering functions are rotating phasors that
maintain the correct phase angle relationships with each other at all times.
For display and oscillography purposes, all phasor angles in a given relay are referred to an AC input channel pre-
selected by the SETTINGS > SYSTEM SETUP > POWER SYSTEM > FREQUENCY AND PHASE REFERENCE
setting. This setting defines a particular AC signal source to be used as the reference.
If the AC signal pre-selected by the relay upon configuration is not measurable, the phase angles are not
referenced. The phase angles are assigned as positive in the leading direction, and are presented as negative in
the lagging direction, to more closely align with power system metering conventions. The figure illustrates this.
✚✥✦✘✙

✚✥✥✜✙ ✚✤✣✜✙

✌★✏✩✪✩✫✑
✎✒✓✔✑
✬✩✕✑✗✪✩★✒

✚✣✧✘✙ ✘✙
☛☞ ✌✍✎✏✑ ✎✒✓✔✑
✕✑✖✑✕✑✒✗✑

✚✣✤✜✙ ✚✛✜✙

✚✢✘✙

✁✂ ✄☎✆✝✞✟✠✡

Figure 335: UR phase angle measurement convention

UR convention for symmetrical components

The URs calculate voltage symmetrical components for the power system phase A line-to-neutral voltage, and
symmetrical components of the currents for the power system phase A current. Owing to the above definition,
phase angle relations between the symmetrical currents and voltages stay the same irrespective of the connection
of instrument transformers. This is important for setting directional protection elements that use symmetrical
voltages.
For display and oscillography purposes the phase angles of symmetrical components are referenced to a common
reference as described previously.

Wye-connected instrument transformers

ABC rotation:
V_0 = (VAG + VBG + VCG)/3

V_1 = (VAG + aVBG + a2VCG)/3

V_2 = (VAG + a2VBG + aVCG)/3

ACB rotation
V_0 = (VAG + VBG + VCG)/3

V_1 = (VAG + a2VBG + aVCG)/3

N60-1601-0125-861-1 652
Chapter 10 - Actual Values

V_2 = (VAG + aVBG + a2VCG)/3

Swapping out V for I, the above equations also apply to currents.

Delta-connected instrument transformers

ABC rotation
V_0 = N/A
V_1 = 1Ð-30°(VAB + aVBC + a2VCA)/3Ö3

V_2 = 1Ð30°(VAB + a2VBC + aVCA)/3Ö3

ACB rotation
V_0 = N/A
V_1 = 1Ð30°(VAB + a2VBC + aVCA)/3Ö3

V_2 = 1Ð-30°(VAB + aVBC + a2VCA)/3Ö3

The zero-sequence voltage is not measurable under the Delta connection of instrument transformers and is
defaulted to zero. The table below shows an example of symmetrical components calculations for the ABC phase
rotation.

Symmetrical components calculation example

SYSTEM VOLTAGES, sec. V * VT relay INPUTS, sec. V SYMM. COMP, sec. V

conn.
VAG VBG VCG VAB VBC VCA F5ac F6ac F7ac V0 V1 V2
13.9 76.2 Ж 79.7 Ж 84.9 138.3 85.4 WYE 13.9 76.2 79.7 19.5 56.5 23.3
Ð 0° 125° 250° Ж313° Ж97° Ж241° Ð0° Ж125° Ж250° Ж192° Ж7° Ж187°
UNKNOWN (only V1 and 84.9 138.3 85.4 DELTA 84.9 138.3 85.4 N/A 56.5 23.3
V2 can be determined) Ð0° Ж144° Ж288° Ð0° Ж144° Ж288° Ж54° Ж234°

In this example, the power system voltages are phase-referenced to VAG and VAB, respectively. This, however, is a
relative matter. It is important to remember that the Product displays are always referenced as specified under
SETTINGS > SYSTEM SETUP > POWER SYSTEM > FREQUENCY AND PHASE REFERENCE.
The example above is illustrated in the following figure.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 653
Chapter 10 - Actual Values

✚✛✜✢✣✤ ✥✦✧✢★✩✣✜ ✚✛✤✤✣✢✪✫✬★✧

✬✦✤✭✦✮✣✮✢✜

✳✲ ✳
✸ ✽
✷ ✹
✶ ✳✴
✲ ✼✳
✵✳✴ ✴✳
✳✲
✲✳✱ ✻✳
✸
✳
✽
✰ ✺ ✹ ✓
✹ ✷ ✳✴
✡ ✯ ✸ ✶
✲ ✼✳
✵✳✴ ✳✴
✳✲ ✻✳
✱ ✺
✌✍✎ ✏✑✒ ✰ ✹
✯ ✸

☞
☛
✔
✕
✾
❇❈ ✿❀❁
❉ ❊ ❂❃ ❄
❂ ❂❁
❃❂
❋❂ ❅❆
❃❂ ❇❁
❈● ❂
❂
✾ ✓
✡ ❇❈ ✿❀❁
❉ ❊ ❂❃ ❄
❂ ❂❁
❃❂
❋❂ ❅❆
❃❂ ❇❁
✖✎✗✘✙ ✏✑✒ ❈● ❂
❂

☞
☛
✕

✁✂ ✄✄☎✆✝✞✟✠

Figure 336: Measurement convention for symmetrical components

10.5.2 SOURCES
This menu displays the metered values available for each source.
Metered values presented for each source depend on the phase and auxiliary VTs and phase and ground CTs
assignments for this particular source. For example, if no phase VT is assigned to this source, then any voltage,
energy, and power values are unavailable.

10.5.2.1 PHASE CURRENT METERING

ACTUAL VALUES > METERING > SOURCE SRC 1 > PHASE CURRENT
■ PHASE CURRENT SRC 1 RMS Ia: 0.000
■ SRC 1 ó b: 0.000 c: 0.000 kA

SRC 1 RMS Ia:

ô 0.000 kA

SRC 1 RMS Ib:

ô 0.000 kA

SRC 1 RMS Ic:

ô 0.000 kA

SRC 1 RMS In:

ô 0.000 kA

SRC 1 PHASOR Ia:

ô 0.000 kA 0.0°

N60-1601-0125-861-1 654
Chapter 10 - Actual Values

SRC 1 PHASOR Ib:

ô 0.000 kA 0.0°

SRC 1 PHASOR Ic:

ô 0.000 kA 0.0°

SRC 1 PHASOR In:

ô 0.000 kA 0.0°

SRC 1 ZERO SEQ I0:

ô 0.000 kA 0.0°

SRC 1 POS SEQ I1:

ô 0.000 kA 0.0°

SRC 1 NEG SEQ I2:

ñ 0.000 kA 0.0°

The metered values are displayed in this menu. The SRC 1 text gets replaced by whatever name was programmed
by the user for the associated source (see SETTINGS > SYSTEM SETUP > SIGNAL SOURCES).

10.5.2.2 GROUND CURRENT METERING

ACTUAL VALUES > METERING > SOURCE SRC 1 > GROUND CURRENT
■ GROUND CURRENT SRC 1 RMS Ig:
■ SRC 1 ó 0.0 A

SRC 1 PHASOR Ig:

ô 0.0 A 0.0°

SRC 1 PHASOR Igd:

ñ 0.000 kA 0.0°

The metered values are displayed in this menu. The SRC 1 text gets replaced by whatever name was programmed
by the user for the associated source (see SETTINGS > SYSTEM SETUP > SIGNAL SOURCES).

10.5.2.3 PHASE VOLTAGE METERING

ACTUAL VALUES > METERING > SOURCE SRC 1 > PHASE VOLTAGE
■ PHASE VOLTAGE SRC 1 RMS Vag:
■ SRC 1 ó 0.0 V

SRC 1 RMS Vbg:

ô 0.0 V

SRC 1 RMS Vcg:

ô 0.0 V

SRC 1 PHASOR Vag:

ô 0.0 V 0.0°

N60-1601-0125-861-1 655
Chapter 10 - Actual Values

SRC 1 PHASOR Vbg:

ô 0.0 V 0.0°

SRC 1 PHASOR Vcg:

ô 0.0 V 0.0°

SRC 1 RMS Vab:

ô 0.0 V

SRC 1 RMS Vbc:

ô 0.0 V

SRC 1 RMS Vca:

ô 0.0 V

SRC 1 PHASOR Vab:

ô 0.0 V 0.0°

SRC 1 PHASOR Vbc:

ô 0.0 V 0.0°

SRC 1 PHASOR Vca:

ô 0.0 V 0.0°

SRC 1 ZERO SEQ V0:

ô 0.0 V 0.0°

SRC 1 POS SEQ V1:

ô 0.0 V 0.0°

SRC 1 NEG SEQ V2:

ñ 0.0 V 0.0°

The metered values are displayed in this menu. The SRC 1 text gets replaced by whatever name was programmed
by the user for the associated source (see SETTINGS > SYSTEM SETUP > SIGNAL SOURCES).

10.5.2.4 AUXILIARY VOLTAGE METERING

ACTUAL VALUES > METERING > SOURCE SRC 1 > AUXILIARY VOLTAGE
■ AUXILIARY VOLTAGE SRC 1 RMS Vx:
■ SRC 1 ó 0.00 V

SRC 1 RMS Vx:

ñ 0.00 V

The metered values are displayed in this menu. The SRC 1 text gets replaced by whatever name was programmed
by the user for the associated source (see SETTINGS > SYSTEM SETUP > SIGNAL SOURCES).

10.5.2.5 POWER METERING

ACTUAL VALUES > METERING > SOURCE SRC 1 > POWER

N60-1601-0125-861-1 656
Chapter 10 - Actual Values

■ POWER SRC 1 REAL POWER

■ SRC 1 ó 3φ: 0.000 kW

SRC 1 REAL POWER

ô φa: 0.000 kW

SRC 1 REAL POWER

ô φb: 0.000 kW

SRC 1 REAL POWER

ô φc: 0.000 kW

SRC 1 REACTIVE PWR

ô 3φ: 0.000 kvar

SRC 1 REACTIVE PWR

ô φa: 0.000 kvar

SRC 1 REACTIVE PWR

ô φb: 0.000 kvar

SRC 1 REACTIVE PWR

ô φc: 0.000 kvar

SRC 1 APPARENT PWR

ô 3φ: 0.000 kVA

SRC 1 APPARENT PWR

ô φa: 0.000 kVA

SRC 1 APPARENT PWR

ô φb: 0.000 kVA

SRC 1 APPARENT PWR

ô φc: 0.000 kVA

SRC 1 POWER FACTOR

ô 3φ: 1.000

SRC 1 POWER FACTOR

ô φa: 1.000

SRC 1 POWER FACTOR

ô φb: 1.000

SRC 1 POWER FACTOR

ñ φc: 1.000

The metered values are displayed in this menu. The SRC 1 text gets replaced by whatever name was programmed
by the user for the associated source (see SETTINGS > SYSTEM SETUP > SIGNAL SOURCES).
When VTs are configured in wye, the Product calculates power in each phase and three-phase poweWhen VTs are
configured in wye, the Product calculates power in each phase and three-phase power is measured as

N60-1601-0125-861-1 657
Chapter 10 - Actual Values

S = VA x ÎA + VB x ÎB + VC x ÎC
When VTs are configured in delta, the Product does not calculate power in each phase and three-phase power is
measured as
S = VAB x ÎA + VCB x ÎC
where
● S is the apparent power
● VA, VB, VC, IA, IB, IC are phase voltage and phase current phasors
● VAB and VCB are phase-to-phase voltage phasors
● Î is the conjugate of I

10.5.2.6 ENERGY METERING

ACTUAL VALUES > METERING > SOURCE SRC 1 > ENERGY
■ ENERGY SRC 1 POS WATTHOUR:
■ SRC 1 ó 0.000 MWh

SRC 1 NEG WATTHOUR:

ô 0.000 Wh

SRC 1 POS VARHOUR:

ô 0.000 varh

SRC 1 NEG VARHOUR:

ñ 0.000 mvarh

The metered values are displayed in this menu. The SRC 1 text gets replaced by whatever name was programmed
by the user for the associated source (see SETTINGS > SYSTEM SETUP > SIGNAL SOURCES).
Because energy values are accumulated, record them and then reset them immediately prior to changing CT or VT
characteristics.

10.5.2.7 DEMAND METERING

ACTUAL VALUES > METERING > SOURCE SRC 1 > DEMAND
■ DEMAND SRC 1 DMD IA:
■ SRC 1 ó 0.000 kA

SRC 1 DMD IA MAX:

ô 0.000 kA

SRC 1 DMD IA DATE:

ô 2020/07/31 16:30:07

SRC 1 DMD IB:

ô 0.000 kA

SRC 1 DMD IB MAX:

ô 0.000 kA

N60-1601-0125-861-1 658
Chapter 10 - Actual Values

SRC 1 DMD IB DATE:

ô 2020/07/31 16:30:07

SRC 1 DMD IC:

ô 0.000 kA

SRC 1 DMD IC MAX:

ô 0.000 kA

SRC 1 DMD IC DATE:

ô 2020/07/31 16:30:07

SRC 1 DMD W:
ô 0.000 kW

SRC 1 DMD W MAX:

ô 0.000 kW

SRC 1 DMD W DATE:

ô 2020/07/31 16:30:07

SRC 1 DMD VAR:

ô 0.000 kvar

SRC 1 DMD VAR MAX:

ô 0.000 kvar

SRC 1 DMD VAR DATE:

ô 2020/07/31 16:30:07

SRC 1 DMD VAR DATE:

ô 2020/07/31 16:30:07

SRC 1 DMD VA MAX:

ô 0.000 kVA

SRC 1 DMD VA DATE:

ñ 2020/07/31 16:30:07

The metered values are displayed in this menu. The SRC 1 text gets replaced by whatever name was programmed
by the user for the associated source (see SETTINGS > SYSTEM SETUP > SIGNAL SOURCES).
The relay measures (absolute values only) the source demand on each phase and average three phase demand for
real, reactive, and apparent power. These parameters can be monitored to reduce supplier demand penalties or for
statistical metering purposes. Demand calculations are based on the measurement type selected in the SETTINGS
> PRODUCT SETUP > DEMAND menu. For each quantity, the relay displays the demand over the most recent
demand time interval, the maximum demand since the last maximum demand reset, and the time and date stamp of
this maximum demand value. Maximum demand quantities can be reset to zero with the CLEAR RECORDS >
CLEAR DEMAND RECORDS command.

10.5.2.8 FREQUENCY METERING

ACTUAL VALUES > METERING > SOURCE SRC 1 > FREQUENCY

N60-1601-0125-861-1 659
Chapter 10 - Actual Values

■ FREQUENCY SRC 1 FREQUENCY:

■ SRC 1 ó 0.000 Hz

The metered values are displayed in this menu. The SRC 1 text gets replaced by whatever name was programmed
by the user for the associated source (see SETTINGS > SYSTEM SETUP > SIGNAL SOURCES).
SOURCE FREQUENCY is measured via software-implemented zero-crossing detection of an AC signal. The signal
is either a Clarke transformation of three-phase voltages or currents, auxiliary voltage, or ground current as per
source configuration (see the SYSTEM SETUP > POWER SYSTEM settings). The signal used for frequency
estimation is low-pass filtered. The final frequency measurement is passed through a validation filter that eliminates
false readings due to signal distortions and transients.

10.5.2.9 CURRENT HARMONICS AND THD METERING

ACTUAL VALUES > METERING > SOURCE SRC 1 > CURRENT HARMONICS
■ CURRENT HARMONICS SRC 1 THD Ia: 0.0
■ SRC 1 ó Ib: 0.0 Ic: 0.0%

SRC 1 2ND Ia: 0.0

ô Ib: 0.0 Ic: 0.0%

SRC 1 3RD Ia: 0.0

ô Ib: 0.0 Ic: 0.0%

SRC 1 25TH Ia: 0.0

ñ Ib: 0.0 Ic: 0.0%

The metered values are displayed in this menu. The SRC 1 text gets replaced by whatever name was programmed
by the user for the associated source (see SETTINGS > SYSTEM SETUP > SIGNAL SOURCES).
Current harmonics are measured for each source for the total harmonic distortion (THD) and 2nd to 25th harmonics
per phase.

10.5.2.10 VOLTAGE HARMONICS AND THD METERING

ACTUAL VALUES > METERING > SOURCE SRC 1 > VOLTAGE HARMONICS
■ VOLTAGE HARMONICS SRC 1 THD Va: 0.0
■ SRC 1 ó Vb: 0.0 Vc: 0.0%

SRC 1 2ND Va: 0.0

ô Vb: 0.0 Vc: 0.0%

SRC 1 3RD Va: 0.0

ô Vb: 0.0 Vc: 0.0%

N60-1601-0125-861-1 660
Chapter 10 - Actual Values

SRC 1 25TH Va: 0.0

ñ Vb: 0.0 Vc: 0.0%

The metered values are displayed in this menu. The SRC 1 text gets replaced by whatever name was programmed
by the user for the associated source (see SETTINGS > SYSTEM SETUP > SIGNAL SOURCES).
This menu displays metered voltage harmonics values. The “SRC 1” text is replaced by the programmed name for
the associated source (see the SETTINGS ðò SYSTEM SETUP ðò SIGNAL SOURCES menu).
To extract the 2nd to 25th voltage harmonics, each harmonic is computed on a per-phase basis, where:
● N = 64 is the number of samples per cycle
● w0 = 2pf is the angular frequency based on the system frequency (50 or 60 Hz)
● k = 1, 2,..., N – 1 is the index over one cycle for the Fast Fourier Transform (FFT)
● m is the last sample number for the sliding window
● h = 1, 2,..., 25 is the harmonic number
The short-time Fourier transform is applied to the unfiltered signal:
2
F real m, h ✁ = --- ☎ f m ➊ k ✁ ✄ cos h ✄ ✂ 0 ✄ t k ✁ ✁ ✁
N
k
2
F imag m, h ✁ = --- ☎ f m ➊ k ✁ ✄ sin h ✄ ✂ 0 ✄ t k ✁ ✁ ✁
N
k
2 2
F ampl m, h ✁ = F real m, h ✁ + F imag m, h ✁

The harmonics are a percentage of the fundamental signal obtained as a ratio of harmonic amplitude to
fundamental amplitude multiplied by 100%. The total harmonic distortion (THD) is the ratio of the total harmonic
content to the fundamental:
2 2 2
THD = F2 + F3 + + F 25

Voltage harmonics are not available on Product relays configured with the high-impedance fault detection (Hi-Z)
feature.
Voltage harmonics are calculated only for Wye connected phase VTs. Ensure that the SYSTEM SETUP > AC
INPUTS > VOLTAGE BANK F5 > PHASE VT <n> CONNECTION setting is Wye to enable voltage harmonics
metering.

10.5.3 SYNCHROCHECK
ACTUAL VALUES > METERING > SOURCE SRC 1 > SYNCHROCHECK<n>

Note:
Only SYNCHROCHECK 1 is shown

■ SYNCHROCHECK1 SYNCHROCHECK 1 DELTA

■ SRC 1 ó VOLT: 0.000 kV

SYNCHROCHECK 1 DELTA
ô FREQ: 0.000 Hz

SYNCHROCHECK 1 DELTA
ô PHASE: 0.0°

N60-1601-0125-861-1 661
Chapter 10 - Actual Values

SYNCHROCHECK 1
ô SYNSCP D_PH: 0.0°

SYNCHROCHECK 1
ô V1 MAG: 0.0 V

SYNCHROCHECK 1
ô V1 MAG: 0.0 V

SYNCHROCHECK 1
ô V2 MAG: 0.0 V

SYNCHROCHECK 1
ô V2 ANG: 0.0°

SYNCHROCHECK 1 PROJ
ô V2 MAG: 0.0 V

SYNCHROCHECK 1 PROJ
ô V2 ANG: 0.0°

SYNCHROCHECK 1 PROJ
ô DELTA PHASE: 0.0°

SYNCHROCHECK 1 PROJ
ñ SYNSCP D_PH: 0.0°

If synchrocheck or a setting is disabled, the corresponding actual values menu item does not display.

10.5.4 TRACKING FREQUENCY

ACTUAL VALUES > METERING > TRACKING FREQUENCY
■ TRACKING FREQUENCY TRACKING FREQUENCY:
■ SRC 1 ó 60.00 Hz

ACTIVE FREQ AND PHS REF:

ô MAIN

MAIN REF FREQUENCY:

ô 60.00 Hz

ALT REF FREQUENCY:

ñ 60.00 Hz

The Tracking Frequency and the Active Frequency and Phase Reference are metered as shown here. The tracking
frequency is calculated from the signals defined in the Active Frequency and Phase Reference. Note that based on
the signal availability and the settings defined in the Main and Alternate Frequency and Phase Reference, the
Active Frequency and Phase Reference might be switched between main and alternate frequency reference in
runtime.
The frequency calculated in main and alternate reference respectively are also metered as shown here. They will be
displayed as 0 if the signal in this reference is lost or it’s not configured.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 662
Chapter 10 - Actual Values

10.5.5 FLEXELEMENTS
ACTUAL VALUES > METERING > FLEXELEMENTS  FLEXELEMENT 1(16)

Note:
Only FLEXELEMENT 1 is shown

■ DIRECTIONAL FLEXELEMENT 1
■ POWER 1 ó OpSig: 0.000

The operating signals for the FlexElements are displayed in pu values using the following definitions of the base
units.

Base unit Description Applicable models

87L SIGNALS IBASE = maximum primary RMS value of the +IN and –IN L30, L90
(Local IA Mag, IB, and IC) inputs
(Diff Curr IA Mag, IB, and IC) (CT primary for source currents, and 87L source primary
(Terminal 1 IA Mag, IB, and IC) current for line differential currents)
(Terminal 2 IA Mag, IB and IC)
87L SIGNALS BASE = Squared CT secondary of the 87L source L30, L90
(Op Square Curr IA, IB, and IC)
(Rest Square Curr IA, IB, and IC)
BREAKER ACC ARCING AMPS BASE = 2000 kA2 ´ cycle All but B90, DC30, N60
(Brk X Acc Arc Amp A, B, and C)
BREAKER ARCING AMPS BASE = 1 kA2 ´ cycle All but B90, DC30, N60
(Brk X Arc Amp A, B, and C)
BUS DIFFERENTIAL IBASE = maximum primary RMS value of the +IN and –IN B30
RESTRAINING CURRENT inputs
(Bus Diff Mag) (CT primary for source currents, and bus reference
primary current for bus differential currents)
BUS DIFFERENTIAL IBASE = maximum primary RMS value of the +IN and – IN B30
RESTRAINING CURRENT inputs
(Bus Rest Mag) (CT primary for source currents, and bus reference
primary current for bus differential currents)
CURRENT UNBALANCE BASE = 100% M60
(Amp Unbalance)
DCmA BASE = maximum value of the DCMA INPUT MAX setting All models
for the two transducers configured under the +IN and –IN
inputs.
FAULT LOCATION BASE = Line Length as specified in Fault Report C60, C95, D30, D60, F35, F60, L30, L60, L90
FIELD CURRENT IBASE = maximum value setting defined for the specific G60
transducer input configured
FIELD GROUND CURRENT IBASE = 5 mA G60
FIELD GROUND FAULT BASE = 100% G60
LOCATION
FIELD GROUND INJECTED VBASE = 15 V G60
VOLTAGE
FIELD GROUND RESISTANCE RBASE = 250 KΩ G60
FIELD VOLTAGE VBASE = 500 V G60

N60-1601-0125-861-1 663
Chapter 10 - Actual Values

Base unit Description Applicable models

FREQUENCY fBASE = 1 Hz All models
FREQUENCY RATE OF df/dtBASE = 1 Hz/s D30, D60, F60, G30, G60, L30, L90, N60, T60
CHANGE
PHASE ANGLE jBASE = 360 degrees (see the UR angle referencing All models
convention)
POWER FACTOR PFBASE = 1.00 All models
RTDs BASE = 100°C All models
SENSITIVE DIR POWER PBASE = maximum value of 3 ´ VBASE ´ IBASE for the C60, C95, D60, G30, G60, L90, M60, N60, T60
(Sns Dir Power) +IN and –IN inputs of the sources configured for the
sensitive power directional element(s).
SOURCE CURRENT IBASE = maximum nominal primary RMS value of the +IN All models
and –IN inputs
SOURCE ENERGY EBASE = 10000 MWh or MVAh, respectively B30, C60, C95, D60, F35, F60, G30, G60, L90, M60, N60,
(Positive and Negative Watthours, T60
Positive and Negative Varhours)
SOURCE POWER PBASE = maximum value of VBASE ´ IBASE for the +IN All models
and –IN inputs
SOURCE THD & HARMONICS BASE = 1% C70, D60, F35, F60, G30, G60, L90, N60, T60
SOURCE VOLTAGE VBASE = maximum nominal primary RMS value of the +IN All models
and –IN inputs
STATOR DIFFERENTIAL IBASE = maximum primary RMS value of the +IN and –IN G60, M60
CURRENT inputs
(Stator Diff Iar, Ibr, and Icr) (CT primary for source currents, and bus reference
primary current for bus differential currents)
STATOR GROUND 3RD VBASE = Primary auxiliary voltage of the STATOR G30, G60
HARMONIC VOLTAGES GROUND SOURCE
(Stator Gnd Vn/V0 3rd)
STATOR GROUND RBASE = 10 KΩ G60
RESISTANCE
STATOR GROUND SUB- VBASE = nominal secondary voltage of auxiliary VT for the G60
HARMONIC VOLTAGE stator ground source
STATOR GROUND SUB- IBASE = ground CT primary current of stator ground G60
HARMONIC CURRENT source
STATOR RESTRAINING IBASE = maximum primary RMS value of the +IN and –IN G60, M60
CURRENT inputs
(Stator Diff Iad, Ibd, and Icd) (CT primary for source currents, and bus reference
primary current for bus differential currents)
SYNCHROCHECK VBASE = maximum primary RMS value of all the sources B30, C60, C95, D30, D60, F60, G30, G60, L30, L60, L90,
(Max Delta Volts) related to the +IN and –IN inputs N60, T60
THERMAL MODEL BASE =100% M60
(Model Capacity Used)
(Model Motor Unbalance)
THERMAL MODEL BASE = 10 minutes M60
(Model Lockout Time)
THERMAL MODEL BASE = 1.00 pu of FLA M60
(Thermal Model Load)
(Biased Motor Load)
THERMAL MODEL BASE = 10 seconds M60
(Trip Time on Overload)
VOLTS PER HERTZ BASE = 1.00 pu G30, G60, L90, T60

N60-1601-0125-861-1 664
Chapter 10 - Actual Values

Base unit Description Applicable models

XFMR DIFFERENTIAL IBASE = maximum primary RMS value of the +IN and -IN G30, T35, T60
CURRENT inputs
(Xfmr Iad, Ibd, and Icd Mag) (CT primary for source currents, and transformer reference
primary current for transformer differential currents)
XFMR DIFFERENTIAL BASE = 100% G30, T35, T60
HARMONIC CONTENT
(Xfmr Harm2 Iad, Ibd, and Icd
Mag)
(Xfmr Harm5 Iad, Ibd, and Icd
Mag)
XFMR RESTRAINING IBASE = maximum primary RMS value of the +IN and -IN G30, T35, T60
CURRENT inputs
(Xfmr Iar, Ibr, and Icr Mag) (CT primary for source currents, and transformer reference
primary current for transformer differential currents)
ZBASE ZBASE = PhaseVTSecondary / PhaseCTSecondary, D30, D60, G60, L60, L90, T60
where PhaseVTSecondary and PhaseCTSecondary are
the secondary nominal voltage and the secondary nominal
current of the distance source. In case multiple CT inputs
are summed as one source current and mapped as the
distance source, use the PhaseCTSecondary value from
the CT with the highest primary nominal current.
Distance source is specified in setting under SETTINGS >
GROUPED ELEMENTS > SETTING GROUP 1(6) >
DISTANCE.
PhaseVTSecondary and PhaseCTSecondary are specified
in setting under SETTINGS > SYSTEM SETUP > AC
INPUTS.

10.5.6 DIGITIZER
ACTUAL VALUES > METERING > DIGITZER > DIGITIZER 1(5)

Note:
Only DIGITIZER 1 is shown

■ DIGITIZER 1 DIGITIZER 1 Out:

■ ó 0

The digitized output signals are displayed as signed integer numbers.

10.5.7 8-BIT COMPARATORS

ACTUAL VALUES > METERING > 8-BIT COMPARATORS > 8-BIT COMPARATOR 1(6)
Only COMPARATOR 1 is shown
■ 8-BIT 8BIT COMP 1 A:
■ COMPARATOR 1 ó 0.00 Range: –12700.00 to 12700.00

8BIT COMP 1 B:
ô 0.00 Range: –12700.00 to 12700.00b

N60-1601-0125-861-1 665
Chapter 10 - Actual Values

8BIT COMP 1 OUT:

ñ 0.00 Range: –12700.00 to 12700.00

The two (A and B) 8-bit digitized inputs as well as the resulting sum/difference are available for display. The values
are rescaled from the original integer numbers using the 8BIT COMP 1 SCALE FACTOR setting.

10.5.8 SUMMATOR
ACTUAL VALUES > METERING > SUMMATOR > SUMMATOR 1(6)

Note:
Only SUMMATOR 1 is shown

■ SUMMATOR1 SUMMATOR 1 OUTPUT:

■ ó 0.000

The values for the six summator outputs are available for display. The values are displayed with the units
programmed in the SUMMATOR 1(6) UNITS setting.

10.5.9 DIRECT ANALOGS

ACTUAL VALUES > METERING > DIRECT ANALOGS
■ DIRECT ANALOGS ANALOG INPUT <n>:
■ ó 0.000 n = 1 to 32

The values for the 32 direct analog inputs are available for display. The values are displayed with the units
programmed in the DIRECT ANALOG 1 UNITS to DIRECT ANALOG 32 UNITS settings.

10.5.10 RXGOOSE ANALOGS

ACTUAL VALUES > METERING > RxGOOSE Analogs
■ RxGOOSE RxGOOSE Analog <n>
■ Analogs ó 0.000LEVEL: n -= 1 to 32

RxGOOSE An1 ExpnSt:

ñ Off

Note:
This menu displays when the product includes an IEC 61850 software option.

The RxGOOSE Analog values display in this menu. The RxGOOSE Analog values are received via IEC 61850
GOOSE messages sent from other devices.

10.5.11 PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT

ACTUAL VALUES > METERING > PHASOR MEASURMENT UNIT > PMU <n>

N60-1601-0125-861-1 666
Chapter 10 - Actual Values

Note:
Only PMU 1 is shown

■ PMU 1 PMU 1 VA:

■ ó 0.000 V 0.00° Range: Va or Vab per VT bank connection

PMU 1 VB:
ô 0.000 V 0.00° Range: Vb or Vbc per VT bank connection

PMU 1 VC:
ô 0.000 V 0.00° Range: Vc or Vca per VT bank connection

PMU 1 VX:
ô 0.000 V 0.00°

PMU 1 V1:
ô 0.000 V 0.00°

PMU 1 V2:
ô 0.000 V 0.00°

PMU 1 V0:
ô 0.000 V 0.00° Range: Substituted with zero if delta-connected VTs

PMU 1 IA:
ô 0.000 A 0.00°

PMU 1 IB:
ô 0.000 A 0.00°

PMU 1 IC:
ô 0.000 A 0.00°

PMU 1 IG:
ô 0.000 A 0.00°

PMU 1 I1:
ô 0.000 A 0.00°

PMU 1 I2:
ô 0.000 A 0.00°

PMU 1 I0:
ô 0.000 A 0.00°

PMU 1 FREQUENCY:
ô 0.000 Hz

PMU 1 df/dt:
ô 0.00 Hz/s

N60-1601-0125-861-1 667
Chapter 10 - Actual Values

PMU 1 CONFIG CHANGE

ñ COUNTER: 0 Range: 0 to 65535

These actual values display without the corresponding time stamp as they become available per the recording rate
setting. Also, the recording post-filtering setting is applied to these values.

10.5.12 PMU AGGREGATOR

ACTUAL VALUES > METERING > PHASOR MEASURMENT UNIT > PMU AGGREGATOR <n>

Note:
Only PMU AGGREGATOR 1 is shown

■ PMU AGGREGATOR 1 PMU AGGREGATOR 1

■ ó PDU SIZE: 0

Actual values for the IEC 61850-90-5 PDU size are provided. These values allow you to know the approximate
Ethernet frame size for the data streams from each aggregator. This can help to estimate network loading. The PDU
size shown in the displays does not include the Ethernet, UDP, or IP layers. PDU sizes approaching approximately
1500 bytes result in fragmented data frames, causing increased network traffic.

10.5.13 TRANSDUCER INPUTS AND OUTPUTS

ACTUAL VALUES > METERING > TRANSDUCER I/O DCMA INPUTS  DCMA INPUT <n>
■ DCMA INPUT <n> DCMA INPUT <n>
■ ó 0.000 mA

Actual values for each DCmA input channel that is enabled are displayed with the top line as the programmed
channel ID and the bottom line as the value followed by the programmed units.

ACTUAL VALUES > METERING > TRANSDUCER I/O RTD INPUTS > RTD INPUT <n>
■ RTD INPUT <n> RTD INPUT <n>
■ ó -50 °C

Actual values for each RTD input channel that is enabled are displayed with the top line as the programmed
channel ID and the bottom line as the value.

10.5.14 HARMONIC DETECTION

ACTUAL VALUES > METERING > HARMONIC DETECTION HARMONIC DETECTOR <n>

Note:
Only HARMONIC DETECTOR 1 is shown

N60-1601-0125-861-1 668
Chapter 10 - Actual Values

■ HARMONIC DET 1 HARMONIC DET 1

■ ó IA: 0.0%

HARMONIC DET 1
ô IB: 0.0%

HARMONIC DET 1
ô IC: 0.0%

HARMONIC DET 1
ô IAVG: 0.0%

HARMONIC DET 1
ñ IG: 0.0%

10.5.15 STATION BATTERY VOLTAGE

ACTUAL VALUES > METERING > STATION BATTERY VOLTAGE
■ STATION BATTERY BATTERY DC VOLT1: :
■ DC VOLTGE ó 0 Vdc

BATTERY DC VOLT2:
ñ 0 Vdc

10.5.16 MULTI-RANGE SIGNAL OSCILLATION DETECTOR (MSOD)

ACTUAL VALUES > METERING > MUTLI-RANGE SIGNAL OSCILL DETECTOR 1(2)

Note:
Only MSOD 1 is shown

■ MULTI-RANGE SIGNAL Freq_osc:

■ OSCILL DETECTOR 1 ó 0.00 Hz

Mag_osc:
ô 0.00 pu

Phase_osc:
ô 0.0 DEG

DampR_osc:
ñ 0.0 %

N60-1601-0125-861-1 669
Chapter 10 - Actual Values

10.6 REMOTE RESOURCES

Field Unit
ACTUAL VALUES > REMOTE RESOURCES > FIELD UNIT <slot and terminal>
■ FIELD UNIT U1 FIELD UNIT STATUS:
■ ID: U 1 ó DISABLED Range: Disabled, Enabled

BRICK SERIAL NUMBER:

ô

BRICK ORDER CODE:

ô CC-55

BRICK DIGITAL CORE:

ô 0

LOCAL TRANSCEIVER:
ô TX POWER: 0.0 dBm

BRICK TRANSCEIVER
ô RX POWER: 0.0 dBm

BRICK TRANSCEIVER
ô TX POWER: 0.0 dBm

LOCAL TRANSCEIVER
ñ RX POWER: 0.0 dBm

This menu displays when using a Process Bus Module for a HardFiber Brick.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 670
Chapter 10 - Actual Values

10.7 PROCESS BUS MODULE

10.7.1 GENERAL STATUS

ACTUAL VALUES > PB MODULE > GENERAL STATUS
■ GENERAL STATUS NETWORK CONFIG:
■ ó INDEPENDENT Range: INDEPENDENT, PRP, HSR, Dual HSR

Port 1a Status:
ô Disabled Range: Disabled, Enabled, Active

Port 4b Status:
ñ Disabled Range: Disabled, Enabled, Active

Note:
These menus display when the product includes a Process Bus Module with order code 85, 86, or 87. The actual values
display on the front panel and software. Additional values display in a web browser; enter the IP address of the relay and
access the Process Card Menu.

Ports applicable to the Process Bus Module display. The example shows all eight ports.
The information also displays in a web browser under Process Card Menu > Process Card Port Information.

10.7.2 RXSV STATUS

ACTUAL VALUES > PB MODULE > RxSV Status
■ RxSV Status All RxSV Online:
■ ó No Range: Yes, No

■ RxSV <n>
ô ■ n = 1 to 16 depending on model

ACTUAL VALUES > PB MODULE > RxSV Status > RxSV<n>

Note:
Only RxSV 1 is shown

■ RxSV 1 SV 1 Status:
■ ó Off Range: Off, On, Not Configured

SV 1 Sync Status:
ô No Sync Range: Local, Global, No Sync

N60-1601-0125-861-1 671
Chapter 10 - Actual Values

SV 1 SynchSrcID:
ô Range: Any 8-octet value
0000000000000000

SV 1 Sim Flag:
ô Range: Off, On
Off

SV 1 Delay:
ô Range: μs
0 μs

SV 1 Missed Frames:
ô Range: Yes, No
No

SV 1 Ch 1 Quality:
ô Range: 0000000000000
0

SV 1 Ch<n> Quality:
ñ 0

Additional actual values for sampled values display in a web browser. Enter the IP address of the relay and access
Process Card Menu > Process Card Diagnostics, for which the following fields are explained.
All SV diagnostics are volatile and are cleared when power is cycled.

Sample Value processing delay...Min Delay

The minimum time delay in received sample values. The accuracy threshold of this diagnostics is within 1/8 of a
power system cycle.

Sample Value processing delay...Max Delay

The maximum time delay in received sample values. The accuracy threshold of this diagnostics is within 1/8 of a
power system cycle.

Sample Value processing delay...Avg Delay

he average time delay for received sample values. A delay up to about 1.5 milliseconds (1500 µsec) is normal. The
accuracy threshold of this diagnostics is within 1/8 of a power system cycle.

SV Delay Alarm Counter

The number of times that sampled values from a configured SV stream are delayed for more than the Settings >
Process Bus Module > General > SV Delay Alarm setting. Counters wrap around when they reach 4294967295.

Sample Estimation Counter

The number of times that the relay used an internal estimation algorithm to substitute a missing sample value.
Counters wrap around when they reach 4294967295.

Stream Status
The status of a configured SV stream. If the Settings > Process Bus Module > SV Stream Config > SV Stream
setting is set to Disabled, this value is shown as Disabled. If the setting is set to IEC 61850-9-2LE or IEC 61869-9
and received sample values are accepted by the relay, this value is shown as Online. If received sample values are
rejected, or sample values are lost (frames not received), stream status changes to Offline.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 672
Chapter 10 - Actual Values

Latest Unacceptable Quality

Time stamp of the latest sample value with unacceptable quality, in any data item in a dataset. This time stamp has
1/8 of a power system cycle accuracy threshold.

Latest Sim Bit Change

The time stamp of latest change in simulation bit status of the received RxSV# messages. This time stamp has 1/8
of a power system cycle accuracy threshold.

SmpSync Latest Update Time

The time stamp of the latest sample value for which the SmpSync attribute was different from the previous samples.
This value determines when the time source that sample value stream is synchronized to has changed. This time
stamp has 1/8 of a power system cycle accuracy threshold.

SmpSync Changes in Past 24hrs

The number of times the SmpSync attribute in the sample value messages from this stream has changed in the
past 24 hours. This counter is updated every hour. Counters wrap around when they reach 4294967295. The
accuracy of this metric is 1.5 hours over a 24-hour period.

Sample Estimate Fail-Last 10s

The number of times that three or more out of five consecutive samples has been lost in the last 10 seconds. This
counter is updated every second. Counters wrap around when they reach 4294967295.

Sample Value Trouble Counter

The number of times that the SV Stream Trouble On minor self-test error is detected by the Process Bus Module.
Counters wrap around when they reach 4294967295.

10.7.3 CLOCK SYNCHRONIZING

ACTUAL VALUES > PB MODULE > PBM PTP
■ PBM PTP Clock Sync Source:
Range: CPU Clock, PBM PTP Clock, PBM Internal
■ ó None Clock, None

Grandmaster ID:
ô 00000000000000000 Range: any 8 octet value

Accuracy:
ô 0 ns Range: 0 to 999,999,999 ns

PBM SW1 PTP State Range: Disabled, No Signal, Calibrating, Synch’d

ô (INV UTCOFF), Synchronized, Qualifying, idle,
master
PBM SW2 PTP State Range: Disabled, No Signal, Calibrating, Synch’d
ñ (INV UTCOFF), Synchronized, Qualifying, idle,
master

Note:
Additional actual values for time are available under Actual Values > Status > Real Time Clock Synchronizing.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 673
Chapter 10 - Actual Values

Clock Sync Source

This is the time synchronizing source that the UR Process Bus Module is using at present. It displays CPU Clock
when the 1 pulse per second (PPS) signal from the main CPU drives the Process Bus Module clock. It displays
None when the Process Bus Module clock free runs. It displays SV Sync Stream when the Process Bus Module
clock is synchronized to the configured reference stream. It displays PBM Clock when the Process Bus Module
clock is synchronized to a PTP grandmaster clock. The time synchronizing source itself is set using SETTINGS >
PRODUCT SETUP > REAL TIME CLOCK and SETTINGS > PROCESS BUS MODULE > PBM PTP > PTP
FUNCTION. If the latter is not set, then the Sync Source displays None even when the REAL TIME CLOCK setting
is configured.

Grandmaster ID
This is the grandmaster clock (grandmasterIdentity) of the present PTP network if any. When the UR Process Bus
Module is not using any PTP grandmaster, this actual value is set to the ID of that relay and the relay is acting as
grandmaster in the network. The ID code is specified by PTP to be globally unique, so one can always know which
clock is grandmaster in a system with multiple grandmaster-capable clocks.

Accuracy
This is the estimated time error based on the clockAccuracy information embedded in the received time signal. This
actual value indicates the grandmaster clock accuracy. The clockAccuracy enumeration information received from
the grandmaster is translated into nanoseconds as specified in the following table. The value 999,999,999 indicates
that the magnitude of the estimated error is one second or more, or that the error cannot be estimated. The value
999,999,999 is used if the clockAccuracy received from grandmaster is in the ranges: 00 - 1F and 2F - FF. If the
relay is the grandmaster, the actual value indicates the estimated accuracy of the local clock and the same
information is embedded in the transmitted PTP messages. See defaultDS.clockQuality.clockAccuracy
for more information.
Value (hex) Specification
00-1F Reserved
20 The time is accurate to within 25 ns
21 The time is accurate to within 100 ns
22 The time is accurate to within 250 ns
23 The time is accurate to within 1 µs
24 The time is accurate to within 2.5 µs
25 The time is accurate to within 10 µs
26 The time is accurate to within 25 µs
27 The time is accurate to within 100 µs
28 The time is accurate to within 250 µs
29 The time is accurate to within 1 ms
2A The time is accurate to within 2.5 ms
2B The time is accurate to within 10 ms
2C The time is accurate to within 25 ms
2D The time is accurate to within 100 ms
2E The time is accurate to within 250 ms
2F The time is accurate to within 1 s
30 The time is accurate to within 10 s
31 The time is accurate to greater than 10 s
32-7F Reserved
80-FD For use by alternate PTP profiles
FE Unknown

N60-1601-0125-861-1 674
Chapter 10 - Actual Values

Value (hex) Specification

FF Reserved

PBM SW1 PTP State and PBM SW2 PTP State

These are actual values that indicate the PTP clock sate at switch level. The possible values are as follows:
● DISABLED: The PTP function setting is disabled. With all other values, the PTP function is enabled.
● NO SIGNAL: No signal from an active master has been found.
● CALIBRATING: An active master has been selected but is not yet locked in.
● SYNCHRONIZED: The signal is synchronized.
● SYNCH’D(INV UTCOff): This value is shown if the signal is synchronized to the PTP master but with
currentUtcOffsetValid = False
● QUALIFYING: This value is shown if the local clock is the better clock, but it is waiting for the qualification
time to expire
● IDLE: The port is neither slave nor master and is in a PASSIVE state.
● MASTER: The he port is acting as the master.

Explanation of ports
The UR Process bus module has a total of 8 ports. They are implemented using 2 switches (4 ports on each
switch). Switch1 includes port 1a, 1b, 2a and 2b, and Switch 2 includes 3a, 3b, 4a and 4b. The UR process bus
module implements a hybrid PTP clock. Both the switches implement a stateless transparent clock between the 4
ports of the switch, and on top an ordinary clock is implemented between the two switches. So, the PTP states are
not applicable at port level, but the states are maintained at switch level. Enabled ports on each switch operate in
stateless transparent clock mode and PTP messages are forwarded between the ports of that switch.
At switch level, each switch acts as an independent ordinary clock and no messages are forwarded between the
switches. A BMCA is run between both the ordinary clocks of the switches, and the selected best master is
synchronized to the PBM local clock. If grandmasters are available on both switches, both the switches can be in a
SLAVE state. However internally, the PBM runs BMCA on both switches and selects one as the best master. The
Grandmaster ID indicates the selected master. In master-slave mode, if the switch state is master, the time is
encoded from the PBM local clock, and messages are sent as if the switch is a grandmaster.
The enabled transceiver ports on the PBM module operate in stateless transparent clock mode. For this reason we
recommend setting the Network Config setting to match the network topology. This will avoid unnecessary data
storms. For example, if the PRP network has multiple relays connected on a PRP LAN and if its Process Bus
Module -> General -> Network Config setting is configured as Independent, PTP messages other than the
PDelay message are forwarded between the connected ports, which can create PTP Data storm.

10.7.4 PRP
ACTUAL VALUES > PB Module > PBM PRP Status
■ PBM PRP Status Total Rx Port A:
■ ó 0 Range: 0 t0 4G

Total Rx Port B:
ô 0 Range: 0 t0 4G

Total Errors Port A:

ô 0 Range: 0 t0 4G

N60-1601-0125-861-1 675
Chapter 10 - Actual Values

Total Errors Port B:

ô 0 Range: 0 t0 4G

Mismatches Port A:
ô 0 Range: 0 t0 4G

Mismatches Port B:
ô 0 Range: 0 t0 4G

FER Port A:
ô 0 Range: 0 t0 4G

FER Port B:
0 Range: 0 t0 4G

Link Active Port A:

No Range: Yes, No

Link Active Port B:

ñ No Range: Yes, No

Total Rx Port A
Counter for total messages received (either from DANPs or from SANs) on Port A

Total Rx Port B
Counter for total messages received (either from DANPs or from SANs) on Port B

Total Errors Port A

Counter for total messages received with an error (bad port code, frame length too short) on Port A

Total Errors Port B

Counter for total messages received with an error (bad port code, frame length too short) on Port B

Mismatches Port A
Counter for total messages received with an error on Port A (PRP frame, but port received through and LAN id in
the frame don’t match)

Mismatches Port B
Counter for total messages received with an error on Port B (PRP frame, but port received through and LAN id in
the frame don’t match),

FER Port A
Frame Error Rate is a counter which counts Erroneous messages on channel A for every 1000 messages
forwarded to Application.

FER Port B
Frame Error Rate is a counter which counts Erroneous messages on channel B for every 1000 messages
forwarded to Application.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 676
Chapter 10 - Actual Values

Link Active Port A

If true, link is up and channel A is receiving telegrams within a specified time interval (5 s).

Link Active Port B

If true, link is up and channel B is receiving telegrams within a specified time interval (5 s).
Actual values for the Parallel Redundancy Protocol (PRP) display in a web browser. Enter the IP address of the
relay and access the Process Card Menu > Process Card PRP Statistics, which displays only when PRP is used.
● PRP Status — PRP is Enabled if Settings > Process Bus Module > General > Network Config is set to PRP,
else it is Disabled.
● Total Rx Port A — Counter indicating the number of frames received on port A, for example port 1a.
● Total Rx Port B — Counter indicating the number of frames received on port B, for example port 1b.
● Total Tx Port A — Counter indicating the number of frames sent on port A, for example port 1a.
● Total Tx Port B — Counter indicating the number of frames sent on port B, for example port 1b.
● Mismatches Port A — Counter indicating the number of erroneous frames received on port A, for example
port 1a.
● Mismatches Port B — Counter indicating the number of erroneous frames received on port B, for example
port 1b.
● Duplicates Removed Port A — Number of PRP duplicate frames received from port A and discarded, for
example port 1a.
● Duplicates Removed Port B — Number of PRP duplicate frames received from port B and discarded, for
example port 1b.

10.7.5 HSR
Actual values for High-Availability Seamless Redundancy (HSR) display in a web browser. Enter the IP address of
the relay and access the Process Card Menu > Process Card HSR Statistics, which displays only when HSR is
used.
● HSR1 Status — Status of the first ring, either enabled or disabled. Enabled when redundancy is set to HSR
or Dual-HSR.
● HSR2 Status — Status of the second ring, either enabled or disabled. Enabled when redundancy is set to
HSR or Dual-HSR.
● Total Rx Port A — Counter indicating the number of frames received on port A, for example port 1a.
● Total Rx Port B — Counter indicating the number of frames received on port B for example port 1b.
● Total Tx Port A — Counter indicating the number of frames sent on port A, for example port 1a.
● Total Tx Port B — Counter indicating the number of frames sent on port B, for example port 1b.
● Duplicates Removed Port A — Number of HSR duplicate frames received from port A and discarded, for
example port 1a.
● Duplicates Removed Port B — Number of HSR duplicate frames received from port B and discarded, for
example port 1b

N60-1601-0125-861-1 677
Chapter 10 - Actual Values

10.8 RECORDS

10.8.1 USER PROGRAMMABLE FAULT REPORTS

ACTUAL VALUES > RECORDS > USER PROGRAMMABLE FAULT REPORTS
■ USER PROGRAMMABLE NEWEST RECORD
■ FAULT REPORTS ó NUMBER: 0

LAST CLEARED DATE:

ô 2020/08/11 14:23:57

LAST REPORT DATE:

ñ 2020/10/09 08:25:27

This menu displays the user-programmable fault report actual values. See the User Programmable Fault Report
section for information on this feature.

10.8.2 EVENT RECORDS

10.8.2.1 ENHANCED AND BASIC FRONT PANELS

ACTUAL VALUES > RECORDS > EVENT RECORDS
■ EVENT RECORDS EVENT: <latest event number>
Click right arrow to replace Event cause with Event
■ ó <Event cause> date and time stamp. Click left arrow to go back.

... up to 1024 events

ô

EVENT: <oldest event number>

ñ <Event cause>

The event records menu shows the contextual data associated with up to the last 1024 events, listed in
chronological order from most recent to oldest. When all 1024 event records have been filled, the oldest record is
removed as a new record is added. Each event record shows the event identifier/sequence number, cause, and
date/time stamp associated with the event trigger. See the COMMANDS > CLEAR RECORDS menu for clearing
event records.
Only major output operands generate events, not every operand. Elements that assert output per phase, for
example, log operating phase output only without asserting the common three-phase operand event.
See also the system log (syslog) information in the previous chapter.
The event records are viewable in the software and in a web browser. The figure shows the event records in the
software.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 678
Chapter 10 - Actual Values

Figure 337: Event records viewed in EnerVista software

To view events in a web browser, enter the IP address of the device.

To download an oscillography waveform, click the Oscillography icon in the Data column (not shown in the figure).

10.8.2.2 GRAPHICAL FRONT PANEL

To display the event records page, press the Home pushbutton then the Event Record Tab pushbutton.
The newest event is always at the top.
Up and Down pushbuttons move the event selector up and down. When the selector is at the bottom of the display,
the Down pushbutton also scrolls the page, and similarly when the active selector is at the top of the display the Up
pushbutton scroll the page.
A selected event is highlighted in yellow and becomes active by pressing the Up or Down pushbutton.
There are two event markers, one green, the other cyan. To mark some an event, use the Up and Down
pushbuttons to select it (highlight in yellow), then press the green or cyan Mark Event Tab pushbutton. The mark
color hides the selector until the selector is moved. A field at the top of the page shows the interval between the two
marks.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 679
Chapter 10 - Actual Values

Figure 338: Event record

10.8.3 OSCILLOGRAPHY
ACTUAL VALUES > RECORDS > OSCILLOGRAPHY
■ OSCILLOGRAPHY FORCE TRIGGER?
■ ó No Range: No, Yes

NUMBER OF TRIGGERS:
ô 0

AVAILABLE RECORDS:
ô 0

CYCLES PER RECORD:

ô 0

LAST CLEARED DATE:

ñ 2019/07/14 15:40:16

This menu allows the user to view the number of triggers involved and number of oscillography traces available.
The cycles per record value is calculated to account for the fixed amount of data storage for oscillography. See the
Oscillography section of chapter 5 for details.
A trigger can be forced here at any time by setting Yes to the FORCE TRIGGER? command. See the
COMMANDS > CLEAR RECORDS menu for information on clearing the oscillography records.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 680
Chapter 10 - Actual Values

To view a waveform:
1. Access Actual Values > Records > Oscillography in the EnerVista software.
2. In the window that opens, select the record number. The highest number is the most recent record (Newest
Record Number).
3. Click the Read button to get the waveform. When available, waveforms are displayed graphically, and
otherwise error messages display.
4. In the waveform window that opens, you can save the file, for example with the CFG extension.

10.8.4 DATA LOGGER

ACTUAL VALUES > RECORDS > DATA LOGGER
■ DATA LOGGER OLDEST SAMPLE TIME:
■ ó 2020/01/14 13:45:51

NEWEST SAMPLE TIME:

ñ 2020/01/14 15:21:19

The OLDEST SAMPLE TIME represents the time at which the oldest available samples were taken. It is static until
the log gets full, at which time it starts counting at the defined sampling rate.
The NEWEST SAMPLE TIME represents the time the most recent samples were taken. It counts up at the defined
sampling rate. If the data logger channels are defined, then both values are static.
See the COMMANDS > CLEAR RECORDS menu for clearing data logger records.

10.8.5 PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT

ACTUAL VALUES > RECORDS > PMU RECORDS
■ PMU NUMBER OF TRIGGERS:
■ RECORDS ó 0 Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1

■ PMU 1
ñ ■ RECORDING

The number of triggers applicable to the Phasor Measurement Unit recorder is indicated by the NUMBER OF
TRIGGERS value. The status of the phasor measurement unit recorder is indicated as follows.
ACTUAL VALUES > RECORDS > PMU RECORDS > PMU 1 RECORDING
■ PMU 1 PMU 1 FORCE TRIGGER:
■ RECORDING ó No Range: No, Yes

PMU 1 AVAILABLE
ô RECORDS: 0 Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1

PMU 1 SECONDS PER

ô RECORD: 0.0 Range: 0 to 6553.5 in steps of 0.1

PMU 1 LAST CLEARED:

ñ 2013/07/14 15:40:16 Range: YYYY/MM/DD HH:MM:SS

N60-1601-0125-861-1 681
Chapter 10 - Actual Values

10.9 PRODUCT INFORMATION

10.9.1 MODEL INFORMATION

ACTUAL VALUES > PRODUCT INFO > MODEL INFORMATION
■ MODEL INFORMATION ORDER CODE LINE 1:
■ ó <order code> Range: standard GE order code format

ORDER CODE LINE 2:

ô <order code continued> Range: up to 20 alphanumeric characters

ORDER CODE LINE 3:

ô <order code continued> Range: up to 20 alphanumeric characters

ORDER CODE LINE 3:

ô <order code continued> Range: up to 20 alphanumeric characters

SERIAL NUMBER:
ô <serial number> Range: standard GE serial number format

ETHERNET MAC ADDRESS

ô <MAC address> Range: standard Ethernet MAC address format

MANUFACTURING DATE:
ô <Date> Range: YYYY/MM/DD HH:MM:SS

OPERATING TIME:
ô <accumulative operating time> Range: HH:MM:SS

PMU FEATURE ACTIVE:

ô No Range: Yes, No

CT/ VT ADVANCED DIAG

Range: Yes, No
ô ACTIVE: No
(not L60)

LAST SETTING CHANGE:

ô <Date of last setting change> Range: YYYY/MM/DD HH:MM:SS

PBM MAC ADDRESS:

ñ <MAC address> Range: YYYY/MM/DD HH:MM:SS

The order code, serial number, Ethernet MAC address, date and time of manufacture, and operating time are
shown here. The rear panel on the device contains similar information. The information is read-only in the software
and modifiable on the front panel. For example, the order code can be corrected using the front panel.

ETHERNET MAC ADDRESS

UR devices with firmware 7.0x and above have three Ethernet ports that can be used on three networks. The MAC
address displays for port 1. The MAC address for port 2 is one higher. The MAC address for port 3 is one higher
than port 2. In redundant mode, the MAC addresses for ports 2 and 3 are the same as port 2.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 682
Chapter 10 - Actual Values

PBM MAC ADDRESS

The MAC address for the Process Bus Module.

10.9.2 FIRMWARE REVISIONS

Enhanced and basic front panels

ACTUAL VALUES > PRODUCT INFO > FIRMWARE REVISIONS
■ FIRMWARE REVISIONS N60
Range: 0.00 to 655.35
■ ó REVISION: 8.61
Revision number of the application firmware.

MODIFICATION FILE
Range: 0 to 65535 (ID of the MOD FILE)
ô NUMBER: 0
Value is 0 for each standard firmware release.

BOOT PROGRAM
Range: 0.00 to 655.35
ô REVISION:
Revision number of the boot program firmware.

FRONT PANEL PROGRAM

Range: 0.00 to 655.35
ô REVISION:
Revision number of front panel program firmware.

COMPILE DATE:
Range: YYYY/MM/DD HH:MM:SS
ô
Date and time when product firmware was built.

BOOT DATE:
Range: YYYY/MM/DD HH:MM:SS
ô
Date and time when the boot program was built.

PROCESS BUS BOOT

ô REVISION: Range: 0.00 to 655.35

PB BOOT DATE:
ô Range: YYYY/MM/DD HH:MM:SS

PROCESS BUS
ô REVISION: Range: 0.00 to 655.35

PROCESS BUS DATE:

ô Range: YYYY/MM/DD HH:MM:SS

PB CVSOC FPGA
ô REVISION: Range: 0.00 to 655.35

PB CVFPGA FPGA
ô REVISION: Range: 0.00 to 655.35

PB CVFPGA SIGN:
ô

FPGA PROGRAM
Range: 0.00 to 655.35
ô REVISION:
Revision number for FPGA.

FPGA DATE:
Range: YYYY/MM/DD HH:MM:SS
ñ
Date and time when the FPGA was built.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 683
Chapter 10 - Actual Values

The shown data is illustrative only. A modification file number of 0 indicates that, currently, no modifications have
been installed. PB and process bus refer to the Process Bus Module.

Graphical front panel

With a graphical front panel (GFP), the following additional items display in the software.

GFP PROGRAM
ô REVISION: Range: 0.00 to 655.35

GFP COMPILE DATE:

ô Range: YYYY/MM/DD HH:MM:SS

GFP BOOT PROGRAM

ô REVISION: Range: 0.00 to 655.35

GFP BOOT COMP. DATE:

ñ Range: YYYY/MM/DD HH:MM:SS

N60-1601-0125-861-1 684
 CHAPTER 11

COMMANDS AND TARGETS

Chapter 11 - Commands and targets

11.1 CHAPTER OVERVIEW

This chapter contains the following sections:

Chapter Overview 686
Commands menu 687
Targets menu 694

N60-1601-0125-861-1 686
Chapter 11 - Commands and targets

11.2 COMMANDS MENU

COMMANDS

■ ■ COMMANDS
ò
■ ■ VIRTUAL INPUTS
■ ■ COMMANDS
ô
■ ■ CLEAR RECORDS
■ ■ COMMANDS
ô
■ ■ SET DATE AND TIME
■ ■ COMMANDS
ô
■ ■ RELAY MAINTENANCE
■ ■ CAPACITOR BANK
ô C70 only
■ ■ AUTO-SETTING
■ ■ COMMANDS C60, C95, D60, F60, G60, L90, N60, L30, T60
ô
■ ■ PMU ONE-SHOT only
■ ■ COMMANDS
ô
■ ■ SECURITY
■ ■ COMMANDS
ô T35, only
■ ■ TRANSFORMER AUTO-SET...
■ ■ COMMANDS
ñ T60 only
■ ■ T/F 1(2) AUTO-SET...

The commands menu contains relay directives intended for operations personnel. All commands can be protected
from unauthorized access via the command password; see the Security section of chapter 5 for details. The
following flash message appears after successfully command entry.
COMMAND
EXECUTED

11.2.1 VIRTUAL INPUTS

COMMANDS > VIRTUAL INPUTS
■ ■ COMMANDS Virt Ip <n>
■ ■ VIRTUAL INPUTS ó Off Range: Off, On

11.2.2 CLEAR RECORDS

COMMANDS > CLEAR RECORDS
■ ■ COMMANDS CLEAR USER FAULT
■ ■ CLEAR RECORDS ó REPORTS? No Range: No, Yes

CLEAR EVENT RECORDS?

ô Range: No, Yes
No

N60-1601-0125-861-1 687
Chapter 11 - Commands and targets

CLEAR OSCILLOGRAPHY?
ô Range: No, Yes
No
CLEAR DATA LOGGER?
ô Range: No, Yes
No
CLEAR DEMAND
ô Range: No, Yes
RECORDS? No
CLEAR ENERGY?
ô Range: No, Yes
No
CLEAR UNAUTHORIZED
ô Range: No, Yes
ACCESS? No
CLEAR DIRECT I/O Range: No, Yes.
ô
COUNTERS? No Valid only for units with Direct Input/Output module.
CLEAR PMU <n> RECORDS? Range: No, Yes
ô
No n = 1 to 6
CLEAR PMU <n> CONFIG Range: No, Yes
ô
CHANGE COUNTER? No n = 1 to 6
■ CLEAR IEC61850
ô
■ XWSI OPCNT
■ CLEAR IEC61850
ô
■XCBR OPCNT
CLEAR SV
ô Range: No, Yes
DIAGNOSTICS? No
CLEAR ALL RELAY
ñ Range: No, Yes
RECORDS? No

The CLEAR SV DIAGNOSTICS command clears the sampled value diagnostics information for a non-HardFiber
Process Bus Module. All other Process Bus Module diagnostics information is reset up relay power cycling, such as
HSR and PTP.
COMMANDS > CLEAR RECORDS > CLEAR IEC61850 XWSI OPCNT
■ CLEAR IEC61850 CLEAR XSWI <n>
Range: No, Yes
■ XWSI OPCNT ó OpCnt? No
n = 1 to 24

COMMANDS > CLEAR RECORDS > CLEAR IEC61850 XCBR OPCNT

■ CLEAR IEC61850 CLEAR XSWI <n>
Range: No, Yes
■ XCBR OPCNT ó OpCnt? No
n = 1 to 8

The Clear XSWI commands clear the disconnect operation counters for each phase and the three-phase counter.
Similarly, the Clear XCBR commands clear the circuit breaker operation counters for each phase and the three-
phase counter.

11.2.3 SET DATE AND TIME

COMMANDS > SET DATE AND TIME
■ ■ COMMANDS SET DATE AND TIME:
■ ■ SET DATE AND TIME ó <YYYY/MM/DD HH:MM:SS> Range: YYYY/MM/DD HH:MM:SS

N60-1601-0125-861-1 688
Chapter 11 - Commands and targets

The date and time can be entered on the front panel keypad. The time setting is based on the 24-hour clock. The
complete date, as a minimum, must be entered to allow execution of this command. The new time and date take
effect when the ENTER key is pressed.
The clock also can be synchronized to the local computer time among several UR devices. Use the Synchronize
Devices entry in the Online Window area of the EnerVista software. (Click the button at the top of the window that
opens.)
When the relay is synchronizing to an external time source such as PTP, IRIG-B, or SNTP, the manually entered
time or the manually synchronized time is over-written.
The timescale of the entered time is local time, including daylight savings time where and when applicable.

11.2.4 RELAY MAINTENANCE

COMMANDS > RELAY MAINTENANCE
■ ■ COMMANDS PERFORM LAMP TEST?
■ ■ RELAY MAINTENANCE ó No Range: No, Yes

PERFORM LCD TEST? Range: Off, Red, Green, Blue, White & Text Pattern,
ô
Off Black & Text Pattern, TV Test Pattern
PERFORM PUSHBUTTON
ô Range: No, Yes
TEST? No
UPDATE ORDER CODE?
ô Range: No, Yes
No
REBOOT RELAY?
ô Range: No, Yes
No
SERVICE COMMAND
ô Range: 0, 101, 20511
0
SAVE VOLATILE DATA?
ô Range: No, Yes
No
■ POWER SUPPLY
ô Range: see below
■

ô FRONT PANEL TYPE Range: see below

CHANGE REDUNDANT
ñ Range: see below
POWER SUPPLY

This menu contains commands for relay maintenance purposes. Commands for the lamp test and order code are
activated by changing a command setting to Yes and pressing the ENTER key. The command setting then
automatically reverts to No. The service command is activated by entering a numerical code and pressing the
ENTER key.
Not all commands display in the software; use the front panel when required.

PERFORM LAMP TEST

Turns on all front panel LEDs and display pixels for a short duration.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 689
Chapter 11 - Commands and targets

PERFORM LCD TEST

This command detects dead pixels in the display screen on the graphical front panel.
● RED, GREEN, BLUE is to display the solid background color in the whole screen.
● WHITE & TEXT PATTERN shows the white background and black texts.
● BLACK & TEXT PATTERN shows the black background and white texts.
● TV TEST PATTERN displays a standard television test pattern (SMPTE color bars). The test screen can be
canceled by pressing any pushbutton or after 30 seconds of inactivity.

PERFORM PUSHBUTTON TEST

This command tests the pushbuttons on the graphical front panel. During testing, press the corresponding
pushbutton according to the prompt text. A failure message is given if the expected action is not detected in one
minute. Holding the ESCAPE button for five seconds to interrupt the test sequence. The designated function of a
specific pushbutton is bypassed in the test.

UPDATE ORDER CODE

Use this command to read and update the order code, for example when hardware modules have been changed
inside the relay. It causes the relay to scan the backplane for the modules and update the order code to match. All
settings are defaulted with an update. When an update occurs, the following message displays and the relay
restarts.
There is no impact if there have been no changes to the hardware modules. When an update does not occur, the
ORDER CODE NOT UPDATED message displays.

REBOOT RELAY
This command restarts the relay so that changes to configuration settings can take effect. In most cases, if changes
are made to the configuration settings these changes do not take effect unless the relay is rebooted.

Note:
With the CyberSentry option, the Administrator and Operator roles can initiate the Reboot Relay command.

SERVICE COMMAND
This command Performs specific Product service actions. Presently, there are two service actions available.
● Code 20511 returns all settings to their factory default value and restarts the relay (then you re-enter IP
address, restart, set unit to Programmed).
● Code 101 is used to clear factory diagnostic information stored in the non-volatile memory. If a code other
than these two is entered, the command is ignored and no action is taken. Various self-checking diagnostics
are performed in the background while the Product is running, and diagnostic information is stored on the
non-volatile memory from time to time based on the self-checking result. Although the diagnostic information
is cleared before the Product is shipped from the factory, the user may want to clear the diagnostic
information for themselves under certain circumstances. For example, you clear diagnostic information after
replacement of hardware. Once the diagnostic information is cleared, all self-checking variables are reset to
their initial state and diagnostics restart from scratch.

SAVE VOLATILE DATA

Saves this data to compact flash memory prior to shutdown. This allows the saved data to be as recent as possible
instead of relying on the periodic timer to save the data.

POWER SUPPLY
Change power supply to: High or Low

N60-1601-0125-861-1 690
Chapter 11 - Commands and targets

Update redundant power supply: No, Yes

FRONT PANEL TYPE

You can change the front panel type according to the following options.
EN BASIC, EN BASIC WITH PB, ZH BASIC, ZH BASIC WITH PB, FR BASIC, FR BASIC WITH PB, RU BASIC, RU
BASIC WITH PB, DE ENHANCED, DE ENHANCED WITH PB, EN ENHANCED, EN ENHANCED WITH PB, FR
ENHANCED, FR ENHANCED WITH PB, RU ENHANCED, RU ENHANCED WITH PB, ZH ENHANCED, ZH
ENHANCED WITH PB, TR ENHANCED, TR ENHANCED WITH PB, PL ENHANCED, PL ENHANCED WITH PB.

11.2.5 PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT ONE-SHOT

COMMANDS > PMU ONE-SHOT
■ ■ COMMANDS PMU ONE-SHOT
■ ■ PMU ONE-SHOT ó FUNCTION: Disabled Range: Enabled, Disabled

PMU ONE-SHOT
ô Range: 0 to 99 in steps of 1
FRACTIONAL SEC: 0
PMU ONE-SHOT TIME:
ñ Range: YYYY/MM/DD HH:MM:SS
2020/06/14 7:58:35

This feature allows pre-scheduling of a PMU measurement at a specific point in time. It can be used to test for
accuracy of the PMU and for manual collection of synchronized measurements through the system, as explained
here.
When enabled, the function continuously compares the present time with the pre-set PMU ONE-SHOT TIME. When
the two times match, the function compares the present sequence number of the measured synchrophasors with
the pre-set PMU ONE-SHOT FRACTIONAL SEC. When the two numbers match, the function freezes the
synchrophasor actual values and the corresponding protocol data items for 30 seconds. This allows manual read-
out of the synchrophasor values for the pre-set time and pre-set sequence number (via the faceplate display,
supported communication protocols such as Modbus or DNP, and the EnerVista UR Setup software).
When freezing the actual values, the function also asserts a PMU ONE-SHOT OP FlexLogic operand. This operand
can be configured to drive an output contact and trigger an external measuring device such as a digital scope with
the intent to verify the accuracy of the PMU under test.
With reference to the following figure, the PMU one-shot function (when enabled) controls three FlexLogic
operands:
The PMU ONE-SHOT EXPIRED operand indicates that the one-shot operation has been executed, and the present
time is at least 30 seconds past the scheduled one-shot time
The PMU ONE-SHOT PENDING operand indicates that the one-shot operation is pending; that is, the present time
is before the scheduled one-shot time
The PMU ONE-SHOT OP operand indicates the one-shot operation and remains asserted for 30 seconds
afterwards
When the function is disabled, all three operands are de-asserted.
The one-shot function applies to all logical PMUs of a given Product relay.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 691
Chapter 11 - Commands and targets

Figure 339: PMU one-shot FlexLogic operands

Testing Accuracy of the PMU

The one-shot feature is used to test accuracy of the synchrophasor measurement. GPS-synchronized tests sets
perform a similar function to PMUs; instead of measuring the phasor from physical signals with respect to the
externally provided time reference, they produce the physical signals with respect to the externally provided time
reference, given the desired phasor values. Therefore the GPS-synchronized test sets cannot be automatically
assumed more accurate than the PMUs under test. This calls for a method to verify both the measuring device
(PMU) and the source of signal (test set).
With reference to the following figure, the one-shot feature can be configured to trigger a high-accuracy scope to
capture both the time reference signal (rising edge of the 1 pps signal of the IRIG-B time reference) and the
measured waveform. The high-accuracy high-sampling rate record of the two signals captured by the scope can be
processed using digital tools to verify the magnitude and phase angle with respect to the time reference signal. As
both the time reference and the measured signals are raw inputs to the PMU under test, their independently
captured record, processed using third-party software, is a good reference point for accuracy calculations. Such a
record proves useful when discussing the test results, and can be retained as a part of the testing documentation.

Figure 340: Using the PMU one-shot feature to test synchrophasor measurement accuracy

N60-1601-0125-861-1 692
Chapter 11 - Commands and targets

Collecting synchronized measurements ad hoc

The one-shot feature can be used for ad hoc collection of synchronized measurements in the network. Two or more
PMUs can be pre-scheduled to freeze their measurements at the same time. When frozen, the measurements can
be collected using the EnerVista software or a protocol client.

11.2.6 SECURITY
COMMANDS > SECURITY
■ ■ SECURITY ADMINISTRATOR
■■ ó LOGOFF: No Range: No, Yes

ENGINEER
ô Range: No, Yes
LOGOFF: No
OPERATOR
ô Range: No, Yes
LOGOFF: No
CLEAR SECURITY DATA:
ñ Range: No, Yes
No

With the CyberSentry option, this setting is available to enable or disable the following commands.

ADMINISTRATOR LOGOFF
Selecting Yes allows the Supervisor to forcefully logoff an administrator session.

ENGINEER LOGOFF
Selecting Yes allows the Supervisor to forcefully logoff an engineer session.

OPERATOR LOGOFF
Selecting Yes allows the Supervisor to forcefully logoff an operator session.

CLEAR SECURITY DATA

Selecting Yes allows the Supervisor to forcefully clear all the security logs and clears all the operands associated
with the self-tests.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 693
Chapter 11 - Commands and targets

11.3 TARGETS MENU

TARGETS

PHASE TOC4 Displayed only if targets for this element are active.
ò
OP: A B - Example shown.
DIGITAL ELEMENT 48: Displayed only if targets for this element are active.
ô
LATCHED Example shown.

A target enables the EnerVista UR Setup software to monitor automatically and display the status of any active
target messages of all the devices inserted into that site.
Each Product element with a TARGET setting has a target message that when activated by its element is displayed
in sequence with any other currently active target messages in the TARGETS menu. In the example shown, the
Phase TOC4 and Digital Element 48 target settings are active and so have their targets displayed. The down
arrow below the two elements indicates that there can be other active elements beyond these two.
For more information, see the description of target messages in the next section, and the Introduction to Elements
section in the Settings chapter for instructions on TARGET setting.
When no targets are active, the display reads NO ACTIVE TARGETS.

11.3.1 TARGET MESSAGES

When there are no active targets, the first target to become active causes the display to immediately default to that
message. If there are active targets and the user is navigating through other messages, and when the default
message timer times out (i.e. the keypad has not been used for a determined period of time), the display again
defaults back to the target message.
The range of variables for the target messages is described below. Phase information is included if applicable. If a
target message status changes, the status with the highest priority displays.
Priority Active status Description
1 OP element operated and still picked up
2 PKP element picked up and timed out
3 LATCHED element had operated but has dropped out

If a self test error is detected, a message appears indicating the cause of the error. For example UNIT NOT
PROGRAMMED indicates that the minimal relay settings have not been programmed.

11.3.2 RELAY SELF-TESTS

The relay performs a number of self-test diagnostic checks to ensure device integrity. The two types of self-tests
(major and minor) are listed in the following tables. When either type of error occurs, the Trouble LED Indicator
turns on and a target message displays. All errors record an event in the event recorder. Latched errors can be
cleared by pressing the RESET key, providing the condition is no longer present.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 694
Chapter 11 - Commands and targets

Major self-test errors also result in the following:

● The critical fail relay on the power supply module de-energizes
● All other output relays de-energize and are prevented from further operation
● The front panel In Service LED indicator turns off
● A RELAY OUT OF SERVICE event is recorded
To view error messages in EnerVista software:
Access Actual Values > Records > Event Records.

Messages display on the front panel with one or two lines of text. An example is as follows:

MAINTENANCE ALERT:
4L Discrepancy

MAINTENANCE ALERT:
Bad IRIG-B Signal

11.3.3 MAJOR SELF-TEST ERROR MESSAGES

Error Latched? Description Test frequency Action
DIAGNOSTIC FAILURE : No (self-reset) This serves as a warning indicating an issue within the DSP/COP Upon recovery Extract a Service Report through UR Setup software. Contact
Self Test Error subsystem. The root cause of the problem is uncertain, attributed to technical support.
several contributors. To pinpoint the likely cause, it is advisable to
conduct DSP diagnostics.
EQUIPMENT MISMATCH: No The number or type of installed hardware modules does not match On power up. Afterwards, the Check all modules against the order code, ensure they are
2nd line detail the order code stored in the Product. For example, when a basic backplane is checked for inserted properly, and cycle control power. If a module has
front panel is installed and the order code on the Product expects a missing cards every five intentionally been added or removed, refresh the order code
graphical front panel. seconds under Device Setup. If the problem persists, contact the factory.

FLEXLOGIC ERROR: No A FlexLogic equation is incorrect Event driven, performed Finish all equation editing and use self tests to debug any
2nd line detail whenever FlexLogic equations errors.
are modified

RAM FILESYSTEM FAIL: Yes The relay failed to create the RAM file system On relay startup Contact factory service
Self-Test Error
SYSTEM FAILURE: Yes Relay system failure detected Continuous Extract a Service Report through UR Setup software. Contact
2nd line detail technical support.

SYSTEM FAILURE: Yes This signifies a DSP failure, with the message specifying both the The recommendation is to replace this DSP. Extract a Service
Card F8L slot and DSP type associated with the issue. Report through UR Setup software and provide it to GE
customer service..

TO INSTALL SETTINGS: Yes Certain settings require a reboot to be applied, for example DNP New CID is sent and it Restart relay
Check log and reboot settings, IEC 104 settings. After a CID file was send to the relay, a includes changes in settings
manual reboot of the relay is required to apply those settings that that require a reboot to be
require a reboot applied

UNIT NOT PROGRAMMED: No The PRODUCT SETUP > INSTALLATION > RELAY SETTINGS On power up and whenever Program all settings and then set PRODUCT SETUP >
Check Settings setting indicates the Product is not programmed the PRODUCT SETUP > INSTALLATION > RELAY SETTINGS to “Programmed”
INSTALLATION > RELAY
SETTINGS setting is altered

11.3.4 MINOR SELF-TEST ERROR MESSAGES

Error Latched? Description Test frequency Action
AGGREGATOR ERROR: No The second line of this self-test error indicates the problem with the Each time a PMU’s related Correct the problem indicated in the second line or contact the
(C60, C95, D60, F60, G60, L30, L90, PMU Aggregator settings is changed factory
T60 only)

N60-1601-0125-861-1 695
Chapter 11 - Commands and targets

Error Latched? Description Test frequency Action

DIAGNOSTIC ALARM COP: Yes This is an initial alert indicating an issue with the co-processor. Module or feature dependent Extract a Service Report through UR Setup software and
Self-test Error Despite this, the relay will continue to provide protection. However, provide it to GE customer service
certain functionalities, such as distance-related operations, may
experience a slight delay, especially when the fast distance feature is
activated and executed on the co-processor.

DIAGNOSTIC ALARM: Yes This serves as an initial alert signaling a potential issue with a DSP. Every protection pass Extract a Service Report through UR Setup software and
Card F8L The message will specify both the slot and DSP type associated with provide it to GE customer service
the problem..
DIAGNOSTIC ALARM: Yes This serves as an initial alert indicating a potential issue within the Every protection pass Extract a Service Report through UR Setup software. Contact
Self Test Error DSP/COP subsystem. The exact origin of the issue remains technical support.
unidentified due to various contributing factors. To determine the likely
cause, it is recommended to acquire DSP diagnostics.
DIRECT DEVICE OFF: No A direct device is configured but not connected Every second Check direct input and output configuration and wiring
COMM Path Incomplete
DOS PARTITION ALARM: There is a problem with the Compact Flash memory in the CPU On relay power-up and Contact the factory
SELF-TEST ERROR module afterwards once every 24
hours
FACTORY MODE ACTIVE No Factory Mode is active This is a reminder for the Supervisor (if enabled) or
Administrator to disable Settings > Product Setup > Security >
Supervisory > Factory Service Mode as soon as it is not needed
LOW ON MEMORY: Yes The relay periodically checks the amount of free RAM memory Every five seconds Contact the factory
with 2nd line detail available and the amount of free stack available for each task against
pre-defined thresholds. The second line of the self-test indicates
which of the tests failed. It asserts this self-test if those tests fail.
MAINTENANCE ALERT: No A discrepancy has been detected between the actual and desired Upon initiation of a contact Verify the state of the output contact and contact the factory if
4L Discrepancy state of a latching contact output of an installed type "4L" module output state change the problem persists

MAINTENANCE ALERT: No A bad IRIG-B input signal has been detected Monitored whenever an IRIG- Ensure the following:
Bad IRIG-B Signal B signal is received - The IRIG-B cable is properly connected.
- Proper cable functionality (that is, check for physical damage
or perform a continuity test).
- The IRIG-B receiver is functioning.
- Check the input signal level (it can be less than specification).
If none of these apply, then contact the factory.
MAINTENANCE ALERT: No No PTP enabled port has good PTP signal input Activated when no acceptable Ensure the following:
Bad PTP Signal signal is being received - The Ethernet cable(s) are properly connected.
- At least one PTP grandmaster-capable clock is functioning.
- If a strict power profile (PP) is enabled, that entire network is
PP compliant.
- The network is delivering PTP messages to the relay.
MAINTENANCE ALERT: No Direct input and output settings are configured for a ring, but the Every second Check direct input and output configuration and wiring
Direct Ring Break connection is not in a ring

MAINTENANCE ALERT: Yes A link loss detection on an Ethernet port. The link loss is due to Check the connection
FIRST ETHERNET FAIL unplugging the cable or the switch port being down.
SECOND ETHERNET FAIL
THIRD ETHERNET FAIL
MAINTENANCE ALERT: No The graphical front panel is not responsive for more than five Every second Contact the factory
Front Panel Trouble seconds. The relay is still protecting, and the main CPU is not
affected by this self-test.
MAINTENANCE ALERT: No The graphical front panel firmware revision is not synchronized with Whenever connection is Perform a UR firmware upgrade with the graphical front panel
GFP Version Mismatch that of the CPU module in the relay established between the connected to the CPU module in the relay. It can be done using
graphical front panel and the any communication interface (Ethernet or USB). This
CPU module in the relay synchronizes the graphical firmware revision with that of the
relay. If trouble persists, contact the factory.
MAINTENANCE ALERT: No A data item in a configurable GOOSE data set is oscillating Upon scanning of each Evaluate all logic pertaining to this item
Oscillatory GOOSE configurable GOOSE data set

MAINTENANCE ALERT: Yes The battery is weak or not functioning. It powers the real time clock. Every five seconds. The error Replace the battery as outlined in the Maintenance chapter. To
Replace Battery This message displays as Battery Fail in the event records. When the message displays after 60 minimize the disruption until battery replacement, temporarily
battery weakness reaches a critical level, the message displays seconds if the problem disable the battery fail function under Settings > Product Setup
persistently on the front panel and no front panel key navigation is persists. > User-Programmable Self Tests.
possible.
MAINTENANCE ALERT: No A faulty small form-factor pluggable port (SFP) or unplugging of the The web page "SFP Transceiver Information" described in the
SFP MODULE # FAIL SFP generates this self test message previous row applies for this self test as well. The "SFP Module
Fail" has higher priority and it suppresses the "Ethernet Fail"
target message. The "SFP MODULE FAIL FUNCTION" setting
enables/disables this self test. The target for this self test is
priority-based, with the third one being the highest priority. For
example, if all three SFP modules fail, then the third SFP target
is activated. If the third SFP module failure resolves, then the
second SFP target is activated.
MAINTENANCE ALERT: No The SNTP server is not responding Every 10 to 60 seconds Check that Ethernet cable(s) are properly connected. Check
SNTP Failure that configuration for the SNTP server corresponds to the actual
server settings. Check connectivity to the server (ping the server
IP address). Check that UR settings for both SNTP servers are
configured with different IP addresses and port numbers.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 696
Chapter 11 - Commands and targets

Error Latched? Description Test frequency Action

PBEthPort-# Offline Process Bus Module Ethernet port failure. Every five seconds Check connection to network switch/ Merging Unit and network
(Not B90, C30, L60 Error registers when an enabled port fails. switch

PB SFP Module # Fail Small form-factor pluggable port (SFP) at back of Process Bus Every five seconds Connect or replace with same SFP type
(Not B90, C30, L60 Module is faulty or unplugged

PROTOTYPE FIRMWARE: Seen until the build is tagged as being 'release candidate' or 'gold' Seen on startup and then Update firmware to either of these builds
Self Test Error build continuous

RRTD COMM FAIL: (Not B90) No Communications with remote RTD unit (RRTD) or GPM-F failed for Runs only if "Com2 Usage" is Check COM2 port settings, check RS485 cables
Self Test Error longer than 10 seconds set to RRTD or RRTD&GPM-
F. Checked every five
seconds.
RxGOOSE FAIL: No One or more RxGOOSE messages are not being received The self-test is activated when Check GOOSE setup
Missing messages no message is received within
the expected time interval,
which is the time-to-live time
in the previous message. This
time can be from milliseconds
to minutes.
RxGOOSE OFFLINE: No One or more RxGOOSE messages are not responding Event driven. The test is Check GOOSE setup
COMM Path Incomplete performed when a device
programmed to receive
GOOSE messages stops
receiving. This can be from 1
to 60 seconds, depending on
GOOSE packets.
OSC FIXED GOOSE: No A FlexOperand configured in DNA and UserSt bit pair is oscillating Upon scanning each DNA or Check Fixed GOOSE oscillation history on UR web page and
Self Test Error UserSt bit pair evaluate all logic pertaining to this item

AGGR CONFIG MISMATCH Yes There is a limitation when using six PMUs. The self-test trips when Event driven Reconfigure aggregators according to the rules, as follows:
(N60 only) any of the following acceptable conditions are violated. - For C37.118 with six PMU software option, the following is
- Two aggregators are allowed when using six PMUs, IEEE C37.118, acceptable:
and a 120/100 reporting rate a. 20/100 reporting rate: 2 aggregators are allowed
- One ASDU is allowed when using six PMUs, IEC 90-5, and a 60/50 - For 90-5 with six PMU software option, the following are
reporting rate acceptable
- One ASDU and one aggregator are allowed when using six PMUs, a. 60/50 reporting rate: six PMUs can be supported with one
IEC 90-5, and a 120/100 reporting rate ASDU only
b. 120/100 reporting rate: six PMUs can be supported with one
ASDU and one aggregator combination only
SETTINGS SAVE ERROR: Yes The relay failed to store the settings to the flash memory When a setting is changed Contact the factory
Contact Factory
STORAGE MEDIA ALARM: No The CPU module fails to read from or write to the Compact Flash On power up. Afterwards, Contact the factory
Self Test Error (CF) card inside the module. The CF card stores certain non-volatile every time the CPU accesses
data, such as event records, oscillography and datalogger records, the CF card for reading or
fault report values, and non-volatile actual values. Settings are not writing
stored in CF and hence are unaffected by this self-test.
SV# STREAM TROUBLE ON: Yes Asserted when Every protection pass Check:
(Not B90, C30, L60) 1. "3 out of 5 lost" errors are detected 1. Connection between Merging Unit (MU) and relay
2. No sampled values have been received for ~2 power cycles 2. SV stream configuration in the relay is matching the SV
3. Mismatch of test mode or simulation bit between UR and stream, for example check svID and confRev fields
subscribed SV streams 3. Check the Actual Values > PB Module > RXSV status>
4. Merging units subscribed by UR are not synchronized to the same rxsv1(16) page in the EnerVista software to verify the Sync
grandmaster and the drift is ~2 power cycles Status, Quality, and delays of the received sampled values and
5. Sampled values subscribed by the relay are not synchronized troubleshoot accordingly
according to the SMPSYNCH CHECK setting defined in the relay 4. Check that all merging units subscribed by the UR are
6. Quality of the received sampled values is not acceptable (either the synchronized according to the SMPSYNCH CHECK setting
quality is invalid, or questionable with Quality Check = Reject
Questionable)
SYSTEM EXCEPTION: Yes Abnormal restart from modules being removed or inserted while the Event driven Contact the factory
Press RESET key Product is powered-up, when there is an abnormal DC supply, or as a
result of internal relay failure.
TEMP MONITOR: Yes The ambient temperature is greater than the maximum operating Every hour Remove the Product from service and install in a location that
OVER TEMPERATURE temperature (+80°C) meets operating temperature standards

UNIT NOT CALIBRATED: Yes DSP module is not calibrated or calibration data is out of range On relay startup The respective DSP module has to be replaced, contact factory
with 2nd line DSP slot number detail service

VOLTAGE MONITOR: Yes The relay detected a problem with the internal voltage rails for longer Every five seconds Contact GE customer service
with 2nd line detail than 25 seconds
Power Supply 12V Low
Power Supply 12V High
Power Supply 5V Low
Power Supply 5V High
WRONG TRANSCEIVER:: Yes The type of SFP does not match the CPU type. The SFP is a silver A web page "SFP Transceiver Information" is provided. This
Self Test Error device that plugs into the rear of the CPU module. page displays the type of the SFP in it. This data is to be used
T-type CPU = All ports support fiber SFPs only with the CPU type to know the cause of the problem.
U-type CPU = Maintenance port needs RJ45 SFP and the other two
ports fiber SFPs
V-type CPU = All ports support RJ45 SFPs only
The consequence of an incorrect SFP can range from damage to the
Product to no power information for the Product on its web page
(enter IP address in a web browser, then click the SFP Transceiver
Information — only the type of SFP displays and not power data).

N60-1601-0125-861-1 697
Chapter 11 - Commands and targets

11.3.5 INSTANTANEOUS PROTECTION ELEMENTS TRIP SECURITY

Some self-tests are not fast enough to detect erroneous data and block protection elements, requiring additional
measures. A bit-flip in program memory is typically detected during a memory scan, which may be too late to inhibit
instantaneous protection element. To secure instantaneous elements, in addition to the self-tests described, there
are supervising elements that validate “fault” conditions and release IOC and differential elements operation.
These trip security elements use currents samples and phasors from the same sources as supervised protection
elements to detect independently true “fault” conditions from IOC or differential. Trip security elements do not have
any user settings and are enabled as soon as corresponding instantaneous elements are enabled. During
laboratory testing, these elements can be disabled by activating any IED test mode via the SETTINGS > TESTING
> IED MODE CONFIG menu by setting IED MODE to anything except On.
Trip security elements do not affect protection performance in any way.

Instantaneous Overcurrent
All enabled Phase IOC, Negative-Sequence, and Neutral IOCs in the active setting group are supervised by the trip
security element. The goals of the IOC trip security are as follows:
● Detect erroneous operate current due to wiring or data acquisition problem resulting in one phase current
dropping to zero, resulting in erroneous negative-sequence and neutral currents
● Justify current phasor magnitude increase with simultaneous current changes from samples
This is achieved by comparing current values of the current phasors and samples change with the values taken two
cycles before. Additionally, trip security elements monitor "pre-fault" current to detect if operate condition is
happening as a result of current decrease instead of increase.
The element is armed when there are no disturbances in currents for five cycles.

Differential elements (if applicable to the product)

Differential trip security runs for each differential zone. It monitors if differential current increase above the pickup
setting is confirmed by the disturbance detectors 50DD for each differential zone input. When a differential zone
fault occurs and at least two zone inputs carry some load, at least two disturbance detectors have to be activated.
Or when there is no load at any zone inputs (zone is energized but does not carry any load), at least one
disturbance detector has to be activated.
Consequently:
● If there is not any disturbance detector activation in at least one zone input — Differential trip is inhibited
● If there is just one zone input disturbance detector activation but load is present in at least two zone inputs
prior to the “fault” — Differential trip is inhibited
● If there is more than one disturbance detector zone input activation — Differential trip is allowed (normal
scenario)
● If differential trip is inhibited by the trip security element —active setting group change is not allowed
Activation of the 50DDs is essential especially when there is load in at least two zone inputs prior to the zone fault.
Sensitivity of the 50DD is defined by the SETTINGS > PRODUCT SETUP > DISPLAY PROPERTIES > CURRENT
CUT-OFF LEVEL setting with a range of 0.002pu to 0.02pu of the zone input CT. In case of the high-resistive zone
fault there may be enough current change in the source zone input causing sufficient differential current, but small
change in the load zone input-this situation can be addressed by reducing CURRENT CUTOFF LEVEL setting to
the sufficient sensitivity level. 50DD operates if there is a change at least 2 x CUTOFF in either positive-sequence,
or negative sequence or zero-sequence currents.

11.3.6 HARDFIBER MAJOR SELF-TEST ERROR MESSAGES

In addition to those provided by the standard UR-series devices, the UR devices implement HardFiber self-tests.
These are listed here. Any abnormal diagnostic condition indicated by the LEDs or the critical failure relay also

N60-1601-0125-861-1 698
Chapter 11 - Commands and targets

results in a self-test message, so troubleshooting is described here. For other relays, such as the B95Plus, see that
product’s instruction manual.
Error Description Severity Action
EQUIPMENT MISMATCH The number or type of installed hardware modules does not Protection is not available and all Check all modules against the order code. Ensure they are inserted properly, and
match the order code stored in the CPU. The standard UR-series contact outputs and shared outputs are cycle the control power. If a module has intentionally been added or removed use the
Equipment Mismatch self-test is extended to cover the possible de-asserted Update Order Code command to notify the relay that the current module
presence of a Process Card. configuration is correct.

MODULE FAILURE UR-series device module hardware failure detected Protection is not available and all Contact the factory and supply the failure code noted in the display. Text in the
contact outputs and shared outputs are message identifies the failed module (for example, H81). If operated on a Process
de-asserted Card failure, the Module Fail self-test seals-in (latches) till the UR-series device is
restarted.

PROCESS BUS FAILURE Mission critical data is not available via the process bus. An AC Protection is not available and all First rectify any Process Bus Trouble and Brick Trouble self-test errors. Check the
quantity is considered critical if both AC bank origins and the contact outputs and shared outputs are actual value of the operand referenced by the Process Bus Failure Operand setting,
crosschecking settings are other than None. This self-test is also de-asserted and if “On,” determine the cause and rectify.
initiated by an AC input discrepancy being detected. See the If the problem persists with the foregoing all clear, the cause must be an AC input
description in the Crosschecking setting in the HardFiber manual discrepancy, which is typically the result of problems in the input signals to the
for further information. In addition, this self-test can be initiated by Bricks, or faults in the Brick input conditioning hardware. If the error was annunciated
user logic responding to loss of critical contact input/output or the first time significant signal was encountered, suspect the former cause and check
other data using the Process Bus Failure Operand user- the copper connections external to the Brick. Where multiple UR-series devices have
programmable self-test setting. This setting is located in the self-test errors, look for common causes.
Settings > Product Setup > User-Programmable Self Test menu. To further isolate AC input discrepancy errors, put the relay in test-isolated mode,
then one by one, temporally change an AC bank Crosschecking setting to None, until
the Process Bus Failure clears. Once the problem AC bank has been identified, the
values from each of the two Bricks can be examined individually by temporarily
mapping each to an AC bank with a single origin.

11.3.7 HARDFIBER MINOR SELF-TEST ERROR MESSAGES

Error Description Severity Action
BRICK TROUBLE Brick internal self-testing has detected trouble internal to This self-test error does not directly Check the Brick environment for over/under temperatures and the voltage of its
the Brick inhibit protection. However, some or all power source. If the ambient temperature and supply voltage are within Brick
of the affected Brick inputs/outputs may specifications, consult the factory. Troubles resulting from a Brick output failing to
not be available to the UR device. respond to an output command can only be detected while the command is active,
and so in this case the target is latched. A latched target can be unlatched by
pressing the front panel reset key if the command has ended, however the output
can still be non-functional.

PROCESS BUS TROUBLE Communications problems with one or more Bricks. The This self-test error does not directly Check the field unit actual values. An indication of equipment mismatch means that
text of the message identifies the affected field units. inhibit protection. However, the affected messages are being received from a Brick, but there is a discrepancy between the
This self-test is initiated by low received signal levels at Brick inputs/outputs may not be settings and the actual Brick serial number, order code, and/or core number.
either the Brick or Process Card end, and by the available to the UR device. Check that the correct core on the correct Brick is patched through to the correct
sustained failure to receive poll responses from the Process Card port, and that the field unit settings are correct. An indication of
proper Brick. communications loss means that no messages are being received.
Check that the patching is correct, and that the Brick has power. If that is not the
problem, use a professional optical fiber connector cleaning kit to clean both sides of
all optical fiber connections from the Process Card through to the affected Brick. If
the problem continues after cleaning, consult the factory.

RTD TROUBLE

Self Test Error The Brick is reporting that the sensed RTD field Not latched Check field RTD settings and connections
connection does not match that of an RTD or
the reported DC input value is outside of the RTD
temperature range, greater than 250°C (likely open
sensor circuit fault) or less than -50°C (likely shorted
sensor fault).

TDR TROUBLE

Self Test Error The Brick is reporting that the sensed transducer field Not latched Check field transducer settings and connections
connection does not match that of a transducer, or the
reported DC input value is outside of the set transducer
input range, or the minimum value setting is equal to the
maximum value setting.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 699
 CHAPTER 12

COMMISSIONING
Chapter 12 - Commissioning

12.1 CHAPTER OVERVIEW

This chapter contains the following sections:

Chapter Overview 701
Overview 702
Testing underfrequency and overfrequency elements 703

N60-1601-0125-861-1 701
Chapter 12 - Commissioning

12.2 OVERVIEW
Instantaneous protection elements trip security can impact the testing of the overcurrent and differential elements.
Please refer to the Instantaneous Protection Elements Trip Security section in the Commands and Targets chapter
for more details on this subject and to Application note GET-20105A (UR Relays Percent Differential Element
Testing) for proper testing methods.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 702
Chapter 12 - Commissioning

12.3 TESTING UNDERFREQUENCY AND OVERFREQUENCY

ELEMENTS
Underfrequency and overfrequency protection requires techniques with subtle testing implications. Whereas most
protection is designed to detect changes from normal to fault conditions that occur virtually instantaneously, power
system inertia requires frequency protection to pick up while the frequency is changing slowly. Frequency
measurement is inherently sensitive to noise, making high precision in combination with high speed challenging for
both relays and test equipment.
Injection to a particular frequency element must be to its configured source and to the channels that the source
uses for frequency measurement. For frequency measurement, a source uses the first quantity configured in the
following order:
● Phase voltages
● Auxiliary voltage
● Phase currents
● Ground current
For example, if auxiliary voltage and phase currents are configured, the source uses the auxiliary voltage, not the
phase voltages or any of the currents.
When phase voltages or phase currents are used, the source applies a filter that rejects the zero-sequence
component. As such, the same signal must not be injected to all three phases, or the injected signal is completely
filtered out. For an underfrequency element using phase quantities, the phase A signal must be above the MIN
VOLT/AMP setting value. Therefore, either inject into phase A only, or inject a balanced three-phase signal.

832771A1.cdr

Figure 341: Typical underfrequency element test timing

N60-1601-0125-861-1 703
Chapter 12 - Commissioning

The static accuracy of the frequency threshold is determined by slowly adjusting the frequency of the injected signal
about the set pickup. If the Product frequency metering feature is used to determine the injected frequency, verify
the metering accuracy by checking it against a known standard (for example, the power system).
To accurately measure the time delay of a frequency element, a test emulating realistic power system dynamics is
required. Let the injected frequency ramp smoothly through the set threshold, with the ramp starting frequency
sufficiently outside the threshold so that the relay becomes conditioned to the trend before operation. For typical
interconnected power systems, the recommended testing ramp rate is 0.20 Hz/s.
The required delay time is the interval from the point the frequency crosses the set threshold to the point that the
element operates. Some test sets can measure only the time from the ramp start to element operation,
necessitating the subtraction of the pre-threshold ramp time from the reading. For example, with a ramp rate of 0.20
Hz/s, start the ramp 0.20 Hz before the threshold and subtract 1 second from the test set time reading of ramp start
to relay operation.
Note that the Product event records only show the “pickup delay” component, a definite time timer. This is exclusive
of the time taken by the frequency responding component to pickup.
Product oscillography can be used to measure the time between the calculated source frequency crossing the
threshold and element operation; however, this method omits the delay in the calculated source frequency. The
security features of the source frequency measurement algorithm result in the calculated frequency being delayed
by two to four cycles (or longer with noise on the input). In addition, oscillography resolution is 0.004 Hz, which at
0.20 Hz/s corresponds to a delay of 20 ms. Do not use the tracking frequency in timing measurements, as its
algorithm involves phase locking, which purposely sets its frequency high or low to allow the Product sample clock
to catch-up or wait as necessary to reach synchronism with the power system.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 704
 CHAPTER 13

MAINTENANCE
Chapter 13 - Maintenance

13.1 CHAPTER OVERVIEW

This chapter contains the following sections:

Chapter Overview 706
Monitoring 707
General maintenance 710
Files and Settings 711
Replace module 727
Battery 730
Repairs 732
Storage and disposal 733

N60-1601-0125-861-1 706
Chapter 13 - Maintenance

13.2 MONITORING
Devices and data can be monitored.

13.2.1 DEVICES WITH SITE TARGETS

To view an overview of devices:
1. Access the Site Targets item in the Online Window area, below the list of devices. It can take a few minutes
for all devices to be read.
2. Acknowledge any messages for unaccessible devices. The Site Targets window opens when done.

Figure 342: Site Targets window

13.2.2 DATA WITH MODBUS ANALYZER

Use the Modbus Analyzer under Maintenance > Modbus Analyzer to monitor the values of the UR device. Use the
Modbus memory map addresses outlined in the UR Family Communications Guide for the entries.
The upper part of the window displays values. The lower part of the window is for factory service use.
The first row in the figure shows that Contact Output 1 operation is being monitored. Its Modbus address is CAFA.
The actual value read from the device is 0, which means that it is off.
The second row in the figure shows the Contact Output 1 Name. It has a Modbus address of CAF0 and a default
value of Cont Op 1. None of Selection column settings render this value because they present the information
based on numbering systems.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 707
Chapter 13 - Maintenance

Figure 343: Modbus Analyzer used to monitor actual values on a UR

Address (HEX)
● Modbus address in hexadecimal. See the Modbus memory map in the UR Family Communications Guide or
in the web interface (enter IP address of UR device in a web browser). Convert the decimal address in the
Modbus memory map to hexadecimal.

Modbus Type
● Actual Value: To read the data in the UR device
● Setting: To read a setting in the UR device
● Coil: To read a command in the UR device

# of
● Element, input, or output to read. An example is 1 for Contact Output 1.

Selection (examples demonstrate various ways to represent 0)

● Hex: A decimal numbering system based on 16 possible values, from 0 to 9 and A to F. An example is
0x0000.
● Char: A single unicode character, such as C. An example is 0.
● Int: A 32-bit number, either positive or negative. An example is 0.
● UInt: Unsigned 32-bit integer, which means that it cannot be negative but can be twice as large as a signed
integer. An example is 0.
● Long: A 64-bit number, either positive or negative. An example is 0.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 708
Chapter 13 - Maintenance

● ULong: Unsigned 64-bit number, which means that it cannot be negative but can be twice as large as a
signed 64-bit number. An example is 0.
● Float: A numbering system with no fixed number of digits before or after the decimal point. An example is
0.000000.
● Binary: A numbering system using 0 and 1. An example is 0000-0000-0000-0000.

Entries are not saved when closing the window.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 709
Chapter 13 - Maintenance

13.3 GENERAL MAINTENANCE

The relay requires minimal maintenance. As a microprocessor-based relay, its characteristics do not change over
time. Expected service life is 20 years for UR devices manufactured June 2014 or later when applied in a controlled
indoor environment and electrical conditions within specification.
While the relay performs continual self-tests, it is recommended that maintenance be scheduled with other system
maintenance. This maintenance can involve in-service, out-of-service, or unscheduled maintenance.

In-service maintenance
● Visual verification of the analog values integrity, such as voltage and current (in comparison to other devices
on the corresponding system).
● Visual verification of active alarms, relay display messages, and LED indications.
● LED test.
● Visual inspection for any damage, corrosion, dust, or loose wires.
● Event recorder file download with further events analysis.

Out-of-service maintenance
● Check wiring connections for firmness.
● Analog values (currents, voltages, RTDs, analog inputs) injection test and metering accuracy verification.
Calibrated test equipment is required.
● Protection elements setting verification (analog values injection or visual verification of setting file entries
against relay settings schedule).
● Contact inputs and outputs verification. This test can be conducted by direct change of state forcing or as part
of the system functional testing.
● Visual inspection for any damage, corrosion, or dust.
● Event recorder file download with further events analysis.
● LED Test and pushbutton continuity check.

Note:
To avoid deterioration of electrolytic capacitors, power up units that are stored in a de-energized state once per year, for one
hour continuously.

Unscheduled maintenance (system interruption)

View the event recorder and oscillography or fault report for correct operation of inputs, outputs, and elements.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 710
Chapter 13 - Maintenance

13.4 FILES AND SETTINGS

13.4.1 RETRIEVE FILES

Data, oscillography, log, events, routing, ARP, and other files can be transferred using the EnerVista software when
using the graphical front panel. These files can be requested by technical support staff.
To retrieve a file using EnerVista software:
1. If the CyberSentry option is enabled, log in to the EnerVista software using the Administrator role.
2. In the Online Window area of EnerVista, access Maintenance > Retrieve File. The window opens.
3. Note the destination folder to which the file is to be saved at the top and change it if required. You can copy
the path or open the folder for convenience at this time.
4. Select the file to download from the UR device.
5. Click the Read File button. The file is saved to the destination folder. The EnerVista window remains open to
download additional files

13.4.2 CYBERSENTRY SECURITY EVENT FILES

CyberSentry security events are available in the following files:
● SECURITY_EVENTS.CSV
● SETTING_CHANGES.LOG

The following figure shows the content for the SECURITY_EVENTS.CSV file:

Figure 344: Security events file

Time — Local time.

Activity — The actual security event.
1 = Authentication Failed
2 = User Lockout
3 = FW Upgrade
4 = FW Lock
5 = Settings Lock
6 = Settings Change, this can fill the entire event log. Hence it is supported by the already existing
SETTINGS_CHANGE.LOG file. This event is not required.
7 = Clear Oscillography command
8 = Clear Data Logger command
9 = Clear Demand Records command
10 = Clear Energy command
11 = Reset Unauthorized Access

N60-1601-0125-861-1 711
Chapter 13 - Maintenance

12 = Clear Teleprotection Counters

13 = Clear All Records
14 = Role Log out
15 = Role Log in
16 = Factory Mode enabled
17 = Factory Mode disabled
Change Method — Format code F229 for the settings control change method.
0 = None
1 = Keypad
2 = Front port
3 = COM1 (not used)
4 = COM2 (RS485)
5 = Ethernet
The SETTING_CHANGES.LOG file stores all the setting changes. A total of 1024 events are stored in a circular
buffer in volatile memory.

Figure 345: Setting changes file

13.4.3 CONVERT DEVICE SETTINGS

Settings files can be upgraded or downgraded to other firmware versions. For example, version 7.4 settings can be
upgraded to version 7.6.
Settings are reset to factory default upon conversion. For a graphical front panel, for example when upgrading from
version 7.6 to 7.7, single-line diagrams and cells configured for the Metering Editor are defaulted, while other
graphical front panel settings are retained.
When converting a settings file from version 7.20 or earlier to 7.70 or later, any IEC 61850 settings are defaulted,
and Edition 2 is used.
When converting a settings file from version since 7.30 inclusive to 7.70 or later, any IEC 61850 settings are
converted and Edition 2 is used.
When converting a settings file with IEC 61850 Edition 1 to version 7.80 or later with a non-HardFiber Process Bus
Module (order code 85, 86, or 87), conversion does not take place and an error message displays. The Process
Bus Module does not support Edition 1.
Conversions between PBM and non-PBM order codes are not permitted.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 712
Chapter 13 - Maintenance

With version 8.00 and later, when a file is converted between order codes, the logical node prefix names and
instance numbers are defaulted and the respective dataset member references are removed.
To convert settings:
1. If not already in the Offline Window area, right-click the online device in the EnerVista software and select the
Add Device to Offline Window option. This copies the settings to the Offline Window area. Any message
about file repair usually means that settings were missing in the original file and have been added with default
values to the new file.
2. Make a copy of the settings file in the Offline Window area by right-clicking the file and selecting Duplicate
Device. A copy of the file is made and the file name start with Copy of. Optionally rename the file by right-
clicking it and selecting the Rename Device option.
3. Convert the settings by right-clicking one of the files in the Offline Window and selecting the Convert Device
Settings option.
If the option does not display, click the Admin > User Management menu item and enable the Update Info
check box for the user, then save, or click the Admin > User Management menu item and enable the
Enable Security check box, then save.
Select the Admin > User Login menu item. Enter Administrator for the user and enter the password.
(Contact GE Grid Solutions if you do not know the default password.)
GE recommends converting settings in firmware steps, for example when converting from 6.0 to 7.4x, convert
first to 7.0 then 7.4 in order to follow embedded conversion rules and keep settings.
The settings convert and a report generates.

Figure 346: Upgrade settings

4. Review the conversion report. The values of all settings that have been defaulted during conversion are not
listed in the conversion report; to find the value of a setting before conversion, inspect the device backup file
made before conversion.
In the example shown here, settings have been reset to factory defaults and several settings are new in
firmware version 7.6 under Settings > System Setup > Switches and Breakers.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 713
Chapter 13 - Maintenance

Figure 347: Conversion report

5. Change settings in the new file, for example by looking at the original file.
6. Write the converted file to the device, for example by dragging and dropping from the Offline Window to the
Online Window.
7. Check settings and operation.

13.4.4 COPY SETTINGS TO OTHER DEVICE

Settings from one Product device can be copied to another Product device for rapid deployment. The order codes
and IEC 61850 edition must match. See the Settings File section at the beginning of the Interfaces chapter for a list
of settings not deployed.
1. Right-click the device in the Online window and select the Add Device to Offline Window option. A window
opens.
2. Check the file path and name the file, then click the Receive button. An example is to save the files in D:
\Users\Public\Public Documents\GE Power Management\URPC\Data\ and to name the source
device Product_Deployment. At the prompt, confirm the action. The settings are saved in .cid, .icd,
and .urs files, and the entry displays in the Offline window area.
3. Right-click the device in the Offline window area and select the Duplicate Device option. The device is
copied with a prefix of Copy of.
4. Right-click the copied device and rename it.
5. Right-click the copied device and select the Edit Device Properties option. Make the changes for the new
device.
6. Send the file to new device by dragging and dropping it into the Online Window area. Or right-click and select
the Write Settings to Device option.
7. Update the remaining settings, such as IP address.

13.4.5 EXPORT SETTINGS

All or specific groups of settings are exportable.
1. Right-click a device in the Offline Window area and select the Export Settings option. A window opens.
When the Export All Settings option is enabled, the individual settings groups are inactive.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 714
Chapter 13 - Maintenance

Figure 348: Export settings

2. For groups of settings, enable the Export Selected Settings option, then enable the check boxes of the
options to export. The example shows that FlexLogic equations are to be exported.
3. Click the OK button, and specify a file name in the window that opens. The format is XML. Click the button to
start the export, which takes a minute or two.
If prompted about a file being repaired, review the report. The path to the file displays, and otherwise it sits
with the URS, CID, and ICD files of the device with a file name of _Repair_Report.txt, such as B30
81x_Repair_Report.txt. The example shows that some settings were added at default values. The
explanation is that the EnerVista software was updated, but the offline file predates the update.

Figure 349: Settings report

13.4.6 COMPARE SETTINGS

Settings are comparable against default values and between two UR devices.
Some of the IEC 61850 settings use floating point data, which guarantees accurate representation of real numbers
up to seven digits. Numbers with more than seven digits are approximated within a certain precision. This can result
in differences between what is entered and what is saved, and for example results in differences shown on a
settings comparison report.
When comparing two settings files with the graphical front panel, all graphical front panel features are compared
except for the single-line diagrams.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 715
Chapter 13 - Maintenance

Comparing against defaults

1. Right-click the device in the Offline Window area and select Compare Settings With Defaults. The file
generates and the number of differences displays.
2. To save the report, click File > Save As, select the TXT, PDF, or CSV format from the drop-down list, and
enter a name for the file.
In the figure, the first entry is from the device, while the second is the default value.

Figure 350: Device settings compared with default values

Compare two devices

Preferences are set under File > Preferences as follows:

Comparison Report: Sequential File 1, File 2 Layout

When disabled (default), the report shows only what differs, as shown in the previous figure. When enabled, the
report indicates differences by device.

Figure 351: Device settings compared between two devices, displayed sequentially

To compare settings of two devices in the Offline Window area:

1. Right-click a first device in the Offline Window area and select Compare Two Devices.
2. In the window that opens, select a second device and click the OK button. The file generates and the number
of differences displays.
Alternatively, in the window that opens, enter a path/file name at the bottom of the window; users can select
either a URS or a CID file. When selecting URS files users should be aware that for IEC 61850 order codes
the information in a URS data file is incomplete and therefore a comparison with an IEC 61850-enabled
device will show many differences.
3. To save the report, click File > Save As, select the TXT, PDF, or CSV format from the drop-down list, and
enter a name for the file.

To compare settings between Online and Offline devices:

1. Right-click a device in the Online Window area and select Compare with Device.
2. In the window that opens, select an offline device and click the OK button. The file generates and the number
of differences displays.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 716
Chapter 13 - Maintenance

Alternatively, in the window that opens, enter a path/file name at the bottom of the window; users can select
either a URS or a CID file. When selecting URS files users should be aware that for IEC 61850 order codes
the information in a URS data file is incomplete and therefore a comparison with an IEC 61850-enabled
device will show many differences.
3. Click the OK button. The file generates, and the differences are highlighted in red, which is for the first
device.

13.4.7 BACK UP AND RESTORE SETTINGS

Back up a copy of the in-service settings for each commissioned UR device, so as to revert to the commissioned
settings after inadvertent, unauthorized, or temporary setting changes are made, after the settings defaulted due to
firmware upgrade, or when the device has to be replaced. This section describes how to backup settings to a file
and how to use that file to restore the settings to the original relay or to a replacement relay.
For reference, settings can saved with Online > Print Device Information and Online > Export Device
Information. They cannot be restored using these options.

13.4.7.1 BACK UP SETTINGS

he following file types can be saved:
●URS — UR settings file — When the IEC 61850 option is not present
●IID — Instantiated IED capability description file — Actual settings on UR
●ICD — IED Capability Description file — Default settings on UR
●CID — Configured IED description file — Settings sent to the UR (may or may not contain the present
settings)
UR device settings can be saved in a backup URS file using the EnerVista UR Setup software. The URS file is the
standard UR settings file. For an introduction to settings files in the URS format, see the beginning of the Interfaces
chapter.
When the IEC 61850 option is present, the settings can be saved alternatively in a backup IID file either using the
EnerVista UR Setup software in online mode or by using any of the supported file transfer protocols. The IID file is
one of several IEC 61850 Substation Configuration Language (SCL) file types; see the IEC 61850 chapter in the UR
Series Communications Guide for an introduction to SCL.
TBD displays when a setting in a modeled element is configured with a non-modeled operand. For example, Phase
IOC is modeled in a firmware release, while the LED operands are not modeled. If the block setting of the Phase
IOC is configured with LED operands, its displays as TBD in IID and CID files, the web interface, or in an MMS
client.
The options that display in the EnerVista software when right-clicking depend on device options.
Preferences are set in the File > Preferences > IEC 61850 menu. There are two options as follows:

Preserve custom attributes when importing SCD/CID files

This applies to the Add Device to Offline Window option. When enabled, the IID file also is to be copied to the
computer. The IID file that is retrieved from the relay is therefore assumed to be in synchronization with the
resulting .urs file, and in fact in this situation the IID file on the computer is a copy of the IID file that was read from
the online device. When disabled, the IID file on the computer is to be left unchanged. The location of the IID file is
C:\ProgramData\GE Power Management\urpc\Offline, for example.

Do not update IID file when updating SCL files

When enabled (default), an IID file is not to be created on the computer and if one is already present there, it is
neither removed nor updated. Have this option enabled when you want to keep the IID file from the UR device
instead of from another tool. The location of the file is C:\ProgramData\GE Power Management\urpc
\Offline, for example.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 717
Chapter 13 - Maintenance

An Environment backup stores a list of sites and devices in the Online and Offline Window areas. Settings files are
not contained within the environment file. If a settings file is moved, renamed, or deleted after the backup, it is
removed from the Offline Window during the restore.

To save a settings file in the URS format in EnerVista Online Window:

1. In EnerVista, connect to the device in the Online Window area.
2. Right-click the device name in the Online Window area and select Add Device to Offline Window. A window
opens.
3. Select or enter a file name and location, and click the Receive button. A .urs file is created in the Offline
Window area.
To create a new settings file in the URS format in EnerVista Offline Window:
1. In EnerVista, right-click in the Offline Window area and select New Device. A window opens.
2. Change the file name at the end of the Path field, keeping the .urs extension.
3. From the Associate File with Device drop-down list, select the UR device. Other fields complete
automatically. Otherwise, when you do not select a device from the drop-down list, all fields need to be
completed manually and only devices that match the entered order code and version display in the list.
4. The Serial # Lock field is the serial number of the intended device. It ensures that the settings file is sent
only to the specific relay that matches the serial number.
5. Click the OK button to create the .urs file in the Offline Window area.

To save settings in the IID format in EnerVista Online Window:

1. In EnerVista, connect to the device in the Online Window area.
2. Right-click the device name in the Online Window area and select Read IID File. The option is not present
when the device does not have the IEC 61850 option. A window opens when successful.
3. Select or enter a file name and location, and click the Receive button. A .iid file is created.

To save settings in the IID format in EnerVista Offline Window:

1. In EnerVista, right-click the device in the Offline Window area.
2. Select the Create IID File option for firmware below 7.3. The option is not always available. Select the Save
As option for firmware 7.3 and later, and select the IID option from drop-down list.
No file is generated. The IID file on the computer is copied to the location specified.
3. If the Do not update IID file when updating SCL files preference is enabled under File > Preferences >
IEC 61850, then a message displays to that effect. This means that there is no IID file available on the
computer to be copied, so a new one is generated.

To save settings in the IID format using TFTP:

1. On a computer on the same subnetwork as the UR device, open a command window.
2. Enter
TFTP <IP address> GET ur.iid <destination>
where
● <IP address> is the IP address of the UR device
● ur.iid is the internal name of the IID file in the UR device
● <destination> is the path and file name of the IID file. If omitted, the file is saved as ur.iid in the command
window default directory.
An example is

N60-1601-0125-861-1 718
Chapter 13 - Maintenance

TFTP 192.168.1.101 GET ur.iid Feeder1.iid

To save settings in the ICD format in EnerVista Online Window:

1. In EnerVista, right-click the device in the Online Window area.
2. Select the Read ICD File option. A window opens.
3. Enter a path/name for the file, and click the Save button.

To save settings in the ICD format in EnerVista Offline Window:

1. In EnerVista, right-click the device in the Offline Window area.
2. Select the Create ICD File option. Or select the Save As option, and select the ICD option from drop-down
list.
You can be prompted to specify if the file is for firmware version 7.12 or later.
The file is saved to the location specified.

To save settings in the CID format in EnerVista Online Window:

1. In EnerVista, right-click the device in the Online Window area.
2. Select the Read ICD File option. A window opens.
3. Enter a path/name for the file, and click the Save button.

To save settings in the CID format in EnerVista Offline Window:

1. In EnerVista, right-click the device in the Offline Window area.
2. Select the Save As option, which displays for firmware 7.3 and later, and select the CID option from the drop-
down list.
The file is copied from the computer to the location specified.

To save list of sites and devices with an Environment backup:

In EnerVista, click File > Environment > Backup. A window opens.
Name and save the .ENV file.

13.4.7.2 RESTORE SETTINGS

UR device settings can be restored to the values they were at when a URS backup file was created using the
EnerVista UR Setup software. When the IEC 61850 option is present, the settings can alternatively be to the values
they were at when an IID type backup was created either using the EnerVista UR Setup software in online mode or
by using any of the supported file transfer protocols. Note that TFTP cannot be used here, as TFTP put mode is
disabled for security reasons.
To restore completely, a few settings need to be entered manually either via EnerVista UR Setup or via the UR
device front panel. If the restore operation is to be via Ethernet, first the UR device must have its IP address
settings entered via the front panel. These are located at SETTINGS > PRODUCT SETUP > COMMUNICATIONS
> NETWORK 1(3) and SETTINGS > PRODUCT SETUP > COMMUNICATIONS > IPv4 ROUTE TABLE 1(6) >
DEFAULT IPv4 ROUTE ð GATEWAY ADDRESS.
When importing a file, it cannot have a blank numeric value. All numeric values must be non-blank, otherwise the
file is rejected.
URS and IID procedures are outlined here.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 719
Chapter 13 - Maintenance

To restore settings from a URS file:

1. In EnerVista, connect to the device in the Online Window area.
2. Right-click the .urs file in the Offline Window area and select Add Device from File to locate a file, and/or
drag-and-drop the file from the Offline Window area to the device in the Online Window area.

Figure 352: Restoring a URS settings file

3. Two prompts are possible, first that the URS file does not include the complete IEC 61850 configuration and
that it needs to be recreated if you continue. This means that the URS file is from UR version 7.30 or higher,
has the IEC 61850 software option in the order code, but any IEC 61850 content will be compromised and
will need to be configured.
Second, a message can display that the URS file is part of a device folder and to use the device’s CID file.
This means that the URS file is from UR version 7.3 or higher, has the IEC 61850 software option in the order
code, and is part of the device folder. The user is trying to add a URS file from inside a device’s folder.
Instead, the user needs to use the CID file from the device folder.
These messages display because the roles of the protection engineer and network engineer can be separate.
The former can require a URS file, while the latter can require stored Modbus settings and protection
schemes.
4. Manually copy the remaining settings, outlined as follows.

To restore settings from an IID file using EnerVista software:

1. In Windows, make a copy of the .iid backup file, and change the extension to .cid on the new copy.
2. In the Online Window area of the UR EnerVista Setup software, connect to the device to establish
communication.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 720
Chapter 13 - Maintenance

3. In the Offline Window area, right-click Devices and select Import Devices from SCD.

Figure 353: Importing an SCD or CID file

4. Navigate to and select the file with .cid extension. When prompted, enter a file name to give to an
intermediate URS file. The URS file is added to the Offline Window area.
5. Drag the imported file in the Offline Window to the device in the Online Window. Note that the RELAY
SETTINGS value also is written to a device, and the accepting relay is put into "Programmed" or "Not
Programmed" mode as configured in the offline file.
6. Manually copy the remaining settings, outlined as follows.

To restore settings from an IID using SFTP:

1. Verify that transfer by SFTP is enabled under SETTINGS > PRODUCT SETUP > COMMUNICATIONS >
PROTOCOL > SFTP PROTOCOL.
2. Close EnerVista UR Setup software.
3. In Windows, make a copy of the .iid backup file, and change the extension to .cid on the new copy.
4. On a computer on the same subnetwork as the UR device, open an SFTP client application, such as
WinSCP. Note that TFTP cannot be used here.
5. Use the device's IP address as the host name.
6. If the device has the CyberSentry option, use the User Name of Administrator or Engineer, and the
password programmed for the selected role. The default password is ChangeMe1# (without quotation
marks). Log in to the device.
7. If the device does not have the CyberSentry option, use the User Name of Setting, and the password
programmed for the Setting role. The default password is ChangeMe1# (without quotation marks). Log in to
the device.
8. Upload the backup file copy with the .cid extension. WinSCP uses drag-and-drop or copy-and-paste for this
file transfer.
9. Manually copy the remaining settings, outlined as follows.

To manually copy remaining settings:

1. Settings files are not transferred to the UR device with settings files. Enter them manually either via the front
panel or via EnerVista UR Setup software. The values that these settings had at the time the backup was
created are contained within the backup file, accessed through EnerVista UR Setup software.

To restore the list of sites and devices from an Environment backup:

1. In EnerVista, click File > Environment > Restore. A window opens.
2. Select the .ENV file to restore.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 721
Chapter 13 - Maintenance

13.4.8 UPGRADE SOFTWARE

EnerVista can be used with all firmware versions. For example, EnerVista software released for UR 8.2 can be used
to access multiple UR devices that have version 8.2x, 7.4x, and 6.0x firmware installed.
Existing installations do not need to be uninstalled before upgrade.
You can also downgrade the software; use the same procedure. A product can be downgraded as far as its first
release.
Silent installation also is possible.
To upgrade the EnerVista software:
1. If a beta version of the EnerVista UR Setup software is installed, uninstall it.
2. Disconnect any USB cables to ensure correct USB driver installation.
3. Download the latest EnerVista software.
4. Double-click the file and complete the wizard. The software installs.
5. Access the software.
The prompt Do you want to create device folders for all your pre-existing off line
devices determines the folder structure on the computer. Clicking Yes means that CID, ICD, and URS files
are to be grouped together in a folder, and the URS file is also one level above. Clicking No leaves folder
structure unchanged.
6. Check the version number under Help > About. If the new version does not display, try uninstalling the
software and reinstalling the new version.
7. For Windows 10, to finish installing the UR USB driver, open Device Manager > Ports, then plug in the USB
cable (to connect the relay and computer). A new port starting with "GE Virtual Serial Port" is available. If
available, click the OK button to complete the installation.
If not available, uninstall the existing GE USB driver in the Device Manager > Ports. (Right-click and
Uninstall)
When complete, unplug and re-plug the USB cable connecting the UR device. The GE Virtual Serial Port
driver is now available.
A message can display about a version not being supported. An example is when upgrading from version
7.12K to 7.4x. The 7.12K entry is removed from the Offline Window area.
A message can display in the EnerVista software upon launch that a device from the environment
was not recognized. This means that a device is online and its firmware version conflicts with the
software version. In the example shown, a C60 with firmware version 7.5x is online, but the software version
is 7.3x. Updating removed incompatible files and changed the device to version 7.3x, after which you need to
make the order codes consistent as outlined next.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 722
Chapter 13 - Maintenance

Figure 354: Mismatch in order code between software and device

To make the order codes consistent:
1. In EnerVista, click the Device Setup button. The window opens.
2. Expand the entry for the UR device.
3. Click the Read Order Code button. The order code and version of the device are populated to the software.
4. Click the OK button to save the change.

The silent installation is not truly silent because it invokes the user interface. The installation is silent at step 5.
Double-clicking on the .exe file for installation is faster.
To install the software silently:
1. Uninstall any existing EnerVista UR Setup software.
2. In a command line window, run the executable file, such as entering URPC810.exe -r
3. Follow the prompts to install the software using the wizard. The action creates a setup.iss file in the C:
\WINNT, C:\Windows\Setup, or other folder that records user inputs.
4. Copy the .exe and .iss files to the same folder.
5. In a command line window, enter URPC850.exe /S /v/qn, where URPC810.exe is the executable file
name. The software installs and generates a setup.log file in the same folder. A result code of "0" at the end
the log file means that the installation succeeded.

13.4.9 UPGRADE FIRMWARE

Note:
If upgrading both firmware and EnerVista software, upgrade the software first.

The firmware of the Product device can be upgraded locally or remotely, using the EnerVista software.
Upgrades are possible for the same release (such as 8.01 to 8.02) and from one firmware version to another (such
as 7.2 to 7.3). When upgrading to another firmware version, check the release notes on the GE Multilin website for
compatibility.
If you are upgrading from version 7.0 or 7.1 to 7.2 or later, some CPU modules require a new boot version. Update
this first.
Address any equipment mismatch error before upgrade. For example, if you have a basic front panel attached and
the order code in the device is for a graphical front panel, the upgrade only works with a graphical front panel.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 723
Chapter 13 - Maintenance

You can also downgrade firmware; use the same procedure. A Product is downgradeable as far as its first release.
Upgrading the firmware takes the relay out of service. At the end of the upgrade, the relay restores the “In Service”
state that existed before the upgrade.
Any DSP manufactured between 1 January 2013 and 1 December 2015 with versions 7.27, 7.28, or 7.60 and up
must be sent back to the factory for updates before updating the firmware.
To upgrade the firmware using EnerVista software:
1. Download the bootcode file and/or firmware from http://www.gegridsolutions.com/app/ViewFiles.aspx?
prod=urfamily&type=7. The firmware is a .SFD file. The boot file is a .000 file. Bootcode files 7.03 and later
are for CPUs T, U, V, or W, which have 9T, 9U, 9V, or 9W on the label.
2. For a relay without the CyberSentry software option, navigate to Settings > Product Setup > Security and
ensure that the Remote Setting Authorized and Local Setting Authorized settings are ON. On the front panel
of the device, the path is SETTINGS > PRODUCT SETUP > SECURITY > DUAL PERMISSION SECURITY
ACCESS.
3. For a relay with CyberSentry Lvl 1 software option, navigate to Settings > Product Setup > Security >
Access Supervision or Settings > Product Setup > Security > Supervisory and disable the Lock
Firmware setting. To change this setting, the Supervisor role is required, or the Administrator role if the
Supervisor role is not used.
4. In EnerVista, back up the device settings by right-clicking the device and selecting Add Device to Offline
Window. In the window that displays, select an existing file to overwrite, or enter a name for a new settings
file and optionally a location for the new file. Click the Receive button to start the backup. If an
Incompatible device order codes or versions message displays, it means that you are trying to
overwrite a file for another product. You access the Convert Device Settings option by right-clicking the file
in the Offline Window area at the lower left. GE recommends converting settings in firmware steps, for
example when converting from 6.0 to 7.4x, convert first to 7.0 then 7.4 in order to follow embedded
conversion rules and keep settings. Note that the values of all settings that have been defaulted during
conversion are not listed in the conversion report; to find the value of a setting before conversion, inspect the
device backups made before conversion.
5. In EnerVista, navigate to Maintenance > Update Firmware. First select the boot file, if applicable, locating
the .000 file, and proceed with the update. Note that settings are not lost during this update. When done, the
relay restarts automatically; continue with the next step.

Note:
When updating the boot file, ensure that power is not lost, else the relay must be returned to the factory for repair.

To update the firmware, select the firmware update by locating the .SFD file, and proceed with the update.
EnerVista software only enables users to upgrade the firmware in the relay after validating the source of the
SFD file and its authenticity, by verifying the digital signature included in the file before sending it to the relay.
If the digital signature validation fails, the firmware upgrade process is aborted. If the digital signature
validation succeeds, EnerVista proceeds with the firmware upgrade. The relay records the outcome of the
signature validation in the security events.
When asked if upgrading over the Internet, the difference is the flash memory buffer size each time the
software sends data to the relay. Yes means that the flash memory buffer size is 256 bytes. No means that it
is 1024 bytes, which is faster.
If a warning message displays about the firmware not being supported by the EnerVista software, it means
that the firmware is a later version than the software. Upgrade the software to the same or later version as
the firmware, then try again.
If an Unable to put relay in flash mode message displays, set the Settings > Product Setup >
Security > Dual Permission Security Access > Remote Setting Authorized and Local Setting
Authorized settings to ON and try again.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 724
Chapter 13 - Maintenance

When the update is finished, the relay restarts automatically. The upgrade process takes about 20 minutes
when using a graphical front panel because of writing to the front panel.
6. Restart the EnerVista software, and refresh the order code in EnerVista under the Device Setup button.
7. Verify the boot and firmware version while the device is starting up or in EnerVista under Actual Values >
Product Info > Firmware Revisions. The Revision is the firmware version, for example, revision 8.20 is UR
firmware release 8.20. The Boot Program Revision is the bootloader release.

Figure 355: Check upgrades

8. Set the device to programmed under Settings > Product Setup > Installation. A self-test error displays on
the device until this is done.
9. If you changed the Remote Setting Authorized, the Local Setting Authorized settings, or relay lock
settings, return them to their previous settings.
10. If you changed the Lock Firmware setting, enable it again.
11. To apply any previously saved settings, right-click the saved settings file in the Offline Window area and
select Write to Device. Optionally convert the saved settings to the new firmware version before writing to
the device by right-clicking and selecting Convert Device Settings.

Note:
The field-programmable gate array (FPGA) can be upgraded under Maintenance > Update FPGA when the device is
connected via serial cable and the firmware revision is 7.0 or higher.

Modbus addresses assigned to firmware modules, features, settings, and corresponding data items (that is, default
values, minimum/maximum values, data type, and item size) can change slightly from version to version of
firmware. The addresses are rearranged when new features are added or existing features are enhanced or
modified. The EEPROM DATA ERROR message displayed after upgrading/downgrading the firmware is a
resettable, self-test message intended to inform users that the Modbus addresses have changed with the upgraded
firmware. This message does not signal any problems when appearing after firmware upgrades.

13.4.10 UNINSTALL AND CLEAR FILES AND DATA

The unit can be decommissioned by turning off power to the unit and disconnecting the wires to it.
To clear files and settings in the UR:
1. On the UR front panel, navigate to COMMANDS > RELAY MAINTENANCE > SERVICE COMMAND, enter
the value 20511, and press the ENTER key. The relay restarts and clears the UR.
2. Clear the flash memory using the SETTINGS > PRODUCT SETUP > CLEAR RELAY RECORDS command.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 725
Chapter 13 - Maintenance

To clear files and settings on the computer:

1. Uninstall the EnerVista UR Setup software.
2. Find and delete the following UR files:
○ .URS, .CID, and .ICD settings
○ .EVT event records
○ .CFG and .DAT COMTRADE

N60-1601-0125-861-1 726
Chapter 13 - Maintenance

13.5 REPLACE MODULE

Warning:
Withdraw or insert a module only when control power has been removed from the
unit, and be sure to insert only the correct module type into a slot, else personal
injury, damage to the unit or connected equipment, or undesired operation can
result.

Note:
To avoid damage to the equipment, use proper electrostatic discharge protection (for example, a static strap) when coming in
contact with modules while the relay is energized.

The relay, being modular in design, allows for the withdrawal and insertion of modules. Replace modules only with
like modules in their original factory configured slots.
Two procedures follow: replace a module with the same module, and upgrade a module.
To replace a module with the same module:
1. Open the enhanced front panel to the left once the thumb screw has been removed. This allows for easy
access of the modules for withdrawal. The new wide-angle hinge assembly in the enhanced front panel
opens completely and allows easy access to all modules in the Product.

Figure 356: Modules inside relay with front cover open (enhanced front panel)

The basic front panel can be opened to the left once the black plastic sliding latch on the right side has been
pushed up, as shown below.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 727
Chapter 13 - Maintenance

Figure 357: Removing module (basic front panel)

2. With power to the unit off, disconnect individually the connections at the front and back of the module before
removing the module from the chassis. For any Process Bus Module in slot H for use with a HardFiber Brick,
also remove the two screws at the back that attach the module to the chassis.
3. To properly remove a module, pull simultaneously the ejector/inserter clips, located at the top and bottom of
the module.
4. Record the original location of the module to ensure that the same or replacement module is inserted into the
correct slot. While modules with current input provide automatic shorting of external CT circuits, for CT/VT
modules it is recommended to short/isolate external circuits accordingly for maximum safety.
5. To properly insert a module, ensure that the correct module type is inserted into the correct slot position. The
ejector/inserter clips located at the top and at the bottom of each module must be in the disengaged position
as the module is smoothly inserted into the slot. Once the clips have cleared the raised edge of the chassis,
engage the clips simultaneously. When the clips have locked into position, the module is fully inserted.

Note:
When adding a module (versus replacing a module), check that settings have not changed. Depending on the module,
settings can reset to default values.

Note:
For applicable models, the new CT/VT modules can only be used with new CPUs; similarly, old CT/VT modules can only be
used with old CPUs. In the event that there is a mismatch between the CPU and CT/VT module, the relay does not function
and a DSP ERROR or HARDWARE MISMATCH error displays.

An upgrade example is replacing the CPU module with a more recent one, such as swapping 9G/9H/9N with
9T/9U/9V/9W. A power supply module upgrade does not affect an order code.
To upgrade a module:
1. Back up settings by sending the device to the Offline Window area. C
2. Convert the settings to the new order code by right-clicking in the Offline Window area.
3. Replace the module as outlined in the previous procedure.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 728
Chapter 13 - Maintenance

4. In the Online Window area, reset all settings to factory defaults and read the new order code from the device
using Commands > Relay Maintenance > Update Order Code.
5. Send the saved settings from the Offline Window area to the online device.
6. Refresh the order code in the Device Setup window and set the device to "Programmed" under Settings >
Product Setup > Installation.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 729
Chapter 13 - Maintenance

13.6 BATTERY
For the SH and SL models and earlier, a battery provides backup power for the real-time clock. The TH and TL
models do not contain a battery, they use a supercapacitor to provide backup power for the relay's real time clock.
For the SH and SL models, the battery can be replaced when required. The battery type is 3 V cylindrical. Lithium
metal primary (non-rechargeable) batteries, Panasonic BR-2/3A or Varta CR-2/3A. Due to shipping restrictions GE
no longer sells replacement batteries, but they can be purchased through retail vendors such as Digikey.

Note:
GE Vernova reserves the right to replace the current battery for an equivalent model and/or vendor

For the TH and TL models, no maintenance is required.

Note:
The power supply modules were upgraded in in the past from RH/RL to SH/SL. However, the order code when purchasing a
UR with redundant power supply remained as RH/RL so that customers can continue to use the same order codes. The order
code can read RH or RL, while the module inside the unit reads SH, SL, TH, or TL. The order code remains RH for power
supplies RH/SH/TH and RL for power supplies RL/SL/TL.

This does not apply to replacement modules. The order code for replacement redundant power supply modules is
SH, SL, TH, or TL.

13.6.1 REPLACE BATTERY

Depending on the type, the power supply module may contain a battery. If applicable and when required, the battery
can be replaced. If you need to replace the battery, follow the instructions below.

Warning:
To avoid injury, ensure that the unit has been powered off for a minimum of three
minutes before replacing the battery.

Warning:
There is a risk of fire if the battery is replaced with an incorrect type or polarity.

1. Turn off the power to the unit.

2. Wait a minimum of three minutes to ensure that there is no power to the battery.
3. Open the unit by sliding up the plastic latch on the right side of the front panel (basic front panel) or
unscrewing the panel (enhanced front panel).
4. For the basic front panel, it needs to be removed in order to access the power supply module, which is
typically in the first slot on the left side and blocked by the hinge of the front panel. To remove the front panel,
unscrew the bracket on the left side of the unit.
5. Remove the power supply module by simultaneously pulling the ejector clips at the top and bottom of the
module and sliding it out.
6. Unscrew all four screws that attach the metal cover to the module. The fourth screw is at the back end of the
module, on the opposite side from the clips, beside the white electronics part (see figure).
7. Slide the metal cover away from the clips about 0.5 cm (1/8 inch) and remove the cover.
8. Unclip the black plastic holder that keeps the battery in place. The plastic clips into the socket at the bottom
on both sides.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 730
Chapter 13 - Maintenance

9. Pull the plastic away from the battery. Use a flat-head screwdriver if you cannot unclip the plastic with your
fingers.
10. Replace the battery with the identical make and model. Observe the + and - polarity of the battery and
replace it with the same polarity as marked on the battery holder.

Figure 358: Battery location on power supply module

11. Reinstall the battery holder and the metal cover, and reinsert the power supply module into the unit.
12. Power on the unit.

13.6.2 DISPOSE OF BATTERY

This product may contain a battery that cannot be disposed of as unsorted municipal waste in the European Union.
See the product documentation for specific battery information. The battery is marked with this symbol, which may
include lettering to indicate cadmium (Cd), lead (Pb), or mercury (Hg). For proper recycling return the battery to your
supplier or to a designated collection point. For more information see: www.recyclethis.info.

N60-1601-0125-861-1 731
Chapter 13 - Maintenance

13.7 REPAIRS
The battery and modules inside the case can be replaced without return of the device to the factory. The firmware
and software can be upgraded without return of the device to the factory.
Fuses in the power supply module are not field-replaceable.
Files can be requested for use by technical support staff, for example the Service Report or under Maintenance >
Retrieve File, as outlined elsewhere in this document.
For issues not solved by troubleshooting, the process to return the device to the factory for repair is as follows:
1. Contact a GE Grid Solutions Technical Support Center. Contact information is found in the first chapter.
2. Obtain a Return Materials Authorization (RMA) number from the Technical Support Center.
3. Verify that the RMA and Commercial Invoice received have the correct information.
4. Tightly pack the unit in a box with bubble wrap, foam material, or styrofoam inserts or packaging peanuts to
cushion the item(s). You may also use double boxing whereby you place the box in a larger box that contains
at least 5 cm of cushioning material.
5. Ship the unit by courier or freight forwarder, along with the Commercial Invoice and RMA, to the factory.
GE GRID SOLUTIONS
650 MARKLAND STREET
MARKHAM, ONTARIO
CANADA L6C 0M1
ATTN: SERVICE DEPT.
RMA# : ______________

Customers are responsible for shipping costs to the factory, regardless of whether the unit is under warranty.
Use the detailed return procedure outlined at
https://www.gegridsolutions.com/multilin/support/ret_proc.htm
The current warranty and return information are outlined at:
https://www.gegridsolutions.com/multilin/warranty.htm

N60-1601-0125-861-1 732
Chapter 13 - Maintenance

13.8 STORAGE AND DISPOSAL

Store the unit indoors in a cool, dry place. If possible, store in the original packaging. Follow the storage
temperature range outlined in the Specifications.

Note:
To avoid deterioration of electrolytic capacitors, power up units that are stored in a de-energized state once per year, for one
hour continuously.

Other than the battery, there are no special requirements for disposal of the unit at the end its service life. For
customers located in the European Union, dispose of the battery as outlined earlier. To prevent non-intended use of
the unit, remove the modules as outlined earlier, dismantle the unit, and recycle the metal when possible. See the
UR Family Recycling and Disposal Instructions (GET-20096).

N60-1601-0125-861-1 733
 CHAPTER 14

APPENDICES
Chapter 14 - Appendices

14.1 ABBREVIATIONS

Abbreviation Meaning
A Ampere
AC Alternating Current
A/D Analog to Digital
AE Accidental Energization, Application Entity
AMP Ampere
ANG Angle
ANSI American National Standards Institute
APDU Application Protocol Data Unit
AR Automatic Reclosure
ARP Address Resolution Protocol
ASDU Application-layer Service Data Unit
ASYM Asymmetry
AUTO Automatic
AUX Auxiliary
AVG Average
AWG American Wire Gauge

BCD Binary-Coded Decimal

BCS Best Clock Selector
BER Bit Error Rate
BF Breaker Fail
BFI Breaker Failure Initiate
BKR Breaker
BLK Block
BLKG Blocking
BNC Bayonet Neill-Concelman
BPNT Breakpoint of a characteristic
BRKR Breaker

CA Certificate Authority
CAP Capacitor
CC Coupling Capacitor
CCVT Coupling Capacitor Voltage Transformer
CFG Configure / Configurable
.CFG Filename extension for oscillography files
CHK Check
CHNL Channel
CID Configured IED Description
CLS Close
CLSD Closed
CMND Command

N60-1601-0125-861-1 735
Chapter 14 - Appendices

Abbreviation Meaning
CMPRSN Comparison
CO Contact Output
COM Communication
COMM Communications
COMP Compensated, Comparison
ConfRev Configuration Revision
CONN Connection
CONT Continuous, Contact
CO-ORD Coordination
CPU Central Processing Unit
CRC Cyclic Redundancy Code/Check
CRL Certificate Revocation List
CRT, CRNT Current
CSA Canadian Standards Association
CT Current Transformer
CVT Capacitive Voltage Transformer

D/A Digital to Analog

DA Data Attribute
DANH Doubly Attached Node with HSR
DANP Doubly Attached Node with DANP
DC (dc) Direct Current
DCE Data Communications Equipment
DCS Distributed Control System
DD Disturbance Detector
DFLT Default
DGNST Diagnostics
DIFF Differential
DIR Directional
DISCREP Discrepancy
DIST Distance
DMD Demand
DNP Distributed Network Protocol
DPO Dropout
DPS Double-Point Status
DSP Digital Signal Processor
DST Daylight Savings Time
dt Rate of Change
DTT Direct Transfer Trip
DUTT Direct Under-reaching Transfer Trip

EAD Expert Arc Detector

EGD Ethernet Global Data

N60-1601-0125-861-1 736
Chapter 14 - Appendices

Abbreviation Meaning
ENCRMNT Encroachment
EPRI Electric Power Research Institute
.EVT Filename extension for event recorder files
EXT Extension, External

F Field
FAIL Failure
FCDA Functional Constraint Data Attributes
FD Fault Detector
FDH Fault Detector high-set
FDL Fault Detector low-set
FIR Finite Impulse Response
FLA Full Load Current
FO Fiber Optic
FPGA Field-programmable Gate Array
FREQ Frequency
FSK Frequency-Shift Keying
FTP File Transfer Protocol
FxE FlexElement™
FWD Forward

G Generator
GCM Galois Counter Mode
GDOI Group Domain of Interpretation
GE General Electric
GFP Graphical Front Panel
GIS Gas Insulated Switchgear
GND Ground
GNTR Generator
GoCB GOOSE Control Block
GOOSE General Object Oriented Substation Event
GPS Global Positioning System
GSU Generator Step-Up

HARM Harmonic / Harmonics

HCT High Current Time
HGF High-Impedance Ground Fault (CT)
HIZ High-Impedance and Arcing Ground
HMI Human-Machine Interface
HSR High-availability Seamless Redundancy
HTTP Hyper Text Transfer Protocol
HV High Voltage
HYB Hybrid

N60-1601-0125-861-1 737
Chapter 14 - Appendices

Abbreviation Meaning
Hz Hertz

I Instantaneous
I_0 Zero Sequence current
I_1 Positive Sequence current
I_2 Negative Sequence current
IA Phase A current
IAB Phase A minus B current
IB Phase B current
IBC Phase B minus C current
IC Phase C current
ICA Phase C minus A current
ICD IED Capability Description
ID Identification
IED Intelligent Electronic Device
IEC International Electrotechnical Commission
IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers
IG Ground (not residual) current
Igd Differential Ground current
IGMP Internet Group Management Protocol
IID Instantiated IED Capability Description
IN CT Residual Current (3I0) or Input
INC SEQ Incomplete Sequence
INIT Initiate
INST Instantaneous
INV Inverse
I/O Input/Output
IOC Instantaneous Overcurrent
IOV Instantaneous Overvoltage
IRC Inter-Relay Communication
IRIG Inter-Range Instrumentation Group
ISO International Standards Organization
IUV Instantaneous Undervoltage

K0 Zero Sequence Current Compensation

kA kiloAmpere
KDC Key Distribution Center
kV kiloVolt

LCD Liquid Crystal Display

LDBN Bias Neutral Level Detector
LED Light Emitting Diode
LEO Line End Open

N60-1601-0125-861-1 738
Chapter 14 - Appendices

Abbreviation Meaning
LFT BLD Left Blinder
LOOP Loopback
LPU Line Pickup
LRA Locked-Rotor Current
LTC Load Tap-Changer
LV Low Voltage

M Machine
M2M Machine to Machine
mA MilliAmpere
MAG Magnitude
MAN Manual / Manually
MAX Maximum
Mb Megabit
MIC Model Implementation Conformance
MIN Minimum, Minutes
MMI Man Machine Interface
MMS Manufacturing Message Specification
MRT Minimum Response Time
MSG Message
MTA Maximum Torque Angle
MTR Motor
MU Merging Unit
MVA MegaVolt-Ampere (total 3-phase)
MVA_A MegaVolt-Ampere (phase A)
MVA_B MegaVolt-Ampere (phase B)
MVA_C MegaVolt-Ampere (phase C)
MVAR MegaVar (total 3-phase)
MVAR_A MegaVar (phase A)
MVAR_B MegaVar (phase B)
MVAR_C MegaVar (phase C)
MVARH MegaVar-Hour
MW MegaWatt (total 3-phase)
MW_A MegaWatt (phase A)
MW_B MegaWatt (phase B)
MW_C MegaWatt (phase C)
MWH MegaWatt-Hour

N Neutral
N/A, n/a Not Applicable
NCIT Non-conventional instrument transformer
NEG Negative
NMPLT Nameplate

N60-1601-0125-861-1 739
Chapter 14 - Appendices

Abbreviation Meaning
NOM Nominal
NTR Neutral

O Over
OC, O/C Overcurrent
OCSP Online Certificate Status Protocol
OF Overload Factor
O/P, Op Output
OP Operate
OPER Operate
OPERATG Operating
O/S Operating System
OSI Open Systems Interconnect
OSB Out-of-Step Blocking
OUT Output
OV Overvoltage
OVERFREQ Overfrequency
OVLD Overload

P Phase
PB Process Bus
PBM Process Bus Module
PC Phase Comparison, Personal Computer
PCNT Percent
PF Power Factor (total 3-phase)
PF_A Power Factor (phase A)
PF_B Power Factor (phase B)
PF_C Power Factor (phase C)
PFLL Phase and Frequency Lock Loop
PHS Phase
PICS Protocol Implementation & Conformance Statement
PKI Public Key Infrastructure
PKP Pickup
PLC Power Line Carrier
POS Positive
POTT Permissive Over-reaching Transfer Trip
PP Power Profile
PPP Point-to-Point
PPS Pulse per Second
PRESS Pressure
PRI Primary
PROT Protection
PRP Parallel Redundancy Protocol

N60-1601-0125-861-1 740
Chapter 14 - Appendices

Abbreviation Meaning
PSEL Presentation Selector
PTP Precision Time Protocol
pu Per Unit
PUIB Pickup Current Block
PUIT Pickup Current Trip
PUSHBTN Pushbutton
PUTT Permissive Under-reaching Transfer Trip
PWM Pulse Width Modulated
PWR Power

QUAD Quadrilateral

R Rate, Reverse
RA Registration Authority
RCA Reach Characteristic Angle
RedBox Redundancy Box
REF Reference
REM Remote
REV Reverse
R-GOOSE Routable GOOSE
RI Reclose Initiate
RIP Reclose In Progress
RGT BLD Right Blinder
RMA Return Materials Authorization
RMS Root Mean Square
ROCOF Rate of Change of Frequency
ROD Remote Open Detector
RRTD Remote Resistance Temperature Detector
RST Reset
RSTR Restrained
RTD Resistance Temperature Detector
RTU Remote Terminal Unit
RX (Rx) Receive, Receiver

s second
S Sensitive
SAN Singly Attached Node
SAT CT Saturation
SBO Select Before Operate
SCADA Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition
SCC Serial Communication Controller
SCD System Configuration Description
SCL Substation Configuration Language

N60-1601-0125-861-1 741
Chapter 14 - Appendices

Abbreviation Meaning
SCEP Simple Certificate Enrollment Protocol
SEC Secondary
SEL Select / Selector / Selection
SENS Sensitive
SEQ Sequence
SFTP Secure Shell (SSH) File Transfer Protocol, Secure File Transfer Protocol
SIR Source Impedance Ratio
SmpSynch Samples Synchronized
SNTP Simple Network Time Protocol
SRC Source
SSB Single Side Band
SSEL Session Selector
STATS Statistics
SUPN Supervision
SUPV Supervise / Supervision
SV Supervision, Service, Sampled Value
SYNC Synchrocheck
SYNCHCHK Synchrocheck

T Time, transformer
TC Thermal Capacity
TCP Transmission Control Protocol
TCU Thermal Capacity Used
TD MULT Time Dial Multiplier
TEMP Temperature
TFTP Trivial File Transfer Protocol
TGFD Transient Ground Fault Detection
THD Total Harmonic Distortion
TMR Timer
TOC Time Overcurrent
TOV Time Overvoltage
TRANS Transient
TRANSF Transfer
TSEL Transport Selector
TUC Time Undercurrent
TUV Time Undervoltage
TX (Tx) Transmit, Transmitter

U Under
UC Undercurrent
UCA Utility Communications Architecture
UDP User Datagram Protocol
UL Underwriters Laboratories

N60-1601-0125-861-1 742
Chapter 14 - Appendices

Abbreviation Meaning
UNBAL Unbalance
UR Universal Relay
URC Universal Recloser Control
.URS Filename extension for settings files
UV Undervoltage

V/Hz Volts per hertz

V_0 Zero Sequence voltage
V_1 Positive Sequence voltage
V_2 Negative Sequence voltage
VA Phase A voltage
VAB Phase A to B voltage
VAG Phase A to Ground voltage
VARH Var-hour voltage
VB Phase B voltage
VBA Phase B to A voltage
VBG Phase B to Ground voltage
VC Phase C voltage
VCA Phase C to A voltage
VCG Phase C to Ground voltage
VF Variable Frequency
VIBR Vibration
VT Voltage Transformer
VTFF Voltage Transformer Fuse Failure
VTLOS Voltage Transformer Loss Of Signal

WDG Winding
WH Watt-hour
w/ opt With Option
WGS World Geodetic System
WRT With Respect To

X Reactance
XDUCER Transducer
XFMR Transformer

Z Impedance, Zone

N60-1601-0125-861-1 743
Chapter 14 - Appendices

14.2 FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS

FlexLogic operands are digital parameters used to help design scheme logic.
The data items are kept in spreadsheets attached to this PDF. The spreadsheets may be opened using Microsoft
Excel, or free web-based software such as Google Sheets.
Please note that this manual must be opened with a PDF viewer capable of opening attachments, such as Adobe
Acrobat Reader or Nitro PDF. If using Nitro PDF, attachments are shown in the Attachment Pane. To show or hide
the Attachments pane, look in the sidebar and click the Attachments tab.
An Open File dialog box may open with a warning message about potential harm from programs, macros or
viruses. The files supplied do not contain any harmful content, and may be safely opened.
If using Adobe Acrobat Reader, click on the button below to open the spreadsheet.

FlexOperand N60 86x

N60-1601-0125-861-1 744
Chapter 14 - Appendices

14.3 FLEXANALOG ITEMS

A FlexAnalog parameter is an analog parameter.
FlexAnalog items specific to your device are viewable in a web browser. Enter the IP address of the UR, access the
DeviceInformation Menu option, then the FlexAnalog Parameter Listing option. Entries displayed online depend
on order code.
Each FlexAnalog address is the Modbus memory map address prefixed with 0004. For example, with Modbus
address of 1638, the FlexAnalog address is 00041638.
The data items are kept in spreadsheets attached to this PDF. The spreadsheets may be opened using Microsoft
Excel, or free web-based software such as Google Sheets.
Please note that this manual must be opened with a PDF viewer capable of opening attachments, such as Adobe
Acrobat Reader or Nitro PDF. If using Nitro PDF, attachments are shown in the Attachment Pane. To show or hide
the Attachments pane, look in the sidebar and click the Attachments tab.
An Open File dialog box may open with a warning message about potential harm from programs, macros or
viruses. The files supplied do not contain any harmful content, and may be safely opened.
If using Adobe Acrobat Reader, click on the button below to open the spreadsheet.

FlexAnalog N60 86x

N60-1601-0125-861-1 745
Chapter 14 - Appendices

14.4 VERSION HISTORY

Manual P/N FW revision Release date ECO

1601-0125-F1 3.4x 10 December 2003 URX-111
1601-0125-F2 3.4x 09 February 2004 URX-115
1601-0125-G1 4.0x 23 March 2004 URX-123
1601-0125-G2 4.0x 17 May 2004 URX-136
1601-0125-H1 4.2x 30 June 2004 URX-145
1601-0125-H2 4.2x 23 July 2004 URX-151
1601-0125-J1 4.4x 15 September 2004 URX-156
1601-0125-K1 4.6x 15 February 2005 URX-176
1601-0125-L1 4.8x 05 August 2005 URX-202
1601-0125-M1 4.9x 15 December 2005 URX-208
1601-0125-M2 4.9x 27 February 2006 URX-214
1601-0125-N1 5.0x 31 March 2006 URX-217
1601-0125-N2 5.0x 26 May 2006 URX-220
1601-0125-P1 5.2x 23 October 2006 URX-230
1601-0125-P2 5.2x 24 January 2007 URX-232
1601-0125-R1 5.4x 26 June 2007 URX-242
1601-0125-R2 5.4x 31 August 2007 URX-246
1601-0125-R3 5.4x 17 October 2007 URX-251
1601-0125-S1 5.5x 07 December 2007 URX-253
1601-0125-S2 5.5x 08 February 2008 URX-258
1601-0125-S3 5.5x 12 March 2008 URX-260
1601-0125-T1 5.6x 27 June 2008 08-0390
1601-0125-U1 5.7x 30 April 2009 09-0938
1601-0125-U2 5.7x 30 September 2009 09-1165
1601-0125-V1 5.8x 29 May 2010 09-1457
1601-0125-V2 5.8x 04 January 2011 11-2237
1601-0125-W1 5.9x 12 January 2011 11-2227
1601-0125-X1 6.0x 21 December 2011 11-2840
1601-0125-X2 6.0x 5 April 2012 12-3254
1601-0125-Y1 7.0x 30 September 2012 12-3529
1601-0125-Y2 7.0x 11 November 2012 12-3601
1601-0125-Z1 7.1x 30 March 2013 13-0126
1601-0125-AA1 7.2x 1 August 2013 13-0401
1601-0125-AB1 7.3x 7 November 2014 14-1408
1601-0125-AB2 7.3x 1 September 2015 15-2215
1601-0125-AC1 7.40x 8 December 2016 16-3319
1601-0125-AE1 7.41x 31 January 2017 17-3427
1601-0125-AE3 7.4x 28 April 2017 17-3561
1601-0125-AF1 7.6x 30 June 2017 17-3779
1601-0125-AF2 7.6x 31 October 2017 17-3935
1601-0125-AG1 7.7x 31 March 2018 18-4430

N60-1601-0125-861-1 746
Chapter 14 - Appendices

Manual P/N FW revision Release date ECO

1601-0125-AG2 7.7x 4 May 2018 18-4517
1601-0125-AH1 7.8x 17 December 2018 18-4703
1601-0125-AI1 7.9x 24 October 2019 19-5181
1601-0125-AJ1 8.0x 30 October 2019 19-5182
1601-0125-AJ2 8.0x 12 June 2020 20-5580
1601-0125-AK1 8.1x 20 November 2020 20-6096
1601-0125-AL1 8.2x 16 February 2021 21-6228
1601-0125-AL2 8.2x 23 July 2021 21-6482
1601-0125-AM1 8.3x 6 May 2022 22-6815
1601-0125-AM2 8.3x 14 October 2022 22-7224
1601-0125-AN1 8.4x 14 December 2022 22-7333
1601-0125-AN2 8.4x 28 June 2023 23-7692
1601-0125-AP1 8.5x 30 November 2023 23-7922
N60-1601-0125-860-1 8.60 8 October 2024 24-0338

N60-1601-0125-861-1 747
© 2025 GE Vernova. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or
warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend
on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice.
Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.